197811_GSD_DPD 197811 GSD DPD
197811_GSD_DPD 197811_GSD_DPD
User Manual: 197811_GSD_DPD
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 703
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
P 1.1
PROGRAMMING
.......
RC Remote Comput/",:Progrims which provide accesa to • computer from
multiple remote ..min.ls for immedi.te or batch processing of individual
taaks.
"
IBM Type I progr8tTlming aystems .re deecribed in this section. The
deeciiplio"s .re .....1 .nd .re nut intended to be exhauative. Fur men
1nfurmatIun. 8M the suppor1lng Systems Reference Ubrery (SRU publicriuns
RG Report GeneratOl' and Report ""r.", Generator: A program which
constructs a report or report-writing program in lICCOrdance with Input
specification. of the d.ta file .nd of the desired report.
Each program is euigned • nlne-ch.recter identification code. The first four
digits 'identify the computer on which the program will run. The next two
ch.rectera .re • functional mnemuric describing the program cl.... The I...
three ch.rectera .re • sequence number. Th.t number m.y be three digits. or
two digits plus .n X. R. or L.
The
Syatem/380 four-dlgit
character which designates:
380A:
380B:
38OC:
3800:
380F:
38OG:
Mar 7.
INTRODUCTORV INFORMATION
identification
All Type II AppIiclition
380H:
Programs except Model 20 380M:
B.sic Operating System
380N:
eonv..iun
360P:
Type III Program.
3805:
38OT:
Model 44
Model 87 Time Sh.ring
380U:
System (TSS)
38OW:
6731-:
51
Simulator: A program which permits the running on 'the simulator
mllChine of • program expreued in the machine I.nguage of the
simulated machine.
SL
System Llbr";,,,: See ED. Editor.
SM Sort/Mer,.
code includ.. .n .Iph.betic
Type I Extension
T.peOperring System
Disk Operating System
Beaic Programming Support
Operating System
Model 20 C.rd
Model 20 T.pe
Model 20 Oleic
Type I Extensions
SP
Symbolic AuemOIy P'oerams: Not used for new progrlms.
SV
Supervisor:' Programs (. set of routines) which control the execution and
possibly the achec.juling of other: programs.
TX Type I Ext_ion
UT Utility: A program or • set of programs which ...iet in the operation of
• computer; •.g.. storage clearing. Intermedi.te date transmission.
simple lueders. dump programs. file org.nization routines. etc.
The function.1 mnemunice uaed In the program identification .re:
AD AutocItIrt: Not ueed fur
AL
new progr.ms. See
Docu~tur (DC).
ALGOL CompIler
AS A...",.,.: A program which prepares .n object I.ngu.ge progr.m by
producing .beoIute or reIocetabie m.chine code from • source program
of atetements containing symbolic operation codes .nd symbolic
operand•.
AT AutonW/c T..t: Not uaed for
new programs. See Program T..t
(PT).
AU Autocoder: Not uaed for new progr.ms. See Auembler (AS).
CB COBOL CompIler: COBOL (COmmon Busineu OrIented L..nguege) is •
I.ngu-ae prim.rily fur commerci.1 d.ta pruceulng. It is the reeult of
work by the Conference, on D.ta Systems Lanau-ae (CODASVU. •
voluntary cooperative effort by I number of usere .nd m.nufacturers of
d.ta pruceuing equipment.
CT Commercial T,.,..,.,OI': Not used for new'programs.
CQ Communications Input/Output: Input/Output routines which include
routines for communication devices or terminlls.
CL
Proe''''':
Control
A set of programs which provide the m.nagement
functions neceaery for continuous operation of. computing system.
CV ConversIon: Programs which facilitate the running of progr.ms written
for one type on lnother type' or configuration.
DC Dac:umentor: A progr8tTI which performs some or all of the functions of'
producilig. mlintaining. controlling. and distributing text.tabullr Ind
graphic inform.tion including flowchlrts.
OM Dat. M.".,emsnf: See 10: Input Output.
ON D/.,l'tOSt/c: A program which fllCilitlites computer m.inten.nce by
detectiqn .nd isol.tion of mllfunctions or mistlk...
ED
Editor: Programs which creete Ind m.intlin I system library (I
collection of .v.iI.ble programs. routines. Ind d.tl which compri. . .n
operlting system). or which logicllly combine. repllce. or interconnect
modules or subsections of I progrlm or operating system.
EU
Emul.tor P'oerem: Used to designlte the program pert of In emul.tor.
An emul.tor is I combin.tion of • progr.m and equipment .daptations
which enlbles one system to emul.te the functions of Inother. The
emulator u... the ..me form of input d.ta and cen produce the ume
form of output d.t. as the syetern being emulated.
FO
FORTRAN CompIler: FORTRAN (FORmula TRANaiation) closely
resembl.. the I.nguage of m.them8tics. FORTRAN permits people who
are not trained programmers to prepare programs for • computer.
FORTRAN is especi.llyuaeful in ICientIfic and t.ehnical fields where
moat problems are expreued in mathematiCll form.
10
Input/Output: Input/Output routines. OM (Oat. Management) is In
.lternative code.
LM Library Material: Supplementary programming developed for inclusion in
a library 'an organized collection of standard. checked out routines). An
eXlmple is a m.thematical function subroutine.
LD
Lalder: A program which prepares instructiona and dlta (often
combining program segments Ind subprOgrams) to form a single
executable machine language program.
MI
Miscellaneous
OS Operatin, System: An integrated set of programs.
communication convention•.
routines.
and
Programming Services
PR
Processors: Not used for new programs.
PL
PL/I Compiler: A program which compiler programs written in the' PL/I
L..nguage.
PT
Program Test: A program which facilitates the testing and debugging of
programs.
The programs described in this
classificetions asaociated with them:
.,':"
~
. . . . . . . . . :.":
~-:
have one of three
A
- Centra' and FE Programming Services
B
- Centra' Programming Services
C
- Local Programming Services Ivaillble It a charge
Not to be r,produced without.wrltten ~rmisslon
~~
section
•.• .:,..
,,"
~
~
~~.,.
-":'j
•
~.~.
service
P 1.2
PROGRAMMING
Mar 74
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
The service classification
plus selected Type III programs, are on
the~oI~ng
for Type I programs;
pages.
P 1 .. 3
II.,
Mar 74
Syst!!/7
lIost Program Preparation 'Faeili ties I
1130 (1130-SV-001)
1800 (1800-SV-001)
MSP/7 Bost Preparation Pacilities II
Pacilities II Macro Library/Basic
OS (360A-TX-024)
DOS (360A-TX-014)
Pacilities II Macro Library/Relocatable
OS (360A-TX-026)
DOS (360A-~X-Ol6)
Host Macro Assembler (AIM/7)
OS (360A-TX-02l)
DOS (360A-TX-Oll)
Host Linkage Editor (LIB/7)
OS (360A-~X-025)
DOS (360A-TX-015)
Host Storage Load Formatting (PORMA~/7)
OS (360A-TX-023)
DOS (360A-TX-Ol3)
Host Source Preparation (PREP/7)
OS (360A-TX-022)
DOS (360A-TX~012)
Distributed System Program (5/370 or 5/360)
(360A-TX-032)
Distributed System Program (1130)
(ll30-SV-002 )
Distributed System Program (1800)
(l800-SV-003 )
Now
Now
P 7.1
P 7.1
A
A
P 7.2
P 7 .. 2
T' 7.3'
" 7.1
P 7.5
P 7.5
P 7.5
P 7.5
P 7.S
P 7.5
Now
P 7.6
A
Now
P 1130.6
A
Now
P 1800.7
A
360B-Al-309
l60B-CL-302
P 360B.2
P 360B.1
C
,360B-IO-303
P 360B.1
IBM System/360 Basic Operating System (BOS/360)
Assembler
Basic Control Program
IOCS
Consecutive Processing Macros
Indexed Sequential Pile Management
System (-ISPMS)
Direct Access Method
S~R Macros
Autotest
Report Program Generator (RPG)
Sort/Merge
Process Communication - 1070
Utilities - Group 1
Group 2
Binary Synchronous Communication Macros
Remote Job Entry Work Station
Basic Program Material and Ordering
Instructions - Additional Program Material
~stem/360
360B-IO-304
360B-IO-305
360B-IO-310
360B-P~-306
360B-RG-307
360B-SM-308
360B-SV-032,
360B-~-300
360B-~-30l
360B-CO-312
360B-CO-3ll
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
360B.1
360B.1
360~.2
3608.3
3608.2
3608.2
360B.3
360B.2
3608.2
360B.1
3608.2
P 360B.4
Conversion/Service Programs
Emulator 1401/1460 32K Model 40
Emulator 1410/7010 64K Model 40
Emulator 1410/7010 Any Model 50
Simulator 1410/7010
Emulator 7070/7074 256K Model SO, 65
Simulator 7070/7074
Emulator 7080 256K Model 65
Emulator 709/90/94 5l2K Model 65
Simulator 7090/7094
FORTRAN IV to PL/I (F) LCP
ALGOL to PL/I (F) LCP
COltOL to PL/I LCP
COBOL to OS ANS COBOL LCP
7094 Under OS Integrated Emulator for Mdl 85
7094 Integrated Emulator - 5/370
Model 165 - OS
7070/7074 Integrated Emulator •
5/370 Model 165 - OS
'
5/370 Model 155 - 05
7080 Integrated Emulator .' 5/370
Model 165 • OS
1401/1440/1460 Integrated Emulato~ • 5/370
Models 155, 15511, 158 under nq
360C-EU-074
360C-EU-728
360C-EU-726
360C-5I-754
360C-EU-725
P 360C.1
P 360C.4
P 360C.3
'P360C~7
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
A
C
360C-EU-727
360C-EU",,:729
360C...SI-7S0
360C-cv-710
360C-CV-711
360C-CV-712
360C-CV-713
360C-EU-734
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
360C-EU-740
P 360C.13
A
360C-EU-739
360C-EQ-741
P 360C.11
P 360C.21
A
A
'360C-EU-737
P 360C.12
A
360C-EU-735
P 360C.I0
A
360C-SI~753
360C.1
360C.6
360C.3
360C.5
360C.5
360C.8
360C.8
360C.8
360C.9
360C.9
C
C
,I • .,
P 1.4
PrOCJramminq
Mar 74
Program·Nllllber/
Availability
Program .Nime
System1370
ConverdonISe~!cf!
Prsgrf!!!s (Cont'd)
1410/7010 Inteqr~ted Emulator - S/370 Models
155, 155II, 158 under OS
DOS Emulator Under OS - S/370 Models 1'35,
145 and 155 - OS
1401/1440/1460 Emulator - S/370 Model
145 with Compatibility Feature Under OS
1410/7010 Emulator ~ S/370 Model 145 with
Comratibility Feature Under OS
140t/1440/1460 Emulator - S/370 Model 135
, with Compatibiiity Feature Under OS
S/360 Model 20 Emulator - S/370 Model 135
- DOS
1401/1440/1460 Inte9rated Emul~tor f.or
5/370 Model 155 under DOS
1410/7010 Integrated Emulator for S/370
. Model 155 Under DOS
BMulatin9 the 1401/1440/1460 on thPS/370 Model 145 Using DOS
BMulatinq the 1410/7010 on the S/370
Model 145 Usin~ DOS
£.ulatinq the 1401/1440/1460 on the
Model 135 Usinq DOS
1401/1440/1460 Emulator for S/370 Model
135 with Compatibility Feature Under OS
7070/7074 Inteqrated Emulator for S/370
Models 155, 155II, 158
360C-EU .. 73fi
P 3fiOC.1n
16oC .. EU-738
p 3fiOr..11
lfiOC-EU .. 735
p
360C.18
A
360C·EU-736
p 360C.19
A
360C"'EU.. 735
P 360C.21
A
370N .. rC .. 002
P 3f;OC.23
A
3l70N-EU-490
1)
360C.13
A
370N-EU-490
P 360C.15
A
370N-EU-490
P 360C.16
A
370N .. EU .. 490
P 360C.16
A
370N-EU-4CJO
p
360<::.19
A
360C .. EU·735
P 3fiOC.22
A
P 360C.22
A
P 36nC.2.5
Additional proqram Material
Systemt360 Type I I I Programs
2.95 - Utility Program (OS)
1I0uston Automatic Spooling PriQrity System
(HASP-II) (OS)
Conversational Remote Batch Entry (OS)
Control Program Cambridge :'lonitor System
(CP-67/CltS)
POWER II (Priority Output Writers, F.~ecution
Processors and Input Readers)
.
IBM 1285/1287/1288 OCR programming Support (OS)
System/360 Model 44
3600-00.0.020
See
3600-05.1.014
360D-05.1.016
Catalog
of
3600-05.2.005
3600-05.2.006
3600-07.5.0(')1
360F-U'1'",606
thru
360P'-UT-620
Basic Program Material and Ordering Insu\&Qtions
Additional Proqram Material
ISH System/360 Model 67
~y.tem/360
A
A
P 360F.2
and
P 360F.3
C
I
P 360G.1
C
P 360G.5
Additional Program Material
IRK
A*
P 360F.3
P 360F.3
360G-CI,-627
Time Sharing System (TSS)
.rTr....
A
C
Tape Operating System (TOS/360)
Control Program
IOCB
Optical Character Reader loeS
Assembler
Report Program Generator
COBOL
FORTRAN IV
Buic PL/I
Sort/Merqe
Autotest
Batch utilities
Supervisor (6K)
Supervisor (8K)
HPS Utility Macroa
caapiler I/O Modules
On-Line Teat Executive Program (OLTEP)
36 QM-CL-40 5
360M... IO-404
.360H:"I()oo.417
360M-AS-465
360M-RG-40S
360M-CS.. 402
36 OM.,.FO-4 0 9
36 OM...PL'" 410
36 OM-.sM-40 0
360M-PT-407
36 OM... UT-4 03
360M-SV-41.3
360M-SV-414
360M"'UT-411
360M-IO-412
360M-DN-41S
P 360M~1
P 360M.I
P 360M.2
P 360M.3
P 360M.3
P 360M.3
p 360M.3
P 360M.3
P 360M.4
P 360M.4
P 360M.4
P 360M.4
P 360M.4
P 360M.4
P 360M.4
P 360M.4
Basic Program Haterial
P 360M.5
.l6UUOftAl hOCJZ'aa ... t~.1.~
P 360M.6
Not to.be reproduced without written permission
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
c
C
C
C
C
C
IBM•
,p 1.5
Proqrlllaing
. Mar 74
Program Number/
Program Name
rBf' Dinr. Operating f;"ntem
Availability
(nO~)
Supervisor
2301/2304
231112314/3330
System Control and Basic IOCS
Direct Access Method loeS Macros
Consecutive Disk loeS Macros
'Conaecuti ve Tape loeS Macros
Consecutive Paper Tape loeS Macros
Indexed Sequential Pile Management System
loeS Macros (ISPMS)
Compiler Input/OUtput Modules
MICR loeS
Optical Character Reader IOCS
Basic Telecommunications Access Method loeS
Macros (BTAH)
Queued Telecol\IJ\\unications Access Method loeS
Macros (Q'l'AM)
Multiprogr&l\lJ\\ing Support Utility Macro
Assembler D
Assembler F
Report Program Generator (RPG)
COBOL
DASD Assembler Macros
ANS COBOL V2
Language Conversion Program
Basic PL/I (Including DOS PL/I DASD Macros
for 2311 ISFMS Files)
FORTRAN IV
FORTRAN IV Library Subprograms
Basic FORTRAN IV
Sort/Merge - Disk
Sort/Merge - Tape (Disk Resident)
Sort/Merge - Tape/Disk
Autotest
'
On-Line Test Executive Program
Group 1 Utilities (Unit Record and Disk)
Group 2 Utilities (Magnetic Tape)
Group 3 Utilities (Data Cell)
System utilities
Vocabulary File Utility Program for 7772
360N-SV-474
370N-SV-495
360N-CL';453
36CiN-IO-454
360N-IO-455
360N-IO-456
360N-IO-458
P
P
P
P
P
P
360N.2
360N.2
360N.2
360N.3
360N.3
360N.3
360.,.3
360N,-io-457
360N.IO-476
360N-rO-4.77
360N-IO-478
P
P
P
P
360N.3
360N.4
360N.3
360N.3
36,ON-CQ-469
P 360N.6
C*
360N-CQ-470
P 360N.6
C*
360N-UT-471
360N-AS-465
360N-AS-466
360N-RG-460
360N-ca-452
360N.CB-468
360N-CB-482
360N-CV-489
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
360N.7
3'60N.7
360N.7
360N.,1
360N-PL-464
360N-FO-479
360N-LM-480
360N';PO-451
360N-SM-450
360N-SM-400
360N-SM-483
360N-PT;'459
3.60N-DN-481
360N-UT-461
360N-UT';462
360N-UT-463
370N-UT;'491
360N-UT-472
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
360N.8
360N.8
360N.8
360N.'1
360N.t"J
360N.!1
360N.1')
360N .1"
360N •. 1 ~
360N.1!J
360N.10
360N.1t"J
360N.11
360N.6
1401/1440/1460 Emulation - Compatibility Support
360N-EU-484
CS/30
360N-EU-485
CS/40
360N-EU-490
1401/40/60 - 1410/7010 Emulation - S/370
37011-cn-493
3735 Termi~al Support
360N-C()-493
Environmental Recordin~ and Editing
370N-tTT-492
Program Material and Ordering Information
*
P
360N.11
360N.7
360N.7
360N.~
P 360N.11
P 360N.11
P 360N.13
P 3('ON.fi
P 3r.ON.14
P 360N.,15-1!'.
DOS Version 4 (Releasr. 27) han r.irltilar cnmponont~: \,dth
370N Pro9ra~ Identification Codps. Th~ne havr. programming
ncrvice ~lnssifiyation A.
"'Not to be reproduced without written permlaiion
C*
11.
C*
C*
C*
C*
C*
C*
'C* '
C*
C*,
C
C*
C
C
C
C
C
A
C
A
A
C
C
C
C
C
C
C*
C
C
C
11.
C
C
'C
C*
11.
1\
IBM
P 1.6
Mar 74
Programming
Program NU'IIber/
Availability
Program Name
IBi-.t:,$ysteJl)./360 Basic Programming SUPeort (BpS/360)
Basic Card Support
Basic Assembler
Basic Utilities
'Input/Output Support package
Absolute Loader
Relocating Loader
Dump Program
Report Program Generator (Card)
FORTRAN IV (16K Card)
Basic Tape Support
360P-AS-021
P 36011'.1
360p-UT-018
360p...UT-017
360p-UT-020
360P-UT-019
360p-RG-200
360p-FO-205
11'
P
P
P
P
11'
Basic Tape System (8K)
1287 Models 3 and 4
Report Program Generator (8K Tape)
FORTRAN IV (Tape)
Sort/Merge (8K Tape) (1 channel)
Sort/Merge (8K Tape) (2 chann~l)
Autotest (Tape)
Card and Tape Utilities (Single-Transfer)
360p-AS-091
360p .. RG-201
360p-FO-031
360p..SM-043
360p..SM-044
360p-PT-045
36011'.3
268-59
11' 36011'.6
P 36011'.6
P 36011'.7
P 360P.7
P 360P.8
Card
Card
Tape
Tape
Tape
360p-UT-050
360p-UT-051
360p-UT.,.052
360p-UT-OS3
360p-UT-054
P
P
P
P
P
360P.9
360P.9
360P.9
360P.9
360P.9
360p... UT-057
360p-UT-055
360p-UT-056
360p-OT:~202
P
P
P
P
360P.10
36011'.10
36011'.10
360P.10
360p-UT-063
360p-UT-064
360P-UT-067
360P-U'l'-073
360p-UT... 065
360p-UT-066
P
11'
P
P
P
P
36011'.11
36011'.11
360P.11
36011'.11
360P.11
360P.11
360p-UT-098
360p-UT-212
360p ... UT.. 068
360p... U'J.'-20·4
360P-UT-069
360p-UT-203
360p-UT-061
360p-UT-062
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
360p.11
360P.12
360P.12
360P.12
360P.13
360P.13
360P.13
36011'.13
360P-UT-071
360p-U't... 072
360p-UT·206
360P-UT... 207
360P-UT":208
P 360P.13
P 36011'.13
P 360P.13
11' 36011'.12
p360P.17
360p,.IO-060
360p .. IO-058
360p-IO-059
P 36011'.16
P 36011'.14
11' 36011'.15
360P,..UT-048
360P-UT-2l3
360P-UT-214
360p-UT-21S
360P-UT.. 219
11' 360P.17
Catalog
of
Programs
P 360P.17
P 360P."
to
to
to
to
to
Printer and/or Punch
Tape
Printer
Card
Tape
c
36011'.1
360P.2
360P.2
360P.2
36011'.2·
36011'.3
p
Card and Taee Utilities (Speoial rurpose)
Initialize Tape
Multiple Utility
storage Print
Tape Compare
DASD utilities (Single Transfer)
Card
JJisk
Disk
Disk
Disk
Tape
to
to
to
to
to
to
Disk
Card
Disk
Printer
Tape
Disk
DASD Utilities (Speoial Purpose)
Alternate Traok Assignment (2311)
Alternate Track Assignment (23al)
Clear Disk
Initialize Data Cell
Initialize Disk
Multiple Disk to printer
Copy Disk to Tape and Restore Tape to Pisk
Copy Disk to Card and Restore Card to Disk
Copy Data Cell to Tape and
Restore Tape to Data Cell
Copy Disk to Disk
16K Initialize Disk
16K Alternate Track Assignment
Distribution program
paper Document Support
Input/Output 1231 Nl
Input/Output 1412/1419'
Input/Output 1418/1428
Miscellaneous support
Universal Character Set Utility
5/360 Direct Access Stor Driveln~tial1zatiPn
Dump/Restore
Reqover/Replace
Modular File Maintenance
RJE ,work Station
360P-CQ-~18
Basic program Material and Ordering
Instructions
P 3&OP.18
Additional Program Material
R l60P.19
Not to be reproduced without written permiaslon
IB14
P 1.7
Mar 74
Progr...u.ng
'Program NlIftberl
Program Name
Slste~360
,
Slst~370
Availability
Reference
Programming
Service
CI.ssificatlon
2E!ratins Slstem (OS)
Primary Control Proqram (PCP)
Multiprogramming with a Fixed Number of Tasks
(MFT)
Multiproqranllling with a Variable Number of
Tasks (MVT), with Priority Scheduler, Disk
SYSIN
Time Sharing Option
MVT Model 6S Multiprocessing
Data Set Control - Primary Data Management
Access Methods
'
Sequential and Partitioned
Direct (BDAM)
Indexed Sequential (BISAM, QISAM)
Telecommunications - Basic (BTAM)
BTAM Extension
Telecommunications - Queued (QTAM)
Telecommunications - TCAM
Graphic Programming Services
Graphic Proqranllling Services for FORTRAN
Graphic Job Processor (MFT or MVT)
FORTRAN Subroutines for Data Transmission
between a S/360 and 1130
Job Control from an 1130 to 2250 using
Satellite Graphic Job Processor (SGJP)
(MFT or MVT only)
Laniuaie Translators
ALGOLi'
ALGOL F Library
Assembler E (18K)
Assembler F (44K)
COBOL E (l7K)
COBOL E Librar-y
Full ANS COBOL V2 Library
ANS COBOL V2
FOR'l'RAN .Ii: (15K)
FOR'l'RAN G (SOK)
FOR'l'RAN H Version II (lSOK)
FOR'l'RAN Library (E, G, H)
PL/I F (44K)
PL/I Subroutine Library
Report Program Generator (lSK)
360S-CI-566
P 360S.l
C
360S-CI-505
P 360S.l
A
360S-CI-53S
360S-CI-SSS
360S-CI-S3S
360S-DM-S08
P
P
P
P
360S.l
360S.4
360S.l
360S.2
360S-l)M-508
360S-DM-S09
360S-CQ-S13
360S-0S-584
U'O.CQ-519
360S-CQ-S48
360S-IO-S23
360S-LM-537
360S-RC-S41
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
360S.2
360S.3
360S.3
360S.3
360S.3
3608.3'
360S.3
360S.3
360S.4
360S.7
360S.1Q
360S-LM-S42
P 360S.7
360S-RC-543
P 360S.l0
360S-AL-S31
360S-LM-S32
360S-AS-036
360S-AS:"037
360S-CO-S03
360S-LM-S04
P
P
P
P
P
P
360S.S
360S.8
360S.8
360S.8
360S.7
360S.8
C
C
C
A
C
C
360S-LM-S46
360S-CB-S4S
360S-FO-092
360S-FO-S20
360S-FO-SOO
360S-LM-S01
360S-NL-Sll
360S-LM-S12
360S-RG-038
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
360S.2
360S.S
360S.7
360S.7
360S.7
360S.7
360S.6
360S.6
360S.8
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
360S-I~·S26
Continued
Not to be reproduced without written perml..lon
C
A
C
INDEX
P·l.S
Mar
Program. NtI11ber/
Program Name
Availability
System/360 Operating System (OS/360) (Cont'd)
Service programs
Linkage Editor E (15K, 18K)
Linkage Editor F Version 2 (44K, 8SK, l28K)
Loader
Sort/Merge (16K minimum)
'1'ES'1'RAN
Remote Job Entry
Conversational Remote Job Entry
Starter System for 2311 Residence
Starter System for 2314/2319 Residence
Starter System for 3330 Residence
Independent Utilities
OS/360 Utili ties
SERO, SERl, , EREP for Model 40,50,65,75
Recovery Management Support for MFT
and MV'l' - Models 65, 85, System/370
On-Line Test Executive
OS/360 Service Aids
FORTRAN Syntax Checker
PL/I Syntax Checker
2305 Additional Device Support
3330 Additional Oevice Support
3211 Additional Oevice Support
Model 145 Additional Device Support
2800/Mdl 65 Additional Oevice Support
TSO/DCB Parameters
System/370 Model 135 Additional support
System/370 Model 195 Additional Support
3410 Additional Device Support
3505 Additional Device Support
3525 Additional Device Support
2996 Add~tional Oevice Support
3270 Additional OIOoeS Support
TCAM Additional Support for Releases 20.1,
20.6, and 20.7
'!'CAM Additional Support for Release 21.0
TCAM Maintenance for Release 21.6
6SMP/'1'SO Additional Support
3735 FO Macros and Utility
3270 B'1'AM
360S-EO-5l0
360S-EO-52l
360S-LO-547
360S-SM-023
360S-P'1'-5l6
360S-RC-536
360S-RC-55l
360S-CI-·514
360S-CI-534
360S-CI-S60
360S-U'1'-507
360S-U'1'-506
360S-0N-527
P 360S.9
P 360S.9
P 360S.9
P 360S.9
P 360S.l0
P 360S.9
P 360S.10
P 360S.16
P 360S.16
P 360S.16
P 360S.10
P 360S.10
P 360S.11
360S-0N-539
360·S-0N .... 533
360S-0N-554
360S-FO-550
360S-PL-552
360S-0S-569
360S-0S-570
3605-0S-571
360S-0S-572
360S-0S-573
360S-0S-586
360S-0S-588
360S-0S-589
360S-0S-590
360S-0S-59l
360S-0S-592
360S-0S-593
360S-0S-594
P 360S.11
P 360S.11
P 360S.11
Call/360 OS
Call-OS Basic
Call-OS PL/I
Call-OS FORTRAN
Real Time Monitor
ASP - Asymmetric Multiprocessing
360A-CX-42X
360A-CX.. 44X
360A-CX-45X
360A-CX-46X
360A-SV-00I
360A-CX-15X
Syst~m
C
A
A
C
C
A
c
c
i
c
C
A
P 360S.4
P 360S.12
P 360S.l2
P 360S.l2
P 360S.l2
P 360S.l2
360S-0S-577
360S-0S-599
360S-0S-595
360S-0S-598
360S-0S-596
360S-0S-579
P 360S.l9
P 360S.22
P 360S.22
P 3605.23
P 360S.24
P 3605.25
c
c
c
C
A
A
P 3605.17
Program Material and Ordering Instructions
System/360 Model 20
~
Basic Assembler 8K
Basic Assembler
loes
Sterling Currency Processing Routines
Report PrOgram Generator
Punched Card utility Programs
Programs I (Gangpunch/Reproduce, List/
Summary Punch)
Programs II (Collate, Merge Sort)
Basic Utility Programs
Except Trace
Basic Trace (4K)
Basic Trace (8K)
Basic Trace (12K)
Basic Trace (16K)
Communications IOCS
1419 I/O Program
Universal Ch_r~cter Set utility
Remote Job Entry (RJE) Work Station
Ioes for BSCA
'&sCA I/O Error Statistics Printout
360'1'-AS-110
360'1'-AS-001
360'1'-10-002
360'1'-LM-015
360'1'-RG-010
P 360'1'.2
P 360'1'.2
p 360'1'.3
360'1'-U'l'-100
360'1'-U'l'-10l
P 360'1'.2
P 360'1'.2
360'1'-U'l'-102
360'1'-U'l'-103
360'1'-U'l'-104
360'1'-U'l'-107
360'1'-U'l'-105
360'1'-CQ-003
360'1'-10-029
360'1''''U'l'-108
360'l'-CQ-113
360'1'-CQ-111
360'1'-U'l'-112
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
p 360'1'.6
P 360'1'.1
360'1'.2
360'1'.2
360'1'.2
360'1'.2
360'1'.2
360'1'.4
360'1'."
360'1'~ 7
360'1'.8
360'1'.8
360'1'.10
Not to be r~produced without written per:miss1on
C
74
P1.,
Mar 74
INDEX
Program NlIIIber/
Availability
Program Name
System(360 Model 20
!!2!
TPS aasic Assembler
Basic Assembler SK
'1'PS Control and Service Programs
Core Image Service
Macro Service
Card-aesiqent Control
IPLTape-Aesident System
Tape-Resident ~o~trol
Load System Tape Program.
Copy System Tape Program
Directory Service Program
Core-Image Maintenance Program
Macro MAintenance Program.
Linkage Editor Program.
'l'PS Report Program Generator
'l'PS Assembler
'l'PS Utility Programs
Card to Tape
Tape to'Card
Tape to Printer
Tape to Tape
Initialize Tape
'l'PS sort/Merge
'l'PS Input/Output and Basic Monitor Macro
Definitions
TPS I/O Macro Definitions for 1419/1259
Remote Job Entry (RJE) Work Station
I/O Macro Definitions for BSCA
360U-AS-130
360U-AS-153
P 360'1',.3
P 360'1'.3
360U-SL-1,5S
360U-SL-156
360U";CL";157
36OU-Ct-15S
360U-CL-159
360U-SL-142
360U-SL-l"3
360U-SL-14"
360U-SL-145
360U-SL-1"6
360U-SL-147
360U-RG-1"S'
360U-AS-149
..p
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
360'1'.6
360'1'.6
360'1'.6
360'1'.6
360'1'.6
360'1'.6
360'1'.6
360'1'.6
360'1'.6
360'1'.6
360'1'.6
360'1'.1
360'1'.3
360U-U'1'-131
36 OU-U'1'-1.3 2
360U-U'1'-133
360U-U'1'-13"
360U-U'1'-135
360U-Sf.t-150
P
P
P
P
P
P
360'1'.2
360'1'.2
360'1'.2
360'1'.2
360'1'.2
360'1'.5
360U-I0-151
360U-I0-152
360U-CO-160
360U-CO-154
P
P
P
P
360'1'.4
360'1'.4
360'1'.8
350'1'.7
360W-CL-171
360W-SL-172
.360W-SL-173
P 360'1'.6
P 360'1'.6
P 360'1'.6
360W-SL-174
360W-SL-175
360W-SL-176
360W";SL-177
360W-SL-17S
360W-SL-179
360W-SL-205
360W-SL-206
360W-RG-lSO
360W-AS-lSl
360W-SM-182
360W-Sl.f-194
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
360'll.6
360'1'.1
360T.3
360'1'.5
360'1'.5
360W-UT-lS3
36 OW-UT-·lS 4
360W-UT-185
360W-UT-186
360W-UT-lS7
360W-UT-188
3601i-UT-189
3601i-UT-190
36 OW-UT'" 19 1
360W-UT-195
360W-UT-196
360W-UT-197
360W-UT-198.
360W-UT-199
360l'1-UT-204
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
360T.2
360'1'.2
360'1".2
360'1'.2
360T.2
360'1'.2
360T.2
360'1'.2
360'1'.2
360'1'.2
360T.2
360'1'.2
360'1'.2
360'1'.2
360T.2
36 Oli-IO-192
360li-IO-193
360W-IO-200
360W-IO-202
360W-CO-203
P
P
P
P
P
P
Disk (12K)
Control and Service
Disk-Resident Control Programs
Load System Disk Program
Library Allocation Organization Program
Physical and Logical Unit Tables
Service Program
Core Image I-laintenance Program
Macro Maintenance Program
Library Service Programs
Distribution Package Retrieval Program
Linkage Editor Program
copy System Program
Macro Library Service Program
Report Program Generator
Assembler
Disk Sort/Merge
Tape sort/Merge
Disk Utility
Initialize Disk
Alternate Track Assignment
Clear Disk
Disk-to-Disk
Disk-to-Tape
Tape-to-Disk
Disk-to-Card
Card-to-Disk
Disk-to-Printer
Tape-to-Tape
Tape-to-Card
Card-to-Tape
Tape-to-Printer
Initialized Tape
Disk Dump Program
Input/Output and Basic Monitor Macro
Definitions
Input/Output i-tacro Definitions for 1419/1259
~oriitor Generation Macro Def.
2152 printer-Keyboard Macro Def.
Remote Job Entry (RJE) Work Station
BSCA loeS
PL/I
Basic Program Material
,/Acidi tional Program Material
360~'l-CQ-201
360l"l-PL-207
360T.6
360T.6
360T.6
360'1'.6
360T.6
360T~6
360T~6
360'1'.4
360T.3
360T.6
360T.7
360T.9
360T.7
P 360T.9
P 360T.11
P 360T.11
.Not to 'b.t,.pr()d~C8dWithout Ylritten perml~Slon
C
IBM
,
1800 C1800-SV-00l>
MSP/7 provides System/7 Instructions plus functional system control and Input/output subroutines formatted as assembler/lnacro definitions to be added to host system
Macro Llbra,les. These macro definitions added to the 11301DM2 or 1800/MPX
macro libraries allow assembly of System/7 programs. This establishes a support
concept for System/7 that makes available, even to the user of the smallest System/
7, the extended facilities and ease of use of macro level assemblers for program prep. .tlon.
The storage load is produced using the macro assembler and Output· Handler Facility.
This storage load can be outputted as follows:
.
Using parameters to specify only the speCific functions of the system control and I/O
subroutines needed, the, macro assemblers provide the.modularlty required to support
the wide range of available System/7 application configurations. ,
Classification: Type I with programming service claSSification ,A.
Minimum System Requirements
For program ~ration on a113~ or 1800
Host p;eparatlon of System/1 storage loads is supported on the minimum machine
configurations required for the macro assemblers under 1130 DM/2 (1130';;05..,005)
and 1800/MPX Cl800-0S-010). However, the throughput of the'macro assemblers
and the size, of the System/1 program which can be produced Is highly dependent upon
the system configuration and available disk space on the 1130 or 1800 host.
To maxim Ize host Preparation throughput:
- A linepiolnter Is highly recommended.
• Punching a System/7 loadable paper tape on a 1055 paper tape punch ..
• Punching the load module to cards for later conversion to loadable paper tape.
A 2170'system with a card reader and paper tape punch may be used for this
conversion.
• Writing the load. module 'to disk as a data set.
These _eros lire functionally grouped and are briefly SIIIIIIIIlI'lzed In the follOWing
- Macro Assembler ~Ing storage should be allocated to adlfferent disk from the
operating system and MSP/7 macro library.
.
If all flies inust'be alloCated to a Single dlsfc,theit the storage available for the
Inciore symbol table should be as large as pos'slble. This can be accomplished
by, Increasing Vcore Cl800) orup!p'dlng core Cl130).
....graphs.
~IfJcatlon
r
Macros prepue environmental data and provide for specification of the
slCal and operanonal chuacterlstlcs fI the system.
The size of System/7 'prograjII which can be assembled ,is dependent upon the number
fI statements Cincludlng macro expansions) prOduced, the average statement length,
and the number of symbols (Including macro generated symbols). To maximize the size
of program which can b~ assembled:
IIIcnts provide for specification and Inclusion, at as5elllbly time, fI subrouto canIroi System/7 facilities allowing the IiSer to more easily utilize the capabilities fI his specific conflgwatlon.
The .aeros provide:
• Sysa Initialization. Start tinlersflnpare input/output modules for operation,
- A disk drive should be dedicated to wortcing storage. If this is not possible,
then files should be arranged to provide a maximum size worIting storage area on
one disk drive.
etI:.
• 'PnIgranI check out and debugging facilities providing storage
......, and storage patch via printer keyboard or paper tape.
- When assembling on a one-disk system, a special MSP/7 assembly pack should
be built containing a minimum-sized operating monitor, the Macro Assembler, the
MSP/7 macros required by the application, and the MSP/7 Output Handler.
Remaining disk space should be allocated to working storage.
dump, snapshot
• Emw recovery routines to handle machine check, pow.., failure, and program
check Intarupts.
• Subroutines to control the functions of the Operator Station Input/output. Included Is Interrupt handling and emw recovery.
• Subroutines to allow control of the Sensor Based devfceli analog Input/output
and digital Input/output.
• Subroutines that control the functions of the two natively attachedtltners of the
System/7. Available are time-of-day functions plus i. subroutine to control the
scheduling of varlC!Us user tasks.
• 2790 Comol Support
Sibroutine allowing use of the System/7 , with a 2790 control, as the
system controller for 2790 system units. (Supports from one to four
2790 controls per System/7.)
Units supported include:
2797 Data Enby Unit
2791 Area Stations
2798 Guidance Display Unit
2792 Remote Communications
. 1053 Output Typewriter
Conboller
1035 Badge Reader
2793 Area Stations
2795 Data Entry Unit
2796 Data Entry Unit
These and other host preparation techniques are documented in IBM System/7
MSP/7' Host Program Preparation Facilities 1130/1800 Macro Library: Programming
Guide (GC34-0021).
For Program Execution
The System/7 programming support pnwides the (with the exception of systems having
a 2790 Control.819S) capability of generating an object program to support the smallest
announced (2K) configuration with the capability to allow for expanSion to any future configuration.
Basic Program Material: 1130-SV-oOl Host PlOgram Preparation Facility
Documentation: One copy each of the Program Directory,. IBM
Systemn MSP /7 Host Program Preparation Facilities 1130/1800 Macro
library: Programming Guide CGC34-0021), and IBM System/1 MSP/7 Messages, Codes, and Operating Procedures (GC34-0023>'
Machine Readable: Object code for 1130-MSP/7 Macro-Assembler, Supervisor,
ana two (2) siiiroutinesj source code for Macro Library Extensions, Output Handler
FaCility, and sample programs.
Optional PlOgram Material:
Documentation: None (installation instructions for the optional material are InclUdea In the Program Directory)
IBM maintenance of the System/7 and its associated 1ft) and tenninals
requires the use of the 5010 Processor Module by the FE, with resultant
effect on system avallabi lity •
ASYnchronous Communication Control Support
, Subroutine to Initiate and control data transfer to and from the System/7
via the asynchronous communication adapter.
Machine Readable: Source for 1130-MSP/7 Macro Assembler, Supervisor, and
siiiroutines.
two (2)
Ordering Information: Program Number 1130SV001
Program Number
Distribution Medium
Extension
Code
Tlpe
2315
Basic
58
None
Optional
None
DTR 9/800
28
DTR 9/1600 29
A transparent data scheme to-pennit the transfer of load modules to the
System/7 for ececution or punching to paper tape.
Using the line oontrol discipline of a 2740 Model 1 '(with record
checking); the System/7 ban send and l'eCeive data.to and from a
360/370 host operating Under coMrol of DOS BTAM or QTAM,
Or OS BTAM, QTAM, or TCAM.
Basic Disk Support Macros
Seek, Read, Write, and Write-Verify functiol!S
Multiple Sector Operationt, including cylinder overflow support
Multiple 5022 modules are supported (seeks may be overlapped)
• Error handling routines
01
None
None
Additional Program Material:
Program listings: Available on microfiche from IBM Corporation, Microfiche
Di~tributlon, Mechanicsburg. When ordering specify: Group Code GJDl-1783.
Publications (available from Mechanicsb..-g): IBM System/7 Modular System
Programs (MSP/7) Logic Manual CGY34-0003), and IBM System/7 MSP/7
Stand-Alone Assembler: Programming Guide' (GC34-0022).
Access Macros provide, at assembly ume, for inclusion of and linkage to subroutines
tIijt perronn diIta transfers between System/7 and input/output devices.
Instruction Macros "ich inelude the Sy~/7 input/output instruction and Its ex';'
talded.mnemonics, the slop Instruction and the asselllbler instruction PEND •
.ott- Functianal ~s Including the IBM supplied data conversion, multiply, divide,
... ...-e root SUllniUtines.
Not to be reproduced without written perml..l~
".
User Volume
Requirement
.
'.
.
.
~
,
"
D =i_:iilF~
P 7.2
Mar 74
Programming
Basic Program Materlah IBOO-SV-OOl Host Program Preparation Facility
DOcllllerUtlon: One copy each of the Program Directory, IBM
SystemI7MSP/7 Host Program P .......lon F.cilltl" 1130/1800 Macro
Liltrary: Progrllilming Guide (GC34-o02U, and IBM System/7 MSP/7 Mes ..
sages, Codes, and Operating Procedures (GC34-Q02,,>.
Machine Readable: SOIl'Ce code for 1800 Macro Library £,cleftslons, Output
Handler Facility, and smple programs, plus 1 conversion routine In ob,"t form.
Optional Prof!!! Material: None
Ordering Information: Program Number 1800SVOOl
Program Number
Distribution Medium
ExtenSion
Type
Code
BaSic
None
2315
1316
58
52
User Volume
Requirement
01
01
. Additional Program Material:
Program Listings: ,Available on microfiche from IBM Corporation, Microfiche
Distribution, Mechanicsburg. When ordering specify: Group Code GJOl-1783.
Publications Cavailable from Mechanicsburg): IBM System/7 Modularl.~ystem
Programs (MSP /7) Logic Manual (GY34-0003), and IBM System/7IM$P/7
Stand-Alone Assembler: Programming Guide (GC34-0022).
MSP/7 ~OST PROGRAM PREPARATION FACILITY II
Facility II provides:
Macro Libraries with System{7 fQl!'~tion system control and input/output subroutines
formatted as assembler/macro definitions
System/7
System/7
System/7
System/7
Host Macro AS5e.lIblers CASM/7>
Host Linkage Editors (LINK/7)
Host Storage Load Formatting Program (FORMAT/7)
Host Source Preparation Program (PREP/7)
This support concept for System/7 makes available to the user of System/7 the
extended facilities and ease of use of macro level assemblers and Linkage Editors
for program preparation.
SYSTEU/1 MACRO L)BRARY/BASIC
OS 360A-TX-024
OOS 360A-TX-014
FLmctions include:
Specification Macros
E,nvironmental characteristics
Physical and operational characteristics of the system.
System Macros
System Initialization. Start timers, prepare feature modules for operation,
etc.
Timer control functions that provide for program timers, time of day clocks,
and scheduling of periodic program execution.
Two-way communication between operator and system through the Operator
Station printer/keYboard.
Program check-out and debugging facilities providing storage dump, snapshot dump, and storage patch via printer/keyboard or paper tape.
Error recovery to handle machine check, power failure, and program check
interrupts.
Access Macros
Macros to control the functions of Digital,Analog,and Operator Station
input/output. These include interrupt handling and error recovery routines.
2790 Control Support
Macros allowing use of the System/7, with 2790 control, as the
system controller for 2790 system units. (Supports from one to four
2790 controls per System/7.> Support for up to 16 2791 or 2793
Area Stations per System!7 is provided by MSP /1.
Macros for area station and attached deVice definition, building Transaction Control List, and Data Entry Unit List.
Units supported include: 2791 and 2793 Area Stations ••• 2795,
2796, and 2797 Data Entry Units ... 2798 ,Guidance Display Unit
... 1053 Output Typewriter ... 1035 Badge Reader.
Asynchronous Communication Control Support
Macros to initiate and control data transfer via the asynchronous communication adapter.
A data scheme to permit the transfer of load modules (0 the System/7
for execution or punching to paper tape.
Using the line control discipline of a 2740 Modell (with record
checking), the System/7 can send and receive data to and from a 360/
370 host operating under control of DOS STAM or QTAM, or OS STAM,
QTAM, or TCAM.
Other Function Macros
Data conversion.macros.
Multiply-Divide •
Square Root.'
Basic Dfsk SuPport Macros
See~, Read, Write, and Write-Verify fmctions.
Multiple sector operations, including cylinder overflow support.
Multiple 5022 Modules are ,supported. (Seeks may be overlapped.)
Disk Cycle Steal Feature 2664 is not supported.
Error Handling Routines.
Classification: Type I with Programming Service Classification A.
Not to be reproduced without written perml.'on
P 7.3
Mar 74
Basic Program Material - OS 360A-TX-024 Macro Library/Basic:
Documentation: One copy each of the Program Qlrectory, IBM
'
Systemtl MSI-'17 Host Program Preparation Facilities 11 Macro lIbrary/BaSic:
Programming Guide (GC34-0019).
Machine Readable: 80~01umn card images on 9-track 800/1600 BPI magnetic
M5P/1 macros and the sample program in source fonn.
taPe.
Optjonal Program Material ~ None
Ordering Information: Program Number 360ATX024
Program Number
Distribution Medium
User Volume
Extension
Type
Code
Requirement
Basic
None
DTR 9/800
28
None
DTR9/1bOO 2.9
None
Additional Program Material:
Program Llstl:!: Available on microfiche from IBM Corporation, Microfiche 015,..
trlbUilon, Mec nlcsiug. When ordering, specify: Group Code GJDl-17B4.
Publications (available from MechanicSburg): IBM System/1 Modular System Programs (MSP17) Logic Manual CGV34-0003).
Basic Program Material: DOS 360A-TX-014Macro Llbrary/Baslc
Documentation:· One copy each of the Program DlrecbIry, IBM
System/7 MSP /1 Host PllOgram Preparation Facilities" Macro Library Basic:
Programming Guide (GC34-0019).
Machine Readable: 80~lumn card images on 9-track 800/1600 BPI magnetic
taPe. MSpn macros and the sample program in source fonn.
Optional Program Material: None
Ordering Infonnaiion: Program NIIIIber 360ATX014
Program Number
Distribution Medium
Extension
Type
Code
Basic
Mane
DTR 91800
DTR 9/1600
28
29
UserVo....
Requ....ent
None
None
Additional Program Material:
P~ LS3: Available on microfiche from IBM Corporatlop, Mlc:raflche Dis6~,
nicslU'g. When ordering, specify: Group Code GJDI-17B4.
Publications (available from Mechanicsburg): IBM SystlJln/1 Modular System Progrants (MSP17)·Logic Manual CGV34-0003).
.
SVSTEM/7 MACRO LlBRARVtRELOCATABLE
0S 3bOA-TX-026
DOS 360A-TX-016
Macro Llbrary/Relocatable provides MSP/1 support macros that can operate In the
Linkage Editor environment.
Functions Include:
Specification Macros
Environmental characteristics.
physical and operational characteristics of the system.
SystlJln Macros
System Initialization. Stat timers, prepare feature modules for operation,
etc.
Timer contrOl fulctlons that provide for program timers, time of day clocks,
and scheduling of periodic program execution.
Two-way COllllllWlicatlon between operator and system through the Operator
Station prlnter/keyboard.
Program check-out and debugging facilities providing ~torage dump, snapshot dump, and stora!}t! patch via printer/keyboard or paper tape.
Error recovery to handle machine check, power falhwe, and program check
interrupts •
Access Macros
Subroutines to control the functions of Digita~Analog,and Operator Station
Input/output. The5e include interrupt handling and error recovery routines.
2790 Control Support
Macros allowing use of the SystlJln/1, with a 2790 control, as the
system controller for 2790 system units. (Supports from one to four
2790 controls per System/1.) Support for a maxillllll of i».., 2792
model Is (up to two per 2790 controls) or a maxinua of sixty i»..,
2791s/2792111OdeIls/2793s is provided by MSP/1.
Provides for multiple input/output channels ." eight data input channels
permitting concurrent operation of up to eight 2 790 termina I devices,
each operating at up to 100 characters per second. In addition, five
output channels are available to permit printing of UP to five 1053
Printers simultaneously.
System/7 UtilizationjProductivity .•. Multiple lobes require additi.onal
processing time on the System/7. MSP/7 utilization of the System/7
CPU is expressed below as a function of the number of lobes:
No. of 2790 Controls
MSP/7 CPU Utilization
1
10 - 16"1.
2
24 - 30"/0
3
33 - 40"/0
4
42 - 50%
Macros for area station and attached device definition, building
Transaction Control List, Data Entry Unit List, GDU transaction
definilion, Lobe Error Recovery proced..,e, and lobe· On-Line
Diagnostics, Lobe Fault Isolation, and Lobe Error Display system
routines.
Units supported include: 2791 and 2793 Area Stations ••• 2792
Remote Communications Controller ... 2795,2796, ancl2797
Data Entry Units ... 2798 GuIdance Display Unit ... 1053 Output Typewriter ... 1035 Badge Reader.
On-Line Diagnostics: For both area stations and 2792. Invokable
from any local or remote area station or from 5028 for 2792. Prerequisite for systems with more than 16 area stations, with a 2792,
more than 16 area stations, or where system availability is critical.
Asynchronous Communication Control Support
Macros to initiate and control data transfer via the asynchronous COllIm...lcatlonadapter •
A transparent data scheme to permit the transfer of load nmduIes to the
System/7 for execliion or punching to paper tape.
Using the line control discipline .f a 2740 Model 1 (with record
checking), the Systal/1 can send and receive data to and front a 3601
370 host operating under comol of DOS BTAM or QTAM, or OS
BTAM,QTAM, or TCAM.
Binary SynchlDIIOUS Communications Adapter Support
ComnIUnications Access Method macros to initiate and control data
transfer via the Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter.
The BSCA feature allows remote connection of a System/1 asa processor
termlna I to:
System/370 MOdels 115,125, and 135 (via the Integrated Communications Adapter).
System/370 Models 115 or larger (via the 2701,2703,3704,
or 3705)
System/3 Model 6 or 10 or 15 (via the System/3 BSCA)
Another System/7 (via the BSCA)
Both EBCDIC and ASCII transmission codes are supported under software
control. Transparent mode is standard but allowed only with EBCDIC.
Note: System/370 Model 135 ICA will nor allow transparent and nontriiiiparent code support on the same. line.)
ColIII!unlcatlon may be over any two !lr four wire links on point-to-polnt
(switched or non-switched) or multipoine configurations. In point-to-point
conflgLnlions, the System/1 is supported as a processor tenninal, In a
multipoint configuration, System/1 is s~ as a tributary station only
with no multipoint central capability available. Transmission is half duplex
. and data transfers in,and out of System/7 storage are by means of a direct
storage access mechanism on a cycle stealing basis.
The System/1 BSCA provides the capability of remote Initial prograIIIload
ClPU hom another system. Initiation of the IPL is controlled by the remote
system, A System/1 can be IPL'd from a remote system when it is configured as a processor terminal on a point-to-point switched line or as a
tributary station in a multipoint configuration, The IPL message is transmitted in transparent EBCDIC only.
The System/1 BSCA is s~pported as a BSC tennlnal by: BTAM under
DOS/VS; by STAM and TCAM under OS/VSl and OS/VS2; by 3704/
3705 emulation mode, by System/3 MultilinelMultipoint (MLIMP),
RPG II and Communication Control Program (CCP).
Other Function Macros
Data conversi.on macros,
Multiply-Divide,
Square Root.
Dynamic Buffer Management.
Variable Length Character Manipulation.
DoIiJIe-Word Integer Arithmetic.
Simultaneous Disk Services.
Not to be reproduced ~~wrItten p8""isslon
P 7.4
Mar 74
IIM~ng
Blsic Disk
Support Macros
WAIT/POST Macros
Seek, Read, Write, and Write-Verify Functions.
Multiple
Sector operations,
including cylinder ovefflow support.
A program WAITING for the completion of an event can relinquish control and free
its interrupt le!,el for other use. The WAIT/POST Macros:
Multiple 5022 Modules are supported. (seeks may be overlapped.)
Save registers in dynamically allocated storage.
Disk Cycle SteafFeatlft 2664 is supportecl when use with 5010 feature 2662.
Automatically restore register contents and reactivate the supported program
when completion of the event is POSTED .•
Emir haridling routines.
Facilitates overlap of proceSSing with inpuVoutput operations.
Symbolic File Support Macros
Classification: Type I with programming service classification A.
Supported disk file organization includes:
System/3 compatible, Volume Table of Contents (\ITOC).
Dlreetorlud data sets with suballocation of data set space Into subdata sets
called members.
Pro9'aIllS stored to disk as members of a dlrectorlzed dataset.
Data sets comprised of one or more tracks, members comprised of one or more
sectors.
.
Basic Program Material: OS 3.60A-TX-026 Macro Library/Relocatable
Documentation: One copy each of Program Directory ••• MSP /7 Macro Library/
Relocata6le: Coding the InputlOutput Macros (GC34-0020> ••• Coding the
Processing Macros (GC34-0008) ••• Coding the 2790 Control Macros (GC340024) ••• MSP/7 Installation and Nucleus Generation Guide (GC34-003l> •••
MSP/7 Control Blocks (GC34-0033).
Machine Readable; SO-coIUIM card images on 9.;track S00/1600 magnetic tape.
MSm macros :nbers unavailable for access.
Retrieval and execution of program members via @ FETCH macros.
Routine to wait until a specific volume or any volume comesrsdy.
Access routines support:
Basic Access Method - Access to data sets or members by relative sector
number. One request allows read and lIVI'ite of multiple sectors acress track
and cyl inder boundaries.
Direct Access Method - Access to fixed length records of data sets or members rendomly by relative record number. GET and PUT of records also
provides for sequential inpuVoutput of records .
Basic Program Material: OOS 360A-TX-016 Macro Library/Relocatable
Documentation: One copy each of Program Directory ••. MSP /7 Macro Library/
Relocata6le: Coding the Input!Output Macros (GC34-0020) •• , Coding the
Processing Macros (GC34-000S) ••• Coding the 2790 Control Macros (GC34~
0024) ••• MSP/7 Installation and Nucleus Generation GUide (GC34-003l> •• ,
MSP/7 Control Blocks (GC34·0033).
Machine Readable: SO-column card images on 9-track 800/1600 bpi magnetic
tape. MSpn macros (commented and uncommented), 2790 On-line Diagnostics,
and the sample programs in source form.
Optional Program Material: None,
Ordering Inf9rmation: Program Number 00 S 360A TX016
Communications Access Method - ProVides suppOrt for Binary Synchronous
Communications Adapter at the logical record (GET~ .PUnlevel and the
physical record (READ, WRITE) level.
The allocation of disk space and the use of the OPEN facility allows the user to reference a data area on disk by symbolic name rather thall di,sk address. OPEN logically
connects.a disk data area to the symbolic name referenced in the application program
jlnd can be either within the program atassembly time or in conjunction with the Disk
Support System at the time the program is loaded for execution.
Program Number
Extension
Basic
Program Number
Extension
Distribution Medium
Type
Code
User Volume
R£lluirement
None
MT 9/800
MT 9/1600
I, - 2400' reel
28
29
1 - 2400' reel
Additional Program Material:
Program Listings: Available on microfiche from IBM Corporation,Microfiche
Distribution, Mechanicsburg. When ordering, specify Group Codes GJD1-1790
and GJDl-1794.
Publications (available from Mechanicsburg): IBM System/7 Symbolic File Support (SFS): Program Logic Manual (GY34-0018) ... Understanding MSP/7
(GC34-0027) ••• MSP/7 Binary Synchronous Communication: Program Logic
Manual (GY34-0012) •• , IBM System/7 Macro library/Relocatable: Program
Logic Manllal (GY34-0010).
System/3 files (data sets) marked as Variable Length Spanned Unblocked
Sequential may be accessed on the System/7 using Basic Access
Method or the Variable Segment Access Method. System/7FORTRAN
used VSAM and DAM.
SYSTEM/7 HOST MACRO ASSEMBLER CASM/7l
System/7 to System/3
System/7 data sets marked as Direct (built by the Direct Access Method)
may be opened by System/3 data management and accessed'as a consecutive or direct file. System/7 data sets marked as variable s~uential
(loaded by the Variable Segment Access Method) may be accessed by
System/3 data management as a variable consecutive file~ System/3
FORTRAN uses both direct and variable sequential files. The System/
7 directorized data sets and members of directorized data sets are not
available to System/3 Support Facilities.
OS 360A-TX-02l
DOS 360A-TX-Oll
ASM/7 is a System/7 Language Translator that translates symbolic instructions into
machine language instruction, assigns storage locations, and performs auxiliary functions
-flecessary to produce executab Ie mach ine language programs. AS M/7 is' language compatible with the stand-alone ASM!7.
In addition, ASM/7:
Produces listings of source and object programs.
TASKING
Produces object modules SUitable for input to the storage load formatting'
program(FO RMAT /7) or the Linkage Editor (LINK/7).
MSP/7 Support Macros provide facility:
To ins...e serial use of a nonreentrant prograrti.
To maintain registers and work area after pr,gram suspenSion and reactivation.
Allows user macros.
Not to be reproduc8d 'without written· pennl..lon
IBM
P 7,5
Mar 74
Programming
Provides conditional assembly Instructions.
SuPPOrts new Instructions for System/7 Model E processor,
Minimum System Requirements for 1!xecutlon on a SystelTll360 or SystelTll370
operating under ...
Disk Operating System (OOS)
MI~lmum System ReqUirements for execution on a System/360 or 5,ste1Tll370
operating untler ...
Disk Operating System . Object code of
ASM/7, PREP/7, LlNK/7, FORMAT/7, and teleprocessing service programs
UTIPL and UZERO. Also includes the service programs UPIPL and UZERO in a
form that can be punched out on paper tape (provides the functions of UTIPL and
UZERO teleprocessing service programs for non-TP users).
The System/370 DSP facilities described in this announcement are FORTRAN
and PL/I callable by the System/370 user.
S/370 DSP will asynchronously proc;ess multiple requests for exchanges of
data, programs, and tasks made from multiple System/7s and regions.
Existing teleprocessing applications utilizing BTAM facilities and existing
user programs utiliZing standard OS facilities are not restricted through the
installation of System/370 DSP.
Optional Program Material:
Documentation: None
Machine Readable: 80-column source card images on 800/1600 bpi 9-track magnetic tape.
Ordering Information: Program Number. 360ATXOIO
Program Number
Extension
None
Basic
Optional
None
Distribution Medium
Type
Code
User Vo~me
Requirement
DTR 9/800
DTR 9/1600
Cards
28
29
15
None
None
None
MT 9/800
MT 9/1600
28
29
1 - 2400' reel
1 - 2400' reel
Applications uti lizing the facilities of other sub-systems (e.g., IMS) may also
use the faci lities of DSP.
Special Sales Information: System/370 DSP allows the support of a wide range of
applications including Laboratory, Automation, Process Control, Data Acquisition,
Manufacturing Testing, and Manufacturing Automation. Application programs written
for 11.30 DSP and 1800 DSP run with little modification under System/370 DSP,
allowing for easy growth.
Use: System/370 DSP consists of subroutines which execute on the host and macros
WIilCh executE: on each System/7. To use the System/370-System/7 multisystem
configuration, application programs must use System/370 DSP in the follOWing
manner:
The System/370 DSP region is initiated as an OS job by using OS Job Control
Language (JCLl.
Additional Program Material:
Program Listings: Available on microfiche from IBM Corporation, Microfiche
Distribution, Mechanicsburg. When ordering, specify: Group Code GJDl-1787.
The System/370 resident programs include calls to the System/370 DSP subroutines.
Publications :
teleprocessing attachment to a host System/370* is
supported at a higher level. The System/370 can continue to be used for local processing as well as for preparation of programs. The larger host computer provides large
fi Ie and processing capabi lities on a demand basis.
Distributed System Program
The System/1 resident programs use the System/7 DSP macros.
The System/370 DSP utility programs are invoked via OS functions or operator
command from a console recognized by OS as the System/370 DSP console.
User Responsibilities: The following items must be arranged for or prOVided by the
user:
Teleprocessing lines and modems necessary to establish the required teleproceSSing links between the System/370 and the System/7s.
Proper generation of DSP to match his system configuration.
Insta lIation of the program elements provided. with System/370 DSP in the proper
libraries, according b System/3 70 DSP generation procedures.
oS/360
* The System/3 70 Distributed System Program operates under the MFT and MVT
versions of the System/360 Operating System and supports both System/360 and
System/370. All references to SYstem/370 also applytQ System/360 unless
specifically indicated. All references to OS regions imply the optional use of OS
MVT partitions.
Description: The System/370 Distributed System Program (S/370 DSP, 360ATX-032), links a System/370 to one or more System/7s to operate as coupled components of an integrated system. Communication between the System/7s and the
host System/370 is by a start/stop teleprocessing attachment using the Basic Telecommunications Access Method (BTAM). System/370 DSP provides support under
OS MFT (with sub-tasking) or OS MVT and System/7 Modular System Programs
(MSP /7). This attachment allows for the exchange of data, programs, and tasks.
The facilities provided by System/370 I)SP include:
Application programs in the System/1 may initiate tasks and subtasks in the
System/370 DSP region or OS batch jobs in other System/370 regions.
System/370 programs may be initiated from a System/7 as:
a)
b)
c)
Programs which execute in synchronism with the requesting application
(as an extension of DSP-l
Programs which execute asynchronously with the requesting application
(as a sub-task of DSP)
"
0 S Batch Jobs
Programs in any region of the System/370 may initiate the execution of programs in the System/1 at user ass igned priorities.
Named data files in the DSP,IOS data sets on the host disk may be defined and
accessed by application programs residing in the System/1, the System/370
DSP region in the System/370, and the DSP users in other regions of OS in
the System/370.
A separate area of main storage ,
to1l1e
If the standard OS data management routines used by DSP are not included in the OS
system area, the storage required for these routines wi II have to be added to the DSP
region size,
System/7
5010
Processor Module Model A06; includes 6144 words of storage
with the Asynchronous Communications Control Adapter feature
tI610
5026
Enclosure Model A02
5028
Operator Station with keyboard/printer and paper tape reader/
punch
The Systemj370 DSP macros resident in the System/7 require approximately 600
words of System/7 storage. The prerequisite MSP /7 macros require approximately
2800 words of System/7 storage including the MSP /7 macros for interrupt handling,
queueing, program interrupt, and Operator Station 1ft) Control, The System/7 storage available for the customer's applicatiol'! program is approximately 2700 words
for the minimum System/7 configuration of 6144 words,
Programming service clasSification is A,
Market Su~port: Customer Announcement Letters (G320-7027), Customer Brochures
are available
from Mechanicsburg,
Ordering Information:
Basic Program Material - OS 360A-TX-032
Documentation: One copy each of IBM Systemj370 D.istributed System Program,
Program Reference Manual (GH20-9500) and IBM Systemj370 Distributed
System Program, Operations Guide (GH20-950l>.
Machine Readable Material: One 9-track 800/1600 bpi magnetiC tape reel
containing source and object code required for System/370 DSP generation and
one paper tape strip for initiating a dial-in System/7 teleprocessing connection,
To order the basic material, specify one of the following numbers:
Specify
Nuniler
Track
Density
Description
User Volume
Requirement
9027
9029
9/800
9/1600
MagnetiC Tape
Magnetic Tape
None (DTR)
None (oTR)
Not to be reproduced without written permission
(Reverse side is blank)
II,.,
Programming
1130 Computing System
Two programming systems are provided for the 1130 Computin,g System: [11 1130 Card/
Paper Tape Programming System ••• [21 1130 Disk Monitor System
Components of the Card/paper Tape Programming System are:
Basic Program Material:
Components of the Disk Monitor System are:
S.
6.
hence the read/punch time, and
b. Whether or not the optional typewriter listing is requested during the compreSSion. This listing effectively reduces the read speed to 15 characters!
second, the typewriter speed.
Minimum system requirements:F or program generation and execution -- A 4K word
1131 mdl1 or mdl 4 ••• 1442 Card Read Punch mdl 6 or 7 or 1134 Paper Tape
Reader and 1055 Paper Tape Punch.
1. Assembler
FORTRAN
3. Subroutine Library
4. Utility Routines
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
P 1130.1
Mar 73
Supervisor
Subroutine Library
Disk Utll ity Program
Assembler
FORTRAN
RPG (Disk Monitor Version 2 only)
IBM 1130 Card/paper Tape Programming System
This Programming System is designed especially for use on an 1130 Computing System without disk storage.
Minimum system requirements: A 4K word 1131 mdl 1 ••• 1442 Card Read Punch
metl 6 or 7, or 1134 Paper Tape Reader and 1055 Paper Tape Punch.
Machine features and units supported: An 1131 model lA, IB, 2A, 2B, 2B, 4A or
4B ... 1442 Card Read Punch model 6 or 7 ... 1134 Paper Tape Reader and 1055
Paper Tape Punch ... 1132 Printer ... 1627 Plotter model lor 2 ... Synchro
nous Communications Adapter.
The four components of the Card/Paper Tape Programming System are described below:
The IBM 1130 Assembler provides the programmer a flexible and meaningful Symbolic language that is easier to code than a binary machine
language.
Source programs are assembled by the processor in two passes. The Assembler automatically assigns and keeps a record of storage locations and checks for coding errors.
By relieving the programmer of these burdensome tasks, the Assembler significantly
reduces the amount of programming time and effort required to prepare a program.
A Compressor Program compresses symbolically assembled output into a form suitable
for execution.
The Assembler and its compressor al""ays use all of core storage available on an assembly machine. The programs determine memory size automatically at assembly time and
adjust table parameters accordingly. Approximately 520 labels may be held in a 4K
memory.
The Assembler provides for assembly of both absolute and relocatable mainline programs, and for assembly of relocatable subroutines. By means of ENT and CALL
statements, provision is made for automatic symbolic cro~s-referencing between programs at load time. The Assembler can be used to generate subroutines and subprograms for FORTRAN main programs. Similarly, Assembler main programs can call
FORTRAN subroutines or subprograms, as well as Subroutine Library and Utility Routines.
1130-SP-00l (Card)
,
SRL PublicatiOn -- IBM 1130 Card/Paper Tape Programming Systell'c Operators
GUide, C26-3629.
Documentation -- Program Material List ••• Sample Assembly Progra,
'ttachment to Users.
Machine Readable -- Object Deck and Samp1e Program.
1130-SP-002
Card System, with 1442 Model 7:
90-100 statements/minute
Processor load times are as follows:
With 1442 Model 6, Assembler -12 seconds, Compressor - 9 seconds
With 1442 Model 7, Assembler - 9 seconds, Compressor - 7 seconds
Paper Tape system with 1134 and 1055:
6-17 statements/minute
The variation may be ascribed to:
a. The extent of remarks on the statements, which affect the tape length and
Not to'be reproduced without written permi.lon
IBM·
Programming
P1130.2
1130 Computing System
Mar '73
Subroutine Library:
The IBM 1130 Subroutine Library has arithmetic, functional,
code conversion, I/O control and selective dump subroutines for
use by object programs generated by the 1130 Assembler or the
1130 FORTRAN Compiler.
The floating-point subroutines in the 1130 Subroutine Library offer two ranges of
precision: Standard Range and Extended Range. The Standard range provides 23
bits of preciSion; the Extended range provides up to 31 bits of precision.
The subroutines provided include Floating-Point, Fixed-Point, Special Function, Code
Conversion, I/O Control and Selective Dump.
The subroutines are used by FORTRAN Compiler or Assembler object programs to perform floating-point, fixed-point arithmetic, and functional operationsj the conversion
of data from one I/O code to another; the control of I/O activity on the devices attached
to the system; and the selective dumping of memory areas for debugging purposes.
Subroutines are provided to operate the Synchronous Communications Adapter in STR
mode and BSC mode. The STR subroutines include I ine control and 4 of 8 code conversion. The BSC subroutines provide for point to point and multipoint transmission
with the following basic line control functions prOVided for: Point to pOint, with contention '" POint to pOint switched network ••• Multipoint, centralized with 1130 as
slave ••• Data set clocking or IBM clocking ••• Inquiry and alternating acknowledgements •.. Auto answer without identification •.• Headers •.. Normal Text (EBCDIC
code) '" Full Transparent Text (EBCDIC control characters) ••• Error checking
(cyclic check) .•• Disconnect. BSC with the 1130 is program supported on
System/360 Models 30,40, 50,65,67 (working in 65 mode) and 75 in OOS/
BTAM and OSIBTAM ••• See IBM System/360 Disk Operating System (00S/360)
and IBM Operating System/360 (OS/360l.
Minimum system requirements: A 4K word 1131 mdl 1 or 4 ••• applicable I/O
equipment for execution of the subroutines.
Machine featl,lres and units supported: A 4K or 8K word 1131 ••• 1442 Card Read
Punch mdl 6 or 7 ••. 1134 Paper Tape Reader and 1055 Paper Tape Punch •••
Console Printer-Keyboard •.• 2315 Disk Cartridge ... 1132 Printer ... 1627
Plotter .•. Synchronous Communications Adapter.
Basic Program Material:
1130-L M-OOl (Card)
SRL Publications -- IBM 1130 Subroutine Library, C26-5929-1 •.• TNLs to
Subroutine Library, N26-0551 and N26-0553.
Documentation -- Program Material List ••• Attachment to Users.
Machine Readable -- Object Deck.
Guide, 'C26-3629.
Documentation -- Program Material.
Machine Readable -- One Paper Tape for each of the following - Relocating
Loader ... Core Image Loader ... Core Image Converter - Core Map on Typewriter ... Core Image Converter - Core Map on Printer .•• Dump and Console
Utilities •.. I/O Utilities ... Construct Paper Tape - a routine for compressing
subroutines ••• EOD 1 ••• EOD 2 ••• DPIR ••• User Exit Special User EOD
User Exit Overlay Record ••• One Record Typewriter Dump ... Keyboard Routine.
1130/1800 Compatible Programs:
Programs can be prepared on the IBM 1130
Computing System fOr execution on the IBM
1800 Data Acquisition and Control System.
Programs for the 1800 can be assembled and compressed or FORTRAN compiled on
the 1130 using the 1130 Card/Paper Tape programming systems. These programs
in relocatable card or paper tape fonn can be executed on the 1800 using the 1800
Re-Iocating Loader and 1800 Subroutine Library.
This compatibi lity applies only tp relocatable object programs produced by the 1130
Card/Paper Tape programming systems. The compatibility does not apply to the programming systems themselves. The 1130 Card/Paper Tape programming systems contain differences in I/O operation such that they cannot generally be used on the 1800.
Reference Manual: IBM 1130 Card/Paper Tape Programming System Operator's
GUide, c26.. 3629,
IBM 1130 Disk Monitor System
The 1130 Disk Monitor System enables the user to assemble, compile, and execute
programs written in Assembler, FORTRAN or RPG. The system proVides the ability
to combine Assembler Language subprograms or FORTRAN subprograms into Assembled
or FORTRAN compiled main programs in any combination. RPG mainline programs
may use assembl er-written subprograms. System programs, user programs, and data
are stored on disk for direct accessibility and speed of operation. The system provides overlay capability, and the abil ity to call (LINK) one program from another, thus
allowing the execution of programs that would not otherwise fit into core storage.
The Disk Monitor System provides for minimal set-up time and continuous execution of
stacked jobs Without Qperator intl!rvention. Job input is in the form of either cards or
paper tape. Job records identify jobs to be performed by the 113 0 Monitor System.
Monitor control records specify the fllnctions to be performed, e.g., Assembly, RPG
compilation, .. , FORTRAN compilation, execute an assembled or compiled program,
or call the Disk Utility PrQgram. Control Records recognized by the function to be
performed give further instructions regarding the sub job.
Monitor System, Version 2:
The components of the 1130 Monitor System, Version 2, are described below:
Supervisor:
The Supervisor reads the monitor control records and causes the proper system
functions to be brought into control. The time required to load a sample 8K
core load {disk. core image format> varies from l.5 to 4.0 seconds, depending
primarily on the length of the User Area.
Utility Routines:
The IBM 1130 Utility Routines are part of the baSic programming
system to be used by all 1130 installations. These programs
make it possible to program the 1130 in a wide range of general
engineering applications.
The Utility Routines include: (1) an Input/Output routine which accepts data fl'l)m one
of two input media (card or paper tape) and outputs data to one or two of four output devices (card, paper tape, 1132 or console printer), When two output devices are required, one must be a print option.(Console Printer or 1132 Printer>' (2) Dump routines which permit the user to dump any area of memory; output can be obtained on
cards, console printer or 1132 Printer. (3) Loader routines - Relocating Loader,
Core Image Converter, and Core Image Loader.
These routines provide the programmer with a versatile tool for transferring data frorn
one medium to another, and also for perfonning the repetitive uti lity functions needed
daily for most data processing installations. They also include routines to aid the
user in debugging his programs. In addition, they provide the facilities for: (1) loading compressed binary object program cards in either relocatable or core image fonnat.
(2) generating object program core maps.
Minimum system requirements: A 4K word 1131 mdl 1 ••• 1442 Card Read Punch
mdl 6 or 7 or 1134 Paper Tape Reader and 1055 Paper Tape Punch.
Basic Program Material:
1130-UT-001 (Card)
SRL Publication -- IBM 1130 Card/Paper Tape Programming Systems Operators
Guide, C 26-3629.
Documentation -- Program Material.
Machine Readable - Object Deck.
~:
The Disk Monitor Assembler performs the same functions as the Card/Paper Tape
System Assembler. It can assemble in one pass of the source deck, however,
and it produces an object program on the disk, as well as a listing. It allows
labels to overflow onto disk if necessary, and provides more instruction types.
The loading of object programs is covered in the description of the core load
builder.
The approximate Assembler program speeds in statements per minute, assuming a
2. 2 ~ sec memory and that the monitor system and Working Storage are on different
disk drives, are given in the following table:
I nput Device
1442
Model 7
1442
Model 6
1134
270
220
190
130
230
200
170
150
110
1132 mdl1
72
68
65
62
54
Console
Printer
14
14
14
14
11
No
listing
500
410
300
240
160
List
Device
2501
Model A2
2501
Model Al
300
1403mdl7
1403 mdl
b*
• Uting Attachment 4424 for oper.ti ... n .t 340 Ipm maximum.
1130-UT-002 subroutines and conversion subroutines. It also
includes dump programs for debugging. All programs in the System Librarv will
operate in any core memory size or speed. DFCNV requires an l130 System with
at least one disk, BK words of core, and a card reader.
Communications Subroutines:
• U1i"l Att8Chmtnt 4424 for operatinn at 340 Ipm meximum.
RPG
RPG is a commercial, problem-oriented, language designed to provide users with an
effiCient, easy-to-use technique for generating programs that can: obtain data records
from single or multiple input fi les ••• perform calculations on data taken from input records or RPG literals ••• write printed reports .•. do table lookup ••. branch within
calculations ..• sequence check input records ... exit to internal RPG subroutines or
external routines written in 1130 Assembler Language ••. process disk Indexed Sequential files ••• process disk Blocked Sequential files .•• provide Sterling conversion and
inverted print edit ••• write records during calculations ••• use of chain operation codes
in cal;.;ulations ••• automatic page numbering ••• use of edit codes on output format •••
transfer to an RPG sub-routine.
A source program written in 1130 RPG Language is processed by the RPG compiler
to produce an 113 0 machine language program. Input/Output Routines for I/O functions,
RPG subroutines, and System subroutines are loaded with the generated mainl ine program prior to execution. The RPG compiler operates in a stacked job environment
under control of the 1130 0 isk Monitor, Version 2.
The approximate time in seconds, assuming a 2.2u sec CPU, to compile a 52-statement RPG source program which reads card input and formats and prints an Accounts
Receivable Register is shown below .
BaSic Program Material: 1130-~G-007
Documentation: Program Directory
SRL Publications: One copy of IBM 1130 RPG Language (GC21-S002).
Machine Readable: Object decks and sample program available.
The System Library contains subroutines to operate the Synchronous Communications
Adapter in STR mode and BSC mode. The STR subroutines include line control and
4 of 8 code conversion. The BSC subroutines provide for point-to-point and multipOint transmission with the following baSic I ine control functions provided for:
Point-to-point, with contention; .. Point-to-point switched network •.. MultipOint,
centralized with 1130 as slave ... Data Set Clocking or IBM Clocking ... inquiry
and alternating acknowledgements ... Auto answer without identification ... Headers
.,. Normal Text (EBCDIC code) .. , Full Transparent Text (EBCDIC control characters) ... Error checking (cyclic check) ... Disconnect. BSC with the 1130 is program supported on System/360 Models 30, 40, 50, 65, 67 (working in 65 mode)
and 75 in DOS/BTAM and OS/BTAM ... See IBM System/360 Disk Operating
System (005/360> and IBM Operating System/360 (oS/360>.
Also supported are communications with S/360 Model 20 with BSCA-IOCS, 1BOO
Data Acquisition and Control System with 1800 Multi-programming Executive System
Version 2 with BSCIO 2770 Data Communications System and 2780 Data Transmission
·Terminal.
Note:
The 1130 Type I programming support will not include the Edit Macro for the
2770's Model 50 Magnetic Data Inscriber. Therefore, if communication with
the 2770's Mdl 50 MOl is deSired, the customer will have to supply his own
edit routine.
Minimum system requirement, A 4K word 1131 Model 2 ••. I/O devices same as
for the Monitor System, Version 2 .,. Synchronous Communications Adapter.
Reference Manual: IBM 1130 Synchronous Communications Adallter Slibroutines,
C26-3706.
Optional Program Material:
Disk Data File Conversion Program CDFCNV):
Machine Readable: Source code for the compiler and subroutines.
Ordering Information: Program Number 1130 RG 007
Program No.
Extension
Distribution Medium
Type
Code
Basic
None
Cards
15
None
Optional
None
MT 9/BOO
MT 9/1600
28
29
None
None
User Volume
Requirement
Additional Program Material: .
Program Logic Manual: IBM 1130 RPG Program Logic Manual (GY21-0010l.
Available from Mechanicsburg.
Program Listings: Available on microfiche from IBM Corporation,Microfiche
UTstributlon, Mechanicsburg. When ordering, specify microfiche listing;
Reference Publications:
IBM 1130 Disk Monitor System V2 Programmer's
and Operator' 5 Guide
GC26-3717-9
IBM 1130 Subroutine Library
GC26-5929-7
IBM 1130 Disk Monitor Programming System
V2 PLM
IBM 1130/1800 Basic FORTRAN IV Language
GN34-0068 (TNL to
GY26-3714-3)
GN34-0085 (TNL to
GC26-3715-7)
Provides the capability for customers to convert their 1130 disk data files which
have been created through the use of FORTRAN (or FORTRAN plus Commercial
Subroutines) to an 1130 RPG compatible disk sequential fonnat.
Designed as a general purpose program, it runs under control of 1130 Disk Monitor
System, Version 2 <1130-05 -OOS)' ConverSion is from di sk data fi Ie to disk data
file, with an intermediate punched card stage as an option.
The program accepts as input a set of control cards which descnbe. the format of the
data file to be converted. This file may contain the follOWIng flela types:
one word integer
two word integer
Real numbers (standard or extended precision)
FORTRAN'S AI, A2, A3, A4, AS, or A6 fonnat
CommerCial Subroutine's 01,04, or A3 data format
Input of this program is always a disk data file record . .output of this program is
always another disk data file record (on the same or a dIfferent drive) lInless punched
card output is specified. Output in all cases is to a sequentIal data fde access,ble
by RPG-comlliled user programs. A reverse converSion is not possible.
PrOVides 1130 user with a quick"easy conversion program to allow data interchange
between FORTRAN-compiled ,and RPG-compiled programs., Allows selective field
conversion and data rearrangement within cOllverted records.
The Ilrogram is used for the permanent conversion of FORTRAN-created data sets for
use by RPG-comlliled programs.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion
I ::l\i
P 1130.4
Mar 73
Programming
1130 Computing System
Customer Responsibilities - The user must reserve an area for the converted file in
either the fixed or user area, by name, before running the utility. ThiS function can
. be performed by the DUP STOREDATA function.
Programming Systems - The program is written in Assembler Language and runs under
control of 1130 Disk Monilor, VerSion 2. It is included in the System library.
Machine Configurations - Requires an 1130 system with at least one disk, 8K words
of core, and a card reader. Supports all 1130 card I/O devices and 1130 printers.
Input disk data file and output disk data file may be on separate disk drives or the
same disk drive.
Util ity Programs:
The Utility Programs are a group of special purpose programs !;tored on cards or
paper tape. They include programs for dumping from core to printer, from disk to
printer, for initializing disk cartridges, and for copying from one disk cartridge to
another.
Minimum System Requirements: 1130-oS-006 - A 4K work 1131 with at least
one disk and a 1134 Paper tape Reader and 1055 Paper Tape Punch.
Basic Program Material: 1130-05-005
Documentation: Program Directory
SRL Publications*: One copy of IBM 1130 Disk Monitor System Version 2,
Programmer's and Operator's Guide (GC26-3717).
Machine Readable: Object decks and sampleptograms are available on one 2315
Disk Cartridge or one 1316 Disk Pack.
'
Optional Program Material:
Machine Readable: Source assembler language coding for the DM2 system programs, system library and utilities.
Ordering Information: Program Number 1130 OS 005
Program No.
Extension
Distribution Medium
Type
Code
User Volume
Requirement
BasiC
None
None
2315 Disk
1316 Disk
58
52
1-2315 Disk
1-1316 Disk
Optional
None
MT 9/800
MT 9/1600
28
29
1-2400' reel
1-2400' reel
1130-0S-005 - A 4K work 1131 with at least one disk and one of the following:
A 1442 Card Read Punch Model 6 or 7, or
A 2501 Card Reader Model Al or A2 and 1442 Card Punch ModelS, or
1442 Card Read Punch Model 6 or 7.
* If only the basic form number copy of the publication is required,
order them from the
IBM Distribution Center, Mechanicsburg (SLSS) -- not from PID.
~ote: RPG reQUired an 8K or larger 1131, disk, and a card reader.
1130-0S-006 (Paper Tape)
Units and features utilized: All 1131 CPU models except lA which are part of an
1130 system containing at least one disk drive (internal disk, 2310, or 2311) .,.
1442 Card Read Punch Model 6 or 7 •• , 1442 Card Punch ModelS .•• 1134
Paper Tape Reader and 1055 Paper Tape Punch ••• Consol~ Printer and Keyboard
•.. 2315 Disk Cartridges ... 1132 Printer Modell or 2 .• , 1627 Plotter Model
Al or A2 •.• 1403 Printer Model 6 or 7 ••• 2310 Disk Storage Models 81 and
82 ••• 123'1 Optical Mark Page Reader ••• Synchronous Communications Adapter,
2311 Disk Storage Model 11 or 12.
Documentation -- Program Material List.
All 1130 card/paper tape and printer devices will function as principal I/O devices
for the monitor system programs except for RPG, which wi II not function with paper
tape input. In addition, the keyboard will funCtion as an input device for all monitor
system programs except RPG. All I/O devices will be available to FORTRAN and
Assembler object programs except the 1231 and Synchronous Communications Adapter
which wi" be available to Assembler object programs only.
Note: 2311 Models 11 and 12 Disk Storage Drives are supported by 1130-oS-005
only.
RPG supports the following I/O devices only:
SRL Publication -- 1130 Disk Monitor System, Version 2, Programming
and Operator's Guide (C26-3717).
Machine Readable -- One Paper Tape for each of the following -- System Loader,
Part 1 ••. System Loader, Part 2 .•• Phase to (PHIDl Control Record ..• Disk
Util ity Program ..• FORTRAN Compiler ••• Assembler. " Supervisor, Core
Load Builder, System I/O, Core Image Loader .•• End of System Tape Control Record ..• Standard Precision L1BF and CALL Subroutines ... Extended
Precision L1BF and, CALL subroutines ••• Common L1BF and CALL Subroutines
.,. ILS, ISS, Conversion and Utility Subroutines ..• Plotter Subroutines ...
SCA Subroutines ••• Cold Start Paper Tape Record .•. DCIP (Disk Cartridge
Initialization Program) '" PTUTL (Paper Tape Utility Program) •.• Paper Tape
~eproducing Program ... 1132/1403 Printer Core Dump ..• Console Printer
Core Dump. Sample FORTRAN Program ... Sample Asssember Program.
The RPG compi ler is not avai lable fOf' this system. It is avai lable for the Card
Equivalent system, 1130-05-005 only. This system does not support 2311
disk drives.
Note: For system using CPU models IB, lC, 10, 5B, 5C, or 50 and 2311 Model
nlITsk, a card reader is required for adequate FE support.
1. 1442 Card Reader/Punch - Model 6 or 7
2. 1442 Card Punch - ModelS
3. 2501 Card Reader - Model A 1 or A2
4. 1403 Printer - Model 6 or 7
5. 1132 Printer - Modell or 2
6. 2310 Disk - Model Bl or B2, up to 4 drives
7. Console printer as an output device
8. 2311 Disk Model 12, up to two drives
The Synchronous Communications Adapter, the 1231 Optical Mark Page Reader,
Paper Tape I/O, the Console Keyboard at execution time, and all other I/O devices
not listed above as specifically supported are not supported.
2311 Programming Notes:
This programming system supports the internal disk drive on 1131 Models 2 and 3
plus up to four additional drives housed in one or two 2310s, or up to two 2311
drives in place of the 2310s. The combinations supported are:
1131 Models
2 or 3
2 or 3
2 or 3
lor 5
lor 5
Internal Drives
2310
ll!!..
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
1 to 4
No
No
No
lor 2
No
lor 2
lto 4
No
Whenever a 2311-11 is part of a system, five 2315 disks are emulated on five
platters of the 1316 disk pack. Whenever a 2311-12 is part of a system, three
2315 disks are emulated on three platters on a 1316 disk pack. Each 2315 cartridge has a four digit cartridge" 10". Each of the 1316 platters will also have a
four digit "10".
'" the maximum system, the 1131 will have avai lable to it a maximum of eleven
logical disk drives - one internal disk plus five logical drives per 2311-11. For
a single job, any five of these logical drives can be addressed. A user program can
select any combination of five logical cartridges at the start of a job by means of
parameters in the //JOB card. Programs coded in Assembler or FORTRAN can, by a
call to the subroutine SYSUP, switch to any other logical cartridge during the job.
System Residence for Disk Monitor Version 2 <1130-oS-005) may be on any logical
platter. IPL (cold start) may come from a~y platter.
1130/2250 Graphic Subroutine Package (GSP): A set of subroutines, !>perating
1130-LM-008
within the 1130 Disk Monitor
VerSion 2 environment, that aids
the FORTRAN or Assembler programmer in I!sing the IBM 2250 Display Unit Model 4.
The subroutines are accessed by means of the CALL statement, and provide these
functions:
I mage Generation:
Routines to generate basic display elements such as points, lines, and characters.
SCissoring and scaling is performed as speCified by the program.
Image Management:
Routines to manipulate image elements (called entities) by name for purposes of
visibil ity (display/non-display), I ight pen control (detect/no detect) and modification (replace, delete, extend>.
.
Attention Handling:
Routines to allow specification of attentions to be processed or ignored and to request available attention data for manipulation.
Operator-Program Communication:
Character Input - - Routines to automatically collect data from the Alphameric
Keyboard to construct messages (Cursor functions are included).
light Pen Tracking - - A sophisticated trackin9capability allowing linear tracking (rubber banding), curve tracking (sketching) or discrete point definition.
Input/Output:
Routines to start and stop the display and light the programmed function keyboard
indicators in any combination.
~ Language Support: ,
In addition to the GSP, the 1130 Assembler will include all the 2250 Model 4
order mnemonics.
Minimum system requirements: Programs using the GSP may be executed on any 1130
computing system having 8,192 words of core storage, disk and an attached IBM 2250
Not to be reproduced without written permission
P 1130.5
Mar 73
1130 Computing System
Display Unit Model 4. Although the programmer Is not required to utilize the total
Graphic Subroutine Package, It Is anticipated that an effective graphic application will
require 16K words of 1130 core storage.
BaSic Program Package: 1l30-LM-011
Reference Manual
Documentation: IBM System/360 Operating Systems and 1130 Disk Monitor
System: System/3bO-1130 Data Transmission for FORTRAN (C21-6937)
••• Program Material List ••• Attachment to Users.
IBM 1130/2250 Graphic Subroutine Package, Preliminary Specification, C27-6934.
Machine Readable: Object code.
Optional Program Package:
'aslc Program- Matet'lal ••• 1130-LM-008
SRL Publication -IBM 1130/2250 Graphic Subroutine Package
for Basic FORTRAN IV, C27-6934-1.
Documentation - Program Material List and an attachment to users.
Documentation: Program Material List ••• Attachment to Users' ••• Operating
Instructions.
Machine Readable: Source modules.
Mllchlne Readable - Object Decks provided In card form.
FORTRAN Subroutines for Data Transmi'ssion Between These routines provide for
a $y_7360
an 1130 System:
_ data transmission between
a S/360 and a remote 1130
Computing System over established communication lines. The user, by means of
FORTRAN' CALL statements, can transmit control information and data between two
programs, one in the 1130, and one In the S/360.• These programs will normally be
st.ted In each processor by the Satellite Graphic Job Processor but can be started by
any procedWt;.
ana
Use of-the transmission subroutines makes It possible fOt an 1130 program to use the
high speed computational capability and large storage capacity of OS/360, thus increaSing the flexlbil ity and efflc iency of the 1130 appl icat!on.
The transmission subroutines use OS/360 BTAM facilities and a specialized syncll'onous communication adapter subroutine under the 1130 MQDi~ System, Version 2,
to accompliSh the actual data transmiSSion. -However, the FORTRAN programmer will
be able to program the data communication with no knowledge of binary synchronous
communications.
The transmission subroutines enable the OS/360 FORTRAN programmer to:
• Inl~lalize tHe communications lines.
• Read ~ wrJte data via the communications lines.
Test and status of the previous request for a read or write operation.
• Activate a user-wrltten syncll'onous routine in the 1130.
Terminate the 1130 main-line program.
Logically terminate the communications hookup.
Simil. functions are performed by transmission subroutines available to the 1130
FORTRAN programmer, except that the 1130 does not have the facility to terminate
an OS/360 program.
ConverSion subroutines are provided to resolve FORTRAN differences between the
Internal data structwe of the System/360 and the 1130. These subroutines (available
to the OS/360 program only) perform the follOWing conversions:
1130 integer fOrmat to OS/360 integer format, and vice versa.
1130 stand.d-preclsion real format to 05/360 stand.d length real format,
and vice versa.
1130 extended-precision real format to OS/360 double-precislon real format,
and vice versa.
In addition, the converSion subroutines can be used to reverse the main storage position of elements when arrays containing alphameric data are transmitted from one system to the other. This preserves the readability of alphameric messag~s despite
differences in the arrangement of array elements in the two systems.
System Requirements:
Operating System/360 MFT -II, orMVT Model 65 Multiprocessing • While
PCP can be used it is not a practical environment because It does not support
multitasking or the Satellite Graphic Job Processor.
A 2701 Data Adapter Unit or 2703 TransmiSSion Control Unit capable of
supporting Bin-v Syncll'onous Communications in half-duplex, point-to-point
environment. The 2701 or 2703 must be designated for use wi~ EBCDIC.
Users of the Dual_tode Featwe on the 2701 must specify EBCI)IC as Code A.
Users of the Dual COIMIunications Interface on the 2701 must specify the
1130 system line as Interface A.
An IBM 1130 Computing System operating under the 1130 Monitor System,
Version 2 with at least 8K of core storage and the Syncll'onous Communications Adapter •
Users who want to employ switched network data sets will be required to perform their
oWn manual or program-controlled procedwes to establish the point-to-point environment necessary for the data transmiSSion subroutines.
Satellite Gra~ic Job Processor:
1130-C -012
The Satellite Graphic Job Processor (SGJP)
permits OS/360 job definition and initiation from
a 2250 Display Unit attached to a remote 1130
Computing System. SGJP enables the user who is unfamiliar with either the 1130
or 05/360 to' define an 05/360 job to run in conjunction with a related 1130 program. OS/360 system messages are routed by SGJP to the 1130 for optional
printing. The programming to transmit control information and data .between the programs in each processor is not prov ided by SGJP and must be part of the appl ication.
FORTRAN Subroutines for Data Transmission between a System/360 and an 1130
system will normally be used for this P!M'Pose.
SGJP can also be used to specify and queue 05/360 jobs fornormal batch processing
under MFT-II or MVT from the 2250. Output from these jobs is produced as normal
OS/360 output, and not routed to the originating 1130.
SGJP is an extension of the OS/360 Graphic Job Processor (GJPl.
UP to 14 remote 1130/2250 systems can be attached to a System/360 for SGJP
operations. If batch jobs are included in OS/360 and/or GJP is being used, the
number of batch partitions Or regions, plus the number of local 2250s (for GJP
operations) plus the n~mber of 1130/2250 systems (for SGJP operations) must not
exceed 14.
SGJP facil itates the initiation of jobs by requesting OS/360 and the related 1130
job control information from a user through a series of displays.. The user responds
to the displays by entering requested information or by selecting appropriate options
with the light pen or the alphameric keyboard. Job control information for an OS/360
job Is transmitted to the 05/360, converted to Job Control Language, and used to
initiate the desired job in a region or partition associated with the 1130/2250 subsystem •. Information about an 1130 program is' used to initiate that program in the
1130.
SGJP enables the remote 1130/2250 user to:
Idelltlfy himself to the 05/360 (LOG ON)
Define and start execution of an OS/360 procedure as a job
(BEGIN PROCEDURE)
Define an OS/360 program or cataloged procedure to be executed
CIS a job step (SPECIFY JOB STEP)
Define data sets to be used by the OS/360 program
Conclude his jo~ definition and prepare the 2250 for the next user (LOG OFF)
System Requirements:
An IBM 1130 Computing System including:
The 1130 Monitor System, Version 2 with at least 16K of core storage
and the Synchronous Communications Adapter •
A 1132 Printer or 1403 Printer (if a. Printed Record of Operations
Performed is desired).
"A 1442 Card Read/Punch, or a 2501 Card Reader and a 1442 Card
Punch.
A 2250 Display Unit Model 4 equipped with the light pen and alphameric
keyboard.
Operating System/360 MFT -II, MVT or MVT Model 65 Multiprogramming.
A 2701 Data Adapter Unit or 2703 Transmission Control Unit capable of
supporting Binary Synchronous Communications in half-duplex, point-to-point
environment. The 2701 or 2703 must be designated for use with EBCDIC.
Users of the Dua.1 Control Feature on the 2701 must specify EBCDIC as
Code A. UsersoftheDual Communications Interface on the 2701 must
speCify the 1130/2250 subsystem line as Interface A •.
Users who desire to employ SWitched network datl! sets will be required to perform
their own manual or program. controlled procedures to establish the point-to-point
environment necessary for the data transmission.
Not to be reproduced without written permission
~' : :~'f'1
P 1130.6
Mar
73
Programming
1130 Computing System
Macro Update Facility
Basic Program Package 1130-('Q-012
• Documentation: IBM System/.360 Operating System and 1130 Dis~ Monitor
System: User's Guide for Job Control from an IBM 1130 System (C27-6938)
.•• Program Material List -- Attachment to Users.
Machine Readable: Object code.
Optional Program Package
Documentation: Program Material list ..• Attachment to Users ••• Operating
Instructions.
MUP - Provides the following facilities for maintaining user macro libraries.
• initializes disk space'for user macro libraries
purge system macros and reclaim space
insert or delete individual statements within macros rename a macro
add new macros to library
phySically or logically join libraries
obtain listing of macro libraries
Performance
Machine Readable: Symbolic modules.
The macro assembler performs as effiCiently as the existing DM2 Assembler when
used for assembl ing non-macro code.
Compatibility
The macro assembler is language compatible with the 1800 Macro Assembler, operating
under MPX Version 2 announced in P69-79.
Remote Job Entry Work Station'
1130-GQ·009
The 11.30 Remote Job Entry Work Station Program, operating within the 11.30 Di~k Monitor
Version 2 envirllnment, has ability to enter OS/
360 jobs from a remote 1130 to be executed on a central System/360 Model 50; 65,
67,(65 mode), 75, 85, 91 or 195. The program reads job input and RJE commands
from an attached input device, transmits data to and receives data from the central processor, and writes output to an attached printer, punch or disk. As an option, disk
output may be replaced by a user-written routine. 16K words of main storage is
normally required if a user-written output routine is included. However, a limited
user-written routine can be included in an 8K machine, depending on the configuration.
The 11.30 RJE program operates with Remote Job Entry under OS/.360. Communication is in binary synchronous mode on a point-to-point leased line, a multipoint I,easoo
line, or on a point-to-point switched network.
Minimum System Requirements: I>n 8K word 11.31 Model 2 or 5 ••• ~442 Card Read
Punch Model 6 or 7, or 2501 Card Reader Model Al or A2 and 1442 Card Punch
Model 5 or 1142 Card Read Punch Model 6 or 7 ••• 11.32 or 140.3 Prll>ter ••• Synchronous Communications Adapter.
I/O Devices Utilized: 1442 Card Read Punch Model 6 or 7 ••• 2501 Card Reader
Model Al or A2 ••• 1442 Card Punch ModelS ••• Keyboard/Console Printer •••
1403 Printer Model 6 or 7 ••• 1132 Printer Modell ••• 2.310 Disk Storage
Models B1 and B2 and internal ,disk drives ••• 2.315 Disk Cartridges .•• Synchronous Communications Adapter ••• 2311 Disk Storage Models 11 and 12.
Object modules are not 1800 compatible.
The language
is a~upetset of the present 1130 assembler language.
The macro capability of the 11.30 Macro Assembler restricts the number of in-core
symbols to 217 less than the number supported by the, current Disk Monitor, Version 2
Assembler. This restriction applies only to systems with 8K core or above; the 4K
core user will not be affected. For all IIsers, overflow sectors in disk working storage
for programs with larae symbol tables may still be specified. (See "Assembler"
section of SRL IBM 1130 Disk Monitor System, Version 2, Programming and Operator's Guide - C26-.3717)
Disk Utilization Requirements
These programs require an additional 5 cylinders of disk space for reSidence over the
space now required for the assembler program.
Programming Systems
These programs are written in assembler language, and run under control of the IBM"
1130 Disk Monitor, Version 2.
Machine Configurations
These programs run on any 1130 disk configuration. However, 8K words of core (or
more) are a requirement for the macro features.
Reference Material: IBM 11.30 Disk Monitor System, Versiori2, Programming and
Operators Guide, C26-.3717 •
BaSic Program Material: (1130-CQ-009)
SR L Publication -- IBM System/.360 Operating System, Remote Job Entry,
C.30-2006.
Documentat'on -- Program Material List ••• Attachment to Users.
Machine Readable Material -- Available in card form.
1130 Distributed System Program (1l30-SV-002):
The 1130 Distributed
System Program <1130
DSP),l130,-SV-002,
a Type I ExtenSion, provides means for operating an 1130-System/7 multisystem
configuration as a Single system with distributed facilities. ,This program provides
the capabil ity to operate 1130-System/7 Multisystem Support programs in the foreground, concurrently with Disk Monitor batch programs in the background.
1130 DSP supports multisystem operation of the 1130 System coupled to the
System/7 via the 1130 Storage Access channel. The facilities provided by 1130
DSP are:
11.30 Macro Assembler and Macro Update Facility:
An Enhancement to the IBM
1130 Disk Monitor System,
"
VerSion ,2 -- Available only
under the IBM 11.30 Disk Monitor System, Version 2. It is a direct extension of
and a replacement to the existing DM2 assembler (ASM) and is entirely compatible in
syntax and language usage. It is avail abl e at no cllarge.
1. Support for the exchange of data, programs, and tasks between
Description
2. Enhancements to the 1130 Disk Monitor Programming System which
provide for background execution of batch programs concurrently with
sensor-based System/7-related application programs in the foreground (Foreground/Background Support).
Introduces high level language capability, specified by the customer.
Decreases customer programming effort through the development of his own
application or systems oriented macro libraries.
Provides full library facil ities for user macros.
Enables your customer to create a language suitable to his unique enVironment.
~s
Macro Definition
MAC - Start user macro
SMAC - Start system macro
MEND - Macro end
Conditional Assemblies
AIF, AGO - Provide for conditionally or unconditionally passing over and not
assembl ing blocks of code.
Symbol Redefinition
SET - Permits redefinition of a symbol Without a multiple definition error occurrir.c-,
Library Purging
PURG - Removes macro name from the users library.
systems (Muitisystem Support).
Multisystem support is provided to link the computers together so that each may communicate with arid draw upon the resources of the other. Each computer may be
assigned the tasks for which it is best suited, while providing the user with a convenient interface for application programming.
These faCilities parallel those of the IBM 1800 Distributed System Program which
supports the system comprising one or more System/7s coupled to an IBM 1800
Data Acquisition and Control System via a telecommunications link. Multisystem
application programs that are written using the facilities of 1130 DSP can be transferred to an IBM 1800 System operating with 1800 DSP with little or no modification.
The 1130 Foreground/Background Supjwt makes it possible to add sensorbased applications to an 1130 Computing System while maintaining the batch job
processing environment of the Disk Monitor System. The 1130 DSP Foreground/
Background Support permits the basic 1130-System/7 Multisystem support functions
to be co-reSident in the 1130 with Disk Monitor batch programs.
Under the Foreground/Background mode of operation, Multisystem Support functions
are processed in the 1130 on a priority baSiS, responding to the demands of the
System/7 program. The Foreground/Background Support will interrupt and restore
Disk Monitor batch jobs, as required by System/7, in a manner whit:h is transparent
to .the batch program. The user, writing batch programs for concurrent operation with
Multisystem Support, need only be concerned with the foreground operation insofar
as it affects the amount of 1130 core storage available for background programs. If
sufficient 1130 core storage is available, many existing user-Written batch programs
will run under 1130 DSP Foreground/Background Support if the programs are recompiled.
Not to be reproduced without written permission
I: :i',,~
Programming
P 1130.7
May 73
1130 Computing System
Highlights:
• Concurrent operation of 1130-System/7 Multisystem Support with
Disk Monitor batch jobs.
Minimal batch program modification required to run with Foreground/
Background Support.
Data Acquisition and Control application programs can u!'e the facilities
of both the 1130 and the System/7 •
• Multisystem support compatible with 1800 DSP.
System/7 application programs will be c:ompaUble with either 1I30 DSP or 1800 DSP
if communications to the hQst use only the DSP data, task, and program exchange
facilities. No direct use of the MSP/7 communication mac:ros is allowed If 1800 DSP
compatibility is to be maintained. Reassembly will be required however, when changing
from 1130 to 1800.
Minimum Mac:hlne Configuration:
1130 System
1131-28
All 1130 DSP user subroutines In the 1130 are FORTRAN callabie.
Central Processing Unit with 8,192 words core storage, single
internal disk storage drive, 1442 Model 6 or 7 Attachment ('4454),
Storage Ac:cess Channel (.7490 or '7492).
Special Sales Information: 1130 DSP Multisystem Support can be used In a wide
range of sensor-based applications Including Laboratory Automation, Process Control,
Manufacturing Testing, and Manufacturing Automation. Application programs written
for 1130 DSP run under 1800 DSP, allowing easy growth. 1130 OSP Foreground/ '
Background Support makes It possible to connec:t a System/7 to an Installed 1130
system and add sensor-based applications with minimal Impact on the 1130 Disk
Monitor batch processing environment.
This program will not operate on an 1130 System utilizing an 1131
Modell, 4 or 5.
Use: Data acquisition and control application programs written to use the 1130~
!ystem/7 multisystem c:onflguration will I.nclude calls to the 1130 DSP subroutines
In 1130 reSident programs and DSP Macros for System/7 reSident programs. 1130
Disk Monitor batc:h programs written for c:oricurrent operation with 1130 - System/7
Multisystem Support Clan use only the 1130 Clore storage available after providing
resldenc:e for the Foreground/Bac:kground Support.
The 1130 Distributed System Prog;am is a modular series of subroutines. This makes'
It possible for the user to incorporate into his system only those DSP functions required
for his application. The sel.ction of DSP modules Is accomplished by using the
*EQUAT feature of the 1130 Disk Monitor System, Version 2 to replace unneeded subroutines with a DSP provided dummy subroutine.
Customer Responsibilities: The c:ustomer must arrange for the Installation of the
devic:es listed under minimum machine c:onfiguration.
The c:ustomer must generate the 1130 DSP system (using 1130 Disk Monitor System
generation procedures), define disk-resident files used by the Submonitor, specify the
size of the Distributed System Partition CDSPAR)~ and assemble and bUild core loads
for this area. These core loads must include the DSP Submonitor and may include
user-written routines.
The code which is to be reSident in System/7 must be assembled using the 1130
Macro Assembler and storage load for the System/7 generated. The MSP/7 facilities
to be used in this storage load must be specified by using the MSP!7 configuration
macros.
The foreground/background support is specifically designed to provide System/7 users
with additional functional capabilities by relocating certain elements of 1130 DMS
Version 2. Most 1130 programs, not employing the use of absolute addreSSing, may
be re-compiled to operate in the background under 1130 DSP. AS,a result ofthis
relocation careful review is required of 1130 Type II, III and IV programs, and program prod~cts'planned for execution in the background; for example COBOL will not
execute without modification.
As with other systems, the customer is responsible for providing protection against
accidental loss or misuse of his data.
Programming Systems:
1130 Programs: The IBM 1130 Disk Monitor System, Version 2, with modifications
necessary to provide Foreground/Background Support, is distributed as a part of the
IBM 1130 Distributed System Program (1130 DSP). All ofthe standard programming
features of the IBM 1130 Disk Monitor System, Version 2, (1130-05-005) are
available under 1130 DSP (for background programs), except for the 1130/2250
Graphic Subroutine Package.
Careful review is required of all RPQ devices which may be attached to interrupt level
3. This level is used by the System/7 Storage Access Channel attachment which may
pre-empt other devices and their servicing 'routines.
Because the modified Disk Monitor is distributed as a part of the 1130 DSP, an
existing Disk Monitor System cannot be modified to include 1130 DSP facilities.
When Disk Monitor facilities are to be used with 1130 DSP, the 1130 DSP must
be ordered and installed.
All of the 1130 reSident subroutines of 1130 DSP are written in 1130 Assembler
Language. Some of the 1130 DSP Utility Programs are written in 1130 FORTRAN
Language.
System/7, Programs: The 1130 DSP System/7 routines use the macros provided by
Systemn Modular System Programs (MSP/7). The MSP/7 Macros and the DSP
Macros are written in System/7 Language which is assembled under the 1130 Macro
Assembler.
Compatibilit
compati i ity wit
following conventions:
1.
1130 resident application programs written in 1130/1800 Basic FORTRAN IV
Language must avoid the use of FORTRAN facilities which are peculiar to the
1130 operati,ng system. FORTRAN programs must use the *ONE WORD INTEGERS
control record.
1442-6
'Card Read Punch
This minimum configuration provides the necessary storage for many functional subsets of the full DSP system.
The major DSP functions not included In the minimum configuration are System/7 requests for executing programs in the 1130 at the foreground level, priority batch level,
and System/7 batch level.
The minimum configuration is utilized as follows:
~
Resident Monitor
(inc:luding DISKN and the Monitor Extension
required for DSP)
1280
User's Area
(Minimum size for operation of DUP, FORTRAN,
and Assembler)
3616
DSP Submonitor (maximum size)
~
8192
User-written programs operating in the User's Area must also include approximately
100 words for subroutine calls for 1130 initiated transactions and 200 words if
logging and checkpointing of 1130 transactions is also specified.
The Macro Assembler and the Macro Update program require a User Area of 6912
words for operation. These programs can be run in an off-line mode in the minimum
configuration or on-line ,in a larger configuration of 16,384 or 32,768 words.
Following are examples of storage assignments for two functional DSP subsets. These
DSP subsets will execute in the minimum configuration OSP submonitor (with LOCALs).
EXAMPLE 1
System/7 Satellite System - Data Spooling to 1130 Disk Files
DSP functions supported are:
1130 originated DGETD and DPUTP
System/7 originated DPUTD and DGETP
IPL of System!7 from 1130 disk file
Special data file, • COR in the System/7
Named 1130 disk files
LOCALing of some DSP subroutines is required to support these functions in the minimum system configuration. The submonitor for this subset consists of the following:
Words
DSPAR Fixed Area
DSPAR Communication Buffer
1130 DSP Subroutines including maintenance reserve
ILS Routine, Transfer Vector and Core Load Header
LOCAL Table, FLIPR, LOCAL Area
62
322
2146
134
632
".IT%""
Data is spooled to the 1130 disk from the System/7 at Intervals controlled by timer
interrupt, experiment parameters, :!tc. This data can later be reduced on-line as
additional spooling is proceeding. During the spooling operation, all of the normal
DUP, ASM, and FOR functions are available to run in the User's Area as well as user
programs that will execute in 3616 words of storage.
EXAMPLE II
System/7 Satellite System - 1130 Initiated Transactions
2.
Do not use subroutines which are unavailable in the 1800.
DSP functions supported are:
3.
Communications between systems must use only the data, task, and program
exchange facilities of DSP; e.g.: "user program call to the 1130 SAC I/O
Control Routine, is not allowed.
1130 Originated,DGETO, DPUTD, DPUTP, DXEQP
IPL of System/7 from 1130 disk file
Special data files .COR, .FOR, .COM
Named disk files
DSP COMMON in both the System/7 and 1130
Transaction Logging
Completion tasks in System/7
Not to be reproduced without written permi.'on
I : :;~~
P 1130.6
May 73
Programming
1130 Computing System
LOCALing of some DSP subroutines, is required to support these functions in the minimum system configuration. The Submonitor for this subset consists of the following:
Disk Storage Requirements:
Following are disk storage requirements .for the components of 1130 DSP:
Words
DSPAR Fixed Area
DSPAR Communication Buffer
DSP COMMON Cl 00 words)
1130 DSP Subroutines including maintenance reserve
ILS routine, Transfer Vector, and Core Lciad Header
LOCAL TABLE, FLlPR, LOCAL Area
62
322
102
2004
144
~
3296
For this confi~uration the 1130 makes all requests for data or task transfer. This
t~pe of operation can be used in the controlled eXPet:iment environment or any application where the 1130 controls the entire operation. During the Satellite operation,
all normal DUP, ASM, and FOR functions are available to run in tne User's Area.
The Macro Assembler and the Macro Update program require a User's Area of 6912
words for operation. These programs can be run in an off-line mode in the minimum
configuration or on-line in a larger configuration of 16,384 or 32,768 words.
A maximum DSP configuration which provides all of the DSP .facilities and which makes
no use of LOCAWng, thereby providing minimum response time, can only be configured
in a 16,384 word (or larger) 1130. The storage requirements for this DSP Submonitor are given below.
Words'
DSPAR Fixea Area
DSPAR Communication Buffer
DSPAR COMMON (100 words)
DSPAR Queues (10 entries each - three queues)
In-Core FLET Table (10 entries)
1130 DSP Subroutines resident in DSPAR (including
,
maintenance reserve)
ILS Routine, Transfer Vector, and Core Load Header
62
322
102*
96*
44*
5725
158
6509
*S lze may be user defined.
A DSP configuration which provides all of the DSP facilities but makes use of maxi-.
mum LOCALing of DSP s!tJroutines, can only be configured in a 16,384 word·Cor
larger) 1130. The storage requirements for this DSP Submonitor are given below.
Words
DSP Fixed Area
DSPAR Communication Buffer
DSPAR COMMON ClOO words)
DSPAR Queues ClO entries each - three queues)
In-Core FLET TabieClO entries)
1130 DSP Subroutines (including
maintenance reserve)
I LS Routine, Transfer Vector, and Core Load Header
LOCAL Table, FLlPR, LOCAL Area
62
322
102*
96*
44*
4210
160
650
5646
In the above two configurations, User's Areas of approximately 8600 and 9450 words
respectively are providt!o for operation of user prog'rams and 1130 Disk Monitor System programs in a 16,384 word 1130 System.
Any program which required all of an 8192 word 1130 under the 1130 Disk Monitor
System, Version 2, will require a 16,384 word 1130 when run with 1130 DSP.
System/7:
5026
5010
Enclosure, Model A02
Processor Module, Model B04 (with 4,096 words of storage, 11.30
attachment, and Operator Station Adapter)
5028
Operator Station
One I/O Module (such as 5014 or 5012)
Following are the System/7 storage requirements for code generated b.y DSP and the
prerequisite MSP /7 Macros for the minirnu~ configuration.
Sectors
Modified 1130 Disk Monitor System
1130 DSP Subroutines and Utilities
1130 DSP Save Areas, System/7 Storage Dump
Area, and Transaction Log Area
Sample Problem
DSP Macro Library
MSP /7 Macro Library, Output Handler and
Required Subroutines'
.
128*
89**
40
406
*The size of these areas, except the transaction log area, can be set by the user for
his configuration. The default-sizes received with the system are as follows: Cl)
The transaction log is one sector, (2) The save areas are 32 sectors each and are
designed to save an 8K or smaller User's Area, and (3) The System/7 dump area is
52 sectors, large enough for a 16K System/7 storage dump. These areas are configured in a 16 cylinder,Fixed Area <128 sectors).
**The sample problem can be deleted making this area available after the .problem is run
The total disk recluirements for the modified Disk Monitor System, DSP subroutines
and uti lities, save, dump, and log areas, DSP macro library, and MSP /7 macro
library and output handler are 1387 sectors ofthe 1600 sectors available.
With this configuration, 213 sectors are initially available for working storage (if the
sample problem has been removed). As user programs are stored to the disk, the size
of working storage decreases. If the working storage required to assemble System/7
storage loads exceeds that available on the disk, a two drive system may be required;
If the MSP /7 macro library is to be kept on a separateMSP /7 cartridge along with the
DSP macro library, the disk storage requirements for the DSP cartridge are 941 sectors, and the requirements for the MSP /7 cartridge are increased by 40 sectors for
the DSP macro library.
Users will not be able to interchange disk cartridges (in order to execute programs that
are resident on another disk) while the system is- on line because the User's Area.may
have been saved on the disk and must be available to be restored. Users with limited
space for storage of programs, will require two disk drives to allow access to all programs at anyone time.
Programming Service Classification: A
Basic Material:
Documentation: Program Directory ..• One copy each of IBM 1130 Distributed
System Program, Program Reference ManuaICGH20-1144) and IBM 1130
Distributed System Program Operations Guide CGH20-1145).
Machine Readable Material: Object decks and sample program are available on
two 2315 Disk Cartridges, or on 80-column cards.
Optional Program Material:
Machine ,Readab Ie Material: 'Source assembler language coding for the DSP system
programs, subroutines, and macros.
Ordering Information: Program Number 1130SV002 (use form Z120-1957).
Program No.
Extension
Distribution Medium
Type
Code
User Volume
Requirement
BaSic t
None
None
2315 Disk
Cards
58
15
2 - 2315 Disks
None
Optional
None
MT 9/800
MT 9/1600
28
29
1 - 2400' reel
1 - 2400' reel
Additional Program Material: IBM Distributed System Program General Information
Manual (GH20';'0080-3).
May be ordered on cards only if 1130 system configuration does not include a 2310
Disk Driye, or the Single Disk Drive in the 1131 CP U,
Words
DSP Macros
MSP/7 Macros (including Interrupt Handling Queueing,
Program Interrupt, and Operator Sta.tion I/O.ControJ)
708
105
600
1200
1800
This allows approximately 2300 words for the user's application program in the minimum System/7 configuration of 4096 words.
Not 10 b. reproduced Without written permilalon
IBM
Progranwning
ORDERING INFORMATION
113005006
Basic
Optional
OPTIONAL PROGRAM PACKAGE
P rogram Number
Extension
Distribution Medium
Type
Code
User Volume
Requirement
none
PT
05
none
51111e as 11300S005
1130LM008
Basic
Optional
Ca'ds
MT 9/800
DTR 9/1600
none
none
1130LMOll,1130CQOOQMdl130C0012
BasiC
none
Cards
Optional
none
DTR 9/800
DTR 9/1600
1130FOOOI
Basic
Optional
none
113OLMOOI
Basic
Optional
none
15
28
29
none
01
none
15
28
29
none
none
none
15
none
15
none
See 1130UT002
See 1130UT002
1130RG007
Basic
Optional
P 1130.9
Mar 73
1130 Computing System
Documentation - Program material list, Operating Instructions, and attachment.
Machine Readable - Source modules are available on the programs listed below:
1130 Disk Monitor Version 2 Card
Paper Tape
Satellite Graphic Job Processor
1130-CQ-012
1130/2250 Graphic Subroutine Package
1130-LM-008
FORTRAN IV Subroutines for Data Transmission between S/360 and 1130
1130-LM-Oll
1130 Remote Job Entry Work Station
1130-CQ-009
FORTRAN Compiler (Card)
FORTRAN Compiler CPaper Tape)
Subroutine Library (Card)·
Subroutine Library (Paper Tape)
Card System Error-Detectlon Aids
Assembler Program
Utility Routines (Card)
Utility Routines'CPllper Tape)
1I30-FO-00l
1130-F0-002
1130-LM-00I
1130-LM-002
1130-SP-00I
1I30-SP-002
1130-UT -001
1130-UT -002
1130 RPG Computer
1130-RG-007
1130 Distributed System Program (1130 DSP) 1130-SV-002
Cards
MT 9/800
MT 9/1600
none
none
15
28
29
none
01
01
15
none
11305POOI
Basic
Optional
none
1130SP002
Basic
Optional
none
See 1130UT002
PT
05
none
1130UTOOI
Basic
Optional
none
See 1130UT002
Cards
15
none
1130UT002
Basic
none
PT
05
none
1130 SV002
Basic
Optional
none
none
2315
MT 91800
MT 9/1600
58
02
02
01
See 1130UT002
ADDITIONAL PROGRAM MATERIAL
Program Lo9ic Manuals
28
29
1130 Disk Monitor Programming System
GY26-3714
1130/1800 Programming Systems, Card/Paper Tape GY26-3620
1130/2250 Graphic Subroutine Packaye
GY27-7174
1130 Remote Job Entry Work Station
GY30-1001
1130 RPG
GY21-0010
1130 DSP
GY30-0786
Pr0feam Listings: Listings are available on microfiche from -- IBM Distribution
ten er, pUblication Order Department, Mechanicsburg, Pa. Specify order supply
number.
Order supply number
GJDl-3000 for 1130 Card/paper Tape System
GJDl-3040 for 1130 Disk Monitor System, Version 2
GJDl-3050 for 1130/2250 Graphic Subroutine
Package
GJDl-3060 for 1130 Remote Job Entry Work
Station
GYBO-0791 for DSP
Optional Machine Readable Material - Source Code for the following 1130 programs
Is available on one functional vollllle:
FORTRAN Compiler CPaper Tape)
Subroutine Library (Card)
Subroutine Library CPaper Tape)
Cn System Error-Detection Aids
Assembler Program
Utility Routines (Card)
Utility Routines (Paper Tape)
Ordering Infonnatlon
= System
1130-FO-002
1130-LM-00I
1130-LM-002
1130-SP-00I
1130-SP-002
1130-UT -001
1130-UT -002
NlIIIber 1130
Note: The Optional Machine Readable Material for the above 1130 programs is
o;ae;ed by speCifying a "System Line" (columns 1-7, 15-24) and "Component
Lines" (columns 8-12) of the program order form. Enter a separate component line
for each component desired. Also, specify program number extension "OPTl".
Optional
1130-05-005
1130-0S-006
Program Number
Extension
Distribution Med illlll
Type
Code
OPTl
MT
MT
91800 28
9/1600 29
(Reverse side is blank)
User Volume
Requirement
01
01
Not to be reproduced without written permission
I.
P 1800.1
Programming
N.,72
IBM 1800 Data Acquisition and Control System
1800 Assembler Language:
The IBM 1800 Assembler Language provides the progrllllmer a flexible and meaningful symbolic language
that Is easier to code than a binary machine language.
Source programs are assembled by the processor In two passes. The Assembler automatically assigns and keeps a record of storage locations and checks for coding errors.
By relieving the programmer of these burdensome tasks, the Assembler significantly reduces the amount of programming time and effort required to prepare a program.
A Compressor Program Is provided with the Assembler to compress symbolically assembled output Into a fonn suitable for execution.
The Assembler and Its compressor always use all of core storage available on an assembly machine. The programs determine memory size automatically at assembly time
and adjust table parameters accordingly.
The Assembler provides for assembly of both absolute and relocatable mainline programs,
and for assembly of relocatable subroutines. ~y means of ENT and CALL statements,
provision Is made for automatic symbolic cross-teferenclng between programs at load
time. The Assembler may be used to generate subroutines and subprograms for FORTRAN main programs. Similarly, Assembler main programs may call FORTRAN subroutines or subprograms, as well as Subroutine Library and Utility Routines.
A Core Image Converter Is provided which will convert the relocatable binary object
decks of a mainline and all called subroutines Into a single core Image bln.y deck.
This deck may then be loaded with a Core hmige Loader which has no relocating or
cross-teferenclng abilities.
Minimum system ~irements: For program generation and execution: A 4096 word
1801 or 1802'Processor-Controller ••• 1442 Card Read Punch mdls 6 or 7 or
1054 Paper Tipe.Reader and 1055 Paper Tape Punch.
Processor-Controller supported: an 1801 or 1802 with 4, 8, 16 or 32K words of
core storage (Note: 24K is not supported).
Basic Program Material:
SRL Publication -- 1800 Card/paper Tape Programming System, Operatorls GUide,
C26-3751.
Documentation -- Program Material List.
Machine Readable 1800-AS-005 (Card)
Deck No. 1
As¥mbler
2
Compressor
3
Sample Program
1800-AS-006 (Paper Tape)
Tape No. 1
Assembler (unedited)
2
Compressor (unedited)
3
Assembler Sample Program
1800'FORTRAN Language:
The IBM 1800 FORTRAN Language is a coding system with a language that· closely resembles the language
of mathematics. It Is a system designed primarily for
scientific and engineering computations. Since this system Is essentially problemoriented rather than machlne-orlented, It provides scientists and engineers with a method of communication that Is more familiar, easier to learn, and easier to use than actual machine language.
The FORTRAN processor accepts source program statements as Input from cards or
paper tape and produces, as output, a machine language program. At object time, the
sxstem utilizes advanced techniqUes, such as relocatable subroutines, highly compressed fonnats, and flexible Input and output command structures which facilitate data
conversion operations. The FORTRAN Language optimizes redundant subscript calcu~
lations to produce an efficient object program. The FORTRAN Language provides a
high level of language power and flexibility with minimal machine requirements. The
machine features supported at execution time are the 1442 Card Read Punch mell 6 or
7, 1816 Prlnter-Keyboard, 1053 Printer, 1443 Printer mel I 1 or 2, 1054 Paper
Tape Reader and 1055 Paper Tape Punch, 2401/2402 Magnetic.:rape Units mdl1,
2, or 3, Analog Output, Analog Input, Contact Sense, and Contact Operate. The
maximum number of words available on",e computer can be utilized at both compile and
execute time.
A source program written in the 1800 FORTRAN Language Is processed by the FORTRAN Complier to produce an 1800 System machine language program. The 1800
System Loader, Input/Output· Routines for I/O function, and the System Subprograms
will be loaded with the compiled program prior to execution.
The 1800 FORTRAN language encompasses American Standard Basic FORTRAN,
X31-1966, with extension beyond this standard. These extenSions are shown in
C26-3715, IBM l130/1800 Basic FORTRAN IV Language.
Minimum s~tem requirements: For compilation: A 4096 word 1800 System Processor-Controller ..• 1816 Printer-Keyboard or 1053 Printer or 1443 Printer ••• 1442
Card Read Punch mell 6 or 7 or 1054 Paper Tape Reader and ... 1055 Paper Tape
Punch.
Processor-Controller supported: an 1801 or 1802 with 4,8, 16 or 32K words of
core storage (Note: 24K is not supported).
BaSic Program Material:
SRL Publlcation.-- 1800 Card/Paper Tape Programming System, Operator's Guide,
C26-3751.
Documentation -- Pmgram Materl.1 List.
Machine Readable 1800-FO-007 (Card)
Deck No.1
Compller,(unedlted>
2
FORTRAN Compiler Editor
3
FORTRAN Sample Program
1800-F0-008 (Paper Tape)
Tape No.1
2
3
4
5
6
FORTRAN Input Phase for 1816/1053 (unedited)
FORTRAN Input Phase for 1443 (u1lflCl1ted>
Part 2 of FORTRAN Complier for 1816/1053
Part 2 of FORTRAN Complier for 1443
FORTRAN Compiler Editor
FORTRAN Sample Program
1800 Subroutine Libra,:
The 1800 Subroutine Llb.-ary Provides arithmetic, functional, code conversion, 1,10 control and selective dump
subroutines for use by object fl")9rams generated by the
1800 Assembler of the 1800 FORTRAN Language.
The floating-poInt subroutines In the 1800 Subroutine Libiwy offer two ruges of preciSion: Standard Range and Extended Range. The Standard range provides 23 bits of
precision; the Extended range provides up to 31 bits of precision.
The subroutines provided Include Floating-Point Fixed Point, Special Function, Code
Conversion, I/O Control, and Selective Dl!ftIp.
The subroutines are used by FORTRAN Language or Assembler object programs to perfonn floating-poInt, fixed'1JOint arithmetic, and functional operations; the conversion
of data from one I/O code to another; the control of I/O activity on the devices attached
to the ~ystem; and the selective dumping of memory areas for debugging purposes.
Minimum system requirements: An 1800 System with an 1801 or 1802 ProcessorController with 4096 words of core storage and applicable 1,10 equipment Is required
for execution of the subroutines.
Machine features and units supported: An 1801 or 1802 Processor-Controller with
4,8, 16, or 32K wards of core storage (Note: 24K Is not supported) ... 1442 Cn
Reid Punch mells 6 and 7 ••• 1054/1055 Paper Tape Attachment ••• 1816 PrlnterKeybon ••• 1053 Printer •• ~1810 Disk Storage DrlvemdlsAl, A2, Al, B1, 82,
and f33 ••• 1443 Printer mells 1 and 2 ... 1627 Plotter mells 1 and 2 ••• 2401/2402
Magnetic Tape Units mells 1, 2, and 3 ... Analog Input Basic for 1800 with all
features ••• Digital/Analog Output Feature ••• Digital Input FeatLwe.
Basic Program Material:
SRl Publication -- 1800 Card/paper Tape Programming System Operatorls GUide,
C26-3751.
Documentation -- Program Material List.
Machine Readable 1800-LM- 003 (Card)
Deck No. lA Standard Precision .
Basic Program Material:
SRl Publications --1800 Card/Paper Tape Programming System Operator's GUide,
C26-3751.
Documentation -- Program Material list
Machine Readable 1800-UT-001 (Card Uti lity)
Deck No.1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Relocating Loader
Core I mage Loader
Core Image Converter/1443
CQre Image Converter/1816
I/O Utility - phase 1
I/O Uti lity - Phase 2
Users Exit Special User EOD Cards
Users Exit Overlay Cards
Dump Between Limits - Cards
Dump Between Limits - Console Printer
Dump Between limits - Magnetic Tape
Core Dump - 1443
Relocatable Core Dump
One Card Dump on Console Printer
Keyboard to Paper Tape
Keyboard to Cards
Card Reproducing Routine
I/O Utility Edit Cards
DPIR
1800-UT -002 (Paper Tape)
Tape No.1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
P 1800.2
Nov 72
IBM 1800 Data Acquisition and Control System
Progranming
Relocating Loader
Core Image Loader
Core Image Converter with 1443 Map
Core Image Converter with 1816/1053 Map
I/O Utility - Phase 1
I/O Util ity - Phase 2
Users Exit Special User EOD Record
Users Exit Overlay Record
Dump Between Limits -1816/1053
Dump Between Limits - Magnetic Tape
Core Dump - 1443 Printer
Relocatable Core Dump -1443
Core Dump -1816/1053
Keyboard to Paper Tape
I/O Utility Edit Record
OPIR
Construct
Paper Tape Reproducer
Nonprocess Supervisor
The Nonprocess Supe;yisor recognizes certain system control cards and transfers
control to the system program specified. It also initiali.zes the nonprocess system
when a job control card is recogniz~d.
Subroutine librarY
A set of reentrant arithmetic, functional, and conversion subroutines are
supplied with the l80C TSX. A set of non-reentrant s.ubroutlnes for use
with TSX can be ordered separately 11800-lM-0091 •
The non-reenttant arithmetic, functional and conversion subroutines are
the same in number and function as those reentrant subroutines provided
by the 1800 TSX. These routines offer those users of the 1800 TSX
system who do not need reentrant coded subroutines faster execution of
their prograns.
Simulator Program
The Simulator execu~s a program in a controlled environment for the purpose of debugging.
Process Supervisor
The Process Supervisor controls execution of process programs. It consists of the
Skeleton Executive, error deciSion programs, arid certain other on-line special pur';'
pose start-up and analysis routines. The Skeleton Executive is built up from routines the user has assembled or compiled. Many different options may be specified
using equivalence statements when these routines are assembled. The user may include frequently called subroutines and high priority interrupt routines in the Skeleton. The control tlf timers and the scheduling of core loads and. interrupt routines
are handled by routines suppl ied by IBM and that the user assembles.
Efficiency
The efficiencies listed in the following sections vary depending on the machine configuration, disk and core layout, and the user program size and type. Execution times
are based on large programs.
Approximate core storage and execution times:
Assembler
Core Storage
Minimum 3692 at the high end of core
Disk Storage
48 Sectors
Speed
With 1442 Model 7 - No listing
- 1443 (Mod 1> listing
(52 char. set)
- 1443 (Mod 2) listing
(52 char. set>
- 1053
With 1442 Model 6 - No listing
- 144.3 (Mod 1) listing
(52 char. set>
- 1443 (Mod 2) listing
(52 char. set)
- 105.3
FORTRAN Compiler
95 cds/min
125 cds/min
16 cds/miIJ
Minimum 3692 at the high end of core
103 Sectors
Speed
Assuming a 150 statement program:
Without punching
With punching (assume 50 cds pch)
47 Statements/min
38 Statements/min
Disk Utility Program
Core Storage
Disk Storage
The IBM 1800 TS>< is a real-time programming system that affords the user a
convenient means of generating and USing
a complete process control or data acquisition system. The system programs provided
are:
Disk Utility Program COUP)
The 1800 DUP is a group of generalized utility and maintenance routines that are
necessary in the day to day operation of the TS><. These routines store user Pr0grams on disk, delete programs from disk, dump programs from disk and perform numerous other functions of a utility nature. .
,
250 cds/min
Disk Storage
1800 Time-Sharing Executive System:
FOR TRAN Compiler Program
Accepts 1800 FORTRAN language input in card fann and produces object programs
that can be used with the 1800 TSX. Both the FORTRAN written and Assembler
written programs call on subroutines to perform various arithmetic and input-output
functions.
140 cds/min
17 cds/min
Core Storage
Speed
Assembler Program
A one-for one symbolic assembly program that produces object programs that can be
used with the 1800 TS>< from symbolic card input.
.320 cds/min
103 cds/min
3692 at the high end of core
68 Sectors
The STORE operation varies in speed depending on the size of the
program and the number and distance of the disk arm movements
needed. This can vary from about 15 seconds to read in and execute the STORE routine for a short program to many hundreds of
seconds to store the program under worst case conditions. Nannally
an assembled program will be stored in 15 or 20 seconds after the
STORE control card is read by DUP.
Other DUP operations will not be performed often in most "1800 installations, so the time they require is not significant to the total
use of the 1800.
Nonprocess Supervisor (with Core Load Builder)
Core Storage
Disk Storage
Speed
3692 at the hioh "l1d of core
21 S~tors
The control card analyzer operates at card read speed for most control cards. The Core Load Builder requires from several seconds
to about thirty seconds under the worst conditions. The normal'
time for an 8K core load is 7 or 8 seconds.
Simulator
Core Storage
3.692 at the high end of core
Not to be reproduced without written permission
IBI4
Programming
Disk Storage
IBM 1800 Data Acquisition and Control System
high-priority interrupt subroutines in real-time, may reside in these partitions.
95 Sectors
Speed
150 to 1, ratio of Sim. speed to Exe. speed
Process Supervisor
Core Storage
Minimum system (8K) must proVide 4500 words for the Incore Skeleton if that' Skeleton is to be used off-line with the
Nonprocess Monitor. (This means that 3692 words will be
available above the Skeleton for the Nonprocess Monitor.)
•
If a separate Skeleton Is used for off-line work, the on-line
Skeleton may be 6392 words. (This leaves 1800 words
for error deCision programs at the high end of core storage.)
The maxinl.lm size of the Skeleton is always detennined by
the balance of core storage above the Skeleton -- 3692
minimum for Nonprocess Monitor use or 1800 minimum for
error decision program use.
Disk Storage
46 to 131 Sectors
Speed
The speed of the execution of process core loads Is dependent on what they have been programmed to do. The reading of
core loads by the SuperviSor is done with disk addresses
that are in core when the new core load is called, for mininI.Im delay. All process core loads are In" core Image and are
obtained at disk read speed. .
Interrupts may be permanently In the Skeleton In core, on
disk as Intemlpt core loads, or with mainline core loads.
The In-core routines are entered most quickly, the routines
with the mainline equally quickly If the mainline contal"lng
the Interrupt routine is in core when the interrupt occurs, and
the Interrupt core loads least quickly since they must be read
into core after saving the current contents on disk.
Error deciSion programs are read Into core after saving the
1800 words that they ,must occupy. If a dump to disk Is
Included as an error decision option, the dump will write all
of core to disk. These operations proceed at disk read-write
speed.
Minimum System Conflpuratlon: The system requires an 1801 or 1802 Processor
Controller with 8K of core storage ••• a 1810 Disk Storage Drive model Al or model
B 1 ••• a 1053 Printer or 1443 Printer or 1816 Prlnter-Keyboard ••• and a 1442
Card Read Punch.
Additional Hardware Supported
Process Controller with 16, 24, or 32K words of core storage ••• Up to eight
.1053 Printers ••• 1810 Disk Storage Drives models A2, A3, B2, or B3 •••
1442 Cant RelKl Punch ••• 1443 Printer.
The following are supported for the user but not for system generation
2401/2402 MagnetiC Tape Unit ••• 1627 Plotter ••• 1054 Paper Tape Reader
••• 1055 Paper Tape Punch ••• Analog Input ••• Digital Input ••• Analog/Digital
Output.
Reference Material: Microfiche Listings GJDl-3030 1800 Reference Sunmary Sys7
tem, Reference Data, GX26-5624j 1800 TSX System Program logic Manual GY263702j 1800 Data Acquisition and Control System Functional Characteristics
~
GA26-5918j 1130/1800 Plotter Subroutines GC26-3755. 1800 Time-Sharing
Executive Concepts and Techniques GC26-3703j 1130/1800 BaSic FORTRAN IV
Language GC26-3715j 1800 Time-Sharing Executive System Subroutine Library
GC26-3723j 1800 Assembler language GC26-5882.
BaSic Program Material:
P 1800.3
Nov 72
1800-0S-001
SRl Publications -- 1800 Time-Sharing Executive System Operating Procedurl:",
GC26-3754.
Documentation -- Program Material List.
Machine Readable -- Twenty-eight object decks and three source decks (one of which
is a sample problem deck), available in card form.
Multiprogramming Executive System (MPX):
The IBM 1800 Multiprogramming
Executive Operating System is a
partitioned, FORTRAN-oriented,
disk-based operating system intended for process control and data acquisition applica"
tions which have high system usage requirements.
Multiprogramming is regulated on the basis of I/O operation. When an I/O operation is ,
initiated in one core storage partition, that partition can be placed in a suspended state
until the I/O function is completed. Concurrently with thiS, a program loaded into a
lower priority partition can also be executed. A programmed interrupt technique is used
by the system to direct the levels of operation, thereby controlling the execution of any
one of the areas at any moment in time.
The MPX system also provides for queueing of I/O operations as well as the ability to
achieve overlap of I/O and computiilg. In addition,interrupt programs may be queued
and executed on interrupt levels within a hierarchy of priority levels chosen by the user.
Queueing and I/O overlap as used in the MPX system are designed to take advantage of
the 15 cycle-stealing data channels and 24 interrupt levels.
In MPX main storage is allocated as follows:
The System Executive, which is always core resident.
Up to 23 partitions. Programs executed in these partitions are executed on an
interrupt level. Special
- 1053
250 cds/min
140 cds~in
125 cds/min
16 cds/min
1000 cds/min
285 cds/min
1050 cds/min
900 cds/min
Disk Management Program
5140 words at the high end of core
166 sectors
The STORE operation varies in speed depending on
the sile of the program and the number and distance of
the disk arm movements needed. This can vary from
about 15 seconds to one minute to execute the STORE
program tor a short program under worst case conditions.
Normally an assembled program will be stored in 35
or 40 seconds after the STORE control record is read
by DMP.
However, depending on whether the assembled subroutine is reentrant makes a considerable difference in
time to complete the STORE function. A reentrant
subroutine causes the moving of all the non-reentrant
subroutines in compliance with the system design of
having all reentrant subroutines in OQe area and all
non-reentrant subroutines in a separate area.
Since other DMP operations will not be performed as
often in most 1800 installations, the time they require
is not significant to the total use of the 1800.
Batch Processing Supervisor (with Builder)
5140 words at the high end of core
44 Sectors
'
The control card analyzer operates at card read speed
for most control cards. The Builder requires from
several seconds to about two minutes to build a
coreload under the worst conditions. The normal
time for an 8K core load is 30 to 40 seconds.
System Executive
Following
are
3. A system that provides multiprogranming only.
System Executive size, approximately 7520
words; Partition 1 size, minimum 320 words;
Partition 2 size, minimum 320 words; The
remainder of core storage could be allocated to
any of the above partitions or to the System
Executive. This system supports all of the
features mentioned in example 2 except for
batch processing.
95 cds/min
Core Storage
Minimum 5140 at the high end ~f core
Disk Storage
97 sectors
Speed
Assuming a 150 statement program:
With punching
47 statements/min
With punching (assume 50 eols/cd)
38 statements/min
Core Storage
Partition 1 may be used for SPAR coreloads.
If there are no other SPAR coreloads, the
size of the System Executive can be reduCed
by exercising a system generation option that
deletes the unneeded code.
103 cds/min
FORTRAN Compiler
Core Storage
Disk Storage
Speed
2. Two partitions, one of which is VCORE
3. Interrupt level queueing
Minimum 5140 words at the high end of core
56 sectors
Speed, Disk Input
With 1810-A2
Source file not on Drive 0, no listing
Source file on Drive 0, no listing
With 1810-B2
So Source file not on Drive 0, no listing
Source file on Drive 0, no listing
Core Storage
Disk Storage
Speed
Nov 72
Output ••• Four interrupt levels ••• Nine
ILSW bits ... Sixteen PISW bits ... First-infirst'!'Out queueing ••• Batch proceSSing
BOM (Basic Operating Monitor) - controls the systehl generation process, provides
for the definition of the system to the system generation process, and controls the
batch process ing operations.
'Core Storage
Disk Storage
Speed, Card Input
With 1442 Model 7
P 1800.4
IBM 1800 Data ACquisition and Control System
examples of minimum System Executives:
1. A single partition system.
System Executive size, apprOXimately 6550 words.
Variable Core (VCORE) size, minimum 5140 words.
The remainder of core storage can be added to
VCORE or the System Executive.
This system supports:
One 1810 Disk Storage Unit Model Al or Bl ...
One 1442 Card Read Punch ••• One 10S3
Printer ••• Analog Input ••• Digital/Analog
Disk Storage
Speed
24 to 87 sectors
The speed of the execution of process coreloads Is
dependent on what they have been programmed to
do. For minimum delay the fetching of coreloads
by the System Executive is done with disk addresses
that are in core when the new coreload Is called.
All process coreloads are in core image format and
are obtained at disk read speed.
Interrupt servicing subroutines may be part of the
System Executive on disk as interrupt coreloads, or
in SPAR coreloads. Interrupts may also be serviced
-by programs queued to partitions. The subroutines
in the System Executive are entered most quickly,
those in the current SPAR coreload almost as quickly,
those interrupts serviced by queued programs IIlIch
more slowly since they must be read into core from
disk, and the interrupt core loads least quickly since
they must be read into core after saving the current
contents on disk.
Approximate time to service various interrupts, assuming
the interru~ is not masked and no cycle steal ing is
occurring are:
1. Time to execute first user instructions for an incore system executive ISS Subroutine is 115
usec.
2. Time to execute first user instruction in a process
interrupt subroutine that is in the System Executive is 343 usec.
3. Time to execute first user instruction of a process
interrupt subroutine that is in a SPAR coreload
core-resident is 343 usec.
Minimum S~stem Requirements (without 2790): The IBM 1800 Multiprogramming
Executlveystem requires at least: one 1801/1802 Processor-Controller with a
minimum of 16,384 words of core storage ••• one 1053 Printer or one 1816
Printer-Keyboard or one 1443 Printer ••• one 1442 Card Read Punch ••• one 1810
Disk Storage Unit, Model Al or Bl, or one 2311 Disk Storage Unit (attached via
2841 Storage Control Unit>.
Minimum System Reauirements (with 2790): One 1801/1802 Processor-Controller
with a minimum of 2 ,576 words of core storage ••• one 1053 Printer or one 1816
Printer-Keyboard or one 1443 Printer ••• One 1442 Card Read Punch • ~. one 1810
Disk Storage Unit, Model A2 or B2, or one 2311 Disk Storage Unit (attached via
2841 Storage Control Unit) ... one 2790 Adapter ... one 2791 or one 2793 Area
Station.
Machine Features SUptrted: In addition to the above, the optional machine units and
features supported by t MPX system are: Process-Controller with up to 65,538
words of core storage ••• up to eight 1053 Printers ••• up to two 2401 Magnetic
Not to be reproduced without written permission
1BJ4
Prowanwning
IBM 1800 Data Acquisition arid Control System
P 1800.5
Nov 72
-ape Units ••• 1627 PI~ter ••• 1054 Paper Tape Reader.,. 1055 Paper Tape
unch ••• Analog Input ••• Digital Input ••• Analog/Digltal Output ••• a second
.1442 Card Read Punch ••• all models of the 1810 Disk Storage-Unit ... up to
eight 2311 Disk Storage Units (attached to a 2841 Storage Control Unit) ••• up to
fOW' Communications Ad~rs,.each with OM or two lines ••• up to two 1800/2790
Adapters ••• for each 1800/2790 Adapter~ Lip to 100,2791/2793 .Area Stations,
1024 2795/2796 Data Entry Units, 100 1053 Printers, and 300 1035 ~dge
Readers, and up to 1024 pulse counters.
'
MPX Spooling (1800-SV-002) augments
MPX. It provides additional functions which
facilitate the application of the IBM 1800 to
those environments in which multiple, isolated, asynchronous lJ$ers require concurrent service. The functions implemented under MPX SPOO LING are:
1. Dynamic File Allocation: Files are aSSigned on as-needed basis by the user at
execution time. This allows disk storage to be minimized in a non-static environment.
Reference Material: Microfiche listings, GJDl-3070 • e' MPX System Introduction,
GC26-3718 ••• 1800 Reference Summary System Reference Data, GX26-5624 ... ,
1800 Reference Sunwnary, MPX Control Statements, GX26-1594 ••• 1130/1800
Assembler Language Statements Summary, GX26-3780 ••• 1800 MPX System Program'Loglc Manual, GY26-3726 • e. 1800 Data AcquiSition and Control System
Functional Chara~lstlcs, GA26.-5918
1130/1800 Plotter Subroutine, GC263755 ••• 1800 Multiprogramming 'Operating System, Subroutine Library. GC263724 ... 1130/1800 Assembler Language, GC26-3778 ••• 1130/1800 Basic
FORTRAN IV Language, GC26-371S ••• 1800 Multiprogramming Operatlng'System
Communications Adapter Programming, GC26-3757 ••• 1800/2790 Multiprogrammng Executive Operating System, Data Communications System Programming, GC263732.
BasiC Program Material:
SRL Publlcations* --1800 Multiprogramming Executive Operating System, Programmer's Guide, GC26-3720-4; 1800 Multiprogramming Executive Operating
System, Operating Procedures, GC26-3725-2i 1800 Multiprogramming Executive
O1Ierating System, Error Messages and Recovery Procedures, GC26-3727-2.
Documentation --Program Material list ... Attachment to Users.
Machine Readable -- MPX Is available on either one 1316 Disk Pack (2311 users),
two or three 2315 Disk Cartridges <1810 users), or one 2400 foot reel of magnetic
tape which can be restored to a 1316 Disk Pack. Both 2311 and 1810 users will
also receive a small deck of cards to assist cold start In addition to the disk distribution. The Communications Adapter and 2790 Adapter Support for 1810 users are
contained on the third 2315.
The program number extension OPTl is for the 23i1 user. The complete MPX system Is available on one 1316 Disk Pack.
The program number extenSion OPT21s for the 1810 user. The MPX system, except
for the Communications Adapter and 2790 Adapter Support, is available on two 2315
Disk Cartridges.
The program number extension OPT3 is for the 1810 user requiring the Communications
Adapter and 2790 Adapter Support. This package Is available on 0", separate 2315
Disk Cartridge.
1810 users requiring the entire MPX system, including the Communications Adapter
and 2790 Adapter Suppoot, must order both the OPT2 and the OPT3 packages.
2. Buffering of 1443 Printer Output on disk: Significant increases in throughput
are possible in installations with heavy assembly or compilation listings or computationprlnting burdens. The 1443 can be used by both process mainline and
non-process programs executed in variable core.
3. Buffering of 1627 Plotter output to disk for users requiring large amounts of
plotter output. Again both proeess mainline and non-process programs executed
in variable core may make use of the plotter independently of each other.
The above features are completely Independent. A.log data logging requires the
dynamic file allocation feature. A user whose needs are answered by any of the
above facilities may readily implement only the function desired.
4. Logging of analog data to di Sk at equal time increments. Time increment for
various devices which may operate concurrently need not be equal. Users
acquiring'analog data from multiple devices would find this feature very helpful.
The program is specifically suited to dynamic. installations in which an efficient
utilization of disk, analog features and printer and/or plotter resources will greatly
increase system throughput and avaUability of variable core for computational
purposes.
Description: The IBM 1800 Data Acquisition and Control System provides a large
number of Features, e.g., data channels and priority interrupt structure, which allow
the computer to execute multiple tasks concurrently. For example, several peripheral
deVices can run Simultaneously while the central processing unit is dOing a calculation
completely unrelated to the I/O operations.
MPX SPOOLING utilizes this capability for the line printer. the plotter and the
analog-to-digital converter in a manner which allows them to be easily shared by
multiple., isolated programs.
Open~ended file routines are provided to allow a user to process variable length, discretely addressable disk data files. Data may be formatted on the disk in one word
integer, single precision or extended precision format. The user must specify the name,
size (maximum of 32,767 words) and drive when it is necessary to create a file.
Flies may be deleted or modified as required. Files are automatically expanded if
the file size Is exceeded when attempting to write to the file. The user determines
what size file "pool" he wants On each drlv~ and files are then created, modltied and
deleted dynamically. Reference may be made to other "permanent" f·iles by referring
to the file name and thereafter usi!'!g the same file read and write subroutines.
Printer and plotter routines allow the user to concentrate on using variable core for
extensive data analysis calculation rather than tying up the machine with large amounts
of line printer/plotter output. Printer and plotter output is spooled directly to disk'and
then printed/plotted using a separate coreload area avoiding "bottlenecks". Printer
and plotter spooling are restricted to variable core Basic Level program use.
Analog data logging routines are provided to allow the user to collect data at a desired
rate (up to a maximum of 60 points/sec.) with a minimum of programming effort.
The customer interfaces his instrument to the Analog Input Features via Multiplexer/S
(solid state switched input) or Multiplexer/R (mercury wetted contact switched input)
after suitable filtering and Signal conditioning. Readings are initiated by a timer.
Multiple instrument readings are obtained by linking analog input sequential tables.
A baSic requirement of the system is thus Analog Input Data Channel Adapter 1 (fIl233)
and Data Channel (standard or 13222) .
.Three methods of acquiring analog data may be used:
A sequential read method of up to six points per instrument. The user specifies
the rate and number of points to be accumulated.
A range-selection method for Multiplexer/R where the program selects the range
giving maximum resolution. A maximum of four ranges are possible. A typical
use would be for Gas Chromatograph Instruments.
A "catting" (Computed Average Transients) method where a number of individual
scans are repeated to improve the signal-to-noise ratio. Corresponding points
in scans are added together and divided by the total number of scans at the end
of theexperimei)t. A typical use would be for a Nuclear Magnetic Resonance
CNMR) Instrument.
Input data is buffered and logged to a disk data file defined by the user at execution
time.
~i9hlitts: Use of printer and/or plotter spooling may significantly increase the system
roug put in some systems with heavy printing and/or plotting output requirements.
Throughput is defined as the ratio of the time required to process a job stack through
the card reader without spooling, divided by the time required with spooling.
Use of Analog Inl'lut Data Channel Adapter 1 to Iink Analog Input sequential tables
allows reading multiple instrument addresses with one call, It also allows intermixing
Multiplexer/S and Multiplexer/R tables.
USing four Multiplexer/R ranges (lOmV, 50mV, 500mV, and 5V for example) allows
meeting the wide dynamic range requirements of such instruments as gas chromatographs.
e ••
Current users will receive a preprinted program order fonn and I letter announcing the
availability of Version 3 Modification Level 2. The letter Instructs them to order the
version through the branch office using the preprinted order form. Complete ordering
instructions are proVided in the letter to users~
MPX SPOOLING :
Not to be reproduced' without written permiSSion
.
DM.prowamming
P 1800.6
Nov 72
IBM 1800 Data Acquisition and Control System
NOTE: The 1810 Model A2 or A3 may be used but a substantial reduction in
throughput can resultif the transaction proceSSing times are limited by disk seek
speed. Also, the 2:"inicrosecond Processor-Controller is required for 2311 Disk
Storage.
One 1442 Card Read Punch, Model 6 or 7
""Use: Printer spooling requires no programming effort on the part of the user. Plotter
$'pOOling necessitates adding certain FORTRAN calls to the plotter programs. Run
initialization and data analysis programs, written by the user" are implemented
largely through calls to system subroutines provided for open-ended files and analog
data acquisition.
Customer Requirements: The customer is responsible for performing the following
functions:
1. Generating a suitable MPX operating system and properly defining system equates
and the desired system parameters.
, 2. Allocating disk storage for open-ended files.
3. Allocating diskstoragt! for 1443 and/or 1627 spooling.
One 1816 Printer-Keyboard
Analog Input Features with Analog Input Data Channel Adapter 1 (#1233) and 1
gtoup Multiplexer/S and/or Multiplexer/R
.
For each Instrument wired to the system, the following is necessary.
Two pOints of Proeess Interrupt Contact (#51l5) or
Process Interrupt Voltage (15116) for REQ/ABORT and START/STOP pushbuttcns
T~o pOints of Electronic .Contact Operate (#3612) for READY and RUN lights
One group of Digital Input Contact (13285) or Digital Input Voltage (#3286) for
,data entry switches
~
If instruments are concentrated in one location, one group of digital input may
be used per group of instruments.
For Analog Data logging, it is desirable to have multiple 1053s if instruments
are Widely separated. If the instruments are closely iocated to the computer
the console SWitches may be used (see Item 6 of Customer Requirements).
4. Assembling or compiling the programs supplied in source form and building the
core loads.
5. Providing low noise, low impedance analog Signals to the 1800. For specific
requiremenb, see IBM 1800 Installation Manual - PhySical Planning, Form
GA26-5922.
6. Installing appropriate instrument stations with lights, buttons and switches at
each instrument and cabling to the 1800.
1. Writing the necessary FORTRAN programs to initialize the analog data acquisl'~\PrIlII'ogram, analyze the data collected and generate reports.
a. As with other systems the customer is responsible for· providing adequate protection against aCcidental 1055 or misuse of his data.•
There are three possible options in the manner In which the user may set up the Instrument stations. The following items are always located at each instrument:
START/STOP pushbutton for starting or terminating a run.
RUN light indicating that data acquisition.!s in progress for this Instrument.
Option A
If there are no other Instruments in the immediate vicinIty the station would also
include:
REQ/ABORT pushbutton for requesting or aborting a run.
READY light to indicate ~he computer is ready for run initiation on this instrument.
Data entry switches for entry of run parameter information.
'OptionS
If instruments are closely located then there would be a common (user-supplied) console conSisting of:
'
REQ/ABORT pushbuttons (one per instrument).
To utilize only the 1443/1627 spooling features of MPX SPOOLING, the minimum
configuration is:
1801 Processor Controller 24K, 2 microsecond (2CB) or 4 microsecond (lCB)
microsecond
'
One of Ute following:
One 1810 Disk Storage Model B2 or,
One 1810 Disk Storage Model Bl and one 1800 mapped 2311 Disk Storage
Drive or,
one 1810 mapped 2311 Disk Storage Drive
NOTE: The 1810 Model A2 or A3 may be used but a substantial reduction in
throughput can result if the transaction procp.ssing times are limited by disk seek
speed. Also/the 2-microsecond Processor:"Controller'is required for 2311 Disk
Storage.
One 1442 Card Read Punch - Model 6 or 1
One 1443 Printer Modell or 2 and/or one 1621 Plotter Modell or 2
One 1816 Printer-Keyboard
To incorporate all four modules of MPX spooling requires:
1810 Processor-Controller 32K, 2 microsecond (20) or 4 microsecond (10)
. and the above mentioned PE7ripheral devices.
Core Requirement: The following subroutines and their core requirements are required
for the corresponding MPX SPOOLING modules to be incorporated. These routines are
to be incorporated into the System Executive.
~
For 1443 Printer spooling:
READY lights (one per instrument).
16 data entry switches.
This option requires one set of data switches for the entire group of instruments.
OptionC
If the instruments are in the vicinity of the IBM 1800 then the common console would
ConSllit of:
REQ/ABORT pushbuttons (one Per instrument).
CASEl
LEVEL
PHSE1
PLOTX
LEVEL
For 1621 Plotter spooling:
For Open-Ended Files:
GTFAD, DSKOP 98
GTPAR
34
For Analog data IcgiJing
LNKSP
CANCL
REPET
AISN
ABRTQ
READY lights (one per instrument>.
The data switches on the IBM 1800 console would serve the purpose of the data
entry switches.
A combination of the above options may also be used.
Programming Systems: MPX SPOOLING is written largely in 1800 Assembler Language, WIth some U£ility and test programs in IBM 1130/1800 Basic FORTRAN IV.
It operates under the IBM 1800 Multiprog;ammlng Executive (MPX) Operating System.
Generation of MPX SPOOLING requires the capabilities of assembling and compiling
from disk and the use of the DMP SRFLE function, all standard facilities of MPX
at its current version.
Minimum Machine Configuration: The minimum machine requirements for MPX
SPOOLiNG incorporatIng the Analog data logging and open-ended file features are:
1801 Proc.essor-(.ontr;iler 24K, 2 microsecond (2CB), or 4 microsecond (lC,B)
One of the follow!ng:
One 1810 Disk Storage Model B2 or,
No. of Storage LocaUons
806 (2 buffers)
132
184 (2 buffers)
211
132
Partition requirements are as follows:
Analog Data Logging
164
138
348
424
46
ADAS
Actual size depends on buffer allocations.
For 1443 Printer Spooling
CASE2 or
PRPH2
2918
CASEl or
PRPH3
598
~
For 1621 Plotter Spooling:
For 1443/1621 Spooling: ,
One 1810 Disk Storage Model B1 and one 1810 mapped 2311 Disk Storage
Drive or,
PHSE2
134
PHSE3
622
734
CASE2 or
PRPH2 or
PHSE2
(continued)
One 1810 mapped 2311 Disk Storage Drive
Not to be reproduced without written permission
686
IBM 1800 Data Acquisition and Control System
CASE3 or
PRPH3
598
PHSE3
622
Process working storage for S POOLING may be estimated as follows:
For 1443 spooling, a minimum of 100 sectors is suggested. For 1627 spooling,
a minimum of 200 sectors is recommended.
The user should make his partitions somewhat larger than the above requirements to
allow for fubft corrections whicfl may be required.
Programming Service Classification: B.
A sample core map implementing open-ended files and Analog data logging follows:
Basic Program Package:
*Executive I/O (2 disks, 1816, 1053, 1442)
INSICEL COMMON
***EXDIR
GTFAD, DSKOP, GTPAR
LNKSP
AISN, CANCL, REPET, ABRTQ
Patch Area
Total for System Executive
Area 1 CADAS)
**Variable Core
P 1800.7
Nov 72
7931
50
3958
132
164
956
Documentation: One copy each of the Application Directory, Program Description'
Manual tGH20-0977), and Operations Manual (GH20-0984)~
Machine Readable: Source programs.
Optional Program Package:
~
Documentation: None
Machine Readable: None
13600
3500
7476
A sample core map implementir,v .,~ Printer and Plotter spooling features follows:
*Executive I/O C2 disks, 1816, 1053, 1442,
1443, 1627)
INSKEL COMMON
'***EXDIR
CASEl
.pHSEl
PLOTX
LEVEL
PatcltArea
8422
50
3958
806
784
217
132
21L
Total for System Executive 14800
Partition 1 CASE2, PRPH2, PHSE2
Partition 2 CASE3, PRPH3
Partition 3 PHSE3
**Variable CCR
Systems Manual (GY20-0668)
Reference Material:
Promotional Flyer (G520-2442)
Generallnfonnation Manual (GH20-0884-1)
800
650
700
7626
A sample core map for a 32K system with Printer spooling, Plotter spooling, and
Analog data acquisition follows:
*Executive I/O (3 disks, 1816, 1053, 1442,
1443, 1627)
INSKEL COMMON
*'**EXDIR
GTFAD, DSKOP,GTPAR
CASEl
PHSE1
LNKSP
LEVEL
PlOTX
AISN, CANCL, RE&PET, ABRTQ
Patch area
8532
50
3958
132
806
784
164
132
277
956
309
Total for System Executive 16100
Area 1 CADAS)
Area 2 CASE2, PRPH2, PHSE2
Area 3
Area 4 PHSE3
**Variable Core
3500
750
650
650
11017
*Includes all BOM Utilities (858 words additionall
**'MInimum 5400 words. To minimize the use of locals and linking core loads a
variable core size of at least 6000 words is recommended.
***SIngle priority queues.
1800 Distributed System Program Cl800-SV-003l:
Provides means for operating
a multisystem configuration
COmprised of 18005, System,!
7s, and 2740 terrnlnal-s as a Single Distributed System. Equipment can be placed at
the optimum physical location and yet take advantage of all the facilities of the central
1800.
The IBM 1800 Distributed System Program provides for operating an interconnected
system of IBM 1800s, IBM System/7s and IBM 2740s as a single Distributed
System. Communications between the systems use start/stop teleprocessing links.
The facilities provided may be categorized as:
1.
Support for the exchange of data, programs and tasks between systems
(Multisystem support).
2.
Support for setting up and entering jobs into the batch process queue of
the 1800 from remote tenninals (Conversational Remote Job Entry).
3.
Support for communication between an 1800, operating under the Multiprogramming Executive System (MPX), and a remote terminal or computing system (Communications support).
." The facilities P.!'ovided in the first category Citem 1 above) parallel those of the IBM
1130 Distributed System Program, which supports a System/7 coupled to an IBM
1130 Computing System. Application programs that are written using the facilities
of 1130 DSP and obeying its conventions, can be transferred to an 1800 System
'Operating with 1800 DSP with little or no modification.
Highlights:
Disk Requirements: Following are the disk requirements for MPX SPOOLING on
Drive 0:
Reload Core Load RMPXP
System Definition Macro PLUS
Open-Ended File Core Loads
L1NKC Core Load (1443 and/or 1627)
1442 Spooling Core Loads
1627 Spooling Core Loads
Analog Data Acquisition Core Loads
OEFEO Open-Ended File Drive 0
Related Documentation:
Operator Station
Normally user application programs will require the use of at least one I/O module
(such as 5012 or 5014).CRJE and Multisystem are mutually exclusive and require
separate storage loads. Multiprocessor Support size Is based on the inclusion of the
follOWing modules:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Fixed core used for IPl
CE Error tables
Interrupt branch tables
Interrupt level work area
Initialize, $INIT
System error recovery, $ERP
Set programmed interrupt, $ SPT
Queue handling $QUE
Null interrupt handler, $NINT
Telecommunication interface, $TNlK
Telecommunication transmission, $TXMT
Telecommunication reception, $TREC
Operator Station SuPPOrt, $OPR
Total for Multiprocessor Support
14. DSP Multisystem routine D7TRP
(note 1)
Size
128
50
72
64
96
187
87
101
31
164
324
316
437
2,057
600
Total
2,657
Note 1: Actual size = 505 + DSP COMMON size + 3* (number entries in D7PRJ) +
number entries in D7TAB.
The user must add to this minimum requirement those MSP /7 routines .required for his
application together with the actual user requirements.
CRJE requires a storage load of 3,600 words.
COMMUNICATION FACILITIES
The communications interface to the IBM 1800 is the Start/Stop Communications
Adapter
which provides for the attachment of a Single start/stop
communications line. Up to 15 adapters are supported. All adapters must be assigned
to the same interrupt level. Compatible modems supplied by IBM or other manufacturers are required to connect the adapter to the communication lines.
Installation and operation of the adapter are described in the Start/Stop Teleprocessing
Adapter, General Information Manual (!lL26-2112). The following adapter installation options are normally required:
number of bits per character
7
number of stop bits
1
yes
vertical redundancy check NRC)
yes
VRC generate
odd
VRC type
End-of-block (EOB) character
bits 10, 11, 12, 13, 15
bits 11, 12, 13, 14, 15
End ..of-transmlulon (EOT) character
bit 9
Negative reply (NAK) character
The carrier detect option Is detennlned by. the type of data set used, and the full
duplex option Is not applicable.
DSP operation requires the adapter to be Jumpered to transmit PAD characters.
NQt to be reproduced without written ~rrnilslon
I: :~1
P1800.10
Nov 72
IBM 18QO Data Acguisjtion and Control System
Programming
The communications facilities which may be used include Common Carrier Switched
Telephone Networks, Common Carrier Leased Private Line Telephone Service (twoor four-wire facility), or equivalent privately-owned facilities.
The communications mode on a given line may be pOint-to-point over a switched network (dial up), point-to-point over non-switched leased or private facilities, or multipoint over non-switched leased or private facilities. When operating in multipoint
mode, up to 16 terminals may be multidropped from a single line.
Supported terminal configurations include:
""Systemn with Asynchronous Communications Control or 50K bps Co~munications
Adapter (RPQ D08000>
Programmed to emulate an IBM 2740 Modell or 2
134.5 bits per second multipoint, point-to-point, or dial-up mode
600 bps multipoint or poin~-to-point mode
Additional Program Material
Program Logic Manuals
Y'2b-3620'
Y26-3702
Y26-3726
. 1130/1800 Programming Systems, Card/Paper Tape
1800 Time-Sharing Executive System
1800 Multiprogramming Executive Operating System
Program Listings: Listings are available on microfiche from --
Group Code 3010 for 1800 Card/Paper Tape System
3030 for 1800 Time-Sharing Executive System
3070 for 1800 Multiprogramming Executive System
Optional Program Material (Symbolic Modules:) The optional progrcw components are
available on magnetic tape (2400). One teeI of·tape 's requlred for ~ach program group
(each program group is bracketed below).
IBM 2740 Modell
IBM 2740 Modell
134.5 bps line speed
POint-to-point or multipoint mode
Checking feature required
Station control feature required for multipoint
Automatic EOB feature optional
134.5 bps line speed
Dial-up mode on switched network
Dial-up adapter required
Automatic EOB feature optional
Checking feature required
IBM 2740 Model 2 (buffered)
IBM 2740 Model 2 (buffered)
600 bps line speed
Multipoint mode
Record checking feature required
Buffer receive feature required
Speed base feature required
Buffer expansion feature optional
Header control feature optional
Edit f.eature optional
134.5 bps line speed
Multipoint mode
Record checking feature required
Buffer expansion feature optional
Header control feature optional
Edit feature optional
All tenninals on a given line must be of the same line speed and addressing mode.
Programming Service Classification is A.
Distribution will be made on S/360 9-track magnetic tape
requester must forward or order one reel of magnetic tape,
(800 bpi
or 1600 bpi). The
The external tape label
must show one of the program numbers listed below, as well as the information
required under the current procedures.
If either 9-track 800 bpi or 1600 bpi is not specified on the order form, 9-track
800 bpi will be supplied.
Program Component Name
Program Number
1800 Card Utilities
Paper Tape Utilities
Card Subroutines
Paper Tape Subroutines
Card Assembler
Paper Tape Assembler
Card FORTRAN
Paper Tape FORTRAN
Time-Sharing Executive 5 ystem
1800-UT-00I
1800-UT-002
1800:-LM-00I
1800-LM-002
IBOO-AS-005
1800-AS-006
1800-FO-o07
1800-FO-008
1800-0S-001
} one reel
1800-05-010
} one reel
1800 Multiprogramming Executive System
Basic Program Material:
One copy each of the Program Reference Manual (GH20-1l43-0l and Operations
Guide (GH20-1142-0). One copy of the machine readable material containing source
program modules, object program modules, and sample programs, shipped on one IBM
2315 or one 1316 Disk Cartridge.
Optional Program Material:
The Logic Manual' and additional copies of the Program Reference Manual (GH201143) and Operations Guide (GH20-1142), may be ordered from the IBM Distribution Center as bi liable customer requisition; customer will be billed through AOO.
One copy of the machine readable material containing in source form those program
modules which come in object form on the basic machine readable material.
General Documentation: Additional documentation consists of the General Information
Manual (GA20-0SSIl which is available from the IBM Distribution Center at no
charge.
Not to be reproduced without written permission
one reel
IBM Basic Operatinq System/360
8OS/360 is a Disk Resident System designed to provide
operating system capabilities for 8K and larger System/360
configurations.
This system is provided specifically for
2311 Disk Drive configurations.
Configurations above 8X
requiring a disk oriented stack job operation but not
requiring the expanded functions of DOS/360 or OS/360 will
also benefit from this system.
Minimum system requirements:
8,192 bytes of main core
storage
Standard Instruction Set
either
one
multiplexer or one selector channel... one 2311 Disk
Drive* ••• one card reader** ••• one card punch**
one
printer. **
*The system resident device (2311 Disk Drive) may be used
by processing programs for intermediate or
permanent
storage.
**See the control program I/O chart for specific devices
and possible alternatives •.
Note:
The 1052 Keyboard-Printer
errrcient systems communication.
is
required
for
Control Programs
The Control Program, 360B-CL-302, constitutes the basic
It is a
framework of the Basic Operating System/360.
in
the
BOS/360
prerequisite to any program executed
environmen t.
Consecutive Processing Macros, 360B~IO-303 -- Used to
read, process, and wrLte successive records ~n a logical
file.
These routines apply to all files in s.erial-type
I/O devices. They can also be used for the 2311 disk
file records to be processed in a serial manner.
Indexed
s~uential ~ Mana~ement
system (ISFMS), 360B-
~-ese routLnes provLde a compre h ens~ve metnOd
~stablishing and maintaining
logical files· in a
manner which allows random and
the same 2311 disk file.
Direct
Access
seq~entia.l
processing
Resident: System resident unit
Reader: Unit used for Job Control cards
Input: Main system input for control programs
List: System printer unit for control programs
Punch: Main system output for control programs
Log: Medium for operator communication
into
Tele-processing Input/out1ut tupport ~ 36013-10-310
-- Input/Output macro leve Te e-process~ng support for
2701 with Synchronous lJata Adapter Type I communicating
with Synchronous Transmitter-Receiver (STR)
terminals:
Using bOS/360 system, STR applications will probably
require 16K, however, utility type applications requiring
minimum processing and code conversion are supported in
an 8K envirorunent. STR applications usin~ facility will
require a 16K of core storage.
and
the
f2Pport ~
Binary
B1nary Synchronous
an IBl-I System/360·
via a 2701 equipped with a SDA-Type II adapter to another
System/360* via (a) a 2701 equipped with a SDA-Type II
adapter,
(b) a 2703 equipped with Binary Synchronous
features.
This support is for
point-to-point
non
switched
and switched lines.
Included within this
support are the 2701 Lrror Recovery Procedures and Error
Counts. Available for S/360 Model 25 via its integrated
communication attaciunents.
Tele-processing
Input/Output
~ynchronous Commun~catLon 360B-CQ-3
Commun~cat~on
Macros are prov~ded for
Control components and functions:
main
Supervisor
provides main storage resident control
tunctLons (in a minimum of 4,096 bytes) such as: interrupt
handling
scheduling of
I/O
operations
on
the
multiplexer and one or two selector channels •.• common
physical I/O interface for all channel programs
operator communication via the operating console or 1052
Printer-Keyboard
Job-to-Job
commu~ication
via
a
communication
region
systems loader for program
fetching ••• a transient area for functions such as
error recovery, file management (open, close, end-ofvolume, end-of-job), checkpoint restart, storage print.
Macros will be provided to handle the following Binary
Synchronous Line Control functions:
Contention (point to point)
Headers and normal text,
Inquiry and alternating replies
WABT (optional)
Full Transparent text,
Dial with and without identification
Disconnect and Conversational
Job Control -- brought into main storage between jobs by
to provide: job-to-job transition; e.g.,
compile and execute ••• symbolic device assignment within
device
dependent environment
entry of additional
information such as -file limits, label checking data,
current data, proqram switches.
EBCDIC will be supported as the transmission code.
minimum core storage requirement is 16K bytes.
Linkage ~ -- for linking and relocating separate
program sect~ons from the relocatable library and/or from a
system input unit.
These programs may be permanently
placed in the system (core image library), requiring only
control cards to call them for execution, or they can be
stored temporarily, executed, and then overlaid in the core
image library by new programs.
•
me -supervisor
Librarian
-- A group of programs, used for maintaining and
the disk library areas and providing printed
and punc~ed output from these libraries.
reorgan~zing
Core Image Library (required).
for execution from this library
routine of the supervisor.
in
Method (DAM) , 360B-IO-305 -- The D\rect
used to create
logical files in random order in 2311 disk
and maintain
files.
Macros will be provided to:
Handle transmission
reception of data in the STR mode
assist
programmer in the processing of STR records.
Control Program input/output functions are:
Initial Pfiogram Load (IPL)-- loads supervisor
storage w en systeii\operation is initiated.
IOCS -- The Consecutive Processing Macros, ISFMS Macros,
~ Macros,
and Tele-processing Macros for Synchronous
Transmitter-Receiver terminals (STR), together constitute
the logical IOCS facilities of BOS/360.
AC'CeSS MetJiOd"""macro-rnstrUCtions can be
The Basic Operating System/360 is composed of two types of
programs: Control progtams and Processing Programs.
Users
may
tailor--tne sys em accord~ng to theLr ~nstallation
configurations and processing requirements.
System
System
System
System
System
System
build minimum systems for specializedappljcations. If two.
disk drives are available, the librarian can be ·used.
instead of the Load Systems program to build specialized
systems.
All programs are loaded
by the System Loader
The
BOS/360
Binary
Synchronous
Communication
support
communicate with other System/360s using DOS
BTAM,
OS
.BTAM
and
BOS/BPS/360
Binary
Synchronous
Communication support.
~odel
Note:
25, 10, 40, 50, 65, 67 (65 mode) or 75, System/37C
Hodel 165.
2701 Support on a selector channel is limited
to non-switched. (leased or private
direct connection)
It is recommended that a 1052 console be used in order to
facilitate the printing of error messages and error
counts as the result of a persistent error condition.
This facility will aid in system repair and preventive
maintenance.
Processing Programs
Macro Library (optional) - used to store IBM-supplied and
user-defined macro routines.
Include customer programs and IBM supplied programs that
provide both language and service functions. All processing
programs, customer and IBM, utilize the functions provided by
the control programs.
Relocatable Library (optional) - reouired for compileand
for
and-execute operations, certain utiiities,
Autotest.
It can be used to store assembled object
other
program
modules for subsequent linkage with
sections when editing programs into the core image
library.
The Basic Operating Systems may be generated and regenerated
by the customer to include those languages, service and
problem program functions that he
desires
in
system
residence.
Load s~stfm Pro2ram -- Operates as an independent program
IIOade
rom carCfs, with its own IPL program, Supervisor,
and Job Control), the Load System program builds a disk
resident system from cards. This program can be used to
LangUajj Functions:
Available within the Basic Operating
System 60 at a 4, 096 design level. A design level is the
minimum main storage requirement in which the processor is
designed to·operate.
Not to be reproduced without written permission
IBM P~9gramming
Feb 72
Assembler, 360B-AS-309 -- Provides a convenient means of
sOlv~ng
problems by offering the full flexibility of the
powerful System/360 instruction set.
This easy-to-use
symbolic language is machine oriented and applicable to
both commercial and scientific problems.
The Assembler
Language includes a complete set of macro instructions
for all I/O and other Superviscr functions.
Also, the
user can define frequently used routines as macros. The
actual problem coding is done with symbolic instructions
that
are
translated,
one
for
one,
to machine
instructions. All storage references can be made through
symbolic names. Data constants can be defined in several
different ways, either as explicit constants or as
literals
coded
directly
into
the operand of an
instruction.
ReP6it Pro~ram Generator (RPG), 360B-RG-307 -- RPG is a
pro em-or~ented language~signed to provide users with
an efficient, easy-to-use technique
for
generating
programs that can:
obtain data records from single or
mUltiple input files ••• perform calculations on data
taken from input records or RPG literals ••• write
printed reports ••• use table lookup ••• exit to a user's
subroutine written in a language other than RPG •••
branch within calculations ••• and sequence-check input
rec,ords.
Note:
The Decimal Arithmetic feature #3237 is required
by
RPG.'
Residence
1052
2540
1403
1404*
1442 Nl
1442 N2
1443
2501
2520 Bl
2520 B2, 83
2311
x
2400 (1)
2400 Dual Densi ty
Input Work Punch List
~
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
and 1050 or 1030
x**
x**
x**
x**
Assembler
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x**
x***
:10<1c1 1GS.
Utilities, Group 2, 360B-UT-301 (B05/360)
to ~ - Transfers binary or EBCDIC data from cards
to magnetlc tape.
- Prints
a
tape
file
in
one
of
two
Data Display - prints all, in a series of lines, of the
tape block using 100 print positions for the data (with
top and bottom scale line, and page numbering). Twenty
positions of the printer line are used for block size,
block number, and record number.
Field selection of
data is not available with this option.
Data List - prints one line for each data record. The
data, if larger than the print span, would usually be'
edited to printer size by using the "Field Select"
feature of the utility program.
Some other options for the user include
heading lines, and spacing control.
page
numbering,
~
to Card - Transfers data from magnetic tape to
caras.--Data:may be punched in either EBCDIC or binary.
!£ ~,- Transfers the data from one tape to
another.
The tape file data may be simply copied, block
by block; or reorganized by altering the number of
records in the block
(reblocking): ,or reorganized by
deleting or re-positioning the fields within the record
(Field Select) as well as reblocking.
~
Disk !£ ~ - Transfers data from a disk file to a tape
The-aTsk file mayor may not contain key fields.
The disk file may be copied, reblocked, field selected,
or reblocked and field selected.
1IIe.
~ to Disk - Transfers data from a tape file to a
disk
~ disk file mayor may not contain key fields.
The tape file may be copied, reblocked, field selected,
or reblocked and field selected.
IIIe.
Compare - Compares two files from two or more tape
reels to ensure that the files are identical. The number
of reels in each file need not be equal.
~
Files containing fixed, variable, or undefined record
lengths may be compared. Physical records which do not
compare are documented along with an index indicating the
bytes that do not match, and the physical record number.
A user routine may be supplied for user processing on
unequal compares •
A compare may be terminated and a new
at any time.
(1)
7 is not supported.
VTOC Display - Displays the labels in the volume table
of contents from either a system pack of a data pack.
~a~:~
Sort/Merge, 3608-SM-3U8 -- The Sort/Merge program enables
the user to sort a f~le of records into one sequential
fi·le.
The control data information can be contained in as
many as twelve fields in each record. The program assumes
that input records for a sort operation are in random
sequence. Records can be sorted or merged into ascending
o~
descending sequence, and an individual sequence can be
specified for e~ch control-data field. The output sequence
for a merge-only operation must be the same as the input
sequence.
Files to be sorted can be read by the program
from 2311 Disk Storage (except ISP~S), 2400 series Magnetic
~odel
Disk to Disk - Transfers the data from one disk file to
iliiO'fher.--The input and/or output file mayor may not
contain key fields.
The disk file may be copied,
reblocked,
field
selected, or reblocked and field
selected.
x
2701 with SDA-I communicating with: 1009, 1013, 7701/02,
7711, 1974 (mdl 2), 1978 (mols 1, 2, and 3) 360 Model 20
witil Communication Adapter (Feature i/2073), 360 Model 25,
30, 40, 5U, b~, and 75 with 2701 and SDA-l.
Available with Process'Control System (PC5).
1u:', Systci:l/3('O * via a 2701 equipped with an SDA-Type II
Oluapter, or all 1&1 Syster.l/360 :-IoLiel 25 via the Integrated
CO:;.'lUllications Attachl1cllt to another S/360 * via a 2701
eguiUi?eu with an SDA Type-II adapter or via a 2701 with
a Synchronous lJase, or an S/360 ~lodel 25 via the
InL'-'jratcu CO:!lIllunicatiolls Attachment.
* ':,-)(}(:1 25, 30, 40, S'l,' (,5, 67 (Horking in 65 modp.) or 7';,
(1) 242u
Disk to Printer - Prints a d.isk file in either the data
arsplay format or the data list format. Both formats are
explained under the tape to printer program.
Disk
records mayor may not contain key fields.
x
x
x
x
RPG
['i'~tc:;/'37()
Disk to Card - Transfers data from disk to cards.
The
or may not have key fields. Data may be
punched in either EBCDIC or binary.
dISK -rire--may
~
x
x
x
x
x
x
Continuous Porms
x
x
x
x
x
x
(1) 7- or 9-track
x
Consecutive
x
Direct Access Method (DAM) x
Indexed Sequential (ISFMS) x
.
Card to Disk - Transfers binary or EBCDIC data from cards
ro-diSK WItn or without key fields.
x
x
Input/Output Support for Object Programs:
Service Functions:
Clear Disk - Clears one or more areas of 2311 Disk
establishes a preformatted track containing
an indicated base throughout the area cleared.
~ge:--and
x
x
* Continuous Porms Only
** Assembler Only
2540
1403
1404
1442
1443
1445
2501
2520
2400
2311
2311
2311
1052
2671
1285
2701
1070
Utilities, Group 1, 360B-UT-300 (BOS/360)
data Trom cards to a
~
I/O Units
Tape, or from cards read through any of the card readers
listed under Minimum Machine Requirements. Output files can
be ~ritten on disk storage or magnetic tape. An option
prov~ded by the program is a list of disk storage addresses
that reflects the sorted output file.
Card to Printer and/or Punch - Transfers binary or EBCDIC
pr~nter and/or a card punch.
Control Program Input/output:
Units
Supl20rted
P 3608.2
IBM Basic Operating System/360
compare
initiated
(805/360)
wor s ~n conJunct~on w~t t e 05
Remote
Job
(RJE)
system to provide a convenient means of
entering OS
jobs to a central computing system from a
remote location equipped with a System/360. It accepts
OS
jobs and RJE control statements and commands from a
card reader or 1052 printer-keyboard, transmits this data
to the
Central
(OS)
processor
via
high-speed
communication lines, receives data from the central system,
and
outputs this data to an attached output device
(printer, punch or console printer), or passes it to a
Not to be reproduced without written permission
IB,.,
System/300 Basic Operating System
Programming
Feb 72
(BOS/360)
user-written routine. The console
printer-keyboard
cannot
be used for input and output of jobs.
without
the
inclusion
of
user-written routines, a
system/360 with at least 16K of main storage, a 2701 Data
Adapter
Unit
or Integra~ed Communications Attachment
equipped for binary synchronous communication in EBCDIC
transparency
mode, a card reader, a printer, a 1052
Printer-Keyboard, and a card punch are required for RJE
operation.
If
user-written routines are included, a
Syst~m/360 with at least
24K bytes of main storage is
requ~red. 505/360 minimum device requirements apply.
Autotest, 360B-PT-306 (B~/36~)-- Autotest is the debugging
programs
at ave been assembled by the
Assembler.
Using Autotest, runs can be planned to proceed
with a minimum of operator intervention.
(For use on
systems with at least 16K bytes of main storage.)
~obJect
Autotest resides on
controls testing and:
Allows
the
instructions
constants.
P 360B.3
disk
(SYSRES)
during
testing.
It
eXChange,
addition,
or
deletion
of
without reassembly.' Allows replacement of
Provides the dump of all or any portion of main storage,
permanent
storage
assignments,
and/or
general
registers/floating registers
whenever
a
de~ignated
address is reached during object pro~ram execution. Such
test request output can be regulated even within user
program loops.
S~olic debugging features
ma~n
storage printouts can
are available.
End-of-job
reflect user ass'embled labels
associated with the appropriate main storage locations.
Also, address for test requests and patches can be
referenced symbolically.
will print out main storage at abnormal
optionally at normal end-of-job.
end-of-job,
and
Pre-scan loading of the object program and cl~ars unused
main storage.
Allows execution of BOs/360 Utili ties or User utilities
to be run prior to or following'execution of .the user
test program.
A card to tape utility is supplied to
length tape records.
generate
variable
Allows assembly and immediate test capability.
1070 Process communication Supervisor '360B-SV-032
The 1070 PCS consists of the following components:
~xecutive Routine ••• Conversion Subroutine ••• Delta Limit
Check
Subroutine
Contact
Sense Subroutine
Thermocouple Subroutine ••• Pulse Counter Subroutine
Binary to Decimal String Routine ••• Decimal to Binary
Subroutine
Decimal to Binary String Routine
Diagnostic Write Routine .•
[See next page for Basic program Package and Ordering
Information)
The 1070 l'C:; is used with the Supervisor (8K Disk) at
object program time, and uses the Assembler (8K Disk) for
program assembly.
The PCS macro definitions are inserted in the BOS macro
library by a NMAINT run and the Subroutines are inserted in
the BaS relocatable library by a RMAINTrun •.
'rhe PCS provides the facility to communicate with 1070
Process Communication Terminals,
1030
Data Collection
Terminals and 1050 Data Communication Terminals, through a
2701 Data Adapter Unit or a 2702 Transmission Control. In
addition, all lacs facilities provided by the
Basic
0perating Sys tem (8K Disk) may be used'.
Not.. to be.reproduced
written
.....,
.without
. '.,
. . permission
. '. , .' ····1 '.'
IBJ4
P 360B.4
Feb 72
System/J60 Basic Operating Systenf
PfogrCllllming
System Number 360B (specify each component deSired).
BASIC PROGRAM PACKAGE
Doc\JlllentatiQn -- Material List and an attachmen~ ••• The following SRL publica~
tions appropriate to the components ordered are shipped with each initial BOS/360
order •
Ass~bler with Input/Output f\4acros SpecificatiOns,
Distribution MeditlTl
Type
Code
Basic
none
MT 7DC/800
DTR 9/800
DTR 9/1600
1316
26
?8
29
52
01
None
None
01
Optional
none
MT 7DC/800
MT 9/800
MT 9/1600
1316
26
28
29
52
gi
GC24-3361-6
TNLsGN33-8564, 8571,§608, 8633
Programs and Assembler Operating Guide
TNLs GN33-8533, 8566, 8577
GC24-3450-3
Programmer's 'GUide
TNLs GN24-5336, 5328i GN33-8531,
8544,8565,8572,8605,~
GC24-3372-6
User Volume
Requirement
Program Number
Extension
01
01
Operating Guide, Operator Messages
TNLs GN33-8537, 8563,8578, 8609, ~
System Generation and Maintenance
TNLs GN33-8532, 8545, 8567, 8579, 863~
GC24-5060-2
Utility Programs Specifications and Operating Guide
TNL GN28-2338
GC24-3409.3
1070 Process Communication Supervisor
GC26-5996-1
1070 Process Communications Supervi sor, Operati ng
Guide
GC26-3627-1'
Autotest <8K Disk) Specifications
TNLs GN21-5011, 5041, 5070i GN33-8583,
GC ~~-33 78-2
ADDITIONAL PROGRAM MATERIAL
Program Logic Manuals,
BOS/360 Control Program
10CS
Autotest
Report Program Generator
Sort/Merge
Assembler
1070 PCS
RJE Work Station.
Program Listings: The BOS/360 listing (including the Control Program) is available
on microfiche
PeMsylv.anta..
Note: SRl Gc24-3378·' plus TNlI Gf\I24-S015, GN21·S01 " 5041, an4
50'70 !NY be uoed in lieu of the SRL GC24-3378·2 plus TNLs GN21·501 I,
5041. S070. GN33-8583.
Report Program Generator (8K Disk) Specifications,
GC24-3387-S
Sort/Merge Program (8K Disk) Specifications
TNL GN28-;2389
GC24-3321-t
The Control Program listing is also available on hard copy. Specify Group Code 2010
for the microfiche and/or Group Code 2011 for the hard copy, The Irstings are equivalent to the output listings produced by assembling the symbolic modules indicated
below.
Program Component Name
Note: SRL GC24·33213 plus TNls GN21·5045 and GN28·2:j89 mav
used in lieu 01 SRL GC24·3321·4 plus GN28·2389.
be
GC24-3364-3
Macro Definition Language 8K Disk/Tape
TNL GN33-8639
Y24-5002
Y24-5003
Y24-5004
Y24-5005
Y24-5001
Y24-5000
Y24-5006
Y30-2006
Form numbers which have changed since previous release are underlined.
Basic Control Program
Utilities, Group 1
Sort/Merge
1070 PCS
Assembler
Utilities
Autotesli
Report Program Generator
Program Number
360B-CL-302
UT-300
SM-308
SV-032
AS-309
UT -301
PT -306
RG-307
. Machine Readable -- Program components ma~ be selected from the following list.
Each component for which program documentation and maintenance material is r€
quired must appear on the order form,
Assembler
Basic Control Program
Consecutive Processing MACROS
IFMS - Indexed Seq. File MGT. SYSTEM MACROS
DAM - Direct Access Method MACROS
Synchronous Transmitter Receiver MACROS
Autotest
Report Program Generator
Sort/Merge
Group 1 Utilities
Group 2 Utilities
1070 PCS
BCS
Remote Job Entry
360B-AS-309
CL-302
10.303
10-304
10-305
10-310
PT-30b
RG-307
SM-308
UT-300
UT -301
SV-032
CQ-312
CQ-311
CURRENT USERS
Clirrent users wi II receive a pre-printed Program Order Form and a letter announcing
the availability of Release 19/20 instructing them to order the new Release through
the branch office using this pre-printed Program Order Form. Complete ordering
instructions are provided in the letter to users.
To order the maintenance package for System Release 19/20, the user must specify
M for Mi\intenance Package with one of the appropriate Distribution Medium codes on
the Program Order Form. User Volume Requirements for either the total replacement
or the maintenance package is 1. The maintenance package will be available for
60 days from the date of announcement. Disk only users must order a complete
Replacement of BO S.
Users who no longer require this program shoulibe instructed to return the pre-printed
order form to PID with a "0" in columns 14 of section 1, line 1.
Current IJsers may also modify their profile by adding or deleting components.
OPTIONAL PROGRAM PACKAGE
Documentation - Material List - Optional Material instructions. The dumped disk
pack data on the tape will be preceded by an initialize 2311 Utility Program and a
tape to disk program. The operating instructions for creating it system pack from the
tape are provided with the material list.
Machine Readable
1070 PCS
Utilities Group 1
Utilities Group 2
BasiC Control Programs
Autotest
RPG - Report Program Generator
Sort/Merge
Assembler
360B-SV-037
I.,IT -300
UT-301
CL·302
PT -306
RG-307
SM-308
AS-309
Not to be reproduced withOufwrilten permission
1BJt1.
Proqumminq
IBM
s y
8
t e m 1 3 6 0 - 3 7 0
P r o q ram m
P 360C w l
Feb 72
n q
Con v e r 8 i o n 1 S e r v i c e
for
use
with
stem/360 Model 40:
The 11101/
1460 Emulator Program is a
stand-alone program that executes 1401/1460 programs when used
on a System/360 Model 40
equipped
with
the
1401/1460
Co_patibility Feature (#4457). The compatibility Feature, which
executes 1401 instructions at an average internal s~ed of
approxi_te1y 4.5 times the 1401 system exclu.ling I/O and edit
instructions.
Currently operating non time-dependent 1401/1460
programs can be executed without modification, although certain
special and custom features are not emulated.
.
The basic 1401/1460 configuration being emulated may include 6
tape units.
unit record equipment,
5
dl~k
units,
and the
1407/1447 Console.
The emulator appears to the 1401/1460
program as a 16K 1401/1460 with all basic features and the
follOWing optional features:
Advanced programming ("1060) •••
Bit Test (#1470) .,. Column Binary (#1990) •••
Expanded PrintEdit (#3835) ••• 51-Column Interchangeable Rea~-Feed ("4150)
High-Law-Equal Compare
(#457S) ••• Multiply-Divide (MS275)
Print Storage (#5585) ••• Additional Print Control
("5540)
Processing Overlap (#5730) ••• Punch-Feed Read (#5890) ••• RerldPunch Release (#6040)
••• Space Suppression (117 246) ••• Sense
Switches (#7600) ••• Rinary Transfer - 1460 ("1468) .••• Indexing
and Store Address Register - 1460 (#4631) . ' . Scan Uisk
(#6]9b)
Direct seek - 1]11 ("3281, #]282, "3283) ••• Track-Hecord
llli U801l>.
By eliminating the reqUirement to convert ,)11 1401/1460 programs
before installing system/)60, the emulator allows the user to
apply most of his programminq resources towards devf'lopinq new
applications and redesiqning existing applications to takf' full
advantage of System/360 facilities.
Uge of the emulator also
allows immediate production runs upon installiltion, allow:; till'f'
for user edUcation in Syst~m/J60 concerts,
anrl ('ases the
pressure of program testinq.
In addition to 1401/1460 compatihi lity Feature 114457 dnrl at
least ]2,768 bytes of main storaqe (Model E), the ::>y:;tem/360
Model 40 must have:
Decimal Arith\l'etic
(II1;n7)
one 1052
Printer-Keyboard and 1052 Adapter (117'120) ••• one 2 c,40 Card Kead
Punch or 2400 series Maqnetic Tape Unit for initial progralll
loading ••• for disk systems only - ll'inillluJn of 65,5ll> bytes of
main storage and Disk Compatibility (119710).
If the emulator program is too be loaded frail' a 2400 seril':; tapp
unit equipped with the 7-track Heaci-Writelle7),
the 7track Compatibility ~'eaturp ("712'), "7126, 117127), i1nd till' ·Uata
Conversion Feature ("3228 or 113231» must be inst.llled on the
associated Tape Control Unit..
After the em',lator proqram hoH,
been loaded,
the 10"ld device is available a:;
11101/141.>0
correspomlinq
device
(see below).
Attel
initial progr.'lr.
loadinq, the emulator pro
or 1track (800 cpi) DTR (Data Conversion feature required) For
disk systems,
a disk initialization proqram i:; reqllirej
and must be ordered separately.
II suitable initializiltion
program is the Initialize Disk
(2311)
Proqrrlll',
]bOP-U!069.
Tbe 7074 Emulator l'r::ogram
opprates on a
System/360 Model H50, 150,· 1165, I6S, or J6,) equipped with ttl£'
7070/7074 compatibility Feature ("7ll7).
The Emulat.or l'rogrdlll
and Compatibility Feature toqether constitute the Emulator.
Currently operating non time-nepen,ient 7070/7074 programs can be'
executed without modification, altho1lqh certain special and
custom features are not emulat.ed.
7074 Emulator Program for System/360 Models 50
and 65:
Ay eliminating the requirement to convert all 7070/7074 proqrallOs
before installing sistem/]60, the Emulator allows the user to
better allocate his programmin'l n'sollices to .... ard developinq new
applications and redesiqninq existing applications to take full
advantage of System/360 facilities.
Use of the E,nulator also
permits continued running of the critical production work loan
during the early period of installation' when thE're are normally
large testing requirements for new programs.
5/360 Model 50 Internal Performance
1402 Card Read Punch,
Modell or J
2540 Card Heai Punch anJ 2~21
control unit with 11100 compatibility Feature 118065
140] Printer, Model I, 2, or J
lli01 Printer, ~odel 2 or NI or
1404 Pri ntf'r Model 2 (cont.inuous
forms 0peratio'\<' only)
729 II, IV, V, VI Tape Unit or
7330 Magnetic Tape Unit
2401, 2402, 2ltO],
or
2415 Tape
Units, "ldl I, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6;
and 2420 Model 5 or 2404 Mdls 1-3
2401 Model 8 (7-track only)
3420 Models 3,5
14071'1447
station
10S2 Printer-Keytoal·d,
with PTTC/EflCD
carie
element.
Console
Inquiry
1311 Disk Storage Drive, Mnls
1. 2, or 4
Model 7,
printinq
2311 Disk "torM,,,, (;rive •• M11 1
• Magnetic Tape Units must be on Selector Channel 1 for el11ulation.
All other units must ue on the Multiplexor Channel.
•• The 2311 Disk Storage Drive 2,: hyte:;
of main storage (Model H) ••• one 1.0')2 Printer-Keyboarl ••• one
selector channel for each tape chilnnpl of the system ,being
emulate1
one 2liOO series Magnetic Tape unit, for Pdch 729
Tape Unit to be emulated ••• one 2400 series Magnetic Tape Unit
for
initial loading of the Emulat.or proq'rarr (suLsPguent proqrdm
loadinq is accomplished by either a 21100 sprif>s Maqnf'tic Tal·!'
Unit or 2311 Disk Storage Drive).
Input/Output Feature Corrf'spondenc(' h. as fcllo .... s:
1401/1460 Input/Output Feature
1402 Punch Feed Read and Control Unit, Feature 115890 anri
#5895
If the Emulator PrograJn is to be loaned frail a ma Emulator Program has
been loaded,
the load device i3 availahle as
1410/7010
corresponding cievice (see h<'low).
Engineering Change Levels: The tollowinq I::C levelS are required
for proper functioning of the ~ystem/160, Model ')0 141C/7UI0
Emulator Program with phaGe enco(le.l tare drives.
EC 20,7241> on
the 11110/7010 Compatibility fedture '"
FC 730Q69 on thV LAO]
Tape Control Unit model 2 ••• lOC 730966 on the 2804 Tal'C Cont rol
unit model 2 ••• EC 730969 on the 2403 ~iodel 4,
c"
'011'1,1 6.
Version 3 Modification Level 0 does not require the above lOC's
tor Models 1. 2, and 1 taI~ drives.
The follOwing REAs are required for prorer f1lnctioninq of the
System/360 Moriel 50 1410/7010 ~mulator Pro,!ralT' with the 2314
Direct Access Stora,!e Facility,
REA 02-110-425 an,l REA 02-40-497
on the 1410/7010 compatibility fedture.
RLA 02-40-425 is in EC 112')7246
REA 02-40-4Q7 will he in EC 1120,7929
Input/output Device Correspondence is as fol10ws:
Documentation -- Program ~dterial List
Operating Instructions.
Machine Readable -- Sample Problem CarJ Geck ••• one ~-tra<-:k
(800 or 1600 bpi) DTR or one 7-track (HOO "cpi) OTR UJata
Conversion feature required) containinq the 7074 Elr.ulator
Object Deck.
The
1111017010
Ell'uldtor
Proqran. is a st3nrlalone
progrdn:
that: executes 1410/7010 progrdll's when used on a :3ystem/360 Mo,lel
50 equipped with the 14lU/7010 Compatihility Feature (114478).
The Emulator consists ot
the Compatihili,ty Feature an-l the
Emulator Program.
Currently operating
non
t ilPe-depenJent
1410/7010
proqraros
can be execute:l without rnoditication,
although certain special and custom features arE' not emulat0.d.
System/360 Model 50 1410/7010 Emulator proSl!:!!!!!
for use with Compatibili~_~~~~~~~:
1410/7010
1/0
iquivalpnt
Mo~pl ')0
Devices
Systc~/360,
I/O Devicps
1402 Card Read Punch, Mdl 2*
2')40
1442 Card Feader, Mdl 3·
1442 Cari Read Punch, Mdl Nl
14U1 Printer, Mdl 1, 2, or 1*
1403 Printer, Mrtl 2 or Nl
1404 Printer, ~dl 2
729 II, IV, V. or VI
Tape Units
2401, 2402, 2403, 2404,2420 Ndl
5, or 2415 Ma9netic Tape Units
Mdl 1,2,3,4,5, or 6, 7-track or
9-track or 3420 Models 3, 5 or
7**
~:agnptic
eliroinat in9 the requiremen t to convert all 1410/7010 pro,! rdn,s
before installing Systern/160, the ~mulator
for user education in system/360 concerts,
an~
edses th('
pressure of proqram testing.
By
Not to be reproduced without written permission
C~r~
Read Punch
IB,.,
IBM
Programming
S Y s t e m /
6 0 - 370
P r o 9 ram m
P 360C.3
Feb 72
n 9
Con v e r s i o n / S e r v i c e
~agnetic
7330 Ma!netic Tape Units
Sarres as for the 729
Tape Unit.s
1415 console Printer
1052 Printer~Keyboard. M~l 7.
with printing ele~ent ~9~72
1301 Disk Storage
2302 Disk or 2314 Direct
Access Storage Facility ***
Most currently operating non-time-dependent 70QO proqrams can b",
executed without' modification.
although certain s[·ecia1 and
custom features are not emulated.
Model Correspondence
as follows for 2302:
Two Model 1
One 110del 2
Four Model 1
Two Model 2
Two ~1odel 1 and
One Model 2
One
One
One
One
110del
Model
Model
Model
3
3
4
4
The performance of the Emulator- will vdry according to t.tI",
combination of instructions uspd and the dctivity of the I/O in
support of the emulated 70HO program.
The average internal
speed of the Emulator on Systerr/360 Mo,jel 6~ is arl,roxin,dtely
equal to that of the 7080.
One Model
Model Correspondence
as follows for 2314:
1301 Mdl °1 ••• DASF ...
1301 Mdl 2 '"
DASF •••
Emulated punched card equipment must previously have been
assigned to 1410/7010 Channel 1.
3420 Model 7 is not supported at 1600 bpi nine-track; during
simultaneous operations, the combined data rate on the system
cannot exceed 600KB.
Input/Output Feature correspondence is as follows:
1410/7010 Feature
Model 50 Feature
1402 51-Column Interchangeable Read Feed. Feature
HOl3 and 14150
2540 50-Column InterchangeRead Feed, Feature 14151
Input/Out?ut Feature
Corres~ondence
2302 Disk Storage
Model correspondence as
follows:
One 2302 Model 1
One 2302 Model 2
Throughput performance of the 7080 Enmlator is
lept'ncipnt ul.on'
the
mixture of instructionG executE'd nn,1 the cOIT'par-nt ivp
performance of equivalent I/O devices used in the GUH,ort. of
given application.
However. experience with the 70HO EJllulittor
indicates that throughput time {or most Emulator Johs will be
approximately equal to the joh time on the 70QO.
The 7080 configuration beinq emulated may incluJe t.en ta~e units
on each of four channels. a 7153 Console an'j a 7502 Console Cdrd
Reader.
7~80
In addition to the
requirements are:
System/360
One selector channel for each communication channel of t.he
7080 being emulated.
2314 DASF***
One 2"00 series Magnetic 'laoe Unit for each
being emulated.
DASF •••
DASF •••
one
an,
SRL Publications -- Sy>1telT'F~60 Basic FrolralT'n ing !;:ll'pOrt,
Operating Guide for Basic Assembler ar:u Utilitie:3, C~R6557-3 ••• System/360 Model 50. Emulation ot thp 1410/701C
Data Processing System. C28-6~bH-I. an,:! TNL ~'27-1L4'j.
Unit
Device Correspondence 'lahlp for 7080 Emulator
7080 Units
Console Typ<."writer
(choice,ot iirect 10~2
or 2150/10')2)
2150 ConsolE' with
·1052 p!:inter-Keybodr,l
Or
lO~2 Printer-Keybo,lrd
via 117920
7153 Console
control Unit
7621 Tape Control
2.4
729 Magnetic Tape
units
2.4.5,6
7502 Console Card
Reader
The 70RO Ln'ulator- ProqrdIr.
is a ~tanl-alone proqram
that expcutpy
cur~ently
operating 7080 programs when 'ls+"l on Sy,c;ten / .100 MoJel 65
equipped with the 70RO COll'patibility Feature (lI711fl). T~e
Emulator Proqram an,j the
comp"ltihi1ity
Feature
togpther
constitute the Emulator.
Programs [or 705 1/11 awl 70', III can
be run if they are compatible with the 70ell).
This IIGually
requires running these proqrams in con;unction with'INT5RO.
However. 705 III programs that can be run without I~T~80 on thp
7080 will run on the Emulator within the restraints of thr
Emulator support.
Tare
Input/Output device correspondence is:
Documentation -- Program Material List
Operating Instructions.
Machine Readable -- Absolute Loa'ler, I:n'u la tor Ol'iec 1 . :1eck,
Sample Problem and Disk Loacler availahle on one ,j-tr,lck
(800 or 1600 bpi) or one 7-track (800 cpi) DTR (OJta
Conversion feature require,i).
729
If l.he Emulator Proqram is to b<." loacjed trorr a ma'lnptic tapp
unit equipped with the 7-track Read/Write Head (~,}'i57). the 7track Compatibility Feature (117125, 117126. 117127) and the Jatd
Conversion Feature (~3228 Ot· 113236) must hp installed on thp
associated tape control unit.
After the [.:rogr,an" has l,een
loaded, the load device is available as a 7080 corresponding
device.
va
360C-ZU-726
Pro~~~:
Feature.
One 1052 Printer-Keyboard.
••• Three 2314 disk units are needed to Pl11ulate
1301/2302 access drn,.
Unus",c1 2 114 jisk Hni ts
available for any other JesireJ operation.
System/360 -- 7080 Emulator
compatibility
At least 262K bytes of main storaqe
(Model H)
for thE'
emulation of a 7080 wi t.t. 80,000 charact.ers of rren.ory.
~ 24 K
bytes of m,ain storage (Modell) is the minirruIf' requi rement
to emulate a 7080 with a 160,000 character ~emory.
is as follows:
Disk initialization may be performed using ,-ysten'/360 Direct
Access Storage Device Initialization Program. 360P-UT-213_
Basic Program II.aterial
By eliminating the requirement
to convert all 7080 pro'1 rarr,s
before installing the System/360, the Emulator al,lows the user
to better allocate his programming resources toward develo(Jinq
new applications and redesigning existing applicat ion~; to take
full advantage of system/360 facilities.
Use of thf' Elllulator
also permits continued running of the' critical production
workload during the early (Jeriod of installation when there dH'
normally large testing requirements for new rroqrarni.
1
7
2401 !-:agnetic T,ll'e Unit 1-6
an.l Control, or.
2Q03 'ldl'P Corl'trol, and
1.2.3
2816 switching Unit
1
or
240" ~agnetic Tape Unit 1.2.1
a n,l Cont rol, or
2804 Tape Control
1.2
2401. 2402. 2403
MagnetiC Tape Units or
2404 Magnetic Tape Unit
or 2420 Magnetic Tape Unit
or 3420 Magnetic Tape Unit
1442
2501
2520
2540
Card
Card
Card
Card
1-6,8
1-6
1-3
5-7
3,5.7
Read Punch. or Nl
Reader. or
Bl.B2
Read Punch, or Bl
Read Punch
Note: Tape drives must be emulated on a drive~for-drive-per
aiaii'nel basis ••• as many tape cont:'ol uni ts are required on the
System/360 as are necessary for the tape drives required. Use of
3420s requires Version 4 Mod Levell :of 360C-EU-727.
System/360 Unit Record Devices can be attached to either or both
Selector and Multiplexer Channels contained in the same system.
Not ,to be reproduced without written permiSSion
IBM
S y
8
t
o-
e m/
Con v e r 8
Basic Prosram Mat!fia1
7 0
p 360C.4
Feb 72
P r o 9 ram min q
o n / S e r vic e
Engineerinc:t
360C-EU-727
Change
Levels
REA
02-06-177
on the 1410
required for proper functioning of
System/360 Model 40 1410/7010 Emulator Program with the 2314
Direct Access Storage Facility. This REA is in EC t258013 •
compat~b~l~ty feature ~s
saL
Pablioa.ion8 -- system/360 Conversion Aids:.
The 1080
. .lator Proq~am for system/360 Model 65, C27-6911-1 and
TNLs N21-1249, 1357.
Sample
DocomeD~atiOD
-- program Material List
Operating Instructions.
Inpu~;Output
Device
Corres~~ndence
Problem
11110/7010 I/O Devices
Machine Readable -- One 9-track (800 or 1600 bpi) or 1-track
(800
cpt)
DTR
110 Card Reao Punch
1~"2
1442 Card Redd Punch ~11 Nl
2'>01 Card Reajer M~l 81 or B2
2'>20 Card RPdd Punch ~dl 81
Card Reader
Model 3.
1"03 Printer Mdl l,2,or3
1403 Printer Mdl 2 or
1404 Printer ~dl 2
129 II. IV. V. and VI
Magnetic Tape Unit5
~l
2401, 2402, 2403, or 2404
Magnetic Tape units, ~'ll
1, 2, 3. 4, 5, or 6, 8** or
2420 Mdl 5** or 2415 Magnetic Tape
Units Mdl 1,2,3,4,5, or 6, 7-track
or 9·track or 3420t Models 3 and 5**
1410h610
The
Emulator
Proqra~ is a standalone pr~ram that executes 1410/7010 progrdlT's when used on a
sy9tem~O M, 117126, 117127). and the Dat.a
Conversion Feature
(113228 or 113236) IT'U~t hI" installed on the
associated Tape Control Unit. After the Ell'ulator PrO to take
full advantage of system/360 fdci1ities.
Use of the Emulator
also allows inunediate production runs IIpon in5talldtion an·1
eases the pressure of proqram testing.
The 1442 and. 2520 can be used to-emulate either
a reader
or a punch, but not both at the same time.
2401, 2402,2403, 2404, and 2420-5, and 3420-3,5,7 magnetic
tape units. U~e of 34205 requires Version 3 Mod Level 1 of
360C-FU-72J.
During simultaneous operations, the comhined data rate on
the system cannot exceed 640KB.
Basic Program Material [360C-EU-729]
SRL
Publications
System/360 Conversion Aids: The
709/7090/7094/709411 Emulator Program for System/360
Model 65, C28-6565-3
System/360 Conversion Aidsl
Sample Problems for System/360 Emulator Programs, C276929.
Documentation -- Program Material List
Mos~
c1II:rently-operating,
nOD-time-dependent.
7090
s~ri('s
proqrams ean be executed without modification: howevpr. certain
devices and special features are not enlulated.
Performance of the 7090 Emulator varies according to the
instructions used and the I/O activity of the emulated 7090
series program. The average internal speed of the Emulator when
it is executing non-I/O instructions is approximately twice that
of the 7090 on the Model 65.
Throughput performance is highly dependent upon the mixture of
instructions and the comparative performance of equivalent I/O
devices used for a given application. However, on the Hodel 65
throughput time for most jobs will be approximately equal to the
job time on the 7094 Hodel 1. Timing information that may be
used to-estimate throughput is presented in the SRL publication,
System/360 Conversion Aids: The 709/7090/7094/709411 Emulator
Program for System/360 Model 65. C28-6565.
Minimum macnine reqUirements:
System/360 Model 165
(524,288
bytes of main storage)
••• 7090 Compatibility Feature (.7119)
••• one 1052 Printer-Keyboard Model 7 with 1052 Adapter ('7920)
or with 2150 Console ••• one 2400 series Magnetic Tape Unit
(9-.
track, or 7-track with the Data Conversion Feature) ••• two
additional units of initialization from the follmring
2400series Magnetic Tape Unit, 2501 Card Reader or 1442, 2520, or
2540 Card Read Punch.
uata transfer operations during emulation are restricted to
simultaneous operation of 2420 I'lodel 7' s on two channels.
the
709/7090/7094i7094 11
System/360
~
2065 Processing Unit
J
7109 Arithmetic Sequencer Unit
1,IH,J
With 709/7040/7044/7090/
7094/7094 II Compatibility
Functions provided by 2065
7302 Core ..;torage
1,3
2365 Processor Storage I
2365 Processor Storage III
2365 Processor Storage J
7L07 Jata Channel(s)
«(.;hannels ,\ thru i.l
supported)
1,2.3,
4,5
2860 selector Channel(s)
1,2,3
729 l'ape unit
2,4,5,
2401,2402,2403 magnetic
tape units
2404 magnetic tape units
2420
3420
l,2, 3,
4,5,6,11
1,2,3
and' 7
1,5,7
6
***
711 Card rteader
711i l"rinter
2540 Card Read Punch
1442 Card ilead i'unch*
2420 Card rtea' Punch*
2501 Card ReaJer
2400/3400 Series Magnetic
Tape Cnit**
1052 l"rinter-Keyboard
1403 Printer
1443 Printer
2400/3400 Series Magnetic
Tape Unit**
721 Card l'uncn
2540 Card itead Punch
1442 Card Read Punch*
1442 Card Punch
2520 Card Read Punch·
2520 Card Punch
2400/3400 Series Magnetic
Tape Vnit**
rEP
S stem/360 Simulator of
the
7090 7094 D,lta Proccssl.nq SystC'm:
Syst~m/3GO Simulator
the 7090/~4
is a
st;mcl-a1one
Systtcm/360
nronram tnat, '"i thout additional han.h'Jarc, ena!,lcs .:JrooraI'1S t;lat
have uecn operatinq on a 7090/94 to be executed on an"
System/360 ildving a suitable confiquration.
rBl~
The
of
By providinq lJroqram "com::>atibility," tne simulator relieves
reoro<'rLlmmino schedules. and can eli'Tlinate the need tn conv"rt
infre,uentlj used Droorams.
All standard 7090/7094 instructions and features are simulated.
and in addition to 7090/7094 programs the simulator executes 709
programs and 704 programs designed for 8K or 16K running under
the
7lJ4/709/7090
Input/Output Compatibility Program.
The
functions of 7090/7094 input/output devices are performed by
corresponding System/360 devices.
[Note: Simulation of the 70.4/709/7090 I/O Compatibility
Program is provided to the users who retained an operational
copy. This program is withdrawn and will not be provided.]
.·Iatching xe<.juirements are as follows:
71011 l'rocessiny lmit
(7090)
7110 l'rocessiny Unit
(70H)
7111 t"rocessiny Unit
(7094 II)
Machine Readable -- The Emulator Object Program, the Emul~tor
Initialization Deck,
the sample program, and the Emulator
Initialization Object Program are available on one 9-track
(800 or 1600 bpi)
or one 7-track
(800 cpi), DTR Data
Conversion feature required.
;a
The simulator uses the System/36Q Standard Instruction Set,
Floating Point Arithmetic, and the Interval Timer.
It also
reauires:
a minimum of 262,144 bytes of main storage (Model H)
•• : one 1052 Printer-Keyboard ••• one device for input of the
si'rnulator program (2400 Magnetic Tape Unit, 9-track or 7"'.track
with 'Data Conversion Feature ••• one device for simulator
control information input ••• for each device simulated, one of
the devices shown for it in the following table:
7090/7094 Device
Systern/360 Device
7151 Console
1052 Printer-Keyboard, any model compatible with the system
711 Card Reader
1442 Card Read Punch. Mdl Nl, equipped
with card-image option: or 2540 Card
Read Punch: or 2501 Card Reader. Mdl Dl
or B2: or 2520 Card Read Punch, Mdl Bl;
or 2400 Magnetic Tape Unit, Mdl 1, 2. or
3 (7- or 9-track), 4, 5, or 6 (9-track).
710 Printer
1443 Printer, Mdl Nl: or 1403 Printer:
or 1052 Printer-Keyboard: or 2400 Magnetic Tape Unit. Mdl 1. 2. or 3 (7- or
9-track), 4, 5, or 6, (9-track).
721 Caro Punch
1442 Card Read Punch, Mdl Nl equipped
with card-image option: or 2540 Card
Read Punch: or 1442 Card Punch. Mdl N2:
Bl
ill,b2
Bl,B2
2,3,7,
Nl
~l
;.il
;,2
HI
B2,i!3
Not to be reproduced w.ithout written permission
IBM
S y 8 t e m / 3
Con v e r s
729 Magnetic Tape Unit
o-
7 0
o n /
S e r vic e
P r o '9
ram min
P 360C.6
Feb 72
9
or 2520 Card Read Punch, Mdl Bl; or 252Q
Card Punch, Mdl ~2 or B3, or 2400 Magnetic Tape Oni~, Mdl 1, 2, or 3 (7- or
9-track) 4, 5, or 6 (9-track).
7070/7074 core storaoe canacities from 5,000 to 30,000 words are
simualted, as well as all standard features,
Ploatinq Decimal
ppint
(Option #4420), and Additional Storaoe (Ontion #1017).
The functions of 7070/7074 innut/output devices are performed by
correspondinq System/360 devices.
2400 Maqnetic Tape Unit, Mdl 1, 2, or
(7- or 9-track), 4, 5, or 6 (9-track)
or 8 (7-track)
The Simulator uses the System/360 Standard Instruction
the Decimal Arithmetic option.
It also requires:
131,072 bytes (~dl G) if simulated system is 5K or 10K
262,144 bytes (Mdl H) if simulated system is 15K to 30K
Card Read Punch devices must be equipped with the Card Image
feature
(1442),
the Column Binary feature (2540), ('1532) or
with Data Mode 2 (2501, 2520).
• One 1052 Printer-Kevboard
In some cases, the simulator program input,
and the control
information input, can be handled by the same d~vices as those
used for simulated-device functions.
One device for innut of the 7070/7074 proaram.
The Simulator produces correct results only for programS that
work properly on the original system, and may produce incorrect
results for time-dependent programs.
For each device simulated, one of the devices
in the followinq table:
There are limitations on the length of magnetic tape
records which can be directly accepted by the Simulator.
These are explained in detail in the SRL.
Variable Length Multiply (VLM), Variable Lenqth Divide or
Halt
(VDH),
and Variable Length Divide or Proceed (VDP)
instructions in which the count field is greater than 35
are treated as invalid.
The di. ffernnce in timincr of the 7090 and the Systel'l/360
may C"llo;C nrorrral'lS not nrotecteel b'o' the Loael Chd.
on0
711,
onc
716,
or
one
721
Ciln
System/360 Device
1052 Printer-Keyboard, an? model comnatible with the system
7501 Console Carel
~eader
Canl
Carel
Card
Carel
7500 Card Reader
1-14 2
2501
2520
2540
2401
I,
Card Read "unch, tJ:oelel Nl
Card Reader, ~-lodel [31 or [32
Card Read Punch, ","ode 1 fll
Cilrel Read Punch
- 2403 ~··ilqnetic Tape Unit, Fodel
2, or 3 (9-track onl·')
7550 Card Punch
1442 Carn Pead Punch, ~lodel Nl
2520 Card Read Punch, 1-1dl III
1442 Card Punch, Model N2
2520 Card Punch, Mdl B2 or f33
2540 Card Read Punch
2401 - 2403 ~aCfnetic Tane Unit,
t'odel I, 2, or 3 (9-track only)
7400 Printp.r
1403
1443
2401
1,
iJe
[3GOC-SI-750J
SRL
Publications
IU~
System/360 ConVersion Aids:
The
7090/7094 Simulator Program for IB:1 System/360, C28-6532-2.
Program ~aterial List.
:-Iachine J{eadable -- The 7090/7094 Simulator Program Object Deck
and ~ample Program is available on one 9-track DTR (800 or 1600
bpi)
or 7-track DTR
(800 cpi)
Data Cqnversion Feature is
required.
Read Punch, ~'odel Nl
Reader, t'odel Bl or 132
Read Punch, Model 131
Read Punch
1442
2501
2520
2540
Printer, ~1odel 2
Printer, ~lodel Nl
- 2403 ~aqnetic Tane Unit, r-lodel
2, or 3 (9-track onl")
240 1 - 2403 ~aanetic Taoe Uni t, Y-'ode 1
1, 2, or 3 (7-track or 9-track) or
8 . ('l-track)
(Note that Moel('lq 4, 5, anel 6 of 2400-series tane units cannot
be used.)
721
dasic Program Material
for it
7150 Console Tynewriter
a
be simulated.
s~O'Nn
7070/7074 Devic('
The noi nt \.;it'1in " nl'OCfram run uneler Simulator control at
whic l 1 iln I/n interruntion occurs will not;: necessaril:!
coincid0 wit~ the corrcsnonelinCf interruption point when
t l lat rroara!'"! is run on
70g0.
A maximum of fnur 7G07 Oata Channels
and
Main Storaqe
(Note that Models 4, 5, and 6 of 2400-Series Maqnetic Tape Units
will be written at 1600 bpi density).
Restrictions and Limitations: Before a 7090 program is run
under control of the Simulator, the following restrictions and
limitations must be considered.
Set
Tane Unit
(any motlel)
~~acrnetic
In some case<;, the nroqram input, control information inC)ut, and
simulat('d-ertane Drive
••• 1414 Input/Outnut Synchronizer, Mell 6
Intervill Timer
Peature
Read Binarv Tane Feature ••• Diaqn0stic Oneration
Cod",; +08/-:-08 and +09/-09 - treated as NOP
Unit Record
Sianal
(US)
treated as NOP ••• ~ane No-O~ Select (TSEL) treated as Non.
The follo-_vino rna:' im))ose a limitation for cC'rt"in nrO'lrams:
• Ta:'>c Read Alpha (TRA) renlaces Delta characters '.'li th the
ill,)harneric code 29 if the reconl i.s not in "imulator
internal format.
Reference :-Iaterial
~ddress
liM Syste.n/3GO
System swnmary, /\22-6810
IKI System/360
Principles qf uperation, A22~6821 ••• IB~ 7090 Principles of
Operation, A22-6528 ••• Iil~ 7094 PrincipleS of Operation, A226703.
IB~
System/360
Simulator
of
the
Tile System/360 Simulat()r
of the 7070/7074 is a
stand-alone
System/360
pro"rnm t~at, without ar.ditional hardware, enables or0crrams that
have been o~eratin(] on a 7070/7074 to he executed on any
SYHt01'1/3t;O havino a sllita!:le confiqurat~on.
Stop is simulated
instruction address.
only
if
it
results
from
an
0 r toe simulated Sto~ l~ey durin .... execution of a branc!1
places the branch ilcc1rp.ss int" t:le "il'lulated
instruction counter.
Use
o~)eration
The ProCfram r:eqister is not simulated; ",h('n simulated
execut iOll is stonped by a proCframmcr] hal t, the ston ke,',
or an error condition, the current 7070/74 instruction and
the contents of the instruction counter ilre nrinted.
In~ 7d7~77074 Data Procns~lng System:
• j'aximuJ'l BCD in))ut/output
tape
record
l"ncrth
is
20,000
Bit renresentations of invalid characters are not
blanks or System/360 characters arc ty .... cel in,;tead.
tyned;
bytes~
- '1y proviclinq nrooram "compatibility",
the simulator reliev.es
renr()'lril:"minI'T schedul"s, and can eliminate the n('('d to convert
infrcqu0ntl'l u"ed nrO'lral'ls.
Not to be reproduced without written permission
IB:M,
IBM
S y s t e m /
7
P r o g ram m
n g
P 360C.7
Feb 72
prograJIBUinq
C o'n v e r s i o n / S e r v i c e
~ystem/360 device corresponding to each 1410/7010 device to be
simulated is required as follows:
A
Basic Program Material -[360C-SI-753)
Documentation - Program Material List •••
the 7070/7074 Simulator Manual, C2B-6530.
Conversion
Machine Readable
The object programs
functions and supporting functions ••• and the
may be obtained on one 9-track or 7-track
If 9-track
forwarded.
required.
or
7-track
is
not
Aids
for
all simulator
sample program
specified, 9-track will be
No tape submittal is
IBM System/360 1410/7010 Simulator Program:
The
1410/7010
Simulator Program
is a stand-alone
system/360 progr.am that enables programs that
have
been
operating on a 1410/7010 to be executed on a System/360 having a
suitable configuration.
By providing program ·compatibility,·
the simulator relieves reprogramming
schedules,
and
can
e1imina t e the need to convert infrequently used programs.
The Simulator produces correct results only for programs that
work properly on the original system, and may produce incorrect
results for time-dependent programs.
The System/360 must be equipped with the devices needed to
service the simulator, as well as those required to provide a
configuration corresponding to that of the original system.
The Simulator requires:
• One 1052 Printer-Keyboard.
• One device for program input
• One device for simulator control information input.
One corresponding device for each simulated device.
In some cases, the program input, control, and
functions can be handled by the same device.
1410/7010 Device
System/360 Device
1415 Console
1052 Printer-Keyboard, any model
compatible with the System/360
configuration.
1402 Card Read Punch
Model 2
2540 Card Read Punch
1442 Card Reader, Mdl
1442 Card Read Punch, Mal Nl
2501 Card Reader, Mdl Bl or B2
2520 Card Read Punch, ~ldl Bl
1403 Printer,Mdl 1,2,or
1403 Printer, Mdl 2
1443 Printer, Mdl Nl
729 Magnetic Tape Unit
Mdls II, IV, V, VI
7330 Magnetic Tape Unit
2401, 2402, 2403 Maqnetic Tape
Mdls 1, 2, 3, or B (7-track)
Note: .0:1+"'''' series tape units
cannot be used.
and
the
can
be
simulated
si~ulated.
The len'Jtfi~f records is limited to the size of the I/O
buffers
(5'1<: to l20K characters, depending on the main
storage capacity of the System/360 and on that of the
1410/7010 and the number of channels simulated).
Minimum system requirements:
The simulator operates with the
Standard Instruction set and the Decimal Arithmetic option.
I-lai n storage requirements depend on the 1410 or 7010 core
storage being simulated as follows 7010
Core Storage
(Chara'cters)
System/360
Main Storaqe
(bytes)
10,000
65,536 (Model
20,000
65,536 (Model F)
F)
40,000
40,000
131,072 (Model r,)
60,000
60,000
131,072 (!"odel r-)
80,000
80,000
(2 channels)
131,072 (Model r,)
80,000
(4 channels)
262,144 (Model H)
100,000
-
[360C-SI-754]
If 9-track or 7-track DTR is not specified, 9-track DTR will be
supplied.
No tape submittal is
required.
1401 compatibility is not simulated.
1410
Core Storage
(Characters)
bpi
Documentation
Program Material List
IBM System/360
Conversion Aids- 1410/7010 Simulator for IBM System/360 Manual,
C28-6528.
Programs which rely on 1410/7010 internal machine ti",ing
to overlap I/O and CPU operations may produce incorrect
results.
Only the main console functions are
1600
'Any 2400-series Magnetic Tape Unit used to read or write 7-track
tapes must be equipped with the 7-track Compatibility feature
('7125) and a 7-track Read/Write Head (19557).
The 7-track
Compatibility feature must be installed on the associated tape
control unit.
Information on simulation
limitations
and
performances
under
simulation
can be found in the SRL
publication, System/360 Conversion Aids: The 1410/7010 Simulator
for System/360, C28-6528-l, and in the Proqramming section of
the DP Sales Manual.
(360C-SI-754]
The main restr'ictions and limitations are:
devices
at
nachine Readable - 9-track or 7-track (Data Conversion Feature
required) DTR containing
Common programs, SIM 10, PREP 10,
UPDATE 10, SYSINEND and sample program.
Floating point arithmetic.
Processing overlap ('5730).
Priority processing (.5620).
Inverted Print-Edit (comma-period).
One to four channels.
I/O
and
Simulation of the 1402 Card Read Punch, Model 2, with Read and
Punch Column Binary feature (16025) requires a Column Binary
Data Mode 2 feature on the 2821 Control Unit (11990).
Basic Program Haterial
The 1410/7010 simulator handles all standard features
following optional features of the simulated system:
25
4, 5,
simulated-device
Performance under simulation depends largely on the balance of
CPU and I/O operations.
No more than
simultaneously.
mode~s
Simulation of the 1402 Card Read Punch, Model 2, with 51-column
Interchangeable Read Feed feature (14150) requires a 2540 Card
Read Punch with 51-column Interchangeable Read Feed feature
(14151) •
262,144 (Model H)
Not to be reproduced without written ptrmissi()n
D~ Programming
IBM
P 360C.B
System/360 - 370 Programming
Co n v er s i 0
ALGOL-to-PL/I (F) Language Conversion Program The ALGOL-to-PL/I (F) Language Conversion Program (LCP)
assists customers in the transition
from OS/360 ALGOL-to-PL/I (F)' The LCP itself, intended for operation within the
System/360 Operating System, is written in PL/I (F). It is distributed in object
module form on disk or on tape.
Minimum System Requirements --TAe machine requirements depend on the type of run
to be made: a conversion run or.a I ink-editing run for creating the LC P load module.
For a conversion run by the LCP:
One System/360 Model 40 with 12BK bytes of main storage. The LCP itself
needs a minimum of 54K bytes to operate in a PCP or MFT environment. The 54K
bytes include the Data Management Routines and buffers. To use the LCP with MVT,
it is suggested that 6K be added to the SlZE chosen so as to obtain the REGION
spec ificat ion.
Feb 72
n/S erv ice
One System/360 Model 40 with 12BK bytes of main storage. The LCP itself
needs a minimum of 70K bytes to operate in a PC~ or MFT environment. The 70K
bytes include the Data Management Routines and buffers. To use the LC P with
MVT, it is suggested that 6K be added to the SIZE chosen so as to obtain the
REGIQN specification.
Standard instructi on set
Decimal Arithmetic feature
Floating Point Arithmetic Feature
Minimum peripheral equipment required by the Operating System
The Logical data sets.used by the LCP are shown in t'able below. Note that when
these data sets are on DASD, they may be placed on the same volume as the system residence.
Logical Data Sets Required by the LCP for a Conversion Run
Standard instruction set
DATA SET
Decimal Arithmetic feature
Floating Point Arithmetic feature
FUNCTION
Source Input
Magnetic Tape Unit, Card
Reader, Direct Access
Storage Device
1
2085 Processor Unit
Any
Object Program -- As a general guidel ine to facil itate installation planning, it is
estimated that the sample programs, when translated and compHed by the PL/I F Compiler will take between one and one third and one and two thirds times as long to
execute as the original COBOL programs and will occupy up to 3 times as much core
storage. Note that the programs tested are not necessarily representative of all
COBOL programs and the above information is presented as a guidel ine only.
7110 Processing Unit (7094)
1
With 709/7090/7094/
709411 Compatibility
COBOL -to-ANS COBOL Language
Conversion Program:
This Language Conversion Program
(LCP) operates under OS/360 and
assists users in the transition from
COBOL E or COBOL F to OS/360 ANS COBOL, 360C-CV-713.
Minimum System Requirements - For conversion: One System/360 Model 30 with
64K bytes of main storage. The LCP itself requires a minimum of 26K bytes to
operate in a PCP or MFT environment. To use the LCP with MVT, it is suggested
that 4K be added to the SIZE chosen to obtain the REGION specification.
709/7090/7094/709411
Model
7111 Processing Unit (709411)
Functions provided by 2085
7109 Arithmetic Sequencer U!lit
7302 Core Storage
1,3
2365 Processor Storage
2385 Processor Storage
7607 Data Channel(s) (Channels
A thru H supported)
1,2,3,
4,S·
2860 Selector Channel(s)
2870 Multiplexer ChannelCs)
2,4,5,
6
Any tape unit supported by
the'operating system baSic
seqUential access method
729 Tape Unit
711 Card Reader
2
Any card reader with Card
Image Feature or SVS IN
device supported ily the
operating system queued
sequential access method
if SVSIN is used for binary
cards, the Automatic SVSIN
batching reader must be used
. The combination of the program and the compatibility feature
enables programs written for the IBM 1401, 1440, or 1460 Data Processing Systems
to be executed on the Model 155, 155 II, 158. Most 1401/1440/1460 programs
require ;10 changes for execution under the emulator, although certain special and
cMstom features are not emulated. Emulation is provided for 1401/1440/1460
systems with main storage Sizes from 2,000 to 16,000 positions of core stora~e.
os:
All basic features are emulated, along with the following optional features: Expanded
Print Edit ..• Inverted Print Edit ••• High-LOw-Equal Compare ... Multiply-Divide
• .. Processing Overlap ..• Sense Switches ..• Advanced Programming/ Indexing •••
Bit Test ..• Print Storage ••. Additional Print Control .•• Space Suppression •••
Scan Disk (in load mode) ••• Selective Stacker.
The following features and operations are not emulated: Column Binary ..• Binal)'
Transfer .•• 51-column Card .•• Punch-Feed Read .•. Read-Punch Release •••
Card Image (on 1442) ... Selective Tape Listing (on 1403) ." Compressed Tapes.
The following input/output devices are not emulated; 1404 Printer ... 1444 Card
Punch ••. 1445 Printer ... 7340 Hypertape Drive ..• 1011 Paper Tape Reader
••. 1012 Paper Tape Punch .•• Optical Readers .•• MagnetiC Character Readers
••• Tel~proc~ssing Devices.
Basic Program Material:
Documentation: BaSic Program Material List; 1401/1440/1460 Emulator on
Models 135, 145, 155 (GC33-200S).
Machine Readable: Load modules, emulator generation macro definition and
sample program.
Optional Program Material:
Documentation: Optional Program Material List.
Machine Readable: Source statements and macro".
Ordering Infonnation: See the last page in this section (Conversion/Service) •
Additional copies of the form numbered manual should be ordered from Mechanicsburg __
not from PID.
Additional Program Support Material:
Program Listings: Available on microfiche from IBM Corporation, Microfiche
Distribution, Mechanicsburg. When ordering use Group Code G~Dl-2100.
Publication: 1401/1440/1460 Emulator on Models 135, 145, 155 Logic
(GY33-7011). Available only from Mechanicsburg .
The 1401 Model G is not emulated.
Internal speed - Model 155 only - (perfonnance of CPU instructions only and weighted
by frequency of use) of the integrated emulator Is approximately 1. 75 times that of the
1401/1460 standalone emulator for the IBM System/360 Model 40. Throughput
under emulation is not detennined as much by the emulator as it is by the 1400 program being executed. Throughput of 1400 jobs is affected by the mix of CPU operations (executed by the compatibility feature and/or the emulator program), input/output
operations (executed by the emulator program), and the amount of interference from
higher-priority partitions or regions.
The emulator program takes advantage of the multiprogramming facilities of the
Operating System, Other problem programs, such as utility programs, user jobs,
compilers, and more than one II integrated" emulator program can be executed concurrently
The emulator program uses the data managemen~ services of the operating system, and
takes advantage of the automatic allocation of resources and the device independence
achieved by these services. The operating system error recovery procedures are also
used. Both emulator jobs and System/360 or System/370 jobs can be placed in a
Single input job stream for processing,
Card, tape, and disk programs are emulated. Cards and tapes, used and produced by
the 1401/1440/1460 system 'or by other emulator programs, and mixed parity tapes,
are emulated. Disk files must be converted before they can be used by the emulator
program. Two tape fonnatting programs are provided with the emulator program: (1)
to assist the user in converting his tape files before emulation so they can be used
more efficiently by the emulator program, and (2) to convert tape files produced during
emulation back to the 1401/1440/1460 format so they can be used on the original
system. In addition, a disk fonnatting program is provided to assist the user in converting his disk files.
Disk files created by the 1401/1440/1460 system or an emulator program must be
dumped onto tape using a 1401/1440/1460 utility program, and then restored to
disks that have been fonnatted by the disk formatting program. Both the disk fonnatting
program and the tape fonnatting programs run as problem programs under the operating
system.
System Requirements: The emulator program requires the Model 155, 155 II, 158,
the 1401;40/60, 1410/7010 Compatibility Feature (#3950>, enough main
storage for the operating system under which the emulator program is run (MFT or
MVTl, the emulator functions required for the system being emulated (emulator program
and buffers), the 1401/1440/1460 program; and enough Model 155, 155 II, 158
devices to correspond to the emulated 1401/1440/1460 deVices, in addition to the
devices required for the operating system.
Input/Output Device Correspondence is as follows:
1401/1440/1460 I/O Device*
1401 Card Read Punch
1442 Card Read Punch
1403 Printer
System/370
Model 155, 155 II, 158
Any card reader or card read punch
supported by the queued
sequential access method of the
operating system.
1443 Printer
Any printer supported by the queued
sequential access method of the
operating system,
72911, IV, V, VI Tape Unit,
• or 7330 MagnetiC Tape Unit,
or 7335 Magnetic Tape Unit
Any tape unit supported by the basic
sequential access method of the
operating system.
1407 Console Inquiry Station,
or 1447 Console
Any operator's console supported by
the operating system.
1301 Disk Storage, or 1311
Disk Storage Drive, or 1405
Disk Storage, Modell or 2
Any direct access storage device
supported by the basic direct access
method of the operating system.
1410/7010 Integrated Emulatort'rogram for the IBM
The 1410/7010 Emulator
System/370 Model 155, 155 ii, 158 Under OS:
Program executes as a prob36oc-E 0-736
lem program under the
Operating System (MFT or MVT) using the 1401/40/60, 1410/7010 Compatibility Feature (#3950>. The combination of the program and the compatibility feature
enables programs written for the 1410 or 7010 Data ProceSSing Systems to be executed on the Model 155, 155 II, 158. Most 1410/7010 programs require no
changes for execution under the emulator, although certain special and custom features
are not emulated. Emulation is provided for 1410/7010 systems with main storage
sizes from 10,000 to 100,000 pOSitions of core storage.
All basic features are emulated, along with the follOWing optional features: ProceSSing
Overlap ..• Priority Processing .'., Two Channels on 1410 .•. Inverted Print Edit
••. 7010 Second, Third, and Fourth Data Channels •.. 7010 Store and Restore
Status •.. 7010 Floating Point Arithmetic Feature.
The follOWing features and operations are, not emulated: 1401/1410 Compatibility
Mode ••• Column Binary ••• 51-Column Card .. '. Selective Stacker ... 1410/7010
Diagnostic Instruction Branch on Tape Indicate J (I) K ... 7010 Diagnostic Instruction Branch on C Bit ... 7010 Program Relocation and Storage Protection ... 7010
Interval Timer ••• Write Disk Check Operations ..• Disk CE Track Operations (i.e.,
operation with CE switch on).
The follOWing input/output devices are not emulated: 1311 Disk Storage Drive .. .
1405 Disk Storage •.. 7340 Hypertape Drive ... 1011 Paper Tape Reader ... '
1012 Paper Tape Punch ... Magnetic Character Readers ... Teleprocessing Devices
... Optical Readers.
Internal speed - Model 155 only - (performance of CPU instructions only and weighted
by frequency of use) of the integrated emulator is approximately 1.1 times that of the
1410/7010 standalone emulator for the IBM System/360 Model 50. Throughput
under emulation is not determined as much by the emulator as it is by the 1400 program being executed. Throughput of 1400 jobs is affected by the mix of CPU operations (executed by the compatibil ity feature and/or the emulator program), input/output
operations (executed by the emulator program), and the amount of interference from
higher-priority partitions or regions.
Continued
Notes:
*Programmed reading on more than one reader, printing on more than one printer, or
p,unching on more than one punch is not supported.
** If more than one System/370 direct access storage device is required to correspond
to the emulated 1401/1440/1460 disk storage deVice, all corresponding System/
370 devices must be the sam'e type of direct access storage device.
**
Not to be reproduced without written permission
IBlf1
IBM
Proqramming
Convers i on/Serv; ce
The emulator program takes advantage of the multiprogramming facilities of the
Operating System. Other problem programs, such as utility programs, user jobs,
compi lers, and more than one" integrated" emulator programs tan be executed concurrentiy.
The emulator program uses the data management services of the operating system, and
takes advantage of the automatic allocation of resources and .the device independence
achieved by these services. The operating system error recovery procedures are also
used. Both emulator jobs and System/360 or System/370 jobs can be placed in a
single input job stream for processing.
Card, tape i and disk programs are emu.ated. Cards and tapes, used and produced by
the 1410/7010 system or by other emulator programs, and mixed parity tapes, are
emulated. Disk files must be converted before they can be used by the emulator pro~
gram. Two tape formatting programs are provided with the emulator program: (l) to
assist the user in converting his tape files before emulation so they can be used more
efficiently by the emulator program, and (2) to convert tape files produced during
emulation back to the 1410/7010 format so they can be used on the original system,
In addition, a disk formatting program is prOVided to assist the user in converting his
disk files.
Disk files created by the 1410/7010 system or a stand-alone emulator program must
be dumped onto tape using a 1410/7010 utility program, and then restored to disks
that have been formatted by the disk formatting program. Both the disk formatting program and the tape formatting programs run as problem programs under the operating
system.
System Requirements: The emulator program requires a Model 155, 155 II, 158,
the 1401/4tV60, PHO/7010 Compatibility Feature (#3950), enough main storage
for the operating system under which the emulator program is run (MFT or MVT), the
emulator functions required for the system being emulated (emulator program and buffers),
and the 1410/7010 program; and enough Model 155, 155 II, 158 devices to corre- .
spond to the emulated 1410/7010 devices, in addition·to the devices required for
the operating system.
Input/Output Device Correspondence is as follows:
System/370
1410/7010 I/O Device*
Model 155, 155 II, 1581/0 Device
1402 Card Read Punch
P 360C.ll
Nov 73
System/360 - 370 Programming
Any card reader or card read punch
supported by the queued sequential
access methOd of the operating
system.
1403 Printer
Any printer supported by the queued
sequential access method of the
operating system.
72911, IV, V, VI Tape
Unit, or 7330 Magnetic
Tape Unit
Any tape unit supported by the basic
sequential access method of the
operating system.
1415 Console Printer
Any operator's console supported by
the operating system.
1301 Disk Storage,
Modell or 2, 1302 Disk
Storage, Modell or 2,
2302 Disk Storage,
Model 1 or 2
Any direct access storage device
supported by the basic direct
access method of the operating
system. **
DOS Emulator Under OS
The DOS Emulator eases the transition for DOS use;'
migrating to OS (MFT) and the System/370 Models
135,145 and·155, 155 II, 158 or OS MVT on the
Models 145 and 155, iss II, 158. The Emulalor program integrates tl-te facilities
of the DOS system into the operating environment of OS. It receives DOS jobs as
input and produces output in the same format a!' found in DOS.
Highlights: Emulation enables the new OS user to execute his DOS programs witlJout
havll1g to rewrite them.:. No re-SYSGEN or linkage edit is required for DOS.,. The
emulator supports the DOS multiprogramming environment .•. The emulator does not
dedicate OS to emulating DOS, as normal OS proceSSing occurs concurrently.
Restrictions: The following IBM units and features supported by DOS are not sUPported by the emulator:
2260 or 3270 local
1270, 1275 optical reader, sorter
1259, 1412, and 1419 magnetic character readers.
,
1227, 1288 optical character reader in document mode, when: response times
are required for pocket selection, .
Machine Readable: Load modules, emulator generation macro definition and
sample program.
Optional Program Material:
System/nO Model 165, 165 II, 168 Integrated Emulator
Program forthe 7070/1074: C360C-EU-739
Documentation: Optional Program Material List,
Machine Readable: Source statements and macros.
Ordering Information: See the last page in this section (Conversion/Service).
Additional copies of the form numbered manual should be ordered from Mechanicsburg -not from PID.
Additional Program Support Material:
Program listings: Available on microfiche from IBM Corporation, Microfiche
Distribution, Mechanicsburg. When ordering use Group Code GJDl·2~.50.
Publication: 1410/7010 Emulator on Models 145/155 Logic (GV3)-7012),
Avai lable only from Mechanicsburg.
The 7070/1074
Emulator Program executes as a problem
program under the MFT or MVT version of OS/360 on a Model 165, 165 II, 168
equipped with the 7070/7074 Compatibility Feature (.7117>. The 7070/1074
Integrated Emulator Program and the Compatibility Feature enable the Model 165,
165 II, 168 to execute, under the Operating System, programs writt~n for an IBM
7070/7074 Data Processing System with the Floating Point feature'and 10,000
words of storage. Most 7070/7074 programs that are debuggea and cue ,not timedependent can be executed without modification, Certain devices and features of the
7070/7074 system are not emulated, however.
The Integrated Emulator Program takes ad04ntage of the multiprogramming facilities of
OS/360. Other problem programs such as: user jobs, utility programs ,compilers, or
Ifdditional 7070/1074 Integrated Emulator Programs can be executed concurrentlv in
Not to be reproduced without written perml ••lon
IBM
P 360C.12
Nov 13
System/360 - 310 Programming
Co nver s ion /Serv i ce
main storage. The Emulator allows the user to direct his programming resources toward
developing new applications and redesigning existing applications to take advantage of
System/370 facilities. The Emulator uses the data management services of the Opera~
ting System, thereby achieving device independence and the automatic allocation of
s.ystem resources.
The internal speed - Model 165 only - (that is, the speed for performing 7070/1074
CPU instructions, weighted by frequency.of use) for the emulator is approximately three
times the speed of the IBM 7074 Data Processing System. Throughput depends upon
the 7070/7074 program being emulated, as determined by the following factors: the
nrix of 7070/7074 CPU operations executed by the compatibility feature, the 7070/
7074 CPU and input/output operations simulated by the emulator program, and the
amount of interruption from higher priority tasks of the Operating System.
Tape formatting programs are provided with the Emulator to assist the user in converting 7070/7074 tape files before emulation, so that they can be processed mor~
efficiently by the Emulator, and in converting tape files produced during emufation, so
that they can be us!!d on the original system. Native mode tape files must be preprocessed using the tape formatting program if record lengths exceed 32,755 bytes or if
-the complete range of data management facilities of the operating system are to be
used.
Ti,e following CP U features are not emulated: Additional Storage and aSSOCiated ,nst4"uctions ••• Interval Time Instructions .•. _ Customer Engineering D;agnostic InScructions _•• Optional Feature Instructions (except Floating Point).
The following input/output devices arE: ilOt emulated: 7907 Data Charmel .•• 7900
Inquiry Station .. , 7300 Disk Storage ... 7500 Card Reader ... 7550 Card Punch
__ • 74"00 Printer ... 7603 Input!Output Synchronizer.
The following inputjoOtput features are not emulated: Tape Read All Alpha (treated
as tape read) •.• Read Binary Tape ••• Tape Read/Write from 7074 locations
9990-9999 ••• 729 Tape Switching Feature ••• Unit Record Priority Interrupts •••
Unit Record Signal.
System Requirements: The 7070/7074 Emulator Program requires a System/370
Model 165, 165 II, 168 equipped withthe 7070/7074 Compatibility Feature; it
requires enough Model 165, 165 II, 168 devices to correspond to the 7070/7074
devices on the system being emulated (in addition to devices required by the Operating
System); it requires enough main storage for the version of the Operating System being
used (MFT or MVT), for the emulator functions needed for the 7070/7074 system
being emulated, and for the 7070/7074 program being executed.
Input/output device correspondence is as follows:
7070/7074 Device
System/370 Device
7150 Console
3066 Systems Console
7501 Console Card Reader
Any card reader or SYSIN device sup- '
ported by the Operating System Queued
Sequential Access Method.
729 1I/IV/V/V1 Magnetic
Tape U.,it
2400 Series Magnetic Tape Units
Models 1 - 6 and 8 (7-track) or 2420
MagnetiC Tape Unit Models 5 or 7 or 3420
Magnetic Tape Unit Models 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,
or 8 or any other tape unit supported by the
Basic Sequential Access Method of the Operating System* or direct access devices. **
*AII seven-track tape drives used for 7070/7074 compatible tapes must have
the Seven-Track Compatibility Feature.
'
System/370 Model 165, 165 II, 168 Integrated Emulator
Program for the 7080: (360C-EO-737)
The 7080 Integrated
Emulator Program executes as a problem
program under the MFT or MVT version of OS/360 on a Model 165, 165 II, 168
equipped with the 7080 Compatibility Feature ('10118), The 7080 Integrated Emulator Program and the Compatibility Feature enable the Model 165, 165 II, 168 to
execute, under the Operating System, programs written for an IJ:>M 7080 Data Processing System. Most 7080 programs that are debugged and are not time-dependent
can be executed Without modification. Certain devices and features of the 7080
system are not emulated, however.
The 7080 Emulator takes advantage of the multiprogramming facilities of OS/360.
Other problem programs, such as user jobs, utility programs, compilers, or additiotfal
7080 Integrated Emulator Programs, can be executed concurrently in main storage.
The Emulator allows the user to.direct his programming resources toward developing
new applications and redeSigning existing applications to.take advantage of System/
370 facilities. The Emulator uses the data management services of the Operating
System, thereby achieving device independence and the automatic allooation of system
resources.
The internal. speed - Model 165 only - (that is, the speed for performing 7080 CPU
instructions, weighted by frequency of use) of the Emulator is approximately two times
the speed of the IBM 7080 Data Processing System. Throughput depends upon the
7080 program being emulated, as determined by the follOWing factors: mix of 7080
CPU operations executed by the compatibility feature, the 7080 CPU and I/O operations simulated by the emulator program, and the amount of interruption from higher
priority tasks of the Operating System.
Tape formatting programs are provided with the Emulator to assist user in converting
7080, tape files before emulation, so that they can be processed more efficiently by
the Emulator, and in converting tape fi les produced during emulation, so that they
can be used on the original system.
Specifically excluded from support are the following items:
The IBM 7622 Signal Control, associated units and related instructions.
The IBM 7908 Data Channel, associated devices and features (including control storage bank 4) and related instructions, specifically ENABLE COMPARE
BACKWARD.
All 7080 RPQ (Request for Price Quotation) features and related instructions.
System Requirements: The 7080 Emulator Program requires a System/370 Model
165., 165 II, 168 equipped with the 7080 Compatibility Feature (#7118); it
reqUires enough Model 165, 165 II, 168 devices to correspond to the 7080 devices
on the system being emulated (in addition to devices required by the Operating System);
it requires enough main storage for the version of the Operating Syste~ being used
(MFT or MVTl, for the emulator functions needed for the 7080 system being emulated,
and for the 7080 program being executed.
Input/output device correspondence is as fo lIows:
7080 Device
System/370 Device
7153 Console
3066 Systems Console
7502 Console Card Reader
Any card reader or SYSIN device supported by the Operating System Queued
Sequential Access Method.
729 II/1V/V/V1 MagnetiC
Tape Unit
2400 Series MagnetiC Tape Units
Models 1 - 6 and 8 (7-track) or 2420
Magnetic Tape Unit Models 5 or 7 or
3420 Magnetic Tape Unit Models 3, 4,5,
6, 7, or 8 or any other tape unit supported
by the Basic Sequential Access Method of the
Operating System* or direct access devices.
**A 7074 tape in spanned variable-length format may be kept on any Model 165
direct access device supported by BSAM. The file will appear to b,' a tape to the
7070/7074 program, which can access it only through tape comma '0;.
Basic Program Material:
Documentation: Basic Program Material List with'attachment; Emulating the IBM
70.74 on the IBM System/370 Models 155 and 165 using OS/360 (GC27-6948)
and TNuGN27-1365 and GN27-1372.
Machine ~: Emulator generation macro definition, load modules and sample
prograrr•.
Optional Program Material:
Documentation: Optional Program Material List.
Machine Readable: Source program and soiJrce macros.
Ordering Information:
See page P 360C.23.
Additional Program Support Material: See pageP 360C. 23.
**
*AII seven-track tape drives used for 7080 compatible tapes must have the
Seven- Track Compatibility Feature.
**A 7080 tape in spanned variable-length format may be kept on any Model 165,
165 It, 168 direct access device supported by BSAM. The file will appear to be
a tape to the 7080 program, which can access it only through tape commands.
7080 devices not listed are not supported.
Basic Program Material:
Documentation: Basic Program Material List; Emulating the IBM 7080 on the
IBM System!370 Model 165, 165 II, 168 using OS (GC27-6952).
Machine Readable: Load modules, emulator generation macro definition and
sample program.
Optional Program Material:
Documentation: Optional Program Material list.
Machine Readable: Source statements and macros.
Ordering Information:
Same as 360CEU740 from next page applies.
Additional Program Support Material:
Program Listings: A~ailable on microfiche from IBM Corporation, Microfiche
Distribution, Mechanicsburg. When ordering use microfiche listing form number GJD1 - 1642.
Publication: Program to Emulate the IBM 7080 on the IBM System/370 Model
165 using OS Program Logic Manual (GY27-7229). (Available only from
Mechanicsburg. )
Not to be reproduced without written permission
IBr.,
IBM
Programming
Conver s i on/S erv i ce
7094 Integrated Emulator System/370 Modell 65,
165 II, 168 - OS (360C-EO-740>:
The 7094 Integrated Emulator Program executes as a
problem program under the
MFT or MVT version of OS/360 on a Model 165, 165 II, 168 equipped with the
709/7090/7094/7094 II Compatibility Feature (#7119). The 7094 Integrated
Emulator Program and the Compatibility Feature enable the Model 165, 165 II, 168
to execute, under the Operating System, programs written for a 709/7090/7094/
7094 II Data Processing System. Most 7090/7094 programs that are debugged and
are not time-dependent can be executed without modification. Certain devices and
features of the 7090/7094 system are not emulated, however.
The 7094 Emulator takes advantage of the multiprogramming facilities of OS/360.
Other problem programs, such as user jobs, utility programs, compilers, or additional
7090/7094 Integrated Emulator Programs, can be executed concurrently in main
storage. The Emulator allows the user to direct his programming resources toward
developing new applications and redesigning existing ap~lications to take advantage of
System/370 facilities. The Emulator uses the data management services of the Operating
System, thereby achieving device independence and the automatic allocation of system
resources.
The internal speed - Model 165 only - (that is, the speed for performing CPU instructions, weighted by frequency of use) of the Emulator is approximately 1. 5 times the
speed of the IBM 7094 II Data Processing System. Throughput depends upon the
7090/7094 program being emulated, as determined by the following factors: mix of
7090/7094 CPU operations executed by the compatibility feature, the 7090/7094
CPU and I/O operations simulated by the emulator program, and the amount of interruption from higher priority tasks of the Operating System.
System Requirements: The 7094 Integrated Emulator Program requires a System/370
Model 165, 165 Ii, 168, the 709/7090/7094/7094 II Compatibility Feature
('!I7119), devices required for the operating system, and one device or direct access
data set for each emulated 7094 device. All card read punch units used to read or
punch binary data must be equipped with the Card Image Feature, and all tape drives
used for 7094 compatible tapes must be equipped with the Seven-track Compatibility
Feature. Column binary card input data must be accepted in the SYSIN jobstream
through the MVT ASB reader.
Input/outp~t device correspondence is as follows:
709/7090/7094/7094 II
Model
n
7108 Processing Unit (7090>
7110 Processing Unit (7094)
7111 ProceSSing Unit (7094 III
7109 Arithmetic Sequencer Unit
729 Tape Unit
Modej 165~ 165 II, 168
Processing Unit with 709/
7090/7094/7094 II Compatibility
Functions provided by Model 165,
165 II, 168
Functions provided by Model 165,
165 II, 168
1,2,3,
4,5
2860 Selector ChannelCs)
2870 Multiplexer Channel(s)
2880 Block Multiplexer Channel(s)
2,4,5,
6
711 Card Reader
~stem/3?Q
I,
7302 Core Storaae
7607 Data Channel(s)
(Channels A through H supported)
2
Optional
Distribution Medium
Type
Code
User Volume
Requirement
2311
DTR 7DC/800 26
28
DTR 9/800
DTR 9/1600 '£9
None
None
None
2314
DTR 70C/800 26
DTR 9/800
28
DTR 9/1600 29
None
None
None
3330
MT 7DC/800
DTR 9/800
DTR 9/1600
26
28
29
01
None
None
None
MT 7DC/800
OTR 9/800
DTR 9/1600
26
28
29
01
None
None
Additional copies of the form numbered manual should be ordered from Mechanicsburg -~
not from PID.
Additional Program Support Material:
Program Listings: Available on microfiche from IBM Corporation, Microfiche Distribution, Mechanicsburg. When ordering use Group Code GJDl-1640.
Publication: IBM System/360 Operating System Emulator Program to Emulate the
IBM 7094 on the System/3 70 Model 165 Program Logic Manual (GY27-7187).
(Available only from Mechanicsburg.)
The 1401/1440/1460
Emulator Program is a
Type I Program that is
executed as a problem program under the Disk Operating System, using
the 1401/40/60, 1410/7010 Compatibility Feature (#3950>. The combination
of the program and the compatibility feature enables programs written for the IBM 1401,
1440, or 1460 Data ProceSSing Systems to be executed on the Model 155. Most
1401/1440/1460 programs require no changes for execution under the emulator,
although certain special and custom features are not emulated. Programs written for
the 1401 Model G are emulated.
Emulation is provided for 1401/1440/1460
systems with main storage sizes from 2,000 to 16,000 pOSitions of core storage.
1401/1440/1460 Integrated Emulator Program for the
IBM 5/3 70 Model 155 under DOS: (370N-EU-490)
All basic features are emulated, along with the following optional features: Expanded
Print Edit •.. Inverted Print Edit .•• High-Low-Equal Compare ..• Multiply~ivide
••. ProceSSing Overlap •.. Sense Switches ... Advanced Programming/Indexing ..•
Bit Test ••• Print Storage ... Additional Print Control •.• Space Suppression .•.
Column Binary •.• Binary Transfer •.. 51-Colurnn Card •.. Punch-Feed Read ..•
Card Image (on 1442) ... Selective Stacker ••• Scan Disk.
The follOWing features and operations are not emulated:
Selective Tape Listing (on 1403) ••• Compressed Tapes
Read Compare feature (on 1404)
Any card reader with Card Image feature or SYSIN device supported by the
operating system Queued Sequential
Access Method.
The 1401 Model G is emulated.
If SYSOUT is used the user must write
his own SYSOUT writer to punch
binary data.
1
Basic
Prg. Nbr.
Extension
The following input/output devices are not emulated:
Any card punch with Card Image feature or SYSOUT device supported by
the operating system Queued Sequential Access Method.
721 Card Punch
Ordering Information: Program Number 360CEU740 (Also applies to
360CEU737 from preceding page.)
Any tape unit supported by the operating system sequential access method
or sufficient space on a direct access
device supported by the Basic Sequential Access Method.
If SYSIN is used for binary cards the
Automatic SYSIN batching reader must
be used (MVT only).
710 Printer
P 360C.13
Nov 73
System/360 - 370 Programming
Any printer or SYSOUT device supported by the operating system Queued
Sequential Access Method.
Any 7094 features or devices not listed are not emulated. 704 Mode is not emulated.
Basic Program Material:
Documentation: Basic Program Material List with attachment; Emulating"the IBM
7094 on the IBM System/370 Model 165 using OS (GC27-695l).
Machine Readable: Load modules, emulator generation macro definition and sample
program.
Optj"onal Program Material:
Documentation: Optional Program Material List.
,Machine Retdable: Source statements and macros.
1445 Printer ••• 7340 Hypertape Drive ••. 1011 Paper Tape Reader •.• 1012
Paper Tape Punch ..• Optical Readers ••• Magnetic Character Readers .•• Teleprocessing Devices ..• Audio Response Units.
Internal speed (performance of CPU instructions only and weighted by frequency of use)
of the integrated emulator is approximately 1. 75 times that of the 1401/1460 standalone emulator for the IBM System/360 Model 40. Throughput under emulation is not
determined as much by the emulator as it is by the 1400 program being executed.
Throughput of 1400 jobs is affected by the mix of CPU operations (executed by the
compatibility feature and/or the emulator program), input/output operations (executed
by the emulator P!ogram), and the amount of interference from higher-priority partitions.
The emulator program takes advantage of the multiprogramming facilities of the Disk
Operating System. Other problem programs, such as utility programs, user jobs,
compilers, and more than one "integrated" emulator program can be executed concurrently.
The emulator program uses the data management services of the operating system, and
takes advantage of the deVice independence achieved by these services. The operating
" system error recovery procedures are also used. Both emulator jobs and.System/370
jobs can be placed in a single input job stream for proceSSing.
Card, tape, and disk programs are emulated. Cards and tapes used and produced by
the 1401/1440/1460 system or by other emulator programs, and mixed parity
tapes, are emulated.
Two tape formatting programs are provided with the emulator program: (1) to assist
the user in converting his tape files before emulation so they can be used more effiCiently
by the emulator program, and (2) to convert tape files produced during emulation back
to the 1401/1440/1460 format so they can be used on the original system.
'pisk files created by the 1401/1440/1460 syst~m must be copies on a tape using
a 1401/1440/1460 utility program on a 1401/1440/1460 system and then
restored to disk by emulating the 1401/1440/1460 utility program on a Model 155.
Disk files created by emulator program (CS/30 and CS/40> can be used without conversion or they can be converted by using the technique described above. Converted
files are processed more efficiently.
Not to be reproduced without written permission
IBM
System/360 - 370 Programming
P 360C.14
Nov 73
Conyers ion/S erv ice
System Requirements:
For'emulation, the Model 155 must be equipped with the 1401/40/60, 1410/7010
Compatibility Feature (#3950>. 1401/1440/1460 devices are emulated by
corresponding Model 155 input/output devices. There must be sufficient main storage
for the version of the operating system used, for the emulator functions required for the
emulated system, and for the 1401/1440/1460 program being emulated.
Input/output device correspondence between a 1401, 1440, or 1460 system and a
Model 155 is described in the following table:
1400 Unit Record Devices
Model 155 Unit Record Devices
1402 Card Read Punch
Modell (1401 Models A, 8, C, E, F)
Model 3 (1460)
Model 6 (1401 Model H3)
Models 4, 5 (1401 Model G)
1442
1442
2501
2520
2520
2540
3505
3525
1442 Card Read Punch
Modell Cl440-one stacker)
Model 2 Cl440-two stackers)
Card. Punch, Model N2
Card Read Punch, Model Nl
Card Reader, Models Bl, 82
Card Punch, Models 82, B3
Card Read Punch, Model Bl
Card Read PunchCard Reader, Models Bl, B2
Card Punch, Models PI, P2, P3
1442 Card
1442' Card
2501 Card
2520 Card
2520 Card
2540 Card
3505 Card
3525 Card
1442 Card Reader
Model 4 Cl440-two stackers)
Punch, Model N2
Read Punch, Model Nl
Reader, Models Bl, B2
Punch, Models B2, B3
Read Punch, Model Bl
Read Punch
Reader, Models Bl, B2
Punch, Models PI, P2, P3
1442 Card Read Punch, Model Nl
2501 Card Reader, Models Bl, B2
2520 Card Read Punch, Model Bl
2540 Card Read Punch
3505 Card Reader, Models Bl, B2
3525 Card Punch Models PI, P2,
P3 (with Card Read Feature)
1442
1442
2520
2520
2540
3525
1444 Card Punch (1440>
Card
Card
Card
Card
Card
Card
Punch, Model N2
Read Punch, Model Nl
Punch, Models B2, B3
Read Punch, Model Bl
Read Punch
Punch, Models PI, P2, P3
1407 Console Inquiry Station
(all 1401 models except 1401 Model A)
3215 or 3210 Console
Printer-Keyboard
1447 Console
Modell Console (1440, 1460)
Model 2 Inquiry Printer and Keyboard
(1440, 1460)
Model 3 Inquiry Printer and Keyboard
(1401)
Model 4 Inquiry Printer ahd Keyboard
and Control (1440, 1460>
3215 or 3210 Console
Pri nter-Keyboard
1400 Magnetic Tape Units
1403 Printer
Modell (1401 MOdels A, B, E, F)
Model 2 (1401 Models A, B, C, D,
E, and F, 1440 1460)
Model 3 (1440, 1460) Model 5 (1440)
Model 6 (1401 Model H3, 1440)
Model 4 (1401 Model G)
1404 Printer
Model 2 (all 1401 models except
1401 Models A, 0, H)
(continuous forms only)
1443 Primer
Models I, 2 (1440)
1403 Printer, Models 2, 3, 7, Nl
1443 Printer, Model Nl
3211 Printer
1403 Printer, Mode!s 2, 3, 7, Nl
1443 Printer, Model Nl
3211 Printer
1403 Printer, Models 2, 3, 7, Nl
1443 Printer, Model Nl
3211 Printer
Notes:
Programmed reading on more than one reader, printing on more than one printer, or
punching on more than one punch is not supported.
If more than one System/370 direct access storage device is required to correspond
tei the emulated 1401/1440/1460 disk storage device, all corresponding System/
370 devices must be the same type of direct access storage device.
Input/Output feature correspondence between a 1401, 1440 or 1460 system and a
Model 155 is described in the followir.g table:
1400 Device Feature
System/370 Mdl155 Device Feature
Column.Binary (#1990> for
1402 Card Read Punch, Model 1
Column Binary ('1;1990) for 2540
Card Read Punch
Card Image (#1531) for
1442 Card Punch, Model N2.:'t
2501 Card Reader, MOdels 61, B2
2520 Card Read Punch, ModelSI
2520 Card Punch, Models B2, B3
Card Image (#1532) for
1442 Card Read Punch, Model N1
Card Image (standard) on
3505 Card Reader, Models 61, B2
Card Image (#1531) for
1442 Card Read Punch, Models 1, 2
Column Binary (#1990) for
2540 Card Read Punch
Card Image (#1531) for
1442 Card Reader, Model 4
Card Image (#1531) for
1442 Card Punch, Mode.l N2
2501 Card Reader, Models 61, B2
2520 Card Read Punch, Model Bl
2520 Card Punch, Models 62, B3
Card Image (#1532) for
1442 Card Read Punch, Model Nl
Card Image (standard) on
3505 Card Reader, Models 61, B2
System/370 Mdl 155 Magnetic Tape Units
729 Magnetic Tape Units
Modeis II, IV, V, VI 1401, 1460)
7330 Magnetic Tape Unit (1401, 1460>
7335 Magnetic Tape Unit (except 1440
Model A2)
Binary Trans fer (#1 46 8) for
1402 Card Read Punch, Model 3
Column Binary (#'1990) for
2540 Card Read Punch
51-Column Interchangeable Read
Feed <#4150) for
1402 Card Read Punch, Mdls I, 3, 6
Card Image (#1531) ior
1442 Card Punch, Model N2
2501 Card Reader, Models Bl, B2
2520 Card Read Punch, Model B 1
2520 Card Punch, Models B2, B3
Card Image (standard) on
3505 Card Reader, Models Bl, B2
51/80-Column Interchangeable Read Feed
for
2540 Card Read Punch (#4151)
2401 Magnetic Tape Unit
2402 Magnetic Tape Unit
2403 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control
2404 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control
Models I, 2, 3 (seven-track)
Models 1 - 6 (9-track), 8 (7-track)
2415 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control
Models 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (seventrack or nine-track)
2420 Magnetic Tape Ur.it Models
5,7(nine-track)
3410 Magnetic Tape Unit Models
1, 2, 3
3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and
Control Models I, 2, 3
3420 Magnetic Tape Unit
Models 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
1400 Disk Storage Devices
Model 155 Disk Storage Devices
1301 Disk Storage
Models 11,12 (1440,1460>
132.1 Disk Storage Drive
Model 1 <1440, 1460)
Model 2 (1401, 1440, 1460)
Model 4 (1401)
2311 Disk Storage Drive, Modell
2314 DASF
1405 Disk Storage
Models I, 2 (1401)
2311 Disk Storage Drive, Modell
2314DASF
2319 Disk Storage Facility
3330 Series Disk Storage
Not available on other card devices
Punch Feed Read (#5890) for
1402 Card Read Punch, Mdls I, 3, 6
Model 4, 5 for 1401 Model G
Note: This feature is required to execute
TIle'Reaa Punch Feed instruction (4R) of
the 1401.
Punch Feed Read (#5890) for
2540 Card Read Punch
Card Read
for
3525 Card Puncn, Models PI, P2, P3
Punch Column Skip <#5880) for
1442 Card Read Punch, Mdls I, 2
The 1440 instruction MOI,Gn nnn C
is emulated without USing a special
feature.
Not to be reproduced without written permission
--- -
======
IBM
~..::::§~§: Programming
P 360C.15
Nov 73
System/360 - 370 Programming
Conversion/Serv ice
Selective Stacker (#6406) for
1442 Card Read Punch, Mdl 1
Alternate Stacker (standard) tor
1444 Card Punch
Stacker 2 (standard) for
2520 Card Punch, Mdls B2, B3
2520 Card Read Punch, Mdl B1
Stackers R2 and RP3 for reading,
P2 alld RP3 for punching Call
standard) for
2540 Card Read Punch
Selective Stacker (#6555) for
3505 Card Reader, Models Bl, B2
Stackers 1 and 2 (standard) on
3525 Card Punch, Models PI, P2, P3
Stacker 2 (standard) for
2520 Card Punch, Mdls B2, B3
2520 Card Read Punch, Mdl Bl
Stackers P2 and RP3 (both standard)
for
2540 Card Read Punch
Card, tape, and disk programs are emulated. Cards and tapes, used and protluced by
the 1410/1010 system or by other emulator programs, and mixed parity tapes, are
emulated. Disk files must be converted before they can be used by the emulator program. Two tape formatting programs are provided with the emulator program: (1) to
aSSist the user in converting his tape files before emulation so they can be used more
effiCiently by the emu.ator program, and (2) to convert tape files produced during
emulation back to the 1410/1010 format so they can be used on the original system.
Disk files created by the 1410/1010 system or a stand-alone emulator program must
be copieft' on a tape using a 1410/1010 utility program on a 1410/7010 system and
then restored to disk by emulating the 1410/1010 utility program on a Model 155.
Input/Output Device Correspondence is as follows:
1400 Unit Record Devices
System/370 Mdl 155 Unit Record Devices
1402 Card Read Punch, Mdl2
1442
1442
2501
2520
2520
2540
3505
3525
1442 Gard Reader, Mdl 3
1442 Card Read Punch, Model Nl
2501 Card Reader, Models B1, B2
2520 Card Read Punch, Model Bl
2540 Card Read Punch
3505 Card Reader Models Bl, B2
3525 Card Punch Models PI, P2,
P3 (with Card Read Feature)
1415 Console Unit
3215 or 3210 Console Printer-Keyboard
Modell
1403 Printer, Mdls I, 2,3
1403 Printer, Models 2, 3,7, Nl
1443. Printer, Model Nl
3211 P~inter
1400 MagnetiC Tape Units
System/370 Mdl 155 Magnetic Tape Units
729 MagnetiC Tape Unit Mdls II, IV,
2401 MagnetiC Tape Unit
2402 MagnetiC Tape Unit
2403 MagnetiC Tape Unit & Control
2404 MagnetiC Tape Unif& Control
Models 1, 2, 3 (seven-track)
Models 1 - 6 (9-track), 8 (7-track)
Stackers 1 and 2 (standard) on
3525 Card Punch, Models PI, P2, P3
Stackers 1 and 2 (both standard) for
1402 Card Read Punch
Stacker 2 (standard) for
2520 Card Read Punch, Mdl B1
Stackers R2 and RP3 (both standard)
for
2540 Card Read Punch
Selective Stacker (#6555) for
3505 Card Reader, ModelsBl, B2
Stackers 4 and 8 (both standard) for
1402 Card Read Punch
Stacker 2 (standard) for
2520 Card Punch, Mdls B2, B3
2520 Card Read Punch, Mdl B1
Stackers P2 and RP3 (both standard)
for
2540 Card Read Punch
Stackers 1 and 2 (standard) on
3525 Card Punch, Models PI, P2, P3
Numerical Print feature (#5381) for
1403 Printer Models 1, 2
Numerical Print feature (.5381> for
1403 Printer, Model 2
V, VI
1330 MagnetiC Tape Unit
1410/7010 Integrated Emulator Program for the IBM
System/370 Model 155 Under DOS: 370N-EU-490
The 1410/1010 Emulator
Program is a Type I Program that is executed as a
problem progr:>m under the Disk Operating System using the 1401/40/60, 1410/
7010 Compatibility Feature (#3950>. The combination of the program and the compatibility feature enables programs written for the 1410 or 7010 Data Processing
Systems to be executed on the Model 155. Most 1410/7010 programs require no
changes for execution under the emulator, although certain special custom features
are not emulated. Emulation is provided for 1410/1010 systems with main storage
sizes from 10K to lOOK positions of core storage.
All basic features are emulated, along with the following optional features: Processing
Overlap .•• Priority Processing ••• Two Channels on 1410 ••• Inverted Print Edit
.•. 7010 Second, Third, and Fourth Data Channels ••• 7010 Store and Restore
Status ... 7010 Floating Point Arithmetic Feature.
The following features and operations are not emulated: 1401/1410 Compatibility
Mode .•. Column Binary ••. 51-Column Card ••• 1410/1010 Diagnostic Instruction Branch on C Bit .•• 7010 Program Relocation and Storage Protection '" 7010
Interval Timer.
The following input/output deVices are not emulated: 1311 Disk Storage Drive •••
1405 Disk Storage ••• 7340 and 7641 Hypertape Drives •.• 1011 Paper Tape
Reader ••• 1.012 Paper Tape Punch ••• Magnetic Character Readers ••• TeleproceSSing Devices .•• Optical Readers ••• Audio Response Units.
Internal speed (performance of CPU instructions only and weighted by frequency of
use) of the integrated emulator is approximately 1.1 times that of the 1410/1010
stand-alone emulator for the IBM System/360 Model 50.
Throughput under emulation is not determined as much by the emulator as it is by the
1400 program being executed. Throughput of 1400 jobs is affected by the mix of
CPU operations (executed by the compatibility feature and/or the emulator program),
input/output operations (executed by the emulator program), and the amount of interference from higher-priority partitions or regions.
The emulator program takes advantage of the multiprogramming facilities of the Disk
Operating System. Other problem programs, such as utility programs, user jobs,
compilers, and more than one "integrated" emulator program can be executed concurrently.
The emulator program uses the data management services of the operating system, and
takes advantage of the device independence achieved ~ these services. The operating
system error recovery procedures are also used. Both IRrulator jobs and Systelll/370
jobs can be placed in a Single input job stream for processing.
Card
Card
Card
Card
Card
Card
Card
Card
Punch, Model N2
Read Punch, Model Nl
Reader, Models Bl, B2
Read Punch, Model Bl
Punch, Models 82. B3
Read Punch
Reader Models Bl, B2
Punch Models PI, P2, P3
2415 MagnetiC Tape Unit & Control
Models 1, 2, 3,4, 5,6 (seventrack or nine-track)
2420 Magnetic Tape Unit Models
5, 7 (nine-track)
3410 MagnetiC Tape Unit Models
1,2,3
3411 MagnetiC Tape Unit and
Control Models 1, 2, 3
3420 MagnetiC Tape Unit Models
3,4,5,6,7,.8
1400 Disk Storage DeviCes
Model 155 Disk Storage Devices
1301 Disk Storage, Mdls 1, 2
2311
2314
2319
3330
1302 Disk Storage, Mdls 1, 2
Disk Storage Drive, Modell
DASF
Disk Storage
Series Disk Storage
2314 DASF
2319 Disk Storage
3330 Series Disk Storage
Note:
Programmed reading on more than one reader, printing on more than one printer, or
punching on more than one punch is not supported.
If more than one System/370 direct access storage device is required to correspond to the 1410/1010 disk storage device being emulated, all corresponding
System/370 devices must be the same type of direct access storage device.
Printer feature correspondence is as follows:
1400 Printer Feature
Systemj370 Mdl 155 Printer Feature
Numerical Print feature C.s381> ·for
1403 Printer, Mdls 1, 2
Numerical Print feature ~3Bl> for
1403 Printer, Mode~ 2
Interchangeable Chain Cartridge
Adapter (f4 740) for 1403
Printer, Mdls 1, 2
Interchangeable Chain Cartridge
AdapterCf4740> for 1403 Printer,
Models 2, 7
Not to be reproduced without written perml..lon
IBM
. The combination ofthe program
and the compatibility feature enables programs written for the IBM 1401, 1440 or
1460 Data Processing Systems to be executed on the Model 145. Most 1401/
1440/1460 programs require no changes for execution under the emulator, although
certain special and custom features are not emulated. Programs written for the 1401
Model G are emulated •. Emulation is provided for 1401/1440/1460 systems with
main storage sizes from 1,400 to 16,000 positions of core storage.'
All basic features are emulated, along with the following optional features: Expanded
Pr.int Edit, Inverted Print Edit, High-Low-Equal Compare, Multiply-Divide, ProcesSing Overlap, Sense SWitches, Advanced Programming/Indexing, Bit Test, Print
Storage, Additienal Print Control, Space Suppress ion, Column Binary, Binary Transfer, 51-ColulT)n Card, Punch-Feed Read, Card Image (on 1442), Selective Stacker.
The following features and operations are not emulated: Selective Tape Listing (on
1403), Compressed Tapes, Read Compare (1404).
The foilowing input/output devices are not emulated: 1445 Printer, 7340 Hypertape
Drive, 1011 Paper Tape Reader, 1012 Paper Tape Punch, Optical Readers, Magnetic Character Readers, Teleprocessing Devices, Audio Response Units, and 1404
printer in cut card mode.
The 140] Model G is emulated.
Internal ~tJE:ed (performance of CPU instructions only and weighted by frequency of use)
of the int"orated emulator is approximately 4.9 times that of the 1401 and 1.1 times
the CS40 1401 emul.ator. Throughput under emulation is not determined as much by
the emulator as it is by the 1400 program being executed. Throughput of 1400 jobs
is affected by the mix o( CPU operations (executed.by the compatibility featl/l'e and/or
the emu lator program), input/output operations (executed by the emulator program),
and the amount of interference from higher priority partitions. A precise performance
statement cannot be given.
The emulator program takes advantage of the multiprogramming facilities of the Disk
Operating System. Other problem programs, such as utility programs, user jobs,
compilers, and more than one "integrated" emulator program can be executed concurrentiy. The emulator program uses the data management services of the operating
system, and it takes advantage of the device independence achieved by these services.
The operating systpm er~or recovery procedures are also used. Both emulator jobs
and System/370 jobs can be placed in a single input job stream for proceSSing.
1010 Program Relocation ana Storage Protection, 7010'lntervarTimer, 'Stacker select.
The follOWing input/output deVices are not emulated: 1.311 Ois1< Storage Drive, 1405
Disk Storage, 7340 and 7641 Hypertape Drives, 1011 Paper Tape Reader, 1012
Paper Tape Punch, MagnetiC Character Readers, Teleprocessing Devices, Optical
Readers, Audio Response Units.
Internal speed (performance of CPU instructions only and weighted by frequency of use)
of the integrated emulator is approximately two times that of the 1410 and approximately
0.67 times that of the 7010.
Throughput under emulation is not determined as much by the emulator as it is by. the
1410/7010 program being.executed.Throughput of 1.400 jobs is affected by the mix
of CPU operations (executed by the compatibility feature and/or the emulator program),
input/output operations (executed by the emulator program), and the amount of interference from higher priority partitions or regions. A precise performance estimate cannot
be given.
The emulator program takes advantage of the multiprogramming facilities of the Disk
Operating System. Other problem programs, such as utility programs, user jobs,
compilers, and more than one "integrated" emulator program can be executed concurrently.
The emulator program uses the data management services of the operating system, and
it takes advantage of the device independence achieved by these services. The operating system error recovery procedures are also used. Both emulator jobs and System/
370 jobs can be placed in a single input job stream for processing.
Card, tape, and disk programs are emulated. Cards and tapes, used and produced by
the 1410/7010 System or by other emulator programs, and mixed parity tapes, are
emulated. Disk files must be converted before they can be used by the emulator program. Two-tape formatting programs are prOVided with the emulator program: (1) to
assist the user. in converting his tape files before emulation so they can be used more
effiCiently by the emulator program, and (2) to convert tape files produced during emulation back to the 1410/7010 format so they can be used on the original system.
Disk files created by the 1410/7010 system or a stand-alone emulator program must
be copied on a tape using a 1410/7010 utility program on a 1410/7010 system and
then restored to disk by emulating the 1410/7010 utility program on a Model 145.
Input/output device correspondence is as follows:
1401/1440/1460 1(0 DEVICES
SYSTEM!} 70 MODEL 145 I/O DEVICES
1402 Card Read Punch
Model 1(1401 Models A,B,C,E,F)
Model 3 (1460)
Model 6 (1401 Model H3)
Models 4,5 (1401 Model G)
1442
1442
2501
2520
2520
2540
3505
3~25
Card
Card
Card
Card
Card
Card
Card
Card
Punch, Model N2
Read Punch, 'Model Nl
Reader, Mode Is B1, B2
Punch, Models B2, B3
Read Punch, Model Bl
Read Punch
Reader Models Bl, B2
Punch Models PI, P2, P3
1442 Card Read Punch
Modell (1" , - One stacker)
Model 2 <1440 - Two stackers)
1442 Card
1442 Card
2501 Card
2520 Card
2520 Card
2540 Card
3505' Card
3525 Card
Punch, Model N2
Read Punch, Model Nl
Reader, Models Bl, B2
Punch, Models B2, B3
Read Punch, Model Bl
Read Punch
Reader Models Bl, B2
Punch Models PI, P2, P3
1442 Card Reader
Model 4 (1440 - Two stackers)
Input/output device correspondence between a 1401, 1440, or 1460 System and
a Model 145 is described in the table follOWing the 1410/7010 Emulator Model 145
write-up be low.
1442 Card Read Punch, Model Nl
2501 Card Reader, Models Bl, B2
2520 Card Read Punch, Model Bl
2540 Card Read Punch
3505 Card Reader Models Bl, B2
3525 Card Punch Models PI, P2,
P3 (with Card Read Feature)
1444 Card Punch (1440)
1442
1442
2520
2520
2540
3525
Emulating the IBM 1410/7010 on the IBM System/370
Model 145 USing DOS: 370N-EU-490
1407 Console Inquiry Station
(all 1401 Models except 1401
Model A)
3215 or 3210 Console
Printer/Keyboard
1447 Console
Modell Console (1440, 1460)
Model 2 Inquiry Printer and Keyboard (1440, 1460)
Model 3 Inquiry Printer and Keyboard and Control (1440,1460>
3215 or 3210 Console
Printer/Keyboard
Card, tape, and disk programs are emulated. Cards and tapes used and produced by
the 1401/1440/1460 system or by .other emulated programs, and mixed parity tapes,
are emulated.
Two-tape formatting programs are provided with the emulator program: (1) to assist
the user in converting his tape fj les before emulation so they can be used more effiCiently by the emulator program, and (2) to convert tape files produced during emulation back to the 1401/1440/1460 format so they can be used on the original system.
Disk fi les created by the 1401/1440/1460 System must be copied on a tape using
a 1401/1440/1460 utility program on a 1401/1440/1460 System and then restored to disk by emulating the 1401/1440/1460 utility program on a Model 145.
Disk files created by emulator program (CS/30 and CS/40> can be used without conversion or they can be converted by using the technique described above. Converted
fi les are processed more efficiently.
System Requirements: For emulation, the Model 145 must be equipped with the IBM
Compatibility Feature <#-4457 or #4458>. 1401/1440/1460 devices are emulated by corresponding Model 145 input/output devices. There must be sufficient
main storage for the version of the operating system used, for the emulator functions
req.uired for the emulated system, and.for the 1401/1440/1460 program being
emulated.
The 1410/7010 Emulator Program is a Type I
Program that is executed
as a problem program under the Disk Operating System using the 1401/1440/1460,
1410/7010 Compatibi I ity Feature (#4458). The combination of the program and the
compatibil ity feature enables programs written for the 1410 or 7010 Data Processing
Systems to be executed on the Model 145. Most 1410/7010 programs require no
changes for execution under the emulator, although certain special custom features are
not emulated. Emulation is provided for 1410/7010 systems.with main storage s·izes
from 10,000 to 100,000 positions of core storage.
All basic features are emulated, along with the follOWing optional features: Processing
Overlap, Priority ProceSSing, Two Channels 'on 1410, Inverted Print Edit, 7010
Second-Third-and Fourth Data Channels, 7010 Store and Restore Status, 7010
Floating Point Arithmetic Feature.
The following features and operations are not emulated: 1401/1410 Compatibility Mode,
Column Binary, 51-Column Card, 1410/7010 Diagnostic Instruction Branch on C Bit,
Not to be reproduced without written permission
Card Punch, Model N2
Card Read Punch, Model Nl
Card Punch, Models B2, B3
Card Read Punch, Model B1
Card Read Punch
Card Punch Models PI, P2, P3
IBM
P 360C.17
Nov 73.
System/360 - 370 Programming
Convers ion/S erv ice
1400 MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
MODEL 145 MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
729 Magnetic Tape Units
Models II,IV ,V ,VI <1401, 1460)
7330 Magnetic Tape Unit (1401, 1460>
7335 Magnetic Tape Unit (except 1440
Model A2)
2401 Magnetic Tape Unit
2402 Magnetic Tape Unit
2403 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control
2404 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control
Models 1, 2, 3 (7-track)
,
Models I, 6 (9-track)
2415 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control
Models I, 6 (7 or 9 ..track)
2420 Magnetic Tape Unit Models
5, 7 (9-track)
3410 Magnetic Tape Unit Models
1,2,3
3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control
Models 1, 2, 3
3420 Magnetic Tape Unit Models 3,
5, 7 (7- or 9-track) Models 4, 6, 8
(9-track)
1400 DISK STORAGE DEVICES
MODEL 145 DISK STORAGE DEVICES
1301 Disk Storage
Models 11, 12 (1440,1460>
2311 Disk Storage Drive, Model 1
2314 Direct Access Storage Facility
Model 1 & A Series
2319 Disk Storage Facility
3330 Series Disk Storage
1311 Disk
Modell
Model 2
. Model 4
Storage Drive
(1440, 14(0)
(1401, 1440, 1460>
(1401)
1405 Disk Storage
Models I, 2 (1401)
2319 Disk Storage Facility
2311 Disk Storage Drive, Model 1
2314 Direct Access Storage Facility
Model 1 & A Series
3330 Series Disk Storage
1400 PRINTER S
MODEL 145 PRINTERS
1403 Printer
Modell (1401 Models A,B,E,F)
Model 2 (1401 Models A,B,C,D,E,
and F, 1440, 1460>
Model 3 (1440, 14(0)
Model 5 (1440)
Model 6 (1401 Model H3, 1440>
Model 4 (1401 Model G)
1403 Printer, Models 2, 3, 7, Nl
Card Image (~1531) for
1442 Card Reader, Model 4
Card Image (#1532) for
1442 Card Read Punch, Model Nl
Card Image (standard) on
3505 Card Reader Models Bl, B2
Binary Transfer (*1468) for
1402 Card Read Punch, Model 3
51-Column Interchangeable Read Feed
(:f¢4150) for 1402 Card Read Punch,
Models 1,3, 6
51!80-Column Interchangeable Read Feed
2540 Card Read Punch (14151)
3505-B2 Card Reader (#3921)
(Not avai lable on other card devices)
Punch Feed Read (15890) for
1402 Card Read Punch,
Models 1, 3, 6
Models 4, 5 for 1401
Model G
Note: This feature is required to execute
the Read Punch Feed Instruction (4R) of
the 1401
'
Punch Feed Read (#5890) for
2540 Card Read Punch
Card Read (#1533) for
3525 Card Punch, Models PI, P2, P3
Punch Column Skip (15880) for
1442 Card Read Punch, Models 1,2
The 1440 instruction MO/oGn nnn C is emulated without using a special feature.
Selective Stacker (16406) for
1442 Card Read Punch, Model 1
Stacker 2 (standard) for
2520 Card Punch, Models B2, B3
2520 Card Read Punch, Model Bl
1443 Printer, Model Nl
Stackers R2 and RP3 for reading,
P2 and RP.3 for !lunching (all standard)
for 2540 Card Read Punch
Selective Stacker (#6555) for
3505 Card Reader, Models Bl, B2
Stackers 1 and 2 (standard) on
3525 Card Punch, Models PI, P2, P3
3211 Printer
1443 Printer, Model N1
3211 Printer
Alternate Stacker (standardHor
1444 Card Punch
1403 Printer, Models 2, 3, 7, Nl
1443 Printer
Models I, 2 (1440)
3211 Printer
Progranwned reading on more than one reader, printing on more than one printer, or
punching on more than one punch is not supported.
Stackers 1 and 2 (both standard) for
1402 Card Read Punch
1400 DEVICE FEATURE
MODEL 145 DEVICE FEATURE
Column Binary (4H990> for
1402 Card Read Punch, Modell
Column Binary (fl990> for
2540 Card Read Punch
Card Image (fl531) for
1442 Card Punch, Model N2
2501 Card Reader, Models B1, B2
2520 Card Read Punch, Model B1
2520 Card Punch, Models B2, B3
Stackers 4 and 8 (both standard) for
1402' Card Read Punch
Stacker 2 (standard) for
2520 Card Punch, Models B2, B3
2520 Card Read Punch, Model B1
Stackers P2 and RP3 (both standard) for
2540 Card Read Punch
Stackers 1 and.2 (standard) on
3525 Card Punch, Models PI, P2, P3
Numerical Print Feature (15381) for
1403 Printer, Models I, 2
Numerical Print. Feature (15381) for
1403 Printer, Model 2
1410/7010 I/O DEVICES
SYSTEM(370 MODEL 145 110 DEVICES
1402C~rd Read Punch, Model 2
1442
1442
2501
2520
2520
2540
3505
3525
Card Image (fl532) for
1442 Card Read Punch, Model PH
card Image (standard) on
3505 Card Reader Models B1, 82
C.d Image ('1531) far
1442 Card Read Punch, Models I, 2
Stacker 2 (standard) for
2520 Card Read Punch, Model Bl
Stackers R2 and RP3 (both standard) for
25.40 Card Read Punch
Selective Stacker (6555) for
3505 Card Reader, Models Bl, B2
If more than one System/370 direct access storage device is required to correspond
to the emulated 1401/1440/1460 disk storage device, all corresponding System/
370 devices must be the same type of direct access storage device.
InpuVOutput feature correspondence between 1401, 1440, or 1460 System and a
Model 145 is described in the following table:
Stacker 2 (standard) for
2520 Card Punch, Models B2, B3
2520 Card Read Punch, Model Bl
Stackers P2 and RP3 (both standard) for
2540 Card Read Punch
Stackers 1 and 2 (standard) on
3525 Card Punch, Model.s PI, P2, P3
1443 Printer, Model N1
Notes:
Column Binary (#1990) for
2540 Card Read Punch
Card Image (#1531) for
1442 Card Punch, Model N2
2501 Card Reader, Models Bl, B2
2520 Card Read Punch, Model Bl
2520 Card Punch, Models B2, B3
Card Image (standard) on
3505 Card Reader MOdels Bl, B2
1403 Printer, Models 2,3, 7, Nl
1404 Printer
Model 2 (all 1401 models except
1401 Models A, 0, H)
Continuous form only
Card Image (11531) for
1442 Card Punch, Model N2
2501 Card Reader, Models Bl, B2
2520 Card Read Punch, Model B1
2520 Card Punch, Models B2, B.3
Column Binary ('1990) for
2540 Card Read Punch
corit'd
Not to be reproduced without written permission
Gard
Card
Card
Card
Card
Card
Card
Card
Punch, Model N2
Read Punch, Model Nl
Reader, Models B1, B2
Read Punch, Model B1
Punch, Models B2, B3
Read Punch
Reader, Models Bl, B2
Punch, Models PI, P2, P3
IB,.,
IBM
Programming
P 360C.18
Nov 73
System/360 - .370 Programming
Convers ion/Serv ice
1442 Card Reo,der, Model 3
1442 Card'Read Punch, Model N1
2501 Card Reader, Models B1, B2
2520 Card Read Punch, Model B1
2540 Card Read Punch
3505 Card Reader, Models Bl, B2
3525 Card Punch, Models PI, P2, P3
, (with Card Read Feature)
1415 Console Unit
3215 or 145 Console Printer/Keyboard
Modell
1403 Printer, Models I, 2,3
140.3 Printer, Models 2, .3, 7, Nl
144.3 Printer, Model N1
3211 Printer
Notes:
*
Programmed reading on more than one reader, printing on more than one printer, or
punching on more than one punch is not supported.
** If more than one Svstem/.370 direct access
storage device is required to correspond
to the 1410/7010 disk storage device being emulated, all corresponding System/
370 devices must be the same type of direct access storage device •.
1400 MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
MODEL 145 MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
729 Magnetic Tape Unit
Models II, IV, V, VI
7330 Magnetic Tape Unit
2401 Magnetic Tape Unit
2402 Magnetic Tape Unit
240.3 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control
Models I, 2, 3 (i-track)
Models I, 6 (9-track)
2415 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control
Models 1, 6 (7 or9-track)
2420 Magnetic Tape Unit
Model s 5, 7 (9-track)
3420 Magnetic Tape Unit
Models .3, 5 i 7 (7- or 9-track)
Models 4, 6, 8 (9-track)
1400 DISK STORAGE DEVICES
MODEL 145 DISK STORAGE DEVICES
bOl Disk Storage, models I, 2
2311 Disk Storage Drive, Modell
2.314 Direct Access Storage Facility
Model 1 & A Series
2319 Disk Storage Device
.3330 Series Disk Storage
2314 Direct Access Storage Fa.cility
Model 1 & A Series
2319 Disk Storage Device
3330 Series Disk Storage
Printer feature correspondence is as follows:
1302 Disk Storage, Models I, 2
2302 Disk Storage, Models 1, 2
1400 PRINTER FEATURE
MODEL145PR~TERFEATURE
Numerical Print Feature (#5381)
for 1403 Printer, Models 1,2
Numerical Print Feature (#5381)
for 1403 Printer,' Model 2
Interchangeable Chain Cartridge
Adapter (#4740) for
1403 Printer, Models I, 2
Interchangeable Chain Cartridge
Adapter (#4740) for
1403 Printer, Models 2, 7
The follOWing featuy.,s and operations are not emulated: Column Binary, B inarj
Transfer, 51-coll.1mnCard, Punch-Feed Read, Read-Punch Release, Card Image (on
1442), Selective Tape listing (on 1403), Compressed Tapes.
The tollowing input/output devices are not emulated: 1404 Printer, 1444 Card Punch,
1445 Printer, 7340 Hypertape Drive, 1011 Paper Tape Reader, 1012 Paper Tape
Punch, Optical Readers, M;ignetic Character Readers, Teleprocessing Devices.
Internal speed (performance of CPU instructions only and weighted by frequency of use)
of the integrated emulator is approximately 4.9 times trat of the 1401 and 1.1 times
the CS40 1401 emulator. Throughput under emulation is not determined as much by
the emulator as it is by the 1400 program beln,) executed. Throughput of 1400 jobs
is affected by the mix of CPU operations (executed by the compatibility feature), input/
output operations (executed by the emulator program), and the amount of interference
from higher priority partitions or regions. A precise performance estimate cannot be given.
Unlike stand-alone emulators, integrated emulators must share the CPU and input/output devices. w.ith the operating, system. In a system with multinrogramming capabi lity,
however, the time lost waiting for a !'hared resource is much less on the average than
the time lost by a stand-alone emulator waiting for its input/output operations to complete. This reduction in system wait time should increase total system throughput.
The emulator program takes advantage of the multiprogramming facilities of the
Operati ng System. Other problem programs, such as uti lity programs, user jobs,
compilers, and more than one" integrated" emulator program can be executed concurrently. The emulator prog'ram uses the data management services of the operating
system, and takes advantage of the automatic allocation of resources and the device
independence achieved by these services. The operating system error recovery procedures are also used. Both emulator programs' Jobs and System/360 or System/370
jobs can be placed in a Single input job stream for proceSSing.
The emulator program allows the user to apply most of his programming resources toward'
developing new applications and redesigning existing applications to take full advantage of available Model 145 facilities.
Card, tape, and disk programs are emulated. Cards and tapes, used and produced by
the 1401/1440/1460 system or by other emulator programs, and mixed parity tapes,
are emulated. Disk files must be converted before they can be used by the emulator
program. Two tape formatting programs are provided with the emulator program: (1) to
assist the user in converting his tape. files before emulation so they can be used more
effiCiently by the emulator program, and (2) to convert tape files produced during emulation back to the 1401/1440/1460 format so they can be used on the original system. In addition, a disk formatting program is provided to assist the user in converting
his disk fi les.
Disk files created by the 1401/1440/1460 system or a stand-alone emulator program
must be dumped onto tape using a 1401/1440/1460 utility program, and then restored to disks that have been formatted by the disk formatting program. Both the disk
formatting program and the tape formatting programs run as problem programs under the
operating system.
System Requirements: The emulator program requireS the Model 145, the Compatibility
Feature (#4457 or #4458), enough main storage for the operating system under which the
emulator program is run (MFT or MVT), the emulat.or functions required for the system
being emulated \emulator program and buffers), the 1401/1440/14&0 program, and
enough Model 145 devices to correspond to the emulated 1401/1440/1460 devices,
in addition to the devices required for the operating system.
InpuVOutput Device Correspondence is as follows:
1401/1440/1460 I/O DeVice
t
Model 145 I/O Device
Any card reader or card read punch
supported by the queued sequential
access method of the Operating
System.,
1401 Card Read Punch
1442 Card Read Punch
1443 Printer
Any print~r supported by the queued
sequential access method of the
Operating System.
7330 Magnetic Tape Unit, or
7335 Magnetic Tape Unit
device supported by the basic sequential
access method of the Operating System.
1407 Console Inquiry Station
or 1447 Console
Any operator's console supported
by the Operating System.
1301 Disk Storage, or 1311
Disk Storage Drive, or 1405
Disk Storage, Modell or 2
Any direct access storage device
supported by the basic direct
access method of the Operating
System. tt
1403 Printer
-----------------------------------------------... ...
Any tape unit or direct access storage
729 II, IV, V, VI Tape Unit or
~, ----------------------~~
The 1401/1440/
1460 Emulator
Program executes as
a prob lem program
under the Operating System, MFTorMVT version, using the IBM Compatibility
feature ('*'4457 or #4458). The combination of the program and the compatibility
feature enables programs written for the IBM 1401, 1440, or 1460 Data Processing
Systems to be executed on the Model 145. Most 1401/1440/1460 progrjlms require nil changes for execution under the emulator, although certain special and custom
features are not emulated. Programs written for the 1401 Model G are .not emulated.
Emulation is provided for 1401/1440/1460 systems with main storage sizes from
2,000 to 16,000 positions of core storage.
1401/1440/1460 Emulator Program for the System/370
Model 145 with Compatibi lily Feature (414457 or 414458)
Under
360C-EU-735
os:
All basic features are emulated, along with the following optional features: Expanded
Print Edit, Inverted Print Edit, High-Low-Equal Compare, Multiple-Divide Processing'
Overlap, Sense SWitches, Advanced Progrilmming/lndexing, Bit Test, Print Storage,
Additional Print Control, Space Suppression, Selective Stacker.
SRL Publication: IBM Operating System: 1410/1440/1460' Emulatw on Models
135/145/155.(GC33,..200S).
t
Programmed reading on more than one rllllClef, .printing on ~ thlll one print.... or punching on
mortI th.... cine punch is not
IUpported.
tt~~v:~~=:r:·.:,=:v":~:::·::=:;:~~=:c:=~==
'of direct _ n o r . dwlel.
Not to be reproduced without written permission
T=§)I:
:a::a:.s:= .. Programming
IBM
~
P 360C.19
Nov 73
System/3bO - 370 Programming
Convers I on/Serv I ce
1410/7010 Emulator Program for the System/370 Model 145
with Compatibility Feature (i44S8)·OnderQS: 360c-EO-736
The 1410/
7010 Emulator
Program executes
as a problem program under the Operating System, MFT or MVT version, using the
IBM 1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010·Compatibility Feature (*4458). The combination of the program and the compatibility feature enables programs written for the
1410 or 7010 Data Precessing Systems to be executed on the Model 145. Most
1410/70-10 programs require no changes for execution under the emulator, although
certain special and custom features are not emulated. Emulation is provided for
1410/7010 systems with main storage sizeS from 10,000 to 100,000 pOSitions of
core storage.
All basic features are emulated, along With the following optional features: Processing
Overlap, Priority Processing, Two Channels on 1410, Inverted Print Edit, 7010
Second, Third, and Fourth Data Channels, 7010 Store and Restore Status, 7010
Floating Point Arithmetic feature.
1301 Disk Storage, Modell or 2,
1302 Disk Storage, Modell or 2,
2302 Disk Storage, Modell or 2
Any direct ac.cess storage device supported
by the basic direct access method of the
operating system. ***
SRL Publication: IBM Operating System: 1410/7010 Emulator on Models 145/
155 can be used without conversion or they can be converted by using the technique described above. Converted
fi les are processed more efficiently.
System Requirements: For emulation, the Model 135 must be equipped with the IBM
Compat,b,hty Feature (~457). 1401/1440/1460 devices are emulated by corresponding Model 135 input/output devices. There must be sufficient main storage for
the version of the operating system used, for the emulator functions required for the
emulated system, and for the 1401/1440/1460 program being emulated.
Input/output device correspondence between a 1401, 1440, or 1460 System and a
Model 135 is described in the follOWing table:
Not to be reproduced without written permialon
I : :~~
IBM
Programming
Conversl on/Servi ce
1401/1440/1460 I/O DEVICES
SYSTEM/370 MODEL 135 I/O DEVICES
1402 Card Read Punch
Model 1<1401 Models A,B,C,E,F>
Modp.1 3 <1460>
Model 6 <1401 Model H3)
Models 4, 5(1401 Model G)
1442
1442
2501
2520
2520
2540
3505
3525
Card Punch, Model N2
Card Read Punch, Model N1
Card Reader, Models Bl~ B2
Card Punch, Models B2, B3
Card Read Punch, Model B1
Card Read Punch
Card Reader Models Bl, B2
Card, Punch ModelsPl,P2,P3
1442
1442
2501
2520
2520
2540
3525
Card Punch, Model N2
Card Read Punch, Model Nl
Card Reader, Models Bl, B2
Card,Punch, Models 62, 53
Card Read Punch, Model Bl
Card Read Punch
Card 'Punch, Models Pl, P2, P3
1442 Card Read Punch
Model 1 (1440 - One stacker)
Model 2 (1440 - Two stackers)
1442 CItd Reader
Model 4 <1440 - Two stackers)
1444 Card Punch (1440)
1442 Card Read Punch, Model Nl
2501 Card Reader, Models B1, B2
2520 Card Read Punch, Model B1
2540 ,Card Read Punch
3505 Card Reader Models Bl, B2
3525 Card Punch Models Pl,P2 ,P3
(with Card Read Feature)
1442
1442
2520
2520
2540
3525
Card
Card
Card
Card
Card
Card
Punch, Model N2
Read Punch, Model Nl
Punch, Models B2, B3
Read Punch, Model Bl
Read Punch
Punch, Models P1, P2,P3
1407 Console Inqu.i~ Stati.on
(all 1401 Models except 1401
Model A)
3215 or 3210 Console
Printer/Keyboard
1447 Console
Modell Console'
2319 Disk Storage Facility
2311 Disk Storage Drive, Modell
2314 Direct Access Storage Facility
Modell & A Series
3330 Series Disk Storage
1400 PRINTERS
MODEL 135 PRINTERS
1403 Printer
1403 Printer, Models 2, 3, 7, N1
Model 2 (1401 Models A,B,C,D,E,
and F; 1440 I 1460)
Model 3 <1440, 1460)
Model 5 <1440>
Model 6 (1401 Model H3, 1440)
Model 4 (1401 Model ~
1443 Printer Model Nl
3211 Printer
1404 Printer
Model 2 (all 1401 models except
1401 Models A,D,H)
,
Continuous form only
1403 Printer, Models 2,3,7, N1
1443 Printer
Models I, 2 (1440)
1403 Printer, Models 2,3, 7, Nl
1443 Printer, Model NI
3211 Printer
1443 Printer, Model NI
3211 Printer
Notes:
on
Programmed reading
more than one reader, printing on more than one printer, or
punching on more than one punch is not supported.
If more than one System/370 direct access storage device is required to correspond
to the emulated 1401/1440/1460 disk storage deVice, all corresponding System/
370 deVices must be the same type of direct access storage device.
InpuVOutput feature correspondence between 1401, 1440, or 1460 System and a
Model 135 is described in the follOWing table:
1400 DEVICE FEATURE
MODEL 135 DEVICE FEATURE
Column Binary (n990> for
1402 Card Read Punch, Model 1
Column Binary (#1990> for
2540 Card Read Punch
Card Image (n531) for
1442 Card Punch, Model N2
2501 Card Reader, Models B1, B2
2520 Card Read Punch, Model Bl
2520 Card Punch, Models B2, B3
Card Image (#1532) for
1442 Card Read Punch, Model Nl
Card Image (Standard) on
3505 Card Reader Models Bl, B2
Card Image (f1531) for
1442 Card Read Punch, Models 1, 2
Column Binary (#1990> for
2540 Card Read Punch
Card Image (n531) for
1442 Card Reader, Model 4
Card Image (#1531> for
1442 Card Punch, Model N2
2501 Card Reader, Models Bl, B2
2520 Card Read Punch, Model Bl
2520 Card Punch, Models B2, B3
Card Image <#1532) for
1442 Card Read Punch, Model Nl
Card Image (Standard) on
3505 Card Reader Models Bl, B2
Binary Transfer (11468) for
1402 Card Read Punch, Model 3
Column Binary ('1/01990) for
2540 Card Read Punch
Card ImageW1531> for
1442 Card Punch, Model N2
2501 Card Reader, Models Bl, B2
2520 Card Read Punch, Model Bl
2520 Card Punch, Models B2, B3
Card Image (Standard) on
3505 Card Reader Models Bl, B2
51·Column.lnterc'hangeable Read Feed
('114150) for 1402 Card Read Punch,
Models 1,3,6
Punch Feed Read (#5890) for
1402 Card Read Punch,
Models 1, .3, 6
Models 4, 5 for 1401
Model G
51J80-Column Interchangeable Read
Feed for 2540 Card Read Punch
('114151>
3505-B2 Card Reader (3921)
(Not available on other card devices)
Punch Feed Read ('1/05890) for
2540 Card Read Punch
Note: This feature is required to execute the
Read Punch Feed Instruction (4R) of the 1401
Punch Column ski'p (#58130) for
1442 Card Read Punch, Models 1,2
The 1440 instruction M~.Gn nnn C is emulated Without using a special feature.
Selective Stacker (#6406) for
1442 Card Read Punch , Model'1
Stacker 2 (standard) for
2520 Card Punch, Models B2, B3
2520 Card Read Punch, Model B1
Modell <1401 Models A,B,E,F)
Not to be reproduced without written permission
Stackers R2 and RP3 for reading,
iBifl
Progrnning
IBM
System/360" 370 Programming
Conyers I on/Service
P2 and RP3 for punehing (all s~a'd)
for 2540 Card Read Punch
Stackers 1 and 2 (Standard) on
3525 Card Punch Models Pl,P2 ,P3
Alternate Stacker (standard) far
1444 C.-d Punch
Stacker 2 (standard) for
2520 Card Punch, Models B2, 53
2.520 Card Read Punch,. Model B1
Stackers P2 and RP3 for
140·3 Printer, Model 2
Selective Stacker «(16555) for
3505 Card Reader Models Bl, B2
Not to be reproduced without wrttten permi..lon
P 360C.21
Nov n
IBM
System/360 - 370 Programming
P 360C.22
Nov 73
Conv,er.s i 0 njServ ice
The 1401/1440/
1460 Emulator Program
executes as a problem
Droaram under the
Operating System, MFT or MVT version, using the IBM Compatibility feature
(#4457). The combination of the program and the compatibi lity feature enables programs written for the IBM 1401, 1440, or 1460 Data Processing Systems to be
executed on the Model 135. Most 1401/1440/1460 programs require no. changes
for execution under the emulator, although certain special and custom features are not
emulated. Programs written for the 1401 Model G are not emulated. Emulation is
provided for 1401/1440/14bO systems with main storage sizes from 2,000 to
16,000 positions of core storage.
1401/1440/1460 Emulator Program for the System/370
Modeli35 with Compatibility Feature (#4457) Under OS:
360C-EU-735
All basic features are emulated, along with the follOWing optional features: Expanded
Print Edit, Inverted Print Edit, High-Low-Equal Compare, Multiple-DiVide Processing
Overlap, Sense Switches, Advanced Programming!Jndexing, Bit Test, Print Storage,
Additional Print Control, Space Suppression, Selective Stacker.
The follOWing features and operations are not emulated: Column Binary, Binary
Transfer, 51-column Card, Punch-Feed Read, Read-Punch Release, Card Image (on
1442), Selective Tape Listing (on 1403), Compressed Tapes.
The following input/output devices are not emulated: ·1404 Printer, 1444 Card Punch,
1445 Printer, 7340 Hypertape Drive, 1011 Paper Tape Reader, 1012 Paper Tape
Punch, Optical Readers, Magnetic Character Readers, Teleprocessing Devices.
Throughput under emulation is not determined as much by the emulator as it is by the
1400 program being executed. Throughput of 1400 jobs is affected by the mix of
CPU operations (executed by the compatibility feature and/or the emulator programs),
input/output operations (executed by the emulator program), and the amount of interference from higher priority partitions or regions. A precise performance estimate cannot
be given.
Unlike stand-alone emulators, integrated emulators must share the CPU and inpuVoutput devices with the operating. system. In a system with multiprogramming capability,
however, the time lost waiting for a shared resource is much less on the average than
the time lost by a stand-alone emulator waiting for its inpuVoutput operations to complete. This reduction in system wait time should increase total system throughput.
The emulator program takes advantage of the multiprogramming faci lities of the MFT
optio~s of S/370. Other problem programs, such as utility programs, user jobs,
compilers, and more than one" Integrated" emulator program can be executed concurrentIy. The emu lator program uses the data management services of the operating system,
and takes advantage of the automatic allocation of resources and tIe device independence achieved by these services. The operating system error recovery procedures are
also used. Both emulator programs' jobs and System/360 jobs or System/370 jobs
car. be placed in a Single input job stream for processing.
Any operator's console supported
by the Operating System.
1407 Console 'Ilquiry Station
or 1447 Cons"l~
----------~--"'!'---------------------------------------- ---------------------
Any direct access storage device
supported by the ~asic direct
access method of the Operating
System. tt
1301 Disk Storage, or 1.311
Disk Storage Drive I or 140.5
Disk Storage, Modell or 2
Hlf more than one System/370. direct access storage device is required to correspond
to the emulated 1401/1440/1460 disk storage device, all corresponding System/
370 devices mustbe the same type of direct access storage device.
The 707X Emulator executes as
a problem program under the MFT
or MVT option of as on a System/370 Model 155, 155 II, 158 equipped with thE) 7070/7074 Compatibility
Feature #7117. The 707X Emulator enables the Model ISS, 155 II, 158 to execute, under the 'Operating System, programs written for an IBM 707X Data Processing
System with 10,000 words of storage. Most 707X programs that are not timedependent can be executed without modification. Certain devices and features of the
707X system are not emulated.
OS-70.70/7074 Integrated Emulator for
System/370 Model 155, 155 II, 158:
Problem programs such as user jobs, utility programs, compilers, or teleprocessing
can be executed concurrent with the 707X Emulator in main storage. The Emulator
allows the user to direct his programming resources toward developing new appl ications
and redesigning existing applications to take advantage of System/370 facilities.
The Emulator uses the data management services of the Operating System, thereby
achieving device independence and. the automatic allocation of system resources.
Performance: The internal speed (that is, the speed for performing 707X CPU instructions, weighted by frequency of use) of the Emulator is up to 1.1 times for Model
155 and 1.2 times for Model 158 the internal speed of the IBM 7070./7074
Stand-Alone Emulator for System/36o. Model 50 or up to 2.75 times for Model 155
and 3.0 times for Model 158 the IBM 7070. Throughput depends upon the following factors: the mix of 7o.7X CPU operations part of those being CPU operations
executed by the compatibi lity feature, the 707X CP U and input/output operations
simulated by the Emulator Program, and the amOlll1t of interruption from higher
priority partitions or regions and from the Operating System.
Two tape formatting programs are provided with the Emulator to assist the user in converting 7o.7X tape files before emulation so that they can be processed more
efficiently by the Emulator, and in converting tape files prodllced during emulation so
that they can be used on the original system.
The emulator program allows the user to apply most of his programming resources toward
developing new applications and redesigning existing applications to take full advantage of available Model 135 facilities.
The following CPU features are not emulated: Additional Storage and associated instructions ••• I nterva I 'Tlmer Instructions •.• Customer Engi neer Diagnostic Instruction s
• •• Optional Feature Instructions (except Floating Point which is emulated).
Card, tape, and disk programs are emulated. Cards and tapes, used and produced by
the 1401/1440/1460 system or by other emulator programs, and mixed parity tapes,
are emulated. Disk files must be converted before they can be used by the emulator
program. Two tape formatting programs are provided with the emulator program: (1) to
assist the user in converting his tape files before emulation so they can be·used more
efficiently by the emulator program, and (2) to convert tape files produced during emulation back to the 1401/1440/1460 format so they can be used on the original system. In addition, a disk formatting program is provided to assist the user in converting
his disk files.
The following input/output devices are not emulated: 7907 Data Channel ••. 790.0
Inquiry station ••• 730.0 Disk Storage •.• 7500 Card Reader •• , 755(3 Card Punch
••• 7400 Printer ••• 7603 Input/Output Synchronizer.
Disk files created by the 1401/1440/1460 system or a stand-alone emulator program
must be dumped onto tape using a 1401/1440/1460 utility program, and then restored to disks that have been formatted by the. disk formatting program. Both the disk
formatting program and the tape formatting programs run as problem programs under the
operating system.
System Requirements: The emulator ptogram requires the Model 135, the Compatibility
Feature (#4457), enough main storage for the MFT option of the operating system,
additional control storage (Control Storage Requirements) the emulator functions required for the systel'1 being emulated (emulator program and buffers), the 1401/1440/
1460 proqram, and enough Model 135 devices to correspond to the emulated 1401/
1440/1460 devices, in addition to the devices required for the operating system.
Input/Output Device Corr(;spondence is as follows:
1401/1440/1460 I/O Devicet
1401 Card Read Punch
1442 Card Read Punch
1403 Printer
System Requirements: The 707X Emulator requires a System/3 0 Model 155,
with the 7070/7074 Compatibility Feat rei it requires enough
System/370 devices to correspond to the 707X devices on the ystem being emulated
in addition to devices required by the Operatinq System; it requir s enough main .
storage for the option of the Operating System being used (MFT or MVT), the emulator
functions needed for the 707X system being emulated, and the 707X program being
executed.
155 II, 158 equipped
Excluded Feature: The Model 155, 155 11,70.70/7074 compatibility feature
7117 cannot be installed with the Extended Floating Point Feature 3700.
Input/output device correspondence is as follows:
707X Device
System/370 Device
7150 Console
Model 155 Console
7501 Console Card
Reader
1442 Card Read Punch, 2501 Card Reader,
2520 Card Read Punch, 2540 Card Read Punch
with 2821 Control Unit, or any other SYSIN devices
supported by the Queued Sequential Access Method
of the Operating System
729 II/I V/V/V I
MagnetiC Tape Unit
2400 Series Magnetic Tape Units (Models 1, 2,
3, 4, 5 or 6) or 2420 Magnetic Tape Unit (Models
5 or 7) or any other tape unit supported by the Basic
Sequential Access Method of the Operating System*
or direct access devices.
Model 135 I/O Device
Any card reader or card read punch
supported by the queued sequential
access method of the Operating
System.
1443 Printer
Any printer supported by the queued
sequential access method of the
(' ,Jerating System.
729 II, IV, V, VI Tape Unit or
7330 Magnetic Tape Unit, or
7335 Magnetic Tape Unit
Any tape unit or direct access storage
device supported by the basic sequential
access method of the Operating System.
t
The following input/output features are not emulated: Tape Read all Alpha ••. Rrad
Binary Tape ••• Tape Read;Write from 707X locations 9990.-9999 ••• 720 Tape
Switching Feature ••• Unit Record Priority Interrupts ••• Unit Record Signal.
**
* All seven-track tape drives used for 707X - compatible tapes must have the
Seven-Track Compatibility Feature.
** A 707X tape in spanned variable-length format may be kept on any System/370
direct access device supported by BSAM. The file will appear to be a tape to
the 707X program which can access it only through tape commands.
SRL Publications: 7074 OS Emulator on System/370 (GC27-6948).
Programmed reading on more than one reader, printing on more than one printer, or punchinil on
more than one punch is not supported.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion
==-====
=::=..:
IB M
::5:'::::~~ Programming
P 360C.23
May 73
System/360 - 370 Programming
C onvers lon/S erv I ce
Basic Program Material:
Documentation: Basic Program Material List ••• User's information SRL: Emulating the 7074 on the System/370 Models 155 and 165 using OS (GC27-694S
and TNLs GN27-1365 and 1372).
Minimum System Requirements: To emulate System/360 Model 20, the System/370
Model 135 must have:
'
The Model 20 Compatibility Feature .7520
For control storage ~uirements, refer to page M 3135.1 of the sales manual
Machine Readable: load module, emulator generation macro definition, User
SYSOUT Writer, and sample program are available on a 2400 magnetic tape 9track (SOO or 1600 bpI).
Enough main storage for the routines needed to emulate the Model 20, for
emulated Model 20 core storage, and for the OOS supervisor
System/370 input/output devices that correspond to the System/360
Model 20 input/output devices being emulated.
Optional Program Material:
Documentation: Optional Program Material list, PLM: Program to emulate the 7074
on tile System/370 Model 155 using OS (GY27-7238).
The I/O device required by DOS.
Machine Readable: source statements and macros are available on a 9-track
2400 magnetic tape (800 bpI).
Main Storage Requirements: The Systemj370 Model 135 main storage illustrated
below InclUdes the emulator routines and emulated Model 20 core storage. It does
not Include the main storage occupied by the OOS supervisor.
Program Listings: are available on microfiche from Mechanicsburg CGJDl-1643-0).
MAIN STORAGE REQUIRED (In K Bytes)
Ordering Information: Program Number 360C-EU-741
Program Number
ExtenSion
Basic
2311
Optional
Distribution Medium
Code
T~pe
User Volume
Requlreme~
DTR 7DC/800 26
DTR 9/800
28
DTR 9/1600
29
none
none
none
2314
DTR 7DC/800 26
DTR 9/800
28
DTR 9/1600
29
none
none
none
3330
DTR 7DC/SOO 26
2S
DTR 9/800
29
DTR 9/1600
none
none
none
26
28
29
1
none
none
none
MT 7DC/SOO
DTR 9/800
DTR 9/1600
Additional copies of the form numbered manual should be ordered from Mechanicsburg not from PID.
Model 20
Core
Storage
Model 20
Card
System
4
S
12
16
24
32
*
Model 20
Card & Tape
Model 20
Card & Disk
S~stem
S~stem
19
23
27
35
43
27
31
39
47
12
16
20
24
32
Model 20
Card, Tape
& Disk S~stem
29
33
41
49
* Card devices include the IBM 2501, the IBM 2520 or 2560, the IBM 1442
and the IBM 1403 or 2203.
AUXiliary Storage Required (On a 2316)
Source Statement Library:
Relocatable library:
Core Image library:
2261 blocks
173 blocks
'19 blocks
See SRL GC24-5036 - Disk Operating System System Control and System Service
Program.
Input/Output deVice correspondence is as follows:
System/360 Model 20 Emulator on System/370
Model13S under DOS C370N-lc-002):
It allows the user to run Model 20
programs under the Disk Operating
System USing the Model 20 Compatibility Feature .7520 of the System/370 Model 135.
Model 20 Devices
Emulated By:
2415 Magnetic Tape Unit,
Models 1 to 6
2401 MagnetiC Tape Unit, Models 1 to 6
and S attached to the 2803 or 2804
Control Unit
2401 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control,
Models 1, 2, 4
2415 Magn~tic Tape Unit and Control
Models 1 to 6
2420 Magnetic Tape Unit, Models 5
and 7 attached to the 2803 Control
Unit
It allows Model 20 programs to be run in a stacked-job environment mixed with System/
370 jobs, It takes advantages ofthe multiprogramming facilities of DOS.
,'.
If SYSRDR is assigned to a magnetic tape or a disk unit, that device must
of the DOS control cards that normally are included in the job stream,
3420 Magnetic Tape Unit, Models 3,5
and 7 attached to the 3803 Control
Unit'
Input all
The Model 20 CPU instructions are executed by the Compatibility Feature, except.'
the Halt and Proceed (HPR) set PSW (SPSW), and all SS-format instructions which
are executed by the emulator program. The emulator program uses the phySicallOCS
capabilities of DOS to emulate the Model 20 I/O instructions,
2311 Disk Storage Drive, Models 11
and 12
2312 Disk Storage Model A1
2313 Disk Storage Model Al
Card Tape and Disk programs are executed. Cards and Tapes used and produced by
the System/360 Model 20 or by the System/360 Model 25 in Mode 20 can be used
by the emulator program without changes, except 7 -track tapes in mixed parity or
density which are not accepted by the emulator, Disk volumes created by the System/
360 Model 20 or by the System/360 Model 25 in Model 20 mode must be copied
on a tape by running a Model 20 utility program on their original system, and then
restored to disk by emulating tI1e Model 20 utility program on a Model 135. Each
Model 20 disk volume is converted into a DOS DAM file. Three 2311 Model 11
volumes can be emulated by one module of an IBM 2319.
Restrictions:
Model 20 devices and features/functions not emulated are:
1419,1255, and 1259 MagnetiC Character Readers
1270 Optical Reader Sorter
2560 Sort/Me,ge, and only one punch path
Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter
Communications Adapter Special Features
1401/1440 Compatibility Feature for S/360 Model 20
Submodel5
Dual Feed Carriage Feature of the 2203 Printer
Selective Tape Listing Feature of the 1403 Printer
Programs that cannot be executed using the emulator are:
Time-dependent programs
Programs using mixed parity or mixed density on 7-track tape
Programs using ASCII Code
.
Programs using the DIAGNOSE instruction
Programs using the two commands for the Universal Character
: Set Feature of the IBM 1403 Printer
2311 Disk Storage Drive, Modell
attached to the 2841 Control Unit
2314 DireCt Access Storage Facility
Models 1, ~1, B1
2318 Disk Storage Model Ai
2319 Disk Storage Models A1, A2, B1,
B2
3330 Series Disk Storage
1259 Magnetic Character Reader
Not emulated
1255 Magnetic Character Reader
Not emulated
1419 Magnetic Character Reader
Not emulated
1270 Optical Reader Sorter Models
I, 2, 3, 21, 22, 23
Not emulated
Binary Synchronous Communications
Adapter
Not emulated-
2152 Printer-Keyboard
3210 Console Pri'nter'Model 1
2501 Card Reader, Models A1 and
A2 (3) (4)
2501 Card Reader, Models B1 and B2
3215 Console Printer
The emulated Model 20 error condition will always be that of the
Model 20 Submodel 5
Not to be reproduced without written pennl..lon
2520 Card Read Punch, Model Bl
2540 Card Read Punch attached to the
2821 Control Unit
3505 Card Reader, Models Bl and B2
3525 Card Punch, Models P1, P2, and
P3 (1)
I=D=£E
=&e=~~ Programming
C onvers i on/Ser'" i ce
2520 t;:ard Read Punch, Model Al
(3) (4)
2520 Card Read Punch, Model B1
3525 Card Punch; Models P1,P2, and
P3 Cl)
2520 Card Punch, Models A2 and
A3 (4)
2520 C(!rd Read Punch, ModelB1
2520 Card Punch, Models B2 and B3
2540 Card Read'Punch
2821 Control Unit
~ttached to the
3525 Card Punch, Models PI, P2, and
P3 (1) or (2) with or without Card Read
feature
1442 Card Punch, Model
S (3) (4) .
2520 Card R,ead Punch/Model B1
'2520 Card Punch, Models B2and B3
2540 Card Read Punch attached to the
2821 Control Unit
'
3525 Card Punch, Models PI, P2, and
P,3 (1) or(2)
2560 Multi-Function Card Machine,
Models Al and A2 (Model Al with
one of the Optional Card Print
feature) (4)
Sort and merge capabi lities are not
emulated
3505 Card Reader, Models B1 and B2,
and
3525 Card Punch, Models PI, P2, and
P3 with one of the Card Print feature
(optional) (1)
1 and
1403 Printer, Mddels 2, 7, and N1
(4) or
1403 Printer, Models 2, 3,
2203 Printer, Models Al and A2 (4)
1443 Printer, Model N1
Selective Tape Listing Feature of the
1403 and Dual Feed Carriage
Features of the 2203 are not
emulated
3211. Printer attached to the 3811
Printer Control Unit
(1)
Nl
Model 20 OOS/VS Disk Data Interchange Function: During the conversion period the
user may want a newly-written DOsNs application program to have access to data
stored ill his files by Model 20 application programs running under emulation.
Since the data organizati~ns on disk used by,DPS andooS/VS are not compatible,
a file conversion aid known as Model 20 OOS/VS dis.k data interchange, part of the
emulator program, provides this and the reverse capability.
Conversion is proVided for Sequential, Indexed SElQuentiai and Direct Access files.
Conversion from Model 20 DPS emulated format to DOS/VS format is provided, as is
reverse conversion from OOS/VS format to Model 20 DPS emulated format.
Both Sequential and Indexed Sequential fi lescan have a different blocking factor on
the OOS/VS copy of the file from that used on, the DPS copy. This enables the user to
take advantage of the different physical characteristics of the System/370 Direct
Access devices.
The Data Interchange function operates as a job in a OOS/VS jobstream. When the
conversion function is no longer required the control cards invoking this function are
merely removed from the jobstream. Thus no special provions need be made in
newly written OOS/VS application programs to allow for the file conversion process.
Restriction: The blocksize used by the OOS/VS copy of the file should not exceed a
single track capacity.
When a ooS/VS originated file is copied into DPS emulated format, the disk extents
used must be initialized by a DPS program running under control of the emulator.
Machine Requirements: The Disk Data Interchange function runs on any model (sup, ported by ooS/VS) of Systemj370 in any partition since it is not dependent on the
System/360 Model 20 compatibility feature (FC7520), The program including 2K
buffers for an average blocksize of lK runs in a 20K partition.
For best performance, it is suggested that the files are copied from one DASD pack
to another DASD pack. In this case one DASD volume supported by the Model 20
Emulator (for the Model 20 file in emulated format), and one DASD volume supported
by OOS/VS (for the OOS/VS file) must be provided.
Basic Program Material:
The 3505 Card Reader must be equipped with the 3525 Read/punch Adapter
feature '116105; the 3525 Card Punch must be equipped with the Card Read
feature U533.
(2)
The 3505 Card Reader must be equipped with the 3525 Punch Adapter feature
ta103.
(3)
The System/370 2520 Card Read Punch, Model B1, or the 3525 Card
Punch cannot emulate more than one of the following devices at a time~
(4)
P 360C.24
May 73
IBM System/360 - 370 Programming
-
2501 Card Reader, Models AI, A2
-
2520 Card Read Punch, Model Al or 2520 Card Punch Models A2, A3
-
1442 Card Punch, Model 5
Documentation: One copy each of Model 20 Emulator on System/370 using DOS
and DOS/VS (GC33-2006), basic program material list.
Machine Readable: One copy of machine readable material containing Generation
macro definitions, object modules, phase modules for Cil and sample program.
Optional Program Material:
Documentation: Optional material list.
Machine Readable: One copy of machine readable material containing source modules
of the Model 20 Emulator.
Ordering Information: Program Number 370NIC002
When device independence is used, add the System/370 Magnetic Tapes and
Disk Storage in the list of corresponding System/370 devices.
Device Independence: This option allows faster S/370 I/O devices such as disks or
tapes to be used to replace unit record devices when emulating Model 20 programs.
This is particularly advantageous when emulating Model 20 programs which make use of
intermediate card files, since tape and disk devices transfer data at much higher speeds
than do unit record devices. Also,in a multiprogramming environment, unit record devices
no longer need to be dedicated to the emulator partition.
Basic
Optional
Program Number
Extension
Distribution Medium
Type
Code
User Volume
Requirement
None
DTR 7DC/800
DTR 9/800
DTR 9/1600
Disk 1316
Disk 2316
26
28
29
52
57
None
None
None
DTR
DTR
DTR
Disk
Disk
26
28
29
52
57
None
None
None
None
7DC/800
9/800
9/1600
1316
2316
1
1
1
1
The additiotlal storage required by this option is 6K plus buffer areas.
Additional Program Support Material:
Model 20 features and instructions not emulated when using Device
Independence are:
Stacker selection for input fi les
Optional Card Print feature on the 2520 MFCM, Model Al
Punch Feed Read instruction
Read Column Binary cards on the 2501 Card Reader, the 2520
Card Read Punch, and the 2560 MFCM
Program Listings: Available on microfiche frOm IBM Corporation, Microfiche Distribution,
Mechanicsburg. Order Number: GJDl-4601
Program logic Manual: Model 20 Emulator on System/370 using DOS (SY 33-7010>.
In addition:
The Sort/Merge program for the 2560 MFCM cannot be run
Only the selection of two stackers is emulated for 2560 MFCM
Primary and secondary feeds have no interaction when emulating
the 2560 MFCM
Data files that contain /& cards cannot be read.
Not to be reproduced without written permi.lon
IBM
If ..=sE
:5:.:IV1: Programming
S~stem!360 -
370 Programming
P 360C.25
May 73
Conver s ion /S erv ice
Program Number
Extension
OPTIONAL PROGRAM PACKAGE
Machine Readable: Source modules are available and distributed as indicated below.
Distribution Medium
Type
Code
User Volume
Requirement
360CEU735,or360CEU736
Basic
2311
MT
DTR
OTR
70C/800
9/800
9/1600
26
28
29
01
nonenone
2314
MT
DTR
OTR
70C/800
9/800
9/1600
26
28
29
01
none
none
. ·3330
MT
MT
MT
70C/800
9/800
9/1600
26
28
29.
01
01
01
none
MT
OTR
DTR
70C/800
9/800
9/1600
2311
SOTR
SOTR
SDTR
7DC/800
9/800
9/1600
26
28
29
none
none
none
2314
MT
LOTR
LOTR
7DC/800
9/800
9/1600
26
28
29
01
none
none
3330
MT
LOTR
LOTR
70C/800
9/800
9/1600
26
28
29
01
none
none
none
MT
LOTR
SOTR
7DC/800
9/800
9/1600
26
28
29
01
none
Ilone
ORDERING I~FORMATION
Program Number
Extension
Distribution Medium
Code
Type
User Volume
Requirement
360CEU074, or 360CEU726, or 360CEU728, or
Basic
none
DTR
OTR
OTR
7DC/800
9/800
9/1600
26
28
29
none
none
none
Optional
none
OTR
OTR
OTR
7DC/800
9/800
9/1600
26
28
29
none
none
none
360CEU725, 360CEU727, 360CEU729, 360C~750
Optional
none
OTR
DTR
OTR
70C/800
9/800
9/1600
26
28
29
none
none
none
Optional
none
MT
MT
MT
7DC/800
9/800
9/1600
26
28
29
01
01
01
Basic
none
DTR
00
none
Optional
none
DTR
OTR
OTR
7DC/800
9/800
9/1600
26
28
29
none
none
none
DTR
OTR
OTR
1316
7DC/800
9/800
9/1600
26
28
29
52
none
none
none
01
none
OTR
DTR
OTR
7DC/800
9/800
9/1600
26
28
29
01
01
01
Basic
none
DTR
OTR
DTR
1316
7DC/800
9/800
9/1600
26
28
29
52
none
none
none
01
Optional
none
MT
OTR
MT
70C/800
9/800
9/1600
26
28
29
01
none
01
Basic
360CSI752
Optional
360CCV710,or360CCV711
Or:Yional
none
01
none
none
360CEU739
Basic
Basic
26
28
'29
360CCV712
360CCV713, or 360CSI754
BaSic
none
DTR
DTR
DTR
7DC/800
,9/800
9/1600
26
28
29
none
none
none
Optional
none
MT
OTR
MT
7DC/SOO
9/800
9/1600
26
28
29
01
none
01
ADDITIONAL PROGRAM MATERIAL
Program LO!.1ic Manuals
1401/1460 Emulator for 5/360
7074 Emulator for S/360 Models 50 & 65
7080 Emulator for 5/360 Model 65
7074 Emulator for 5/360 Models 50 & 65
1410/7010 Emulator for S/360 Model 40
7040/7044 Emulator for S/360 Model 65
1410/7010 Emulator for 5/360 Model 40
709/7090/7094 Emulator for 5/360
ALGOL to PL/I LCP
FORTRAN IV to PL/I LCP
1410/7010 Simulator
7070/7074 Simulator
7090/7094 Simul.ator
COBOL-to-ANS COBOL LCP
COBOL-to-(E/F) to PL/I LCP
7094 Integrated fmulator Model 85 under
05/360
1401/1440/1460 OS Emulator on Models
135/145/155
1410/7010 OS Emulator on Models 145/155
GY27-7103
GY27-7111
GY27-7112
GY27-7129
GY27-7127
GY27-7147
GY28-6564
GY28-6566
GY33-7006
GY33-7000
GY27-7115
GY27-7117
GY27-7119
GY28-6397
GY33-7007
GY27-7187
GY33-1011
GY33-1012
360CSI753
Basic
none
DTR
DTR
OTR
7DC/800
9/S00
9/1600
26
28
29
none
Ilone
none
Optional
none
MT
MT
MT
7DC/SOO
9/800
9/1600
26
28
29
02
02
02
2311
OTR
OTR
9/800
9/1600
28
29
none
none
2314
OTR
OTR
9/800
9/1600
28
29
none
none
None
OTR
OTR
9/800
9/1600
28
29
none
none
360CEU734
BaSic
Optional
[Reverse Side is Blank)
Program Listings:
When oroerlng specify -Group Code
1310 for the 1410/7010 Simulator
1321
1620 Simulator S/360
1370
7070/7074 Simulator
1390
701)0/7094 Simulator
1400
1401/1460 Emulator
1410
1410/7010 Emulator
1500
1410/7010 Emulator, Model 50
1510
7074 Emulator, Models 50 & 65
1620
7080 Emulator, Model 65
1630
709/7090/7094/7094 II Emulator, Mdl 65
4600
ALGOL to PL/I LCP
4610
FORTRAN IV to PL/I LCP
4620
COBOL to PL/I LCP
9000
COBOL-to-ANS COBOL LCP
for OS/360
1420
7094 Integrated Emulator Model 85 under
OS/360
GJO,l- 2100
1401/1440/1460 Integrated Emulator
for Model 155 - OS
GJOl-2150
1410/7010 Integrated Emulator for
Model 155 - OS
GJOl-1641
707017074 on Model l65
Not to be reproduced without written permlllion
m,.,
Programming support for the System/360 Model 44 is tailored for the intermediate
scientific user. It is provided by
System/360 Modr.1 44 Programming System ••• disk reSident programs
requiring a minimum of 64K (65,536) bytes of core storage.
System/360 Model 44 Programming SystC!fl (44 PS)
The Model 44 Programming System conSists of a FORTRAN compiler, an assembler,
a supervisor, and system support programs, It provides FORTRAN and assembler
language processing and program execution in a monitored environment, with automatic job-to-job transition. interruption handling, and input/output supervision,
The system has facilities for the creation and maintenance of libraries and the
manipulation of their contents. It also provides extensive job control and modular
programming capabilities for flexibility and versatility in the preparation of programs for execution. It will utilize all available core storage. Programs utiUring
direct data channel, direct word, or priority interruption features cannot be executed
under the supervisor,
System Components
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
PS
PS
PS
PS
PS
PS
PS
PS
Supervisor
Job Control
Linkage Editor
Assembler
Utilities
FORTRAN Compiler
FORTRAN Library
System Editor
P 360F.1
Feb 72
IBM System/360 Model 44
Programming
Assembler
The assembler translates System/360 assembler language programs to relocatable
object program IIIodules. The assembler language consists of all System/360
Moclel 44 instruction mnemonics, literals, and a set ofassembler instructions tbat
direct the assembly process. It includes an optional UPDATE facility.
Compatibility. Observing the qualifications listed below, programs written
br the Model 44 Assemblc¥ may be assembled by the TOS/DOS Assemblers
and the OS
Assembler. Similarly, programs written for the BPS Assemblers may be assembled by the Model 44 Assembler.
The Model 44 Assembler will only assemble instructions included in the
Model 44 Instruction Set. There are four special instructions unique to the
Model 44 that cannot be assembled on other System/360 assemblers.
In addition, the Assembler's UPDA IE instructions are unique to the Model
44 and cannot be processed by any other assembler.
If variable symbols are used, care must be taken prior to assembly in other
systems to ensure that LCLA declaration exists for all variable symbols.
The user must ensure that each program observes the subroutine linkages and
supervisor calls' appropriate to the system,that the program will run under.
FORTRAN IV
360F-10-l13
360F-CL-614
360F-ED-615
360F-AS-616
360F-UT -617
360F-FO-61S
360F-LM-619
360F-UT-620
The system resides on either a 2315 or a 1316 Disk Cartridge. It includes a
supervisor, a set of support programs that perform system-related and utility functions, and two language processors: a full FORTRAN IV compiler and an assembler.
It also rncludes seven stand-alone (i .e., not operating under system controll programs that are not resident on the 2315/1316 Disk Cartridge: a program to con'struct the executable programming system from the distributed tape/card decks; a
loader for loading system-produced programs that are in absolute form; and are to be
executed independently of system control; two disk initialization programs (2315
and 1316); a save/restore program for saving the contents of a disk on tape and
later restoring the disk; a special purpose program for printing, .punching, or updating the IBM-di stributed system; and a self-loading core dump program. The
system requires 16,896 bytes to be permanently resident in core storage, and
110 tracks on the Systems ReSidence Volume. Additional space must be reserved
on the DSSK when the system is initially created for system scratch areas and
user additions to the phase and module libraries. 814 bytes in the Resident
Supervisor are the FE Diagnostics required to support this system.
Supervisor
The supervisor controls the entire system and provides a common interface to all
processing programs, including the FORTRAN compiler, the assembler, the system support programs, and user-written programs, SpeCifically, the supervisor
Manages the use of system resources,
Loads the appropriate execution phases from the phase library (i.e " the
library of programs in absolute form, ready for execution) .•
Handles all standard label checking, input/output requirements, and input/
output error recovery procedures. The.NO LABEL option is provided for
unlabled tapes.
The FORTRAN IV compiler translates programs written in the FORTRAN language
to relocatable object program modules. The compiler accepts programs written in
the full FORTRAN IV language. No debug facilities are available however. Programs may be written in either BCD or EBCDIC. The compiler tests for usages of
official FORTRAN library routine names to ensure correspondence with respect to
the number arid type, of arguments used. The FORTRAN language manual warns
against the declaration of COMMON and EQUIVALENCE data in such a way as to
cause data to be improperly aligned, e.g., double preciSion data not on double
word boundaries. If such a condition is detected, a warning message will be printed
at compile time but execution will be allowed to begin. If a specification condition
occurs at execution time, a' fix-up routine will be loaded automatically into main
storage and the data adjusted so that execution can continue. A facility is provided
in the FORTRAN Library for CALling the Fetch and Load Supervisor facilities of
the 44 PS.
Compatibility. The Model 44 FORTRAN IV is compatible with and encompasses
the U.S .A. Standard (USA) FORTRAN. Programs written in BPS, TOS, DOS
FORTRAN or OS E Level FORTRAN may be compiled by the Model 44 FORTRAN
IV. 05/360 FORTRAN IV G and H are compatible with Model 44 FORTRAN IV.
(See System/360 FORTRAN IV Language Manual (C28-6515), which describes
the common language).
Performance: Estimated performance of the Model 44 Programming System Assembler
and FORTRAN IV, illustrated with three typical configurations, can be calculated
with the information below, assuming no labels. I/O is unblocked with the exception of intermediate data sets. Assembler and FORTRAN IV figures include output
of a listing and an executab Ie program in the Phase Library for each comp i lation and
are based on typical source program decks. Additional core storage will be used for
symbol tables.
Configuration A is for a card environment, configuration B a tape/disk, and configuration C an all-tape environment. The following table shows the units required
for each configuration. In configuration A, the card reader is the 2540 Card
Read/Punch, and 5050 refers to the single disk storage drive. In Band C, the
2400 Tape is the Model 3 (90KC) tape.
.
All configurations include the Model 44F with a 2315 or 1316 Disk Cartridge
for systems residence, the console printer-keyboard, and high speed general purpose registers. In addition, configurations Band C require a multiplexer channel
as a second channel.
Services interruptions and passes control to the appropriate system or user
routine for interruption processing •.
Schedules channel use to effect overlap of processing with input/output
operations.
Provides for communication with the console operator.
System Support Programs
The system support programs provide a Wide range of capabilities for use by both
the system and the programmer.
Job Control provides for sequential job processing with automatic job-to-job
transition.
Linkage Editor edits,the compiler and assembler relocatable output modules
into absolute form, automatically combining these modules with modules from
the module library (one of the system libraries) where necessary.
Utility Programs. These programs provide data set transmission and external
storage initialization and maintenance functions. In addition, the(e are
DUMP facilities which can be invoked by either the problem program or the
operator.
A
Source input
Output listing
Linkage Editor input
Scratch file
2540
1403 Nl
SO SO
5050
Configuration
B
2400 tape
2400 tape
2400 tape
SDSD
C
2400
2400
2400
2400
tape
tape
tape
tape
The estimates are made assuming that assembly/compilation options are set to give
a listing, no deck, and to perform linkage editing. Also it is assumed that units
are assigned to give optimum channel utilization.
~
Up to 2100 symbols can be assembled in a Model 44F. This is increased by
2,000 for each additional 32 K bytes of core storage available.
The ass~mbler has a cross-reference feature ~hich is optionally callable. The performance is significantly different with cross-reference.thanwithout i so several of
the entries below provide two timing estimates.
The System Editor allows for modification of program stored in either the phase .
or module library.
Not to be "PrOduced withoUt written permiealon
IB"
P 360F.2
Feb 72
IBM System/360 Model 44
Programming
(Time in seconds)
System factor to be applied once per job
System and Assembler factor to be applied
once per assembly
a. without cross-reference
b. 2311 Residence, without cross-reference
c. with cross-reference*
A
Configuration
B
C
4.5
4.0
4.0
independent of system control. Object modules may also be loaded provided
they are in absolute form. That is, they do not contain any external references or address constants which require relocation.
Disk Initialization. Two programs (for 2315 and 1316) are included for
surface analysis, initialization, and alternate track allocation.
6.3
5.2
12.3
4.5
3.7
9.8
4.5
3.7
7.0
Assemble factor per source card
a. without cross-reference
b. with cross-reference
0.133
0.145
0.044
0.049
0.030
0.032
System factor to be applied once per linkage
editor step
a. SDSD Residence
b. 2311 Residence
4.3
3.5
3.6
2.4
3.6
2.4
Linkage Editor factor to be applied once per
source card
0.003
0.003
0.003
Save/Restore. This program saves the contents of a disk on tape or restores a disk from a "Save" tape.
System Maintenance. This program prints or punches selected files of
the tape containing the IBM-distributed system.
Core Dump. This program dumps core, the 16 standard registers, and
the floating ;Joint registers, if they exist.
'
Minimum Machine Configuration
2044 Processing Unit with its Console Printer-Keyboard, Single Disk Storage
Drive, and at least 65,536 bytes of main storage.
One Multiplexer Channel
(# 5248
or #4598).
One 2315 Disk Cartridge (used for Systems Residence).
"*These estimates are made assuming that the symbol table is 2000 entries long.
These times become proportionately less if the user specifies that the ~ymbol table is
shorter. For example, a symbol table of 500 entries under configuration.A would
reduce thi s figure by about 4.5 seconds.
One of the follOWing input units: 1442 Mdl Nl Card ReadlPunch •• , 2501
Mdl Bl or B2 Card Reader ••. 2520 Mdl Bl Card Read/Punch .•• 2540 Mdl
1 Card Read/punch .. , 2401 or 2402 Mdl 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or8 (7-track)
Magnetic Tape Unit ... 2420 Mdl 5 ... 2403 Mdl 1, 2, 3,4, 5, or 6
Magnetic Tape Unit Control ••• 2404 Mdl 1, 2, or 3 Magnetic Tape Unit and
Control ... 2311 Disk Storage Drive.
FORTRAN IV
One of the following output listing units: 1403 Mdl 2, 3, 7 or Nl Printer ...
1443 Mdl Nl Printer ... any of the magnetic tape units listed above ... 2311
Disk Storage Drive.
Both compiler and object programs require the Standard Instruction Set and the
Floating Point option. In a Model 44F, about 1000 statements1T1ay be compiled.
At execution time, approximately 33,000 bytes of core storage are available for
object code and data space. In any given compilation, it is unusual for the number
of bytes of executable code generated to be more than 60 per statement. To improve multiple compilation performance, compilations may be batched between a
Single //EXEC card and a 1* card. The options on the //EXEC card follow
throughout all compilations in the batch. The second and subsequent compilations
follow directly behind the END statement of the preceding campi lation.
S'ystem factor to be applied once per job
System and Compiler factor to be applied once
per batch of compilations
a. SDSD Residence
b. 2311 Residence
System and Compiler factor to
per compilation
a. SDSD Residence
b. 2311 Residence
A
Configuration
B
C
4.5
4.0
4.0
4.0
2.2
2.5
2.0
2.5
2.0
4.5
3.7
4.5
3.0
4.5
3.0
0.10
0.05
0.05
One'ofthe following output punching units: 1442 Mdl N2 Punch .. , 2520 Mdl
B2 or B3 Punch ... any of the card read/punches I isted above ... any of the
magnetic tape units listed above ... 2311 Disk Storage Drive.
Notes on Configurations:
1. In addition to the above requirements, the system supports the attachment of
-- a second Single Disk Storage Drive (with 2315 Cartridge),whicb, alter~
natively, may be used for Systems Residence ... additional 2311 Disk Storage Drives (with 1316 Disk Pack), which also may be used for system residence
... additional magnetic tape units (any of the modules listed above) ... addiitional multiplexer channel s to a maximum of 3.
2.
be applied once
Compile factor per source card
System and Linkage Editor factor to be applied
once per job step
a. SDSD Residence
b. 2311 Residence
System and Linkage Editorfactor to be applied
once per source card
11.8
8.3
0.04
10.0
6:3
0.03
9.6
6.3
3. If more than 65,536 bytes of main storage are available, the system will take
advantage of their availability.
4.
The FORTRAN compiler requires that the 2044 be equipped with the Floatingpoint Arithmetic feature (#4427). The assembler also requires this feature if
it is desired to assemble floating-point constants.
5.
The user may modify the supervisor to include input/output routines for additional devices (provided these devices have start, device end, and channel
end characteristics similar to those of the supported devices). These characteristics are detailed in System/360 PrinCiples of Operation, A22-6821,
and the appropriate unit manua Is.
6.
The Read-Backward feature of the 2400 Series Magnetic Tape Units is not
'
supported.
0.02
Stand Alone Programs
2315 Disk Initialization
2311 Disk Initialization
Save/Restore (Stand Alone Utility)
System Maintenance (Stand Alone Utility)
Absolute Loader (Stand Alone Utility)
System Construction
360F-UT-607
360F-UT -608
360F-UT-609
360F-UT-610
360F-UT -611
360F-UT -612
System Construction -- Each system can be tai lored to the specific system,func'"
tion requirements and input/output configuration ofthe installation. The installation may modify the IBM-supplied configuration, deleting functions not required
by the installation and adding installation-created functions and programs.
A stand-alone program is provided that constructs a system (on a 2315 or a
1316 DiskCartridge) from the executable phases and the relocatable modules
the installation elects to include in its system. All the announced support
will be included in the distributed decks. As part ofthe initial program load
0 Model 44 PrOframming System ~ Systems Programmen' Guide,
C28-6814 ... 1.
Program LOgic Manuals
Assembler
Supervisor and Job Control Proce~~or
Linkage Editor
Uti! ities· and Stand-alone Proqrailis
FORTRAN .IV Compiler
Y28-6811
Y28-6812
Y28-b813
Y28-6814
Y28-6815
Progral" Listin~s: Available on Illicrofiche. Spec.ify qroup c.ode 1720. The li,tln'l:'
are equivalent to the output listings produced lJy asseiliblinq the sy" nolie "oculf:s.
A ,I:llarate ·~.aqn(:tir. ti1I)~'
is required for eilch distribution volUille. The external tape label :"lI~t ,,1,0'11 tl.,: ';istrlbution volume nilillber indicated below, as well (IS tile infoYl':ation r(:quirl:~ UII~(:r
currellt Ilrocedures. Tapes arc blocked 20 card, per record.
If either 9- or 7-track maqnetic tape is not specified, 9-track tap': at 800 "iJi will
be forwarded.
Program Extension
Number
VOLl
Progra::1
S/A Cort: DlII'11l
2315 Disk Initialization
2311 Disk Initilllization
Silve/Restore
* Systell! Maintenance
'i, Absolute Loader
Systelll Construction
44 PS Supervisor
Job Control
Link(lge Editor
Assembler
Util ities
System Editor
FORTRAN COlllpiler
FORTRAN Library
*
Core Dump 360F-UT-606
A stand alone utility that provides f!ll' dumping core sizer; of 64K or greater. the 16
standard registers al1d floating-point registers, if they exist,
VOL2
*$tand
alo~e
utility
IThe reverse side is blank'
Not to be reproduoed without written pennl.lon
360F -UT -60 b
UT -607
UT -603
UT-609
UT-610
UT-611
UT-612
10-613
CL-614
ED-615
AS-61b
UT-617
UT-b20
FO-618
I:.r,'-619
IB14
IBM System/360 Model 67
Programmi ng
P 360G.l
Feb 72
Time Shari 09 S ys'tem
IBM System/360 Time Sharing System
Time Sharing Support System - TSSS
Time Sharing System/360 is.a comprehensive programming system consisting of
processing programs and service programs operating under the control of a supervisory program. Its purpose is to provide many users concurrent ",cess to a
computing facility in an interactive mode, coupJed with concurrent execution of nonconversational (b!ltch) programs. By calling on various facilities of the liystem,
users are able to compile programs, execute programs, manipuilife data sets and
perform a variety of tasks which may be basically unrelated to each other and are
generally unrestricted in their nature. The Time Sharing System (TSS/360)
operates, on a System/360 Model 67 which has special features that provide the
proper machine environment to enhance the time sharing ability of the system.
TSS/360 operates either on a single processor System/360 Model 67 (2067
mdl 1 or 2) or on a duplex (two 2067 mdl 2 CPUs) configuration.
TSS/360 is composed of programs designed to perform unique functions. These
programs provide: (1) supervisory functions, (2) maintenance and support functions,
(3) service functions, and (4) user functions.
SUPERVISORY FUNCTIONS
The Supervisory Functions of TSS/360 are performed by a single supervisor
supporting both the 24 and 32 bit dynamic address translation hardware. The
s uperv i sory routi ne s prov i de :
'supervision and proceSSing of all types of interrupts.
, Control over I/O activity.
Overlap of CPU operations with I/O activity.
Error recovery and restart.
Concurrent control of a variable number ,of tasks.,
Time-slicing, scheduling and dispatching of tasks in a multiprogramming
env ironment.
Core storage, virtual memory and auxiliary storage allocation.
Basic accounting facilities to accumulate task usage of CPU time. (An
installation provided routine is required to access and output this data.)
Configuration Control
Table Driven Scheduler
The Table Driven Scheduler is a CPU scheduling system (for tasks) which is'driven
from a table made up of a series of entries, each COntaining sc;hedul ing parameters
such as time slice length and maximum pages allowed in core during a time slice.
The system administrators provide the table entries, and their associated scheduling
parameters, as ,well as the aSSignment of users to table entries according to the
priority and kind of work being done.
Error Control
A set of error-control, procedures is provided in the Recovery Nucleus and SERR
(System Error Record and Retry) programs for recognition, analySiS, retry, and
fault-location on the, occurrence of error incidents resulting from "inboard" (CPU,
storage element) errors. Similar procedures are provided to handle "outboard"
(I/O> errors. The intent is to lessen the effect of an error incident on the system;
errors are considered tranSient/intermittent ulltil proven otherwise. Components
exhibiting sol id failures are restricted from further usaqe whenever possible,
although certain solid and intermittent "inboard" failures will necessitate a new system startup. IndiVidual tasks are terminated where possible, in preference to total
system failure. Error data recording concerning "inboard" and "outboard" errors is
provided to enhance system maintenance. This data may be requested by the Field
Engineer and output time shared with the remainder of TSS/360 operations.
Configuration Control
The facil ities provided by Configuration Control enable a system operator to modify
the system configuration (i.e., storage elements, CPU, channel control units,
channels, etc.). These facil ities permit static partitioning, i.e" partitioning at
system startup only. However, some components may be mi;lde inactive or activated
by system operator command after systemstartup.
MAINTENANCE AND SUPPO.RT FUNCTIONS
Include System Generation.
Control, Startup and Shutdown of the system.
Provide TSS Utilities.
Provide for On-line'Testing of certain I/O Devices.
Provide a Powerful System Mainteliance Facility (TSSS).
System 'Generation
System generation macro instructions enable an installation to generate. data to
adapt TSS/360 to its machine configuration and proces$ing reqllirements'.
Partiti~nj'ng
The Time Sharing Support System consists primarily of two parts: RSS for core,
and VSS for Virtual Memory. This support system allows flexible control for diagnostic lind investigative work on TSS/360. Its operation in the Virtual Memory
mode is time shared. TSSS permits a system programmer to monitor the progress
of a task and to debug system programs associated with hiS task from a terminal
or from a central location.
SERVICE FUNCTIONS
Perform data management functions for system and user programs. Data
management conSists of sequential access method (SAM), virtual access
method NAM), and terminal access method (TAM). In addition, for special
requirements, users may construct their own access method USing the input/
output request facility (lOREQ). For operation of on-line card equipment and
printers, a Multiple Sequential AccE'sS Method (MSAM) is provided.
Provide catal9g services to maintain information' about and facilitate access
to data sets (programs and/or data files) and control the sharing of data sets.
Provide dynamic loading of separate object modules into a running program at
execution time.
Include a Command System through which each user interacts with the various
portions of TSS/360.
Provide facilities for Task Interrupt Handl ing.
Provide device management functions.
Provide efficient control of Bulk I/O operations.
Perform 2780-1 Remote Job Entry
Data Management
Data Management routines provide efficient usage of I/O devices and allow application programs to be written independent of device and data characteristics. To
attain these objectives, data management facilities provide a systematiC means of
classifying, identifying, cataloging, storing,and retrieving all data - including
loadable program modules.
Data management facilities can be grouped into two major categories: Data Set
Control and Data Access.
Data Set Control
These functions, which control and regulate the use of all data sets includ'e
provision for:
Data set location control, supported by catalog services, enabl ing programmers to retrieve data and programs by symbolic name alone, without specifying
volume serial number(s).
Shareability of VAM data sets cataloged within the system accOrding to user
definitions.
A system of standard labels and label checking. ProviSion is made for
handl ing unlabeled magnetic tape.
Successive generations of a data set.
Data Access
The programmer can select, from among the data access methods, facilities tailored
to hi s prOCessing requirements. Each access method supplies a comprehensive set
of macro instructions that permit the programmer to specify input/output requests
with a minimum of effort.
Access Methods
Access' methods provide for:
Reading data.
Writing data.
Blocking and deblocking recordS.
Overlapping reading/writing and proceSSing operations.
Reading and verifying standard volume labels; reading, verifying and writing
standard data set labels.
Detecting error conditions, and optionally correcting them when possible.
Providing exits (except VAM) to user written error and label routines.
ASCII Capability
Support in Access Methods for the American National Standard Code for Information
Interchange, X3.4-1968, referred to by the acronym ASCII, provides the TSS/360
customer with the capability to interchange data between systems regardless of manufacturer or operating system, provided the data contains only ASCII characters and is
recorded in conformance with American National Stal1dard Recorded Magnetic Tape for
Information Interchange, 9-track, 800 CPI NRZI,X3.22-1967.
Sequential Access Method
Hardware partitioning into subsystems for non-TSS/360 operations suc.h as running of programs in emulation mode, running OS/360, or running the diagnostic
monitor (maintenance subsystem) can be done between system shutdown and startup. This also applies to the removal for mClintenance of any system device as
well as most other devices in the system.
Ollta is sequentially organized; physical blocks of data are stored or retrieved.
BSAM macrO-instructions are provided to synchronize I/O with the problem program.
QSAM macrO-instructions allow the storage and retrieval of records of a physical
sequential data set without reqlliring the user to supply blocking, deblocking, or
buffering routines. This support is provided for magnetic tapes, as Well as
Not to be reproduced without written penni.lon'
IBM
IBM System/360Mocfel. 67
Progr..mming
P 3600.2
Feb 72
TimeSharing. System
sequentially organized data on direct access devices. (See section On Compatibility with 05/360.)
,
Automatic translation between EBCDIC and ASCII codes is provided in conjunction
with support for American National Standard Recorded Magnetic Tapes, Labels. and
record formats.
Virtual Access Method - VAM
USER FUNCTIONS
Language Processors -- FORTRAN IV , Pl/l, and Assembler with
macro· facilities.
A Linkage Editor allowing use'rs to combine, rename and delete program
modules. (The Linkage Editor does not handle Pl/I object modules.>
language, Processors
VAM is specially designed for TSS/360 and uses the paging facilities of the
supervisor. Three data set organizations are available under VAM: sequential,
index sequential; and partitioned. VAM data sets are limited to direct access
devices. Records are packed into and across pages as required. Although physical
blocks are in units of pages, the logical record length can be as lonq as one million
bytes in sequential. Maximum logical record size supported is 4,000 bytes i.n
index sequential. Partitioned data sets may.contain both sequential and index se.quential members.
VAM II
VAM II is an improved virtual access method which includes VAM volume forma~
changes and allows the creation of duplicate data sets as well as recovery and
validity check options. The VAM volume format changes improve performance
through reduced disk activity in OPEN, CLOSE and extending VAM data sets.
It will be necessary to translate and convert existing VAM data sets. Conversion
routines to accomplish this will also be included.
Terminal Access Method - TAM
language Processors are designed to interact dynamically with a conversational
user, or operate in a batch mode' for a non-conversational user. The cOnversational
user may correct errors as they are discovered by the processors. All P':ocessors
except PL/I are shared problem programs within the Time Sharing environment.
Assembler
The Assembler and the Assembler Langua·ge combine the convenience of the mnemonic
assembly language witb the flexibility of a macro-definition capability. Assembly
is performed conversationally with the user or in a batch mode of operation. The
Assembler provides a macro generator facility that allows the user to define his Qwn
macro-instructions that can be included in a macro library to simplify and standardize problem definition at his installation. 1.11 addition, IBM provides a number of
·macros. These may differ from OS/360 macros having the same name. (See section
on Compatibility with 05/360.)
FORTRAN IV
TAM is only for System Programs, and is not directly available to user programs.
TAM provides necessary communication to be established between TSS/360 and a
terminal. TAM has the complete error detection/correction pertinent to the access
method. This consists of the normal read/write checkin~, error detections and I/O
retry.
User programs may access a terminal via Command System facilities. System Programmers may, of course, write special programs which use TAM.
The FORTRAN compiler provides the user access to FORTRAN IV, a Widely used
symbol ic programming language. The language parallel·s the symboli sm and format
of mathematical notation, thereby providing the flexibility for expressing the method of
of solution of a mathematical problem as a meaningful FORTRAN program. The compiler produces reentrant code deSigned to be executed effiCiently in both conversational
and batch modes of operation in the Time Sharing environment. In conversational
mode, syntax analysis is performed as the source lines are entered. (See section on
Compatibil ity with OS/360.)
Input/Output Request Facil ity - 10REQ
10REQ allows the user to control I/O devices directly without employing the access
methods. Facil ities for scheduling input/output requests, data protection, interrupt
procedures, and error recognition are available. 10REQ may be used only for private
devices or volumes and its use requires a detailed knowledge of device control and
system functions. It maybe used to access data on otherwise unsupported devices.
Multiple Sequential Access Method - MSAM
MSAM is used by System Programs only and is not directly available to user programs. MSAM provides operation of on-I ine card readers and punches and high-speed
printers in a TSS/360 environment. It provides automatic buffering to minimize
system overhead.
Dynamic Loader
The Dynamic Loader allocates virtual storage for object modules and I inks external
sym~ols among these various separately assembled or compiled modules ona dynamic
basis. The Dynamic Loader is available for use by other system. routines and by the
user, in either conversational or non-conversational mode. Normally, with these
facilities of the Dynamic Loader the user need not use the Linkage· Editor unless it
was desired that separate modules be combined into a single program module.
:>mmand System
fhe Command System provides the interface between the user and the operating sysem. Commands are provided which permit the user to construct and execute programs,
atalog and modi fy data sets, and control input/output on card, tape. or printer.
:ommands control the execution of jobs in both conversational and non-conversational·
lodes.
he Command System provides the user with the ability to define his own commands,
) call his programs by direct command, and to use a general text editing capability.
provides a regular command syntax and default and profile facilities.
'gram Control System - PCS
lcludec! as part of the Command System is a subset called the Program Control
,ystem which provides the user with object time symbolic debugging aids. While
lperating in a conversational mode, it enables a programmer to monitor the progress
.1I1d control the execution of a program, make modifications to data and attempt to
localize areas of difficulty. In non-conversational mode these commands allow debugging information to be produced automatically during execution.
'ask Interrupt Handling
Normal tas.k interrupts~ including Terminal Atte·ntions, are handled by TSS/360
facilities. In adcJition the user may write his own programs to handle on or more
types of interrupts. through use of the Task Monitor Fa'cil ities.
Bulk I/O
A single Bulk I/O program,
tions.
utiliZin~ MSAM, controls all TSS/360 Btllk I/O opera-
?7eO-1 Remote Job Entry - RJE
Pl/I F Compi ler
Compiling or executing PL/I code is restricted to tasks operating in 24 bit addressing
mode. The compi ler wi II process source statements from prestored data sets. When
errors are detected, diagnostics can be rett,lrned to the user's terminal. The user may
terminate the compilations, correct the errors and recompile. The compiler is not
reentrant and does not provide a line by line syntax analysis. The use of pes (Pro~
gram Control System) for debugging is limited to using external definitions. No ISDs
(Internal Symbol Dictionaries) will be generated~ The TSS/360 compiler does not
support multitasking, SORT/MERGE, checkpoint and regional I/O and QTAM of the
I/O environment options. If these statements are used, they will be compiled properly,
The user will be informed that the feature is not available at execution time. (See
TSS/360 Supported Hardware and Features for I/O devices supported.) PL/I
object modules which are to be executed as one program must be prepared for the
Dynamic Loader by converting the output of the PL/I compiler to executable code.
This may be done by option at compile time or at any time before passing them to the
Loader.
Linkage Editor
The Linkage Editor, which operates in conversational or batch mode, may be used
to combine and edit separate (non~PL/J) object modules to produce a Single object
module. The Linkage Editor operates as an independent proceSSing program, rather
than as part of the dynamic loader. (The Dynamic Loader allows dynamic linking of
separate object modules into a running program at execution time without requiring
use of the Linkage Editor.) ,
COMPATIBILITY WITH 05/360
Assembler Language -- The language used to describe instructions is syntactically
s.imilar to that of the OS/360 Assembler except for those extensions and restrictions
required by unique Model 67 features, TSS/360 Program Services and ,the TSS/360
operating environment. Programs written in either Assembler language will require
reprogramming to run on the other system. Object code produced by the TSS/360
Assembler is not compatible with OS/360 produced code.
FORTRAN IV -- Provides source level compatibility with 05/360 for those portions
of the language implemented in both systems, with minor exceptions caused by
differences in the compiler implementations. Object code produced by TS$/360
FORTRAN IV is not compatible with OS/360 produced code.
PL/I -- OS and TS S/360 Pl/I F source programs wi II be compatible for those
portions of the language implemented in both systems. However the data files they
generate may not be compatible. Data compatibility is provided under the Sequential
Access Method (SAM).
Data Sets -- The Sequential Access Method of TSS/360 provides data compatibility
between 05/360 and TSS/360 sequential data sets, except for minor differences
caused by access method implementations and by the different operating environments
of the two systems.
The 2780-1 RJE facility for TSS/360 extends the central Bulk I/O capabilities
to remote work stations. The remote user can enter batch jobs in the same. f.orm as
at the central reader and receive printed output at a 2780-1 remote work station.
Not t~ ,b~ reproduced without ~,ri~en permission
IB,.,
IBM Systein/360 Model 67
Programming
Time. Sharing System.
P 360G.3'
Feb 72
TSS/360 SUPPORTED HARDWARE AND FEATURES
2860 Selector Channel, Mbdels I, 2, 3 '
Simplex System (single 2067 mdl 1) - System minimum IS two Selector Channels
(two 2860 mdl Is or one 2860 mdl 2>'
(Only units and features listed below are supported.)
Duplex configuration and Extended Dynamic Address Translation.
Note: Isolation features must be specified, as required, for the proC'essing units,
Cliiii'neis and control units supported by TSS.
For duplex systems two channel switches are recommended on all I/O control units
where available.
See applicable machine pages for availability of 2 channel switch feature with 360/
67 and TSS/360 programming pages for 2 channel switches supported by TSS/360.
2067 Processing Unit [Minimum - One 2067 mdl 1 (Simplex System) or one 2067
mdl 2 (Half-duplex System); Maximum - Two 2067 mdl 2s (OuplexSystem)].
Features and Specifications:
Partitioning Sensing (15495). Required on each 2067 mdl 2 of a multiple processor system.
Extended Direct Control (15494). Required on each 2067 mdl 2 of a multiple
processor system.
Floating Storage Addressing (14434>' Optional feature used only on 2067 md! 1.
1052 Adapter (17920>. May substitute 2150 Console with 1052 mdl 7 atta~hed,
one per processor unit. A 1052 mdl 7 is required for each processing unit.
Addit10nal 2846 Attachment (11102). Required to attach second 2846 Channel
Controller. If the feature is on one processor, it must be on all processors in the
Time Sharing System.
Extended DynamiC Addre!?s Translation (t3862). If the feature is on one processor, it must be on all processors in the Time Sharing System.
2nd Wall Section Attachment (t6310>. Required on each 2067 mdl 2 in a configuration with two wall sections.
2365 Processor Storage, Models 2, 12
The 360/67 simplex or half-duplex system requires a minjmum of two 2365s or
512K bytes of memory.
For the 360/67 multiprocessor system a minimum of three 236S5 or 768K bytes
of me!"ory is recommended.
2365 mdl 2
2365 mdl 12
2365 mdl 12
Two to four with 2067 mdl 1
Two to four with 2067 mdl 2 (Single processor systems)
Two to eight with 2067 mdl 2 (multiprocessor systems)
(Storage must all be the same model.)
Features and Specifications:
Half-duplex System (Single 2067 mdI2)'- $ystemminimum is two Selector Channels (two 2860 mdl Is or one 2860 mdl 2) attached to one or two 2846 Channel
Controllers.
Cuplex System (two 2067 mdl 2s) - System minimum is two Selector Channels
(two 2860 mdl Is or one 2860 mdl 2) attached to one or'two'2846 Channel Controllers.' .
Features and Specifications:
High Speed Direct Access Storage Priority (#4597). Required on·2860(s)
attaching 2820/2301(s) through 2846 Channel Controllers. (Attaches to first
channel - highest priority channel only.)
Address Prefixing (tI095). Required on each channel, 'in systems having more
than one 2067 Processing Unit.
2870 Multiplexer Channel (System minimum is 'one 2870' Multiplexer Channel;
system maximum IS one 2870 per 2846.)
Features and Specifications:
First Selector Sub-Channel (#6990>.*
Second ~elector Sub-Channel (#6991>.*
Third Selector Sub-Channel (#6992).*
Fourth Selector Sub-Channel (t6993>. *
Address PrefiXing (#1095>. Required on each channel in systems. having more
than one 2067 Processing Unit.
* The only supported devices on 2870 Selector Sub·Channel are magnetic 'ta~
(upto 800 bpj)and 1052 mrll7. Only one control unit is permitted on each
selector SlJb-channel of the 2870.
2821 Control Unit, Models I, 2, 3, 5 (Minimum - One Control Unit).
Features and Specifications:
·1403 Model 2 Attachment (#9241, #9242, #9243). A feature #9241,
,t9242, or #9243 is required as appropriate with the printer or control unit
model selected.
1403 Model 3, Nl (llOO LPM) Attachment (#3615>. A fetl'ure ~9262,
#9263, #9264 is required as appropriate with the printer control and control
unit model selected.
Universal Character Jet Adapter (#8637, #8638, #8639).
Third Printer Control (t 7945).
Two Channel Switch, with partitioning (#8100>.
Remote Switch Attachment (#6148).
2150 Console Model 1
Seven Bit Storage Protect (t7123). One required per 2365 mdl 2 Processor
Storage Unit. Standard on 2365 mdl 12.
2067 Attachment (t8035). One required per 2365 mdl 2 Processor Storage
Unit. Standard on 236S mdl 12.
2067 Switching Feature (t8036). Feature #8036 is required for an additional 2067 on 2365 mdl 12 only.
2846 Switching Feature (t8088, t8091). Provides for attachment of a
2846. One #8088 is required for the first, one t8091 for the second. Maximum of one each per 2365 mdl 12.
Expansion Feature (t3846).
Power Sequencing (#5518). 2365 mdl 12 only.
2167 Configuration Unit, Models I, 2, 3, 4
One configuration unit of appropriate model is required on ei!ch 2067 mdl 2 halfduplex or duplex system.
2846 Channel Controller
One or two channel controllers may be attached to a 2067 mdl 2·system. A maximum of two 2846s are supported in a duplex system. Only one channel·with 2820s
can be attached to a 2846. Maximum one operating 2820/2301 per 2846.
Features and Specifications:
Additional Addressing I (#1086). Required if the 2846 is to address five or
six 2365 model 12s. If the feature ison one 2846, it is required on every
2846 in the system.
Features and Specifications:
Operator Control Panel, First (#5475, #5485).
Operator Control Panel, Second (#5476, #5486),
2702 Transmission Control, Model 1 (Minimumof one 2702 or 2703 required),
Features and SpeCifications:
IBM Terminal Control - Type I (#461S) with Selective Speed (#9684). Required on 2702.
2741 Break (#805S). Required on 2702.
31 Line Expansion (#795S>.
Two Processor Switch, with partitioning (#8110>. [1]
Remote Switch Attachment (#6148).
Terminal Control Expansion (#7935).
Expansion Base (#38S3).
Telegraph Terminal Control - Type II (#7912)
Break Communication IBM TC-l
• Requiredon 2702.
Data Set Line Adapter (#3233).
IBM Line Adapter - 4 wire (#4635J.
2712 Line Adapter (#8040>.
2712 Model 1 Adapter (#804S, #8046).
[1] Manual operation only.
2703 Transmission Control, Model 1 (Minimum of one·2702 or 2703 required),
Features and Specifications:
Start - Stop Base Type I {#7S0S) -- Required •.
IBM Terminal Control Base (#4619) -- Required for 1050 or 2741 terminals.
IBM Terminal Control Type 1(#4696) -- Required for·l0S0 or. 2741 terminals.
Additional Addressing II (#1087). Required if the 2846 is to address seven.or
eight 236S model 12s. Prerequisite is additional addressing (#1086).
No~.to be reproduced",itho~.rI." p,rmiaa'on
II,.,
16M System/;360 Model 67
Programmi ng
jJ
360G.4 .
Feb 72
T.ime Sharing System
2741 Break (#8055) -- Required for 2741 termillals.
Break Transmission
Re(lUirt)d for 1050 or 2741 terminals.
Telegraph Terminal Control Base <#790~) h Req\lired for TWX or similar
terminals.
Telegraph Terminal Control Type II (#7912) -~ Required for TWX or similar
terminals.
Data Line Set (#3205).
Data Line Set Expander (#;3206).
Speed Options (#4877, #4878).
Two Processor Switch (#8110).[:\')
Remote Switch Attachment
[11 Manual Operation Only
2803 Tape Control, Model 1
System requires a minimum of one tape control and two tape drives (9-track), May be
attached to either a 2860 Selector Channel or a 2870 Selector Sub-Channel,
Features and Specifications:
2780-1 Data Transmission Terminal
Features and Specifications:
Transmission Code: Form EBCDIC (#9762) required.
Terminal Use: (#9710) required •.
Data Set Attachment: (#9110)
(2000 bps) or (019111>
(2400 bps).
Leased Line Termination: (#9402 or #9404).
Extended Retry Transmi ssion: (#9150) required.
Print Line: Ui 5821) prerequisite (#5820) required.
Selective Character Set: (#6400) required.
Type Bar: 63 character set required.
E6CDIC TRANSPARENCY (#8030) required.
2701 Data Adapter Unit
Features and Specifications:
Data Conversion (#3228).
Seven-Track Compatibility (#7125).
Sixteen Drive Addressing (#7185).
Two Channel Switch, with partitioning (#8100),
Remote Switch Attachment (#6148).
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II: <#7698 or #7699) required must specify
#9060 for EBCDI C for each adapter.
TransP'lrency (#8029) specify (#9700) required.
Expanded Capability ('1#3815) and Expansion Feature (;;3885) for additional
<#7698 or #7699>.
2816 Switching Unit, Model 1
I/O Units
Features and Specifications:
2301 Drum Storage Modell (Minimum 1)
Additional Drives <#1050).
Third Control <#1051).
Fourth Control (n052).
Additional Drive Adapter (#1055).
Control for Base Drive Third (#2285),
Control for Base Drive Fourth (#2286).
Fourth Control Attachment <#4455).
Second 2816 Attachment
First Control (#6392>.
Second Control (#6393>'
2301 only for system use; minimum of one 2301 in every system. An additional
2301 attached to a separate 2820 Control UOI t is recommended for duplex systems.
2311 Disk Storage Drive, Model 1
The system alone requires an absolute minimum oUive 2314 modules for system use
(slle note below), In addition, a number of 2311s or 2314 modules will be needed
to $upport an installation's use of TSS/360. This additional requirement will vary
as a function of planned number of users of the installation.
2314 Direct Access Storage Facility
2820 Storage Control, Modell (Minimum - One Storage Controll
Sy~tem minimum is one 2820 Storage Control for all systems. One additional
2820 Storage Control is recommended for multiproqessor systems. No additional
devices may ~e attached to the same channel a!i the ~820 ather than anQther 2820;
However, only one 2320 per Channel (2860) ar ChannalController may be active
at anyone time.
The system alone requires an absolute minimum of five 2314 modules for system use
(see note below), In addition, a number of 2311s or 2314 modules will be needed to
support an !n:ltallation's use of TSS/360. This additional requirement will vary as
a function of planned number of users of the installation. All system required 2314
modules must be on the same control unit (address 0-7).
Features and Specifications:
Two Channel Switch, with partitioning (i/:8170).
Storage Priority (#75:).6). Requires High-Speed Direct ACCe!i6 Storage Priority
#4597 on the 2860 Selector Channel ta which the 2820/2301 is attached.
Remote SWitch Attachment (#6148>.
2403 Magnetic Tape Unit &Control, Models 1,2,3
System requires a minimum of one tape control and two tape drives (9-track). May be
attaChed to either a 2860 Selector Channel or 'I 2870 Selector Sub-Channel.
2314 DASF. (System minimum is five 2314 modules)
Features and Specifications:
Features and Specifications:
Data Conversion (#3228),
Seven-track Compatibility (#7125).
Sixteen Drive Addressing (#7ls5),
Remote Switch Attachment (#6148),
Two Channel Switch, with partitioning (#8100).
Two Chqnnel Switch, with partitioning (#8170),
Remote Switch Attachment (#6148).
2844 Attachment (#7949) (Model 1 or Al only.]
2841 Storage Control, Modell
Features and Specifications:
Additional 2311 Attachment (#9706) required,
Record Overflow (#6118). One required for each 284:). specified.
Two Channel SWitch, with pqrtitioning (#8100).
Remote Switch Attachment <#6148>.
2844 AUXiliary Storage Control [with 2314 Modell or Al onlyl.
System requires a 1052 mdl 7 for each processing unit. PTTC/EBCD (#9572)
only.
1403 Printer Model 2, 3, Nl (Minimum 1)
Either 1403 model may be selected.
2540 Card Read Punch Mvdel 1 (Minimum 1)
2741 Communications Terminal
Features and Specifications;
System requires a minimum of one 2741 Communications Terminal or one 1052 mdl 1
or 2 Printer~Keyboard. The main operator console must be a 1052 mdl 7.
Remote Switch Attachment (#6150).
Two Channel Switch (#81711.
lOS:). Printer-Keyboard Control Unit, Model~
2401 and 2402 Magnetic Tape Unit Models, 1, 2, 3, 8
System requires a minimum of one tape control and two tape drives (9-track).
I,
Features and Specifications:
2
Features and Specifications:
IBM line Adapter (#4691, #4692, #4693, #4694).
D'Ita Set Attachment (#9114).
Data Set Att'lchment (#9115).
I BM Line Adapter (#4647).
Receive Interrupt Control
Automatic EOB After CR
* Not Feature (#1;313)
Text Time-out Suppre!ision (#9698),*
First Reader Attachment (#4411). For 10:;6 Modell,
Transmit Interrupt Control
Fir$t Printer Attachment (#4408).*
Auto Ribbon Shift and l..ine Feed Select (#1295).
Group and Broadcast Appl i cation (#919 OJ.
*
*
Data Set Attachment (#9114).
Data Set Attachment (#9115).
IBM L,ineAdapter ('It4635).
Dial-up <#3255).
Interrupt (#4 708) required.
Transmit Interrupt
required.
PTTC/EBCD Code (#9571) required.
1316 and 2316 Disk Pack (Minimum 5)
System requires a minimum of five 2314 modules for system use and, therefore, five
2316 Disk Packs.
For user facility and backup, additional disk
packs are recommended.
'*
* Required.
No~ to be reproduced without written permission
IB,.,
P 360G.5
Feb 72
IBM System/360 Model 67
Programmi ng
Time Sharing System
1052 Printer-Keyboard Model 2
System requires a minimum of one 2741 Communications Terminal or one 1052 mdl 1
or 2 Printer-Keyboard located at the computer center. The main operator console must
be a 1052 mdl 7.
Features and Speci fications:
PTTC/EBCD Code Only. (9571).
Documentation: Program material list ••• Source Volume Uti lization.
Volume 1 contains: CEA - Supervisor, CEB - Independent Utilities, CEH - Time
Sharing Support Systems, CEI - Auxi liary Programs, CEY - li nkage Ed itor,
CGC - Service Routines, CHB - System Tables, and is specified by using Program Number ExtenSion VOLL
Features and Specifications:
Extended Character Reading (if>3861) is required.
PTTC/BCD.
PTTC/BCD modified.
VO',UlIP. ., contains: CEC - Access Methods, and CFA - Command System, and is
specified by using Program Number ExtenSion VOL2.
Volume 3 contains: CEK - FORTRAN Compiler, CEV -Assembler, CHC - FORTRAN Library Subroutines, CMA - Diagnostics, and CZU - Time Shared Utilities,
and is specified by using Program Number Extension VOL3.
I/O Devict Support: The following devic...... supported by T55/360 far tho Indlcoted u .... function.,
"
,,,'
Editing out backspaced text
Date/Time Stamping
Processing may be performed:
After receipt from a terminal,
After receipt from CPU, but before the line is available"
After receipt from CPU, but after the line is available.
EP (Emulation Program) Generation Procedure'
The EP Generation Procedure is a two stage process which uses the 3704/3705
Assembler and the OS Linkage Editor to generate a 3704/3705 EP (Emulation
Program).
Stage I is an assembly of the System Generation macros. The output of stage I is a
job stream containing the JCL and control information necessary to generate and link
edit an Emulation Program. Stage 1\ is the execution of the job stream.
Load Program
The Load Program retrieves a specified load module from direct access on the host
system and transfers it across the channel to the Communications Controller. Upon
successful completion of this transfer, control is passed to the program just loaded.
The Utility .in the host system, having completed, exits to DOS.
Dump Program
Stage I is an assembly of the System Generation macros. The output of Stage I is a
job stream containing the JCL and control information necessary to generate and link
edit an Emulation Program. Stage II is the execution of the job stream.
The Dump Program dumps the storage and register contents of the Communications
Controller to a host system data set and provides for the printing of the contents.
This dump may be a full or partial dump.
Load Program
Assembler
The 3705 Load Program retrieves a speCified load module from direct access on the
host system. This load module is then transferred across the channel to the Communications Controller. Upon successful completion of this transfer, control is passed
to the program just loaded. The utility in the host system, having completed, exits to
OS.
The 3704/3705 Assembler is available for assembly of Emulation Programs written in
3704/3705 Assembler language. The instructions are similar to tliose processed
by the DOS Assembler. The 3704/3705 Assembler operates on three kinds of instructions:
'
.
1)
Dump Program
"
The Dump Program dumps the storage and register contents of the Communications
Controller to a host system data set and provides for the printing of the contents.
Formatting of critical control blocks of the NCP is provided as an option. The dump
may be a full or partial dump.
:3705 Assembler
The 3705 Assembler assembles programs written in 3704/3705 Assembler language.
The instructions are Similar to those processed by the OS assemblers. The assembler
operates on three kinds of instructions:
1)
2)
3)
3705 machine instructions (written in 3704/3705 Assembler language
notation)
Macro instructions
Assembler instructions
The machine instructions are represented to the 3704/3705 Assembler by. mnemonic
operation codes, usually followed by one or more operands.
The macro language provides a convenient method of generating a desired sequence of
assembler language statements many times in one or more programs. Macro definitions can be coded in-line in assembler language programs or stored ina host library
and called in when needed by means of a macro instruction coded in the program.
The assembler instructions direct the assembler to perform certain operations during
the assembly process, but are not converted into executable code.
2)
3)
3705 machine instructions (written in 3704/3705 Assembler language
notation)
Macro instructions
Assembler instructions.
The 3705 machine instructions are represented to the 3704/3705 assembler by
mnemonic operation codes, usually followed by one or more operands.
The macro instructions provide a convenient method of generating a desired sequence
of assembler language statements many times in one or more program.s. Macro definitions can be coded in-line in assembler language programs or stored in a host library
and called in when needed by means of a macro instruction coded in the program.
The 370.4/3705 Assembler instructions direct the assembler to perform certain
operations during the assembly process, but are not converted into executable code.
System Requirements: The DOS EP Generation Procedure, load Program, Dump Program and 3704/3705 Assembler require a minimum partition of 18K bytes when used
with DOS.
System ReqUirements for Ol T's: Ol T's to service the 3704/3705 require 8K bytes.
Ol T for problem determination with the EP program requires 8K bytes. Terminal OlT's
for use with EP programs are a minimum of 4K bytes. On-I!ne terminal tests, OlTT's
for use with NCP or EP programs require a minimum of 8K bytes. The above does not
include the diagnostic executive requirements. Diagnostic executives to be used are
OlTSEP, OS/OlTEP, DO~/Ol TEP, and at release of NCP, TCAM/TOTE.
Programming service classificition is A.
Not to bereproc:luc8eiwithout written pennl.lon
~ : :~~ Programming
P 360H.2
Mar 74
:3 7 Q4/3 70 5 COM M UN I CAT 10 N S CON T R0 L L E R
The NCP also supports communications with tenninals employing the following Line
Control disciplines:
Basic Program Material (360H-TX-036):
Documentation: A Program Directory.
Machine Readable Material: DTR containing the macros and modules of the IBM
3705 OOS/SSP.
Optional Program Material: None.
AT&T83B3 orWU USA, start/stop multi-point leased telegraph lines - CPT-TWX
(Model 33/35) start/stop over switched TWX network. Attachment of non-IBM
terminals is, of course, under the provisions of the IBM Multiple Supplier (' ,stem
Policy.
Ordering Information: Program Number 360HTX036
Program Number
Extension
Distribution Medium
Type
Code
User Volume
Requirement
None
None
Basic
None
9/800
9/1600
Optional
None
None
28
29
None
Minimum Machine Configuration: For program execution -- a 3705 Model A2 with
Channel Adapter Type I or Type II, Communications Scanner Type I or Type II, and
appropriate line attachment features. A 3704 Model A3 with Channel Adapter Type I,
Communications Scanner Type I or Type II, and appropriate line attachment features.
Programming service classification is A.
Network Control Program Support (:360H-TX .. 034):
A set of program modules provided to the customer to
generate (by use of the 3704/
3705 NCP Generation Procedure) his customized Network Control Program (NCP).
The NCP, when generated and loaded, executes in the 3704/3705 and is supported
by OS/TCAM operating in conjunction with a System/370 CPU only.
The NCP performs the traditional transmission control unit functions such as line control character recognition, line timeout, character assembly/disassembly and checking.
In addition, some functions typically perfonned by a TP access method are provided
by the NCP. Polling, addressing, code translation, data link control and first level
error recovery procedures are perfonned by the NCP.
The basic element of communication between the host acceSS method and the 3704/
3705 is the block. A transfer between the CPU and 3704/3705 may consist of one
or more blocks. A block consists of control information and any text which may
accompany it. The text is generally a transmission block destined to or received from
a terminal.
A block is sent by the host to the Communications Controller to request that an operation be performed. When the operation is complete, the 3704/3705 Network Control
Program may send a block to the host indicating the results of the requested operation.
The NCP will also send unsolicited blocks to the host to provide it with such information as error statistics.
Within the Controller, the installation can optionally select functions to make certain
changes in transmission block data. These functions are essentially data editing
functions which can be performed on a transmission block before transmission to a
tenninal on output or before transmission to the CPU on input.
At any time, the NCP may have several transactions in process at various points in
the subsystem. The supervisory functions provide the capability for. scheduling the
NCP activity optimally by resolving contention for processing time within the NCP.
In addition, there are functions in the NCP to accomplish the logical and physical
elements of input/output on the communications lines and the channel to the host CPU.
These functions are dependent upon the network configuration specifically line and
tenninal types.
Problem detennination aids such as machine and program check recording, pennanent
line error recording, 3705 panel display, on-line tenninal test, abend condition
check and debugging aids are provided by the Network Control Progrqm.
Remote attachment via the NCP is shown in the following chart:
Terminals
Opereting
With a 3705/NCP
1050
2740 Mdl1
2740Mdl2
2741
5/360 and 5/370
Mdl20
1130
1800
S/3
2780
2770
2715·2
2972·8.·11
3735
3271/3275
5/7"
3650
3660
3741 Md12.4
3747
37BO
5275""
Type
Comm
SS
SS
SS
SS
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
SS
SOLC
SOLC
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
BCD
X
X
X
X
EBCD
X
X
X
X
Corras·
po!!den
X
X
X
Other
EBCDIC
Norm Trans
x
X
)€
X
'X
X
X
CommNetwk
~
US
PTP
!lOll
noll
ASCII
Sw
Sw
Sw
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
x
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
x
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
x
X
X
X
X
X
a
x
x
x
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Emulation Program Support (360H-TX-033):
A set of program modules provided
to the customer to generate (by use
of the Emulation Program Generation
Procedure) his customized 3704/3705 Emulation Program. The EP, when generated
and loaded, executes in the 3704/3705 and provides the functional capabilities of
the 2701 Data Adapter Unit and/or 2702/2703 Transmission Contorl Units through
the physical medium of the 3704/3705.
Programs which operate with an IBM 2701, 2702 or 2703 will operate with a 3704/
3705 in emulation mode, provided the programs:
- ~se only the 2701, 2702 or 2703 features supported by the emulator.
~
use only tenninals and CPU attachments supported by the emulator.
-
require only RPQs supported by the emulator.
- are not time dependent.
A list of 270X features not supported, and tenninals, CPU attachments and RPQs
supported by the emulatQr follows:
2701, 270(! and 2703 features not supported by the Emulator are:
Synchl'onous Data Adapter Type I
Parallel Data Adapter
Programmable Two-Processor Switch
6-Bit Transcode
ASCII Transparency
Attachment to mher than a byte multiplexer channel
230, 400 bps Synchronous Speed
1032 Digital Time Unit Attachment
Second Channel Interface
Intermixing of 2701, 2702 and 2703 line and function is permitted, however,.subchannel address assignment must be contiguolls. Replacement of multiple 2701,
2702 or 2703s with a 3704/3705 may require device address reassignment.
The following RPQs for 2701, 2702 and 2703 will be provided as standard features
in the Emulator:
11.Q!.
E56160
M44307
F260n
M53193
858492
E60987
Dataphone 50
Attach 2711
Autopoll IBM III
Break Command IBM I
Break Command IBM I
IBM Type III at 4800 bps
~
Fl3308
E46765
E54838
E62920
EA3120
50 bps Speed
Break Command IBM I
Immediate End
Carriage Return on TTY
TTY X Off
X
X
(cont'd)
"
System/7 is sUPPG"ed IS • 2740 Modell.
~~!~!!~~~~ specified as 3276 with EBCDIC Code (9781) and EBCDIC
a
Leased line suppo" must be used on switched line using a manual dial/auto
answer procedure.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion
£: :~~
Programming
3704/3705 COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER
2703
E53715
F17897
Z71949
Z16087
E49633
E62376
858126
E61947
W21061
W23396
V24344
Break Command -IBM I
50 bps Speed
1200 bps Speed
Immediate End
28 Second Timeout - No data
TTV II Character Recognition
Timeout Change
TTV II with Telegraph Line Set'
Timeout Change
IBM I - No LRC
EOT or EOR 4 Character Sequence
Although operation of the 3704/3705 EP is mutually exclusive with operation of the
3704/3705 NCP, EP and NCP modes of operation may be alternated provided the
customer has sufficient core to support NCP mode operation. This procedure will
necessitate a re-IPL of the 3704/3705.
Thruput rates of the 3704/3705 with the Emulator will be, In most cases, comparable
to those attained with a Similarly configured 2701, 2702 or 2703.
The following terminals and CPU remote attachments will be supported by the EP:
1030
1050
1060
2740-1 (2760)
2740-11
2741
2770/2772
3270
2972-8, 11
2701 (BSC)
2703 (BSC)
2715-11
3735
2845/2265
2848/2260
3650 (as a 5/3)
3670
3780
3741-2,4
3747
AT&T 83B2/B3 Line Control Type
5/370 Mod 125 with ICA (eSC)
S/370 Model 135 with ICA (BSC)
System/3 (BSC)
S/360, S/370 via Local 3705 (BSC)
2780
WU 115A Line Control Type
CPT - TWX (33/35) Line Control Type
System/1 (as a 2740-1)
360/20 equipped with the Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter feature
360/25 equipped with the Integrated Communications Attachment and Synchronous
Data Adapter features
1130 equipped with the Synchronous Communications Adapter feature 1hich mitiqate an
arbitrary 2K boundary for supervisor stnrage. They arel
1.
Various portions of the supervisory transient areas
can
resid~
in
unprotected
storage (same as
background problem program).
2.
Label storage areas normally part
program area can reside within
protected by the su~ervisor.
of the problem
the unused area
It is reasonable to assume that 10,240 bytes represents
the maximum supervisor capable of generation in TOS/360
with respect to the complement of currently announced
supervisory options.
The
storage protection feature is required for: the
multiprogramming option. This requirement results from
the fact that a multiprogramming system cannot effectively
function
without the assurance of continuous system
operation in spite of errant problem programs.
The requirement for the interval timer is optional and is
cond,itionedonly on the application requirements and the
use of certain system macro facilities.
No arbitrary
requirement for the interval timer is imposed by TOS/360.
Generation and Editing Functions:
Systbi - Generation - to in'i tialize the system residence,
esta ish superv1sor capabilities, include desired system
functions and processing programs.
Librarian - used for maintaining'the tape libraries and
prov1d1ng printed and punched output from the libraries.
Three libraries are used - Core Image Library, Relocatable
Library, and Source Statement Library.
Linkage Editor - for linking and relocating separate
program sect10ns from relocatable libraries and/or from a
system input unit: and editing into core image libraries
for loading by system loader.
Input/Output Control Syste~ (~), 360M-IO-404:
Logical
IOCS 1S a ser--or macro instructions wh1ch handle logical
files of data for the ,user on the devices supported.
Among
these functions are '-- request physical I/O operations to be
performed when, necessary... block and deblock logical
records within physical records ••• provide label handling
capabilities
via' OPEN/CLOSE/EOV routines ••• switching
between I/O areas when two areas are specified for a file. -
Not to be reproduced without written permission
IBM
P 360M.2
Feh 72
Progri'llT11l\inq
IBM Tape Operating System
System Control/IOCS:
Several extensions to the system
cOntrol funct10ns will be Provided to benefit the tape
operating
system
in
both
the
batched
job
and
multiprogrAlT1llling operating environments. These extensions
are briefly described below.
Greater flexibility will be provided in the assignment and
control of system input and output files to facilitate and
encourage concurrent peripheral operations.
Specifically
these extensions will allow:
• Automatic volume switching for system
magnetic tape in TO~/360.
output
• Combined system output files on a single
volume.
files
maqnetic
Expanded
backqround
program
checkpoint
facilities will be provided to allow:
and
of
tape
restart
• 7-track checkpoint with translate mode data on magnetic
tape in TOS/360.
(Data Conversion feature is required.)
Additional
support
involvinq
input/output
devices,
features and operations will be provided in TOS/360 8S
follows:
• Dual density magnetic tape recor.ding (800/1600 BPI).
• Enable/disable mode for the Universal Character Set
(UCS).
Error recovery involving command chaininq operations.
Automatic retry of devices made ready following operator
intervention type input/output errors.
OPTICAL CHARACTER READER IOCS; 360H-IO-417
Optical Character Reader IOCS provides support for the 1285,
1287 alia 1288 Optical Readers. This support provides for
reading printed paper tapes or journal rolls, such as those
produced on cash registers and adding machines (1285 and
1287 models 2 and 4 only). The IOCS also provides support
for reauing printed and hand printed data and optical markread c.iata from cut form dQcuments, such as sales checks
utility stubs and customer orders (1287 and 1288 only).
'
Optical Character Reader support can be utilized in a multiprogramming environment
under
TOS/3EO
for
proces~ing
documents or printed paper tapes. Factors affecting Optical
Character Reader performance under TOS/360 that must be
considered are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
System/360 model
Number of readers (maximum of 8 are supported)
Characteristics of tapes and/or documents
Batch or multi-programming environment
If processing printed paper tapes, the blocking of
data
6. User' s programming
input
In addition, throughput is dependent on operator loading and
unloading time.
This handling time is significant when
processing short printed paper tape rolls.
MultiPr;trammin g : The information contained in this section
complet~y replaces the information previously announced
under the heading of ·Concurrent Perinheral Operations.·
Partitioning - TOS/360 offers multiprogramming support
that ~s termed fixed partitioned multiprogramming.
That
is,
the
number
of
problem program areaS (called
partitions) and the size of those areas are established
externa.lly.
These partitions are defined during the
system generation process. Each partition is defined as a
block of contiguous storage locations. The definition may
subsequently be altered by the operator to satisfy varying
requirements of problem program during system operation.
Object programs are not relocated by the system when
loaded into a given partition. Th~refore, (unless a given
program is self-relocating) a program is cataloged in the
system with reference to a specific partition.
When programs are initially loaded the highest storage
locatiOn available in the partition is provided by the
system supervisor .to the problem program. This enables
the problem program to be designed such that it can take
advantage dynamically of the amount of storage allocated
to its partition under varying operating conditions.
The three partitions which may be established are as
follows: Back~round Partition - programs which operate in
the backgroun
partlt~on are automatically initiated by
Job Control as defined by the sequence of job statements
contained in the system input stream. Only the background
partition allows all of the operating system capabilities
provided in the batched-job mode of operation (without
multiprogramming).
Fore~round
~n
Partitions
(1 and 2) - programs which operate
t e fcreground partitions-ari initiated by the operator
from the console keyboard (1052).
That is, foreground
programs are not initiated automatically fr.om a job stack.
The operator must explicitly initiate each program to be
executed in the foreground partitions.
Since
each
partition
is
completely independent of the others
foreground programs may be initiated and
terminated
completely asynchronously from each other and from the
background program.
As a result, program execution can continue in the active
partitions
during
the initiation procedures for an
inactive for~ground partition. Similarly, job transition
occurring
In
the background partition is conducted
concurrently with the execution of foreground programs.
The foreground initiation statements, e.g., A~~r.N, VOL,
TPLAB, etc., associated with foreground proqrams are
similar to the job control statements for background
programs.
They may be entered into the system via either
the 1052 or an unassigned card reader device.
Partition Selection - With multiprogramming
TOS/360 is
capable of concurrently operating one backqround and one
The selection of_~~ich of the
active programs is to be given control of the CPU 1S
performed by the system supervisor. Foreground pro~rams
are always given priority for CPU processing over the
background program. Normally, control of the nrocessor is
passed to the next lower priority program when the higher
priority program encounters a wait condition. Control is
then returned to the higher priority program when the
event for I.,hich it was waitinq has been completed.
2! two foreground programs.
No special user programminq is needed in order to indicate
a wait condition and thus cause the transfer of control to
a lower priority program. For example, I/O device support
provided in the system utilizes EXCP-NAIT type logic in
order to synchronize physical I/O operations with requests
from the problem program for data transfer. The various
conditions under which the selection mechanism of the
supervisor will he invoke·:J can he summarized as follows:
Occurance of unsatisfied wait condition identified by
the wait macrOSI
pop.~in~ of I/O or timer interrupt condition;
Issua~~e of load or fetch macros;
A~ention interrupt from the 1052 console keyboard;
Completion of lo~ical transient routines; e.g., OPEN,
CLOSE.
Programming Considerations - Object proqrams capable of
operat1on in the batch-only environment (initial version)
of TOS/360 can be executed in the background partition i~
a
multiproqramming
environment
without modification
assuming sufficient configuration requirements.
These
object programs need only be recataloged when movinq from
one environment to the other. Problem programs operating
in the foreground partitions have access to the full
capabilit1es of the system, aside from those relating to
batched job initiation, with the exception of:
(1)
checkpoint/restart, (2) communications region modification
and (3) use of the system logical units other than SY~LOr,
and SYSRES.
Since the symbolic units used for system
input/output functions; i.e., RDR, I~T, PCH, and LST, are
reserved solely for the services of batched jobs in the
background partition, all IB~ provided component programs:
i.e., language processors, sorts, system service programs,
may be operated only in the background partition of a
multiprogramming system.
For the same reason, problem
programs capable of operation in the foreground partitions
must not access these symbolic system units.
Requests
from foreground programs for the checkpoint function are
ignored.
Requests from foreground programs for
the
alteration of the communications region cause program
cancellation.
Use of the interval timer feature for the time of day
function is supported by the system anu is available to
any or all programs operating concurrently. However, only
one of the programs may utilize the timer to request time
intervals (elapsed time) during a given period. The
operator can assign the time interval function supported
by the system to anyone of three partitions. Requests
for time intervals from a program in a partition not
assigned the function will cause program cancellation.
program
Cataloging
- In general, proqrams must be
cata oged ~n the system core image library with reference
to the specific storage locations in which they are to
operate. An exception to this rule exists in the case of
self-relocating programs.
A self-relocating program is
one which can be executed in any storage
location
irrespective of the assignments made by the linkage
editor.
This is accomplished by the object problem
program initializing at execute time all of its address
dependent constants. Loqical IOCS is capable of selfrelocation.
A self-relocating program may be loaded by the system into
either foreground partition. This means the operator need
not know the explicit starting address of a program, as
NQt to be reproduced without written permission
II
IB,.,
PrograllUlling
IBM Tape Operating System/360
established by linkage
editor,
when
initiating
a
foreground
partition.
Furthermore, the same problem
program may be initiated in separate foreground partitions
from a single copy in the system core image library.
2.
In foreground requires
assigned to SYSOOO.
3.
Autotest for TOS/360 must be run in a dedicated
environment I however, this does not pr 7clude its
running under the Multipro~ramminq superv1sor.
The
latter case requires that an., and all fore<:Jr"und
partitions be reduced to zero for the duration of the
Autotest operation.
I f this condition is not met,
Autotest is cancelled and a diaanostic messa'le is
printed.
4.
Restricted to those language functions which do not
require access to background cOllUllunication region or
symbolic system units.
Self-relocating programs must be .soeci fically desiQ'ned
using the Assembler language. Logical IOCS is not selfrelocating. In addition, object programs resulting from
RPG, COBOL, PL/I, and FORTRAN are not self-relocating. To
facilitate the design of self-relocating programs several
utility input/output macros will be provided with the
multiprogramming systems.
These ~acros will, produce self-relocating object code
whic~ w111 provide 1nput/output control functions such as:
open1ng and closing files ••• blocking/deblocking of fixed
length records ••• printer forms and stacker select
control ••• user exits before, during and upon completion
of record processing.
These macros will support consecutive organizations on the
following devices:
card readers/punches (2540, 2520,
2501, 1442) ... printers (1403, 1443, 1445, 1404*) ...
magnetic tape (2400/3400) ••• console printer (1052).
*Continuous form operation
With these macros, the user may assemble tailored file to
file utilities supporting normal concurrent peripheral
operations. Or the macros may be combined with user
programming to produce either generalized or s~ecific file
processing programs.
Multiprogramming ~ummarY - The following chart summarizes
the characterist cs and system facilities applicable to
the available partitions in the multiprogramming systems.
Background
(BG)
Foreground
Program Initiation
Automatic
Operator
Operator
Job Control Unit
SYSRDR/IPT
Card/Tape
1052 or
Card Reader
1052 or
Card Reader
Storage Protection
Yes
Yes
Yes
Adjacent to
System
Supervisor
Adjacent to
Background
Adjacent to
Storage End
Size (Variable)
Minimum (Active)
Minimum (Inactive)
Maximum
Intervals
Established by
Alterable by
10K Bytes
10K Bytes
available strge
2K Bytes
SYS t;EN
Operator
2K Bytes
Bytes
SlOK Bytes
2K Bytes
SYS GEN
Operator
2K Bytes
o Bytes
510K Bytes
2K Bytes
SYS GEN
Operator
Priority
3 (lowest)
(po2)
Foreground
(Fl)
Storage Protect Key
Location (Fixed)
o
1 (highest)
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Use of System Components:
System Servo
(Librarian)
Yes
Language Processors
Yes
Service Programs
(Sort, Utilities)
Yes
Autotest
3
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Use of Problem Programs
Compiled by:
Assembler
Yes
COBOL
Yes
RPG
Yes
FORTRAN
Yes
~asic ~L/I
Yes
Restricted
Restricted
Restricted
No
No
Restricted
Restricted
Restricted
No
No
Types of Program Loading:
Absolute
Yes
Self-Relocating
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Only one
operator.
partition
at
a
time
selectable
tape
or
printer
Processing Programs
Include customer programs and IRM supnlied programs that
provide both language and service functions. All processing
programs, customer and IBM, utilize the functions provided
by the control programs.
TOS/360 may be generated and regenerated bv the customer to
include
those
languages, service and problem pro~ram
functions that he desires in system residence.
Langfiagj Functions: Lanquages are available within 1OS/360
at ; e OK design level. A deSign level is the minimum main
storage requirement in which the processor is designed to
operate.
TOS/360 Language Function Descrintion:
Assembler, 360M-AS-465 - A symbolic programming language
used to write proqrams for System/360.
The TOS/360
Assembler program processes the language and provides
auxiliary
functions
useful
in the preparation and
documentation of a program and includes facilities for
processing macro instructions. Included in the lanquaqe
are the standard and optional instruction sets, mnemonics,
extended mnemonics, literals and macro facilities.
An
extensive macro library is also included to provide
facilities for system generation and I/O device macro
support for processing programs.
report
;rogram Generator, 360M-Rr.-408 - An expanded
anguage unct10n that has the capabIiity of compiling
programs which can produce a wide variety of reports
ranqing from a single listing to a complete report· that
incorporates
calculation
and
editinq.
Sterling
conversion,
arithmetic,
table
lookup,
branching
capabilities, indicator control, snlit control fields,
move left, and the designation of multiple input and
output files are also provided.
COBOL, 360M-CB-402
COBOL (Common Business Oriented
Language) 1S sim11ar to English.
conOL provides
a
conv~ient
method of coding programs to handle commercial
data processing problems.
The TOS/360 COBOL Language Processor has the following
advanced features -- source prog~am library facility •••
COBOL debugqing language ••• internal/external floatingpoint items and floatinq-point literals ••• the linkage
section of the data division ••• options 1, 2 and 3 of the
USE sentence ••• the transform statement ••• option 2 o~
the APPLY clause ••• inverted print enit.
Use of System Functions:
System Log
Yes
Job Logging
Yes
System Units (I/O)
Yes
Programmer Units
Yes
Operator Inquiry
Yes
IOCS Macros
Yes
Fetch/Load
Yes
Program Check Exit
Yes
Interval Timer Exit
Yes
Time of Day
Yes
Dump (PDUMP) 2
Yes
Communication Region Yes
Modification
Checkpoint/Restart
Yes
1.
maqnetic
~:
COBOL for,TOS/360 requires 10K bytes of main storage.
It w1ll operate 1n 16K, although most user programs will
require a 24K minimum configuration.
FORTRAN
IV,
360M-FO-409
The FORTRAN Language is
especially-Usefui 1n wr1t1ng programs for scientific and
engineering
applications
that
involve
mathematical
computations.
The TOS/360 FORTRAN Language is compatible with and
encompasses the proposed .American Standards Association
(ASA) Basic FORTRAN, including its mathematical subroutine
provisions.
TOS/360 FORTRAN offers the following advanced features
mixed-mode ••.• spacing format code ••• literal flormat code
the A format code ••• scale factor ••• carriage
control ••• double precision data type ••• three dimension
arrays •••" functional subprograms may return results via
the argument list.
The FORTRAN IV compiler will allow the introduction of
source programs in either BCD or EBCDIC character codes.
Iiasic PL/I -, 360M-~L-450 l::xtends the range of applications
that can be handled by a single high level language. It
includes the functional capabilities of rOR'rRAN and COBOL.
P!./l for 'XO::;/360 is a subset .of PL/I provided under 05/360
by
the
Expan1ed Instruction Sets may be required depending on the
SpeC1 1C requ1rements-or-the language programs utilized as
Not to be reproduced without written permission
IBJt1
Proqramminq
System Requires
Object ProSram May Use
roRTRAN IV
Standard Instruction Set
Floating Point Option
Standard Instruction Set
Floatinq Point Option
Hasic PL/I
standard Instruction Set
Universal Instruction Set
COBOL
Standard Instruction Set
Decimal ~rithmetic Option
Universal
,
In~truction
Set
Standard Instruction Set
Decimal ~rithmetic Option
tFloating
Point Option is required if floatinq
literals and/or non-inteqer exponents are used.
point
Control Program Input/Outgut - TOS/360
Residence ~ Ingut ~*
~~2**
Bl
B2', B3
x
Dual Density x
x
Dual Density x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
The loqical support of innut/output file
problem proqrams is provided as follows:
requirements
for
Problem Programs Comgiled by TOS/360 -Assembler ~ ~ ~ ~
C,- or 9-track)
Oual Density
Console (Note 1)
(7-or 9-track)
Dual Density
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
FORTRAN Output Only
Note 1. COBOL Accept and Display Only
••• Basic PL/I Display Qnly.
TOS/360 - Service Functions Description:
sort/Merte progr;a' 360M-SM-400 -- Orders un sequenced d~ta
~nto e~t er ascen ing or descending sequence as
specif~ed
on the sort control cards. The sort control statement
cards permit a diversification of parameters 'to meet the
needs of the magnetic tape user. These assiqnments of
specified parameters maximizes the sort performance to
meet the confiquration of the individual user.
The sort employs IOCS standard label check or enables the
user to bypass or process his non-standard ~a~els.
~he
utilization of the check point-restart fac~l~ty perm1ts
the user to interrupt and continue durinq the merqinq
phases of the sort.
The merqe only option qives the user
the facility of combininq from one to seven pre sequenced
files into a sinqle output file. A sequence check and
reblockinq capability form an inteqral part of the merqe
option,
Utility Prnr:s, 360M-tl'I'-403- The followinq utility
proqrams W1
ava11able on the IB~ supplied tape:
Care
to Printer and/or Punch -
binary or
card punch.
This program transfers
EBCDIC data from cards to a printer and/or a
Card to Tape - This program transfers binary
data from cards to magnetic tape.
or
Tape to Tape - This program
tape to another.
transfrr~
~ile
the data from
in
one
Multiprogramming SURraH ~tility ~. 3fiOM-UT-41l.-These macros may be Utl ze
to qenerate the fallowlng
concurrent peripheral self-relocation utilit'! programs
which will operate in 2K bytes af problem program stora'je:
Card to Print, ••• Card to Tape ••• Tap!> to Print
Tape
to Card.
The creation of input data files hv means
utility programs (Im' or user !';un"lied).
-Three (3) required.
**In the event that the 1052 is ino?erative, printer devices
may be aSSigned temporarily to SY~LOG.
for continuous forms
Tape to Printer - This proaram will print a tape
one of two formats -
~utotest,
360M-PT-407
A d~huqqinq aid for object
~ assembled by the TOS/360 Assm"bler
lind executed
under
TOS/360.
Usinq Autotest, a test run can be
performed as a normal job in a batch, with a mi.nim';l!TI of
operator intervention. Autotest monitors the executl0n of
the
program
under test and provide~ the following
facilities:
'-track tapes require Data Conversion feature '3228 or '3236
(except LIST).
System Residence may be either 7- or 9-track.
Systems input and systems reader may be desiqnated the same
unit.
Systems input, systems punch and systems list are required
for systems generation and editinq functions.
2540
1403
1404
1442
1443
1445
2501
2520
2400
2400
1052
2671
3400
3400
Tape Compare - The tape compare proqram compare~ two
files from two or more tap!~s to .-.n!';un> that the file';
are identical.
The inClusion of any u~er proarammina with the above
utilities may cause the !';torage requirements tn exr.eer] 2K
bytes.
(See description under multiproqramming.)
x
Nl
N2
7'/
Data Display - prints all of the tapA block.
Data List - prints one line for earh data record
Report Pgrm Standard InstructionS~t
Generator Decimal ~rithmetic Option
1052
2540
1403
1404
1442
1442
1443
2501
2520
;520
2400
2400
3400
3400
lr;n~'.4
f'pL
Tape to Card - This proqram transfer!'; data from ma'jnetic
tape to card s.
Data may be pllnr.h",d in ei ther EBCDIC or
binary.
follows:
Language
Units Supported
P
IBM Tape Operating System/360
of
standard
Exchange, addition, or deletion of instructions without
reassembly.
Dump of any portiones) of main storage, permanent
storaqe assiqnments, qeneral reqisters and/or floatinq
point reqisters whenever a desiqnated address is reached
durinq proqram execution. The main storaqe dump can be
in hexadecimal, character, floating point, fixed point,
or mnemonic representation.
Dump of main storage at normal or abnormal end of job in
hexadecimal character and/or mnemonic representation.
Source symbols can also be printed with the end of job
dump.
~ list of all phases
in the
called into main storaqe.
sequence
that
they
are
Print out of any output data files by means of standard
utility programs (IB~ or user supplied).
Compiler Input/Output Modules,
360M-IO-412
This
component
cons1sts of~~re-assembled Input/?utput
modules requireed by the TOS/360 COBOL and RPr, comp11ers.
If either the COBOL or RPG compilers are to be used, these
pre-assembled modules must be available in the system.
Users requestinq maintenance on either COBOL or R~G
components
should
also request maintenance on th1s
component.
~
6K Sutervis0r, 360M-SV-413 and
Supervisor, 36Dr1-SV-414
==
e two sunerv1sor components are 1den£lcal
content
and function. ' The only difference is in the endinq
l'
~n
address.
The user who does ~ expect to qenerate a
supervisor in excess of 6144 bytes should order the system
with the 6K Supervisor component. The user who expects to
qenerate a supervisor in excess of ,6,144 bytes shou~d
order the system with the 8K Superv1sor component., Th~s
will allow him to assemble and cataloq the ta~lored
supervisor without link-editinq all of the desired system
components residinq in the Core Imaqe Library~
However,
if the tailored supervisor exceeds the s~ze of the
supervisor component ~n the system, a complete linkaqe
edit run must be performed.
On-Line Test 1:;xecutive Program (OLTEP)
360M-DN-41B - OLTEP
together w1th assoc~ated on-i~ne un1t tests allows testing
of System/360 I/O devices while operating under control of
the '1'05/360 supervisor. OLTEP is a monitor program that
controls the execution of individual routines designed to
test specific I/O units.
It can be run either in a
dedicated batch-only environment or in the background
partition of a multiprogramming system.
This allows the
user to continue performing productive work during the
running of I/O unit tests. 1:;xcept for specific I/O units
being tested, all units of the system remain available to
the user.
Some of the advantages of OLTEP are:
• Increased system,availability
• Improved serviceability
• ~roductive work
(in foreground partitions)
serVicing
• System checkout following maintenance
EBCDIC
Not to be reproduced without written permission
during
IB"':
P 360M.5
Feb 72
Programmi ng
IBM Tape Operating System/360
BASIC PROGRAM PACKAGE
OPTIONAL PROGRAM PACKAGE
The following SRL publications and documentation appropriate to the components
ordered are shipped by PID with each initial TOS/360 order. Machine readable
material is distributed as indicated below.
Documentation - Program Material List ••• Attachment I - TOS/360 Restrictions
•. , Attachment II - APAR Submission. SRL publications, appropriate to the component ordered, will be shipped.
System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems Concepts and Facilities
GC24-S030-10
System/36'0 Tape Operating System - System Generation
and Maintenance TNL GN24-S4S0
GC24-S01S-6
System/360 Tape Operating System - Performance Estimates
GC24-S020-S
System/360 Tape Operating System - Operating Guide
GC24-S021-4
System/360 Tape Operating System - System Control and
System Service Programs
GC24-S034-2
System/360 Tape Operating System - Supervisor and Input;
OutP.Jt Macros
GC24-S03S-4
System/360 Tape Operating System - Data Management
Concepts
GC24-3430-3
System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems - Assembler
Specifications
GC24-3414-8
System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems - Tape Sort/
Merge Program Specifications TNL GN33-S0S5
GC24-343S-4
System/360 Tape Operating System - Autotest Specifications
TNLs GN21-S0S4, 5074,SOSO; GN33-SSS5
GC24-3441-3
System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems - Utility
Program Speci fications
GC24-346S-6
System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems - COBOL
Language Specifications TNL GN2S-024S, 02S6, 0407
GC24-3433-S
System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems - COBOL
Programmer's Guide TNL GN2S-0253, 0259, 0406, 0430
GC24-S02S-5
System/360 Basic FORTRAN IV Language
GC2S-6629-2
System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems - FORTRAN
IV Programmer's Guide
GC24-503S-3
System/360 Disk and Tape'Operating Systems - Report
Program Generator Specifications
GC26-3570-7
System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems - Utility
Macro Specifications
GC24-5042-6
System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems PL/I
Programmer's Guide
GC24-900S-6
PL/I Subset Reference Manual
GC28-S202-2
System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems - On-line
Test Executive Program Specifications and Operating Guide
TNL GN24-5452
GC24-S066-3
Documentation - Optional Program Material List.
Machine Readable - Source modules are avai lab Ie on five individual distribution
volumes each identified by a Program Extension Number as indicated below.
Program Number
Extension
Program Component Name
Program Number
OPT 1
System Control
10CS
Assembler
MPS Utility Macros
360M-CL-40S
10-404
AS-46S
UT-411
OPT 2
FORTRAN IV
SortjMerge
Report Program Generator
128S Optical Character Reader
FO-409
SM-400
RG-408
10-417
OPT 3
COBOL
Autotest
CB-402
PT-407
OPT 4
PL/I
OLTEP
PL-410
DN-418
OPT 5
Uti Lilie5
IJT -4Q3
ADDITIONAL PROGRAM MATERIAL
Program Logic Manuals
TOS/360
TOS/360
DOS/360
TOS/360
DOS/360
OOS/360
DOS/360
DOS/360
DOS/360
DOS/360
TOS/360
Form numbers which have changed since previous release are underlined.
Machine Readable -- Option 1 - Appropriate material delivered for 6K Supervisor
and is specified by using Program Number Extension OPT 1. Option 2 - Appropriate material delivered for SK Supervisor and is specified by using Program
Number Extension OPT 2. Components are as follows:
Assembler
COBOL
Systems Control Program
On-Line Test Executive Program
FORTRAN IV
InputlOutput Control System
Compiler Input,/Output Modules
Optical Character Reader
PL/I
Autotest
Report Program Generator
Sort/Merge
Supervisor,6K
or
Supervisor, SK
Uti lity Programs
Multiprogramming Support Uti lity Macros
360M-AS-465
CB-402
CL-405
DN-41S
FO-409
10-404
10-412
10-417
PL-410
PT -407
RG-40S
SM-400
SV-413
or
SV-414
UT -403
UT-411
System Control
Logical 10CS
and TOS/360 MPS Utility Macros
Uti lities
and TOS/360 Tape SortjMerge
and TOS/360 Assembler
and TOS/360 RPG
and TOS/360 COBOL
and TOS/360 FORTRAN IV
and TOS/360 PL/I
On-Line Text Executive
GY24-5022
GY24-S01S
GY24-5045
GY24-5019
GY24-S016
GY26-3642
GY26-3701
GY24-5025
GY24-5032
GY33-9011
GY24-5056
Program Listings: The TOS/360 listings are available on microfiche from the IBM
Corporation,
Mechani csburg, Pennsy Ivania.
The listings are equivalent to the output listings produced by assembling the symbolic modules.
CURRENT USERS
Current users will receive a pre-printed Program Order Form and a letter announcing
the availability of Release 15 instructing them to order the new Release through the
branch office using this pre-printed Program Order Form. Complete ordering instructions are provided in the letter to users.
To order the maintenance package for System Release IS the user must specify M for
Maintenance Package with one of the appropriate Distribution Medium codes 011 the
Program Order Form. User Volume Requirements for the total replacement package
is 01. The Maintenance package is available on a OTR. Users who no longer
require this program should be instructed to return the pre-printed Order Form to PID
with a "'0" in column 14 of section 1 line 1. The maintenance package will be
avai lab Ie for 60 days from the date of announcement.
Current users may also modify their profile by adding or deleting components.
[Reverse side.is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission
::::z::::=
~ - -~
Disk Operating System (005):
DOS Is a disk resident system designed to provide
operating system capabil ities for System/360 and
System/370.
.
System/360 support operates on the following System/360 models: 22, 25, 30,
40, 44 Cfeal:\llOe *8501 Is required), 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode), and 75. System/
360 suppOl1 is induded in DOS releases through 26. ~elease 27 and subsequent
releases support System/370 only.
The System/370 models supported by speCific releases are indicated below.
DOS
System/370 models
Release/Version
_s..
up....p_ort_e_d_ _ __
Comments
25
26
27
27.1
(158 hard
P 36ON.1
Mar 74
IBM Disk Operating System
Programming
3
145, 155
3
145, 155
4
135,145,155
4
135,145, ISS, 158
stop BC code only)
.S/360 and S/370 support
S/360 and S/370 support
S/370 support only
S/370 support only
ENVIRONMENTS
Partitions - When the IBM Disk Operating System is running, main storage is divi~d
Into two or more areas of contiguous storage. One area is used to co~tain the resident
Supervisor Control Program. Its minimum size is 6K bytes on System/360 and 14K
bytes on System/370. The remainder of storage is then divided into one or three
user program partitions. Each partition is an integral mUltiple of 2K bytes.
Single Partition System - Many functional advantages of DOS may be realized even
In a limited operat.ng environment. In a system with one user program partition, only
one problem program, such as a compiler, sort, utility or user program, runs at a time.
This partition shares main storage with the Supervisor. The Supervisor handles many
of the functions common to all problem programs, such as interrupt handling, input!
output supervision, error recovery procedures and the loading of executable phases from
the core image libraries into main memory for execution. Symbolic device addressing,
automatic job to job transition and library. maintenance functions are some of the additional advantages to a user of DOS.
Multiprogramming System' - If more than one user partition is defined, two or three
user programs may be executed concurrently, this is termed Multiprogramming.
The partitions have standard names aSSigned to them dependent on the number of partitions in the system, as follows:
One User Program Partition
Three User Program Partitions
- Background
- Foreground One, Foreground Two,
Background
LIBRARIES
The IBM Disk Operating System Is built ar()und disk libraries, of which there are two
classes: System Libraries and Private Libraries. A System Library occupies part of
the System ReSidence Extent; a Private Library occupies an entire extent of Direct
Access Storage which may be either on the Systems Residence ~evlce or on some
other device of the same type.
The following types of System and Private Libraries may be defined:
A Core Image Library contains object program phases ready for execution. Every program that IS to be executed by the system must first be placed in a Core Image library.
The System Core Image library must be present in every system. One or more additional
Private Core Image Libraries may be fll'ther defined by the user. Core Image Libraries
may contain tile following types of object program phase:
1. Absolute ~hases, which must be executed at the specific storage locations
aehned w th the text of the phase Itself.
,2. Self-relocating phases, which may be executed at any contiguous set of storage locations. such programs are specially written In the Assembler Language
in such a way as to be address-independent (self-relocating phases cannot be
executed in a non-multlprogramming environment).
A Relocatable Library contains relocatable program modules output by the Assembler
or compliers Which may then be operated on by the linkage Editor to produce object
program phases.
A Source Statement Library contains source program text and Assembler Language
macro books Which may be IOcluded in user progrclms by means of COpy or macro
mnemonic statements.
Both classes of Relocatable Library and Source Statement Library are optional, but
the user will normally require at least one library of each type. These may be either
System or Private Libraries.
Any number of private libraries may be defined but for any operation involving libraries
only one private library (and the system library) may be in use at the same time. When
operations involve both private libraries and system libraries, library references will
cause the private library to be searched before the system library, except for those
phases starting with $$A or $$B, in which case the system library is searched first.
REQUIREMENTS
Configuration Requirements -- Minimum system and feature requirements are:
General Requirements, Condition,
or Explanation
These names are normally abbreviated to: F1, F2, and BG.
Main Storage (S/360>
Multiprogramming may be specified at System Generation time and if so, the size of
each user program partition may be defined at this time and may subsequently be
altered by the operator to satisfy varying requirements of problem programs during
system operation.
Batch Job Processing SYSRES
Device: 2311, 2314/2319, or
The Background Partition, which is always present, must at all times have a size of
at least 10K bytes.
Foreground Partitions may be either Single-Program-Initiated (SPD Partitions, in which
case they have a minimum size of 2K bytes, or Batched-Job-Foreground (BJF) Partitions, in which case they have a minimum size of 10K bytes. The system may contain
two Foreground Partitions of the same 'type or one of each, whichever is required by
the user. Foreground Partitions may further be defined as Inactive and have a size of
OK, that is, no main storage is currently allocated to the partition.
Each partition has associated with it a priority which determines the system priority
to be given to the program in that partition. The priority sequence is: Foreground
One (highest), Foreground Two and Background (lowest).
Each partition must have associated with it sufficient input and output devices to
satisfy the requirements of the programs to be run in that partition. The necessary
aSSignments of devices are made initially at System Generation Time and subsequently
modified by means of operator commands and Job Control statements to meet the
varying requirements of problem programs during system operation. At any point in
time Direct Access Storage Devices may be shared by partitionS; all other devices
must be uniquely aSSigned to an individual partition (or not aSSigned ,at all>.
16,384 Bytes of Main Storage
For COBOL 0 Compiler in Batch Environment
(COBOL 0 Compiler design point is 14K)
24,576 Bytes of Main Storage
For Multiprogramming, MICR, BTAM, or
System Input/Output on Disk
24,576 Bytes of Main Storage
Main Storage (5/370>
Batch Job ProceSsing SYSRES
Device: 2311, 2314/2319 or 3330/3333
SYSRES
24,576 t;Jytes of Main Storage
Support available in Release 27
(Minimum S/370 is 98,304 Bytes of
Main Storage
Note: Minimum 135, 145 and 155 Processor Storage Sizes exceed minimum DOS
'StOrage requirements. See DOS SYSTEM Generation (GC24-5033), for details of
storage requirements.
Instruction Set
Background and BJF Foreground programs have access to all the general system facilities provided by the operating system. SPI Foreground Programs do not have access
to Job Control, and hence each program to be executed in an S PI partition must be
separately initiated by the operator. Furthermore, SPI Foreground Programs may not
use the System Checkpoint/Restart facility or access the Communications Region.
Timer serv!ces may use both the TOO Clock CS/370 only) and the interval timer. All
programs have access to the value of the Time of Day Clock; however, only one program may request time intervals from the Interval Timer during a given period. The
operator can aSSign the Interval Timer to any of the partitions. Requests for time
intervals from a program in a partition to which the Interval Timer is not assigned will
cause program termination.
The majority of system and user programs may be executed both in the Background
Partition and any BJF Foreground Partition; there are however, certain restrictions
on programs which modify the contents of the system libraries.
Requirements Fulfilled by
Exceptions to this may be required by
the language processors or application
program, See the speCific product
for additional instruction set requirements
One I/O Channel, either Multiplexer or
Selector. Additionally,
Telecommunications and MICR iocS
require multiplexer channel and at least
one selector channel
2314 requires a selector channel for
S/360 Models and a special feature
or block multiplexer channel for S/370
Models (See machine section)
I/O Devices
One Card Reader
Multitasking - The Multitasking option allows concurrent a~ynchronous activity within one or more partitions. Thus different parts of the same program can be executed
concurrently where it is meaningful to do so. To utilize the multitasking facilities of
the Disk Operating System, it is necessary to code programs in the Assembler Language. Events occurring concurrently in different parts of the same program can be
synchronized to meet the user's requirements.
Not to be reproduced without written permiulon
Choice of:
1442
2540
3504/3505 (S/370 only)
2501
2520
3525 with Read Feature
(S/370 only)
IBM•
P 360N.2
One Card Punch
One Printer
Choice of:
1442
2520
2540
3525 (S/370 only)
Choice of:
3211
1403
1404 (S/360 only)
1443
Units Supported
Residenc:e
3505 Bl, B2 (S/3700nly)
3525 Pl, P2, P3
with Card Reed (1533)
(S/370 only)
2311
X
2314/2319
X
2400/3400
333G-l,2/3333-1 (S/370 only) X
341013420 (See Note 4).
Note: A disk extent or a magnetic tape
drive may be substituted for the system
reader, punch and/or printer. If disk,
at least 24,576 bytes of main storage
is required. If tape, 9-track or 7-track
drives may be used; 7-track drives require the data.conversion feature except
when tape is substituted for a printer.
Through release 26 2400 series or
3400 in 2400 mode series tapes support these functions; beginning with
release 27, 2400 and/or 3400 tapes
may be used.
ChOice of: 2311 Disk Storage
2314 DASF - (2312, 2313, 2316
and/or 2319 Disk Storage)
3330-1,2/3333-1 Disk Storage
(S/370 only; block multiplexer
channel required)
It is strongly recommended that a multiple disk or disk/lape system be used.
EC 131182
EC 126737
EC 128053
EC 305247
EC 413160
EC 413140
EC125598
Note 2:
In a s.torage protected batch job enVironment, the 2030 multiprogramming
level EC is 128058.
Note 3:
The following engineering changes are not required, however, in order to
achieve optimal perfonnance, they are recommended.
2403 ••• EC 254969 and EC 255981
2404 ••• EC 254969 and EC 255982
2401 ••• EC 254969
2402 ... EC 254969
DEVICE AND FEATURE SUPPORT
Features - The features supported by DOS are:
Interval timer
Simultaneous read-while-write tape control (2404 or 2804) on selector
channel only
One multiplexer and up to six selector channels
Storage Protection - (Required for multiprogramming)
Additional main storage up to Model J (not in Release 26*)
Universal character set
Direct Control and External Interrupt (as used with 1255, 1259, 1412
or 1419 only)
TOO Clock (S/370 only)
Reader
X
X
l.!!m!!.
~
Punch
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
2501
X
2520 Bl, B2, and B3
X
2540
X
2596
X
2671
X
2701, 2702, 2703 with
1030, 1050, 1060,2740
Models 1 and 2, 2848 with
2260 (Remote) (2701 only),
Teletype terminals (WU 115A)
AT&T 83B3 and AT&T Models
33/35, 2760, 2265 (2701 only)
X
2701, 2703 Binary Synchronous,
with 1130, 2972-8, 2780, S/360
Model 20 and remote S/360 or
S/370 with 2701, 2703 or I CA
(Model 25 or 135), 1800, 2770,.
2715 Model 2, 3735. 3780,
3741 Models 2.4,3747
X
3210/3215 (Note 1) (S/370 only)
X
3211"·
X
3330·1,2/3333-1
X
333G-l,2/3333·1 Consecutive Org. (S/370 only) X
333G-l,2/3333·1 Direct Access Org. (S/370 only)X
333G-l,2/3333·1 Index Sequential Org.
(S/370 only)
X
3420 (7· or 9·track) (Note 4)
X
3420 Dual Density (Note 4)
X
X
3504/3505 Card Reader (S/370 only) ••••
3525 Card Punch (S/370 only)····
X
7770, 2848 with 2260 (Loca"
X
X
7772 (S/360 only)
S/360 Model 25 via ICA with
1030,1050,1060,2740 Models 1 and 2. Teletype terminals (WU 155A), AT&T 83B3,
AT&T Models 33/35, 2760 Optical image unit attached to 2740 Modell, 2770, 2780,
3735,3780, 1130 and S/360 Model 20.
2972·8 General Banking Station with up to ten if any 298G-l, 298G-2 or 298G-4
List
!:9.9.:'.
Note 3:
X
X
X
3803 Tape Control F~ature Code 1793, Three Control Switch and Feature Code 1794,
Four Control Switch are not supported for alternate path.
X
Note 4:
ThClse components of DOS which use MTMOD and DIMOD to utilize the 2400 Magnetic
Tape Subsystem can run without change when using the 3410/3420 Tape Subsystem.
X
X
Note 5:
For compiler support see applicable program product.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Remote S/360 or S/370 with 2701, 2703 or ICA (Models 25,135),1800,2770,2715 Model 2, 3780
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
l:s!s:-
S/370 Model 135 via ICA with 1050,2740 Modell and 2, 2760 Optical Image Unit attached to 2740
Modell, 2770, 2780, 3780, 1130 and S/360 Model 20.
Devices - The devices supported for the indicated functions for Control Program
input/output are:
Residence
Units SUl!I!.Qrted
3215
3210
1052 (S/360 only)
2540
1403, 1404 (S/360 only)··
3211
1442Nl
1442N2
1443
2501
2520 Bl
2520 B2. B3
3504 A 1, A2 (S/370 only)
List·
Units
~
101711018 (2826 Mod 1)
X
X
101711018 (2826 Mod 2)
1052 Console (Note 1) (S/360 only)
X
X
1255
X
1259
1275
X
1285
X
1287
X
X
1403
1404 for continuous forms only (S/360 only) X
1412 (S/360only)
X
1419
X
1442 Nl and N2
X
X
1443
1445 (S/360 only)
X
2311 Consecutive Org.
X
2311 Direct Access Org.
X
2311 Indexed Sequential Org.
X
2314/2319 Consecutive Org.
X
2314/2319 Direct Access Org.
X
2314/2319 Indexed Sequential Org.
X
2321 Consecutive Org.
X
X
2321 Direct Access Org.
X
2321 Indexed Sequential Org.
X
2400 (7· or 9-track, dual density)
Engineering Changes: The following Engineering Changes are prerequisite for proper
functioning of DOS:
If the multiprogramming and/or telecommunications support faci lities of
DOS are used, the 2030 hardware logic level EC 126751 and 2030
hardware logic level EC 126751 and 2030 multiprogramming level
EC 127058 must be installed.
!lms!!..
The devices supported by problem program produced by the assemblers are:
Note: System generation uti lizes the
assen;tbler and therefore, requires three
'logical files for working storage. If not
available on the system residence unit,
either a second disk storage drive or
three magnetic tape units are required.
(If tape, 2400 or 3400 in 2400 mode
series is supported for this function
through Release 26,2400 and 3400
are supported starting with Release 27.
Note 1:
Work-
X
The 2400/3400 series tape drives may be used for working storage by language
translators only (3 required) except RPG and Assembler F which cannot use 3400
tapes as workfiles unless they have been SVSGENed as 2400 tapes. 7-track
tapes require data conversion feature (except LIST>. Work devices may not be
mixed between disk and tape.
One disk storage drive
hardware logic level
micro program level
X
X
X
X
X
X
!!!I!!!!.
•• In the event the Console Printer· Keyboard is inoperative, printer d8'lices may be·lllligned
temporarily to SYSLOG.
See "Machines" for console availability
for each processor model.
S/360 Adapter, Single Address Feature
hardware logic level
micro program level
~
X
74
• 2311,2314,2319 or 3330 is required for control program working storage; i. e., compile and
go and linkage editor.
One console printer-keyboard
1419
2030
2030
1445
2841
2841
2821
Mar
IBM Disk Operating System
Programming
X
X
• Releale 26 supports up to 512K (maximum value in ALLOC card is 510K).
• ·1403 is supported on both System/360 and System/370
·"Only ALC and program products support 150 charecter print line.
····3505 and 3525 special features are supported only by program products.
Not to be reproduced without written permission
I : :;~~
P 360N.3
Mar 74
Programming
IBM 0 isk Operating Sy stem
COMPONENTS
Indexed Sequential File Management System, 360N-10-457
System Control and Basic IOCS - 360N-CL-453
The System Control Programs fonn the nucleus of the IBM Disk Operating System.
There are thr,ee programs in this class:
Initial Program Load initializes the Disk Operating System for execution.
The Supervisor provides main storage resident control functions which are invokable by
all other system and user programs. Supervisor generation macro instructions allow
the creation of an individual supervisor program to meet the needs of the indiVidual
installation. The size of the supervisor wi II depend on the particular generation options
selected by the user. A minimum supervisor requires 6K of main storage for System/
360 configurations and 14K for System/370. This latter figure includes full S/370
RAS support.
Job Control provides job-to-job transition functions for Background and Foreground BJF
PartItions. The supervisor loads Job Control into the user partition when the job in
that partition comes to an end. Job Control occupies 10K for S/370 of partition
storage while performing its functions; it is then overlaid by the next program to be
executed in the partition.
The System Service Programs provide maintenance and service functions for the system. There are two groups of programs in this class:
The linkage Editor links and relocates separate program sections read from the system
input unit or ffOm the relocatable libraries or from both, creating executable object
program phases which are then stored in the specified core image library.
The librarian is a group of programs which provides maintenance and service functions
for the system and private libraries allOWing the user to insert, delete, rename, display, copy, condense, and output the contents of the libraries, and to create and use
new private libraries. In addition, the system libraries can be reallocated.
The System Control and Service Programs require the following logical units:
For the System as a whole:
System Residence (SYSRES)
System Log (SYSLOG)
- accomodates the System Residence Volume
- used for communications between the system
and the operator
- an extent of Direct Access Storage used to
store records output by the Recovery Management Support Recorder (RMSR)
System Recorder (SYSREC)
For each user program partition:
System Reader (SYSRDR)
- used to read Job Control input in card or card
image form
- used to read other system input in card or card
image form
- used to display print lines or store print line
images output by the system
- used to punch cards or store card images output by the system
System Input (SYSIPT)
System list (SYSLST)
System Punch (SYSPCH)
The following further logical units will be required when certain specific control and
service functions are invoked:
System link (SYSLNK)
- an extent of Direct Access Storage used to
record input for the linkage Editor
Core Image Library (SYSCLB)
- an extent of Direct Access Storage serving as
a Private Core Image library
Relocatable Lib.rary (SYSRLB)
- an stent of Direct Access Storage serving as
a Private Relocatable library
Source Statement Library (SYSSLB) - an extent of Direct Access StOrage serving as
a Private Source Statement library
ADDITIONAL 10CS SUPPORT
Consecutive Tape Inputft)utput Control System (IOCS),360N-10-456
Consecutive tape macros (GET/pUn are used to process succ;essive records in a
logical file. Magnetic tape records are processed starting with the first record of
a fi Ie through to the end. The consecutive tape 10CS macro allows for logical records, blocked or unblocked to span multiple phYSical records. 'EBCDIC and ASCII
files can be processed.
Consecutive Disk Input/Output Control System ClOCS), 360N-10-455
COnsecutive disk macros ·(GET/pun are used to process successive records in a
logical file. DASD records are processed starting with a beginning DASD address
and continuing in order through the records on successive tracks and cylinders to
the ending address. The program may continue immediately following the GET/
PUT macro before the input or output operation is completed. These mac~s are
used for procesSing records on a 2311, 2314/2319, 2321 or 3330/3333.
Direct Access Method, 360N-I0-454
Records within a logical fi Ie are organized on direct-access volumes in any manner
chosen by the user.
Storage or retrieval ota record (READ,lWRITE) is by actual address or by relative
address within a logical file. This address can be that of the deSired record, or it
starting point within the logical Ie whei'e a search for the record begins. The
starting point is based on a record key furnished by the. user. The Direct Access
Method .macros are used for processing records organized in a ran~om manner on a
2311 Disk Storage Drive, 2314/2319, or a 2321 or 3330/3333.
n
The Indexed Sequential File Management System ClSFMS) permits DASD records to
be processed in random order control information, or in sequential order. For random processing, the user supplies the key (control information) of the desired record
to the ISFMS, and issues a READ or WRITE macro instruction to transfer the
specified record. For sequential proces.sing, the user issues GET /pUT macro instructions for all records to be processed in sequential order. ISFMS allows the
user to construct data files by key sequence in a manner that permits insertions
(additions) without sorting, recopying, or merging. ISFMS can be used on a 2311
Disk Storage Drive, .2314/2319 or a 2321 or 3330/3333.
Additional features for ISFMS include the ability to store part or all of the cylinder
index in core, and the ability to add new records to a prime data track by reading up
to a full track into core, making the addition and rewriting the data. Both cylinder
index in core and prime data in core are optional.
Consecutive Paper Tape Input/Output Control System (IOCS), 360N-10-458
Consecutive. Paper Tape 10CS is used for proceSSing paper tape records, with or
without translation of any code. A user may specify one or two I/O areas as deSired,
but work areas are not serviced. Two record formats are acceptable: undefined
(end-of-record character mandatory) and fixed unblocked (end-of-record character
prohibited) •
MICR 10CS, 360N-10-477
The MICR (Magnetic Ink Character Recognition) 10CS is used to read data from and
control the engage, disengage, stacker select and other control functions of the
1255, 1259, 1275, 1412 and 1419 Character Readers. By means of external
interrupt, the DOS Supervisor provides the user with the ability to perform stacker
selection on a first priority baSiS, regardless of the partition in which the problem
program is operating. Following stacker selection, logicallOCS enables the user
to access documents'sequentially, process the data, and exercise control over··nonMICR and non-OCR input/output devices. This normal processing (as opposed to
stacker selection) has the priority of the partition in which the problem program is
executed.
The supervisor and logical 10CS support up to six (6) Character Readers, which
may operate in any combination in any or all partitions.
The engage, disengage, document reading, and stacker selection functions are performed through macros. A buffer is maintained to provide the problem program with
continuous input data.
The External Interrupt capability is employed to provide an automatic entry to the
user's stacker select routine on a first priority baSis regardless of the partition in
which the routine resides.
GET macro logic is proVided for the user's proceSSing requirements other than
stacker selection: This normal proceSSing takes the priority of the partition in which
the program is executed. When higher priority (Non-MICRand Non-OCR) paitftions
are operative, reduced document throughput may occur, however, the higher prioritv
program is interrupted to perform stacker selection and fill the MI CR for OCR input
buffer.
The following units are supported by MICR IOCS:
1255 Magnetic Character Reader Models 1, 2 and 3.
1275 Optical Reader Sorter Models 2 and 4.
1412 MagnetiC Character Reader with System/360 Adapter feature ('*7720>.
Engineering Change level, EC 131182, required (S/360 only).
1419 Magnetic Character Reader (Model 1> with System/360
Single Address Adapter feature (#7720). Engineering. Change level EC 131182
required.
1419 Magnet.i~ Character Reader (Model 1) with System/360 Dual
Address Adapter feature (#7730>. Engineering Change level, EC 13119b required.
1403 Printer with the Selective Tape Listing Feature (*6410 on Model 3 or
Nl, «>411 on Model 2, *6420 on Model Nl).
.
All 1275 1412/1419 special features are supported.
Note: 24K bytes of storage and either the Direct Control Feature ('*3274) or the
External Interrupt Feature <*3895) (System/360 Model 22 or 30> are required.
The following configuration and system design considerations are applicable to DOS
MICR or OCR environment:
Up to six (6) Magnetic Character Readers are supported. The maximum number
that may be effectively operated is application and configuration dependent. Refer to DOS, Supervisor and Input/Output Macros, GC24-5037~ for timing·
information.
Unique System Supervisors are generated for (a) 1412/1419 with the Single
Address Adapter feature (17720> and (b) 1419 with the Dual Address Adapler
feature (#7730); or 1275 Model 2 or 4 therefC)re concurrent operation ofthe
two features is precluded.
When MagnetiC Character R~ders are utilized on the multiplexer channel, magnetic tape or direct access devices may. not operate on the multiplexer channel.
Not to be reproduced without written permission
IBM Disk Operating System
Optical Character Reader IOCS, 360N-IO-478
Optical Character Reader .IOCS provides support for the 1285 (S/360 only), 1287
and 1288 Optical Readers. This support provides for reading printed paper tapes
or)oumal rolls, sucb as those produced on cash registers and adding machines
(1285 .. "cl128 7 Models 2 and 4 only). The I()CS also provides support for
reading printed and hand printed data and optical mark-read data from cut form documents, such as sales check, utility stubs, and customer orders (1287 and 1288
only).
Optical Character Reader support can be utilized in a multi-programming environment
under DOS for processing documents or printed paper tapes. Factors affecting Optical
Character Reader performance under DOS that must be considered are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
CPU model
Number of readers (maximum of 8 are supported)
Characteristics of tapes and/or documents
Batch or multiprogramming environment
If orocessing printed paper tapes, the blocking of input data
User's programming
In addition, throughput is dependent on operator loading and unloading time. This
handling time is significant when processing short printed paper' tape rolls.
Compi ler
110
P 360N.4
Mar 74
2703 Transmission Control Unit
Autocall ('#1340,1341), EBCDIC code ('7714), ASCII
code (#7716), 6-bit Transcode (#7717), Transparency
for USASCII (*9100>.
S/360 Model 25 with Integrated Communications
Attachment (#7551,7552) ASCII cock! ('9001, 9002),
Transparency (*9751, 9752), Autocal; ('1300), Dual
Communications Intetface (#3461>
S/370 Model 135 with Integrated Communications Adapter ('114640>
EBCDIC Code (std), ASCII Code (19681-9688)
6-Bit Transcode (19689-9696), Transparency (t9673-9680)
Autocall (.1290>
Telecommunication Terminals and Terminal Features
1030 Data Collection Syst~m
1050 Data Communication System
1060 Data Communication System
AT&T 83B3, Models 33/35 TWX, WU U5A, World Trade Telegraph Terminals.
Modules, 36.0N-I0-476
These input/output modules used by object programs compiled by the language
processor are pre-assembled and incorported into the Relocatable library. They
provide all necessary input/output operations so that the user can execute
programs written using the language.
2740 Modell Communication Terminal
Dial Up (#3255), Record Checking (#6114), Station Control
(#7479), Transmit Control ('8028), 2760 Attachment ('*'8301>.
2740 Model 2 Communication Terminal
Record Checking (#6114), Buffer Receive (#1499>.
2760 Optical Image Unit
BTAM and QTAM - Discussed in next sections.
2260 Display Station
(Local and Remote).
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SUPPORT
2265 Display
The telecommunications support provided in DOS includes both Basic Telecommunications Access Method (BTAM) and Queued Telecommunications Access Method
(QTAM).
The BTAM facilities of DOS may be utilized in any or all of the partitions
described in the Multiprogramming sectinn. The QTAM facilities of DOS must
utilize Foreground 1 and either Foreground 2 or Background, or both.
The size ofthe telecommunication problem program is dependent upon the BTAW
QTAM module and the extent of the following user-determined areas and functions:
I/O buffer areas ••• terminal lists ••• message processing routines ••• number of
macro instructions issued ••• number of lines ••• number ofterminals per line, line
procedure specifications, etc.
The following configuration a{ld system design considerations are applicable to
the DOS telecommunications environment:
5/360 or S/370 with 2701 or 2703 (Remote Station)
Features same as for 2701 and 2703 under Telecommunication
features except: 2701; 6-bit transcode (19062) not supported.
2703; 6-bit transcoee (~7717) not supported.
5/360 Model 25 with Integrated Attachment feature
(Remote Station). Features same as for Mod 25 ICA under
Telecommunication Features.
5/370 Model 135 with Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640)
EBCDIC Code (std), ASCII Code (,*,9681-9688)
6-Bit Transcode (#9689-9696), Transparency (#9673-9680>
5/360 Model 20 Process Unit
Binary Synchronous Communication Adapter (#2074),
Automatic Calling (#1315), Transparent Text Mode
(#4100>, Station Selection (#7477), High,Speed
(#4500 or #4501>.
All telecommunications devices with the exception of the 2701 SDA-II, S/360
Model 25 via its Integrated Communications Attachment, the System/370 Model
135 via its Integrated Communications Adapter, and the 2848-2260 (Loca\)
must be on the multiplexer channel and no burst mode device may co-exist on the
channel with telecommunications dE!vices. The support for the 2701 SDA-II
attached to the selector channel i~ limited to non-switched (leased or private
line connection) networks.
1800 System
Communication Adapter (#7550>, EBCDIC Code (#932l thru
#9328),
,ASCII Code (#9331 thru #9338).
All terminals (except Binary Synchronous Communication) on a multipoint nonswitched line must be the same type. Terminals may be mixed within the same
problem program. Different ,types of BSC terminals may be mixed on the same
non-switched multipoint line or on the same computer phone number in a switched
network.
7772 Audio Response Unit operating in a switched network with: 1001
Data Transmission Terminal, or a telephone set (5/360 only).
See Terminal Support Chart 2 for BSC terminal mix capability.
The following terminals and features are supported by DOS BTAM and/or QTAM.
Other features, not listed, have no specific programming support and their existence
is ignored by the control program. Attempts to use the DOS with unsupported features can cause unpredictable results. For brevity this list does not include those
basic features or control units which are required to connect a supported device.
Support for items in the list below is available. except where indicated by date or
otherwise noted.
Telecommunication Features
2701 Data Adapter Unit
Autocall (#1302,1303, 1314), Dual code (#3455),
Dual Communications Interface (#3463, 3464, 3465),
EBCDIC code (#9060), ASCII code ('#9061), 6-bit
transcode (#9062), Transparency (#8029>.
7770 AudiQ Response Unit operating in a switched network with: 1001
Data Transmission Terminal, or a telephone set.
~972-8, 2972-11 General Banking Station , EBCDIC Transparency ('#3650), EBCDIC Code
(#9761), USASCII Code (#9762), Conversational Mode
(#1910), Identification (#4610>.
2780 Data Transmission Terminals
Automatic Answering (#1340), AutomatiC Turnaround (U350),
Multiple Records Transmission (#5010>, MultipOint Line
Control (#5020), EBCDIC Code (#9761), USASCII Code
(#9762), 6-bit Transcode (#9760>, EBCDIC Transparency
(#8030;, Terminal Identification (#7850), Dual Communication
Interface (#3401)
3270 Information Display Systems
(Local and Remote)
2715 Transmission Control Unit
Modell - Expanded Capability (#3801), Local 2740
Adapter (#4850).
Model 2 - Expanded Capability (#3801>, POint-to-Point
Non-switched (#9401), POint-to-Point Switched
(#9402), Multipoint Non-switched (#9403).
2702 Transmission Control Unit
Autocall (#1290), Autopoll (#1319),
'1032 Attachment (#7918>.
Note: DOS does not support the attachment of the 2701. 2702 or 2703 to the Selector Channel of
5/360, Models 22 & 25 ... See M2701, M2702 and M2703 in 'Machines' for other attachments limitations.
3735 Programma~le Buffered Terminal
Not to be reproduced without written permission
~ - -=E.E
~ ::-:':s~~ Programming
3780 Data Communication Terminal
Switched Network Control (#7651>
Additional Print Positions <#5701)
EBCDIC Transparency (#3601)
Multi-Point Data Link Control (#5010)
EBCDIC Code (#9761)
ASCII Code (#9762)
Terminal Identification <#9300>
3741 Data Station Model 2, 3741 Programmable Work Station Model 4
Terminal Identification (#7850>
Operator ID Card Reader (#5450>
Data Set Attachment (#9120, 9121, 9122, 912.3)
Expanded Communications (#1680)
Expanded Communications/Multipoint Data Link
Control (#1685)
S/.3 Central Process Unit
Binary Synchronous Communications Adoption (#2074),
EBCDIC Transparency (#7850), Station Selection (#7477),
Autocall (#1315), EBCDIC Code (#9060>, ASCII Code
(#9061>, Point-to Point (#9481), Multipoint (~9482),
Switched (#9483), plus additional specifIcations.
Systeml7
Communication Control (#1610) must be specified as a 2740
Modell terminal with checking feature.
1130 Central Process Unit
Synchronous Communication Adapter (#7690> operating in BSC
mode.
3735 Programmable Buffered Terminal
Multi-point Data Link Control (#5010>, ASCII (#9762) or
EBCDIC (#9761),
3747 Data Converter
Communications Adapter (#1660>
Data Set Attachment (#9120, 9121, 9122, 9123)
TERMINAL SUPPORT CHART 1
DOS
ACCESS METHOD
Terminals
Operating
with S/360
or S/370*
1030
1050
1060
AT&T83B3&
WUl15A
AT&T Mod33/35
TWX
2740 Mod 1
2740 Mod 2
2760
2260 (Local}
2260 (Remote)
2265
777017772
5/360 & 5/370··
Nlodel20
1130
1800
5/3
2780
2770
2715 Model 1
2715 Model 2
2972·8.2972·11
3735
511
3277 (Remote)
3277 (Local)
3284/3286
(Remote)
I Local)
3275
3780 (A)
3741 Mod 2
3741 Mod 4
3747
Notes:
Date
~
A
A
A
Chen.
~
4
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
5112
11/71
5112
5112
5112
5112
5112
A
12114
A
QTAM
4
STAM
X
X
X
4
X
X
6
4
5
5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
6
X
L
1
1
L
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
L
3
3
3
5
2
L
X
X
X
X
Auto
poIl+
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
!!!!....
CtrI. Rest
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
X
X
X
a
a
a
X
X
X
X
X
a
a
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
~
X
X
X
X
X
X
~
X
X
X
apr. Chkpt/
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
()n.ln
X
X
X
X
COMMUNICATION CODE
ERR
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
TERMINAL SUPPORT CHART 2
DOS/360
PROGRAMMING SUPPORT
X
2
L
2
3
2
2
2
P 360N.5
Mar 74
IBM Disk Operating System
X
X
X
X
X
X'
X
a
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1 = Supponed on 2701 and Ml35 only.
2 = Suppond on 2701, 2703, and MI35ICAonly.
3 = Supponed on 2701, 2703 M251CA,and M135 ICAonly.
4 = SuPPoned on 2701, 2702. 2703 and M25 ICA only.
5 = Supponed on 2701, 2702,2703, M25 ICA .nd M135 ICA.
L = Supponed on Local Channel (7172 is not supponed on M135)
Access Method:
X = Supponed
Not supported
Programming Support: X = Supponed by Access Methods
- = Not supported
a = Supponed by aT AM only.
Tannin".
Operating
with S/360
Type
Comm
~
1030
1050
1060
AT&T83B3&
WU115A
AT&T Mdl 33/35
TWX
2740Mdll
2740M - Operator control is provided as an option to 'enable
the operator to examine and modify QTAM control information and to respond to
errors and unusual conditions. An IBM 1050 System, or IBM 2740 Communication Terminal with station control and checking, is required for ttlis function.
When operator control facil ities are used, operator awareness messages may be
directed to the operator control terminal instead of the printer-keyboard.
'
Checkpoint/Restart (QTAM> - Checkpoint/Restart is proVided for the QTAM
message control program as an optional facility. The terminal table queue control blocks, and the polling lists are checkpointed on the disk at the user
specified intervals. Two checkpoint records are maintained with a pOinter to
the most current record. Restart.will be accomplished by reloading the QTAM
message control program, using the latest checkpoint records to overlay the initial queue control blocks and polling lists.
3735 Terminal Support, 360N-CQ-493 and 370N-CQ-493
Form Description Macros
The Form Description Macros for the 3735 are used to describe and generate Form
Description Programs that are used by the 3735 to control the terminal operations.
The Form Description Macros operate with the DOS Assembler D or F.
Queued Telecommunication Access Method, 360N-CQ-470
QTAM is a generalized input/output control system that extends the techniques of
logical IOCS to the telecommunications enVironment. In addition to the standard
GET/PUT macro instructions support for message processing programs, QT A M provides high-level and flexible message control language. Some ofthe capabilities
proVided by QTAM through the use of macro instructions are: automatic control of
switched networks ••• polling terminals ••• receiving and editing messages from
terminals ••• addressing terminals ••• sending and editing messages to terminals
••• dynamic buffer management ••• queueing messages on a direct access storage
device.
A telecommunications system built upon QTAM facilities consists of:
1. A message control program (Foreground 1) to control the flow of message traffic
from one remote terminal to another (message switching application) and between
remote terminals and any message proceSSing programs (message proceSSing
application message).
2. Message processing programs (Foreground 2 and/or Background> to perform the
message proceSSing required by the user's application.
QTAM allows asynchronous operation of II partitions ofthe system. This method
of execution is based on the completion o. ~ueued events and on the estaillished
priorities. of Foreground 1, Foreground 2" d Background.
The follOWing DASDs are supported by QTAM for intermediate storage of message
queues:
2311 Disk Storage Drive
2314 Direct Access Storage Facility
2319 Disk Storage Facility
3330/3333 Disk Storage
The output of the assembly is an object module suitable for input to the Form Description Utility.
Form Description Utility
The Form Description Utility for the 3735 is used to prepare the output of the
Form Description Macro assembly for transmission to the 3735 terminal.
The Form Description Utility reads the output of the assembly from a sequential
input device, formats the object code into blocks for the 3735, and writes the
blocked code into an index sequential data set that is available to the user's program for transmission to the 3735 terminal.
See 5747-AZ1 in the SCP DOS/VS section for ordering information.
Vocabular.y File Utility Program for 7772 Audio Response Unit, 360N-UT -4 72
The System/360 Vocabulary File Utility Program for the 7772 is designed for
use within DOS and uses the facilities provided by it, including logical IOCS
and supervisor services.
The program provides for the creation and updating of an audio vocabulary file.
The customer receives the Vocabulary Input File containing words in digitally coded
form on either punched cards or maqnetic tape. The program allows the user to
select the words he needs (by means of control cards) from this master file, to
organize them on disk (2311, 2314 or 2319 Disk Storage) in the manner best
suited for his application, and to list the Vocabulary Input File and the Vocabulary File he created.
Communication Serviceability Facilities - (BTAM and QTAM)
Communications Serviceability Facilities are incorporated within BTAM and QTAM.
They are provided on an optional basis,i,n STAM.
It is strongly recommended that users include these facilities in their system since
they can increase system availabil ity by providing statistics and diagnostiC aids
for effective system repair and preventive maintenance: Refer to the Terminal
Support Chart 1 for information on device support. The 'Communication ,Serviceability Facilities are:
Error Recovery Procedures .
A Debug package is avai"lablc enabling the user to locate errors in a source program.
Minimum System Requirements -- For compilation a partition of at least 40K
bytes.
DOS FORTRAN IV compiler and object programs require the Standard Instruction
Set and the Floating Point Feature.
The compiler and library produce object code supporting the following devices:
2540, 1403, 1404, 1443, 2501, 2520, 2400, 3211 as a 1403.
•
1052 and 3210/3215 consoles for ACCEPT and DISPLAY only.
The Commercial Instruction Set
•
2311, 2314/2319, and 2321 for consecutive and direct access organizations.
The Floating Point Feature (jf Floating Point literals or calculations are
to be used)
Documentation: 5/360 FORTRAN IV Language, GC28-6515-8, TNL GN280595 ••• S/360 FORTRAN IV Library Sub-program, GC28-6596 ••• FORTRAN
IV Programmer's Guide, GC28-6397.
Four utility work files on 2400/3400 Series Magnetic Tape units, 2311
Disk Storage Drives, or a 2314 or 2319 Storage facility. At least
one of these work files must be on a 2311,2314 or 2319 direct
access storage dev ice.
The compiler generates object code supporting the following devices:
2540, 1403, 1404, 1443, 2501, 2520, 2400,3211 as a 1403.
1052 and 3210/3215 consoles for ACCEPT and DISPLAY only.
2311,2314/2319, and 2321 for consecutive, direct access and indexed
sequential organizations.
Documentation: USA Standard COBOL, GC28-6394-2, TNL GN28-0436 •••
USA Standard COBOL Programmer's Guide, GC28-6398-2.
Basic FORTRAN IV, 360N-F0-451
The Basic FORTRAN IV Language is especially useful in writing programs for
scientific and engineering appl ications that involve mathematical computations.
The DOS Basic FORTRAN IV Language is compatib"le with and encompasses the
USA Standards Basic FORTRAN, including its mathematical subroutine prOVisions.
PL/I, 36G N-PL-464
The DOS Basic PL/I Compiler provides, in a single high-level language,
many new features, such as:
Comprehensive data conversion and editing facilities.
Data structures for alphameric information.
Abil ity to process a wide range of data types, including character and bit
strings, fixed and floating decimal, and fixed and floatin;i binary.
Both structured data and array data have arithmetic capabil ity, including
expressions whose elements are simple variables, structured data, and
arrays.
Data stream transmission.
Record transmission capabil ity.
Batched Job Foreground execution capability for compiler output decks.
Object time performance is improved through the el imination of repetitive
transient fetches.
DOS Basic FORTRAN IV offers the following advanced features -- mixed-mode ••.
spaCing format ••• I iteral format code ••. the A format code ••. scale factor ...
carriage control ..• double precision data type ••• three dimension arrays .•.
functional subprogram return of results via the argument list.
CATALR cards are now produced by the compiler for object modules if UPS I
bitO ison.
The following features are furnished by the basic FORTRAN IV compi ler:
Steriing Picture capability now includes PICTURE characters 6,7, and 8.
Input/output device support for the IBM 2314 or 2319 Disk Storage
facility.
Source statement numbers now appear in the object code listing.
LIST Directed Input/Output allows free-form data transmission.
Compiler output decks may now be executed in a Batched Job Foreground
partition.
INITIAL Attribute.enables initialization of variable at the time that
storage is assigned.
The Basic FORTRAN IV compiler allows the introduction of source programs in
either BCD or EBCDIC character codes.
The Basic FORTRAN IV compiler and object programs require the Standard Instruction Set and the Floating Point feature #4427.
The compiler generates object code supporting the following devices:
Certain keyword abbreviations reduces the overall effort of source
program coding.
Built-in functions ADD, MUL TIPL Y and DIVIDE permit user control
over the preci sion resulting from these functions.
Provide tracing of object program flow initiated by source program
CALL statements.
2540, 1403, 1404, 1443, 2501, 2520, 2400,3211 as a 1403.
XREF option allows cross reference listing to be written.
•
1052 and 3210/3215 consoles for ACCEPT and DISPLAY only.
PROCESS card allows compile-time option to be specified overriding job control options •
•
2311 and 2314/2319 for consecutive organizations.
Documentation: Basic FORTRAN IV Programmer's Guide, GC24-5038-3 •••
Basic FORTRAN IV Language, GC28-6629-2.
FORTRAN IV, 360N-FO-479
FORTRAN IV library Subprograms "360N-LM-480
The language features provides beyond DOS Basic FORTRAN IV are: Data initial ization statements .•• COMPLEX and LOGICAL data types •• , The logical IF state~
ment ••. END and ERR parameters to allow testing for end-of-file and error conditions
on input ••• ASSIGN and aSSigned GO TO statements ••• Labeled COMMON.
DOS FORTRAN IV is fully compatible with and encompasses USA Standard FORTRAN IV. Extensions beyond the USA Standard language level include: Direct
access input/output statements for the 2311, 2314 and 2319 direct access
storage devices ••• Seven dimensions for arrays ••• An IMPLICIT statement
allowing extended impliCit classification by the first character of a name ••• The
NAMELIST statement permitting input/output and conversion without an explicit
I/O list and FORMAT statement ••• The PAUSE statement option allowing output
of messages to the console typewriter ••• Generalized subscripts ••• Multiple
ENTRY points to subprograms ••• Non-standard RETURNs from SUBROUTINES.
Basic PL/I provides the user with a key for solving both computing and resource
allocation problems. It enables the user to employ an organization of programmers
using one common language, thus reducing training cost and enhancing communi·
cation between scientific and commercial applications groups.
Because of the space required for the Foreground Save Area, both the 10K and
12K variants of this compiler require an additional 2K of main storage when run in
a Batched Job Foreground partition.
The Basic PL/I compiler requires thefloating point feature when floating pOint
literals, data items or non-integer exponents are used.
The compiler generates object code supporting the follOWing devices:
2540, 1403, 1404, 1443, 2501, 2520, 2400, 3211 as a 1403
1052 and 3210/3215 consoles for ACCEPT and DISPLAY only
2311,2314/2319, and 2321 for consecutive, direct access and indexed
sequential organizations.
Documentation; PL/I Subset Reference Manual, GC28-8202 ••• PL/I Programmer's Guide, GC24-9005 ••• PL/I DASD Macros, GC24-5059.
Not to be reproduced without written permission
--- -
=-=====
P 360N.9
Oct 72
:5:='::S~~ Programming
IBM Disk Operating System
Report Program Generator (RPG), 360N-RG-460
DOS RPG is a powerful, high level, problem oriented language capable of
generating programs that range from produc-ing simple reports to full file maintenance. The generated programs will read data from punched cards, tape and sisk,
update records according to user spec ifications,' write output records on tape and
disk, punch cards and prepare printed reports. RPG offers a rapid method of converting defined appl ications to operational programs producing results.
With minimal specifications, RPG generated programs can:
Obtain data records from single or multiple input files.
Perform record identification.
Disk Sort/Merge, 360N-SM-450
The sort program enables the user to sort files of un sequenced disk (2311, records
into one sequential file. The merge program enables,tile user to merfje (collate, up
to four pre-'sorted disk files into one file. The program assumes that input records
for a sort operation are in random sequence. Records can be sorted or meryed Into
ascending or descending sequence. The output sequence for a merge-only operation
must be the same itS the input sequence.
Significant features of the sort/merge program are:
Sequence check input fi les.
Sorting or merging on as many as twelve control-data fields.
Determine log ical order of record procesSing.
Collating sequences and data format can be specified separately for each
control fiel d •
Perform calculations on data taken from input records or literals.
Perform automatic decimal alignment.
Perform tests al'!d/or comparisons that may influence proce~sing.
Exit to user subroutines written in a language other than RPG.
Produce reports with an unlimited number of heading and detail lines up to
nine levels of total lines, and an end~of-job total.
In addition', RPG has the capabilities of processing the following
requ irements:
Option of writing an output file on disk composed of the disk addresses or
disk addresses plus control data for the sorted records.
Provides exits to storage areas for user-written routines.
Sorts multiple input files.
Input and output can be from either talle or disk.
Disk intermediate storage may be deSignated on the system residence device
assuming sufficient working storage is available.
Disk storage is used as work areas.
· Automatic handl ing of sterling fields.
• Alternate collating purposes.
• Inverted field in editing.
Disk Sort/Merge does not support the 2314, 2319 or 3330/3333 Disk
Storage facility as an input/outPLIt device.
RPG requires the Standard Instruction Set and Decimal Arithmetic feature #3237.
The compiler generates object code supporting the following devices:
2540, 1403, 1404, 144.3, 2501, 2520, 2400,3211 as a 1403.
• 2311, 2314/2319, and 2321 for consecutive, direct access and indexed
sequential organizations.
Documentation: Report Program Generator, GC26-.3570.
Tape Sort/Merge, 360N-SM-400
Enables the user to sort files of unsequenced tape records into one sequential file.
The merge program enables the user to merge (collate) up to seven presorted tape
files into one file.
Si9nificant features of Tape Sort/Merge are:
Sorting or merging on as many as twelve control-data fields.
Collating sequences and data format can be specified separately for each
control field.
Records can ,be sorted or merged into ascending or descending sequencc-.
I he sort employs IOCS standard label checking or enables the user to bypass
or process his non-standard label s.
The checkpoint-restart facility permits the user to interrupt arid continue
~uring the merging phases of the sort.
Magnetic tapes are used as work fi les.
An alternate work drive Is available during sort and will allow the maximum
input file size to be approximately doubled.
HollO be reproduced without written permission
1BJ4
IBM Disk Operating System
Programming
Sort/Merge, 360N-SM-483
The DOS Tape and Disk Sort/Merge provides support for the 2314/2319 Di~k
Storage facility. In addition to the features provided by the other 1 ,pel DOS
sMt/merge programs, this program provides the following facilities: The sort ('ser
may read, modify, or insert tape/disk records by means of Exit 15, and may write
or delete tape/disk records by means of Exit 35 ••• A tag sort may be requested
for DASD ••• Tape and disk control cards are compatible ••• The sort may operate
in either the background or a batched-job foreground partition ••• User exits have
.additional capability.
This sort/merge program enables the user to sort files of unsequenced records into
one sequential file. The control data information can be read from as many as 12
fields in each record. The program assumes that input records for a sort operation
are in random sequence. However, if an inherent sequencing exists, the program
takes advantage of it.
Records can be sorted or merged into ascending or descending sequence, and an
individual sequence can be specified for each control-data field. The output
sequence for a merge-only operation must be the same as the input sequence.
Minimum System Requirements -- A 10K for 5/370 partition for 2311 and
2400 sorts, and a 22K partition for 2314/2319 sorts.
This sort is designed to be tailored at system generation time to meet the specific
requirements of the .customer installation. The following facilities can be included
at system generation:
The entire Sort/Merge Library
The entire Sort Library
The entire Merge library
A 2400 Sort Library
A 2311 Sort Library
A 2314/2319 Sort Library
P 360N.10
Oct 72
VTOC Display - Provides the means of displaying the individual labels in the
Volume Table of Contents from either a system p.kk or a data pack. The labels are
identified by location within the VTOC and their format, type, and major fields are
indicated by appropriate heading lines~
Initialize Disk- This p~ogra~ performs th~ func;ions of BPS/360 16K I~itlalize
Disk (231172314/2319), 360P-UT-206. It prepares a complete disk pack
foruseonthe2311, 2314, 2319.
Alternate Track Assignment- This program aSSigns an alternate track to a defective track or changes from defective to nondefective the flag indicating the
track's condition. A parameter allows for the bypassing of surface analysis .
when running the initialize disk utility.
Copy Disk to Card and Restore Card to Disk - These programs permit the user
to transfer a file or a volume of data from disk to cards, and to restore that data
to a disk pack at a later date. The restored records occupy areas of the disk
pack identical to the original file. Consecutive, Indexed Sequential, and Direct
Access methods of file organization are supported with a copy volume feature.
Both the Copy and the Restore programs write checkpOint records enabl ing them
to be restarted at the end of a new extent or after 'processing 80 tracks of an
extent. The checkpoint file may be aSSigned to either disk or to tape.
An additional option permits copyinglPLrecords during a copy file job.
The output created by the copy program is designed for use by the DOS Restore
Program only.
Copy and Restore Disk to Disk - This program performs·the same function as the
Copy!Restore Disk to Card programs without the intermediate storage medium.
. Group 2 (Magnetic Tape) Utilities, 360N-UT-462
Tape to Printer - Prints a tape file in one of two formats:
DOS UTILITIES
· Data Display - prints all of a tape block.
• Data List - prints one I ine for each data record.
Current DOS utilities have been divided into three groups in order to simplify
ordering and maintenance. Each group is itemized and described below. The
disk-oriented utilities wi II support file transfer to and from the 2311 and
2314/2319. The following features are available in most of the programs:
Card to Tape - Transfers Binary or EBCDIC data from cards to magnetic tape.
Tape to Card - Transfers data from magnetic tape to cards. Data may be punched
in either EBCDIC or binary.
Moving and copying a logical file or part of a logical file from one volume to
another.
Disk to Tape - Transfers data from a disk file to a tape file. The disk file may
or may not have key fields.
Copying a logical file from one location to another on the same volume.
Tape to Disk - Transfers data from a tape file to a disk file. The disk file may
or may not have key fields.
Printing and/or punching a logical file.
Field selecting, blocking, and deblocking records.
Tape to Tape - Transfers the data from one tape to another.
Computing I/O area assignments based on available storage space and the size
of the input and output blocks. Maximum advantage of device and process overlap for!l given block size is taken.
Label checking.
Skipping a number of input records before processing begins.
Data Cell to Tape - Transfers data from a data cell file to a tape file. The data
cell file mayor may not have key fields.
Tape to Data Cell ~ Transfers data from a tape file to a data cell file. The data
cell file mayor may not have key fields.
The utilities will be distributed for operation in the background partition, but may
be linkage edited by the user to operate in a Batched Job Foreground partition.
Tape Compare - Compares two files from two or more tapes to ensure that the
files are identical.
Group 1 Utilities (360N-UT -461> is a prerequisite for using Group 2 and/or
Group 3.
Copy and Restore Disk to Tape - These programs perform the same functions as
the Copy/Restore Disk to Card programs but substitute tape as the intermediate
storage medium.
Group 1
1402/1403 (~4463) or 1442/1443 (#4464) Attachment
Console Inquiry Station (1114465)
Disk Storage Drives (#4466)
Magnetic Tapes (1114467) for multiplexer and #4468
For selector channels)
Standard instruction set (see Note 1)
One I/O channel (either multiplexer or selector) (see Note 2)
One card reader (1442,2501,2520 or 2540) (see Note 3)
One card punch <1442,2520, or 2540) (see Nllte 3)
One printer (1403, 1404,1443 or 3211) (see Note 3)
One'1052 Printer-Keyboard
• 1051 Attachment (1117915)
1051 Control Unit with ·CPU Attachment (#3130>
One 2311 Disk Storage Drive or 2314 Direct Access
Storage Facility for DOS System Residence
Whatever systems configuration is required for operation
of the user's Disk Operating System
Note 3: One 2400-Series Magnetic Tape Unit (7- or 9-track) may be substituted
TortI1lS device. (If SYSIPT, SYSPCH, or SYSLST are assigned to 7-track tape units,
the Data Conversion Feature is required.)
Note 4: When the 1401/1440/1460 DOS Compatibility Feature 4460 is installed,
the operation of the Model 40 emulator (360C-EU-074) is excluded on the system.
Once the minimum configuration requirements are met, the configuration may range from
a card-oriented System/360 Model 25/30/40 to a maximum configuration of disk,
tape, and teleprocessing. Tape and teleproceSSing are mutually exclusive on the
Model 25 under DOS.
CS/30 has the capability to execute in any partition of DOS that is initiated in batch
job mode. However, CS/30 emulator programs cannot be executed concurrently.
CS/40 has the capability if the 1401/1440/1460 Relocatable DOS Compatibility
Feature (#4462) is installed on the Model 40, to execute in any partition of DOS
that is initiated in batch job mode. This feature provides the relocation of simulated
1400 storage boundaries to multiples of 16,384 bytes beginning at location 16,384
and extending up to and including location 114,688. With this feature installed,
concurrent execution of CS/40 emulator programs is provided in up to and including
three partitions of DOS.
One of the objectives of CS/30, CS/40 is to provide flexibility of external devices
for the user who needs to grow and requires system availability to do so. 1400 programs operating under the CS/30, CS/40 can request I/O operations on the following
System/360 devices:
1442,2520,2540 Card Read Punch, or 2501 Card Reader
1403 (for continuous-forms operations). 1404 (for continuous-forms and cut-card operations), 3211 or 1443 Printer
1052 Printer-Keyboard (for operator communications)
2311 Disk Storage Drive or 2314 Direct Access Storage Facility
2400/3400-Series MagnetiC Tape Units (and Controls)
Input/output device correspondence between a 1401, 1440, or 1460 system and a
System/360 Model 25/30/40 is as Follows:
1401/1440/1460 I/O Device
System/36O I/O Device
1402 or 1442* Card Read
Punch or 1444 Card Punoh
2501 Card Reader or 1442, 2520,
or 2540 Card Read Punch*
1403, 1404***, or 1443
Printer
1403,1404***, 1443 or 3211**
Printer
729, 7330, or 7335 Magnetic
Tape Unit
2400/3400-Series Magnetic Tape
Unit (and Controllt
1407 Console Inquiry Station or
1447 Console
1052 Printer-Keyboard
DOlor 1405 Disk Storage or
1311 Disk Storage Drive
2311 Disk Storage Drive or 2314
Direct Access Storage Facility
• 1442 relldlng WId punching into ,he ume cerd cen "S""" ..ted bV the punch unit on 1M 2540 fit thePFR future
is instelled). bv the 1442 Modil Nt. or by the 2520Modtl 81.
··3211 Printer for System/360 Mode" 30 Ind<40only .
••• The 14(M Printer should be uted if eut-cwd operMions •• to be simulMed; othetwite. 1403 or 1U3 Ihould be UI1Id.
The following are system requirements for a Model 40 configuration for the emulator
program:
System/360 Model 40 with a 2040 Processing Unit containing
32,768 (32K) bytes of main storage
1401/1460 Compatibility Feature #4457 and 1311 Disk Compatibility Feature #9710 (see Note 4)
1401/1440/1460 DOS Compatibility Feature (4460> (see Note 4)
File Scan Feature (1114385) (supported, but not required)
Decimal Arithmetic Feature (#3237)
Storage Protection Special Feature (#7520) for multiprogramming
Standard instruction set (see Note 1)
One I/O channel (either multiplexor or selector) (see Note 2)
One card reader (1442,2501,2520, or 2540) (see Note 3)
One card punch (1442.2520, or 2540) (see Note 3)
One printer (1403, 1404,1443 or 3211) (see Note 3)
One 1052 Printer-Keyboard
1052 Ada~r (#7920)
Additional features supported by CS/30, CS/40 are: Timer feature ... Simultaneous
Read-While-Write Tape Control (2404 or 2804) ••• Any channel configuration up to
one multiplexer channel and two selector channels ... Tape Switching Unit (2816)
••• Universal Character Set ••• Multiple Character Set (on 2025).
Input/Output feature correspondence between a 1401, 1440, or 1460 system and a
System/36O Model 25/30/40 is as follows:
1401/1440/1460 I/O Feature
System/360 I/O Feature
1402 Punch Feed Read and Control Unit (#5890 and t5895)
2540 Punch Feed Read (t5890); Punch
Feed Read Control (t5895) on the 2821
Control Unit* or on the Integrated 2540
Attachment (t4595) on 2025
Column Binary Feature
(#1990>
Binary Transfer Feature (t1468)
Column Binary Feature (n 990) must be installed on the 2821 Control Unit
BaSic lacs (VOL2)
Optical Character
Reader 10CS
Magnetic Character
.Reader 10CS
360N-CL-453
360N-CL-453
360N-10-478
VOL2
Assembler
Assenbler F
360N-AS-465
360N-AS-466
VOL3
Group 1 Uti lities - Unit
Record Disk
Group 2 Utiiities - Tape
Group 3 Uti lities - Data
Cell
MPS Utility Macros
360N-UT -461
COBOL
Language Conversion Program
360N-CB-452
360N-CV-489
Note: PID will distribute Release 26.1 of OOS on 2316 Disk Packs provided that they
liiVi"been initialized by the customer prior to being sent to PID. The disk should be
initialized with one of the following programs: 360P-UT -206, 360P-UT -208 .or
360N-UT -461. (All disks must have Volume 10 111111.)
The following is a list of the available components:
*2311 and 2314 ReSident Systems
* Assembler 0
* Ass.ler F
*COOOL 0
COBOL DASD Macros
*American National Standard COBOL
* System Control and BaSic 10CS
*BTAM
*QTAM
* Language Conversion Program
*On Line Test Executive Program
*Model 30 Emulator
*Model 40 Emulator
*System/370 Emulator
Basic FORTRAN IV
*FORTRAN IV
*Direct Access Method
*Sequential Disk lacs
*Magnetic Tape lacs
*ISFMS
Paper Tape lacs
*Compiler I/O Modules
* Magnetic Character Reader 10CS
*Optical Character Reader lacs
*FORTRAN IV Library Subprograms
*PL/I 0
Autotest
Report Program Generator
Tape Sort/Merge
Disk Sort/Merge
*Tape/Disk Sort/Merge
*Group 1 Utilities - Unit Record/Disk
*Group 2 Utilities - Tape
Group 3 Uti lities - Data Cell
*MPS Utility Macros
Vocabulary File Utility Program
3-10
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-1
3-4
3-10
3-9
3-10
3-4
3-7
3-7
3-6
3-1
3-9
3-6
3-9
3-10
3-10
3-10
3-4
3-10
3-10
3-10
3-6
3-10
3-3
3-9
3-8
3-8
3-6
3-10
3-10
3-7
3-10
3-3
360N-SV-474
AS-465
AS-466
CB..:452
CB-468
CB-482
CL-453
CQ-469
CQ-470
CV-489
DN-481
EU-484
EU-485
EU-490
F0-451
F0-479
10-454
10-455
10-456
10-457
10-458
10-476
10-477
10-478
LM-480
PL-464
PT-459
RG-460
SM-400
SM-450
SM-483
UT-461
UT-462
UT-463
UT-471
UT-472
* Changed with this release
The OOS data is preceded by an initialize 2311/2314 Utility P-ogram and a Restore
Tape-to-Disk program.
360N-10-477
VOL4
360N-UT -462
360N-UT -463
360N-UT -4 71
VOL5
Tape/Disk Sort/Merge
360N-SM-483
VOL6
Autotest
Report Program Generator
Basic FORTRAN IV
360N-PT -459
360N-RG-460
360N-FO-451
VOL7
STAM
Vocabulary Fi Ie Uti lity
Program
QTAM
360N-CQ-469
360N-UT -472
VOLB
PL/I
Program Logic Manuals
DOS
System Control Introduction
Librarian Maintenance and Service
Linkage Editor
IPL and Job Control
Logical 10CS Introduction
Unit Record, Magnetic Tape, and Compiler
Files
Sequential and Direct Access Files
ISFMS
BTAM
QTAM
Utilities
Disk Sort/Merge
Autotest
FORTRAN IV
GY24-5017-12
GY24-5079-3
GY24-50.80-3
GY24-5086-5, TNL GN33-8740
GY24-5020-7, TNL GN33-8739
GY24-5087-6,
GY24-5088-5
GY24-5089-4,
GY30-5001-6
GY30-5002-4
GY24-5023-3,
GY24-5021-1
GY.24-5027
GY28-6394-1,
TNL GN33-8741
TNL GN33-8743
TNL GN33-8747
TNL GN28-0415
DOS and TOS
OlTEP
MPS Utilities
Tape/Disk Sort/Merge
Assembler
Assembler F
RPG
COBOL
FORTRAN IV
Subrouti ne Library
PL/I Volume 1
PL/I Volume 2
PL/I Volume 3
DOS 1401/1440/1460
Emulator Program Compatibi lity Support 30
DOS 1401/1440/1460
Emulator Program Compatibility Support 40
DOS: USA Standard COBOL
Conversion Aids: COBOL-to-USA
Supervisor and Related Transients
Logical Transients
System Service Programs
DOS OLTEP
Emulate the 1401/1440/1460 on S/370
145 and 155 using OOS
Emulate the 1410/7010 on S/370
145 and 155 using OOS
GY24-5056-2,
GY24-5045-4
GY28-6645-2
GY26-3642-4
GY26-3716-1,
GY26-3701-1,
0005
GY24-5025-3
GY24-5032
GY33-9013-1,
GY33-9010-4
TNL GN24-5451
Reference Material: Order from Mechanicsburg only.
OOS TOS Assembler Specs
OOS Tape Disk Sort/Merge Program
OOS TOS PL/I Program Guide
DOS Emulator for Models 30 & 40
BPS TOS BOS OOS Tape Labels
DOS DASD Labels
DO S Data Management Concept
DOS TOS Utility Macro Specs
DOS TOS Utility Specs
DOS TOS COBOL Language Specs
PL/I Subset Reference Manual
DOS OLTEP
DOS USA Standard COBOL Program
360 DOS Emulator 370/155
360 DOS Emulator 370/155 1410
TNL GN33-8120
TNLs GY21-0009,
TNL GN33-9108
GY33-9011~2
GY33-9012~2
GY27-7164-2, TNl GN33-7013
GY27-7165-2,
GY28-6392-2
GY28-6397-1
GY24-5151-3,
GY24-5152-2,
GY24-5153-3,
GT64-5154-2
TNL GN33-7014
TNL GN33-8744
TNL GN33-8745
TNL GN33-8746
GY33-7008, TNLs GN33-7019,
7022
GY33-7009, TNLs GN33-7020,
7023
Program Listings - The DOS Assembly Listings (Source Statement Library) SSERV
listings, are avai lable on microfiche from IBM Distribution Center, Pub lications
Order Department, Mechanicsburg, PA. For complete decks at Release 26.1, order
the base form as listed below. For the update portion only, order supplement number
as listed below. The assembly listings are equivalent to the output listings produced
by assemblying the symbolic modules as r~.ired for each of the OOS components.
Not to be reproduced without written permission
GC24-3414-9,
GC28-6676-5
GC24-9005-6,
9130,9129
GC27-6940-5
GC24-5070-3
GC24-5072-2
GC24-3427-8
GC24-5042-6,
GC24-3465-7,
GC24-3433-6
GC28-8202-3
GT24-5086-2,
GC28-6398-3
GT33-2004-1
GT33-2005-1
TNL GN33-8157
TNLs GN33-9124,
TNl GN33-8697
TNL GN33-8738
TNL GN28-2535
=f§~
:s:.::=~~ Programming
P 360N.17
May 13
IBM Disk Operating System
RELEASE 27 BASIC PROGRAM MATERIAL CAvaiiable from PID>
Documentation -- Memo to Systemj370 users. The following SRL piblications
are distributed with each initial DOS order:
Disk Operating System -Version 4 Systems Generation
GC33-500S-0
Version 4 Messages
GC33-5009-0
DOS Version 4
GC33-5007-0
OPTIONAL PROGRAM MATERIAL
Documentation -- Appropriate material delivered.
Machine Readable -- Source code is avai lable on MagnetiC Tape <2400') or Disk
Pack as specified by Program Number Extension indicated in the follOWing ordering
information:
Program Number
ExtenSion
Program Component Name
Program Number
VOLl
System Control (VOL1)
Basic 10CS (VOL2)
Optical Character Reader 10CS
Magnetic Character Reader 10CS
E"REP
370N·CL-453
370N-CL-453
370N-10-478
370N-10-477
370N-UT-492
VOL2
Assembler 0
Assembler F
370N-AS-465
360N-AS-466
VOL3
Group 1 Uti lities • Unit Record
Disk
Group 2 Utilities - Tape
Group 3 Uti lities - Data Cell
MPS Uti lity Macros
System Utilities
360N-UT -461
360N-UT -462
360N-UT -463
360N-UT -471
370N-UT-491
VOL4
COBOL 0
Language Qmversion Program
360N-CB-452
360N-CV-489
VOL5
Modular Sort/Merge
360N-SM-483
VOL6
Report A-ogram Generator
Basic FORTRAN IV
360N-RG-460
360N-F0-451
VOL7
BTAM
3735 Terminal Support
QTAM
370N-CQ-469
370N-CQ-493
370N-CQ-470
VOLB
PL/I
The follOWing isa list of the available components:
*2311/2314/3330 Supervisor
* System Control and Basic 10CS
* Direct Access Method
* Sequential Disk 10CS
*Magnetic Tape 10CS
* Indexed Sequential Fi Ie Management System
* Paper Tape IOCS
* Compi ler I/O Modules
* Magnetic Character Reader 10CS
*Optical Character Reader 10CS
* Assembler 0 <14K)
* Basic Telecommunications Access
Method
*Queued Telecommunications Access
Method
**3735 Terminal Support
*On-Line Test Executive Program
* System/370 Emulators
** System Utility Programs
** Environmental Recording and Editing
Program
* Assembler F
*COBOL 0
*American National Standard COBOL
* CO BO L Language Conversion Program
CO BO L DA S0 Macros
FORTRAN D
*FORTRAN F
*FORTRAN F Library Sub Program
*PL/I
Report Program Generator
Tape Sort/Merge
* Disk Sort/Merge
*Modular Sort/Merge
* Group 1 Uti Iities, Unit Record/Disk
*Group 2 Utilities, Tape'
Group 3 Utilities, Data Cell
MPS Utility Macros
4-0
4-0
4-0
4-0
4-0
370N-SV-495
370N·CL-453
370N -10 -4 54
370N-10-455
370N-10-456
4-0
4-0
4-0
4-0
4-0
4-0
370N-10-457
370N-10-458
370N-IO-476
370N-10.-477
370N-10-478
370N-AS-465
4-0
370N-CQ-469
4-0
4-0
4-0
4-0
4-0
370N-CQ-470
370N-CQ-493
370N-DN-481
370N-EU-490
370N-UT -491
4-0
3-10
3-11
3-5
3-4
3-1
3-9
3-7
3-7
3-11
3-9
3-8
3-9
3-7
3-11
3-11
3-7
3-10
370N-UT -492
360N-AS-466
360N-CB-452
360N-CB-482
360N-CV-489
360N-CB-468
360N-FO-451
36 ON -FO -4 79
360N-LM-480
360N-PL-464
360N-RG-460
360N-SM-400
360N-SM-450
360N-SM-483
360N-UT -461
360N-UT -462
360N-UT -463
360N-UT-471
*changed with this release
**new with this release
The DOS data is preceded by an initialize 2311/2314/3330 Utility Program and a
Restore Tape-to-Disk program.
Each tape may also be restored to a 2316 or 3336 Disk Pack.
There is no optional program material for the following: Sequential Disk 10CS,
370N-10-455; Magnetic Tape IOCS, 370N-I0-456; Direct Access Method,
370N-10-454; ISFMS, 370N-10-457; Paper Tape 10CS, 370N-10-458;
COBOL DASD Macros, 360N-CB-468.
Source statements for the Supervisor, 3 70N-SV-4 74, and the Compi ler Input!Output
Macros, 370N-10-476, are no~ available.
ORDERING INFORMATION: System Number 370N
Note: Both baSic and optional machine readable material for this system is ordered by
specifying a "System Line" upervisor and Program Loa1er
(for 'l~e
and controlling the operation of r,roblem [..ro';r"r.s).
wit.tl,
Link: together separately assemblelj program sectirJOls r..nd/0r
subroutines into a single output deck that can De ~xecut~_d
without rea~sembling.
Add user-written macros to the System Tape so tiley are
:r:!:able for inclusion in problem programs at assemoly
Build a tape of problem
permiting batch execution.
program(s)
in
loa~able for~
Maintain the System Tape.
The system tape, tailored to the installation, is built
using a master tape supplied by the Program Information
Oepartment ana a set of control cards (suppli~d by the U3~r
and :iescrilJing his requirements). The maJor functions of
the sys~em tape are assemblies, HPG compilations, and
preparat10n of problem programs for execution. The system
::~~U!:d~ot used
when these problem progran,s are being
The Assembler language is a flexible, easy-to-us~ sjrnbolic
language which is machine-oriented and a~plicaole to both
commercial anc scientific problems. The Assembleor language
provides facilities for macros and literals.
Both zyst<:m
macros and installation macros may l;e filo.oe available to the
programmer. Source programs written in this language are
as~embled
by the Assembler program to produce executa ole
object programs.
One major advantage of the Assembler program (and also cf
RPG) is that it can produce object programs in a reloca·taole
fo:m, if desired. Therefore, programs or subroutines can De
W1;1tten, a,.,seClbled, and tested in sections.
Aft:er all
testing is complete, the sections or subroutines can ~e
combined ~nto. a single, logical program anci 0e IT.ade reauy
for execut1on.w1thout reassembly. The process of iinking
program sect10ns is accomplished by the Linko.ge Editor
program.
Executable program(s), i.e., programs with no unresolved
linkages, can be loaded from the card reader or from tape.
The Basic Tape System allows for buil~ing a loado.ole tafe
from carde.
Programs on this tape are executed exactly in
the order in which they appear.
Report Program Generator <8K
T~gl
The BPS/360 Report Program Generator
(SK Tape) produces
r7lo~atable
object programs that are used to produce
11s~1ngs, perform numerous calculations, use lftuitiple files,
search tables, and update files.
Thus, it is possiole tb
produce reporte ranging from simple listings iron. cards or
tape to complete jobs such as payroll, accounts receivable
~tc. Special coding sheets are provided to describe the job
to be performed.
Through precisely defined Entries, tt.e
programmer describes the
type
of
input
data,
the
calculations to be performed, and tne tYfe of output
necessary. RPG is a problem-oriented language that does not
require detailed knowledge of machine functions.
The
information from the coding sheets is compiled to produce
object language programs ready for execution.
The minimum System/360 machine configuration required for
execution is -- 16K byt.es of core storage ••• l"loating-Point
Arithmetic Feature ••• any of the following card reading
units -- 2540 Card Read Punch, 1442 Nl Card Read Pu~Ch, 2501
Card Reader ••• one 1443 Print.er, 1403 Printer, or 1052
Printer-Keyboard
any device to be used by the user's
program. The devices that may be used are all those card
reading, card punching, and printing devices previously
mentioned, and the 2520 Card Punch.
The IOCS macros of the basiq tape system relieve the user of
the detailed
programming; involved
"'ith
input/output
operations. Two major functions are provided:
In each case, the Card FORTRAN IV System uses only those
devices and features listed. Additional core storage and
features are not used.
The retrieval and storing of logical data records, making
files available for processing (including label handling),
and end-of-file processing.
This is referred to as
logical rocs.
Input/Output
Contro!_~y~~
(IOCS)
The control of actual transfer of data between storage and
I/O devices. This is referred to as physical IOCS.
Logica. data records are made availaole for proceSSing and
stored after proceSSing by the use of I/O macros in tHe
Not to be reproduced without written permiaalon
P 360P.4
Feb 72
IBM system/36.0 Basic Programming Support
problem program.
Execution of these macros mayor may not
cause physic~l IOCS to transfer data between core storage
and an I/O device.
STR (Synchronous Transmitter Receiver) macros providing DIAL
and leased line programming support for Systern/360 Models
30, 40, 50, 65 and 75 with 2701 Data Adapter Unit and
Synchronous Data Adapter Type I (#7695 and 1t7696) are.also
included. Most STR applications will probably require 16K;
however,
utility
type
applications requiring minimum
processing and code conversion are supported in an 8K,
environment.
IBM System/360
via a 2701 equipped with an SDA Type-II
a4apter, or an IBM System/360 Model 25 via the Integrated
Communications Attachment to another 5/360
via 'the 2701
equipped with an SDA - Type II adapter or via a 2703 with a
Synchronous Base, or an S/360 Model 25 via the Integrated
Communications Attachment. This support is for point-to-point,
nonswitcbed and switched lines. Included within this support
are the 2701 Error Recovery Procedures and Error Counts.
14acros
are
provided to handle
Synchronous Line Control functions:
the
following
Binary
h~CDIC
. is
supported as the transmission
minimum core storage requirement is 16K bytes.
code.
The
BPS/360
~inary
Synchronous
Communications
support
communicates with other System/36Os using OOS/360 BTAI,I,
OS/360 BTAN and BOS/BPS/360 Binary Synchronous Communication
support.
Model 25, 30, 40, 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode) or 75
!~ote: 2701 Support on a selector channel is limited
SWItched (leased or private direct connection)
to
non-
It is recommended that a 1052 console be used in order to
facilitate the printing of ~rror messages and error counts as
the result of a persistent error condition.
This facility
will aid in system repair and preventive maintenance.
Not~:
RPG is not supplied as a resident component of the
system tape. It is supplied as a separate program (360PRG-201), and must be incorporated into the system tape by
the user before it can be used. Additional information on
RPG is provided below.
control--E!:~~!!!~
The Basic Tape System provides a series of
control programs. They are:
~--E!:Qgram
Loader (IPL):
initiate system operation.
To allow flexible operation, a programmer refers to
input/output devices by symoolic nawes in his prograrr.
Assignment of actual addresses to symbolic names can be
done when the Supervisor is assembled. However, when a
change of device address i's requireti,
it
COln
CJe
accomplished by Job Cor.trol.
A separate phase of the Job Control program is used for
restarting checkpointed programs.
This phase '(RST!'l.T) ,
when used, is the final phase of Job Control and follows
the job control cards.
S~_~:
The initial program loading procedure
(IP~)
initiates system operation.
First, the Supervisor and ttl.,.
Program ~oader are loaded and control is transferred to the
Program Loader.
Step _~:
The Job Control program may be loaded next.
Its
use is optional since its functions are not always needed.
Job Control processes necessary control cards to initialize
the supervisor.
contention (point to pOint)
Headers and normal text
Inquiry and alternating replies
WA»T (optional),
Full Transparent Text
Dial with and without identification
Disconnect and Conversational
*
Processing of standard tape lat~ls
Changing of symbolic I/O aSsignments
Changing the date or user switch indicators
Restarting a previously checkpoint~d job
programs
called
This program is provided to
The Supervisor is the control program that
always resides in core with problem programs. It can be
defined and assembled to satisfy the requirements of an
installation.
The
Supervisor
can
be
assembled
independently of, ,and operate with, many different· problem
programs, or may be assembled with each problem program.
The Supervisor consists of:
~ervisor:
Step 1: Next, a problem program is loaded.
It can overlay
the area used by Job control.
.When the Program Loader
recognizes that execution is to begin, it transfers control
to a specified entry point.
During execution, control
alternates between the problem program and Supervisor.
At
any time during a job, a program can request the Sup2rvisor
to load a program phase into storage.
The Program Loader
performs
this
function and transfers control to the
appropriate entry point.
When a probleo, program reaches end of job, the Supervisor
informs the operator of this condition. If the next job to
be 'run uses the same Supervisor and if the Program Loader
has
not
been overlaid, the operator can signal tbe
supervisor to give control to the Program Loader to load th€
next job (step 2 or 3). If these conditions do not exist,
the next job must be initiated by the IPL procedure (step
1>.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
This section is divided into two major parts: Mini~~_2Y~terr.
Requi~~~rrt2 and K~~~~~~2 -2~£PQ~~ed.
The minimum system
requirements
are
listed
by
function:
system tape
generation, system operation, execution of user's prograrr·
compiled by the assembler, and execution of user's prograo,
compiled by RPG. The §y~:!&!!! _Operati2!! section lists thE
minimum features required for both the Assembler and RPG,
followed by the additional required features that pertain to
only the Assembler or RPG.
The ~atures §!mPQ~!:~~ section provides a complete listing
of the' features supported by the BPS Basic Tape System.
The IBl'i-suppl,ied programs assume the availability of
a problem program area of at least 4096 bytes.
Not~:
Engineering Change Levels 811839 and 811842
must
be
installed on all models of the 2520 for proper functioning
of the device ,support routines.
For ge,neration of a system Tape, the
is:·
A co~nunication region
Interrupt handling routines
A Channel Scheduler
Device error recovery routines
Operator communication routines
Program retrieval (FETCH) routine
End-of-job routine
minimum
configuration
8Kbytes of main storage.
The
supervisor
will
handle
physical
input/output
operations,
interrUpt activity, operator communication,
and inter job functions.
Therefore, the programmer is
concerned only with the logic and instructions actually
necessary to solve his problem.
Proqram~~~~:
This program loads problem programs into
storage for execution.
Upon completion o.f the loading
routine, control is passed to a specified entry point in
the problem program. Subsequent problem programs may be
loaded by use of the Program Loader instead of the IPL
procedure.
Job control: The Job Control program is executed prior to
the loading and execution of a problem program, but it is
not always required. The following conditions make this
program necessary:
Two tape units (2400 series), one must be 9-track.
If a
7~track tape
unit is used, it must have the Data
Conversion Feature.
(See Features Supported:
2400Series Magnetic 'l'Cl:pe units.)
.' One card re,ader (1442, 250J., 2520, or 2540).
• One I/O channel (either multiplexer or selector).
s¥ste!!!-Q£~~~~iQg
Minimum features required for both the Assembler and RPG are
listed under Basic.
Additional required features that
pertain specifically' to the Assembler or RPG are then
listed.
Basi£
8K bytes of main storage (the Supervisor must not exceed
4K).
• 'I'hree 2400-Series Magnetic Tape units, one of which
Not to be reproduced without; written permission
~
.p
IBM System/360 Basic Programming support
360P.5
Feb 72
be 9-track for systems residence. If 7-track tape units
are used, the Data Conversion Feature is required. (See
Features Supported: 2400 Series Magnetic Tape Units.)
• SK bytes of main storage.
Standard Instruction Set.
• Decimal Arithmetic Feature
Either one multiplexer or one selector channel.
• I/O Units as required by the object program. Up to
I/O Devices may be used (see Features Supported:
Devices Supported by the Assembler and/or RPG).
input file is required.
Ass~!!!ble!:
To perform an assembly, the Assembler program requires
system/360 with the following additional features:
a
If the Supervisor requires less than 4K bytes of main
storage. the Assembler may use additional main storage
to allocate area for inputloutput buffers and Assembler
tables whenever they are needed.
At least one additional tape unit is required for any or
all of the following conditions:
• If the source program is to be read from tape.
If the text output
written on tape.
from
the
Assembler
is
to
be
• If the program listing is to be written on tape.
• A second additional tape unit is required if both the
text output and program listing are to oe written on
tape.
One 1442. 2520. or 2540 Card Read-Punch. or one 2501
Card Reader, is required under either of the following
'conditions:
• If the source program is to be read
the Assembler.
• If the job-control information is to
cards by the Supervisor program.
from
be
cards
read
oy
from
This device may be the same 1/0 unit used for punching
the output deck.
One 1442, 2520, or 2540 Card Read-Punch or one 2520 Card
Punch is required if .the object program is to be punc:h ed
into cards by the Assembler. This device may be. the
same 1/0 unit used for reading the source deck.
One 1403. 1404 (continuous forms only>, or 1443 printer
is required if the program listing is to be printed out.
When a 1052 Printer-Keyboard is available, it may
used for the output of special diagnostic messages.
be
~
To compile an RPG object program, the following additional
features are required:
One 1442, 2520, or 2540 Card Read-Punch.
One 1403. 1404 (continuous forms only>, or 1443 Printer.
Decimal Arithmetic Feature.
object
program,
the
ten
I/O
One
Note:
Although the RPG compiler will operate in SR,
most user object programs will require 16K.
PEATURES
SUPPO~TED
• Interval timer.
• Simultaneous Read-While-Write.
• Any channel configuration up to one
and two selector channels (1 and 2).
Additional main storaCJe, with
multiplexer
channel
th~ followinCJ.r~strictions:
• All control programs (Supervisor, Job Control, and
Program Loader), the Linkage Editor, the OPEN/CLOSE
routines, maintenance and service programs for the
System Tape, and the restart routine used followinCJ a
checkpoint cannot be located beyond 32K.
• When the user's program is executed, the portion of the
problem program that communicates with IOCS and the
Supervisor must be located in the first 64K of main
storage.
This includes channel command words (CCW's),
command conttol blocks (CCB's), file definitions (DTF's)
and the entry to certain problem proCJram routines, i.e'.,
1052 operator communication routine, program
check
routine, and interval timer routine. User imperative
macros, e.g., GET, PUT, may be origined beyond 64K, if
desired.
• For RPG, a maximum of 64K bytes of main storage.
• Dual Density Feature, .3471 and '3472.
• I/u devices supported by Assembler and/or
program.
RPG
object
>
1442 Car~ Read Punch.
2501 Card Reader.
2520 Card Read-Punch.
2520 Card Punch.
2540 Card Read Punch (also with Punch Feed Read
],'eature) •
1403 Printer.
1404 Printer (for continuous forms only).
1443 Printer.
1445 Printer.
2400-Series Magnetic Tape Units. If variablelength records are written on 7-track tape,
the Data Conversion special feature is required.
if the 8UO/1600 bpi Dual Density feature is to
used, the tape unit must be one of these:
be
2401 or 2402 l-lagnetic Tape Unit Model 4, 5, or 6
and 2803 or 2804 Tape Control, Hodel 2.
2403 "lagnetic 'l'ape Unit and Control, Model 4, 5, or
Execution of User's Program compiled oy the Assembler
To execute an assembler
configuration is:
• Standard Instruction Set.
minimum
6.
.
2415 l'lagnetic 'l'ape Unit and Control :todel 4, 5, or 6.
1/0 devices supported by Assembler object programs only.
• 8K bytes of main storage.
One 1/0 channel (either multiplexer or selector).
• One card reader (1442, 2501, 2520, or 2540) if the
object program is to be loaded from cards, or 1 2400
Series Magnetic Tape Unit if the program is to be loaded
from tape.
1052 Printer-Keyboard (Only one 1052 is supported.
It is attached to the multiplexer channel. When
this device is on the system, it is used for operator con~unication.)
2671 Paper Tape Reader.
1285 Optical Reader (up to eight 1285's are
supported).
1287 Optical Reader (maximum of 8).*
• Any 1/0 devices required by the problem program.
• If in STR (Synchronous Transmitter Receiver) mode, one
2101 Data Adapter Unit with a Synchronous Data Adapter,
Type I is required.
Note: If in STR mode, 16K bytes of storage are required
for
most
applic~t~ons:
however.
utility
type
applications
requ~r~ng
m~n~mum
processing and code
conversion are supported in an 8K environment.
Binary Synchronous Communication using a 2701 SDA - Type
II adapter or 5/360 Model 25 with an Intergrated communication At~achment·requires a 16K btyes of storage.
Execution of User's Preqram Compiled by RPG
To execute an RPG object program, the following is required:
STR (Synchronous Transmitter Receiver) devices
connected. by leased or dial lines through
Synchronous uata Adapter -- Type I, on 2701
Data Adapter Uni t. The following Devices are.
supported:
1978 Read, Print, punch Terminal
1974 II Data 'l'ransmiss,ion Terminal
1009 Data Transmission Unit
10+3 Card TransmissioI\ 'l'enninal
7701, 77.02 Nagnetic Tape Transmission
, Terminal
7711 Data Communication Unit
System/360 Hodel 20 with a Communications
Adapter. Feature 12073
System/360 Model 30, 40, 50, 65, or 75 with
a 2701 Data Adapter unit equipped with the
Synchronous Data Adapter Type 1 (SDA-l).
NoUo be reproduced without written permiSSion
P 3bOP.b
IBM System/3iO Basic Programming Support
FORTRAN
Note: The STR devices must be at
following engineering change levels:
Unit
N~er
2040
7702
7711
1978
1009
1974
2701
2020
or
above
the
Engineering Change Level
360P-Fo-031
The BPS/360 FORTRAN IV System operates independently of any
other programming system. The FORTRAN system provides an
extensive range of capabilities including:
A FORTRAN
problem.
255490
706973 ERC R0641
254441
892559
123005
120593
707484
11924
language
for
efficiently exp.essing a user's
The facility for compiling and executing programs.
The provision for system maintenance to simplify the
tailoring
of
the system to individual installation
requirements.
Binary Synchronous Communication supportsa System/360 Model
25, 30, 40, 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode) or 75 with a 2701 SDA. ~
Type II adapter.
Model 25 is also supported via
thl>!
Integratl>!d Communication Attachment.
*Programming
IV~,
Feb 72
specifications for using this device may
~:s~se~o:orcE!~I!nin~~~~:~~n~n~~; itS~~~~ th!~!~~
Tape System includes the appropriate proqramming.
~
MNOTE stating IMPROPER DEVICE will appear if coding
for the device is included in a source program.
Report Program Generator (8K Tape), 360P-RG-20l
The BPS/360 Report Program Generator (SK Tape) is a problemoriented, programming language which provides an efficient,
easy-to-use technique for generating object programs. The
object programs will be used primarily to produce 'reports,
but the reports may range from a simple card-to-printer
listing to a complete report that incorporhtes numerous
calculations and editing.
Some of the capabilities of the language are:
The object program Can obtain data records from as many as
three card-input files or three tape-input files, or a
combination of both •••
The object program can match records in as many
files to govern processing of the report •••
as
three
Input records may be checked for sequence •••
A variety of system
library
facilities,
mathematical and service (utility) subprograms.
including
A simplified set of operating instructions and diagnostic
messages that minimize operator
intervention
during
program processing and machine operation.
The BPS/360 FORTRAN IV language, which closely resembles
the language of mathematics, is especially useful in
Writing engineering applications that involve mathematical
COmpQtations.
Source programs written in the FORTRAN language consist of a
set of statements from which the compiler generates machine
instructions, constants, and storage areas.
The programs
are coded in either BCOIC or EBCDIC character code. Mixing
ot the two, however, is not allowed.
The FORTRAN compiler analyzes the source program statements
and transforms them into an object program that is suitable
for execution on the System/360.
In addition, when the
FORTRAN compiler detects errors in the source program,
appropriate error messages are produced.
At the user's
option a complete listing of the source program is produced.
To
simplify the compilation and execution of FORTRAN
programs, the FORTRAN system provides the user with a
flexible yet concise control language. This language is
expressed by means of control statements that enable the
programmer to specify run type (e.g., one or more source
programs), the processing to be performed (e.g., compile and
executE!>, al'!d the output desired (e.g., source program
listing).
If certain control information is not specified
by the user, the FORTRAN system will operate with a set of
assumed specifications.
The object program can search tables, and it can use data
found in the tables to produce the report •••
The subprogram facilities of the FORTRAN ::;ystem can be
expanded to
include
uSer-written
assembler
language
subprograms, which can be used with FORTRAN programs.
Calculations may be performed on
re~ords or RPG literals •••
Program Size Considerations
data
taken
from
input
The program can branch to a subroutine that has been
written in
a
language
other
than
RP~,
perform
calculations, and return to the RPG program •••
The report can be produced on as many as ten output
devices. A maximum of three printer files is allowed.
Five coding forms (The RPG specification sheets) are used to
describe the program.
The permissible entries of the
specification sheets are strictly defined, and the headings
on the specification sheets suggest the function to be
performed.
After
the
specifications
have
been written on the
appropriate forms, cards are keypunched with the data from
the forms.
Each line of the form is a card in the source
deck.
rhe source deck, along with control cards, is supplied to an
input device and is processed by the RPG program (360P-RG201), which is a separately orderable component of the
BPS/360 Basic Tape System (360P-AS-091).*
At the end of
this processing run, an object program capable of preparing
the report specified by the programmer has been produced.
At this point, the user may choose to generate an object
program deck, execute the object program, or both. The
object program can ,be retained for later runs without
recompilation.
* The BPS/360 Basic Tape System contains programs that
compile and/or assemble user programs (also called problem
programs) written in Report Program Generator language or
Assembler language. The object programs which result are
used 'with the Supervisor, Program Loader, and Job Control
programs.
The design of these programs is such that the
programmer need only be directly concerned with solving
his problems.
System Reguiremen!s: The system requirements for RPG are
indicated in the System configuration section for the Basic
Tape System.
~ -R~Q9~~m
Size:
The maximum source p:ogram size
depends upon:
(1) the size of main storage ava~lable, (2)
the number of statement numbers and symbols, such as
subprogram, variable, and array names used in the source
programs; and (3) the size of the dictionary reserved by
the compiler.
Object E£Qg~am Si~: The amount of storage reserved for a
compiled source program (i.e., the object program) depends
upon:
(1) the amount of main storage available; (2) the
size of the FORTRAN system Director; (3) the size of the
IBCOM routine; and (4) the size of each different out-ofline library subprogram referred to by the object program.
Compilation_§E~ed
Considerations
During a compilation, information about the ~cogram is
passed between various phases of the compiler to produce
an object program. This information may be transmitted to
each phase by ::;toring it either in a reserved portion of
main storage (called a buffer area) or on an input/output
device (e.g_, tape).
Because this information can be
accessed faster within main storage than from input/output
devices, maximum compilation speed will be attained when
few or no input/output operations occur.
The number of input/output operations can be appreciably
reduced by decreasing the size of the source program
and/or increasing the 'main
storage
size,
thereby
increasing the buffer area. When the main storage size is
equal to 16K bytes, the buffer size reserved is 100 bytes.
In addition ,to the buffer size consideration, compilation
time may be reduced by limiting the number of output
options (e.g., DECK, LIST, MAP) in a job.
Minimym System-B~ggi~m@D~: ~ System/360 with a Scientific
Instruction Set and 16K or more bytes of main storage and
the following minimum I/O units: one or any combination of
the following devices that provides for card reading and
punc~ing -- 1442 Card Read Punch,
2501 Card Reader, 2520
Card Read punch, 2520 Card punch, 2540 Card Read Punch •••
Not to be reproduced without written permission
IB,.,
1403 or 1443 Printer ••• three 2400 Series Magnetic Tape
Units, either 9-track or 7-track with the Data Conversion
and 7-track Compatibility features
an optional 2400
Series Magnetic Unit for compile-and-go ••• an optional 1052
Printer Keyboard (cannot be used as an input device).
System Configuration:
Compiler
work
2501
2520
2540
1442
1403
1443
1052
2400
Note:
SYSil!
Pun£!:!
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_fi~
Go
File
X
X
Program~[!Eti2n:
The sort/merge is
divided
into
four
phases:
Assignment Phase (Phase 0)
Internal Sort Phase (phase 1)
External Sort Phase (Phase 2)
Merge Only Phase (Phase 3)
X
X
sequen'ce-checks the records during the final pass.
Provides standard System/360 IOCS error procedures.
X
X
available for outputting the unreadable block using either
the sort IOCS print routine or a user-written routine for
any I/O device.
Processes standard System/360 volume and file labels.
X
X
X
X
X
X
x
Feb 72
Sorts or merges on each control f~eld independently,
permitting
the user to specify either ascending or
descending sequence for each individual field.
Object
ProgralT'
Workfik.2
X
X
P 360P.7
IBM System/360 Basic Progranuning Support
Progranuning
The Dual Density Feature is supported.
Sort/Merge (8R Tape), 360P-SM-043 (1 Channel) and 360P-SM-044 11
Channel)
The BPS/360 Sort/Merge (8K Tape) programs are generalized
sort/merge proqrams designed to operate on the System/360.,
With these programs the user can sort records into one
sequential file, or merge multiple presorted files into one
continuous sequential file. Control-data information can be
contained in as many as twelve fields in each record.
Each sort/merge program is in the form of an assembled
object deck when it is received by the user.
In addition,
the facility to create a program tape (9-track, or 7-track
if the Data Conversion feature is present) is provided.
Control statements tailor the generaliz~u sort/merge program
to the user's specific application. The control statements
are punched into cards and inserted into the program deck
before it is loaded, if the program will be loaded from
cards.
Or, the control statement cards are inserted into
the card reader if the program will oe loaded from magnetic
tape.
The programs assume that input records for a sort operat~on
are in random sequence; however, if any inherent sequenc1ng
exists within the input file, the programs will take
advantage of it. Records can be sorted or merged into
ascending or 'descending sequence, and an individual seq?ence
can be specified by the user for each control data f1eld.
The output sequence for a merge~only operation must be the
same as the input sequence.
The 2-channel sort/merge program functions in a Read-WriteCompute environment. This overlapped processing improves
the
performance
of
the
2-channel program over the
performance of the l-channel program.
Also when the 2channel program is executed on a system with one selector
channel and 16,384 or more positions of main storage, the
resulting performance will generally surpass the performance
of the l-channel program when each is executed on the same
system configuration.
If sorting is to be done. phases 0, 1, and 2 are executed.
If only merging is to be done, the assignment phase and the
merge-only phase are executed.
Assignment2!:!!!~f~!LQ!'
The assignment phase reads the control statement cards and
analyzes the information. Constants to be used during the
actual sort or merge operation are stored for later use.
Any errors detected are printed out for the operator and
the system enters the wait state.
If no errors are
detected, execution of the sorting or merging process
begins immediately without operator intervention.
If
label checking is specified, the assignment phase checks
the labels on all the phase 1 output tapes and partially
checks the first phase 1 input tape. Exits from the
program are provided to allow for user modifications and
for processing user-prepared subroutines.
Internal Sort Phase (Phase 1)
Phase 1 performs the initial sequencing of the input file.
The records are read into the main-storage input area and
sorted into sequences that are at least G (the number of
records that can be sorted internally at one time) in
length. The program will take advantage of any inherent
sequencing
in the input file.
These sequences, are
distributed on the phase 1 output tapes according to an
output scheme that minimizes the time required to complete
the sort.
Phase 1 allows multivolume input files. ~xits from the
program are provided to allow for user modifications and
for processing user-prepared subroutines.
The 2-channel program utilizes two output areas. While
blocks of records are being written on tape from one
output area, the alternate area is being filled. One
channel is used for reading records into storage, and the
other channel is used for writing records out on tape.
External Sort Phase (Phase 2)
Program Features
mnemonic
control-card
information
that
Translates
describes the file parameters for each input and output
file.
sorts single or multiple input files under control of
VOLUME entry in the INPFIL statement.
the
Merges a minimum of one to a maximum of five input files.
Allows multivolume input and/or output.
Provides for specification of an alternate input drive
(sort only) and an alternate output drive (sort or merge).
Provides for specification of an alternate work drive
allowing the maximum input file size to be 'approximately
doubled.
Provides for input from and output to
track magnetie tapes.
7-track
and/or
9-
Provides checkpoint, interrupt, and restart procedures
during the merge phase (phase 2) of a sort operation.
Provides exits to user-written routines.
Prints out -- the control card information (optional),
record
counts at the end of phase 1 and phase 2
(optional>. and necessary diag~ostics.
Upon detection of a permanently unreadable block during
Pha~e
1, provides an option to either bypass the block or
terminate the sort.
In either case. a user exit is
The external sort phase merges the sequenced strings
created by the internal sort phase. The merging technique
is a generalized, read-backward polyphase for three to six
tapes.
This technique minimizes the amount of time
required
to
complete the merging process ,with the
specified system configuration. The final output drive
can be specified before the sort is begun.
Exits from the program are provid~d to allow for user
modifications
and
for
process1ng
user-prepared
subroutines.
An interrupt-restart procedure is provided
for the user's convenience.
The 2-channel program utilizes an extra input area, in
addition to the prescribed single input area for each
drive. This technique keeps a new block of records
available in storage whenever necessary. Two output areas
are utilized so that processing can continue while blocks
of records are being written on the output tape.
Merge - Only Phase (Phase 3)
The merge-only phase can be used to merge existing
presorted files into one sequential file. A maximum of
five input files can be merged. The program allows for
multiple volume input and multiple-volume output. The
program also allows for a single fileto,be reblocked and
sequence checked. Exits from the program are provided to
allow for user modifications and for processing userprepared SUbroutines.
Minimum
SM-043)
~~~m
-~
Reguirements: For 1 channel program C360P8,192 bytes of main storage ••• one multiplexer
Not to b8 reproduced without written 'permlealon
P 360P.8
Feb 72
IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support
IB:t4progral1Ulling
or one selector Channel ••• three 2400 series ~a9netic Tape
Units (7- and/or 9-track) ••• one 1403, 1404, 1443 Printer
or one 1052 Printer Keyboard ••• one 1442, 2501, 2520 or
2540 Card Reader ••• Standard Instruction Set.
pregrams being tested gets into an unending loop or destroys
some vital portion of a controlling program, Autotest
provides special operating instructions to continue the run.
For 2 channel program (360P-SM-044) -- 8,192 bytes of main
storage
either one or two selector channels
three
2400 series Magnetic Tape Units (7- and/or 9-track) ••• one
1403, 1404, 1443 Printer or one 1052 Printer Keyboard .••
one 1442, 2501,
2520 or 2540 card Reader
Standard
Instruction Set.
The user communicates with the Autotest program through
control cards.
These control cards provide two
main
advantages.
One, they facilitate remote testing; using
them, a progral1Uller can preplan his test to run with a
minimum of operator intervention.
Two, by removing the
control cardS, the user can convert his program to its nonAutotest state easily without a reassembly.
If the system has two selector channels and the 2-channel
program will be executed, one of four minimum combinations
must be observed:
Autotest allows a user to batch as many individual test jobs
as he wants and to get extensive diagnostics and testing
services in each with just one load procedure •
• One 2404 Magnetic Tape unit ~nd Control, or one 2804
Tape Control.
(This combination produces a-read-writecompute environment.)
• One 2816 Switching Unit with two 2403
Controls.
(This combination produces
compute environment.)
Two 2403
or
produces
only.)
a
2803
Tape
Controls.
read-compute
or 2803 Tape
a read-write-
(This
Monitors the execution of the object program.
Performs a storage printout if the
abnormal end-of-job.
and write-compute environment
program
comes
to
an
Autotest provides the following option~_ features that a
programmer may select for his test job:
~g~QI2~£h:
If the system has one selector channel and the 2-channel
program will be executed, one of the following minimums must
be observed.
One 2415 Magnetic Tape Unit.
(This combination produces
a read-compute and write-compute environment only.)
or 2803 Tape Controls.
(This combina.tion
a read-compute and write-compute environment
One 2403 or 2803 Tape
produces a read-compute
only.)
Control.
(This combination
and write-compute environment
Both programs take advantage of the following:
and/or
up to two for input drives
up to six for work drives
up to two for output drives
one for program residence
one for alternate work drive
a
~ork
under
£~~~ _Lis~:
Any portion or all of the input/output cards
used in an Autotest run can be listed.
This facilitates
separating the jobs.
Card to Tal2e~!i!i!Y: One or more test-data tape files
can be generated just before the execution of each
program. The records can be fixed- or variable-length,
blocked or unblocked.
Header and trailer labels can be
created.
Nor~End-Qf=~Q~~~:
The programmer can specify the
k.ind of dump desired:
(a) hexadecimal,
(b) hexadecimal
and
alphameric,
(c)
hexadecimal
and
mnemonic
representation of operation codes,
(d)
hexadecimal,
alphameriC', and mnemonic representation, or (e) no dump.
TY2es of Abnorma'l _f!n~of-Job DU!!)E:
The programmer can
choose either dump a, b, c, or d as described under Normal
End-of-Job Dump.
7 or
9
Note:
With 7-track work tapes, records created with the
Data Conversion feature cannot be sorted; that is, only
character data can be sorted using 7-track work tapes.
The possible combinations of 7-track or 9-track tapes for a
merge-only operation are:
!n12~
or 9
must
Qn: The programmer may also control the conditions
which a Panel or Display occurs in a loop.
The user may print any tape he
uses in his program immediately before or after execution •
• Dual Density Feature for 2400 series Magnetic Tape.
The
7-track
tapes
characteristics.
Panel: The permanent storage assignments
(bytes 24-127)
and the general registers (0-15) can be dumped whenever a
designated address (the test-point address) is reached
during execution. The floating-point registers (0-6) can
also be dumped if requested.
~~Erin~_~!ili!Y:
The possible combinations of 7-track or 9-track tapes for
sort operation are:
7 and/or 9
Dis2!SY: Any portion or all of main storage can be dumped
whenever a designated address
(test-point address) is
reached during execution of the object program.
All Autotest output can be stored
on an available scratch tape to be printed off-line by the
BPS/360 Tape to Printer Utility Program.
Up to twelve 2400-Series Magnetic Tape Units (79-track):
7 and or 9
9
Instructions can be exchanged, added, or
deleted
without
reassembling
or
computing linkage
addresses. Constants can be exchanged or added using
Autopatch.
A~Q~~Q~2g!~~2~:
A maximum of 65,534 bytes of main storage.
7
9
Clears main storage before the object program is loaded.
combination
Two 2415 Magnetic Tape units attached one to ea.ch of two
selector channels.
(This combination produces a readcompute and write-compute environment only.) The POOLED
entry cannot be specified with this configuration.
Two 2403
produces
only.)
For each program tested, Autotest:
all
have
the
same
AUTOTEST (Tape)L-160P=E!=Q!2
The BPS/360 Autotest (Tape) program is the debugging aid for
object programs that have been assembled using the BPS/360
Basic Tape System (8K Tape).
Programs that have been
assembled by the Basic Operating System can also be tested
if they can run with the Supervisor that is a core resident
control program used in the Basic Tape System (8K Tape).
Autotest provides ~ynamic testing services by monitoring the
execution of the user's object program.
If one of the
The testing process can be carried out in any manner the
user desires. On the first run, a programmer might use the
utilities to build the necessary test files for his program.
He might take some displays of different areas in main
storage while his program is being executed. He might·also
call for a dump in all possible formats at both normal and
abnormal end-of-job.
If his program runs, he can examine
his main storage dump to make sure all the details were
executed the way he wanted them to be done. If the program
doesn't run to normal end-of-job, he can examine his dump
and output for clues to his errors.
On his next run, the programmer might want to take more
displays and panels to investigate the specific problems
uncovered by the first run.
Once he determines what the trouble is, the user can use
Autopatch to experiment with solutions until a workable
solution is found
(Autopatch makes it unnecessary to
reassemble each time patches are made to the program).
Or,
he could reassemble his corrections into his program and
test later.
Autotest can be used either at a user's installation or at a
remote testing center . without .. altering
the
testing
procedures.
Minimum System Requirements:
Not to be reproduced without written permission,
16,384
bytes of main storage
P 360P.9
IBM System/360 Basic Progranuning Support
••• One 1442. 2520 or 2540 Card Read Punch - or one 2501
Card Reader ••• One 1-track or 9-track 2400 Series Magnetic
Tape Unit for system residence (1-track requires the data
conversion feature
Standard Instruction Set
One
1403. 1404 (continuous forms only) or 1443 Printer or one
2400 Series Magnetic Tape Unit.
The Autotest program supports these optional features:
32.168 or 65,536 positions of Main Storage ••• 1052 PrinterXeyboard ••• Dual Density Feature for 2400 Series Magnetic
Tape Units.
£~Q
AND TAPE UTILITY PROGRAMS
The BPS/360 Card and Tape Utility Programs are generalized
object programs designed to assist the user in the day-to-d~y
operation of his installation.
With these programs. certa1n
frequently required operations. such as transferring files
between cards and tape. can be performed without programming
effort on the part of the user.
Each program handles a particular type of job. To handle a
specific job. the generalized program is modified by control
information entered by cards or the printer keyboard. The
control information statements are free-form. in that optional
parameters can be punched in any order~ Th7 program~ a~sume a
normal use for most options when a ch01ce 1S not 1nd1cated.
consistency of control information is maintained by providing
for all control information to be specified in a similar manner
for all programs.
The programs are grouped into two categories: single~!~~fer
and ~£i~~~. The single-t:ansfer. programs tr~nsfer a
single file from an input med1um to an output med1um. The
special-purpose programs are used either to prepare a system for
use. to provide multiple functions. or to be used as part of the
diagnostic or physical error procedures.
single Transfer
Card
Card
Tape
Tape
Tape
to
to
to
to
to
A file can be transferred between unlike storage mediums (card
to tape) or like mediums (tape to tape).
A file can be
transferre~ from an input medium to an output medium with
these
options:
~.
This type of transfer in~icates that the file is.to
be transferred from &n input med1um to an output med1um
without change to the format of the records or the file.
Deblock.
Format one logical record per physical record in
~iable-length format.
Reblock. The input file is transferred from an input medium
to an output medium with only the block size being changed.
Field Select. Prior to performing output. fields within
record are rearranged. dro~ped. or converted to
zoned or packed decimal through the choice of this option.
~ input
Deblock and Field Select. Deblock and field select
fixed portion of a varIable-length record.
in
the
Reblo£k and __ ~i~!g __ §~~£!.
This is a combination of the
reblock and field-select options. 'l'he format of the record
is rearranged by moving. dropping. or converting fields
within a record along with changing the block size.
Allows the user to show the output
in
one
of three ways:
Qll!i!Y'
This option allows the user to display a bytefor-byte representation of the information.
List. This option gives an
information.
edit~d
representation
of
the
List and l"ield Select.
This is a combination of the list
and field=select options.
For the CARD TO PRINTER AND/OR PUNCH programs
combinations are:
These programs take advantage of up to 65,536 positions of main
storage. The maximum amount of storage available as I/O area is
the area beginning at the end of the program being run, and
extending to the end .of the available storage.
The available
storage
area is reduced by Tape Label Processing. Field
Selection. and Reblocking ," Deblocking. or Listing.
If the utility program can assign two input or output areas,
overlap of the I/O operation can be performed whenever channel
assignment permits. The utility program determines the method
of I/O area assignment based on the maximum block size, the
available I/O area, and the type of job being processed.
~~~f~i~~~n~~Q~_f~u£hL-12QE-UT-02Q
.card ~~~~ -- The card-to-printer
printed output in two formats:
function
produces
~!2Y transfers the contents of a card file to a
printer with each record being placed on one print line.
The field-select option cannot be performed with display.
In this format the first 20 positions of the print line
are reserved for information describing the file.
List - input records are transferred to the printer with
record being fully printed •. The field. select option
may be used.
In this format the entire print line is
available to the user.
each
Sequence checking can be performed on card input.
Card ~o Pun£h -- The card-to-punch function accepts input
records punched ~i.t.her EBCDIC or binary. Output records
may also be in eIther EBCDIC or binary. The records may be
copied or fiAld-selecTed.
Ta2~_12Q£~!~Q2!
Transfers the contents of a card file from cards to tape.
These utility programs are provided for the transfer of data
files from any of the normal input devices to any of the normal
output devices.
Pri~er Outpu~.
Fixed-length, variable-length. and undefined-length records may
be handled; however. only fixed-length records can be reblocke1
or field-selected.
Card to
Printer and/or Punch. 360P-UT-050
Tape, 360P-UT-05l
Card, 360P-UT-053
Printer. 360P-UT-052
Tape. 360P-UT-054
Feb 72
the
possible
The cards may be punched in either EBCDIC or binary. The
input records must be fixed-length unblocked. and each
logical record must fit on one card. The maximum size
record is 80 bytes for EBCDIC and 160 bytes for binary.
These files may be copied, reblocked, field-selected, or
reblocked and field selected. An option is availaole for
specifying the number of logical records to be bypassed
before processing starts.
Tape to Printer. 360P-UT-052
Displays a tape file in two forma·ts: data display and data
list. Data display provides abyte-for-byte representation
of the data file.. This format can handle fixed. variable,
and undefined records. Data list provides a single edited
representation of the file. Input records for this format
must be fixed or variable length. and the field-select
option may be used. An option is available for specifying
the number of logical records to be bypassed before print ina
starts.
Tape to
Card~
360P-UT-053
Transters the contents of a tape file to h card file. The
output file may be in either EBCDIC or binary. Each logical
output record must fit into one card (80 bytes for EBCDIC or
160 bytes for binary). Unless only a portion of the input
record is transferred through the field-select or reblockand-field-select option. the input record size will be
restricted to 80 or 160. Input records to the program must
be fixed length.
These files may be copied. reblocked. field-selectee. or
reblocked and field-selected. Blocked input records must be
reblocked. An option is available for specifyino the number
of logical records to be bypassed before punching starts.
Tape to Tape. 360P-UT-054
Transfers a file from one or more tape reels to one or more
other reels. The files may be cooied. reb locked , fieldselected, or reb locked and field-selected. If the reb.1nck
or field-select ootions are used. the inout records.~ust be
fixed or variable length.
An
option is availacle for
specifying the number of logical records to be bvpassed
before the copy function is initiated.
Both Print and Punch.
This is a comoination of copy and
list-fOr the card=to-printer punch program.
Both Print and Punch with Field select.
'i'his is a
combination copy and list with field select in the cardto-printer punch program.
Not to be reproduced without written permission
IBl4
Programming
P 360P.IO
Feb 72
IBM System/360 Basic programming Support
Special
facilitate identification of fields.
The line to be
printed following register printout contains the channel
status word (CSl'l) and channel adore~s word (C,]ItoT) c;eparated
into their various sections.,
Purpos~
Initialize Tape, 360P-UT-057
In order to perform standard label checking on tapes,
standard Volume labels must be present. This program places
the Volume labels on the tapes. The Initialize Tape program
prepares up to eight Volume labels, one dummy header label
(HDRI followed by binary zeros), and a tape mark on any
number of tapes supplied. No label checking is performed.
The next section of printing depicts in chart form the old
and new proqram status word (PSW) for the five tyces of
interrupt.
Each Drogram status word is broken down into
its component parts.
The line that follows shows bytes 4C - 57, ,,,hich are
up of unused bytes and the timer.
made
The user has two options for creating the Volume labels:
A single control card can be used to provide (fqr
example) the starting Volume serial number, the owner
name- and address code, and the protection code.
This
information will be written on the first tape supplied.
Each succeeding tape will have the same Volume label
written on it with the exception that the serial number
will be incremented by one.
• From one to eight Volume label image cards can be used
as a set to write a unique Volume label(s) on each tape
initialized. This card is the exact image of the 80
character label.
This option should be used when the
volume serial number field contains any alphameric,
values.
Following the Volume label(s), a dummy Header label is
written, followed by a
tape
mark.
This
completes
initialization.
The tapes may then be either rewound or
rewound and unloaded as the user specified.
~'ul tiple
utili tv 360P-UT-055
Allows from one to three utility operations to be performed
simultaneously. Each of the operations transfers a file of
information from an input device to an output device. The
appropriate unit record device and a separate tape drive
must be on-line for each operation being performed.
Card to Tape:
magnetl.c tape.
Transfers binary or EBCDIC data from card to
Tare to Printer:
Transfers data from magnetic tape to
prl.nter.
The data may be listed (one logical record per
line).
The operation will also recognize
the
first
character of a record as a forms control character on
preformatted tapes.
TaP7 to Card~ Transfers data from magnetic tape
Data may be punched in EBCDIC or binary.
to
cards.
Any combination of these utility operations up to a total of
three may be initially selected (e.g., two tape-to-printer
and one card-to-tape operation). Once the operations to be
performed are assigned, they can be started and ended any
time during the running of the program. However, only those
operations original Iv assigned can be performed during the
program execution.
While the primary purpose of this program is to transfer
preformatted records, one field can be selected (field
select) from an input record and ,,,ritten as the output
record.
The Multiple Utility Program makes efficient use of main
storage when assigning I/O areas. Active tape I/O areas are
assigned contiguously, allowing for a maximum available I/O
area. When possible, two tape areas are assigned for each
operation to allow overlap of processing. The unit record
areas assigned are fixed length.
Storage Print, 360P-UT-056
Produces a printout of storage and registers to aid the user
in locating the reason(s) for a program malfunction. The
only item of control information that must be provided is the
address of the printer to be used. The program is divided
into three major sections:
Initial Print:
The initial-print section prints the
contents-or-storage '(320-767)
that is to contain the
program for displaying the rest of storage. The contents
of the area taken by the initial overlay cannot be printed
out, and if desired, must be manually displayed.
Register and Low-Storage Print:
If the Floating Point
feature is present, the flOating point registers are printed in hexadecimal representation. The general regesters
(0-15) are printed in hexadecimal representation on two
lines, 8 registers to a line.
Storage below hexadeciMal addre~s 80 contains permanently
assigned fields that can be used to deterMine the status
of a program. This area is printed .in a special form to
~ain Print:
Remaining storage is printed by this section.
El.gh€ words are printed on each line in hexadecimal. The
storage address of the first byte of each line is printed
to the left of the line.
If an area of storage produces one or more lines that
contain the same word
throughout,
the
lines
are
suppressed.
A message is printed indicating the area of
storage and the repeated word.
The Storage Print program will not destroy more
bytes of main storage.
than
192
Tape Compare, 360P-UT-202
Tape compare compares two files from t,.,o or more tane
reels to ensure that the files are identical. The numb~r
of reels in each file need not be equal.
Reels containinq fi~ed, variable, or undefined record
length!! may be compared. Physical records which 00 not
compare are printed ,.,ith an index of the bytes that do not
match and the carresponding physical record number. A
user routine may be supolied for processing records that
are not identical.
When possible, two input areas are assigned to each tape
to allow overlap of processing with physical I/O if
channel assi~nments permit.
The compare operation may be terminated at any time by
pressing the 1052 request key or console stop key.
A
compare operation for a new file can be initiated by
supplying the correct control card and followinq the
restart procedures.
Minimum S stem Re uirements:
The
minimum
system
requl.rements or t e BPS
0 Card and Tape Utility Programs
are -System/360 Processing Unit with 8,192 Dositions of core
storage
for program loadinq and control cards - 1442
Card Read Punch, or 2501 Card Reader, or 2520 Card Pead
Punch*, or 2540 Card Read Punch ••• for "rOqraM qeneration
Input/Output devices reguired by the scecific program.
~~s) T~~ ~~lt!~~:Ch~~il~~y e~~~~~amth:ll~~~ti~~:xe~a~~
selector channels but the unit record I/O devices must
attached to the multiplexer channel.
be
For loqging and error m~ssaqes -- l403·Prir.ter ••• or 1404
Printer (continuous forms only) ••• or 1443 Printer
or
1052 Printer-Keyboard (recruired for the Multinle Utility
ProqrE\m) •
Supported devices include -- 2501 Card Reader ••• 1442 'Card
Read Punch
2520 Card Read Punch* ••• 2540 Card Read
Punch ••• 2520 Card Punch* ••• 1403 Printe-' .•• 1404 Printer
(continuous forms only) ••• ]443 Printer
2400 series
tape u]1it (with or without the 7-track feature), dual
density feature.
*For proper functioning of the device SUODort routines,
the 2520 (all models) must have Engineering Chancres 811839
[ECA 25] and 811842 [ECA 20] installed.
DJ\SD UTILITY
!'R()r,P}\~5
The B1">S/360 D}I,Sn Utility Programs are generalized
object
programs designed to assist the user in the day-to-day operation
of his installation.
With these programs, certain frequently
required operations, such as transferring disk storage files to
or from cards and/or tape, can be performed without programming
effort on the part of the user.
Each program handles a particular type of job.
To handle a
specific job, the generalized program is modified oy control
information entered!Jy cards or the printer keyboard.
The
control information statements are free-form, in that optional
parameters can be punched in any order. The programs assume a
normal use for most options when a choice is not indicated.
,Consistency of control information is maintained by prOVl.Ql.ng
for all control information to be specified in a similar manner
for all programs.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion
IB,.,
P 360P.ll
IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support
programming
The programs are grouped into two categories:
Single-Transfer
and Special-Purpose.
The single-transfer programs transfer a
single file from an input medium to an output medium.
The
special-purpose progr~s, are used either to prepare a disk or
data cell for use, to provide multiple functions, or to assign
an alternate track.
Feb 72
portion of the input record is transferred through the
filed-select option, the
input-record
size
will
be
restricted to 80 or 160. Input records to this program must
be fixed length.
Files in this program may be copied,
selected, or reb locked and field selected.
reblocked, field.
Single Transfer
Disk to Disk, 360P-UT-067
Card to Disk
360P-UT-063
Disk to Card
360P-UT-064
Disk to Disk
360P-UT-067
Disk to Printer
360P-UT-073
Disk to Tape
360P-UT-065
Tape to Disk
360P-UT-066
Transfers a file between disk units, or between areas of the
same unit. A maximum of, six drives can be assigned by
assigning one as input, one as output, and the remaining as
both input and output. Using the same device for input and
output can cause a reduction in performance.
Files can be copied, reblocked, field selected, or reblocked
and field selected. If the field-select or reb lock options
are to be used, the input records must be fixed length.
These utility programs are provided for the transfer of data
files from any of the normal input devices to any of the normal
output devices.
A file can be transferred between unlike storage mediums (tape
to disk), or like mediums as is the case of disk to disk when
the files may be transferred from one area to another area of
the same unit.
A file can be transferred
medium with these options:
from an input medium to an output
of transfer indicates that the file is to
from an input medium to an output medium
without change to the format of the records or the file.
The input file is transf.erred from an input medium
medium with only the block size being changed.
~utput
Field Select.
Fields within
each
input
record
are
rearranged, dropped, or converted to zoned or packed decimal
through the choice of this option.
Reblock and Field Select.
This is a combination of the
reblock and f1eld-select options. The format of the 'record
is rearranged by moving, dropping, or converting fields with
a record along with changing the block size.
Printer Output.
of three ways:
Allows
~iS~at.
Transfers a file from one or more a~sk units to one or more
tape units.
These files may be copied, reblocked, field
selected, or reb locked and fiel,d selected.
If the fieldselect or reb lock options are to be used, the input records
must be fixed-length. The data portion of the output tape
is preceded by a tape mark.
Tape to Disk, 360P-UT-066
a file frQm one or more tape reels to a maximum of
five uisJ..i units. 'l'nese files may be copied, fi,eld selected,
reulocked, or reb locked and field selected. If the fieldselect or reolock options are to ue used, the input records
must. oe fixed lenyth.
~ransfers
the user to show the output in one
This option allows the user to display
or- y e representation of the information.
List.
This
IiiTc5'rmation.
Displays a disk file in two different formats: data-display
and data-list. Data-display provides a visual picture of
the data where every byte appears in the printed output.
This format can handle fixed, variable, and undefined
records.
Data-list provides a simple edited list of the
file. Input records must be fixed length, and the field
select option can be used. The input file can come from a
maximum of five disk units.
Disk to Tape, 360P-UT-065
~.
This type
oe--trans~eTred
Reblock.
Disk to printer, 360P-UT-073
a
option gives an edited representation of the
List and Field Select. This is a combination of the
and field-select options.
Special Purpose
byte-
list
Fixed-length, variable-length, and undefined-length records may
be handled: however, obly fixed-length records can be reblocked
or field-selected.
These programs take advantage of up to 65,536 positions of main
storage. The maximum amount of storage available as I/O area is
the area beginning at the end of the program being run, and
extending to the end of the available storage. The available
storage area is reduced by Tape Label Processing,
Field
Selection, and Reblocking.
If the utility program can assign two input or output areas,
overlap of the I/O operation can be performed whenever channel
assignment permits.
The utility program determines the method
of VO area assignment based on the maximum block size, the
available I/O area, and the type of job being processed.
Card to Disk, 360P-UT-063
Alternate Track Assignment (2311)
Alternate Track Assignment (2321)
Clear Disk
Initialize Data Cell
Ini tialize Disk
~ultiple Disk tQ Printer
Copy Disk to Tape, and Restore
Tape to Disk
Copy Disk to Card, and Restore
Card to Disk
Copy Disk to Disk
Copy Data Cell to Tape, and Restore
Tape to Data Cell
360P-UT-098
360P-UT-2l2
360P-UT-068
360P-UT-204
360P-UT-069
360P-UT-203
360P-UT-06l
360P-UT-062
360P-UT-072
360P- UT 071
Alternate Track Assiqnment (2311) ,360P-UT-098
Designed to assign an alternate track to a defective track
on a 2311 Disk Pack at any time other than when initializinq
the pack.
When a defective track is encountered, the Volume Table of
Contents is checked to determine the next alternate track to
be assiqned.
If an alternate track is available, the
records contained on the defective track are transferred to
it~
The BPS/360 Card-to-Disk program transfers the contents of a
card file from cards to an area of disk.' The cards may be
punched in EBCDIC or in binary. The input records must be
fixed-length unblocked, and each logical record must fit on
one card. The maximum-size input record is 80 bytes, or 160
for binary.
These files may be simply copied, block by block: or
reorganized by altering the number of records in the block
(reblocking): or reorganized by deleting or re-positioning
the fields within the record (field selecting) as well as
reblocking.
Disk to Card, 360P-UT-064
Transfers the contents of a disk file to a card file.
The
output file may be punched in either EBCDIC or binary. Each
logical-output record must fit on one card (i.e., 80 bytes
for extended BCD or 160 bytes for binary).
Unless only a
Surface analysis is performed on the track in error after
all records have been transferren to the alternate traa~.
If the home address and/or the track descriptor record (RO)
area(s) is defective, all records associated with the track
in error are printed, and the program is terminated.
If
these areas are not defective, but a permanent error exists
elsewhere on the track, the data records remain on the
alternate track, ani' the job is completed. If the error is
only temporary, the data records are transferred back to the
oriqinallv de~ective track.
An indication is given to show where errors occur and the
action that is to be taken. An option is available allowing
all records, or only the invalid records transferred to an
alternate track, to be printed on the printer, or on the
printer-keyboard.
If an error is found in 'the home address
or RO area, this option is ignored' and all
records are
printed.
Engineering
Change
Not to be reproduced 'without written pennlsslon
Considerations:
2841
Control
Unit
IB,.,
Programning
IBMSys~em/360
Basic programming Support
Engineering Change 413140 or higher is a prerequisite for
use of Version 3 or subsequent versions of ,the Alternate
Track Assignment (2311) program.
Note: If the 2841 Control Unit is at Engineering Change
revel
413140,
or higher, Version 3, or subsequent
versions, must be used' (Version 2 will not function
properly if this engineering change is installed.)
If the 2841 Control Unit is at an £ngineerina Change Level
lower then 413140, the~Version 2 must be used (Version 3
and subsequent versions will not function properly unless
Enqineering Change Level 413140 is installed).
functions
Program
The key and data areas defined are filled with a userdefined character. Lable-checking is done to determine if
the area to be cleared contains all or part of an unexpired
file. Expired labels for the area to be cleared are deleted
from the VTOC.
Initialize Data Cell, 360P-UT-204
16K Alternate Track Assignment (2311/2314), 360P-UT-207
Performs all of the
Track
Assignment
improvements:
a maximum of a complete disk pack. As many as five areas
can be designated to be cleared with one run of the program.
When an area of disk is cleared, fixed-length blocks
containing count, key, and data areas are established on the
disk.
The information defining the key and data areas is
indicated in the utility-modifier card, or, if a utilitymodifier card is not entered, assumed values are made.
of the program, Alternate
(360P-UT-098)
with
these
The specified track will be flagged defective
alternate
track
assigned without performing
analysis of the specified track.
and an
surface
_Optionally, surface analysis will be performed
'specified
track (or its assigned alternate)
alternate tr~ck will be assigned only if the
analysis fails.
on the
and an
surface
Prepares from one to five data cells for use on any 2321
Data Cell Drive.
The proqram initializes the data cells
with a method compatible to DOS/360 and OS/360.
The
preparation of each of these cells consists of:
• VTOC Label Checking •••
• Home-Address and Track-Descriptor Record
(RO)
Generation
• Surface Analysis and Initialization Verification
• IPL, Volume-Label, and VTOC Format Creation.
Optionally, remove the defective indication from
specified track and unassign the alternate track.
Optionally, perform surface analysis
track up to a total of 255 times.
of
Perform the selected functions on either an
IBM 2314.
the
the
specified
IB~i
2311 or an
Selection
of
the added options is indicated through
additional parameters in the utility modifier statement.
Minimum System Requirements:
System/360 with 16K Main
Storage ••• Card Reader (1442, 2501, 2520 or 2540) ' •••
Printer (1403, 1404 [Continuous Forms], 1443, 1445 or 1052)
••• Disk Drive (2311 or 2314).
Alternate Track Assiqnment
(2321), 360p-UT-2l2
Designed to assign an alternate track to a defective track
on a'232l Data Cell at any time other than when initializing
the cell.
When a defective track is encountered, the Volume Table of
Contents is checked to determine the next alternate track to
be assiqned.
If an alternate track is not available, the
condition is logged and the job is terminated.
If an
alternate track is available, the records contained on the
defective track are transferred to it.
An indication is given to show where errors occur and the
action taken.
An option is available allowing either all
records, or only the invalid records which are transferred
to an alternate track, to be printed on the assigned logging
device.
If an error is found in the home address or track
descriptor record areas, this option is ignored and all
records are printed as they are transferred.
--Surface analysis is performed on the track in error after
all records have been transferred to an alternate track. If
the home address or track descriptor record areas are not
defective, but a permanent error exists elsewhere on the
track, the defective- track points to the alternate tra,ck,
and the job is completed •. If the error is only temporary,
the data records are transferred from the alternate track
back to the oriqinally defective track.
If the home address or track descriptor record areas are
defective, the home address and track descriptor record are
advanced 800 bytes and are rewritten to allow the track to
be flaqqed defective. If an error occurs while attempting
to advance these areas, the program is terminated. If no
error occurs, the defective track points to the alternate
track and the job is completed.
Control
Unit
Clear Disk, 360P-UT-068
Clears one or more areas of the 2311 Disk Storage, and
establishes a pre-formatted track containing an indicated
base throughout the area cleared. For each track cleared,
records are formatted to the end of the track. The maximum
number of records depends on the size of the records.
The area to be cleared can be as small as one track ,or up to
Two types of control information are required by the
program:
Job control-card information, and utility-control
informa-t:i:on. The job control-card information relates to
the
channel
and unit assignment and physical device
descriptio~.
The utility-control information, which is
prov1ded 1n the utility modifier statement and the label
control-card set, specifies which data cell(s)
is to be
initialized, and provides the labeling information for VTOC
and-volume label creation.
VTOC Label Checking: Before a cell is 1nitialized, a
check 1S performed to see if a VTOC is present.
If the
cell has been previously initialized and the VTOC is
present, any labels in the VTOC are checked to see if the
files on the data cell have expired. If any files have
not expired, a message is printed. If the user still
wishes to initialize the cell after receiving the messaqe,
he can bypass the label condition and continue to process.
If the user does not wish to bypass the condition, that
cell may be deleted from the job.
Home Address Generation: A binary, five-bvte home address
1S wr1tten on every track by the proqram. The five bytes
cylinder (head bar) ntmber, and track
(element) number.
The flaq byte, which is propagated to the flaq byte of
each record on the track, is used to indicate the
condition (defective or not defective) of the track, and
whether or not it has been assigned as an alternate track.
Track Descriptor (RO) Generation:
A track descriptor
record or record zero (RO) 1S wr1tten as the first record
following the home address. It is divided into two parts:
count and data. If an error occurs in the home address or
~o area, the home address and record zero are advanced 800
uytes and are rewritten.
The track is then flagged
defective, and an alternate track is assigned.
If an
error occurs at this time, the program is terminated.
ciurface Analysis and Initialization Verification: Surface
analys1s 1S performed f1rst 1n an alternate track area
consisting of 400 tracks. 'rracks in this area found to be
defective are flagged and cannot be assigned as alternate
tracks.
surface analysis is then performed on all remaining tracks
of the cell. If defective ones are encountered, alternate
ones are established in the alternate track area. If
there are 110 more alternate tracks available, the cell is
deleted from further processing.
Messages are printed on
defective tracks, assigned
locations.
SYSLOG to notify the user of
alternate tracks, and their
An initialization verification routine ensures that the
home address and track descriptor record have been written
on each track, and that surface analysis has
been
performed on every track.
IPL ~ormat Creation: The proqram formats two IPL records.
These are wr1tten on cylinder zero, track zero, records
one and two. Record one is written with a 24-byte data
field of binary zeros. Record two is written ,·lith a 144byte data field of binary zeros.
VTOC~Format Creation:' Pre-formats
the Volume Table of
Contents ,(VTOC), reservinq the first two record locations
in it ~or the Volume Table of Contents- Data Set Control
Block (VTOC - DSCB) label, and the Space-Management label.
Not. to be reproduced without written permiSSion
P 360P.13
Feb 72
IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support
The location on the cell in which the VTOC is to be placed
is indicated in a control card. The standard location is
on cylinder zero immediately
following
the
volume
label(s), and extending to the end of the cylinder. The
VTOC can, however, appear on any cylinder (excluding
alternate
cylinders),
but
cannot
exceed
cylinder
boundaries.
Initialize Disk, 360P-UT-069
Prepares from one to five complete disk packs for use on
IBM ·2311 Disk Drives. The preparation of a pack consists
of:
• VTOC Label Check •••
and
Track
Descriptor
(RO)
Record
• IPL and VTOC Format Creation.
VTOC Label Check: Before a pack is initialized, it is
checked to see if any labels present in the VTOC are
expired. If the file has not expired, a message is
printed.
If the user still wishes to initialize the disk
pack after receivinq the message, he can bypass the label
and continue to process.
If the user does not wish t9
bypass the pack(s) with unexpired labels, the pack or
packs are deleted from the job.
Home Address Generation Five
nome address are written by
representation.
bytes of the seven-byte
this program in binary
If the home-address cannot be written on a track, a
messaqe is printed to identify each home-address that
cannot be written.
If a home-address canno.t be written
for every track of a pack, that pack is deleted from the
job.
Ana~ysts
and
Perform surface analysis of only those
tracks
not
previously flagged as defective.
The tracks already
flagged as defective are left unchanged.
Optionally, perform surface analysis of· all
tracks,
including those tracks previously flagged as defective.
Flag individually specified
perforll\ing surface analysis •
tracks as
defec~ive
without
up
Perform initialization of from one to five 2316 Disk Packs
mounted on the IBM 2314.
The selection of functions to be performed is indicated on a
utility modifier statement inserted in the program deck by
the user.
• Volume-Label Creation •••
Surface
Performs all of the functions of the Initialize Disk Program
(360P-UT-06!H with thes.e improvements:
Optionally, perform the surface analysis of each track
to a total of 255 times.
• Home-Address Generation
• Surface Analysis
Generation •••
16K Initialize Disk (2311/2314), 360P-UT-206
Track
Descriptor ·(110)
Record
~ion: ur ace-.nal~is performed fliit on~
aiternate cylinders (200,201, and 202). When a track on·
an alternate cylinder is found to be defective, the track
is flaqged as defective and cannot be assigned as an
alternate track. Surface analysis is theft performed on
all remaininq tracks.
If a track is detected to have a
defective surface area upon which data cannot be written,
an alternate track is established to record the data. A
message is printed to notify the user of defective tracks.
Processing is terminated after detection of the thirtyfirst
defective
track
(30 alternate tracks) .'l'he
defective tracks are logged to provide a record of the
condition of each pack processed. When analysis has shown
that a track is not defective, the track descriptor record
(RO) is written.
If the track-descriptor record cannot be
a message is printed to identify the
continues analysis and RO generation
defective tracks.
The pack on which
deleted from the job.
writtenon a track,
error. The program
to log any other
the error occurs is
Volume-Label Creation: Through the use of a control card
unIque to th1s program, a Volume label is created in the
standard format (VOLl) for each pack processed. The
Volume label is written on cylinder zero, track zero,
record three of each .disk pack. Seven additional (VOL2VOLe) user Volume labels can be created, if desired, and
will be placed in records four through ten.
IPL Format Creation:
This function formats two IPL
records. These records are written on cylinder zero,
track zero, records one and two. Record one is written
with a 24-byte data field of binary zeros. Record two is
written with a l44-byte data field of binary zeros.
VTOC
Format
Creation:
The initialize disk program
pre formats the Volume Table of Contents (VTOC).
The
location on the disk in which the VTOC is to be placed is
indicated in a control card.
The standard location of the VTOC is on cylinder zero
immediately following the volume label(s), and extending
to the end of the cylinder. However, the ~oc can appear
on any cylinder (excluding alternate cylinders), but
cannot exceed cylinder boundaries. A VTOC placed anywhere
other than in the standard location can be any number of
tracks desired on the cylinder.
Minimum System Requirements: System/360 with 16K
Main
Storage
Cara Reader (1442, 2501, 2520 or 2540) •••
Printer (1403, 1404 [Continuous Forms], 1443, 1445 or 1052)
••• Disk Drive (2311 or 2314)
Multiple Disk To Printer, 360P-UT-203
The BPS/360 Multiple Disk to Printer Program allows from
one to three disk-to-printer functions to be performed
simul taneously.
Each function is capable of printing (in character mode)
fixed length records with or without key fields.
The
_ records may be either blocked or unblocked.ifkey fields
are absent. If they are present, the records must be
unblocked.
One printer and one disk. unit. must be on-line for each
separate function being performed. A new function may be
started at any.time while other functions are in process.
When the job of. any function is complete, a new job may be
initiated for that function.
The Multiple Disk to Printer Proaram makes efficient use
of core storaqe when assiqninq I/O areas. To allow fora
maximum available I/O area, active i/o areas are assigned
contiguously.
When possible, two disk input areas are
assigned for each·function to allow overlap of input with
processing and output.
CoPY Disk to Tape and Restore Tape to Disk, 360P-UT-06l
Copy Disk to Card and Restore Card to Disk, 360P-UT-062
Copy Disk to Disk, 360P-UT-072
These programs provide a 2311 DASD Utility function in
support of BOS/360 and OOS/360. They enable the user to
tran·sfer volumes and files of data from 2311 Disk Storage
to a magnetic tape, cards, or 2311 Disk Storaqe.
If the
data was transferred to card or tape, it can be restored
to the disk pack· at a later date. The transfer processes
all fields necessary to restore the data so that it is
identical to the original volume or file.
Consecutive, Indexed Sequential and Direct Access
of file organization are supported.
Methods
The output created by the Copy programs (except Copy Disk
to Disk) is designed for use by the Restore programs only.
Program Functions: The Copy proqrams can transfer data
from a 2jll by file or by volume. The Copy file option
transfers the file described by the File-Label XTE~TS as
referenced by the volume table of contents in the defined
2.311. An option permits. copying of IPL records.
A special open on-line option allows as many as five XTENTS
'to be opened at the beginning of the run, thus freeing the
open-routine space for use as I/O area during execution of
the Copy function. Otherwise, the user may specify a consecutive open which processes each XTENT as it is encountered. The consecutive open option allows an unlimited
number of XTENTS to be processed in one run.
The Copy volume option permits the user to copy a complete
volume including the IPL records, Volume Label(s), Volume
Table of Contents, and data.
The restore programs will replace data from cards or tapes
to the 2311 by file or by volume depending on the method
(Copy Program .option) used to copy and data originally.
When files are restored, the Format 1 label is modified to
include the serial number of the new pack.
When volumes
Not to be reproduced without written permission
IB:t4
Programming
P 360P.14
Feb 72
IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support
are
restored, the Format 1 labels are restored
oriqina11y copied and the Format 4 label mod.ified.
as
The programs assign I/O areas based on the size of core
storage.
I/O overlap is performed if core storaqe is
equal to or greater than 16K and channel assignment
permits.
The restored records occupy areas of the 2311
identical to the original file.
The Copy Disk to Card and Restore Card to Disk program
allows the program to be restarted at the beqinning of any
'track that was processed, or at the beginning of any pack
(consecutive open only).
program deck.
See Appendix
A
of
System/360
Basic
Programming Support DASD Utility Programs Operating Guide,
C24/3392. for additional information.
Supported devices include -- 2501 Card Reader ••• 1442 Card Read
Punch ••• 2520 Card Read Punch ••• 2540 Card Read Punch ••• 2520
Card Punch ••• 1403 Printer ••• 1404 Printer (continuous forms
only)
1443 Printer
2400 Series Tape Unit, (with or
without the 7-track feature ••• For the Copy and Restore
Programs, the Data Conversion feature must be used with 7-track
tape) ••• 2311 Disk Storage Drive ••• 2321 Data Cell Drive
Dual Density Feature.
PAPER DOCUMENT SUPPORT
i~b~~~;lcell
to
Tape and Restore
Tape
to
Data
Cell,
Incut/Output
The BPS/360 Copy Data Cell to Tape and Restore Tape to
Data Cell program provides a 2311 Data Cell utility
function in support of BOS/360 and OOS/360. It enables
the user to transfer volumes and files of data from a data
cell(s) to tape. The tape can then be restored to the
data cell(s) at a later date. The transfer processes all
fields necessary to restore the data so that it is
identical to the original volume or file.
Consecutive, Index Sequential, and Direct Access M.thods
of file orqanization are supported.
The output created by the Copy program is designed for use
by the Restore program only.
The proqram copies and restores a data cell in one of
ways:
two
COPy and Restore File: With this option one data file may
be copied and restored. The file may consist of more than
one volume.
R~s are copied for the area occupied by the
file, and IPL Records may be optionally copied.
A snecial open on-line option allows as many as five
XTENTS to be opened at the beginning of the run, thus
freeing the open-routine space for use as I/O area during
execution of the Copy function •. Otherwise, the user may
specify a consecutive open which processes each XTENT as
it is encountered. The consecutive open option allows an
unlimited number of XTENTS to be processed in one run.
corr and Restore Volume: With this option one entire data
ce
w111 be cop1ed and restored, including R~, IPL
Records, data records, Volume Label(s), and the VTOC.
The restore program will replace data from tape to the
2311 by file or by volume depending on the method (Copy
Proqram option) used to copy the data originally. When
files are restored, the Format 1 label is modified to
include the serial number of the new pack. When volumes
are restored, the Format 1 labels are restored
as
originally copied and the Format 4 label modified.
The program will assign I/O a~eas based on the size of
main storage. I/O overlap will be performed if the main
storaqe iE equal to or greater than 16K and channel
assignment permits.
The restored records will occupy
areas of the 2321 identical to the original file.
option is available to checkpoint and restart during
proqram execution. An additional tape drive is required
to support this option.
An
Minimum System Reauirements:
The minimum system requirem.1IInts
for the BPS/360
ASD Utility
Programs
are:
System/360
Processing Unit with 8,192 positions of core storage [16K for
the Alternate Track Assignment (2311), Copy and Restore Data
Cell,
Initialize
Data Cell, and Mutliple Disk-to-Printer
Programs] •
For program loading and control cards
1442 Card Read Punch
••• or 2501 Card Reader ••• or 2520 Card Read Punch* ••• or 2540
Card Read Punch.
*For proper functioning of the device support routines, the
2520 (all models) must have Engineering Changes 811839
[ECA
25] and 811842 [ECA 20] installed.
For program operation
specific program.
Input/Output devices required by the
The Multiple Disk to Printer program requires the. disk
unites) to be attached to the selector channel and the
printer(s) to be attached to the multiplexer channel.
For logging and error messages
1403 Printer ••• or 1404
Printer (continuous forms only) ••• or 1443 Printer
or 1052
Printer-Keyboard.* (required for the Multiple Disk to Printer
Program) •
*·If the system does not have the 1052 Printer-Keyboard at
the fixed address X'OOIF ' , a replace card (REP) must be
inserted between the supervisor and job control of the
1412/1419, 360P-IO-058
provides control of up to four user programs concurrently.
These four programs, referred to as a user program set, may
be: a) one 1412 or 1419 program and up to three additional
user programs, or b) two 1419 programs and up to two
additional user programs, or c) one to four user programs
which do not include 1412 or 1419 input. A user set once
loaded must complete processing of all programs within that
set prior to loading a new set of programs.
The program can control the input and output functions
associated with typical MICR processinq, such as demand
deposit ca~re, outgoing transit and proof of deposit.
The Input/Output 1412/1419 program provides ••• control for
all supported devices and their error routines
control
of the document input buffer(s) ••• batch numbering (1419
Model l only) ••• control of System/360 standard tape label
and 2311 disk label processing.
The
user
can
insert
his routines for
stacker
determination ••• formatting output
document
data
proce~sing
recognition of control levels.
.0.
The 1412 or l4l9s should be placed at the highest priority
on the multiplexer channel to minimize contention problems.
The Input/outPut 1412/1419 program includes a multiplexing
capability providing four request queues which will permit
four unbuffered byte mode I/O devices to operate in a. data
interleaved mode on the mUltiplex channel. The 1412 and
l4l9s have their own queues and are interleaved in addition
to the four request queues. If a burst mode operation is
attempted on a multiplex channel, I/O operations which can
be mutliplexed on the remaining queues will be processed
prior to the burst mode operation.
Performance: The Input/Output 1412/1419 program is designed
to make possible maximqm MICR reader to printer thruput.
Thruput speeds will vary with document length, amount of
user processing time, other input and/or output operations
and system configuration.
The minimum time available for stacker selection for each
MICR Reader is: 1412 --- 7.5 milliseconds ••• 1419 --9.5
milliseconds.
At least 9.5 milliseconds are available for
stacker decisions on the 1419 for 100% of the documents
read.
For those cases where the 9.5 milliseconds (7.5
milliseconds for the 1412) of stacker selection time are
exceeded and worst case conditions such as minimum document
spacing occur, an increase in rejects can be expected.
Assume a System/360 Model 30 with a 1.5 microsecond storage
cycle.
The timings in parenthesis are for a System/360
Model 30 with a 2.0 microsecond storage cycle, and a
System/360
Model
40,
respectively.
The Input/Output
1412/1419 program will use:
• For one MICR Reader
1.5 (2.0, 1.2) milliseconds
(minimum)
to process the external interrupt which
signals the end of the document and 2.1 (2.8, 1.4)
milliseconds (maximum) if a unit check has occurred.
• For two MICR Readers ••• 1.6 (2.1, 1.2) milliseconds
(minimum) to process each external interrupt wheneve~
the interrupts are not concurrent and 3.1 (4.1, 2.1)
milliseconds to process tWQ interrupts concurrently •••
4.2 (5.6, 2.8) milliseconds (maximum) if two concurrent
unit
checks
occur
with
two concurrent external
interrupts.
• The I/O control program may take up to an additional .38
(.5, .25) milliseconds
to
process
the
external
interruptions,
if any other interruption is being
serviced.
For other I/O operation ••• approximately 3.8 (5.0, 2.5)
milliseconds for each I/O operation to start the I/O
service the interrupt and recognize errors.
• For document data ••• approximately 1.5 (2.0, 1.0)
milliseconds to -get- a document record from the input
buffer to make it available for user processing.
Not to be reproduced without written permission
IBJt1
Programming
P 360P.15
IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support
The available time for selection processing will be reduced
by the character transfer time associated with concurrent
I/O operations and the time needed to complete instruction
execution prior to interruption. The I/O control program
may take up to an additional .5 milliseconds to process the
external interruption, if any other interruption is being
serviced.
In making timing calculations, only one printer can affect,
and thereby reduce, the MICR Reader document selection time.
Note:
Channel contention problems may be minimized by -priCing the 1412 or l4l9s at the highest priority on the
multiplexer channel... disengaging the 1412 or l4l9s
whenever other I/O operations might conflict.
The average document cycle times (without
printer) for user processing ares
considering
!ill
Document length - 6 inches
Document length - 8 3/4 inches
the
!ill.
60 ms.
87.5 ms.
37.4 ma.
54.5 ma.
To determine the processing time available, it is necessary
to subtract the time required for the f.ollowing factors from
the average document cycle time. This applies for either
one or two MICR Readers.
Feb 72
Input/OUtput 1418/1428, 360P-Io-059
The BPS/360 Input/Output 1418/1428 program is designed to
eliminate the user's need to program logical
details
associated with input • and output of OCR processing. The
basic control program provides a single request queue for
in~ut/output
operations on the multiplexer channel. The
mUltiplex capability provides four request queues which will
permit four unbuffered devices (which do not operate in the
burst mode) to operate in the data interleaved mode. If any
burst mode (tape or disk) operations arc attempted on a
multiplexer channel queue, input/output operations which can
be multiplexed on the remaining queues will be processed
first until all such requests have been serviced.
The multiple program facility provided to handle four
applications consists of several subroutines th~t become an
integral
part of the 1418/1428 control program.
The
mUltiple program facility uses progr~ control words (PCW's)
to transfer control among the user programs. A PCW is 3 240
byte area reserved by the user for each of his pro~rams.
The control program stores the status of the System/360 when
control is being' transferred fro~ one user program to
another. This facility permits the user to operate one
1418/1428 reader on-line with a System/360 with up to three
other non- 1418/1428 programs. Each of the applications is
controlled by a separate user program.
MICR Reader(s) interrupt servicing time.
User's document selection time(s).
The time required to get document record(s).
The time required for each I/O operation (exclusive of
the MICR Reader(s).
5. Character transfer interference times for all I/O
ooerations including the MICR Reader(s).
Approximately 5 milliseconds will be taken for each I/O
operation exclusive of the Reader Sorter.
A user program written for a single 1418/1428 reader program
may be easily adapted for use in a ~ultiple program
application. In order to adapt a user's single 1418/1428
program to a multiple application:
This time includes -- Start I/O, interrupt servicing and
recognition of errors.
The Input/Output 1418/1428 program controls the input and
output functions that are associated with such typical OCR
processing
as
formatting, blocking and conversion to
magnetic tape or disk storage, batch balancing and punching
of out-of-balance data.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Approximately 2 milliseconds will be
document record from the input buffer.
The Input/Output 1412/1419
storage requirements:
taken
program·has the
to
get
each
foll~ling
Madel 30
core
~
One program (one MICR Reader
with 2400 Tape)
4400 bytes 4650 bytes
One program (one MICR Peader
with 2311 Disk)
4400 bytes 4650 bytes
Two
The control program provides maximum programminq flexibility
in the time dependent OCR applications.
The followinq
functions are provided for the user's problem proqrams
• Channel scheduler and complete error
devices other than the 1418/1428 •••
routines
for
I/O
routines
for
• Operator communication routine •••
• Tape label processing or disk label processina.
5600 bytes 5600 bytes
additional 160 bytes are required
capability is utilized.
when
the
multiplexer
Minimum s*stem Requirements:
One 1419 or one 1412 MICR
Reader W1t Adpater Feature (17720)* ••• 2030** Processing
Unit ,Model D is required for Dual 1419 operation) or 2040
Processing Unit Model D (1419 only ••• ~412 is not supported
on 2040) or 2050 Processing Unit Model F (1419 only ••• 1412
is not supported on 2050) or 2065 ProceSSing Unit Model G
(1419 only
1412 is not supported on 2065) ••• a card
reader (1442, 2501, 2520 or 2540) ••• a printer (1403,
1404,*** 1443, 1445 or 1052 Printer-Keyboard) ••• External
Interrupt (2030 only) on Direct Control
Standard
Instruction Set ••• Appropriate control units.
*Not required if the user program does not include 1412 or
1419 input.
**The
2030
Processing
Unit
Engineering Change Level·1259l9.
• Entry points must be provided to the
subroutines
associated with the multiple program facility.
• Maintenance of a document input buffer
or more programs (two
1419s with 2400
Taoe or 2311
Disk)
An
• A program control word must be provided to control
transfer from one user program to another user program .•
must
be
at
or
beyond
***Continuous forms only.
Additional Machine Features supported:
Additional core
storage ••• 2400 series Magnetic Tape Units (7- or 9-track)
or 2311 Disk Storage Drive ••• Selector Channel 1 and
selector Channel 2
Highspeed Multiplexer Channel •••
1442, 2520, or 2540 Card Punch ••• Selective Tape Listing
Feature
•••
Interchangeable Chain Cartridge
1416
Interchangeable Train Cartridge ••• Universal Character Set
Feature ••• Endorser Feature ••• Pocket Light Control
Feature (1419 only) ••• Batch Numbering Device (1419 only)
••• up to two 1419s ••• Dual Density Feature.
The I/O program allows the user to insert his
such functions as:
• Stacker determination •••
• Formatting of printer, punch, and magnetic tape or
output •••
disk
• Document arithmetic processing
• Recognition of control levels.
The. program consists of -- Supervisor ••• Job Control
Tape and Disk processing routines ••• Initial Program Loader
(IPL) •
These components (except IPL) and the user-provided problem
program(s) are assembled, and the resultinq object decks
(with IPL) are loaded into main storage from cards. The
combined deck [Input/OUtput 1418/1428 Program and the user's
problem program(s)] allows the processing of dat~ read and
effects the readinCl and writing of other 1nput/output
devices which the user may require. Input/OutDut operations
and other supervisory functions are requested through the
use
of the Supervisor~Call (SVC) InterruDtion Feature of
the System/360.
Performance: The 1418/1428 Control Program is designed to
make poss1ble maximum OCR throughput. Throughput speeds
will vary with document length, amount of user processing
time, and other I/O operations. Disengaginq the 1418 or
1428 in order to perform a burst mode operation on the
multiplexer channel or any other operation requiring a
disengage will decrease throughput.
The maximum stacker select time for the 1418 and 1428 is 10
ms ~lus any additional time provided by terminating the last
read command prior to the trailing edge of the document
passing the -Document End 4- sensing station.
Not to be reproduced without written permlllion
IB,.,
P 360P.16
PrograllU1ling
IBM System/360 Basic PrograllU1lingSuppor't
If the read command is terminated with the trailinq edqe of
the documents passing the selected document end .switch
setting, the following times are available:
Document End
1
2
3
.4
94
63
25
10
ms
ms
ms
ms
The control program will use a maximum of 1.5 (2.0)
milliseconds to process each external interrupt and .75
(1.0) millisecond
(maximum) additional if a unit check has
occurred. Concurrent I/O operations will deduct from the
user's stacker selection routine.
The time needed to
comolete the instruction being executed when the interrupt
occurs will also reduce the available time. The I/O program
can delay the External Interrupt up to .3Q (.5) milliseconds
if another interrupt is currently being processed.
when
the
availablestack.er
Note:
Channel contention problems may be minimized by
placing the 1418 or 1428 as the highest priority on
the multiplexer" channel ••• (2) disengaging the 1418 or
1428 where other IiO operations would conflict.
rrr-
The user will have the following times available for his
overlapped process time in the main line program assuming no
concurrent
I/O
operations.
These
times
consider
interference from 39 OCR characters per 6 inch document with
a single read collU1land in the CCW chain.
1418
113 milliseconds
1428
113 milliseconds
A user program written for a single program application may
be easily adapted for use in a multiple proqram application.
In order to adapt a user's single application to a mUltiple
application:
• A program control word must be provided to control
transfer from one user reader proqram to another user
reader program.
Assume a system/360'Model 30 with a 1.5 microsecond storage.
The times for a 2 microsecond storage cycle are shown in
parentheses.
Document reiects will occur
select time is exceeded.
Feb 72
Approximately 3.8 (5.0) milliseconds will be required for
each
I/O
operation
requested
(this
includes start
I/O, interrupt servicings, and recognition
of
errors).
Approximately 1.5 (2.0) milliseconds will be required to get
a document record from the input buffer. Concurrent I/O
operations will deduct from the user's available process
time.
f.1inimum s*stem Requirements: One ·1418 or one l428 Optical
Reader W1t Adapter Feature (17720) ••• 2030
(Model C)
(a
model 0 is required if the multiple program facility is .
used) or 2040 (Model D)
or 2050
(Model F)
••• External
Interrupt Feature
(2030 only) or Direct Control Special
Feature ••• Standard Instruction Set ••• appropriate Control
Units ••• One Printer (1403, 1404*, 1443, 1445, or 1052
Printer-Keyboard)
••• one Card Reader (1442, 2501, 2520, or
2540).
• Entry points must be provided to the
associated with multiple program facility.
subroutines
The Input/Output 1231 Nl Program is desianed to eliMinate
the user's need to piogram loqical details associated with
input and output of 1231 Nl data sheet processina.
In
addition, the ability to conveniently read, write and
control other I/O devices (tape, disk and punched card data
processing) is included.
Features of the proqram include:
• Provision for controllinq functions of the Master Mark
Special Feature (the Master Mark Special Feature permits
reading data that is recorded cOllU1lon to a specific batch
of documents).
• Automatic servicing of interrupts.
Complete disk and/or tape label checking.
• Control of such 1231 Nl functions as
feeding
documents
reading documents ••• stacker selectinq
documents ••• handling validity check conditions.
The Input/Output 1231 Nl program consists of
Supervisor
Job Control ••• Tape and Disk Label Processing Routines
Initial Proqram Loader (IPL).
These components and the user provided problem program(s)
are assembled, and the resultina object decks (with IP!.) are
loaded into main storage from cards. The combined deck
[Input/Output 1231 Nl Proqram and the user's
problem
program(s)]
allows the processinq of data read from the
optical mark pages and effects the readinq and \Olri tinq of
othe£ input/output devices which the "user may re~uire in his
1231 Nl applications.
Input/output operations and other supervisory functions are
requested through the use of the Supervisor-Call
(SVC)
Interruption Feature of the System/360.
Performance:
In a 1231 Nl configuration, throughput will
vary w1th user processing time requirements and other
input/output operations. However, the Input/Output 1231 Nl
program is designed to make possible the maximum 1231 Nl
reader throughput which is a rated speed of 2,000 data
sheets per hour (Version 2 of the IQCP is designed to make
possible this throughput rate for each 1231 Nl reader up to
a maximum of four).
Engineering
The basic cycle time for the 1231 Nl is 1,677 milliseconds.
Of this time, 1,452 milliseconds are requirecl for data
transfer when the Control Timing Marks Switch is set to NO.
When the Control Timing Marks Switch is set to YES, the data
transfer time is 1,527 milliseconds. Within thiR time, data
is read from the document and transferred into core storage.
Both user and Input/Output 1231 Nl Proqram processinq can
proceed during document read time.
Additional
rted: Additional machine
eatures supporte
y t e Input Output 1418/1428 program
are: additional core storage ••• 2400-series Magnetic Tape
Units
(7- or 9-track) or 2311 Disk Storage Drive •••
Selector Channel 1 and Selector Channel 2
High-speed
multiplexer channel ••• 1442, 2520, or 2540 Card Punch •••
Mark Readinq Feature ••• Read Station Feature, Additional
••• Dual Density Feature.
If maximum throughput is to be maintained, the maximum
reinstruct time 'for subsequent read onerations is 225
milliseconds after the end of data transfer if the Control
Timinq Marks Switch is set to NO.
If the Control Timing
Marks Switch -is. set to YES, the maximum reinstruct-time for
subsequent read operations is 150 milliseconds after the end
of data transfer •
Note: The Model 2030 must be
cnange Level 125919.
at
or
beyond
*Continuous forms only.
Input/ou~put
1231 Nl, 360P-IO-060
Provides
input/output
proqram . control for System/360
installations usinq the 1231 Nl Opti~l Mark Page Reader.
the basic control proqram provides a single request queue
for input/output operations on the multiplexer channel. The
multiolex capability provides four request queues which will
perroi t four unbuffered devices (which do not. operate in the·
burst mode)
to operate in the data interleaved mode. The
multiplex capability permits the user to operate up to four
1231 Nl readers on-line with aSystem/360. If any burst
mode
(tape or disk)
operations are
attempted
on
a
multiplexer channel queue, input/output operations which can
be multiplexed on the remaining queues will be proceRRed
first until all such requests have been serviced.
Minimum srstem Requirements: 2030 (Model C) [a Model D is
requ1red 1 the mult1ple program facility is used) or 2040
(Model D) or 2050 (Model F) or 2065 (Model G) ••• Standard
Instruction Set ••• one 1231 Optical Mark Page Reader Mo~l
Nl
one Card Reader (1442,2501,2520, or 2540).,. one
Printer (1403, 1404*, 1443, 1445, or 1052 Printer-Keyboard)
••• appropriate Control Units.
*Continuous forms only.
Additional Machine Features Suoported:
Additional core
storage ••• e1tner (or both 1f suff1c1ent core storaqe is
available)
2400-series Magnetic Tape units (7- or 9-track)
or 2311 Disk Storaqe Drive
Selector Channel 1 and
Selector Channel 2 ••• 1442, 2520, or 2540 Card Punch •••
Master Mark special feature ••• up to four 1231 NIs ••• Dual
Density Feature.
The multiple program facility provided to handle up to four
applications consists of .severalsubroutines that become an
integral part of the 1231 Nl control program. The multiple
program facility uses program control words
(PCW's) to
transfer control among the user programs. A PCW is a 240
byte area reserved by the user for each of his programs.
The control program stores the status of the System/360 when
control is being transferred from one user program to
another.
Up to four 1231 Nl readers may be distributed in
any manner among the four programs.
Not to bereproduce~ without wrtttenpermission
IB,.,
Programming
surface analysis once per track. Increasing the number of
times surface analysis is performed adds approximately 5
minutes per repetition.
MISCELLANEOUS SUPPORT
Universal Character Set Utility Program 360P-UT-048
The BPS/360 Universal Character Set, a special feature,
provides the System/360 1403 Models 2, 3, and Nl Printers
with the ability to print any set of 240 graphics, arranged
in a desired sequence on the print train or print chain.
The advantaae of this feature is that print trains or chains
can be tailored to the needs of the particular use.r
apnlications.
The Universal Character Set feature utilizes a 240 character
read/write storage unit located in the 2821. One storage
unit is su~plied for each printer equipped with the feature.
Each position of the 240 character storage corresponds
sequentially to a graphic on the train or chain of the
respective printer. This :~~~~qe unit is sequentially read
out as the various graphics are byought into print position
by the movement of the train or chain. Codes read out of
the stroage unit are matched to the successive codes of the
data record to be printed.
When a match occurs, the
corresponding print position prints. The codes in the data
record are selected from the 256 codes of the Extended
Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code.
The Universal Charecter Set Utility program loads the
arrangement of 240 codes selected from the Extended Binary
Code Decimal Interchange Code into the read/write storage
units located in the 2821 COntrol Unit. 'l'en train and ten
chain arrangements are provided for System/360, but any
preyio\1sly announced l400-series arranaement or any customdesigned arrangement can be used.
The proaram prints a train/chain image after loading is
complete.
This image must be checke~ by the machi·ne
onerator for accuracy. The System/360 arrangements have an
identifvinq message printed with the image.
If a customdesigne~ or l400-series arrangement is used, no message is
printed. An optional name control card permits the user to
identifv the customer application of the train or chain
installe~. Control card errors are checked by the program.
Data checks caused by unprintable characters
may
be
suopressed by using Version 1, Modification Levell, and
later modifications of the UCS program.
However, this
suppression can only be accomplished if the 2821 Control
Unit has been updated through Engineering Change #125632 or
Request
for
Engineering
Action
#0100037.
If this
modification level or a later modifica.tion level is used on
a System/360 not equipped with the feature, a Command Reject
will result.
To suppress data checks on a system equipped
with the feature, an additional operand (,NO DATA CHECK)
is
punched in columns 16-29 of the BL card. The data check
suppression will remain in effect until the UCS program is
rerun without the additional operand (blanks in cols. 1629), or otherwise reset. If the System/360 is being run
with
the
1401 compatibility feature, the data check
suppression f~ature cannot be used.
Minimum s}stem Reduirements: An 8K System/360 with a 2520,
2540, 144 , or 25 1 card Reader ••• a 1403 Pr~nter, Model 2,
1, or Nl ••• and Universal Character Set Spec1al feature.
Distribution
~rogram,
360P-UT-208
Build two tape 10adable programs on an output tape. The
two programs are an Initialize Disk (2311/2314/2319)
program and a Restore Tape to Disk program.
Copy one or more disk files, defined by the file name
parameter on the utility modifier cards, to the output
tape(s).
The volume built by the above,two steps will allow a disk
pack to be initialized by the first tape loadable program
and allow that disk pack to be restored with the disk
file(s) information contained on the tape volume by the
second tape loadable program.
Performance ••• The program
performance is as follows:
Initialization of a 2316 disk pack requires not more than
14 minutes per one execution of surface analysis. Each
additional
repetition
of
surface
analysis
adds
approximately 10 minutes.
Restore Tape to Disk -- This function requires not more
than 11 minutes to restore a 2311 disk file from tape to ;
a 1316 disk pack whose extents are from cylinder 0 to
cylinder 198·. It requires not· more than 25 minutes to
'restore a 2314/2319 disk file from tape to a 2~16 disk
pack whose .extents are from cylinder 0 to cylinder 198.
Minimum System Requirements ••• System/360 with 16K bytes
of ma1n storage ••• card Reader (1442, 2501, 2520 or 2540)
••• Printer (1403,1404 [Continuous Forms], 1443 or 1445)
••• Printer Keyboard (1052) ••• Tape Drive (2400 series)
••• Disk Drive (2311, 2314 or 2319).
Modular File Maintenance Program 360P-UT-219
The complete 110dular File Maintenance Program is supplied in
both object (basic) and symbolic (optional) formats. The
?rogr~n performs these functions I
Buildinq of self-loading master and update DTR(s) such
as those on which IBM will now supply BPS programs and
updates. This function can be employed by users to
prepare master and update tapes containing user-written
proqrams.
Update of current master tapes by merging with an update
DTR(s) to produce new master. tapes.
IBM will supply
update
DTR(s) only for the basic volumes of BPS
• programs.
For
the
optional
volumes,
complete
replacements must be. ordered.
Retrieval of individual programs from both master and
update DTR(s). The output media can be card, tape,
printer, or any combination of these.
Retrieval
of header records only to
programs on masters and update DTR(s).
identify
the
Each master and update DTR supplied by IBM consists of two
files. The first file contains IPL, supervisor, job control,
and
the
Upaate/retrieval
phase of the Modular File
Maintenance Program. The second file is a series of data
modules, each containing a header record and one phase of a
BPS program (IPL, supervisor and job control are each
considered phases·of a BPS program).
The header records on a current master and an update
DTR(s)control the merging operation by which a new master is
created. A program phase is omitted from the new master
when the header for that phase on the update DTR(S)
specifies a delete action.
Minimum System Requirements: System/360 Model 3"
40 or 50
w1th 8K bytes of ma1n storage ••• Card Reader- 1442, 2501,
2520 or 2540 ••• Card Punch - 1442, 2520 or 2540 ••• Printer
1403, 1404 (continuous forms only) or l443 ••• Tape 2400series, 9-track or 7-track with Data Conversion feature.
One
to
three urives required depending on functions
performed. '
Performance: The Modular File Maintenance Program runs at
approx1mately the rated speed of the slowest I/O device
used.
Performs the following functions:
has
three
functions
whose
Copy -- This segment requires not more than 14 minutes to
copy to tape a 2311 disk file whose extents are from
cylinder 0 to cylinder 198. It requires not more than 28
minutes to copy to tape a 2314/2319 disk file whose
extents are from cylinder 0 to cylinder 198.
Initialize Disk -- This segment requires not more than 7
to initialiZe a 1316 disk pack when performing
~inutes
P 360P.17
Feb 72
IBM System/360 Basic programming Support
Remote Job Entry Work Station Program
360P-60-2l8 ~BPS/360)
-- This program works in conjunction with the OS/360 Remote
Job Entry (RJE) system to provide a convenient means of
entering OS/360 jobs to a central computing system from a
remote location equipped with a System/360. It accepts
OS/360 jobs and RJE control statements ann commands from a
ca~d reader to 1052 printer-keyboard, transmits this data to
the Central (OS/360) processor via high-speed communication
lines, receives data from the central system, and outputs
this data to an attached output device (printer, punch or
console printer), or passes it to a user-written routine.
The console printer-keyboard cannot be used for input and
output of jobs.
Without .the inclusion of user-written routines, a System/360
with at least 16K of main storage, a 2701 Data Adapter Unit
or Integrated Communications Attachment equipped for binary
synchronous communication in EBCDIC transparency mode, a
card reader, a pr:inter, a 1052 Printer-Keyboard, and a card
punch are required for RJE operation. If user-written
routines are included, a System/360 with at least 24K bytes
of
main
storage is required. BPS/360 minimum device
requirements apply.
Nono be reproduced without written permission'
IB"1
P 36UP.I8
Feb 72
IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support
Programming
Bas ic Program Package
Documentation: The following SR L publications and documents appropriate only to
the components ordered are shipped by PID with each initial EWS/360 order. The
Volume numbers li6ted be low correspond tp machine readable VOL numbers.
- - - Volume 1 - - - GC24-3354-7
Note 1
BPS/360 Programmer's Guide - 8K Tape
(360P-AS-091)
TNLsGN33-8569,8596
BPS/360 Assembler with Input/Output Macros 8K Tape (360P.,.AS-091)
BPS/360 Operating Guide- Report Program Generator Card (360P-RG-200)
TNL GN21-5106
BPS/360 Support Programmer's Guide FORTRAN IV
(3 60P-UT -208)
TNL GN28-0219
BPS/360 Specifications - FORTRAN IV - 16K Card
(360P-FO-205)
TNL GN28-0223
GC24-3355-7
GC24-3464-2
Note 9
GC21-5000-1
GC21-9040-1
Note 10
--Volume 6 - - -
GC24-.3364-3
BPS/360 Input/Output 1412/1419 Specifications and
Operating Guide (360P-10-95 8)
TNLs GN24-5228; GN33-8574
GC24-3398-4
BPS/360 Operating Guide - Basic Tape System - 8K
(360P-AS-091; RG-201)
TNLs GN33-8562, 8573, [2.1Q
GC24-3391-4
Note 2
BPS/360 Input/Output 1418/1428 Specifications and
Operating Guide (360P-10-059)
TNLs GN24-5350i GN33-8576
GC24-343 7-2
BPS/360 System Generation and Maintenance - Basic
Tape System (360P-AS-09lJ
TNL GN33-8636
GC24-5061-4
BPS/360 Input/Output 1231
(360P-10-060)
TNL GN33-8575
GC24-3408-2
BPS/360 Specifications - Report Program Generator
<360P-RG-20I)
GC24-3418-3
Note 3
BOS/BPS/360 Macro Definition Language - 8K
Disk/Tape (.360P-AS-09I)
TNL GN3.3-~
- - - Volume 2
Form numbers which have changed since previous release are underlined.
NOTE 1
SR L GC24-3354-6 plus TN Ls GN24-532 7, 5339, GN33-8541,
8569 and 8596 may be used in lieu of SRL GC24-3354-7 plus
TNLs GN33-8569 and 8596.
NOTE 2
SRL GC24-3391-3 plus TNLs GN24-5322, 5353, GN33-8539,
8562, 8573 and 8640 may be used in lieu of SR L GC24-3391-4
plus TNLs GN33-8562, 8573 and 8640.
~OTE
SRL GC24-3418-1 plus TNLs GN24-5056, 5160, 5176, 5200,
GN21-5059, 5087, 5094, 5097 and 5098 or SRL GC24-3418-2
plus TN Ls GN21-5059, 5087, 5094, 5097 and 5098 may be used
in lieu of SRL GC24-3418-3.
-~-.
S/360 Basic FORTRAN IV Language
(360P-FO-031)
GC28-6629-2
BPS/360 FORTRAN IV Programmer's Guide
(360P-FO-031)
TNL GN28-0230
GC28-6583-2
3
- - - Volume 3~-,-
BPS/360 Modular Fi Ie Maintenance Program Specifications
and Operating Guide (360P-UT-219)
TNLs GN33-8590, 8607,
GC24-5069-0
BPS/360 Sort/Merge Program Specifications
(3 60P-S M-043, 044)
GC24-.3320-7
Note 4
BPS/360 Sort/Merge Program Operating Guide
(3 60P-S M-043, 044)
BPS/360 Autotest Specifications 8K Tape
(360P-PT-045)
TNLs GN21-5025, 5068; GN33-8582, ~
aw..
NOTE 4
SRL GC24-3320-5 plus TNLs GN21-5028, 5052, and GN28-2346
or SRL GC24-3320-6 plus TNL GN28-2346 may be used in lieu of
SRL GC24-3320-7.
NOTE 5
GC24-3413-3
Note 5
SRL GC24-3413-1 plus TNLs GN21-5008, 5020, 5029, 5046,
GN24-5027, GN28-2244 or SRL GC24-3413-2 plus TNLs GN215046 and GN28-2244 may be used in lieu of SRL GC24-3413-3.
NOTE 6
SRL GC24-5026-1 plus TNLs GN21-5030 and GN28-2340 may be
used in lieu of SRL GC24-5026-2 plus TNL GN28-2340.
GC24-3343-2
NOTE 7
SRL GC28-6503-6 plus TNLs GN33-8581, 8597 and 8659 may be
used in lieu of SRL GC28~6503-7 plus TNLs GN33-8597 and 8659.
NOTE 8
SRL GC24-3374-1 plus TNLs GN21-5065 and GN24-5052 may be
used in lieu of SRL GC24-3374-2.
NOTE 9
SRL GC24-3464-1 plus TNLs GN21-5066, GN24-5171 and GN215106 may be used in lieu of SRL GC24-3464-2 plus TNL GN21-5106.
NOTE 10
SRL GC21-9040-0 plus TNLs GN21-5007 and GN28-0223 may be
used in lieu of SRL GC21-9040-1 plus TNL GN23-0223.
BPS/360 Operating Guide Autotest 8K Tape
(360P-PT -045)
TNLsGN21-5026,5069;GN33-8642
- - - Volumes 3 and 4 - BPS/360 Specifications - Card and Tape Utility Programs
(360P-UT-050, 057, 202)
TNL GN28-2340
GC24-5026-2
Note 6
BPS/360 Operating Guide - Card and Tape Utility Programs
(3 60P-UT -050, 057, 202)
GC24-5027-4
Machine Readable - Machine Readable material for all 360P programs is contained on
six (6) functional volumes. The machine readable for VOLs 1-5 is in object form.
The machine readable for VOL 6 is in source form. See packaging chart.
GC24.3396-.3
Basic machine readable material for some 360P programs (see packaging chart) can
be obtained in card form. If cards are preferred, speci fy each program des ired in
columns 4-12 and specify medium code 15 in columns 21-22 of the Program Order
Form.
TNLGN33-~
BPS/360 Operating Guide Universal Character Set Utility
Program (360P-UT -048)
TNL GN28-2339
- - - Volume 4 - - BPS/360 DASD Utility Programs - Specifications
(360P-UT-061, 069, 071, 072, 073,098,203,
204, 206, 207, 212)
TN L GN33-8638
Current users for all the BPS programs will receive the following materials.
Documentation:
Memo to user and attachments; Program Material list.
Publications will be distributed to affected current users for the programs they are
registered for.
BPS/360 DASD Utility Programs - Operating Guide
(360P-UT-061, 069, 071, 072, 073, 098, 20.3,
204, 206, 207, 212)
TN L GN33-8641
Machine Readable Material t - Machine readable material will be distributed to affected
current users for the programs they are registered for.
BPS/360 Distribution Program Specifications and Operating
Guide (.360P-UT-208)
---Volume
If only the publications or if additional copies of the publications are required, order
them from the IBM Distribution Center, Mechanicsburg -- not from PID.
GC21-5001-1
5--~
tAli maintenance machine readable material will be supplied on either one, two or
three Distribution Tape Reel(s) C~ for customers requiring card, in cardTor;n.-The
DTR(s) will be 9-track 800 or 1600 GPI 01' 7-track 800 CPI permits the
concurrent proceSSing of several jobs, one per partition, in a user controlled, partitioned
core storage environment. Multiprogramming with a Variable number of Tasks (MVT>
provides for the scheduling of a variable number of jobs to be run concurrently, depending on the core space available, in a dynamically allocated core storage environment.
This reduces the requirement for user control and intervention.
A wide ral'lge of proceSSing programs including assemblers, compilers, and service
programs are available with OS/360. The language processors are provided at various
core storage requirement levels and include PL/I, COBOL, Assembler, RPG, FORTRAN, and ALGOL. Service programs are Sort/Merge, Linkage Editor, Remote Job
Entry, Graphic Job Processor, Testran, and Utilities.
The following paragraphs describe the components of the system, Minimum System
ReqUirements, I/O Device Support, Publications and Distribution.
SUPERVISORS (PCP/MFT/MVT)
Primary Control Program (PCP) 360S-CI-566 provides for the inclusion of basiC
OS/300 tunctions which are appropriate'for single job execution. When generating
a system, functional capabi lities may be selected in a variety of combinations and
added to those included in PCP to produce additional capabilities.
PCP has been functionally stabi lized with OS Release 19.
P 3605.1
Mar 73
tem functions available in. any partition. The additional functions in MFT are:
Control up to 15 single task jobs
Control of up to 3 system input readers (resident or transient)
Control of up to 36 system output writers
Small problem program partitions (8K or more)
DynamiC Partition. Definition - Operator can redefine partitions without reinitializing system
Data set integrity - Prevents multiple tasks from concurrently using the same
dataset
'
Storage Pro'tection - Problem program integrity (write protect) is maintained by
supervi sor assigned 'protecti on keys.
System Restart - After re-I PL is performed, jobs not previously initiated for execution are in the ready queue. The output queue corftains all job output that
has not been completely transcribed to tape, cards or printer. Jobs that were
in executi'on ·are removed from the system. Whatever data that was placed in
the output queue by such jobs can be printed or punched
Provision for conditional requests for resources (ENQ/DEQ)
Priority Job Class Scheduling - Provides for more effective balancing of system
resources by permitting the assiqnment of jobs by type to a partition
Telecommunications Support - BTAM, QTAM, and TCAM are supported. QTAM
requires two partitions; one partition for message control, the second partition
for message proceSSing. Only one BTAM partition is normally recommended in
a given system although multiple partitions can coexist provided that, if the
BT~M READ;WRITE module is reSident, then all shared device I/O modules
must be made resident. A user planning a multiple BT AM partition sys~em
should be cautioned that high contention for system/BTAM facilities among
the partitions may cause serious performance degradation, particularly if a
binary synchronous partition is assigned a secondary priority,
Graphics Support - Provides Graphic Programming Services including all features
for the 2250 Models I, 2, and 3 and the 2260 Direct Attachment.
Disk SYSIN allows disk to be used as a source for a Reader/Interpreter's
job stream.
Job Step Timing - makes job step task time available to a user written
accounting routine. .
System Management Facilities - Gather, format, and optionally record basic system and user information from which an installation can determine resources such
as CPU, I/O, data sets, volumes and storage used by each program.
Support of System/370Time-of-Day yet provide the ability to identify or specify source and destination of terminal 110 •.Network control functions may be provided in an application program able
to Issue TCAM operator control commands.
Teleprocessing applications with TCAM are constructed by providing a Message
Control Program and one or more TCAM application programs. The Message Control
Program is defined and generated by the user with TCAM macro-instructions. When
using a 3705, functions of the Message Co,!~rol Program that are associated with
network management will be generated in the 3704/3705 Network Control Program.
The Message Control Program describes the TP network and specifies the device
dependent handling requirements needed to insulate the application programs from
device dependent conSiderations. Different applications may have different handling
requirements. Alternate paths and procedures may be provided to meet these needs.
Additional facilities are furnished especially for use in Inquiry and conversational
applications.
Application programs are developed separately. A single application may be built
which services several terminals concurrently. Also, a Single terminal may be used
wtth several independently developed application programs. QTAM application programs or other applications using BSAM or QSAM options 'supported by TCAM may
be easily adapted to rul'! as TCAM application programs.
TCAM is especially recommended In Situations where several terminal types, e.g.,
start-stop terminals, Binary Synchronous Terminals, Display Stations, etc. are
present on a system or where the same terminal Is deSired to be used for several applications. Terminals serviced by TCAM for application programs can. be used for TSO.
In an OS TSO System, application programs using TCAM can be swapped in and out
of a time shared region. In this connection, it should be noted that RJE and CRJE
cannot share communications lines with TCAM applications. BTAM or QTAM programs supporting other communications lineS may co-reside with TCAM.
Information on terminal support is provided by Terminal Support Charts 1 and 2.
Basic Telecommunications Access Method - SlAM 360S-CQ-S13
The STAM facilities are designed chiefly to provide the basic tools required to
'Irite a telecommunications program. These include faCilities for creating termllal lists and performing the following operations:
Initiating and answering calls to and from terminals on switched networks.
Polling and addreSSing terminals on non-switehed multipoint lines.
Changing the status of terminal lists.
Transmitting and receiving messages.
Posting completion status of messages.
Managing buffer pools.
Code transl'lltion.
Retransmitting messages which are received with detected error.
Providing on-line terminal test facilities.
Keeping error statistics.
BTAM operates under the MFT
and MVT options of the Os, Control Program.
Information on terminal support is provided by Terminal Support Charts "1 and 2.
The support of binary synchronous communications combined with that of the various
start/stop devices such as the 1050 gives BTAM a wide range of applicability and
flexibility. BTAM supports both low, medium and high spec:d devices In one access
method.
STAM supports Binary Synchronous Communication over non-switched extends to the terminal user the full power
of OS/360. Under TSO up to 14 Time Shared regions may be defined, each of
which may be time shared by many terminal users.
Features:
General purpose time sharing capability operating concurrently with normal
05/360 background operation within one operating system.
Up to 14 regions can be devoted to time sharing.
Sharing of the main storage allocated to time ~ilaring by more than one remote
terminal user by swapping remote terminal user's programs in and out of time
shared regions.
Installation control of the time sharing algorithms which determine the priority
and amount of processing time allocated to each job.
Dynamic control of the allocation of system time between time sharing and
background operation.
Statisti.cs gathering routines which provide data to assist the installation in
tuning the system.
Graphic Assess Method
Graphic Programming Services 360S-10-523 --- Graphic Programming Services
is supported under PCP, MFT or MVT. It consists of the functions necessary to
handle graphic input/output, and a set of macro-instructions and problem oriented
routines that can be used as building blocks in the construction of graphic process;
programs. These services support the 2250 Display Unit, Models 1, 2~ and 3;
and the 2260 direct attachment (local). Functions provided are:
Macro instructions to generate all orders for the 2250, models 1 and 3, including the Model 1 with the Graphic DeSign feature.
Data handling aids for arranging orders and data in main storage prior to transferring them to the graphic device buffer.
Problem oriented routines that dynamically generate orders and data for displaying
on the 2250 models 1 and 3.
AI phameric characters.
.
Rectangular grids CIinear or semi-log).
Grid labels.
Polar coordinate grids (finear or semi-log).
Circles and arcs.
Input to these routines can be either fixed point or floating point and can be
scaled by the routines.
Graphic Data Generation slbroutine - to generate data, during program execution,
for use with the 2-byte incremental data modes of the 2250 Model 1 with
SMF support by individual terminal user as an installation option.
Control of the system resources by installation management.
Conversation terminal command language which is powerful, easy to use,
and permits the installation to add additional commands.
Environment for creating and executing conversational programs. A device
independent BSAM/QSAM interface to terminals is provided for ease of develop·
ment and installation of terminal-oriented application programs. '
Language, data and Data Management compatibility between conventional
(batch) programs and programs developed at the terminal. Batch or terminal
developed programs can be stored, rEtrieved and executed locally (at the
computer center) or from the remote terminal allowing the sharing of data se~s
between time shared and background regions.
A TCAM :.lessage control program is provided to support 1050, 2741, 2260/
2848, 2265/2845 and TELETYPE(c) terminal Model 33/35*** as Time
Sharing Terminals.
Use of TCAM to handle terminals allows the same terminal and/or communications lines to be used for both TSO and other TCAM applications.
TCAM message proceSSing programs can be swapped in and out of a time
Not to be reproduced Yiithout written permission
to support the 2741 and 1050 Transmit Interrupt (7900) and/or Receive
Interrupt (4708, 6100): 8200 Type 1 Terminal Interrupt
shared region. This provides more efficient utilization of main storagel;
especially during period of low utilization of terminal application programs.
Terminal user may use any currently supported IBM 05/360 language prcicessor
(or equivalent) that is available at the installation.
3.
IBM 2703 Transmission Control with an IBM Terminal Control Type 1 and/or
Teletype Terminal Control Type 2. The following feature is necessary to support
the 2741 and 1050 Transmit Interrupt (7900) arid/or Receive Interrupt (4708,
6100): 8200 Type 1 Terminal Interrupt
4.
A 3704 or 3705 .Communications Controller.
Command language f~cillties provide for creating, editing, copying*"', merging*"',
formattln9**, listing*"', deleting, or renaming data sets
Direct access data sets can be dynamically allocated in a time shared region
as they are needed.
Test command allows
systems programmers and assembly language programmers to control the execution of a program, interrupting it at dynamically
specified points.
languages supporting probletn solving:
- Interactive Terminal Facility: Pl/I, BA5IC**
- Code and Go FORTRAN**
Conversational language support provided by T50 includes:
Prompting for required parameters to invoke compilers , dynamic allocation of
required data sets and compi lation output and diagnostic messages sent to the
terminal for the following: Assembler (F), ANS COBO lVersion 3** , Code
and Go FORTRAN**, FORTRAN IV (GI)**, Pl/I Optimizing Compile!'*'* ,
Linkage Editor and loader.
Syntax Checking for PLI (F) and FORTRAN (E, G, & H).
Dynamic on-line .,rogram debugging facilities for systems programmers and
assembly language programmers.
Conversational program execution capabi lity.
Conversational initiation of batch execution (CRJE-like function).
Terminals Supported: TSO provides a TCAM Message Control Program which proVides support tor the follOWing terminals and special features. The special terminal
features are highly deSirable in the TSO environment but are riot required.
1050 Data Communication System on either switched or point-to-point lines
With:
1051 Control Unit permits a maximum
of 32 operator consoles. The following devices are supported.
1052 Model 7 attached directly to a Model 40,50,65, or 75,
Source program debuggiog facilities, including an option for a source statement
. number reference during executing, indication of variable names and values,
and optionid checking for unusual conditions.
Time recording tor compilation.
Stream input/output (an extension of FORTRAN -like I/O).
Record oriented input/output (an'extension of COBOL - like I/O>.
Multitask capability under MVT and VS/2 is proVided with appropriate control
of posting and waiting upon task completion.
Ability to change task priority under MVT during execution.
Compile time facilities which allow analysis and modification of source pro..
grams and for the inclusion of source statements from libraries.
Update mode for QSAM input/output.
Sort capability.
Teleprocessing support under MFT and MVT only.
Halfword binary storage.
Optimization options permit the compiler to optimize within limits set by
source programmer.
TRANSlATE/VERIFY feature permits the handling of non-EBCDIC character sets.
System Requirements for Compiling Pl/I:
1052 Model 7 attached through a 2150 Console.
3210 Printer Keyboard attached directly to a Model 135, 145, 15S, and 155 "
3215 Printer Keyboard attached directly to a Model 135, 145, 155, and 155 "
2740 Communications Terminal Model 1 with Record Checking (6114). (One
2740 for each non-switchable communications line used. Feature 9571 should
be ordered for EBCDIC Character Set Support.)
3284 or 3286 Printers Models 1 and 2 attached to 3272 Control Units Models
1 and 2, are supported as hard-copy consoles.
Currently supported composite consoles.
Output units of currently supported composite consoles (1403 and 1443 only).
3277 Model 2 Character Display Device (local att(Jchmentl.
3277 Model 1 Character Display Device, output only console .
Minimum of 44K bytes of main storage.
Significant Increases in compile performance result from the availability.of
more storage.
Decimal and floating pOint instruction set options for compiling and executing
all programs.
CPU interval timer and the OS timer control program option can be used.
Data Management space and/or device allocation is required for:
Source program input (SYSIN)
Intermediate (work) storage (SYSUTl, SYSUT3,) optional
Object modules (SYSLlN) optional
Printed output (SYSPRINT)
Punched output (SYSPUNCH) optional
Source (macro) library (SYSLlB) optional
Pl/I - F object programs can uti! ize the following OS/360 control program and
Data Management servi ces •
2250 Model 1 or 3.
D3ta Manaqement access methods available with PL/I:
2260 Model 1 on a 2848 Model 3 .
BSAM (unblocked, unbuffered, sequential files, record formats F, U, Vl.
QSAM (blocked and/or buffered sequential files, all record formats)
BISAM (blocked or unblocked files, formats F, FB)
QISAM (blocked or unblocked, buffered files, formats F, FB)
BDAM (unblocked, unbuffered files, formats F, U, V)
QTAM under MFT and MVT only.
Model 91 Di splay Console.
Model 85 Operator's Console (5450>.
3060 System Console (Model 195).
3066 Systems Console CModel165, 165 II and 168).
Model 158 Display Console has two modes of operation: 3215 mode and 3270
mode. When operating in 3215 mode, this console will function as a 3215
printer-keyboard using the 3213 output printer. The 3213 is mandatory in
3215 mode to produce hard copy.
When operating in 3270 mode, this console will function as two devices: (1)
a 3158 graphic display console and (2) a 3213 output printer. In 3270 mode,
the 3213 is optional and may be used to satisfy the hard copy requirements of
MCS or any other "output only" console function.
Plr.oce.~~.(.ng
Plr.oglr.a.m~
Main storage requir~ments for compilers stated in the system requirements sections
are in addition to the main storage required by the control program.
Language Translators: Language translators compile sybmolic source programs
(source modules) into object programs (object modules). Object modules serve as
input to the Linkage Editor which produces the relocatable program.
The language compilers are at various design levels providing maximum efficiency
and flexibil ity. All compilers function with any control program configuration with
the exception of Assembler E under MVT. All OS compilers provide upward compatibility within each language, except that Full ANSI COBOL provides a language
conversion program to convert the user from COBOL E or F to the standard compilers.
PUI (360S'-NL-51l)
PL/I Subroutine Library (360S-lM-512)
PL/I extends the range of applications that can be handled by a single high level
language. In addition to covering problems similar to FORTRAN and COBOL, PL/I
also covers problem areas beyond the scope of each, whert: ",ast application efforts
have required the use of an assembly language. Many features provided simplify
programming of both commercial and SCientific applications and assist the programmer
in making efficient use of the supervisor facil ities of OS/360. In terms of function,
PL/I is the most complete high level language ever developed.
~ -- Provided are:
Many data types including fixed and variable length character and bit strings,'
floating decimal and binary data, fixed decimal and binary data and complex
numeric data.
Complex data and arithmetic capability include expreSsions whose elements are
scalars (individual numeric items), structures (collection of alphameric field,)
and arrays - (tables).
Program segmentation capability providing for modular program structure.
Automatic conversion and editing of data types where necessary.
Initialization of data elements and arrays.
DynamiC storage allocation under user control permitting more efficient use of
variable size data areas.
Options:
UPDATE mode .
Acceptance of input data in any retangular coordinate system; the data is scaled
as appropriate for use by the graphic subroutine package.
Provision for temporarily removing an image from a display while its associated
orders and data are in the buffer, and later redisplaying the image.
Modification of graphic orders and data produced by a single call whereever they
are locatt!d (in main storage or in the buffer) by another call to the same
subroutine.
Display of alphameric characters using either the character generator feature of the
2250 or a series of lines called strokes.
Capability to read information from the buffer into maIO storage.
Capability to locate the position of the light pen on the screen even if the light
pen is pointed at a blank portion of the screen.
Capability to place a tracking symbol on the screen and follow its motion as it is
moved by a 2250 operator with the light pen. (Restricted to 2250 Model 3).
Allowance for in-buffer subroutines that can be repeatedly invoked through inbuffer linkage (restricted to 2250 Model 3).
Ability to check the status of the program while it is being processed.
Calling any of the subroutines from an assembler language program.
Single and multiple queueing of attention infor~tion, and in-line processing of
that information.
The E Level subset provides language extensions beyond ANS basic FORTRAN
including:
Support of the direct (BDAM fixed length only) data access method.
Double precision arithmetic.
Compatible extensions to the READ and WRITE statements to provide direct data
organization in support of direct access storage devices is planned.
Mixed mode aritlvnetic.
Ability to replace the H FORMAT specification by substituting enclosing
apostrophes.
The T -specification, permitting printed output to begin at any print position.
Arrays of up to three dimensions.
P-scale factors in FORMAT statements.
STOP statement allows the processing of codes for testing by 05/360 Job
Control statements.
1. element -- all orders and data produced by one call to a GSP subroutine.
2. sequences -- all orders and data produced by several calls to GSP subroutines.
FORTRAN H provides the above as well as extensions to the language beyond ANS
FORTRAN, Including:
IMPLICIT statement allowing extended impliCit classification by first character
of a name.
An extended type statement, including length specification and initializing data
from type statement.
G- conversion, extended to cover all numeric and logical data types.
Multiple entry points to subprograms, and non-standard returns from subroutines.
Arrays of up to seven dimensions.
PAUSE statement extended to permit output of messages.
NAMELIST statement permitting input/output and conversion without an explicit
I/O list and FORMAT statement.
Generalized subscripts.
Hexadecimal constants and FO RMA T code.
END and ERR parameters in READ statement.
Double exponention
FORTRAN G provides all the above plus a Debug facility as a programming aid.
System Requirements: An three compilers and object programs require floating point
arithmetic option during execution. They require floating point arithmetic at compile
time only If floating point contents appear in the source program. In addition to the
05/360 reSidence, space in auxiliary storage is required for the following data sets
-- system input ••• two intermediate .
The sequential access methods BSAM and QSAM are used by the compiler. The
compiler object pl'ograms use BSAM only.
Options: The following compile tim,e options l)1ay' be specified: Single or double
precision of floating pOint numbers ••• Full compilation or syntax checking only •••
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion
IB~ ~amming
IBM Operating System
P 360S.9
Mar 74
Compilation of program or procedure ••• compiler output options like source listing,
storage maps, object module deck ••• source code in EBCDIC or DIN/ISO.
Linkage Editor E 360S-ED-510
Linkage Editor F 360 S-EO-521
Caution: ALGOL usage must be on a resuicted basis since there are no plans for
additional ALGOL processors, improvements, or increased language function. Pl/I
oontaills many ALGOL features, plus-many additional features that give PL/I a wider
range ot iilJplicability. IBM intends to provide full and continuing support for Pl/Ii
we do not inten4 to extend our support of ALGOL beyond that announced. No formal
customer education or documentation beyond the SRL is planned.
The linkage editor combines separately assembled or compiled object modules into
one or more load modules that is in a format suitable for loading by the control
program, and subsequent execution. It also combines previously edited load
modules with each other or With object modules.
It is mandatory that the effect of ALGOL use be clearly understood by all users.
As a result, the following rules must be adhered to before propOSing the use of
ALGOL:
1. ALGOL should be committed or referred only to an account where clear need is
evident. (For example, currently using ALGOl 1
2. The user should understand the limitations of IBM's plans (stated above) in regard
to ALGOL.
Linkage Editor F (44K, 88K, 128K) offers functions not available with,E (15K>
or E U8K> related to input and output blocking and the number of entries in certain
tabl e structures.
The 15K desi gn for Level E has a larger capacity than the 18K with the 18K
deSign providing faster performance. For linkage Editor F, in a given amount of
available main storage, the 44K design provides capacity, the 88K design speed
and the 128K offers the best overall performance.
3. Every effort must be made to move an ALGOL account to Pl/I.
Features -- Arthough linking or combining of program modules is its primary function.
linkage editor also:
OS service programs provide functions ranging from standard utility services
to program module linking and editing, remote job entry, graphic job proct!ssing ·and
an extremely flexible sort/merge.
Incorporates modules from data sets other than those in its primary input, either
• automatically or upon request.
'
• Constructs an overlay program for loading by the control prog'am.
• Aids proqram modification by replacing and deleting control sections as directed
by linkage editor control statements.
• Defines the storage requirements for the common control sections generated by
assemblers and FORTRAN compilers, and the static external areas generated
by PL/I compilers.
Provides proceSSing options and logs diagnostic error messages.
Sort/Merge
System Requirements -- The minimum main storage requirement for linkage Editor E
is 15K bytes, and 44K for linkage Editor F. In addition to the standard system
residence, the linkage editor requires space in auxiliary storage for at least the
following data sets:
360S-SM-023
The OS Sort,IMerge is designed to satisfy the sorting and merging requirements of
both tape-oriented and DASD-oriented installations. It is a generalized program
that will use different sorting and merging techniques, depending on the control
information supplied by the user, on the main storage and on the secondary storage
devices available to it. The minimum main storage requirement is 15.5K bytes.
Additional main storage will be used, if available, for performance improvement.
Features -- Significant features of the 'sort/merge are:
Sorting or merging on as many as sixty-four control data fields.
Collating sequences and data format can be specified separately for each control
field.
Device independent initial input and final output.
With additional main storage, as many as 32 tape units or 6 access mechanisms'
on 2311 and 17 on 2314 can be used for intermediate storage, as well as
multiple input and output devices.
"
An advanced sorting technique on larger tape systems with the 2816 Switching
Unit.
Callable through COBOL, assembler language and PL/I.
System input
One intermediate - requires DASD
Print output - Selectable through JCL
Output load module - requires DASD
There may also be one or more library data sets containing object or load modules
reqUiring DASD, and one or more object module data sets as additional input.
LOADER 360S-LD-547
The OS LOADER provides improved performance in a compile-load-go environment.
The LOADER combines thebasic editing and loading functions ofthelinkage editor
and program loading (fetch> in one job step. It loads object modules produced by the
language processor and load modules produced by the linkage editor directly into main
storage for immediate execution. The LOADER is supported under PCP, MFT and MVT
and wi II be reentrant so that it can reside in the link pack area of MVT to further enhance performance. The LOADER is operational in 21K bytes of main storage, plus
that required for the program to be executed.
5734-SMI or equivalent is a prerequisite for sorting on OS with the 3330/3333.
Remote Job Entry 360.S-RC-536
360S-SM-023 does not support the 3330/3333.
OS Remote Job Entry allows OS jobs to be entered from remote locations
using binary synchronous communications. Output may be returned to the remote
work station submitting the job, to another remote control station, or at the central
computer. A job entry control language (JECl) is provided for operator communicati4n
and control. It features:
System Requirements -- In addition to the standard system reSidence, the sort/
merge requires, as a minimum, devices for each of the follOWing:
System input
Three intermediate stora!JE! (same device type) - 3 tape units or one DASD.
Initial input and final output (may be the same device) or the input device may also
be used for intermediate storage.
Devices for intermediate storage can be anyone of the following:
2400/3400 Series Magnetic Tape Units (except 3420 Models 4, 6, or 8
at 6250 BPI)
2311 Disk Storage Drive
2301 Drum Storage
2314 or 2319 Disk Storage Drive
3330 is not supported
Note:
9-track input requires 9-track for output, and, if tape is used, 9-track tape
for intermediate storage. If 7-track input is used, any combination of 7- and
9-track tape may be used for output or for intermediate storage.
The 2321 Data Call Drive and 2305 FHSF are not supported as a sort work
file.
System/360 using BOS or BPS, an 1130 Computing System, Model 20, 2780
Data Transmission Terminal or the 2770 Data Communication System may serve
as remote work stations. The 2770 and 2780 work stations can share the same
non-switched multipoint line or the same switched connection at the central computer.
The 1130 and Model 20 Work Stations can share the same non-switched multipoint
line.
.
The System/360, Model 20 and 1130 Work Stations can use the same switched
network connection (phone number) at the RJE central computer. (Not supported
inWTC).
Uses the binary synchronous communication system.
Provides completely automatic scheduling, initiation, execution, and output of
job data.
Notification of forms change requirements.
System restart
Uses BT AM with error recovery procedures
Started and stopped like OS readers and writer
System Requirements -- Operates under the MFT or MVT control program. MFT or
MVT device requirements apply. In addition, a 2701 or 2703 equipped with appropria~e features for binary synchronous communication in EBCDIC transparency mode, and
dIrect access storage space sufficient for storage of tables and work queues is required.
Space is dependent on application, but will normally not exceed one 2311 Disk Storage
Drive.
Dependent upon other installation requirements the MFT option may permit installation
of RJE in a system having 256K of main storage.
Not to be reproduced without written permission
P 3605.10
Mar 74
IBM Operating System
Graphic Job P'rocessor .3605-RC-541
on either an IBM 50 Magnetic Data Inscriber or a Magnetic Tape SELECTRIC
Typewriter) and creates a sequential data set using QSAM. (P69-64)
This processor allows an application user, such as an engineer, to conveniently
initiate and control jobs directly from the 2250 Display Unit. The jobs may
either be graphic in nature and utilize the 2250 or may be requests for batch
process in!!.. The Graphic Job Processor allows the user to LOG ON, SPECIFY
JOB STEP, DESCRIBE DATA, BEGIN JOB, BEGIN PROCEDURE, WRITE
MESSAGE ENTER DATA, CANCEL JOB, RECALL and LOG OFF. GJP is
supported under MFT or MVT. The system requirement is the 2250 Display Unit,
Modell or Model 11/ equipped with a minimum of 4096 bytes of buffer storage, the
alphameric keyboard, and the character generator.
Satellite Graphic Job Processor
System Requirements -- The Operating System utilities require the standard system
residence device and space on the auxiliary storage for the following data sets:
System input
Intermediate storage (varies with utility)
Pri nt output
In addition to the OS utilities, a number of independent utilities (36bS-UT-507)
are provided:
'
The independent utilities do not operate with the control program, but they support
the operating system with the following services:
360S-RC.,.543
'l,he Satell ite Graphic Job Processor (SGJP) is an extention of the Graphic Job
Processor aQd provides similar facilities. It enables an application user, such
as an engineer, to request the initiation of System/360 jobs from the 2250-4
attached to his 1130 comouter. He can initiate an OSI360 job to run in
conjunction with a related 1130 program. Once the programs are initiated, they
can utilize the FORTRAN Data Transmission Subroutines to transmit control
information and data between a proqram and each orocessor. He may also request
that a program be initiated in the background job stream of OS/360. SGJP is
supported under MFT and MVT.
TESTRAN and TESTRAN Editor 360S-PT-516
TESTRAN statements can be grouped or interspersed in source modules and will be
identified by the assemblers. The assemblers will produce from them a separate,
replaceable control section which can be deleted by the linkage editor. These
statements can also be assembled separately and link edited with a program to be
tested.
The TESTRAN editor processes the data placed in auxiliary storage by TESTRAN
during a preceding text execution of a load module. It edits and prints the data in a
format indicated in the symbol table produced by the assembler, unless an overriding
format has been specified through TESTRAN macro instructions.
The time used to process test output is minimized by:
Preventing runaway test execution' by allowing limits to be placed on the quantity
of test output and the number of T ESTRAN macro instrl!ctiQns.
Allowing selective editing and printing of test results according to any of eight
priority categories deSignated by the programmer.
Allowing test output editing and printing at any convenient time after test
execution.
System Requirements -- The minimum main storage requirement is 18K bytes.
Space is required in auxiliary storage for the following data sets:
System input
Print output
Test resu Its from interpreter
One intermediate - requires DASD
Restriction -- The instructions of S/370 are not supported by TESTRAN.
OS/360 Uti IiUes 360 S-UT -506
The Operating System utilities operate with the control program and provide the
follOWing features:
Moving and copying a data set or part of a data set from one volume to another.
Moving a data set from one locating to another on the same volume.
Unloading a data set onto a.removable volume and loading it at a later time to a
device of the same type as the original.
Copy, move, load and unload functions can be accomplished on groups of data sets
data sets cataloged under common high level qualifiers.
Printing or punching a data set, and printing information contained in the catalog
or volume table of contents.
Generating a data set based upon the contents of a sequentially organized input
data set. Fields within records may be repositioned and/or converted as
specified accounting to programmer specifications.
Updating source language modules and the macro instruction library.
Bui Iding and modifying the catalog data set.
Analyzing the contents of the system library when updating is required and creating
appropriate control statements for system maintenance.
Unloading disk resident data sets to 7-track tape.
Permitting inclusion of a control character in each logical record which controls
printer carriage spacing when the data set is printed.
Tape volume label creation.
Unloads an indexed sequential data set to a special format sequential data set and
reloads the indexed sequential data set at a later time.
Record overflow support in the move/copy uti lity.
Initial ize and assi gn alternate tracks to a direct access volume; dump and restore
the data contents of a direct access volume.
Reads input from a 2495 Tape Cartridge Reader, optionally edits the data (created
Initializing DASD's by writing home addresses and record zero for each track,
checking for defective tracks, initializing tracks to zero, and writing volume
tables of contents.
Unloading and loading data between DASD and a removable volume.
Recover/Replace Utility -- This utifity attempts to read data from a bad track and,
after the operator has corrected the data, replaces it on an alternate track of the'
direct access device.
Conversational Remote Job Entrt
360S-RC-551
Allows remote access to OS/360 via low-cost Printer Keyboard terminals. Terminal
users share a Central System/360 for conversational preparation and updating of programs and data, submission of jobs for execution, selective listing of job output -concurrently with normal background OS/360 operations. An easy-to-use command
language is provided to control entry, editing, inquiry and other communication and
control functions provided.
~eatures:
Supports 2740, 2741 and 1050 printer keyboard terminals using STAM
FORTRAN and PL/I statements are checked for intra-statement syntax errors
Logon security
Data Set Protection
Library storage of remotely entered programs and 'data
Administrative aids
Extensive data editing and manipulation capability
Operator control of network
Job Status inquiry at terminal or console
Routing of output data to central computer output devices or selectively to a
remote terminal
System Requirements: For MVT, a Systeml360 Model 50, 65, !>5 MP, 67 (65
mode), 75,85,91,195 or System/370 Models 145, 155, 155 II, 158*,165,
165 II, 168* , and 195 with at least 384K .bytes of main storage is required.
For MFT, a Systeml360 Model 40, 50, 65, 67 (65 mode), 75,85 or System/
370 Models 135, 145, 155, 155 II, 158*,165, 165 II, and 168* with at
least 256K bytes of main storage is required.
* MP models in UP mode.
Control program device requirements apply.
In addition, DASD space on a 2311 Disk Storage Unit or a 2314 or 2319 Disk Storage facility for CRJE tables, System Data Sets and work areas. Normally a portion of
one :2311 Disk Drive capacity will be sufficient. Additional DASD space must be provided for user library data sets and directories, the exact requirement for which must
be established by the using installation.
A 2701,2702,2703 with a Type I Terminal control, or 3704/3705 in emulation
mode is required on the multiplexer channel with appropriate features for attachment of
1050 (1051 control unit Modell or 2),2740 Modell, or 2741 terminals over
communications lines.
All 2740 terminals must have the Record Checking feature, and not have the
Station Control feature.
1f BTAM
On-Line Test Facilities are omitted from CRJE, full system resources must
be made available to the customer engineer for terminal maintenance when required.
Because of command chaining techniques,CRJE may not function properly when residing
in the 2361 Large Core Storage on the S/360 Model 50. Its use from LCS on the
Model 50 is therefore not recommended. CRJE in the 2361 on Models 65 and 75
will most likely operate correctly under conditions of normal I/O activity rates.
Not to be reproduced without written permission
II
IBM Operating System
Programming
RECOVERY MANAGEMENT AND DIAGNOSTIC AIDS
OS SERVICE AIOS 360S-DN-554
The Service Aids are a group of programs designed to improve the serviceability of OS
and to aid in Problem Detennination, debugging and system maintenance by:
SERO, SER1 & EREP for Models 40, 50, 65, 75 360S-DN-527
Recovery Management (RMS) for MVT and MFT
Models 65, 85, 57370 360s-DN-539
SERO, SER1 and RMS are model dependent Programming Support and provide several levels of recovery: (See table for applicable models)
MCH/CCH -
This is the highest level of RMS and provides maximum support for
Machine Checks and Channel Checks (i.e., Channel Control Checks,
Interface Control Checks, Channel Data Checks).
SER1/CCH -
This is the highest level of RMS on models which do not allow MCH
support. This can also be optioned on some models where MCH is
available. It provides full Channel Check Handling and selective
termination and recording on Machine Checks.
SER1 only -
This is the highest level of RMS on S/360 - M50 and below. It
provides selective tennination and recording on Machine checks and
recording on channel checks.
SER
~-
Provides recording prior to loading wait.
TABLE OF APPLICABLE MODELS
MOD.
MCH/CCH
All S/370
M85
M65MP
SER1/CCH
SER1
SER~
STD
STD
STD*
STD
OPT
OPT
M75,91/95
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
M50, below
*
OPT
• Gathering infonnation about the cause of a failure.
• Fonnatting and printing infonnation in a fonn that makes it easy to use.
• Aiding in the development and application of a fix for a given problem.
Included are:
Generalized Trace Facility (GTF)
The generalized trace facility (GTF) service aid is a debugging tool that can be
used to trace software behavior (system or problem program). GTF uses a hardware
instruction (Monitor Call) to detect occurrences of system events and to create trace
records. Probe 1m programs may also use a GTF macro instruction (GTRACE) to
record problem program data in the trace data set. Through the use of the GTRACE
macro instruction, GTF will utilize the monitor call (MC) instruction on models of
S/370 which have the hardware instruction and will provide support on models of
S/370 and all models of S/360 which do not have the instruction. The macro is
such, that programs which use it will run on models of S/360 and S/370 and will
utilize the MC instruction where it is available. Thus, for consistent, compatible
results, the interface to GTF and Monitor Call must be via this macro.
GTF provides the ability to single out those programming activities to be traced
within the system, including such things as all (or specific) I/O interrupts, all (or
specific) program interrlJpts, and all (or specific) supervisor call interrupts.
The output from GTF is a trace data set that can be used with a data reduction program (IMDPRDMP EDIT function) to edit the data set. The data reduction program
provides the capability to format specific trace activities. It operates as a problem
program that can be called via the job control language.
M195
M65
M67 (65 Mode)
P 3605.11
Mar 74
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
On M65MP, MCH & CCH must be speCified in order to SYSGEN. On the M85
& S/3 70, MCH & CCH wi II automatically be included.
On-line Test Executive Program (OL TEP) 360S-DN-533
The On-line Test Executive Program (OL TEP) is an optional function designed to
direct the selection, loading and execution of the On-line Test Sections (OL TS)
within the Operating System environment.
Ol TEP with the related OL TS COL TEP/OL n is designed to allow the testing of
Input/Output Hardware components of a system, concurrent with the running of customer jobs.
The OL TEP/OL T System is designed for:
Diagnosing I/O errors.
Verifying I/O hardware repairs and Engineering Changes.
ExerciSing a device requiring dynamiC adjustments.
Checking I/O hardware.
Integrity of customer data.
Analysis of System Error Recording Data
IMAPTFLE
This program aids in the application of a PTF to the system by producing the JCL
statements that are required for the proper application of the temporary fix. When
a PTF is to be applied to a module, the user supplies infonnation on the module
andCSECT to which the PTF is to be applied. The program then either produces
the necessary Job Control Statements for application of the PTFi or, if specified,
dynamically invokes the linkage editor to update the operating system.
• IMBLIST
This linkage Editor service aid program produces various fonnatted listings which
may be used for system serviceability and diagnostic purposes. Depending on
options specified on IMBLIST control statements the following listings may be
produced:
Fonnatted load module listings
Formatted object module listings
Load module map and cross-reference listings
Listings of the data stored in the CSECT Identification records (lOR) of load
modules
Load module summary data including entry point address, module attributes,
and the contents of the module's System Status Index (SSD
Lists program modifications to a load module library.
• IMASPZAP
This service aid program assists authorized personnel to:
As a job under OS it is called by standard Job Control Language or via a console
command and is under control of the Operating System at all times. It uses Operating
System faCilities to accomplish the testing and competes with other jobs in the system
for use of these facilities when running in a multiprogramming environment.
Inspept and modify instructions and data in any load module that eX,ists as a member
of a partitioned data set.
Definition of Test Runs can be entered via console or via reading sequential data records. Prompting is available on consoles to aid in defining tests to be run.
Dump an entire data set, a specific member of a partitioned data set, or any portion
of a data set residing ona direct access device.
Customer Engineering will supply the OlTs to the customer on magnetic tape or
cards. The OL Ts must be reformatted and link edited into a partitioned data set in
order to be used under the Operating System.
InpuVOutput Recovery Management Support .•• Extends Channels (#38JO for Model 85, #3851 for
Model 195) . . Integrated Storage Control feature (#4650).
Multiplexer Channel --Excludes: Burst devices (including byte devices with burst
mode options operating in burst mode) on a multiplexer channel, standard on S/360
Models 30, 40 and 50 and Multiplexer channel (#5248) on a System/360 Model
44, Existance of these devices is not recognized by the control program.
I/O Features
1285 Modell - Not supported on System/370 Model 135.
NOF (NCR Optical Font)
The following table shows the required system elements and the device types which may
1287 Models I, 2, 3,4 and 5
be used for each function:
Farrington 7B Font ••• 1428 and USASCSOCR Font ••• NOF (NCR Optical
Font) - Model 2 or 4 only ••• Numeric Handwritin!l ••• Optical Mark Reading •••
System Function
Units Permitted
Alphameric - Model 3 or 4 only.
ProceSSing Unit·
System/360 Model 30, 40,50,65, 65MP, 67 (65
1288 Model 1
mode), 75, 85, 91, 195, or System/370 Models 135,
Numeric Handwriting ••• Optical Mark Reading.
145, ISS, 15511, 158*,165,16511, 168*, and 195,
1403 Printer
Main storage of 64K bytes or more is required for PCP,
Universal Character Set Feature (#8641, Md12; #8640, Mdl3, Nl),
128K bytes or more for MFT and 256K bytes or more for
1419 MagnetiC Character Reader Modell
MVT . For problem program use only.
1052 Model 7, 3210, 3215, 2740 Modell ComOperator Console
1442 Card" Read Punch Model N2
pOSite Console, 3277 Model 2, 2260 Model I,
Card Image (#1531).
2250 Modell or 3, 3060, 3066, 2085 (5450),
1443 Printer Model Nl
2091, or 3158 (Note 3).
24 additional print positions (#5558)
2305 Fixed Head Storage Facility - Not supported on System/370 Model 135.
Card Input Unit
2540, 1442-Nl, 2501, 2520 or magneti'c tape
Features Two Channel Switch
3505, 3525 with Card Read (1533) or magnetic
2540 Card Read Punch
tape (Note 1).
Card Image (#1531)
Punched Output Unit
2540, 1442-Nl :a single 1442 cannot be both in2520 Card Read Punch
put and output) 1442-N2, 2520, 3525 or magnetic
Card Image (#1531)
tape (Note 1).
2501 Card Reader
Card Image (#1531)
1403, 1404 (continuous form only), 1443, 3211
Printer Output
2520 Card Punch
(Note 7) or magnetic tape (Note 1).
Card Image (#1531'
2311, 2314/2319, 2303 (Note 5), 2301 (Note 5)
Generating System Residence
2314 Direct Access Storage Facility
and 2305 (Note 5), 3330 (Note 5).
Feature #8170 Two Channel Switch
Genera~ System Residence
2311,2314/2319,2303,2301,23050r3330/
2400/2415 Magneti~ Tape Units ana L803 Tape Control Model 2
3333 (different unit from generating system residence).
Dual Density 800 - 1600 bpi (#3471 and #3472L
2401, 2402 Magnetic Tape Unit Models I, 2, 3,4, 5, 6, 8 (7-track).
Two Intermediate (work) data
2311, 2314/2319, 2301,23030r3330/3333
2403,2404 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control Models 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.
S. Notapplicable for starter system.
• .• Communicator 1-2 (#9071) ••• Communicator 3-4 (#9073) ••. 2 Control
6. Interchange of ASCII data on magnetic tape requires a unit that reads or writes one';'
SWitch (#1792) .,. 3 Control SWitch (#1793) •.• 4 Control Switch (#1794)
half inch, 9-track, 800 CPI NRZI tape. (Use of 1600 bpi tape while non-standard
••• Two-Channel Switch (#8100).
is not prohibited.)
MINIMUM SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
7. MVT and MFT only.
See sales manual pa~ for 3410/3411 magnetic tape subsystem to determine
CPUs supporting the 3410/3411,
Not to -be reproduced -without written permission
Programming
P 3605.13
Mar 74
I BM Operating System
2816 Switching Unit Model 1
All features for additional switching <11050, n051, n052, n055 f '2285,
'2286, t4455, 16392, t6393)'
•
.
2821 C(ortrGl Unit Model I, 4, 5
Column Blnary,(n990). For problem program use only.
Unfwrsal Character Set Adapter (t8637, '8638, t8639)'
2841 Storage COI'Irol Unit
Feature '6118 Record Overflow,
Feature t8100 Two-Chamel Switch.
2844 Auxiliary Storage Control
Feature 18171 Two Channel Switch.
2870 Multiplexer Channel -- Excludes:
l. Burst devices (including byte devices with burst mode options operating in
burst mode) on a multiplexer subchannei. The 2321 and magnetic tapes
are supported on the selector subchannels.
2. Cross channel devices (2804 Tape Control, 2404 Magnetic Tape Unit
and Control, 2816 SWitching Unit, 3803 with communicator feature and
either two control switch, three control switch or four control SWitch, 3803
with two channel switch feature .8100, 2841 Storage Control with Feature .8100 Two Channel Switch) attached between any 2870 selector
subchannel and any selector channel; or between any 2870 selector subchannel and a selector subchannel of a different 2870.
3. SEP and AFF parameters for device allocation ~re not supported.
2848 Display Control
Feature f4787 Line Addressing.
Local Support - Graphic Programming Services.
2880 Block. Multiplexer Channel
Two Byte Interface (.7850jt7851)
Telecommunication Terminals and Terminal Features
1030 Data Collection System ..
1050 Data Communication System.
1060 Data Communication System.
AT&T 8383, Models 33/35 TWX, WU 115A, WT Telegraph terminals.
2715 TransmiSSion Control Unit
Modell ... Expanded Capability (f3801), Local 2740 Adapter (.4850> ...
Model 2 ... Expanded Capability (f3801), Point-to-Point non-switched (19401),
Point-to-Pointswitched (19402), Multipoint non-switched (19403),
2740 Modell Communication Terminal
Dial Up ('3255), Station Control Ct7479), Transmit Control ('8028), 2760
Attachment (t8031), Record Chec~ing (t6114).
2740 Model 2 Communication Terminal
Record Checking (t6114), Buffer Recelv.e ('1499).
2741 Communication Terminal
Dial Up (13255), Interrupt Ct4708).
2760 Optical Image Unit
2260 Display Station
2265 Display Station
1130 Central Process Unit
Synchronous Communications Adapter Ct7(90) (operating in BSC Mode).
2972-8 General Banking Station
3505 Card Reader, Models B1, B2
Optical Mark Read (15450>
Read Column Eliminate (t6122)
Selective Stacker (t6555)
51/80 Column Interchangeable Read Feed (Model B2 only)
3525 Card Punch, Models PI, P2, P3
Card Read (tI533)
Multiline Card Print (15272)
Two-Line Card Print ('8338)
3211 Printer
18 Additional Print Posltions(l¥5554)
3811 Control Unit 18 Additional Print Positions
3830 Storage Control
Feature .8170 Two Channel Switch
Feature .8171 Two Channe1 Switch Additional
Telecommunication Features
2701 Data Adapter Unit
Autocall (11302, 1303, 1314), Dual Code ('3455), Dual Communication
Interface (,3463,3464,3465), Transparency (18029), EBCDIC code
(19060), ASCII code (t906l), 6-bit Transcode (19062).
2702 Transmission Control Unit
Autocall (11290>, Autopoll (113191, 2741 Break ('8055).
2703 Transmission Control Unit
Autocall ('1340, tl341), EBCDIC code ('7715), ASCII code ('7716),
6-bit Transcode ('7717), Transparency for ASCII (19100>,2741 Break
(f8055).
2715 Trarvnission Control Unit
Modell - Expanded capability ('3081), Local 2740 Adapter (14850).
Model 2 - Expanded capability ('3801), Point-to-Point Non-switched
('9401), Point-to-Point Switched ('9402), r.nultipoint
Non-switched ('9403),
3704/3705 Communications Controller
Note: EBCDIC Code, ASCII Code, Autopoll, EBCDIC Transparency, do not
have special feature codes on the 3704/3705, but the equivalent functions
are program supported as capabilities ofthe 3704/3705 Network Control
Program and Emulation Program.
System/370 Model 135 ICA (f4640)
Terminal Adapter Type I Model 2, (*9721-9728)
Terminal Adapter Type /11,(19753-9160) Synchronous
DATA Adapter Type 11(*9649-9656)
EBCDIC Code (Std), ASCII Code (*9681-9688)
6-Bit Transcode (*9689-9696)
Transparency ('9673-7680)
Autocall (t1290)
S/360 Model 20 Process Unit
Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (t2074), Automatic Calling
(t1315), Full Transparent Text Mode (14100), Station Selection ('7477)
High Speed (14500 or t450ll.
'
System/360, System/370 with 2701, 2703, 3704/3705 (Remote Station)
Features as as for 2701,2703 and 3705 under Telecommunication
Features except: 2701: 6-bit Transcode (19062) not supported.
2703: 6-bit Transcode Ct7717) not supported.
3705: 6-bit Transcode and ASCII Transparency are not
supported by the 3704/3705 Network Control
Program or the 3704/3705 Emulation Program.
S/360 Model 25 Integrated Attachment Feature
Synchronous Data Adapter ('7551, '7552), Autocall Adapter (#1300),
Dual Communications Interface ('3461), ASCII code in lieu of EBCDIC
('9001, '9002), Transparency (14751, '9752).
System/370 Model 135 Integrated Communication Adapter (14640) with a
Synchronous DATA Adapter Type II (*9649-9656).
EBCDIC Code (Std), ASCII Code (19681-9688).
6-Bit Transcode ('9689-9696).
Transparency (*9673-9680>
Autocall (tl290)
1800 System
Communication Adapter 17550, EBCDIC code .9321 thru 19328, ASCII
code 19331 thru 19338.
2770 Data Communication System
Multipoint Data Link Control 15010 ... EBCDIC 19671 ... ASCII '9672 ...
EBCDIC Transparency,3650 ••• Automatic Answering d340 ••• Conversational Mode U910 ••• Buffer Expansion U490 ••• Trans/Rec. Monitor
Print '7950 ••• Keyboard Correction 14690 •.• Display Format Control .3250
••• Synchronous Clock #7705 ••• Identification 14610.
2780 Data Transmission Terminal
Automatic Answering (#1340), Automatic Turnaround (tI350), Multiple
Record Transmission (#5010>, MultipOint Line Control (,5020l, EBCDIC
code 1#9670l, EBCDIC Transparency ('8030>, Identification Terminal ('7850>,
Dual Communication Interface EBCDIC Code
(9761), ACII (*9762), Identification (*9350>.
S/3 Central Process Unit
Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (12074), EBCDIC Transparency
('7850>, Station Selection 1#7477), Auto Call (11315), EBCDIC Code Ct9060>,
ASCII Code (#9061), Point-to-Point (19481), MultipOint ('9482), Switched
(t9483), plus additional specifications.
System/7 Communications Control (tI610) must be specified as a 2740 Modell
terminal with checking.
7770 Audio Response Unit operating in a switched network with: 1001 Data
Transmission Terminal, or a telephone set.
3735 Programmable Buffered Terminal
Multi-point Data Link Control (15010)
ASCII (19762), EBCDIC (#9761)
(continued)
Not to be reproduced without written permission
I ;.;:r~
P 360S.14
Mar 74
Programming
IBM Operating System
TERMINAL SUPPORT CHART 2
TERMINAL SUPPORT CHART 1
ACCESS METHOD
Terminal.
Openti",
with S/380
or SI:r10'
1030
1050
1060
WT Telegraph
AT&T 83B3 &
WUl15A
AT&TMdl
33/35TWX
2740Mdll
2740Mdl2
2741
2760
2260 (Local)
2260 (Remote)
2265
7770.3
S/360 & S/370"
Model 20
1130
2780
2770
2715 Mdl 1'"
2715 Mdl 2'"
2972·B, 2972·11
3735
1800
S/3
3277 (Remote)
3277 (Local)
3275
3284/3286
(Remote)
328413286
(Local)
Systeml1
3670
3780t
3741 Mdl 2
3741 Mdl4
3747
Not..:
Dlte
Chan
~
~ BTAM
A
A
A
A
Auto
4
5
4
4
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
PROGRAMMING SUPPORT
4
5
5
5
5
L
1
1
L
2
2
2
2
2
L
Q!M!.
~
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
2
2
2
2
:z
L
L
2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
X
X
A
A
A
A
A
12/74
A
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Channel Attachment:
Access Method:
1
2
4
5
L
X
=
=
=
=
-
=
=
=
Programming Support: X =
-
=
T =
aT =
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
12114 X
On·Ln
~Test
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
12/74
X
ERR
~
X
X
X
X
X
X
I!!!!!!-
X
X
X
COMMUNICATION CODE
apr.
Chkpt/
CtrI.
!!!!L
aT
T
T
aT
aT
aT
aT
T
aT
aT
aT
aT
T
T
T
aT
aT
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
T
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
T
aT
T
T
T
T
T
X
X
aT
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
.x
X
T
T
T
T
Supported on 2701 and M135 ICA only
Supported on 2701, 2703 and Mt35 ICA only
Supported on 2701. 2702 and 2703 only
Supported on 2702. 2703 and. M135 ICA
Supported on local Channel
Supported
Not supported
Supported by Access Methods
Not supported
Supported by TCAM only
Supported by aTAM & TCAM only
Autopoll is available on the 2701 and 2703 for terminals using a start·stop communication code and on the
2701 and 2703 for terminals using a BSC communication code.
System/l60 Models~O. 50. 65. 65MP. 67. 95. 91 and 195 (with 2701. 2702 or 2703).
Systom/370Models 135.145.155.15511.158., _,16511, 16Band 195 (with 2701, 2702. 2703 or Model
1351CA).
For datails on terminal support when computer is used with 3704/3705, see 3704/3705 Programming
Support Package.
Terminlil.
0pIrati",
with S/380
orS/370'
Type
~ BCD Other
1030
1050
1060
WT Telegraph
AT&T 83B3 &
WU 115A
AT&T Md133/35
TWX
2740Mdll
2740Mdl2
2741
2760
2260 (Local)
2260 (Remote)
2265
7770.3
S/360 & S/370
Model 20
1130
2780
2770
2715 Mdl 1'"
2715 MdI2'"
2972·8. 2972·11
3735
1800
S/3
SI1 134.5
600
3277 (Remote)
3277 (Local)
3275
3284/3286
(Remote)
3284/3286
(Local)
3670
3780t
3741 Mdls 2. 4
3747
Not..:
SS
BSC
l
X
Sl
Ml
R
Rl
R2
SS
SS
ss
ASCII
!!!!!J!!!!.
&-bit
Tran
X
X
X
X
SS
X
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
L
SS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Sl.Rl
SI.R
SI.R
SI.R
SI.R
X
X
Ml
BSC
X
X
L
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-x
X
X
SI
SI
SI
X
X
Ml.R
Ml,R
Ml.R
Ml.R
X
X
X
X
X
SI
X
X
X
X
X
Ml
Ml
Ml
Ml
Ml
X
X
Ml
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Ml
Sl.R X
Sl.R2
Sl.R2 X
x
Ml
Ml.R
Ml
Start/Stop
Binary Synchronous Communication
local Attachment (2715 Modell used BTAM PTP Non·switched programming support)
Supported
Non supported
Group of terminals which can share the same phone number(s)
Group of terminals which can operate on the same multipoint line
RJE Work Stations (2770 and 2780 may not share the same line/phone number with Processor
Work Stations)
= S/360 RJE Work Stations must use BaS/BPS RJE support
= When dialing in to a 3704/3705 in NCP mode. the 3741/3747 can use the same phone number
as oth er terminals in the group with the following restriction: when a 3741/3747 is dialing in.
the NCP must be configured with the 3741/3747 specified for that BSC line appearance. If a
3741/3747 is not dialing in. the NCP must not be configured with the 3741/3747 specified
for that BSC line appearance,
System/380 Models 40,50.65. 65MP. 67. 15. B5. 91 and 195 (with 2701 •. 2702 or 2703).
System/370 Models 135. 145.155. 15511. 158. 165, 165 II. 168 and 195 (with 2701. 2702. 2703 or Model
135ICA).
For details on terminal support when computer is used with 3704/3705. see 3704/3705 Programming
Support Package.
Not supported by System/360 Model 91.
t 3780 S~pported and specified as a 2770 without component select.
Not supported by System/360 Model 91.
t 3780 Supported and specified as a 2770 without component select.
Telecommunication Terminals and Terminal Features
~
X
X
System/360 Modals 25 and 30 with BaS/BPS or DOS; Models 40, 50, 65, 67, and 75 with BOS/8PS. DOS or
OS; and Models 85, 91. 195 with as. System/370 computers cannot operate as a terminal using as TCAIII
if the central computer uses as TCAM.
Systeml370 Models 145, 155. 155 II and 158 with DOS and as; and Models 165, 16511. 168 and
195 with as. Model 135 with DOS or as (MFT).
MP
~ (non-$WI
X
X
X
X
X
ss
PTP PTP
X
SS
L
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
L
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
SS
SS
BSC
L
BSC
EBCDIC
~
COMM. NETWORK
(continued)
3270 Information Display Systems
(Local and Remote)
3741 Model 2 Data Station, 3741 Model 4 Programmable Work Station
Terminal Identification (#7850)
Operator 10 Card Reader ('IF5450)
Data Set Attachment ('l¥c912 0 , 9121, 9122, 9123)
Expanded Communications (#1680)
Expanded Communications/Multipoint Data Link Control <#1685)
3747 Data Converter
Communications Adapter (#1660)
Data Set Attachment W9120, 9121, 9122, 9123)
HoUo be reproduced without written penniSllon
IB'4
P 3605.15
IBM Operating System
Programming
Mar 74
DEVICE SUPPORT
I/O Unit Support: The following units to a maximum of 768 devl_ are supported by lIIe Operating Sylten\.for lIIe indjcated function.
Input Job
InputlOutputUnlb
1052 Printer·Keyboard
1286 Optical Reeder
1287 Optical Reeder
1288 Optical Page Reeder
1403 Printer (MdlsNl, 2, 3 &7)
1404 Printer (Mdl 2) (continuous
Iorm Printer support only)
1419 Magnetic CIw'acter Reader
1442 Card Reed Punch (Mdl Nl)
1442 Card Punch (Mdl N2)
1443 Printer (Mdl N1)
2150CoIllOIe
2250 Display (Mdls I, 3)
2260 Dilllley
2260 Film Recorder
2282 Film Recorder/Scenner
2301 Drum (MdII85,86MP, 76,86, 91, 196 only, Note 9)
2302 Di* Storage (Notes 4, 9 end 21)
2303 Orum Storage (Note 9)
2306 FHSF IMdls85, 146, 166,I66on1y. Notes 9.22.261
2311 Di* Storage OrNe (Notes 7 and 9)
231912314 Di* Storage facility (Notes 7 end 91
2321 Oete CelI.OrNe (Notes 9 end 111
3331).1,2/3333-1 (SI36O. 85.195, 5/370· All
ModeIsl (Notes 9 end 241
2400 Magnetic: T_ Units.
7416 M..,etic Tape Units
2420 Megneiic: T_ Units
3410 Magnetic T_ Units (Note 261
3420 Megnetic Tape Units
2486 T_ Cartridge Reeder
2501 Card Reeder
2620 Card R_ Punch
2640 C.d Read Punch
2871 Peper Tape Reeder
2740 Communication Terminal
2741 Communication Terminal
2760 Oete Transmillion Terminal (Models 1 and
2, ESCDIC Tran--,cv Only)
1050 Data Communicetlon System (Keyboardl
Printerl
1130 Computing System
2nO Deta Communicetion System
5/360·20,26,30,40, 5O,65,65MP,1I7 (85 model, 75
85, 195, System/370 All Models
3211 PrinUlr
3505 Card R......
3526 Card Punch
3277 Display (Models 1 and 21
3275 Display
3284 Printer
3286 Printer
2596 C.d R_ Punch
3210 Printer Keyboard
3216 Printer Keyboard
3168 Pr~ing Unit in 3215 Mode with 3213
3168 Pr~ing Unit in 3270 Mode
3213 Output Printer
3060 System Console for 195
3066 System Console for 185, 16511 and 168
5460 lor 65
r.o.:
..!!!!!!!...
MVT InlOut
~
5.,-
I'rinwy
Output
~
X3
X2
X5
X2
X6
X3
X
X
X5
X5
X
X12
X12
XI
X
X
XI
Xl,23
XII
XII
XI
X
X23
X
X
X
X
X
X
Xl1,23
X28
X
X
X
X
!
!..
t
g
X18
X19
X20
X2
X2
X20
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X3
X6
X23
X
X3,8
X6,8
X13
X13
Xl0
X
X
Xl0
X17
Xl0
X
X3
X
X
X
X23
X
X
X
X
X
X
X23
X
X
X
X
X
X
X23
X
X
X
X
X
X
X23
X
X
X
X
X23
X
X
X
X23
X23
X23
X6
X5
X5
X
X15
X
X3
X
X
X27
Xl0
Xl0
X17
X
X
X
X23
X
X
X14
X
X
X
X
X
Xl0
X
X3.8
X
X
X
X
X5
X5
X5
X12
X12
X12
X12
Legend: C • Console· See console ~ion for specific modes supported
Q. Graphic Programming Service
S • Sequential ~ Methods
I . IndlllCed Sequential Access Method
P . Basic Pertitioned Access Method
D· 8IIsic Dirict Access Method
X· Function Supported
XII
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X12
XI2
XI2
X12
161
A Deta Set Utility (lESCRINIIs provldadtto reed data from the 2496 and cnIIIte a tIqtIentially
orlJllliZad data 1ft.
PCP and MFT for model 66 only.
As a _ric stationfor RJE.
QSAM (devic:e-dependlnt only).
OSAM (devic:e-dependlnt onI.y) for journal tapes; &SAM (deY~ only) for cut·form
documents).
&SAM (deYice-clependent only).
Not supported by ateckpoint/R-.t.
Multiple R8qIMI!lIng ..pported.
Rotational Posa1iori Sensing ..pport.
For meIIIIgII queues under TCAM.
168 for 2305-1'
168 and 168 for 2305-2
166 and 168 only.
Requires MCS (MFT and MVT only).
Rotational Position sensing support (except Model 135)
28)
27)
28)
§
X16
X16
MVT only.
The SelectIve Tape Usting Feature is not supported
Support lor reed or punch. but riot both simu.--..y.
Not supported by MVT.
Composite ConIOIe only.
Punch F_ R_ is not supported.
For mellllgllqueuesunder QTAM,
For u. with the MVT Output Writer; not fQI' system IftIIIAIIII.
File Scan not supported,
Asa_rIc station for RJE.
MVTendMFTonly.
Supported by DIDoes In MFT and MVT.
Supported only under eonv..tionIII Remota Job Entry.
Supported when attached to a . ._
channel or when attached to a . ._
PCI fIrtch is not included In the system.
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)
26)
£
X
11
21
3)
41
5)
61
7)
81
9)
101
111
121
13)
141
161
171
18)
191
Program
~
..bchanneI only if
Not to be reproduced without written perml.lon
IBM;
Programming
P 3&OS_16
Mar 74
IBM Operating System
SYSTEM GENERATION
System Function
This is rile process of preparing a specially tailored operating system to match the
machine configuration and operating system options selected by the user. This
process uses the Operating System and requires the following programs -Control Program
Data Management: Data Set Control, BSAM, QSAM, BPAM"
Assembler
linkage Editor
Utilities
System Requirements
The miniman main storage requirement including the resident control program nucleus,
is 128K bytes. The Operating System requires a minimum of one DASD device for
system residence but for SYSGEN the minimum DASD requirements are:
2314
1316 Disk
Disk Storage
~ ~
3330/3333
2316
Disk
3336
Disk Storage
Disk
Pack Module
Pack
To Generate:
A Non-TSO System
A T50 System
4
4
5
6
2
2
3
3
2
2
2
2
Note: While SYSGEN can be performed with 1-2314/2319 disk storage module plus
one other DASD device this i~ not recommended.
System Maintenance
The same "system requirements" are required for maintenance as' for generations since
some changes may require a new system generation.
Starter System
l!
-si
. PID will inciude the required libraries 3228 or '11>3236) or 7-track feature
('/16407). (See also Note 5)
4.
9-track. (See also Note 5)
5. Magnetic tape units supported include 2401, 2402, 24~3, 2415. (Models
1,2, and 3,4,5,6) 3410 (Models.l, 2, 3) and 342'0 (Models 3, 5, 7).
6. May not be used for both input and output.
7.
1404 Printer, using continuous form only, may be substituted.
8. Operator Console may be one of the following:
1052/2150 or
3210
or
3215
or
3158 in 3215 mode with a 3213
9.
The Starter System does not support the 3066 (165, 165 II, and 168 console)
and the 3158 Console in 3270 mode nor Models 85, 91, 195 Display
Consoles.
,Not to be . reprod.ucedwithout written permission
Programming
P 360S.17
Mar 74
I BM Operating System
Oistribution
Volume Number
Basic Proem Material
Program Component Name
Program Number
1
PL/I F
360S-NL-511
2
PL/IF
NL-511
3
For the 3330/3333 user: Two 2400 foot reels of magnetic tape, either 9-track (800
bpj), or tM 7-track (800 cpi Data'Conversion feature required), or one 9-track
magnetic tape (1600bpj).
PL/I F
PL/I Library
PL/I Syntax Checker
Graphic Job Processor
Graphic Subroutine Program
Graphic Program Services
NL-511
LM-512
PL-552
RC-541
LM-537
10-523
4
FORTRAN G
FORTRAN Syntax Checker
FORTRAN library
FORTRAN H
Service Aids
F0-420
FO-550
LM-501
FO-500
DN-554
Program components may be selected from the following list. Each component for
which program documentation and maintenance material is required must appear on
the program order form.
5
ALGOL library
ALGOL
ANS COBOL library
ANS COBOL
Recovery Management - Model 65
LM-532
AL-531
LM-546
CB-545
DN-539
6
COBOL E
CO-503
COBOL E Library
LM-504
Satellite Graphic Job Processor (SGJP)
RC-543
Assembler F
AS-037
Linkage Editor F
ED-521
LOADER
LD-547
Queued Telecommunication Access Method (QTAM) CQ-519
1130/360 Data Transmission
LM-542*
7
Sort/Merge and SORTUB
Report Program Generator (RPG)
SM-023
RG-038
8
Independent Utilities
OS Utilities
UT-507
UT-50.6
9
OS Utilities
BaSic Telecommunication Access Method (BTAM)
Basic Direct Access Method
CO-503
COBOL E
BaSic Telecommunications Access Method (BTAM)
CQ-513
Queued Telecommmications Access Method (QTAM)
CQ-519
CQ-548
Telecommunications Access Method .
Basic
Program Number
Extension
Distribution Medium
Type
Code
User Volume
Requirement
none
DTR 7DC/800 26
DTR 9/800
2S
DTR 9/1600
29
none
none
none
Machine Readable Material: Object material for Assembler E.
Optional Program Material
Documentation: One copy of the optional program material list.
Machine Readable Material: Source material for Assembler E.
Ordering Information: Program Number 360SAS036
Program Number
Extension
Distribution Medium
Type
Code
User Volume
Requirement
Basic
none
DTR 7DC/SOO 26
2S
DTR 9/S00
29
DTR 9/1600
none
none
none
Optional
none
MT 7DC/SOO 26
2S
MT 9/S00
29
DTR 9/1600
01
01
none
For microfiche and program logic manuals see System/360 and System/370 Bibliography,
GA22-6S22 and the Accumulative Index of Publications and Programs, GN20-0360.
Linkage Editor E •
Basic Program Material
Documentation: One copy of Linkage Editor and Loader (GC2S-653S-Sl; linkage Editor and Loader Installation Guide (GC2S-6429-0 Including Basic Program
Material List>.
Machine Readable Material: Object material for Linkage Editor E.
Optional Program Material
Documentation: One copy of the Program LogiC ManuaI is an optional feature
of CALL-OS. When COBI is included, terminal users can prepare as jobs and submit those jobs via terminal commands to the as batch-processing environment. All
or a portion of the output of submitted jobs can be saved for printing at a terminal.
Terminal users can inquire about the status of submitted jobs or data sets and keep
or scratch specific jobs or data sets.
Utilities: CALL-OS provides the user with several utility programs for the creation
and manipulation of the direct access data sets employed by the system. These utilities are used to perform system build, data base creation and maintenance, and
accounting functions.
The system build function refers to the initial establishment of CALL-OS under OS.
For the user installation, this serves as a simplified means of allocating data set
space and selecting a CALL-OS configuration. A final allocation of resources,
depending on specific installation requirements, can be made at job initialization
time.
Data base creation and maintenance is facilitated through use of CALL-OS utilities
designed to run under OS in a batch-processing environment. Operations such
as the follOWing can be performed on a CALL-OS data base: formatting and maintaining the CALL-OS index data set, reorganization of the data base, recreating part
or all of the data base from a backup tape, outputting CALL-OS files in OS format,
punching files in card format with program files formatted to be compatible with as
batch compilers, listing files, deleting files, writing files to tape, and inserting or
replacing files by means of tape, disk, or card input.
Under SVSLlB password authorization, one user or a range of users can be validated.
Each validated user can, thereafter, upon specifying his user number and password,
interact with CALL-OS.
On-line accounting routines provide statistics of processor and terminal connect time.
The accounting utility supplements these statistics.by monitoring disk usage and can
provide a tape journal of usage information to be used, for example, as input to an
installation's billing routine •.
Performance: CALL-OS handles the high volume of diverse activity present in a problem solVing environment, and provides the fast response required of an individualized
computing system.
Obtain listings of program files
Choose a language processor for compilations
Compile and execute programs
Obtain information relative to terminal connect time, CPU time, program files, and
data files
Use routines residing in CALL-OS system libraries
Enter programs and data via paper tape
As is true in all multiprogramming environments, the performance of one task may be
impacted by other tasks. CALL-OS specifically addresses this situation through internal features such as dynamic relocation of terminal user programs and dynamic
reassignment of dispatching priorities. The system provides rapid response for those
functions (for example, program statement entry) where fast response is required, wh!le
giving lower priority to those functions (for example. extensive calculation> where such
response is not required.
Create paper tape output on-line
Submit jobs from the terminal for OS batch proceSSing
Scan (print), inquire about, and keep or scratch all or a portion of the output from
jobs submitted from a terminal to OS batch proceSSing
Through the terminal command language, the user is able to access those resources,
within the system, which are applicable to his particular computing problem. The
language is structured so that the user may concentrate on problem solution and not
on the intricacies of the computing machinery.
.
Because of the dynamic nature of user problems, and the manner in which they are
handled, no definitive statement may be made regarding the impact of CALL-OS on
any other task in the system, or vice versa. For maximum performance, however, the
CALL-OS task must have the highest dispatching priority within OS
Highlights: Some of the highlights of the CALL-OS system follow:
Highly' responsive individual computing system under OS MFT or MVT
CALL-OS BASIC (360A-CX-44X)
The CALL-OS BASIC language is based upon the BASIC time-sharing language
originally developed at Dartmouth College, Hanover, New Hampshire. This language
was specifically designed to be easy to learn and easy to use. It is ideally suited
as a first entry language for new users, and provides a wide range of capabilities for
experienced programmers.
CALL-OS PL/I (360A-CX-45X)
For more complex programs, the powerful CALL-OS PL/I langu~ge is provided. This
Concurrent batch-processing capability under
Dynamic assignment of dispatching priorities
Extensive terminal command language
Multiple programming languages:
CALL-OS BASIC
CALL-OS PL/I
CALL-OS FORTRAN
Not to be reproduced without written permission
as
:!:====-=
: :~=
P 360S.20
Mar 73
IBM Operating System
Programming
Structure designed for problem solVing, including:
The minimum peripheral equipment required for on-line operation with each of these
CPU's is shown below.
Terminal checkout of CALL-OS user programs
System/360 Model 50HG:
Ease of modification and editing of user programs
Optional storing of programs (for example, "frequently used application programs)
in object format
Multiprogramming within a Single task area
One selector channel ••• One 2314 Storage Control Model Al ••• One 2312
Disk Storage Model Al ••• One 2702 or 2703 Transmission Control ••• Two
terminal consoles (see below)
System/370 Model 145H (393K , as defined above):
'.;C,ompiler-generated, dynamically relocatable code
Facility to accept source programs, program-requested data, and system commands
entered via paper tape, and to provide output on paper tape, formatted as required
for reentrance into CALL-OS
Extensive CALL-OS data-base file manipulation and maintenance capabilities
avai lab Ie via off-line COS batch-oriented) CALL-OS uti lities
Faci lity for terminal entry of OS batch jobs and subsequent printing of t .. ~
outpuLbf submitted jobs at a user terminal via the CALL-OS Batch Interface (COBI)
option
Main Storage Hierarchy support. to prOVide segmented operation in either central
processor storage and/or IBM 2361 Core Storage
Use: The CALL-OS system is initiated as a job through use of OS job control
language (JCLl statl;l11ents. Variations in the confiQuration of terminals and available
I ibraries may be attained by the 'inclusion or exclusion of speCific data definition COD)
statements at system initialization time.
When the system is in operation, a terminal user may communicate with the system by
dialing the computer. A dialed call is answered automatically. The terminal command
language provides data and program security to interactive users of CALL-OS and
allows each user to initiate his own terminal activity.
Customer Responsibilities: The customer is responsible for performing the following
hmctions:
The ordering and satisfactory installation of all required communications equipment
The ordering and installing of at least one of the three language processors that
function under this system (See nCALL-OS BASIC 360A-CX-44X," "CALL-OS
PL/I 360A-CX-45X," and "CALL-OS FORTRAN 360A-CX-46X" on succeeding
pages of this manual.)
Assuring that proper steps are taken to maintain the security of his confidential
programs and data files
An OS System Generation to include support for CALL-OS devices, the
storage protect function, the interval timer function, and one "user" SVC (prOVided
with the CALL-OS system)
Allocating DASD space for the CALL-OS Executive and libraries
Building a CALL-OS Executive and data base
One IBM 2319 Disk Storage Facility Model AI ••• One IBM Integrated·File
Adapter feature (#4650) ••• One IBM 2702 or 2703 Transmission Control •••
Two terminal consoles (see below)
System/370 Model 155HG:
One block multiplexer channel ••• One 2314 Disk Storage Control Model Al •••
One 2312 Disk Storage Model Al ••• One 2702 or 2703 Transmission Control
••• Two terminal consoles (see below)
The two terminal consoles are used for system communication. One serves as a
command console from which the operator issues special system' commands. The
other serves as a communications console for recording system error messages and
activity. The OS system console is used to initialize CALL-OS and may serve
as the communications console, thus reducing to one the number of terminal cor.~olcs
required.
Depending on 'the utility functions to be utilized, additional peripheral equipment may
be needed. This equipment includes:
One printer output unit, OS supported, with 120 print pOSitions and graphics
equivalent to the PN print arrangement
One punched output unit (See OS minimum system requirements)
One card input unit (See OS minimum system requirements)
One 0 S-supported magnetic tape unit (any model)
CALL-OS is designed to operate with either the standard interval timer available on
the System/360 Model 50 or 65 <16.667 millisecond resolution), or the standard
interval timer available on the System/370 Models 145,155, and 165 (3.3 millisecond resolution).
Since the execution of a job may be fragmented into many small pieces, some of which
may be less than 16 millisecond duration, use of the standard resolution timer on the
System/360 Model 50 or 65 could lead to failure to record such fragments during
some executions. Therefore, the high-resolution timer <13.02 microsecond resolution) is recommended for repeatable program execution time and most accurate accounting on the System/360 Models 50 and 65. Appropriate RPQ numbers are E15092
and E43528 for the Model 50 and Model 65, respectively.
2702 Configuration
Type
If the CALL-OS Batch Interface (COBD option is utilized, the customer is also responsible for:
.
Model or
Feature
Building COB I data sets (via a COBI utility program)
2741
Related
Converting catalog procedures for use by COBI
Feat~~es
4615
9684
8055
3233
9696
TTY
33/35
Features
7912
RPQ-E62920
3233
If COBI is selected for use in an MFT environment, the OS subtasking option is
required.
Note: A CALL-OS user program lis~ing is available on
microfiche and may be ordered from the IBM Distribution Center, Mechanicsburg.
RPQs will not be accepted at this time.
CALL-OS PL/I:
(360A-CX-4SX)
Combines many features of the full PL/I-F language deSigned to
cover a wide range of programming applications. A basic factor
underlying the deSign of PL/I is that programmers have common
problems, regardless of the different appl ications with which they are concerned. CALLOS PL/I enhances this concept by presenting a problem solving facility in a convenient,
terminal-oriented, time-sharing environment.
Description: The CALL-OS PL/I compiler (360A-CX-45X) operates within the CALLOS System (360A-CX-42X) time-sharing environment. CALL-OS operates under the
Operating System in either an MFT or MVT environment.
The CALL-OS System supports two additional compilers that operate in conjunction
with CALL-OS PL/li CALL-OS BASIC (360A-CX-44X) and CALL-OS FORTRAN
(360A-CX-46X). The combination of compilers available within the system is an
installation option.
A user's program consists of a single external procedure and the runtime library routines
needed to support it. Although the external procedure may contain internal procedures,
there are no facilities for linking separately compiled external procedures.
Differences between the full PL/I language and the CALL-OS PL/I language are identified in the CALL-OS PL/I Language Reference Manual, GH20-0700.
Performance: To meet the objectives of fast response in a time-sharing, problem
solVing environment, the CALL-OS PL/I compiler is deSigned as a reentrant one-pass
compiler that produces relocatable object code for immediate execution. If errors are
discovered during compilation, appropriate error messages are returned to the terminal
user, and further handling of the user program is terminated.
Features: Capability to handle a variety of data types, including: character string
and complex numeric data ••• Extended array facilities ••• FleXible, stream-oriented,
input/output faCilities, including: list-directed, data-directed and edit-directed data
specification ... A large number of built-in functions ... User-controlled processing
of program generated interrupts ••• Free-form source language statement format.
Use: When the CALL-OS System is in operation, a terminal user may gain access to
the"System by dialing the computer. If a line is available, his call is automatically
answered. Once the terminal user has "signed on", he may request the PL/I compiler
by the terminal command: ENTER PL/I. He may then proceed to develop a PL/I
program by entering his statements, via his keyboard, as specified in the CALL-OS
PL/I Language Reference Manual, GH20-0700. Compilation and subsequent execution of his program is then initiated by the entry of the terminal command: RUN.
Customer Responsibilities: The customer is responsible for performing the foiliwing
functions:
The ordering and installing of the CALL-OS Executive and Utilities System~
360A-CX-42X.
The ordering and. installing of the CALL-OS PL/I Language Compiler,
360A-CX-45X.
Programming Systems: The CALL-OS PL/I compiler is written in the OS Assembler
language. To install and maintain CALL-OS PL/I, the user must follow the requirements as stated for the CALL-OS Executive and Utilities Program, 360A-CX-42X.
There is no direct communication between CALL-OS PL/I and OS.
Minimum Machine Requirements: For information regarding the machine requirements
for CALL-OS PL/I, refer to the sales manual for CALL-OS, 360A-CX-42X.
Basic Program Material
Documentation: Application Directory - The following SRL Publication is shipped
by plO with each initial order: CALL-OS PL/I Language Reference Manual,
GH20-0700.
If only the publications or if additional copies are required, order them from the IBM
Distribution Center, Mechanicsburg -- not from PID.
Machine Readable: The complete CALL-OS PL/I Language Compiler, including
macros and source statements, is distributed on one Distribution Tape Reel or 888258 <*20&5 attachtnent).
Writing device support for any real-time device except those devices explicitly
supported by RT M - see highlights above.
Resolving conflicts between RT M and programs which contain time-dependent or
time-critical coding. The performance of programs such as teleprocessing access
methods or on-line diagnostics, for example OlTEP, might be influenced by RTM.
Ensuring that real-time events written in high-level language do not use OS
facilities impliCitly or explicitly.
Ensuring that overall system integrity is maintained when user-provided interrupt
processors are executing (These routines execute in supervisor state).
i;:nsuring that RTM is loaded last and terminated first when operating with other
systems which modify the new PSWs.
External Interrupt (*3895) and Direct Control (#3274).
Programming Systems: RTM operates in an MFT or MVT environment (except MP65).
The system configuration is dependent upon the OS requirements, plus the hardware
requirements of the real-time application program. The program is written entirely in
Assembler Language making extensive use of SET A variables to reflect the system
configuration. Each proposed real-time system configuration should be analyzed indiVidually to ensure optimum performance. The Monitor is structured to run in an MFT
, or MVT environment and to provide real-time services for one or more separate jobs.
The program occupies a minimum of 15K bytes of storage. This requirement varies
with the amount of queue space reserved for stacking of OS I/O interrupts and the
number of real-time devices defined.
This program is released to work with OS Release 18 and all subsequent releases,
verSions, and modifications unless so stated in a future revision of this document.
Use: Real-time problem programs are entered in the normal job stream and scheduled
'I)y11S with full use of OS facilities. These problem programs inform the Real Time
Monitor of their presence in the system through the use of a FORTRAN subroutine or
Assembler-Language macros. The problem programs have full use of the Real Time
Monitor for scheduling real-time input/output and CPU time.
The Real Time Monitor, and thereby the real-time problem programs, are given top
priority in contending for CPU time, with non-real-time jobs being scheduled by OS.
Whenever data proceSSing is not required by the real-time problem prO«.lrams, the
Monitor allows non-real-time proceSSing to proceed under OS.
Within OS, the Real Time Monitor is viewed as a normal job, It is subject to all the
rules of job operation in the OS environment. OS is viewed by RTM as an
extension of ~TM's OWIl interrupt processors. The link between OS and RTM
is via OS new Program Slatus Words (PSWs).
The Monitor is entered into the OS environmentlhrough the normal job stream. Once
in execution, the Monitor goes through its initialization. First, it gain$ supervisor
Status by issuing an SVC call to an RTM-provided SVC routine included in a pr~vious
system generation and link edit ohhe OS nucleljs. Then Monitor initialization
disables all interrupts and replaces OSs new PSWs with its own, thus gaining conlrol
of the hardware interrupts. The original OS new PSWs are s,ved, with the problem
program bit on, to provide the link between lhe Monitor and OS. NQte: RTM, in
ruooing OS as a problem program wi II cause some degradation of the non-real-time
work. All OS privileged, superviSor instructions will be intercepted and re-executed
by RTM.
,.
Jobs which aoe to be real-time jobs can be introduced into the OS job stream. These
jobs can use the full complement of OS facilities. Once in execution the job identifies
itself to the Monitor by issuing an RTOPN (real-time open) call. The job can then be
Thi s program operates ~n System/360 alld System/37 0 configurations,
subject to the compatibi lity constraints announced for System/3 70. (See A Guide
to the IBM System/370 Model 145 (GC20-1734l, A Guide to the IBM ~70
MOdel 155
Voltage and Color
Permitted Features:
3851
3855
Expanded Capability (for additional lines)
Expansion Feature (for additional lines)
IBM 2702 Modell Transmission Control
Required Features:
Programming Systems: The ASP system programs are written in OS Macro Assembler
Language. Programs to provide additional functions, known as Dynamic Support Programs CDSPs), can be incorporated into the Support Processor by the customer at his
installation. These programs also must be written inOS Macro Assembler Language.
The minimum OS control program that will execute ASP includes the Multiprogramming
with a Variable Number of Tasks (MVT> - 360S-CI-535, a linkage editor, and the
OS Utilities - 360S-UT-506. The OS Macro Assembler program (F-Ievell must be
available if program modifications are anticipated. The H-Ievel Assembler program
product may be used to assemble the ASP system.
4612 IBM Line Adapter (one/console)
4615 IBM Terminal Control Type I
9684
Speed Selection (for #4615)
9696 Terminal Control Base
9080 or 9081 Cabling
Specify Voltage and Color
Permitted Features:
7955
31 Line ExpanSion
Not to be reproduced without written permission
:
~ ::r~ Programming
P 3605.27
Nov 73
IBM Operating System
Perrrlltled Features:
IBM 2703 Modell Transmission Control
1002
4485
4785
5475,
Required Features:
7505
Start Stop Base Type I
4619 IBM Terminal Control Base
4696 IBM Terminal Control Type I
4688 IBM Line Set 2 (one/eight consoles)
4878 Line Speed Option
9080 or 9081 Cablil19
Specify Voltage and Color
5855
IBM 3060 Systeffi/360 or System/370 Model 195 System Console
SpeciFy Voltage
5476 Operator Control Panel (second) is permitted
IBM 3Q66 System/370 Model 165 System Console
Perm itted Features:
1440
IBM System/360 Model 85 Feature f5450 Operator Console
Base Expansion (n44Q)
IBM 3705, Communications Controller (Properly configured)
The 2701, 2702, 2703, .and 3705 (Emulator Mode) may include ot.her features
(j.e., adapters, speed selections, tenninal controls) ONL V IF THEV ARE NOT
associated with the ASP system consoles.
-- - -- ---
IBM 3210 Console Printer/Keyboard, Models 1 and 2
Required Features:
Specify Voltage, Cabling
7844 Adaptet' for 145 or 155 (Model 1)
7845 Adapter for 145 or 155 (Model 2)
.IBM 2260 Modell Display Station
IBM 3215 Console Printer/Keyboard
Required Features:
Required Features:
4766 Alphameric Keyboard
9880 or 9881 Voltage
Cables (ordet'ed separately)
Specify Voltage, Cabling
Perm,tted Features:
Permitted Feature:
9430
Absolute Vectors and Control
Graphic Design
Light Pt'n
5476 Operator Control Panel
Prollrarnmed Function Keyboard
9162 or 9167 Pin Feed Platen
Long Cable Attachment
IBM 3277 Model 2 Display Station
The 2260 must be attached through a localiSM 2747 Model 3 Display Control as
follows:
ISM 2848 Model 3 Display Control
Required Features:
4787
Line Addressing
Channel Adapter
Specify Voltage, End Cover, Color, System Attachment
9011
Required"F eatures:
9098 EBCDIC Character Set
4630-4633 EBCDIC Keyboard
Specify Voltage
Order Cables Separately
All other features are permitted
Must be attached via 3272 Model 2 (see below)
IBM 3272 Model 2 Control Unit
Permitted Features:
7928 Printer Adapter (Required for 1053 Model 4 [see below)
5340 (534}) Nondestructive Cursor (and Adapter)
3858 3859
Expansion Unit
IBM 3284 Model 2 Printer (attached to 3272 Model 2 [see above])
IBM 3?86 Model 2 Printer (attached to 3272 Model 2 [see above])
Restricted Features:
4656 4657
Specify Voltage, System Attachment, Operator Console
3250 Device Adapter (one!four consoles (after the first fourl)
IBM 7412 Modell (RPQ) Printer/Keyboard (similar to 2150 but uses a 3215 type
printer)
IBM Terminal Adaptet' Type III
IBM 1053 Model 4 Printer (Available with the 2848)
Specify Voltage, Print Element, Line Feed,. Character Spacing
1006 Accelerated Carrier Return Permitted
IBM System/370 Model 158 Opet'ator's Console
ASP Region Sizes
Recommended minimum ASP region sizes are:
IBM 1443 Model N1 Printer
Specify Voltage, Print Arrangement, Type .Size, Color
All other Features are permitted
IBM 1403 Models 2, 3, 7, or N1 Printet'
Single Processor (No RJP)
Add for RJP
Add for each additional Main
Detailed ASP Version 3 main storage requirements may be calculated from infonnalion
contained in the ASP System PloQrammer's Manual (GH20-1292>'
Required Features:
SpeciFy Voltage, Print Chain!Train, Color
9709 Voltage Adaptet' (Model 2 or 3)
1416 Interchangeable TrClin Cartridge (Model 3 or N1)
All other features are permitted
Note: These are complex configurations and must be reviewed according to established
'briinch office assessment procedures.
.
Basic Program Package:
Documentation:* System Programmer's Manual (GH20-1292), Application Programmer's Manual (GH20-1291), Operator's Manual (GH20-1289), Message
and Codes Manual (GH20-1290).
IBM 3211 Model 1 Printer . The DPS programs
support up to 32,768 bytes of core storage.
Minimum system requirements for the tape and disk programs outlined below apply to
program generltlon Ind eleecutlon. To handle the program distribution Ind maintenance,
tape or disk, the following additional requirement applies -- one card punching device
(2520,2560,1442).
Users of Model 20 configurations that do not satisfy this requirement must have access to an adequltely conflgurated Model 20 system If thl!Y des Ire to punch out contents of the IBM-supp"ed program distribution, tape or disk. Por the tape system
only, users receiving the program distribution tape may punch out the contents on
System/369 Model 30 or higher.
For submodel 2, 5 or 6
For generation: A 2020 Processing Unit Model C2, C5, or C6 a 2415 Model lor 4
Magnetic Tape Unit (or a like number of 2401 MagneliC Tape Units, Modell, 2 or
4 in lieu of 2415s on the.Submodel 5 only), the first drive must be 9-track, the
.
second drive may be 9-track or 7-track with Data Conversion feature, a Card Reader
(2501, 2520( 2560), It Printer (2203, 1403 for printing of diagnostic messages,
a Punch (2520,2560,1442) If punching of the object deck is required.
For execution: A 20~0 Processing Unit Model C2, C5, or C6 and I/O devices as
speCified by the uS'er.
•
For Submodel 4
For generation: A 2020 Processing Unit Model C4; a 2415 Modell or 4 Magnetic
Tape Unit, the. first drive must be 9-track, the second drive may be 9-track or 7-track
with Da~ Conversion feature; a 2560 MFCM Model A2 for card reading, and punching
If a punched object deck is required; a 2203 Model A2 Printer for printing of
diagnostic messages.
For execution: A 2020 Processil1g Unit Model C4 and I/O devices as specified by
the user.
DPS , a 2415 Magnetic Tape Unit
(or a like number of 2401 MagnetiC Tape Units, Model I, 2 or 4 in lieu of 2415s
on the Submodel 5 only), if tape functions are required, a printer (1403, 2203), if
printing is required and/or diagnostic messages are to be printed, a card punch <1442,
2520; 25(0), if punching is required •
• For submodei 4
A 2020 ProceSSing Unit Model 63 or 84 with a 2560 Model A2 and ... for "Print
Storage" and" Basic Trace" a 2203 MO,del A2 Printer.
Except Trace
Basic Trace (4K)
Basic Trace (8K)
Basic Trace (12K)
Basic Trace , a card punch
(1442,2520,2560), i{punching is required, a 2415 Magnetic Tape Unit (or a
like number of 2401 MagnetiC Tape Units, Modell, 2 or 4 in lieu of 2415s on the
Submodel5 only) if tape input and/or output is required, a printer (1403, 2203) for
program listing and diagnostic messages.
For execution: Depends on user's program. All Model 20 configurations are supported.
• For submodel 4
For program generation: A 2020 Processing Unit Model BC4, a 2311 Disk Storage
Drive Model 11 or 12, a 2560 Model A2, a 2415 Magnetic Tape Unit if tape input
and/or output is required, and a 2203 Model A2 Printer for program listings and
diagnostic messages.
' .
For object program execution:
are supported.
Depends on users program. All Model 20 configurations
Input/Output Control System (lOCS):
10CS routines are provided for System/360
Model 20 Card, Tape ariJ Disk systems.
The Input/Output Control System (lOCS) relieves the user of mueh of the programming required for utilization of the System/360
Model 20 I/O units.
10CS provides the user with macrO-instructions to -avoid the coding of complete input!
output routines inCluding data and error checking. - DTF type statements define the
device, the function, data fnrmat and other speciai requ irements .
The !nput/Outpllt areas as well as the exit-routines referred to by the definition statements must be defined in the sourc!! program.
Card loes
The CPS laCS provides routines that perform the following functions:
Input/Output functions and scheduling to optimize ,CPU time-sharing ability
(Tape 360U-AS-1301 [360U-AS-153 for generating and assembling BSCA 10CS
programsl.
Error detection and restart procedures
GPU interruption handling
Not to be reproduced without written permiaalon
IBJ4
Programming
The DTF statements are input to a generator program. From the information.in these
statements, the necessary coding in symbolic language for the different rO\Jtinesis
generated and then assembled in conjunction with the main source program or separately.
The macro-instructions inserted in the source program is processed by the Basic
Assembler.
The CPS 10CS can be used in conjunction with the System/360 Model 20 10CS
for the Communications Adapter (CIOCS), Model 20 Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter IOCS (BSCA 10CS), and/or the System/360 Model 20 10CS for the
1419 Magnetic Character Reader.
Minimum system requirements--
[360T -10-0021
. Input/Output Control Systems for 1255/1259/
1419 Magnetic character Readers (MeR IOCS):
TPS/DPS Matro Definitions
provide the user with efficient
and tested routines whith by
means of macro instructions and interrupt routines control and optimize Maqnctic
Reader input and printer output. It provides I inkage to I/O routines for tard tape
and disk de/ices.
'
This program consists of a set of macro definitions, to be inc.luded in the macro library
of the system tape/pack. If the TPS/DPS I/O and Monitor Macro Definitions are
expanded by these macro definitions the T PS/DPS Assembler wi II qenerate routines
for the 1419, 1255 or 1259 as well as for card, tape and disk devices when
encountering macro instructions in the user's source program.
ThE: routines for the Magnetic Character Reader perform the following functions:
• For submodel 1, 2, 5 or 6
F or generation: The requirements are the same as those for the BaSic Assembler.
Note: In a system that has only a 2520 Card Read Punch as card unit, only program
routines referring to this unit and to a printer may be generated.
For object execution: The input/output configuration depends upon processing requirements. In addition to a 2020 Processing Unit Model Bl, B2, C5 or C6, at
least one reading device such as a 2560 MFCM.or 2520 Card Read Punch or 2501
Card Reader must be avai lab Ie.
• For submodel 3 or 4
For program generation:
Assembler.
P 360T.4
F",b 72
IBM System/360 Model 20
The reguirements are the same as those for the Basic
For object program execution: The input/output configuration depends on processing
requirements. In addition to a 2020 Processing Unit Model B3 or 84, a 2560 Model
A2 MFCM must be available.
BK Tape and 12K Disk 10CS
The 10CS consists of a set of macro definitions contained in the macro library of the
Tape Assembler (BK Tape) or Disk Assembler (12K Disk). By means of DTF statements the assembler generates a set of specialized input/output routines.. GET and
PUT type macro instructions included in the problem program are translated into linkages to the appropriate input/output routines. The input/output routines for tape
and disk files make use ofthe 1/0 routines
of a monitor.
Therefore, all
programs processing tape or disk files using 10CS must run under a Monitor.
In addition to the features provided by IOCS for punched-card equipment, Tape (BK)
and Disk , a printer <1403, 2203), for diagnostic messages and printing of directories,
etc., a card punch (1442, 2520, 2560>, if card output of Library Service programs
and/or Linkage Editor is required or a bootstrap card is to be punched by the backup and
restore program, a 2415 Magnetic Tape Unit with at least one 9-track head or, if all
heads are 7-track, the Data Conversion feature, if tape input and/or output is required.
• For submodel 4
A 2020 Processing Unit Model BC4 •• , one (two for the Copy System Program) 2311
Disk Storage Drive Model 11 ,or 12, a 2560 Model A2, a 2203 Model A2 Printer (for
diagnostic messages and printing of directories, etc.), a 2415 Magnetic Tape Unit
with at least one 9-track head or, if all heads are 7-track, the Data Conversion
Feature, if taP7 input and/or output is required.
DPS Control and Service Programs
Disk-Resident Control Programs
Load System Disk
library A 1I0cation Organization
Physical and Logical Unit Tables
Service Program
Core Image Maintenance
Macro Maintenance
Directory and Core Image library
Service
Backup and Restore
linkage Editor
Monitor Generation Macro Defin.
Copy System Pro'gram
Macro library Service Program
360W-CL-I71
SL-172
SL-173
SL-174
SL-175
5L-176
SL-I77
SL-178
SL-179
10-200
5L.-205
5L-206
Universal Character SefUtility Program:
This program will be used whenever a new
chain or train is mounted on the 1403
Model 2 or N1 printer with Oniversal
Character Set Feature. The program loads the 240-character UCS buffer with the
8-bit codes that correspond one-to-one with the 240 graphic pOSitions on the printerchain/train. Upon completion of buffer loading, the program prints several lines
so that the user can visually verify that the correct chain/train was installed.
The program supports the folding and dualing capability.
The program is a stand-alone program and accepts as control information four chainimage cards, each conSisting of 60 characters.
Minimum system requirements
A 2020 Processing Unit Model B2, C5 or C6 with Universal Character Set Adapter
... A Card Reading DeVice, and a 1403 Printer Model 2 or Nl with Universal Character Set Feature. [360T-UT-I08J
2152 Printer-Keyboard:
The Model 20 Disk Programming System supports the
2152 Printer-Keyboard ... (1) as an inquiry device and
... (2) as an input/output unit.
A new and more flexible Model 20 DPS Monitor i~ also supported.
2152 Printer-Keyboard 1360W-IO-202.1
For inquiry, user may interrupt main line programs to request and display information from disk files.
When inquiry is requested, main I ine programs are suspended only for length of
time necessary to retr ieve and format information des ired.
'
User writes inquiry processing programs in RPG, Assembler/IOCS or PL/I to
suit his particular requirements.
Any number of different inquiry programs, up to the limits of the core image library may be stored on disk to be called when requested from the 2152.
Use of the Printer-Keyboard as an input/output device is fuily supported in
RPG, Assembler/IOCS or PL/I.
Carriage Control tape can be simulated for output on the 2152 Printer in RPG.
Minimum System Requirements:
• For submodel 2, 5 or 6
The minimum features required for generation and object program execution are the same
as those required for DPS Cl2K), lOCS, and PL./I with the addition of the 2152:
a 2020 Processing Unit Model BC2, BC5 or BC6 ••• one card reading device (2501,
2520, 2560-A1) ... one 2311 Disk Storage Drive Model 11 or 12 ... one Printer
<1403 or 2203-A1) ... a card punching device (1442, 2520, 2560-A1) if required
••• and a 2152 Printer-Keyboard.
Machine Features Supported:
Up to 32,768 bytes of core storage ••. card reading devices (2501,2520,2560AI) ... card punching devices (1442, 2520, 2560-All ... 2415 Magnetic Tape
Units, Models 1-6 (or a like number of 2401 Magnetic Tape Units, Model I, 2 or 4
in lieu of 2415s on the Submodel 5 only) (7- or 9-track) .•• four 2311 Disk Storage
Drives, Models 11 or 12 ... one Printer (1403 or 2203-All ... one 2152 PrinterKeyboard ... one MCR device (1419, 1255 or 1259) ... BSCA.
• For sub model 4
The minimum features required for generation and object program execution are the same
as those required for OPS utput Control System C26 .. 36 03; Operating
procedure C26 .. 3S03.
IOCS for the 1419 manual C26-3607; Operating
procedure C24-900S.
Sterling Cllrrency Processing Routines C26-360S.
RPG for Punched-Card Equipment C26-3600;
Operating procedure C26-3S00.
Punched-Card Uti lity C26-3601; Operating procedure.
Basic Utility, Functions and Operating procedure
C26-3604.
Universal Character Set Utility, C26-3SI2.
Machine Readable -- Program and sample decks. Exceptions are further explained
below.
360T -AS-11 0
360T -CQ-003
360T -10-029
36 OT -LM-015
360T -CQ-lll
Object code and sample problem.
Program deck (Generator and library) and two sample
decks (one for transmit and one for receive operations).
Program deck (Generator and library) and one sample
deck.
Symbolic subroutines in lieu of program and sample
deck.
Object code (Generator and library) and two sample
problems.
OPTIONAL PROGRAM PACKAGE
The following documentation and machine readable are shipped with each Model 20
CPS program if optional material is requested.
Documentation -- Optional program material list; ,attachments I, II and III.
Machine Readable -- Source code for all CPS (360T) programs, except 360TUT -105 and UT -107, is contained on one 9-track DTR
(SOO or 1600 bpj).
LM .. OlS, U1 -104,
P 36o.T.11
Feb 72
IBS System/360 Model 20
Programming
Documentation -- Program Material List .•. Attachment I -- Operating Procedures
C24-9009-3. Performance Estimates C24-9o.I0-3, BasiC Assembler Language
C26-36o.2-4 and TNLs N33-8S23, N33-85S4, BaSic Assembler/Tape Procedures
C24-9011-1 and TNL N33-8553 Utility Programs C26-3808-3 and TNLs N338559, N33-8588 Control and Service Programs C24-9o.OO-4, Report Program
Generator C24-9001-4 and TNL N33-9052, Assembler Language C24-9002-4
Tape Sort/Merge Program C26-3804-2 arid TNLs N33-8535 , N33-8558, N338561, 10CS C24-90o.3-4, 10CS for 1419/1259 C33-6001-3 and TNL N33.
90.43, 10CS for Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter C33-40o.l-3.
Machine Readable -- Object code for following Tape Programming Systems Components
(360U) are available on one functional volume. The bootstrap card has not been
changed. (V=Version. M=Modification Level).
BasiC Assembler (Tape) 4K
3bOU-AS-13o.
Tape-to-Tape Ut iI ity
UT-131
Tape-to-Card Uti I ity
UT-132
Card-to-Tape Utility
UT-133
Tape-to-Printer Utility
UT-134
Initial ize-Tape Utility
UT-135
Load System Tape
SL-142
Copy System Tape
SL-143
Directory Service
SL-144
Core-Image Maintenance
SL-145
SL-146
Macro Maintenance
SL-147
Linkage Editor
Report Program Generator
RG-148
Assembler
AS-149
Sprt/Merge
SM-15o.
Input/Output and Basic Monitor
10-151 •
Macro Definitions
Input/Output
Macro Definitions for the IBM
1419/1259 Magnetic Character
readers
10.-152
BasiC Assembler (Tape) 8K
AS-153
Input/Output Macro Definitions for
the Binary Synchronous Communications
CQ-154
Adapter
Core-Image Service
SL-155
Macro Service
SL-15b
Card-Resident Control
CL-157
Initial Loader for Tape-Resident System
CL-158
Tape-Resident Control Programs
CL-lS9
CQ-160
Macro Definition for RJE
OPTIONAL PROGRAM PACKAGE
Documentation -- Optional Program Material List •.. Attachment I.
Machine Readable -- Source code for all Tape Programming Systems Components
{360Ul is available on one (1) functional volume except I/O and Basic Monitor
Macro Delinltions, 360U-ID-lS1, the I/o. Macro Definitions for the 1419 and
1259, 360U-10·152, the I/o. Macro Definitions for the Binary Synchronous
Communications Adapter, 360U-CQ-1S4 and the Remote Job Entry Work
Station Program, 3bOU-CQ-lbO.
Not to be reproduced without written permiaalon
P ;360T.12
IB~ Programming
'Feb 72
IBM System/360 Model 20
DPS
BASIC PROGRAM PACKAGE
OPTIONAL PROGRAM PACKAGE
Documentation -- Basic Program Material list -- The following SRL Publications
appropriate to the components ordered are shipped by PID with each initial DPS
order.
SRL Publications -- DPS System Generation and Maintenance, GC33-6006-3
with TNLs GN33-9104, 9120; DPS Operating Procedures, GC33-6004-4 with
TNLs GN33-91 iJO, 9114; DPS Control and Service Programs, GC24-9006-5
with TNLs GN33-9098, 9118; DPS Disk Utility Programs GC26-3810-3 with
TNLs GN33-9102, 9115; DPS and TPS Report Program Generator,
GC24-9001-6 with TNLs GN33-9097, 9116; DPS and TPS Assembler Language, GC24-9002-5 with TNLs GN33-9096, 9121; DPS Disk Sort/Merge
Program, GC26-3806-5 with TNL GN33-9099*, DPS Input/Output Control
System, GC24-9007-6 with TNL GN33-9119.
Documentation -- Optional Pfogram Material I ist and Attachment I.
Machine Readable -- Source .code for all disk programming system components
(36OW except macros which can be obtained by using MSERV programwith
option SOURCE) is contained on two (2) functional volumes.
Option 1 - 360W-CL':171 to 360W-SM-IB2 ilnd is specifi~d by using program
number extension OPT 1.
Option 2 - 360W-liT -183 to 360W-UT -191 ... 360W-SM-194 to 360W-UT199 ... 360W-UT -204 to 360W-PL-207 and is specified by using program
number extension OPT2.
Optional program material is not available for the following: 360W-10-192,
10-193, 10-200, CQ-201, 10-202, CQ-203.
If only the publications or if additional copies are required; order them from the
IBM Distribution Center, Mechanicsburg -- not from PID.
Machine Readable -- The different systems are available on disk packs* or magnetIc tapes**
System A (200 cylinder users only) -- contains object code of all the following
components: To order specify program extension number OPTA.
System B (200 and/or 100 cylinder users) -- contains object code of all the
following components except 10CS BSCA, RJE <10-192,193, 202,
CQ-201, 203): To order specify program extension number OPTB.
System C (200 and/or 100 cylinder users) -- contains object code of all the
following components except PL/I (PL-207): To order specify program
extension number OPTC.
Program Name
Program Number
VM
Disk Resident Control Programs
360W-CL-171
Load System Disk Program
SL-172
library All ocat,i on. Organization Program
SL-173
Physical and Logical Unit
SL-174
Tables Service Program
Core Image Maintenance Program
SL-175
Macro Maintenance Program
SL-176
Directory and Core Image library
SL-177
Service Programs
Disk Backup and Restore Program
SL-178
linkage Editor Program
SL-179
Report Program Generator
RG-IBO
Assembler Program
AS-181
Di sk Sort/Merge Program
SM-182
Initialize Disk Utility Program
UT-183
Alternate Track Assignment Util ity Program
UT-184
Clear Di sk Utility Program
UT-185
Disk-to-Disk Utility Program
UT-186
Disk-to-Tape Utility Program
UT-187
Tape-to-Disk Util ity Program
UT-188
Disk-to-Card Uti I ity Program
UT-189
Card-to-Disk Util ity Program
UT-190
Disk-to-Printer Utility Program
UT-191
Input/Output and Monitor Macro Definitions
10-192
Input/Output and Monitor Macro Definitions
10-193
Tape Sort/Merge Program
SM-194
Tape-to- Tape Utility Program
UT-195
Tape-to-Card Utility Program
UT-196
Card-to- Tape Util ity Program
UT-197
Tape-to-Printer Util ity Program
UT-198
Initialize-Tape Utility Program
UT-199
Monitor Generator Macro Definitions
10-200
Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter Macro
CQ-201
Definitions
2152 Printer-Keyboard Macro Definitions
10-202
I/O Macro Definitions for Remote Job Entry
CQ-203
Work Station Program
Di sk Dump Program
UT-204
Copy System Program
SL-205
Macro library Service Program
SL-206
360 Model 20 DPS PL/I Compiler Program
PL-207
3/3
3/1
4/2
3/1
6/2
3/4
4/3
3/4
3/1
4/2
3/4
5/2
3/3
3/0
3/2
3/3
3/1
3/3
3/1
3/2
3/1
3/4
4/3
3/3
3/1
3/2
3/1
3/1
3/1
2/4
3/2
2/1
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/4
1/2
* - The 1316 Disk Pack returned from
the prG!lram library contains a running system
as well as sample decks in card-image format to be punched. It is accompanied by
three disk IPL cards to be used for initializing the loading of the running system,
which is referred to as the DPS disk pack.
CURRENT USERS:
Current users will receive a preprinted Program Order Form and a letter announcing the
availability of the new release. The letter instructs them to order the new release
through the branch office USing the preprinted form.
Each user of record may order either a total replacement for his current DPS, or a
maintenance package which is appl ied to his existing DPS. The detailed ordering
instructions suppl ied to each user of record describe how one package or the other
is expl icitly requested.
Note: The maintenance package is available on a 1316 Disk Pack or one DTR
for 9/BOO, 7DC/BOO, or 9/1600. The user should specify or~ of the medium
codes on the preprinted program order form. The maintenance package will be
available for 60 days from the date of this announcement. USER VOLUME
REQUIRED IS 01 FOR 1316 DISK ONLY.
REFERENCE MATERIAL:
IBM 5/360 Model 20 Guide to DPS, GC33-6000-3 with
IBM S/360 Model 20 Pl/I User's Guide, GC33-6007-2
IBM 5/360 Model 20 DPS Master Index, GC33-6008-1
10CS for the BSCA, GC33-4001-4 ••. S/360 Model 20
GC33-6003-3 with TNL GN33-9101.
TNL GN33-9103 ...
with TNL GN33-9095 ...
..• IBM S/360 Model 20
Performance Estimates,
PLMs -- IBM S/360 Model 20 Control and Service, GY33-900B-3 ... IBM
S/360 Model 20 DPS Disk Sort/Merge, GY33-9016-1 with TNL GN33-9106 ...
IBM S/360 Model 20 DPS Disk Utilities, GY33-9017-0 ••. IBM S/360 Model
20 DPS RPG, GY33-9015-2 ... IBM S/360 Model 20 DPS PL/I Volume I,
GY33-9060-0 with TNL GN33-9094.
** - Users with 2415 Magnetic Tape Units (or a like number of 2401 MagnetiC
Tape Units, Modell, 2 or 4 in lieu of 2.415s on the Submodel5 only) attached
should request the programs on tape. The tape contains the Backup and Restore
Program (360W-SL-17B) to be activated by one bootstrap card distributed with the
tape. The Restore Program initializes the 1316 Disk Pack ••• copies a running
System as well as sample programs in card image format on 1316 Disk Pack ...
punches the cards for initializing the loading of the Disk Programming System
Not to be reproduced without written permission
S320-1071-5
PA 1.1
Nov 73
PROGRAMMING - APPLICA nON
INTRO~UCTORY
iNFORMATION
General
Availability Oat. .
IBM Typfl 1\ appl~8tion programs are descriiltl'.1 ';1 thl!> suctiorl. The
descriptlonli are general and are not ;nte"dP.d to tie exhaustive For more
information. see the supporting Systems Reff)rence Library (SRl) publications
Program availabilitY dates appear throughout the programming section. These
availability d8t~ are defined as the dates on which the first program
shipment enn be made by PIO.
Program Identification
Each program is assigned a mne-character Identification code. The first f()ur
digits identify the computer on whicn the J.)rogram will run. The next two
characters are a functional mnemonic describing the program class. The last
three characters are a sequence number. That number IS two digits plus an
X. R, or L.
The System/360 four-digit Ident,fica~ion code includes
character which designates:
.
.
360A: All Type II Application Programs except Model 20
360V: System/360 Model 20 application programs
an
alphabetic
IBM application programs perform specific tasks, such as demand deposit.
lens design, etc.
Application programs are usually classified as
industry-oriented or industry-Independent programs. They are produced by
both marketing and product divisions. Functional .nnemonics for these
programs are:
Industry-oriented Programs
Distribution
Manufacturing
OP:
DR:
OW:
OX.
MA:
MD:
ME:
MF.
MP:
MR:
MT:
MX:
Publishing
Retail
Wholesale
Other
Finance
FB:
FF:
FI:
FX:
Banking
Finance Companies
Brokerage and Investment
Other
Faderal Government
GF: Government, Fads.ral
Insurance
IB:
Blue Cross and Blue Shield
IF:
Fire and Casualty
Il:
Life
IX:
Other
These steps should not be overlooked in scheduling the installation's use of a
program.
Response Time
When planning and schedut;ng the receipt of a program consider.these facts:
The normal tum around time for a program order to be shipped to Plo and
the order received at the user location may be calculated from the following
table:
Timaln
Order sent to PIO
Order proc8ssed at PIO
Order sent from PIO
Average - 4 calendar days in transit
Average - 8 working days at PID
Average - 4 calendar days in transit
Thus. considaring weekends. three weeks should be allowad for ordering
Type II programs from PIO.
Service
SC:
Communication
ST:
Transportation
SU:
Utilities
SX:
Other
Universities and Government
UC:
Colleges and Universities
UG'
Government. Stete & Local
UH:
Hospital and Medical
US:
Secondary Schools
UX.
Other
Engineering
EC:
Civil Engineering
EE:
Electrical Engineering
EH:
Chemical Engineering
EM:
Mechanic:alEngineering
EN:
Nuclear Codes
EO:
Optics
EX:
Other
Exploratory
XP:
Mathematics and Applications
Programming Services
The programs described in this
. classifications associated with' them:
Withdrawn Program
Type II programs that are WIthdrawn frOfTI the program library will be retained
with its documentation in archival storage. They may be identified by
reference to the special supplement to the Catalog of Programs containing a
list of these deleted programs (instructions were given to branch offices to
keep this supplement for tuture reference) .
If a customer requiret> these programs and documentatiOn, submit the regul.r
order form and a letter of request signed by your branch manager.
A base charge of $100 plus reprO$iuction and distribution tee will be billed to
the customer.
Use of Index
Catalogs of Programs
,
~30.
1800
Form Number
.
1240. 1401. 1420, 1440, 1460
700 Senes, 1410, 7000 Series
1620/1710
have one of three service
The Service Classification for Type II programs are on the following pages.
The hst of programs on the follOWing pages is divided into six columns. The
left-hand column lists the progri:ifTt name. The second column indicates :he
program number. The third column c(·nta:ns the recommended beSt reference
for that particular program. component, or foature. The fout'!;h column lists
t"'e current Version (V) and Modlficat.on (M). .he fifth collimn indicates the
date of latest change. If rhe modification nUMber IS :!ero. then no corrections
have been issued !lince the announcement of t"'fl last versior., in this case,
the data given is the date of the last version. The Sixth column shows the
current programming service classification.
System/360 MOdel 25 and above
Svstem/360 Model 20
section
A - Central and FE Programming Services
B - Central Programming Service
C - Local Programming services available at a charge
SMTO
SE:
System Marketing Techniques
Systems
o.y.
Action
Aerospace
Drug.Food.Chemir.al Products
Flectrical and Machinery
Fabrication and Primary Metals
Petroleum & Industrial Chern
Transportation Equipment
Textiles and Paper
Other
Industry-independent Programs
Cross Industry Group
CA: Statistical Applications
CC: Process Control
. CM: Mathematical Applications
. CN: Numerical Control Applications
CO: Operations Research
CP:
Critical Path Scheduling
CR: Information Retrieval
CS: Simulators
CX: Other
When planning for an Installation's needs you 'must consider: the time
required to receive the availability notification ... the time for placing the
order, which may include the shippIng of volumes to PIO ... PIO processing
tlmp .. and the time for returning the processed volumes.
G" -!Q··1679
GC2(H691
GC20-1630
GC20-1601
GC20-1602
(;C20-1603
Not to be reproduced without written perm.i"'on
IB~
PA 1.2
Programming
w
Nov 73
Application
Program Name
;;i,.
Information
tUl,l/3GO 1~~1>lication I'rcgrruns
AlJ-APT/AUTOSPOT
Pl, 360.1
:ltiO,\-(:;,1{-32X
Pl\ 360.30
PA 360.7
P!\ 360.24
(P~~)
(DOS)
Product Structure Retrieval (DOS/DOS)
PrograM for \)~tical System Design/II (OS)
Remote Access Cor.lj.Juting (UPS)
Stuclent Scheduling
:,,;checluler (lJOS)
'1'ally and Conflict ~iatrix (DPS/DOS)
0yat;h ~.i.·ransl'lit-Receive Access X·lethod (OS)
'I'ext Processor
(DOS)
Vehicle Scileuuling (OOS)
:2
3
6
1-14-69
3
2-19-69
1
5
,
i
3
1
c
c
2-14-69
2-3-70
1-29-70
8-8-68
7-2-68
c
c
c
6-3-70
6.. 25 .. 71
7-22-66
7-15-69
6-20-69
13
13
C
C
C
1-5-72
C
Ph 360.2
,
1
360A-SE-19X
PA 360.19
1
2
360l\-CN-Onx
3601\-CN-09X
360A,-FI-OGX
360A-CX-26X
360A-aS-07:<
3601\-J:!0-15X
360A-CX-17X
PA 360.9
P1\ 360.9
PA 360.3
Ph 360.38
PA 360.16
PA 360.13
PA 360.111
2
4
2
5
1
0
1
,
1
0
1
2
4
J
11-9-71
C
C
360A-US-07X
360A-m:;-06X
360A"SE-33X
PA 360.5
PA 360.2
PA 360.6
1
0
1
,
5
5-11-66
3-25-66
1-19-70
c
c
c
360A-DP-08X
360A"ST-06X
PA 360.20
2
PA 360.22
3-34-72
6-17-69
C
C
360A-Cr.-19X
360J\-c~{-1 8X
360A-IL-09X
360A-MJ!:-06X
360A.. UX-01X
36 OA-r·1F-O4X
360A-Co-18X
PA 360.18
PA 360.22
PA 360.16
PA 360.31
PA 360.28
Ph 360.29
PA 360.8
2-10-72
6-15-70
6-15-70
11-10-70
9-22-71
6-20-69
3-28-69
B*
B*
360A-C~l-
36Gl\-CX-12X
360A-$r:... 22X
0iJt iH1Ul.l iSonulJidding (£lOS)
cmIPOSITIO~V360
pr. 360.6
360A-I"D-13X
(DO~)
Probl~a Languageru~alyzer
3X
360..l\-Sr;-20x
360.l\-m~-2
oata Conv & Label I'roc Sub (TOC/DOS/OC)
Data Conversion Util.ity II (OS)
Decision Logic ~ransl.tor (DOS)
ue1:land Deposi t Accounting (UOS)
uocur.leat Pro'C(;;ssing System (OS)
FLO\'JCHART (OOS)
1400 A;J.tocoder to COBOL Cony Aid
Nur.lcrical Control Processors
AuTOSPOT (D9S)
0
,
C
Syster.l/360 and Syster.v'370 !\pplication Prcxn:'4IIl.
Adrainistrative Te:cminal Systeni (OS)
Administrative Terminal System (001:;)
Advanced Life Information System (DOS)
oi11 of :taterial Processor (DOS/DOS)
Coursewriter I I I
Inventory Control (i)O::;)
Linear Proyrar:ul\in<,j !::iystem (OOS)
~Lu:lerical Control Processors
AD-APT/AUTOS POT (O;:,)
AP'; (OS)
FLA.! Graj;JhicSiJLJPort for 2250 (OS)
Proble:.., Language A;.~alyzer (P~H (aS)
Project Control ~ystem (DOS)
Propert)' ancl.-Iwiaoility Info Syst8lll (OOS)
llasic
I, u tOI:lobi le
0ti)ur ..iil~S
lI.etail I.IPAC'r' Systera
Fashion (as)
5taJ?le (OS)
::; ta~)le (DOS)
Fclsnion (OOS)
n.cljuirar,II~I".ts Planning (00:1)
Text .'rocessor
:rtPiiL:JATIO,V360
(00::-)
Shareu Ilosp:..tal l\ccounting System (SilAS)
l>llolel::>ale r~·IPACT (DOS/JJOS/OSi
Jill of :!aterial Processor
~10SL)i til~' ,\ccoun ts il.ecci val.lle
llOs~it~al Pcltient BJ.llinq
RequireLlcnt~;:~ r lannL:-",': a ..... d Inventor:l Control
Ilhclel:iale 1.1PACT
(DOS)
1
1
2
3
1
4
22
4"
1
1
1
0
4-30-69
C
2-19-70
3-4-71
B
3
3
3
2-4-70
n
1
1
1
0
2
0
,
0
3
4
3
1
1
0
1
2
4
J60A-IF-10X
360A-IF... 11X
360A';'IF-13X
PA 360.17
9A 360.'7
PA 360.17
360A-OR-04X
360A-DR-05X
360A... DR-09X
J60A-DR... Oax
PA J60.4
360A-~1F-05X
PA. 360.12
1
360A-DP-01X
PA 36\l.21
P:\. 360.25
PA 360.8
2
2
360,\-Un .. l1x
3 60A-rM-O 5X
2-4-70
13
2-4-70
!3
C
0
6-26-68
1-2-69
4-30-69
1-15-6)
12-20-68
0*
::
4-8-69
5-26,,70
2-4-70
1
C
C
C
D
C
C
1
10··8 ... 70
C
0
C
PA 360.103
10- 31-68
z2-16-68
FA 360.104
p~ 360.102
1
1
0
1
PA. 360.' 02
360V-LlH-1GX
360V-rtf'-lOX
*
C
1
1
1
360V":1!:-08X
3GOV-UIJ-rl!)X
360V-DW-06X
13
C
B
B
1
PA 360.9
PA 360.27
PA 360.26
PA 360.3
PA 360.4
PA 360.4
r".361).4
C
C
11-24-71
9-30-71
PA 360.9
360A-CN-10X
360A..-CX-J4X
360A-CX-27X
360A-CP-06X
1 2X
B
P~
360.10:'
0
4-7-69
9-29-~
Effective March 15 t 1974 wi II be changed to
Not to be reproduced without written permi••lon
'1
e" .
0
C
C
C
IB,.,
PA 1.3
Nov 73
Programming - Application
Program Number/
Availability
Program Name
1130 COIi1&?uting System
~pplication
Progr~ns
Automated Chemistry Programs
Con~ercial Subroutine Package
Control optimization
Data Presentation System
~lechanisn Dcsiyn SysteH\ 3prings and Gears
L10uul 2 Civil Engineering Coordinate Geometry
(COGO)
iJw:lcrical Surface Techniques to Contour nap
Plottin(j
Petrolt;!wl\ anti I.;ngineering
Lconouic Eval. Petrolew:t Proj ects
Decline Curve Analysis
Schilthuis ,-laterial Balance
'I'wo-Dimen. 'Jater Flooding
Gas Deliverability
;.}ulti-Stage Flash Calculation
Vclocity Functions from Tir.le-Dei?th Data
i/ave-!:'ront Ray-Path Determination
Synthetic SeismograIa
Gravity and ,1agnetic Continuations
Derivatives Residuals
Theoretical Gravity of a 3-0 Hass
~uantitative Log Analysis
Oi",r.\eter
ProbleM Lauguaye ANalyzer (PLAl'l)
R~gid Fraue Selection Prograr:1 (RFSP)
s~ientific Subroutine Package
Statistical System
STRESS
Type Composition
TYL)e Composition 8-Channel Pai?er T-ape
1130-UII-13X
1130 ... SE-25X
1800-CC-OlX
1130-CX-14X
1130-E:I-01X
1'7\ 1130.1
1'1\ 1130.9
2
0
3
1
PA 1800.1
PA 1130.12
Pl\ 1130.3
2
2
2
0
1
0
6-16-69
10-11-68
6-6-69
11-8-71
6-16 ... 69
1130-EC-02X
PA 1130.9
3
9-24-68
C
11JO-CX-11X
PA 1130.2
2
0
4-30-69
C
1130-;lP-01x
1130-:1P ... 03X
1130-:'1P-05X
1130-:1P-06X
llJO-:lP-07X
113 O-~1P-O 8X
1130-!1P-09X
PA
PA
PA
PA
PA
PA
PA
PA
PA
2
0
4-30 ... 69
C
11-8-71
6-24-69
12-19-68
11-15-68
9-24-70
11-15 ... 67
9-27-67
C
C
C
C
C
1130-~!P-IOX
1130-!lP-llX
1l30-~-1P-12X
1130-~1P-l3X
1130-HP-14X
1130-:1P-15X
1130-CX-25X
1130-EC,:,09X
1130-CH-02X
llJO-CA-06X
llJO"'EC-03X
1130-DP-04X
1l30-DP-06X
1130.11
1130.3
1130.4
'130.4
1130.5
1130.5
1130.5
1130.6
1130.6
PA
PA
Pl\
1'A
PA
Pl\
PA
PA
1130.7
1130.7
1130.B
1130.8
1130.11
1130.1
1130.9
1130.10
1'1-\ 1130.2
PA 1130.10
PA 1130.11
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
1800 Progranulling Syster.l
A;Jplication Prograr.\s
'l'raffic Control
Control Optimization
PROSPRO
1BOO-UG-OGX
1800-CC... 01X
1800-CC .. 02X
KeY-l-lord-in-Context Kt-JIC
Bank Sort
Bond Trade Analysis for a Bank
1401 Portfolio Selection
1962 CFO (Consolidated Functions Ordinary)
(;2 CFO
valuation Programs
l)ocwncntation IUds System (for 5/360)
~lurt'::iage Loan Accounting for 1440 & 1450
~lectronic Circuit Analysis
1401-CR-Q4X
1401-FB-06X
1401-FD-09X
1401-FI-04X
1401-IL.,.01X
1401-IL-02X
1401-IL-03X
1401-SE-12X
1440-FD-04X
1620 ... t:E-02X
PA 1BOO.1
1800.1
PA 1800.2
1'1\
Catalog
of
Programs
2
0
2
0
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
5
1
1
18
13
2
0
1
1
6
0
3-29 ... 68
6.. 6-69
8-16-68
6-9-65
'12-4-63,
8-16-66
5-19-65
6-1-66
,5-27-69
5-1-68
3-4 ... 66
5-2-66
6-8 ... 65
(reverse side Is blank)
Not to be reproduced without written permi,.lon
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
PA 360.1
Nov 73
=s=~=a.s=
:i::::: ;§~~
Programm ing
Data Conversion Utility II:
IBM System/360 Application Programs
Provides an effective and flexible capability for
customers to convert their current IBM system data
files to System/360 data sets under control of
OS/360. (360A-SE-20X)
Designed as a general-purpose program, it will accept as input data sets in the format
used with the IBM 705/1410/7010 and 7:000 series systems. System/360 data
sets are also accepted as input as indicated below. The program produces as output
the data format deSired for System/360 tape or DASD. The program has data transformation capability that .. lIows the user flexibility in "resystematizing" his data sets
for System/360.
The Data ConverSion Utility II Program accommodates the three general considerations
in data conversions:
1. The physical characteristics of the I/O device .
2. Current IBM Programming Systems standards (i.e., labels, padding characters, checkpoint records).
3. Optimization of data representation (i.e., floating point, binary, packed
decimall.
Description: Data Conversion Utility II is a set of special-purpose macros, subroutines, and modules. These may be combined in a large variety of ways to create a
specific data conversion program that meets the exact requirements of the user's
data set to be converted from current IBM system formats to System/360 formats.
There are two steps involved in using Data Conversion Utility II -1. Creating a specific Data Conversion Utility II program.
2. Executing this specific Data Conversion Utility II program.
To perform the first step, the user creates a Data ConverSion Utility II controller by
combi~ing in assembly language --
1. Three controller macros.
2. Data move/transform macros as required to perform field transformations.
3. Test macros as required for record selection, etc.
4. A common table macro that provides specific information about the input and
output files that cannot be furnished via the DD card, such as 7070/7074
Form 3 records 35 words or less in size, etc.
5. User code as required.
The controller is combined with an input module and an output module by use of the
linkage editor to create the unique Data Conversion Utility II program.
The second step is performed by executing the utility program created in Step One.
This is done by providing the IBM Operating System/360 with the necessary job
control cards and the data set to be converted.
During program execution, Operating system/360 can make use of a set of modules
provided with this program to simplify processing of current IBM system standard
labels on input tapes, which are conSidered non-standard by System/360. In addition, linkage is provided to user-written header and trailer label modules if proceSSing
of current IBM system non-standard labels is required. These label checking modules
also provide linkage for user-written label checking modules.
Input Module: For a particular data conversion run, the input module that is best
suited to process the input data fj Ie is selected from -Card Data File Input - These modules read data cards on an 80/80 basis.
They are intended to assist in converting card data files, such as tub files,
to $ystem/360 tape or DAsD data sets. There are two card input modules:
one is provided to process Hollerith/EBCDIC cards, and the other handles
column binary card input.
705/1410/7010/7080 BCD Variable-Length Tape Record Input - Three
types of modules are provided to GET even-parity BCD variable-length records
written on 7- or 9-track tape. The first type locates blocked or unblocked
logical records whose length is established by terminal record marks. The
second locates blocked or unblocked logical records of the size specified by
a BCD length counter within the logical record. The third will locate an unblocked logical record where the record requires neither a terminal record mark
nor a BCD length counter. All module types will bypass applicable checkpoint
records.
BCD Fixed-Length Tape Record Input - This module will GET even-parity BCD
fixed-length records written oil 7- or 9-track tape. Interspersed checkpoint
records or segment mark records will be deleted. The input tape may be zerosuppressed or non-zera-suppressed.
Mixed Mode Tape Record Input - This module will GET all binary or intermixed
even parity BCD records and odd parity binary recorcrs.- Records may be either
variable-length unblocked or fixed-length blocked or unblocked.
System/360 Direct Access DASD Output - Fixed.or variable-length unblocked
records can be created on SysteiTi!360 DASD with this module. The BDAM
method is used to write the records; therefore, if blocking of records is to be
done, the user has to set up the blocked physical record before calling the Direct
Access Output module.
S ste 360 Indexed Sequential DASD Output - Fixed-length, hlocked or unblocked logical records can be created on ystem/360 DASD with this module.
The records can then be retrieved sequentially or directly.
Features: Provides the IBM System/360 users with a faCility to reduce substantially
the difficulties, time, and costs of performing the required data conversions ••. allows
greater flexibility for scheduling user manpower in new.application areas where
potential savings may be made; more of the manpower can be concentrated on the solution to the application problem, rather than the nature of the data ••• encourages the
user to write his IBM System/360 application programs using record organization
and data formats which are optimum for the IBM System/360 ••• encompasses the
requirements of current IBM system users, regardless of the machine size and configuration ... provides comparable data conversion facilities to users, regardless
of the IBM System/360 language used ••• is designed to allow the user to tailor
the program to his individual requirements through modular program organization and
the data move/transform and test macros.
Use: The program can be used for the permanent conversion of current IBM system
data sets into System/360 sets and can also be used to obtain "live" text data from
current IBM systems for use in testingSystem/360 application programs. Since input data may be on 7- or 9-track tape, customers whose initial conversion to System/
360 is planned around emulation will be able to use the Data Conversion Utility II
Program to convert their even parity BCD 9-track emulator data sets when they convert their programs to System/360.
Customer Responsibilities: The object decks and the macro definitions which make
up part of the Data Conversion Utility II package must be cataloged in a link library
and the I112cro library respectively. Users of VerSion 2 must delete the old Data
ConverSion Utility II macros before cataloging the new macros. The NSL modules must
be cataloged in the SYS1. SVCLlB library. The user then writes the necessary Data
ConverSion Util ity II macro statements (and user routines if required) to specify the
desired data conversion program. The user also has to specify in the I inkage editor
run which input and output modules to include.
Programming Systems: The program is written in the IBM Operating system/360
Assembler Language as described in C28-6514. It is designed to run under control of the IBM Operating System/360, and uses the Operating System/360
Input/Output capability;
Machine Coniiguration: A System/360 Model 30 or above with Decimal Arithmetic.
Storage requirements are dependent on the size of the OS/360 supervisor used, the Data
ConverSion Utility modules selected, the maximum input phySical record Size, the maximum output physical record size, the maximum work area size (required for 7070 input
modu Ie), the area u sed for the requested move/transformat ions (j nstructi ons, convers i on
subroutines, subroutine linkages, constants and literals), and user routines.
The 05/360 requirements for system operation and program assembly must be ut.ilized
to create a speCific data conversion utility program.
For executing the created utility, the devices of OS/360 'system operation are requiredj
in addition, the following input/output devices may be used:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2400 series tape drivers) for the input data set
2540/2501 for data card input
DASD for input of S/360 Sequential Data Set
2400 series tape drive(s) for the output data set
DA sD for the output data set
Note: The 2400 series tape drives can be 9-track, unless they interface with
729 tape drives, in. which case the 7-track Read/Write Head feature and
a 7-track Compatibility feature are required.
Basic Program Material: Documentation -- Programmer's Manual (H20-0313-1) ...
Operator's Manual (H20-0314-1 ... Application Director. If only the form numbered
manuals are required, order them from the IBM Distribution Center, Mechanicsburg -not from PID.
Machine Readable -- Object cards, macro definition cards, source cards, and sample
problems may be obtained on one 9-track or 7-track DTR and is used to produce flowcharts. The source
language is DOS/360 Assembly language and uses the EBCDIC character set.
Minimum System Requirements: System/360 Model E30 (32K) with standard
instruction set ••• two 2311 Disk'Storage Drives (one for systems residence
and one for work file) ••• one 2540 Card Read Punch ••• one 1052 PrinterKeyboard ••• one 1403 Printer with 132 Print pOSitions using the PN or QN
chain arrangement (Pl/n.
Programming Systems: The Assembler language with Input/Output Macros
<8K Disk) is used (360B-AS-309). Both programs can run under control of the
Basic Operating System!360, 8K Disk, or under the System/360 Basic Programming Support.
Minimum System Requirements: A 2030 Processing Unit, Model F with Decimal
Arithmetic (11<3237) ••• 1051 Attachment (11<7915) ••• 1051 Control Unit Model
N1, CPU Attachment (11<3130), First Punch Attachment (11<4410>, First Reader
Attachment (11<4411) ... 1052 Printer-Keyboard Model 6 ••• 2821 Control Unit
Modell ... 1403 Printer Model 2 ••• 2540 Card Read Punch Modell.
The Tally Program will run in 32K, provided that the Supervisor being used does
not exceed 5,200 bytes, and the Conflict Matrix Programs may be easily modified by the user to run in 32K with a reduce course capacity in the Matrix.
Basic Program Material: Documentation -- Application Description, H20-0202
.,. Technical Newsletter, N20-0059 ... User's Manual, H20-0220 ... Appi ication Directory ••• System Manual.
Machine Readable-- Object Card Decks and Sample Problem Decks. t
Optional Program Material: Machine Readable -- Source Card Decks. t
t Customers may elect to receive the programs in card-image form on either 7- or 9-ttack Distribution
Tape Reels (OTR). instead of cards. The user will receive 9-ttack OTR unless he requests a 1-track
OTR. Both are written at 800 bpi.
[Note: If a PN or QN chain is not available, the following delimiter characters
may either not print or else print as different characters: Percent (~o), colon (d,
semi-colon (i) and number sign (11<). J
The user who orders 7- or 9-track DTR tape from PID will require one 2400
series tape unit, with its associated control unit. The data conversion feature is
required, if 7-track tape is to be used.
Optional Devices: One 2400 series tape drive for System/360 FLOWCHART
language input; one 2400 series tape drive for output.
The DTRs are solely for the purpose of punching out the required program decks.
A tape unit is not required'for system operation. DTRs will be supplied by PID
-- no tape submittal is required.
Basic Program Material: Documentation -- Application Directory, Users Manual
H20-0293, and Operator's Manual H20-0294.
Not to be reproduced without written permission
PA .360 • .3
Nov 73
--- ---~
- -:f~E: Programming
IBM System/360 Application Programs
Optimum Bond Bidding:
The program has been designed for bond underwriters to
assist them in determining the coupon schedule and associated values for a bid on a new bond issue. A mathematical procedure is used which develops an optimal set of coupon rates. The optimization procedure minimizes the net interest cost or effecti.ve rate, whichever is
applicable, while remaining within the constraints established by the issuer and the
constraints established by the underwriter. The program is flexible in that a numher
of options are provided which aid the user in obtaining bidding information for issues
with various characteristics. (360A-FI-06X)
Description: New municipal bond issues, usually serial in nature, are normally offered for competitive bidding. The issue is, therefore, awarded to the underwriter
whose bid results in the lowest cost to the municipality, Other types of bond issues,
such as corporate or foreign issues, may be either offered for competitive bidding or
negotiated for private placement. Regardless of the nature of the issue or the method
of placement, the Optimum Bond Bidding Program will prove to be a valuable aid.
To bid for a serial bond issue, it is necessary for the user to decide upon a yield for
bonds of each maturity, a spread which covers the expense and profit of the underwriter, and a range of coupon rates acceptable for each maturity. The program then
constructs a set of figures which satisfies all constraints of the issue and which sets
a coupon rate for each maturity so that a relatively low net interest cost or effective
rate, whichever is applicable, is obtained. The Optimum Bond Bidding Program replaces the manual methods commonly used to obtain bid figures for a serial bond
issue. The program utilizes a mathematical procedure to develop an optimal set of
coupon rates which minimize either the net interest cost or the effective rate depending upon the basis for the award of the issue. Many possible combinations of·constraints can be quickly and accurately analyzed by the use of the Optimum Bond Bidding Program prior to submitting a bid.
~eatures:
OPTIMIZE a bid for a serial bond issue on the basis of net interest cost
••• OPTIMIZE a bid for a serial bond issue on the basis of effective rate ••• OPTIMIZE two possible bids without premium to produce spreads in juxtaposition above
and below the desired spread ••• OPTIMIZE all possible net interest cost bids without premium which produce spreads within a range of acceptable spreads ••• OPTIMIZE a bid predicated upon a desired bid price other than par; this permits a controlled premium or discount on the issue .•• OPTIMIZE a bid while using only authorized coupon multiples .•• OPTIMIZE or EVALUATE a bid, taking into consideration stated call provisions in the computation of the sellin!) price of the bond •••
OPTIMIZE or EVALUATE an issue with bonds maturing at either six month or twelve
month intervals ••• EVALUATE either a serial or term bond issue to determine spread
••• EVALUATE either a serial or term bond issue to determine bid price ••• both the
optimization and evaluation procedures adjust for an irregular first interest payment
period .•• both the optimization and evaluation procedures base the selling price on
delivery date rather than on issue date ••• control of the desired spread may be
achieved in the optimization mode; a single bid may be generated to produce an exact
spread, or, multiple bids may be generated to produce spreads for stated intervals
within a range of acceptable spreads; for example, if the range of acceptable spreads
is from $1.00 to $1.50 per $100 of par value and the stated interval is 10e, Six
separate bids would be generated; the first bid would produce a spread of $1. 00, the
second $1.10, and so on in 10e intervals to $1.50; it is to be noted that when an
exact spread is produced, a premium will frequently occur ••• coupon structure limitations are checked automatically and any violation is reported in a warning message;
the limitations are maximum coupon rate, maximum number of different rates, maximum number of times rate may change, and maximum range between hrgh and low rate
••• the effective or "Canadian" rate of interest to the issue(is computed for each
bid ••• accrued interest per day on the entire issue is computed for each bid •••• 05
EQUALS is computed on the basis of the actual amount production decreases when
each yield is increased. 05% '" the weighted average yield and the weighted aver~
age maturity of the entire bond issue are computed ••• control and descriptive infor- ,
mation is printed at the top of each output page ••• a complete listing of input is
printed, if deSired; this listing includes a schedule of bond year values ... complete
data is provided for each maturity on an output report ••• abbreviated output reports
may be obtained if desired ••• all essential infomlation concerning the bid is summarized at the bottom of each report ••• an interest and principal payment schedule
is printed, if desired. This cash-flow report will be of particular value in the calculation of bids requiring level-debt service; annual totals may be generated on either a
calendar year or fiscal year basis.
Use: Basic data concerning the bond offering are transcribed from an information
Sheet describing the issue onto a worksheet. Then, the analyst decides upon a yield
for bonds of each maturity, a spread or margin which covers the expenSe and profit
of the underwriter, and a range of coupon rates acceptable for each. maturity. After
these decisions have been made, this data is indicated on the worksheet. Input cards
are then punched from the data on the worksheet and entered into the computer. The
program then produces the desired reports.
Programming Systems: IBM Basic Operating System/360 (SK Disk) is required.
Assembly - Assembler with Input/Output Macros (8K Disk) (360B-AS-309), Monitor System - Control Program (SK Disk) (360B-CL-302)i Consecutive Processing
Macros (360B-10-303); 151: MSMacros (360B-10-304); Utility Programs (SK
Disk), Card to Disk, Clear Disk, (360B-UT-30m.
Minimum System Requirements: 32K System/360 Central Processing Unit with
Decimal Instruction Set, Printer (any of those available with 120 or more print positions), Card Reader/Punch (any of those avai lable), Direct Access Storage (one
2311 Disk Storage Drive), and Console Typewriter for Operator/Program Communication (optional).
Program Material: Basic Program Material: Application Directory, Users Manual
(E20-0228), object decks and a sample problem deck. The object decks and
sample problem can be ordered on 9-track DTR, 7~rack DTR, .or in card form. Optional Program Material: Source decks on either 9-traqk or7-track DTR, and Systems Manual. 9- and 7-track DTRs are written at 800 bpi. The Data Conversion
feature is required if 7-track DTR is used.
Reference Material: Information about the System/360, the assembly language,
the operati ngsystem, and the uti lity programs, may be found in: IBM System/360
Principles of Operation, A22-6S21; IBM Basic-Operating System/360, Assembler
with Input/Output Macros (SK Disk), C24-3361; IBM Basic Operating System/
360, Programmers Guide (SK Disk), C24-3372; IBM Basic Operating System/
360 and IBM System/360 BaSic Programming Support, Macro Definition Language
(8K Disk/Tape), C24-3364; IBM Basic Operating System/360, Utility Programs,
C24-3409.
Operating Instructions for the Basic Operating System, the Assembler, and the
Utility Programs may be found in: IBM Basic Operating System/360, Operating
GUide, Control Programs and Assembler (8K Disk), C24- 3450; IBM Basic Operating System/360, Operating GUide, Utility Programs, C24-345S.
Project Control System:t
This program prOVides the advanced- tools needed by
management to fulfill its responsibilities in the plan,
ning, supervising and controlling of project-oriented
work by providing extensive capabil ity in the follOWing operations or techniques:
(1) Planning ... (2) Scheduling ... (3) Report Preparation. While it provides some
capability for resource allocation and cost estimating, PCS/360 does not directly
cover these techniques. (360A-CP-06X)
For critical path networks, PCS/360 will process 5,000 activities either in the form
of precedence lists or in PERT /CPM notation. Its design permits a very simple approach to networking, but also offers many of the sophisticated features normally found
only in programs deSigned for larger configurations.
Use: The use of PCS/360 is in the areas of government and industry concerned
with construction or maintenance. The needs in these areas determine the title and
format of the field report and the format of the various input cards. However, intenSive
investigation has revealed that there are no essential differences among the needs of
all critical path users. For this reason, PCS/360 can provide critical path capability
for a broad range of 005/360 users, regardless of industry.
Sample Appl ications are:
Manufacturing and Distribution Industries -- network techniques have been used to
schedule construction operations, aerospace research and development projects,
the use of mining eqUipment, crude petroleum manufacturing, natural gas operations,
construction, repair and maintenance "pulp mill operations, paper and paperboard
manufacturing, book preparation and printing and blast furnace maintenance.
Science Industries -- network techniques have been used to schedule appl ied research projects and comp.uter program development.
Service Industries -- network techniques have been used to schedule power plant
operations, bank clearing-house operations, dividend check distribution and insurance report preparation.
GEM Accounts -- network techniques have been used for internal management control as well as for contractor control, test production 'of biological products, experimentation with drugs, and university and college curricula and facilities usage.
Transportation Industry -- network techniques have been used to schedule freight
forwarding operations, terminal and service facilities, and the repair and maintenance of equipment.
In addition, these project control techniques are extensively used for controlling the
design and implementation of data processing systems in virtually all industries.
Features: Abi I ity to store and retrieve up to 52 networks on di sk ... a significant
throughput improvement in network generation, milestone processing, updating and report printing ••• hours per work day specified by the user •.• Iess disk space required for
processing ••• milestones can be tied to both the start and finish of a work Item ••• automatic updating of current duration for in-progress work items when no progress is reported in current run ••• suppression of printing of zero duration work items on selected reports
., .option to remove actual data from files ••• addition of Type IV and V schedule dates
to permit more extensive float analysis ... 5,000 work items (or PERT /CPM activities)
• •. 12 ,500 precedence relationships •.• each precedence relationship can be lagged •••
the number of days in the work wl!ek can be specified for each item ... for in-progress
work items, progress can be reported as a percent completion, or as a number of work
days remaining ... scheduled and actual dates can be assigned to both the beginning
and end of each work item~ •• arbitrary non-work days can be incorporated into the calendar ... basic resource scheduling and cost summarization capability is provided ...
tabular and graphic reports are available.
Customer Respon~ibilities: Current users of critical path progfclnis will have to prepare
new data cards to use the IBM Project ControISystem/.360. However, data cards for
use by PCS/1l30 are directly usa6le. Networks generated under VersiDn I will have
to be regenerated under VerSion II.
All users should learn the particular features of this system before attempting to use it
fal ***, Floating Point Arithmetic (-.4427), 1051 Attachment (#7915) ••• 1051 Control Unit Model N1 with CPU Attachment (#3130) •••
1052 Printer-Keyboard Model 8 ••• 1442 Card Read Punch Model Nl ••• 1443
Printer Model N1 with Selective Character Set 8/:6402) and the 63 Character Set
Type Bar <*9089)* ••• 24 Additional Print Positions 8/:5558) ••• 2841 Storage
Control ••• 2311 Disk Units (4 required) ••• 2415 Tape Unit Model 1.*
Minimum System/360 Configuration for Fashion under 005/360, PL/I: System/360
Moael E025 (4SK) with Floating Point Arithmetic Gl4427)*1Q*, 1052 Printer-Keyboard Model 7, Selector Channel (f6960), 1442 Card Read Punch Model Nl, 1443
Printer Model N! with Selective Character Set <*6402) and 63 Character Set Type
. Bar (#9089')* ••• 24 Additional Print Positions <*5558), Integrated 2311 Attachment CtM59S), 2311 Disk Storage Drives (4 required),**2415 Magnetic Tape Unit
and Control MOdell.
Minimum System/360 Configuration for Staple Under OS/360, PL/I and Staple Forecasting and Simulation Subsystems under 005/360, PL/I:· System/360 Model G 40
*****, Floating Point Arithmetic (-.4427),
1052 Adapter (#7920) ••• 1052 Printer-Keyboard Model 7 ••• 1442 Card Read
Punch Model N1 ••• 1443 Printer Model N1 with Selective Character Set (f6402)
and the 63 Character Set Type Bar (#9089)* ••• 24 Additional Print Position
(#555S) ••• 2841 Storage Control ••• 2311 Disk Units (4 required) ••• 2415 Tape
Un it Model 1.
Basic Program Package for Fashion System/DOS.(360AOR08X):
Documentation -- Application Directory ••• Program Description Manual (H20-D54l»
•.• Operations Manual (H20-0541).
Machine Readable -- Source c:eda-r ftIIITaff'le,. and ~ pJ:~
Optional Program Package for (360A-DR-OaX):
Machine Readable -- Flow charts~
Ordering Information: Program number 360A-DR;.OSX
PrOgram Number
Extension
BASIC
none
OPTIONAL
none
Distribution Medium
!xE.!:
DTR
DTR
DTR
DTR
DTR
DTR
~
7DC/800 26
9/800
28
9/1600 29
7DC/aOO 26
28
9/800
9/1600 29
User Volume
Requirement
none
none
none
none
none
none
Basic Program Package for Staple System/DOS (360A-DR-09X):
Documentation -- Application Directory •.. Program Description Manual (H200599-1) ••• Operations Manual (H20-0592-1L
Machine Readable -- Source code, narrative, sample problem, and flow charts.
Ordering Infomation: Program number 360ADR09X
Program Number
Extension
BASIC
none
Distribution Meilium
Code
~
MT
MT
MT
7DC/800 26
28
9/S00
9/1600 29
User Volume
R~uirement
01
01
01
Additional Program Support Material: Application Description Manual (E20-0188).
If only the form numbered manuals that are a part of the Basic Program Package are reqUired, order from Mechanicsburg -- not from PID. All other form numbered manuals
are available only from Mechanicsburg.
Minimum System/370 Configuration: System/360 I/O devices listed above or comparable System/370 equipment must be used. The minimum partition (or region) size
is identical to System/360 requirements except that Staple requires 116K bytes under
the supported OS/VS systems.
*Users ordering a 1403 Printer will require a QN2 or PN2 print train.
**Users operating the Fashion System who do not intend to implement "Black
Book" replacement, summary files, or the Staple System will require one less
disk or tape.
***A minimum partition or region of 4SK bytes is required for Fashion under OS and
56K for Staple under DOS.
****A minimum partition of 40K bytes is required for Fashion under DOS.
***'ricA minimum partition or region of 114K bytes is reauired for Staple under OS and
and 96K for Staple Forecasting and Simulation Subsystems under DOS.
BaSic Program Package for Fashion System/OS (360ADR04X):
Documentation -- Application Directory ... Program Description Manual (H200480, N20-1084) .'. Operations Manual (H20-0481>Machine Readable -- Source code, narrative, and sample problem.
Optional Program Package for (360ADR04X):
Machine Readable -- Flow charts.
Ordering Information: Program number 360A-DR-04X
Program Number
Extension
BASIC
none
OPTIONAL
none
Distribution Medium
~
DTR
DTR
DTR
DTR
DTR
DTR
~
7DC/SOO 26
9/S00
28
9/1600 29
70C/800 26
9/S00
9/1600
28
29
User Volume
Reguirement
none
none
none
none
none
none
Basic Program Package for Staple System/OS (360ADR05X): 1
Documentation -- Application Directory ... Program Description Manual (H200591) ... Operations Manual (H20-0593)'
Machine Readable -- Source code, narrative, sample problem, and flow charts.
Ordering Information: Program numb.er 360A-DR-05X
Program Number
Extension
BASIC
none
Distribution Medium
~
MT 7DC/800
MT 9/800
MT 9/1600
~
26
28
29
User Volume
Requirement
The Scheduler:
Is the class section aSSignment program for student scheduling in
secondary schools., vocational schools, and junior colleges.
(360A-US-07X)
Description: Using a Master Schedule prepared by the school, Student Scheduling
System!360 processes student course requests to create Student Schedules, Class
Lists, and an Updated Master Schedule. Two auxiliary programs, the Tally and Conflict Matrix Programs, 360A-US-06X, are used to furnish the school administrator
with data pertinent to Master Schedule creation. These programs are already available.
Features: Variable length alphameric course codes (three to six characters) ••• Increased period, section, semester, and days capacity ••• Increased course description fields ••• unique descriptions for each period of blocked courses .•• common
course request input ••• improved pre-scheduling editing ••• female - male balancing
of classes ••• alternate course scheduling ••• partial scheduling for students with
conflicts ••••eject matrix output for students with conflicts ••• daily study hall class
lists ••• independent editing of punched and printed output ••• sub-heading lines may
be added on printed reports ••• use of on-line disk storage increases the efficiency of
the program ••. core storage is employed for table structuring; it is also used to contain part or all of the Master Schedule, reducing processing time ••• the Scheduling
program is modularin construction, consisting of five distinct phases; the input, Student Schedule output, and class list output phases may be run individually ••• the
Linkage Editor function within the Basic Operating System/360 13K Disk version can
be used to I ink the standard Schedul ing program to special output routines.
Use: The Scheduler reads all types of scheduling input, creates student schedules,
andUpdates the Master Schedule. The student schedules are stored on disk and may
be sorted into class list sequence, which are stored on a second disk pack. Updated
master schedUle, student schedule, and class list output may be punched and/or
printed; student schedule and class list output may be saved on disk for use at a later
date.
.
Customer Responsibilities: A thorough kno~ledge and understanding of the system before use ••• use Tally and Conflict Matrix programs to deSign optional master schedule ••• create error.;.free input files.
Programming Systems: The BaSic Operating System/360, 8K DISK Version, is used
to control the Scheduling program. The scheduler Is written in the IBM Basic Operating System/360 Assembler with Input/Output Macros (8K Disk). If Class List output is deSired, the Basic Operating System/360 SORT/MERGE (8K Disk) Program
is required.
.
.
01
01
01
Not to be reproduced without written permission
PA 360.6
~ : :~1: Programming
Nov 73
IBM System/360 Application Programs
Minimum Systems Requirements: A 2030 Processing Unit Model F with Decimal
Arithmetic (/t3237) and 1051 Attachment (#7915) ••• 1051 Control Unit Model Nl
with CPU Attachment (#3130l, First Punch Attachment (#4410), and First Reader
Attachment ('/I.44ii) '" 1052 Printer-Keyboard Model 6 ••• 2841 Storage Control
Iv\odel 1 ... three* 2311 Disk Storage Drives Modell ••• 2821 Control Unit
Modell ••• 1403 Printer Model 2 ••• 2540 Card Read Punch Modell.
"Two Disk units are required for the Scheduler Program in addition to the One Disk unit
required for the 8K Disk Basic Operating System and other non-scheduling data. If no
class lis~s are desired. only one extra disk unit i< needed,
Basic Program Material: Documentation -- Application Description "Student Scheduling System/360" (H20-0202) ... User's Manual (H20-0239) ... Application
Directory.
Machine Readable -- Object Program, Job Control card decks and sample problem on
one 7- or 9-track DTR or in card form.
Optional Program Material: Documentation -- System Manual
Machine Readable -- Source program on one 7- or 9-track DTR or one 1316 Disk
Pack**.
Programs ordered on tape are in card-image form on either 7- or 9-track Distribution
Tape Reels . The usel' will receive 9-track DTR unless he specifically requests a 7-track DTR. Both are written at 800 bpi. The user who orders 7- or 9track DTR from PID will require one 2400 series tape unit, with its associated control unit. The data conversion feature is required, if 7-track tape is to be used. The
DTRs are solely for the purpose of punching out the required program decks. A tape
unit is not required for system operation. DTRs will be supplied by PfD; no tape submittal is required.
** Disks: The requester may forward one 1316 Disk Pack in accordance with current ordering
Minimum S~s(em 'Requirements: System/300 Model 30F, or larger ••• one or more
2701s wit Synchronous Data Adapter - Type I (#7695 or #7696) ••• as terminals
one or more System/360 Model 30 or larger with 2701 Synchronous Data AdapterType I (#7695 or #7696); Model 20 with Communications Adapter, 1978 Terminal
(RPQ) Models 1, 2, and 3: 1009 Data Transmission Unit; 7701/1702 M:lgnetic
Tape Uniti 7711 Data Communications Unit - Magnetic Tape; 1974 Terminal (RPQl
Model 2i 1013 Card Transmission Terminal.
BaSic Prograril'JIWteotial:
Publications* -- Users Manual (H20-0349) ••• Operators Manual (H20-0350)
... Systems Manual (Y20-0097).
Docuinentation -- Application 0 irectory.
Machine Readable** -- OS/360 Job Stream on one 9-track Distribution Tape Reel
(OTR), 800 or 1600 bpi, or one 7-track (Data Conversion Feature required) OTR
at 800 cpi.
Optional Program Material:
Machine Readable# -- Source Modules on one 9-track DTR at 800 or 1600 bpi,
or one 7-track , 1051 Attachment (f791S) ••• 10S1 Control Unit Model N1 ... 10S2 Printer-Keyboard ••• Processor Attachment (+3130>
••• Adapter for First Punch ('3410> ••• Adapter for First Reader (14411> ••• 2841
)~torage. C~~I ~ader ••• three 2311 Disk Storage Drives ••• one Reader Punch
selected from 1442 Card Read Punch Model Nl, 2540 Card Read Punch, 2520
Card Read Punch Model AI, or one Reader and One Punch selected from 2501 Card
Reader Model Bl or 62, 2520 Card Punch Model B2 or B3, 1442 Card Punch
Model N2 ••• one Printer and the Associated Control Unit if the latter is required:
1403 Printer Model 2, 3, or Nl with 2821 Control Unit, Models 1, 2, 3, 5, and
1416 Interchangeable Train Cartridge, or 1443 Printer Model N1 with 24 Print PoSitions Additional ('5558), Selective Character Set for 13 Character Bar (16402),
and Preferred Character Set Feature (t9S62 or 9564) ... one Magnetic Character
Reader with Attachment 1412 Magnetic Character Reader with 7720 Adapter or
1419 Magnetic Character Reader with 7720 Adapter).
The conversion of 1440 combined master file program requires the fallowing machine
configuration or its equivalent in S/360 with compatibility. One 1441 Processing
Unit Model A4 ••• one Card Reader and assOCiated control unit ••• one Printer and
associated control unit ... one 1311 .Disk Storage Drive and Disk Storage Control
Uni! (.3321> ... two 7335 Magnetic Tape Units and 7802 Tape Adapter.
Bastc Program Material: Documentation -- Appl ication Directory, Appl ication Description Manual (E20-0246), Programmer's Manual (H20-0263), Operator's
Manual (H20-0262), Sample Problem Manual.
.
Machine Readable -- One .9-track DTR <800 or 1600 bpi) or 7-track MagnetiC Tape
containing System/360 Assembler Language source decks, System/360 Object decks
(some utility functions), System/360 Sample Problem Job Control decks, Sample
Problem data decks, 1440 Autocoder Source deck.
Optional Program Material -- Systems Manual.
Note: The program is available on magnetic tape or disk pack. All submitted tapes
iiiii'S'[be 800 bpi, 2400 foot reels. 7-track tapes require the data conversion feature. One magnetic tape reel per order or one 1316 Disk Pack, vented hub model,
per ordf'r will be required.
Notto.be repr()~uced without written permission
PA 360.8
i--_.: :~~~
Nov 13
Programming
IBM S Yst e m /3 6 0 A Pp I i c a ti 0 n Pro g ram 5
linear Programming System/360 (LPS/360>:t Provides theSystem/360 DOS user
with a simple, easy to understand,
easy to use means of solving linear
Programming problems (360A-CO-1SX).
Description: Mathematical optimization is any mathematical technique for determining
the optimum use of various resources - capital, raw materials, manpower, plant, or
other facilities - to attain a particular objective such as mimimum cost or maximum
profit, when there are alternate uses for the resources; Linear Programming is the most
Widely used of these techniques and has been used to aliocate, assign, schedule,
select, or evaluate the uses of limited resources for such jobs as blending, mixing,
cutting, trimming, bidding, pricing, purchasing, planning, and the transportation and
distribution of raw materials and finished products.
'
LPS/360 processes up to 200 row problems on a 32K System/360andup to 1500
row problems on 64K and larger System/360s. The number of columns is I imited only
by the amount of di sk space avai lable.
Features: Large problem capacity (1500 rows on a 64K System and 200 rows on a
~em) •.. simple flexible processing control (optional conditional control of
processing sequence)' .• , Simple problem definition (easy-to-use format and extensive
data maintenance functions, specification of starting solution basis, combination of
problems to form master problems) •.• advanced mathematical methods - automatic
iterative input scaling for accuracy, revised simplex method (product form of inverse) ,
bounded variable feature for range ( and ) constraints and bounded variables to simplify
problem description and to increase problem capacity and solution speed.,. multiple
pricing ..• efficient triangularization inversion method 'for accuracy ••• extensive postoptimal analysis options (di screte parametric analysis for all problem data and activitycost-bound relationships for all variables) •• , extensive checking (input check for
duplicate entries, solution processing check to test for need.of early inversion and
automatic solutio!) check).
Use: LPS/360 is governed by procedure control cards which specify the solution
sequeRCe. Inpllt data may originate on cards and be stored on disk for subsequent
processing. Several problems may be stored on the disk and updated, rerun, or combined. For example, a c;orporate model can be formed· from divisional models; or a total
production plan, from the plans for indiVidual products.
When ordering on tape if the residentsysteni is not specified, 2311 will be
forwarded.
Optional Program Material: '
Machine Readable** ...:- The s.ource 'clecks
are
available on onE! 9':'track DTR (800 or 1600 bpj) or one 1-track 2400' reel of
tape at sao cpi (Data Conversion feature required).
Ordering Procedures:
*
tf only the Form numbered manuals are'required, order from the IBM DistrllUtion
Center, Mechanicsburg - nolP 1.0.
'
** Magnetic tapes (2400') may be forwarde(! or ordered (the program order card should
accompany the tape order form). The 1316 disk pack must be forwarded.
If the track and density requirements are riot indicated on the program order card,
9-track at SOO bpi will be forwarded.
Additional Program Support Material: ApplicatiGn Description Manual (H20-0513-1),
Reference Material: Introduction to linear Programming(E20-8171) '" Aluminum
Alloy Blending (E20-0127) '" Electric Arc Furnace Steelmaking Manual (E20-0147)
... Feed Manufacturing CE20-0148) ... Ice Cream Bieriding"CE20-0156) ... Blast
Furnace Burdening (E20-0160) •.. Cotton Blending (E20-0164) '" Gasoline
Blending (E20-016S) ... LP-MOSS/l130 Program Reference Manual CH20-0345).
Reports may be on cards or printer. Output options include a full solution report, comprehensive solution analysis and parametric analysis reports.
Special Sales Information: The design .emphasis of LPS/360is on ease of learning,
ease of use, large problem capacity on a small computer, and use under DOS/360.
The design goals of MPS/360 (360A-CO-14X) are high performance on larg~ computing systems and use under OS/360.
For those installations at which either LP$/360 (oOS) or MPS/360 (OS) could be
used (64K systems or larger), the greater efficiency of MPS must be weighed against
the greater problem size capacity and the ease of use of LPS.
MPS will not operate on a 32K System/360. However, on a 64K Model 30, typical
LP problems in the size range which can b~ handled by MPS (less than 300 rows) will
run as much as three times faster with MPS than with LPS. On the other hand, LPS is
capable of handling problems with as many as 1500 rows .
Customer Responsibility: A thorough knowledge of DOS/360 is required for installation
of LPS. Since the CPS program documentation is written in tutorial fashion, little
mathematical background or linear programming experience is needed.
Programming Systems: LPS/360 operates under control of System/360 Disk Operating
System (DOS). The source language is primarily FORTRAN IV isk Pack.
Ordering Procedures:
*If only the form numbered manuals are required, order fromthe IBM Distribution
Center, Mechanicsburg -- not PID.
**When ordering, if the distribution medium is not specified on the back of the prog.-am
order clIrd, 9-track tape at 800 bpi will be forwarded,
The AUT05POT processor accepts an English':'like language defining geometric entities, patterns of points, deSired motion sequences and machining information. This
input, called a part program, is converted to a meta-language containing mathematical
representations. of the geometriC surfaces and sequential instructions directing a cutting
deVice with respect to defined surfaces and points.
The. processor will then analytically calculate points on the cutting device axis at the
tip (bottom center) of the device. The resultant motion will always be linear motIons.
The AUTOSPOT processor also allows the optional interpretation of point-to-polnt
machining verbs and eliminates the burdensome task previously required of a userwritten post processor program.
These .data are then available to a user-supplied post processor which must insure
that they 'conform to the characteristics and dynamics of a particular N/C device.
The user is supplied with a printed listing of the part program and optionally a printed
I isting of the cutter center points and machining information. He mllst al so specify
which post processors ·are to be called to process the output of the AUTOSPOT processor.
Features: The processor includes extensive pattern definition and manipulative capabilities, scalar variables, nested definitions, FORTRAN-like arithmetic computational
facilities, geometric definitions, sophisticated editing functions and the generation of
cutter motions required to perfQrm simple milling operations. The AUTOSPOT Processor establishes a precedent in that a wide range of machining verbs may optionally
be interpreted. This capabil ity substantially reduces the complexity of the usersupplied post processor required to produce the final input to a ll1achine tool/controller.
Use: AUTOSPOT may be executed in a normal job step environment. It is designed
to reside on a direct access device in executable form and need only be scheduled as
a job operating under 005/360.
Customer Responsibil iUes: A customer using AUTOSPOT must take the following
steps to effect usable results and optimum performance:
1. Supply and merge into the AUTOSPOT processor any post processors
required by his N/C controller/machine tool configurations.
2. Appropriately train system programmers to enable them to use the Disk
Operating System facilities, to operate, mqintain and update the AUTOSPOT
processor.
3. Implement modifi,cation and version reieases.
4.
Insure that proper training is given to programmers responsible for developing part programs.
Programming Systems: The AUTOSPOT processor is written in its entirety in DOS
Assembler Language. The input/output routines are written in physical 10CS. The
minimum DOS configurlltion required to operate AUTOS POT includes the DOS Assembly
Language program and the DOS utilities. AUTOSPOT users must order the System/360
.Disk Operating System separately.
Machine Requirements: A 2030 Processing Unit Model E with Floating Point Arithmetic<#44Z7J, 1051 Attachment(#7915) ... 1051 Control Unit Model N1 with
First Printer' Attachment (#4409), First Punch Attachment (#4410), First Reader
Attachment (#4411>, and CPU Attachment (13130> ••• 1052 Keyboard Model 6 '"
2501 Reader Model B1 '0' 1442 Punch Model N2 ••• 1443 Printer Model N1 •••
2841 Storage Control ••• 2311 Disk File Drive.
Basic Program Material:
Publlcations* -- Part Programming Manual (H20-0373-1> ••• Operator's Manual
. ••• Application Directory.
Machine Readable** -- Relocatable object modules and sample problem contained on
one 9-track DTR in either 9-track (800 or 1600 bpi) or 7-track 800 cpi C360A-CN-09X)
Optional Program Material:
Description: AD-APT /AUTOSPOT operates as a task under control of DOS/360,
accepts either BCDIC or EBCDIC input on any sequential system input device, and
allows any number of input decks (part programs) to be processed in a single job step.
Machine Readable** -- Source programs and flowcharts on one 9-track 2400' reel
of magnetic tape (800 bpi) or 9-track DTR <1600 bpj) or one 7-track 800 cpi COata
Conversion feature required) 2400' reel of magnetic tape.
The AD-APT/AUTOSPOT processor accepts an English-like language defining geometric entities, patterns of pOints, desired motion sequences and machining information.
This input, called a part program, is converted to a meta-language containing mathematical representations of the geometric surfaces and sequential instructions directing
a cutting device with respect to defined surfaces and pOints.
The processor will then analytically or iteratively calculate points on the curting
device axis at the tip (bottom center) of the device. The resultant motion will always
be I inear motions whose magnitudes are dictated by specified tolerance criteria.
These pOints are then available to a user-supplied postprocessor which must insure
that they conform to the characteristics and dyni\mics of a particular N/C device.
The user i~ supplied with a printed listing of the part program and optionally a printed
listing of tilt: cutter center pOints and machining information. He must also specify
which postprocessors are to be called to process the output of the AD-APT/
AUTOS POT processor.
Features: The AD-APT/AUTOSPOT Processor is the first sophisticated Numerical
Control Processor which effectively addresses itself to the requirements of both pOintto-pOint and contouring machine tool users, yet operates on a small computing system.
It is designed to process the AUTOSPOT language and the AD-APT language, or any
mixture of the two languages in anyone part program, without sacrifice in proceSSing
speed. The processor is substantially faster than the 1620/1311 AD-APT Processor.
The AD-APT Numerical Control language provides contouring capabilities involving
constant cutter contact with vertical surfaces of many shapes and nonvertical planes.
In addition, very sophisticated macro and loop capabilities are provided for repeating
with variations a set of predefined operations. The processor also encompasses a very
extensive set of geometric definitions, FORTRAN'-like computational facilities and
comprehensive editing functions.
Use: The AD-APT/AUTOSPOT Processor may be executed in a normal job step
environment. The processor is designed to reside on a direct access device in executable form and need only be scheduled as a job operating under DOS/360.
Customer Responsibilities: A customer using AD-APT/AUTOSPOT must take the
following steps to effect usable results and optimum performance:
1. He must supply and merge into the AD-APT /AUTOSPOT processor any postprocessors required by his N/C controller/machine tool configurations.
2.
He must appropri2"ely train system programmers to enable them to use the
Disk Operating System facilities, to operate, maintain and update the
AD-APT /AUTOSPOT Processor.
3.
He must implement modification and version releases.
4.
He should insure that proper training is given to those programmers responsible
for developing part programs.
Programming Systems: The AD-APT/AUTOSPOT Processor is written in its entirety
in DOS Assembler language. The input/output routines are written in physicallOCS.
Ordering Procedures:
*
If only the form numbered manuals are required, order from the I BM Distribution
Center, Mechanicsburg -- not PID.
** If the track and density requirements are not specified on the back of the program
order card, 9-track at 800 bpi will be forwarded. Card decks for the BasiC Machine Readable material will bp supplied only to users who do not have magnetic
tapes available.
DTRs for the basic program will be furnished by PID; no tape submittal is required.
MagnetiC tape (2400') for the Optional Program Material may be forwarded or
ordered (the program order card should accompany the tape order form).
Additional Program Support Material: Application Description Manuals (H20-0463)
and (H20-0462) ... System Manuals CY20-0 118) and (Y20-0 119).
APT (360A-CN-10X):t
Description: This processor operates as a task under control of OS/360. The APT
processor accepts either BCD·or EBCDIC input on any sequential system input device
and allows any number of input decks (part prograllls) to be processed in a single job
step.
The APT processor accepts an English-like language defining geometric shapes, deSired motion sequences, and machining infDrmation. This input, called a part program,
is converted to a meta-language containing mathematical representations of the geometric surfaces and sequential instructions directing the movement of a cutting device
with respect to the defined surfaces.
The processor will then analytically or iteratively cah:ulate points on the cutting device
axis at the tip of the device (bottom center of the cutting device). The resultant motions
will always be straight line motions whose length is determined by specified tolerance
criteria. These points are then available to a user-supplied post processor which must
insure that they conform to the characteristics and dynamics .of a particular N/C device.
The APT processor is also capable of modifying the cutter axis to conform to part
program specifications. When the processor is in a multi-axis (4 or 5 axis) environment, the output data will .also contain the unit vector representing the cutter axis for
each output point.
The user is supplied with a listing of the part program and optionally a li.sting.of the
cutter center points and machining Information. He must also specify which post
processors are to be called to process the output from the APT processor.
Features:
Double prec"ision calculations are used through~t the processor to improve
reliability and extend the range of usable numbers.
An analytical proceSSing technique calculates start-up pOSitions and noniterative solutions for motion sequences involving vertical planes or cylinders
for drive and check surfaces and non-vertical planes for part surfaces • This
technique significantly reduces the processing time for these cases'.
The data handling technique for the POCKET feature has been designed to
provide efficient usage of Wol'k files.
An internal statement number is assigned by the processor and referenced by
output listings and error messages.
.
A debugging facility has been included in the processor to assist computer
programmers in locating problem areas.
The level of nesting allowed for MACRO's is five. The number of MACRO
variables allowed is 50.
The storage requirements for reSident tables are predetennined and the space
dynamically allocated to reduce the requirement for programmer manipulation.
Reliability of the processor, particularly ARELEM is the primary design
criterion.
Dummy call structures are provided to assist with interfacing of special user
progMms.
Not to be reproduced without written permission
PA360.11
Nov 13
ISM System/3~.O Application ProYTams
• The redehnition of variable symbols as another surface. of the same type without the inclusion of the CANON modifier in the surface definition is pennitted
via a modal CANON/ON - CANONjOFF command.
The core storage requirements for each MACRO are printed.
Post processors are created as separate load modules and may be added or
modified without re-link editing other post processors or any other component
of the APT system.
A tool axis specification and algorithm have been implemented to provide predictable multi-axis results.
• A feature to allow selective printing of the output data.
Pattern definition and manipulation capability to facilitate point-to-point
programming •
Machine Readable-- $ource prog{lints, execlMl)le ioad mclules, overlay stfUCtures,
and sample part programs.ar8 coltained on one 1'Itf:! of magnetic tape 2400' (800
bpi>,9-track DTR (1600 bpi) or 7-track (800 cpi, Data Conversion feature required)
mode •. The contents of. the ~ are wrltwn In tht! U!HMOVE Ullload format.
If track and density reqUirements are not indicated on the back of the progralll ocdet
card, a 9-track tape (800 bpj) will be forwarded.
.
Magnetic tapes (2400') may be forwaJdecj or ordered (the order card shDIIld .
accompany' the tape order form).
Ordering Procedures:
Additional Proyram SuW'(ort Material: Application Description (H20-0ISI-) ...
System Manoa CV2D- 08D) ••• System Manual Flowchart C360A-CN-12X):t
System macro capability to allow commonly used macros to be defined once and
subsequently be available to any input part program.
AD-APT IAUTOSPOT isa bilingual processor which prepares runerlcal instructlo{lS
for both pcint-to-point. and contOUi'lng machine tools.
Segment Read feature, which allows segments of part programs to be stored on
direct access devices and subsequently read in and include in input part programs.
DescripUon: The AD';'APT /AUTOSPOT Processor addresses itself effectively to the
requirements of both paint-to-polnt and contl'uring machine users, yet operates on a
medium scale computing system. It is deSigned to process the AUTOSPOT language
and the AD-APT language, or any mixture of the two languages in anyone part program, without sacrifice in processing speed.
Implicit subscripting for simplified part coding and improved processor performance.
Improved Pocketing capabil itv in that the part surface plane may optionally be
used as the bottom of the pocket.
Virtual elimination of arithmetic element loops by.addition of code to detect and
exit from loop conditions.
Use: The APT processor may be executed in a normal job step environment. The
iifoCessor is deSigned to reside on a direct access device in executable form and need
only be schel;luled as a job operating under 05/360. PCP, MFT, or MVT options
may be used to execute APT.
Customer Responsibilities: To achieve usable results and optimum performance, a
customer must supply and 'merge into the APT processor any post processors reou:rr:d
by his N/C contro!\er/machine tool combinations .•• he must make sure that appropri. ate training is given to system programmers 1.0 permit them to use the Operating System
far.lIities to operate, maintain, and update the APT processor ..• he must implement
modilicatlon and venion releases ... he must make sure that proper training is given to
the part programmers responsible for developing the input.
The AD-APT /AUT05POT Processor provides contouring capabilities involving constant
cutter contact with vertical surfaces of many shapes and non-vertical plane p.-t surfaces. In cfddition, sophisticated macro and loop capabilities Me provided for repeating
with variation a set of predefined operations. The processor also encompasses an extensive set of geometric and pattern definition and manipulative capabilities, scalar
variables, nested definitions, FORTRAN-like computational facilities, and sophisticated editing functions.
Features:
• Both the AUT05POT aNi AD-APT languages may be processed in the
part program.
same
• Long operand floating point calculatlol's are used throughout the Processor to
improve reliability and extend the rang!.' of usable numbers.
A processor assignPd statement number is referenced in output listings and
c!lagnostlc messages •
The number of MACRO variables allowed Is 50. The level of MACRO nesting
allowed is five.
The number of vocabul.... y synonyms allowed Is 50.
looping capabilities 1ft Implemented using the LOOPST /LOOPND feature of
APT.
The output file (ClFllE) may be edited by USing TRACUT and/or COpy instructions.
Debuggi~
Programming
.~yster:
The APT processor routines are primarily written in FORTRAN
~"""AP'f input output routines are written in 05/360 Assemt.iy Language and
interfar.e to the BSAM access method. The minimum OS configuration to operate APT
includes the 05 Assembly Language program, the FORTRAN H compiier, the 44K
[-level linkage editor, and the OS utility programs,
APT users must order the S!3bO Operating System separately.
System Configuration: Operating System/JbO requirements .•• Floating Point Arithmetic .. , approximately 215K bytes of core storage. Executable load modules require
1.2 million bytes of direct access storage (310 2311 disk tracks>. AdGitional
storage IS normally required for user-implemented po!'.t processor load modules.
Work space for intermediate storage must be avai lable on one or more 2311, 2302,
or 2314 disk storage device ••. 2301 or 2303 drtlm storage drive .•• 2400 tape
unit.
The amount of intermediate storage required i5 a function of the part program executed.
Intermediate storage requirements generally vary from a total of .3 million bytes to 2
mi Ili on bytes.
At insta!lations where APT is a significant appli r..ation , to meet normal tnr·.,,·:t requireme-'1ts, ... Insider: a model 2050H with Floatinq Point Arithmetic (#4427) • __ one
;; 40(: ,ertes tape d'iv~ ... fow 2311 Disk Ori'.!e!s ... 2540 Card Read P".ch ...
IOU AlIad'ITlenl "'evi.ce {RPQ} .•• 1012 Tape Fu":-h.
facilities are Included to aid part programmers in locating problem
areas.
Extensive FORTRAN-like computatioflal facilities
are Included.
. An extensive set of geometric and patH'n definition and manipulative capability
is inci!.!ded. The pattern capability is a significant subset of that contained in
5/360 APT.
• A wide range of AUTOSPOT machin!n') verbs may be Interpreted by the
processor,
• Any number of part programs may be pr')cessed in a single job step.
• Postprocessor input/output modules, completely compatible with tilose of
5/360 APT, are provided for ease in implementation of FORTRAN-coded
postprocessors.
A system library concept permits acce';slng externally defined PlWt program
segments, such as a master TOOL or MACRO lilll'ary.
A Significant subset of 5/360 APT pattern definition and manipulative
capability enhances the facility of poillt-to-point part programming.
A thickness (THICK) statement may
conlouring oper~ticos.
b·~
applied to surfaces used in AD-APT
H,,,, re(~d;nH;c;~ of var ..:,ble s'lo"bols q.Jivalenced to nonsr.alar er.lities IS
co;\:ro!.,: v':, ;; mO(li!! ~Ar.'ON/ON"Ct-.NONA1~F st"t?mrllt.
The capacity of the RE';;''::RV table.ac':ommcdates 100 unique array names.
New ':;'l,;oputationa! functions are inchded.
The XYONL Y mode of AUTOS POT may be suppressed via the modal command
XYONLY /OFF,
AUT05PQT constants, used in verb i 1terpretatlon, may be modifled via the
modal command UNIT lu.
Basic Program Material:
Publications -- Application Directory ... Patt Programming Manual (H20-0309) •.•
Operator's Manual (H20-0331). If only the form numbered manuals are reqUired, order
from the IBM Distribution Center, Mechanicsburg -- not from PID.
Use: The AD-APT /AUT05POT Processor ~ccepts an EngliSh-like language defining
geometric entities I patterns of points, deSired motion sequences and machining information. This input, called a part program, 'S converted into. meta-language coltaimng
Not to be reproduced without written perml..lon
IBM
PA 360.12
Nov 73
Programming
IBM Systtm!.360 APplication Progrll/tls
1~I_tical r~s.ntations of the geometric entllies and sequential instructions directlng. culling device with respect to specified surfaces and points.
The prvcessor then calculates either analytically or It.atively, points on the cutU",
device axis, such that tile linear molions generated thereby are opthll;zed with respect
to the specified tolerance criteria.
Further, a wide range of AUTOS POT machining yerbs mlly optionally be interpreted by
the processor, thus greatly reduc1hg the tasks required or a postpl'Ocessor.
These data are then available for subsequent processing by a IIser-supplled postprocessor
program, which must insure-that they conform to the ch.ecterlstics and the dynllllics of
a particular Nit device.
The user is supplied with II printed Iisting of the part program, and optionally a printed
listing of the cutter center points -and machining information. He must also specify
which postprocessors are to be executed to process the outpUl of AD·APT /AUTOSPOT •
Customel'Responsibilities: A customer using AD·APT /AUrOSPOT must take the
follOWing steps to effect usable results and optimum performance.
1. He must supply and merge into the AD-APT /AUTQ5POT Processor any
postprocessers required by his N/C Controller /machil!e tool configurations.
2. He must appropriately train system programmers to enable them to ule the
Operating System facilities, to operate, and update the AD-APT /AUTOSPOT
Processor.
3. He must implement modifiCition and version releases.
4. He must ins...e that prope; training Is given to JIPOgrammers responsible fOl
developing part programs.
Offers a meehantled approach hI detAiled reqUirements
planning for a larqe segment "I malluiactlmnq industries.
Thi~ system uses tile Item Maste, and ProdUct StructUN files cl?ated by the System/3bO Bill of Material Pr(l(;eSSOf f'rog,.I\\ (3bOA-MEObXl or OBOMP (5734 ·)()(41. It performs I.ime series plaMinti to determine
planned orders for ftnished products, Assemblies, sub ...ssemblies, ~rts. and
raw material based upon the input of forecasts and orders. <360A-MF·05X)
Requlremet1tsPlannin9:t
This system determines the net reqUirements for lilllshed prociucts and component parts,
establishes planned orders based on the predetermined order policy, and otfsetl t.he
planned orders with respect to lead times. Additional capabilities include projecting
demand.;. consideration of safety stock, allocated quantity, shrinkage (actors •••
plan order policies Include discrete, fixed quantity, least unit cost, and part period
balancing •.• modifying plan order policies by considering number-days· supply ,
minimum-maximum-multiple quantities, and culoff dates .•• offsetting by a tixed or a
calculated lead time. ProceSSing variations include: complete generation of requirements, Requirements Alteration (r.}visions to gross requirements), and Conversational
Planning (reviSions to planned orders). A customizing procedure permits a user to tailol
the system to meel his specifiC reqiliremenls. System/360 Requirements Planning
utilizes many of the concepts of the requirements planning subsystem discussed in the
IBM Production Information and Control System (E20·0280).
.
Description: System/360 Requirements Planning consists 01 two programs: The Requirements Generation Program and the Print Exception Progrilm. The inputs to the
-.Iystem are from card, magnetiC tape, or disk and contain the '1ross reqUIrements by
shop day, calendar date or time period. Card input is by date and quantity only. These
requirements can be generated manually from a forecast, from customer orders, or from
System/360 Inventory Control (ApplicatIOn Description Manual H20-0471). This
input spans a user specified number of planning time periods into the future. The out·
put of the. Requirements Generation Program i~ in the form of planned orders for purchased and manufactured items. Orders for items rr.anufactured are available for input
to a capacity planning function, and orders to be purchased are available to a purchasing function. A considerable amount of flexibility is prOVided by System/360 Requirements Planning relative to the printing of pertinent informalion. This fleXibility is
. proVided to enable the extraction of
much or as little information as desired. Three
types of reports are prOVided: detailed requirements, planned orders that have been
adjusted through ConversatIOnal Planning, and an exception report. The Print Exception Program is used to print the exceptions generated from the Requirements Generation Program.
as
Features:
Proyramming Systems: The AD-APT /AUTOSPOT Numerical Control Processor is
written prima,'ity in Assembler Language. It operates as a task under control of 05/360.
It requires the F level assembler and E level Iinkage editor and uses the S VS 1. MAC LIB
and SVSl.FORTLI6 libraries.
Two programs are provided to assist the user in performillg requirements
planning: The Requirements Generation Program performs the actual time
series requirements generation, and the Print Exception Program lirints
notices for the exceptions that were discovered during requirements generation.
The AD-APT /AUTOSPOT Processor may be executed Ina normal job step envlrorwnent.
The processor is deSigned to ,eside on a direct access device In executable form, and
need only be scheduled as a job operating under OS/360.
Functions performed include gross requirements determin.ltloll, net requirements determination, plan orders, and offset requirements. Net requirements
determination, plan orders, and offset requirements are optional functions.
Minimum S~stem Re~uirements: In addition to OS/360 reqUirements, this program re·
-qui,es \heloating oint Arithmetic feature and lOOK bf core. Distribution of the program will be by magnetic tape only. Systems without tape drives may be used to execute the proqram if other provisions are made to load the program to a disk storage device
Many options are provided within the functions. These include: projection
of demand ... safety stock quantity ... allocated quantity ..• shrillkagc
factor ... discrete, fixed quantity; least unit cost, part period baiancing,
and user order policies. " minimum-maximum-multiple, number-days·o{·
suppiy, maximum quanti~y, and cutoff date modifiers to order policies •••
fixed and calculated lead time ••• product structure offSet adjustment •••
product structure scrap factor ... user's exits for engineering change effectivity of product structure.
The program requires the equivalent of 15 cylinders of 231-1 storage on a dis~ storage
device. In addition, space must be available on a second dilk storage device for Inter~
mediate stOlage. The amount of intermediate storage required is dependent on the input
data.
An example of a configlA'ation which could be used forthll program II a 2040G •••
2540 Card Read Punch ... 1403 Printer ... two 2311 Disk Storage Orives ••• one
2400 Magnetic Tape Drive.
Basic Program Material:
Publications -- Application Directory ••• Part Programming Manual (H20-0549) •••
Operations Mantal (H20·0557>' If only the form numbered manuais are required,
order from Mechanicsburg -- not from PID.
Machine Readable* -- Executable load modules, postprocenor overlay structure and
sample part programs are contained on one OTR 9·track (800 or 1600 bpj) or one
7 -track (800 cpi, Dllta ConverSion featare required>, The contents of the tape are
written In the IEHMOVE unload fOlmat.
Optional Program Mllterlal:
Machl!1 •••
S,.. Manua <-vaila I ity alid form number will be announced In a PRL,>.
Three types of processing variations are provided. - These include: complete generation 'of requirements, Requirements Alteration (revisions to
gross requirements), and Conversational Planning (revisions to planned
orders).
.
Three types of reports are provided. These include: detail report of
requirements, planned orders that have been adjusted through Conversational Planning, and an exception r~port.
Two optional methods are prOVIded for pritlting of detail requirements.
These include printing of item indicative information, gro>s reqUirements,
open orders, net requirements, planned orders, and offset requirements
in random sequence, as requirements are generated, or at the completion
of generating requirements in the sequence t.hat the Item Master file is
organized.
Provision is made to store qross requirements, open orders, and planned
orders in either an Item Master file or a Subordinate Item Master file,
Joth of which are created ano lriai I'ltained by the System/::' 60 Bi Ii cf
Material Processor or OBOMP. 'A'hen thE' Subordinate item Master fde is used,
any combination of the gross requirements, open orders, and planned orders
will be stored as one separate record for each item. The linkage between the
two Files will be created by System/360 Requirements P!'lnning.
Input to the system is from card, magnetic tape, or disk and contain gross
requirements by shop day, calendar date, or ti me perio.d. Card input is
by date and quantity only.
• A cUltomizing procedure permitting the user to select the functions and
options necessary to taiior the system to meet his specifit: requirements.
Srtal S~les Informatio~: The philosophies and concepts incorporated In, System/
3 0 ReqUirements planning are applicable to a large segment of the manufacturing
industry. Modular design .and programming techniques facilitate the user's selective
..pansion and modification of input-output formats, processing rOutines and the content. of the data base. Many of the aspects of this system are discussed in the Productio" Infomliltion and Control System CE20-0280)'
Not to be reproduced without written permi,,'on
PA 360.13
Nov 73
IBM System/300 Application Programs
Use: System/360 Requirements Planning is direct access file oriented utilizing data
Co'iitainecl in the Item Master, Product Structure, and Subordinate Item Master (optiona!> files. The records within these files are created and maintained bv the System/
360 Bill of Material Processor Program (360A-ME-06Xl or DBOMP (5736-XX4).
Frequency of use of System/360 Requirements Planning will depend on the user needs
of his production plannIng function. Typically, each scheduled program run would be
a complete generation of requiremenls with the input of gross requirements spanrllng
from the current tll11e period to the last time period in the planning horizon. The Conversational P!anninq (optiol!al) method of processing enables the system to stop processing after each level of planned orders have been developed. ThiS allows the
planned orders to ~ reviewoo and, if necessary, readjust.cd before the next level of
requirements is determined. Thus, either complete requirements generati,on or Conversational Planning would normally be performed on a scheduled basiS. Requirements
Alteration processing (optional) provides for regeneration of requirements due to
changes to the original gross requirements input. In this instance, only the altererl
gross req\urements are ~nput to the system. Requirements Alteration processing would
normally be performed between scheduled complete requirements generation or Conversational Planning proqram runs.
Customer Responsibilities: A thorough knowledge and understanding of this program
befOre installation ••• customize S/360 Requirements Planning to meet user requirements •.• a thorough knowledge and understanding of the 5/360 Bill of Material
Processor or DBOMP provide and maintain a shop calendar that reSides on a direct
access device ••. define contents and format of the Item Master, Product Strucutre and
Subordinate Item Master files .•• maintain aCcurate up-to-date data '" provide open
orders to the system ••• provide fj Ie organization and maintenance of the Item Master,
Subordinate Item Master, and Product Structure files through the use of the Bill of Material
Processor Program and DBOMP.
Pro·gramming Systems: 5/360 Requirements Planning programs are written in Assembler
Language using the macro language facility and operate under DO.S or OOSjVS. In
addition, the~' als" operate in a VM/370 environment under the control of OOS or OOSjV5.
The DOS Disk Sort/Merge (360N-SM-450> (or S/370 equivalent) is required if the
exception notice file is to be sorted. In addition, Bill of Material Processor or DBOMP
is also required. The Bill of Material Processor is not supported under DOSjVS.
Minimum System KeqUirements:
For Sj360
For S/360
For S/360
Model30
Model 25
Model 22
Device or Featurf'
5/360 CPU, 32K bytes*
Decimal Arithmetic Special Feature
Control Unit for Printer-Keyboaro
Integrated 1052 Attach. Feature
S/.360 Card Reader (see NOle 1) ,
Pri Ilter-Keyboard
S/360 Printer
Maintenance of 30 surfaces in core.
Thorough set of utility options.
Ray tracing speeds in the order of .10 sec. fray surface.
Enhanced energy distribution and frequency response data presentation.
Vignetting control by ray aiming option.
• Energy distribution by 5"/. energy increments.
Comprehensive plotting features fi130l.
• Automatic Design "
Index and dispersion variables
Boundary Condition Controls'
Maximum of 20 var~ables
Use: The progra", is under the control of the designer through IIser written commands.
TOeSe commands provide data and bring into core the program modules necessary for
the required problem solution. In automatic deSign', the program accepts as input target values and parameters. The program is iterative in this ",ode. If no solutioll-can
be Found, the designer may set new targets.
Customer Responsibilities: The lens designer must be able to operate the S/360
console, and tie must devise satisfactory ba'tch problem solving procedures for 5/360.
He must be familiar with the operating rules and conventions for POSD/Il. The customer must produce his own required.. lens library and glass tables. Utility programs
assist him in this,task.
•
Programming Systems: The program is written in basic FORTRAN IV and operates
under the IBM Problem Language ANalyzer (PLAN) (360A-C~-27X) for 05/360
which in turn operates under the Operating System/300.
'
2025E
standard
2030E
3237
1051 Nl
4690
Any
1052 Mdl 8
Any
Machine C"nfiguraticm: System/360 models supported by OS/360. In addition to
the System/360 main and auxiliary storage required by 05/360 and the DASD Ilsed
by PLAN, POSO/Il requires a lOOK minimum partition or region and two million bytes
of DASD.
2540
1052 Mol 7
1403 Mdl 2
Any
Basic Program Material:
2022E
1052 MeH 8
Any (with at
least 132 print
positionsi
2B41 Mdl1
2311 Mdl 1
2311 Mdl 1
OR
Oirect Access Storage Facility
(5ee Note 2)
* A minimum partition of 24K bytes is required.
2. In'addition, a 2314-only system configuration also requires a 2400 series
tape drive for system preparation.
Refer to the machines secti"n of the sales manual for appropriate attachments required
for conneclion of input/olltput units.
BaSIC Program Material:
Publications -- Application Directory ••• Program Description Manual (H20-0584)
::-:-~s Manual (H20-0583). If only the form numbered manuals are required, order from Mechanicsburq -- not from PID.
Mach;ne Readable -- The source programs and sample problem may be obtained on
one ;':~<800 or 1600 bpi) or one 7-track 2400' reel of magnetic tape
(SOC cpi - Oat.a ConverSion f~alure reqUired) or one 1316 Oisk Pac~(
jf.lra~k and den.,ity reqlM~ments for magnetic tape lire not indicated 0
Publications -- Application Directory ••• Program Description Manual (GH200571) ... Operations Manual (GH20-05781.
If only the form numbered ~anuals are required, order from Mechanicsburg -- not
from PW.
Machine Readable -- Object Decks, Sample Job Control cards, and tile Sample
Problem Decks are furnished on a 9-tracL OTR at 800 or 1600 bpi, or one 7track DTR at 800 cpi ([)ata Conversion feature required), ,
MagnetiC Tapes (2400 1 ) may be forward{·d or ordered (the program order card
should accompany the tape order form); disk packs must be forwarded to PIO with
the program order card.
2314
1. A System/360 card punch, while not used by the System/360 Requirements
Planning prQ9rams, is required for system preparation.
the 1)~09ram or(i·,' ci.lrd,
~
standard
2841 Mdl 1
Storage Control
Disk Storage Drives (as reQuired to contain OOS or OOS/VS and the
2311 Mdl 1
llser's date fil~ (minimum of 2)
NOTES:
POSD/Il consists of an inter-'
related se.t of programs providing
.
• a complete facility for the· geometric analYSis of image forming optical systems, together with a means for automatically correcting such systems. 'The program has the capacity to analyze systems
containing prisms, toric surfaces and diffraction gratings in addition to refracting.or
reflecting elements. The designer has access to outputs such as spot diagram ·information, radial energy distributions, .and geometric frequency response tables. (360AEO-15X)
Program for Optical System Designlll (POSD/lIl:
back of
If the track and density requirements are 'lot indicated on the back of the program
order card, 9-track at 800 bpi ~i!l be forwarded.
Optional Program Material;
Machine ·Readable -- Source Decks are ;wailable on one Distribution Tape Reel
(OrR) 9-track 800 or 1600 bpi, or one DTR 7-track 800 cpi (Data Conversion
feature required).
OTRs are provided by PIO; no tape submittal is required. 'If the track and density
requirements are not indicated on the back of the program order card, 9~track at
800 bpi will be forwarded.
Additional Program Support Material: Application Description Manual (GH20-0489)
• •• System Manuals.
.
'
Reference Material: PLAN Application De~cription Manual (GH20-0490) ••• PLAN
Program Description Manua! (GH20-1066) ••• PLAN Operatiolls Manual (GH20,0596).
9-tra.:k at 800 bpi will be sent.
Magnetic tjlPC (2400') may be forwarded to or ordered from PID. TI.,
card should accompany the tape order form.
Jgram order
Disk packs must be forwarded to PID with the program order Card.
Additional Program 5l9~ort Material: Application Description Manual (GH20-0487-2)
... Systems Manual
0-0317l.
Reference Material: Production Information and Control System(GE20-0280) •••
- Application Description Manual (GH20-0197) and
Programmer's Manual (GH20-0246) ••• Inventory Control - Application Description
(GH20-0471) ... DBPMP - Application Description Manual (GH20-0771), Program
Description Manual (SH20-0829).
S.. I of Material Processor
tSupports S/3 70 configurations also.
Not to be reproduced without written permi_lon
!: ::~~
PA 360.14
Nov 73
Programming
IBM System/360Application Programs
RAX prOllides sustained access to a
System/360 from remote locations to
enable progcammers, engineers, sCientists,
and other users to obtain fast tll'naround and reduced problem-solution time for their
computational problems. (360A-CX-17X)
Remote Access Computing System·CRAX):
Descriron: RAX is a time shared,·remote computing sy'stem. Users of RAX can submit
BaSIC URTRAN IV and Basic Assembler Language jobs for compilation and time-sliced
execution from local and remote terminals, Simultaneously with similar operations from
oth~r on-I ine equipment at the computer site. Programmers can compile, modify, and
execute programs from their terminals while non-computer oriented users can be CORversat i onall y interact jng with programs prey iousl y stored in the RAX library.
Customer Responsibilities: A customer using RAX must take the following steps
before Installation to Insure satisfactory operations:
.
.
1. Order and install (satisfactorily) the communicatiOns equipment required.
2. Train operators to use the terminal command language, the programming
languages, and terminal operations.
3. Familiarize a system programmer with the internal operations of the system.
Terminal users of RAX can access up to 64 disk units to relld or write permanent or
temporary files. Multiple users are able to access these files simultaneously. The
temporary files allow preparation of intermediate results storage for later recall in that
program or subsequent programs.
RAX user flexibiiity is provided by a modular and compatible design. Three System/360
Models (30, 40, and 50> and three memory sizes (64K, 128K, and 256K bytes) are
supported. Four terminals (the IBM 1050 Data Communications Terminal,.the IBM
2741 Communications Terminal, the Nos. 33 and 35, ASR and KSR Teletypewriters,
and the IBM 2260 Display Station) can be used depending on system memory size.
Two 2311 Disk Storage Drives are necessary.
Programming System: RAX is written in BPS. Basic ,Assembler Language.
Features:
Up to 63 terminals can be used with RAX, depending upon the amount of core
memory available.
Terminals may be 1050s, 2741s, or TTYs which provide keyboard input,
typewriter output as well as 2260s, which provide keyboard input and CRT
display of up to 12 I ines of output. In addition, the 1050s provide card and
paper tape input-output, arid the TTYs provide paper tape input. All terminal
device types may be combined on the same system provided that the configuration
restrictions are observed. The 10505, TTYs, and 27415 may be at a remote
location from the computer. The 2260s must be 1~1. The TTYs must be
dialup.
The terminal user may save source or object programs and data or program output
in the RAX user library. Saved information may be shared with other terminal
users. File security is provided by means of a lock code which prevents unauthorized deletion or modification of any file in the library.
The terminal user may use permanent or temporary files fc:ir input or output. When
using the File Input-Output capability of RAX the user is able to specify the file
characteristics (logical record size, file name, volume name, dispoSition, etc.)
from the terminal. Multiple users 3re able to access the permanent files simultaneously. File Input-Output requires a minimum of 128K bytes and one 2311 in
in addition to system residence and user library units.
A restart capability is prOVided for resumption of jobs afte; recovery from system',
error. Upon recovery, RAX will indicate to each user the last line ·of input
accepted or repeat the last few t'ines of output.
Th(; 2260 Display Stations aliow entry of up to twelve lines of input at a time.
The Non-Destructive Cursor feature is used to provide for single character modification within a iine when updating program or data files.
Object program execution storage of 32K bytes is provided on the minimum memory
configuration. 64K bytes are available on the 128K and·256K byte configurations.
Users of RAX may enter programs and data one line at a time from their terminals
or use a sinl'~e terminal command to insert a previously stored data or program
module into their job stream at compile time.
The user may enter either USASI BaSic FORTRAN IV Of Basic Assembler jobs
from his tenninals. All input-output must be programmed in FORTRAN and the
execution of privileged instructions in a user program is not allowed.
A DISPLAY command is available for total or selective liSting of a user's input
or I ibrary files.
RAX provides for the running of background batch processing through the 2540
Card Read Punch •. The background batch job:; utilize the machine when it is
not serving the te~mjnals. Virtually any job prepared for terminal proceSSing will
run in batch mode. In addilion I the batch can address file input-output on
magnetic t.ape.Batch mode lJIakes possible lengthy computer runs whert> turnJfOUna time is not of prime importance and cail be used to t!nter large programs
and (. ;;.;) f;,C!$ mto t~ I ibtaty .
U~,e: Sustaineci access to a System/360 from remote locations enable engineers,
SCientists, and other users to real ize fast turnaround and reduced problem solution
time. FORTRAN programmers can compile, modify, and execute programs from remote
terminals, while non-programmers may use programs previously stored in the RAX
library. Familiarity with the RAX terminal command language and the operation of the
tenninal device enables the user to exploit the computational power of 5ystem/360 in
a convenient manner.
RAX provides a facility for conversational interaction between a user and an executing
program. This is accomplished by the use of input/output statements in a problem
program which addresses tile user's terminal as an I/O device. Thus, programs can be
written to take advantage of the "on-I ine" presence of the user by permitting him to
selectively modify his input, observe intermediate results, and alter parameters - or
perhaps the execution sequence of the program based on his interpretation of these
results.
Minimum System Requirements: System/360 Model 30F with one Selector Channel,
Interval Timer, Storage Protection, Decimal Arithmetic, Floating Point Arithmetic
features ••• 1052 Printer-Keyboard Model 8 as·a system con$ole ••• 2821 Control
Unit Modell ... 2540 Card Read Punch ••• 1403 Printer Models 2,3,7 or N1 ...
2841 Storage Control ••• two 2311 Disk Storage Drives; for attaching keyboardtypewriter terminals either a 2102 Transmission Control or a 270~ Data Adapter
Unit. Up to ten keyboard-typewriter tenninals may be attached to the minimum configuration. The 2260 Display Stations and terminal file capability are not supported
on the 64K byte configuration. (For 2701 and 2702 features see Tenninal Configuration Section.)
Memory Size Restrictions; The number of RAX terminals supported for the allowable
memory configurations are:
64K - 1050 !!!'. 2741.!!. TTY up to 10 terminalli
12BK - 1050 !!!: 2741
~ TTY up to 36 terminals
- up to 32 of any two of the above
- up to 28 if all three are included
- if 2260's are to ~ included in the system, the number of terminals supported
in addition to the 2260's may be calculated by using the following formula:
T=M-3 <0+2)
T=number of keyboard typewriter terminals RAX will support
M=maximum number of tenninals due to installation configuration (i.e.,
36, 32, 28 as explained above)
n=number of 2260's required (maximum of eight>.
256K - up to 63 terminals ill any combination (maximum of eight 2260s).
File Configuration: A minimum of two 2311 disk units are required by RAX but the
system can use up to 64 disk units.
One of the required disk units is for system residency and the·other for the
user library.
Systems with 31 or more terminals require an additional 2311 for system
residency.
• Up to six additional 2311s may be used for the user library storage.
One additional 2311 is re.quired for storage of permanent and temporary files
when the terminal file input output capabil ity is used.
Additional 23115 may be used to store permanent and termporary files, but the
total number of 2311s on a system may not exceed 64.
Up to foUr 2400 tape drives (7- or 9-track in any combination) may be used in
place of 2311s for file input-output For the background batch Jobs.
Terminal Configuration;
:SM 1050 Data Communications Terminal: The IBM 1050 may be attached to the
system thi'ough a 2101 or 2102. SpeCifications arei
iBM 2701 Data Adapter Unit
1. Terminal Adapter i},pe I (#4645 or 4646)
2. Appropriate I ine adapters (up to 4)
IBM 2702 Transmission Control
1. Terminal Control Type I (14615)
2. Select/ve Speed feature c.9684)
3. Appropriate line adapters
The minimum IBM 1050 Data Communication Terminal consists of: one
1051 Control Unit Model 2 with the First Printer Attaclvnent (14408) and one 1052
Printer-KeybOard Model 2. The 1052 Printing Element used by RAX is Data 1 font
c.9575 or *9576>. The 1050 can util ize the 1054 Paper Tape Reader or 1056
Card Reader attached as Reader I I on the 1051. For use with the 1056, cards
can be prepared on either the 26 or 29 keypunch. The 1056 must have the Extended
Not to be reproduced without written penni.lon
I : :~'1
PA 360.15
Nov 73
Programming
IBM System/360 Application Programs
Character Read Special Feature.
Below are indicated 1050 special features that can be used with RAX CA); featll'es
that can be attached but are not util ized by the system (B>j and features that must
not be attached to a RAX terminal (C). CAR) status means that, where the component
is installed, the referenced feature must be available.
Component
Feature No.
1051 Control Unit Modell & 2
~
AR
I/O Unit Attachments
Card Punch Attachment
1st Printer Attachment for Mdl 1 or 2
1st Punch Attachment
1635
4408
4410
1st Reader Attachmen~
2nd Printer Attachment
2nd Punch Attachment
2nd Reader Attachment
Auto Fill Char &en
Auto Ribbon Shift & line Feed Select
Audible Alarm
AutomatiC EOB
CPU Attachment
Forms Stand Stacker
1447 Attachment
Home Comp Recgntn
Home Correction
Home Loop Input Component Interlock
IBM Line Adapter
Subchannel 1
Subchannel 2
Subchannel 3
Subchannel 4
IBM Line Adapter
I/O Comp Table
Keyboard Request
Line Correction
Line Gor Relea~e
Master Station
Open line Detection
Reader Stop-Prefix J
Switch Unit
for Mdl 1
for Mdl 2
Tel line Attachment
Vertical Forms Control
4411
6381
6383
6384
1287
1295
1307
1313
3130
4450
4461
4605
4607
4606
4647
4691
4692
4693
4694
4790
4632
4770
4795
4796
5050
5465
6060
B
AR for 1052
AR for 1055,1057,
1058
AR for 1054,1056
B
B
B
B
B
B
A
C
B
C
B
B
B
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
A
B
B
B
B
B
No. 33 and No. 35 Teletypewriter
Telety~writer terminals may be ordered through local Telephone Company representative!
RAX will support ASR and/or KSR Teletypewriter terminals. The teletypewriter keyboard should have a left arrow as upper case letter '0'. At installation time, the
answerback drum of the teletypewriter may be encoded with any sequence the user
desires.
2701 Specifications: Telegraph Adapter Type II (.71385)
2702 Specifications: Telegraph Terminal Control Type II (#7912) ••• Data Set
Line Adapter (13233) one per line.
2260 Terminal
For systems larger than 64K, support is provided for keyboard-typewriter terminals
and 2260 Display Stations •. The 22M) Display Station must have an AlphameriC
Keyboard feature (14766) and be connected to the multiplexer channel through a
directly attached 2848 Oisplay Control Model 3 with the Non-Destructive Cursor
feature Ct5340 and 15341). One 2848 Model ~ with up to eight 2260 Display
Stations is supported.
Maximum Support Configurations: System/360 Model 50H (256K byte memory)
with three selector Channels, Interval Time" Storage Protection, Decimal Arithmetic,
Floating Point Arithmetic, 1052 Printer-Keyboard Model 7, 2540 Card Read Punch,
1403 Printer Models 2, 3, 7, or Nl, up to sixty-four 2311 Disk Storage Drives,
up to sixty·three keyboard-type-writer terminals (connected via communications equipment to 2701 and/or 2702 control units), one 2848 Display Control Model 3 with
Non-Destructive Cursor feature and up to eight 2260 Display Stations with the Alphanumeric Keyboard feature (with maxim\lm of sixty.three terminals in all, four 2400
tape drives (with a maximum of 64 disk and tape drives).
BasiC Program Materiai:
Publications .,;. Application Directory ... Program Description Manual (H20-0354
I>, Operations Manual (H20-0355-11. If only the form numbered manuals are
required, order them from the IBM Distribution Center, Mechanicsburg -- not from
PID.
Machine Readable .- Object program load modules and sample problem decks are
available on eIther one 9-track DTR (800 or 1600 bpj) or one 7-track D·TR (800
cpil - Data Conversion feature required.
Optional Program Material:
7660
7661
7873
8715
C
C
C
A
1052 Printer-Keyboard Mdl 1 or 2 only
Accelera\ed Carrier Return
Auto EOB
Forms Feed Control
Home Loop Input Component Interlock
Open Line Detection
1053 PrinterMdl 1
IosiJPaper Tape Reader Mdl 1
Eilge-Punch Read
Reels, Center Roll Feed and Take-up
Telegraph Speed
1055 Paper Tape Punch Mdl 1
Edge-Punching
Reel Take-up
1056 Card Reader (Mdl 1 Recommended)
Card Reader Program
Extd. Character Reading
Feed, 51 Col Card
Feed, Short Card Pack
High Speed Skip
Telegraph Speed
1057 Card Punch Mdl 1
Extd. Character Punching
Operator Panel
1058 Printing Card Punch Mdl 1
5-. Data set attachment: .9114 for use with dia I-up data set •• , 19115
for use with direct dataset
6. If data set attachment .91l4·~s specified, .Dial Up feature (.3255) is required.
B
1006
1313
4452
4606
5465
A
A
B
B
B
A
C
3570
6120
7910
B
C
A
C
3571
6121
B
A
B
1640
3861
4004
4006
4595
7910
AR
C
Machine Readable _. OPTl and OPT2 are available -. either or both may be
ordered.
OPT1 requires one 9-track DTR (800 bpj) or 7-track magnetic tape at 800 cpi
(Data Conversion f,ature required) or 9-track 2400' MT at 1600 bpi. OPT2
requires one 2400' MT 9-track C800 or 1600 bpi) or one 2400' MT 7·track
(800 cpj).
.
DTRs are provided by PIDj no tape submittal is required. Magnetic Tapes (2400')
may be forwarded or ordered (the order card shouJd accompany the tape order form).
Note: Systems Generation,..-DistributionoftheRAXprogramwillbeontape. RAXusersmust
haVe access to tape configuration on which to punch the object and source program decks.
Additional Program Support Material: Application Description Manual (H20-0545-1)
... System Manual
4.10 char/in character spaCing .9104)
Not to be reproduced without written penni_Ion
PA 360.16
Nov 73
~ : ::t~1: Programming
IBM System/360 Application Programs
Product Structure Retrieval:
Thi$ program extracts selected information from
files org;;lnizedby the System/360 Bill of
Material Processor Program (360A-ME-06X).
Six types of retrieval reports can be made with this module. They are Single
Level Explosion ••• Indented Explosion ... Summarized Explosion ... Single
Level Implosion •.• Indented Implosion ; •• Summarized Implosion. (360A-ME-07X)
The general structure of the retrieval program- consists of a mainline phase and
three retrieval phases .•• (1) a single level retrieval phase ..• (2) an indented
retrieval phas~ '" (3) a summarized retrieval phase ~ .. each phase incorporating both explosion and implosion logic .•. a common area for constants and work
area ••. separate formattin9 routines are included.
Minimum System Requirements: System/360 Model 2030 D or DC Cl6K under BOS
control or 24K under DOS controll ... Decimal Arithmetic (#3237) ... 1051 Control
Unit Mode! Nl .. , 1052 Printer-Keyboard Model 8 with appropriate attachments ...
2841 Storage Control Modell ... 2311 Di.sk Storage Drives as required to contain
BOS/360 or DOS/36O and the user's data files (minimum of 2).ru:.2314 Direct Access
Storage Facility (oOS only) ••• any System/360 Card Reader and Card Punch or
Card Read Punch ••. any System/360 Printer.
System/360 Model 2025 0 or DC (l6K under BOS control or 24K under DOS control) ... 1052 Printey..Keyboard Model 7 ... 2311 Disk Storage Drives as required
to contain BOS/360 or 00S/360 and the user's rlata files (minimum of 2) ••• any
System/360 Printer, Card Reader and Card Punch ~ Card Read Punch.
Each of the three retrieval phases performs processing appropriate to it; linkage is
then made to the required formatting routine to produce reports on a particular part
number request. The program is written in a modular manner to provide for maximum
facility in tailoring the reports to user needs. Maintaining and retrieving accurate,
up-to-date product structure information at an economical cost suggests a central
information system that can serve many functional areas: in a manufacturing company.
Basic Program Material:
Features: The mainline phase is the control section of this retrieval system. It performs system initialization; opening files,' updating the run number •.• reads the first
request card (type of retrieval desired) .•. fetches the appropriate retrieval program
phase into core .•. passes control to it.
.
Ordering Information: Program Number 360AME07X
. The retrieval pha~es operate generally by: reading the part number request card •..
retrieving the appropriate file records ..• passing control to the appropriate report
fllrmatting routine.,. reading the next part number request card (jf any) '" continuing to link to and from the report formatting routine until a new retrieval request card is encouptered ..• returnil'!g control to the mainl ine.
When one of the retrieval phases encounters an end of job card, control is also returned to the mainline which performs end.;{)f-job functions and ends the run. Use of
the product data can be classified as explosion (assembly data) or implosion (where
used data) by using the assembly..component addresses (chains) or wher~used addresses_ (chains) contained in the master and product structure files. The user should
refer to-th'e Bill of Material Processor - A Maintenance and Retrieval System (E200114);
The follow'inC) is a discussion of the features of each of the three retrl'.?val phases
which produce the following six report types:
Single Level Explosion. 'The most fu~dam£!ntal type' of retrieval program using
product structure data in assembly component sequence. The processing output
is a bill of material. The assembly is exploded into its direct components and
associated Quantities per assemblv. An example of a sinqle level explosion application that uses product structure data as framework tot processing is the extended bi II of material.
Documentation -- Application Directory ••• Programmers Manual (H20-0369) •••
Operators Manual (H20-0370). If only the form numbered manuals are required,
order from the IBM Distribution Center -- not from PID.
Machine Readable -:.. Source code,
Program Number
Extension
BaSic
none
Distribution Medium
Type
Code
OTR 7DC/800
DTR 9/800
OTR 9/1600
Cards
26
28
29
15
User Volume
Requirement
none
none
none
none
Additional Program Material*: Application Description (H20-0329) with TNL (N202015) and Systems Manual (Y20-0112).
Reference Material*: Bill of Material Processor - The Maintenance and Retrieval
System (E20-0114) .•• General Information Manual - Production Information Control
System (E20-0280) •.• Bill of Material Processor - Application Description Manual
(H20-0197) ... System/360 Bill of Material Processor - Programmers Manual (H200246>'
*Avai lable only from Mechanicsburg.
a
Indented Explosion, A processing technique for' completely breaking a top-level
or other major assembly into its mUltiple sub-,assembly levels or tiers. The term
"indented" refers to the format of the printed output frequently called aa indented
parts list. In addition, the order quantity of the starting assembly is multiplied
by each of the quantity-per-assembly fields givin~ the total quantity for each component needed. This report shows a level by level relationship of all parts within
an assembly. .
Summarized Explosion. Provides gross requirements for end products and subassemblies. fhi s is a 'processing technique for completely breaking ,a top-level
or other major assembly into all its multiple sub-assembly levels arid summarizing
the quantities of each part (sub-assemblies and simple parts) found in the entire
product structure. Low level codes are used to eliminate re-explosion of multipleuse assemblies. This type of retrieval provides the framework for performing a
gross to net requirements application.
Single Level Implosion. The most basic type of retrieval program using the
prOduct structure data in where-used sequence, The output of the processing is
a next assembly where-used listing.
Indented Implosion A processing technique for tracing the usages of a given '
part number in assemblies at various usage levels, and in turn, the use of the
part number in higher level assemblies up to the top assembly level. The term
"indented" refers to the format of the printed output which shows a level by level
rei ationshi p through aII products.
Summarized Implosion. A multi-level processing technique that totals the direct
ana indirect usages of a part number on all higher level assemblies. The printed
output indicates all the assemblies that directly or indirectly contain the part
number, including the total quantity of the part number in each assembly. This
type of retrieval, also reflects the effect of incremental cost increases or decreases
of simple parts or sub-assemblies on top level products.
Use: The System/360 Product Structure Retrieval Program is a direct access file
Oriented concept that requires a master inventory file to be on line simultaneously
with the product structure file. All files are created, added, deleted, and reorganized by the Bill of Material Processor Program (360A-ME-06Xl.
The package includes logic diagrams and programming support for the three retrieval
phases of the module. The diagrams supplying the master logic describe the deciSions required to determine which records to access ••• acceSSing of the records,.
controls ••• the locations in the logic flow where the user may insert his own processing subroutines.
Customer Responsibilities: A thorough knowledge of the System/360 Bill of
Material Processor Program ••• creation of master inventory files ••• creation
of product structure files ... tailor sample file layouts to installation requirements.
Advanced Life Information System (ALlS):t
ALiS represents an insurance information system's approach to the
maintenance, processing, and servicing of individual life insurance contracts. (360A-IL-09X)
Description: The system use,s modular programming techniques to perform automatic
processing of scheduled (internal) and nonscheduled (external) transactions ••• and
updating of policies with cash values, reserves, dividends, and other forms of partiCipation, and renewable term premium rates just before the anniversary.
Most modules which perform these insurance logic functions are programmed in COBOL.
This simplifies program maintenance and modifications. Executive routines link the
insurance logic modules with the IBM Disk Operating System for System/360. These
routines are modular and written in assembler language. This separation of processing
and control functions provides the widest possible range of system configuration approaches to solve individual customer requirements.
Features: The system is designed in a modular concept to facil itate use and modifi~
~. insurance logic modules are designed to work in a disk operating system's
environment ••• the mass direct access storage capaCity of the IBM 2321 Data Cell
Drive is used to house the policy master file .•• insurance logiC is designed to provide
maximum flexibility for companies of all sizes to effectively utilize its featureS •••
the system provides a base for Teleprocessing communications network ... the system
supports one 1050 terminal and one 2260 terminal.
Customer Responsibilities: A thorough knowledge and understanding of the system before implementation ••• design conversion procedures to generate policy master records
in a form acceptable to the system ••• generate diVidend, renewable term premiums,
cash value, net premiums, benefit and terminal reserve rate tables ••• develop adequate
procedures and programs to generate policy master records for all new bUSiness, exchange, conversion, and re-instatement contracts ••• write programs to print premium
notices and other forms of notification except where notification by automatic status is
adequate ... prepare Commission statements and Ag'ents Accounting from system
generated output.
Use: ALI S represents a new information system's approach to the maintenance,
processing, and serviCing of life insurance contracts.
Prograrnmlt:: ~stems: Assembler language with input/output macros under supervision of t
sic Operating System/360 or Disk Operating System/360.
Not to be reproduced without written permi•• 'on
PA 360.17
Nov 73
IBM System/360 Application Programs
ALiS is an extremely comprehensive system, but it still must be modified or ItailCftd"
to conform to the unique business practices of each user. Therefore; the first step
in using AUS is the determination of these modifications. The next step is to implement these modifications and to generate a policy master record file containing all
of the information required by ALiS. The policy master record file and unscheduled
transactions are then input and processed by the ALI S programs - scheduled transactions require no external input other than the information contained on the policy
master record. Output from this processing is then analyzed by an output analysis
program and routed to various programs for final printing. Intermediate files are also
produced for use by ~the policy exhibit and valuation programs.
The Home Office Inquiry feature of ALI S may be used as soon as a policy master record
file "as been generated. This feature provides the facility to display on the 2260 or
1050 a partial image of the policy master record (plan, face value, mode premium,
issue, 'paid-to and billed-to dates, etc.>; the name and address of the insured, payer
and other; and the results of the following quotation transactions: cash surrender,
conversion to nonfOrfeiture option, withdrawn par val~s on depOSit, withdrawn paid-up
additions,maximum loan, loan payoff, and mode premium.
Programming Systems: AUS operates under 005/360 and uses the System Control
and BaSIC IOCS, Consecutiile Tape 10CS, Direct Access Method, Indexed Sequential
File Management System, Group I, II, and 1/1 Utilities, Disk/Tape Sort/Merge or
Tape Sort/Merge, Assembler language, COBOL, Compiler Input/Output Modules,
and BTAM (Basic Telecommunications Access Method). Users must become familiar
with these components of the Disk Operating System.
Minimum System Requirements: Daily C~cle and V~Iuation Programs - System/360
Model FjO with at least s6k bytes avai able for program, data, and access method
storage and the decimal arithmetic, storage protection, interval timer, selector channel,
and 1051. attachment features .•• a 1051 Control Unit Model Nl with CPU attachment,
systems console attachment, first punch, first reader, and first printer attachments controlling one 1052 Printer-Keyboard Model 8' ••• 2841 Storage Control with 2321
attachment feature ..• a 2321 Data Cell Drive Modell and a 2311 Disk Storage
Drive Modell ••• four 2401 Magnetic Tape Units Model 1 ••• 2803 Tape Control
Unit Model 1 ••• 2821 Control Unit with a 140.3 Printer Model 2 and one 2540 Card
Read Punch ModelL
Alternate input/output units supported by 005/360 may be substituted to satisfy individual company requirements. ConSideration must be giyen to volumes of input and
output in light of required throughput speeds ... off-line s~!?tem availability ••• sorting
capability in this or another system ... requirements of programming systems for other
user applications.
Home Office Inquiry - System/360 Model F30 with 44K bytes availa~le for progr~m,
data, and access method storage. In addition to the features required fOr the daily
cycle and valuation programs, home office inquiry requires a 2848 Display Control
Model 2 with display adapter, line addressing, non-destructive cursor, i!nd 'non-'
destructive cursor adapter controlling a 2260 Display Station Model 2 ••• '2701 Data
Adapter Unit Modell with Line Adapter (14636) and Terminal Adapter Ct464S) ••• a
1051 Control Unit Model 1 with line adapter, first printer attachment, and key"
board request features ••• a 1052 Printer-Keyboard ModelL
Basic Program Material:
Publications -- Application Directory ... Program Description Manual (H20-0S18) .'
••• Operations Manual (H20-0517) ••• Home Office Inquiry Program Terminal
Operations Manual (H20-0S88). If only the form numbered manuals are required,
order from Mechanicsburg -- not from PID.
.
Machine Readable - The source programs and source tape A LIS maintenance pr!l"
gram (STAMP) are available on two 2400' 9-track (800 or i600 bpi) magnetic
tape reels.
.
MagnetiC Tapes (2400') may be forwarded or ordered (the program order card should
accompany the tape order form).
If the density requirements are not indicated on the back of the program order card,
800 bpi will be forwarded.
Additional Program Support Material: Application Description Manual (H20-0126)
••• Policy Master Record Code BOok (H20-0483) ••• Utility Program Description
Manual (H20-0519) ... Batch Edit System Manual (V20-0177) .. ; Input Edit System Manual (V20-0178) ••• Frequently Used Record Formats System Manual (V200179) ••• Miscellaneous Volume System Manual (V20'-0180) ... File Maintenance
Run ExeaJtive System Manual (V20-0181) ... Data Cell Reorganization Program,
Policy Master Record Merge Program, Data Cell Reconstruction Program, and Data
Cell Restore Program System Manual (V20-0182) ... File Maintenance Include (R)
Routines (Narratives) System Manual (V20-0183) ••• File. Maintenance Incillde CR)
Routines (Flowcharts) System Manual (V20-0184) ... File Maintenance call (5) ~ou
tines (Narratives) System Manual (V20-018S) ••• File Maintenance Call (5) Routines
(Flowcharts) System Manual (V20-0186) ... File Maintenance Issues, Additions,
Complex Changes, and Terminations Transactions System Manual (Y20-0187) •.•
File Maintenance Sil.QP~_iE g 3 Transactions System Manual (Y20-0188) ••• File
Maintenance 36XX Firftlncial Transactions - Payments System Manual (V20-0189)
••• File Maintenance Financial Transactions - Accounting Entries System Manual
(V20-0190> ••• File. Maintenance Status Transactions - Process and Quote TerminationsSystem Manual (V20-0191) .••• File Maintenance Status Transactions'" Process
and Quote Miscellaneous, Loan Values, and Participation Values System Manual (V200192) ••• File Maintenanc;eBilling Transactions System Manual (V20-019~) •••
File Maintenance. 'Premium Due, Overdue, and Anniversary Processing Transactions
System Manual (V2()-OI94) ... File Maintenance Rate File Extract and Anniversary
Extract Update Transactions System Manual (V20-0195) ... File Maintenance Contractual Change and Notifications System Manual (V20-0196) ••• Output Analysis
System Manual (V20-0197) ... Transaction Register System Manual (V20-0198)
... Status Print System Manual (V20-0199) ' " Policy Accounting Journal System
Manual (V20-0200) ••• Accounting Control System Manual (V20,..020l> ... Error
Register System Manual (V20-0202) ••• Rate File System Manual (V20-0203) ...
Home Office Inquiry Program System Manual (V20-0321).
Reference Material: Promotional Brochure (520-1205).
t Supports System/370 configurations also.
Property and liability Information System for System/360:t Consists of programs which
maintain an Automobile and
Other lines policy master
file. It provides for direct access inquiry to these records.
Description: The system, consisting of three programs, wrll perform the follOWing
functions:
.
PAllS Basic Program (360A-IF-I0>O - provides billing and premium collection
for direct billed business ••• a program'to build and update user tables for automobile and homeowners rates ••• a program to edit all transactions for format and
range of values ••• utility programs to aid the'installation and modification of
PAllS : •• programs to load, reorganize, reconstruct and restart the policy file
on the 2321 Data Cell ••• status inquiry into policy file via Local 2260 or
Remote 2260 and 1050 •• ; a run linkage program to interface between DOS/360
and PAllS insurance logic.
The Automobile Program (360A-IF-IIX) - rate and write new business •••
renewals ••• endorsements, both premium and non-premium ••• cancellations •••
(reinstatements) ••• claims arising ••• claims payments and closing ••• provides
facility to recreate portions of the master record ••• provides data for premium
statistical reporting.
The O~her lines Program (360A-IF-13X) - maintain a complete insurancerec()l'd
for single and multi-location risks by proceSSing the following new bUSiness •• ,
renewals ••• endorsements both premium and non-premium ••• cancellations •••
claims arising ••• claims payments and closing ••• provides facility·to recreate
portions of the masterrecm:d ••• provides data fo~ statistical reporting.
Features: The system takes advantage of the powerful features of IBM System/360 •••
"'~the system functions in a Disk Operating System environment •• ~ the flexibility of the
system design allows for user defined configurations when processing loads exceed the
capacity .of the minimum configuration ... both the insurance logiC and run linkage
provide the flexibility required to make the system adaptable to most companies ••• the
policy master file is stored on the IBM 2321 Data Cell Drive.
Use: PALt1i is designed to be the foundation of a P & L information system. As such,
TrC'reates an:d maintains a .detailed pol icy enforce file. In addition, an Automobile
Private Passenger policy rating and writing facility is provided. Premium, loss, and
historical data are maintained by pol icy,
The customer must provide a program to interface user data capture and data coding
procedures with the system edit. Output programs must be written to format and in
some cases further process the contents of the generalized output records.
During implementation and conversion, interface programs between PAllS output and
user accolinting and statistical systems must be provided.
Customer Responsibilities: A thor04lgh knowledge and understanding of the system before IOstaliatlon ••• write converslon'·programs to c;reate the master file •.• write
programming to format output for printin'!I.' punching and entry into other systems •••
write all routines to satisfy special company policies such as underwriting criteria, loss
reserving standards, accounting procedures, etc •••• write any programmi!lg required
to effect user change~ to record format; e. g., expand, contract routines, additional
programming to handle new fields, etc., generate and expand tables for private
passenger automobile according to the specifications provided; write pro~ram~ and procedures to provide adequately edited input transactions to PAllS ••• malOtalO
the programs and documentation as changes to bureau requirements dicta~~.changes in
logic ••• provide additional logic to format replies to inquiries beyond that supplied by
PAllS.
Not to be reproducedwith()ut wrttten ~rmi,,'on
PA 360.18
Nov 73
Programming
IBM System/36.0AppficationPrograms
Programming Systems: To facilitate understanding, the insurance logic program modules
are written In Disk Operating System/360 COBOL The use of System/360 COBOL
allows for ease of modifications to the various programs and simplifies program maintenance. Run linkage routines have been written to form aninterfacebetweenthe
insurance logic and Disk Operating System/360. Just as the insurance logic program
modules. are written in a modular fashion, the run linkage is also written in a mOdular
fashion 10 allow fora wider range of system configurations. The run linkage is written
in assembler language.
.'
..
"
PAllS uses the following components of the Disk Operating System and the usermust
become ,familiar with them -:-System .Control and Ballic IOCS , .• Consecutive Tape
IOCS .... DirectA~cess Method .. , Group I, II and III Utilith!s ... Tape Sort/Merge
.. , Assembler Language •• , COBOL .... DOS Supervisor (6K) ... RPG ... QTAM.
In addition, PAllS uses IBM System/360 FLOWCHART (360A-SE-22X) for
printing of PAllS Flowcharts.
, Minimum Machine Requirements: System/360 Model 40 G with Decimal Arithmetic
(3237), Selector channel (6980) and 1052 Attachment (7920) ... 1052 Printer
Keyboard Model 7 .•. 2841 Storage Control with 2321 Attachment (8079) ••. 2321
Data Cel! Modell ... 2311 Disk Storage Drive Model 1* .. , Four 2400 series
Magnetic Tape Units (at least three of the magnetic tape units must be 9-track) .••
2821 Control Unit with 1403 Printer Model 2 and 2540 Card Read/Punch ModelL
The Automobile application requires 89K of core and Other lines application requires ,120K core for program, data and access method storage.
*One or two additional 2311's will be required if the user rates Homeowners in all
states.
Additional System Requirements for Inquiry **: Storage Protection (7520), For 2260
Local: 2848 Display Control Model 2, Display Adapter (3356), Lirie Addressing
(4787), 2260 Display Station Model 2, Alpha Numeric Keyboard (4765>' For 2260
Remote: 2848 Display Control Model 2, Display Adapter (3356), Line Addressing
(4787), 2260 Display Station Model 2, Alpha N'umeric Keyboard (4765), 2701
Data Adapter, Unit, IBM Terminal Adapter Type III (4656>' For 1050 Remote: lq51
Control Unit Model 2, First printer Attachment (4408), IBM line Adapter (Dependent
on line-type), Keyboard Request (4770), 1052 Printer Keyboard Model 2, 2701
Data Adapter Unit, IBM Terminal.Adapter Type I (4640).
For Inquiry application26K of core is required in Foreground I for QTAM and 65K cif
core is required for program, data and access method storage.
'H,
In minimum configuration, Inquiry will operate only independent of other PAllS runs.
Basic Program Material for 'PALISBasic Program (360A-IF-IOX):
Documentation - Application Directory ••• Basic Program Description and Systems
Manual (H20-0497-1) •• ~. Basic Operations Manual (H20-0498-1) ••• Overview Program Description Manual (H20-050 1).
Machi ne Readable ,- Contains source code, flowcharts, fOl'l'i1atsand sample problems.
Basic Program Material lor PAllS Automobile (360A-IF-11X):
Machine Readable - Contains source COde, flowcharts and formats.
Basic Program Materiaifor PAllS Other Lines (3bOA-IF-13X):
Documentation - Application Directory ••• PAllS Other lines Premium Processing
Program Description and Systems Manual (H20-0503-1) ••• PAllS Other lines
Claims Processing Program Description and Systems Manual (H20-0S04-l).
Machine Readable - Contains source cOde, flowcharts and formats.
Note: If only the form numbered manuals are required, order from Mechanicsburg - not
from PID.
Ordering Information -Numbers 360AIFlOX, 11X, 13X.
Basic
Optional
None
Type
MT
MT
DTR
MT
DTR
None
Distribution Medium
Code
Track/Density
7 DC/800
9/800
9/1600 . Implementation of an operatiOl'llI System/360 Text Processor, which consists of COMPOSITION/3bO,
HYPHENATlON/3bO Cif required), and a user-suppl ied input/output generation pro-
Gather data which controls the graphic and stylistic appearance of the text
and which defines the fonts used to justify the text. This data must then be
loaded on a disk in a format acceptable to COMPOSITION/360 via utility
programs suppl ied with this package.
Programming Systems: COMPOSITION/360 is written in Assembler Language and
operates under control of DOS/360 in a multiprogramming environment. In addition
to a Supervisor and System Control and BaSic IOCS, the following comoonents are
required:
Direct Access Method
Disk Sort/Merge
Assembler
360N-IO-454
360N-SM-450
360N-AS-465
Minimum Machine Configuration: System/360 Model F Processing Unit (64K bytes)
with Dec imal Arithmetic, Interval Timer, Storage Protection, and one Selector Channel
1052 Printer-Keyboard with CPU attachments, 2841 Control Unit, and one 2311
'
Disk Storage Drive. These components are in addition to DOS/360 requirements of
one 2311 DiSK Storage Drive, one card reader*, one card punch*, and one printer*.
Note that this minimum machine configuration does not include the text input/output
system devices necessary to implement an operational text processing system (e .g.,
magnetic tape, paper tape, data entry terminals, display components etc.). It is the
responsibility of the user to select these components and provide the necessary support
programming based on his composition system requirements.
The core residence requirement for COMPOSITION/360 is 30K bytes. The inclusion
of HYPHENATION/360 with COMPOSITION/360 does not increase this requirement
since HYPHENATION/360 functions as an overlay phase in COMPOSITION/360.
The remaining 34K in a minimum system can be used for the DOS Supervisor, the
user1s input/output generation program, and a user background program. Implementation
of a three partition system (user's input/output generation program in Foreground I,.
COMPOSITION/360 in Foreground ,II, and user program in Background) in a minimum
system is dependent upon the size of user's input/output generation program and the
DOS Supervisor needed.
*See System/3bO Disk Operating Guide (C24-5022) for acceptable units and
possible substitutions.
Not to be reproduced without written permission
PA 360.21
Nov 73
IBM System/360 Application Programs
Basic Program Material:
Publications: Application Directory ••• Program Description Manual (H20-0SBS)
••• Operations Manual (H20-0579). If only the form numbered manuals are required, order from Mechanicsburg -- not from PID.
Machine Readable: Machine readable material may be obtained on one '9-track
OrR (800 bpI) or 9-track 2400' magnetic tape <1600 bpi) or one 7-track 2400'
magnetic tape (BOO cpi, Data Conversion feature required) or on one 1316 Disk Pack.
Magnetic tapes (2400') may be forwarded or ordered (the program order card should
accompany the tape order form); disk packs must be forwarded to PID with the program order card.
If track and density requirements are not indicated on back of the program order card,
9-track at 800 bpi will be forwarded.
Additional Program Support Material: Application Description (E20-0256) •••
Systems Manual Flowchart lIarratives Vol. 1 CV20-0318) •.• Systems Manual Flowcharts Vol. 2 CY20-0319).
The Subscription Service (SRL/SS) should be used to ensure that revisions [0 the
Systems Manuals are received.
To build the user's exception word dictionary so that it contains the appropriate words,
the user should test words that he feels might be exceptions to the hyphenation logic •
Exceptions to the hyphenation rules as indicated by the testing program, together with
the exception words distributed with the program, are loaded on the exception word
dictionary by the maintenance program.
As additional words whiCh do not follow the hyphenation logiC are encountered, they
can be added to the exception word dictionary by using the maintenance program.
Programming Systems: This program is coded in Assembler Language and operates
under DOS. The program also operates in a V=R mode under control of OOSjVS. In
addition; the program operates in a VM/370 environment while in V=R mode under
control of 005 andDOSjVS.
The program operates with the batch or multiprogramming superVisors of OOS or OOS/VS
in any of the three partitions.
The user's text processing environment will determine the Supervisor options and
system components required.
To assemble and catalog the HVPHENATION/360 and utility program source books,
a DOS system including the following components is required:
System Control and Basic 10CS (360N-CL-453)
Assembler (360N~ AS-465)
Direct Access Method (360N-IO-454)
• Consecutive Disk 10CS (360N-10-455)
The following DOS uti lity programs are required for retrieving machine readable
material:
• Disk to Card (360N-UT -461)
• Disk to Printer (360N-UT -461)
Minimum Machine Configuration: The minimum machine configuration required·for
execution of HYPHENAtloN/360 and its two associated utility programs includes:
one System/360 Processing Unit (32K)
ConSists of control and functional routines that
provide for division of words in text-processing
applications. This permits the addition of word
syllables to meet justification requirements rather than forcing the line to end with the
complete word. This hyphenation capability is provided in the form of a module which
can be linked with a text-processing program. (360A-DP-07X)
one Card Reader (1442, 2501, 2520, 2540>
Through program linkage, HYPHENATION/360 accepts a word up to 63characters in
length from the user's program and determines the division points. The word,. with the
division point or points indicated (based on user option), is returned to the user program
where the portion to be retained on a line can be selected as determined by user's
graphic requirements.
one 1052 Printer-Keyboard
Text Processor - HYPHENATION:
The program assumes the burden of all hyphenation decisions, regardless of whether
the word to be divided contains alphabetic characters only, or combination of alphabetic characters, numbers, and/or punctuation.
A word presented to the program normally consists entirely of alphabetic characters.
However, lengthy compound words or phrases I alphameric words, and words containing punctuation can be divided by HYPHENATION/360·.
Features: Modular design concept permits inclUSion of HYPHENATION/360 in any
program ••• broad statistical data base used to generate probabilities implies higher accuracy through a wide range of words ••• exception word
dictionary concept with IBM-supplied utility programs provides ability to tailor
HYPHENATION/360 to highly specialized word lists (e.~:legal, medil;al, scientific) '" file and program layout based on statistical analYSIS that insures faster
hyphenation of commonly used words ••• dual operating mode (j .e., last-to-fit.~
all-points hyphenation) provides fast throughput coupled with flexibility to accO~
date a Wide variety of user-required graphic considerations ••• hyphenation of all
words, including those containing numerals, punctuation, special characters, text
hyphens, etc •••• system utility programs provide user maintenance and display capability utilizing the logic of this package.
i:iSerTeid processing
Use: HYPHENATION/360 can be used in conjuction with a text composition program
to produce justified and hyphenated lines of text. HYPHENATION/.360 accepts a
word from the composition program and returns to the composition program the hyphen
points for that word. The number of hyphen points picked depends on the mode of
operation desired.
If All POints mode is selected by the compOSition program then all valid hyphen points
in the word are indicated. However, if Last-to-Fit mode is chosetl only one hyphel1
point closest to the last character in the word to fit is chosen.
Two utility programs are also supplied which allow the user to test words for hyphen
points and maintain the exception word dictionary.
The testing program processes words entered on cards with desired hyphen points
indicated. These words are processed through the hyphenation logic and if the computed pOints are different than those desired, the word is indicated as an exception.
These exception cards can then be used as input to the maintenance program· which
loads them on the exception word dictionary.
Using the facilities of these programs the user can insure a high degree of hyphenation accuracy.
Customer Responsibilities: The user of HYPHENATION/360 must assemble and
generate an operational program and link edit it with a text-processing program. That
program must contain the routines necessary to initialize the linkages to and from
HYPHENATION/360.
one Card Puncher <1442,2520,2540)
one Printer <1403, 1443)
one 2311 Disk Storage Drive (includes SYSRES)
The core residence requirement for HYPHENATION/360 is 11,280 bytes. The minimum processor storage capacity of 32K is dictated by the core requirements of one
ofthe uti lity programs.
Retrieval of machine readable material can be obtained on the minimum configuration
with the restriction that the System Printer must be a 1403 Printer with 132 print
pOSitions. This Printer configuration is required for listing flowcharts. It is desirable, but not required, that the printer have a PN or QN chain arrangement (PL/I).
If this arrangement is not available, the following four delimiter characters may either
not print, or else print as different characters: percent Sign, colon, semi colon, and
number sign.
If a 2400 series Magnetic Tape Unit is available in addition to the above configuration, the user can order the machine readable material on magnetic tape. A tape to
disk operation is then required prior to retrieving the data from disk.
All components of HVPENATION/360 can be assembled and link edited on the same
minimum configuration with the CPU core requirement of only 24K instead of 32K.
Basic Program Material:
Publications* -- Application Directory ... Program Description Manual
(H20-0525) ••• Operations Manual (H20-0626) ••• System Manual (Y20-0208).
Machine Readable** -- Source statements of the 3 componel't programs in card
image format, basic file of exception words, and system flowcharts along with
reference listings are available on one 9-track DTR (800 bpi) or 9-track <1600
bpi) 2400' MT or one 7-track 800 cpi 2400' magnetic tape reel .
Reference Material: IBM System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems Assembler
Specifications (C24-3414) •.• IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, System
Control and Service. Programs (C24-5036) '" IBM System/360 Disk and Tape
Operating Systems Utility Programs Specifications (C24-3465) ••• IBM System/
·360 Disk Operating System Operating Guide (C24-5022) ••• IBM System/360
Principles of Operation (A22-6821l.
Not to be reproduced without written permission
~~:e.~
-:S~~ Programming
:i: -
Administrative Terminal System under DOS/360:t
PA 360.22
Nov 73
IBM System/360 Application Programs
ATS/360 under DOS is intended
for System/360 Model 30, 40,
and 50 , and uses the multi-
programming features of 00S/36O (360A-CX-18X).
Description: ATS/360 is a new dimension in text and data processing. ATS/360
is a user-oriented remote terminal system designed. for large text and data files. The
terminal user has complete control over the management and processing of his own information files. ATS/3600perates under DOS/360 which means the customer does not
ha~e to dedicate an entire system to ATS/360operations.
ATS/360 is programmed to runin one partition under DOS/360 using the multiprogramming supervisor •. Other!*~lJI'ams may run concurrently with and independently of
normal ATS/360 terminal operation, thereby extending the productivity of System/360
for users of ATS/360.
ATS/360 uses include source data recording, data modification and correction, data
manipulation, retrieval of information from large disk and magnetic tape files; outputting
of information on the same terminal or another terminal, magnetic tape, punched cards,
and high speed upper and lower case printed output. Information may be entered and
stored in either a free or fixed form. Stored information may be recalled for further
processing.
Features: Remote entry and processing of large text and data files ••• direct access
by an alphameric name to large data banks by remote terminals ••• ATS/360 activities
are time shared with other data processing activities on the same computer ••• reduced
cost of capturing information at its point of origination ••• ATS/360 information is
processed in real-time ' " low entry and start-up cost .•. I ittle skill and training
needed to use the system '" data correction, modification and rearrangement by backspacing and retyping during original entry; retyping beginning with a particular phrase;
replacing a word or phrase; inserting, erasing, copying, or moving I ines of information;
gathering stored information in any sequence ••• storage and retrieval of data from disk
files or magnetic tape ••• remote Or centralized, upper case, or upper and lower case
printed output, magnetic tape or punched card; output format controlled from the terminal
at the time of output by --limiting free-form text I ine length, hyphenless justification
of right-hand margin, intermix of free-form and fixed format information, controlled
vertical spacing, very flexible heading, footing, and page numbering capabilities, halting to allow insertion of information or changing of prInt elements, etc.
Special Sales Information: Principal application areas are soiJrce data recording, keypunch replacement, technical manual preparation, data file conversions, proposal
writing, computer and numerical control programmers, library abstracts, purchase order
preparation, property - sales - engineering - personnel - tooling - manufacturing financial and quality data file management, etc.
Type of customers and prospects interested in ATS/360 include aerospace, airlines,
consultants, distribution, education, federal government, finance, insurance, legal,
manufacturing, medical, printing and publishing, process, public· utilities, service
bureaus, SCientific, state and local government, and transportation.
Customer Responsibilities: The system is designed to run primarily unattended. However, when console operator intervention is required, a knowledgeable individual
thoroughly trained in the equipment and program, including DOS/360, must be available to make quick accurate decisions. Education of the terminal and console operators
are the prime installation requirements for this system.
ATS/360 does not in general require exclusive use ot any particular channel. ATS/.360·
I/O deVices are channel independent to the extent of phYSical attachment. Several
2.3115, for example, may be assigned to separate control units on each of two selector
channels if deSired; furthermore, programs in other partitions may share channels with
ATS/360 operations. However, if programs in other partitions require a selector
channel, for best ATS/360 performance it is recommended that a second selector
channel be added, one dedicated to ATS/360 functions, and the other to background
programs. Furtner, it is recommended that burst mode deVices not be attached to the
multiplexer channel to avoid interference problems which might occur in some configurations.
tSee IBM/360 Disk Operating Guide (C24-5022) for acceptable units and possible
substitution.
BaSic Program Material:
Publications* -- Application Directory ••• Terminal Operator's Manual (H20-0S09)
.•• Computer Center Operator's Manual (H20-05ll) ••• Program Description Manual
(H20-0508>.
Machine Readable** -- ATS/360 macros for ATS assembly and object program are
available on one Distribution Tape Reel (oTR) 9-track 800 or 1600 bpi or 7-track
800 cpi •••
System Manual ... Disk OperatingSystem/360 Supervisor and Input/Output Macros
(C24-5037) ••• Disk Operating System/360 System Control and System Service
Programs (C24-S036) ••• Disk and Tape Operating System/360 Assembler Specifications (C24-3414) ••• Disk and Tape Operating System/360 Utility Programs Specifications (C24-346S) •.• Disk Operating System/360 System Generation and Maintenance (C24-5033) ••• Disk Operating System/360 Operating Guide (C24:-5022).
Programming System: The ATS/360 program is written in DOS/360 Assembler
language and operates under control of DOS/360 with the multiprogramming feature.
The DOS/360 version uses the console interrupt key to call for the cessation of
ATS/360 peripheral functions. Therefore, background programs that use this key for
console operator initiated messages may not run while ATS/360 is running.
Minimum System Requirements: Model F ProceSSing Unit (64K bytes), one Selector
Channel, 1052 Printer-keyboard with appropriate attachment ..• 2841 Control Unit,
two 2311 Disk Storage Drives or one 2314 Direct Acceo;s Storage Facility •.• one
2701 Data Adapter Unit or 2702/2703 Transmission CO.ntrol, 2741 Communication Terminals equipped only with Standard Courier 72 SELECTRIC@> printing
element (Part 1167043) with Feature #9812, and with the appropriate line adapters.
ATS/360 supports only the Correspondence Code 2741 Terminals without the interrupt
feature. These components are in addition to 005/360 requirements of one 2311
Disk Storage Drive, one card readert, one card puncht, and one printert. This minimum
configuration could preclude some ATS/360 document transmission functions depending
upon selection of I/O devices. One 2400 magnetic tape drive is required for system
generation .In practice it is recommended that a user include sufficient components to obtain maximum benefits and performance from ATS/360. Additional components supported include
up to eight 2311 Disk Storage Drives ••• one or more 2400 Magnetic Tape Drives
with tape control unitst, card readert, card puncht, and printert producing at least 132
charac ter pri nt lines.
If the multiprogramming feature of DOS/360 is used, the Storage Protect feature is
required on the processing unit. If uppercase and lowercase printing (similar to the
Courier 72 printing element on the terminals) is deSired, a 1403 Printer Model 2, 3,
or N1 equipped with the Universal Character Set feature and TN printing arrangement
must be used.
Vehicle Scheduling Program (VSP):
VSP provides a comprehensive tool in the
planning and operating of a distribution and
delivery system. It computes near-optimal
routes for delivery of products or services by a fleet of vehicles. Because of the wide
range of program options, it can be applied to most fleet routing and delivery Situations.
The advantages over manual methods are increased efficiency and speed of scheduling,
improved routing, and cost reductions (through better fleet utilization). (360A-ST06X).
Description: VSP determines the routes a group of vehicles must travel to meet certain
commitments in the delivery of service or products to customers at given locations.
The program tends to optimize basic factors such as travel time and number of vehicles.
VSP consists of two main sections, the Network Analysis Program and the Schedule
Production Program. The first program analyzes a network representing the potential
calling pOints by computing either actual or approximate distances between all points.
The second program can repetitively produce schedules which meet various restrictions
such as route-time, speed, vehicle capacity, and customer requirements.
t Supports System/370 configurations also ..
Not to be reDroduced without written oermisslon
----
~: :f~~ Programming
PA 360.23
Nov 73
IBM System/360 Application Programs
The program can be'used to solve many types of delivery problems. In addition to
fulfilling the daily routing function, VSP can also be applied to realign fixed routes,
aid in determining feasible locations of warehouses and depots to sendce potential
customers, plan for a new fleet, and provide statistical and cost data relative to the
efficiency of a fleet.
Input to the Network Analysis Program can be either of two types: True Distance or
Coordinates. Both methods are concerned with zones, not actual customers. A zone
is defined as a delivery area (e.g., a shopping center, a postal zone, or a section of
a City), which can contain from 1 to 255 customers. The True Distance Method considers distances over actual roads between all points, intersections, and zones. Individual speed can be specified for each road in the network, if desired. This method,
while more time consuming to prepare, gives a higher degree of accuracy as the output
file will represent the combined knowledge of a firm's manual routing and dispatching
departments. True Distances are best suited for networks in which customer location
can be determined in advance with relatively few changes so that it needs to be run
infrequently. Both methods produce a file representing all practical combinations of
potential delivery zones.
Programming Systems: VSP is written in Basic Assembler Language and operates under,
the IBM System/360 Disk. Operating System (DOS). Use is also made of the DOS
Sort/Merge.
Minimum System Configuration; System/360 Model E25 (32K) ••• 1052 Model 7
and two 2311 Disk Storage Drives (which include'provJsion for 005/360 disk
residence) with attached features ••• 1442 Card Read Punch Model N1 and Multiplexer Channel.
The Schedule Production Program uses the output of the Network Analysis Program,
together with the list of calls to be made. It then prepares feasible routes approaching
optimum loads and minimum travel time, within the restrictions imposed by the user; the
most valuable result is that fewer vehicles may be required. The output of the program
consists of a printed list ofthe recommended routes. A summary of the fleet utilization is also produced. All output is stored on disk and can be modified by the user to
prepare a variety of specialized reports, including: warehouse picking and loading
lists, invoices in route sequence, special driver instructions; plus various analytical
reports. The output can, of course, also be used as the entry back into the customer's
existing data processing flow. VSP can, therefore, be a link to a more fully integrated distribution system.
Features: The features of the Schedule Production Program listed below are of particular interest as they allow the schedules to be tailored to meet specific demands of
customer service and fleet utilization. These features are designed as options which
are used only when requested by the user and can then be combined in almost any manner.
Limited calling times by stop
Average time at all stops in addition to loading/unloading
Special additional time for an individual stop
Vehicle limits by calling point
Up to 255 different vehicle types and capacities
Modification of average vehicle speed
Earliest possible starting and latest possible finishing time for the fleet
Maximum route time by vehicle type
Maximum number of calls per route
Multi-compartment vehicles
Variable assignment of trailers to vehicles
Average unloading time per unit
Dual specification of load e.g. weight and volume
Multiple day journeys
Low priority orders
Traveling time between calls within a zone.
Use: VSP consists of two basic parts, which can be thought of as separate programs
andrun independently if deSired. These ar~ the Network AnalySis and Schedule Production Programs.
After determining whether to use the True Distance or the Coordinate Method of input,
the user must prepare the appropriate Network description cards for the Network Analysis Program. The output file from this first phase is then 'used as partial input for the
Schedule Production Program. In addition, for this second phase, the user must
specify the various delivery requests and restrictions, fleet descriptions, and limits
to be imposed.
Output from the program consists of a sU9gested schedule for each route,a summary
of fleet utilization, and disk storage of all output. Altholjgh the user is not required to
write any additional programs, he may do so to create input for either phase or to expand the output from the Schedule Production Program.
Customer Responsibilities:
1. The user must be familiar with the options and features of both the Network AnalYSis and the Schedule Production PrQgrams.
2. Capable user personnel must be assigned to choose between the True
Distance and the Coordinate methods and gather the appropriate data.
Sufficient time should be given to data gathering prior to implementation
of VSP •
.I.
Overall work standards and special requirements for each delivery must
be documented prior to producing the first workable schedule.
4. Some user programming may be required to tailor the input and output
of the Schedule Production Program, as mentioned above. .
.
5. A period of parallel operation should be planned when both VSP and the
manual system are used. This will allow time to try various combinations of the program features to produce the deSired routings.
Not to be reproduced without written permi.lon
i::::l\:~ Programming
--~:--.-
PA360.24
. Nov 73
IBM System/360 Application Programs
~
• Data base creation using either fuli text, abstracts or index terms.
Word and document frequency counts to improve search word effectiveness.
Words occurring in the input can be eliminated from further processing by a
variety of system options.
Basic Program Material:
Search expansion employing ~erms selected by user.
Publications --"Application Directory ... Program Description Operations Manual
(H20-0506) ... lf only the form numbered manual is required, order from the
IBM Distribution Center, Mechanicsburg -- not PIO.
Machine Readable* -- The relocatable programs and sample problem deck are
available on one 9-track DTR (800 or 1600 bpi) or one 7-track DTR (800 cpi)
Data Conversion Feature required or one 1316 Disk Pack. (Disk Pack must be
forwarded to PID with the program order card).
Optional Program Material:
Machine Readable. -- The source programs and flow charts for the Schedule Production phase of VSP are available on one 9-track OTR (800 or 1600 bpi) or one
7 -track DTR (800 cpil Data Conversion Feature required.
Orderi"g Procedures: "
* If the track and density requirements are not specified on the back of the
program order card, a 9-track (800 bpi) OTR will be forwarded. DTRs
will be supplied by PIO; no tape submittal is required.
5earch precision by preserving context.
Specialized search operators against bibliographic (formatted) fields: "such as,
between, mask, scan, and numeric operators.
Search language easily learned.
Printed index--search word and document frequencies, document cross references, and reference field and text listing by selected keyword.
Search and output language allowing keyword (dictionary) parameters; sentence,
paragraph, or positional separat!on restrictors; 'Synonym, equivalents, or truncation expanders; reference field parameters; or logical combinations of parameters.
Use: As input, the program .accepts user-defined documents composed of a sequential
OOcument number, bibliographic data, and narrative data. The program converts
narrative data from all documents into alphamerically ordered search terms, creates a
file accessing dictionary composed of the unique worris of the set of documents, and
stores a searchable representation of each document's original terminology and context; Moreover, the program stores reference data (bibliography and control number)
as formatted fields within pertinent records containing document text representation.
If full-text retrieval is elected as an installation option, the program also stores a
verbatim copy of input documents. A user-generated exclusion table causes the system to purge common words; a user word edit further. limits dictionarY size and contents.
a
Reference Material: Promotional Brochure "VSP/360: Direct Route to Improved
Vehicle scheduling" (520-1914) ••• VSP/360 Promotional Kit (slides and narrative) (V20-0156).
A user's search request accesses the dictionary with Boolean combination of search
terms possibly constrained by relative position indicators: word distance, sentence, i
paragraph. The request may also cite reference data as search criteria. The program
then amasses and merges strings of document control numbers, reduces the candidate
documents through a check of formatted reference fields, satisfies search-term-position criteria, and prints a bibliography of qualifying documents. A full-text printout
is an installation option.
A search procedure can also employ synonymous/equivalent terms from two usergenerated search,:,w9rd-substitution lists. A special kind of search procedure - index
list - produces various forms of topical listings based on the words contained in the
dictionary.
DOCUment Processina System: Provides for the creation of document files by storing
in machine-readable form either full text, abstracts, or
keywords. The program generates a series of interrelated files which furnish direct access to each textword or keyword and the documents which contain them. A dictionary file provides control over the words available
for searching. Contextual relationship is preserved by storing in the master file every
word (in coded form) in the sequence in which it oce-ured in the input. This capability
ensures high precision in answering queries. To assure a high level of retrieval of
relevant documents, the Document Processing System optionally provides for the
maintenance of a Synonym/Equivalents file which is designed to expand terms used
by the search. (360A-CX-12X)
'MIere full text of a document or at least an abstract is available in machine-readable
form, it may optionally be stored in a file and presented in answer to a query.
Description: This application program converts input source records into three searchable hies. The input record format must contain a unique and ever-increasing identification number (assjgned by the user) and at least one alphameric text word.
Optional fixed or variable length bibliographic (formatted) fields may be included in
the input source record. The system compares, on a word basis, the contents of the
narrative portion of the input record against a dictionary file containing acceptable
terms obtained from previous proc;essing. If the word already exists in this file, the
unique identification number of the input record containing this alphameric word is
placed in a Voca;'ulary File, as well as all successive input record numbers containing this specific word. Hence, if a given word occurred ten times in document fl23
and 100 times in document 1456, the Dictionary File would contain a single entry
(for the given word) and an associated record in the Vocabulary file with document
numbers fl23 and 1456. A third, or Master, file contains for ~ach input record the
contents of the bibliographic (formatted) fields as well as a coded representation of
the narrative data so as to indicate to the program the relative location of each word
within the narrative portion of the input record.
Two optional files can also be created: (1) an Auxiliary Text file, which stores,
verbatim, the narrative, and (2) a Synonym/Equivalent file, which the user creates
from the words or terms he frequently associates with those in the dictionary. With
this facility, for example, a multi-language data base might be searched from an inquiry containil19.. words from only one language.
Customer Responsibilities: All persons installing, operating, or maintaining the apphcatlon program must have a working knowledge of Operating 5ystem/360.
A system user must convert his document source data into machine-readable records
acceptable by the Document Processing System, for an I/O device supported by
05/360. Specifications for such input conditioning should be made as nearly universal as possible so that they apply t9 document holdings in many forms. The user's
conversion speCifications should particularly address word, sentence, and paragraph
termination as employed in his current information holdings and as conventions to be
adopted within the Document Processing System. Input conditioning must also format
document reference data into field structures allowable within the system. The data
format produced under input conditioning specifications must be described to the system one time via data base description procedures.
The system user should exercise the application program against a quantity of documentary data to familiarize himself with the system's operation and capabilities.
Machine time will be m.inimized and procedural errors more quickly noted if the user
prepares a relatively small set of documents as a test vehicle.
To ensure proper operation of the program with the intended set of documents, the user
is responsible for providing adequate equipment and programming support as outlined
below.
Programming Systems: The application program is written in the 05/360 Assembler
Language. Operation of the Document Processing System hinges on the following
05/360 options lind compo~ents:
Primary Control Program
Input/Output Support for BDAM
Utilities
.
Sort/Merge
Linkage Editor E
360S-CI-505
360S-DM-509
360S-UT -506
360S-SM-023
360S-EO-510
"Minimum Machine Configuration: The Document Processing System requires OS/360
facilities for planned configurations. As a guideline, this application programming
system requires a 5ystem/360· Model 2040G. The requirement for dynamic main
storage is 441<. bytes. In addition to 05/360 secondary storage requirements, a
minimum ofthree IBM 2311's (or equivalent) is recommended. Peripheral devices
needed include a card reader (for system generation), a tape station or printer (for
output), and provision to sort the user's data sets. The a.llowance of 44K bytes for
the Document Processing System satisfies the 05/360 SAM and BOAM requirements.
BaSic Program Material:
Publications* -- Application Directory ••• a combined Program Description and
Operations Manual (H20-0477J.
Machine Readable*"< -- The generation job stream object programs and sampleproblem program are available on one 9-track DTR (800 or 1600 bpi) or one
7-track OTR (800 cpi - Data Conversion feature required>.
Not to be reproduced without written permission
PA 360.25
,Nov 73
i: :}~prOgramming
IBM System/360 Application Programs
Optional Program Material:
Accounts Receivable
Machine Readable** -- Source statements and flowchart print lines available on
, one 9-track 2400 ' reel of magnetic tape <1600 bpj} or 9-track DTR (SOO bpj)
or one 7-track 2400' reel of magnetic tape (SOOcpi - Data Conversion feature
required),
'
Ordering Procedure:
*If only the form numbered publication or if additional copies of the form numbered
publications are required, order from the IBM Distribution Center, Mechanicsburg
--'not PID.
**If the track and density'requirements are not specified on the back of the program
order card, 9-track at 800 bpi will be forwarded.
Preparation of statements ••. recording cash payments ... receivable accounts
stored either off';'line or on-line ••. inquiry on the status of receivables .•• online account validity check for off-line receivables ... listing of accounts which'
require a final diagnosis •••• listing of receivables by financial class ••. aged
trial balance .•• listing of accounts which have insurance receiva61es ... listing
of accounts which'fail to meet installment payments .•. consolidated statement
for family billing ..• bad debt reports.
General Ledger
DTRs will be provided by PIDj no tape submittal is required.
Ledger posting .. , Trial Balance. " Comparative Income and Expense Report
..• Balance Sheet ... Operating Statement, .• , cost allocation methods suitable
for Medicare - ~epdown and double apportionment.
MagnetiC Tapes (2400') may be forwarded or ordered (the order card should
accompany the tape order formL
Additional Program Support Material: Application Description Manual (H20-0315)
.. , Systems, M a n u a l . '
,
Reference Material: System/360 Operating System -- Utilities (C28-6586) '"
System Programmer's Guide (C28-6550> ... Sort/Merge (C28-6543) ... Job
Control Language Charts (C28-6632L .. Storage Estimates (C28-6551L
Shared Hospital Accounting System (SI:lAS>:t
SHAS provides hospital accounting
for the multiple hospital environment. The member hospitals are
tied to the central computer facility by Teleprocessing terminals. The accounting applications are Patient Bill ing, Accounts Receivable, and General Ledger. Accounting
for both inpatients and outpatients is provided." In addition to Medicare cost allocation,
SHAS determines Medicare insurance proration facilitating the prepa~~tion of the Medi~
care inpatient and outpatient billing forms. The design ofSHAS f~ciJitates the addition of clinical or administrative user written programs. SHAS programs are deSigned
to provide better administrative and operational control and reduce the ever increasing
clerical load aSSOCiated with hospital administration. (360A-UH-I1X)
Description; TheSHAS programs and the System/360 using remote terminals encompass the application areas of Patient Billing, Accounts Receivable, and General
Ledger for multiple hospitals.
The SHAS applications operate in two modes: on-line entry of data and receipt of reports by means of Teleprocessing terminals and off-line data entry and reporting at the
central data processing location. The SHAS programs provide the on-line facility for
applications where immediacy of the information is significant (entry of charges, Icash
payments, request for demand bills, etc.l. For other appl ications, receivable statement writing, etc., the central facility (with its high speed printer) is used directly.
Features:
General
Input Edit Tables and Report Format Control provide flexibility at thE
user's option to tailor the input and output for each application.
Hospital Profile provides for individual hospital processing decisions
and parameters tailoring SHAS program proceSSing to each hospital on
the system.
The SHAS Executive provides the capability for processing foreground
and background programs. Several terminals can transmit and receive
data concurrently through foreground programs while batch applications
are processed by background programs.
Job Accounting statistics including terminal and CPU utilization are
logged internally and are available in report form.
Security is attained through input and data set identifications to limit
access of data. Each hospital is permitted to inquire into or modify its
data £.!!!1.:
Executive
Manage communications lines ... handle the timer '" handle interrupts (e.g. ,
demand bill request and inquiries) ... queue messages ... manage input/output.
Patient Billing
Setting up patient's files upon admission to hospital ... central pricing of hospital services ... chlrge posting ... census ... insurance proration (including
Medicare) ... record cash payments ... Daily Balance Forward printed 'at the
hospital ... inquiry on the status of patient accounts (detail and summary patient
bills) ... automatic preparation of patient bills ... automatic printing of insurance statements ... automatic transfer to accounts receivable .•. accumulation
of revenue and usage data for Medicare requirements.
Use: The S HAS system processes input data against patient and account master files.
mese files are established through procedures supported by the SHAS programs.
Patient admissions and dismissals I charges, payments, and accounting transactions
are processed for multiple or single hospitals. Teleprocessing provides an alternate
input method and an alternate output for certain operational reports and inquiries. Vol~
ume output reports are printed- centrally in a Teleprocessing system. File update and
report jobs are controlled by the central operator through a higher level function language
(series of cataloged job steps).
Balance and edit, maintenance, and error reporting programs process data for all applications. Update programs in each application maintain and back-up tape and Indexed
Sequential dis"k master files. Report programs can select data for individual hospitals
from billing and receivables tape and disk files. The Background Monitor supports function initiation and uniform restart capabilities for operator control. The Teleprocessing
Foreground Monitor is assembled from user Teleprocessing network specifications.
Customer Responsibilities: A thorough understanding of the system (by personnel in
the central facility) before installation ... a thorough understanding of DOS and COBOL,
including operating experience with DOS ... a thorough understanding of QTAM for installations with Teleprocessing ..• selection fJf terminal site ... creation of master
files ••• terminal operation manuals for clerical personnel affected ... preprinted forms
for certain reports ... customize formats specified by the user by means of SHAS Input
Edit Tables and Report Format Control modules •.. create hospital profile parameter
records ... make necessary arrangements for communication I'ines and equipment.
Programming Systems: The Shared Hospital Accounting System (SHAS) operates under
the IBM System/360 Disk Operating System (oOS/360). The application programs are
written in COBOL and Assembler Language. Also used are Sort/Merge and Utility Programs. Teleprocessing programs utilize Queued Teleprocessing Access Method (QTAML
'Minimum Teleprocessing Srtem ReqUirements: 2030F Processing Unit (64K), Decimal Arithmetic (#3237i, F oating Point Arithmetic (#4427) Interval Timer (#4760>,
Selector Channel - first (#6960> I Selector Channel - second (#6961>, Storage Protection (#7520) '" 1052 Printer-Keyboard with appropriate attachments ..• 2821
Control Unit Modell with 1,100 lines per minute Printer Adapter (#3615) '" 1403
Printer Model Nl ••. 1416 Interchangeable Train Cartridge." 2540 Card Read Punch
Model 1 ... 2841 Storage Control Modell ..• three 2311 0 isk Storage Drives
Modell .• , 2415 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control Modell ... 2701 Data Adapter
Unit Modell, Terminal Ada~ter - Type 1 (#4645) or 2702 TransmiSSion Control
Model 1, Terminal Control - Type 1 (#4615), Selective Speed (#9684), and IBM
Not to be reproduced withoutwrftten permiaalon
I
1:--_.: :~~.
PA 360.26
Nov 73
Programming
IBM System/360 Application Programs
, Line Adapters as required. System control terminal at ~e Central computer site In~
,eludes 1051 Control Unit Model 2, First Printer Attachment ('4408) ••• 1052
Printer-Keyboard Model 2.
t~rminal configuration at each hospital uses 1050 series equipment. Recommended
are 1051 Control Unit Model 2, First Printer Attachment (~408), First Reader
Attachment ('441l>, IBM Line Adapter (f469X),·Line Correction (~795), Line
Correction Release (~796) ••• 1052 Printer-Keyboard Model 2 ••• 1056 Card
Reader Modell ••• 29 Card Punch Model A22* ••• 59 Card Verifier Model 2.
'* Self-Checklllg Number Feature ('7062) may be additionally specified for
card punch as desired by the user.
Minimum Non-Teleprocessing Machine Configurations (formerly announced as the
CARE Accounti~ System>: A 2030 Processing Unit Model E (32K) with Decimal
Arithmetic ('32 7), Floating Point Arithmetic (~427), Interval Timer (~760>,
Selector Channel - first ('6960>, Storage Protection ('7520> '" 1052 PrinterKeyboard with appropriate attachments •• ; 2821 Control Unit Modell ••• 1403
Printer Model 2 ••• 2540 Card Read Punch Modell ••• 2841,Stora!je Control
Modell ••• three 2311 Disk Storage Drives Modell ••• one 2415' Magnetlc Tape
Unit and Control Modell.
A 2025 Processing Unit Model E (32K) with Floating Point Arithmetic (f4427),
Interval Timer ('4760>, Selector Channel ('6960), Storage Protection ('7520> •••
1052 Printer Keyboard with appropriate attachment$' ••• InteQrated 1403 Attachment
('4590) ... 1403 Printer Model 2 ••• Integrated 2.540 Attachment (M595) •••
2540 Card Read Punch Modell ... Integrated 2311 Attachment (f4598) ••• three
2311 Disk Storage Drives Modell ... one 2415 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control
Modell.
BaSic Program Material:
Publication~ -- Application Directory ••• Program Description Manual (H20-0533-l>
... Operations Manual (H20-0534-l> ••• Teleprocessing Operations Manual (H200550).
If only the form numbered manuals are reqUired, order them from the IBM Distribution Center, Mechanicsburg -- not PID.
Machine Readable -- One 9-track OTR (800 or 1600 bpj) or one 7-track 2400'
reel of magnetic tape (800 cpj) Data Conversion feature required. The machine
readable material contains the source program modules and catalog control cards,
model job control statements, and data set file descriptions for compiling and cataloging into the core image and source library for program operation. Also included
is a sample problem with control cards for execution.
Features: Free form input ••• four levels of input statement hierarchy ••• user controlled error recovery and diagnostic features ••• powerful ,input data options, SUCh '4S
default value, override, algebraic and logical expreSSiOns' for:data values, automatic
mode conversion and scaling ••• dynamic program loading ••• extensive subroutine
SUpport for FORTRAN IIflPlication programMers.
Use: The problem solver (application user) communicates with PLAN through PLAN
statements designed by the user to suit his needs. Each PLAN statement contains a
maximum of 450 characters; terminated by a semicolon. A new statement may immediately follow the semicolon. Each statement usually contains both a command
and data. Processing a PLAN statement causes execution of one or more program
modules, using accumulated data and the partial results available at that time.
Programmers communicate with the PLAN system to obtain programttinli:age, error
handling, data management and utility functions by entering PLAN subroutines through
CALL linkages (normally from FORTRAN).
Customer Responsibilities:
Program ReqUirements -- Functional program modules must be written for new
applications, following FORT.RAN conventions. These modules are named and
stored in the system Ii brary •
Certain FORTRAN operations may terminate the execution of PLAN. In general
these are the functions that return control to the operating system. Substitute
functions are provided for these under PLAN and should be used.
For each PLAN application, the customer must also design and define the
input language that he wants to use.
Staffing -- Capable user personnel are necessary for good results. Creating a
f5'CANapplication involves three groups of people. They are (a) users who are to
be served by the application (b) programmers who implement functional logic modules, ,
and (c) system designers who actually design the application input language in detail and specify the data and program modules to be used for each kind of input
statement.
Education -:- Initial education for system designers and key programmers can be
accomplished in a four-day workshop school. No more than a few hours of pLAN
training will be needed for those who are simply using a t:>LAN based appli~tion.
Customers should expect to prepare simplified user's manuals for application users.
Their direct,useof PLAN program documents is not intended.
Evaluation -- PLAN is designed to support change. An important factor in the long~ss of PLAN applications is user feedback to and continued attention from
the application deSigner.
If the distribution medium required is not indicated on the back of the program order
card, 9-track at 800 bpi will be forwarded.
MagnetiC tape (2400·) may be forwarded or ordered. (The program order card should
accompany the tape order form.)
Additional Program Support Material: Teleprocessing Systems Manual (Y20-0251)
•.. Systems Manual (Y20-021S-l> ••• Application Description Manual (H20-0302-
2).
Programming Systems:
005/360 PLAN -- PLAN runs under 5/360 Disk Operating 5ystem (oOS/360).
It is programmed in the S/360 Assembly language and Basic FORTRAN IV. EXCP
is used by PLAN for nrocessinQ of files.
t SupportsSystem/370 configurations also.
OS/360 PLAN -- PLAN runs under OS/360 PCP, MFT, or MVT. It is programmed in the 5/360 Assembly language and Basic FORTRAN IV. BDAM,
BPAM and BSAM are used by PLAN for processing of logical files.
Problem Language ANalyzer (PLAN):t
This program (oOS/360, 360A-CX-26X
or 05/360, 360A-CX-27X) is a submonitor and application development support
system, implemented in an externally uniform way under the S/360 Disk Operating
and Operating Systems. It is especially designed to support problem solving and
other highly variable applications.
Description: PLAN furnishes five closely related program sets that are mutually dependent. These provide the basic PLAN functions: the submonitor ... the PLAN
input language interpreter ... the PLAN input language definer ... the PLAN subroutine package for FORTRAN application programmers ... the Diagnostic Supervisor.
The PLAN programs for each operating system are written to support a single application development interface. (Each set also allows some deSirable, but non-standard
operations.) As a result, applications may be moved from one environment to another
without change, provided the common interface is adhered to. High level languages
offer this kind of support for many purposes. PLAN adds uniform methods of user interaction, data definition, and program structure, in the FORTRAN environment...
Because PLAN was designed to support highly variable applications, it offers a new
type' of modularity. Program linkage definition and intermediate DASD specifications
are deferred until execution time, when they can be varied by input data. As a result,
much program recoding and re-organization can be avoided.
In further support of this idea, input languages used for application control under PLAN
are also defined at the statement level. Both new statement definitions and new program modules can be added to a PLAN application without forcing changes in existing
programs and statement definitions.
Minimum Systems Configuration: The minimum core requirement for PLAN is 24K for
DOS, 32K for os/360 PCP or MFT, and 44K for MVT. Only part ofthis space is
permanently used by PLAN. About 17K is transient, and this part can also be used
by PLAN applications. Under OS/360, an additional 6K is re-enterable, and may
'be assigned to the RAM or Link Pack areas. The remainder contains buffers, pOinters,
and control blocks that are permanently resident.
D05/360 PLAN -- Models 22,25,30,40,50,65 or 75 (background partition of 24K bytes or larger) ••• all features required for OOS/360 FORTRAN •••
Floating-point Arithmetic (#4427) ... one 2311 Disk Storage Drive with 2841
Storage Control in addition to 005/360 requirements (total of two disk storage
drives).
05/360 PLAN-- Model 30, 40, 50, 65, 75,85, 195 or 67 in 65 mode. In
addition to 05/360 main and auxiliary storage requirements, PLAN requires 32 K
or larger partition size for PCP-MFT and 44K or 1"J'!Ier for MVT ••• Floatingpoint Arithmetic (11.4427) ... direct access storage space equivalent to the capacity
of one 2311 Disk Storage Drive (any DASD supported for system reSidence may be
_ used) in addition to 05/360 requirements.
Basic Program Package:
Documentation* -- (OS/360 PLAN) Application DirectDry ... Program Description
Manual (H20-0594-1> ... Operations Manual CH20-0596-11.
.,. Operations Manual (H20-0597).
Machine Readable -- <05/360 PLAN) Object code, PLAN commands, sample
problem.
.
(OOS/360 PLAN) Object code, PLAN commands, sample problem.
t Supports System/370 configurations also.
Not to be reproduced without written p;rrniliion
------ --------
PA 360.27
Nov 73
:S:.=:~~§: Programming
IBM System/360 Application Programs
Optional Program Package (no documentation):
Machine Readable -- (05/360 PLAN) Source code. Code is contained as an
unloaded PDS created by the OS Utility IEHMOVE
(005/360 PLAN) Source code. Code & Listing are generated by executing the selfloading program contained on the: Tape on a System/360 Mdl 22DC or Mdl 300
or iarger.
PLAN Graphics Support can be used for nearly any application which can utilize the
capability of the IBM 2250. In particular, this includes Engineering AnalySiS,
Petroleum Exploration and Production, Management Information Systems, and bata
Reduction.
Features:
Easy-to-use statements for specification of graphic displays and interrupt
control.
Ordering Information: Program Number 360ACX27X 05/360 PLAN
Program Number
Extension
.none
Basic
I} ptionaI
Qrd~ring
none
none
Optional
OTR
Includes routines for lines, arcs, circles, and conic sections.
User Volume
Requirement
DTR
DTR
.7/800 DC cpi
9/800 bpi
9/1600 bpi
26
28
29
none
none
none
Tape
DTR
DTR
7/800 DC cpi 26
9/800 bpi
28
29
9/1600 bpi
01
None
None
Special \\high speed displays" may be defined giving rapid response to operator
interrupts.
Built-in default options simplify programming.
Since PLAN Graphics Support and PLAN coexist, all the PLAN functions and
facilities are available to the user.
Open-ended system allows user to build additional capability into PLAN
Graphics Support.
Special routines facilitate mainterwu:e of graphic data.
InfQrmation: Program Number 360ACX26X 005/360 PLAN
Program Number
Extension
Basic
Distribution Medium
Type Track/Density Code
none
Distribution Medium
Type Track/Dens ity Code
User Volume
Requirement
Tape 7/800 DC cpi 26
DTR 9/800 bpi
28
DTR 9/1600 bpi
29
1316
52
01
None
None
01
Tape 7/800 DC cpi
Tape 9/800 bpi
DTR 9/1600 bpi
01
01
01
26
28
29
Additional Program Support Material**:
05/360 -- Application Description Manual (H20-0490) ••. System Manual-Volume 1, Narratives (Y20-0345), Volume 2, Flowcharts (Y20-0346), and
Volume 3, Assembly listings (Y20-0351) .,. User's Introduction Manual (H200626).
DOS/360 -- Application Description Manual (H20-0490) .•. System Manual -Volume 1, Narratives (Y20-0345>' Volume 2, Flowcharts (Y20-0346), and
Volume 4, Assembly listings (Y20-035Q) ••. User's Introduction Manual (H200626>'
*If only the form numbered manuals are required, order from Mechanicsburg -- not
from PIO.
"*Available from Mechanicsburg.
PLAN Graphics Support:t
FLAN Graphics Support (360A-CX-34X) reduces the
time and effort required to implement an interface between
the IBM 2250 Display Unit and application programs.
In most instances, an application programmer may use this system to avoid coding the
graphics portion of ·an application at a FO RTRAN or Assembly Language level. The
user may rapidly integrate graphic capability into existing and new applications. ""'TJiis
system is an excellent tool to minimize learning and progri\.l'lming time when extending
existing applications to include graphic capability. PLAN 05/360 (Problem ~n
guage ANalyzer) a Type II program (3bOA-CX-27X) must be used by l>LAN Graphics
Support. The user has access to all the functional capability in PLAN.
Use: The application programmer describes the graphic displays and interrupt controls
by means of statements and specification cards. These cards are normally used as input
to an off-line operation during application development to create and store the files
necessary to generate the graphic displays. During the running of the application, the
previously stored files are used to generate the displays on the IBM 2250, allowing
the console user to communicate with his application. Information flowing between
PLAN Graphics Support and the application program pass through FORTRAN COMMON
managed by PLAN.
CListomer Responsibilities: PLAN Graphics Support minimizes the requirement for
detailed knowledge of graphics. A knowledge of PLAN is useful but is not a prerequisite when working at the PLAN Graphics Support level. The application programmer must be familiar with FORTRAN conventions and the use of COMMON.
Note: The application USEr (the console operator) does not have to understand
l5IAN Graphics Support. Only a familiarity with the use of Light Pen, Programmed Function Keyboard, and Alphameric Keyboard is required.
Programming Systems: PLAN Graphics Support is programmed primarily in FORTRAN
some Assembler code and requires the following system environments:
IBM System/360 Operating System ••• IBM System/360 Operating System - Graphic
Program Services for FORTRAN IV, Type I (360S-LM-537) ••• S/360 PLAN
(Problem Language ANalyzer) Type 1\ (360A-CX-27X).
Iv with
Minimum System/360 Configuration: SA360 Central ProceSSing Unit Model 40 with
a minimum of 128K memory (90K application partition required) '" One 2250
Model 1 with Absolute Vectors and Control (n002), Alphameric Keyboard (il245),
Buffer (#1498 or 1499), Character Generator (*1880), Light Pen (~4785),
Programmed Function Keyboard (#5855) •• ~ OR '" One 2250 Model 3 with Alphameric Keyboard (#1245), Programmed Function Keyboard (1;5855) and 2840 Display
Control Model 2. In addition to the I/O units and intermediate storage for OS/360 ,
PLAN, and Graphic Program Services for FORTRAN IV, storage on a DASD is
required for:
(a) PLAN Graphics Support Load Modules -- approximately 350K bytes.
(b) Panels - approximately 2K bytes per panel (based on an average of
25 specifications per paneD.
Access to a tape drive will be necessary for system generation· and maintenance.
. Refer to the Program Description Manual (H20-0614) for tailoring the system to run
an application in a minimum size partition of 90K.
Description: A user-oriented statement language has been implemented into PLAN
Graphics Support via the facilities provided by PLAN for language definition. By
means of the free format language statements and the more conventional fixed format
specification cards, the application programmer can specify the graphic displays and
interrupt (light Pen and Keyboards) controls desired by the application user. During
the execution of the application, the display console operator may dynamically control
his application utilizing the interactive graphic capability of the IBM 2250.
Basic Program Package:
The facilities available to the application user (display console operator via PLAN
GraphicS Support include:
Optional Program Package:
Graphic Output
Data lists from the application program may be displayed in any desired format
using pOints , characters, lines, arcs, circles, etc. -- the format and control
options being previously defined via language statements and/or specification
cards.
Graphic Input
Data may be created or modified at the console and passed to an application
program via the Alphameric Keyboard and/or the light Pen.
Monitoring and Controlling the Application
The console user dynamically controls subsequent displays and application
functions to be executed via the Light Pen, Programmed Function Keyboard,
and the Alphameric Keyboard.
Documentation -- Application Directory ••• Program Description Manual (H20-0614)
••• Operations Manual (H20-0615). If only the form numbered manuals are required
order from Mechanicsburg -- not from PIO.
Machine Readable -- Object Decks, Sample Job Control Cards, and the Sample
Problem Decks.
Machine Readable -Option 1 - Source statementS are specified by using Program Number Extension OPTl.
Option 2 - Program listin,9s are specified by using Program Number Extension OPT2.
Ordering Information: Program Number 360ACX34X
Basic
Optional
Program Number
Extension
Distribution
T~
none
DTR 7DC/BOO
DTR 91800
DTR 9/1600
26
2B
29
IIOIIe
OPTl
DTR 7DC/B00
DTR 918PO
D1R 9/1600
26
28
29
none
none
none
OPT2
MT 91800
MT 9/1600
28
01
01
Not to be reproduced without written permission
Medium
Code
29
User VolUme
Reqlfirenaents
none
none
.I::;,;,~
PA 360.28
Nov 73
Programming
IBM System/360 Application Programs
, Additional Program Support and Reference Material: Application Description Mariual
(GH20-0535) ••• Systems Manual ([Y20-0394) .•. PLAN Application Description
Manual (GH20-0490) .,. PLAN Program Description Manual (GH20-1066) •••
PLAN Operations Manual (GH20-0596) ••• Graphic Programming Services for
FORTRAN IV (GC27-6932).
Coursewriter III:t
Coursewriter III is a program that can be used with System/360
Models 30, 40, 50, 65 or 75 to develop and present course
materials for Computer Assisted Instruction (CAJl(360A-UX-01X).
Description: Coursewriter III can be used for educational research, curriculum development, and operational uses of Computer Assisled Instruction. Course materials may
be designed for baSic or supplemental instruction and can include pretests to assess
student capabilities, drill and practice problems and laboratory simulations.
The System/360, through IBM 1050 or 2740 terminals, interfaces directly with
students, authors of curriculum materials, monitors who assist students, and supervisors of the CAl installation.
Coursewriter III applications exist primarily in the following areas:
• Teaching and learning research
• School and university instruction
• Industrial and military training
The Coursewriter 1/1 programming system is made up of four elements:
Coursewriter III Author Language
Coursewriler 1/ I Processor Program
Coursewriter II I Input/Output Control Program
Coursewriter III Student Response Processor
These elements, under control of the Disk Operating System/360, store, present,
and administer the author-prepared course materials.
Disk Operating System/360 is a disk-resident system composed of control programs
and processing programs configured in the system generation of each individual installation. Multiprogramming is Included as a facility which enables System/360 to
process a background job and foreground jobs Simultaneously. The Coursewriter III
program will normally be run in the highest priority foreground partition. The Teleprocessing operations of DOS/360 manage the line communications with the IBM
1050 or 2740 terminal stations.
The Coursewriter III Author Language provides capability for the development and
presentation of educational course materials through the terminals.
This special language enables authors to control computer presentation of course
material and processing of student responses. The contents and techniques of instruction can vary widely depending on the type of student, the learning environment and
the performance objectives of the course.
The Coursewriter '" Processor Program operates interpretively and contains the control routines, author routines, student and monitor routines, and supervisor routines.
Together, these routines direct System/360 to P!!rform the specific tasks initiated by
its users.
The Coursewriter III Input/Output Control Program maintains the current status of
communication lines and their associated terminal stations.
A Coursewriter III Student Response Processor Utility Program is also included which
extracts and prints from selected records from the Coursewriter III recording tape.
Removable 1316 or 2316 Disk Packs store the course materials along with individual performance records and other administrative materials.
IBM 1050 and 2740 terminals are used by students to receive instruction and by
course authors to input and modify instructional materials.
Customer Responsiblities: Customers are responsible for providing their own course
materials. Currently, only limited amounts of course materials are available from
publishers or other users. Therefore, customers should have an experienced staff to
develop and/or evaluate curric,ulum materials. The customer must make the necessary
arrangements for communication lines and equipment. Knowledgeable individuals
thoroughly trained in DO 5/360 and Teleprocessing techniques are essential.
Programming Systems: Coursewriter III is written in 005/360 Assembler language.
It operates under the control of 00S/360 with the multiprogramming feature. The
interval timer is required. The Direct Access Method is used for disk, Sequential
Access Method for tape and BTAM for teleprocessing.
Minimum Machine Configuration: A 2030 Moclel F ProceSSing Unit with Decimal
Arithmetic (#3237), First Selector Channel (#6960), Storage Protection ~7520),
1051 Attachment (#7915), and Interval Timer (#4760) ... 1051 Control Unit
Model N1 with CPU attachment (#3130) ... 1052 Printer-Keyboard Model 8 ...
1442 Card Read Punch Model N1 ... 1443 Printer Model N1 with Selective Character Set (f/>6402) ... 2841 Disk Storage Control Modell ... two 2311 Disk Storage Drives Modell •.• 2803 Tape Control Modell ••• 2401 Magnetic Tape Unit
Modell ••• 2701 Data Adapter Unit Modell with Terminal Adapter (#4645) .• ,
2740 Communication Terminal with Record Checking (#6114>.
As many as 161 IBM 1050 or 2740 terminals may be connected to a System/360
Model 50, 65, or 75 through remote dial-up or dedicated voice grade lines. A user
selects one of three transmission control units according to the number of terminals
tobe serviced by the system. The 2701 Data Adapter Unit handles up to four lines
while the 2702 Transmission Control Unit, with a speed extension feature (7387)
can handle up to 31 half-duplex communication lines. One 2703 Transmission Control Unit can service up to 176 half-duplex lines simultaneously operating at speeds
up to 180 bits per second.
The 2701 Data Adapter Unit requires special feature 4645; the 2702 requires special features 3233,4615, and 7955; the 2703 requires special features 7505,
4878, 4619,4696, and a 3205 (for every eight lines). Each 1051 Model 2 terminal must be equipped with feature 4408, each 1052 Model 2 with feature 1006,
each 2740 Modell with feature 6114.
Either the tape or the printer is required as a system log device in the minimum configuration. To record student responses, and at the same time perform functions such
as print course, course off/on, one tape must be added for each such function performed.
Coursewriter III will accommodate the following sample configurations along with a
background job under control of 005/360:
Model
Core Size
30
40
40
50
64K
128K
256K
256K
Data to be collected on student responses for later analysis.
As many as 161 independent 1050 or 2740 terminals to be serviced when a
System/360 Model 50, 65 of-75 is I.;sed.
15
62
124
161
System configuration.
The complexity of the courses being used.
The number of terminals in use.
The type of background job being run.
The number and type of buffer areas allocated at Coursewriter III system generation time.
Authors to write and correct course material.
A macro capability to be used for easier development of repetitive course routines.
Number of Terminals
44K
108K
170K
220K
The number of terminal s a system can actually handle wi II depend upon the amount of
core storage available and the response time required. The response time to the
student will be dependent upon many factors, including:
Features: Coursewriter, III provides essential language, processor, and control program capabilities that enable:
Authors or programmers to add new functional capabilities to the Coursewriter
III language for unique requirements.
Coursewriter III
Partition Size
Basic Program Package:
Documentation -- Application Directory ••• Author's Guide (H20-0609) ••• Supervisor's Guide (H20-0610) ... Student Monitor User's Guide (H20-0608)" Ifonly
the form numbered manuals are required, order them from Mechanicsburg -:- not from
PID.
Machine Readable -- Program object deck and sample problem.
Optional Program Package:
Machine Readable -- Source program decks, assembly listing, and flowchart listings.
Ordering Information: Program Number 360AUXOIX.
Use: IBM System/360 Models 30, 40, 50, 65 or 75 serve as central processin9
iiiiifs for Coursewriter /II instructional systems. The CPU can access course material
from 2311 or 2314 Disk Storage Drives, interpret course $tatements, analyze stu4ent nrsponses and control data flow between the CUP and system tenflinal stations.
Program Number
Extension
Di,st.
Type
Med.
Code
User Volume
Requirement
Basic
None
OTR 9/800
DTR 9/1600
28
29
None
None
Optional,
None
MT 9/800
MT 9/1600
28
28
01
01
Additional Program Support Material: 'Application Description Manual (H20-0587)*
Obsoletes 220-1872 ... Student/Monitor User's Reference Card (X20-1780)'lr ...
Author's Reference Card (X20-1781>* '" Supervisor's Reference Card (X20-1782'>*
... Instruction Sheet Padded Form (X20-1750>* ... System Programers Guide
.
Analysis can be performed on a"items or on a portion of the file, with or
,
without updating.
*Available from Mechanicsburg Distribution Center.
Four methods for calculation of order quantity with exits for insertion of user
routines.
~rder quantity calculations based, on averages or future requirements.
Analysis for implel'(lentatlon is part of order quantity program it provides for
contrasting the newly computed order quantity to existing order quantity.
Inventory Controt:t
This group of integrated programs has been especially designed
for the implementation of order point inventory control where it
applies in manufacturing organizations (360A-MF-04X).
Programs are provided for (1) classification of Inventory Items for dete\'mlnlng the
type of control, (2) calculation of economic order quantities based upon usage Information or future reqUirements, (3) computation of safety stock and order point, (4)
projection of demand based upon historiC data, and (5) basic programs for transaction
processing and report preparation.
Description: ihis application programming package consists of source programs and
supporting documentation for the installation of an effective order point inventory control system. There are three major aspects - planning, projection, and execution.
Analysis, for implementation teatureof order quantity program provides for contrasting the newly computed order quantity to existing order quantity with respect
to il1\lentory level and set up costs.
Order quantity category code allows for many combinations of order costs
and carry,ing rates. Only the code is stored ,on the inventory record.
Provision"for processing specific'transactions that update the master inven-
tory file.
~pecial emphasis is placed on ease of implementation.
• Programs are modular in design to pennit the customer to use only the options
he desires.
For Plannrl: purposes three programs are provided: (1) Inventory AnalYSiS, (2) Order
'Point, an 3) Order quantity.
The srilection phase includes four programs: (l) Edit" (2) Model Select, (3) Initial pate, and (4) Update and Project.
T~e execution phase is made up of two basic programs: (1) Transaction ProceSSing,
and (2iStaiUs Reporting.
Inventory Analysis: A program that provides detailed analysis of Inventory items ,
based upon usage and cost. The output is useful in determining how the Items are to
be controlled.
Order Point: A program that calculates order point and safety stock for items in the
inventory master fi Ie. Seven different options for computing safety stock are provided. Four of these use Mean Absolute Deviation and user specified level of service.
First and second order exponential smoothing with automatic updating of
MAD.
Highlighting of items when new order point varies from old order point by
a specified percentage.
Evaluation of old and new safety stock each time order point Is calculated.
t
Is prOgrams.
Identification coding and prOCessing definition for transactions.
Writing routines to perforJ:l1 tasks not covered by these programs.
Programming Systems: Inventory Control Programs will operate under the IBM System/
360 Disk Operating System or Disk Operating System/VS. In addition, this program
product also operates in a VM/370 environment under the contr!)1 of DOS or DOS/VS.
The planning and projection programs are written in Assembler Language, The execution
programs are written USing Report Program Generator II. The schedule of avai lability
under DOS/VS is as announced is P-Ietter P72-94.
'
Minimum System Requirements: System/360 Model 2030 E* ••• Decimal Arithmetic
(3237 ... 1051 Control Unit Model Nl ••• 1052 Printer-Keyboard Model 8 with
appropriate attachments ... 2841 Storage Control Modell ... 2311 Disk Storage
Drives as required to contain Disk Operating System/360 and user's data files
(minimum of2) or 2314 Direct Access Storage Facility (configurations with 2314
only require ,a
series tape drive for system preparation) ••. System/J60
Card Reader and Card Punch or Card Read Punch capable of reading one file and
punching a second file simultaneously ••• System/360 Printer with at least 120
print positions.
goo
System/360 Model 2025E •• ; 1052 Printer-:Keyboard Model 7 ••. 2311 Disk
Storage Drives as required to contain Disk Operating System/360 and user's data
files (minimum of 2). System/360 Printer, Card Reader and Card Punch as described
for Model 2030 E.
* A' minimuni partition of 24K bytes is required for execution o(OOS Inventory Control
Supports System/370 configurations also.
Not to be reproduced without written perml..lon
PA 360.30
Nov 73
=§=-;:;~E
~
=:::: :S~5:
Programm jng
IBM S y s t e m / 3 6 0 A p p I i cat ion Programs
Basic Program Material:
Sample Application Areas:
Documentation -- Application Directory ••• Progr is resident on 2314 in 2311
mode. The BMP util ity programs (Customizer, etc.) operate only against
2311-mode files. The 2311-lIiode disk pack need be on line ~ during
BMP-SYSGEN procedures.
.
2.
Object program modules resulting from BMP-SYSGEN procedures are
cataloged in DOS libraries, which'may be in native-mode residence.
3. Cus.tomer data files are maintained in native mode. This pOint, together
with paint 2 above, provide for the 2314 euston,;!r aay-to-day operations
in native mode.
4.
2311 to 2314 reorganization of user data files is a standard featln of
the program.
5. When a user converts from 2311 to 2314, no change to or reassembly of
user. application programs which reference 'Bill of Material Processor files
is dictated by differences in BMP operation. The user may, however, be
reqUired to modify and/or reassemble for the follOWing reasons:
a. device-type dependericies in his own code.
b. changes he desires to implement at conversion time •..
Most of the IBM-supplied BMP program modules will require customiZing
and assembly for conversion to 2314. !The exceptions are those known
as MAINLINE modules.) This preparatory work 'may be accomplislled
with 2311's prior to 2314 delivery.
Ba'Sic Program Material:
Publications -- Application Directory ••• Programmer's Manual (H·20-0246)
••. operator's Manual (H20-0254) .•• Basic Tape System, System Generation and Maintenance (C24-506U. If only the form numbered manuals are
required, order them from Mechanicsburg -- not from PIO.
Machine Readable -- The macros, generalized source programs, specialized
utility programs, and sample problem input may be obtained on one 9-track OTR
(800 or 1600 bpi) or one 7-track tape (800 cpi, Data Conversion feature required)
or one 1316 Disk Pack. The requester may forward or order magnetic tape or
forward the 1316 0 i sk Pack
This program will not be distributed on 2:316 Disk Pack.
When onIering this program on magnetic tape, the reque5Uf' must indicate whether
9-track tape (800 or IbOO bpi or 7-track 800 cpi) ls required. U not specified,
9-track tape (800 or IbOO bpI) ·will be forwarded. The Data ConverSion feabn
is required if the program is received on 7-trac:k tape.
Reference Material: Bill of Material Processor - Malrt.enanc:e and Retrieval Systelll
(£20-0114> ... Application Description ManUal (H20-0197-2 TNLs N20-l020
and N20-l8b4) ••• System Manual (\'20-0099 TNL Y20-o2l0) ••• Tt. Production Information and Control System (E20-0280).
(reverse side Is
Not to be reproduced without written pennlulon
bf_,
·IBM
PA 360.101
Programming
IBM System/360 Model 20 Apelication Pro,ram
Ordering Information
Program Number: 360VDW06X
Program Number
Extension
Basic
none
Oi stri but ion
Medium
Code
Requi~
OTR 9/1600
29
OTR 9/800
28
OTR 70C/800 26
none
none
none
T~pe
User Volume
Program Numbers: 360VME08X, 360VUH09X, and 360VUH16X
Program Number
Extension
Basic
none
Distribution
Type
Medium
Code
User Volume
Requirement
52
29
28
26
01
none
none
.none
Medium
Code
User Volume
Requirement
00
none
Medium
Code
User Volume
Requirement
1316
OTR 9/1600
OTR 9/800
OTR 70C/800
Program Number: 360VSUllX
Program Number
Extension
Basic
none
Distribution
T):pe
OTR
Program Number: 360VMFI0X
Program Number
Extension
Basic
Optional
none
none
Distribution
Type
OTR 9/800
OTR 9/1600
1.316
52
OTR 9/800
OTR 9/1600
1316
52
28
29
28
29
none
n!)ne
01
none
none
01
Not to be reproduced without written pennl.1on
~ov
73
IBM
Programming
.I>
iSM $ystem/360 Model 20 Application Programs
. Wholesale IMPACT:
PA 360,102
Nov 73
This progl'/lm offers Model 20 users the opportunity to use the
IMPACT system of inventory management now in wide use
mong 5/360 and 1400 systems tlser~, The Model 20 IMPACT library contains only the operating programs CSVA and AP) and MACRO routines,
Initialization is accomplished on a Model 25 using the Whole$ale IMPACT Program
Library C.360A-OW-05X>, The program order number is 360V-OW-06X.
a-
De,scription: The IBM IMPACT (Inventory Management Program and Control Techniques) system of scientific inventory management provides the warehouse distributor
·(or any organization having identical inventory control characteristics) with the information ot "when" and "how much" to buy for each inventory item controlled by the system,
It does this through the means of probability science in conjunction with the many factors influencing the distributor's inventory control decisions, Factors conSidered include lead time, lead time variability, forecast of demand, forecast error, service desired, inventory carrying costs, purchasing/receiving costs, discount structures, minimums, maximums, shelf lives and pack sizes. The."when" and "how much" answers
find the most effiCient balance between the cost of carrying inventory, cost of purchasing and receiving, discounts realized, and customer service requirements.
TheSystem/360 Model 20 Wholesale IMPACT Program Library (With its associated
education classes and documentation) enables the distributor who has an IBM System/
360 Model 20 Data Processing System to successfully operate an IMPACT inventory
management system with minimum effort and expense. Programs and/or macro routines
are included that perform in the functional areas of forecasting, reviewing, and the control of both independent and joint replenishment ordering,
Features: This application programming system includes two complete programs, plus a
group oJ macro routines. The two Model 20 programs (SVA, AP) are the same as those
in the previously developed System/360 Wholesale IMPACT Program Library in terms
of scope, names of programs, and input/output format and content.
The System/360 Model 20 Program Library performs the same functions as the comparable components of the System/360 Wholesale IMPACT Program Library, which are
forecast demand and measure forecast error, including demand filter and tracking Signal
tests ••• calcuiate the adjustment factor for lead time variability, and time to the Beta
power ••• calc.ulate maximum available stock level for a specified shelf life limit".
calculate order points or peek points, •• calculate economic order quantities (with an
option to include safety stock in the calculation) ". rotate base index values to sequence and format required by the ordering program, •• determine when to order items
and item groups to meet service objectives ••• calculate the product mix to be ordered
within an item group that will meet both service obj~ctives and limitations on total order
size ••• macro routines which assist the user in the preparation of distribution-by-value
reports and in the creation of his operating programs.
The follOWing programs and macro routines are prOVided in the S/360 - Model 20
version of Wholesale IMPACT:
Macros
DBV1
DBV2
FeST
LBTA
MAXA
OPPP
EOQ
SRB1
INVLV
GOTO
Distribution-by-Value, Pass 1
Distribution-by-Value, Pass 2
Forecast
Lead Time Variability and Time to Beta Power
Maximum Available
Order Point and Peek Point
Economic Order Quantity
Smooth and Rotate Base Index
Inventory Level Evaluation
Provides Standard Entry Into and Exit from other IMPACT Macros
Programs
SVA
AP
Customer Responsibilities: Because the Model 20 IMPACT library contains operating
programs and Macro routines only, the user must make use of the existing System/360
Wholesale IMPACT Program library's. initialization programs. These programs which
are Ilsed initially and as required thereafter require a 16K System/360 Model D25
using BOS or DOS or a b4K System/360 Model F30 using OS. Detailed machine
requirements are provided with the program documentation. The user is responsible for
providing his own record-keeping system. In addition, some user programming is required
to use the macro routines and to provide linkage between his programs and IMPACT
library programs.
Programming Systems: Model 20 IMPACT may be run under either the Disk-ReSident
Monitor or the Card-Residel;1t Monitor of the System/360 Model 20 Disk Programming
System. Programs are written in Assembler Language, Macro routines are written in
BasiC Macro Definition Language. Macro routines are written in Basic Macro Definition
Language for use with Assembler Language programs.
Minimum System Requirements: A 2020 Processing Unit Model 04 with Disk Storage
Control (¥749 5), the appropriate printer attachment, the appropriate card reader attachment, the appropriate card punch attachment .,. 1403 or 2203 Printer (48 character
set minimllm) .•• 2501, 2560, or 2520 Model Al Card Reader ... 2560, 1442,
or 2520 Card Punch •.. two 2311 Disk Storage Drives (Mooel 11 or 12) or one
2311 (Model 11 or 12) and one 2415 Magnetic Tape Unit.
Note: The 2560 or 2520 Model Al can be used as both the card reader and card
punch.
BasiC Program Package:
Documentation -- Application Directory ••. Program Description Manual (H20-0255-2)
.,. Operations Manual (H20-0256-2). If only the form numbered manuals are required,
order from Mechanicsburg -- not from PID.
Machine Readable -- Source program and sample problem.
Service Point and Variable Interval Allocation
Allocation Print
FleXibility in the choice of input and output is provided. Input and output of main data
flow in programs may be disk or tape, as specified by the user at assembly time. At
run time the user may specify card input in neu of tape or disk and/or may specify card
output in addition to tape or disk. The macro routines are device independent.
Use: The program library includes operating programs and macro routines. Initialization
programs which are designed to be used once to set up an IMPACT System, then as
required to meet changing conditions, are not part of the Model 20 library. The user
must prov ide time on an S/360 Model 25 or larger to initialize the system using the
initialization programs in the System/360 Wholesale IMPACT Program Library (360ADW-05X), The output from these initialization programs is completely compatible with
the Model 20 operating programs and macro routines.
Ordering Information: Program Number 360VDW06X.
- Additional Program Support Material: System Manual CY20-0230l ..• Application
Description Manual tH2o-o461-11.
Reference'Material: Introduction to IBM Wholesale IMPACT (E20-0278> ••. Wholesale IMPACl - Advanced Principles and Implementation Reference Manual (E20-0 174).
Bill of Material Processor:
This program has the capability to load, maintain, retrieve, and reorganize part number master and product
structure records, (360V-ME-08X)
Description: The program represents an extension of the support by IBM in the area
of manufacturing application definition and implementation to the System/360 Model 20.
The package- contains general ized source programs to load and maintain product structure
and part .number master records on IBM 2311 disk fiks .,' generalized source pros rams
Not to be reproduced without written permi.iton
PA 360.103
Programm Ing
Nov 73
IBM System/360 Model 20 Appliciltion Progrilms
to reorganize the product structure and part number master files ••• a genertlized source
program to perform six basic product structure retrievals (sinqle level, indented and summarized parts lists and single level, indented and summamed where-used parts lists).
The program uses a direct accen file-oriented concept that requires the part number master (inventory-type) file to be on-line simultaneously with the product structure file.
Features:
The above modules of the System/360 Model 20 Disk Programming System are reqUired; however, if any others are present, they will not affect the Systenv'360 M~eI
20 Bill of Material Processqr programs. Also, it should be l10ted that the System!
360 Model 20 Bill of Material Processor programs will execute under either the DlskResident Control Programs <36OW-CL-I71) or the S/360 Model 20 DPS MonitOl'
Generation Macro Definition C360W-10-200>' The Punched Card Utility <360T-UT100) is used in the selective reproduce procedure of the modification process.
Product Structure records are linked to the Part Number Master
(inventory-type) records.
Note:
Disk file chaining is used to organize product structure data in
two inherent sequences:
1. Assembly or bill of material sequence (j .e., linking the
components of an assembly).
2. Where-used sequence (i. e., linking the usages of a part
number on higher assemblies>.
Minimum Mstem Requirements: A 2020 Processing Unit Model 04 with Disk Storage
appropriate printer attachment, the appropriate card reader attachment, the
COnUol, t
appropriate card punch attachment .•• 1403 or 2203 Printer (48 character set minimum) ... 2501, 2560, or 2520 Model A1 Card Reader ... 2560, 1442, or 2520
Card Punch ... two 2311s (Model 11 01' 12).
Raw material can be included in the product structure file, providing
for complete where-used cross reference of. each raw material.
~:
User deSigns his own record layouts by incorporating his own information plus certain required data into Part Number Master and Product
Structure records.
Low level coding is automatically maintained when adding records to
the Product Structure file.
If the user has a 2560 attached to his system, he may find it
useful to have a Punched Card Utility Program C360T -UT -101 >.
Although it is not a required program, it will simplify generation
of the sample problem.
The 2560 or 2520 Model Al can be used as both the card reader
and card punch fOl' the System/360 Model 20 Bill of Material
Processor.
Sasic Program Package;
Documentation -- Application Directory ••• Program Description Manual (H20-0S53)
• •• Operations Manual (H20-0S54), If only the form numbered manuals are reqUired, order them from the IBM Distribution Center, Mechanicsburg -- not from PID.
Assembly to sub-assembly continuity is verified. This feature guarantees that the product structurerecOl'ds can be "exploded."
Machine Readable -- Generalized source programs, macros, and sample problem.
Plus
Bi-directional file chains to speed the maintenance of part number
where-used data.
A run activity control technique to aid in restart and reconstruction
arid to faci! itate additional retrieval features.
Ordering Information: Program Number 360VMEOBX.
Additional Program supsort Material: Application Description Manual (H20-0478)
... Systems Manual {'{ 0-0255l.
Reference Material: Bill of Material Processor -- A Maintenance and Retrieval System
(E20-o114j .•. The Production Information and Control System (E20-02BOl.
Hospital Patient Billing: This program provides smaller hospitals with the capability of
installing a patient billing system with a minimum of programming effort. (360V-UH-16X)
Description: The programs accept patient charges, provide for insurance company billing,
Medicare Part A (SSA-1453C) and Part B (SSA-1554), and detailed billing of patients.
The package covers admissions ••• charge posting ••• census reporting ••• insurance
proration ••• preparation of detailed bills ••• preparation of summary bills ••• daily
balance 'forward ••• updating room transfers and discharges.
Use:
File Load and Maintenance; The user prepares his bills of inaterial and transilctions in his predefined card formats. The programs load and maintain this information on disk in a logical structure consistent with the relationship of the data.
Retrieval: The user prepares a simple inquiry transaction card to request one of
his six basic product structure retrieval reports. The program retrieves the information from the disk files and prints the required document in user-defined format.
Reorganization: At the user's discretion, he can reorganize one or both files with
programs supplied.
Customer Responsibilities: A thorough knowledge of Bill of Material Processor concepts (explained in the Application Description Manual> by the system designer is necessary. To implement this system, the following steps must be taken -- determine the
format and content reqUirements of the records .•. design additional input edit routines
(if desired) ..• establish control sequence (up to three levels available) '" deSign
print formats and write routines to implement them '" tailor the Assembler Language
Source Programs to fit his requirements.
Programming Systems: The following modules of the System/360 Model 20 Disk Programming System are required for the assembly and execution of the System/360 Model
20 Bill of Material Processor:
Program Name
Disk-Resident Control Programs
Macro Maintenance Program
Library Service Programs
Core Image Maintenance Proqram
Assembler Program
Initialize-Disk Utility Program
Disk-to-Card Utility Program
Input/Output and Basic Monitor Macro
Definitions
Punched Card Util ity Programs
Progr"m Number
360W-CL-171
360W-SL-176
360W-SL-177
360W-SL-rJ5
360W-AS-IBl
360W-UT-IB3
360W-UT -lB9
360W-IO-192
360-UT-100
Features:
•
Stored Programs -: each of the application programs, stored on disk, is called into
core as needed, USing System Control aDd -Service Program (Disk) and Job Control
cards.
• Insurance Proration - charges are automatit;ally prorated among the patient and
insurance companies at the time a bill is printed. ProviSion is made to handle up
to three insurance plans (including Medicare).
Internal PriCing - standard charges are priced automatically •.
• Preparation of data for entry to Accounts Receivable - patient data are punched at
the time a final bill is prepared. The data are punched in the format required for
direct entry to System/360 Model 20 Hospital Accounts Receivable program
C360V-UH-09X).
Revenue Distribution O!1ta - punched into charge requisition cards as charges are
posted. The user may then distribute revenue according to his particular needs.
Controls - system control totals, in conjunction with manually posting to the Patient
Billing Audit form, provide for an effective audit trail. The Patient Billing Audit
form is used to record the dollar value of patient transactions in the billing systerr,
Use: When a patient is admitted, his record is entered into the Patient Master Data Set
anme Census Master Data Set. As services are prOVided, all charges, credits, and
payments are entered into the patient record. When insurance verification is received,
the provisions. of up to three plans are recorded in the patient insurance master data set.
Interim reports such as Census, Daily Balance Forward, Interim bills are printed. Final
patient bills are prepared after discharge. Insurance bills are printed after interim and
final bills. When final bills are printed the patient data are punched for entry to Accounts
Receivable (refer to System/360 Model 20 Hospital. Accounts Receivable,
360V-UH·09X).
The largest mOdule of the patient bi lIing system ...
System Manua . A Ithough it is not a
required program, it will simplify generation of the customized user system.
Minimu~~
System Requirements:
IBM System/36O Model 20 Central Processing Unit Model 02, 04 or 05 with
dec ima I arithmetic and 16K core storage.
The appropriate card reader attachment
The appropriate card punch attachment
The appropriate printer attachment
One card reading device IBM 250 I, 2560, or 2520 Modei Al
One card punching device IBM 2560, 1442, or 2520
One printer IBM 1403 or 2203 (48 character set minimum)
Storage Control IBfIf. 7495
Two 0 isk Storage Drives IBM 2311
Customer Responsibilities:
A thorough understanding of the system before installation ••• design of statement forms for use by the Statement Writing Program ••• creation of table of insurance companies and plans of coverage for use by the Insurance
Accounts Receivable program ••• establishment of Accounts Receivable Master Data
Sets ••• installation requires the conversion to card format of data on present accounts
receivable.
Programming Systems: This program operates under the IBM Disk Programming System
for IBM System/360 Model 20. The appl.ication programs are written in Report Program Generator< RPGl. Sort/merge and Disk Utility Programs are also utilized.
Minimum System Requirements: 2020 BC2 Central Processing Unit( 12K bytes),
2560 Attachment (48099), 2203 Attachment (~8082), 2311 Attachment (#7495)
••• 2560 Multi-function Card Machine Model Al ••• 2203 Printer Model AI,
52 Character-SetC~9088) ••• two 2311 Disk Storage Drives Model 12s. Core
requirement for largest module of the system is 11,171 bytes including system overhead.
Q!
2020 BC4 CPU (l2K bytes), 2203 Attachment (#8084), 2560 Attachment(#8100l,
2311 Attachment(17496) ••• 2560 MFCM Model A2 ••• 2203 Printer Model A2,
52 Character-5etC#9(88) ••• two 2311 Disk Storage Drives Model 12s.
OR
Note: The 2560 or 2520 Model Al can be used as both the card reader and card
punch for the IBM System/360 Model 20 Requirements Planning and Inventory
Contrbl System.
2020 BC5 CPU (l2K bytes), 2203 Attachment ("a082), 2560 Attachment (#8099),
2311 AttachmentCfI!7497) ••. 2560 MFCM Model AI ••• 2203 Printer Model AI,
52 Character-Set (19088) ••. two 2311 Disk Storage Drives Model 12s.
Basic Program Package:
BaSic Program Package:
Documentation -- Application Directory ••• Program Description Manual (H19-0023)
... Operations Manual (H10-0022). If only the form numbered manuals are required,
order from Mechanicsburg -- not from PJD.
Documentation -- Application Directory ••• Program Description Manual (H20-0567)
••• Operation Manual (H20-0568). If only the form numbered publications are
required, order from Mechanicsburg -- not PID.
Machine Readable -- Standard source programs, macro, and sample prob·lem.
Machine Readable -- RPG source programs and sample problem (a bootstrap card
will be provided with each DTR).
Optional Program Package:
Machine Readable -- A sample minimum DPS system containing the RICS object
programs and the sample BOMP 20 object programs, sample BOMP 20 source
programs, macros, and sample problem.
Qrdering Information: ?rogram Number 360VMF10X.
Ordering In~ Program Number 360VUH09X.
Additional Program Support Material: Application Description Manual (H20-054 7) .•.
System Manual
It contains design logic for steel, laminated wood, 'and reinforced concrete structural
elements. RFSP is of direct interest to manufacturers of prefabricated buildings and
to consulting engineers and architects.
Automated Chemistry ProGram (ACP>:
Description: This program processes the punched card output of the IBM 1080 Data
Acquisition System.
'
Processing of 1080 Punched Card Output -~ establishes the calibration function
from control stanaaid ••• checks the quality of the control standards used •••
computes the test result •• , adjusts the test result for interaction between specimens
(high concentration followed bvlow concentration>. •• compares test result ,with
mean and standard deviation of cumulative 'data for all results for that test ••• associates each test result with the proper specimen identification number.
The principal value of the program is its ability to produce a least weight deSign, within
the range of material sizes available to a particular user. Designs produced by RFSP
will satisfy one user-specified set of loading and stress specificatiol'!s, for generalized,
non-symmetric (rames. In the more typical case, symmetric frames can be designed for
three standardized load cases at i1ne time.
RFSP uses building profile dimensions, applied loads, and the user's ch~ice of material
dimensions to produc;e a deSign.
Setting Up a Test Result File -- sets up a file by specimen number and tests
results for each test OI'dered- .' •• the data from this file can be transferred to and
integrated with a Patient ~aster Record by! user - written routines.
Features:
Has direct deSign of least-weight two- and three-hinged rigid frames by automatic, successive approximation, using outside building dimensions and applied
loads.
PrintOut of Quality Control Report -- Prepares 'a quality control report for review
by the laboratory prior to release of test data for distribution to the ward or cl inic
••• the qual ity control report I ists for each specimen processed: test result,
dilution factor (if any), abnormal indication for lor 2 standard deviations, and
spec iinen number.
Allows several inventory policies to be evaluated for a product line, by creating
section economy tables from various inventory specificationS.
Provides a convenient language for users to specify design and inventory
'variables.
Calculates dimensions and weights of frames and their components.
Allows for the deSign of members of other structures, given the results of a
structural analysis.
Supports interactive operation via the ll30 keyboard.
Use: Inventory calculations are made once for each different choice of material types
and sizes. DeSign calculations are made for each different structure, for each different
combination of dead, live, and wind load.
Users describe inventory choices, external structure dimensions, and applied loads in
a convenient free form langua'ge, implemented under the Problem Language ANalyzer
(PLAN), These statements determine which inventory, analysis, input and output
programs are executed. Results are printed for inspection and may 'be stored on disk
for modification and recalculation.
'
Customer Responsibilities: Users should be, familiar with the theory and practice of
rigid frame design. At least one person in the installation should be familiar with the
use of 1130 PLAN Cl130-CX-2 5X) and the 1130 Disk Monitor System. No programming or classroom training is required unless the customer decides to alter or
extend the system. In this case, he must be familiar with FORTRAN, PLAN, and
structural engineering.
ACP supports the IBM 1080 Data AcquisitiOh·
System in the clinical laboratory.
(1130~UH~ l.3X)
Features:' This program encompasses the following unique features that produce
mote reliable test result -- it checks reliability of control standards ••• adjusts for
analyzer drift ..• reports quality control information • ~. flags abnormal test results
for retesting of these specimens.
Special Sales Information' The output from this program can be combined with the
user-provided baSic patient data and, printed by simple user~written routines to
serve as a Patient Summary Sheet for tests processed by 1130 ACP.
Use: The program is loaded into the library and called via job control cards.
!iiVTronmental data are loaded and retained on disk via a maintenance program included
with this program, this is a one-time operation for a given operating environment .••
1080 card output can then be processed.
Customer Responsibilities: The user is responsible for -- providing basic patient data,
associating patient number and ,specimen number ••• setting up the 1080 by providing
a description of which analyzer strip chart recorders are assotiated with which 1084,
a descriotion of the tests run on each 1084, test number and name, concentration of
each calibration-standard, control standards used, and chemistry procedure used.,.
Programmin~ Systems: ACP iswri,tten in 1130 Bas,ic FORTRAN IV ,and Assembler
language an operates under the 1130 Disk Monitor System Version 2.
Minimum System Requirements: An 8K disk 1131 tentral Processing Unit or larger,
with 2315 Disk cartrUlge, 1442 C;ord Read Punch Model 6 ' " 11.32 Printer Model
1.
Programming Srtem: The RFS~ /1130 is written in FORTRAN and operates under
the 1130 Prob em Language ANalyzer (PLAN) which, in turn, operates under the
ll30 Disk Monitor Version 2.
Additional Device-5upport: A 2501 card reader and a 1403 printer are supPorted
under Version 2.
Minimum 1130 System Configuration: 8K disk 1131 Central Processing Unit •••
1442 Card Read Punch Model 6 ... one 2315 Disk Cartridge
BaSic Program Package:
Expanded ll30 Systems: RFSP throughput and usefulness are increased by the
addition 0/ a IIOe printer, larger main storage, a 2311-12 or II, a 2310 Model 61
or B2, and faster main storage, in that order of importance. 1131 Models 2C, 20,
3B, 3C, and 3D may be used. All combinations of 11.30 line printers, card readers,
and card punches supported by FORTRAN can be used for RFSP.
Basic Program Package:
Documentation -- Appl ication Directory ... Program Description and Operations
Manual (H20-0580>. If only the form numbered manual is required, order from
Mechanicsburg -- not from PID.
Documentation -- Application Directory ••• Program Description Manual (H200542-1> ... Operations Manual (H20-0543-1)
Machine Readable -- control cards" object modules necessary to store the programS
in the users area of the 1130 Monitor Disk, and a sample problem (with control
cards>.
Optional Program Package:
Documentation -~ None
Machine Readable -- Source code.
Ordering Information: Program number 1130UH13X
Program Number
Extensions
Machine Readable -- Object decks and saniple problem.
Distribution Medium
Type
Code
User Volume
Requirement
Optional Program Package:
Machine Readable -- Source statements.
Ordering Information: Program number 1130EC09X.
PROGRAM NUMBER
EXTENSION
DISTRIBUTION MEDIUM
TYPE
CODE
Basic
none
Cards
15
none
Optional
none
DTR 9/800
DTR 9/1600
28
29
none
none
USER VOLUME
REQUIREMENT
BASIC
none
2315
58
01
OPTIONAL
none
DTR 9/800
DTR 9/1600
28
29
none
none
,l\dditional Program Material:
Application Description Manual (H200482) with TNL (N2o-l'9"9T3) System Manual (Y20-0216) with (Y20~0402>.
~eference Material:
System Summary (A26-5574) .•. Installation Manual-
~I Planning (A26-3684) -.•• Functional Chara'Cleristics (A26-366l> ...
Additional Program Support Material: Application Description Manual (H20 -0 598) ...
Systems Manual Flowcharts and Narratives (Y20-0316) ... Compiled Listings CY200366),
Reference Material: PLAN Application Description Manual (H20-0490-1) ... PLAN
Progralll Description Manual (H20-0594) ... 1130 PLAN Operations Manual (H200595).
Disk Monitor System Reference Manual (C26-3750) •.• Basic FORTRAN IV
Language (C26-5933) .. , Assembler Language (C26-5927 •. , Subroutine Library
(C26-5929) .• ' Functional Characteristics (A26-5881) '" Data Presentation
SY5tem-~,User's Manual (H20-0338) ..• Problem Language Analyzer (PLAN)
Program Description Mall,uai(H20-0594) ... 1130 Operations Manual (H20-0595
Not to be reproduced without written permission
mr.,
PA 1130.2
Nov 73
Programming
I B. M 11 3 0 A PPI i c at ion Pro g ram s
Skuctural Ensineering System Solver (STRESS):
A powerful tool fo solving
structural engineering prob~
.
lems. It is a problem w
oriented language which enables the engineer to communicate with the computer
even though he has had no previous programming experience. C1130-EC w03X)
The programs included in the set are:
Utility Programs _w load user data of intermediate results to disk storage •••
dump intermediate or final results from disk to cards ••• initialize disk stor w
age ••• l1)odify data sets in disk storage.
Numerical Approximation over a Uniform Grid _w takes irregularly spaced data
points that define a surface and produces values at the mesh points of a
square grid system superposed on the surface.
This program covers many application areas in thefieldof structural analysis.
Most buildings and bridges are deSigned by consulting engineers or government
agencies, but many other types of structures in other industries can also be
designed using 1130 STRESS. Some o(the other i.ndustries and typical appli w
cations for each are Aerospace (Wing Members) ••• Manufacturing (Conveyer
Framing, Plant Design) ... Process (Supporting Towers) ... Utilities (Transmission Towers, Culvert Sections) ... Federal (Dam DeSign, Ship Design).
Interpolation to a Finer Grid -- takes the values that define a surface at the
mesh points of a square grid and, by nonlinear interpolation, defines the surface on a grid with onewhalf the spacing.
Smoothing -- applies a controllable degree of smoothing to the values that define a surface, thereby eliminating unwanted minor irregularities in the surface.
Features: STRESS incOrporates many. features that will make it extrem~ly valuable to
the engineer. Included area user .oriented language for describing the geometry of the
structure which is essentially the same as the language used generally in engineering
••• facility to solve space frames, trusses, rigid frames, box culverts, tun;lel sections,
plane grids and plane frames .•• problem sizes. up to 125 joints and 250 members •..
access to the stiffness matrix.
Surface Fitting with Orthogonal Polynomials -- fits orthogonal polynomials to
either regularly or irregularly distributed data .
Use: To use 1130 STRESS the engineer Simply describes the shape of the structure, the
PrOPerties of the members, the loadings placed on the structure and the output he requires,
using the 1130 STRESS language. Each statement is punched into a card in free form.
This deck of statement cards is then read Into the computer, and the 1130 STRESS SySw
tem provides the speCific outputthat the engineer has requested.
Grid-to-Grid Operations -- adds, subtracts, multiplies, or divides the values
at the common points on two grid networks ••• an option provides the capabi lity to modify the boundaries of a grid network to conform to the common area
of two overlapping grids •.• another option provides the capability of output the
greater of lesser of the two values at each grid point.
Customer Responsibilities: The customer is required to be familiar with the 1130
STRESS language. 'the STRESS program is ready to run as distributed. The customer
need only load the cards onto a disk.
Numerical Integration -- takes a surface defined at the mesh points of a square
grid and computes surface areas, projected areas, or volumes by techniques of
numeric.al integration.
Equation Evaiuation over a Uniform Grid -- "roduces representative values for
a surface by evaluati ng a defin:ng equation at the mesh points of a square grid.
Contouring -- takes a surface defined by values on a square grid and produces
a contour map using the IBM 1627 Plotter.
Map Annotation -- draws letters, numbers, special symbols of various sizes,
map boundari es, and ti ties of maps.
Programming Systems: FORTRAN is used as the primary source language, with a few
subroutines written in 1130 Assembler language. Knowledge of these programming
languages is needed only if the user expects to augment or modify the system.· The
program operates entirely under the control
Version 2 of the 1130 Disk Monitor
System (1130-0S-005);
of
Minimum System ReQuirem'ents: An 8K 1130 with disk and a 1442 Card Read
Punch. The addition otan 1132 Printer; while not required, will appreciably improve
the speed of performance. If a printer is not included,the .output wi" consist of
punched cards or will appear on the console typewriter at the user's option.
Basic Program Material:
Publications*-w Application Directory ... User's Manual *
••• 1130 Assembler Manual (C26-5927)* ••• IBM 1130 Subroutine Library C265929)* ..• IBM 1130/1800 Plotter Subroutines (C26-3755)*
*Available from Mechanicsburg Distribution Center.
PA 1130.3
Nov 73
tJrogrammlngSystems: " Version 2 of the IBM 1130 Monitor (1130-0S-005)
Mocm.cationLevel 5 or higher and,ll30 Problem Language Analyzer (PLAN)
(1l30-CX-25X). The application orograms are written in 1130 FORTRAN.
, Minimuiri SlsteniReQuirements: 8K disk 1130 Computing System ••• 1442 Model
6 or 1 Car Read punch ... 2315 Disk. Larger 1130 models, alternate card
Input/output devices and printers supported by 1130 Disk Monitor are also supported
by Mechanism Design.
Optional Ssstem Requirement: 1132 Printer for more efficient production ••• ExpanSion
Adapter h~ 616) ... 1132 Attachment '(f3854).
'
Basic Program Package;
Documentation* -- Application Directory ••• Program Description Manual (H200365-1> ... Operations Manual (H20-036b-1).
Machine Readable -- Object code decks, language definition card decks, and
sample p r o b l e m . ,
"
,
Optional Program Package:
Machine Readable -- Program source code. Decks and listings are generated by
the self-loading program on the tape using a System/360 Model 2030 D or largE'r.
Mechanism Design System Gears and Springs: This program provides design and
analySiS for five distinct mechanical
components used in a Wide variety of
machines. Spur and Helical Gears, Compression, Extensjon and Torsion Springs are
the components covered by this application. (1l30-EM-OIX)
Oescri tion: The 1130 Mechanism DeSign System Gears and Springs provides the
mec anica engineer and mechanism designer with a fleXible, easy-to-use program set
which will design new parts or analyze existing parts. Gears and Springs may exist in
dozens of types, but those covered here represent a high proportion of the total design
effort expended in this are'!.
The engineer is expected to furnish the problem description in terms of deSign restrictions and material parameters. This description is in a flexible problem language format
processed by the Problem Language Analyzer (PLAN), It greatly simplifies man-machine
communication. Operation can 'be either by a batch, card input mode or in Interactive
typewriter input mode. In the latter case, an engineer can readily evaluate parametric
changes and use the computer as a design tool.
The Spur and Helical Gear Programs enable the engineer to design a new gear train
containing two gears or to analyze an existing gear train. The programs for gear design
compute the parameters of gears with the smallest dimensions that will give stresses
below the allowable limits for the materials specified. When deSigning gears, the
engineer may furnish the data about one gear or the shaft center distance of the two
gears. In both cases, the computer will generate the information necessary for producing the gears and evaluating the design.
Ordering Information: Program Number 1130EMOIX
Program Number
~
Distribution Medium
User Volume
Ill?!.
Requirements
Code
Basic
none
CARDS
15
none
Optional
none
DTR 9/800
DTR 9/1 bOO
28
29
none
none
Additional Proram Materlal**: Application Description Manual (H20-02b8-1) with
TNt (N20-2 20) ... System Manuals -- Flowchart and Narratives (V20-0109-1)
... Listings (V20-0434).
ReferenceMateria~: PLAN Application Description Manual (H20-0490) ••• PLAN
Program Description Manual (H20-0594) ••• 1130 PLAN Operations Manual (H200595>'
*If only the form numbered manuals are required, order from Mechanicsburg -- not
from PID.
**Available from the Mechanicsburg Distribution Center.
The Compression and ExtenSion Spring programs provide for both the design and analysis of round wire helical springs. The TorSion Spring program provides for the design
and analysis of round and rectangular wire helical springs.
When designing springs, the user can specify an allowable design stress or allow the
program to compute the design and limit stresses based on wire diameter. Commonly
used materials and wire sizes are furnished with the Spring programs in the form of '.
tables. The user has the option of using these standard values or providing a minimum
and maximum wire size and an incremental value to be used in selecting a workable wire
size. The acceptability of each wire size for a given spring design is based primarily
on the spring operating at a safe stress level consistent with service requirement. However, once a real spring is calculated, several other checks can be performed. Two
such checks are For tl,e spring index and the spring diameter to be within specified
limits.
~A
modiFiable command structure is provided which the user can tailor to meet
individual requirements .•• input can be in batch or interactive mode ••• while operating
in the latter mode (typewriter input), the engineer can readi Iy modify the problem parameters to achieve a satisFactory design ••• programs are highly modular and coded in
FORTRAN For ease of modification; calculations not performed in this application can
be added to existing program modules or new program modules written; standard data can
be called by name through use of the command structure provided; new commands can be
added to those provided with the system for tables of standard size data, material physical
parameters, etc •..• American Gear Manufacturing Assoc iation (AGMA) and Spring
Manufacturer's Institute (SMIJ tolerance and quality data are available in the command
list; thus, the user can utilize that quality data furnished with the program or by adding
new commands he can use local practices ••• new components can be designed or existingcomponents analyzed ••• design documentation includes data required for a part
drawing and a:!ditional calculated data required for deSign evaluation ••• a framework is
provided for expanding the existing command structure to include functions not covered
in these applications as well as for creating new appl ications for additional component
types. (Examples for the former are type and size synthesis; for the latter, cams,
different gear type and linkages.>
Customer Responsiblities: A basic knowledge of gear and spring design terminology,
materials, manufacturing tolerances and inspection techniques is essential. The
customer must, in addition, study and understand what design criteria are implemented
in this application. In any given machine generated deSign, the results may not agree
with a preconceived idea or an existing design. It is envisioned that in situations like
this, the engineer will be able to direct the machine to a satisfactory solution by means
of a feature prOVided. If he cannot, however, program modification will be necessary.
The programs were constructed with this in mind and are modularly coded in FORTRAN,
and thoroughly documented. This program is not a suhstitute for an engineer's experience
and judgment. Rather, it is a tool to be used which enables him to think more about
deSign and less about detail calculations.
Decline Curve Analysis Program: Computes the coefficients in the equation be$t
fitting past production data and the reserve$ associated with these data. Using a method of
least squares for non-linear systems, the coefficients of the equation best fitting
past production data are determined. By means of the equation, future production
rates 'and future cumulative production are computed. These figures are used to
better evaluate a producing property. Output may be on the typewriter, 1132 Printer,
or 1627 Plotter. Cl130-MP-03X)
Description: Past oil production data for a number of time periods '
Not tobereprodu~without ~rltt.n permiulon
Programming
IBM 1130 Application Prograt:n'S
Customer Responsi~: The Cl!stomer is responsible for plaCing his data :ina
~achi'leable form and in the format described iii the Input/Output description secti()n
Of the Programmer's Manual. The customer assllmes ·the responsibility for program
modificatlJI1 if plottil1Y of. a' decline curve showing both past ~nd predictep production
is not desired. Tile results of calculations then would only be il typed report of the
oroducti 011 data.
Instructions for the above progral1l modification dre provided in the Programmer's
Manual (H20-041Q).
PA 1130.4
Nov 73
Additional Program Support Material*: Appl ication DescriDtion Manual (H20-0417)
... TNL N20=t972 ... System Manual CV20-0050·-l>.
Reference Material*: 1130 FORTRAN Language (C26-371S) ... 1130 Disk Monitor
System, Version 2 (C26-3717) ... 1130 Input/Output Units(A26,.S717'.
*Available from Ml)e
. Programming Systems: The program is written in FORTRAN language (described in
C26-3715). It is designed to run under control of the 1130 Disk Monitor System
Version 2. The IBM 1130 Dipmeter program Cl130-MP-15X)conlaining specific
plotting subroutines necessary to ".Inning the DeclineCurite Analysis Program must be
ordered from P ID
Minimum System Requirements: An 8K disk IBM 1131 and an IBM 1442 Card R'~ad
Punchor an IBM 2501 Card Reader and a 1442 Model 5 Card Punch; and an IBM
1627 Plotter. An IBM 1131 Printer or an IBM 1403 Printer is optional.
Basic Program Package:
Documentation -- Application Dir~ctory . " Programmer's Manual (H20-041 0-1)
... Operator's Manual (H20-041f-l). If only the form numbered manuals are
required, order from Mechanicsburg ~- not from PID.
Machine Readable -- Source code and sample problem.
Ordering Information: Program Number 1130MP03X
Basic.
Prvgram Number
Extension
Distribution Medium
Type Code
none
cards
lIser Volume
Requirement
none
15
Additional Program Support Material*:Application Description Manual Oi20-0409-1)
... System Manual ose flast. calculation program that can be used for a variety (If the
comPl 1tati0l1S made by the Petroleum Engineer. The program maybe used to design surface s~parators or to delenni ne the physical propertieS of the oil and gas from a surface facility. A laboratory differential
liberation may be Simulated. C1130~MP-OaX)
Descri~lon: This program was designed a~ a general purpose program to accommcdate
up to Four stages of flash. The program is ~Iseful for Simulating a laboratory differential depletion or for computing the recovery from various arrangements of surface t.raps.
Allows the user to project ~he annual rate at which volumesof ga5 reserves may be received Into gathering
systems, A printed rePOrt may be obtained by quarters
showing a breakdown of the deliverabillty and daily takes fOr each well, as well as
deliverability and prodUction, both daily and cumulative for the rPoservolr. (1130MP-07X)
Gas Deliverabllltx Proaram:
Description: The complete job of computing gas dellverabllity is performed by two
routines, the first of which Is the computational phase. Future absolute open flow and
future dellverabllities are predicted for up to 40 Individual wells. The daily production Is then reported as the smaller of the deliverability or the allowable, which may
be a fixed quantity or a percentage of the absolute open flow. For the reservoir as
a whole, the dally production, the cumulative production for the year, and the total
cumulative production arE' reported by quarter. When the production drops below a
specified rate, the line preuure Is decremented until a minimum line pressure Is
reached.
The second routine prepares reports and InPllt data fClr the ECQnomlc Evaluation Program. Output reports may be typed on the console typewriter or may be created offline
by listing punched cards.
Features: The program computes ~bsolute open flow and future deliverabilities for up
'iO"4lITiiilividual wells ••• daily production cumulative production for the year and total
cumulative production are reported quarterly ••• output can be read directly by the
Economic Evaluation program (1l30-MP-01X).
The feed to the first stage may be computed from the separator liquid and vapol' products
for a high';'pressure separator or from the separator products and the tank oil for a lowpressure separator; or, alternately, the user may evaluate a pre-computed well stream.
If the user deSires, the program converts the C7+ cut Into five cuts (C7, Ca. C9 CIO
and Cu+) based on either an ASTM (American Society of Testing Materials) or
true boiling point distillation. In all, the program accommodatE'S up to 16 components
which Includes up to three non-hydrocarbons.
a '
If specifiC K values are deSired, these mjly be entered for each stage. Optionally, the
program accepts the NGPA (Natural Gas Processors Association) coeFricients which
represent a sllrface fit of the NGPA K values as a function of pressure and temperature. The fit is perfonned for each component at each of nine convergence pressures.
The program performs the flash c;alculation at each stage at pre-selected convergence
pressures.
The computer calculates a new convergence pressure after each flash reported.
Output reports may be typed on the console typewriter or may be created off-line by
listing punched cards.
Features: The pr~ram will aCcommodate up to four stages of flash ••• the feed to
the lirst stage may be entered directly or computed from separator products •.. under
useroptlon, the C7+cut can be ~rokendown into five cuts (C7, Ca, C9, C10, and
CU+) ... specific K values can be entered; or, optionally, the program will compute
K values from the NGPA (Natural Gas Processing Association) Equilibritlm Coofficlents.
Use: The program accepts as input reservoir pressure and volume, well flow rates,
gaui'ering line pressures, and allowables.
From this information, flow rates from individual wells and cumulative reservoir pro..
duction are projected for up to 30 years into the future.
Customer Responsiblli~: The customer is responsible for placing his data in a machineable 'onn aiid 10 t e format described in the Input/Output Description section of
the Programmer's Manual.
Use: The program accepts as input a definition of the well stream feedin9 the first
5ejj'irator s~ge, along with the temperatures and pressures at which the separator
stages will be operated. From this input definition, the prorJram Simulates the flash
process 'at each separator stage.
Programming Slstems: ThE' program is written. in FORTRAN language (described in
C26-371S>. tis designed to run under control of the 1130 Disk Monitor System
Version 2.
Customer Responsibility: The customer Is responsible for placing his data in the
proper machine readable format described in the Input/Output Description section of
the Programmer's Manual.
Minimum System ReQuirem!!IIts: An 8K disk IBM 1131 and an IBM ~442 Card Rea~
Punch or an IBM 2501 Card Re~der and a 1442 ModelS Card Punch. An IBM
1132 Printer or an IBM 1403 Printer is optional.
Version 2.
Basic Program Package:
Documentation -- Application Directory ••• Programmer's Manual (H20-0426)
'" TNt N20-1976 ... Operator's Manual (H20-0427-l>. If only the form
numbered manuals are required, order fl'Qm Mechanicsburg -- not from PID.
Machine Readable -- FORTRAN source codes and sample problem
Ordering Information: Program Number 1130MP07X
Program Number
Extension
Basic
none
Distribution Medium
T~pe
Code
15
cards
User Volume
Requirement
none
Programmin~ S~ste,"s:. The pro. 9ram is written in FORTRAN language (described in
e26~j715.
1
is designed to run under control of the 1130 Disk Monitor System
'
Minimum System Reauirements: An 8K disk IBM 1131 and an IBM 1442 Card
Read Punch or an IBM 2501 Card Reader anll a 1442 Model 5 Card Punch. An IBM
1132 Printer or an IBM 1403 Printer is optional.
Basic Program Package:
Documentation -~ Application Directory ••• Programmer's Manual (H20-0430-l)
••• Operator's Manual (H20-0431) .•• TNL N20-1977. In only the form numbered
manuals are reqUired, order from Mechanicsburg ~- not from PID.
Machine Readable -- FORTRAN source cQde and sample problem
Ordering Information: Program Number 1 DOMP08X
Program Number
'Extension
BaSic
none
9istrlbuti~n
. !le.!
eards
Medium
Code
User Voiume
Requirement
15
none
.
Additional Program Support Material*: Application Description Manual (H20-0425,,1)
.•. System Manual (Y20-0052~11.
Reference Material*: 1130 FORTRAN Language (C26~3715) ... 1130 Disk Monilor
System, Version 2 (C26-3717) '" 1130 InpuVOutput Units (A26 .. 5717).
*Available from MOe
Additional Program Support Material*~ Application Description Manul (H20-0429-1l
System Manual . it is designed to run under control of the 1130 Disk Monitor System,
Version 2.
Use: The program accepts as input up to 80 time-depth points normally obtained
shot survey run ina well.
The IBM 1130 Dipmeter Program Cl130~MP-15X) containing specific plotting subroutines necessary to running the Wave Front Ray Path Determination Program must be
ordered from PID.
An optional set of equatior!s can be least square fitted to,the data. T~e resulting
velocity function is then solved at discreet tiine intervalstproviding the user with
a tabulation or plotted cutpUl gilli"g time to ~epth conversion for allY given time
value.
' '
,
Minimum System Requirements: An 8K disk IBM 1131 and an IBM 1442 Card Read
Punch or an IBM 2501 Card Reader and a 1442 ModelS Card Punch, and an IBM'
1627 Plotter: An IBM 1132 Printer or an IBM 1403 Printer is optional.
Triim a check
Customer Responsibility: The customer is responsible for placing his data In a machineable form and in the format desc,ribed in the Input/Output description section of
the Programmer's Manual', The customer assumes the responsibility for pr09ram modification if plotting is not desired. Instructions for the above program modification are
provided in the Programmer's Manual (H20-0434>'
, Programming Systems: The programi's written in FORT'RAN language a~ de~cribed
in C26-37b. It is designed to run under control of the 1130 Disk Monitor System
Version 2.
The IBM 1130 Oipmeter Progrand1130-MP-1SX), containing specifiC plotting subroutines necessary to running the Velocity Functions Program must be ordered fromPID.
Minimum System ReQuirements: An 8K disk IBM 1131 Model 2B and an IBM,;1442
Card Read Punch or an IBM 2501 Card Reader and a 1442 Model 5 Card Punch,
and an IBM 1627 PloUer. An IBM 1132 Printer or an IBM 1403 Printer is
optional.
Basic Program Package:
Documentation -- Application Directory .. , Pro'gr~mmer's Manual (H20-0434)
... TNl N20-1978 ... Operator's ManuaI'.
tv
Reference Material*: 1130 FORTRAN Language (C26-3715) .•. 1130 Disk Monitor
System, Version 2 (C26-3717) ... 1130 Input/Output Units (A26-5717).
*Available from MDC
Machine Readable -- Source code and sample problem
Ordering Information: Program Number 1130MPll X
BaSic
Program Number
Extension
~
none
cards
Distribution Medium
Code
15
User Volume
Requirement
none
Additional Program Support Material*: Application Description Manual (H20-044l>
'" TNt N20-1981 .. , System Manual (V20-00S6-1>'
Reference Material*: 1130 FORTRAN Language (C26-371S) ••• 1130 Disk Monitor
System, Version 2 (C26-3717l ... 1130 Input/Output Units (A26-S7171.
*Available from MOe
Gravity and Magnetics Continuations, Derivatives, and Residual Program: Provides
a method
for computing: (1) Upward and downward continuations of gravity and magnetic fields ••.
(2) First and second derivatives of these fields •.• (3) Residuals of arbitrary type
for gravity and magnetic values. All gravity and magnetics interpreters should be
able to make use of this progra", to analyze potential field data .. (1130-MP-12X)
Description: Commonly used tools of the gravity and magnetics interpreter are the
techniques of continuations, derivatives, and residuals. Though historically such
techniques have been applied in localizing the anomalies of potential fields, derivative and residual methods have recently been used in structural and stratigraphic
applications to remove regional gradients in geologic and seismic data.
This program enables computation of upward and downward continuations by a circle
averaging technique in which the circle averages of ten circles are each multiplied
by a weighting factor and then summed. Continuations may be computed to a maxi"1ltm of five levels above the datlim and five levels below.
1r.Pl/t to this routine must be numerical values of the data at the mesh points of a
square grid.
'
The routine for computation of derivatives and residuals also employs a circle averaging technique which operates on a square grid of input data. Both first and second
derivatives may be computed by a ten-circle method very similar to that employed in
~r)e computation of continuations. First derivatives may be calculated to a maximum
Theoretical Gravity of a 3-D Mass Proerant:
Allows the user to establish a synthetic gravity anomaly by computing the
theoretical gravity of an assLimed mass.
It permits the comparison of the synthetic anomaly with ill1 anomaly actually mapped
and thereby allows the user to find out the reasonahleness of his structural interpretation. The program will type and/or punch the gravity values for a grid of simulated
gravity stations. (1l30-MP-13X)
Description: Inferences drawn from gravity data about subsurface structures which
cause a gravity effect can be checked by comparing the observed potential field with
the computed field for a buried mass of assumed configuration and density.
The configuration of the mass is represented by a 30 x 30 x 10 array of vertical prisms
of square cross section. Depths to top and bottom of each prism define the geometry
of the mass. Gravity is determined at assumed stations on a plane representing the
earth's surface. At each station, gravity is computed by sUlllming the gravity contribution of each prism. Assumed stations are located on a square grid; the station interval and dimensions of the grid are selected by the user.
This program is of particular value in such interpretive projects as. the analYSis of
salt domes and reef buildups. Seismic and well data may be used to develop the configuration of the anomalous mass, and the computed gravity may be compared with observed gravity to establish the degree of correspondence.
Features: The mass is represented by a three-dimensional array with maximum dimensions of 30 x 30 x 10 ••• each prism can be assigned a different density or the densities can be assigned on a layer-hy-Iayer basis.
Use: The program accepts as input a three-dimensional array of rectangular prisms
representing the shape and density distribution within an assumed buried mass and a
two-dimensional rectangular array of gravity stations. At each gravity station, the
theoretical gravity of the buried mass is computed.
The computed gravity station values can be contoured and the resulting theoretical
gravity map can be compared with the actual gravity map. Agreement between the
two maps suggests that the assumed buried mass is close to the actual buried mass in
both shape and density distribution.
Customer Responsibi Ii~: The customer is responsihle for placinq his data in a machineable fOlm and in t format descrihed in the Input/Output description section of
the Programmer's Manual.
e
Not to be reproduced without written pennl..lon
Programming
PA 1130.8
Nov 73
Programming Systems: The program is written in FORTRAN language (described in
c26;,371Sl. It is designed to run tinder control of the 1130 Disk M""itor Sy~tem
Version 2.
Minimum System Requirements: An 8K disk IBM 1131 and an IBM 1442 Card Read
Punch or an IBM 2501 Card Reader anda 1442 Model'S Card Punch. An IBM 1132
Printer or an IBM 1403 Printer is opt.ior-al.
Ordering Informat;~ Program Nuniber 1130MP14X
Basic
Pmgram Number
f:xtensi_on_ __
Distribution Medium
Code
none
cards
IYE---
15
User Volume
Recj~ement
none
Basic Program Package:
Documentation -- Application Directory .• ; Programmer's Manual (H20,..0450)
. " TNL N20-1984 ... Operator's Manual (H20-04S11 ' .. TNL N20-1985.
If only the form numbered manuals are required, order from Mechanicsburg -- not
from PID.
Additional PlOgram SUPPOlt Material*: Ap~lication De~cription Manual (H20-0453)
N20-1986~ertiManilai (Y20-0059-1) .
'.--:--:-nn:.
Referen-::e Material*: 1130 FORTRAN Lan4uage (C26-371.5) ... 1130 Disk Monitor
System, Version 2 (C26-3717.1 ... 1130 Input/Output Units (A26-5717l.
*Available from
Machine Readable -- FORTRAN source codes and sample problem
:v: DC
Ordering Information: Program Number 1130MP13X
Basic
Program Number
Extension
Di.stribution Mediu'm
Type
~~
none
cards
User Volume
Requirement
none
15
Additional Program Support Material*: Application Description Manual (H20-0449)
... TN L N20-1983 ... System Manual (Y20-0058-lJ.
Reference Material*: 1130 FORTRAN Language (C26-3715) ... 1130 Disk Monitor
System, Version 2 (C26-3717) ... 1130 Input/Output Units (A26-5717).
*Available from MDC
QlIantitJtive Los Analysis Prowam:
Permits the user to compute the porosity and
water saturation on prospective hydrocarbon
zones in a well, using data from several log
combinations. This program aids in evaluating the zones in a well to enable decisions concerning the setting of casing, testing programs, reserve calculations,
etc. (1130-MP-14X)
Description: Quantitative analysis of well logs is of vital. importance to exploration
and development geologists and reservoir engineers in the evaluation of rock characteristics which are indicative of the presence of oil and gas. Of chief interest to the
oil finder are the porosity and water saturation of the rock units penetrated by the
drill. In addition, he is aided in his interpretation by knowledge of the resistivity
of the interstitial water, the resistivity of the flushed zone, the resistivity of the
formation if completely filled with interstitial water, and the true resistivity of the
zone.
Manual computation of the above characteristics is a laborious, error-prone process.
However, the Quantitative Log Analysis Program enables computer determination of
these characteristics for the following log combinations: Induction-Electric, Microlog; Induction-Electric, Sonic; Electric Log, Microlog; and Electric Log, Sonic.
Data is obtained by scanning the logs and preparing a data card for each zone of
interest. Calculations are based on the Schlumberger "Log Interpretation Charts."
Output consists of both detail and summary listings of rock characteristics.
Features: Allows fast quantitative analysis on an unlimited number of prospective
hydrocarbon bearing zones in a well .,. Induction Logs, Electric Logs, Micrologs,
and Sonic Logs can all be processed ... both a detailed report giving many intermediate results of the calculations and a summary output report are available.
Use: The program accepts as input a number of rock properties as recorded by variouscombinations of well log logs. the recorded values on the logs are converted by
the program into more meaningful rock properties; i.e., porosity, water saturation,
and permeability. A geologist using the results of this program can better evaluate
the potential worth of hydrocarbon bearing zones found in a wei I.
Customer Responsibi lit: The customer is responsible for placing his data in a machineable orm an in t Ie format described in the Input/Output Description section of
the Programmer's Manual.
Programming Systems: The program is written in FORTRAN language (described in
C26-37155. It is designed to run under control of the 1130 Disk Monitor System
Version 2.
Minimum System Requirements: An 8K disk IBM 1131 and an IBM 1442 Card Read
Punch or an IBM 2501 Card Reader and a 1442 ModelS Card Punch. An IBM 1132
P:inter or an IBM 1403 Printer is optional.
Basic Program Package:
Documentation -- Application Directory ••. Programmer's Manual (H20-04S4)
... TNL N20-1987 •.. Operator's Manual (H20-04S5-1). If only the form
numbered manuals are required, order from Mechanicsburg -- not from PID
Machine Readable -- FORTRAN source code and sample problem.
Dipmeter Program:
'S designed to assist in the analysis of the continuous dipmeter
log by calculating the true dip of intervals in a well. Structural
information is required in most phases of petroleum exploration
and production; and, sometimes, the dipmeter is the only source of this information.
Output is in Ule form of tabulation on the typewriter, flying arrow plot, or polar plot
on the 1627 Plotter. U130-MP-15X)
Description: The dip and direction cf dip of the formations penetrated by an oil well
are of great stratigraphic and structural value to the petroleum geoloyist. Not only
may diptneter data be of value in the determination of !ocal structural dip ilnd in establishillg the presence of faulting, but also detailed analysis of dipmeter data may
reveal extremely local stratigraphk conditions which control accumulation of hydrocarbons. Decisions concerning the sidetracking of a well or the drilling of an offset
are frequently infhlenced by dipmeter data. Manual computation of such data is an
involved, laborious procedure.
The Dipmeter Calculation program provides a computer"calculation of true dip and
azimuth of dip. The method is not rigorou!; for drift angles in excess of about 30
degrees. However, the error introduced for high drift angles may be expected to be
les~ than 10°1,. After the three microresistivity curves have been visually corrected
and the depths of correlative points punched in cards, these depth points, togethel
withthe diameter of the hole, the azimuth of the number 1 electrode, the dip of the
borehole and the azimuth of the borehole axis, are entered into the computer as input.
Output may take the form of either a tabulated listing of depth vs dip and direction, or
a flying arrow plot or polar coordinate plot made by means of a 1627 Plotter.
Features: Allows fast calr.ulation of the magnitude of dip and direction of dip of rock
srrariiii a well bore ••• results of the calculations can be presented in tabular form,
a polar coordinate plot, or a cartesian coordinate plot.
Use: The program accepts as input a definition of the borehole and formation geometrY"is defined by a Continuous Dipmeter Log. From this information, the program
computes the true di p and direction of di p of the rock strata immediately adjacent to
the borehole. A geologist using the results of this program has 'an additional aid in
piecing together the structural picture of an area.
Customer Responsibility: The customer is responsible for placing his data in a machineable form and in the format described in the Input/Output Description section of
the Programmer's Manllal.
Programming Systems: The program is written in FORTRAN language (described in
C26-3715). Itis designed to run under control of the 1130 Disk Monitor System
Version 2.
Minimum System Requirements: An 8K disk IBM 1131 and an IBM 1442 Card Read
PuncE or an IBM 2501 Card Reader and a 1442 Model 5 Card Punch I and an IBM
1627 Plotter. An IBM 1132 Printer or an IBM 1403 Printer is optional.
Basic Program Package:
Documentation -- Application Directory ... Programmer's Manual (H20-0458-1)
. •• Operator's Manual (H20-0459). TNL N20-1989. If only the form numbered
mallJals are required, order from Mechanicsburg -- not from PID.
Machine Readabl.e -- FORT RAN source code and sample problem. Object code
for the IBM 1627 plot subroutines.
Optional Program Package -- Assembly Language and FORTRAN Language source
codes, for the IBM 1627 plot subroutines.
Ordering Informat ion: Program Number 1130MD 15X
Program Number
Extension
Basic
Optional
none
none
Distribution Medium
Code
Type
User Volume
Requirement
15
none
none
cards
cards
15
Additional Program Support Material*: Application Description Manual (H20-0457)
... TNC N20-1988 .. , System Manual (Y20-0060-1).
Not to be reproduced· without written permission
Programming
IBM 1130 Application Programs
PA 1130.9
Nov 73
Reference Material*: 1130 FORTRAN Language (C26-371S) ... 1130 Disk
Monitor System, Version 2 (C26-3717) ... 1130 Inpul/Output Unit$ (A26-57J.7).
*Available from MOC
Use: To use 1130 COGO, the engineer writes a description of the problem and the
No special forms are required: The problem may be
stated on any piece of paper or a surveying field book. Data are punched into cards in
free form for entry into the 1130, or entered directly from the console typewriter. The
programming system provides the engineer with direct communication with the 1130
for the most complete use of his judgment, experience, and imagination in solving each
problem.
Commercial Subroutine Package:
PrOVides the scientific user with added capabilities for handling functions and techniques
applicable to commercial programming. All
twenty-eight subroutines are callabre by the FORTRAN pr09rammer in a similar
manner to such standard functions as sine, cosine, square root, etc. (1130SE-25X)
meu,od to be used to solve it.
Description: These subroutines will provide the SCientific 1130 user with flexibility
to add commercial applications such as payroll, cOlit accounting, and others.
ustomer Responsibilities: All that Is required is that the customer be familiar with
the 11
anguage. The COGO program Is ready to run as distributed. The
customer need only load the cards onto a disk. COGO is written in FORTRAN and if
the user wishes to add any of his own special subroutines he may do so with a minimum
of effort.
Featll'es: Variable length alphameric move, compare, edit and fill ... variable length
conversion from EBC OIC to real, and from real to EBC DIC ••• zone manipulation •••
stacker select ... variable length decimal add, subtract, multiply, divide and compare
••• sign manipulation ••• overlapped printing and carriage control on the 1403 and
1132 Printers ••• overlapped reading of cards with conversion of card codes on the
1442 and 2S01 Card Readers ... punching of cards on the 1442 Model S, 6, or 7
••• overlapped printing on the Console printer ••• conversion from one character per
word to two characters per word ••• conversion from one character per word to three
characters per word ••• conversion from one digit per word to four digits per word.
pf!'ramming Systems: All subroutines are written in the 1130 Assembler Language.
T Internal format of data is one character per word.
Minimum System ReqUirements: An 8K 1130 card system will be required to execute
a mainline program uSing die Commercial Subroutines. All I/O devices must use either
FORTRAN I/O exclusively or Commercial Subroutine Package I/O excluSively.
Basic Program Material:
Pro~ramming Systems: COGO Is written In 1130 FORTRAN and runs under the 1130
Dis MORitor System.
Minimum System Requirements: A card-oriented 8K disk 1130. The addition of an
1132 Printer will Increase die speed of the system but is not required.
Basic Program Material:
Publications* -- Application Directory ••• Users Manual CH20-0301-l>
Machine Readable -- Object decks and sample program are availabe in card form.
Optional Program Material: •
Machine Readable** -- Source cards are available on one 9-track OTR (800 or
1600 bpo.
Ordering Procedure:
Publications* -- Program Reference Manual, including operating instructions,
IlsUngs, flowcharts and nanative, (H20-0241-3) ... Application Directory.
Machine Readable -- Object Decks and Sample Problem Decks available In
card form.
Optional Program Material:
Machine Readable** .:- Source decks and sample problems as card images on a
9-track
(BOO or 1600 bpj).
orR
Ordering Procedure:
*If only, the form numbered manual is required, order it from the IBM Distribution
Center in Mechanicsburg -- not from PID.
**If the distribution medium is not specified on the back of the program order
card, 9-track at 800 bpi will be forwarded.
DTRs will be provided by PID; no tape submittal is required.
Reference Material: System Manual (y20-0064) •.• Application Description Manual
(H20-0143-31.
*If only the form numbered manual is reqUired, order'it from the IBM Distribution
Center in Mechanicsburg -- not from PID.
**OTRs supplied by PID; no tape submittal required.
Reference Materiai: Application Description (H20-0S20) ••• IBM 1130/1800
Basic FORTRAN Iv Language (C26-;371S).
COGO is a Simple, efficient tool
designed especially to assist the
civil engineer with a wide variety
of geometric calculations. With COGO, the engineer can state his problems using familiar terminology common to the engineering field. No knowledge of traditional programming is necessary. (1l30-EC-02X)
Civil Engineering Coordinate Geometry (COGO):
Description: The civil engineer requires a Simple but efficient means to solv!! geometric problems now being done laboriously by hand. 1130 COGO provides the solution to his problem by allowing the engineer to enter the data for the job Into the
computer by typewriter or punched card using a language he Is familiar with, and to
have solutions automatically printed out for him. COGO Is especially useful beclUse
It provides the facility for the engineer to try many different methods of solVing a problem.
COGO can be used for many different types of jobs, e.g., control surveys, highway
design, right of way surveys, bridge geometry, subdivision calculations, land surveying, construction layout.
COGO can, in fact, be used wherever geometric calculation is required.
Features: ,1130 COGO is a new, powerful and versaUle.coordina~ geometry program
modeled after and encompassing the capabilities of 1620 COGO. Some 1620
customer-written COGO programs now in use may require modifications to run on the
1130 system since some 1620 COGO commands have been deleted. The following
new features have been added to 1130 COGO:
• Commands to process spirals
• Commands to process vertical geometry
Reference to distanCes, angles and azimuth by specifying
point numbers
Scientific Subroutine Package:
A collection of 121 FORTRAN subroutines which
provide a major additional to those built Into FOR.
TRAN. They are input/output free, computational
bUilding blocks that can be combined with a user's input, output, or computational
routines ~o meet his individual needs. The package has widespread application to
the solution of problems In r,s~rch, development, and deSign, In both science and
engineering, wherever FORTRAN is used. (1l30-CM-02X)
i
l'1dividual subroutines, or a combination of them, can be used to carry out the follOWing
functions:
In statiSti.cs -- analysis of variance (f~ctorial design) ••• correlation analysis •••
multiple linear regression ••• polynomail regression ••• canonical correlatlim •••
factor analysis (principal components, varlmax) ••• discriminant analYlis. (many
groups) .••• time series analysis ••• data screening and analysis ••• non-parametric
tests.
In matrix manipulation -- InverSion ••• eigenvalues and eigenvectors (real symmetric
caie) ••• simultaneous linear algebraic equations ••• transposition ••• matrix arithmetic (addition, product, etc.) ••• partitioning ••• tabulation and sorting of rows or
'cl'lumns ••• elementary operations on rows or columns.
In other mathematical areas -- integration of given or tabulated functions ••• integration of up to six first order differential equations ••• Fourier analysis of given or
tabulated functions ••• Bessel and modified Bessel function evaluation ••• gamma
function evaluation ••• Legendre polynomial evaluation ... elliptic, exponential, sine,
cosine, Fresnel Integrals ••• finding real roots of a given function ••• finding real
and complex roots of real polynomial equations ••• polynomial arithmetic (addition,
division, etc.) ••• polynomial evaluation, integration, differentiation.
!=~atures: All subroutines are free of input/output statements ••• subroutines do not
contain permanent maxillllm dimensions for the data arrays named In their calling
sequences ••• all subroutil1es are written in FORTRAN ••• many matrix manipulation
subroutines handle symmetric and diagonal matrices (stored in economical, compressed
formats> as well as general matrices ••• the use of important subroutines (or groups
of them) is illustrated in the program documentation by sample main programs with
input/output ••• all subroutines are document.ed uniformly.
999 points may be stored vs. 99 in 1620 COGO 1-0
• Localorl,ln5
Not to be reproduced without written permieslon
PA 1130·.lP
Nov 13
IBM 1130 Application Programs
Use: As a"library of subroutines, SSP/1130 allows the user to select functions he
iiias, while not being burdened with unneeded routines.
Pj!rammlng S~em5.'! The subroutines will compile ~nd .execute with the IBM 1130
ea~ FORTRAN Compilers (1130-05-001 and 113O-FO-001'.
Dr Monitor a
MaChine ConfipuratiOn: The machine configuration ne~&sary to NlI SSP/l130js
de_nt upon the use that is to ~ made of the package. Each of the subroutines
is I/O free, compiles to less than 1,200 words of core, and Is, therefore, configuration independent. However, many of the routines are intended to be used In conjunellon with other subroutines or to solve problems uSing large arrays.of data. For
this reason, many of the subroutines are not useful with less than 8K words of core.
"The following items should be taken into consideration when deciding upon theapplicablllty of the package toa particular machine configuration:
1. The size of problem which may be executed on a given 1130
depends upon th4I number of subroutines used, the size of the
compiled subroutines, the size of the cOmpiled main program, the
'if. size of the control program and the data storage' requlrelJ1ents.
'2. SSP/l130 will
be distributed in card fonn only.
3. The sample programs for SSP/l130 illustrate the same functions
as the SSP/360 sample programs. Three of the sample programs,
canonical correlation, discriminant analysis and factor analYSiS,
use the overlay facilities of the 1130 Disk Monitor Programming
System C*LOCAU and. therefore require a disk system and 8K
words of core. The remainirig sample programs do not require disk
but do require 8K words of core.
Customer Responsibilities: To produce a functioning system.th4I user must g8the; and
Incorporate Into the system detailed linecaster descriptions and factors relating to the
user's method of operation and stylistic requirements. A Systems Installation "Workbook has been provided to enable the user to gather the required infonnallon in a systematic and complete fashion. A series of utility programs are provided for loading
this data jnto the system"in the f'equlred form. The workbook and utility programs
greatly increase the speed and ease with which the user produces a funtioning system.
Customers that use 8-channel"paper tape systems must load and/or assemble their
programs and installation dependent data on a system equipped with a card reader and a
disk drive following system generation procedures specified for the card system
C1130-QP-04X), The system's cartridge is then transferred to the customer's paper
tape oriented system for operatio", using the 8-channel paper tape Skeleton Monitor
(l130-DP-06)() for system initialization.
Programming Systems: 11'30 Assembler language. For 1130- DP-04X, the user
shOuld order 1130-0T-00I from PID; for 1130-DP-06X, 1130-UT-002.
Minimum Systems Reguirements:
"For the 1130-DP-04X -- An 1131 Processor Model 2B with 2315 Disk Cartridge •.•• 1442 Card Read Punch MOdel 6 or 7 .;. Typesetting RPQs listed below.
For the 1130-DP-06X -- An 1131P(oCes"sor Model 28 with 2315 Disk Cartridge •.• 1134 Paper Tape Reader .•• "1055 Paper. Tape Punch ••• Typesetting
RPQs listed below.
1lIl30-DP-04X and 1130-DP-06X Typesetting RPQs
The follOWing RPQs for user-provided 6":channel advanced feed hole paper tape
readers (PTRs>* and paper tape punches (PTPs>* are required.
RPQ 834398
Basic interface (required to attach any number of PTRs and
PTPs).
RPQ 834399
Paper Tape Attachment (required to attach any number of
PTRs and PTPs).
For more than one PTR and PTP -Interface Expander (required to attach PTR numbers 2
RPQ 834400
through 8 and/or PTP numbers 2 through 8).
RPQ E36610
Second Interface Expander (required to attach PTR numbers
9 through 16 and/or P TP numbers 9 through 16).
RPQ 834401
Additional PTR' Interface (one required for each PTR numbers 2 through 16).
RPQ 834402
Additional PTPlnterface (one required for each PTP numbers 2 through 16). .
Basic Program Material:
Publications* -- Application Directory ••• Application Description together with a starter card to punch the decks.
Basic 'program Material for 1130-DP-06X: 1 Core Image Paper tape ••. Application
Directory.
Note: When ordering 1130-DP·06X, the user must also order the BaSic Program Ma~I for 1130-DP-04X.
Optional Program Material for 1130-DP-04X & 113 - -06: The optional
materia or 1130-DP-06Xconsists of 18 source card decks available ona
':\- or. 7-track (Data Conversion ,feature required) 2400' MT. Optional material
for 1130-DP-04X consists of 18 source card decks available ona 9/1600 OTR
or 7-track 2400' MT.
Reference Material: Application Description Manual (H20-0139>.
Description: The program is deSigned to allow computer acceptance of perforated
paper tape, containing the copy to appear in print and instructions pertaining to a de~
sired printing format, from which a ta~ SUitable for controlling the operations of a
linecasting machine is produced and allocated to the proper pOint in the compOsing
room. The output tape contains the original copy in the form of properly: justified lines
1arI'anged according to the stylistic and graphic requirements described by the uset with
the format Instructions. The programs are capable of producing justified lines in any
format within the inherent lim,itations of the iinecasting machill!a.
.
Feature: Printer-oriented format control language which does not requIre extensive
knowledge of type compOSition techniques ..•• contr.ollable style limited only by .inherent limitations of linecasting machine ••• consistent graphic quality ••..1130
Disk Storage offers automatic access to a largenuinber of type fontsand hyphenation
exception ' words ... up to 16 input read'ers and 16 outputpunches can be accommodated on the system ..• program controlled polling of input readers ... program controlled selection of output punch based on font and column width required permits
automat/callocation of output tapes .•.. extensive error detection and recovery pro~
cedures •.• Systems Installation Workbook and several utility programs to aid the
user in gathering and loading information concerninq user's operafion.
~:Printing organizations that use paper tape oper~ted li~ca~ting maC~i~s in compoSing type are potentlal users of this program. Tape perforator operators will now
prepare tape for input to the computer illsteadof the linecastingmachine. '. Since the
computer assumes the burden of all justification deciSions, hyphenation decisions,
and the insertion of proper linecasting machine control functions, the operators can
now concentrate on speed and accuracy of copy perforation with resulting benefits in
total type composition speed.
Statist/cal System:
A col!ection of four major tools: Stepwise Regression AnalySiS,
Factor AnalysiS, Analysis of Variance, and Orthogonal Polynomial Curve Fitting. and then generate the 1130 Statistical System under monitor control. After system generation (explained in detail in the Users Manual, H20-0333)
analyses are defined by the use of program control cards.
Programming S~stems: The system, distributed in source card form, will compile and
execute using t e IBM 1130 Disk Monitor System (1130-05-001>. The system
consists of forty-two routines, thirty-seven written in the IBM 1130 FORTRAN Language (C26-S933) and five use the·IBM 1130 Assembler Language (C26-S927).
PA 1130.11
Nov 73
Minimum System Requirements: An 8K disk IBM 1131 and an IBM 144~ Card
Read Punch or an IBM 2501 Card Reader and a 1442. ModelS Card Punch, and an
IBM 1627 Plotter. An IBM 1132 Printer or an IBM 1403 Printer is optional.
Basic Program Package:
Documentation _. Application Directory. " Programmer's Manual (H20-0402) ••.
TNL N20·1964 ... Operator's Manual (H20-0403>' TNL N20-1965. If only
the form numbered manuals are required, order from the IBM Distribution Center -not from PID.
Machine Readable -- Source code, and sample problem.
Ordering Information: Program Number 1130 MPO 1 X
Basic
Program Number
Extension
~
none
cards
Distribution Medium
Code
15
User VOiume
Requirement
none
Machine Confirration: 8K words of core, disk, and 1132 Printer (optional) are
used with the I M1130 Computing System.
Basic Program Material:
Publlcations* -- Application Directory ••• Users Manual ••• Systems
Manual N20-0093).
.
.
Problem La!ll!uage ANalyzer (PLAN):
Economic Evaluation of Petroleum Projects Program:
The IBM Economic Evaluation
of Petroleum ProJects Program
(1130-MP-01X) can be used
to screen drilling proposals and rank th~m according to their profitability. Given the
Investment schedule and production forecast for an exploration and drilling prospect,
the programs compute the payout period and rate of return using the discounted cash
flow method.
Description: Many reservoir and petroleum engineering probiems require an analysis
not only of production and reservoir performance, but also of what a given performance
means in terms of economics. This economic analysis normally includes consideration of such factors as producing rates, investment, expense, taxes, working interest
factors, product prices, value of money, and depreciation. An economic evaluation
program is offered to evaluate all these factors and to provide as an end result the
rllte of return and payout for any given proJect.
The program is set u'p to handle a proJect life of 30 years or less. Input includes (on
an annual basis) production schedules for oil and gas, investment schedules for tan- .
gibles and intangibles, and well schedules. Additional data includes working interest,
011 and gas price, depreciation rate, lifting cost and operating expense, and investment discount factor.
.The computation has been set up to provide the user with various options. For example, the program calculates depreCiation using either the straight-line or decliningbalance method, or both. Depletion is calculated using both statutory and cost depletion. Rate of return is calculated using the discounted cash flow method, in which
investment may also be discounted at any rate, at the user's discretion.
PLAN (1130-CX-2SX) is a submonitor and
application development support system especially designed to support problem solving
and other highly variable applications.
Description: PLAN furnishes five closel y related program :sets that are mutual! y dependent. These provide the baSic PLAN functions: the submonitor ••• the PLAN input
language Interpreter ••• the PLAN Input language definer ••• the PLAN subroutine
package for FORTRAN application programmers ••• the Diagnostic Su.,Pt'rvlsor.
Because PLAN Is deSigned to support highl y variable applications, It offers a new type
of modularity. Program linkage definition and intermediate DASD specifications are
deferred until execution time when they can be varied by Input data. As a result, much
program recoding and reorganization can be avoided.
In further support of this Idea, input languages used for application control under PLAN
are also defined at the statement level. Both new statement definitions and new program modules can be added to a PLAN application without forcing changes In existing
programs and statement definitions.
Features: Free form input ••• four levels of Input statement hierarchy ... user controlled
;;;;o;TeCovery and diagnostic features ••• powerful input data options, such as default
value, override, algebraic and logical expressions for data values, automatic mode conversion ani scaling ••• dynamic program loading ••• extensive subroutine support for
FORTRAN application programmers •
The program Is well suited to perform multiple analyses of a given project so that the
engineer may determine the effects of all variables on a given project.
Use: The problem solver (application user) communicates with PLAN through PLAN
statements designed by the customer to suit his needs. Each PLAN statement contains
a maximum of 450 characters; terminated by a semicolon. A new statement may Immediately follow the semicolon. Each statement usually contains both a command and
data. Processing a PLAN statement causes execution of one or more program modules,
using accumulated data and the partial results available at that time.
Output is in such a form as to provide the user with a detailed tabulation of all c0mputations. Hence, in a given case SUch factors as expense, depreciation, depletion,
taxes, etc., may be analyzed.
Programmers communicate with the PLAN system to obtain program linkage, error
handling, data management and utility functions by entering PLAN subroutines through
ett.LL linkages (normally from· FORTRAN).
Features: The program considers producing rates, investment schedule, expense,
taxes, working interest factors, prodUct prices, time value of money and depreciation
.•. the program computes rate of return and payout for any given project ••• a project
life of 30 years can be handled ••• the program will accept directly the output of
tloth the Decline Curve Analysis Program (1130-MP-03X) and the Gas Deliverabillty
Program •••
Systems Manual - Volume 1, Narratives CY20-0343)i Volume 2, Flowcharts
CY20-0344)i Volume 3, Listings CY20-0349) ... User's Introduction Manual
(H 20-0626>"
Customer Responsibilities: The customer should be thoroughly familiar with the use of
the system as described in the Program Description Manual.
Special Sales Information: A partial list of applications that could advantageously use
the 1130 Data Presentation System is engineering analysis .•• statistical studies •••
schematics ••• sales analysis ••• machine performance ••• semi-standard drawings •••
quality control ••• inventory control ••• mathematical analysis ••• schedules ••• delta
reduction ••• wage studies ••• forecasting ••• data verification ••• product evaluation
••• program documentation.
Programming Systems: Ti:1e Data Presentation System runs under 1130 Disk Monitor
SystemVersion 2 FORTRAN and
1130 Assembly Language.
Minimum Systems Configuration: An 8K disk 1131 Central Processing Unit ...
1442 card Read Punch or 2501 Card ~eader ••• 1627 Plotter Modell or 2.
Larger1l31 models, alternate card input/output, printers, and additional disk storage
supported by the 1130 Monitor are also supported by the Data Presentation System.
BaSic Program Package:
Data Presentation System:
The Data Presentation System is a three-level graphic
support system for the IBM 1130. C1l30-CX-14X>
Description: The IBM 1130 Data Presentation System supplies high quality, hardcopy
graphic output at exceptionally low cost. This system can be used independently as a
Graphic Report Generator. The user can choose one or two levels of subrouti nes from
the system for inclusion in his own graphic output programs. The scope and flexibility
of this program make it valuable in many applications of the 1130.
Anal ysis and synthesis of data are a difficult part of most significant jobs. Important
facts are often hidden by routine output. Recognizing this, it is common for managers ,
engineers, and analysts to draw graphs, plots, and diagrams.
Documentation* -- Application Directory ••• Program Description Manual (H200338-1) ... Operations ManIJa' (H20-0337-11.
Machine Readable -- Object code, language definition cards; and sample problem.
Optional Program Package:
Machine Readable -- Program source decks. Decks and listings are generated by
the self-loading program on the tape USing a System/360 Model 2030 D.
Ordering Information: Program Number 1130CX14X
Program Number
Extension
There are three levels of control. The Graphic Report Generator, Level III, is the
highest level. It is a self-contained system that requires no further programming
to operate. It is controlled by input statements that describe the plot to be generated
and data fi les to be processed.
Distribution Medium
Code
Type
User Volume
Requirement
Basic
none
2315
58
01
Optional
none
DTR 9/800
DTR 9/1600
28
29
none
none
Level II subroutines utilize the routines of Level I to. perform larger, logical tasks such
as scale annotation and curve fitting. Over 30 subroutines, callable from the program
library, are included in Level II.
Additional Program Material**: Application Description Manual (H20-0235-2) ...
Systems Manual -- Flowcharts and Narrative (Y20-0089-1), Listings (Y20-0436).
Level I orthis system provides subroutines to generate, scale, and rotate characters
and lines using the 1627 plotter attached to the 1130. These routines include interrupt handling and overlapped proceSSing capability.
Reference Material**: PLAN Application Description Manual (H20-0490) ••• PLAN
Program Description Manual (H20-0594) .•• 1130 PLAN Operations Manual (H200595J.
Features: Up to eight data scales may be drawn at any chosen location on the graph; .
scales may be linear, logarithmiC, polar, monthly or calendar date ••• several graphs
may be plotted from data contained in a single data file or in multiple data files; data
from different data files may be plotted against each other ••• the automatic scaling
feature of the Graphic RepOrt Generator el iminates the need for manual scanning of data;
the minimum and maximum data values are automatically extracted and used to select
a scale, within the requirements specified by the user, that is convenient to use and
that keeps all data on the graph ••• scale limits may be user specified to restrict the
range of piotting ••• scales and scale annotations are automatically system generated
but may be suppressed, if desired" ••• data may be plotted as point plots, line plots,
polynomial series, histograms, or horizontal or vertical bar graphs • ~. the number of
data points wl]ich may De plotted on one curve or the number of curves on one graph is
effectively unlimited ••• existing data can be extracted from card or disk files in a
variety of formatted or unformatted arrangements •.. data may be in any format acceptable to 1130 FORTRAN; in addition, data may be punched in a continuous manner
*
If only the form numbered manuals lire required. order from Mechanicsburg ..
not PID.
.
** Available from the Mechanicsburg Distribution Center.
Not to be reproduced without written permission
IBM
1
PA 1800.1
Programming
Nov 73
IBM 1800 Data Acquisition and Control System
Traffic Control System:
A modular, flexible, and efficient programming system
used to control vehicular traffic through proper signal
settings In a real-time atmosphere, Any city Interested
in increasing the efficiency of its City streets through proper setting of traffic Signals
would be interested in this 1800 Vehicular Traffic Control System, <1800"';UG06X) ,
Description: The advantages of using the 1800 Vehicular Traffic Control System to
control traffic can be illustrated best by listing the capabilities of the type of control,
that this programming system provides that do not exist in conventional techniques and
equipment: on-line, real-time system evaluation" , depending on the number of subsystems, 500 Signal setting choices are available when using one sub-system to over
30 choices of traffic patterns when using 16 SUb-systems", capability of reaction
in seconds to traffic changes '" optional control strategies for different traffic conditions '" easy adaptation to new traffic control techniques", adaptability to system growth, ;. instant access for information and control '" automatic resynchronization of a controller out of synchronization, .• the computer Is available for related
applications as time-space diagram plotting ,data reduction and analYSiS, traffic simulation for developing new control strategies, etc., when not controlling the system.
By using the microloop control algorithm option, indiVidual intersections can be controlled utilizing the pre-selected pattern as a background ••• the microloop allows
for extensions of green time for each phase based .upon demand, density and weighting
factors ••• it may be free running or timed to hold a strict offset ••• one option also
allows for a learning process to take place by automatically adjusting the main streetside street weight factors while iterating for a minimum stop probability.
It Is also capable of positive computer control of all phases of controller actuations
••• adherence to strict timing requirements with one second definition on computer
commands ••• verification of successful operation of the controller through monitoring
.•• guaranteeing minimum walk, don't walk, and amber time periods •.. smooth, synchronous phasing of all signal changes, without destroying normal flow ... pick up
and dropping (with message) controllers that are malfunctioning •.. real-time detection
of special functions and emergency conditions ••• printing controller settings and control technique •.. automatic generation of traffic statistics upon request ... analvsis
o'detector performance which reports countinq failures, .• , simplified communications
between operators or traffic engineers and the entire. controlling system ••• manual
changes of any step time (walk, don't walk) as well as split, offset, and cycle •••
synchronizing of subsystems operating under the same cycle length ••• making allowance for safe experimentation of new methods and techniques of controlling traffic ••• redefinition of arteries and boundaries without physical changes.
The actual time to drive the controllers through each of their steps is Insignificant.
The modifications of split, cycle, and offset, in addition to the measurement programs,
will take up the majority of the running time of the system.
Customer Requirements: A customer is required to have a thorough knowledge of the
system before installation ... define the area to be controlled including the number of
intersections •.• establish the location and' number of detectors in the system ... define the measurements to be made and the maximum allowable count per cycle for each
detector in the system ••• define the communications network ... create a series of
traffic patterns Including the split, cycle length, and offset for each intersection in the
system .. " define the intersections in the system that normally run on the same cycle
length ••. select the method of changing traffic patterns (If time of day is selected, define this time; if limit checks are required, define the type of measurements, the limits,
and the detectors used to obta.in these measurements) .•• define the number of steps per
cycle for all controllers and the function that can be performed by the controller ..• define the minimum time periods for each phase of all controllers (this includes the minimum walk, don't walk, and amber time periods) '" determine the need for additional
programming required for special functions or options, such as pedestrian indicators,
cycle lengths greater than 128 seconds, controllers that require more than 32 steps,
and intersections that contain more than 4 directions of flow ••• define kinds of microloop control, at which intersections and for which lanes it will function ... install all
street eqUipment, including communications, detectors and controller modifications.
Programming SJrems: All programs in the system are written in the 1800 Assembler
Language UR O-AS-005).
Minimum S~stem Requirements: An 8K 1801 with 1816 Printer-Keyboard ••• Digital and Ana og Output Data Channel Adapter (13290) ••• Digital Input Data Channel
Adapter ('3291) ... Digital Input - Contact* (13285) ... Digital Input Adapter*'
('3262) ••• Electronic" Contact" Operate** (13612) ••• Digital Output Adapter**
('3295) ••• Digital Output Control** (.3296) ••• 1826 Data Adapter Controlt •••
Relay Card Housing (RPQ) ... Reed Relay Cards (RPQ> ••• Contact Operate Cards
(RPQ) ••• Power Supply (RPQ) ••• Card Read Punch Adapter ('4430) ••• 1442 Card
Read Punch ... Data Channel (.. 3222) ... 1810 Disk Storage ... 2315, Disk Cartridge ... minimum of 16K required for microloop system, with larger systems requiring
up to 32K.
Basic Program Material:
Documentation -- Application Directory ••• Program Description Manual (H20-033515i Operations Manual (H20-0336-1># .. , System Manual (Y20-0082-11.# If
only the form numbered manuals are required, order them from the IBM Distribution
Center, Mechanicsburg -- not from PID.
Ordering Information: Program Number 1BOOUG06X
Basic
Optional
none
none
Total capacity of any system will depend upon the number of controllers and detectors,
as well as the number of intersections requring special microloop control. The maximum capacity is a combination of controllers and detectors adding up to 800. This
maximum, however, can be influenced in either direction by the degree to which all
measurement routines are used.
The guide also describes the RPQ features that are needed, all of which must be approved by your Regional or San Jose Special Equipment Department.
Fundamentals of TraffiC Engineering by Norman Kennedy, J. H. Kell, and W. S.
Rornburger (1963).
ualit and Theory of Traffic Flow by B. D. Greenshields, H. P. George, N. F.
Guerin, M. R. Polmer,
• Underwood (Bureau of Highway Traffic, Yale University
1961).
TraffiC Surveillance, Simulation and Control (U.S. Department of Commerce, Bureau
of Pu6hc Roads, Washington, D. C. September 14-15, 1964, -- proceeding~lof
highway conference on the future of research and development>.
Vehicular Traffic Control -- A Time-Space Design Model <1964 Proceedings [34th
Annual Meeting), Institute of Traffic Engineers, L. A. Yardeni, IBM Corporation,
\\1lite Plains, New York).
* TDigilllinput
.. nu_ol int-.ctioMond _ o n will_mine." nu_ of Di....llnpu. CO ...... ING. 32II1iIancl ... nun- of
Adap.... INo. 32621 'OCIuiNCI, 0 .. i ...... point II tequiNCI fo< _ _ n and _ f... _hdeloctor.
**
t
#
T .. nu_ol in_ioMwlU dot..mi..... nu_of E_onic Co_O_INo, 31121. DItI..1Output ~
INo. 32961,_ Digilll Outpu. Control A~ INo, 32881 tequirad. T_output ........... _ _ f ... _
i~
T ....... nu_ 01 ditl..1in..... and ou"'"' poInt.will_mi..... nu_ of 1826 DOlO Adopc" Units ,aqulrld,
AVli_ f,om M.......i......
'g.
Control Optimization Program: COP is a general-purpose non-linear optimization
program. When used on the 1800 system its
features make it particularly suited to on-line use
in an optimizing system. , two Data Channels '*3222) I Analog Input Data Channel
Adapter 1 *.
Optional Program Package:
Reference Material: 1130 Disk Monittir System Reference Manual (C26-3750)* ...
1130 Assembler language (C26-5927)* ••• 1800 Time Sharing Executive System
Concepts and Techniques (C26-3703)* ... 1800 Assembler Language (C26-5882)*.
Ordering Information: Program Order Number 1800CC02X
* If you want the H20-0351 Manual and not the rest of the basic program package,
order It fromt,e IBM Distribution Center, Mechanicsburg -- not from PID. All
other form numbered manuals are available from Mechanicsburg.
be equipped
Machine Readable -- Source code.
Program Number
ExtenSion
BaSic
Optional
none
none
Distribution Medium
Type
Code
Cards
15
DTR 9/800 28
DTR 9/1600 29
User Volume
Requirement
none
none
none
Additional Program Support Material: Application Description Manual'(H20-0261)*
••• System Manual N2o-o1281* ... Language Specificaticn Manual (H20-0473)*
••• Oat Forms (X20-1752 through 1757)*.
A real-time on-line system for Implell'le,llloift!i control of continuous
processes •.By using the "fill-in-the-blanks" technique, the
user can describe the process and develop the control scheme.
The system receives Its necessary process operating data and control instructions from
cards PU!1Ched according to the entries on standard data forms. The various tables,
data records and control schemes required by the system are automatically generated by
PROSPRO/1800 and become operational.
PROSPR0/1800:
* If you want the Manuals that are a part of the baSic program package and not the
rest of the package, order from Mechanicsburg -- not from PID. All other form
numbered items are available from Mechanicsburg.
Expected frequent modifications in the process and the control strategy are easily accommodated by PROSPRO/1800.
No knowledge of computer programming is requiredtto complete the forms. However,
special programs can be written in Assembler Language or FORT~AN and added to
PROSPRO/1800. n800-CC-02X>
Features:. Organization of engineering and control information by providing "fill-inUie=Iiliiiks" forms ••• vel!'>atile programs to procesS" information effectively and to
execute contr)I actions consistently ••. accommodation of special programs (written in
FORTRAN or Assembler Language) to fulfill more complex requirements ••• simplification of program modification and maintenance in addition to. initial system generation
••• uniform and complete system documentation.
Use: Using the Language Specifrtation Manual, the customer fills out the data forms
maximum and minimum limits,
etc J and control action (constants, type of control, etc.). The information is punched
into cards and entered into the 1800 through the card reader.PROSPRO/1800
reads the cards and builds various data tables. These data tables provide the necessary logic and constants used during execution of the program. The forms become the
documentation of th'e)rocess control application. Changes may be made by entering'
. new and/or different data cards.
;;rn; information on each variable (processing frequency,
Customer Responsibitl~ies:
-
Know the process to be controlled and the desired control strategy.
-
Describe the process and the control act/on using the standard data
forms.
- Write any routines for functions not handled by the PROSPRO/1800
system.
-
Develop any mathematical models that may be required.
programml~ System: PROSPRO/1800 operates under the IBM 1800 Time-Sharing
Executlveystem (fSX). The application programs are written In Assembler Language or FORTRAN.
.Not to be reproduced without written permission
SCP 1.1
PROGRAMMING/SCP
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
General
IBM System Control Programming (SCP) is described in this section.
For detailed information, see supporting System Reference Library
(SRL) publications.
System control programming (SCP) is fundamental to the operation
and support of the system and is available without additional charge.
It serves as an interface for program products as well as user
programs and is directly involved with the management of available
systems resources. System control programming controls various
input / output devices and the execution of programs.
System control programming provides functional support for varying
operational environments such as batch mode for jobs entered locally
or remotely, or sharing of resources during the concurrent execution
of other programs. It supports configurations of different minimum
requirements in terms of processing units, storage and devices.
System Control Programming Identification
Each SCP is assigned a seven character identification code for
ordering purposes. The first two digits (57) identify it as a program.
The next two digits identify the Processor/Program Environment. The
last three characters are identifiers which distinguish it from other SCPs.
Processor/Program Environment Codes
01 - System/3 Model 10 Card
02 - System/3 Models 8,9 and
10 Disk
03 - System/3 Models 4,6
04 - System /3 Model 15
05 - System/3 Model 12
07 - System /7
41 - S/370 OS/VS1
42 - S/370 05/VS2 (5VS)
44 - S/370 OS/VS Independent
SCP
45 - S/370
47 - S/370
SCP
49 - 5/370
52 - S/370
DOS/V5
DOS/VS Independent
VM/370
05/VS2 (MVS)
Additional codes will be used as SCPs become available within other
Processor/program environments.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Nov 78
SCP 1.2
Nov 78
PROGRAMMING SCP - INDEX
Reference
Operating System/Virtual Storage 1
Highlights
Supervisor
Scheduler / JES
Remote Entry Services
Job Scheduling
Command Processing
System Management Facilities
Recovery Management Support
Operator Communications
Virtual Storage Access Method
Sequential Access Method
3850 Mass Storage System
Virtual Telecommunications Access Methods
Teleprocessing Online Test Executive Program
Telecommunications Access Method
Basic Telecommunications Access Method
Graphic Programming Services
Graphic Subroutine Package
Shared DASD
System Support Program
System Assembler
System Utilities
System Data Set Utilities
Online Test Executive Program
Dynamic Support System
Service Aids
Display Exception Monitoring Facility
Generalized Trace Facility
Conversational Remote Job Entry
Current System Programs under OS/VS
Minimum VS1 Configuration
System Generation
Starter System
Starter System Requirement Chart
Device Support Chart
Terminals and Terminal Feature
Terminal Support Charts
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
4.101
4.101
4.101
4.102
4.102
4.103
4.103
4.103
4.104
4.104
4.104
4.105
4.106
4.106
4.107
4.107
4.108
4.108
4.108
4.109
4.109
4.109
4.109
4.109
4.110
4.110
4.110
4.110
4.110
4.111
4.111
4.111
4.111
4.111
4.112
4.116
4.117
4.122
Operating System/Virtual Storage 2
SVS Highlights
MVS Highlights
Supervisor
Job Management
Job Entry Subsystem 2
Job Entry Subsystem 3
Remote Job Processing
Recovery Management Support
Multiprocessing with Shared Real Storage
Timesharing Option
Data Management
Virtual Telecommunications Access Method
Telecommunication Access Method
Basic Telecommunication Access Method
System Support Programs
Service Aids
Optional Processor Features Supported
SVS Device Support Chart
MVS Device Support Chart
SVS Terminal Support Chart
MVS Terminal Support Chart
ASP
HASP-II
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
4.201
4.201
4.203
4.203
4.204
4.208
4.208
4.211
4.211
4.212
4.214
4.216
4.216
4.217
4.219
4.220
4.221
4.225
4.226
4.232
4.234
4.237
4.237
Disk Operating System/Virtual Storage
Control and Service Programs
The POWER/VS Program
The Assembler
Data Management
Device Support Chart
Telecommunications Support
Terminal Support Chart 1
Terminal Support Chart 2
Utility Programs
Error Recovery
Diagnostic Aids
Emulator Program
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
4.301
4.301
4.303
4.306
4.306
4.310
4.311
4.318
4.319
4.320
4.321
4.321
4.321
Virtual Machine Facility /370 (VM/370)
SCP 4.401
Reference
Conversion /Service
1401/1440/1460 Emulator for Models 135. 145.
15511. 158 with Compatibility Feature (OS/VS)
1410/7010 Emulator for Models 145. 15511. 158
with Compatibility Feature (OS/VS)
DOS/VS Emulator Under OS/VS. Version 3
3704/3705 Emulation and System Support for
DOS /VS and OS /VS
SCP 4.501
SCP 4.501
S"cP 4.502
SCP 4.504
EP /VS and NCP /VS
3704/3705 System Support Programs for OS/VS2
and DOS/VS
SCP 4.601
Network Control Program/Virtual Storage NCP /VS
SCP 4.602
SCP Support for Advanced Function Systems and Terminals
3600 Finance Communication System
SCP 4.701
3650 Programmable Store System
SCP 4.702
3650 Retail Store System
SCP 4.703
3660 Supermarket Scanning System
SCP 4.704
3660 Supermarket Key-Entry System
SCP 4.704
3770 Data Communication System
SCP 4.705
3790 Communication System
SCP 4.705
System/32
SCP 4.706
System/34
SCP 4.706
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----------- ------ ---- - ---- DPD
--------_.
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
OS/VS1
SCP 4.101
Nov 78
OPERATING SYSTEM/VIRTUAL STORAGE 1 - OS/VS1
The Operating System/Virtual Storage 1 (OS/VS1, also known as
VS1) programs perform the systems control programming functions for
the System/370 Models 135, 135-3, 138, 145, 145-3, 148, 15511,
158, 16511, 168, and 3031 Processor, utilizing Dynamic Address
Translation (DAT), and the Extended Control Mode (EC) of these
systems.
The maximum size real storage supported by OS/VS1 is 8,388,608
bytes.
The minimum systems supported by OS/VS1 are the 3135 model GD
(147,456 bytes), the 3138 model I (524,288 bytes), the 3145 model
GE (163,840 bytes), the 3148 model J (1,048,576 bytes), the 315511
model H (262,144 bytes), the 158 model I (524,288 bytes), the 316511
model J (1,048,576 bytes), the 3168 model J (1,048,576 bytes)
processor and the 3031 Processor model U2 (2,097,152 bytes).
A system with processor storage size of 160K bytes of available real
storage is sufficient for all VS1 standard features, but the use of
optional SCP features will probably require additional real storage. In
general, function, advantages and performance depend upon the
amount of real storage available; therefore, most users will find a
processor storage size of 240K bytes or larger to be more effective for
their VS1 system.
The virtual storage size which can be supported is highly dependent on
a number of factors, such as application characteristics, programming
techniques, and system resources. VS1 supports a maximum virtual
storage size of 16,777,216 bytes provided there are enough system
resources to support the workload.
that require all of their pages in processor storage while they are
executing.
The paged section of real storage contains the active pages of the
virtual tasks and the active portions of the paged section of the
supervisor.
A section of the supervisor called the Page Supervisor is responsible
for allocating and deal locating pages in real storage and for initiating
page-in and page-out operations between auxiliary storage and
processor storage.
OS/VS1 includes features to improve the security/integrity of the
system: Fetch Protect, DEB Validity Checking, Password Protected
Page File, Protected TIOT (Task I/O Table), and APF (Authorized
Program Facility). Fetch Protect is optional support that combines
hardware and software support to protect a user'S main storage from
disclosure to any task but a system task. The entire dynamic storage
area (virtual partitions assigned to job steps and system tasks) and all
region key subpools are protected. The Data Extent Block (DEB)
Validity Checking is an option that prevents the user from unauthorized
modification of direct access extents or gaining control in the
supervisor state. Password Protection capability for the Page File
available in VS 1 also includes special processing to allow the size of a
protected SYS1.PAGE to be varied at IPL time. Protected TIOT
prevents a problem program from accidently or intentionally storing
into the TIOT. APF (Authorized Program Facility) is a function that
permits designated problem programs access to certain restricted
system functions.
The SU's integrated into Release 6.7
Smaller Main Storage Considerations
Lack of available real storage reduces the capabilities and performance of OS/VS1. The following restrictions apply to the 144K real
storage programming design point:
The release 6 or later starter systems are not supported.
Two-partition support is the recommended maximum.
The external trace option of the Generalized Trace Facility is not
supported.
Two megabytes of virtual storage is the recommended maximum.
Only one partition is allowed if the system includes RES.
OS/VS1 is a compatible extension of OS/360 Multiprogramming with
a Fixed Number of Tasks (MFT), providing up to 16,777,216 bytes
(hereafter referred to as 16 million or 16 megabytes) of virtual storage
for a customer's installation independent of the real main storage size
of his installation. Virtual Storage is the name given to the address
space referenced by a System/370 processor that is equipped with
the Dynamic Address Translation feature. This address space may be
as large as the logical addressing capability of the system; that is, if a
user can write an address, the location addressed can be included in
virtual storage.
Although the addressing range of virtual storage is equal to the
address range of the system, the user is limited to a virtual storage
capacity that is determined by the installation at System Generation
time or at IPL on the basis of such factors as real storage capacity. job
characteristics, number and size of virtual partitions, secondary
storage capacity, and control program storage requirements.
OS/VS1 virtual storage organization is similar to OS/360 MFT real
storage organi"'!:ation. OS/VS1 virtual storage is divided into two main
areas: the Control Program area (containing the supervisor and Job
Entry Subsystem - JES) and the Problem Program area. The Problem
Program area is divided into fixed partitions (maximum of 15) at 64K
bytes (or multiples thereof) or system task partitions (maximum of 37),
with a total maximum of 52 partitions.
As in OS/360 MFT, the partition size, class, and other attributes can
be changed by the operator while the system is in operation. Partition
allocation appears to the problem programmer and to the operator just
as it appears in OS/360 MFT with one exception: maximum partition
size is not limited by the real storage size, but by virtual storage size as
defined at System Generation or IPL. Partitions must be allocated in
64K multiples with a minimum of 64K.
Real storage in OS/VS1 is automatically managed by the operating
system in discrete blocks of 2K bytes called pages. As a page in
virtual storage is referenced, it is brought into real storage for
processing, if it is not already in real storage. When pages are not
being used and the processor storage is needed for another task, they
are written out to auxiliary storage unless an exact copy already exists
(i.e. the page was not modified during execution). Some sections of
the control program are not paged but are fixed in real storage.
OS/VS1 divides real storage into two sections: one fixed and the other
paged.
The fixed section of real storage contains the resident supervisor. Any
jobs that are currently executing in the "Virtual Equals Real" mode are
also fixed in real storage. This "Virtual Equals Real" mode makes
provision for the types of programs that cannot run in a paged
environment: programs that modify the channel program while it is
active; programs that are highly time-dependent; programs that have
user written I/O appendages to support EXCP where the appendages
do not adhere to VS1 appendage programming rules; and programs
Additional OS/VS1 Facilities
I/O Load Balancing in VS1 provides a method of allocating nonspecific requests for data sets based upon the utilization of devices
across the entire configuration.
DynamiC Dispatching provides for the alteration of the dispatching
priorities of selected users tasks. Processor and I/O characteristics of
these tasks are constantly monitored during execution and changes
are dynamically taken into account in the dispatching process.
Automatic IPL can be performed when system initialization parameters
have been included in a data set (SYS1.PARMLlB). The operator can
avoid keying in responses to system initialization message requests by
indicating a list of SYS1 .PARMLIB members which contain most of the
necessary system initialization parameters needed for a particular IPL.
The time of day can be requested in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Interrupts can be requested at a specific time of day based on
Greenwich Mean Time.
ISSP (Installation Specified Selection Parameters) permits system
programmers to control the handling of job input and output classes,
joh priorities and message classes.
VS1 can execute as a virtual machine under VM in an arrangement
called VM/VS Handshaking. Some of the most significant features
include: Closing of CP (Control Program) spool files at job end instead
of virtual machine termination; elimination of VS1 paging control, which
would otherwise be redundant with similar VM function; and the ability
to perform task switching within the VS1 subsystem during VM
processing of VS1 real page faults caused by VS1 real page faults.
The IBM System/370 135-3, 138, 145-3, and 148 includes Extended
Control-Program Support. This hardware assist provides improved
supervisor performance. The assist may be used if VS1 is running
native or under VM/370. The VS1 hardware assist is designed to be
executed only by the VS1 Supervisor. Access to the assist is
generated at SYSGEN time.
Supervisor
The OS/VS1 Supervisor is a part of the System Control Programming
that monitors each unit of work being done in the system. The
Supervisor, in general, controls the use of the processor, I/O, and real
and virtual storage automatically or as requested by a user through
system macro instructions or higher level language statements. It
provides a variety of services such as allocating virtual storage space,
performing I/O operations, loading programs into virtual storage,
moving pages of programs into and out of real storage, and maintaining
the address space (virtual storage) on an auxiliary storage device. To
perform its function, the supervisor receives control of the processor
following an interruption which may have resulted from a specific
service request or through an asynchronous interruption by the
computing system.
The OS/VS1 Supervisor performs the same functions as the OS/360
Supervisor.
In addition to interruption handling, the OS/VS1
Supervisor performs: Task Dispatching in up to 15 problem program
partitions
Task Supervision ... Fetch ... Contents Supervision ...
Timer Supervision ... Storage Supervision (virtual) ... I/O Supervision
Exception Condition Handling ... System Management Facilities
(SMF).
Functions that have been added to support Dynamic Address.
Translation are real storage supervision and paging supervision.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------- --- ------- DPD
----......-
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
OS/VS1
OS/VS1 is designed to take advantage of Dynamic Address Translation hardware. The system operates on the basis of virtual storage and
real storage. Real storage is the storage of System/370 from which
the central processing unit can directly obtain instructions and data
and to which it can directly return results. Virtual storage is address
space that appears to the user as real storage. From this address
space, Instructions and data are mapped Into real storage locations.
Partitions are assigned from available virtual storage; the system
assigns real storage only as it is actually needed for program use.
The OS/VS1 relocate concept operates through Dynamic Address
Translation. When a program is executing, the system tran§lates each
virtual address into a corresponding real storage addres5 as the
instruction is executed.
With address translation, all 24 bits of an address are usable. Thus
virtual address space can be (and real storage can appear to be)
16,777 ,216 bytes. This address space is divided into 256 segments of
64K bytes each. The segments are subdivided into 32 pages of ;;!K
bytes each.
OS/VS1 real storage contains a fixed section and a paged section.
The fixed section located in the lower portion of real storage contains
the resident supervisor and any jobs executing in a virtual = real (V =
R) mode. The size of the fixed area depends on the amount of storage
the user requires to execute his programs in (V = R) space (which is
fixed only while the V =;= R program is executing). the resident
supervisor requirements, the System Queue Area (SQM, and the
Recovery Management Support (RMS) area. In OS/VS1, the fixed
area is that part of real storage into which the nucleus is loaded at IPL.
The Paged section in the upper portion of real storage contains
portions of the problem programs currently executing and the pageable
portions of the Supervisor as they are needed. It also contains, as
needed, two transient areas: the SVC transient area and the I/O
transient area. JES is also located in this section.
Before an instruction can be executed, it must be brought into real
storage. As instructions are required, the addresses are translated and
the page(s) containing the instructions is moved into real storage.
When pages are not being used and the real storage space is needed
by another task, the page is written out onto auxiliary storage unless
an exact copy already exists (i.e. the page was not modified during
execution). This procedure is called demand paging. The Page
Supervisor task for OS/VS1 consists of a set of functions that
efficiently manages the contents of real storage as tasks are executing
in a multiprogrammed, demand paging environment. It is responsible
for: Ensuring that the contents of real storage are addressable through
the hardware OAT feature ... Exchanging virtual pages between
auxiliary storage and real storage on a demand paging basis ...
Keeping the most frequently referenced pages in real storage where
possible ... Interfacing with and servicing auxiliary requests such as
fixing virtual pages in real storage prior to I/O ... Providing these
additional SMF statistics: Number of page-ins; Number of page-outs;
Number of reclaimed pages.
The Page Supervisor task directly initiates page movement from real
storage to auxiliary storage, when required. All other page movement
comes about as a consequence of an implicit or explicit request from
an external source. Thus, OS/VS1 is able to assume the image of a
large contiguous real storage by keeping only required virtual pages in
real storage during execution.
The default size of the allowable virtual equals real area is equal to
512K or the real storage size of the machine, whichever is smaller.
Users with systems larger than 512K may set a higher (than 512K)
upper bO\.lndary of the virtual equals real area so that large V =B
programs can be run.
In addition to the paging support provided by OS/VS1, the user can
elect to utilize the virtual = real execution facility. This allows him to
specify that real storage should pe made available in which to run
programs that cannot run in the paged environment or those that the
installation determines should not be executed in the paged portion of
real storage. Real storage will be allocated at the time of job execution
for the equivalent amount of storage he has defined on the JOB or
EXEC card for the partition (and task) involved.
Thus the job of the supervisor is to provide the resources and services
that programs need in such a way that at any given time as many
services and resources as possible are in use.
Scheduler / JES
The OS/VS1 scheduler is an extension of the OS/360 MFT scheduler.
It provides an integrated Job Entry Subsystem (JES) for efficient job
submission and control. The job scheduling services direct and control
the flow of one or more jobs through the system. In general these
services are: Analysis of the input stream ... Allocation of I/O devices
.,. Selecting jobs for execution ." Reading and writing job data ...
Communication between the operator and the system.
Job Entry Subsystem
The Job Entry Subsystem is a standard centralized facility that
provides spooling and scheduling of OS/VS1 primary input and output
streams. The Job Entry Subsystem contains many features of the Type
SCP 4.102
Nov 78
III HASP program of OS/360 MH. The Scheduler/ JES of OS/VS1 Is
pageable and will only occupy as much real storage as is necessary to
.
execute a sPecific funotion.
JES performs three basic functions: All primary input streams are read
from the input QeviGe and stored on a direct access storage device
(DASD) in a format convenient for later processing by OS/VS1 and
problem programs ... System (and selected user) print and punch
output is similarly stored on DASD until a convenient time for producing
a hard coPy on a printer or punch device or via 3540 Oiskette
Input/Output Unit '" If system resources are in contention, JES
schedules its activitie~ to best utilize these resources.
JES is responsible for getting jobs into and out of the system as
quickly as possible to enhance system throughput and performance. It
accomplishes this by reading jobs into the system, dividing them into
various segments (job control statements and data, for example), and
storing them. When the jobs are selected for execution, the JCL is
interpreted separately. This procedure reduces the need for executing
system reader and interpreter functions sequentially when jobs are first
read into the system, as in past operating system environments.
During execution of a job, JES spools the output into a data set; that is
the data is stored on a DASD device in a manner that reduces the
movement of the access mechanism.
JES supports a Logic;al Cylinder function that provides the user with
the ability to mQre efficiently use the DASD workspace that is allocated
for spooling.
JES supports a Writer Checkpoint function that provides the user with
the capability of ehec;kpointing his SYSOUT data sets.
JES supports an Output Separator facility that provides a means of
identifying and separating the output of various jobs that are processed
by the same output device.
JES also supports a Checkpoint/Restart Capability, thereby complementing other RAS facilities to ensure continuous operation.
JES supports a Job Log Facility that collects all WTOs. WTORs and
replies to WTORs and includes them in the JCL listing.
The two components of JES are the Job Entry Peripheral Services
(JEPS) and th~ ,Job Entry Central Services (JECS).
The functions provided by JEPS are System READER and System
WRITER. All input to OS/VS1 except console entered commands,
passes through the JES Reader(s). OS/VS1 allows as many readers
and writers as can be contained within the limits of the virtual storage
allocation made for the JES area during SYSGEN. The readers/writers
are part of JES end do not occupy separate partitions. They are
resident in the .jES area of storage and operate concurrently with
problem pr9gr~ms,
All resource management for JES is consolidated in the Job Entry
Central Services f~cility. JECS has three logical functions, each of
which provides ~ m&nagement service for JES:
Buffer Management - A central buffer handling facility for JES
Spool Management - Has the responsibility to logically handle data
such as JC!- text, in line input data, procedure libraries, system
messageS, WTP, and spooled output data.
DASD Wqrk Area Management - Suballocates DASD work space and
performs I/O operations on DASD work space for JES.
All other scheduler operations such as interpretation. allocation,
command processing, initiation and termination of system and program
tasks, (:lati'l ma,nagement and system management facilities (SMF)
inteffaG~ with JlZg,
Remot~
Entry S~rvjces • RES
RES is a logical and functional extension of the Job Entry Subsystem
(JES). It ~xtends tn€! JES functions so that remote users can be
attached to Q$/V$1, Using RES, jobs and commands can be
submitted frgm remote terminals, and output can be routed back to the
terminals. RES makes OS/VS1 available to teleprocessing terminals
so that more usefS can have direct access to the central 'system for
their job sl)Pmissign.
RES provides a,1I remote batch processing facilities. Using normal JCL
(no sPecial statem~nts or parameters), the user can submit a job or a
batch of jobs from his terminal directly into the system. He avoids the
inefficient prpceqYfe of putting the jobs together, submitting them to
the computer center, having the operator enter the jobs into the
compllter, 'lAd waiting for his output to be processed on the same local
facilities as thE! PlItput from other users' jobs. By using a true subset of
system Openltor commands, the remote user can inquirEl about and
manipulate his jqbs, Remote Entry Services supports the following
stand-alone worKstations and features:
BSC Termi!'~h~
2772 MyltiplIrpose Control Unit
2780 Qa,ta Transmission Terminal
3741 Data Station, Model 2 (in basic communications mode)
3741 Programmable Work Station, Model 4 (in basic communications rnpqe)
3771 Comrnunic;ation Terminal, Models 1,2,3 (as a 2772)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----------==-- :::::;:
--- ==--~ ==
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
OS/VS1
DPD
3773 Communication Terminal, Models 1,2,3 (as a 2772)
3774 Communication Terminal, Models 1 ,2,P1 ,P2, (as a 2772)
3775 Communication Terminal, Model 1,P1 (as a 2772)
3776 Communication Terminal, Models 1,2 (as a 2772/3780)
3777 Communication Terminal, Model 1 (as a 2772/3780)
3777 Communication Terminal, Model 2 (as a System/360 Model
20 MULTI-LEAVING Workstation)
3780 Data Communications Terminal
1131 Central Processing Unit
5110 Computer (as a 2772)
System/3
System/32 (as a S/3)
System/34 (as a S/3)
System/360 Model 20
System/360 Models 25-195 (Model 25 requires ICA - #4580)
All virtual storage S/370 Processor in BC (Basic 360 Control)
mode only (115, 125 with 1052 Compatibility Feature)
System/370 Model 195
8100 with OPPX (as a System/360 Model 25 MULTI-LEAVING
Work Station)
SOLC Terminals
3771 Communication Terminal, Models 1,2,3
3773 Communication Terminal, Models 1,2,3
3774 Communication Terminal, Models 1,2
3775 Communication Terminal, Model 1
3776 Communication Terminal, Models 1,2,3,4
3777 Communication Terminal, Models 1,3
3791 Controller, Configuration Feature #9165 or #9169
8130 Processor with OPCX, Models A21, A23 (as a Multiple
Logical Unit (MLU), SNA device)
8140 Processor with OPCX, Models A31, A33, A51, A53 (as a
Multiple Logical Unit (MLU), SNA device)
System/32 (as a 3770)
System/34 (as a 3770)
System 8100 - OPPX (as a Multiple Logical Unit (MLU) SNA
device)
Features
Point-to-point nonswitched lines
Point-to-point switched lines
Line error recovery
RES supports the SDLC non-programmable models of the 3771, 3773,
3774, 3775, 3776 and 3777 Communication Terminals, the
System/32 (as a 3770) and the System/34 (as a 3770). Transmission
to the 3770 terminals (except 3777-2) is via Synchronous Data Link
Control (SOLC). This provides RES remote entry support for SOLC
terminals in a terminal-sharing environment where multiple applications
may establish logical connections with the terminal on a per-session
basis. To achieve this flexibility of terminal-sharing, RES uses the
VTAM application program interface for the support of the SOLC
terminals which are attached to a 3704/3705 in network control
mode.
Functional characteristics of the R~S support for SOLC terminals are
as follows: Half-duplex flow... Multipoint operation ... Serial data
transmission operation - e.g., no concurrent operation of printer and
punch on the outbound flow from RES to the SOLC terminals ... 3770
disk operation is transparent to RES ... Data stream provides
compression of repeated characters.
SOLC Terminals supported by RES are the non-programmable models
of the 3771, 3773, 3774, 3775, 3776, and 3777-1,3 Communication
Terminals,the System/32 (as a 3770), and the System/34 (as a
3770). Additional 3770 products include the 3784 Line Printer, the
3521 Card Punch, the 3501 Card Reader, the 2502 Card Reader, and
the 3203 Printer.
Multiple Logical Unit (MLU) 3776 Models 3,4 and 3777 Model 3, with
up to six independent and concurrent sessions are supported.
RES communication with the 8130/0PCX, 8140/0PCX and 3791
uses VTAM/SOLC. An 8100 or 3790 system can support a single
RJE workstation which will allow spooling of output data, batching
of input data, and editing of input data. A work station can support
up to five logical concurrent sessions with RES, Workstations will
accept compacted and compressed RES output.
The 3790 and 8100 RJE workstations have Network Control Program
(NCP) support in the 3704/3705.
System Requirements - For BSC Transmission, Remote Entry Services
(RES) requires a 2701, 2703, 3704/3705 (In emulation mode), or
Model 135 IntegrC'ted Communications Adapter (#4640) equipped for
Binary Synchronous Communications. A minimum processor storage
size of 144K bytes will allow the use of one terminal subject to tlie
restrictions that apply to the 144K real storage design point (see
Smaller Main Storage Considerations). However, to Obtain more
effective function and performance it is recommended that a processor
storage size of 240K bytes or larger be available. For SOLC transmission, RES requires a 3704 or 3705 in network control mode and a
minimum processor size of 384K of real storage. The real storage
requirements are dependent upon the user's definition of VS1 and the
RES line and terminal configurations.
SCP 4.103
Nov 78
Job Scheduling
The Initiator for OS/VS1 is pageable and has no resident modules.
When the command is entered from the console specifying an Initiator
procedure, the initiating task is established in the specified partition to
schedule job execution. The Initiator job selection routine dequeues
the highest priority job from the first job input queue associated with its
partition.
A program required for execution is fetched from the program library
and placed in virtual storage. It is paged as needed and execution
begins after the entire program's relative addresses (created by the
Linkage Editor) are resolved into absolute virtual addresses.
When the final step of the job is terminated, or if the job is bypassed,
any temporary or deleted data sets are returned to the system and the
Initiator is ready to select another job.
The OS/VS1 Interpreter operates as a subroutine of the Initiator. Its
function is to analyze the contents of job control statements and build
tables that are used during the initiation and execution of job steps.
The Allocation function operates as a subroutine to the Initiator. Its
function is to analyze the I/O device requirements of job steps,
allocate devices to them, issue volume mounting instructions, and
verify that the volumes were mounted on the correct device. OS/VS1
Allocation also supports dedicated data sets. The use of dedicated
data sets reduces the time required to schedule a job step by
eliminating the time normally required for allocating prespecified data
sets.
When a job completes execution, the OS/VS1 termination routines
free (deallocate) all resources used by the program and performs the
necessary "cleanup" operations to allow the system to continue
functioning for other problem programs.
Command Processing
Programmer and operator commands can be entered into the system
via the console or the input job stream. Some commands may be
entered cnly through the console. Others may be entered through
either the console or the input job stream. OS commands are
compatible with OS/VS1 with one notable enhancement: The WRITER
command provides the ability for the operator to manipulate printed
output.
This command can only be entered from the console and enables the
user to: Obtain multiple copies of job output on a data set or job basis,
within a job output class ... Immediately stop the job output stream and
start writing again from the beginning ... Forward space and back
space the output data '" Go to the next data set or restart the output
writing of the current data set ... Suspend the writing of a job's output
data and requeue it on the output queue to be written out later.
OS compatible command facilities available in OS/VS1 include:
Providing the flexibility to manipulate jobs by displaying the class,
priority, and the number of jobs to be processed; suspending the
execution of certain jobs or classes of jobs; releasing jobs that
have been suspended; direct canceling of a particular job; and
changing the priority or class of a particular job.
Redefining the size of a partition. In a virtual storage environment,
the partitions actually reside in virtual storage so that the change
in partition size is made in virtual storagE:} and not in real storage
as in OS.
Preparing for shutting down the system at the end of the day by
enabling the operator to save important statistics and data
records.
Modifying certain processing characteristics such as: changing
output writer classes and conditions under which the output writer
pauses for servicing; changing job classes associated wit'" direct
system output processing (OSO); changing programmer-specified
values providing the programmer has set tpe proper indicators in
his program to allow such revision.
Starting a job called via the console from a procedure library to
override the normal selection of jobs entered via the input job
stream.
Establishing the date, time of day, or the device to be used as the
input work queue and whether this queue is to be forrnatted, as
well as specifying the location of the library containing certain
program procedurE:}s (procedure library), and which automatic
commands the user WishE:}s to override,
Mounting an input/output device for all job steps tha,l require a
particular volume, without intervening demountings and remountin~s o.f the volume. (The volume must be removable).
Placing input! output devices (other than a comml..JnicatiQn line)
into an online or offline status.
System Management Facilities - SMF
System Management Facilities (SMF) is an optional support in OS/VS1
that .collects and records system information. The information obtained
can be used in management information reports that describe system
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------- ---- ---------------.-
DPD
SCP 4.104
Nov 78
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
OSIVS1
efficiency, performance and usage. The SMF records collect such
data as: System Configuration ... Job and job step termination ...
Processor wait time ... Processor and input/output device usage .. ,
Temporary and non-temporary data set usage and status ... Virtual and
real storage usage ... Status of removable direct access volumes .. ,
Paging statistics.
time-interval updating for the display of active job status, and provides
a means of separating status displays and certain WTO messages from
operator's message traffic. This is done by designating certain
consoles or separate areas of the display console screen exclusively
for these displays and messages.
Console device support is summarized in the following matrix.
SMF provides exits to installation-supplied routines that can monitor
the operation of a job or job step and generate the installation's own
SMF records. The exit routines can cancel jobs, write records to the
SMF data set, open and close user-defined data sets, suppress the
writing of certain SMF records, and enforce installation standards
(such as identification of users). Dummy routines are automatically
provided for all unused exits.
SYSTEM CONSOLE SUPPORT
Console Type
3215
3210
1403 (1)
3203-4 (1)
3286-2 (9)
3211 (1)
2540 (1)
2250 (2)
2260 (3)
2740
3274 (4)
3277 (4)
3066 (5)
138 Console
148 Console
158 Console (6)
3213-1 (6)
1052-7/2150 (7)
Recovery Management Support
OS/VS1 recovery management consists of five functions: machine
check handling, channel check handling, dynamic device reconfiguration, alternate path retry, and missing interrupt checker.
The Machine Check Handler (MCH) records all machine checks and
determines if recovery from a malfunction was made by the Instruction
or Micro Instruction Retry or Error Checking and Correction facilities of
the System/370 Processor. If the malfunction is not corrected by the
milchine facilities, MCH assesses the damage and attempts to repair
intermittent real storage errors. If recovery is not possible, MCH
determines whether operation can continue either in full or degraded
mode and isolates the failure to a task for orderly selective termination
of the task. Failing real storage is isolated on a page size basis.
The Channel Check Handler (CCH) analyzes information which results
'from Channel Data Checks, Channel Control Checks, and Interface
Control Checks. CCH attempts to have the error corrected and
determines whether or not the system can continue operation. In all
cases, the channel check handler passes data to OBR for formatting
and recording appropriate error records.
Dynamic Device Reconfiguration (DDR) allows a demountable volume to
be mOiled from one device to another. The request to move a volume
may be initiated by the system or by the operator. The system will
initiate a DDR request to the operator upon detection of a permanent
error. This support may be deleted at the user's option. Additional
support for non-standard tape labels may be included at the user's
option.
Alternate Path Retry (APR) automatically retries input/output operations
in error and marks offline those data paths that are unusable. APR is
automatically included when optional channel paths are specified.
The operator may vary paths online and offline by using the VARY path
command. He may not vary the last remaining path to a device offline,
nor may he vary teleprocessing paths or paths to shared DASDs.
The Machine Check Handler and Channel Check Handler are standard
parts of the OS/VS1 control program. They reside in the control
program area of virtual storage and operate in the fixed section of
processor storage. Dynamic Device Reconfiguration is a user option
while Alternate Path Retry is an optional extension to the Input/Output
Supervisor.
The MiSSing Interrupt Checker (MIC) polls active I/O operations to
determine if a channel end and/or device end interruption has been
pending for more than a three (3) minute period. In this manner, it
provides the operator a reminder message for outstanding mount
requests.
Operator Communications
Communications Task - The communications task processes communications between the operator and the operating system via the system
console. Write-to-operator (WTO) and write-to-operator with reply
(WTOR) macro instructions, operator commands and replies, and
switching from the primary console to an alternate are all processed by
this task. JES supports a Job Log Facility that collects all WTOs,
WTORs and replies to WTORs and includes them in the JCL listing.
Optional Multiple Console Support (MCS) enables systems to be
configured with' a Master Console and one or more secondary
consoles with each console dedicated to one or more system facilities.
The Multiple Console user, by selecting which routing codes each
console is to receive, tailors his system to his requirements. Through
the use of routing codes, both system and problem programmers can
indicate to which functional area(s) a message is to be sent.
A hard copy log may be selected to record system and problem
program messages and operator commands and responses. The hard
copy log can be either a console or the System Log (SYSLOG).
The hard copy log is mandatory when (1) there is more than one active
console in the console configuration, or (2) a graphic console is being
used as the Master Console.
Device Independent Display Operator Console Support (DIDOCS) is an
additional option under Multiple Console Support that provides uniform
operator console support for graphic display units.
Status Display Support provides for writing multiple-line messages to
the operator using the WTO macro instructions. It also provides
Standard
(Single
Console)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Multiple
Console
Support
MCS with
DIDOCS
(8)
(8)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Notes:
(1)
A console must consist of a printer-keyboard or a card reader
and printer to simulate the actions of a printer-keyboard.
2250 Models 1 and 3.
(2)
2260 Model 1 on a 2848 Model 3 (local attachment).
(3)
Support for the 3270 under DIDOCS. The 3277 Model 1
(4)
attaches via a 3272 Model 1 or 2. The 3277 Model 2 attaches
via a 3272 Model 2 only. The 3278 Models 1-4 are only
supported in default mode via 3274 Model 1B.
Model 165 II and Model 168 only.
(5)
(6)
Printer-Keyboard mode only and only on Model 158.
(7)
Model 155 11,165 II, and 168.
(8)
Maximum of 32 devices.
(9)
When attached to Model 138, 148.
Data Management
Data management controls all operations associated with input/ output
devices, such as allocation of space on volumes, storing, naming, and
cataloging data sets, and movement of data between main and
auxiliary storage.
Virtual Storage Access Method - VSAM
VSAM is an access method designed to operate with direct access
devices and to support both direct and sequential processing by
means of either an index key (keyed accessing) or by means of relative
byte address (addressed accessing). (Relative byte address refers to
the displacement of a stored record, or control interval, from the
beginning of the storage space allocated to the data set to which it
belongs.)
Three types of data sets are provided: key-sequenced data sets, which
are ordered by a key field in the data record, entry-sequenced data
sets, which are ordered by the sequence in which the records were
loaded, and relative record data sets which are ordered by record
number. Keyed accessing is used to access key-sequenced or relative
record data sets, and addressed accessing is used to access both
key-sequenced and entry-sequenced data sets. Key-sequenced and
entry-sequenced data sets may be either fixed or variable length
records, relative record data sets are fixed length records only.
VSAM is composed of two major elements: a data organization which
minimizes data movement and which is suitable for data base
applications; and routines for creating data sets in the VSAM
organization, adding and deleting records, and performing other data
management functions. Because the VSAM data organization and the
access method routines are supported for both OS/VS and DOS/VS,
VSAM provides full data portability between these systems.
The VSAM user can expect to see performance improvements relative
to OS/VS ISAM and DOS ISAM. Performance gains with VSAM can
become increasingly significant as the number of insertions to the data
set rises. This is due to the elimination of the "chained record
overflow" concept employed by ISAM. VSAM effectively maintains its
sequential, non-inserted performance as records are added to the data
set. Also, VSAM requires less time to perform a record insert than
does ISAM. These factors, coupled with the efficient VSAM index
structure and with. the VSAM performance options, offer the potential
of performance improvements relative to ISAM.
VSAM Highlights
Access to data via VSAM is controlled by macro instructions
written under the conventions of Assembler language. Access to
data sets may be either direct or sequential, and may either be
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --- ---------------_.
- - ---
DPD
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
OS/VS1
keyed (controlled by index key) or addressed (controlled by
relative byte address).
With VSAM, certain device-dependent calculations such as the
optimum block sizes for a given device type are carried out
automatically and all data addressing is by relative bytes within the
storage space allocated to the data set. These features minimize
programmer effort when he wants to change device types.
Most existing and new COBOL, PL/I, and Assembler language
programs written for use with ISAM data sets may be used with
VSAM data sets by means of the VSAM ISAM Interface Program.
The ISAM Interface Program maps ISAM macro instructions into
the corresponding VSAM requests. Refer to the Program Product
section of the sales manual for details regarding COBOL and PL/I
support of VSAM.
VSAM functional extensions relative to ISAM include concurrent
direct and sequential processing, expanded catalog support for
OS/VS and enhanced device independence. A single VSAM
OPEN macro instruction may be used to initiate both direct and
sequential accessing, without the need of issuing an intervening
CLOSE instruction.
VSAM offers a mUlti-function service program (Access Method
Services) to facilitate overall management of data. Such services
as defining data sets initially, deleting VSAM data sets from the
VSAM catalog, printing and copying data, listing the VSAM
catalog, and providing backup and portability features are
controlled by this multi-function program. Converting data sets
from the VSAM or SAM format to the ISAM format is another
important function of this program.
A significant feature of VSAM is that of data set and volume
portability between DOS/VS and OS/VS systems. Portability of
data sets and volumes is made possible by the user catalogs and
the multi-function service program, Access Method Services.
Recovery
Extensions to the facilities within VSAM Catalog Management and
Access Method Services will now permit limited access, via
Access Method Services, to data that is not addressable by the
catalog (due to the loss of, or damage to, the catalog). Further, the
user can restore addressability of the data and reconstruct the
associated catalog entries.
Improved Control Interval Processing
This feature is designed to reduce processor utilization for users
of control interval processing with user buffers and with minimal
processing options.
VSAM Shared Resources
This option provides new interfaces to allow the user to create and
control his own resource pool, permitting buffers and control
blocks to be shared among data sets. Its use minimizes the
storage requirement in a data base environment in which a large
number of data sets may remain open over an extended period.
Catalog Recovery
Additional catalog recovery capability has been added to Access
Method Services for VSAM users on OS/VS1 Release 6. The
RESETCAT command provides the capability for validity checking
and rebuilding a VSAM catalog from information contained in its
catalog recovery areas without the necessity of moving VSAM data
Sets.
VSAM Minimum System Configuration
These VSAM options retain the same general system configuration
requirements as the original version, however, one of the following
no charge special features is required for either S/370-135 or
S/370-145.
VSAM offers multiple levels of password protection to enhance
data set security. VSAM also offers a user exit so that user-written
security routines may be included.
# 1001 Advanced Control Program Support·
VSAM operating under OS/VS1 establishes its own master
catalog independently from the OS/VS1 catalog. VSAM operating
under OS/VS1 also supports user catalogs to reduce contention
for the master catalog and to enhance data set integrity and
portability. Each VSAM catalog defines VSAM volumes, whether
mounted or not. This enhances space allocation because it is not
necessary to mount a volume in order to determine whether or not
space is available. Each VSAM catalog also supports non-VSAM
data sets. Volumes may contain a mixture of VSAM data sets and
non-VSAM data sets.
# 1051 Conditional Swapping' •
S/370-135 All models
S/370-145 All models
( •• standard on 135-3 and 1 38)
The primary objective of these features is to provide functions which
reduce the need to schedule redundant work. These optional features
are:
SCP 4.105
Nov 78
S/370-145 Models IH, J2, J12, or K2
(. standard on 145-3 and 148)
Note: Insert PSW Key and Set PSW Key from Address which are part of
Advanced Control Program Support are standard on the S/370 135-3
and 138 and are called PSW Key Handling.
VSAM coexists with existing data management access methods. The
data management functions supplied by VSAM are: opening data sets,
closing data sets, end of volume processing, cataloging VSAM data
sets, allocating space, Checkpoint/Restart processing, and processing
records by index key or by address.
The operating system job control language (JCL) is expanded to
include VSAM catalogs and access method parameters.
Alternate Indexes
This new feature permits application programs to access the
records of a VSAM entry or key sequenced data set on the basis
of keys other than the prime key. These alternate keys may be
non-unique and must be contained in the base data record. Once
an Alternate Index has been constructed by using Access Method
Services, it may optionally be automatically updated whenever a
data record is changed in the base data set to which it relates.
Relative Record Data Set
With this feature the data set is viewed as a numbered sequence
of fixed length slots. Records may be inserted, updated, read, or
erased in these slots using VSAM keyed processing, with the slot
(i.e., record) number as the key. No index is used since each
record's physical location is calculated directly by VSAM from its
record number and the characteristics of the data set.
Get Previous
This feature permits retrieval and update processing on the basis
of descending key values, relative record numbers, or relative byte
addresses. Processing may begin either within or at the end of the
data set.
Reusable Data Set
This "new" capability allows a data set to be reused (Le., reset to
"empty" when opened and reloaded) many times without being
deleted and redefined. A reusable data set may be any key
sequenced, entry sequenced, or relative record data set that does
not have an alternate index associated with it and that does not
reside on unique space. However, an alternate index may be a
reusable data set.
Sequential Access Methods
In the Basic Sequential Access Method (BSAM), data is sequentially
organized and physical blocks of data are stored or retrieved. The
READ/WRITE macro instruction causes the initiation of an
input/output operation. The completion of these operations is tested
by using synchronization macro instructions. Automatic translation
between EBCDIC and ASCII codes is provided for magnetic tape labels
and record formats.
In the Queued Sequential Access Method (QSAM) logical records are
retrieved or stored as requested. The access method anticipates the
need for records based on their sequential order, and normally will
have the desired record in virtual storage, ready for use, before the
request for retrieval. When writing data, the program normally will
continue as if the record had been written immediately, although the
access method routines may block it with other logical records and
defer the actual writing until the output buffer has been filled. As with
BSAM, automatic translation between EBCDIC and ASCII codes is
provided for magnetic tape labels and record formats.
Basic Partitioned Access Method - BPAM
This access method, when used in conjunction with BSAM, is designed
for efficient storage and retrieval of discrete sequences of data
(members) belonging to the same data set on a Direct Access device.
The data set includes a directory that relates the member name with
the address where the sequence begins. Each member has a simple
name. Members may be added to a partitioned data set as long as
space is available in the directory and the data set. Other than
directory manipulation, all I/O is performed by BSAM.
Basic Direct Access Method - BDAM
Spanned Record
Originally VSAM did not permit a record to exceed a control
interval in size. The Spanned Record feature removes the
restriction, allowing a record to occupy multiple control intervals
within a control area. If indexed, the keys must be in the first
control interval.
In the Basic Direct Access Method (BDAM), records within a data set
are organized on direct access volumes in any manner chosen by the
programmer. Storage and retrieval of a record is by actual or relative
address within the data set. This address can be that of the desired
record or a starting point within the data set where a search for the
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------- ---- -- --------------_.
DPD
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
OS/VS1
record, based on a key furnished by the programmer, begins.
Addresses are also used by BDAM as a starting point for searching for
available space for new records.
Indexed Sequential Access Methods
Sequential and direct processing are provided by the Indexed
Sequential Access Methods (ISAM). Records are maintained in control
field sequence by key. A multilevel index structure is system maintained, allowing retrieval of any record by its key. Additions can be
made to an existing ISAM data set without rewriting the data set.
The Basic Indexed Sequential Access Method (BISAM) stores and
retrieves records randomly from an indexed sequential data set.
Selective reading is performed using the READ macro instruction, and
specifying the key of the logical record to be retrieved. Individual
records can be replaced or new records added randomly.
The Queued Indexed Sequential Access Method (QISAM) is used to
create an indexed sequential data set or to retrieve and update records
sequentially from .such a data set. Synchronization of the program with
the completion of input/output transfer, and record blocking/
deblocking are automatic. QISAM is also used to reorganize an
existing data set.
3850 Mass Storage System - MSS OS/VS1 supports attachment of a
single 3850 Mass storage System MSS (up to two A Model 3851 's).
The 3850 Mass Storage System (MSS) programming support includes
an MSC (Mass Storage Control) Table Create program, Access Method
Services functions to aid in mass storage volume management, and a
Mass Storage System Communicator (MSSC) which communicates the
Staging/Destaging commands to the MSC and contains Mass Storage
Volume Control (MSVC) functions to assist in volume management. In
addition, most of the facilities available for the control and management of real 3333/3330 Disk Storage drives and the data sets
contained on 3336 Model 1 and 11 Disk Packs are applicable to virtual
3333/3330 addresses and the data sets contained on mass storage
volumes. 3350 Disk Storage devices may be attached to the 3830
model 3 Storage Control or the appropriate ISC with the Staging
Adapter as a real device in 3350 native mode. Brief descriptions of
the significant areas of support follow. More detailed information can
be found in the publication OS/VS Mass Storage System (MSS)
Planning Guide.
SCP4.106
Nov 78
KEEP or CATALOG and the portions of old data sets that were
modified is initiated when the mass storage volume is demounted.
Mass Storage System Communicator (MSSC) : The MSSC includes Mass
Storage Volume Control (MSVC) functions to assist users of the 3850
MSS to control and manage the use of mass storage volumes. MSVC
centers around a new system data set, usercat.MSVI, which is a keyed
sequential VSAM data set containing space and activity information
about mass storage volumes and groups of mass storage volumes. It is
created, initialized, and maintained by the user via the Access Method
Services functions for creating a VSAM data set and for the manipulation of mass storage volumes. Usercat.MSVI is used by OS/VS1 for
the allocation of mass storage volumes to satisfy non-specific volume
requests for new data sets. An Access Method Services function
which produces a report of the status of mass storage volumes and
groups of mass storage volumes is available. Access Method Services
also list information concerning cartridges similar to the information
listed concerning volumes. Included are two commands which enable
the user to list or scratch and uncatalog non-VSAM data sets
according to his specified criteria (e.g., creation date, expiration date
or name qualifier). Access Method Services also list information on
cartridges similar to the information listed on volumes. Included are
two functions which enable the user to list or scratch non-VSAM data
sets according to specified criteria such as: creation date, expiration
date or name Qualifier. It is an installation responsibility to analyze
these reports to determine the extent of space utilization on mass
storage volumes and then to initiate the appropriate utility functions to
scratch or copy inactive data sets.
Data Management Support: BSAM, QSAM, BPAM, BDAM, VSAM, EXCP,
and XDAP may be used for data sets contained on mass storage
volumes. The staging of such data sets is initiated at OPEN. ISAM
data sets can be contained on mass storage volumes. However,
staging for ISAM data sets is not initiated at OPEN but, rather, at the
time a data record is accessed. One cylinder at a time is staged as
requested by the "cylinder fault" mode of operation. The Direct
Access Device Space Management (DADSM) facilities are applicable
to mass storage volumes as well as to real direct access volumes. All
of the catalog facilities of OS/VS1 can be used for data sets contained
on mass storage volumes.
MSC Table Create: Creates and initializes the tables required by the
. Mass Storage Control (MSC). The tables are of four types:
Data Sharing: The catalog, user program libraries, and user data sets
can be accessed by any processor. If 3333s are shared between
hosts, the 3330V devices with paths to the shared 3330 drives may be
SYSGENed as shared or unshared at user option .
Configuration Information: describes the hardware present in the
3850 Mass Storage System and the interconnections between the
various hardware components.
Data Security: The password protection data security facilities of
OS/VS1 can be used to control access to MSC tables and data sets
contained on mass storage volumes.
Cartridge Information: describes the locations and volume serial
numbers of the mass storage volumes in the 3851 MSF.
Data Set Utility Programs: All non-standalone OS/VS1 Data Set Utilities
can be used with data sets contained on mass storage volumes.
Activity Information: describes the status of staging and destaging
of data.
System Utility Programs: All non-standalone OS/VS1 System Utility
Programs except IEHDASDR and IEHATLAS can be used on mass
storage volumes.
Control Information: contains information required to locate all the
above tables and also the basic information required to start the
MSC initial microprogram load.
This program must be run at the initial installation of the 3850 MSS
and whenever the configuration changes. It must be run prior to an
OS/VS1 System Generation, if the 3851 IODEVICE macros are being
changed, because it generates IODEVICE and UNITNAME card images
to be used in Stage I of SYSGEN.
OSjVS1 System Generation: The 3851 Mass Storage Facility is a new
device type for which an IODEVICE macro must be included. The
number of virtual 3333/3330 addresses will be limited by the OS/VS1
UCB limit (see OS/VS1 System Generation Reference) and by the
available subchannels (see appropriate Processor or channel
functional characteristics manual). An IODEVICE macro for each virtual
3333/3330 address is required. Certain system data sets must reside
on real direct access units known to OS/VS1. The four real unit
addresses 0, 1, 8 and 9 on Staging Adapter 0 and Staging Adapter 1
are reserved for direct access to the MSC tables. More detailed
information can be found in the publication OS/VS1 Planning & Use
Guide, GC24-5070. If the only direct access units in an installation are
the 3333/3330 Disk Storage drives included in the 3850 MSS, then
one or more of these 3333/3330 drives must be assigned addresses
that have been identified to OS/VS1 as real 3333/3330 units. These
3333/3330 drives can then be used for the system data sets. All
3350 drives must be identified as real devices during system
generation. For further information on system generation, refer to the
publication OS/VS1 System Generation Reference, GC26-3791.
StagingjDestaging Initiation: Staging and destaging is based upon Job
Control Language (JCL) Data Definition (DO) statement parameters.
UNIT = 3330V indicates that the data set defined by DSNAME resides
on a mass storage volume whose serial number is identified either by
the VOLUME parameter or in the catalog. This mass storage volume is
: 'f!1?u.nted" , i.e. made active, by the Mass Storage Control at job step
Initiation. If DISP = OLD, SHR, or MOD is specified, the staging of the
~~t.a set is initiated when the data set is OPENed. Staging will be
Initiated for new data sets only when the space request is not on a
cylinder boundary. Destaging of new data sets for which DISP =
IEHDASDR Utility Function: OS/VS1 System Utilitity Program IEHDASDR
provides support for formatting the IBM 3336 Models 1 and 11 Disk
Packs for use as the real volume staging pack. This utility function can
only be performed external to the MSS.
Access Method Services Functions: Access Method Services provides
mass storage volume commands which allow a user to initialize,
modify, copy, and scratch mass storage volumes, to add and remove
mass storage volumes from the 3850 MSS, and to convert real 3336
Model 1 Disk Packs to mass storage volumes and back again. There
are commands which allow a user to create, modify, and scratch
groups of mass storage volumes in usercat.MSVI, and to list the
contents of usercat.MSVI.
Additional Commands allow the user to copy, swap, and compare the
Mass Storage tables, to dump portions of the MSC or Staging Adapter
storage, to dump the MSC tables, to audit cartridge locations within
the MSF, and to check the consistency of the MSC tables, SA tables
and Mass Storage Volume Inventory data set.
VIRTUAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS ACCESS METHOD - VTAM (Also
refer to the Program Products section for licensed options provided for
TCAM).
A functionally superior alternative to BTAM, VTAM provides telecommunications support for the 3704/3705 in network control mode and
for locally attached 3270s, 3730s and 3790s. In addition, VTAM
controls the sharing of telecommunication resources between
application programs and supports the concurrent execution of
multiple teleprocessing applications.
VT AM provides for the direct transmission of messages between
application programs and terminals. Using NCP /VS, it makes the lines
and communications controllers transparent to the application
program; thus, the application program need only be responsible for
device control characters in data streams.
The expanded interface for application programs allows the user to
control connections between application programs and terminals, as
well as to request data transfer. A single request for connection or
input can be directed simultaneously to more than one terminal.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-----------.--- ----------------- _.-
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
OS/VS1
DPD
For SS and BSe terminals, VTAM supports switched networks as
point-to-point, manual dial, automatic dial, and automatic answer.
Nonswitched networks are supported as point-to-point or multipoint, as
appropriate for the device.
For SDlC terminals, VTAM initially supports switched and nonswitched
lines. A switched line connection requires system operator assistance.
Manual dial service is supported. Nonswitched networks are supported
as point-to-point or multipoint, as appropriate for the device. VTAM
subsequently supports SOlC terminals in switched networks as
point-to-point, manual dial, automatic dial, and automatic answer. Each
station has a unique transmission identification within the network, as
defined by the installation.
The VT AM application program interface is upward compatible for the
three virtual storage operating systems (DOS/VS, OS/V$1, and
OS/VS2). It is designed for long-term stability and to aid user
teleprocessing growth.
VTAM and VSAM are companion access methods on which to build
customer data base/data communications systems. TCAM application
programs can use certain VT AM facilities through TCAM Message
Control Program.
Network operator control facilities are provided, enabling the user to
monitor and reconfigure his network to meet fluctuating requirements.
The program operator facility allows an authorized user-written
application program to enter VT AM Network operator commands and
receive VT AM Network operator messages.
Configuration Restart Facilities allow the VTAM Network to be
reinstated after a failure or a normal deactivation occurs. Manual
switching support to a backup Processor or 3704/3705 is provided.
VTAM's modular deSign and use of tailored OS/VS1 RAS facilities
provide a reliable telecommunications system and assist in maintenance.
A 3790-SNA System Installation Package, consisting of a 3790
Sample Installation test program with appropriate supporting code and
control statements, and a 3790 Installation Guide, is provided to
facilitate installation of 3790 Communication Systems and the host
communications subsystem.
To aid in installing the 8100 Information System with DPPX, the Host
Command Facility program product with an SNA 3270 display station
running under VTAM or TCAM, can be used to:
Remotely operate an 8100/DPPX system from a 3270 display
station.
Run 81 OO/DPPX checkout routines remotely.
Verify the operation of a link connecting S/370 and 8100 DPPX.
Modify DPPX Network profiles.
VTAM System Requirements: VTAM operates in OS/VS1 on a
System/370 and requires the Compare and Swap and the Compare
Double and Swap instructions. These instructions are provided via the
Conditional Swapping Feature (# 1051) for the Model 135, and via the
Advanced Control Program Support Feature (#1001), or the Conditional Swapping Feature (# 1051) for the Model 145, (see Note). The
minimum OS/VS1 system under which VTAM operates is 256K of real
storage.
See Terminal Support Chart 1 for the devices supported by VTAM with
OS/VS1.
Note: Conditional Swapping is standard on the Models 135-3 and 138.
Advanced Control Program Support is standard on the Models 145-3
and 148. Insert PSW Key and Set PSW Key from Address, which are
part of Advanced Control Program Support, are standard on the S/370
135-3 and 138 and are called PSW Key Handling.
Teleprocessing Online Test Executive Program - TOl TEP
Tal TEP is a component of VT AM and is designed to control the
selection, loading, and execution of teleprocessing online terminal
tests (OLTTs) for all control units and terminals in a VTAM network. It
uses VTAM capabilities for line sharing, ; ~
'~;~ ... _, ,ing, and remote
test requests. Tal TEP performs control services, device accessing,
and configuration-update functions for teleprocessing OlTTs of
devices supported by VT AM.
Tal TEP allows the operator or IBM representative to run teleprocessing OlTTs concurrently with other processing programs, with VTAM,
and with the operating system. Tal TEP is automatically included in a
system when VTAM is generated. It is initiated when VTAM is initiated
and stopped when VTAM is stopped.
Tal TEP dqes not support the dedicated testing of a locally attached
3704/3705 Communications Controller. Dedicated testing of the local
3704/3705 is handled by OlTEP.
Although Tal TEP provides testing facilities for the VT AM network,
TOTE and OlTEP are still required for testing appropriate non-VTAM
networks.
SCP 4.107
Nov 78
Tal TEP requires the configuration data set (CDS) and the OlTT data
set.
Telecommunications Access Method - TeAM (Also refer to the
Program Products section for licensed options provided for TCAM).
The Telecommunications Access Method (TCAM) is a teleprocessing
support program which may execute in conjunction with VT AM or as a
separate access method. It provides:.
A regionalized, general-purpose TP access method providing
facilities that permit exchange of data between a central S/370
and remote terminals.
A control program designed to optimize the allocation and
scheduling of a computer's resources in a real-time teleprocessing
environment.
Resources optimized include processor time,
real-storage space and I/O paths (lines and channels).
A high-level language composed of macro instructions designed
specifically to facilitate the construction of a TP message control
program. Please refer to the TERMINAL SUPPORT CHART(S) in
.
this section for specific terminals and how supported.
TCAM provides unified management of terminal devices, local and
remote, including BSC and SDlC devices, through a single Message
Control Program. The TCAM application-program interface has been
defined to provide maximum compatibility with BSAM (READ/WRITE
level) and QSAM (GET/PUT level), yet provide the ability to identify or
specify source and destination of terminal I/O. Network control
functions may be provided in an application program able to issue
TCAM operator control commands.
Teleprocessing applications using TCAM are constructed by providing
a Message Control Program and one or more TCAM application
programs.
TCAM does not provide emUlation of the QTAM interface.
TCAM M4assage Control Program: The TCAM Message Control Program
(MCP) serves as an interface between remote terminals, user-written
application programs, and secondary storage devices on which
messages are queued until their destinations are available to receive
them. The MCP's job is to control the flow of messages to and from
these terminals, application programs, and queuing media, in a manner
that optimizes allocation and scheduling of the computer's resources.
By handling all line control and scheduling of I/O operations for'
remote terminals, the TCAM MCP insulates user-written application
programs from the complex device-dependent considerations inherent
in a TP environment.
In TCAM, messages entered by remote terminals or application
programs are queued by destination. Queuing by destination permits
overlap of line usage in I/O operations; messages having a common
destination may be received simultaneously from more than one
source, even while the destination itself is busy sending or receiving a
message. Disk queuing permits a high volume of concurrent terminal
operations to proceed without requiring excessive real storage for
buffering. TCAM destination queues may be located in main storage or
on disk.
A TCAM MCP contains one or more message handlers. These are
user-coded sets of routines that process messages as they enter and
leave the TCAM MCP. Message handler functions are included by the
selection and coding of TCAM supplied macros; among these functions
are the following: message editing ... validity checking ... message
routing ... record keeping ... error handling ... system control.
Special message-handler facilities are furnished for inquiry and
conversational applications. The path of a message through a
message handler may be varied dynamically based on the source or
destination of the message, or on the presence or absence of certain
character strings in the message header. To supplement TCAMprovided functions, the user may code open or closed subro~tin~s
consisting of assembler macro instructions and include these In his
message handlers. Assembly, linkage-editing, and execution of the
MCP is similar to that for any other problem program. For performance
reasons, the MCP is usually executed as the highest priority user task
in the system, but this is not a requirement.
TCAM permits the user to code one or
more application programs and interface these with the MCP.
Application programmers are insulated from the TP environment; they
issue ordinary GETs and PUTs or READs and WRITEs to move data
between the MCP and application program work areas.
TCAM Application Programs:
TCAM application programs can be SAM compatible, and may be
debugged in a non-TP environment using BSAM or QSAM as the
access method, and a tape, card-reader, disk, card punch, printer,
etc., as I/O devices. Once debugged, many application ~rogram~ can
be plugged into TCAM without reassembly by changing a Single
job-control statement. The user can specify that either messages or
user-defined records be transferred when he issues his GET/READ or
PUT /WRITE macros.
TCAM application programs can be attached dynamically during
execution by the MCP.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- ---- -- -------------_. - DPD
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
OS/VS1
TCAM Service Facilities: TCAM offers an extensive set of service
facilities. Among these are:
A set of operator commands allowing the user to determine the
status of his TP system and alter, activate, or deactivate portions
of that system by entering appropriate commands from the system
console, remote terminals, or application programs. An NCP may
be referred to by its NCP name, and SNA entities are allowed as
operands where applicable.
A checkpoint/restart facility which allows the user to specify that
his MCP environment be restored following system failure or
closedown.
A facility for selectively logging incoming or outgoing messages or
message segments.
Comprehensive debugging aids, including error-recovery and
event-recording facilities, and utilities which permit debugging
information to be dumped to tape or disk and then printed out.
An online test facility (TOT:::) that allows the user to test transmission control units (270X and 3704/3705) and remote terminals
without closing down the MCP or deallocating the device being
tested. When TCAM uses VTAM, TOl TEP provides testing
facilities for the VTAM network.
TCAM MFT, MVT /VS Compatibility: OS TCAM Message Control
Programs must be reassembled to run in the OS/VS environment.
This reassembly allows the MCPs to benefit from the virtual storage
capability of OS/VS. Under OS/VS, TCAM runs as a subsystem in a
virtual partition. Certain TCAM elements, such as the buffer pool, I/O
appendages, control blocks, and tables are fixed in main storage for
the duration of the TCAM task.
System Requirements and Device Support: TCAM operates under
OS/VS1 on a System/370 having at least 144K bytes of main storage.
Normally space on one or more 2314 or 3330/3333/3340 DASD units
will be needed for intermediate storage of message queues.
TCAM supports a wide variety of start/ stop and binary-synchronous
terminals attached remotely via a 2701, 2702, 2703, 3704/3705 (in
emulation mode) or System/370 Model 135, 138 with ICA (#4640);
remote terminal and network configurations supported by OS/VS1.
TCAM in this fashion is itemized in Terminal Support Charts 1 and 2.
In addition to remotely attached terminals, OS/VS1 TCAM supports
direct attachment to either the multiplexer or selector channel of the
2260-2848 Display Complex (local), and direct attachment to the
multiplexer channel of the 7770 Model 3 Audio Response Unit. These
devices are not supported by TCAM when running through VTAM.
TCAM/VTAM Relationship in OS/VS
VT AM controls the telecommunications environment that includes
3704/3705s in network control mode and, optionally for TCAM, locally
attached 3270s. VTAM permits sharing of this telecommunications
network among different applications including those applications
which used TCAM 3704/3705 network control mode support in
previous releases of the operating system. When the TCAM Message
Control Program schedules a read or write operation for a station in
the TCAM/VTAM network, this I/O request is routed to VTAM. To the
TCAM applications, the message looks as if it were handled only by
TCAM.
If a TCAM application program or a TCAM terminal operator issues
TCAM 3704/3705 control commands, o. unique return code and a
response message is provided. This code and message indicate the
command has been intercepted and cannot be executed. Similar
3704/3705 control functions are available through VTAM network
operator commands. TCAM now shares this network with VT AM and is
no longer the sole "owner" of the tel communi cations network.
The installation can provide an interface to the terminal user similar to
the TCAM interface by using the "simulated logon" capability of
VTAM. However, to use the full sharing capabilities of VTAM, the
installation instructs the terminal user to enter an installation-defined
sequence requesting logon to TCAM and includes in the system the
VT AM facility to monitor logons.
This VT AM facility provides the capability to interpret the sequence
entered by the terminal user and to route the interpreted logon request
to the appropriate VTAM application (e.g., TCAM).
Note: A TCAM MCP must be re-assembled for proper operation through
VTAM.
Basic Telecommunications Access Method - BTAM
The facilities of the Basic Telecommunications Access Method (BTAM)
are designed chiefly to provide the basic tools required to write a
telecommunications program. BT AM provides support for terminals
attached other than to the 3704/3705 in network control mode.
These include facilities for creating terminal lists and for performing the
following operations: Initiating and answering calls to and from
terminals on switched networks ... Polling and addressing terminals on
nonswitched multipoint lines ... Changing the status of terminal lists ...
Transmitting and receiving messages ... Code translation ... Retransmitting messages which are received with detected errors
Providing online terminal test facilities ... Keeping error statistics.
SCP 4.108
Nov 78
The support of Binary Synchronous Communications combined with
that of the various start/stop devices gives BTAM a varying degree of
applicability and flexibility. BTAM supports low, medium, and high
speed devices.
BTAM supports Binary Synchronous Communication over nonswitched
(leased or private direct connection) and switched (dial) networks in a
System/370 to terminal communication.
All terminals (except Binary Synchronous Communication) on a
multipoint nonswitched line must be the same type. Terminals may be
mixed within the same problem program.
Further information on terminal support is provided by
Support Charts 1 and 2.
Terminal
Optional communication serviceability facilities are available in BTAM
including error recovery procedures, diagnostic error information, error
counts, and online terminal tests. It is strongly recommended that
these facilities be included since they increase system availability.
OS/VS1 BTAM supports the same functions as OS BTAM and,
therefore, requires no additional programmer training. The user is
cautioned regarding any internal changes that he may have made to
OS/MFT BTAM.
Graphic Programming Services
Graphic Programming Services consists of the functions necessary to
handle graphic input/output, and a set of macro instructions and
problem oriented routines that can be used as building blocks in the
construction of graphic processing programs. These services support
the 3250 Graphic Display System, the 2250 Display Unit, Models 1
and 3, and the 2260 direct attachment (local). This access method
includes:
Macro instructions to generate orders for the 3250 and the 2250
Models 1 and 3, including the Model 1 with the graphic design feature
... Data handling aids for arranging orders and data in virtual storage
prior to transferring them to the graphic display buffer ... Problemoriented routines that dynamically generate orders and data for
displaying on the 3250 and the 2250 Models 1 and 3: alphameric
characters, rectangular grids (linear or semi-log), polar coordinate
grids (linear or semi-log) and circles and arcs ... Input to these routines
can be either fixed point or floating point and can be scaled by the
routines ... Graphic Data Generation Subroutine to generate data,
during program execution, for use with the 2-byte incremental data
modes of the 3250 and the 2250 Model 1 with the Graphic Design
Feature and the 2250 Model 3 ... Light Pen Tracking Subroutine Generates a buffer subroutine during program execution which may be
used on a 3255 or a 2840 Model 2 to track the pen movement on the
CRT and display a pattern showing its current position ... The Graphics
Access Method (GAM) includes: Read/Write level macro instructions
for transferring data between real storage and the graphic display
buffer; Buffer management facilities that allocate, control, and protect
sections of the 3255 or the 2250 Model 1 or 2840 buffer; Routines
that facilitate man-machine communication using 3250, or 2250 or
2260 local, at both the express and basic attention handling levels
(provides synchronous attention handling).
Graphic Subroutine Package - GSP
The Graphic Subroutine Package provides support for graphic
programs written in Assembler language or for the following compilers:
FORTRAN IV E, G or H
Pl/I (F)
FORTRAN IV H-Extended or G1 (Program Products)
Pl/I Optimizing or Checkout Compilers (Program Products)
These services consist of subroutines and functions that enable a
programmer to create a display on one or more 3251 Display Stations
or 2250 Display Units (Models 1 and 3) under OS/VS1. The displays
produced consist of any figures that can be constructed with points,
lines, or· characters, including charts, circles, arcs, rectangles, etc.
The subroutines are requested through the use of CAll statements in
a sequence that produces desired characters or graphic forms on the
3251 or 2250 screen, and that provide two-way communication
between the user's program and the 3251 or 2250 operator (if
desired). In producing desired displays, the subroutines automatically:
Generate necessary graphic orders and and data for the displays ...
Transfer the generated orders and data to the 3255 or the 2250 buffer
for execution, relocating them as necessary ... Allocate, control and
protect sections of virtual storage and of the 3255 or the 2250 buffer
as required by the user's application program .. , Diagnose asynchronous errors and accomplish necessary error handling.
Features available are:
Two levels of graphic order and data grouping, each of which can
be referenced by an entity: (1) element - all orders and data
produced as one call to a GSP subroutine, and (2) sequences - all
orders and data produced by several calls to GSP subroutines.
Acceptance of input data in any two-dimensional rectangular
coordinate system; the data is scaled as appropriate for use by the
graphic subroutine package.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - - ---- --------- -----------,
DPD
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
OS/VS1
Provision for temporarily removing an image from a display while
its associated orders and data are in the buffer, and later
redisplaying the image.
Modification of graphic orders and data produced by a single call
wherever they are located (in real storage or in a buffer) by
another call to the same subroutine.
Display of alphanumeric characters using either the character
generator of the 3250, or 2250 or a series of lines called strokes.
Capability to read information from the buffer into real storage.
Capability to locate the position of the light pen on the screen even
/
if the light pen is pointed to a blank portion of the screen.
Capability to place a tracking symbol on the screen and follow its
motion as it is moved by a 3250 or 2250 operator with the light
pen (restricted to 3250 or 2250 Model 3).
Allowance for in-buffer subroutines that can be repeatedly invoked
through in-buffer linkage (restricted to 3250 or 2250 Model 3).
Ability to check the status of the program while it is being
processed.
Calling any of the subroutines from an assembler language
program.
Single and multiple queueing of attention information, and inline
processing of that information.
Shared DASD
A pool of direct access storage devices may be shared by two to four
S/370 Processors. Devices supported are 2314/2319, 3333 Models
1 and 11, 3330 Models 1, 2 and 11, 3340 Models A2, B1 and B2,
3344 Models B2 and B2F, and 3350 Models A2, A2F, B2 and B2F.
Two S/370 Models 145, 148, 15511, 158, 16511, and 168 Processors
can share a pool of 2305-2 DASD. Two S/370 Model 16511 and 168
Processors can also share a pool of 2305-1 DASD. The catalog,
program libraries, and user data sets may be accessed by any
processor. Advantages are reduced file maintenance, improved
operational flexibility, and reduced disk space requirements. The
system establishes access for each catalog generation. Exclusive
access for all other data sets is controlled by using the RESERVE
macro.
System Support Programs
Linkage Editor
The Linkage editor combines separately compiled or assembled object
modules into one or more load modules that is in a format suitable for
loading by the control program and for subsequent execution. It also
combines previously edited load modules with each other or with
object modules.
Features - Although linking or combining of program modules is its
primary function, the linkage editor also:
Provides CSECT ordering and page boundary alignment facilities.
Incorporates modules from data sets other than those in its
primary input, either automatically or upon request.
Aids program modification by replacing and deleting control
sections as directed by linkage editor control statements.
Defines the storage requirements for the common control sections
generated by the assembler and by FORTRAN compilers, and the
static external areas generated by PL/I compilers.
Provides processing options and logs diagnostic error messages.
Maintains an audit trail of compilation, linkage editing dates and
levels and modifications on a CSECT basis within a load module
via the Identification Record (lOR).
System Requirements - The linkage editor is designed for a virtual
partition of 192K bytes, but can operate in the minimum virtual
partition of 64K bytes.
Loader
The Loader combines the basic editing and loading functions of the
linkage editor with program loading (fetch) in one job step. It loads
object modules produced by a language processor and load modules
produced by the linkage editor directly into virtual storage for program
execution.
System Assembler
The OS/VS1 System Assembler is a programming tool for the
implementation of programs using the IBM System/370 instruction set.
The System Assembler gives the user access to hardware and
operating system functions and permits the user to generate and
maintain the Operating System/Virtual Storage 1. Among the features
supported by this assembler are:
Macro Instructions - The macro capability provided by the
assembler is a programming tool providing interfaces to the
OS/VS1 Input/Output Supervisor by means of Data Management
macros, access to the complete OS/VS1 capabilities through the
use of Supervisor Macros, and the ability to include programmer
defined macros in assembler programs for special applications.
Conditional Assembly Statements - Conditional assembly statements
are uS3d to alter the sequence in which statements are processed,
SCP 4.109
Nov 78
or to specify selective assembly of instructions. The conditional
assembly mechanism is a key element in the macro feature.
Private Libraries - A private library may contain assembler language
statements. These can be macro definitions or code that is to be
inserted into the program by the COpy statement.
Dynamic Work Areas - The assembler provides a mechanism for
establishing addressability to independently allocated storage
areas.
System Requirements - The OS/VS1 System Assembler uses the S/370
Standard Instruction Set. This assembler runs efficiently in 128K of
virtual storage and requires a minimum of 64K of virtual storage. In
addition to the standard OS/VS1 requirements, the System Assembler
requires space in auxiliary storage for the following data sets: System
Input and three Intermediate data sets for work storage.
Depending on program requirements, additional data sets may be
needed for Macro Definition library, print output, object module output,
and punch output.
The OS/VS1 System Assembler contains the following enhancements
to OS Assembler F: SETC values and character relation terms may be
up to 255 characters in length (the old limit was 8 characters) ...
Fewer restrictions and extended functions for conditional assembly
language ... Three additional system variable symbols (&SYSPARM,
&SYSTIME and &SYSDATE) ... Extended mnemonics for RR-type
branch instructions ... Improved diagnostics and debugging facilities.
System Utilities
These programs are used to maintain system control data at an
organizational or system level. The functions performed by the system
utility programs are:
IEHPROGM - Builds and maintains system control data and modifies
the password data set.
IEHMOVE - Moves or copies logical collections of IBM System/370
OS/VS1 data.
IEHLlST - Lists system control data such as data sets cataloged in
the system catalog, directory entries of partitioned data sets,
and VTOC entries.
IEHIOSUP - Updates entries in the supervisor call library.
IEHDASDR - Initializes direct access volumes for use with the
operating system and dumps data to or restores data from these'
volumes.
IFCDlPOO - Reinitializes the system data set, SYS1.LOGREC.
IEHINITT - Writes volume label sets in EBCDIC, in BCD, or in ASCII
code on magnetic tapes.
IEHATLAS - Locates and assigns an alternate track to replace a
defective track.
IFHSTATR - Selects, formats, and writes information from Type 21
(error statistics by volume) records.
Device Support Facilities - Initializes direct access storage volumes
for use with the Operating System, analyzes DASD tracks and
conditionally reclaims tracks previously flagged as defective.
System Data Set Utilities
These programs reorganize, change or compare data at the data set
and/or record level, and are required for the proper generation and
maintenance of the system control program. The following general
functions are performed by these utilities:
IEBCOPY - Copies, compresses, merges, loads, and unloads
partitioned data sets.
IEBGENER - Copies a sequential data set or members of a
partitioned data set, or converts a data set from sequential to
partitioned organization.
IEBPTPCH - Prints or punches records residing in a sequential or
partitioned data set.
IEBUPDTE - Updates a symbolic library.
IEBEDIT - Edits input job stream data set from a master input job
stream.
IEBTCRIN - Constructs records from input read from the IBM 2495
Tape Cartridge Reader. Generation of a 2495 is required for the
inclusion of the IEBTCRIN utility into the operating system.
IEBDG - Can create output data sets either with internally
generated test data or externally supplied input. These data
sets can be sequential, indexed sequential, or partitioned.
IEBCOMPR - Compares two identically organized sequential or
partitioned data sets at the logical record level.
IEBISAM - Can copy, reorganize, load, or unload an indexed
sequential data set.
IEBIMAGE - New 3800 Utility provides means for the user to create
or modify and to store in SYS1.IMAGELIB Forms Control Buffer
records, Copy Modification records, Graphic Character
Modification records, and Character Arrangement tables. Input
to the Utility consists of simple control statements. User can
specify for FCB records forms sizes, number of lines at each
vertical spacing, and line positions for simulated channel control
punches. For Copy Modification, control statements include the
text and its position within each copy of the pages of a data set.
EXisting Copy Modification records can also be modified.
Graphic Character Modification statements provide means for
combining and naming groups of graphic characters, including
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --- - --------------- - --.-
DPD
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
OS/VS1
any characters already in SYS1.IMAGELlB, and to assist in
storing in the system new graphic characters of user's own
design. Character Arrangement tables can be created or
modified to print with different character sets, to include Graphic
Character Modifications, and to assign data codes to graphics
or to change existing assignme,1ts.
• IEHDASDR - Dumps and restores data sets.
Independent Utilities
The following independent utilities do not operate under the OS/VS1
control program, but they support OS/VS1 with the following services:
IBCDASDI -Initializes direct access volumes for LIse with the
operating system.
ICAPRTBL - Performs stand-alone buffer loading for the IBM 3211
and 3203-4 printers.
IBCDMPRS - Performs unloading and loading of data between
DASD and a removable volume.
Device Support Facilities - Initializes direct access storage volumes
for use with the Operating System, analyzes DASD tracks and
conditionally reclaims tracks previously flagged as defective.
An online test facility (TOl TEP) is provided for telecommunications
networks under VTAM. See Virtual Telecommunications Access
Method - VTAM for a description of TOl TEP.
Online Test Executive Program - Ol TEP
The Online Test Executive Program (OL TEP) is a function designed to
direct the selection, loading and execution of the Online Test sections
(OL 1's) in OS/VS1.
Ol TEP with the related OL T allows the testing of Input/Output
Hardware components of a system, concurrent with the running of
customer jobs. Concurrent debug with OL TEP is supported in
OS/VS1 for systems with 144K or more.
The OL TEP /OL T system is designed for: Diagnosing I/O errors
Verifying I/O hardware repairs and Engineering Changes ... Exercising
a device requiring dynamic adjustments ... Checking I/O Hardware ...
Integrity of customer data.
As a job under OS/VS, it is called by standard Job Control language
. and is under the control of the operating system at all times. It uses
the facilities of OS/VS to accomplish the testing and competes with
other jobs in the system for use of these facilities when running in a
multiprogramming environment.
Definition of Test Runs can be entered via console or non-console
devices. Prompting is available on consoles to aid in defining tests to
be run.
Customer Engineering will supply the OL Ts to the customer on
magnetic tape or cards. The Ol Ts must be reformatted and link edited
into a partitioned data set in order to be used under the operating
system.
OL TEP executes in the pageable area of real storage. It requires a
minimum of 64K of virtual storage for the OL TEP modules, and a
minimum of 4K of real storage for the OL Ts to be loaded and
executed.
Dynamic Support System - DSS
Dynamic Support System (DSS) is no longer supported on OS/VS1
and is deleted from the OS/VS1 Release 6.7 distribution libraries.
SCP 4.110
Nov 78
attributes, and the contents of the module's System Status Index (SSI)
... Listing of program modifications to a load module library ... Map of
the resident reenterable load module area.
The minimum virtual storage requirement for HMBLIST is 64K bytes.
In addition to the standard system residence, HMBLIST requires space
in auxiliary storage for at least the following data sets: System Input,
Print Output, and one or more load modules and/or object module
data sets (load module data sets require DASD).
HMASPZAP - This service aid program assists user authorized personnel
to: Inspect and modify instructions and data in any load module that
exists as a member of a partitioned data set '" Inspect and modify
data in a specific data record that exists in a direct access data set ...
Dump an entire data set, a specific member of a partitioned data set,
or any portion of a data set residing on a direct access device.
HMDSADMP - This service aid is a macro instruction that allows the user
to generate a stand-alone dump program that is specifically tailored to
his needs. HMDSADMP can generate two types of dump programs:
one high-speed, the other low-speed. The high-speed version can write
the control registers, contents of real storage, and, optionally, the page
data set onto a tape volume in large blocks. The low-speed version can
write the control registers and the contents of real storage to a printer
or tape volume in unblocked, printable format.
HMDPRDMP - This service aid allows the user to format and print a
storage dump of either virtual or real storage when utilizing the dump
tape produced by the high-speed version of the HMDSADMP service
aid, dumps in the SYS1.DUMP data sets, or print a real storage dump
when utilizing the tape produced by the low-speed version of
HMDSADMP. It also edits and prints the Generalized Trace Facility
trace data set and formats the SYS1.DUMP data set.
IMCJOBQD - This service aid produces a formatted copy of the contents
of the job queue data set and related scheduler work area data sets.
This program operates independent of the OS/VS1 control program,
and does not alter the existing status of the records that are displayed.
JESDUMP - This service aid provides selective, non-destructive main
storage dumps of JECS and Queue Manager errors. This facility
should only be used when a spool or Queue Manager error is
suspected .
JOB LIST VERIFICATION - A service aid that provides selective nondestructive main storage dumps of Job List Manager errors. This
facility should only be used when a Job List Manager error is
suspected.
HMASMP - This program is used for the application of Program
Temporary Fixes (PTFs) prepared in the new Systems Modification
Program format. It is designed tn improve the quality and reliability of
the support process by recording the status of the system so that
modifications will not be applied where inappropriate. Also, updating
will be easier since libraries, modules, macros, and PTFs can all be
updated and applied via one programming procedure.
Analysis Program-1 (AP-1) aids the operator in analyzing 3350 or 3344
DAS error situations and in isolating such errors into hardware or
media related areas.
AP-1 may be directed to test for hardware errors only or hardware and
media errors. Simple result messages appear on the operator console.
Detailed error-related data are directed to SYSPRINT.
Additional Service Aids
AP-1 will only analyze errors associated with 3350 or 3344 devices
and requires that one of these devices be on the system.
The following service aid facilities are also available under the
Operating System/Virtual Storage 1. These programs aid in the
diagnosing of system or application program errors by: Gathering
information about the cause of a failure ... Formatting and printing
information in a form that makes it easy to use ... Aiding in the
development and application of a fix for a given problem.
The Display Exception Monitoring Facility (DEMF), Selectable Unit (SU)
24 is a serviceability aid, which offers users of 3270 Information
Display Systems in local or BSC mode assistance in locating a
hardware problem in a communication network. In remote mode, the
3270 must communicate through a 270x or 370x on E.P. mode.
HMAPTFLE - This program aids in the application of a PTF to the system
by producing the JCL statements that are required for the proper
application of the temporary fix. When a PTF is to be applied to a
module, the user supplies information on the module and CSECT to
which the PTF is to be applied. The program then either produces the
necessary Job Control Statements for application of the PTF; or, if
specified, dynamically invokes the Linkage Editor to update the
operating system. The program executes in the paged section of real
storage and requires a virtual partition of 64K bytes unless the Linkage
Editor is dynamically invoked, then a 128K virtual partition is required.
IFCEREPO - Edits and prints environment error records.
HMBLIST - This Linkage Editor service aid program produces various
formatted listings which may be used for system serviceability and
diagnostic purposes. Depending on options specified on HMBLIST
control statements, the following listings may be produced: Formatted
load module listings ... Formatted object module listings ... Load
module map and cross-reference listings ... Map and cross-reference
listings of the system nucleus ." Listings of the data stored in the
CSECT Identification records of load modules ... Load module map and
cross-reference listings showing relocated addresses .. , Load module
summary data including alias names entry point address(es), module
Display Exception Monitoring Facility
DEMF is logically composed of two tasks: a logging function and a
display function. The logging function runs as a system task under
OS/VS1. It is passed communication error records created for the
SYS1.LOGREC data set. The display function is a component that
runs under TCAM, CICS/VS, or IMS/VS. It presents a structured
display of the errors accumulated by the logging function at the user
request.
Generalized Trace Facility
The Generalized Trace Facility (GTF), is a standard feature in the
OS/VS1 system operating on S/370 Processors of 144K bytes or
more. It is a program service that assists users in performing problem
determination and diagnosis by tracing system events, user events, or
both. GTF consists of two major functions, the Generalized Trace
function and the Trace Edit function.
The Generalized Trace function is a system service that can be
optionally started from the master console. It executes as a system
task in a partition. When the Generalized Trace function is started, the
user also has the option of tracing internally in the GTF partition or
externally to a data set on an auxiliary device. The Generalized Trace
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------------------- ------.- DPD
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
OS/VS1
function supports a S/370 Processor storage size of 144K bytes or
more for internal tracing and 160K bytes or more for external tracing.
The Trace Edit function is a feature of the HMDPRDMP service aid and
provides the user with a selective data reduction capability for the
trace data set or formats GTF trace data contained within a storage
dump produced by HMDSADMP or dumps in the SYS1.DUMP data set.
It runs as a problem program and can be invoked via JCL. The Trace
Edit function supports the minimum system support size.
Conversational Remote Job Entry - CRJE
Conversational Remote Job Entry (CRJE) allows remote access to
OS/VS1 via low-cost printer-keyboard terminals. Terminal users share
a central System/370 to submit jobs for execution, update and
prepare programs and data, list job output, all concurrently with normal
background OS/VS1 operations. An easy-to-use command language is
provided to control entry, editing, inquiry and other control functions
provided.
Among the features supported are: Supports 2740, 2741, 3767 (as a
2740-1 or 2741), and 1052 Printer-Keyboard terminals using BTAM ...
Logon security ... Data set protection ... Library storage of remotely
entered programs and data ... Administrative aids ... Data editing and
minipulation capability ... Operator control of network ... Job status
inquiry at terminal or console ... Routing of output data to central
computer output devices or selectively to a remote terminal.
DASD space on a 2314, 2319 or 3330-1,-2/3333-1 Disk Storage
Facility is required for CRJE tables, System Data Sets and Work Areas.
Additional DASD space must be provided for user library data sets and
directories, the exact amount must be established by the using
installation. The 3350, 3344, 3330 Model 11 and 3333 Model 11
DASDs are not supported by CRJE.
A 2701, 2702, 2703, 3704 or 3705 (in emulation mode only) or Model
135 ICA (#4640) with a Type I terminal control is required on the
multiplexer channel with appropriate features for attachment of 1050
(1051 control unit Model 1 or 2),2740 Model 1, 2741 or 3767 (as a
2740-1 or 2741) terminals over communication lines. All 2740
terminals must have the record checking feature and may not have the
station control feature. If BTAM Online Test facilities are omitted from
CRJE, full system resources must be made available to the Customer
Engineer for terminal maintenance when required.
Program Products
There are a large number of program products which may be ordered
to support OS/VS. The program product section of the sales manual
pages should be referenced for more information and ordering
instructions.
Current System Programs (CSP) Under OS/VS
Type I CSPs, such as Sort and the Language Compilers, are not
distributed as part of the OS/VS SCPo Those wishing to continue using
them may transfer them over from their OS Release 21.8 or later
system. If the CSP is on a DASD device accessible to a VS system,
then the VS system's SYS1.PROCUB need only be updated to include
the CSPs cataloged procedures. These procedures should contain a
JOBUB or STEPUB DO card referencing the data set containing the
CSP. If the CSPs reside on a DASD device not accessible to VS, then
they should be copied to one with the IBM Utility IEBCOPY. The VS
system's SYS1.PROCUB should be updated accordingly.
Those customers not on OS Release 21.8 must order this or a later
release of the OS DUBs. They would then perform a processor only
sysgen as described in the as System Generation Guide (GC286554). In so doing, the CSP target library and the procedural library
should be one accessible by the VS system.
Ordering instructions for the Release 21.8 DUBs are the same as for
Release 21.7, which are available in the Release 21.7 Guide (GC6730).
Type I Current System Programs (CSP) Under VS
Program Name
Program Number
Notes
COBOLF
COBOL F Library
·COBOL LCP
Full ANS COBOL V2
Full ANS COBOL V2 Library
FORTRAN G
FORTRAN H
FORTRAN G & H Library
FORTRAN Syntax Checker
PL/I F
PL/I F Library
PL/I Syntax Checker
SORT /MERGE
360S-CB-524
360S-LM-525
360C-CV-713
360S-CB-545
360S-LM-546
360S-FO-520
360S-FO-500
360S-LM-501
360S-FO-550
360S-NL-511
360S-LM-51 2
360S-PL-552
360S-SM-023
1
1
2
3
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
Programs withdrawn, but will operate on OS/VS1 Release 1.
Orderable as an Independent Component Release.
Teleprocessing support is not available in this environment since
QTAM is not supported by VS, and PL/I F does not support
TCAM.
SCP 4.111
Nov '78
Minimum VS1 Configuration
The minimum configuration required for VS1 operation or SYSGEN is:
S/370 Model 135, 135-3, 138, 145, 145-3, 148, 15511, 158,
16511, 168, or 3031 Processor.
144K bytes of available real storage t
A multiplexer channel.
A selector or block multiplexer channel.
For VS1 operation, two of the following DASD spindles are
required, 2314/2319, 3330 Models 1, 11 or 3333 Models '1, 2,
11, 3340/3344 or 3350. These spindles must be of the same
type. Additional spindles may be required to meet customer
needs.
For VS1 distribution library installation and SYSGEN, three 3330
Models 1, 11 or 3333 Models 1, 2, 11, or three 3340 drives
with 3348 Model 70 Data Modules, or four 3340 drives with
3348 Model 35 Data Modules, or four 2314/2319s are
required. The required number of 3330/3333 spindles may be
the 3350 in 3330 Model 1 or 11 compatibility mode, and the
3350 in native mode may be the new system residence device.
The 3340 spindles may be provided by the appropriate logical
3340 volumes on the 3344.
A SYSIN device (card reader or tape).
A SYSOUT Printer (printer or tape).
A SYSOUT Punch (punch or tape).
A console.
A 9-track tape drive' .
t
The OS/VS1 starter systems require a minimum of 160K bytes
of real storage (see the "Starter System" section for more
information).
• Distribution of the SCP, component releases, emulator SCPs
and PTFs are made on 9-track; therefore, a 9-track tape on the
system or access to another system meeting the minimum
configuration requirements and having a 9-track tape at the
customer installation is required for system generation and
maintenance. Note, a tape drive is also recommended for the
output from the high-speed stand-alone dump program
(HMDSADMP). This may be the same drive used for generation
and maintenance.
System Generation
This is the process of preparing a specially tailored operating system
to match the machine configuration and operating system options
selected by the user. This process uses the VS1 starter system or the
user's current operational VS1 system, and requires the following
programs: Control Program ... Data Management Data Set Control,
BSAM, QSAM, BPAM ... Assembler ... Linkage Editor ... Utilities.
PIDdistributes on tape for 2314/2319, 3330/3333, 3340 or 3350
residence the required libraries (Partitioned Data Sets) which contain
the OS/VS1 system modules and the system macro instructions
needed for the system generation process when OS/VS1 is ordered.
The same system requirements are required for maintenance as for
generations since some changes may require a full or partial system
generation.
Starter System
The standard starter system for OS/VS1 is a special VS1 system
ordered separately.
The starter system has the basic elements necessary for system
generation in a form that is directly usable by a majority of customers.
The starter system functions with a variety of different I/O units at
"standard" addresses. Customers may use the starter system to
perform system generation if there are appropriate matching units and
addresses in their own configuration.
Dedicated Data Set Support is used in SYSGEN for the utility data sets
in assemblies, link edits, and data set copies.
The starter system runs on a System/370 which meets the minimum
system requirements. RMS (Recovery Management System) routines
for all S/370 Processors are included in the system libraries thus
allowing processor independence of the Starter System SCPo The
current levels of the starter systems require a minimum of 160K of real
storage. If a customer requires a 144K starter system, then the
Release 5 starter system should be ordered from theManager of Order
Control at PID.
Customers should be encouraged to match unit addresses with those
of the starter system to the greatest degree practical. Unit address are
established as part of the normal physical planning and cable order
process; therefore, phYSical installation plans should be reviewed
where appropriate.
The following chart shows the devices supported by the·starter system,
the system functions for which they may be used, and the three
character address assigned to each unit. The OS/VS1 starter system
supports all the devices at the address specified.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- --- - -------------.- DPD
SCP 4.112
Nov 78
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
OS/VSl
STARTER SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS CHART
Min.
Reqd
1
Device
MPX
Channel
System
Console
3066
3158 (Note 3)
3213 (Note 4)
3210/3215 (Note 5)
019
010,014
011,015
009,OlF
219
System Input
2540 Reader
3505 Reader
1442 Reader/Punch
2400/3400(7-Tr-DC)
2400/3400(9-track)
OOC
012
OOA
20C
2540 Punch
1442 Reader/Punch
2400/3400(7-Tr-DC)
2400/3400(9-track)
3525 Punch
000
OOA
3211
1403
2400/3400(7-Tr-DC)
2400/3400(9-track)
3800
002,004
OOE,OOF
Punch Output
Print Output
New system
018
2305-2
2314 (or 2319 on CHAN 1)
3340/3344
3350
3
2314 (or 2319 on CHAN 1)
3340 (M35)
3330-1 /3333-1
3330-1,-11/3333-11
3340/3344(M70)
3350
Three system
generation
utility data
sets and the
three object
program data
sets (Note 2)
280,281
282,283,284
380,381
382,383
480,481
482,483
200
180,181
182,183,184
280,281
282,283,284
380,381
382,383
480,481
482,483
180,181
182,183
118
202
20E
280,281
282,283
218
380,381
382,383
480,481
482,483
100
130,131,132
133,134
150,151,152
153
158,159,15A
15B
lCO,lCl,lC2
lC3
148,149,14A
14B
230,231,232,
233,234
250,251,252,
253
258,259,25A,
25B
2CO,2Cl,2C2,
2C3
248,249,24A,
24B
330,331,332,
333,334
350,351,352,
353
358,359,35A,
35B
3CO,3Cl,3C2,
3C3
348,349,34A
34B
230,231,232,
233,234
Note 6
330,331,332,
333,334
Note 6
Note 6
Note 6
Note 6
Note 6
013
3330-1/3333-1
Starter
System and
Distribution
Libraries
(See Note 7)
Selector
Channel 4
209,21 F
180,181
182,183,184
3330-1,-11/3333-11
5
Selector
Channel 1
Device Address (Note 1)
Selector
Selector
Channel 3
Channel 2
Function
2305-2
2314 (or 2319 on Chan 1)
3330-1/3333-1
3330-11/3333-11
3340/3344
3350
130,131,132
133,134
150,151,152
153
158,159,15A
15B
lCO,lCl,lC2
lC3
148,149,14A
14B
100
130,131,132
133,134
150,151,152
153
158,159,15A
15B
lCO,lCl,lC2
lC3
148,149,14A
14B
Note 6
t-lote 6
Note 6
Note 6
Note 6
Note 6
230,231,232,
233,234
Note 6
330,331,332,
333,334
Note 6
Note 6
Note 6
Note 6
Note 6
Note 6
Note 6
Note 6
Note 6
Note 6
Note 6
Notes: 1. DASD 3330/3333 Models 1 and 11, 3340 and 3350 are
generated on channel 1 and accessed on channell, with
channels 2 thru 4 as optional channels.
2.
The three system generation utility data sets and the three
object program data sets do not require additional direct
access devices if sufficient space is available on the volumes
that contain the new system and the starter system.
3.
The 31 38 and 3148 consoles use the 3158 console support
(Display Mode).
4.
3286-2 optional printer for S/370 138/148.
5.
3138 and 3148 Console when IMPLed in Printer/Keyboard
mode.
6.
See the addresses under channell;
addresses for sysgen.
7.
The DUB Installation and Build process requires space equal
and additional to the distribution library space. The
spindle(s) available after DUB installation and build may be
used for the new system being generated.
use only those
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- -----------------_. -
SCP 4.113
Nov 78
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
OS/VS1
DPD
Feature Support
#5479 - Optical Mark Reading
The following features are supported by the Operating System/Virtual
Storage 1. Other features, not listed, have no specific programming
support; their existence is ignored by the control program. Attempts to
use OS/VS1 with unsupported features may cause unpredictable
results. For brevity this list does not include those basic features or
control units which are required to connect a supported device.
PROCESSOR SPECIAL FEATURES
Feature
Advanced Control Program
Support
Conditional Swapping
Block Multiplexer Channel
Floating Point Arithmetic
Multiplexer Subchannels,
Additional
1403 Printer (Models 2,3,7 ,N1) :
Supported:
#8640 - Universal Character Set
#8641 - Universal Character Set
1419 Magnetic Character Reader (Model 1) :
Supported:
# 1445 - Batch Numbering
#5739,#5741 - Program Control for Pocket
Lights
135
135-3
N/A
1051
1421
STD
STD
1425-6 STD
1001 STD STD
1051
1421-41 STD STD
1427-9
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
1850
1450
1850
1450
1850
STD
STD
2001
STD
3274
3274
3274
3274
Pre
-Req
3274
3274
N/A
STD
STD
N/A
STD
STD
3840
Pre
-Reg
STD
STD
3910
STD
STD
2250 Display Unit (Models 1,3)
STD
3910
STD
STD
2260 Display Station (see VTAM, TCAM and BTAM Terminals
Supported)
Block Multiplexer Subchannels,
Additional
N/A
Channel-to-channel
N/A
Clock Comparator and
CPU Timer
2001
Direct Control
Extended Control Program
Support
Extended Precision Floating
Point
1 288 Optical Page Reader (Model 1) :
Supported:
#5370 - Numeric Handwriting
#5479 - Optical Mark Reading
3900
138
145
145-3 148
3905-7 3906-7 3906-7 4951-44953 4953
-4
-4
1401/1440/1460 Compatibility4457
4457
4457 4457 4457 4457
1401, 1410/7010 Compatibility N/ A
4458 4458 4458
N/A
N/A
Integrated Communications
Adapter
4640
4640
4640 N/A
N/A N/A
2319 Integrated File Adapter
4650
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A N/A
3330/3340 File Adapter
4655
4655
4655
N/A N/A
Integrated Storage Controls
N/A
N/A
4660' 4660 4660
N/A
Integrated Printer Adapter
4670,
4670, 4670. N/A
N/A N/A
2,7
2,7
2.7
OS/DOS Compatibility
STD
STD
STD
STD STD
STD
Selector Channel
6981-2 N/A
N/A
6982-4 N/A N/A
3210 Adapter
7844-5 7844
7844-5 7844-5N/ A
N/A
321 5 Adapter
7855 7855 N/A
7855
7855
N/A
Integrated 3203-4 Printer
Attachment
N/A
N/A
8075 N/A
N/A 8075
-6
-6
Two Channel Switch for ISC
N/A
N/A
N/A
8100' 8100 8100
Word Buffer
8810 Pre
N/A
STD
N/A
N/A
-Req
3345 Models 3, 4. 5, available on 145.
Insert PSW Key and Set PSW Key From Address, which are part of
Advanced Control Program Support, are standard on these machines,
but are called PSW Key Handling.
These instructions are part of Advanced Control Program Support.
15511
Feature
Advanced Control Program
Support
STD
Conditional Swapping
STD
Block Multiplexer Channel
1433-5
Buffer Expansion
N/A
Channel-to-Channel
1850
Clock Comparator and
CPU Timer
STD
Direct Control
3274
Extended Precision Floating
3700
Point
Extended Channels
N/A
Floating Point Arithmetic
STD
1401/1440/1460 Compatibility 3950
1401,1410/7010 Compatibility 3950
High Speed Multiply
N/A
Integrated Storage Controls
N/A
2nd Byte Multiplexer Channel 4990
OS/OOS Compatibility
5450
7070/7074 Compatibility
7117
7080 Compatibility
N/A
709/7090/709411 Com pat.
N/A
Staging Adapter for ISC
N/A
3213 Printer Attachment
N/A
3210 Adapter
7844-5
3215 Adapter
7855
Two-Channel Switch for ISC
N/A
Extended Control Program
Support
N/A
1442 Card Read Punch (Model N1) :
Supported:
# 1532 - Card Image (for problem program
use only)
1442 Card Read Punch (Model N2) :
Supported:
#1531 - Card Image
1443 Printer (Model N1) :
Supported:
#5558 - 24 Additional Print Positions
21 50 Console
2305 Fixed Head Storage (Models 1 ,2) :
2835 Storage Control
Required:
Not Supported: Model 2 on S/370-135
2314 Direct Access Storage Facility (Model A1):
Supported:
#8170 - Two-Channel Switch
2319 Disk Storage
2401 Magnetic Tape Unit (Models 1,2,3,4,5,6)
2402 Magnetic Tape Unit:
Supported:
#3472 - Dual Density (800-1600 bpi)
2403 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control:
Supported:
#3471 - Dual Density (800-1600 bpi)
2415 Magnetic Tape Unit:
Supported:
#3471,#3472 - Dual Density (800-1600
bpi)
2420 Magnetic Tape Unit (Models 5,7)
2495 Tape Cartridge Reader
2501 Card Reader (Models B1 ,B2) :
Supported:
#1531 - Card Image
158
16511
168
3031
STD
STD
1433-5
N/A
1850
STD
STD
N/A
1432
N/A
STD
STD
N/A
1435
N/A
STD
STD
N/A
N/A
1850
2520 Card Read Punch (Models A1 ,B1) :
Supported:
#1531 - Card Image
STD
3274
STD
N/A
STD
N/A
STD
3274
2540 Card Read Punch (Model 1) :
Supported:
#1531 - Card Image
3700
N/A
STD
3950
3950
N/A
4650
4990
5450
7117
N/A
N/A
7220
7840
N/A
N/A
7905
STD
3850
STD
N/A
N/A
4520
N/A
N/A
N/A
7117
7118
7119
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
STD
3855
STD
N/A
N/A
4525
4650
N/A
N/A
7127
7128
7129
7220
N/A
N/A
N/A
7905
STD
N/A
STD
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
2596 Card Read Punch (Model 1)
8750
N/A
N/A
STD
I/O Features
1052 Printer-Keyboard (see VTAM, TCAM and BTAM Terminals
Supported)
1287 Optical Reader (Models 1 ,2,3,4,5) :
Supported:
#3850 - Expanded Symbol Set
#3945 - Farrington 7B Font
#4470 -1428 and ANSCS OCR Font
#5300 - NCR Optical Type Font
#5370 - Numeric Handwriting
2520 Card Punch (Models A2,A3,B2,B3) :
Supported:
#1531 - Card Image
2671 Paper Tape Reader
2740 Communication Terminal (ModeI1) (see VTAM, TCAM and BTAM
Terminals Supported)
2741 Communication Terminal (see VTAM, TCAM and BTAM
Terminals Supported)
2780 Data Transmission Terminal (see VTAM, TCAM and BTAM
Terminals Supported) :
Supported:
EBCDIC Transparency only
2803,2804 Tape Control (Models 1,2,3) :
Required:
#3228,#3236 - Data Conversion (for all
7 -track tapes that record binary data
such as variable length, format V records and abnormal end dumps. Inclusion of 7 -track tapes without this feature is not recommended.)
Supported:
#7125-#7127,#7135 - 7-track Compatibility
#7185 - 16 Drive Addressing
#7900 - 2420 Attachment
2816 Switching Unit (Model 1) :
Supported:
#1050-#1052,#1055,#2285,
#2286,#4455,
#6392,#6393 - Additional Switching
2821 Control Unit (Models 1 ,2,3,5,6) :
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --- --------------.--.-
DPD
Supported:
#1990 - Column Binary (for problem
program use only)
#8637-#8639 - Universal Character Set
Adapter
2835 Storage Control (Models 1,2) :
Supported:
#8170,#8171 - Two Channel Switch
2844 Auxiliary Storage Control:
Supported:
#8171 - Two Channel Switch
2860 Selector Channel (Models 1,2,3) :
Supported:
# 1850 - Channel-to-Channel Adapter
2870 Multiplexer Channel:
Not Supported: Burst devices (including byte devices with
burst mode options operating in burst
mode) on a multiplexer subchannel.
Magnetic tapes are supported on the
selector subchannels.
Cross channel devices (2804 Tape Control,
2816 Switching Unit, 3803 Tape Control with communicator feature and
either 2-control switch, 3-control
switch or 4-control switch, 3803 Tape
Control with # 81 00 Two-Channel
Switch) attached between any 2870
selector subchannel and any other
selector channel, or between any 2870
selector subchannel and a selector
subchannel of a different 2870.
2880 Block Multiplexer Channel (Models 1,2) :
#7850,#7851 - Two Byte Interface
Supported:
3066 System Console (Model 1)
3158 Console Function
3203 Printer (Model 4) :
S/370 Models 138, 148
Required:
3210 Console Printer-Keyboard
3211 Printer (Model 1) :
Required:
3811 Printer Control Unit
#5554 - 18 Additional Print Positions
Supported
3213 Console Printer
3215 Console Printer-Keyboard
3275 Display Station (Models 1,2) (see VTAM, TCAM and BTAM
Terminals Supported)
3277 Display Station (Models 1,2) (see VTAM, TCAM and BTAM
Terminals Supported)
3284 Printer (Models 1,2)
3286 Printer (Models 1,2)
3287 Printer (Models 1,2) [supported as a 3284/3286]
3288 Printer (Model 2) (supported as a 3286-2)
3330 Disk Storage (Models 1,2,11) :
3333 Disk Storage and Control, or
Required:
3830 Storage Control
3333 Disk Storage and Control (Models 1 ,11) :
#8150 - String Switch
Supported:
3340 Direct Access Storage (Models A2,B1,B2) :
3340 Model A2
Required:
#4301,4302 Fixed Head Feature
Supported:
#6201,#6202 - Rotational Position Sensing
#8150 - String Switch
3344 Direct Access Storage (Models B2,B2F)
3350 Direct Access Storage Facility (Models A2,A2F,B2,B2F,C2,C2F)
Supported:
SCP 4.114
Nov 78
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
OS/VS1
#8150 - String Switch
3410 Magnetic Tape Unit (Models 1,2,3) :
#3211 - Single Density
Supported:
#3221 - Dual Density
#6550 - Seven-Track Tape Unit
#7360 - S/370 Attachment
3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control (Models 1,2,3) :
Supported:
#3211 - Single Density
#3221 - Dual Density
#6550 - Seven-Track Tape Unit
#7360 - S/370 Attachment
3420 Magnetic Tape Unit (Models 3,5,7) :
#3550 - Dual Density
Supported:
#6407 - 7-track
#6631 - Single Density
3420 Magnetic Tape Unit (Models 4,6,8) :
#6420 - 6250 Density
Supported:
#6425 - 6250/1600 Density
3505 Card Reader (Models B1,B2) :
Supported:
#5450 - Optical Mark Read
#6555 - Selective Stacker
3525 Card Punch (Models P1,P2,P3) :
#1533 - Card Read
Supported:
#5272 - Multiple Card Print
#8338 - Two-Line Card Print
3540 Diskette Input/Output Unit (Models B1,B2)
3741 Data Station (Model 2) (see VTAM, TCAM and BTAM Terminals
Supported)
3741 Programmable Workstation (Model 4) (see VTAM, TCAM and
BTAM Terminals Supported)
3767 Communication Terminal (supported as a 2740-1 or 2741) (see
VTAM, TCAM and BTAM Terminals Supported)
3770 Data Communication System (supported as a 2770; 3776/3777
also as a 3780) (see VTAM, TCAM and BTAM Terminals Supported)
3780 Data Communications Terminal (Model 1) (see VTAM, TCAM and
BTAM Terminals Supported)
3800 Printing Subsystem (Model 1) :
Supported:
# 1490 - Burster-Trimmer-Stacker
#5401 - 127 Character Generation Storage
Positions
#8170 - Two Channel Switch
3803 Tape Control (Model 1) :
#1792
Supported:
#1793
#1794
#3551
#6408
#9071
#9073
-
Two-Control Switch
Three-Control Switch
Four-Control Switch
Dual Density
Seven-Track
Communicator 1-2
Communicator 3-4
3803 Tape Control (Model 2) :
#1792
Supported:
#1793
#1794
#5310
#6320
#8100
#9071
#9073
-
Two-Control Switch
Three-Control Switch
Four-Control Switch
Nine-Track NRZI
Seven-Track NRZI
Two-Channel Switch
Communicator 1-2
Communicator 3-4
3811 Printer Control Unit (Models 1,2) :
Supported:
#5553 - Additional (18) Print Positions
3830 Storage Control (Models 1,2,3) :
#8170 - Two-Channel Switch
Supported:
#8171 - Two-Channel Switch, Additional
3851 Mass Storage Facility (Models A1,A2,A3,A4,B1,B2,B3,B4)
Supported:
#4901,4902 MSC Twin Port
#8171 - Two-Channel Switch
#8172 - Two-Channel Switch, Additional
3886 Optical Character Reader (Model 1) :
#3210 - Additional Data Storage
Supported:
#4610 - Additional Instruction Storage
#4720 - Line Marking
#5360 - Numeric Handprinting
#6450 - Serial Numbering
3890 Document Processor (Models A1,A2,A3,A4,A5,A6) :
#5111 - Microfilming
Supported:
#4666 -Item Number/Endorsing
1130 Computing System (see VTAM, TCAM and BTAM Terminals
Supported)
System/3 (see VTAM, TCAM and BTAM Terminals Supported)
System/360 (see VTAM, TCAM and BTAM Terminals Supported)
System/370 (see VTAM, TCAM and BTAM Terminals Supported)
Device Support
The Device Support Chart shows all devices that are supported by
OS/VS1 for system functions and/or non-TP access methods. (For
other telecommunications devices see VTAM, TCAM and BTAM
Terminals Supported). The chart shows for each device the relevant
functions supported.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- ------- - --=:::;:::E';'=
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
OS/VS1
DPD
Devices which are not shown in this chart have no specific programming support under OS/VS1 and their existence is not recognized by
the control program.
Notes:
1)
aSAM (device-dependent only) for journal tapes; BSAM (devicedependent only) for cut-form documents.
2)
BSAM (device-dependent only).
3)
The Selective Tape Listing Feature is not supported.
4)
A console must consist of a printer-keyboard, or a card reader and
printer to simlJlate the actions of a printer-keyboard (composite
console).
5)
Supported for read or punch, but not both simultaneously.
6)
Model 1 only.
7)
Multiple Requesting supported.
8)
File Scan not supported.
9)
Rotational Position Sensing supported (optional feature on 3340).
10) For message queues under TCAM.
11) A Data Set Utility (IEBTCRIN) is provided to read data from the
2495 and create a sequentially organized data set.
12) Punch Feed Read is not supported.
13) As a workstation for RES.
14) Space Compression/Expansion is not supported.
15) Support shown is for 3330s or 3333s as virtual device types. If
real 3330/ 3333s are included as part of 3851, see the
3330/3333 lines above.
16) With 3330/3333 as staging device, Rotational Position Sensing
supported.
17) User Program Libraries only.
18) aSAM (device-dependent only).
19) Supported on Model 138.
20) Supported on Model 148.
21) Supported as a 3213 on Model 138 or 148.
Legend:
I/O Device Support Chart
The following units to a maximum of 768 devices are supported at the
Release 6.0 level by OS/VS1, for the indicated functions.
Console
C
G
Graphic Programming Support
S
Sequential Access Methods
I
Indexed Sequential Access Methods
P
Basic Partitioned Access Method
o
Basic Direct Access Method
Virtual Storage Access Method
A
X
Function Supported
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
SCP 4.115
Nov 78
-------- ---- ----------------.-
SCP 4.116
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
OS/VS1
DPD
Nov 78
DEVICE SUPPORT CHART
Input/Output Units
1052 Printer-Keyboard
1287 Optical Reader
1288 Optical Page Reader
1403 Printer
1419 Magnetic Character Reader
1442 Card Read Punch
1442 Card Punch
1443 Printer
21 50 Console
2250 Display Unit
2260 Display Station
2305 Fixed Head Storage (Notes 7,8)
2314 Direct Access Storage
Facility (Notes 8,10)
2319 Disk Storage (Notes 8,10)
2401 Magnetic Tape Unit
2402 Magnetic Tape Unit
2403 Magnetic Tape Unit and
Control
2415 Magnetic Tape Unit
2420 Magnetic Tape Unit
2495 Tape Cartridge Reader
2501 Card Reader
2520 Card Read Punch
2520 Card Punch
2540 Card Read Punch
2596 Card Read Punch
2671 Paper Tape Reader
2740 Communication Terminal
2741 Communication Terminal
2770 Data Communication System
2780 Data Transmission Terminal
3066 System Console
·3138 Console (Note 19)
3148 Console (Note 20)
3158 Console Function
3203 Printer
3210 Console Printer-Keyboard
3211 Printer
3213 Console Printer
3215 Console Printer-Keyboard
3251 Display Station
3275 Display Station
3276 (supported as a 3277)
3277 Display Station
3278 (supported as a 3277)
3284 Printer
3286 Printer
3286-2 Console Printer (Note 21)
3287-1, -2 Printer
3288 Printer
3330 Disk Storage (Notes 8,10)
3333 Disk Storage and
Control (Notes 8,10)
3340 Direct Access Storage
Facility (Notes 8,10)
3344 Direct Access Storage (Notes 8,10)
3350 DASF (Notes 8,1 0)
3410 Magnetic Tape Unit
3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control
3420 Magnetic Tape Unit
3505 Card Reader
3525 Card Punch
3540 Diskette I/O Unit
3741 Data Station
3741 Programmable Workstation
3767 Communication Terminal
3770 Data Communication System
3777-2 Communication Terminal (as a
8/360-20 MULTI-LEAVING
Workstation)
3780 Data Communications Terminal
Input Job
Stream
X
In/Out
Work Queue
X5
System
Output
X
Primary
SYSRES
Program
Libraries
c
G
S
I,P,D,A
X
X3
X4
X5
X
X
X4
X1
X2
X3
X2
X
X
X
X4
X
X6
X
X
X
X9
X9
X
X9
X9
X9
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X5
X
X5
X
X12
X12
X4
X4
X4
X4
X11
X
X5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X13
X13
X13
X13
X6
X6
X6
X6
X4
X
X
X
X4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X3
X
X3
X
X
X4
X
X
X9
X9
X9
X
X9
X9
X9
X9
X9
X
X9
X9
X9
X9
X9
X
X
X9
X9
X9
X9
X9
X9
X9
X9
X9
X9
X9
X9
X
X
X
X
X9
X9
X9
X
X
X
X4
X4
X
X5
X
X
X
X
X
X5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X14
X
3790 Communication System
3800 Printing Subsystem
3851 Mass Storage Facility (Note 15)
3886 Optical Character Reader
3890 Document Processor
1130 Computing System
System/3
System/360
System/370
X
X
X
X13
X13
X13
X13
X13
X13
X13
X13
S/8100/DPCX Information System
S/8100/DPPX RJE Workstation Facility
X
X
X
X
X14
X16
X16,17
VTAM, TCAM and BTAM Terminals Supported
VTAM, TCAM and BTAM telecommunications access methods support
the following terminals, programmable features, transmission control
units, and communications controllers. Programmable features which
change the control or transmission characteristics and which are not
shown are not supported. Attempts to use VTAM, TCAM or BTAM with
unsupported features can cause unpredictable results. If the
terminal/feature is not supported by all three access methods, the
access method(s) which does (do) support the terminal/feature is (are)
shown in parenthesis.
X
X16
X2
X18
X16
The user should be aware that many terminal and control unit special
features are transparent to programming, and are therefore readily
usable even though not specifically identified. Note that the appropriate line adapters and hardware attachment features must be included
in the system configuration.
Terminals that are functionally equivalent to those specifically
supported by VTAM, TCAM or BTAM may also function satisfactorily
with VTAM, TCAM or BTAM; the customer is responsible for establishing equivalency. IBM assumes no responsibility for the impact that any
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- ---------- --------_.---
SCP 4.117
Nov 78
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
OS/VS1
DPD
changes to the 18M-supplied programs or products may have on such
terminals.
#7900 - Transmit Interrupt
#9567,#9597 - PTTC/BCD Code
#9571,#9591 - PTTC/EBCD Code
Correspondence Code
REMOTE ATTACHMENT
Terminals and Terminal Features
SS LINES:
IBM TERMINALS
1030 Data Collection System on nonswitched lines: (TCAM,8TAM)
1031 Input Station (Models A1,A2,A3,A4,A5,A6,A7):
Supported:
Attachment of 1031,1033,1034,1035
1031 Input Station (Models 81,82,83,84,85,86,87) :
Attachment of 1035
Supported:
1 033 Printer
1034 Card Punch
1035 8adge Reader
1050 Data Communication System on switched or nonswitched lines:
1051 Control Unit (Models 1 ,2) :
Attachment of 1052,1053,1054,1055,1056,
Supported:
1057,1058,1092,1093
# 1313 - Automatic E08
#4795 - Line Correction
#4796 - Line Correction Release
#5465 - Open Line Detection
#6100 - Receive Interrupt
#9698 - Text Time-Out Suppression
#9700 - Transmit Interrupt
1052 Printer-Keyboard (Models 1 ,2) :
Supported:
# 1313 - Automatic E08
#9567,#9597 - PTTC/8CD Code
#9571,#9591 - PTTC/EBCD Code
1053 Printer (Model 1) :
Supported:
#9567,#9597 - PTTC/BCD Code
#9571,#9591 - PTTC/EBCD Code
1054 Paper Tape Reader (Model 1)
1055 Paper Tape Punch (Model 1)
1056 Card Reader (Models 1 ,3)
1057 Card Punch (Model 1)
1058 Printing Card Punch (Models 1,2)
1092 Programmed Keyboard (Models 1,2)
1093 Programmed Keyboard (~odels 1,2)
2848 Display Control (Models 1,2,3) on nonswitched lines:
(TCAM,BTAM)
Supported:
Attachment of 2260,1053
3901 - Extended Cursor Control
#4787 - Line Addressing
#5340 - Non-Destructive Cursor
#5341 - Non-Destructive Cursor Adapter
Not Supported: Attachment of 1053 (TCAM)
2260 Display Station (Models 1,2) :
#3606 - Extended Cursor Control, AlphaSupported:
meric Keyboard
#4766 - Alphameric Keyboard
Not Supported: Tab feature of #3606
1053 Printer (Model 4) : (BTAM)
Supported:
#9567,#9597 - PTTC/8CD Code
#9571,#9591 - PTTC/EBCD Code
2845 Display Control (Model 1) on nonswitched lines: (TCAM,BTAM)
Supported:
Attachment of 2265,1053
#3301 - Destructive Cursor
# 4801 - Line Addressing
Not Supported: Attachment of 1053 (TCAM)
#7801 - Tab
2265 Display Station (Model 1) :
#4766 - Alphameric Keyboard
Supported:
1053 Printer (Model 4) : (BTAM)
Supported:
#9567,#9597 - PTTC/BCD Code
#9571,#9591 - PTTC/EBCD Code
2740 Communication Terminal (Model 1) on switched or nonswitched
lines:
Supported:
#3255 - Dial Up
# 611 4 - Record Checking
#7479 - Station Control
#8028 - Transmit Control
8301 - 2760 Attachment (TCAM,BTAM)
#9567,#9597 - PTTC/8CD Code
#9571,#9591 - PTTC/EBCD Code
Correspondence Code
2740 Communication Terminal (Model 2) on nonswitched lines:
Supported:
#1495,#1496 - Buffer Expansion
# 1499 - Buffer Receive
#6114 - Record Checking
#9571,#9591 - PTTC/E8CD Code
2741 Communication Terminal (Model 1) on switched or nonswitched
lines:
Supported:
#3255 - Dial Up
# 4708 - Receive Interrupt
2760 Optical Image Unit (Model 1) on switched or nonswitched lines
(TCAM,BTAM)
3767 Communication Terminal (Models 1,2,3) (supported as a 2740-1)
on switched or nonswitched lines:
Required:
#7111 - 2740-1 Start/Stop
Supported:
#9560 - Station Control
3767 Communication Terminal (Models 1,2,3) (supported as a 2740-2)
on nonswitched lines:
Required:
#7112 - 2740-2 Start/Stop
3767 Communication Terminal (Models 1,2,3) (supported as a 2741)
on switched or nonswitched lines:
Required:
#7113 - 2741 Start/Stop
5100/5110 Computer Systems (supported as a 2741) on switched or
nonswitched lines:
Required:
#1525 - Communications Adapter
CMCST (Communicating Magnetic Card Selectric @ Typewriter)
(supported as a 2741 with Correspondence Code) on switched lines:
Supported:
The CMCST is functionally equivalent to a
2741 with Dial Up, Receive Interrupt
and Transmit Interrupt
IBM PROCESSOR AS TERMINALS
(For details of programming support provided within the Processor
when acting as a terminal, see appropriate programming sales
manual pages)
System/7 (supported as a 2740-1 with checking) on switched or
nonswitched lines:
Required:
# 1610 - Asynchronous Communication
Control
Non-IBM TERMINALS
AT&T 83B3 Line Control Type on nonswitched lines
CPT-TWX (Model 33/35) Line Control Type on switched lines
World Trade Telegraph on nonswitched lines
WU 11 5A Line Control Type on nonswitched lines
BSC LINES:
IBM TERMINALS
2790 Data Communication System on switched or nonswitched lines:
(TCAM,BTAM)
2715 Transmission Control Unit (Model 2) :
2740
Required:
Supported:
Attachment of 2798,1035,1053
#3801 - Expanded Capability
#4850 - Local 2740 Adapter
#9401 - Point-to-Point Nonswitched
#9402 - Point-to-point Switched
#9403 - Multipoint Nonswitched
2740 Communication Terminal (Model 1)
2798 Guidance Display Unit (Model 1)
1 035 Badge Reader (Model 1)
1 053 Printer (Model 1)
2770 Data Communication System on switched or nonswitched lines:
2772 Multipurpose Control Unit:
#5010 - Multipoint Data Link Control
Required:
(VTAM)
Supported:
Attachment of 0050.0545.1017.1018.1053.
1255,2203,2213,2265,2502,5496
# 1340 - Automatic Answering
# 1490 - Buffer Expansion (256 bytes)
#1491 - Buffer Expansion Additional (512
bytes)
# 1 91 0 - Conversational Mode
#3250 - Display Format Control
#3650 - E8CDIC Transparency
#3860 - 144 Character Print Line
# 461 0 - Identification
#4690 - Keyboard Correction
#5010- Multipoint Data Link Control
(TCAM,BTAM)
#5890 - Horizontal Format Control
#6555 - Space Compression/Expansion
#7705 - Synchronous Clock
#7950 - Transmit-Receive-Monitor-Print
#9140 - Extended Re-Entry
#9402 - Line Termination - 2-wire
#9761 - Transmission Code E8CDIC
#9762 - Transmission Code ASCII
#9936 -Immediate WACK
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---.=.- =::
:s~1§: D PD
....... -...-
-
SCP 4.118
~~,....
~~
0050 Magnetic Data Inscriber
0545 Output Punch (Models 3,4)
1017 Paper Tape Reader (Models 1,2)
1018 Paper Tape Punch (Model 1)
1053 Printer (Model 1)
1255 Magnetic Character Reader
2203 Printer (Models A 1 ,A2) :
#5558 ~ Print Positions,
Supported:
2213 Printer (Models 1,2)
2265 Display Station (Model 2)
2502 Card Reaper (Models A1 ,A~)
5496 Data Recorder
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
OS/VS1
Nov 78
3669 Remote Communications Unit. Not available on 3651 Model
A25 and B25.
24 Adpitional
2780 Data Transmission Termin!;ll gn switched or nonswitched lines:
Supported:
#134Q ~ Automatic Answering
# 1350 - Automatic Turnaround
#3401 - Dual Communication Interface
#5010 - Multiple Record Transmission
#5020 - Multipoint Line Control
#5820 - 120 Character Print Line
# 5821 - 144 Character Print Line
# 6400 - Selective Character Set
#7850 - Terminal Identification
#8030 - EBCDIC Transparency
#9150 - Extended Retry Tr;3.nsmission
#9761 ~ ASCII Transmission Code
#9762 - EBCDIC Transmission Code
2980 General Banking System on nonswitched lines:
2972 Station Control Unit (Model 8 - RPQ 858160, Model 11 - RPQ
858231):
Supported:
Attachment of 2980,2971
RPQ 835503 - Buffer Expansion
RPQ 858165,858182 - 96-Character Buffer
2980 Teller Station (Model 1 - RPQ 835504, Model 4 - RPQ
858147)
2980 Mministrative Station (Model 2 - RPQ 835505)
2971 Remote Control Unit (Model 3 - RPQ 858144)
3270 Information Display System on nonswitched lines:
3271 Control Unit (Models 1,2) :
Supported:
Attachment of 3277,3284,3286,3287,3288
#1550 - Copy
#9761 - EBCDIC Code
3274 Control Unit (model 1 C) [supported as a 3271]:
Supported:
Attachment of 3277,3278,3284,3286,3287,
3288,3289
3276 Control Unit Display Station (Models 1,2,3,4) [supported as a
3271]:
Supportec!:
Attachment of 3278,3287
#6350 - Selector Light Pen
#9082 - EBCDIC Character Set
3277 Display Station (Models 1,2) :
#6350 - Selector Light-Pen
Supported:
#9089 - EBCDIC Character Set
3278 Display Station (Models 1,2,3,4) [supported as 3277]:
Supported:
#6350 - Selector Light Pen
#9082 - EBCDIC Character Set
3284 Printer (Models 1 ,2) :
Supported:
#9089 - EBCDIC Character Set
3286 Printer (Models 1,2) :
Supported:
#9089 - EBCDIC Character Set
3287 Printer (Models 1,2) [supported as a 3284 or 3286 attached
to 3271-1 or -2]
#9082 - EBCDIC Character Set
Supported:
3288 Printer (Model 2) (supported as a 3286-2) :
Supported:
#9089 - EBCDIC Character Set
3289 Printer (Models 1,2) [supported as a 3286-2]
3270 Information Display System on switched lines (BTAM)
or nonswitched lines: (VTAM,TCAM,BTAM)
3275 Display Station (Models 1,2) :
Supported:
Attachment of 3284
#6350 - Selector Light-Pen
#9089 - EBCDIC Character Set
#9761 - EBCDIC Code
3284 Printer (Model 3) :
Supported:
#9089 - EBCDIC Character Set
3650 Programmable Store System (Supported as a S/3) on switched
lines: (BTAM)
3651 Store Controller (Models A25, B25, A75, B75, C75 D75)
Supported:
Attachment of 3653,3663,3657,3275,
3659,3669,3784
3653 Point of Sale Terminal (Model 1)
3663 Supermarket Terminal (Model 1 P, 2 and 3P)
3657 Ticket Unit (not available on 3651 Models A25 and B25)
3275 Display Station (Model 3)
Supported:
Attachment of 3284
3284 Printer (Model 3)
3659 Remote Communications Unit (Model 1)
2400 BPS non-switched line
Required:
3784 Printer (Model 1) not available on 3651 Models A25 and B25.
3660 Supermarket Scanning System (supported as a S/3) on switched
lines: (BT AM)
3651 Store Controller (Models A60,B60) :
Supp()rted:
Attachment of 3663,3669
3663 SI,JPermark~t Terminal (Models 1,2) :
$!,.!pporteg:
Attachment of 3666
3666 Checkout Sq~nner (Model 1)
3669 $tore QornmlJnications Unit (MQgel 1)
3660 Superm1'lrket Key-Entry System (supported as a S/3) on
switched lineS: U3T AM)
3661 Store Controller:
Supp()rte(:i:
Attachment of 3663
3663 Supermarket Terminal (Models 1,2)
3670 Brokerage Communication System on nonswitched lines: (TCAM)
3671 Shared Terminal Control Unit (Model 1) :
Supported:
Attachment of 3672,3673,3674
#3250 - Display Expansion
3672 Executive Console (Model 1)
3673 Data Display (Model 1)
3674 Printer-Keypoard (Model 1)
3735 Prograrpmablf'l Buffered Terminal (Model 1) on switched or
nonswitched lines:
Supported:
Attachment of 5496,3286
5010 - Multipoint Data Link Control
#9761 - EBCDIC Code
#9762 - ASCII Code
3286 Printer (Model 3)
5496 Data Recorder (Model 1)
3741 Data Station (Model 2) on switched or nonswitched lines:
Supported:
Attachment of 0129,3713,3715,3717
#1680 - Expanded Communications
#1685 - Expanded Communications/
Multipoint Data Link Control
#5450 - Operator Identification Card Reader
#7850 - Terminal Identification
0129 Card Data Recorder (Model 2)
3713 Printer (Model 1)
3715 Printer (Models 1,2)
3717 Printer (Model 1)
3741 Programmable Workstation (Model 4) on switched or nonswitched lines:
Supported:
Attachment of 0129,3713,3715
# 1680 - Expanded Communications
#1685 - Expanded Communications/
Multipoint Data Link Control
#5450 - Operator Identification Card Reader
#7850 - Terminal Identification
0129 Card Data Recorder (Model 2)
3713 Printer (Model 1)
3715 Printer (Models 1,2)
3747 Data Converter (Model 1) on switched or nonswitched lines:
#1660 - Communications Adapter
Supported:
3770 Data Communication System (supported as a 2770) on switched
or nonswitched lines:
3771 Communication Terminal (Models 1,2,3) :
Required:
#1460 - SDLC/BSC, Switch Control, or
#1461 - BSC Point-to-Point, or
#1462 - BSC Multipoint
#1201 - ASCII Code
Supported:
3773 Communication Terminal (Models 1,2,3,P1,P2,P3) :
#1460 - SDLC/BSC, Switch Control, or
Required:
# 1461 - BSC Point-to-Point, or
#1462 - BSC Multipoint
Supported:
#1201 - ASCII Code
3774 Communication Terminal (Models 1,2,P1,P2) :
#1460 - SDLC/BSC, Switch Control, or
Required:
# 1461 - BSC Point-to-Point, or
#1462 - BSC Multipoint
#1201 - ASCII Code
Supported:
3775 Communication Terminal (Models 1,P1) :
Required:
# 1460 - SDLC/BSC, Switch Control, or
#1461 - BSC Point-to-Point, or
#1462 - BSC Multipoint
#1201 - ASCII Code
Supported:
3776 Communication Terminal (Models 1,2) (supported as a
2772/3780):
#1460 - SDLC/BSC, Switch Control, or
ReqIJired:
# 1461 - BSC Point-to-Point, or
#1462 - BSC Multipoint
Supported:
#1201 - ASCII Code
3777 Cgmrnunication Terminal (Model 1) (supported as a
2772/3780):
#1460 - SDLC/BSe, Switch Control, or
Reql,J!red:
#1461 - BSC Point-to-Point, or
#1462 - BSC Multipoint
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----------==-- ::::::::
--- ==--';' == DPD
SCP 4.119
Nov 78
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
OS/VS1
Supported:
#1201 - ASCII Code
3777 Communication Terminal (Model 2) (supported as a S/360-20
MULTI-LEAVING Workstation) :
#3701 - EIA Interface
Required:
3780 Data Communications Terminal (Model 1) (supported as a 2772
without component select) on switched or nonswitched lines:
Supported:
#3601 - EBCDIC Transparency
#5010 - Multipoint Data Link Control
#5701 - Print Positions, Additional
#9761 - EBCDIC Code
5110 Computer (supported as a 2770) on switched and nonswitched
lines:
Required:
#2074 BSCA
Supported:
Attachment of a 5103, 5106, 5114
The 5110 emulates the following 2770
features:
Auto Answer
Buffer expansion additional (512)
EBCDIC Transparency
144 Character print line
Identification
Multipoint Data Link Control (TCAM, BTAM)
Horizontal Format Control
Space Compression/expansion
Synchronous Clock
Transmission Code EBCDIC
5275 Direct Numerical Control Station (Model 1) [supported as a 3275
with EBCDIC Code and EBCDIC Character Set] on switched lines
(BTAM) or nonswitched lines (VTAM, TCAM; BTAM).
IBM PROCESSOR AS TERMINALS
(For details of programming support provided within the Processor
when acting as a terminal, see appropriate programming sales
manual pages)
1130 Computing System on switched or nonswitched lines:
(TCAM,BTAM)
1131 Central Processing Unit:
#7690 - Synchronous Communications
Required:
Adapter
1800 Data Acquisition and Control System on switched or nonswitched
lines: (TCAM,BTAM)
1826 Data Adapter Unit:
#7550 - Communication Adapter
Required:
Series/1 (supported as a System/3) on switched or nonswitched lines:
(BTAM)
4953 or 4955 Processor:
#2074,2075, or 2094 Binary Synchronous
Required:
Communications Adapter
System/3 on switched or nonswitched lines:
5406 or 5410 or 5415 Processing Unit:
Required:
#2074 - Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter
System/7 (supported as a S/3) on switched or nonswitched lines:
5010 Processor Module:
Required:
#2074 - Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter
System/32 (supported as a S/3) on switched or nonswitched lines:
5320 System Unit:
#2074 - Binary Synchronous CommunicaRequired:
tions Adapter
System/34 (supported as a S/3) on switched or nonswitched lines:
5340 System Unit:
Required:
#2500 or 3500 - Communications Adapter
Feature
System/360 Model 20 on switched or nonswitched lines:
(TCAM,BTAM)
2020 Processing Unit:
Required:
# 2074 - Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter
System/360 Models 25,30,40,50,65,65MP,67(65mode),75,85,91, 195
on switched or nonswitched lines: (TCAM,BTAM)
Processing Unit:
Required:
#4580 -Integrated Communications
Attachment, or
2701 Data Adapter Unit, or
2703 Transmission Control, or
3704 Communications Controller in
emulation mode, or
3705-1 Communications Controller in
emulation mode, or
3705-11 Communications Controller in
emulation mode
All virtual storage S/370 Processor on switched or nonswitched lines:
Processing Unit:
Required:
#4640 -Integrated Communications
Adapter (TCAM,BTAM), or
2701 Data Adapter Unit (TCAM,BTAM), or
2703 Transmission Control (TCAM,BTAM),
or
3704 Communications Controller in network
control (VTAM,TCAM) or emulation
mode (TCAM,BTAM), or
3705-1 Communications Controller in
network control (VTAM,TCAM) or emulation mode (TCAM,BTAM), or
3705-11 Communications Controller in
network control (VTAM,TCAM) or emulation mode (TCAM,BTAM)
8100 with DPPX on nonswitched lines: (BT AM, TCAM, VT AM)
Required:
Refer to 8100 sales pages for required
features and for Program Products
supported.
SDLC LINES:
COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLERS
3704 Communications
(VTAM,TCAM)
3705-1 Communications
(VTAM,TCAM)
Controller
Controller
in
in
network
control
mode
network
control
mode
IBM TERMINALS
3270 Information Display System on nonswitched lines: (VTAM,TCAM)
3271 Control Unit (Models 11,12) :
Supported:
Attachment of 3277,3284,3286,3287,3288
# 1 200 - ASCII Code
#1550 - Copy
#9761 - EBCDIC Code
3277 Display Station (Models 1,2) :
#6350 - Selector Light-Pen
Supported:
#9089 - EBCDIC Character Set
3284 Printer (Models 1,2) :
Supported:
#9089 - EBCDIC Character Set
3286 Printer (Models 1 ,2) :
#9089 - EBCDIC Character Set
Supported:
3287 Printer (Models 1,2) [supported as a 3284 or 3286 attached
t03271-110r-12]
Supported:
#9082 - EBCDIC Character Set
3288 Printer (Model 2) (supported as a 3286-2) :
#9089 - EBCDIC Character Set
Supported:
3275 Display Station (Models 11,12) :
Supported:
Attachment of 3284
# 1200 - ASCII Code
#6350 - Selector Light-Pen
#9089 - EBCDIC Character Set
#9761 - EBCDIC Code
3284 Printer (Model 3) :
#9089 - EBCDIC Character Set
Supported:
3270 Information Display System on switched and nonswitched lines
(VTAM) and on nonswitched lines only (TCAM/NCP Direct) [Supported
as a 3790 with Configuration Support #9165]:
3276 Control Unit Display Station (Models 11,12,13,14) :
Supported:
Attachment of 3278,3287
#6350 - Selector Light Pen
#9082 - EBCDIC Character Set
3278 Display Station (Models 1,2,3,4) [SupPorted as 3277):
Supported:
#6350 - Selector Light Pen
#9082 - EBCDIC Character Set
3287 Printer (Models 1,2) [Supported as a 3284 or 3286]:
Supported:
#9082 - EBCDIC Character Set
3600 Finance Communication System on switched or nonswitched
lines: (VTAM,TCAM)
3601 Controller (Models 1 ,2A,2B,3A,3B) :
Supported:
Attachment of 3603,3604,3606,3608,3610,
3611,3612,3614,3615,3618
3602 Controller (Models 1 A, 1 B) :
Supported:.
Attachment of 3603,3604,3606,3608,3610,
3611,3612,3614,3615,3618
3603 Terminal Attachment Unit (Model 1, 2) :
3604 Keyboard Display (Models 1,2,3,4,5,6)
3606 Financial Services Terminal (Models 1,2)
3608 Printing Financial Services Terminal (Models 1,2)
3610 Document Printer (Models 1,2,3,4,5,12,13)
3611 Passbook Printer (Models 1,2)
3612 Passbook and Document Printer (Models 1,2,3,12,13)
3618 Administrative Line Printer (Model 1)
3614 Consumer Transaction Facility (Models 1,2,11,12) :
Required:
When attached to a 3601 or 3602 3601 or
3602 application programs
Supported:
Attachment to a 3704/37Qp (via nonswitched lines only) or 3601 ,3602.
3615 Administrative Terminal Printer (Models 1,2)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------- --- ----- ----------.-
SCP4.120
DPD
Nov 78
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
OS/VS1
3624 Consumer Transaction Facility (Models 1,2,11,12) :
Required:
When attached to a 3601 or 3602, 3601 or
3602 application programs
Supported:
Attachment to a 3704/3705 (via nonswitched lines only) or 3601, 3602.
3630 Plant Communication System on switched or non-switched lines
(VTAM, TCAM)
3631 Controller (Models 1 A, 1 B)
Supported:
Attachment of 3604, 3641, 3642, 3643,
3644,3646,3842,7430 (RPO)
3632 Controller (Models 1 A, 1 B)
Supported:
Attachment of 3604, 3641, 3642, 3643,
3644,3646,3842,7430 (RPO)
3604 Keyboard Display Terminal (Model 6)
3641 Reporting Terminal (Models 1,2)
3642 Encoder Printer (Models 1 , 2)
3643 Keyboard Display (Models 2,3,4)
3644 Automatic Data Unit (Modell)
3646 Scanner Control Unit (Modell)
3842 Loop Control Unit (Modell)
7430 Document Printer (RPO)
Required:
Supported:
3776 Communication
Required:
Supported:
3776 Communication
Supported:
3777 Communication
Required:
Supported:
3777 Communication
Supported:
#1460 - SOLC/BSC, Switch Control, or
#1470 - SOLC
#1201 - ASCII Code
Terminal (Models 1,2) :
#1460 - SOLC/BSC, Switch Control, or
#1470 - SOLC
#1201 - ASCII Code
Terminal (Models 3,4) [VTAM]:
#1201 - ASCII Code
Terminal (Modell) :
#1460 - SDLC/BSC, Switch Control, or
#1470 - SDLC
#1201 - ASCII Code
Terminal (Model 3) [VTAM]:
# 1201 - ASCII Code
3790 Communication System on switched or nonswitched lines
(VTAM,TCAM/NCP)
8100/DPCX Information System on switched or nonswitched lines
(VT AM, TCAM / NCP)
IBM PROCESSOR AS TERMINALS
·3650 Programmable Store System on switched or non-switched lines:
(VTAM, TCAM via VTAM)
3651 Store Controller (Models A25, B25, A75, B75, C75, 075)
.Supported:
Attachment of 3653, 3663, 3657, 3275,
•
3659,3669,3784
3653 Point of Sale Terminal (Modell)
3663 Supermarket Terminal (Modell p, 2 and 3P)
3657 Ticket Unit (Not available on 3651 Models A25 and B25)
3275 Display Station (Model 3)
Supported:
Attachment of 3284
3284 Printer (Model 3)
3659 Remote Communications Unit (Modell)
Required:
2400 BPS nonswitched line
:3784 Printer (Modell) not available on 3651 Model A25 and B25
3669 Remote Communications Unit (Modell) not available on 3651
Model A25 and B25
3650 Retail Store System on switched or nonswitched lines:
(VTAM,TCAM)
3651 Store Controller (Models A50,B50) :
Supported:
Attachment of 3653,3657,3275,3659,3784
3653 Point of Sale Terminal
3657 Ticket Unit
3275 Display Station (Model 3) :
Supported:
Attachment of 3284
3284 Printer (Model 3)
3659 Remote Communications Unit (Modell)
3784 Printer (Modell)
3660 Supermarket Scanning System on switched lines: (VT AM)
3651 Store Controller (Models A60,B60) :
Supported:
Attachment of 3663,3669
3663 Supermarket Terminal (Models 1,2) :
Supported:
Attachment of 3666
3666 Checkout Scanner
3669 Store Communication Unit (Modell)
3660 Supermarket Key-Entry System on switched lines: (VT AM)
3661 Store Controller:
Supported:
Attachment of 3663
3663 Supermarket Terminal (Models 1,2)
3730 Distributed Office Communication System on switched and
nonswitched lines (VTAM and TCAM/NCP Direct).
3791 Controller, Model 11 C, 12A or 12B with: SOLC with clock
(#6301) or SOLC without clock (#6302 or 6303), and required
modem
3732 Text Display Station
3736 Printer
3767 Communication Terminal (Models 1,2,3) on switched or
nonswitched lines: (VTAM,TCAM)
Supported:
SOLC adapter provided unless one of the
Start/Stop features are specified
#1201 - ASCII Code
3770 Data Communication System on switched or nonswitched lines:
(VTAM,TCAM)
3771 Communication Terminal (Models 1,2,3) :
Required:
#1460 - SOLC/BSC, Switch Control, or
#1470 - SOLC
Supported:
# 1201 - ASCII Code
3773 Communication Terminal (Models 1 ,2,3,P1 ,P2,P3) :
Required:
#1460 - SOLC/BSC, Switch Control, or
#1470 - SOLC
Supported:
# 1201 - ASCII Code
3774 Communication Terminal (Models 1 ,2,Pl ,P2) :
Required:
#1460 - SOLC/BSC, Switch Control, or
#1470 - SOLC
Supported:
#1201 - ASCII Code
3775 Communication Terminal (Models l,Pl) :
System/32 (supported as a 3770) on switched or nonswitched lines:
(VTAM,TCAM)
5320 System Unit:
Required:
# 1005 - Additional Storage (minimum of
one)
#6301 - Synchronous Data Link Control
System/34 (supported as a 3770) on switched or nonswitched lines
(VT AM) : 5340 System Unit:
#2500 and 3500 Communications Adapter
Required:
Feature
8100 with DPPX on switched or nonswitched lines (TCAM,VTAM)
Required:
Refer to 8100 sales pages for required
features and Program Products supported.
LOCAL ATTACHMENT
Transmission Control Units and Communications Controllers
135:
Integrated Communications Adapter of S/370 Model
(TCAM,BTAM)
Communications
#4640
Integrated
Required:
Adapter
Supported:
EBCDIC Code is a standard feature
#9763-#9780 - Transparency
#9681-#9688 - ASCII Code
#9689-#9696 - 6-bit Transcode
2701 Data Adapter Unit on local channel: (TCAM,BTAM)
#1302,#1303,#1314 - Autocall
Supported:
#3455 - Dual Code
#3463-#3465
Dual
Communication
Interface
#8029 - Transparency
#9060 - EBCDIC Code
#9061 - ASCII Code
#9062 - 6-bit Transcode
2702 Transmission Control Unit on local channel: (TCAM,BTAM)
#1290 - Autocall
Supported:
#1319 - Autopoll
#8055 - 2741 Break
2703 Transmission Control Unit on local channel: (TCAM,BTAM)
Supported:
# 1 340, # 1 341 - Autocall
#7715 - EBCDIC Code
#7716 - ASCII Code
#7717 - 6-bit Transcode
#8055 - 2741 Break
#9100 - Transparency for ASCII
2715 Transmission
(TCAM,BTAM)
Supported:
Control
Unit
(Modell)
on
local
channel:
See "2790" under Local Terminals
3704/3705-1/3705-11 Communications Controller on local channel:
Supported:
EBCDIC Code, ASCII Code, Autopoll and
EBCDIC Transparency do not have
special
feature
codes
in
the
3704/3705
EP/VS (TCAM,BTAM)
NCP/VS (VTAM,TCAM)
PEP
#8002 - Two-Channel Switch (VTAM,TCAM)
LOCAL TERMINALS
2848 Display Control (Models 1,2,3) on local chimnel: (TCAM)
Supported:
Attachment of 2260,1053
#3901 - Extended Cursor Control
#4787 - Line Addressing
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --- - ---- - - ---------_.-
DPD
SCP 4.121
Nov 78
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
OS/VS1
# 5340 - Non-Destructive Cursor
#5341 - Non-Destructive Cursor Adapter
Not Supported: Attachment of 1053
2260 Display Station (Models 1,2) :
Supported:
#3606 - Extended Cursor Control, Alphameric Keyboard
Not Supported: Tab feature of #3606
2790 Data Communication System on local channel: (TCAM,BTAM)
2715 Transmission Control Unit (Model 1) :
Supported:
Attachment of 2740,2791,2793
#3801 - Expanded Capability
#4850 -local 2740 Adapter
Not Supported: #8110 - Two Processor Switch
2740 Communication Terminal (Model 1 )
2791 Area Station (Models 1,2) :
Supported:
Attachment of 1035,2795,2796,2797,2798,
1053
1035 Badge Reader (Model 1)
2795 Data Entry Unit (Model 1)
2796 Data Entry Unit (Model 1)
2797 Data Entry Unit (Model 1)
2798 Guidance Display Unit (Model 1)
1053 Printer (Model 1)
2793 Area Station (Model 1) :
Supported:
Attachment of 2795,2796,2797,2798,1053
2795 Data Entry Unit (Model 1)
2796 Data Entry Unit (Model 1)
2797 Data Entry Unit (Model 1)
2798 Guidance Display Unit (Model 1)
1053 Printer (Model 1)
3730 Distributed Office Communication System on local channel
(VTAM)
3791 Controller, Model 11 C, 12A or 12B with: Local Channel
Attachment (#1515)
3732 Text Display Station
3736 Printer
3790 Communication System on local channel (VTAM,TCAM)
7770 Audio Response Unit (Model 3) on local channel (TCAM)
legend:
(VTAM)
(TCAM)
(BTAM)
VTAM only
TCAM only
BTAM only
3270 Information Display System on local channel:
3272 Control Unit (Models 1,2) :
Supported:
Attaqhment of 3277 ,3284, 3286,3287,3288
3277 Display Station (Models 1,2) :
#6350 - Selector light-Pen
Supported:
#9089 - EBCDIC Character Set
3284 Printer (Models 1,2) :
Supported:
#9089 - EBCDIC Character Set
3286 Printer (Models 1 ,2) :
Supported:
#9089 - EBCDIC Character Set
3287 Printer (Models 1,2) [supported as a 3284 or 3286 attached
to 3272-1 or -2]
Supported:
#9082 - EBCDIC Character Set
3288 Printer (Model 2) (supported as a 3286-2) :
Supported:
#9089 - EBCDIC Character Set
3270 Information Display System on local channel: (Supported as a
3272)
3274 Control Unit (Model 1 B)
Supported:
Attachment
of
3277,3278,3284,3286,
3287,3288,3289
3277 Display Station (Models 1,2)
Supported:
#6350 - Selector light Pen
#9089 - EBCDIC Character Set
3278 Display Station (Models 1,2,3,4) [Supported as 3277]
Supported:
#6350 - Selector light Pen
#9082 - EBCDIC Character Set
3284 Printer (Models 1,2)
Supported:
#9089 - EBCDIC Character Set
3286 Printer (Models 1,2)
Supported:
#9089 - EBCDIC Character Set
3287 Printer (Models 1,2) [Supported as a 3284 or 3286]
Supported:
#9082 - EBCDIC Character Set
3288 Printer (Model 2) [Supported as a 3286-2]
Supported:
#9089 - EBCDIC Character Set
3289 Printer (Models 1,2) [Supported as a 3286-2]
3270 Information Display System on local channel: (VTAM, TCAM thru
VTAM) [Supported as 3790 with Configuration Support #9165]
3274 Control Unit (Model 1 A)
Supported:
Attachment of 3277,3278,3284,3286,3287,
3288,3289
3277 Display Station (Models 1,2)
Supported:
#6350 - Selector light Pen
#9089 - EBCDIC Character Set
3278 Display Station (Models 1,2,3,4)
Supported:
#6350 Selector light Pen
#9082 EBCDIC Character Set
3284 Printer (Models 1,2)
Supported:
#9089 - EBCDIC Character Set
3286 Printer (Models 1 ,2)
Supported:
#9089 - EBCDIC Character Set
3287 Printer (Models 1,2) [Supported as a 3284 or 3286]
Supported:
#9082 - EBCDIC Character Set
3288 Printer (Model 2) [Supported as a 3286-2]
Supported:
#9089 - EBCDIC Character Set
3289 Printer (Models 1,2) [Supported as a 3286-2]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - --------_.- ----DPD
------
SCP 4.122
Nov 78
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
OS/VS1
TERMINAL SUPPORT CHART 1
Remote Attach (a)
VTAM
via
NCPjVS
(c)
TCAM
via
VTAM
(c)
TCAM
via
NCPjVS
(f)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
TCAM orBTAM
via
via
EPjVS
270X
(h)
(9)
via
M135
ICA
RES
RTAM
SS Lines:
1031
1051
2260
2265
2740-1,-2
2741
2760
3767-1,-2 (2740-1)
3767-1,-2 (2740-2)
3767-3 (2740-2)
3767-1,-2 (2741)
5100 (2741)
5110 (2741)
CMCST (2741)
S/7 (2740-1)
AT&T 83B3 or WU 115A
Line Control Type
CPT-TWX.(M33/35)
Line Control Type
WT Telegraph
1,2,3
1,2,3
1
1
1,2,3
1,2,3
1,2,3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1,2,3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1,2,3
1,2,3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X (B)
X
X
X
X
1,3
1,3
1,3
1,3 (B)
1,3
1,3
1,3
1,3
X
X
X
X (B)
X
X
X
X
1,3 (T)
1,3
1,3
1,3
1
1
1
6/79 (B)
X (B)
X (B)
X (T)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1,2,3
1,2,3
X
X
X
X
X
BSC Lines:
2715-2
2772
2780
2972-8,-11
3271-1,-2
3274-1C (3271-1,-2)
3275-1,-2
3276 (3276 (3271-1,-2)
3651-A25,-B25,-A75
B75,C75,D75
3651-A60,-B60 (S/3)
3661 (S/3)
3670
3735
3741-2,-4
3747
3771-1,-2,-3 (2772)
3773-1,-2,-3 (2772)
3773-P1,-P2,-P3
(2772)
3774-1,-2 (2772)
3774-P1 ,-P2 (2772)
3"175-1 (2772)
3775-P1 (2772)
3776-1,-2(2772/3780)
3777~ (2772/3780)
3777-2 (S/360-20)
5275 (3275-1,-2)
3780 (2772)
5110 (2772)
1131
1826
Series/1 (as S/3)
S/3
5/7 (S/3)
S/32 (S/3)
$/34 (S/3)
8/360-20
S/360 (b)
8/370 (b)
S/8100/DPPX(j)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
6/79 (B)
X (B)
X (B)
X (T)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X (B)
X (B)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8/79
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8/79
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8/79
1
1,3
1,3
1,3 (B)
1 (B)
1,3
1,3
1,3
1,3
1,3
1,3
1,3
8/79
(1,3)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X (I)
X
X (i)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X (B)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8/79
X
X
X
X
X
X
8/79
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
III
------- ------- -----------_.-
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
OS/VS1
DPD
115-168MP and 3031 Processor with either BaS, BPS, DOS, as,
DOS/VS, OS/VS1, or OS/VS2.
TERMINAL SUPPORT CHART 1 - cont'd
SOLC Lines:
VTAM
via
NCP/VS
TCAM
via
VTAM
(c)
(c)
X
3704 Remote
3705-1 Remote
X
3271-11,-12
X
3274-1 C (3791)
X
3275-11,-12
X
3276 (3791)
X
3601
X
3602
X
3614
X
X (j)
3624
3631
X
3632
X
3651-A25,B25,A75
B75,C75,D75
6/79
3651-A50,-B50
X
3651-A60,-B60
X
3661
X
3767-1,-2,-3
X
X
3771-1,-2,-3
3773-1,-2,-3
X
3773-Pl,-P2,-P3
X
3774-1,-2
X
3774-Pl,-P2
X
3715-1
X
3775-Pl
X
3776-1,-2
X
3776-3,-4
X
3777-1
X
3777-3
X
3791
X
3791 (for 3730)
1/80
B130/DPCX
8/79
-A21,-A23
8140/DPCX-A31
8/79
,-A33,-A51,-A53
S/32 (3770)
X
S/34 (3770)
X
S/8100/0PPX(j) 8/79
Local
Channel
Attach
VTAM
(c)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X (j)
TCAM
via
NCP/VS
(T)
RES
VTAM
(c) OS/VS1 Release 3.1 or later.
(d) Available with TCAM NCP /VS Direct.
(e) The ICR for Special Programming Support for Key Entry (SPS/KE)
supports only the local 3791 .with Data Entry Configuration using
3760s, and precludes concurrent operation of IBM 3704/3705 or
IBM 3272 controllers through VTAM or TCAM through VTAM.
X
X
X
(f)
X (d)
X (d)
X
OS/VSl Release 3.0 only, or the current OS/VS1 release when
reAM direct NCP/VS support becomes available in July, 1977.
(g) 3704/3705 EP /VS; or the Partitioned Emulation Programming
(PEP) extension to 3704/3705 NCP /VS, can be used to emulate
the 270)(.
(h) 270)( == 2701. 2702, 2703; column shows last digit of 270X
support. All support without a date is available now.
6/79
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
)(
(j)
Nonswitched support only.
(k) Concurrent 3730-3790 systems only.
X
X
X
X
8/79
X
1/80
8/79
X
X
X
X
X
1/80(k)
8/79
8/79
8/79
8/79
X
X
X
X
8/79
X
X
8/79
TCAM
Support is for console printer and for data formatted as cards from
diskette or keyboard (Logon).
)(
X
TCAM
via
VTAM
(c)
(i)
BTAM
RES
VTAM
ICA, TCUs, Local Communications Controllers:
ICA
2701
2702
2703
2715-1
3704 (EP /VS)
3704 (NCP /VS)
3705-1 (EP /VS)
3705-1 (NCP /VS)
3705-11 (EP /VS)
3705-11 (NCP /VS)
Local Terminals:
2260
3272-1,-2
3274-1 A (3791)
3274-1 B (3272-2)
3791
3791 (for 3730)
7770-3
SCP 4.123
Nov 78
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X (e)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1/80(k)
1/80
X
Legend:
SS
BSC
SOLC
Start/Stop
Binary Synchronous Communication
Synchronous Data Link Control
X
(date)
supported now
date when support will be available.
Notes:
(B) BTAM only.
(T) TCAM only.
(a) If shown, the terminal type in parenthesis designates the
programming support provided by SCPs. E.g., "S/7(2740-1)"
means "the S/7 is supported as a 2740-1 ".
(b) S/360 Models 25, 30, 40, 50, 65, 65MP, 67 (65 mode), 75, 85,
91, 195 with either BOS, BPS, DOS, or OS. S/370 Models
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --- --------_.--------
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
OS/VS1
DPD
TERMINAL SUPPORT CHART 2
Remote Attach (a)
Communication
Communications Code - Network-EBCDICASCIJ- sw
nonswnorm trans norm trans PTP PTP MP
SS Lines:
1031
1051
2260
2265
2740-1
2740-2
2741
2760
3767-1,-2 (2740-1)
3767-1,-2,-3(2740-2) 3767-1,-2 (2741)
5100 (2741) (b)
CMCST (2741 )
S/7 (2740-1)
AT&T 8383, WU 115ACPT-TWX (M33/35)
WT Telegraph
BSC Lines:
2715-2
2772
2780
2972-8.-11
3271-1,-2
3274-1 C(3271-1,-2)
3275-1,-2
3276(3271-1,-2)
3651-A50,-850 (S/3)
3651-A60,-B60 (S/3)
3661 (S/3)
3670
3735
3741-2,-4
3747
3771,3773,3774,
3775 (2772)
3776-1,-2,3777-1
(2772/3780)
3777-2 (S/360-20)
3780 (2772)
5275 (3275-1,-2)
5110 (2772)
1131
1826
Series/1 (as S/3)
S/3
S/7 (S/3)
S/32 (S/3)
S/34 (S/3)
S/360-20
S/360 (c)
S/370 (c)
S/8100/0PPX
OPPX/DSC
OPPX/RJE
SDLC Lines:
3704 Remote
3705-1 Remote
3271-11,-12
3274-1C (3791)
3275-11,-12
3276 (3791)
3601
3602
3614
3624
3631
3632
3651-A25,B25,A 75
B75,C75,075
3651-A50,-B50
3651-A60,-B60
3661
3767-1,-2,-3
3771,3773,3774,
3775,3776,3777
3791 (d)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Local Channel Attach:
2260
2715-1
X
3272-1,-2
X
3274-1 A (3791)
3274-1 B (3272)
X
3791 (d)
3791 local attachment
is code insensitive.
7770-3
Legend:
SS
= Start/Stop
BSC = Binary Synchronous Communication
SDLC =Synchronous Data Link Control
X = supported
- = not supported
o
=
Group of terminals which can communicate over the public
switched telephone network to the same SDLC line appearance
on a 3704 or 3705 attached to a S/370. All OTEs so communicating must be operating with the same clocking source (either
modem or business machine) and at the same transmission
speed.
M =
Group of terminals which can operate on same BSC MP line and
same line speed.
N
Group of terminals which can operate on same SDLC MP line
and same line speed.
S
Group of terminals which can share the same phone number(s).
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
S
S
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
X
X
S
See) X
S (e) X
X
X
S
X
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
S
S
S (h)
S
S
S
S
S
X
S
S
S
S
S
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X (g)
X
X
X
X
X
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SDLC is insensitive
Notes:
(a)
If shown, the terminal type in parenthesis designates the
programming support provided by SCPs. E.g., "S/7 (2740-1)"
means "the S/7 is supported as a 2740-1".
(b)
Supports EBCO communications code only.
(c)
S/360 Models 25, 30, 40, 50, 65, 65MP, 67 (65 mode), 75, 85,
91, 195 with either BOS, BPS, DOS or OS. S/370 Models
115-168MP and 3031 Processor with either BOS, BPS, DOS,
OS,DOS/VS,OS/VS10rOS/VS2.
(d)
The 3791 Controller, as part of the 3790 Communication
System/Data Entry Configuration, does not support ASCII code.
(e)
The 3741/3747 can use the same switched network hardware
at the 3704/3705 as other BSC terminals. However, NCP /VS
requires that the port be configured for 3741/3747 when the
port is to be used for 3741/3747. Two separate versions of
NCP /VS must be maintained for the two separate configurations
of the port, and the proper version loaded into the 3704/3705
for the way the port is to be used at the time.
(f)
Terminal operates on switched line using manual dial/manual
and/or auto answer procedures and nonswitched VTAMNCP /VS programming support. The 3651-A50,-B50 uses
manual answer and the 3791 uses manual or auto answer
procedures. These manual dial procedures will not be required
when switched VTAM-NCP /VS support is available.
(g)
IPL of S/7 is not supported in this network configuration.
(h)
Switched network support by BTAM only.
X
X
to data interchange
codes
M
M
M
M
M
X
N
N
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
o (t)
o (t)
X
X
N
N
0
0
0
o (t)
X
X
N
X
N
N
N
8130/0PCX-A21,A23
8140/0PCX-A31 ,A33,A51 ,A53
S/32 (3770)
S/34 (3770)
X
o (t) X
O(t) X
O(t) X
0
X
0
X
S/8100/0PPX
0
N
0
X
SCP 4.124
Nov 78
N
N
N
N
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- -----=.:.::,;,=
- --- --- DPD
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
OS/VS2
SCP 4.201
Nov 78
OPERATING SYSTEM/VIRTUAL STORAGE 2
OS/VS2 (also known as VS2) is an operating system, upward
compatible from MFT, MVT and OS/VS1.
OS/VS2 Release 1 (SVS) makes available a single address space of
1 6 megabytes for programs and data. In MVS (VS2 Release 2 and
subsequent MVS releases), each job or timesharing user is provided
with individual 16 megabyte virtual address space. The 16 megabytes
include the space required for system code and tables.
OS/VS2 supports the System/370 Models 145, 15511, 158, 16511,
168, and the 3031, 3032 and 3033 Processors. In addition, MVS
supports the 158MP and 168MP systems.
MVS Release 3.8 is a refresh release with SUs integrated in the
release described in Chart 1 of the Announcement letter.
In MVS Release 2, Job Entry Subsystem 2 (JES2), which is upward
compatible with HASP, is provided. MVS Release 3 allows two to
seven JES2 systems to operate in a JES2 Multi-Access Spool
environment. JES3 is an SU to MVS Release 3.7 and Release 3.8 and
is upward compatible with ASP. Both have been incorporated in the
system control program as an SCP component. One or the other must
be used for job entry.
Virtual storage can exceed the available main storage ("real storage")
in the system. This is possible because virtual storage resides on
direct access devices as well as in real storage.
Virtual storage is organized in 4K byte blocks called pages which are
loaded from direct access storage into real storage for execution and
written out to direct access storage when not actively being used and
the space they occupy is needed and an exact copy does not exist on
the paging device.
Virtual storage reduces the need for programmers to be aware of
storage constraints.
Real storage utilization can be increased, providing the capability
to increase multiprogramming and resource utilization.
TSO user regions are paged. Real storage utilization for TSO
reflects actual requirements to execute the program as compared
to fixed MVT time shared region.
Virtual storage allows most programs to run in a system with less
real storage than the program was designed for. This enables
testing and backup on smaller real storage systems.
link Pack Area (lPA) is paged. All transient SVCs, transient
ERPs, Appendages, most data management and most job
management modules as well as any reentrant programs can be
included in lPA without dedicating real storage for each program.
A portion of the lPA may be fixed in real storage.
OS/VS2 includes features which are designed to improve the integrity
of the system. These include Region Protection, Authorized Program
Facility and DEB Validity Checking. The combination of fetch
protection, a standard feature on VS2 supported Processors and the
dispatcher's manipulation of segment table validity bits prevents
unauthorized access of user regions. The use of control program
services may be restricted to designated programs, using Authorized
Program Facility (APF). The DEB Validity Checking facility aids in
preventing an unauthorized user from modifying direct access extents
or gaining control in supervisor state.
Note: For SVS restrictions, refer to the OS/VS2 Planning Guide
(GC28-0600) and for MVS the Introduction to OS/VS2 Release 2
(GC28-0661 ).
Facilities to Support Virtual Storage
Enhancements to the linkage Editor permit the programmer to
group related CSECTs together and place them on page boundaries. The result is the ability to localize references within a page,
and help to reduce the number of pages brought into real storage.
Extensions to System Management Facilities (SMF) are made to
record information regarding paging activity.
Additional VS2 Facilities Over MVT
An enhancement to IEBCOPY to allow unloading a partitioned data
set to a removeable volume and loading it at a later date to the
same or a different type of volume.
RMS facilities are expanded to check for miSSing interrupts and
alert the operator so that action can be taken.
VS2 Assembler supports all available S/370 instructions, improved
macro instructions, conditional assembly statements and dynamiC
work area.
A Quick-Start IPL can be performed when a previously created
LPA is in external page storage eliminating the necessity of having
to recreate pageable LPA in external page storage and to
reconstruct the BLDl table during each IPL.
SVS HIGHLIGHTS
In addition to the availability of 16 megabytes of virtual address space
described previously, SVS provides the following facilities:
Virtual Telecommunications Access Method - VTAM: refer to the
VTAM section below for a description.
Resource Management
Dynamic dispatching is a feature of the task supervisor included in
the system when the automatic priority group (APG) option is
selected. Installation-designated groups of tasks are dispatched
based on their operational characteristics: Processor-oriented or
I/O-oriented. Processor and I/O characteristics of the group of
tasks are constantly monitored during their execution and changes
are taken into account in the dispatching process.
VS2 will select low priority jobs and migrate their pages from the
primary paging device to the secondary paging device when the
system specified level of activity on the primary paging device is
reached.
I/O load balancing provides an improved method of allocating data
sets that do not have a specific volume assignment, based upon
the use of devices across the entire configuration.
HASP II Version 4 and ASP Version 3.2 are supported under SVS.
Analysis Program-1 (AP-1) aids the operator in analyzing 3350 or
3344 DASD error situations and in isolating such errors into hardware
or media related areas.
AP-1 may be directed to test for hardware errors only or hardware and
media errors. Simple result messages appear on the operator console.
Detailed error related data are directed to SYSPRINT.
AP-1 will only analyze errors associated with 3350 or 3344 devices
and requires that one of these devices be on the system.
MVS HIGHLIGHTS
Multiprocessing With Shared Real Storage
Support either two Model 158MP processors or two Model 168MP
processors providing flexibility in the use of computing resources
through shared main storage, alternate path I/O control, and
inter-processor communication.
Provide the potential for improved installation workload scheduling
over that attainable with two separate uniprocessing systems by
pooling resources such as main storage, secondary storage and
central processing units.
Can be operated as an MP system or partitioned through operator
commands. While one system continues operation, the other
system may be reinitialized with another operating system. The two
systems are then operated as two independent systems.
Extend MP availability with an alternate Processor recovery (ACR)
facility allowing the non-failing Processor to attempt recovery
processing for the operating system without using the failing
Processor. The timing facility allows continued operation after
failure of the time-of-day clock on one of the Processors. A new
recovery facility allows resetting a specific channel or subchannel
and attempts the restart of I/O operations by the non-failing
Processor. Storage reconfiguration facilities allow logical isolation
of failing main storage in 4K byte elements.
Provide less disabled code through the use of a new locking
structure in the control program. The existence of multiple locks
allows the processing of non-intersecting queue structures without
interference from the other Processor.
Allow an installation to specify that a specific program (e.g.,
emulator) should run on a certain Processor.
On 168MP systems, channels attached to a stopped Processor
may be accessed via the Channel 6 interface of the ,:1;410/7010 I/O Device
**
System/370 I/O Device
Any card reader or card read punch supported
by the queued sequential access method of
the operating system.
, 1402 Card Read Punch
1403 Printer
Any printer supported by the queued sequential access method of the operating system.
729/1, IV, V, VI Tape Unit
Any tape unit or direct access storage
device supported by the basic sequential
access method of the operating system.
or 7330 Magnetic Tape Unit
1415 Console Printer
Any operator's console supported by the
operating system.
1301 Disk Storage, Model 1 or 2,
1302 Disk Storage, Model 1 or 2,
2302 Disk Storage, Model 1 or 2
Any direct access storage device supported
by the basic direct access method of the
operating system***.
* Can be emulated if running on 1402 mode.
** Programmed reading on more than one reader,
printing on more than one printer, or
punching on more than one punch is not supported.
*** If more than one System/370 direct access storage device is required to correspond
to the 1410/7010 disk storage device being emulated, all corresponding System/
370 devices must be the same type of direct access storage device.
Additional Documentation
PLM
Microfiche
SCP4.502
System/370 Programming
Conversion/Service
Programming/SCP
GY33-7012
GJDI-2150
DOS Emulator Under OS/VS (5744-ASll:
Version 3
The DOS Emulator eases the transition
for DOS (Releases 25, 26, 27, 28,
29, 30,31,32 and 33) user migrating to OS/VS and the System/370 Model 135 (OS/VSll, 145, 155/1, or 158.
The Emulator program integrates the facilities of the DOS system into the operating
environment of OS/VS. It receives DOS jobs as input and produces output in the
same format as form~t as found in DOS.
Throughput under emulation is not determined as much by the emulator as it is by the
DOS program being executed. Throughput of DOS jobs is affected by the amount of
interference from higher priority virtual or real regions/address spaces, and the paging
rate of the system.
Highlights Version 3 Modification 3:
DO S programs can be processed under OS/IIS without conversion.
No re-linkage edit, re-compile, or re-assembly is required for DOS programs.
Other 0 S/VS programs can run concurrently.
DO S/II S functions supported are:
Extended Control Mode
Virtual Storage Support
Relocating Loader
Five partitions
Shared Virtual Area
Generic assignment
Block Multiplexer Channel and Rotational Position Sensing
oS/IIS Sysin/Sysout facil ities are available to the DO S user.
DOS BTAM is supported; includes 2260 local and 3270 local and remote.
DASD Device Sharing support a/lows both OS/IIS and DOS programs to concurrently share DASD volumes.
3340 in restricted, non restricted (sharable) and substituted modes.
3330 Model 11 in non restricted (sharable) and substituted modes.
Device substitution allows programs written for a given type of DASD to run on
another type of DASD.
Volume sharing and device substitution facilities are extended to the 3850 Mass
Storage System, using the virtual 3330 deVice.
The 3540 Diskette is supported via the OS/IIS Reader and Writer facilities.
The 3344 and 3350 Direct Access Storage devices are accepted by the Emulator
in Compatibility Mode only. This support allows the user to operate a 3344 as if
it were four 70MB 3340s, or a 3350 as if it were two Model 1 3330s.
ISAM mapping function allows unmodified DOS programs to access OS/VS formatted ISAM data sets. This function, together with a degree of existing
SAM and DAM compatibility, allows individual program conversion where a
group of programs access common data sets.
An automatic DOS IPL procedure eliminates the need for ADD, DEL, SET, CAT
and DPD commands.
Operator communications substantially improved compared with Version 2.
Restrictions: The following IBM units and features supported by DOS are not supported
by the emulator:
Virtual Storage Support: DO SlY S programs should not rely on the DOS/VS paging
mechanism.
Other DOS/VS functions: Emulator does not support SDAID, OL TEP, Machine
Emulators, QTAM, VTAM.
Programs using VSAM run only on restricted DOS volumes.
2260 and 3270: 2260 local and 3270 local and remote are supported only if
accessed through DOS STAM.
Device substitution: supported for non restricted DASD volumes only. Emulated
DOS programs must not contain any device dependent coding other than DTFs.
Emulated DOS system and OS/IIS system must support explicitly the substituted
(new) device.
Jul78
1270, 1275 optical reader, sorter.
1259, 1412, and 1419 magnetic character readers.
.
1287 1288 optical character reader in document mode, when: response tImes are
req~ired for pocket selection, (1287 only); PIC bit in the CCW is used, or the CCW
string is modified between the READ and WAITF macros.
Model-dependent functions such as CS30, CS40, and the DIAGNOSE instruction.
7770 and 7772 AudiO Response Units under DOS BTAM.
Use of data chaining for staged devices.
Device Sharing.
DOS files accessed on a device shared volume cannot:
• have more than 16 extents.
• be a DOS ISAM file.
• be a multivolume file.
• have both spl it and unsplit cyl inder.
DOS programs accessing files on a device shared volume must:
issue a DOS OPEN or OPENR for each file accessed.
not and cannot rely on the information in the DBDL and EXTENT cards other than
the logical unit (SYSXXX, file name, and file-ID fields).
not use embedded SEEKS in the channel program accessing the files on the shared
volume.
use absolute track speCifications on the DO when accessing files using absolute
track address.
ISAM Mapping.
• .
The use of the ISAM Mapping Feature is subject to the following limItatIons:
DOS program may read and write only fixed-:'ength records.
The use of incore indexes or prime data will be ignored.
The ISAM DTF may not be modified.
Fiel ds other than filename C, P, 0, I, A, R, T, and H are not supported any may
be invalid.
.
The Emulator does not take any steps to provide or prevent concurrent use of an
ISAM file with other jobs.
3540 Diskette.
DOS/VS programs using the 3540 Diskette will not run under the Emulator if they:
••• attempt to use a file without issuing an OPENR Macro
•• , use EXCP s or non-standard access method
••• attempt to use a fi Ie created in the same Emulator job
The following programming items, permissable in the DOS enVironment, cannot be
handled by the emulator:
The emulator program for 1401/40/60, 1410/7010 and Model 20 under DOS.
Modification, use, or storing of information in user CCWs between EXCP and WAIT.
Storage protection under DOS may be specified but is not effective.
QTAM, AUTOTEST and VTAM.
HIO is not a restriction for DOS BTAM.
ProgramS'That:
Depend upon the HIO, ROD, WOO, and DIAGNOSE instructions for their operation.
Rely on known timing relationships of DOS.
Use PCI bit.
Minimum System Requirements: The Emulator requires the OS/DOS Compatibility
Feature. The basic Emulator program requires 48K bytes of Virtual Storage. Additional virtual storage is required for the DOS System being emulated including a/lowances for its associated partitions.
48K bytes: Emulator program
6K bytes: Control blocks for up to 10 I/O devices in job step
Add 300 bytes for each additional device
Add 20K bytes for the emulator's service aids
Systems Support - Version 3 Modification 3 of the DOS/OS Emulator supports DOS
Releases 25 - 27 plus DOS/VS Releases 28, 29, 30, 31, 32 and 33 on all releases of OS/VSl and OS/VS2 current at the time of availability of Version 3.
DOS Emulator support in no way changes the currency of a DOS or DOS/VS release.
Device Reguirements: There must be enough deVices available to support both DOS and
OS/VS. When using staged I/O I and device sharing facil ities the need for deVices dedicated to DOS can he minimized.
Generally I the Emulator supports devices which are concurrently supported bv the System/
370, OS/VS system and DOS system being utilized. The Emul
f devices
may not be concurrent with the various releases of OS/VS or DO~
In addition, allowable mapping of command code compatible devices between OS/VS
and DOS are as follows:
Q92...
OS/VS
1403
2400
2540 (Reader)
2540 (Punch)
3211
3420
3505 (Reader)
3525 (Punch)
Note that OS/VS does not support 2311 Disk Units and 23U Data Cells.
The System/370 Model 155 requires logic EC level 260-448 and DOS Compatibility
Feature (5450) EC level 260-715.
General Documentation
7015).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Program Logic Manual (SY33-
fRY'
iiu!i-=Ii'~ Programmlng/SCP
~y'hem/370 Models 165 II and 168
. ' The 7080 Integrated Emulator
Emulator
fCii'the 7080 Under OSNS
.Program executes as a.prob.lem
(57 4-A l J . "
program under OS/VS ona Model
165 II or 168 equipped with the 7080 Compatibility :Feature(7]] 8or7.128>, The7080
Integrated Emulator Program and the CompaUbJllty Feature enable the Model 165 to
execute, under the Operating System, programs written for an IBM 7080 Data Processing
System, Most 7080 programs that are d&bugged and are not ·time~pendent can be
executed without modification. Certain devices and feat ....s of the 7080 system are
not emulated, however.
The 7080 Emulator takes advantage of the multiprogramming faclntles of OS/VS.
Other problem programs, such as user Jobs, utility programs, compliers; or additional
7080 Integrated Emulator Programs, can be executed concUrrently'lnmaln storage.
The Emulator allows the user to direct his programming resources toward developing
new applications and redesigning existing applications to take advantage of System/
370 facilities. The Emulator uses the data management services of the Operating
System Virtual Storage, thereby achieving device Independence and the automatl~
allocation of system resources.
E'0irm
Throughput depends upon the 7080 program being emulated, as determined by the following factors: mix of 7080 CPU operations executed by the compatibility feature, the
7080 CPU and I/O operations Simulated by the emulator program, the amount ofl.nterruption from higher priority tasks of the Operating System, and the paging rate.
Tape formaWng programs are provided with the Emulator to assist user In conv.ertlng
7080 tape flies before emulation, so that they can be processed mcWe efficiently by
the Emulator, and In converting tape files produced durlrfg emulation, so that they
can be used on the orl~lnal syste",.
Specifically excluded from support are the following Items:
• The IBM 7622 Signal Control, associated unit. and related Instrl.!Cllon••
• The IBM 7908 Data Channel, 1I••oclated device. and feature. (Including control storage bank 4) and related Instructions, specifically ENABLE COMPARE
BACKWARD.
• All 7080 RPQ (Request for Price Quotation) features and related Instructions.
S~stem
SCP 4 ~n,
Mar 77
System/37,o Programming
Converslon/hrillce'
Re,ulrements: The 7080 Emulator Program requires a
Sys~m/370
Model
1 5 II or 68 equipped with the 7080 CompabllltyFeature (7118 or 7128) i It re.qulres
enough Model 165 II or 168 devIces to correspond to the 7080 devices (In addition
to devices required by the Operating System Virtual Storage) It requires enough
storage for the Operating System Virtual Storage, and for the 7080 program being .
executed,
.
Input/output device correspondence Is as follows:
7080 Device
System/370 Device
7153 Console
3066 Systems Console
7502 Console Card Reader
Any card reader or SYSIN device supported by
the Operating System Queued Sequential Access
Method.
729 II, IV, Vi VI Magnetic
2400 Series Magnetic Tape Units Models 1 Tape Unit
6 and 8 <7-track) or 2420 Magnetic Tape Unit
Models 5 or 7 or 3420 Magnetic Tape Unit
Mode,1 3, 5 or 7 or any other tape unit supported
by the BaSic Sequential Access Method of the
Operating System* Virtual Storage or direct
access devlces**.
* All seven-track tape drives used for 7080 compatible tapes must have the SevenTrack Compatibility Feature.
** A 7080 tape in spanned variable-length format may be kept on any Model 165 II
or 168 direct access device supported by BSAM. The file will appear to be a tape
to the 7080 program, which can access it only through tape commands.
'
UJ11!~Mr~ g;1Iftl!Q'fi370 MptIe!
The 7094 Emulator takes advantage of the multiprogramming facilities of OSNS. Other
problem programs, such as user Job., utility programs, compilers, or additional 7090/
7094 Integrated Emulator. Programs, can be executed concurrently In main storage. The
Emulator allQWs the user to direct his programming resources toward developing new
applications and redesigning existing applications to take advantage of System/370
facilities. The Emulator uses the data management services of the Operating System
Virtual Storage, thereby, achieving device Independence and the automatic allocation of
system resources.
Throughput depends upon the 7090/7094 program being emulated, as determined by the
following factors: mix of 7090/7094 CPU operations executed by the compatibility
featlft, the 1090/7094 CPU and J/Ooperatlqns Simulated by the emulator program, and
the amount of Interruption from higher priority tasks of the Operating System Virtual
Storage.
System R~jUI"';'nts: :The -7094 Integrated Emulator Program requires a Systfim/370 .
Model J6 II or.16s, the 709/7090/7094/709411 CompatlbllityFeature(7119~7129)
devices required .f« the operating system " and one device or direct access data set for
each emulated 7094 device. All card read punch units used to read or punch binary
data must be equipped with the Card Image Feature, and all tape drives UHd for
7094 compatible tapel must be equipped with the Seven-:Track Compatibility Feature.
Input/output deVice Correspondence II as fonows:
709(7090/7094/709411.
Model
SYltem/370
7108 ProceSSing Unit (7090)
1
Model 165 II or 165 (with RPQ
S204"1) ProceSSing Unit with 709/
7110 Processing Unit '(7094).
1
7090/7094/7094 " Compatibility
7111 Processing Unit <7094.11)
1
7109 Arithmetic Sequence Unit
1
Functions proVided by Model 165 "
or 168
7302 Core Storage
1
Functions provided by Model 165 II
or 168
.
7607 Data Channef(s)
1, 2, 3,
(Channels A through H supported) 4, 5
729 Tape Unit
2,4,5
6
711 Card .Reader
2
721 Card Punch
1
2860 Selector Channef(s)
2870 Multiplexer Channef(s)
2880 Block Multiplexer Channel(s)
Any tape unit supported by the operating system sequential access method
or sufficient space on a direct access
. device supported by the Basic Sequential Access Method.
Any card reader with Card Image featum or SYSIN device supported by the
operating system .Queued Sequential
Access Method.
Any card' punch with Card Image feature or SYSOUT device supported by
the operating system Queued Sequential Access Method.
.
If SYOUT is used the user must
write hiS own SYOUT writer to
punch binary dates.
7080 devices not listed are not supported.
Additional Oocumentation
PLM
Microfiche
~:~9!~::daE;~~~~:
program under OS/VS on a Model
165 " or 168 eQuipped with the 709/7090/7094/7094 II Compatibility Feab..e(7119
or 7129 >. The 7094 Integrated ~mulator Program and thtCompatlbillt'y Feab..e enable
the Model 165 II or 168 to exeCute, ""der the Operating System/VS programs written
for a 709/7090/7094/7094 II Data ProceSSing System. Most 7090/7094 pro~
grams tfJat are debugged are are not tlme-dependent can be executed without modification.
Certain devices and feat1,lf'es of the 7090/7094 system are not emulated, however.
716 P;lnter
1
GY27-7229
GJDl-1642
Any printer or SY$OUT .devlce supported by the operating System Queued
Sequential Access Method.
Any 7094 features or devices not listed are not emulated. 704 Mode Is not emulated.
Additional Documentation
PLM
Microfiche
GY27-7187
GJDl-1640
Not to be reproduced without written penni..lon
SCP 4. 504
IBM p~rammlng/SCP
1;~370
Models 165" and 168 Inteerated The 707017074 El"ulator Program
fOi'the 707017074 Un_r
executes as a prOblem program under
OS/VS C5744-AK1):
OS/VS on a Model 165 II and 168
equipped with tiWi 707017Q74Compability FeatureC71]7 or7]27). The Model ]6511
and ]68 to execute, under the Operating System Vlrtwal Storage prograins wi'ittf:nfor an
7070/7074 Data Processing System with the Floating Po/ntfeature and 10~QOO words
of storage; Most7070/7074'programs that are debugged and are not time-dependent
can be executed without modification.' Certain devices and features of the' 7070/7074
system are not emulated, ,hOwever.'
'
...' '
_---1Piiiijijii1
The Integrated Emulator Program takes advantage of the multiprogramming facilities of
OS/370. Other problem programs such as: user jobs,utilitypro~ams,.compilers, or
additional 7070/7074 Integrated Emulator Programs can be elcecuted concurrently in '
main storage. The Emulator allows the user to direct, his programming resources toward
developing new applications and redesigning existing applications to take advantage of ,
System/370 faCilities. The Em'ulator uses the data management services oftheOper;..
atlng System Virtual Storage, thereby achieving ~vlce Inr:fepa~nce and the automatic
allocation of system resour,ces.
'
Throughput depends upon the 7070/7074 program being emulated, as determined by
the following fac;tors:, the mix of 707017074 CPU opera~lons executed by the compatibility feature" the 7070/7074 CPU and input/output operations Simulated by the emulator program, the amount of Interruption from higher priority tasks of the Operating System,
and the paging rate.
"
. ..
Tape formatting programs are pr".lded with the Emulator to assist the user In converting
7070/7074 tape flies before emulation, so. that they can be processed more efficiently,
by the. Emulator, and in converting tape files pioduced during emulat,lon, 50, that they
can be used on the ori,glnal system. Native mode tape files must be preprC)!:essed
using the tape formatting program if record lengths exceed 32,755 bytes or If the complete. range of data management facilities of the operati~g system are to be'used.
The follOWing CPU features are not emulated: Additional Storage and associated Instructions ••• Interval Time Instructions •• , Customer Engineering Diagnostic Instructions
••• Optional Feature Instructions (except Floating Point!.
The follOWing input/output devices are not emulated: 7907 Data Channel ••• 7900
Inquiry Station ... 7300 Disk Storage.,: 7500 Card Reader ... 7550 Card Punch
... 7400 Printer ... 7603 Input/Output Synchronizer.
.
The follOWing input/output features are not emulated: Tape Read All Alpha or OSIVS 13144-ANll:
Emulation Program Support is
a set of program modules provided to the customer to generate, using tfie EP Generation Procedure, a customized 3704/3705 Emulatiqn Program.
The EP, when generated and loaded, executes in the 3704/3705 and provides the
functional capabilities of the 2701 Data Adapter Unit and/or 2702/2703 Transmission
Control Units through the physical medium of the 3704/3705.
System Support Programs consists of the Emulation Program (EP) Generation Procedure,
Load Program, Dump Program, and Assembler.
Not to be rep~d...c«t.
NCP /VS performs such transmission control unit functions as line
control,
character
recognition,
line
timeout,
character
assembly /disassembly and checking. In addition, some functions
typically performed by a telecommunications access method are
provided by NCP /VS. Polling, addressing, code translation, data link
control and first level error recovery procedures are performed by
NCP/VS,
The basic element of communication between the host access method
and the 3704/3705 is the block. A transfer between the Processor
and 3704/3705 may consist of one or more blocks. A block consists
of control information and any text that may accompany it. The text is
generally a transmission block destined to or received from a terminal.
A block is sent by the host to the Communications Controller to request
that an operation be performed. When the operation is complete,
NCP /VS may send a block to the host indicating the results of the
requested operation. NCP /VS will also send unsolicited blocks to the
host to provide it with such information as error statistics.
Within the Controller, the installation can optionally select functions to
make certain changes in transmission block data. These functions are
essentially data editing functions which can be performed on a
transmission block before transmission to a terminal on output or
before transmission to the Processor on input.
At any time, the NCP /VS may have several transactions in process at
various points in the subsystem. The supervisory functions provide the
capability for scheduling NCP /VS activity optimally by resolving
contention for processing time within NCP /VS.
In addition, there are functions in NCP /VS to accomplish the logical
and physical elements of input/ output on the communication lines and
the channel to the host Processor. These functions are dependent
upon the network configuration, specifically line and terminal types,
SOLC/BSC Path: The SDLC/BSC Path is an enhancement to
NCP /VS. It provides an SNA application-driven two-way path for data
flow between the Host Positive Credit Session of a 3651 Retail Store
Controller and a specific BSC device via a 3705-1/3705-11 Communications Controller.
The 3651 and the BSC device must be attached to the same 37051/3705-11: the 3651 via a nonswitched SOLe line and the BSC device
via a point-to-point nonswitched BSC line operating in EBCDIC
transparent mode, The 3705-1 may be local or remote, the 3705-11
must be local.
When using the SDLC/BSC Path, the following are supported as
terminals on the BSC line: S/360 and S/370, and the 1130, 1800,
S/3, and S/7 when specified as a S/3. Any device or application
code required is the user's responsibility.
Definition of the path is accomplished at NCP system generation time.
Data flowing over the SDLC/BSC Path does not enter the host CPU.
First level error recovery is performed by NCP /VS. Other errors must
be handled by the user-written application program interacting with
VTAM in the host. Application dependent logic can be added by way
of the BSC User Block Handling Routines (UBHRs) in NCP /VS.
Partitioned Emulation Programming - PEP is an extension of NCP /VS
which allows NCP /VS and EP /VS to co-reside within a single
3704/3705-1/3705-11. Through PEP, a contiguous range of subchannel addresses may be assigned to emUlation mode operation for the
execution through the 3704/3705 of programs written for the IBM
2701 Data Adapter Unit, the IBM 2702 Transmission Control Unit and
the IBM 2703 Transmission Control Unit, concurrently with network
control mode operation. A line may be assigned to either network
control mode or emulation mode operation at one time. Assignments
may be changed between network control mode and emulation mode
through use of a Control Command issued to the NCP /VS by the host
Processor Operator Control Facility.
Support of features, attachment of remote terminals and Processor
attachments for the NCP /VS partition when PEP is generated is the
same as described for NCP /VS, and for the EP /VS partition is the
same as described for EP /VS, except that: (1) Two channel NCP /VS
support for MP systems is available when PEP is used provided both a
Type 1 and a Type 3 channel adapter are employed; (2) NCP /VS
support is for virtual storage operating systems only.
The 3704 and 3705-1 with the Remote Program Loader Feature are
supported by OS/VS VTAM and OS/VS TCAM through VTAM, and by
DOS/VS VTAM.
PEP is available for System/370 Processors using OS/VS with VTAM
or TCAM or using DOS/VS with VTAM. The EP/VS partition does not
operate with VTAM.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
--------- ------------------.- DPD
SCP 4.603
Nov 78
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
EP /VS AND NCP /VS
NCP /VS (cont'd)
Problem determination aids such as machine and program check
recording, permanent line error recording, 3704/3705 panel display,
online terminal test, abend condition check and debugging aids are
provided by NCP /VS.
Remote attachment via the NCP /VS isshown in the following chart:
NCP /VS TERMINAL SUPPORT CHART
PTP
Communlcations
Network
sw nonsw
PTP MP
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
x
x
Communications Code
Correspan- EBCDIC
BCD EBCD dence norm trans
SS Terminals:
1051
2740-1
2740-2
2741
3767-1,-2
(2740-1 )
3767-1,-2,-3
(2740-2)
3767-1,-2
(2741)
5100(2741)
5110(2741)
CMCST (2741 )
S/7 (2740-1)
AT&T 8383 (b)
CPT-TWX
(M33/35)
WT Telegraph
WU 115A (b)
X
X
X
X
BSC Terminals:
2715-2
2772
2780
2972-8,-11
3271-1,-2
3274-1C
(3271-1,-2)
3275-1,2
3276 (3271-1,2) 3735
3741-2,-4
3747
3771-1,-2,-3
(2772)
3773-1,-2,-3,-P1,
-P2,-P3(2772)
3774-1,-2,-P1,
-P2 (2772)
3775-1,-P1
(2772)
3776-1,-2
(2772/3780)
3777-1
(2772/3780)
3777-2
(S/360-20)
3780 (2772)
5110 (as a 2772)5275
(3275-1,-2)
1131
X
X
X
X
X
ASCII
norm
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
x
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
x
x
x
x
SDLC Terminals:
,
3704 Remote
SOLC is communication
3705-1 Remote
3271-11,-12
code insensitive
3274-1C (3791)
3275-11,-12
3276 (3791)
3601
3602
3614
3624
3651-A50,-850
3651-A60,-B60
3661
3767-1,-2,-3
3771-1,-2,-3
3773-1,-2,-3,-P1,-P2,-P3
3774-1,-2,-P1,-P2
3775-1,-P1
3776-1,-2
3777-1
3791
S/32 (3770)
S/34 (3770)
X
x
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
x
x
x
x
X
X
X
X
X
X
x
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
not supported.
X
Nonswitched Nonswitched
X
Nonswitched Nonswitched
X
X
X
Nonswitched Nonswitched with
with SNBU • SNBU
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S/3
S/7 (S/3)
S/32 (S/3)
S/34 (S/3)
S/360-20
S/360
S/370
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X(c)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
(c) IPL of S/7 is not supported in this network configuration.
NCP /VS Support with IBM 3872, 3874, 3875 Modems of BSC, SDLC
Lines
X
X
X
(b) Attachment of non-IBM terminals is under the provisions of the IBM
Multiple Supplier System Policy.
X
X
X
X
(a) All terminals shown, except the 3704/3705-1 Remote, are
supported by a Local 3704/3705-1/3705-11 or Remote
3704/3705-1. The Remote 3704/3705-1 does not support another
Remote 3704/3705-1. Consult the 3705 Configurator for storage
sizing and performance capabilities of the 3704 and 3705 in terms
of the number of lines and terminal mix. If shown, the terminal
type in parenthesis designates the programming support provided.
E.g., "S/7 (2740-1)" means "that S/7 is supported as a 2740-1".
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Multiplexer's
IBM Modem
Modem
3872 3874 3875 Configuration
X
X
x
Attachment
BSC SOLC
X
18~6
x
X
X
X
X
X
X
x
X
X
X
x
X
X
X
X
X
X
Notes:
X
X
X
x
x
x
x
supported now or will be supported. See Terminal Support
Chart 1 for specifics.
X
X
x
x
Legend:
X
X
X
X
X
x
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Remote
Modem
Configuration
Nonswitched with
SNBU & fan out
only when NCP /VS
originates the
call to the
remote modem
X
X
X
Switched
Network
Switched
Network
• Switched Network Back Up
NCP /VS Minimum Machine Configuration: For program execution -- a
3705-1 Model A2 with Channel Adapter Type 1 or Type 2, Communication Scanner Type 1 or Type 2, and appropriate line attactlment
features ... a 3704 Model A3 with Channel Adapter Type 1, Communication Scanner Type 1 or Type 2, and appropriate line attachment
features ... a 3705-11 Model A3 with Channel Adapter Type 1,
Communication Scanner Type 2, and appropriate line attachment
features.
General Documentation
Title
IBM 3704 and 3705 Communications
Controllers Assembler Language
IBM 3704 and 3705 Communications
Controllers Principles of
Operations
Introduction to the 3704/3705
Communications Controllers
IBM 3704/3705 Communications
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Form
Number
GC30-3003
GC30-3004
GA27-3051
- ------- --
---- -------------_.
-
DPD
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
EP /VS AND NCP /VS
NCP /VS (cont'd)
Controllers Network Control
Program/VS Program Logic Manual
IBM 3704/3705 Communications
Controllers Network Control
Program Storage Estimates for
OS/TCAM and OS/VS TCAM Users
IBM 3704/3705 Program Reference
Handbook
Network Control Program/TCAM
Network User's Guide
EP Storage and Performance Guide
EP Program Logic Manual
SY30-3007
GC30-3006
GY30-3012
GC30-3009
GC30-3005
SY30-3001
Programming Service Classification: See SCP Index
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
SCP 4.604
Nov 78
===-=
=
--- ----- -- ------ DPD
---------,
SCP 4.701
Nov 78
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
SCP SUPPORT FOR ADVANCED FUNCTION SYSTEMS
AND TERMINALS
3600 FINANCE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
Programming support in the central processor for the 3600 Finance
Communication System consists of an OS/VS or DOS/VS assembler,
support programs used exclusively with 3600 systems (Le., the 3600
Host Support Independent Release-IR), and the Subsystem Support
Services used in common by 3600 systems and other subsystems.
This programming support enables the user to: Define the configuration
for each 3601/3602 controller ... Customize each 3614 or 3624
Consumer Transaction Facility... Write 3601/3602 application
programs ... Create and maintain a library for the 3600 system at the
central computing system ... Transmit 3601/3602 configuration
images, 3614 or 3624 customization images, and 3601/3602
application program images to 3601 s/3602s and 3614s ... Test these
images, using special debugging commands, from a 3270
display /printer ... Print dumps of 3601/3602 application program
storage and diskette files ... Convert assembly listings of 3601/3602
application programs into a more meaningful format ... Generate
personal codes for 3614 and 3624 users ... Encipher and decipher
messages transmitted to or from 3614s or 3624s.
3600 Host Support (Independent Release)
The assembler creates configuration data from 3601/3602 configuration macro instructions, creates customization data from 3614 and
3624 customization macro instructions, and creates 3601/3602
application program object modules from programs written in 3600
Assembler Language.
3601/3602 Configuration Definition macro Instructions: These are
used to specify the physical and logical configuration of each
3601/3602 and its associated user workstations. The macro
instructions are assembled into configuration data by the macro facility
of the OS/VS or DOS/VS Assembler. The configuration macro
instructions describe: User-defined parts of 3601/3602 storage (called
segments) ... Files to be created on the 3601/3602 diskette ... Loops
by which terminals are attached to the 3601/3602 controller ... The
link between the 3601/3602 and the telecommunication network ...
Translation tables for the keyboards, printers and displays of terminals
attached to the 3601/3602 ... Terminals, storage, application
programs, and operators associated with the workstations for the
3601/3602.
3614 and 3624 Customlzatlon Image Definition macro Instructions:
These specify the physical and logical configuration for each 3614 or
3624. The macro instructions are assembled into customization data
by the macro facility of the OS/VS or OOS/VS Assembler.
3600 Assembler Language: This is the set of macro instructions used
to write. application programs for execution in a 3601 or 3602
controller. Programs written in this language a're assembled into object
modules by the OS/VS or DOS/VS Assembler.
3600 Post-List Processor: This program can be used after a
3601/3602 application program has been assembled to delete
unnecessary assembler statements and make the assembly listing
more readable.
3600 Host Support Program (HSP): Beginning with IR4, this program
is used to link edit (1) any subsections of the 3601/3602 application
programs into a single application program module and (2) the
application program modules, controller configuration module and
controller data into a single 3601/3602 diskette image. The
3601/3602 images are then put into the Subsystem library. In
addition, HSP will ADD/REPLACE image subsections and provide a
facility for patching these images. These functions also apply to 3614
or 3624 customization images.
3600 Host Diskette Image Create (HDIC): This program can be used
as an alternative to transmitting the diskette image to the 3601/3602
by SSS (see below) during the diskette create process. HOIC takes
the diskette image from the Subsystem library, processes it and writes
it to a sequential host data set. Further processing could include (1)
transmitting the complete image, via user application, to a 3601/3602
to complete diskette creation, or (2) spooling the complete image to a
removable medium for further processing at another host.
3600 Program Validation Services (PVS): After the 3601/3602
configuration data and 3601/3602 application program have been
assembled and link Edited, the user can test them with 3600 Program
Validation Services. These services use VT AM and a local or remote
3277 Model 2 and, optionally, a 3284 Model 2 or 3286 Model 2
printer attached to a System/370 Processor, and provide special
debugging commands for the testing. See the appropriate SCP
section on terminal support for compatible devices supported.
The following two programs are not available in releases later than IR3.
3600 Format Service Program: This program must be used to
transform the assembler output into the format required for the 3600
library and to place the formatted 3601/3602 application program,
configuration data, or customization data on a VSAM data set.
3600 Finance Image Processor: The finance image processor is a
part of Subsystem Support Services specifically for the 3600 Finance
Communication System. It is used to create or modify the load images
for the 3601/3602 controller, 3614 terminal, and 3601/3602
application programs.
3614 Hard Error Recovery Modules: These can be used to indicate
the recovery action that should be taken after a hard error status
occurs in a 3614 causing it to close. The user furnishes the recovery
analysis program with the maintenance data from the 3614 and a risk
acceptance level associated with reopening the 3614. The hard error
routine performs a rather complex analysiS of the maintenance data to
recommend a recovery action. The recovery action recommended is
based on severity of errors, previous error history, and the acceptable
risk level. Based on this analysis three possible actions may be taken
by the user's program:
Attempt to reopen the 3614.
Inform the operator that manual service is required by a representative of the operating institution.
Inform the operator that service is required by a hardware service
representative (IBM CE or equivalent).
This facility is available in both the 3600 sub-host and the S/370 host
support code.
3614 Control Data Format Service Routine: Beginning with the
availability of the 3600 Host Support Independent Release 3, 3614
control data tapes for Version 4 and earlier 3614's must be reformatted by this service routine before further processing by 3600
Host Support programs.
3614 and 3624 Host Support: The following two sets of programs
provide host Processor data encryption support for the 3614 and 3624
Consumer Transaction Facility. Source listings are not orderable for,
nor supplied with, these modules. Customers should be informed of
this fact before the 3614 or 3624 is ordered.
Personal Identification Number (PIN) Generation Program: The 3614
and 3624 user is identified by an account number encoded on a
magnetic stripe on his identification card and by a PIN entered at the
3614 or 3624. The PIN is issued to the user by the financial institution
and can be freely selected if the financial institution chooses to write
its own host application programs to generate and check the PINs. As
an alternative, PINs can be generated using the PIN Generation
Program and the codes entered at the 3614 or 3624 can be checked
automatically by the 3614 or 3624. When this option is chosen, the
PINs have a special, complex relationship to the account number on
the identification card. The two versions of this program (BQKPERS
and BQKDPERS) allow the financial institution to generate PINs under
either the 3614 Alternate Encryption Technique (AET) or the U.S.
Federal Information Processing Data Encryption Standard (DES)
respectively. In addition, the DES version allows greater flexibility in
PIN and offset number generation.
Cipher Program: The cipher program is used by the host application
program to encipher and decipher messages and by Subsystem
Support Services to encipher the 3614 or 3624 customization image
before transmitting it. The integrity of the enciphering and deciphering
process depends upon adequate safeguarding of the user-supplied
crytographic key used by the cipher program. The two versions of this
program (BQKCIPH and BQKDES) allow the financial institution to
encipher the 3614 customization image and other data under either
AET or DES, respectively.
Subsystem Support Services - SSS
SSS provides support for the creation and maintenance of the 3600
library and for transmitting load images to the 3601, 3602, and 3614
or 3624. The host processor creates the load images which are than
transmitted by SSS to the 3601, 3602, 3614 or 3624. SSS also
supports a dump of an application program storage segment from the
3601 or 3602 controller and of the user's 3601/3602 diskette files.
SSS uses a special dump-formatting program. It can also receive data
specified by the system monitor's 888 command.
Note: Subsystem Support Services (SSS) are no longer supplied as
components of DOS/VS, but are available as an independent release
(Program No. 5747-CC6).
General Documentation:
Title
Number
SSS User's Guide
3600 System Summary
Instructions and Macro Reference
Programmer's Guide and Component
Description
Host Service Programs Reference
OOS/VS 3600 Host Support IR
Release 5
OS/VS 3600 Host Support IR
Release 5
GC30-3022
GC27-0001
GC27-0003
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
GC27-0004
GC27-0005
5747-BR1
5744-CA3
--------- ---- -- -------------_.- DPD
SCP 4.702
Nov 78
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
SCP SUPPORT FOR ADVANCED FUNCTION SYSTEMS
AND TERMINALS
3600 Finance Communication System (cont'd)
Programming Service Classification: See SCP Index.
3650 PROGRAMMABLE STORE SYSTEM
3650 Programmable Store System
3650 PSS Programming Support consists of SPPS and Host Support.
Programmable Store System Host Support
In support of the 3650 Programmable Store System and residing in a
Host S/370 is the PSS Host Support which consists of the following
basic components:
Controller Configuration Facility. Terminal
Configuration Facility. Data Base Facility and Data Communication
FAcility. They supply the support to maintain system libraries, tailor
and transmit controller and terminal programs from a Host S/370 to a
3651, generate tables for use in a 3651. create format controls and
space allocation for files, and provide problem determination aids.
Either BT AM or VT AM is used to provide BSC or SNA transmission to
and from the store controller.
The 3650 PSS supports the 3653 Model 1 functions. PSS also
provides the capability for user written programs executing in the 3651
controller to interact with user written programs executing in the Host.
another 3651 mdl 75, and 3663 ModellP or 3P.
Subsystem Program Preparation Support
The Subsystem Programming Preparation Support (SPPS) provides
the capability of writing programs for execution in the 3651 Models
A25, B25, A75, C75 and D75 Store Controller. Devices supported by
the Subsystem Programming Preparation Support are the 3651. host
communications, 3275-3 Display Station and 3284 in Screen image
mode. and 3653 Model 1 for basic input and output operations only.
Refer to the PP-Systems section of the sales manual for information on
Subsystem Programming Preparation Support II (SPPS II). SPPS II
provides additional capability.
A minimum 3650 Programmable Store System requires support
from:
(1) One System/370 with the following minimum storage entry:
DOS/VS
OS/VS1
OS/VS2
BTAM
VTAM
128K
240K
768K
160K
256K
768K
Additional storage will be required based on application requirements and performance considerations.
(2) An IBM 3704 or 3705 Communications Controller in emulation
mode using BT AM or network control mode using VT AM.
(3) A telecommunications access method (BT AM for BSC·. VT AM for
SDLC).
(4) The Virtual Storage Access Method (VSAM).
(5) The IBM 3651 Model A25, B25, A75. B75, C75 or D75 Store
Controller.
(6) An IBM 3653 Model 1 or an IBM 3663 Model 1 P or 3P. or an IBM
3275 Model 3 display station.
Additional terminal
"machines" pages.)
devices
may
be
added.
(See
appropriate
'Note: BSC switched line communications only.
Programming Service Classification/Charge: See SCP Index.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------- ---- --------------_. -
SCP 4.703
Nov 78
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
SCP SUPPORT FOR ADVANCED FUNCTION SYSTEMS
AND TERMINALS
DPD
3650 RET AIL STORE SYSTEM
3650 RSS Programming Support consists of SPPS and Host Support,
both of which operate in conjunction with SSS Global support provided
by the operating systems.
3650 SSS Logic (Release 2)
3650 SPPS Programmer's Guide
Programming Service Classification: See SCP Index
Subsystem Programming Preparation Support - SPPS
The Subsystem Programming Preparation Support (SPPS) provides the
capability of writing programs for execution in the 3651 Models A50
and B50 Store Controller.
The customer program may have two parts: a procedural part, and a
data format and transformation part.
The procedural part provides the programmer with the capability to
perform: Arithmetic ... Logic ... Program Control ... Input/Output
operations.
The data format and transformation part provides the programmer with
the capability of specifying data formats on 3275 Model 3 Display
Stations, and transformations to be applied to such data (including
checks and edits) during Input/Output operations which were specified
in the procedural part of a program.
Devices supported by SPPS are the 3651, host communication, 3275
Model 3 Display Station and 3284 in Screen Image mode.
3650 Release I (OS/VS1 and DOS/VS only) supports the 3651 and
the capability to write the procedural part. 3650 Release II (OS/VS1,
OS/VS2 MVS. DOS/VS) supports the capability to write the data
format and transformation part for the 3275 Model 3.
Subsystem Support Services and Retail Store System Support
In support of the 3650 Retail Store System and residing in a host
S/370 is RSS Host Support, which operates in conjunction with SSS
Global support to maintain system libraries, tailor and transmit
controller data from a host S/370 to a 3651, generate tables for use in
the 3651, create all format controls and space allocation for files, and
provide problem determination aids.
Note: Subsystem Support Services (SSS) are no longer supplied as
components of DOS/VS, but are available as an independent release
(Program No. 5747-CC6).
3650 Release I (OS/VS1 and DOS/VS only) uses BTAM and supports
the initial functions available on the 3651 which include basic sales
and logging support, negative in-store credit, support of all terminals
and the interface for user program execution. 3650 Release II
(OS/VS1, OS/VS2, DOS/VS) uses VTAM and supports the functions
available on the 3651 Model 50 which include basic sales and logging
support, negative in-store credit, support of all terminals, and interface
for user program execution, as well as the expanded functions
available on the 3651 files, and additional interfaces for user program
execution. It also supports 3653 functions associated with the
functional expansion feature, the 3651 9.3 megabyte disk storage,
direct attachment for 3651 to 3704/3705 and the 9600 bps loop
transmission speed.
A minimum 3650 Retail Store System requires support from one
System/370 with the following minimum configuration:
DOS/VS
OS;VS1
OS/VS2 MVS
BTAM
VTAM
128K
240K
N/A
160K
256K
768K
Additional storage will be required based on application requirements and performance considerations.
An IBM 3704 or 3705-1 or 3705-11 Communications Controller in
emulation mode using BTAM (OS/VS1 and DOS;VS only) or
network control mode using VTAM.
A telecommunications access method (BT AM for BSC, VT AM for
SDLC).
The Virtual Storage Access Method (VSAM).
The IBM Subsystem Support Services (SSS).
The IBM 3651 Model A50 Store Controller.
An IBM 3653 Point of Sale Terminal or an IBM 3275 Model 3
Display Station.
Additional terminal
"Machines" pages.)
devices
may
be
added
(see
SY30-3017
GC30-3024
appropriate
General Documentation:
Title
Number
3650 Introduction
3650 Administrative Operations Guide
3650 Sales Operations Guide
3650 PDP's and Operator Messages
3650 Host Logic (Release 2)
SPPS Logic
3650 SSS User's Guide
GA27-3075
GA27-3088
GA27-3089
GA27-3089
SY30-3025
SY30-3024
GC30-3022
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- ---- -------------- _.-
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
SCP SUPPORT FOR ADVANCED FUNCTION SYSTEMS
AND TERMINALS
DPD
SCP 4.704
Nov is
3660 SUPERMARKET SCANNING SYSTEM
3660 SUPERMARKET KEY-ENTRY SYSTEM
IBM programming support for the 3660 Supermarket Scanning System
consists of the Subsystem Support Services (SSS). The SSS program
is required in configuring and supporting individual 3651 Models A60
and B60 Store Controllers - Supermarket. For configuring, the user
creates Input Statements which select the options and create certain
tables that are necessary to the operation of the 3660 system. These
statements are edited and translated into "System Definition Records"
(SDR) by SSS. Using the appropriate telecommunications access
method, the SDRs are transmitted to the selected 3651 to complete the
tailoring of the 3660 system. For support, any IBM-supplied changes or
subsequent changes required to the SDR are applied through SSS.
The 3660 Supermarket Key-Entry System does not require the support
of the Subsystem Support Services (SSS). It does require support
from user-created host S/370 programs. This user-written code is
necessary to organize, preformat and transmit data records to be used
in the 3661 Store Controller. This includes any changes to these data
records. These records are for price/description, check authorization,
operator authorization and system parameter records (SPR). The user
will also need to instruct the 3661 Store Controller to execute certain
tasks, accept miscellaneous messages, or transmit data held within the
controller back to the host S/370 for application processing.
Note: Subsystem Support Services (SSS) are no longer supplied as
components of DOS/VS, but are available as an independent release
(Program No. 5747-CC6).
A minimum 3660 Supermarket Scanning System requires the support
from one System/370 with the following minimum configuration:
DOS/VS
OS/VS1
OS/VS2 MVS
STAM
VTAM
128K
240K
768K
160K
256K
768K
Additional storage will be required based on the application
requirements and performance considerations, particularly in a
VT AM environment.
An IBM 3704 or 3705-1 or 3705-11 in emulation mode using BTAM
or network control mode using VTAM or a S/370 ICA using BTAM.
BT AM telecommunications access method (using BSC) or VT AM
telecommunications access method (using SDLC).
The Virtual Storage Access Method (VSAM).
The IBM Subsystem Support Services (SSS).
An IBM 3872 modem or equivalent, or an IBM 2400 bps Integrated
Modem feature in the 3704 or 3705.
BSC compatibility (if using BTAM) or SDLC compatibility (if using
VTAM).
An IBM 3651 Model A60 Store Controller - Supermarket.
An IBM 3669 Store Communications Unit.
Customer supplied Store Loop.
At least one IBM 3663 Supermarket Terminal.
Additional terminals and devices may be added (see appropriate sales
manual "machines" pages.
The IBM 3660 Supermarket Systems Programmers User's Guide;
Key-Entry System contains the information necessary for the user to
establish his 3660 Supermarket Key-Entry System, including those
functions described immediately above, required to be built into
user-written code.
A minimum 3660 Supermarket Key-Entry System requires the support
from one System/370 and:
A virtual storage operating system (OS/VS1 or OS/VS2 MVS or
DOS/VS)
An IBM 3704 or 3705-1 or 3705-11 in emUlation mode using BTAM
or in network control mode using VTAM or a S/370 ICA using
BTAM
BT AM telecommunications access method with RFT option (using
BSC) or VT AM telecommunications access method (using SDLC)
1200 bps Integrated Modem feature in the 3704 or 3705-1 or
3705-11, or ICA
BSC compatibility (if using BT AM) or SDLC compatibility (if using
VTAM)
An IBM 3661 Store Controller
An IBM 3663 Model 2 Supermarket Terminal locally attached to
the 3661
A customer supplied Store Loop for the attachment of additional
Supermarket Terminals, if required
Additional terminals may be added.
"Machines" pages.
To further support the 3660 System, it will be necessary for the user to
create host S/370 programs. This user-written code is necessary to
organize, preformat, and transmit data records to be used in the 3651
Model A60/B60 Supermarket Controller. This includes any changes to
these data records. These records are for price/description, check
authorization, and operator authorizatioll data. The user will also need
to instruct the 3651 to execute certain tasks, accept miscellaneous
messages, or transmit data held within the controller back to the host
S/370 for application processing. The user is responsible for
interfacing directly with the telecommunications access method.
The IBM 3660 Supermarket Systems Programmers User's Guide
contains the programming information necessary for the user to
establish his 3660 system including those functions described
immediately above, required to be built into user-written code.
General Documentation:
(Order for Mechanicsburg.)
Title
IBM System/370 Subsystem Support
Services Logic Manual
IBM 3660 Supermarket Systems
Sales Operations Guide
IBM 3660 Supermarket Host
Program Logic Manual
Number
SY30-3017
GA27-3090
SY30-3019
Programming Service Classification: See SCP Index.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
See appropriate sales manual
------ ---- ----======
';'=
DPD
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
SCP SUPPORT FOR ADVANCED FUNCTION SYSTEMS
AND TERMINALS
SCP 4.705
Nov 78
3770 DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
3790 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
The 3770 Data Communication System is a family of terminals.
Teleprocessing support for SDLC line control is provided by RES or
JES2 (MVS) or POWER/VS (non-programmable 3770 models only,
except 3777-2), VTAM, TCAM nonswitched (OS/VS1 and OS/VS2
MVS only), and 3704.3705 NCPIVS. An appropriately configured
3770 system (except 3777-2) operates on nonswitched point-to-point
lines, switched point-to-point lines and nonswitched multipoint lines,
using SDLC or BSC or either under manual switch control. An
appropriately configured 3777-2 operates on nonswitched point-topoint lines and switched point-to-point lines using RES BSC or
JES2/360-20
MULTI-LEAVING
Workstation
support
for
the
System/360 Model 20 Submodel 5.
Support for the 3790 system is provided by VT AM and TCAM through
VTAM using the System/370 Local Channel Attachment, or VTAM,
TCAM through VTAM and TCAM/NCP Direct over nonswitched
communication lines using SOLC. VT AM and TCAM through VT AM are
supported using switched communications facilities with SDLC.
Nonswitched lines can be either point-to-point or multipoint. Batch
and/or inquiry sessions may use the physical line concurrently.
Program-controlled or manual procedures can be used at the host to
establish physical connections over switched lines for batch sessions,
with auto or manual answer at the 3791. Manual procedures are used
at the 3791 to establish physical connections over switched lines for
inquiry sessions with auto or manual answer at the host. The initial
release of 3790 support requires a special, system operator-assisted
procedure to use switched communication lines.
The RES-JES2-POWER/VS support provides for remote entry from the
non-programmable models of the· 3770 SDLC terminals in a terminalsharing environment, where multiple applications may establish logical
connections with the terminal on a per-session basis.
The 3770 system consists of the 3771, 3773, 3774, 3775, 3776 and
3777-1 Communication Terminals. All except 3773P models can
operate under RES-JES2-POWER/VS support for the ,2772 Multipurpose Control Unit. In addition, the 3776/3777-1 can operate under
RES-JES2-POWER/VS support for the 3780 Data Communications
Terminal. Additional 3770 products include the 3784 Line Printer, the
3521 Card Punch, the 3501 Card Reader, the 2502 Card Reader and
the 3203 Printer.
Users may develop, test and run terminal programs for programmable
models of the 3773, 3774 and 3775 Communication Terminals. 3770
programs are prepared at the host using a System/370 assembler,
3790 programming statements, and an IBM-supplied macro instruction
library. Program Validation Services (PVS) validate and format 3770
terminal programs for storage at the host and for later transmission to
the 3773, 3774 or 3775 under control of user-written host application
programs.
The macros and PVS support for programmable models of the 3773,
3774 and 3775 Communication Terminal (3773P/3774P/3775P) is
packaged as a Host Support SCP component. The component called
3790 Host Support - OS/VS (or DOS/VS) carries the program number
5744-BZ3 (or 5747 -BQ1).
The JES2 support when used with the 3790 RJE Function provides the
user with a Remote Job Entry capability.
User-Developed 3790 Programs
Users may develop, test and run programs for the 3790 which do not
use the 3760.
3790 programs are prepared at the host using a System/370
assembler, 3790 statements, and an IBM-supplied macro instruction
library.
Program Validation Services (PVS) allows validation of the 3790
program statements at the host to assist in 3790 program development. PVS also formats 3790 programs for storage at the host and
later transmission to the 3791. The macros and PVS, along with a
3790 Industry Unique function applicable to SSS and appropriate inner
macros necessary for the independent link-editing of these functions to
the Operating System, are packaged as a Host Support SCP component.
Subsystem Support Services (SSS) controls 3790 program libraries at
the host and controls the transmission of 3790 programs and data set
specifications from the host to the 3791 via VT AM and NCP /VS.
Batch Transfer Program
The Batch Transfer Program is a program which supports, using VTAM,
the extraction of data sets from a 3790 Communication System/Data
Entry Configuration to a System/370 virtual storage system.
This program allows the customer to specify jobs of data to be
transferred from the 3791 to the host. A request for a specific job will
result in the transmission of all batches flagged as available for
transmission within that job. When Key Entry Data Jobs are received
at the host, they are written to disk or tape into user-named sequential
data sets for subsequent processing by an application program. Route
jobs (messages to the host operator) are sent to either the operator's
console or the printer. List format jobs, print jobs and report jobs are
sent to a host printer.
The Batch Transfer Program, through a user exit, provides for the
inclusion of a user-written routine for data jobs. This facility allows a
user to modify or delete records that are received at the host, or
provide additional records himself for inclusion within the output data
set.
Multiple batches from more than one 3791 may be combined at the
host to prC'duce a single job data set during one execution of the Batch
Transfer Program.
With the availability of the Reverse Extract function, the Batch Transfer
Program will also provide the capability to transfer a host-created data
set via the System/370 Local Channel Attachment or SDLC to the
3791 for updating by a 3760 operator. The data sets will be transferred in a similar manner by specifying the job name and the 3791
address to the Batch Transfer Program.
Reverse Extract is not supported under Special Programming Support
(SPS/KE)(OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 only).
Programming Service Classification: See SCP Index.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- ------ ---------
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
SCP SUPPORT FOR ADVANCED FUNCTION SYSTEMS
AND TERMINALS'
--_.------ DPD
SCP 4.706
Nov 78
SYSTEM/32
The System/32 is a low-cost general purpose computer system.
Teleprocessing support for SDLC line control is provided by RESJES2-POWER/VS, VTAM, and the 3704/3705 NCP/VS when the
System/32 is specified as a 3770. Teleprocessing support for SSC
line control is provided by RES-JES2-JES3-POWER/VS, VTAM,
STAM, TCAM (OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 only), and EP/VS with PEP when
the System/32 is specified as a System/3. An appropriately
configured System/32 operates on a nonswitched point-to-point line, a
switched point-to-point line, or as a tributary station on a nonswitched
multipoint line, using SDLC or SSC. Operation of System/32 is under
control of an SCP-supplied utility or user-written program.
The System/32 consists of a processing unit, keyboard, display, disk
storage, line or serial printing facility, diskette drive, and optionally a
data communications adapter (SDLC or SSC).
Note: The diskette drive is not supported by SSC or SOLC communica-
tions programs.
SYSTEM/34
The System/34 is a low-cost general purpose computer system, with
attached display stations. Teleprocessing support for SDLC line
control is provided by JES2, VTAM amd the 3704/3705 NCP/VS
when the System/34 is specified as a 3770.
Teleprocessing support for SSC line control is provided by HASP, ASP,
RES, JES2, JES3, VTAM, STAM, TCAM (OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 only,
and the 3704/3705 EP/VS with PEP when the System/34 is specified
as a System/3. An appropriately configured System/34 operates on a
nonswitched point-to-point line, a switched point-to-point line, or as a
tributary station on a nonswitched multipoint line, using SDLC or SSC.
Operation of System/34 is under control of an SSP supplied utility or
user-written program.
The System/34 consists of a processing unit, keyboard display
workstations, disk storage, line or serial printing facility, diskette drive,
and optionally a data communications adapter (SDLC or SSC).
Note: The diskette drive is not supported by SSC or SDLC communica-
tions programs.
Programft1lng Service Classification: See SCP Index.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
I 'I~
--------- ----- - -------------_. -
DPD
SCP 4.801
Dec 78
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
SUBSYSTEM INFORMATION RETRIEVAL FACILITY
RELEASES 1, 2 and 3 for the
IBM 3790 (Configuration Support #9169)
and the IBM 8100 Information System
5747-BQ1 (DOSjVS) - 5744·BZ3 (OSjVS)
The Subsystem Information Retrieval Facility is a part of the Host
Support Independent Release (lR) for the 3790 (Configuration Support
#9169) and 8100/DPCX systems. The subsystem Information
Retrieval Facility provides the host location with the ability to retrieve
incident and status information, the ability to execute problem
determination tools and to modify with appropriate control, distributed
system control code. It establishes in one product a broad range of
functions required to help isolate and act on problems in a distributed
system network.
Highlights
Host Inititated Data Link Data Trace
Customer Responsibilities - For the REA and PTF files, customers
must acquire the necessary information from Field Engineering and
load the required data. Commun'ication between the customer and
Field Engineering must be sustained to ensure that the REA and PTF
information is kept current and accurate.
Operating System Support
System Configuration: The Subsystem Information Retrieval
Facility may be used on any System/3l0 Model 125 or larger
capable of operating with OS/VS - VTAM, OS/VS - ACF /VTAM,
OS/VS - TCAM Level 10, OS/VS - ACF/TCAM, DOS/VS - VTAM,
DOS/VS - ACF/VTAM, and DOS/VS - EXTM.
Host Retrieval of 3276 Error Log
Programming Services/Charge: See PP Index.
Host Retrieval of:
Documentation:
Program Abend Dumps
Subsystem Information Retrieval Facility Guide and Reference
Manual SC27 -0497.
Condition Incident Log
Control Code Configuration for 3791
Selected Data Set Records
Host Initiated Wrap Test
Host PTF Distribution and Control
Host Initiated Data Link Protocol Trace
Interactive Control
Host Retrieval of Formatted 81 OO/DPCX System Dump,
Subsystem Information Retrieval Facility Highlights in Detail
Host Distribution and Control of Requests for Engineering Action - REA
files can be built in the host or can be retrieved from a 3791. The
3791 REA status can be queried, one or multiple REAs sent to any
or all network 3791 s and indicators set for automatic or manual
application of selected REAs.
Host Initiated Data Link Data Trace - A data link message trace can
be initiated or terminated by the host. The trace data will be
spooled to a 3791 data set for printing at the 3791 or for transmission to the host for printing.
Host Retrieval of 3276 Error Log - Status and statistical information
contained in the Error Log of the 3276 Display Units connected to
a distributed system may be retrieved by the host.
Host Retrieval of Program Abend Dumps - Available Program Abend
DUmps may,be retrieved by the Host for central site analysis.
Host Retrieval of Condition Incident Log - Available Condition
Incident Ll)g records are retrieved from the distributed systems for
analysis at the host.
Control Code Configuration - The Control Code feature, configuration and quantity are retrieved at the host. The configuration data
is extracted from a system file that was loaded during the system
installation. In addition to the configuration, the file contains the
serial number of the machine and the EC level of the code.
Selected Data Set Records - Selected records from the Transaction,
Print and Message Data Sets can be retrieved at the Host.
Host Initiated Wrap Test - Test data is transmitted to the distributed
system and then queried by the host to test the communication
path. The duration of the wrap test can be modified to support
physical testing of the line.
Host Initiated Data Link Protocol Trace - A trace facility can be
initiated or terminated from the host that will provide al\ pertinent
incoming and outgoing SDLC command and address bytes and
SNA headers between the 3791 and 3276.
Host PTF Distribution and Control - PTF files can be built in the host
or can be retrieved from an 8100/DPCX. The· PTF status of
8100/DPCXs can be queried, one or multiple PTFs sent to any or
al\ network 8100/DPCXs and indicators set for automatic or
manual application of selected PTFs.
Interactive Control - 3270 Display (1720 character screen) support
is provided for input and editing of control statements and the
presentation of retrieved information.
Host Retrieval and Formatting of 8100/DPCX System Dumps - System
dumps can be retrieved from 8100/DPCX systems and presented
for display and/or printing in a formatted manner at the host.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Reverse side is blank
PRICE LIST
General Systems Division
Column Heading
Explanation
MACH Type
- Machine type number
MOL/FEAT
- Machine model number or feature number
- Acc. means accessory
Description
- Description of machine, model, feature or accessory
- Preceding numbers are part numbers for accessories
Purchase Price
- Purchase Price of base machine, exclusive of features
- NC = No Charge
Monthly Rental
- Monthly rental charge (M RC) under LRA
- Monthly availability charge (MAC) under Agreement for IBM
Machine Service if the machine and customer are eligible
- NC = No Charge
Monthly Lease
- Monthly lease charge (M LC), under LRA, for base term indicated
- ETP, FTP, TAP or ATP monthly charge for machines and customer's
still el igible for withdrawn lease plans. See ACB section to verify customer
eligibility under the old lease plan.
.
- Note: If a Plan A base machine is on LRA/lease, any LRA/rental features
or models will be billed an~ additional amount in lieu of additional
use charges. This amount will be equal to a percentage of the LRA/rental
charge based upon the type of base machine-CPU = 5%, I/O = 10%.
Base Term
-
U/L%
- Upper limit percentage under LRA leases
Term CHG
- Termination charge under LRA leases (%/months)
MMMC
- Minimum monthly maintenance charge for purchased machines
- NC = No charge
- TM = Time and material maintenance only
Base term, in months, for LRA leases
Former FTP machines are indicated 12 and 24 months
Former ETP machines are indicated 24 months
Former TAP machines are indicated 36 months
Former ATP machines are indicated 60 months
Verify eligibility for the withdrawn plans by machine and customer.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Column Heading
Explanation
FIC
- The service charge for field installation of the special feature on
purchased machine. PO under this heading means plant
installation only (cannot be field installed).
PUR OPT
- Applicable purchase option percent. S LG LP machines accrue at
this rate plus 15 percent.
M.G.
- Maintenance Group-indicates the machine group used when
calculating the additional maintenance charge for optional
periods of Maintenance Agreement service availability.
P.C.
- Per Call-the class of rates applicable to purchased machines subject
to hourly service charges (e.g., where no maintenance agreement
exists, or when service is requested outside the hours vcovered in the
Maintenance Agreement, etc.).
W.C.
- Warranty Category-indicates the months of warranty following
initial installation on a purchased machine.
R.P.
- Rental Plan-the rental plan under which the machine is offered.
See "Rental Plans" in ACB Section. (For Rental Plan "A" machines,
the entry indicates that additional billable time is charged at an
hourly rate of 1/176th of 10% of the MAC. The extra shift rate is usually
10% except that it is 30% for the following machines: 1231,1255,1403,
1419, 1442, and 1443.
L.C.
- Useful Life Category-see "Investment Tax Credit"
Not to bereoroduced without written Dermission_
11/01/7'3
DATE
MACH MDLI
_IyeE_EEAT ____
z
O
C"
CD
...
CD
~
o
Q.
c:
C')
CD
Q.
~.
~
o
S.
001
:>:2
005
NOTE: SOME PRICES HAVE
PURCHASE
MONTHLY
2125.0C
20C5.0C
76.00
70.00
147.CO
141.00
1 C 8.00
103.00
119.CC
MONTHLY RASE
U/L
TERM
PUP M P W
R L
___________________ eRl~g _____ ag~I~~ ____ b~~~~ __ ~~e~ ___ ~ ___ £~§ ______ ~~~~ ___ El~ ___ QeI_§_~_~ __ ~_~
PRINTING CARD PUNCH ALPHA
PRINTING CARD PUNCH NUMERIC
PRINTING CARD PUNCH ALPHA
c-:6 PRINTING CAPO PUNCH NUMERIC
N'7
PRINTING CARD PUN~H
CC'8
PRINTING CARD PUNCH
(21
INTERPRETING CARD PUNCH
121C
ALPHABETIC FIELD LIMIT
ALPHA8~TIC RECEIVE
1?21
1255 -ALTERNATE PPOGQAM
135C
AUXILIARY DUPLICATION
15:)9
CARD CORREC1."ION
CARD IN S':RTI ON
1535
1945
CLOCK READ-IN
436('
F~ED.VAR!A8LE LENGTH
HIGH SPEED SKIP
4595
47C2
INTERMIX
4711
INTERSPERSED GANG PUNCH UR
4712
INTERSPERSED GANG PUNCH UL
INTERSPERSED GP SW CTQL CC
4714
593C
PUNCH SWITCH CON1ROL
607C
READING BOARD • LARGE
7~61
SELF-CHECKING NUMBER
7062
SELF-C~ECKING
NUMBER-MOD 11
SELF-CHECK GENERATOR-MOD 11
7C63
7064
SELF-CHECKING NUM PUNCH ELIM
7244
SPACE CODE GENERATION
CAPO PUNCH NUM NON-PRINTING
0029
All
A12
CARD PUNCH EXP NON-PRINTING
A21
CAR~ PUNCH NUM PRINTING
A22
CARD PUNCH EXP PRINTING
CARD PUNCH NUM NON-PR L ZERO
Bl1
B12
CARD PUNCH EXP NON-PR L ZERO
CARD PUNCH NUM PRINT L ZERO
B21
B22
CARD PUNCH EXP PRINT L ZERO
C22
CARD PUNCH EXP PRINT INTEPP
135r
AUXILIARv DUPLICATION
1535
CARD INSERT ION
CHARACTER INHIBIT
154C
157C
COLUMN LOCATE
FEED.VARIABLE LENGTH
43.CC
4595
HIGH SPEED SKIP
INTERSPERSED GANGPUNCH
4720
READING BOARD EXTENSION
6065
SELF-CHECKING NUMBER-MOD 10
7061
7('62
SELF-CHECKING NUMBER-MOD 11
SELF-CHECK NUMBER GENERATOR
7C63
TAPE TO CARD PRINTING PUNCH
OC47
001
1350
AUXILIARY DUPLICATION
DISTRIBUTORS GP 5 2-POS
339C
ac 26
S-
Q~~Cgle!lQ~
C~ANGED
3625.CO
351C.OO
2770.00
2645.CC
2755.00
259. C c:
489.0C
95.0(
259. C ('
221.0C
158. CC'
252.0C
619.0 C
686.C<:
145.00
126.0C
126.00
32.00
NC
20.0r
78C.OC
109C.OC
189.0 C
322.CC
NC
13CC.::0
1415.0C
1965.0C
2C 75. CC
1675.00
1790. CC
234C.OC
2455.(C
331('.0:::
179. C C
53.0C·
71.00
149.0C
608.0C
477.00
239. DC
16.CC
577.0C
689.0C
59.0C
3985.0C
259.0C
79.0C
55
55
55
5'3
C
1. B
C
B
4[,.5C
5~
C
C
C
B
B
B
4':' .5C
48.5C
55 C
B
39.CC
35.C:
59.CC
49.(C'
8.CO
2.CC
5e.~c
24.00
3.00
2.:C
8.0:)
5.5C
7.CO
5.Ct
10.0C
24.00
24.00
6.0C
1 .5:;
36.C'C
58.((73.CC
75.1:('
9(1.CC
PO
PO
241.:)('
19.(,C
1C2.ce
1C'2.0C
24.CC
1 • C' C
3.5("
2.CC
4.CC
2.5('
NC
7.('C
7.CC
1:: .C 0
1 C • CO
5.00
NC
:".5C
"lC
22.::C
.oc
86.0C
106.00
112.00
142.CO
6.0C
2.0(.
3.C C
7.0C
24.CO
24.00
10.CC
PURCHASE ONLY
31.00
35.00
3.CC
2C7.00
8.CO
3.CC
s.OC
NC
7.0C
NC
33.5C
37.(;C
45.0(;
47.50
4C.CC
A2.CC'
A8.5C
NC
PO
PO
13.CC
9C.CC
48.5C
51. C C
2.5C
136.C(I
:.75
NC
1.5C
13E-.CC
11 • CO
s.ce
1.5C
NC
12.5C
13.CC'
NC
B4.5C
5.5C
34.CC
9C. C-C
Pr:'
241.CC'
153.::C
NC
1 36. C C
143.CC
13.CC·
2.ce
EFFECTIVE JANUARY 1. 1979. REFER TO NOTICE TO CUSTOMER DATED SEPTEMBEP 26.
.-
C
~5
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
1
':'5
55
':'5
55
55
55
55 C
~5
C
55 C
55 C
C:;5 C
55 C 1
B
8
8
8
B
8
B
B
2
2
2
2
B 2
8 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
8 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
B
B
8
2
2
B
B
2
B
B
A 2
8
B
B
B
B
2
2
2
NC
33.00
35.00
5.0r
10.CO
NC
67.:0
74.CC
92.CO
98.00
8":'
50::
B
B
B
R
1-
55
55
55
55
C 1 B
C 1 B
C
C
55
C 1 B
55
55
55
5'3
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
C 1 B
C
B
B
B
C
8
C
B
C
1
B
C 1 E'
C 1 B
C
B
C 1 B
C
B
B 2
R 2
B 2
B 2
B
B
B
2
2
2
B 2
p. 2
8 2
B 2
B 2
8 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
B :2
C
C
C
9
B
B
C
B
B
B
55 C
B
B :2
55 C
55 C
55 C
5C C
B
B
B
B
B 2
8 2
B 2
5('
B
B 2
B
B 2
55
C
5C C 1
1978 •
8
2
2
11/01/78
DATE
MACH MDL/
_!XeE_Ef~T
0047 4375
678C
6795
0(,59
OCI
C02
138C
43~t;
...
I'D
"a
Q.
c(')
I'D
Q.
!.
:T
S
o
4595
6065
0082
001
152C
1545
1546
154 7
237('
4(91
4092
4093
45(1
45C'2
5230
724C
C~83
OC1
1225
1520
1545
1546
1547
2370
4C)15
45Cl
45(2
4503
45j4
523('
724C
OC84
001
1225
2370
724C
OC85
OCI
050
113C
1960
2370
3195
4101
41C2
4103
4107
~OTc:
____
PURCHASE
Qg~~~leIIQ~
___________________
FIELD DEF EXITS 5-8
SELECTORS GP 5 2-POS
SELECTOR GP 10 I-POS MOL 2
VERIFIER NUMERIC
CARD VERIFIER~ALPHAMERIC
AUXILIARY VERI~ICATION
FEED,VARIA8LE LENGTH
HIGH SPEED SK IP
READING BOARD =XTENSION
SORTER
CARD COUNTING UNIT
CARD MATCH FRONT PAIL BRUSH
CARD MATCH REAR PAIL BRUSH
C~RD MATCH OFFSET RAIL BPUSH
COUNTER,AUXILIARY CARD
FEED,INT~RCH.
51 COL
FEED,INTERCH, 6C COL
FEED.INTERCH.66 COL
GROUP SORTING-LCe MASTER eDS
GROU~ S~RTING-RCe MASTER CDS
MULTIPLE COLUMN SI::LECTOR
SORTiNG SUPPRESSION
SORTER
ALPHABETIC SORTING
CARD COUNTING UNIT
CAPO MATeH FRONT RAIL BRUSH
CARD MATCH REAR RAIL BRUSH
CARD MATCH OFFSET RAIL BRUSH
COUNTER,AUXILIARY CARD
~EED.FILE
GROUP SORTING-LCe MASTER
GROUP SORTING-RCe MASTER
GROUP SORTIN~-LCC DETAIL
GROUP SORTING-RCC DETAIL
MULTIPLE COLUMN SEL~CTOR
SORTING SUPPRESSION
SORTER
ALPHABETIC SORTING
COUNTER.AUXILIARY CARD
SOPTING SUPPRESSI~N
COLLATOR
COLLA TOP
ALPHABETIC COLLATING
COLLATOR COUNTING
COUNTER.AUXILIAPY CARD
CYCLE DELAY UNIT ADDN
FEED,INTERCH PRIMARY. 51
FEED,INTERCH PRIMARY. 60
FEED,INTEPCH PRIMARY. 66
FEED.INT=RCH SEC, 51 COL
SOME PPICES
HA~E
CDS
CDS
CDS
CDS
COL
COL
COL
~81~~
MONTHLY
_____
76.00
126.0C
158.0C
2C65 .. CC'
~185.00
179.00
6C8.CO
477. (Ie
16.00
283C.OC
21 70.0 C
618.0C
618.00
NC
252.0':
696.00
696.00
696.(C
1345.00
1345.00
1385.00
61.00
8175.0C'
113C.00
2170.0C
747.00
747.00
NC
392.00
915.00
1345.0C
1345.0C
NC
NC
2240.00
61.00
1C89C .cc
176C.OC
448.00
1 79. C C
735C .0 C
7220.00
16 3C. 00
955.0C
252.0C
145.0 C
336.0C
336.0C
336.00
336.00
~~~I~b
MONTHLY BASE
____
b~~§~
__
!E~~
U/L
___ ___
~
TERM
~~§
1 .0 C
2.5C
2.50
52.0C'
52.0(
2.5C
12.(,('
8.50
I'Ie
34.00
14.5('
1.25
1.25
NC
2.00
5.00
IO.OC
1 C 1 .0 C
107.00
6.0C
24.00
24.CO
67.00
'35.00
IO.CO
1:' .:; 0
NC
5.eo
10.00
1:> .OC
10.00
24.00
24.CO
31.CC
2.00
141.0C
16.00
35.00
16.00
16.00
NC
7.00
24.00
24.00
24.00
NC
NC
54.00
2.00
316.00
31 .c 0
10.00
2.C'C:
7.00
7.00
7.0C
3.50
3.5C
4.CC
1.25
59.::'0
3. $C
14.50
4.0C
4.00
NC
3.5C
2.5C
4.::0
4.0C
NC
NC
14.50
1.25
lC5.0C'
1.25
3.50
NC
69.50
59.CC
9.50
8.0C
2.00
1.75
7.CC
7.0C
7.CO
7.CC
5.C C
168.00
128.CO
40.00
16.00
5.00
2.00
1:> .00
10.CO
10.00
10.00
CHANGED EFFECTIVE JANUARY 1. 1979.
REFER TO NOTICE TO CUSTOMFR DATED
-
PUP M P W
2-
P L
______ ~~~~ ___ El~ ___ Q~I_~_~_~ __ ~_~_
9C.00
49.0C
66.CO
62.0C
PO
221.C0
NC
50· C
5t:' C
B
8
SCI
C
A
55
55
55
55
55
C
C
B
B
9
B
B
C
C
C
B 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
8
2
B 2
B 2
45 c: 2 B
45 C 2 B
45 C 2 B
45 C 2 B
B 2
PO
PO
176.00
176.00
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
B
B
8
B
13
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
66.CC
PO
176.CC
1 7e. OC
8
2
PO
58.00
119.0:;
73.00
73.00
66.00
PO
PO
PO
PrJ
lec.~c-
26.0('
PO
42.0C
47.00
PO
304.00
66.0C
73.00
PO
PO
PO
PO
S~PTEMBER
26.
C 2 B
C
2
B
c:
2
B
C 2 B
C 2
B
C 2 B
e 2
C 2
C 2
B
B
B
C 2 B
C 2
B
C 2 B
C
2
13
45
45
45
45
C
C
C
C
2
2
2
2
B
B
B
B
45
45
5'3
55
55
55
50
5C'
50
50
5C
50
50
50
50
50
C
C
C
C
C
C
2
2
2
2
2
2
B
B
B
B
B
B
C 2
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
B
8
B
B
8
B
B
B
2
2
2
2
2
2
C 2
C 2
C 2
1978.
B 2
B 2
B 2
8 2
B 2
B 2
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
11/Cl/78
DATE
MACH MDL/
_IyeE_E~~T
(lCe5
41C8
41C9
6681
7465
763C
CC87
"Cl
OC2
196~
z
g.
0'
a'
CD
CD
'0
~
o
a.
c:
n
CD
a.
~"
~
o
S.
~
3:
;::::I
'0
CD
3C;;"
(/)
0"
?
::'1195
41 C 1
41 ~ 2
4IC3
41C7
4108
41~9
6E81
OC88
0('1
OC2
OC3
1 C 9:
lC 91
1092
1960
237C
4C15
403(1
6555
6765
7421
7422
7423
763(1
C129
0:11
OC2
003
102C
10 25
1201
3215
361C
3950
4601
557C
6065
7061
7062
75C3
82C 1
87'5
C357
004
PURCHASE
MONTHLY
MONTHLY BASE
U/L
TFRM
PUP M P W
P L
____ Q~~~~leIIQ~ ___________________ E81~~ _____ ~~~I~~ ____ b~~~~ __ !~~~ ___ ~ ___ ~~§ ______ ~~~~ ___ EI~ ___ QeI_~_~_~ __ e-~
FEED, INTERCH SEC, 6c COL
FEED. INTERCH SEC, 66 COL
SELECTOR,PRIMARY/SECONDARY X
SPLIT SEL~CTOR AND SEQ UNITS
SWITCH.TOGGLF
COLL ATOR
COLLATOR
COLLATOR COUNTING
CYCLE DELAY UNIT ADON
FEFD,INTERCH PRIMARY, 51 COL
FEED,INTEPCH PRIMARY, 60 COL
FEED,INTERCH PRIMARY, 66 COL
FEED.INT~RCH SEC. 51 COL
"'EED,INTERCH SEC. 61'" COL
FEED, INTERCH SEC. 66 COL
SELECTOR,PRIMARY/SECONOARY X
COLLATOR
COLLATOR
COLLA TOP
ALPH COLLATE 4 POS MOL 1,2,3
ALPH COLLATF 8 POS MDL 1,2
ALPH COLLATE 10 POS MDL 1
COLLATOR COUNTING
COUNTER,AUXILIARY CAPD
FEED. FILE-SECONDARY
FD.51-COL INT SEC. & FILE FD
SELECTOR. DIGIT
SELECTORS, RECODE GP 5 AODN
SPLIT CTRL UNITS MDL 1.2,3
SPLIT CTRL UNITS MDL 1,2
SPLIT CTRL UNITS MDL 1 ONLY
SWI TCH TOGGLE
PUNCH VERIFIER NON-PRINT
PUNCH NON-VERI"'IER PRINTING
PUNCH VERIFIER PRINTING
ACCUMULATE
ADDL ACCUMULATE PRGRM LEVLS
AUXILIARY STORAGE
DIRECT PUNCH CONTROL
EXPANSION FEATURE
VARIABLE LENGTH CARD DEVICE
INTERPRET
PRODUCTION STATISTICS
READING BOARD EXTENSION
SLF CHK NUMBER MOD~LUS 1('
SLF CHK NUMBER MODULUS 11
CAR~ INPUT/OUTPUT ATTACH
3741/5320 ATTACHMENT
VERIFY READ CONTROL
INPUT STA TI ON
NOTE: SOME PRICES HAVE CHANGED EFFECTIVE
336.CO
336.~(,
112.00
168.'C
E.CC
1289C.(,(
12~30.0C
955.00
145. C C
336.CO
336.CC
336.CO
336. Or.'
336.CO
336.0C
112.CO
2C 2 7C. OC
18C7C .ce
1597C.CC
1295.CC
217C.00
2605.0C
899.0C
252.0C
915.00
4275.0C
224.00
224.CC
168.0C
168.CC
168.00
6.0C
365C.OC
409C.OC
43 8C. OC
58:3.00
146.CO
233.00
176. C C
292.0,0
723.CO
328.0C
292.0('
16.00
438.('('583. CO
.CO
1e.cc
2.5C
5.00
8.00SUC
324.CO
283.00
16.CO
2.CO
1:) • CO
10.00
1': .0 C
1C
11':' .oe
1:) • C C
82.CC
7.('C
1.75
6.5C
f • '3C
6.5C
'!:.5C
3C lL. (' C
T:.C'C
PO
PO
P("'I
6.5('
1.5C
IlL. C C
!54.CC
"".50
7.CC
8.CO
13.CO
1979. REFEq
3-
PO
158.~C
66.C'(
2.5C
55.CC
2.5('
119.(,C
PC'
2.5C
2.5C
2.5C
2.50
NC
42.C(
85.0C
119.0r
119.C'C
119.C'C
C 2 B
C 2 A
5C C 2 B
5(' C 2 B
5':'
C
55
C 2 B
2
",,5
C
2
B
p.
55 C 2 R
55 C 2 R
55 C 2 A
2
8
B 2
8 2
8 2
B 2
R 2
A 2
A 2
8 2
B 2
e
2
8
2
':5
55
C
5"3
C
2
B
8
9
55
55
45
45
45
45
lL5
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
C
('
C
C
C
2
2
2
2
2
B
B
B 2
B 2
:3
E'
8 2
E' 2
8
B 2
C
2
B
8
8
B
B
B
C 2 8
55 C 2 B
C 2 S'
C
2
13
C 2 B
C
2
8
R 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
C 2
~
E' 2
C
C
C
2
2
2
B
EI
B
B
B
B
C 2
C 2
C 2
B
B 2
:3
8
8
B
C
C
B
B
B 2
B 2
2
2
2
2
2
22.C'''
55.((
6.(
6.0
56.5~
4C
C
R
8
2
3.(C
4C
4':
C
C
8
B
B
2
8
2
4C
C
B
8
2
1.5C
1.5C
NC
7.5C
2.(C
1.5C
NC
1.50
1.5e
13.5C
9.5C
1 .50
4.CC
16.CO
PC'
PC'
2.CC
1.5C
-
22.~':'
PO
PO
PO
8.CO
6.00
10.00
31.00
16.00
10.CO
6.CC
39.00
1!9.~C'
94.~C
5. C;J
176.00
884.00
1.
C;~
175.t:'C
74.00
31.00
5.00
24.00
85.00
10.00
5.00
5.0e
5.C:)
5.00
8.!)CSUC
161.00
179.00
193.0(
24.C Co
133C.OC
J~NUARY
",C
163.0C
.c:,
24.00
96.CO
76.00
1560.00
Pf"l
PO
14.0C
6.5C
10.0C
2.5C
525.00
467.00
4':7.00
35.(,0
6~
'.C'C
7.00
1.5C'
2.5('
NC
4':'
C
13
B 2
4;
4C
4C
40
C
C
C
C
8
8
B
B
B
B
B
2
2
2
8
2
4:'
C
NC
1
B
4C C 1 B
40 C
B
4C C
B
4a
C
B
5C C
8
TO NOTICE TO CUSTOMER DATED SEPTEMREP 26. 1978.
B 2
B 2
B 2
R 2
B 2
8 2
11/C1/78
DATE
MACH MDL/
_!yeE_E~~T
0357
('358
(,36C
0361
C372
z
0373
0374
0402
20'
C"
C'D
~
C'D
"o
~
Q.
c:
n
C'D
Q.
~.
;:
o
S.
OC5
006
145('
2287
OC1
001
OCI
001
002
0:>3
7578
0('1
0('1
ACI
RSr
S5e
S52
S53
XAI
XRC
XSO
XS3
124C
127C
1271
1272
1273
2165
2195
2225
25E5
3241
3243
4')91
4092
4093
455C
4845
4846
5265
5266
5815
6525
6555
666C
7191
7390
7615
7630
848C
~aTE:
____
PURCHASE
Q~~~81~IIQ~
___________________
INPUT STATION
INPUT STATION
BADGE READ-OUT MDL 6 ONLY
CONTROLLED RESET
INPUT CONTR(1L UNIT
CLOCK READ-OUT CONTROL
READ-OUT CLOCK
MANUAL ENTRY
MANUAL ENTRY
MANUAL ENTRY
SUPERVI SOP KEY
PUNCH SWITCH
CARTR I DGE READER
ALPHABETICAL ACCOUNTING MACH
ALPHABETICAL ACCOUNTING MACH
ALPHABETICAL ACCOUNTING MACH
ALPHABETICAL ACCOUNTING MACH
ALPHABETICAL ACCOUNTING MACH
COMPUTING ACCOUNTING MACHINE
COMPUTING ACCOUNTING MACHINE
COMPUTING ACCOUNTING MACHINE
COMPUTING ACCOUNTING MACHINE
ALPH_SUMMARY PUNCHING 8 POS
ASTERISK LIST ELIM 6 POS
ASTERISK PROT 6 POS ALPH
ASTERISK PROT 6 POS NUM
ASTERISK PROT 6 POS TOTAL
COMPARING P~S 5 ADDN
CQMPLRECON 4 CTq GP OR LESS
CONSECUTIVE NUMBER CONTROL
CTR RESET PREDETERM SIG DIG
DEMOUNTARLF TYPE BAR NUM
DEMOUNTABLE TYPE 8AR ALPH
FEED.INTERCH.66 COL
FEED.INTERCH~66 COL
FEED. INTERCH. 66 COL
HAMMER-SPqING TENSION ADJUST
LIST TAB CONTROL 1 CTR BASIS
LIST TA8 CQNTROL 2 CTR BASIS
MULTIPLICATION.SINGLE PROD
MULTIPLICATION.DOUBLE PROD
PROGRAM FEATURE-SPECIAL
SELECTOR.CO GP 4 5-POS
SELECTOR. DIGIT
SELECTOR. PILOT GP 5 2-POS
SKI P STOPS ADDN
SPLIT COLUMN CONTROL-ADDN
SWITCHES SET-UP CHANGE-ADDN
SWI TCH .TOGGLE
TYPE CHARACTER - SPECIAL
~81~s
MONTHLY
_____
MONTHLY BASE
____
8~~I~b
1155.C(
1505.CC
238.('C
95.00
245C.OC
1675.00
1345.(10
5 2C • 00
607.00
694.1;(,
NC
859.0C
46.00
63.00
5.00
2.00
86.00
54.00
41 .0 C
15.0C
18.CO
21.0C
NC
637.0('
21.CO
538.0e
2179C.OC
21630.0('
2151C.OC
19280.00
2C 2 7C.~ C
2899C.00
2865(,.OC
2744('.00
392.:: 0
112.00
112.00
112.00
112.('('
224.00
224.00
313.0C
252.:>0
13.0C
21.0('
112.((
112.0C
112.00
38.0C
752.00
375.00
1090.0C
640.00
112.CO
224.00
112.CC'
280.00
168.00
8.0C
13.0C
6.0C
NC
SOME PRICES HAVE CHANGED EFFECTIVE JANUARY 1.
30.CO
43C.00
330.CO
252.00
296.00
7:0.00
560.00
b~~~~
__
IEE~
U/L
___ ___
~
TERM
~~§
PUR M P W
13.0C·
18.0C
2. Cl
NC
25.CC
3.50
3.00
1.CO
1.50
1.5('
NC
C.75
1.5e
PO
32.CC
5.eo
5.00
5.C 0
43.00SUC
l~.CO
5.0e
35.00
16.0C
3.0C
5.eo
5.00
10.00
C
C
C
e
B
B
B
2
F3
2
5~
c
882
13
B 2
EO
6C'
60
6C
C
C
C
C
B
B
B
B
6('
C
8
B 2
B 2
8 2
B 2
B 2
PO
15~.OC
6(,
111.CC
1(4.('(
92.50
96.CC
217.0C
~~
B 2
13 2
169.CO
162.00
2.50
(\.75
:'.75
C.75
0.75
1.5(
1.0C
2.0e
1.25
NC
NC
2.5C
2.'5C
2.5('
NC
2.5C
2.5C
4.0C
2.((;
2.(0
3.50
1.25
0.75
NC
!'IC
172. CO
C
C
2
2
B
B
B
2
6e C 2 B
B 2
60 C 2 B
B 2
6C
C 2 B
B 2
6C
C 2 B
B 2
13 2
8 2
60 C 2 B
60 C 2 B
60 C 2 B
85.00
85.0('
85.0C
85.0C'
85.0C
78.00
6(.'
6C
2
B
C 2
B
1 72.:) 0
60
C 2 B
85.0C
3.5C
3.5C'
172.0C
6C C 2 B
6('
C
C
2
B
B 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
8 2
B 2
6C C 2 B
R 2
B
1 72. C' C
6(.'\
6('
172. CO
6C C 2 B
C
C
2
2
B
A
2
B 2
B 2
23.CO
43. CC
18(.::>e
87.00
7.CC
85.(,0
58.00
24.00
75.('0
85.00
23.0('
22.00
22.00
6('
C
6:
C 2 B
6("1
C
2
6C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
2 B
6C
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
NC
1979. REFER TO NOTICE TO CUSTOMER DATED SEoTEMBER 26.
4-
8
B 2
A 2
1 .5C
10.0QSUC
16.00SUC
8.00SUC
NC
L
65 C
6C C 1 R
1.ee
5.00
-
50
5e'
50
5C
6C C 2 B
4E4.00
428.GO
1 C .00
14().OCSUC
140.00 sue
140.00SUC
140.00SUC
5.QC
3.0C
7.00
5.00
16.00SUC
28.00SUC
~
______ ~~~~ ___ EI~ ___ QeI_§_~_~ __ e_~
1978.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
A
B 2
B 2
B 2
13
B
2
2
~
2
B 2
B
2
8 2
B 2
8 2
B 2
11/r.l/78
D~TE
MACH MDL/
_IYEE_EE~T
04C2 8481
0514
001
003
15C C
2(50
2241:
237C
34::t5
3745
4075
4141
4142
4143
5011
5012
5013
5021
z
20\
CT
(I)
5022
5023
5031
5032
5033
5411
5412
5445
651 C'
6841
6842
763C
88C1
8811
051<.'
eel
003
1500
2C5C
224C
2331
2332
237C
3435
3745
3761
3762
4075
4141
4142
4143
,/5011
5C'12
5013
____
PURCHASE
Q~~~BleIIQ~
___________________
TYPE CHAP SPEC-ADD TB CHANGE
REPRODUCING PUNCH
REPRODUCING PUNCH
CABLE.SP-ADDN EA FT OVER STD
COL SPLIT FOR SUM PNCH OF XS
CONSEC NUMBER G ~ & CHECKING
COUNTER,AUXILIARV CAPO
DP BC D~T~CTION Ie POS
EMITTER,PUNCH
FEED. FOLDED STUB CARD PUNCH
FFED, INTERCHANGEABLE PUNCH
FEED. INTERCHANGEABLE READ
22 COL ~EATURE
MARK SENSE PCH FD
POS I-Ie
MAPK SENSE PCH FD
P~S 11-20
MARK SENSE PCH FD
POS 21-27
MARK SENSE READ FD POS 1-10
M~RK SENSE PEAD FD POS 11-2C
MARK SENSE READ FD POS 21-26
MARK SENSE CONV 2 FDS lC POS
MARK SENSE CONV 2 FDS 20 POS
MARK SENSE CONV 2 FDS 27 POS
OFFSET STACKING PUNCH FE~D
oeFSET STACKING READ FEED
OFFSET STACK.CMPG REST CHG
SELECTOR,CLASS 1~ POS
SELECTOR,SPLIT COL ,I DIF POS
SELECTOR,SPLIT COL ADDN IDEN
SWITCH. TOGGLE
X CTRL G RADON GP PCH COL
X CTRL G P ADDN GP COMP
DOCUMENT ORIGINATING MACH
DOCUMENT ORIGINATING MACH
CABLE.SP-ADDN EA ~T OVER STD
COL SPLIT FO~ SUM PNCH OF XS
CONSEC NUMBFR G P & CHECKING
CNT-CTRLD PCH.SER PR.DESC
CNT-CTRLD PCH.SEP PR.ASC
COUNTER.AUXILIARV CARD
DP BC DETECTION 1~ POS
EMITTER,PUNCH
END PRINTING RT HAND
END PRINTING-SPEC INVERTED
FEED. FOLDED STUB CARD PCH
FEED. INTERCHANGEABLE PUNCH
FEED. INTERCHANGEABLE READ
22 COL FE ATURE
MARK SENSE PCH F~
DOS l-1C
MARK SENSE PCH FD
POS 11-2C
MARK SENSE PCH FD
POS 21-27
eBI~~
MO~THLY
_____
NC
653C .00
6C90.C,O
6.CO
17.00
42C.CC
325.CC
415.CC
56.0C
562.00
562.C(
562.0C
562.0C
1630. C C
1 C 90. C C
10 9C. CC
1630.00
~~~I~b
43.0C
4.CC
6.00
134.0('1
134. ~ C
714C.OC
670C.OC
6.(\0
17.0C
42C.CC
1295.0C
1295.CC
IgB~
5.C:
______
~~~~
___ EIC ___
PUP M P W
Q~I_~_~_C
5('
C 2
66.0("
5('
C 2 B
8
2
'5C C 2 8
5C' C 2 B
8
2
5C C 2 B
C;C: C ? 8
NC
('.75
4.CI.:
2.CC
2.5('
B
B 2
00
41.0C
199.0C'
75.0C
85.('C
B 2
5('
C
2
8
5C'
C
2
8
B 2
R 2
FI 2
'3 2
5C
5C
C 2 8
C 2 B
B 2
R 2
!:'C
5('
C
C
B
B
7. C'C
24.(,C
260.0':
PO
PO
PO
PO
66.00
7.:C
66.='0
50 C 2
B
B
'3
13.I:C
PO
66.0C
5(, C 2
B
8
2
FI
R
8
2
66.('e
5('
5t:
5.5e
66.CC
5C C 2 8
s.ec
66.cr
66.0C
5C
3.5C
7.0(6.(,C
13.CO
7.CC
7.CC
11.0C
4.('C
4.CC
,.75
1.5C
C.75
:).75
"IC
1 • Co
1.ce
lC:?C'C
1(,2.ce
43.0C
85.0C
::'3.C(I
19.('':
25.CC
118.0C
1 18.0 C
94.CC
78.CO
PrJ
r\.2~
39. C· C
181.00
3.50
6.0('
6.CC
1.
~c
NC
NC
3.CC
6.00
6.0('
PO
P("1
68.0C
77.0C
22.CC'
PO
37. C'C
236.0C
0('1
11.C('
PO
PO
PO
6. (C
6C.CO
6.0C
6c.oe
5.CC
2
2
C 2
C 2
C
2
B
50 C 2 8
5C C 2 B
5' C 2 8
5C C 2
B
5C
C 2 8
5r:'
C
2
R
5C C 2 13
5( C 2 B
C- • CC
3.CO
5('
5('
C
C
2
2
8
B
5('
5':"
C 2
C 2
B
8
5:'
C
B
2
50 C 2 B
5C1
5('
C
C
2
2
8
B
5t: C 2 13
50 C 2 B
5('
C
2
9
50 C 2 B
5C C 2 B
50 C 2 8
50 r 2 B
REFER TO NOTICE TO CUSTOMER DATEO SEPTEMBER 26. 1978.
- s-
R L
__ e_c
NC
72.0C
1.50
2.;)C
35.00
24.00
24.00
1979.
~~§
8.00
4'3.COSUC
56.CCSUC
16.00
16.CO
16.CO
10.('C
562.0('
TERM
7.C'C'
1~.OC
562.00
1630.CC
1090. ec
1 C 90.0 C'
~
16.00
16.0C
16.CO
10.0C
56.CCSUC
4.0C
56.00SUC
5.CiCSUC
8.QOSUC
2.00
2.00
185.CO
149.00
6.00SUC
21.0CSUC
1'J.GC
35.CC
35.0C
43.0C
U/L
___ ___
~.(,C
35.CC
24.0:)
24.CC
35.CO
24.CO
24.00
16.00
31.0C
4J .OC
43.00
562.00
562.0C
__
3.0C·
10.0~
325.0C
415.CC56.0C
NOTE: SOME PRICES HAVE CHANGED EFFECTIVE JANUARY I,
BAS~
bg~~g
NC
163.CO
132.00
6.0CSUC
21 .OOSUC
10.00
5.00
8.CO
1 C 9(1. 0 C
109,).(,0
730.00
1355.00
1895.00
252.CC
252.0C
43.0C
224.C-(
M3NTHLY
____
2
2
B 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
8
8
2
2
B 2
B
8
2
2
B 2
B 2
B
2
B
8
B
2
2
2
B 2
B 2
9 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
e 2
B 2
8 2
B 2
8 2
11/(1/78
DATE
MACH MDL/
_!yec_E~~T
0519 5021
5C22
51)23
5C31
'5032
5033
5411
'5412
5445
651C
6841
6842
763C
88Cl
8811
0534
OC'3
0545
003
C04
~
28.00
273.CO
23.00
23.00
SOME PRICES HAVE CHANGED EFFECTIVE JANUARY 1. 1979.
bg~~g
9-
4.00
1.00
1.ee
119.(C'
1.(\C
879.0C
2C.OC 366C.0C
2.C(
172.0C
2.0C
172.0('
4.CC
626.::'e
8.C(,
626.C'C
46.C(
46.CC
6(' C 1 B
61) (: 1 B
B 2
B 2
6'::
C
1
B
8
55
55
55
55
55
!::5
55
8
B
8
B
8
8
B
;:>
2
2
2
,2
2
2
8
R
8
8
8
B
8
A 2
A;:>
A 2
A 2
A 2
A 2
':"'5
8
8
2
2
8
8
A
A
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
2
,~2
2,
2
8 2 A
B 2 8
8 2 8
A 2
A 2
A 2
8
B
8
8
A 2
A 2
A 2
~
2
2
2
2
2
8
8
8
8
8
2
8
A 2
8
8
2
2
8
8
A
A
8 2 8
E\ 2 B
2
2
A 2
A 2
B
2
8
A 2
~
2
~
A 2
B 2
8
A 2
~5
8
2 8
A 2
55
55
5'5
55
55
8
2
8
'A
2
B
2
8
A
2
B 2 8
A 2
e
A 2
A 2
A 2
,8 2
8 2
55 B 2
B
8
55 R 2 8
55 8 :;> 8
50' C 2 8
A 2
'50
C 2
8
A 2
55
55
55
55
55
55
5'5
B
2
9
P
8
8
8
8
B
2
2
2
2
2
2
8
8
8
R
8
8
A 2
A 2
A 2
A,
2
22.00
NC
NC
12.5C
2.5C
3.5('
2.5C
3.5C
2 7C. C C
4 7C. OC
2'4. (C
652.~C
199.(,0
47C. CO'
199. C (
TO NOTICE TO CUSTOMER DATED SEPTEM8EP 26.
1978.
A
2
A 2
A 2
A 2
A
2
DATE
~ACH
MDL/
_!yeE_E~~T
1133 3302
3303
33C4
z
2-
o
0C'D
;
't:I
a
a.
c:
n
C'D
a.
!.
:ro
s.
~
4423
44244425
7492
1134001
0(2
12(' 1
AC 1
AC2
AC 1
BC2
RC3
804
OCI
002
OC3
oe4
3792
57Cl
5702
12C3
001
lC12
3791
3792
3794
3796
535(1
3:
57Cl
57C2
802C
CD
j
't:I
C'D
~
3
(i)'
o·en
?
123C
O~1
162C
2398
2399
46('9
7467
12"31
NCI
001
1264
47(10
5045
1232
OCI
5C45
5262
64C 5
1255
~OTE:
8580
cel
C02
PURCHASE
MONTHLY
MONTHLY BASE
U/L
11/01/78
TERM
PUR M P W
~
L
____ Q~2~81eIIQ~ ___________________ e81~~ _____ 8~~I~b ____ b£~~£ __ !EB~ ___ ~ ___ ~~§ ______ ~~~~ ___ El~ ___ Qe!_§_[_~ __ e_~
2311-11 2ND DRV
2311-12 1ST f)RV
2311-12 2ND DRV
1403 'MDL 6 ATTACHMENT
14(;3 ATTACHMENT-MODEL 6
14C3 ATTACH~FNT-MQDEL 7
STORAGE ACCESS CHANNEL 2
PAPE~ TAPE FEADE~
PAPER TAPE READER
PROOF INSCRI8ER
PROOF INSC~I8ER
PROOF INSCRr8E~
PR(JOF INSCRI8E~
PROOF I NSCRI PE~
PROOF INSCRIBER
PROOF INSCRI8ER
PROOF INSCRI8E~
PROOF I NSCRI8ER
PROOF INSCRIBER
ENDORSER PLATE - NO ARTWRK
PR~CESS CONTROL-ADDN 5TH DIG
PROCESS CONTROL-ADDN 6TH DIG
UNIT JNSCRI8ER
ACCOUNT NO. FIELD INSCRI8ER
SERIAL NUM8ERING/ENDORSER
ENDORSER PLATE - NO ARTWRK
ENDORSER OLD STYLE
ART WORK
NON-ZERO BALANCE TEST
PROCESS CONTROL-ADDN 5TH DIG
PROCESS CONTROL-ADDN 6TH DIG
TRANSIT NO. FIELD INSCRI8ER
OPTICAL MARK SCORING READER
CARD PUNCH ATTACHMFNT
COUNTER,FOPMULA
COUNTER ,R.WO
ID FIELD CHECKING
STORAGE
OPTICAL MARK PAG~ READER
OPTICAL MARK PAGE READER
ASYNCHRONOUS MODE
ISOLATION CONTROL UNIT
MASTER MARK
OPTICAL MARK PAGE READER
MASTER MARK
MULTIPLE SPREAD CARD
SEGMENTED WORD
UNIT RECORD CARD
MAG CHAR READER ~AG CHAR READER
41 70.00
3025.0C
3C25.0C
4795.0C
94C5.0C
1 ~ 440.0 C
523.0C
679. DC
1175.00
1188C .00
1134C.OC
1188C.OC
11 34C'.C C
lL'26G.CC
972G.OC
1188(,.CC
1134C.OC
10 26C .OC
9720.(,C'
42.CC
206.00
206.00
414C.OO
505.00
413.0C
46.0C
46.0C
3c..oe·
160.0e
174. CC
174.00
505.0('
12060.0C
6185.CC
2485.CO
124C.OC
321.(,0
124C .OC
2376C .oC'
2C52C.OC
1595.CC
NC
2C25.0C
14400.0C
2225.(C·
1330.CC
1330. CO
1775.0C
35460.0C
4G59C.OC
SOME PRICES HAVE CHANGED EFFECTIVE JANUARY 1.
353.00
256.00
256.00
243.00
532.00
592.0(,
28.00
39.00
72.,)0
385.~0
372.00
347.00
333.00
347.00
333.00
4,19.00
41C.OO
385.00
372.00
5.00
5.00
169.00
20.00
2:) .00
NC
NC
NC
5.vo
5.eO
5.00
2~.OO
238.00
129.00
42.00
21 .00
7.00
21.00
549.eO
465.00
42.00
NC
54.00
353.00
54.00
32.00
32.00
42.00
9C4.00
1100.00
1979.
REFER TO NOTICE TO CUSTOMER DATED
-10-
34.(,0
34.CC
34-.ce
41.0('
41.CC
47. 5C
1.ce
17 e 5C
18.0C
99.5('
93.5C
99.5C
93.50
85.5C
8:.CC
99.5C'
93.5C
85.5C
8C.CC
NC
1 • CC
1.0e
70.C'C
2.00
6.5(
NC
NC
25.00
2.0C
1. C C
1. C (I
3.Ce
46.5C
3.CC
4.CC
4.0C
1.ee
2.50
54.Ce
47.Ce
4.C(
NC
1.5C
60.5(2.(-C
2.CO
I.CO
2. c·e
251.CO
400.C·0
652.CC
652.0C
652.CO
19IC.OC'
191C .CC
191 C • (\ C
3C4.(-(
C 2 B
A 2
8 2
C 2 8
C
8
B 2
8 2
5C"
C
8 2
8
2 8
B
2
8
2
8
B 2
B 2
8 2
B 2
8
B
B
B
B
B
50 C
8
5~
C 1 8
50 C 1 8
5C C
8
11.0C
77. (I C
5.0r:
276.00
l(16.0C
PO
39.00
52.0C
52.00
316.0C'
52.00
66.0C
52.(,0
29.0C
52.CC
1 19. 0 C
77.0C
44.0C
21.0C
44.0C
SE~TEMBEP
26,
A 2
A 2
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
45
45
5C
5C"
C
'SC
C
50
5C
C
C
50
5C
50
50
5(1
C
50
50
50
50
60
60
6C
C
1
!
1
C
C
C
A 2
A 2
A 2
A 2
B
8
2
2
8
2
8
B 2
8 2
B
B 2
B
B
8
B
2
8
B
8
B
8
B
2
2
2
2
2
B
B
8
B
2
C
8
8
2
C
B
C
B
B
B
8
B
2
2
2
2
C
1
8
C 2
C 2
fC
C 2
C 2
6r
60
45
45
45
C
C
C
C
C
45
45
45
45
45
40
40
C 2 8
C 2 8
C
C
C
C
C
1978.
2
2
2 B
2 B
2 B
2
2
2
2
2
B
8
8
B
8
B 2
8 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
A 2
A 2
A 2
8 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
8 2
A 2
A
2
DATE
MACH MDLI'
_IY~E_~E~T
1~5':'
C'C:3
147(1
3215
4~8C
452C
63C'3
632C
636C
7C6C
785C
1260
cel
101C
H'71
1294
1296
1935
3791
3792
3 7 96
46C::57(5
63CC
7138
7948
8Clf
1282
001
1250
3435
3833
3950
3951
3952
548C
5481
5482
5483
5484
7065
7090
140'3
NO 1
NOI
C02
002
005
005
006
006
OC7
OC7
1376
oURCHAS~
MONTHLY
MONTHLY BASE
U/L
111'Cl1'78
PUP
TE~M
~
P W
R L
____ Q~~~~l~I~Q~ ___________________ ~~l~s _____ ~E~I~b ____ b~~~s __ !S~~ ___ ! ___ ~~§ ______ ~~~~ ___ El~ ___ Q~I_~_~_~ __ ~_~
MAG CHAR READER
BALANCE LIST
DASH SYMBOL TRANSMISSION
51-COL CARD SORTING
H 0 Z~RO & BLANK SE~ECTION
S1'3-532C ADAPTOR
SI'360 MOD 20 ~DAPTOR
S1'3601'37: AD~PTER
SELF CHECKING NO./IMPROVE
2772 ADAPTOR
ELECTRONIC INSCRI~ER
ACCOUNT NUM~ER FI~LD,
ADDITIONAL TOTALS
AUTOMATIC FLOAT ANALYSIS
AUTOMATIC FLOAT ANALYSIS
CHECKER SIGNAL
ENDORSING & SERIAL NUMBERING
ENDORSER PLAT~ - NO ARTWRK
ENDORSER PLATE
HIGH VOLUME TOTAL
PROCESS CONTROL K=YBOA~D
ROUTING & TRANSIT FIELD
SHIFT IDENTIFICATION SWITCH
3RD SF.T OF PROGRAM CARDS
TRANSIT ANALYSIS
OPTICAL READER CARD PUNCH
ALTERNATE FIELD CONTROL
DPBC DETECTION.GRO OF 2C POS
EXPANDED FIELD SUPPRESSION
FAR.7B REC-NO BAR CD/ALPH BL
FARRINGTON 7B FONT RECOG
FARP.7B F0NT REC-W BAR CD 8L
OP M RD-5 POS.80 COL FR FLD
OP M RD-6 POS.80 COL FR FLD
OP M PD-12 POS.80 COL
OP M RD-5 oS.801'51 C.CTR FLD
OP M RD-6 PS.8~/51 C.CTR FLD
SELF-CHECKING~FIELD CORRECT
SEPIAL NUMBER PUNCHING
PRINTER
5526C.GC
2990.0C
35.CO
661.0C
1315.C'C
5335.0('
66C5.:C
1980C.OC
2135.CO
1915.::C
117CC.CC
551.CC
'."51.CO
106(.00
lC6C.OC
25.00
689.CO
46.CO
25.CC
321.CO
551.CC
551.00
73.0C
123.CC
482.00
640 8e. CC
734.CO
1090.:) C
551.C(
60 5C. 0 C
6(150.80
6C5C.CC
5425.0C
5425.00
730C.00
5425.CC
145C.JO
75.00
56.00SUC
16.00
527.(C
7.CO
NC
I'JC
"i.ce
33.~:)
13'5.00
168.0C
5:6.CC
"S4.0C
48.00
308.:)0
17.CiC>
17.00
34.00
34.0C
25.005UC
17.00
NC
NC
10.0C
17.00
17.0'J
2.CC
3.00
13.00
1848.00
23.CO
35.00
17.CO
166.:)0
166.00
166.0C
0..2('
32'1.CC
C
B
A 2
B
B
B
4::
C
B
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
C 2 B
C 2 B
LL5.0C
1.5C
3.5C
:.5C
62.CC
76.C(,
3814C.CC
220CO.CC
92'5.CO
20C(·
.oc
CHANGED EFFECTIVE JANUARy 1.
88.00
1979.
REFE~
-11 -
2
4" C
4C C
l~.rc
777.00
13 2
91.(C
27. CO
15.:·C
23.!)C
166.CO
125.00
1C5.(,·C
1C81.00
2114C.OC
13
2
4.ce
13.((
48(,.00
B
B
166.80
1876C.OC
B
B
13.C(
1f • LC
PRINTER
13
C
C
C
66.-:.'(
851.CO
C
4(1
40
40
40'
4('
::.CC
777.C(
658.CO
6C 1 .~ C
442.CC
4C 3. (' 0
715.CC
653.00
81.0 C
2
2
2
4C C
::.5C
2c:./'5
25/5
25/5
25/5
4('
A
A
A
13
66.~· ~
3~9.C·C
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
A 2
A 2
23.0C
NC
NC
995.C(
A 2
A 2
I.5C'
166.00
215.(0
37"35. C C
40 C 2 E'
4(' C 2 B
4C C 2 B
40 C 2 B
40 C 2 R
4C C 2 B
4C C 2 p
NC
NC
1.5C
NC
lC4.~C
4365.0C
A 2
A 2
C 2
C 2
6. :'C
5.5e
5.5C·
1::.0C
5425.C'C
B
B
40'
40
91.':C
23.C(
32. (r:
32.CC
92.C(
1C'C'.ce
166.CO
715.00
NOTE: SOME PRICES HAVE
1 7:. C C
76.(-C
21('7(1.00
AUXILIARY RIBBON FEEDING
1255. 'J I)
2.5C
648.0('
3.5C
PRINTER
PRINTER
21. C C
93.CC
15 7 • C C
"318.CC
21. (C
37.CC
11°.CC
4.C(
C::.5C
9:8.C~
PRINTER
~43.(C
3.0'0
6.0C
341.C'C
lC
LL .Ct;
138.::C
lC4.CO
lC4.CC'
32.0C'
84.C'C
C
13
C
B
8 2
B 2
4C' C
B
B
B 2
8 2
4('
c:
2
8
13
C 2 R
C
'2
C 2
B
B
B
B
13
8
2
2
2
2
2
2'
2
R 2
B 2'
B 2
C 2 B
8
C
2
8
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
2
2
2
2
2
2
:
B
P
B
B
13
8
B
B 2
p
2
8
2
2
B 2
B 2
B 2
B
2
A 2
295. C'C'
45 C :3 B
A 2
251'5
251'5
213.0("
45 C 3
B
A 2
25/5
25/5
195.0C
45 C
B
A 2
C
:'
25/5
229.~~
45 C 3 B
A 2
25/5
25/5
26.GC
45 C
A 2
C
:J
TO NOTICE TO CUSTOMER DATED SEPTEMBER 26, 1978.
:3
:3
B
DATE
MACH MDL/
_!~~E_EE~T
1403 1376
391C
474C
474C
511C
511e
5111
5111
5381
5381
5523
5523
5532
6410
____
PUPCHASE
Qg~~~l~IIQ~
___________________
FORMS CAPT 1403 Nl
INTERCHBLE CHAIN CARTR ADAPT
~gl~g
153.C(
2C3C.OC
MULTIBLE CHARACTED SET
299.0C
MULT CHAP
426.0C
SF~
NUMEPICAL PRINT
PRE~ERRED
5865.0C
~
(I)
"C
~
o
c.
c
n
(I)
c.
~.
;:
o
5.
~s~I~~
995C'
9951
9952
1419
OCI
1445
3215
3610
3791
3792
3795
3796
380C
4380
4700
52::> 1
5739
BAS~
bg~§g
!E~~
__
224.CO
42.CO
46.0C
39.1:0
PRINT CHAIN-ADDITIONAL
SELECTIV= TAPE LIST M~L 3.Nl
1C95.0C
7505.CC
SEL TAPE LSTG FOR MDLS 1.2
STACKER
526C.C'C
114C.OOSUC
225.00
2[7.CO
189.00
225.00
207. CO
189.CO
305.0C
FIRST TYPE SLUG SUBSTITUE
ADDITIONAL TYP~ SLUG SUBST
UNIVERSAL CHAR SET-MDD 3
6.CO
16.00SUC
80.00SUC
11 .0 C
6.0t;
426.0C'
e64C
8640
8()40
8641
8641
995C
9951
9952
ACC.
1416
CCI
8373
8374
MONTHLY
____
74.JC
PURCHASE ONLY
88.00
81.C C
74.CC
11.00
1, c. C C
9.C ~
11 .00
le.ce
9.eo
267.00
246.CO
CHAR SET FEATURE
641~
6411
6411
6413
6413
8371
8372
8640
MONTHLY
_____
UNIVERSAL CHAR SET-MOD N1
UNIVERSAL CHAR SET-MODEL 2
ARTWORK SERVICE CHARGE
MATRI X SERVICE CHARGE
SERVICE CHARGE
SET-UP
838300 FORMS CART 1403 N1
INTERCHANGE TRAIN CARTRIDGE
FIRST TYP~ SLUG SUBSTITUE
ADDITIONAL TYPE SLUG SUBST
ARTWORK SERVICE CHARGE
MATRIX
SERVICE CHARGE
SET-UP
SERVIC~ CHARGE
MAGNETIC CHAPACTER READ~R
BATCH NUMBERING
DASH SY~80L TRANSMISSION
ELECTRONIC ACCUM & SEQ CHECK
ENDORSER
ENDORSER PLATE - NO ARTWRK
ENDORSE ONLY
ART WORK
EXPANDED CAPABILITY
51-COL CARD SORTING
ISOLATION. CONTPOL UNIT
MULTIPLE COLUMN CONTROL
PROG CONTROL-PKT LIGHTS 2-6
NOTE: SOME PRICES
HAV~
426.(,C
11
299.0 C
115.CC
173.0C
58.0C
133.C(
2665.CC
18.Cf:
18.0C
115.(0
1 73. C C
'58. CO
12CICC .. OC
680':'.CO
38.CC
10620.0C
1995C.OC
67.CO
131CC.OC
30.00
8185.0C
NC
NC
2445.(:r
11.C('
PURCHASE
PURCHASE
PUR CHAS E
PURCHASE
Ie
9.00
ONLY
ONLY
ONLY
ONLY
1.O~
230.ensuc
18C.OOSUC
PUR CHASE ONLY
PURCHASE ONLY
PURCHASE ONLY
2665.00
145.00
56.00SUC
293.CO
441.0C
NC
293.0C
NC
18l.CO
NC
NC
58.00
30.ce
1 'J 8C • C (
CHANGED EFFECTIVE JANUARY I,
.~,:>
1 -: • c C
9. C C
10.C C
9.C 0
10.I:C
19 7 9.
REFE~
-12-
U/L
___ ___
~
TERM
~~§
______
~~~~
24
c
25/5
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
c
25/5
!'IC
25/5
25/5
25/5
2.50
___
11/C1/78
El~
___
PUR M P W
R L
Q~I_§_~_~
~_~
__
NC
6C.OC
25/5
25/5
45 C 3
B
A 2
45 C 3
8
A 2
45 C 3 B
A 2
45 C 3 8
A 2
45 C 3
B
A 2
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
14.('(
PQ
3.00
42.00
25/5
15.C(
45 C
~
8
A 2
45 C 3
B
A 2
45
B
A
45.CC
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
C
25/5
o
2~/5
15.C'C
-:
25/5
25/5
25/5
TM
PO
NC
1e.c'c
25/5
C
3
2
I'IC
2.0C
<'.5C
191.::0
45 C :' 8
A 2
2.5C
119 •. 0C
45 C :3 8
A 2
2.5C
197.00
45 C 3 B
A 2
B
B 1
5C C ::3 B
A 2
A 2
25/5
25/5
o
2'3/5
c
25/5
25/5
NC
!'IC
NC
NC
TM
TM
TM
NC
NC
NC
55
:3
5.CO
418.C'':
15.CC
NC
31. C C
55.(0
NC
35.50
NC
575.00
5C
21.0C
PO
PO
11.OC
PO
5('
C
1 • CC
NC
NC
3.00
1.0C
C :3
13
C :3
?
B
~
A
A
5~
C 3
B
A 2
1 C 8. CO
5('
C
3
B
A 2
l89.CC
5('
C
3
B
113. DC
5' C
~
B
A 2
A 2
50
TO NOTICE TO CUSTOMER DATED SEPTEMBER 26, 1978.
2
2
11/Cl/78
DATE
MACH MDL/
_I~EE_E~AT
1419 5741
7~61
111.42
·z
111.4=
2-
0'
C"
C'I)
1627
1801
7062
744C
7720
7730
005
OC6
0('7
3630
3950
001
OCI
002
CQ2
003
OC4
1890
1891
1892
1893
1895
1896
4700
5559
5559
5567
5567
5568
5568
5569
5569
5585
5585
6401
64C'1
6404
OCI
CIA
018
01C
010
C2A
028
C'2C
02D
lCB
2CB
1231
1232
DURCHASE
MONTHLY
MONTHLY
DROG CONTROL-PKT LIGHTS 7-12
S~LF-CHECKING NO.,MOOULUS
lC
SELF-CHECKING NO. ,MODULUS 11
SPLIT FIELD
SYSTEM/360 ADAPTER
S/360 ADAPTER-DUAL ADDRESS
CARD PUNCH
CARD READ PUNCH
CARD READ PUNCH
1130/1442 MOL 5 COUPLING
5410 CDUPLING
PRINTER
426.CO
2110.0C
326C.CC
1335.0C
5770.CC
1421C.0C'
972C .ce
l111C.00
1197C.JC
177.00
10.0C
46.00
75.00
22.CO
116.CO
315.CC
18290.CC
311.2.00
498.CC
5.0C
36.00
353.00
PRINTER
18400.CC
488.CO
PRINTER
PRINTER
CHARACTER SET-13 CHARACTERS
CHARACTER SET-39 CHAR~CTERS
CHARACT~R SET-52 CHARACTERS
CHARACTER SET-63 CHARACTERS
ADDL 52 CHAR SET FOR 18CO
AODL 63 CHAR SET FOR 18CO
ISOLATION CONTROG UNIT-NOI
PRINT ROSITIONS-24 ADDL
23360.COC
465.'JO
741.00
4:)') .OOSUC
450.JOSUC
475.00SUC
50:>.OOSUC
475.JOSUC
500.00SUC
NC
48.0C
8AS~
U/L
TERM
PUR M P W
R L
____ Q~~CEleIlQ~ ___________________ eBL~~ _____ ~~~LAb ____ b~A~~ __L~8~ ___ ~ ___ ~~§ ______ ~M~~ ___ El~ ___ Qe!_§_~_~ __ e_~
116C .00
37C3(.OC
400.0C
45C.00
475.CC
50C.OC
475.0C
50(1.00
NC
229C.OC
1 ~ 1 20 .00
255.00
PRINTER CaNTROL
25010.CO
510.00
25010.00
510.":)0
PRINT STORAGE
91)8C.OC
177.00
SELECTIVE CHARACTER SET
1265.00
25.00
SEGMENT,EAC~
PLOTTER
PROCESSOR-CONTROLLER
PROCESSOR-CONTRQLLER
PROCESSOR-CONTROLLER
PROCESSOR-CONTROLLER
PROCESSQR-CONTROLLER
PROCESSOR-CONTROLLER
PROCESSOR-CONTROLLER
PROCESSOR-CONTROLLER
PROCESSOR-CONTROLLER
PROCESSOR-CONTROLLER
ANALOG-DGTL CONVERTER MOD
ANALOG-DGTL CONVERTER MOD 2
30.CC
493C'. CO
33630.00
3962C.OO
525CC.OC
77770.00
38670.00
4465C.OC.
57400.00
82760.00
65310.00
7r;28C. CO
385C .00
42C5.CC
3.50
1 .50
1e.co
33~.00
PRINTER CONTROL
PRINTER CONTROL FOR 180e
1.50
2.5(-
30.00SUC
1435.00
1735.00
2330.00
3510.CC
1795.00
2155.00
2865.00
4305.00
2925.C',0
358C.(l0
174.00
212.00
N01ai,.: SOME PRICES HAVE CHANGED EFFECTIVE JANUARY 1. 1979.
325.~C
12
297.CO
449.:0
41C.CC
?4
c
12
24
44.CC
4C.0C
235.C(,
214.CC
469.0:)
428.CC
469.00
428.C::
163.(C
149.C-O
24.CO
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
22.C 0
24
12
c
c
o
25/5
25/'5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
13.C'C
98.CO
1C4.CC
122.(\(
NC
1.50
89.50
65.00
32.('C
26.0C
26.CC
966.0C
966.,)C
50
50
5('
5C
C 3 B
C 3 B
C ~ B
'5('\
C :3 B
5(1
45
45
45
45
45
45
C "3 B
C 3 F3
C :3 8
C
C
3
e
B
2
A 2
A 2
A 2
A 2
A
2
A 2
A 2
A
2
C 3 8
C 3 B
A 2
C
B
A 2
130. C C
45 C "3 F3
A 2
1(17.0C
156.CC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
3.C"
45 C 3 B
45 C 3 B
A
2
189.(\C
45 C 3 8
A
2
7.0C
PO
45
8
A 2
15.CO
PC)
45 C "3 8
A 2
15. CC
DO
45 C 3
A 2
PO
3
C 3
A 2
A 2
2"i/C::;
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
5.5C
3.0C
26.0C
B
45 C 3 B
A
1I.5 C
2
3
B
A 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
8 2
B 2
B 2
B
B
B
B
B
2
B 2
B 2
B 2
e
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
NC
68.CC
109.00
C
B
65 B
65 B
65 B
65 B
65 8
65 B
65 B
65
113.C'0
127.('C·
152.CC
1C9.CC
115.~0
127.CC
152.CC
139.(C
139.C'C
3.5C
3.5C
65
65
114C.QC
114(.00
B
8
B
B
B
8
65
65 B 2 B
REFER TO NOTICE TO CUSTOMER DATED SEPTEMBER 26.1978.
-13-
3
A.
B 2
2
2
2
2
2
?
2
2
DATE
MA-(!IIIl MDL/
_!Y~E_EG!T
1801
..,
tn
..,
'0
oQ.
C
n
tn
Q.
!.
~
o
S.
:e
3:
;::l
'0
tn
3Cir
(f)
5'
?
12321
1234
2185
3220
3222
3262
3285
328f3287
3290
3291
3295
3296
3612
3703
443C
4431
4432
4709
5256
5257
5258
5259
5487
571C
5715
5716
5861
586?
5863
5867
6125
7188
7925
7926
1802
CIA
018
01C
OlD
02A
C28
02C
02D
lC8
2CB
1231
1232
1233
1234
2185
NOTE:
PURCHASE
____
Qg~~Rl~!lQ~
___________________
ANALOG INPUT DATA CH ADPTR
ANALOG INPUT DATA CH ADPTR 2
COMPARATOR
OATA CHANNEL EXPANDER
DATA CHANNEL
DIGITAL INPUT ADAPTER
DIGITAL INPUT-CONTACT
DIGITAL INPUT-VOLTAGE
DIGITAL INPUT-VOLTAGE.HI SPD
DG & ANLG OTPT DATA CH ADPTR
DIGITAL INPUT DATA CH ADPTR
DIGITAL OUTPUT ADAPT~Q
DIGITAL OUTPUT CONTROL
ELECTRONIC CONTACT OPERATE
1803 ADAPT'=R
1442 ADAPTER
1443/1627 ADAPTER
1443 C ONT ROL
I NTERRUPT LEVELS
MULTIPLEXOR/R CONTROL
MULTIPLEXOR/R CONTROL,ADOL
MULTIPLEXER/S CONTROL
MULTIeLEX~R OVERLAP
OUTPUT PRINTER EXPANDER
PROCESS INTERRUPT ADAPTER
PROCESS INTEPRUPT-CONTACT
PROCESS !NTERRUPT-VOLTAGE
PULSE COUNTER AOAPT~R
PULSE COUNTER
PULSE OUTPUT
PULSE COUNTEP-16 BIT
REGISTER OUTPUT
1627 CONTROL
1053 ADAPTER
1054/1055 ADAPTER
PROCESSOR-CDNTROLLER
PQOCESSOR-CONTROLLER
PROCESSOR-CONTROLL~R
PROCESSOR-CONTROLLER
PROCESSOQ-CONTROLL~R
PROCESSOR-CONTROLL~R
PROCESSOR-CONTROLLER
PROCESSOR-CONTROLLER
PROCESSOR CONTROLLER
PROCESSOR-CONTROLLER
ANALOG-OGTL CONVERTER MOD 1
ANALOG-DGTL CONVERTER MOD 2
ANALOG INPUT DATA CH ADPTR 1
ANALOG INPUT DATA CH ADPTR 2
COMPARATOR
~Rl~~
MONTHLY
_____
662.00
294.:lC
10 7C. 'C1855.00
368.00
589.00
236.00
412.CC
412.:)0
662.CO
662.0C
442.0C
442.,:)C
589.CC:
11 8e. (I C
1565.CC
442.CC
996.00
589.0C
589.CC
294.00
713.:)C
222.0C
1425.CC
662.0C
471.00
589.00
662.00
185.00
589.0C
368.00
MONTHL,Y' F3ASE
R~~I~bT---b~~~~
__
I~8~
U/L
___ ___
~
11/(1/78
TERM
~~§
PUR M P W
______
26.0C
~~~~
___
El~
___
2.CC
114.C·C
1. C C
lIe • .: 0
2.50
1 3C. 00
19.CO 2C25.00
1.5C
56. C'C
::;.75
119.C·(
1. 25
85.0C
2.CC
85.0C
85.(('
2.CC
1.5C
1 C 8.00
1 • '5 ("
lC8.0e
::>.oc 119.':'0
2. C'C
81.ClO
1 C .00
42.00
75.00
16.~C
23.00
1 ~ • C0
14.';'0
14.CC
26.0C
26.00
15.CJ
15.0C'
23.0C
56.00
75.00
15.00
I .25
5.5C
1::>.5C
2.(e
5.5C
2.0C'
38.00
65
311.0C
133.::'C
246.:C
45.0C
3'5.0C
35.CC
35.00
85.00
38C.CC
119.0C
f.OC
28.00
8.00
56.CC
26.00
2.0("
0. 7 5
2.5C
1.50
2.50
:, .75
175.C·0
175. ~ Co
C.75
138.00
0.75
1.25
65.0C
85.00
85.cr
85.CO
168.<:'0
138.00
344.C·C'
B
8
2
2
8
B
B 2 B
8
2
8
A
8
2
'2
B
B
13
2
2
2
2
2
B
8
B
B
B
8
A
B
8
B
B
65
'2
65 8 2 8
65
65
65
65
65
2.5C
1 • (0 C
6"5
85.C'0
13.CO
28.00
26.0C
8.00
23.00
16.00
26.0C
45.JO
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
447.CO
23.00
28.00
23.0C
QeI_§_[_~
B 2
B
8 2
8 2
65 B 2
8
B
65 8 2
B 2
8 2
B 2
8 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
B
B
8
B
B
8
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
F3 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
B
B
B
B
B
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
294.~C
Ie .,')0
1.ec
l1C.OC
1 C 70.00
42.0C
2.5C
1 3C. CD
65 B 2 B
SOME PRICES HAVE CHANGED EFFECTIVE JANUARY 1.
1979. REFER TO NOTICE TO CUSTOMER
-14-
OATE~
65
65
65 B 2
65 R. 2
65 B 2
2
152.0C
175. C C
65
65
114.00
SEPTEMI3EP 26,
2
8
65 R 2 B
65 B 2 B
114C.OC
114C.CC
(3
:?
2
65 B 2 B
65 B 2 R
3.(,C
1.75
2
2
2
2
2
13f.CC
163.CO
3.0C
2
2
2
2
2
2
8
fl5
163. or
B
8
B
B
R
B
8
8
B
B
B
B
B
65 8
65 B
65 8
65 B
65 B
65 B
5.50
9.50
134.CC
140.CC
152.1:'0
1 74.00
133.0C
2
2
B 2
A 2
1825.0(,
2120.00
::'715.00
3910.00
2190.CC
2545.,CC
3255.00
4680.00
3310.0C
3970.00
174.00
212.00
26.CO
5.5C
33.00
56.0e
B
8
B
B
B
662.0 C
1145.0C
713.CO
1145.00
4307c.oe
4904C .00
61860.0C
86990.CC
4803C.OO
54CIC.00
66830.0C
921 7C. OC
74170.00
79160.00
385C .00
4205.0C
662.00
1.25
~_~
2
2
2
65
B
8
8
R L
__
B
1978.
2
A
2 B
2 B
2 8
2 B
2 B
2 B
2 9
B 2
B 2
8
B
B
B
8
B
8
B
8
B
8
B
8
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
F3 2
8 2
8 2
B 2
8 2
8
2
B 2
B 2
8 2
11/Cl/78
DATE
MACH MDL/
_IyeE_E~~T
z
2-
0'
CT
to
18C2 3220
3222
3290
3291
37C 3
443C
4431
4432
47C9
5256
5257
5258
5259
5487
7125
7188
7925
~
to
"o
~
792~
1803
Q.
c:
n
to
Q.
~.
181C
:T
o
5.
1816
C2A
C2B
C2C
020
C2E
ACI
AC2
AC3
BC1
Bel'
BC3
cel
9509
1826 OC1
OC2
003
12~1
1232
1233
1234
1237
2185
3262
3285
3286
3287
3295
3296
3612
4700
5256
5257
NOTE~
SOMF
____
PURCHASE
Q~~~aleIlQ~
____________ ______
~
DATA CHANNEL EXPANDER
DATA CHANNEL
DG & ANLG OTPT DATA CH ADPTR
DIGITAL INPUT DATA CH ADPTR
18('3 ADAPTER
1442 ADAPTER
1443/1627 ADAPTER
1443 CONTROL
I NTERRUPT LEVELS
MULTIPLEXER/R CONTPOL
MULTIPLEXER/R CONTROL.ADDL
MULTIPLEXEP/S CONTROL.ADD~
MULTIPLEXER OVERLAP
OUTPUT PRINTER EXPANDER
7 TRACK COMPATIBILITY
1627 CONTROL
1053 ADAPTER
1054/1055 ADAPTER
CORE STORAGE UNIT
CORE STORAGE
CORE STORAGE
CORE STORAGE
CORE STQRAGE
DISK ~TORAGE
DISK STORAGE
DISK STORAGE
DISK STORAGE
DISK STORAGE
DISK STORAGE
PRINTER-KEYBOARD
PIN FEED PLATEN,R~GULAR
DATA ADAPTER UNIT
DATA ADAP~~R UNIT
.1826 DATA ADAPTER UNIT
ANALOG-DGTL. CONVERTEP MOD
ANALOG-DGTL CONVERTER MOD 2
ANALOG INPUT DATA CH ADPTR 1
ANALOG INPUT DATA CH ADPTR 2
ANALOG INPUT EXPANDER
COMPARA TOR
DIGITAL INPUT ADAPTER
DIGITAL INPUT-CONTACT
DIGITAL INPUT-VOLTAGE
DIGITAL INPUT-VOLTAGE,HI SPD
DIGITAL OUTPUT ADAPTER
DIGITAL OUTPUT CONTROL
ELECTRONIC CONTACT OPERATE
ISOLATION CONTROL UNIT-NOI
MULTIPLEXER/R CONTROL
MULTIPLFXER/R CONTPOL,ADDL
PRI~ES
e81~s
1855.00
368.e c
662.oe
662.0e
11 8e .0('
1565.0C
442.ce
996.CC
589.(\C
589.'0
294.00
713.C,C,
222.CC
1425.00
171C.OC
1145.CO
713.0e'
1145.00
19950.00
32770.00
4559C .• CO
5840C.CC
7122C.OCl
958C.OO
1520C.OO
20 82C. 0(,
1995C.CC
2989C.OC
39830.oe
2085.ce
61.75
196e.co
1725.0C
'3355.0e
385('.00
4205.00
66<'.OC
294.00
4635.0C
Ie 7C. 00
589.0C'
23!=>.CO
412.0C
412.00
442.0C
442.0C
589.0C
NC
589.00
294.00
HAVE CHANGED EFFECTIVE JANUAPY 1.
MONTHLY
_____
8s~I~b
MONTHLY BASE
____
bs~~s
75.vO
16.0C
26.00
26.00
56.00
75.00
15.0C
::'8.0(1
23.00
28.CO
13.00
28.0C
8.0C
56.CO
7r'). JC
46.00
33.00
56.00
__
Is8~
U/L
___ ___
~
TER~
~~§
______
~~~~
9~6.CO
788.00
118~ .00
1575.CO
98.00
PURCHASE ONLY
98.00
___
9C.50
1 3C • C 0
164. CO
199. cr:
72.5C
118.CO
167.0C:86.5C
136.::·C'
191.0C
14.5C
TM
~
P W
QeI_§_~_~
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
155
65
65
65
65
__
R L
e_~
B
B
2
R 2 A
8
2
B
B
B
B
8
B
2
2
2
B
2
2
B 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
e 2
B <
B 2
13 2
B 2
B
B
8
B
B
B
B
8
B
"3
B 2
B 2
B
8 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
B ? B
B
13
2
2
8
B
B 2 A
65
B
2
8
55
5'3
55
55
50
5('
50
B
2
8
B
8
2
2
2
B
B
B
B
C 2 8
C 2 B
C 2 8
50
C
158.00
174.00
212.0C
26.0C
l"'.OC
235.00
42.00
23.CO
8.CC
3.C(
:I.ee
1.75
1•
Co
C
8.cr
2.5C
~.75
14.00
14.00
15.00
15.00
23.00
NC
1.25
1.75
1.75
2.0C
1.75
1.25
NC
28.~()
~.5C
13 .C C
2.50
2
B
5C' C 2 B
5C C 2 B
55 C 2 8
4.r.C
4.CC
334.('(
3311..CC
114.0C
11C.C·C
806. ec
2
2
B 2
8 2
B 2
B 2
B
2
B 2
B 2
B 2
8
2
B 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
8
2
60 A 2 8
60 B 2 8
60 8 2 A
8 2
B 2
B 2
6t:
6C
B 2
6r:
8
B
R
2
2
2
B
8
B
B 2
R
~
60 B 2 R
6C B 2 B
8
2
1 3C .0 C'
6(\
119.0C
85.CC
85.CO
85.ac
119.0C
81.0C
85.00
60
6C B 2 B
60 B 2 8
60 B 2 B
60 B 2 B
6(' B 2 B
60 B 2 B
B
B
35.0C
35.0C
60 B 2 B
6C B 2 B
1979. REFEQ TO NOTICE TO CUSTOMER DATED SEPTEMBER 26.
-15-
PUR
.5C
94.CO
10.0C
El~
18.50 2025.0C'
1.50
56.0C
lC8.0('
1.50
1.5C
108. CO
447.CC
S.5C
12.0C
311.C·C
1.75
133.CC
S.5C
24~.C'C
2.CC
45.0C
6.CC
35.0C
2.5C
~5.cr
2.C(
35.0C
: .75
E5.0C
2.5C
38C.CC
163.0(
2.0C
5.5e
168.0C
138. (\()
5.5C
9.CO
344.CC
9:
1710.CO
2415.00
3140.00
3855.CO
396.00
651.00
___
B
B
1978.
2
2
B
B
B 2
2
2
B 2
8
B
2
2
B 2
B
2
B 2
B
2
B 2
DATE
MAC~
MDL/
_!~E_~g!T
z
20'
C"
C'I)
1826 5258
5259
5710
5715
5716
5861
5862
5863
=867
6125
755C
7551
7552
757C
771C
772C
1827
'01
123C
1231
1232
2185
3262
3284
3285
3286
3287
3289
~295
3296
3612
4700
5256
5257
5258
5861
5862
586~
5867
6125
1828
0 C1
1851
002
OC1
DC 2
3246
3593
3594
3595
3596
3597
3598
~OTE:
____
PURCHASE
Qg~~~leIIQtl
___________________
MULTIPLEXER/S CONTROL
MULTIPLEXER OVERLAP
PROCESS INTERRUPT ADAPTER
PROCESS INTERRUPT-CONTACT
PROCESS INTERRUPT-VOLTAGE
PULSE COUNTER ADAPTER
PULSE COUNTER
PULSE OUTPUT
PULSE COUNTER-16 BIT
REGISTER OUTPUT
COMMUNICATIONS AOAPTER
LINE ADAPTER
CLOCK
18(0/279r: ADAP TER
SELECTOR CHANNEL
SYSTEM/~6C
ADAPTER
DATA AD~PTER UNIT
ANALOG INPUT 8ASIC
ANALOG-DGTL CONV~RTER MOD
ANALOG-DGTL CONVERTER MOD 2
COMPARATOR
DIGITAL INPUT ADAPTER
DIGITAL INPUT BASIC
DIGITAL INPUT-CONTACT
D!G!T~L
INPUT-VOLTAGE
DIGITAL INPUT-VOLTAGE-HI SPD
DGTL & ANALOG OUTPUT BASIC
DIGITAL OUTPUT ADAPTER
DIGITAL OUTPUT CONTROL
ELECTRONIC CONTACT OPERATE
ISOLATION CONTROL UNIT-NOI
MULTIPLEXER/R CONTROL
MULTIPLEX~R/R CQNTROL.ADDL
MULTIPLEXER/S CONTROL
PULSE COUNTER ADAPTER
PULSE COUNTER
PULSE OUTPUT
PULSE COUNTER 16-8IT
REGISTr=.R OUTPUT
ENCLOSURE
ENCLOSURE
MULTIPLEXER TERMINAL
MULTIPLEXFR TERMINAL
DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER
CONNECTOR ELEMENT
CURRENT ELEMENT
CURRENT/HL ELEMENT
CUSTOM ELEMENT
FILTER ELEMENT
V~LTAGE/R ELEMENT
SOME PRICES
H~VE
eEl~E
713.00
222.00
662.0C
471.00
589.0C
662.0C
185.0 C
589.~u
~68.0C
662.00
6555.,)C
4845.0("
206.0C
18510.0C
922C. CC
356C .OC
5345.00
2705.CC
385C .00
4205.00
10 7C .00
589.0C
1995.0C
236.0C
412.0C
412.00
1995.,)0
442.0C
442.CO
589.00
NC
589.0C
294.CO
713.CC
662.00
185.0C
589.00
368000
1'62.00
442.CO
294.0C
713.0C
1 C 7C • C C
442.0C
3.CC
4.0C
4.00
~.CC
8.CO
te.oc
CHANGED EFFECTIVE JANUARY 1.
MONTHLY
_____
Eg~I~b
MONTHLY BASE
____
bg~~g
__
IgE~
U/L
___ ___
~
TERM
~~~
______
2'3.00
8.0C
26.00
23.00
28.00
26.00
8.00
23.00
16.00
26.00
270.00
20".00
7.00
771.00
384.00
1">4.00
223.00
110.00
174.00
212.0C'
42.00
~~~~
2.0C
C.75
1.5C
80.00
10.00
14.CC
14 .C 0
8e.00
15.00
15.00
23.00
NC
28.00
13.CO
?8.CO
26.0C
8.00
23.00
___
35.C,(
85.0C
119.0C
175.::' C
1 75.0 C
1:38.00
65.00
85.0C
8=.00
85.00
126C.00
507.00
114.0('
13CC.OC
R L
QeI_~_~_~
e_~
6(1
60
60
6(
60
60
6('
6C
6:;
6C'
60
B 2 B
B
B
2
2
2
6C'
B 2 B
2 B
2 B
B 2 8
B 2 B
B 2 B
B 2 EI
B
R
'3 2
8 2
6('
8
B
8
6~
SEPTEMBEP 26.
2
B 2
B 2
B 2
B
13
B
B
B
B
2
2
2
2
2
2
B ?
8
2
B
2
8
8
2
B
8
2
2
B
B
B 2
B 2
8
65.00
3.50
2
8 2
B 2
B 2
B 2 8
B 2
B 2
B 2
2
EI
B
B
'3
8
65 A 2 B
65 B 2 B
60
8
B 2 B
F3 2 B
q 2 B
F3 2
NC
2.5C
2.5t
1.25
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
A 2
8 2
2
B
B
60
1.25
2
B 2
2
B 2
B 2
60
26.0C
23.00
15.00
33.00
51 .C 0
23.00
3.00SUC
5.00SUC
5.00SUC
3.00SUC
10.00SUC
13.COSUC
8 2
B
B
B
8
B
6C
6C
60
60
60
60
1.25
2
2
2
2
2
2
B
8
2
2
2
35.00
35.0C
138.0C
65.0C
85.0C
85.00
85.0C
1. CC
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
60
60
60 B 2 B
60
5C
60
60
60
__
EI
60 B 2 B
60 B 2 8
60 13 2 B
60 B 2 B
35.0<:
~.75
B
B 2 B
60
60
60 B 2
~C
B
B
8 2 B
B
2.5C
2.CC
0.75
DAT~D
PUP M P W
s.ct
1-6.00
-16-
El~
2.5C
0.75
0.75
0.75
1.25
1.C(
1.25
61.0C
24.CO
1.ce
49.CC
23.CO 152C.CC
4.CO
718.0C
24.5t,
13.50
6C2.CO
3.5C
3:34.0('
334.(,C
'3.5C'
2.5C
1 3C .00
~.75
119.00
9.5t
1 75.0 C
1.25
85.00
2.CC
85.CO
2.CO
85.00
175.00
11.50
2.CC
119.0C
2.(10
81.00
1.25
85.00
NC
23.00
1979. REFER TO NOTICE TQ CUSTOMER
___
11/("1/78
EI
2
B
6C B 2 B
60 B 2 B
1978.
B
B
8
B
8
B
B
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
8
2
B 2
B 2
B 2
'11/C'1/78
MACH MDL/
_!yeE_EE~T
1851
3599
5252
52S3
1856
OCI
CC 2
1227
15C7
15C 8
3251
3252
325:
3254
5527
5528
2C 2C
8C 1
8C2
8C3
BC4
8C5
8C6
BCl
802
BC3
8e4
CC'l
C02
CC 3
CC4
COS
CC6
De5
DC1
002
DC3
DC'4
De5
006
E(l5
1315
1580
2('74
3228
348C
3901
4lce
4442
4447
4448
446C'
450C
NOT~~
PURCHASE
MONTHLY
MONTHLY BASE
U/L
TERM
PUP M P W R L
____ QgS~gleIIQ~ ___________________ egl~~ _____ ~~~I~b ____ b~~~~-_~~8M ___ ~ ___ ~~G ____ -_~~~k-_-El~_-_QeI_§_~-~--~-~
VOLTAGE/S ELEMENT
MULTIPLEXER/R
MUL T 1 P LEXER/S-HLSE
ANALOG OUTPUT TERMINAL
ANALOG OUTPUT TERMINAL
ANAGOG DRIVER AMPLIFIER
BUFFER REG-SINGLE 13 ~IT
BUFFER REG-DOUBL~ 13 BIT
DGTL ANALOG CNVTP-OAC-MDL
OGTL ANALOG CNVTR-OAC-MDL 2
DGTL ANALOG CNVTR-DAC-MDL 3
DGTL ANALOG CNVTR-DAC-MOL 4
PRECISION VOLTAGE PEF MOL 1
PRECISION VOLTAGE REF MOL 2
PROCESSING UNIT
PROCESSING UNIT
PROCESSING UNIT
PROCESSING UNIT
PROCESSING UNIT
PROCESSING UNIT
PROCESSING UNIT
PROCESSIN.G UNIT
PROCIiSSING UNIT
PROCESSING UNIT
PROCESS IN G UN IT
PROCESSING UNIT
PROCESSING UNIT
PROCESSING UNIT
PROCESSING UNI T
PROCESSING UNIT
PROCESSING UNIT
PROCESSING UNIT
PROCESSING UNIT
PROCESS ING UN IT
PROCESSING UNIT
PROCESSI"'G UNI T
PROCESSING UNIT
PROCESSING UNIT
AUTOMATIC CALLING
CAPO PRINT CONTROL
BINARY SYNCH COMMUNI ADAPTER
DATA CONVERSION
~UAL FEED CARRIAGE CONTROL
14Cl/144C COMPATIBILITy
FULL TRANSPARENT TEXT MODE
1403 ATTACHMENT-MODEL 2
1403 ATTAC~MENT-MODEL 7
1403 ATTACHMENT-MODEL N1
1442 ATTACHMENT-MODEL 5
HIGH SPEED-1920C 8PS
lC.OC
368.CC
851.00
164C .:J C
1215.00
iS5.CC
148.0 C
294. CO
2 36.C C
471.00
713.00
1425.0C
713.00
107C .00
220CC.OC.
2373r.cc
13950.CO
1481C.OC
2407C.00
16860.CO
11 74C. (lC
134 7C. OC'
8210.0C
9220.00
162('0.OC
17930.0C
1 C 3 7C. OC
1126C.00
1895(.OC
111 5C .OC
13.COSUC
17.00
46.00
86.00
56.00
8.00
5.00
1'.:)0
l:).CO
23.00
33.00
70.00
'33.00
56.ac
1160.(0
1250.00
NC
1 .5C
2.C C
1 LL. C C
3.50
175. CO
15('.00
2.CC
61.0C
7C.00
95.CO
7C.00
iL.OC
7(.00
2.5C
6.CC
7C.00
1.50
2.5r:
B
B
2
2
B
B
~S
B 2
B
55 B 2 B
12.C'C'
1.25
6C'
60
7C • C' C
1.5C
23.(lC
2.(;
23.00
79.50
84.CC
79.5C
55
55
2
B
13 2
55 13 2
8
B
8
55
55
55
55
55
55
5C
5C'
5('
50
5(5C
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
8
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
5C
B 2
8
5C
B
B
8
741.00
788.00
1355.0C
98C.CC
84.CC
164. (lC
50
50
182.CC'
5~'
611.00
61.(C
5C
702.CO
433.00
,,-Sc.co
857.00
65.5(61.C'C
sr
950.00
74.00
E9.5C
2736C.OO
2909C' .00
1736(.00
18220.0C
3020(.CC
549.00
598.00
1C70.00
702.00
208(1.00
1455.00
1555.00
931.00
980.CO
167C.OC
2285C. CC'
1215.0C
44430.CC
4n.ac
466.CC
6555. C C
1 (I 75. C C
2500.00
38.00
28.00
201.QC
10.0C
334.00
23.00
273.00
243.00
334.00
34.00
56.00
381~C.OC'
5SSt. CC
2SC .OC
423C .OC
413S.0C
4422.CC,
56C'. CC
678.0C
SOME PPICES HAVE CHANGED EFFECTIVE JANUARY 1.
'5c:).oo
58.00
1979. REFEQ
-17-
5~
5C
5C
65.5C
69.5C
74. C C
lLL8.CC
164.CC
2 B
2 8
2 B
2 B
2 B
2 8
2 B
2 B
2 B
2 B
2 B
2 B
2 B
2 '3
2 8
2 B
2 B
2 8
2 8
2 B
1 9C' • C C
50
2
R 2
8t:::.5Co
91.CO
5('
8
2
8
5C'
5C'
8
2
B
B
2
B
85.5C
91.CC
50 B 2 8
5" 8 2 B
SO B 2 8
172.CC
19: • C C
215.(C'
5('
14S.0C
3. 5C
1 45. C' C
27.CC 156!:.OC
12.50
81.00
2. DC
98. C'O
47.5C
PO
1.ce
128.CO
1.25
36.CC
36.0C
36.ce
181C.00
181(,.OC
181C.CC
3.50
351.0(-
1.25
168.C(,
50
5C
'5~
50
50
5C
5C
B
2
8 2
B 2
B 2
f3 2
B
B
B
B
B
B 2 B
B
B
2
2
B
B
50 B 2 B
50 B 2 B
5C
'50
50
B 2
B 2
B 2
TO NOTICE TO CUSTOMER DATED SEPTEMBER 26, 1978.
B
8
B
B
2
B 2
8
B
8
B
8
8
B
B
B
B
8
8
B
B
B
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
R 2
8
13
8
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
B 2
B
2
B 2
8 2
B 2
B
B
B
8
B
9
2
2
2
2
2
2
8 2
8 2
B
8
8
2
2
2
B 2
B 2
f3 2
B 2
DATE
~
MDL/
_!!!E_E~~T
202C 45(1
4658
470C
470::'
53:> 1
5302
532('
5~75
7081
7125
7126
7135
7477
7495
7496
7497
7498
8C7C'
8'82
8083
8084
8085
8090
8092
8095
8099
8100
8637
2152
COl
4450
2203
AC 1
AOI
AC'2
A02
1897
1ge1
1902
1903
1904
3475
3475
5~58
5558
6404
7815
7815
2213
001
002
4450
62CO
~
PURCHASE
MONTHLY
678.00
282( .00
49C.OC
352.00
941C.OC
11425.C(,
3215.CC
991.00
199C.OC
1075.0C
236C.00
521C.OC
409.0C
423C.00
3165.0C
56.00
181.00
23.00
28.00
537.00
654.00
181.00
66.00
12: .00
58.00
133.CC
297.00
423C'.~C
273.00
423(,. (I C
273.00
lC3.00
66.CO
66.CO
66.00
66.00
MONTH~Y
BASE
U/L
11/01/78
TERM
PUP M P W
R L
___ ~~~~Ele!lQ~ ___________________ e81~5 _____ Bg~I~~ ____ ~~~~~ __ Ife~ ___ Z___ ~~§ ______ ~~~C ___ El~ ___ Qe!_§_C~~ __ e_~
HIGH SPEED-5000C 8PS
INPUT/OUTPUT CHANNEL
INTERMEDIATE BLOCK CHECKING
INTERNAL CLOCK
NATIVE TAPE ATTACHMENT
NATIVE TAPE ATTACHM~NT
9 TRACK COMPATABILITY
PRINTER FEATURES CONTROL
SERIAL I/O CHANNEL
7 TRACK COMPATIBILITY
7 TRACK COMPATIBILITY
7&9 TRACK COMPATABILITY
STATION SELECTION
STORAGE C'1NTROL
STORAGE CONTROL
STORAGE CNTL FOR SU8MDL 5
STORAGE CONTROL FOP SUMDL 6
2152 ATTACHMENT
2203 ATTACHMENT-12~ PPNT POS
2203 ATTACHMENT-144 PRNT POS
22C3 ATTACHM~NT
22C3 ATTA,CHMENT
25C1_ATTACHMENT
2520 ATTACHMENT-MODEL Al
2520 ATTACHMENT-MODEL A2.A3
2560 ATTACHMENT
25fO ATT<\CHMENT
UNI VERSAL CHARACTEQ SET ADAP
PRINTER K.EYBOARD
FORMS STAND STACKER
PRINTER
PRINTER
1745.00
10 4C .OC
lC4C .CO
104('.CC
104(' .OC
383.00
935.0C
486.00
141C.C(
141C.CO
289.0('
5745.0c.
61.00
1388C.CO
lC'620.0C
1.25
168.CO
7.00
5821.00
1.CO
175.00
1.ce
281.0C 2160.00
412. CC 24 7 5.0C
71. C C
1C'2.0C
2.5C
85.ClC
1~.5C
526.00
31.50
102.0C
lC2.(\0
53.50
PRINT POSITIONS.24 ADDITtONL
TAPE CHANNELS.6 ADDITIONAL
PRINTER
PRINTER
FORMS STAND STACKER
ROLL PAPER FEED
5~C.
00
460.CO
520.0C
55e .OC
58C .00
3~
35.00
1495.(0
25.0C
258.00
422( .00
6515.0C
62.00
459.00
NOTE: SOME PRICES HAVE CHANGED EFFECTIVE JANUARY 1.
B 2
B 2
B 2
'3 2
5(1
5~
B 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
9 2
9
B
8
B
B
S~
8
B
5::
50
33.00
1.0e
273.00
2:::8.00
7.::-C
133.CC
209(.OC
50
50
7.00 2:)90.00
7.0C 2C9C.C'C
7.(lC 209C'.oe
6.5C'
712.0C
7. (I C
PO
5(\
7. C C
PQ
PO
PO
7.CC
23.00
2.50
58.~0
9.se
28.00
89.00
89.00
15.00
168.0C
4.CC
293.0C'
38C.OC
351.0C
7.C'(
7. CO
4C7.('C
4C7. CO
5.0r
293.0C
92.'5C
571.00
NC
122.0C
437.CO
525.00
480.00
4C2.CC
50C.OOSUC
46C.00SUC
520.00SUC
550.00SUC
58:>.OOSUC
llC;.CO
lCl.C0
92.CO
49.00
45.C 0
41.0C
25.00SUC
10.00
9.00
8.00
145.00
190 .00
10.00
12
24
12
24
c
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/'5
24
12
24
c
C'
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
12
24
o
25/5
:)
25/5
12
C
B
B
B
9
B
2
2
2
2
2
B
B
B
B
8
B
2
B 2
8 2
B 2
e
2
B 2
8 2
8 2
B 2
50 8
2 8
5C
2
2
2
B
B
8
35 C 2
P
8
8
B
8
8
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
45 C 2 B
A
4S C 2 B
A 2
50 B 2 B
c:;C' 13 2 f'\
50
8
2
B
50 B 2 B
5C' B 2 B
5C' B 2 B
50 8
50 8
2
B
2 8
5C' B 2 B
50
50
B
8
f'\
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
:?
NC
122.0('
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
13.00
PO
45 C 2 B
A 2
5.5e
515.CO
45 C 2 B
A 2
66.00
45 C 2 B
A 2
35 B 2 B
35 8 2 B
~
35 R 2 B
B 2
NC
1.50
42.CO
46.0C
NC
NC
NC
PO
1979. REFER TO NOTICE TO CUSTOMER DATED SEPTEMBER 26. 1978.
-18-
2
50 9 2 8
50 B 2 B
133.0C
7.CO
B 2
50
50
5('
5C
5?5C
367.CO
63 CHAR ASCII CODE
CHARACTER SET-13 CHARACTERS
CHARACTER SET-39 CHARACTFRS
CHARACTER SET-52 CHARACTERS
CHARACTER SET-63 CHARACTERS
DUAL FEED CARRIAGE
B
50 B 2 B
B 2
2
11/C'1/76
DATE'
MACH MDL/
PURCHASE
MONTHLY
MONTHLY 8ASE
U/L
TERM
PUR M P W R L
____ Q~S~81eIIQ~ ___________________ ~gl~g _____ g~~I!~ ____ ~g~~~ __ IgE~ ___ ~ ___ ~~§ ______ ~~~~ ___ El~ ___ Q~I_§_~_~ __ ~_~
_Iy~E_E~~T
0'
tT
CD
2213 9509
2222
OC 1
OC2
2250
~Cl
CC3
1001
lCC2
124'5
1248
1498
1499
1660
3250
3251
4485
4700
4765
5475
5476
5655
226C
OCI
002
36C5.
3606
3607
4765
4766
4767
ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
2265 0('2
2'31C
801
802
2'311
OCI
001
011
011
C12
t'12
36Cl
3601
3602
NOTE~SOME
PIN FEED PLATEN-REGULAR
PRINTER W/LEDGER CARD bEV
PRINTER W/LEDGER CARD DEV
DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT
ABSOLUTE VECTORS
ABSOLUTE VECTORS & CONTROL
ALPHAMER!C KEYBOARD
ALPHAMERIC KEYBOARD
BUFFER-4;96 POSITIONS
BUFFER-6192 POSITIONS
CHARACTER GENERATOR
DISPLAY C'OPIER ATTACH-MDL
DISPLAY COPIER ATTACH-MDL 3
GRAPHIC DESIGN
ISOLATION CONTROL UNIT
LIGHT PEN
1ST OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL
2ND OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL
PROGRAMMED FUNCTION KEYBOARD
DISPLAY STATION
DISPLAY STATION
KEYBOARD ALPHAMERIC NUMERIC
KEYBOARD ALPHAMERIC
KEYBOARD NUMERIC
KBOARD.ALPHA-NUMERIC INSET
KEYBOARD.ALPHAMERTC
KEYBOARD. NUMER I C
323921 BULK CABLE
5213614 BULK CABLE
5213666 BULK CABLE
5214667 BULK CABLE
5727685 CABLE ASSEMBLY
5727686 CABLE ASSEMBLY
5727687 CABLE ASSEMBLY
5728291 CABLE ASSEMBLY
5726292 CABLE ASSEMBLY
~728293 CABLE ASSEMBLY
01 SPLAY STATION
DISI( STORAGE
DISK STORAGE
DISK STORAGE DRIVE
DISK STORAGE DRIVE
DISK STORAGE DRIVE
2311
2311
MDL11
ATTACH TO 11:3 MD
MDL12 ATTACH TO 1133 MD
61.75
1266C.OC
13020.0C
57530.0C
3483C .Oc
1521C.00
17410.CC
3910.0('
391C.OC
16290.0C
2611C.OC
1961C.CO
3655.0C
3655.0C
1696C.00
NC
522C.CC
2170.00
168C.0(764C.OC
1025.0C
1025.00
1235.0C
954.00
635.0C
954.0C
635.0C
317.0C
PPO
RPO
RP~
RPO
RPO
RPO
RPO
RPO
RPO
RPO
4700.CO
6945.00
111 70 .0 C
1651(.00
1651C.OC
14430.00
~3.CC
33.00
42.00
33.CO
21.00
32.00
21 .00
10.00
PURCHAS E
PURCHASE
PUR CHAS E
PUR CHAS E
PURCHASE
PURCHASE
PURCHASE
PURCHASE
PURCHASE
PURCHASE
183.C,O
277.00
445.00
639.00
639.00
391.00
119.0C
5.00
119.0C
PRICES HAVE CHANGED EFFECTIVE JANUARY 1.
NC
144.0C
157.CO
198.(lC
223.0C
5C 9. DC
12.CC
388.(;C
13.(lC
4.<=:C'
3(,'6.0C
2.50
179.00
8.50
12.(C
179.('IC
275.00
1e.5C
2.5C
2.5C
16.CC 1:::> 3C • ~ C
NC
13.0e
161.00
NC
231.('
NC
115.0r
318.C'(
9.5C
12.5C
12.5C
6.5C
63. ::'0
2.00
39.0C
32.0('
1.50
56.0C
6.5C
2.('(1
33.00
26.C(
1.5f
PURCHASE ONL Y
392.00
432.00
1185.CO
1 74C' .00
381.00
437.CO
81 • ':'0
81.00
381.00
544.0('
4C9.CO
75.0C
75.00
353.00
NC
1-:)8.0C
48.0(:
37.00
162.00
5.00
1979.
REFE~
-19-
ONL Y
ONLY
ONLY
ONLY
ONLY
ONLY
ONLY
ONLY
ONLY
ONLY
588. C' 0
537.00
588.CO
537. C C
360.CO
326.00
5.00
4.0C
5. C C
"35 B 2 B
35 F3 2 B
A 2
A 2
Ar':!
A
3
B
A
40
A 3
B
4('
A
B
A 1
A 1
A 1
3
40
A 3 8
4('
3 B
A ::I F3
6,
A
4C
40
40
A
3
A 3
B
A
A 1
A 1
4C
A :"
B
A
A
4('1
A 3
8
A
40 A '3 B
:3 B
1
A
A
4("
A
4:;
4('
4:;
40
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
A ~ B
A :3 8
A 3 B
A :3 B
B 3 B
A 3 B
B 3 ~
B 3 B
B 3 B
B 3 A
FI 3 8
B 3 B
A
B
B
8
F3
B
B
B
A
e
A
A.
1
A 1
A
I'JC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
I'lC
NC
NC
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
32.C(,
5':
51.5C
92.CC
82.50
50 C 2 8
5C C 2 B
55 C 3 B
A
82.50
55 C 3 B
A
55 C 3
B
A 1
C 3
8
.A.
8
o
25/5
25/5
25/5
C
?'5/5
C
25/5
51.50
C
25/5
25/5
1.00
NC
55
C
C
25/5
25/5
1.('e
NC
55 C 3 B
C
TO NOTICE TO CUSTOMER DATED SEPTEMBEP 26. 1978.
2
A 2
A 2
A 1
l1.1t 1/78
DATE
~.
---~A$..~.~ADL/
_!yeE_E£~T
2311 3602
2312 ACI
AO t
2313 ACt
AOI
2~14
AOI
AOI
801
801
COl
001
4700
6148
7949
8170
8170
2318
ACI
AO 1
2319 BCl
BC 1
BC2
f'C2
2401
001
OCI
002
002
O~3
OC3
004
004
DOS
005
0~6
006
OC8
'08
3471
3471
5121
5121
5519
2402
OCI
CCI
002
002
~03
003
3472
3472
5122
____
PURCHASE
Q~~~8!e!lQ~
__________________
e81~g
'2292C.00
DISK STORAGE
DISK STORAGE
7529C.00
STORAGE CONTROL
63810.00
STORAGE CONTROL
6~81C.OC
DIRECT ACCESS STOR.FACILITY
ISOLATION CONTROL UNIT
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT
2844 ATTACHMENT
TW~ CHANNEL SWITCH
19945C.0(,
NC
NC
NC
5340.(lC
37430.00
DISK STORAGE
DISK STORAGE
MONTHLY
_____
3510C.0(,
8~~IAL
MONTHLY BASE
____
599.00
1945.00
1650.0C
1650.CO
589:>.00
NC
NC
NC
156.00
1030.00
108C.00
~g~~g
__
4.00
551.CO
503.00
1789.00
1634.0C
1518.00
1386.CO
1518.CC
1386.00
5419.CO
4948.0C
35100.00
14440.00
MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
MA~NETIC
2094C.OC
TAPE UNIT
3395C.CO
lC80.00
375.00
544.00
881.00
MAGNETIC
TAP~
UNIT
1653C .OC
432.0C
MAGNETIC
T~PE
UNIT
23140.0C
600.00
MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
3615C.OC
937.00
MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
DUAL DENSITY-80C-16CC
1521('.00
8PI
MODE COMPATIBILITY
POWER WINDOW
MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
447.00
11CO.OO
26.00
426.0C
10.00
3C8. CC
26670.00
144.CC
131.00
948.0C
865.('0
8.C 0
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
640.00
585.(10
948.00
865.(0
1569.CO
1432.CC
5C • C' C
45.00
19.00
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
994.C C
696.00
39790.0C
1C30.GO
MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
6580C.OC
1705.00
MODE COMPATIBILITY
2145.00
864. CO
994.CO
907.00
345.(0
315.CO
500.CO
457.CO
811.Ce
740.CC
397.00
363.OC
552.CO
5C4.0C
862.0C
787.00
411.00·
375.00
24.00
22.CO
9.eo
31a.cosuc
MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
DUAL DENSITY-800-160C BPT
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
54.00
21.00
U/L
___ ___
~
('
cC
o
C
:)
C
:)
C
C
o
TERM
~~~
______
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
MMM~
___
El~
___
R L
QeI_~_~_~
e_~
__
lC7.CO
55 C 2 B
B
331.CO
55 C 2 8
B
82.50
55 C 3 B
A 1
82.5C
55 C 3 B
A
856.0(
55 C 3 B
A
c
c
o
c
(;
o
C
:l
C
C
C
o
o
c
c
c
c
c
(I
c
c·
C
C
C
:)
(I
o
C
"
25/5
25/"i
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
2!5/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
55 C :3 B
A
185. CO
55 C 3
B
B
254.CO
55 C :3 B
B
254.CC
55 C 3 8
8
113.0C
45 C :3 B
A
128.00
45 C 3 B
A
156.CC
45 C 3 B
A 1
136.0C
45 C 3 B
A
149.(lC
45 C 3
B
A
1 8e • C C
45 C 3 B
A
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
2!5/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
2!5/5
3.51:
767.00
156.0C
2.50
78.00
45 C 3 B
A 1
NC
27.'::'0
45 C 3
6
A 1
NC
221.00
NC
45 C 3
B
A
253.00
45 C 3
B
A
313.CO
45 C 3 B
A 1
4.5C
157.00
45 C 3 8
A 1
NC
55.00
45 C 3 B
A
NOTE: SCME PRICES HAVE CHANGED EFFECTIVE JANUARY 1. 1979. REFER TO NOTICE TC CUSTOMER DATED SEPTEMBER 26.
-20-
PUR M P W
Nt
NC
NC
9C 7.(C
DISK STORAGE
I~B~
1978.
11/::'Il/7e
DATE
MACH MDL/
_IY~E_EE~T
~
CD
"0
~
o
Q.
C
(")
CD
Q.
~.
;:
o
S.
~
3:
;:::;,
"'0
CD
3c;;.
(/)
o·
?
24025122
5519
7161
7161
2403 3~28
3228
3471
3471
4701
47(3
4704
532C
5::'20
5519
7125
7125
7127
7127
7135
7135
7185
7185
24C'4 3236
5519
7126
2415
OCl
001
CC2
C02
OC3
PURCHASE
POWER WI~DOW
SIMULTNEOUS READ WHILE WRITE
DATA CONVERSION
308.CO
864.01:'
1935.0C
110e.cc
DUAL DENSITY 80C-16CC
26.00
NC
NC
NC
256.CO
POWER WINDOW
7 TRACK COMPAT-MODEL
3C 8. CO
2145.0('
3C8.0CSUC
54.00
1.2.3
7 TRACK COMPAT-MODEL 4.5.6
7
&
~
TRACK COMPATIBILITY
16 DRIVE ADDRESSING
7545.0C
420.00
1100.0C
26.00
3610.00
308.00
32950.0C
MAG TAPE UNIT AND CONTROL
52690.00
MAG TAPE UNIT ANO CONTROL
72420.00
DeS
MAG TAPE UNIT AND CONTROL
TAP~
UNIT AND CONTROL
~855.00
4CC 1C. 00
6426C.1"0
ODS
MAG TAPE UNIT AND CONTROL
9851C' .OC
OC6
DATA CONVl=RSION
ISOLATIO~.
CONTROL UNIT
ISOLATION. CONTROL UNIT
9 TRACK COMPATIBILITY
1935.0C'
NC
NC
5825.CC
7 TRACK COMPAT-MODELS 1.2.3
2145.0C
7 TRACK COMPAT-MODELS 4.5.6
4085.00
7
& 9 TRACK COMPATIBILITY
CARD READER
195.00
16C 90. C C
DATA CONVERSION
POWER WINDOW
7 TRACK COMPATIBILITY
MAG TAPE UNIT AND CONTROL
MAG
~OT~CME
49.00
NC'
NC
NC
9925.0C
C04
004
3228
3228
47Cl
4703
532C
5320
7125
7125
7127
7127
7135
7135
2501
AO 1
3C8.00SUC
21.CO
ISOLATION, ceNTROL UNIT
ISOLATION. CONTROL UNIT
ISOLATION •. CONTROL UNIT
9 TRACK COMPATIBILITY
003
006
MONTHLY
MONTHLY BASE
U/L
TERM
PUP M P W
R L
____ Q~~~~l~Il~~ ___________________ egl~~ _____ ~~~L~b ____ b~~~~ __ I~~~ ___ ~ ___ ~~~ ______ ~~~~ ___ El~ ___ QeI_~_~_~ __ e_~
6675.00
12330.00
18.CO
24
C
25/5
19.00
18.ce
45.CO
41 .C 0
24.CO
22.CO
12
C
24-
J
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
12
24
12
24
C
C·
:;-
236.(C
215.CC
12
24
c
c
25/5
25/5
50.00
45.GC
179.CO
164.CO
386.(0
353.C;)
24.CO
22.(0
12
c
?4
c
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
77.00
308.00SUC
84.CO
841.0e
774.':>0
7C 6. C C
1345.00
1237.CO
1130.CC
1845.00
1697.00
1550.CO
1J15.0C
934.00
853.00
1630.00
150C.00
1369.CO
2240.00
2C61.CO
1882.(0
49.00
45.CO
41 .C 0
NC
NC
150.00
138.CO
126. CO
54.00
50.0C
45.00
105.00
97.00
88.(,0
172.00
158.00
144.00
250.00
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24-
12
24
12
24
12
24
C
c
C'
c
NC
lC2.00
4~
C ~ B
45 C 3 B
A
A
1.5e
88.00
"-5 C':? B
A 1
2.5C
78.~C
"-5 C 3 B
A 1
NC
NC
NC
47.ce
946.ce
45 C 3 R
A
NC
2.ec
!'IC
131.':'(
45 C :3 B
A 1
31.C(
869.0:
45
8
A
8C1.5e
1245.0~
45 C 3 B
A
1.5C
66.0C
45 C 3
B
A 1
2.CC
NC
3. C' C
187.CO
179.C'0
NC
179. Ot
45 C 3
B
A 1
45 C 3 B
C 3 B
A 1
A 1
45
!
c
(
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
334.C(
45 C 3
8
A 1
486.CO
A5 C 3 B
A 1
25/5
214.('0
45
C 3
B
A
c.
c
25/5
25/5
382.:e
4'5
C
3
8
A 1
c
c
25/~
25/5
25/5
553.(C
45 C
3
F3
A 1
C
25/5
1.5e
88.00
45 C 3
8
A
NC
NC
15.CC
48C.OC
45 C 3 8
A 1
2.CC
527.CC
45 C 3 B
A 1
4.50
527.00
45 C 3 B
A
21.CC
665.CO
45 C 3 B
A 1
40 C 3 B
A 2
25/5
C
C
C
o
12
C
~
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
56.5C
PRICES HAVE CHANGED EFFECTIVE JANUARY 1. 1979. REFER TO NOTICE TO CUSTOMER DATED SEPTEMBER 26.
- 21-
C 3
25/5
·c
12
24
12
24
12
24
24
25/5
NC
NC
1978.
11/Cl/78
DATE
2501
AC2
363C
2502
A01
AC 2
465(1
4651
545C
2520
AC 1
AC2
A~3
256C
At) 1
AC2
1575
1576
1577
2711
001
4639
4641
4642
4643
4644
4647
4691
4692
4693
4694
479C
4794
4816
4817
4818
6350
274C
OC1
OC2
1313
1495
1496
1499
3255
3401
34C2
3600
451C
4634
4635
4639
4641
4642
4643
4644
CARD READER
113C/2501 COUPLING
CARD READEQ
CARD READER
INTFQCHANGEABLE FEED 51/80
INTERCHANGEABLE F~ED 66/80
OOTICAL MARK READ FEATURE
CARD READ PUNCH
CARD PUNCH
CARD PUNCH
MULTI-FUNCTION CARD MACHINE
MULTI-FUNCTION CARD MACHINE
CARD PRINT-FIRST 2 LINES
CAPO PRINT-SECONO 2 LINES
CARD PRINT-THIRD 2 LINES
LINE ADAPTER UNIT
lAM LINE ADAPTER 2W VOICE GO
IBM LINE ADAPTER 2W SHRD USE
IBM LINE ADAPTER 2W SHRD USE
IBM LINE ADAOTEQ 2W SHRD USE
IBM LINE ADAPTER 2W SHRD USE
IBM LINE ADAPTEQ 4W VOICE GR
IBM LINE ADAPTER 4W SHRD USE
IBM ~INE ADAPTER 4W SHRD USE
IBM LINE ADAPTER 4W SHRD USE
IBM LINE ADAPTER 4W SHRD USE
IBM LINE ADAPTER 2W TO 8 MI
LINE ADAPTER MODULE
L! NE SET 1
LINE SET 2
LINE SET 3
SHARED LINE ADAPTER 4/1 TERM
COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
AUTOMATIC EOB
BUFFER EXP POS 121-248-MOD 2
8UFFER EXP POS 249-44C-MOD 2
BUFFER RECEIVE-MODEL 2
DIAL UP
DOCUMENT INSERT 6 IN CD-MD 2
DOCUMENT INSERT 7-3/8 CD-M 2
EDIT-MODEL 2
HEADER CONTROL-MODEL 2
IBM LINE ADAPTER 2W TO 4.75M
IBM LINE ADAPTER 4W TO 4.75M
IBM LINE ADAPTER 2W VOICE GR
IBM LINE ADAPTEQ 2W SU8CH
IBM LINE ADAPTER 2W SUBCH 2
IBM LINE ADAPTER 2W SU8CH 3
IBM LINE ADAPTER 2W SU8CH 4
PURCHASE
MONTHLY
1255C .OC
168.00
6160.(lC
668C.00
133C.OC
133C.OC
583C.00
3'5380.00
31630.00
3141(.'0
21230.00
1559(1.CC
4625.00
4625.0C
4625.0C'
661C.00
448.0('
899.00
899.00
899. :>0
899.0C
448.00
899.0C
899.0C
899.0C
899.00
5C6.CO
538.0C
538.00
538.0C
538.0(1
168.00
3400.CO
'52'IC.OC
139. :)0
36C .OC
537.00
1 78 .~O
116.0C
217.00
217.00
330.00
5.00
143.00
179.00
31 .• 00
31.CO
141.0('
949.0C
844.CC
6C9.00
799.0C
621.CC
172.0(1
172 .c 0
172.00
145.GO
10.00
21.CO
21.0e
21.CO
21.00
10 .C 0
21.00
21.0C
21.CO
21.00
l ' .:> 0
10.00
10 .C 0
10.00
10.00
5.00
105.00
162.00
3.50
36C
.oe
178.CO
116.CC
116.00
347.00
694.CO
694.0C·
694.0C
694.00
NOTE: SOME PRICES HAVE CHANGED EFFECTIVE JANUARY 1.
MONTHLY BASE
U/L
PUP M P \If
TERM
8e.5C
NC
40
40
30
30
C
C
C
C
3
3
3
3
B
B
8
9
1e·6.0C
106.00
266. C (I
3;)
3C
3('
B
B
B
8
PO
388. C'C
388.0C
40
40
40
40
4(1
4C'
40
4C
C 3
C 3
C ~
C :3
53.0C.
5C.5C
5::'.5(1
16.(e
16.00
:?9.ee'
184.CO
173.oe
136.1;0
182. C C
182.CO
24.5C
24.50
24.5C·
24.0C
l.ce
1.5('
1.5C
1.5C
1.50
1.ee
1.50
1.50
1.5e
1.5C
C.5C
2.00
2.<:0
2.00
2.oe
~. 5('
39.0C
39.CC
NC
10 .C C
1.0C
16.00
5.00
3.00
6.00
6.00
10.00
5.00
3.00
3.00
10.0C
21.00
21 .00
21.00
21.00
1.CC
NC
NC
2.00
2.C·0
NC
NC
NC
NC
1.50
2.(0
2.00
2.00
2.00
39.0C
39.00
39.00
39.0C
39.01"'
39.(10
39.CV
39.00
39.0(
39.C-C
39.00
28.00
29.0C
29.0C
29.0C
21.0(1
4C.OC
PO
PO
- 23.(;'C
21.CC
57.00
57.~C
96.0C
96.0C
96.00
96.0C
96.0C
1979. REFER TO NOTICE TO CUSTOMER DATED SEPTEMBEP 26.
-22-
C 3
B
C 3 9
C '3 B
C 3
B
C 3 B
A 2
A 2
B
B
B
B
R
2
2
2
2
A
A
A
A
2
2
2
2
2
A 2
A 2
C 3
8
A ~
A 2
5('
8
~
8
B 2
50
50
50
B 3
8 3
B 3
B 3
R
B
8
B
B 2
B 2
C:;O
B 3
B
5C
5(1 B 3 B
'5C
50
50
50
50
5C
50
50
B
B
R
B
A
9
R
B
B
3
3
3
3
3
3
B
B
B
B
B
B
9
B
B
B 2
B
2
B 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
40
8
4C
8 i
B
4('
4('
9
B
B
B
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
A 2
9 2
B 2
B 2
40 9
B
~
4.0
4('
B
R
8
B
B
4C' B
40 B
B
B
B
5C
19.00
C 3 8
R L
:3
3
3
50 9 3 9
4C B
B
4t' BIB
1
B
40
B
40
4C
4C
40
4(1
8
B
B
B
B
8
B
8
BIB
40
8
1978.
1
8
8
B
8
B
B
B
8
B
B
B
2
9 2
2
B 2
B 2
B 2
8
2
B 2
B 2
8 2
B 2
B 2
11/r.l/78
DATE
MACH MDL/
_I~~E_EEAT
274C 4647
4691
4692
4693
4694
4790
6114
71C6
7479
7807
8028
83~
1
9509
960C
ACC.
2741
COl
3255
4634
4635
4639
4641
4642
464~
4644
4647
4691
4692
4693
4694
4708
4790
5501
7900
8341
9509
ACC.
2772
Or: 1
134C
1490
1491
191(:
325C
3650
3830
3860
3940
3941
395C
3970
461C
~OT~
_~
__
PURCHASE
Qg~~BleIlQ~
___________________
IBM LINE ADAPTER 4W VOICE GR
IBM LINE ADAPTER 4W SU8CH 1
IBM LINF- ADAPTER 4W SUBCH 2
IBM LINE ADARTER 4W SUBCH 3
IBM LIN~ ADAPTER 4W SU8CH 4
IBM LIN~ ADAPTER 2W TO 8 MI
RECORD CHECKING
SPEED BASE-6Ce 8PS-MODEL 2
STATION CIJNTROL
TEL LINE ATTACH-MODEL 2
TRANSMIT CONTROL
2760 ATTACHMENT
PIN FEED PLATEN.REGULAR
SPLIT FRICTION F~ED PLATEN
1186101 ROLL PAPER HOLDER
COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
01 AL UP
IBM LINE ADAPTER 2W' TO 4.75M
IBM LINE ADAPT~R 4W TO 4.75M
IBM LINE ADAPTER 2W VOICE GR
IBM LINE ADAPTER 2W SUBCH
IBM LINE ADAPTER 2W SU8CH 2
IBM LINE ADAPTER 2W SU8CH 3
IBM LINE ADAPTER 2W SUBCH 4
IBM LINE ADAPTER 4W VOICE GR
IBM LINE ADAPTER 4W SUBCH 1
IBM LINE ADAPTER 4W SU8CH 2
IBM LINE ADAPTER 4W SU8CH 3
IBM LfNE ADAPTER 4W SU8CH 4
INTERRUPT
IBM LIN~ ADAPTER 2W TO 8 MI
PR I NT I NI-I I 81 T
TRANSMIT INTERRUPT
TYPAMAT!C KEYS
PIN FEED PLATEN,REGULAR
1186101 ROLL PAPER HOLDER
MULTI-PURPOSE CONTROL UNIT
AUTOMATIC ANSWERING
BUFFER EXPANSION
BUFFER EXPANSION ADDITIONAL
CONVERSATIONAL MODE
DISPLAY FORMAT CONTROL
E8CDIC TRANSPARENCY
EXPANDED 1/0 CAPABILITY
PRINT EXPANSION
FIRST 5C ATTACHMENT
2ND 50 ATTACHMENT
545 ATTACHMENT
5496 ATTACHMENT
IDENTIFICATION
~Bl'~
MONTHLY
_____
347.('0
694. DC
694.0C
694.00
694.CC
390.0C
645.00
360.0C
585.0C
112.0(:
195.0C
39(1.CO
61.75
76.00
65.CC
238('.0('
116.00
l1E.OC
116.CO
347. ?O
694.0('
694.CC
694.0C
694.('C
347.00
694.00
694.0C
694.0('
694.0('
99.00
39C.00
303.0C
242.00
195. C C
61.75
65.0C
lC03C.OC
381.00
918.(1('
2090.00
190.00
1 9C. OC
381.0C
152C.O('
762.00
1480.00
229.0C
1290.0C
381C.OO
381.CO
Bg~IAb
MONTHLY SASE
____
b~A~g
10.GO
21.00
21.00
21.00
21.CC
10.00
17.0(;
10.00
16.(;0
3.0r.
5.00
10.00
PURCHASE ONLY
PURCHASE ONLY
PURCHASE ONLY
105.0C
3.00
3.00
3.00
10.00
21 .00
21.00
21.00
21.00
10.0C
21.00
21 .00
21.00
21.00
2.50
1 G .00
1:) .~C
8.00
'5.0C
PURCHASE ONLY
PURCHASE ONLY
286.00
10.00
27.00
59.00
5.00
5.00
10 .C 0
42.00
21.CO
41.00
6.00
36.00
lC8.0C
10.00
__
I~B~
U/L
___ ___
~
TEPM
~~§
PUR M P W
1.5C'
2.C(
'2.C'C
2.CC'
2.CC
1 • CC
NC
NC
NC
1 .5C
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
42.C(
NC
NC
96.0C'
'?6.CC
96.C'C
96.0C
96.01:
29. C'C
32.
c·,,:
5.0C
37.:)C
49.00
48. C' C
35.CC'
"Ie
1 .5C
9f.. CC'
2.(C
96.1)0
96.0C'
96.C(
96.0C
96.CC
96.0C'
96.0C
96.0(:
96.0("
27.00
29.CC
87.0C
132.00
89.(\(')
2.0C
2.00
1.5C
2.CC
2.ec
2. C'C
2.CC
NC
1.CO
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
46.CC
1.ce
9.5C
1.5C
NC
NC
l.e(l
C.5C
1.5t:'
1.5e,
0.50
2.5(1
20.((1
1.ee
B
8
8
LLC
8
8
R 2
40
4C
4C
AC
4C'
4(1
A
B
B
RIB
B 2
B 2
B 2
B
4:.'
34.00
57.1)(
57.C(I
2.C,(
4~
4C
4C
A(I
41)
A
B
B
A
B
B 2
B 2
B
B
R
13 2
P. 2
B 2
8
B
B
B
B 2
B
B
B
8
8
B
R 2
1
2
2
15.C'C
4C 8
B 2
4('
4':
4::'
B
B
B
8
B
R
4~'
8
B
4C
B
B
B 2
13 2
B '2
B 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
8 2
4t
B
8
8
4('
RIB
B 2
4C
4C'
4C
40
4C'
4C
8
B
8
B 2
4(\
B
B
B
40 B
40 8
8
B
B
B
B 1 A
2
B 2
B 2
B 2
B
B 2
B
B
B 2
B 2
45 A 2 B
45 A 2 A
B 2
B 2
41"
!3
8
B
1
15. C'C
39.CO
53.0C
51~.OC
27.CO
36.00
39.00
289.00
9C.CC.
136.0C
8E.ec
9C.OC
179.00
39.00
SOME PRICES HAVE CHANGED EFFECTIVE JANUARY 1. 1979. REFER TO NOTICE TO CUSTOMER DATED SEPTEMBEP 26.
-23-
R L
______ ~~~~ ___ El~ ___ Q~I_§_,_~ __ e_~
45
A 2
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
A 2 8
B
8 2
B
8
2
2
A 2 8
A 2 B
8
2
A 2
2
2
2
8 2
B 2
B 2
8 2
A 2
A
A
A
B
B
8
B
8
A 2 B
A 2 8
A 2 B
1978.
8 2
8
2
B
B
2
2
DATE
MA~ MDL/
PUR~HASE
MONTHLY
MONTHLY ~ASE
U/L
TERM
11/C 1/78
PUP M P W
R L
_IyeE_Eg!T ____ QgS~81~IIQ~ ___________________ ~~1~g-----Bg~IAb----bgA§s __ Ig8~ ___ ! ___ ~~§ ______ ~~~' ___ El' ___ Q~I_~_~_~ __ ~_'
z
20'
CT
CD
2772 4690
4695
501C
5450
5890
6310
6555
7705
791C'
7915
7920
7925
793C
795C
800C
80C 1
8CI0
8015
802C
8021
8040
8700
ACC.
278('
001
002
OC3
OC4
134C'
135C
1894
1895
1897
19C2
1903
19C4
3401
5010
5020
580C'
5820
5821
64(0
6404
77('5
7850
803C
2791
OC 1
CC2
3330
3690
NOTE:
KEYBOARD CORRECTION
KEYLOCK
MULTI~POINT DATA LINK CNTRL
OPTICAL ~ARK READ FEATURE
HORIZONTAL FORMAT CONTROL
SECURITY IDENTIFICATION
SPACE COMP~ESSION/EXPANSION
SYNCHRONOUS CLOCK
1017 ATTACHMENT
1018 ATTACHMENT
1053 MODEL 1 ATTACHMENT
1053 RIBBON SHIFT
1053 VERTfCAL FORMS CONTROL
TRANSMIT RECEIVE MONITOR PRT
2203 AOI ATTACHMENT
2203 A02 ATTACHMENT
2213 MOL 1 ATTACHMENT
2265 ATTACHMENT
2502 MOL Al ATTACHMENT
25C2 MOL A2 ATTACHMENT
3875 ATTACHMENT
2213 MOL 2 ATTACHMENT
ADDITIONAL KEY
DATA T~ANSMISSION TERMINAL
DATA ~RANSMISSION TERMINAL
DATA TRANSMISSION TERMINAL
DATA TRANSMISSION TER~INAL
AUTOMATIC ANSWERING
AUTO~AT!C TURNAROUND
39 CHARACTER BAR 6 BIT TRANS
47 CHARACTER 8AR 6 8IT TRANS
63 CHARACTER BAR ASCII
EBCDIC
E8CDIC
E8CDIC
DUAL COMMUNICATION INTERFCE
MULTIPLE RECORD TRANSMISSION
MULTI-POINT LINE CONTROL
PRINTER HORIZ FORMAT CONTROL
PRINT LINE 120-CHARACTER
PRINT LINE 144-CHARACTER
SELECTIVE CHARACTER SET
EACH SEGMENT
SY NCHRONOUS CLOCK
TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION
E8CDIC TRANSPARENCY
AREA STATION
AREA STATION
DIGITAL DEVICE READ IN
EXT ALARM CONTACTS
1 ~O .00
35.00
512.00
5~2. 00
952.00
5"*2.00
152e.OC
91~,8.CC
9li8.CO
762.0C
952.0e
1 cje .00
57:2.0-0
762.0C
87S5.0C
8755.0C
91:8.CC
2585.00
222(.OC
222'C.OO
190.0C
91'8.CO
'2.50
3324,C
.co
36930.0C
2771,0.00
2584C.00
572.0C
38:1. CO
52C .00
535.00
58C.OC
52'e .OC
55!C .CC
58.0.00
952.00
572.00
91',8.CC
802.00
314,5.0C
166C.OC
91,8.0C
25.0C
918.0C
95~.OO
572.00
714¢ .00
588e.cc
434.CC
43:4.00
SOME PRICES HAV= CHANGED E=FECTIVE JANUARY, 1.
5.00
38.00SUC
16.00
16.00
27.00
16.00
42.00
27.CO
27.CO
21.00
27.00
5.00
16.00
21.00
248.00
248.(0
27.00
73.00
63.00
63.00
5.00
27.00
PURCHASE ONLY
983.00
1 :l9C .00
813.00
763.00
16.00
10.00
520.00SUC
535.00SUC
58C.OOSUC
520.00SUC
55J.OOSUC
58C.OOSUC
28.00
16.00
28.CO
32.00
91.00
48.00
28.CO
25.00SUC
28.00
28.00
16.00
2C5.00
151.00
10.00
10.00
1979.
1.50
NC
2.CO
2.ce
C.5C
1.0e
2.CC
2.50
5.50
6.(,C
1.5C
NC
I.CO
2.0(>
30.50
30.50
6.50
1 C'. 50
1.5C1.5C
C.50
6.50
NC
325.(10
392.CC
301.C'C
271.CO
1 .50
1.5('
NC
44.00
16.00
44.0e
31.(lC
9C .cc
82.0C
515.CC
39.0C
le9.(lC
109.(10
155.0C
45 A 2
8
8
2
49.0{l
39.(lC
412.00
412.(lC'
135.0C
187.00
177.0{l
177.00
l13.0C
125.(lC
45
45
45
A5
45
A5
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
F3
8
8
8'>A
8
8
8
8
8
8
B
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
203. CC'
174.00
35
35
35
35
35
35
ll1.0C
144.00
157.0C
115.0t'
436.0C
855.0C
lI5.(lt;
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
196.CC
38.0{l
2(13.00
35 8 2 8
35 8 2 8
35 8 2 8
45.~~
A
A
A
A
A
2
2
2
2
2
8
8
8
8
B
A
A
A
A
A
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
B
B
8
8
9
B
8
B
8
8
R
8
8
8
8
0\
A
A
A
0\
A
A
A
A
A
8 2 8
8 2 8
B 2 8
B 2
B
8
2
8
~
2 8
2
2
8
2
8
2
8
2
8
8
2
2
8
B
8
B
B
B
I'IC
NC
NC
NC
NC
1.0e
2.5C
3.CC
1 .50
8.5e
3.5C
4.CCNC
1.5(-
2.50
l.ee
56.50
56.5('
I.CO
I.CO
41:'
B 2 A
8 2 B
~
F3 2
8
8
8
8
8
8
B 2 8
R 2 B
B
8
B
8
2
2
C 1
72. CO
189.00
40 C
4C C
4C C
REFER TO NOTIC= TO CUSTOMER DATED SEPTEM8ER 26,
1978.
-24
B 2
8
8
B
8
8
8
8
1
1
8
8
8 1
B 2
8
8
s-
<:=
11/('1/78
DALE
MACH MDL/
_IyeE_E~~T
2791
3874
3875
799C
7991
8cnc
80~C
2792
2793
279~
2797
2798
2841
8295
8296
001
002
001
369"
3874
3875
555C
5'551
5552
799':)
7991
8e5C
8296
871C
0('1
001
OCI
OCI
001
H24
1024
4385
____
PURCHASE
QS?~81eIIQ~
___________________
EDR RECEIVE
EDR SEND
2798 ATTACHMENT 8ASIC
2798 ATTACHMENT ADDITIONAL
1035 ATTACHMENT
lC53 ATTACHMENT
2795/2796 ATTACHMENT -BASIC
2795/2796 ATTACHMENT ~ADDTL
REMOTE COMMN CONTROLLER
REMOTE COMMN CONTROLLER'
AREA STAT I ON
EXT ALAR~ CONTACTS
EXTEND DIST REPEATER qEC
EXTEND DIST REPEATER SEND
PULSE COUNTERS 8ASIC
PULSE COUNTERS ADDL
PULSE COUNTER EXPANSION
2798 ATTACHMENT 8ASIC
2798 ATTACHMENT ADDITIONAL
1('53 ATTACHMENT
2795/2796 ATTACHMENT -ADDTL
VISUAL READOUT
DATA E"ITRY UNI T
DATA_ ENTRY UNIT
DI SPLAY UNIT
STORAGE CONTROL
ADDITIONAL STORAGE
FILE SCAN
eBIC~
MONTHLY
_____
520.00
52C. CO
2075.0C
832.CC
65C. or
841.0C
1(,45.CC
65C .oc,
l071C.Oq
1: 7'lC .OC
5255.CC
434.0C
52C .0(,
520.CO
"'390C.CO
694.00
164C.OC
2C 75. 00
832.00
841.0C
65C .00
130'C.OC
986.00
199C.OC
31 40 • 00
24460~OC
718C.OC
BE~IA~
2848
OCI
002
003
021
(;22
3355
'3356
REMOTE SWITCH
~TTACHMENT
7302 ATTACHMENT
16.00
33.00
28.00
52.00
96.00
589.00
223.0C
38.00
NC
NC
381.0C
10.00
NC
NC
899C.C 0
278.JO
23('3 ATTACHMENT
16960.0C
447.00
ATTACHMENT
629C.OC
195.0C
381(.00
110.CO
2321
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH
DI SPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
ADAPTER FOR MODEL
ADAPTER I=OR MODEL 2
1663C.00
17770.00
19020.0C·
34620.00
37CH.OC
1585.0C
3175.00
__
Ig~~
U/L
___ ___
~
TERM
~~§
4t'4.00
437.0C
471 .00
813.00
869.00
43.0J
89.00
SOME PRICES HAVE CHANGED EI=FECTIVE JANUARY 1. 1979.
R~FER
-25-
PUR M P W
3.0('
~.oC'
14.0C
4.5C
2.CC
1.50
2.5C
1.50
82.5C
82.5('
19.00
14.5C
1.ee
4.5C
71.(('
12.(IC
18E.OO
4.C(
1 ('.9. CC
1.CC
1.0C
1.CO
7.5C
9.00
18.50
7C .5C
111.0C
51.00
77.00
1.5C
1.5e
2.50
2.50
12
24
12
24
12
24
9.:'0
8.ce-
12
24
256.(0
234.00
411.CO
375.CO
179.00
164.CC
1(1.,)0
92.00
12
24
12
24
12
24
12
24
o
(
c
c
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
2'5/'5
25/5
96.0C'
9f.CC
188.00
109.CO
72.CO
111.C·G
99.C'C
51.0C
189.CO
96.00
96.0('
362.0C
71.00
('.5C
542.CO
495.CO
205.00
187.CO
35.0C
32.CO
R L
______ ~~M~ ___ El~ ___ geI_§_~_C __ e_~
21.00'
1255.0(
ISCLATIO"l. CONTROL UNIT
RECORD OVERI=LOW
b~A~g
13.00
14.00
56.00
21.00
16.00
21.00
28.00
16.00
308.CC
3C8.00
135.00
1C'.00
13.00
14.00
99.CO
17.00
41.CO
56.00
21.00
4~85
4700
6118
6118
6148
795C
7950
8077
8077
8079
8079
810C
810C
MONTHLY BASE
____
4<:' C
4C C
4C C
40 C
4C' C 1
B
8
A
R
B
40
4(1
C
C
B
B
4C
1>.5
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
1>.5
45
45
45
45
45
45
C
0
B
B
D
B
1
B
B
B
B
B
B
8 2
1'3 2
B 2
R 2
2
B 2
E\
B 2
B 2
B
8 1
R 2
8 2
B 2
8
B
B
8
8
B 2
8
B
B
B
B
B
8
8
8
8
B
B
8
8
2
A
1
8
P
8
8
~
1
EI
B
B
EI
9
B
B
8
A
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
8
8
3
8
8
911.0e
45 8
~
B
A
34.C(
45
3
B
A 1
l.oe
34.0C
45 8 3
8
A 1
NC
3.50
191.0t::
45 A 3
E\
A 1
45 B
~
E'
.1\
191. CC
45 8 3
8
A 1
575.CC
45 8
8
A 1
8
NC
C
e
C
r.
C
o
c
c
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
9.CC
2.00
3
39.C'C
50 C 3 B
39.5C
50
40.CO
47.00
47.00
'50
:?oe
5.5e
1e4.C'C
152.0('
1
EI
B
'8 1
5C C 3 9
B 1
8 1
8 1
C 3
C 3
8
50 C 3 8
50 C 3 8
50 C 3 8
TO NOTICE TO CUSTOMEP DATED SEPTEM8ER 26. 1978.
EI
e
1
11 /C 1 /78
MDL/
~l~~_Eg~T
2848 3357
3368
3369
3857
3858
3859
3868
39(,1
4700
4787
534C
5341
7927
7928
7938
3262
AO 1
1'301
...CD
...
o
'0
Q.
C
(')
CD
Q.
==
=r
==
o
S.
==
3:
S'
j
'0
CD
3c;;'
(/)
0'
,?
5940
'5943
5944
5945
5946
5947
5948
5949
5962
5963
5964
3271
001
OC2
1550
3250
782C
7821
3272 001
C02
3250
3274
CO 1
18C1
3622
3625
3627
3701
565C
5651
6302
6901
6902
69C3
7802
PUR~HASE
MONTHLY
MONTHLY
~ASE
U/L
PU.R M P W
TERM
R L
____ Q~§~RI~!l£~ ___________________ eEl~~ _____ a~~IA~ ____ b~A~~ __ L~B~ ___ ~ ___ ~~~ ______ ~~~~ ___ El~ ___ QeI_~_C_~ __ e_~
DISPLAy ADAPTER FOR M~DEL 3
DISPLAY ADAPTER-FOR MODEL 21
DISPLAY ADAPTER-FOR MrDE~ 22
EX~ANSION UNIT-ALL MODELS
EXPANSION UNIT-~ODELS 1,2
EXPANSION UNIT-MODELS 1,2.3
EXPANSION UNIT-MODELS 21.22
DISPLAY CNTL
ISOLATION. CONTROL UNIT
LINE ADOqESSING
NON-DESTRUCTIVE CURSOP
N3N-DESTPUCTIVE CUPSOR ADAP
1053 ADAPTER FOR MODEL 1.2
1053 ADAPTER FOR MODEL 3
lC53 ADAPTER-eOR MODEL 21.22
PRINTER 65C LPM BOLT-ON
PRINTFR 650 LPM STAND-ALONE
PRINT BELT 48 CHAQ
PRINT BELT 60 CHAR S/38 SPE
PRINT BELT 64 CHAR EBCDIC
PRINT BELT 64 CHAq ASCII
PRINT BELT 64 CHAq.E8CDIC
PRINT BS-T 64 CHAR ASCII
PRI~T BELT 96 CHAR EBCDIC
PRINT BELT 96 CHAR AS~II
PRINT BELT 64 CHAR MULTI
PRINT BELT 96 CHAR MULTI
PRINT BELT.188 CHAR MULTI
CONTROL UNIT REMOTE ATT
CONTROL UNIT qEMOTE ATT
COpy
DEVICE ADAPTEq
1200 BPS
4800 BPS
CONTROL UNIT LOCAL ATT
CONTROL UNIT LOCAL ATT
DEVICE ADAPTER
CONTROL UNIT
cnNTROL STORAGE EXPANSION
EXTENDED FUNCTION STORAGE
STORAGE
STORAGE
EXTERNAL MODEM INTERFACE
ODS ADAPTER PT-TO-PT
DDS ADAPTER MULTIPOINT
COMMON COMMUNICATIONS ADAPT
TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE At
TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE A2
TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE A3
TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE 81
3990.CO 277C.00
5550.00
194C.CC
2385.00
1940.00
2305.CC
1755.0C
NC
476.CC
455.0~
227.0C
1585.CC
1585.0C
48SC.OC
140cc.ce
1400C.CG
1 70. CC
1 7C. OC
1 7C. CO
17C.OC
17C .OC
1 7C. OC
1 7C. OC
1 70.00
1 7C. 00
170. C 0
170.0C
4735.00
524C.00
NC
779.CO
NC
145.0(5465. DC
597C .00
779.CC·
13190.0C
1055.0C
11 70. C 0
11 7C .0 C
1170.00
40C.C(
84C.OC
84C .OC
45C.00
1215.00
1215.00
1215.0C
1300.00
NOTE: SOME PRICES HAV= CHANGED EFFECTIVE JANUARY 1,
112 .C 0
65.00
129.00
49.00
61.0C
49.e 0
54.00
49.00
NC
tr).oo
10.00
5.00
43.00
43.00
114.00
411.00
411.CC
PURCHAS E
PURCHASE
PURCHASE
PURCHASE
PURCHASE
PURCHASE
PURCHASE
PURCHASE
PURCHASE
PURCHASE
PURCHASE
155.00
169.('0
NC
51.0C
NC
4.00
179. CO
193.00
51.CO
344.00
31 .OC
58.CO
58.00
58.CC
12.00
24.CO
24.CC
12.CO
32.00
2('1.00
192.CC
255.00
NC
NC
NC
1.50
NC
43.CC
98.('('
98.0C
49.oe
2.00
1.5C
7C.CO
7C.OC
1.CO
4.5(
147.~C
4.5C
194.0C
7.(\('
fl8C. C'C
27.00
27.0C
32.00
8
C 3 8
C 3 B
C :3 ~
C
3
B
C 3 B
5( C 3 B
45 D
B
45 D
8
A
A
5
25/5
('.5C
6('
B
B
e
1
B 1
8
8
l!:
B 1
I=l 1
8
1'3
B
B
B
B
1
D 2
D 2'
B
8 2
A
B
2
A
B
8
2
8
2
B 2
1
NC
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
O.5C
6('
17.5C'
6(\
A
A
B
B
:::"9.CC
6C A
60 A
55 A
B
B
B
55
8
~
.50
7~.OC
5.5C
1:: .OC
10.0C
10.0C
4.0e
2.0C
2.('C
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.5C
5.te
1979. REFER TO NOTICE TO CUSTOMER DATED SEPTEMBER 26,
-26
C 3
C 3 B
6('
24
32.00
8
60
5
NC
1 C .00
27.00
B
~
1 7 .5C
19.50
NC
43.C 0
10.CO
20.00
20.00
C :
25/5
25/5
24
24
12C.CO
3 B
3 B
3 B
::3 B
C
5
5
3. C 0
50
50
5C
5C
5C
C
C
C
C
1 2:: • C 0
24
24
152.C')
164.CO
43.CO
293.00
26.CC
49.CO
49.CO
49.C 0
~8.C('l
5(,5C
5C
5('
5C
50
50
5('
25/5
25/5
350.CO
350.C':
ONLY
ONLY
ONLY
ONLY
ONL Y
ONLY
ONLY
ONLY
ONLY
ONLY
ONLY
132.CO
144.CC
32.00
38.00
6.5C
3.0C
4.0C
NC
A
8 2
B
2
8 2
55 A
55 A
55 A
B
B
B 2
B 2
B 2
B
B 2
55
8
8 2
55 A
55 A
B
B
55
55
B
B
B
B
B
B
8
B
B
A
A
A
55 A
B
55
A
B
55 A
B
1978.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
11/01/78
MAC~
MDL/
_IY~E_E~~T
3274 78('3
7804
78('5
~275
eel
('02
1 C'9'1"\
3440
4600
463C
4631
4f..32
4633
4634
4635
4636
469C
55('C
oJ
C
o
aCD
"'CD"
"'o"
"a.
c(')
CD
a.
!,
~
o
S.
:e
55Cl
555C
f-340
6350
7820
7821
ACC.
3276
002
lQ09
109(1
3255
3:
3256
3257
37Cl
4621
4622
4623
;;:,
"3
CD
m'
(/)
4624
0'
?
4627
4628
469('
55f)0
6301
63C2
634C
635C
ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
Ace.
ACC.
ACC.
NOTE:
PURCHASE
MONTHLY
MONTHLY
BAS~
U/L
TEPM
110C.0(,
32.0C
32.00
32.00
113.00
1::'16.00
4.0C
27.0:)
27.CO
27.C C
96. C C
116.:C
24
5
5
25/5
5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
PUR M P W
R L
____ Q~~~81eIIQ~ ___________________ e~1~~ _____ 8~~I~6 ____ 6~~~~ __ :~~~ ___ ~ ___ ~~§ ______ ~~~~ ___ El~ ___ Q~I_§_~_£ __ e_~
TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE B2
TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE B3
TERMlNAL ADAPTER TYP~ B4
DISPLAY STATION
DISPLAY STATION
AUDIBLE ALARM
DIAL IBM ASSIGND TERMNL IDEN
OPER IDENT CARD RDR
KEYBD 66 K~Y EBCDIC TYPEWRTR
KEYBOARD
KEYBD 78 KEY OPFRATOR CONSL
KEYAD 78 KEY EBCDIC TyoEWRTR
KEYBD 66 KEY ASCII TYPEWRTR
KEYBD 78 K~Y ASCII TYOEWRTR
66 KEY FBCDIC KEYBOARD
KEYBOARD NUMERIC LOCK
LINE ADAPTR
LINE ADAPTR WITH AUTO-ANSWER
PRINTER ADAPTEFI
SECURITY LOCK
SELECTOP LIGHT-PEN
1200 BPS
48CO- BPS
ADDIT IONAL KEY
CONTROL UNIT DISPLAY STATION
ADDRESS KEY LOCK
AUDIBLE ALARM
TERMINAL ADAPTER N~.
TERMINAL ADAPTER NO. 2
TEPMINAL ADAPTER NO. 3
EXTERNAL MODEM INTERFACE
75 KEY TYPEWRITER KEYBOARD
7~ KEY DATA ~NTRY KEYBOARD
75 KEY DATA ENTRY KEYBOARD
75 KEY ASC 11 TYP~WRITER KEY
87 KEY EBCDIC TYPE KEYBOARD
87 KEY ASC 11 TYPE KEYBOARD
KEYBOARD NUMERIC LOCK
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM NS
COMM F~ATURE W/BUS MACH Cl
COMM FEATURE W/O BUS MACH Cl
SECURITY KEYLOCK
SELECTOR LIGHT PEN
0323921 COAX CABLE
1830818 STATION PROTECTOR CA
1833104 STATION PROTECTOR ER
1833106 STATION PROTECTOR AT
1833108 CA8LE ASSEM OUTDOOR
1836418CONNECTOR KIT
1836419 CONNECTOR KIT
11ce.oc
l1CC.Ct;
4005.0C
4735.CC
145.0C
328.0C
437.C(' ,
52C.00
52C.OC
10 Ie .OC
s.oc
13.0C
13.00
13.C'';
3. C C
7. C' 0
1 1 • L. ~
11.C(,
32.CC
11 • CO
27. C C
869. C(,
28.:;0
24.C.J
52( • VC
869.CC
522.CC
NC
535.oe
714.00
NC
35.C0
13. CO
1 1. C ~
24.(,C
728.0C
NC
145.C'C
2.5C
6570.00
6C .oe
9C .0 Co
63C.OC
6 3C .0 C
63C.OO
4CC'.00
495.0C
495.CC
495.CC
495.CC
675.0C
675.00
NC
668.0C
670.0 C
45(.(;0
35.0C
585.00
RPQ
48.75
15.8C
16.7C
RPQ
3.90
6.35
SOME PRICES HAVE CHANGED EFFECTIVE JANUARY
1~
(,4
24
24
24
24
5
5
5
2~/5
3.(C
::;.co
"35
AlB
B 2
5=
3.0C
55
14.5C
6C
B 2
A 2
R 2
21.00
r:.5C
6C
60
A
A
A
A
2lJ.
5
25/5
1. C'C
6('
24
24
24
5
5
3. '5C
5.5e
6.5C.
lS.OC
9. C C:
6C
60
6C
?4
'3
25/'3
25/5
25/5
2= /"3
24
24
5
25/5
5
25/5
5
5.5C
9.CC
P,
8
R
B
B
B
B 2
AlP
AlB
B 2
1
1
A
A
A
B
2
2
1
~
B
!
'3
B 2
B ~
Fe AlB
2
ISC
A.
1
P
Bell
6("
A
1
8
8
i
6C'
AIR
'3
21
28.0(,
15.':J
NC
16.CO
21.CC
I'JC
!'IC
14.(')
18.': 0
3.CC
6('
A
3.5C
Fe
AlB
B
P
2
2
NC':
"IC
Ne
NC
1.50
6C
AIR
P
2
6(1 AlB
R
2
55 A 1 B
B
2
13. CO
35.(.OSUC
24.00
20.CC
NC
NC
4.CO
3.CC
PURCHASE ONLY
172.~O
146.CO
6C.COSUC
2.00
2.GO
16.0C
14.CO
16.CO
14.C 0
16.CO
14.0~
1 I). (: C
12.00
13.00
11. C C
13.0C
1l.OC
13.00
11. C C
13.CO
11 .c C
18.00
15. ~ 0
18.0C
15.0C
NC
NC
19.00
16. CO
19.CO
16. C C
12.00
10.ce·
35.0~SUC
NA
15.CO
13.CO
PURCHASE ONLY
PURCHASE ONLY
PURCHASE ONLY
PURCHASE ONLY
0UPCHAS E ONLY
PURCHASE ONLY
PURCHASE ONLY
24
5
25/5
24
24
5
5
25/5
25/5
?4
5
25/5
6.5:'
8
N(
24
5
25/5
~.5C
NC
33.0C
NC
NC
24
5
25/5
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
25/'5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
24
24
24
5
5
5
25/5
5.~C
55
B
R 2
25/5
::".oc
24
5
25/5
2.5C
NC
(1.5(1
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
B
B
B 2
2~/5
55 A
55 A
55
B
8 2
5
1.5C
1.5C
1.5C
4.CC
2.5C
3.5C
3.50
2'.5C
3.CC
3.0C
NC
55
A
B
B 2
2
55 A
B
55 AIR
55 A
B
'55 A ! B
B
B
£'\
q
2
2
55
A
2
8
B
2
55 A
B
55
55
55
A
A
D
B
B
B
R
B
B
B
2
2
2
2
55 D
B
B 2
A
A
1979. REFER TO NOTICE TO CUSTOMER DATED SEPTEMRER 26, 1978.
-27-
1
1
8 2
DATE
MAC~
MDL/
_IyeE_E~AT
3276 ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
3277 001
002
1090
4600
463C'
4631
4632
4633
4634
4635
4636
4690
6340
6350
ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
ACC.
3278 002
1090
1720
4621
4622
4623
4624
4627
4628
4690
4999
6340
6~50
ACC.
ACC.
____
PURCHASE
Q~~~BleIlQ~
2577672
2577741
2621414
5252643
5252750
5252772
5252899
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
___________________
CA9LE ASSEM INDOOR
ADDITIONAL KEY
MQDIFICATION KIT
ADAPTER
COAX WIRE
STATION PRCT~CTOR CR
STA~ION PROTECTOR GA
STATION
STATION
AUDIBL~ ALARM
OP~R IDENT CARD READER
KYBD 66 KEY EBCDIC TYPEWRTR
KYBD 66 KEY EBCDIC DATA ENTR
KYBD 78 K~Y OPERATOR CONSOL
KYBD 78 KEY EBCDIC TYPEWRTR
KYBD 66 KEY ASCII TYPEWRTR
KYBD 78 KEY ASCII TYPEWRTR
66 KEY EBCDIC KEY80ARD
KYBD NUMER I CLOCK
SECURITY 'KEYLOCK
SELECTOR LIGHT-PEN
0323921 COAX CABLE
1830818 STATION PROTFCTOR GA
18331C4 STATION PROTECTOR CR
1833106 STATION· PROTECTOR AT
1833108 CABLE ASSEM OUTDOOR
1836418 CONNECTOR KIT
1836419 CONNECTOR KIT
2577672 CABLE ASSEM INDOOR
2577741 ADDITIONAL KEY
2621414 MODIFICATION KIT
5252643 ADAPTER
5252750 COAX WIRE
5252772 STATION PROTECTOR CR
5252899 STATION PROTECTOR GA
DISPLAY STATION
AUDIBLE ALARM
SWITCH CONTROL UNIT
75 KEY TYPEWRIT~R KEYBOARD
75 K~Y DATA ENTRY KEYBOARD
75 KEY DATA ENTRY KEYBOARD
75 KEY ASC 11 TYPE KEYBOARD
87 KEY EBCIDIC TYPE KEYBOARD
87 KEY ASC 11 TYPE KEYBOARD
KEYBOARD NUMERIC LOCK
MAGNETIC READER CONTROL
SECURITY KEYLOCK
SELECTOR LIGHT PEN
0323921 COAX WIRE
1830818 STATION PROTECTOR GA
eBI~g
MONTHLY
_____
RPQ
2.50
5.30
2.65
RPQ
2.1C
8.4C
247C .CO
3200.00
145. (lC
437.00
520.00
52C.OO
101C.OC
869.00
52C.OC
869.0C
522.0C
NC
35.00
728.00
RPQ
48.75
15.80
16.70
RPQ
3.90
6.35
RPQ
2.50
5.3C
2.65
RPQ
2.10
8.40
234C.00
9C .CC
E~~IAb
PURCHASE
PURCHASE
PURCHAS E
PURCHASE
PURCHASE
PURCHASE
PURCHASE
71.0C
1'3.00
4.oe·
13.00
13.00
13.00
32.00
28.00
13.CO
28.00
15.0C
MONTHLY BASE
____
b~A~g
__
ONLY
ONLY
ONLY
ONLY
ONLY
ONLY
ONLY
60.CO
88.00
3.00
11 .c 0
11.00
11 .C 0
27.0C
24.CO
11 .00
24.CO
13.C 0
NC
NC
35.00SUC
24.00
20.00
PURCHASE ONLY
PURCHASE ONLY
PURCHASE ONLY
PURCHASE ONLY
PURCHASE ONLY
PUR CHAS E ONL Y
PURCHASE ONLY
PURCHASE ONLY
PUR CHA.S E ONLY
RURCHASE ONLY
PURCHAS E ONL Y
PURCHASE ONLY
PURCHAS E ONL Y
PURCHASE ONLY
61.CO
52.C C
2.00
2.C 0
Ig8~
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
25/5
25/5
9.(C
19.5C
25/5
0.50
25/5
25/5
3.5C
25/5
25/5
25/5
5. C'O
6.CO
14.00
8.5e
5
25/5
24
24
5
5
25/5
12.CO
25/5
5.CC
8.50
6.CO
NC
NC
1.5('
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
5
25/5
NC
NC
25/5
25/5
3.5C
25/5
25/5
25/5
25/5
3.00
3.00
24
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
24
5
25/5
4.5{'
13.00
1 1 .C 0
24
675.00
18.00
675.00
NC
405.0C
18.CO
24
24
NC
15.00
15.00
NC
11 .00
9.0C
NOTE: SOME PRICES HAVE CHANGED EFFECTIVE JANUARY 1.
5
24
24
585.CO
PPQ
48.75
~~M~
5
5
11. C 0
35.00SUC
NA
15.00
13.CO
PURCHASE ONLY
PURCHASE ONLY
______
25/5
25/5
25/5
11. C C
35.CC
~~§
___
EI~
___
PUR M P W
R L
QeI_~_~_~
e_~
__
NC
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
.c C
TERM
"IC
5.00
13.00
13.0e
13.00
4.00
~
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
18C.00
495.0C
495.0C
495.0C
495.00
11
U/L
___ ___
11/01/78
25/5
2.50
3.5(
2.50
A
B
A
B
60
6C'
60
60
6C
60
60
AlB
AlB
AlB
60
A
A
60 A
6C A
60 A
B
8
A
B
A
B
1:1
B
B
B
B
B
2
2
2
2
2
8
2
B 2
B 2
B 2
B 2
e
2
60 AlB
B 2
55 S
B
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
D
D
D
2
2
2
2
2
2
D
B
D
D
0
B
B
B
55 D
B
B 2
B 2
55
0
B
B
55
0
B
B 2
B 2
NC
2
NC
24
5
25/5
C.5C
NC
NC
1979. REFER TO NOTICE TO CUSTOMER DATED SEPTEMBER 26. 1978.
- --=
----=
==--=
- ---_.---. General SY$~ Division.........Machines
--.....
"M1231..1
.
April 78
- ..•...
c~annel
1231 OPTICAL MARK PAGE READER
system '" each requires a
Purpose: Reads marked data from 8-1/2" x 11" data sheets
directly into an 1130, 1401 (except A or H Models), 1440 (except
with 1441 Model A2), 1460 or S/360 Model 22, 25,30, 40 or
50.
S/360 Model 25--speGial feature on 2025: Multiplexer Channel, or Selector Channel ... see 2025.
Model 1-For use with 1130, 1401, 1440 or 1460.
Model N1-For use with S/360 Model 22, 25, 30,40 or 50.
Model Changes: Cannot be made in the field.
Highlights: Data sheets are fed from a pneumatically controlled
hopper with a 600-sheet capacity, through the reading area, and
directed to one of two stackers. The main stacker has a capacity
of 600 sheets. Sheets with detected errors are directed to a
separate stacker with a 50-sheet capacity. Documents are
stacked in reverse sequence in both stackers.
Data to be read can be placed on data sheets with ordinary #2
pencils, or by a 1403 Printer, a 1443 Printer Model 1 or 2 with a
52- or 63-character type bar with arrangement A, H or K, or a
1443 Model N 1 or 2203 Model A 1 with a 52- or 63-character
type bar, or a 5203 Printer. The 1403/5203 print chain or train,
or 1443/2203 type bar must be equipped with an enlarged dash
which replaces the standard dash '" see "Type Catalog."
113O--documents are read under computer program control
with speeds varying up to 2,000 documents/hour. The 1231
mode switch must be set to "Demand." Data is transferred to
the 1131 one word at a time on a fully buffered interrupt basis.
Master mark data is only transferred to the 1131 during reading
of the master mark sheet. The 1231 Model 1 can be located up
to 25 feet from the 1131.
S/36O--documents can be read at a maximum constant rate of
2,000 documents/hour. Actual throughput depends upon computer programming. Sheets are fed upon command from the
computer. Data is transferred to the processor by operation of
the ch.annel to which the 1231 is attached.
Data Transmission
1130 Marks are read from the data sheet and stored in a
sonic delay line. storage. As soon as the first word of data
has been loaded on the delay line, data transfer may begin.
An interrupt recognized by the 1130 allows the 1130 to read
the 1231. Fully buffered transmission of data, one word at a
time, occurs. The 1231 recognizes when the last data word
from the sheet has been transferred and signals the 1130.
$/360 Marks read from the data sheet are stored in the 1231
Model N 1 by word and are transferred to the processor by
operation of the channel to which the 1231 is attached,
Data Sheets: 8-1 /2" x 11" ... up to 1,000 mark positions printed on a side ... 2,000 positions when printed on both sides.
Preprinted mark positions are printed in rows of 20 positions.
Each row is divided into two 10-position groups. Each 10position group is called a word for the purpose of defining a
marking area. Each word can be divided into two 5-position
segments. Data words and segments can be grouped in various
combinations to form fields for recording the source data.
Prerequisites: For 1130 An Expansion Adapter (#3854) and
1231 Attachment (#8034) on the 1131 Central Processing Unit
... Asynchronous Mode (#1264) is also required on the 1231
itself. See "Special Features."
(Note: A 1231 cannot be installed with an 1131 Model
1A, 1 B, 4A or 4B ... in addition, the 1130 system must
have 208 V or 230 V power. See "Voltage" under
"Specify" for the 1131.)
For S/360--up to four 1231 Model N1s can be attached to a
control unit position.
S/360 Model 22, 30. 40. 50 Standard multiplexer channel, or
Selector Channels (special features, except on 2022 one selector
channel' is standa'rd) ... see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050.
(Note: If the 1231 is attached to a multiplexer channel, special
consideration must be given to priority.)
Limitations: 1130--if a 2501 Model A1 or A2 is used in a system, a 1231 cannot be attached ... a 1231 can be attached only
to a 208 V or 230 V system.
S/360 Model 25. 30 Operation of 1231's is not included under
1401/1440/1460 Compatibility Features.
S/360 Model 40 Operation of 1231s is not included under the
1401/1460 Compatibility Feature (#4457).
Bibliography: 1130--GA26-5916
Metering: I/O Unit (Online)
Specify:
1) Voltage: (AC, 1-phase, 60 cycle): #9902 for 208 V, or #9904
for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
2) Color (Model N1 only): #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow,
#9043 for blue, or #9045 for gray or #9046 for white.
3) Kickstrips: #9431 ... field installable. When kickstrips are
installed, the open area under the machine is enclosed. This
reduces the amount of "toe-room" for the operator and may
be inconvenient to customer if power outlet is located under
machine.
4) Use with 1130: Requires Asynchronous Mode (#1264) on
the Model 1 ... see "Special Features."
5) Isolation Feature: May be required on units shipped prior to
December 29, 1967 ... see "Special Features."
Special Features
Asynchronous Mode (#1264): [Model 1 only] Modifies the
Model 1 for operation with an 1131. Data is transferred to the
CPU one word at a time, instead of all the words from a data
sheet in one burst. Master mark data is identified and transferred to the 1131 only once per master mark sheet. Maximum:
One. Prerequisite: 1231 Attachment (#8034) on the 1131 .
Isolation. Control Unit (#4700): [For field installation only on
units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... standard on units
shipped after that] To turn power on or off on the 1231 without
generating spurious signals. Thus, a CPU program, if it can be
logically disconnected from the system before power is turned
off, can cOfltinue operating. Prerequisite: Since in all cases
there are compatible EC level requirements, the concurrence of
the branch CE manager is required for any order for this feature.
Master Mark (#5045): A master data sheet, containing up to 10
words of marked data, can be read by the 1231. ihe master
data sheet is identified by a special preprinted mark and contains data that is to be associated with all subsequent.,.
sheetsuntil.a new master sheet is read. Th'us, data commo,
.Not to be reproduced without written permissiofl
---=-~-:: General Systems Division-Machines
- -- ---
-=
~
-~-.-
series of data sheets need be r~orded"'aridread only once.
When used with a 1401, 1440 or 1460 1 the 1231 Modell stores
master mark data on the sqnic delay line and transfers the data
with the data for each subsequent detail sheet .,. in an 1130
system, the 1231 Model 1 stores master mark data on the sonic
delay line and transfers it to the 1130 only one ,time, during the
reading of the master mark sheet ... when used with a S/360,
the 1231 Model N1 transfers master mark data only one time, as
it is being read from the master mark sheet.
Not to be reproduced without written permissigr
M1231.2
April 78
-- --=- -'-.--------
-----
M1232.1
..
=-~. General Systems Division-Machines
April 78
-~-.-
1232 OPTICAL MARK PAGE READER
Special Features
Purpose: Reads marked data from 8-1 /2" x 11" data sheets
into a 534 Card Punch Model 3 for punched card output.
Master Mark (#5045): A niasterdata sheet, containing up to 10
words of marked data, can be read and stored on the delay line
for punching into output cards. The information read from the
master sheet is retained on the delay line until a new master
data sheet is read. The master data sheet is identified by a
special preprinted mark and contains data that is to be associated with all subsequent data sheets until a new master sheet is
read. Thus, data common to a series of data sheets need be
recorded and read only once.
Prerequisite: A 534 Card Punch Model 3.
Highlights: Data sheets are fed from a pneumatically controlled
hopper with a 600-sheet capacity, through the reading area, and
directed to one of two stackers. The main stacker has a capacity
of 600 sheets. Sheets with detected errors are directed to a
separate stacker with a 50-sheet capacity. Documents are
stacked in reverse sequence in both stackers.
Data to be read can be placed on the data sheets with ordinary
#2 pencils, or by a 1403 Printer, a 1443 Printer Model 1 or 2
with a 52- or 63-character type bar with arrangement A, H or K,
or a 1443 Model N 1 or 2203 Model A 1 with a 52- or 63character type bar, or a 5203 Printer. The 1403/5203 print chain
or train or 1443/2203 type bar must be equipped with an enlarged dash which replaces the standard dash '" see "Type
Catalog."
A 534 Card Punch Model 3 is cable-connected to the 1232 to
punch data read from the data sheets. All marks read from a
document are stored as bits in a sonic delay line storage unit
until transferred to the card punch. The duplicating feature of
the card punch can be used to duplicate common information
into a group of cards. When not used with the 1232, the 534
can be used as an· independent card punch ... see 534 for details.
Documents are read at varying rates of speed, depending upon
how many card columns are punched into a card. Throughput
ranges from approximately 850 to 2,000 documents/hour.
Data Sheets: 8-1/2" x 11" ... up to 1,000 mark positions printed on a side ... 2,000 positions when printed on both sides.
Preprinted mark positions are printed in rows of 20 positions.
Each row is divided into two 10-position groups. Each 10positon group is called a word for the purpose of defining a
marking area. If Segmented Word (#6405) is installed, each
word can be divided into two 5-position segments. Data words
and segments can be grouped into various combinations to form
fields for recording the source data.
Multiple Spread Card (#5262): For punching up to four cards
for each data sheet read. Each card will be numbered sequentially by a punch in column 1. Any or all of the following can. be
punched into each card: master sheet data [if Master Mark
(#5045) is installed] ... page or identification data '" and a portion of the detail data from the data sheet in spread card form.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Unit Record Card (#8580).
Segmented Word (#6405): For punching data from a word or
segment into a single card column. A two-position mode switch'
marked "Segment" and "Word" controls mode of operation.
When set to "Segment", marks in positions 0 through 4 are
punched in one card column and marks in positions 5 through 9
are punched in the next card column. When set to "Word",
marks in positions 0 through 9 are punched in one card column.
Unit Record Card (#8580): For punching a separate card for
each field on the data sheet. Cards will be punched only for
those fields containing marks. Each card can contain: master
sheet data [if Master Mark (#5045) is installed] ... identification
data (page number, order number, salesman's number, etc.) ...
field number (to identify item) ... and marked detail data
(quantity, etc.). Limitation: Cannot be installed with Multiple
Spread Card (#5262).
Document Inspection Gauge: One is furnished for each 1230,
1231 or 1232 as a Customer Engineering tool. Used for checking printing alignment on data sheets. Additional gauges
(628848) are $20 each.
Manuals: See IBM Marketing Publications KWIC Index, G3201621.
Specify:
1) Voltage: (115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 cycle): #9880 for locking
plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
2) Kickstrips: #9431 field installable. When kickstrips are installed, the open area under the machine is enclosed. This
reduces the amount of "toe-room" for the operator and may
be inconvenient to customer if power outlet is located under
machine.
rtc?t to be reproduced without written permission.
-- ----~--= General Systems Division-Machines
------_.-
M1255.1
-.=-=
..
1255 MAGNETIC CHARACTER 1U!ADER"
Purpose: Sorts documen,ts, used in banking and other applications, meeting specifications under "Highlights" below. Available as a stand-alone sorter, or with an appropriate attachment
feature, reads magnetic character data into a System/3 Model 6,
8, 10, 12, or 15, a S/260 Model 20, 22, 25, 30, 40, 50, or a
S/370 Model 115 through 158, a System/32 or System/34.
Model 1 Reads and/or sorts up to 500 six-inch documents per
,minute into six stackers.
April 78
symbol, and the field length check on fixed-length fields, are
checked on all fields designated by the operator for reading into
the system or terminal in the online mode, or on all fields designated for checking in the offline mode.
MICR F138 Printing: The type font, print quality, and code line
arrangement on the documents must meet the specifications
recommended by the American Bankers Association Technical
Committee on Check Handling. The specifications and related
data are available in booklets 147R3 and the Supplement to
147R3, both of which are available at a nominal charQe
Model 2 Reads and/or sorts up to 7!50 six-inch documents per
minute into six stackers.
Model 3 Reads and/or sorts up to 750 six-inch documents per
minute into twelve stackers.
Model Changes: Field installable only between Model 1 and
Model 2.
Highlights: Actual sorting and processing speeds depend upon
length of document, paper quality, atmospheric conditions, or
host system limitations. Reads all fields and sorts on any field.
Uses a new, lower cost, single gap MICR reading technique,
providing M ICR capabilities for smaller volume operations.
Reading performance may differ from other reader sorters.
Pre-installation runs of actual documents are strongly recommended to determine expected performance. The input hopper
holds 5-1/2" of documents in a gravity feed permitting non-stop
feeding. Models 1 and 2 each have six horizontal stackers in one
vertical bay, while model 3 has twelve horizontal stackers arranged in two vertical bays of six stackers each. Individual
stackers have a document capacity of 2-1/2". The transport
mechanism opens for access to the document path. An
operator-resettable document counter is provided.
Designed for ease of operation and operator training. The operator panel, feed hopper, and stackers are in a compact area for
operator convenience and minimum space requirements.
In addition to performing the basic modulus 10 or 11 checking
function, the self-checking number i improved recognition feature, when installed and operative, is integrated with the MICR
reading circuitry to reduce account number rejects and substitutions. This field is especially subject to folds, banding, and print
specification deviations. Rejects and character substitutions will
be reduced in proportion to the severity of document degradations, thus reducing customer reconciliation expense.
Sorting: For Models 1 and 2, off-line sorting uses five sort
stackers and one reject stacker for a two-phase digital sort.
Phase 1 sorts even digits, rejecting odd digits which are sorted
in phase 2. This conforms to the sort pattern of other sixstacker sorters and permits the start of phase 2 sorting without
removing phase 1 documents from the stackers. If Alternate
Sort Pattern (#9301) is specified, digits 0-4 sort in phase 1 and
digits 5-9 sort in phase 2.
For Model 3, One-phase sorting on digits 0-9 with rejects directed to stacker "R" at top of first bay. Stacker "A" at top of
second bay is used to select items when the High Order Zero
and Blank Column Selection feature is installed.
Stacker selection is under program control when operating
online to a computer system.
Documents: Intermixed paper and card documents (including
travelers checks) within the following specifications can be
processed:
Width-2.5" to 4.25"
Length-5.75" to 8.875"
Thickness-.003" to .007"
Paper Stock-20 lb. to 44 lb. (card stock)
Carrier documents, enclosing a non-processable item, up to
.013" in thickness may be processed.
Document Evaluation: Documents must be evaluated at least'
six months prior to installation to determine whether the level of
print quality is acceptable to the customer, with time for corrective action if necessary. Sub-standard E13B quality may cause
excessive rejects and character substitutions.
Prerequisites:
For 1255 All documents must be mechanically joggered prior to
each pass through the machine .. , joggers are available from
commercial sources. A sorting tray is recommended.
For System/3: One 1255 can be attached. Serial I/O Channel
(#7081) is required on the 5406, 5408, 5410 or 5415 ...
System/3/32/34 Adapter (#6303) is required on the 1255 itself,
See "Special Features" for additional information to be specified.
Limitations: The 1255 utility program (5702-UT2 for
both the Model 8 and Model 10 disk systems and 5703UT2 for the Model 6) requires at least 12K bytes of main
storage. The ·1255 support for the Model 12 and Model
15 requires a minimum system. IBM's ability to service a
Model 10 card system with a 1255 attached may be impaired with an effect on system availability.
For System/32: One 1255 can be attached. System/3/32/34
Adapter (#6303) is required on the 1255. 1255 Attachment
(#1100) is required on the 5320:
For System/34: One 1255 can be attached. System/3/32/34
Adapter (#6303) is required on the 1255. 1255 Attachment
'(#1100) is required on the System/34.
For S/360 Model 20: One 1255 can be attached to a system ...
a 2020 Processing Unit submodel 2, 5 or 6 with a recommended
minimum of 12,288 bytes of core equipped with a Serial I/O
Channel (#7081) is required ... System/360 Model 20 Adapter
(#6320) is required on the 1255 itself. See "Special Features."
Bibliography: System/3 GC20-8080, System/32 GC20-0032.
Metering: I/O Unit (Online/Offline)
Field Lengths: The amount field and transit-routing field are
fixed length ... the process control field and serial number field
are variable length ... the account number field may be fixed or
,- .riable length. See "Specify" below.
jhecking: Readability of each magnetic character and special
Not to be reproduced without written
permis.~lo
--...
- - . .....
-=
~
.-..
- -=------=
- - General $ystems Division-Machines
=
---------- -.. --~
M1255.2
April 78
'
Specify:
1) Voltage: (AC, l-phase, 60 cycle): For standalone; Locking
plug-#9880 for 115V, #9884 for 208V, or #9886 for 230V
... Non-lock plug-#9881 for 115V, #9885 for 208V, or
#9887 for 230V. For use with System/3, S/360 or S/370;
#9902 for 208V, or #S904 for 230V. For use with
System/32; Locking plug-#9884 for 208V or #9886 for
230V ... Non-lock plug-#9885 for 208V or #9887 for 230V.
Must be consistent with system voltage '" specify code
consistent with system/voltage for pre-system installation.
2) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
3) Alternate Sort Pattern: #9301 if desired. Replaces the standard even/odd pattern with the 0-4/5-9 pattern ... see
"Sorting" under "Highlights." May be changed in the field
4) Account Number Field Length: Specify one # from the table
below. A fixed field length assures maximum processing
accuracy. However, a variable field length may be specified
in lieu of a fixed length. Length of the account number field
may be changed in the field
Fixed Field
Length (positions)
5
Account Number
9210 9211
9212
Fixed Field
Length (positions)
8
10
Account Number
9213 9214
7
6
9
Variable
Field Length
9215 9219
5) Superior Reading Performance: Self-checking Number /
Improved Recognition (#7060) is recommended ... see
"Highlights" above and "Special Features" below.
6) Use
with
System/3/System/32,
System/3/32/34 Adapter is required
Features" below.
or
System/34:
... See "Special
7) Use with S/360 Model 20 System/360 Model 20 Adapter
(#6320) is required ... see "Special Features" below.
positions of the field'..:Lf'l'ittltiq~: Available on Model 3 only ...
operates offline only. Fieldinst~lIable: Yes
System/3-/32/34 Adapter '(#6303): To attach the 1255 to the
Serial I/O Channel #7081 on. the 54'06,5408, 5410, 5412, 5415
or to the 1255 Attachment #1100 on the System/32 or to the
1255 Attachment #1100 on the System/34: Specify: #9791 for
use with 5406, or #9792 for use with 5408, 5410, 5412, 5415 or
5320. #9791 can be changed in the field to #9792, or vice versa.
Field Installable: Yes
5/360 Model 20 Adapter (#6320): To attach the 1255 to the'
Serial I/O Channel (#7081) on the 2020. Field installable: Yes
Self-checking Number/Improved Recognition (#7060): For
reducing rejects and substitutions caused by defects in the
account number field and for checking Modulus 10 or 11 selfcheck digit account numbers up to 10 positions long, including
the self-check digit and dashes. SLT pluggable card wiring
determines the modulus calculated and weighting factor for each
digit. SLT card is removed and inserted by the CE for customer
wiring. An operator panel on/off switch is the only customer
control of the feature. The self-check digit may be in any position, always using a weighting factor of 1. Modulus 10 will
check any weighting factor 0 through 9, summing the product
digits, and checking for an even multiple of 10. Modulus 11 will
check any weighting factor, summing the products, and checking for either an even mUltiple of 11, or for a constant remainder
of 4.
This feature, when installed and operative, replaces the basic
character substitution checking circuitry with the more accurate
modulus 10 or 11 checking circuitry while the account number
field is being read. Documents with marginal printing that might
normally be rejected as potential substitutions will be processed
if all characters pass the self-checking digit test, thus reducing
the chances of a reject. All account numbers that fai~ the selfchecking digit test will cause the document to reject, thus reducing the chances of a substitution. Since the account number
field is frequently subject to folds, banding, mutilation and print
specification deviations, rejects and substitutions will be reduced in proportion to the severity of document degradation.
Field installable: Yes
8) Kickstrips: #9431, if desired. Field installable: Yes
Note: When installed, the open area under the machine is
enclosed. This reduces the amount of "toe-room" for the
operator and may be inconvenient to the customer if the
power outlet is located under the machine.
Special Features
Dash Symbol Transmission (#3215): Transmits the E13B dash
symbol from transit field to storage. With symbol in storage, the
program can distinguish between duplicate foreign and U.S.
transit numbers. Field installable: Yes
51-column Card Sorting (#4380): Modell-for reading and
'sorting 51-column card documents. When installed, machine
speed is reduced to approximately 405 dpm for six-inch documents. For 51-column cards, speed is approximately 500 dpm.
Models 2 and 3-when installed machine speed is reduced to
approximately 605 dpm for six-inch documents. For 51-column
cards, speed is approximately 750 dpm. Note: For optimum
performance on all models, card documents should be separated
out from standard size ABA documents on first pass operations.
Field installable: Yes
High Order Zero & Blank Selection (#4520): This permits
selection to pocket A of documents during a digit sort having
only blanks or zeros in the sort position and in all higher order
lot to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
- _._-- --.----
-=--- . =---= General Systems Division-Machines
M1260.1
April 78
.
-~-,-
1260 ELECTRONIC J"'S~RIBER'
Specify:
Purpose: A key operated'·unit for-proving deposits, sorting and
listing of checks into eight individual stackers, and MICR inscribing of checks· and deposits in the ABA recommended E13B
format.
1) Voltage: (AC, 1-phase, 60 cycle, locking plug): #9880 for
115V, #9884 for 208V, or #9886 for 230V.
Highli'ghts: The ten-key keyboard permits fast, accurate, touch
amount entry for sorting, listing, proving, inscribing and, with
Endorsing and Serial Numbering (#3791 ).endorsing checks in a
single operation. Has eight machine distribution stackers and
detail tapes. Three or five external stackers are provided for
non-processable documents ... see "Specify" below.
Intermixed card and paper documents within the following
specifications can be inscribed: Length-5.750" to 9.000", plus
51-column
cards
Width-2.750"
to
3.750"
Thickness-.003" to .007".
All arithmetic functions are accomplished by a single electronic
accumulator which has a ten-digit addition, subtraction and
accumulation capability. Electronic· storage is provided to store
thp. following data and totals: Thirteen distribution totals, nine of
which develop item count (maximum,· 9999) [see Additional
Totals (#1071) under "Special Features"] .. , group debit total ...
group net total ... grand total ... second field storage and/or
adding machine total ... serial number{control tape - maximum
'99999) .,. deposit item count (maximum, 9999) ... grand total
item count (maximum, 10 digits).
Inscribing: As standard, two fields can be inscribed in E13B
font on the face of documents in the clear band field. The fields
are, from right to left: Amount-set up in the amount keyboard
and inscribed as ten digits bracketed by the amount symbol ...
Process Control--emitted under program and selector key control and inscribed adjacent to the amount for identification of
transaction or batch. Deposit item count total also inscribes in
the process control field on deposit tickets. Distribution totals
with automatic process control codes identifying the stacker and
i;tem count totals are inscribed on control documents. Six positions of process control inscribing and printing are standard ...
for Routing and Transit, and Account Number, see "Special
Features" below.
One cycle automatic group balance with efficient multiple credit
ability provides printout of total debits and net debit/credit
difference on non-balance.
Automatic high dollar selection may be accomplished through
program wiring to override normal selector key operation and
sort, add and list checks of $1,000.00 and over into pocket
number 8.
Programs: Three programs may be stored in the machine and
are selected by a dial program switch. One set of program cards
is shipped with each machine. A second set will be provided, if
.. specified ... see "Specify" below. A third set is also available ...
see "Special Features."
2) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow. #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
3) External Stackers: #9686 for three, or #9687 for five.
4) Up-ending Kit: #9840, if required .. , loan basis, remains
property of IBM.
5) Program Cards, Second Set: #9552, if required ... also available
Special Features
Account Number Field (#1010): Permits inscribing of the
amount, process control, and account number in one pass of the
document. Operation is similar to that of the Routing and Transit Field (#6300). in that the account number may be transferred
to storage and inscribed in the same pass as the amount and
process control field. A repeat key and a means of clearing the
storage area are provided. Includes an additional setup key
adjacent to the ten-key keyboard which allows the operator to
set a blank or dash in either the account number or routing and
transit field.
Additional Totals (#1071): Adds sufficient counters to provide
a total of 20 distribution totals. each with a 4-digit item count.
These counters are used and controlled in the same manner as
the normal distribution counters in the basic machine.
Limitation: Cannot be im;talled with Automatic Float Analysis
(#1294. 1296).
Automatic Float· Analysis (#1294, 1296): #1294 Designed to
be used when the Routing and Transit Field of the deposit ticket
has not been pre-printed. A 4-digit serial number is printed in
the field on the deposit ticket and is repeated in the four highorder positions of the field on each float document.
#1296 Designed to be used when the Routing and Transit Field
of the deposit ticket has been pre-printed with the bank number.
No printing will occur in the field on the deposit ticket. but 5555
is printed in the four high-order positions of the field on each
float document.
Either #1294 or #1296 permit from one to six float amounts in
dollars and cents (10 digits) and corresponding item counts (4
digits) to be classified and accumulated under program control
wiring and selector key control as the debit items are processed
for proof of deposit. The activity of programmed float classes is
detected, so that when the balance status of the deposit is
established as the deposit ticket is processed the developed
float data can be inscribed. Operator feeding of one float ticket
is required for each two classes of float developed. No documents or machine cycles are required for inactive float accumulators. When this feature is installed, the total number of assignable counters is 20, each with an associated 4-digit item count.
When the "Float" switch is "OFF", these may be used as normal distribution counters ... when the switch is "ON", only 14 of
these are available as distribution counters. Maximum: One,
#1294 or #1296. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Additional
Totals (#1071).
Checker Signal (#1935): A light signal under switch control
that provides the operator with a means of signalling a supervisor.
Serial Numbering (#3791): The endorsement prints at random
in an area approximately 3" wide. In addition to printing the
bank's endorsement stamp. a date. a 5-digit machine, batch or
branch identification, and a 5-digit serial number is provided.
Not to be reproduced without written permissj.O'
-=- =- - ---
- - -----.- ---
M1260.2
~-= General Systems Division-Machines
The serial number may be programmed in advance for each
document fed, or to advance for each deposit. The serial number printed on the check is also printed on the control tape to
provide a complete audit trail.
High Volume Total (#4603): To print one quick kill total in the
Routing and Transit Field of the deposit ticket. The quick kill
total will print in the normal Routing and Transit format with a
dash symbol separating the four high-order and four low-Qrder
digits. This feature assumes only one float level of quick kill
items. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Transit Analysis
#8016).
Process Control Keyboard (#5705): Consists of two rows of
keys, numbered blank through 9, located to the right of the
ten-key keyboard. Used either to key in a special transaction
code or to override any two digits of the emitted process control
code.
Routing and Transit Field (#6300): Permits printing of the
Routing and Transit Field as well as the Amount Field and Process Control Field in one pass of the document. The field is keyed
in the ten-key keyboard and transferred into a storage area. The
amount is then keyed and the document dropped into the check
chute. The document will be positioned at the inscribing station,
·the amount will be inscribed and process control if programmed.
The document will advance to the Routing and Transit Field and
the field will be inscribed. A "Routing and Transit" key and a
means of clearing the routing and transit storage are provided.
April 78
shipped with each replacement machine at no charge when the
machine being replaced has an·enporser. If any change in plate
design is desired, there is a charge oniy for art and layout work if
applicable. The endorser plate on a displaced machine is to be
left with the machine, but defaced and rendered unusable.
Installed Machines: The normal plate charge will apply whenever replacement of· a worn or damaged plate is required.
Charges for art and layout work are added, if applicable. Note:
Endorser plates are interchangeable only within the machine
groupings shown above ... the Serial Numbers/Endorser plate
for the 1203 is not interchangeable with the old style Endorser
plate.
Specify:
An Individual completed Endorser Plate Specification Sheet
(102.,.1348 or 120-0563) ... see above, including machine and
serial number, must accompany each order for an endorser
plate. On mechanical and capacity replacement orders, also
attach a sample endorsement.
Shift Identification Switch (#7138): A dial switch, labelled
OFF-1-2-3, that provides the operator with a means of identifying a shift number in anyone of the five positions of the Distribution Total identification number. The switch is located adjacent
to the program switch.
Third Program (#7948): Provides program cards, wires and
overlays for a third program.
Prerequisite: Program Cards, Second Set (#9552) ... see
"Specify" above.
Transit Analysis (#8016): To print two float figures in the Routing and Transit Field of the deposit ticket. The four high-order
digits of the field will inscribe one class of float in hundreds of
dollars ... the four last (or low-order) digits of the field will inscribe a second class of float in hundreds of dollars. The feature
uses two of the standard distribution amount accumulators.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with High Volume Total
Accessories: The endorsing plate is a purchase item made to
the customer's specifications. An additional charge is made for
an endorser plate that requires art and layout work which cannot
be accomplished by straight line typesetting. This additional
charge applies to single plate orders and the first plate of multiple plate orders. For information on endorser plates for 1260,
see Endorser Plate Specification Sheet, 120-1348. For plant
installation on 1260 specify #3792 (or #3793 for Blank Endorser
Plate where applicable) at prices listed below. A completed
Endorser Plate Specification Sheet for each #3792 must be
attached to the DPOW or lAC.
It is recommended that the customer stock at least one spare
endorser plate for each group of machines with identical plates
since plates cannot be immediately replaced.
For feature Numbers for Color of Ink to be used, see unit under
"Machines."
Replacement: Mechanical and Capacity Replacement Machines (1260 to 1260) A replacement endorser plate will be
lot to be reproduced without written permission.
-.,- ---'-'
-=
- -:;:
-.....
- :-:.
- - - - -........
- ' -
M1282.1
General Systems Division-Machines
April 78
-~-
1282 OPTICAL READE~CAR'Q PUN~H
Purpose: Optically reads' nUrneri~ data"~nd three special characters from printed 51 or 8b colu~n cards and punches the data
read into the same card at a maximum rate of 200 cards per
minute.
Highlights: The digits 0-9 and three special characters, plus (+l.
dash (-) and a solid vertical line (I ), are read at a character recognition station. A maximum of 32 characters can be read and
punched during a single pass. Unreadable information is automatically rescanned up to two times. Standard card punching,
.punch suppression, special symbol punching, gang punching,
zero insertion, and double punch-blank column detection are
determined by control panel wiring. A pr~gram card is premarked by the user to control field selection. A line selection
device permits operator selection of anyone of eight to ten
horizontal line positions on the form, depending upon the type
font to be read. Self-checking number detection is controlled by
the premarked program card and control panel wiring.
Printing: For efficient operation, the printing to be read must
conform to the specifications established for the 1282. Cards
can be printed by a 1403 Printer model 1, 2, 3, 7 or N 1, 1404
Printer model 2, IBM Selectric® Typewriter model 721, 723 or
725, and IBM Standard Electric Typewriter model C. They can
also be created by any imprinters which produce the specified
print quality.
The standard machine can be ordered to read any two of the
following (see Item 2 under "Specify"): (1) 1428 front reading
for typewriters, 1403 and 1404 ... (2) 1428 enlarged front reading for imprinters ... (3) 1428 enlarged reverse reading for imprinters.
The 1403 and 1404 normally print 10 characters per inch (10
pitch). However, there is no restriction on the pitch of printing to
be read other than that it be no greater than 10 pitch. Any number of characters less than 10 per inch can be read. Adjacent
fields can have differing pitch.
Documents: Both 51-column and 80-column cards can be
processed, but only one size can be processed at a time. Additional document considerations, relating to the printing device,
recommended ribbons, and type styles, are specified in the table
below.
Standard Features: One single-section, 22-hub, self-contacting
control panel with complement of wires (see "Specify" below)
... a 1,200-card capacity hopper , .. a lens selector knob [a 2position selector to change between the reading of either enlarged font (1428 or Farrington 7B) or 1428 standard font] ... a
digit emitter ... a character reading station ... a rescan feature ...
self-checking number detection ... twenty positions of DPBC
detection ... two document counters ... two radial stackers, each
with a 1,000-card capacity, .. charcoal covers and a white operator console.
Manuals: See "Catalog of Marketing Publications," G320-1621.
Specify:
1) Voltage: (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 cycle): #9884 for 208 V, or
#9886 for 230 V (locking plugs only).
2) Characters!o be Read: Specify one of the following:
#9090 For 1428 standard front reading and 1428 enlarged
front reading.
#9091 For 1428 standard front reading and 1428 enlarged
reverse reading.
#9092 For 1428 enlarged front reading and 1428 enlarged
reverse reading.
3) Test Decks: One or both of the following test decks must be
specified unless Farrington 7B Font Recognition (#3950,
3952) is ordered ... to test the machine, either #9719, 9720
or Farrington 7B Font test documents must be used, depending upon the application.
#9719 For 1428 enlarged front test deck '" #9090 or #9092
above is required.
#9720 For 1428 enlarged reverse test deck ... #9091 or
#9902 above is required.
4) Scan Line Boundary: Specify on~#9576 for right edge,
#9577 for left edge, or #9500 for center. Limitation: #9500
cannot be specified with #9092 above.
5) Control Panel: Specify on~#9081 for self-contacting with
manual wires, #9082 for self-contacting with fixed wires, or
#9084 for no panel or wires ... specify #9084 for all mechanical replacement machines.
6) Extended Memory: #9145, if applicable. Provides for storing
the variable wheel amount field (5-digit only) or account
number field when a rescan is necessary to read the other
field. Note: Will not operate with other than a 5-digit variable
wheel amount field. Can be field installed.
Special Features
Alternate Field Control (#1250): To select field for reading
under control of hand-printed vertical field mark.
Double Punch and Blank Column Detection (#3435): An
additional group of 20 positions. Maximum: One group.
Expanded Field Suppression (#3833): Basic machine permits
punch suppression of up to four fields, each containing a maximun of 12 character positions ... this feature increases the number of punch suppression control fields to six ... it is prerequisite
for Optical Mark Reading (#5480-5484).
Farrington 7B Font Recognition (#3950, 3952): To read and
punch documents printed in Farrington 7B Font by credit plate
imprinters. #3950--without Bar Code or Alpha Blanking ...
#3952-with Bar Code and Alpha Blanking. Specify: Either or
both-#9714 for front reading test deck, #9716 for reverse
reading test deck. '
Optical Mark Reading (#5480-5484): Information marked on
cards in addition to printed characters can be read and converted to punched holes. Similar to mark-sensing, but location of
marking positions and type of marking pencil differ. See Manual
GA24-3106 for details. Specify: One of the following-#5480
for 5 positions, 80-column card, front field ... #5481 for 6 positions, 80-column card, front field ... #5482 for 12 positions,
80-column card ... #5483 for 5 positions, 80-column card, center
field, and 51-column card ... #5484 for 6 positions, 80-column
~ard, center field, and 51-column card. Prerequisite: Expanded
Field Suppression (#3833)
Self-checkin9 Number Field Correction (#7065): Operates in
conjunction with the standard self-checking number error detection feature. Documents with a single unreadable character in a
self-check field ordinarily are rejected. This feature automatically
corrects a single unreadable character and makes the document
acceptable. Documents with more than a single unreadable
character are rejected. This feature is not recommended for use
with imprinter applications.
Serial Number Punching (#7090): To punch consecutive numbers from one to five digits in length in ascending or descending
sequence. The first number to be punched is manually set by the
operator.
Not to be reproduced without written permissiorri:~
---=---=
===
General Systems Division-Machines
-_
- ---.
-
Recommended Ribbon/
Carbon Paper (or
equivalent)
Type Style
Required for
Reading by 1282
1403 mdl
1 or 2
MYLAR (424325)/Nylon
(414486)
1428 Type Style
J4 (#9599)
1416
(1403 mdl3)
Nylon (414486)
1428 Type Style
J4 (#9599)
1404 model 2
Nylon (419031)
1428 Type Style
J4 (#9599)
1403
mdl20r7
MYLAR (424325)/
Nylon (414486)
1428 Type Style
AN4 (#9621)
1416 (1403 mdl
30rN1)
Nylon (414486)
1428 Type Style
AN4 (#9621)
1404 model 2
Nylon (419031)
1428 Type Style
AN4 (#9621)
Model C -IBM
Electric Typewriter with
keyboard 069
Nylon No. 50
(1010655)
5121 Polyethylene
(1010760)
Type
Type
Type
Type
Nylon No. 50
Type Code 009
Printing Unit
Other Than
System/360
Syatem/360
Available
throuOh
OP
Division
Selectric
Typewriter
model 721
723 or 725 with
Keyboard 009
Credit Card
Imprinter
Code
Mark
Code
Mark
097,
VAS
096,
VA8
(1136076)
Carbon paper to be
used will be based
on the application.
1428 Enlarged
Font or Far~
rington 7B Selfcheck
~~t to be reproduced without written permission.
M'1282.2
April 78
__
----= -= .' ....=---=.
--------.-.....
"!·'''·'o:,_. _ _
-;.-
M1316.1
General Systems Division-Machines
.'
,
1316 DISK PACK
Purpose: High-speed•. removable, interchangeable disk storage
for all models of the 1311 Disk Storage Drive and 2311 Disk
. Storage Drive.
Not to be reproduced without written permisSit·
April 78
"-----= -=
=--==
-- ----.-....
-
M1403.1":
1403 PRINTER
Purpose: Printed output unit for the data processing systems
indicated below.
Model
Print Pos.
Speed (max.) For Use With
2
132
600lpm
5tt
7
Nl
132
120
132
April 78
General Systems Division-Machines
4651pm
600lpm
1,1001pm
S/360 mdl20
S/3 mdls 10,12
and 15
S/3 mdls 12 and 15
1130, S/360 mdl 20
S/360 mdl20
S/3 mdls 10,12
and 15
tt 1403 Model 5 is available only on the S/3 Model 12, and S/3
Model 15.
Model Changes: Can be made in the field between models 2
and 7 or models 5 and 2.
Prerequisites: 1403 Model Nl only-a 1416 Interchangeable
Train Cartridge is required on each 1403 Model N 1 '" see 1416.
System/3 Model 10 One 1403 Model 2 or Nl can be attached to a system via the 5421 Printer Control Unit. The
5410 must also be equipped with an appropriate 1403
Printer Attachment ... see "Special Features" under 5410.
Note: Appropriate adapters are also required on the 1403
itself ... see item (3) under "Specify."
System/3 Model 12 One 1403 Model 2, 5 or N 1 can be
attached to a system via the 5421 Printer Control Unit.
The 5412 must also be equipped with the 1403 Printer
Base Attachment (#4160) and the appropriate 1403 Printer Model Attachment ... see "Special Features" under
5412. Note: Appropriate adapters are also required on the
1403 itself ... see item (4) under "Specify."
System/3 Model 15 One 1403 Model 2, 5 or N 1 can be
attached to a system via the 5421 Printer Control Unit.
The 5415 must also be equipped with an appropriate
1403 Printer Attachment ... see "Special Features" under
5415. Note: Appropriate adapters are also required on
the 1403 itself ... see item (5) under "Specify."
System/360 Model 20 One 1403 Model 2, 7 or N 1 can be
attached to a system. The appropriate 1403 Attachment
is required on the 2020 ... see "Special Features" under
2020. Note: To attach the 1403 to a 2020 submodel 5 or
6, appropriate adapter(s) are required on the 1403 itself ...
see item (4) tinder "Specify." Limitations: [1] A 1403
cannot be attached to a 2020 submodel 3 or 4 ... [2] A
1403 Model N 1 cannot be attached to a 2020 with a serial
no. under 20000.
all systems is dual-speed, except for 'a 1403 Model 6 or 7 regardless of system. The"dual speed "carriage permits skipping at
approximately 75" /second dn skips over 8 lines long. Note: On
a Model Nl, under certain unique conditions, the 75" /second
skip is turned off and skipping continues at approximately'
33" /second ... see SRL GA24-3073 for details.
The printer and carriage open for easy loading and alignment of
forms. On all models except Model N1, forms are wheeled to
and from the printer on a double-duty, two-section forms stand
which reduces paper handling and set-up time. The Model N 1
has sound absorbent covers extending to the floor for reduced
noise level. A motorized cover facilitates operator handling. The
accoustical cover design incorporates platforms for feeding .and
stacking of forms. A forms cart may be purchased for the Model
Nl ... see Accessories in this section.
The 1403 Model N 1 is program compatible with the Model" 2
used in S/360 Model 20. Existing programs for Model 2s need
not be changed for a Model N 1, except in those cases where.
because of the reduced time required to "print a line, the overall
I/O scheduling must be re-optimized.
The 1403 Model 2 is program compatible with 5203 Printer
Models, including the tapeless carriage facility. Existing programs for the 5203 need not be changed, except in those programs where the overall I/O scheduling must be re-optimized to
utilize the reduced print time/line, or if the user wishes to use
more print positions on a 1403 than were on the 5203 being
replaced.
Printed Output for Optical Character Reading: 1403 print
chains and 1416 trains can be equipped for printing on documents to be read by the following optical character readers:
1230 Optical Mark Scoring Reader
1231/1232 Optical Mark Page Reader
1282 Optical Reader Card Punch
1287 Optical Reader
1288 Optical Page Reader
1418 Optical Character Reader
1428 Alphanumeric Optical Reader
3881 Optical Mark Reader
3886 Optical Character Reader
Depending upon system with which the 1403 will be used, and
the optical character reader involved, see appropriate section of
the "Type Catalog" for feature #(s) to be specified for the required 1403 print arrangement. The ribbons used on the 1403
must be capable of producing printed characters suitable for
recognition by the optical reader used. For recommended ribbons and document specifications, see appropriate optical reader description.
Highlights: Actual speeds depend upon the operation. The
system's processing unit performs all format and analysis control. A line of printing is presented to the printer in the arrangement in which it is to be printed. All data printed is checked
against data received from core storage.
(l)The dual-s~eed carriage is not available on a 1403 Model 7.
Each print position can print anyone of 48 characters '" alphabetic, numeric. and 12 special characters. Characters are spaced
10/inch. Line spacing is 6 or 8 lines/inch, under operator control. Continuous marginally punched forms from 3 '1/2" to 18
3/4" in overall width are fed by an automatic carriage. Minimum
form depth is 1" ... maximum is 22" at 6 lines/inch, or 16 1/2"
at 8 lines/inch. Forms spacing and skipping are governed by the
5410, 5412 or 5415 and the stored program. A standard prepunched 12-channel tape is supplied with each 1403 for use in
verification of forms movement. Standard skipping is ap~roxi
mately 33" / second. The standard carriage on printers used with
(3) 1403 Model Ni: -Forms sets used on 1403 Models 2, 5, or 7
(ct:lain printers) may not produce acceptable results when
used o~ 1403 Nl (tra!n printer). A six-part set which gave
satisfactory .results on a chain printer may show a decrease
in the print quality of the last copies when used on an 1100
Ipm train printer ... for details, see SRL GA24-3041.
Limitatiqns:
(2) A 1403 Model 2, 7 or Nl cannot be installed in a S/360
Model 20 with a 2203 Printer ... a 1403 Model N 1 cannot be
attached to a 2020 with serial no. under 20,000 ... a 1403
cannot be attached to a 2020 submodel 3 or 4.
(4) Multipie-part forms are not recommended for OCR printilji
The print quality of the top sheet is affected by the unde.
o be reproduced without written -permission.
-- -'----= --=-,---=----=
----- . --
,_--....
M1403.2
General Systems Division-Machines
-.--.-~..
April 78
,':",
~
ing sheets. Under no circumst~ces.sftou!d tt"!e copy sheets
be used for optiqal scar'lning .. For b~st results, use single-part
forms for OCR printing. ":..
.,.
Bibliography:
~ystem/36d
System/3-GC20-8080.
20-GA26-3565,
Model
Metering: I/O Unit (online)
Prerequisites: Special Feature 6410 or 6411.
Specify:
1) Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 cycle): #9903 for 208V, or
#9905 for 230V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
2) Voltage Adapter: #9709. Required when a 1403 MOdel 2 is
to be attached to any model of S/360, or a Model 2 to a
System/3 Model 10, or a Model 2 or 5 to a S/3 Model 12 or
15. Note: When an installed Model 2 or 5 (from other than
S/360 or s/310 or a Model 2 from other than System/3
Model 10) is retained for attachment to these systems, new
cables must be ordered. Refer to Physical Planning Manual
for cable requirements and ordering procedure.
When #9709 is field installed, the standard, configuration
.chain/train previously installed will be modified to an AN
or HN arrangement of the same type size or style. See
"Type Catalog" (S/360 - 1403 Printer) for feature # to
which chain (or train) is to be modified.
If Interchangeable Chain Cartridge Adapter (#4740) is
installed on Model 2, both alphanumeric chains (standard
configuration only) will be modified, one to AN and one to
HN. Modification is restricted to same type size or style
as previously installed.
3) Attachment to 5410 via 1403 Model 2 or Model N1 Attachment (#4140), 4150) and the 5421 Printer Control Unit. The
following features are required on the 1403: 600 LPM Voltage Conversion Adapter (#9725) for 1403 Model 2, or 1100
LPM Voltage Conversion Adapter (#9726) for 1403 Model
N1. These can be changed in the field. Voltage Adapter
(#9709) is also required for a Model 2 ... see item (2) above.
4) Attachment to 5412 via 1403 Base Attachment (#4160), and
the appropriate Printer model attachment ... Model 2, 5 or N 1
Printer (#4135, 4140 4150) ... and the 5421 Printer Control
Unit. The following features are required on the 1403.
600 LPM Voltage Conversion Adapter (#9725) for 1403
Model 2 or 5, or 1100 LPM Voltage Conversion Adapter
(#9726) for 1403 Model N 1. These can be changed in the
field. Voltage Adapter (#9709) is also required for a Model 2 or 5 ... see item (2) above. Note: When 1403 Model 5
is attached to 5412, see 5421 for necessary prerequisite.
5) Attachment to 5415 of a 1403 Model 2, 5 or N 1. Requires a
#4160 Basic Attachment Control, appropriate speed attachment (#4135, 4140 4150) and the 5421 Printer Control Unit.
The following features are required on the 1403: 600 LPM
Voltage Conversion Adapter (#9725) for 1403 Model 2 or 5,
or 1100 LPM Voltage Conversion Adapter (#9726) for 1403
Model N1. These can be changed in the field. Voltage Adapter (#9709) is also required for a Model 2 or 5 ... see item (2)
above. Note: When 1403 Model 5 is attached to 5415, see
5421 for necessary prerequisite.
6) Attachment to 2020 submodel 5 of 6: The following adapters
are required on the 1403; On 1403 Model 2 or 7, a 600 LPM
'··°)y0ltage Conversion Adapter (#9725) ... on 1403 Model N 1,
I,m 1100 LPM Voltage Conversion Adapter (#9726). These
can be field installed. Notes: [1] An appropriate 1403 attachment is required on the 2020 .. . see "Special Features"
under 2020 ... [2] On a 1403 Model 2, a Voltage Adapter
(#9709) is also required ... see item (2) above.
7) Print Chain/Train Arrangement:
With S/360 (1403 Model 2 or N1) See "S/360-1403
and 1404 Printers" in "Type Catalog." For N 1, also
see item (8) below. Universal Character Set Feature
(#8640,8641) is required on a Model 2 or N1, or Multiple Character Set Feature (#5110, 5111) on a Model 2
or N 1 for any arrangement other than the 48-character
set composed of identical arrays of standard sequence
... see "Special Features" below and "Type Catalog"
page TC 71, etc.
With System/3 Model 10. 12 and 15 See System/3 in
"Type Catalog" page TC 109.1, for arrangements and
required feature numbers. For Model N 1, see item (8)
below. Universal Character Set Feature (#8640, 8641)
is required on a Model 2, 5 or N 1 for any print arrangement requiring more than 48 characters (e.g., PN or
GN).
With 1130 (1403 Model 7) #9614 for HN2, or #9615 for
HN3. See "S/360 - 1403 and 1404 Printers" in "Type
Catalog" for characteristics of these chains.
8) 1416 Interchangeable Train Cartridge (Model N1 only): At
least one 1416 is required with each 1403 Model N1 ... see
1416.
9) Color: For Models 2, 5, 7-Color Accent-#9043 for blue, or,
if other system units are to have red, yellow or gray accents,
#9044 for charcoal. Extended Color-#9031 for red, #9032
for yellow, or #9033 for blue. For Model N1-#9041 for Red,
#9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, #9045 for gray, or #9046
for white.
'
10)Tape Punch: Order Part No. 120910
if the 1403 is for a' New Name Account. One
punch is furnished at no charge per installation. A tape
punch is not required when the 1403 is attached to System/3
Model 10 or Model 15.
11)For Model N1, cross reference Branch/Plant Order No. or
1416(s) which will be used with the 1403.
12)Kickstrips (on 1403 N1 only): #9350, if desired.
When kickstrips are installed, the open area
underneath the machine is enclosed. This reduces the
amount of "toe-room" and may be inconvenient to the user if
the power outlet is located beneath the machine.
Special Features
Any of the following field installable special features, as appropriate, are on an "as available" basis for field installation on
discontinued 1403 models.
Auxiliary Ribbon Feeding Feature (#1376): (Models 2, 5, 7 ...
Standard on N1). Not available for use on Model 7 when used
with the 1130 system. Recommended for satisfactory utilization
of polyester film ribbons ... can also be used for conventional
fabric ribbons. The polyester film (424325)' or its equivalent,
provides improved print quality for both optical character recognition and other quality printing applications.
Note: For specific details for optical character recognition covering printing unit, document types, recommended
ribbons and typestyle, see 1282.
Interchangeable Chain Cartridge Adapter (#4740): (Models 2,
Not to be reproduced without written permisSi
---= -- General Systems Division-Machines
=---=
-------.-.--.- - . -......
=
M1403.3
. April 78
-
5, 7 only). Permits operator to insert an interchangeable chain
cartridge with different type font, .style or special character
arrangement. The change can be made quickly without special
tools. Operation of the printer remains unchanged. Two interchangeable cartridges with chains are supplied, one in lieu of the
standard fixed cartridge and one additional. See "Type Catalog"
for feature #s of available arrangements.
For Plant Installation Specify: For other than S/360 or
S/370, #4740 and any two alphanumeric print chain arrangements, except if Numerical Print Feature (#5381) is also ordered. If #5381 is ordered, specify #4740, one numeric chain
(#9485 for .095" type size, or #9484 for .079") and one
alphanumeric print chain arrangement. See appropriate section of "Type Catalog." For Model 2 to be used with a S/360
Model 20, specify #4740 and any two alphanumeric printer
chain arrangements. See "Type Catalog - S/360 - 1403
Printer" for available arrangements.
For Field Installation The installed -fixed cartridge is modified for interchangeability and an additional interchangeable
cartridge with chain is supplied. Specify #4740 and anyone
alphanumeric print chain arrangement. Note: When an installed 1403 Model 2 is to be modified for use with S/360,
both alphanumeric chains will be modified at no charge '"
see item (2) under "Specify."
Selective Tape Listing Feature {#6410. 6411: (S/360 only).
#6410-for Model N 1 ... #6411-for Model 2. Permits operation of eight 1.5" or four 3.1" tapes ... may be fanfold or roll
(fanfold only on Model N 1) ... up to 13 characters per 1.5" tape;
up to 29 per 3.1" tape. Combinations of 3.1" and 1.5" tapes are
possible; however, each 3.1" tape requires one of the following
pairs of 1.5" tape positions: 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 5 and 6, or 7 and
8. Each tape is individually spaced under program control. No
form skipping is provided when the feature is in use. Easily
interchangeable by the operator between tape listing and standard 1403 forms printing. On Model 2 a feature mode switch is
provided. This switch temporarily disconnects the standard
carriage control circuits and activates the tape feeding circuits
when the tape-spool assembly tray is latched in the operating
position. On Model N 1, this switching is accomplished when the
center guide plate is installed. Can be used with Universal Character Set Feature (#8641) on a Model 2, with an alphanumeric
train, or with an alpHanumeric train or Universal Character Set
Feature (#8640) on a Model N 1. A stacker (#6413) is available
for stacking tapes. See "Prices" on the M 10000 pages.
Limitations: A 1403 Model 2 or N 1 is required to utilize the full
capacity of this feature '" see SRL GA24-3073 for details.
Prerequisites: Printer' Features Control (#5575)\ on the 2020.
Warning: Orders are no longer being accepted for #6410 on
1403 Model N1s to be used in any S/360 other than S/360
Model 20.
Universal Character Set Feature (#8640. 8641): (For S/360
Model 20 or S/3 Model 10, 12 or 15). #8640-for Model N1 '"
#8641-for' Model 2 and 5. Required on a 1403 Model 2, 5, or
N 1 for any print arrangement other than a 48-character set
composed of identical arrays of stan I ....
A special character is used for the Ledger Card Device line finder
marks and the identification number -coding.
Use of the "underscore" in conjunction with another character
will overprint the lowest matrix dot forming that character and is
not recommended.
The Ledger Card Device (LCD) posts on ledger cards under'
program control with automatic line finding and identification
number reading. Ledger cards are manually fed ... automatic
stacking provided for up to 1/2" stack of cards. Card width
from 6" to 14" (6", 8-1/2", 11" and 14" are recommended).
Card length from 8" to 11". Cards are to be of .007" thickness
without corner cuts. Line spacing is 6/inch.
Refer to SRL GA24-3488 for ledger card design considerations
and limitations.
Model 1 allows printing left-to-right only. Model 2 provides
bi-directional print capability which increases throughput by
eliminating carrier return. It allows printing with the print element moving either left-to-right or right-to-Ieft'
Performance Considerations: An analysis of each document
type to be printed is necessary to find actual throughput of a
serial print'er. When used for dedicated printing jobs, throughput
depends upon the ratio (R) of lines printed per page to the maximum number of lines available per page and upon the number of
character positions (C) in the printed line. Lines printed per
minute (LPM) can be approximated using formulas:
For Model 1 ... LPM =
For Model 2 ... LPM
=
2700 R where C is average number of
RC + 1 character positions.
4500 R where C is maximum number of
RC + 5 character positions when
program prints alternate lines
in opposite directions .
. i~o be reproduced wiUu,ud
Viti uten
permission.
= =. =----==
J!~;f::~'::~:s
- - - .....------_........
__
.....
2250 DISPLAY
M2250.1
April 78
GeneralSystem's DivisIon-Machines
....,;t,
.
UNIT-Models1.~;
3
Purpose: A cathode ray t~6~ unitfbr d'i~plaYin~ output in alphameric and graphic ·form for S/360 Mod~1 22, 30 thru 85
and 195; or a S/370 Model 115 ·thru 195. Input features provide
broad man-machine communication ability.
a
Model 1: Includes its own control unit ... used for a single display unit configuration.
Model 2~ (No Longer Available) Requires a 2840 Display Control
Modell... applicable special features listed below can be ordered for field installation on installed units.
Model 3: Requires a 2840 Display Control Model 2 ... used in
multiple display unit configurations for computer-aided design
and scientific analysis applications. Up to four 2250 Model 3s
can be attached to each 2840 Model 2. Each 2250 Model 3 can
be located 2,000 cable feet from the 2840 Model 2.
Model Changes: Cannot be made in the field.
Highlights: An I/O unit offering both pictorial (line drawing) and
alphameric input and output for analysis, design and file maintenance applications. It features:
Large Display Area Images are drawn anywhere within a
12" x 12" area on the face of the display tube.
Large Capacity Display Up to 3,848 character positions
... 52 lines with 74 characters to the line.
Vector Graphics Straight lines of any length,
angular orientation and at any position on the
[Note: For this function, Absolute Vectors and
(#1002) is required on a Modell, or Absolute
(#1001) on a Model 2.]
at any
screen.
Control
Vectors
DynamSc Display Buffer areas are addressable ... individual characters or lines c~n be changed rapidly without
time-consuming re-write of complete buffer area.
Additional Data Modes Incre."ental vectors permit
improved buffer utilization and programming flexibility.
(Note: This function is standard on Model 3 ... on Model
1, Graphic Design Feature (#4485) is required.)
Format Flexibility Characters, point plots, and vector end
points can be positioned in any combination at any of the
1,048,576 program addressable positions on the 1,024 x
1,024 grid.
Large Capacity Display (Model 3 only) Up to 2,100
characters or 2,800 incremental vectors may be displayed
at 40 cps regeneration rate without noticeable flicker ... up
to 2,800 characters or 3,700 incremental vectors at 30 cps
regeneration rate with commonly accepted flicker.
(Note: Vector and character times vary depending on
cable length.)
Fast· Turn-around (Model 3 only) A complete buffer
(32K) can be rewritten in less than a tenth of a second ...
manual inputs are presented to the CPU as fast as they
are presented to the display unit.
Graphic Input Program controllable light pen provides for
a variety of input techniques, including pen search and
tracking. (Note: For this function, Graphic Design Feature
(#4485) is required on Model 1.)
Light Pen Detection Processing (Model 3 only) Extensive order set reduces CPU attention handling requirements ... see 2840 Model 2.
Application Flexibility Optional alphameric and program-
med function keyboards for operator input ... see "Special
Features."
Prerequisites: For either model In any S/360 or S/370, a minimum of 64K of core storage is required for use of graphic support under OS/360. A minimum of 16K is required for diagnostic support only.
For model 1 A Buffer (#1498 or #1499) on the 2250 Modell
itself. See "Special Features." A control unit position is also
required on a system channel.
S/360 Model· 22. 30. 40, 50 Multiplexer channel (standard),
Selector Channels (special features, except on 2022 one selector
channel is standard) ... see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050.
S/360 Model 44 Special features on 2044: Multiplexer Channel,
Additional High Speed Multiplexer Subchannels ... see 2044.
S/360 Model 65, 67. 75 Selector channel of 2860, Selector
Subchannels (special features) on 2870 ... see 2860, 2870.
S/360 Model 85, 195 or S/370 Model 165, 168, 195 Selector
channel of a 2860,. Selector Subchannels (special feature) of
2870, or the shared subchannel of a 2880 ... see .2860, 2870,
2880.
S/370 Model 115, 125 Multiplexer channel ... see 3115, 3125.
(No DOS support).
S/370 Model 135 Multiplexer channel ... see 3135 .
S/370 Model 145 Multiplexer channel (standard), selector
channels ... see 3145.
S/370 Model 155. 158 Multiplexer channel (standard), 2nd Byte
Multiplexer Channel (special feature), block multiplexer channels
(first two are standard) ... see 3155,3158.
For model 3 A 2840 Display Control Model 2.
.Bibliography: GA22-6822.
Metering: Assignable Unit
Specify
(1) Voltage (AC, l-phase, 3-wire, 60 cycle): #9902 for 208V, or
#9904 for 230V.
(2) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
(3) Buffer (Modell only): Buffer (#1498 or #1499) is required ...
see "Special Features."
(4) Isolation, Control Unit (Modell only): May be required on
units shipped prior to December 29. 1967 ... see "Speciai
Features."
Special Features
Absolute Vectors (,1001): (Model 2 only) Provides ability to
"draw" a continuous straight line between any two points of the
1,024 x 1,024 reference grid. Prerequisite: Absolute Vectors
and Control {#1003} on 2840 Model 1.
Absolute Vectors and Control (,1002): (Modell only) Provides controls and ability to "draw" a continuous straight line
between any two points of the 1,024 x 1,024 reference grid.
Alphameric Keyboard (,1245): (Any model) A keyboard similar
to that on a 1052 Printer-Keyboard ... for alphanumeric data
entry.
Buffer (,1498. 1499): (Model 1 only) ,1498-provides 4,096
bytes of core storage for display regeneration
'1499-provides 8.192 bytes. Maximum One, #1498 or
,Not to be reproduced without written permissil,
---= -- General Systems Division-Machines
=---=
- ------
-()~
-=
ApriT78'
-~.-.-
#1499.
Note: One of these features is required on each 2250 Model 1 ...
if 1498 is installed, it must be removed in order to insta!l1499.
Character G~nerator (#1880): (Model 1 only) A digital decoder'
which speeds character generation and conserves buffer space.
Special circuits draw characters from stored EBCDIC codes
rather than from sequences of programmed vectors. Note: This
feature is required when using a 2250 Model 1 as an operator's
console under DIDOCS programming support.
units.
.
~ ~
...
,
'
Programmed Function Keyboard (#5855): (Any model) A
32-key keyboard that 'allows theoperstor to 'indicate progra~
interpretive functions to the'system by a single key depression.
Graphic Design (#4485): (Model 1 only) Provides two additional data modes ... 2-byte incremental vectors and point plotting,
four light pen control orders to enable CPU program-directed
pen tracking, and a fiber optic light pen with a tip switch.
limitation: Cannot be installed with Light Pen(#4785).
Prerequisite: Absolute Vectors and Control (#1002).
Note: CPU interaction for light pen tracking will generally be
great enough to limit such interaction to one 2250 Model 1 at a
time.
Isolation, Control Unit (4700): (Model 1 only ... for field installation on units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... standard
on units shipped after that) To turn power on or off on the 2250
Model 1 without generating spurious signals. Thus, a CPU
program, if it can be logically disconnected from the system
before power . is turned off, can continue operating.
Light Pen (#4785): (Model 1 or 2 only) A hand-held electronic
pointer., activated by a foot switch, that allows program detection of lines, characters and symbols that are displayed on the
face of the tube. Limitation: On Model 1, cannot be installed
with Graphic Design (#4485).
Note: A fiber optic light pen with a tip switch is provided with
Graphic Design (4485) on a Model 1 and with the basic 2250
Model 3.
Operator Control Panel, First (#5475): (Model 1 only) Pro~
vides a duplicate of the on/ off and program load facilities (OCP)
of a processing unit ... mounted on the 2250 Model 1.
For a remote panel for a 2050, 2065, 2075, 2085, 3165, 3168 or
3195.
Maximum: One.
Specify
#9175 if #5475 is to be installed on a 2085, 3165, 3168 or 3195
equipped with the Extended Channels ... see "Special Features"
under those units.
Prerequisite, Remote Operator Control Panel Attachment
(#9560) on the 2050, 2065, 2085 or 3195 ... see "Specify"
under those units.
Operator Control Panel, Second (#5476): (Model 1 only)
Provides a duplicate of the on/off and program load facilities
(OCP) of a second processing unit ... mounted on the 2250
Model 1. For a remote panel for a 2050, 2065, 2075, 2085,
3165,3168 or 3195.
Maximum: One.
Specify
#9176 if #5476 is to be installed on a 2250 attached to a 2085,
3165,3168 or 3195 equipped with the Extended Channels '" see
"Special Features" under those units.
Prerequisites: #5476 requires Operator Control Panel, First
(#5475) ... Remote Operator Control Panel Attachment (#9560)
on the 2050, 2065, 2085 or 3195 ,.. see "Specify" under those
to be reproduced without written permission.
M2311.1
- - - ',,: G~ner~1Systerhs' Division-Machines
-=-.:...:: '.: ':' :.;'. ,
- - ; '~ , • 0.-::-
(4)1316 Disk Pack: Must be ordered separately.
2311 DISK STORAGE DRIVE
Purpose: Disk storage dnve for,
1800 SY$tem.
April 78
a S/360.: S/..'370,
1; 30 or an
"
Model 1: For a S/360 Model 22 thru 85 or 195, a S/370 Model
135 thru 195, or an 1800 .,. up to 7.25 million bytes or 14.5
million packed decimal digits ... accesses 200 cylinders.
(5) If the 2311 is to be used as an emulating unit in a S/360
Model 20 with 1401/1440 Compatibility <#3901), see #3901
under 2020.
(6) If the 2311 is to be used on an 1130 system an appropriate
1130 Attachment (#3601 or 3602) is required.
Prerequisites: All Models-use vented hub 1316 Disk Packs,
which must be ordered separately .
Model 1
For S/360 Models 22 and 30 thru 85, 195, S/370 Models
135 thru 195, 180O-a 2841 Storage Control. Each 2841
can control up to eight 2311s ... see 2841 for specifications
of additional cables and connectors required for attachment
of fifth thru eighth 2311 s and for limitations when used with
other storage units.
Highlights: Disk Pack Each 2311 uses a vented hub 1316 Disk
Pack that is removable and provides virtually unlimited offline
disk storage.
Limitations: Vented hub 1316s can be used on 1311 Disk Storage Drives as well as on any 2311 Model, but data written on a
1316 by a 1311 cannot be read by a 2311.
Note: When a S/360 uses one of the 1400 Compatibility
Features for disk storage, the 1316, though residing in a
2311 Model 1, will store 2 million characters in "Sector
Format" or 2.98 million in "Track Record Format." These
disk packs are written at 2311 Model 1 track and bit densities and cannot be read on 1311 s ... one 2311 Model 1 is
required for each 1311 required in the original 1400 system
configuration.
Cylinder Concept: The "comb-type" access mechanism, with
ten vertically aligned heads, one for each disk surface, minimizes
, access time and increases throughput.
Model 1 Accesses 200 cylinders ... up to 36,250 bytes (or
72,500 packed decimal digits) are available at one setting of
the mechanism.
Formats: The 2311 Model 1 uses the track format prescribed
for all storage units attached to the 2841 Storage Control.
Data Transfer Rate: Up to 156,000 bytes/second (or 312,000
packed decimal digits/second) ... permits efficient sequential
and random access processing.
Bibliography:
System/360, System/370-GA22-6822, 1800-GA26-5921.
Metering: Assignable Unit
Specify
(1) Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 60 cycle): #9903 for 208V, or #9905
for 230V.
(2) Drive Number Identification Button: Order each 2311 separately, indicating its position by one of the following codes:
Model 1 #9121 for 1st drive, #9122 for 2nd, #9123 for 3rd,
#9124 for 4th, #9125 for 5th, #9126 for 6th, #9127 for 7th,
or #9128 for 8th. Prerequisite: For #9125 thru #9128, Additional 2311 Attachment (#9706) is required on the 2841 ...
see "Specify" under 2841 .
(3) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
. #9045 for gray.
,. ,Not to be reproduced without written permiSSi,i'
---= -- General Systems Division-Machines
=---=
- -----
- =-
~~123~
~,,',:: :-~AJ~i;l; ;~-
,
-~-.-
2312 DISK STORAGE - Model A1
2313 DISK STORAGE - Model A1
Purpose: Single disk storage module for a 2314 DASF - A Series, or attachment to the 2319 Disk Storage Model A 1/ A2/ A3.
Purpose: Disk 'storage unit composed of four disk storage modules for a 2314 DASF - A Series, or attachment to the 2319
Disk Storage Model A 1.
Highlights: See 2314 DASF - A Series.
Prerequisites: The 2312 Model A1 is designed for interconnected operation as part of a 2314 DASF-A Series, or attachment to
the 2319'Disk Storage Model A1 / A2/ A3. Customers who wish
to order a 2312 Model A 1 for stand-alone or individual use
should submit an RPQ to provide the necessary safety elements
(covers, cable connectors, etc) to complete the unit for a nonstandard (Le., not interconnected with a 2314 or 2319) environment. In lieu of the RPQ, the customer may provide safety elements equivalent to the standard 2314/2312 or 2319/2312
configuration or that provided by the above RPQ. If not provided, the unit will be offered on a purchase only basis.
Agreement for IBM to install and maintain the 2312 Model A1 in
any non-standard environment must be reviewed with
Management prior to making a commitment to the customer.
Bibliography: GA22-6822.
Highlights: See 2314 DASF - A Series.
Prerequisites: The 2313 Modei A 1 is designed for interconnectedoperation as part of a 2314 DASF-A Series or for attachment
to the 2319 Disk Storage Model A 1. Customers who wish to
order a 2313 Model A 1 for stand-alone or individual use should
submit an RPQ to provide the necessary safety elements
(covers, cable connectors, etc.) to complete the unit for a nonstandard (i.e., not interconnected with a 2314 or 2319) environment. In lieu of the RPQ, the customer may provide safety elements equivalent to the standard 2314/2313 or 2319/2313
configuration or that provided by the above RPQ. If not provided, the unit will be offered on a purchase only basis.
Agreement for IBM to install and maintain the 2313 Model A 1 in
Manany non-standard environment must be reviewed with
agement prior to making a commitment to the customer.
Bibliography: GA22-6822.
Specify
(1) Refer to the "Specify" section under 2314 DASF - A Series
for ordering instructions, codes, voltage, position designator,
etc. required for this unit when part of a 2314 DASF - A
Series. Refer to the 2319 Disk Storage Facility for ordering
instructions when this unit is to be attached to the 2319.
(2) 2316 Disk Packs are required and must be ordered separately
... see 2316.
(3) Non-Standard Environment: #9485 ... must be specified if
the 2312 is not to be installed as part of a 2314 DASF - A
Series or attached to a 2319 Disk Storage Model A1 / A2/ A3.
Also see "Prerequisites" above.
Special Features
Specify
(1) Refer to the "Specify" section under 2314 DASF - A Series
for ordering instructions, codes, voltage, position designator,
etc. required for this unit'when part of a 2314 DASF-A Series. Refer to the 2319 Disk Storage Facility when this unit is
to be attached to the 2319.
(2) 2316 Disk Packs are required and must be ordered separately
... see 2316.
(3) Non-Standard Environment: #9485 ... must be specified if
the 2313 is not to be installed as part of a 2314 DASF - A
Series or attached to a 2319 Disk Storage Model A 1. Also
see "Prerequisites" above.
Special Features
See "Special Features" under 2314 DASF - A Series. Those
features are available on this machine when it is ordered as part
of a 2314 DASF - A Series .. , they cannot be ordered when this
machine is ordered for separate use.
See "Special Features" under 2314 DASF - A Series. Those
features are available on this machine when it is ordered as part
of a 2314 DASF - A Series ... they cannot be ordered when this
machine is ordered for separate use.
i
't to be reproduced without written permissi~
-- - ---.-= -- ---~~--=
.... -
=
.--
_~_1'_
April7S
General Systems Division-Machines
.
2314 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE FACILITY - A SERIES
2860.
Purpose: Large capacity high speed direct access storage and
control for a S/360 Model 30, 40, 50, 65, 67, 75, 85, or 195, or
a S/370 Model 135 thru 195.
S/360 Model 85. '195 or S/370 Model 165. 168. 19&-a selector channel of 2860, or shared subchannel of 2880 ... see 2860,
2880.
Configurations: The 2314 DASF - A Series is composed of a
2314 Storage Control Model A1 and various combinations of the
following disk storage units, up to a maximum of eight active,
plus one spare, disk storage modules.
S/370 Model 135 Selector Channel (special feature) ... see
3135.
2312 Disk Storage Model A 1 One disk storage module
2313 Disk Storage Model A 1 Four disk storage modules
2318 Disk Storage Model A 1 Two disk storage modules
Each disk storage module provides up to 29.176 million bytes of
storage, thus a 2314 DASF - A Series can provide from 29.176
to 233.408 million bytes of online storage.
Configuration Changes: Can be made in the field ... see
"Specify" below for ordering instructions and configuration
limitations.
Note: A 2314 DASF Model 1 cannot be converted in the
field to a 2314 DASF - A Series. A 2314 DASF-A Series
can be converted in the field to a 2314 DASF-B Series ...
see 2314 Storage Control.
Highlights: The 2314 DASF - A Series provides an advanced
method of utilizing disk storage. Average access time is 60
milliseconds with a minimum of 25 milliseconds and a maximum
of 130 milliseconds. Self-formatting tracks allow variable length
identifiers and records to be easily handled. Command
Chaining-multiple records within a cylinder can be
read/written by a sequence of channel commands without
rotational delays between records-permits index and directory
searches without processor intervention. The command structure is optimized to yield efficient random or sequential processing with either randomly or sequentially organized data files. The
ability to protect "logical" files is provided by the combination of
commands in the 2314 DASF and checks within the control
programs servicing the file system. Cyclic code and bit count
checking are used to assure the integrity of stored data. The
controls necessary to attach the unit to a system channel are
included in the 2314 DASF.
Cylinder Concept: One cylinder has 20 tracks ... up to 7,294
bytes on each track ... providing up to 145,880 bytes per cylinder, available under one setting of the access mechanism.
Data Rate: 312,000 bytes per second ... with packed decimal
the rate is 624,000 digits per second.
Interchangeable 2316 Disk Packs: used on the disk storage
modules ... provide flexibility and virtually unlimited offline storage in addition to high online capacity of up to 29.176 million
bytes per pack.
Standard Features: Include the following: File Scan: For performing a comparison on selected bytes of file information.
Record Overflow: For greater utilization of storage by allowing
a record to start in olie track and end in another within the same
cylinder.
Control Unit Isolation: Allows power to be turned on or off on
the 2314 DASF without generating spurious signals that could
affect operation of the CPU program.
Prerequisites: A control unit position on a system channel.
S/360 Model 30, 40. 50 Special feature. Selector Channel ...
see 2030, 2040, 2050.
,.
~
.. ;
S/370 Model 145 Selector Channel (standard) ... see 3145.
S/370 Model 155. 158 Block multiplexer channels. See 3155,
3158.
Each disk storage module requires a 2316 Disk Pack ... these
must be ordered separately ... see 2316.
Limitations: The number of disk storage units that may be
attached to a 2314 Model A1 is limited ... see item (3) under
"Specify."
S/360 Model 30: The 2314 DASF - A Series requires a 1.5
microsecond 2030 and can be attached only to the first selector
channel. Further, when it is attached, the second selector channel is restricted as to devices that· may be attached ... see
"Channel Control Capabilities" under 2030. When a 2841 Control Unit and a 2314 DASF are both attached to a 2030, both
must be attached to the first selector channel. Because of the
high data rate of the 2314 DASF and the cycle stealing concept
of the selector channel, available program processing time is
reduced during 2314 DASF operations. This is of particular
concern when handling time dependent I/O devices, Le., 1412,
1418.. 1419, 1428. To determine the 2314 DASF loading effect,
refer to "System/360 Model 30 Channel Characteristics and
Functional Evaluations", GA24-3411. For full diagnostic support
of 2314 A Series DASFs, a minimum of 16K core storage (20;30
Model D) is required.
S/360 Model 40: The 2314 DASF may be attached to either the
first or second selector channel. However, 2314 DASFs may not
be attached to both selector channels.
Bibliography: GA22-6822.
Specify
DASF Components A 2314 DASF - A Series is composed of a
2314 Storage Control Model A1 and various combinations of
2312, 2313, and 2318 Disk Storage Model A 1s to a maximum of
eight active, plus one spare disk storage modules. Each 2312
Model A1 provides one module 11•• each 2313 Model A1 provides
four modules ... each 2318 Model A1 provides two modules.
These units have· been designed for interconnected operation as
part of a 2314 DASF-A Series. Customers who wish to order
them for stand-alone or individual use should submit an RPQ to
provide the necessary safety elements (covers, cable connectors,
etc.) to complete the unit for a non-standard (Le., not interconnected as part of a 2314 DASF-A Series) environment. In lieu of
the RPQ, the customer may provide safety elements equivalent
to the standard 2314 DASF-A Series configuration or that provided by the above RPQ. If not provided, the unit will be offered
on a purchase only basis.
Agreement for IBM to install and maintain the 2314 DASF components in any non-standard environment must be reviewed
with
Management prior to making a commitment to th~
customer.
S/360 Model 65. 67. 75 A selector channel of 2860 ... see
o be reproduced without written permission.
......
===
-- - .----.-.-
:;'.--~.":
--~.,
~.'
-:
M2314.2
April 78
GeneralSysteins Division-Machines
-~.~,,!..~ .•
Each 2314D.ASF - A Series is to be specified;on the older,a:!»
follows:
.; .
--
Note: #91180 can be specified on only one of the disk stor-
a) One 2314 Storage Control Model A1 with appropriate
specify codes indicated for it below.
b) One or more 2312 and/or 2313 and/or 2318 Disk Storage Model A 1 units, as required to provide the amount of
data storage desired by the customer. Appropriate specify
codes are required on each disk storage unit as indicated
below.
.
(6) Power Cord - 60 Amp: #9580 ... specify for the 2314 Model
A 1 if seven or more disk storage modules are to be attached.
A standard 30 amp cord is provided if six or less modules are
to be attached. Field Installation: Yes. Note: Be alert to this
60 amp cord requirement when ordering additional disk modules.
(1) Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 60 cycle): Specify the same code on
the 2314 and each 2312, 2313 and 2318-#9903 for 208V,
or #9905 for 230V.
(2) Color: For 2314 only-#9041 for red, #9042 for yellow,
#9043 for blue, #9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
(3) Position Designators: For cable definitions, a position designator code(s) must be specified for each disk storage unit,
indicating its position relative to the 2314 Model A01, as
indicated in the following diagram:
Possible
Positions #9495
2312
#9494
9495
#9493
9494
#9492
9493
9493 +
#9491
9492
9491
9492+
9491
2314
Model
A01
(8) Field Configuration Changes: Various changes, involving
installed units in a 2314 DASF - A Series, may require submission of an MES as follows:
(1) With any configuration change (increase or decrease) if
the position of installed 2312, 2313, or 2318s is changed,
their position designator codes must be changed by MES.
(2) Order new drive identifier group(s) and end. cover only if
required for the revised configuration.
(3) Refer to item (6) above for possible change in power cord
requirements.
9492
Special Feature
9494+
9495 +
9494
9495
9494
9493
9493
9492
The following features are available on the 2314 Model A 1 when
it is ordered as part of a 2314 DASF - A Series .. , they cannot be
ordered when the unit is ordered for separate use.
9491
Note: With each 2312 or 2318, specify one of the above
codes ... with each 2313, specify two. A maximum of five
position designator codes can be specified for a DASF.
(4) Drive Identifier Groups: Each disk storage module must have
a group identifier code specified to identify the ready lens
and module select plug (each DASF will receive a "Service"
module select plug) ... #9111 for lens A and plug 0, #9112 for
lens B and plug 1, #9113 for lens C and plug 2, #9114 for
lens D and plug 3, #9115 for lens E and plug 4, #9116 for
lens F and plug 5, #9117 for lens G and plug 6, #9118 for
lens H and plug 7, #9119 for lens J and plug "S." Only one
of each of the above codes can be specified for a DASF and
these must be arranged in sequence starting with #9111 as
shown in the following diagram:
Position Codes
#9495 #9494 #9493 #9492 #9491 2314
Model
A01
91159114911391129111
Possible
Drive
Identifier
Groups
(7) Additional Codes~ See "Special Features" below for additional codes required on the 2312, 2313 and 2314 if a 2844
Auxiliary Storage Control is attached to the 2314 DASF.
(9) 2316 Disk Packs: 2316s are required for the 2312s, 2313s
and 2318s. They must be ordered separately ... see 2316.
2313
2318
age units ... specify on initial DASF orders only.
9115
9114
9113
9117
9116
9115
9114
9118
9117
9116
9119
9118
9112
With each 2312-specify one identifier group.
With each 2313-specify four consecutive groups.
With ~ach 2318-specify two consecutive groups.
'~End Cover: #9180 ... specify for the 2312, 2313 or 2318
'rvhich has the highest Position Designator code in the DASF.
Remote Switch Attachment (#6148): To attach the Two Channel Switch (#8170) to a 2167 Configuration Unit in a S/360
Model 67-2 or to a S/360 Model 65 MP which has the Configuration Control Panel (#1505) installed.
2844 Attachment (#7949): To attach ,a 2844 Auxiliary Storage
Control. This feature should be ordered only when a 2844 is to
be installed ... installation of the feature without concurrent
installation of the 2844 will render the 2314 DASF inoperative.
Maximum One.
Prerequisites
(1) The 2314 DASF must have a full configuration of eight active
and one spare modules composed of two 2313 Model A1s
and one 2312 Model A1 ... the 2312 must be located next to
the 2314 Model A1.
(2) 2844 Attachment (#9750) must be specified for each 2313
Model A 1 and the 2312 Model A 1 ... #9750 can be field
installed on these units.
(3) If the 2844 has a Two Channel Switch (#8171), a 2844 Two
Channel Switch (#9765) must be specified for the 2314 Model A 1 ... #9765 can be field installed.
(4) If the 2844 has a Remote Switch Attachment (#6150), a 2844
Remote Switch Attachment (#9510) must be specified for the
2314 Model A1 ... #9510 can be field installed.
(5) If the 2844 to be used with this 2314 DASF was previously
installed with a 2314 DASF Model 1, order #9775 (2314-A
Series 'Compatibility) by MES for the 2844.
Two Channel Switch (#8170): To attach the 2314 DASF - A
Series to a second channel ... switching is under program control ... includes partitioning.
Prerequisite: If the Two Channel Switch is routed through the
Configuration Control Panel (#1505) of a multiprocessing S/360
Model 65 system, Remote Switch Attachment (#6148) is re-
Not to be reproduced without written
permis~JI!
----=
~~ General Systems Division-Machines
--------_.-
=
quired. #6148 is required in a 5/360 Model 67-2 ... see #6148
above.
., be ,reproduced without written permission.
April 78
~• •:::!='
'=
'-":~:-::
.:::
General Systems Division-Machines
..c:. -"-.c' _:. .
April 78
.
-~."".-
2314 DIRECT ACCE.SS STORAGE. FACIL~TY.~,; '8 SERIES
..
'
Purpose: Large capacity high speed direct access storage and
,control for a S/360 Model 30, 40, 50, 65, 67, 75, 85, 91,195, or
S/370 Model 135 thru 195.
Configurations: The 2314 DASF-B Series is composed of a
2314 Storage Control Model B1 and combinations of the 2319
Disk Storage Models B1 and B2 ... providing three, six or nine
(eight active plus one spare) disk storage modules. Each disk
storage module provides up to 29 million bytes ... 87 million
bytes per 2319. Thus a 2314 DASF-B Series can provide 87,
175 or 233 million bytes of online storage.
Configuration Changes: Can be made in the field ... see
"Specify" below for ordering instructions and configuration
limitations.
Note: A 2314 DASF Model 1 cannot be converted to a 2314
DASF-A or B Series. A 2314 DASF-A Series can be converted in the field to a 2314 DASF-B Series· .,. see 2314 Storage
Control.
Highlights: The 2314 DASF-B Series provides an advanced
method of utilizing disk storage. Average access time is 60
milliseconds with a minimum of 25 milliseconds and a maximum
of 130 milliseconds. Self-formatting tracks allow variable length
identifiers and records to be easily handled. Command
Chaining-multiple records within a cylinder can be
read/written by a sequence of channel commands without
rotational delays between records ... permits index and directory
searches without processor intervention. The command structure is optimized to yield efficient random or sequential process~ng with either randomly or sequentially organized data files. The
ability to protect "Iogical" files is provided by the combination of
commands in the 2314 DASF and checks within control programs servicing the file system. Cyclic code and bit count
checking are used to assure the integrity of stored data. The
controls necessary to attach the unit to a system channel are
included in the 2314 DASF.
Cylinder Concept One cylinder has 20 tracks .,. up to 7,294
bytes on each track ... providing up to 145,880 bytes per cylinder, available under one setting of the access mechanism.
Data Rate 312,000 bytes per second ... with packed decimal
the rate is 624,000 digits per second.
Interchangeable 2316 Disk Packs Used on the disk storage
modules ... provide flexibility and virtually unlimited offline storage in addition to high online capacity of up to 29.176 million
bytes per pack.
Standard Features Include the following: File Scan-for
performing a comparison on selected bytes of file information.
Record Overflow-for greater utilization of storage by allowing
a record to start in one track and end in another within the same
cylinder. Control Unit Isolation-allows power to be turned on
or off on the 2314 without generating spurious signals that
could affect operation of the CPU program.
Prerequisites: A control unit position on a system channel.
S/360 Model 30, 40, 50--special feature, Selector Channel
... see 2030, 2040, 2050.
S/360 Model 65, 67, 75-a selector channel of 2860 ... see
2860.
~
M2314.4
S/360 Model 85, 195 or S/370 Model 165, 168, 195-a
selector channel of 2860, or a shared subchannel of 2880 ...
see 2860, 2880.
S/370 Model 135-Selector Channel (special feature) ... see
3135.
S/370 Model 145-Selector Channel ... see 3145.
S/370 Model 155, 158-block multiplexer channels ... see
3155,3158.
Each disk storage module requires a 2316 Disk Pack. These
must be ordered separately ... see 2316.
Limitations: The number of disk storage units (i.e., 2319s) that
maybe attached to a 2314 Model B1 is limited ... see item (3)
under "Specify."
The 2314 DASF-B Series cannot be attached to a 2844 Auxiliary
Storage Control.
S/360 Model 30 The 2314 DASF-B Series requires a 1.5 microsecond 2030 and can be attached only to the first selector channel. Further, when it is attached, the second selector channel is
restricted as to devices that may be attached ... see "Channel
Control Capabilities" under 2030. When a 2841 Control Unit
and a 2314 DASF are both attached to a 2030, both must be
attached to the first selector channel. Because of the high data
rate of the 2314 and the cycle stealing concept of the selector
channel, available program processing time is reduced during
DASF operations. This is of particular concern when handling
time dependent I/O devices, i.e., 1412, 1418, 1419, 1428. To
determine the 2314 DASF loading effect, refer to "S/360 Model
30 Channel Characteristics and Functional Evaluations", A243411. For full diagnostic support of 2314 DASF Bs, a minimum
of 16K core storage (2030 Model D) is required.
S/360 Model 4O--the 2314 DASF may be attached to either
the first or second selector channel. However, 2314 DASFs may
not be attached to both selector channels.
Bibliography: GA22-6822.
Specify
DASF Components--a 2314 DASF-B Series is composed of a
2314 storage Control Model B1, one 2319 Disk Storage Model
B1 and optionally, one or two 2319 Disk Storage Model B2s up
to a maximum of eight active, plus one spare, disk storage modules. Each 2319 Model B1 or B2 provides three modules.
These units have been designed for interconnected operation as
part of a 2314 DASF-B Series. Customers who wish to order
them for stand-alone or individual use should submit an RPQ to
provide the necessary safety elements (covers, cable connectors,
etc.) to comple~e the unit for a non-standard (i.e., not interconnected as part of a 2314 DASF-B Series) environment. In lieu of
the RPQ, the customer may provide safety elements equivalent
to the standard 2314 DASF-B Series configuration or that provided by the above RPQ. If not provided, the unit will be offered
on a purchase only basis.
Agreement for IBM to install and maintain the 2314 DASF components in any non-standard environment must be reviewed
with
Area Management prior to making a commitment to the
customer.
a) One 2314 Storage Control Model B1 with appropriate specify
codes indicated for it below ... also see "Special Features."
Not to be reproduced without written
~
permh~'
---= =---=- General Systems Division-Machines
------ -----.-
=
b) One 2319 Disk Storage Model 81 plus one or two 2319 Disk
Storage Model 82s as required to provide the amount of data
storage as required by the customer. Appropriate specify
codes are required on the disk storage units as indicated
below.
(1) Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 60 cycle): Specify the same code on
the 2314 and each 2319 ... #9903 for 208V, or #9905 for
230V.
(2) Position Designators: For cable definitions, drive identifiers,
and module select plugs, a position designation code must be
specified for each 2319 Model 82 indicating its position
relative to the 2319 Model 81. The 2319 Model 81 will be
the first device attached to the 2314 Model 81 and be shipped with Drive Identifiers A, 8 and C, and Module Select
Plugs 0, 1 and 2, plus a Service Module Select Plug. The first
2319 Model 82 will be shipped with Drive Identifiers D, E
and F, and Module Select Plugs 3, 4 and 5. The second 2319
Model 82 will be shipped with Drive Identifiers G, Hand J
and Module Select Plugs 6, 7 and S.
On the first 2319 Model 82 specify #9181.
On the second 2319 Model 82 specify #9182.
(3) Power Cord - 60 Amp: #9580 ... specify for t~e 2314 Model
81 if three 2319s are to be attached; otherwise, a standard
30 amp cord is provided. #9580 can be field installed.
Note: 8e alert to this 60 amp cord attachment requirement
when ordering the second 2319 Model 82.
(4) Color: For 2314 only ... #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow,
#9043 for blue, #9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
(5) 2316 Disk Packs: 2316s are required for the 2319s. They
must beordered separately ... see 2316.
Special Features
The following features are available on the 2314 Model 81 when
it is ordered as part of a 2314 DASF-8 Series ... they cannot be
ordered when the unit is ordered for separate use.
Remote Switch Attachment (#6148): To attach Two Channel
Switch (#8170) to a 2167 Configuration Unit in a S/360 Model
67-2 or to a S/360 Model 65 MP which has the Configuration
Control Panel (#1505) installed.
Two Channel Switch (#8170): To attach the 2314 DASF-8
Series to a second channel ... switching is under program control ... includes partitioning.
Prerequisite: If the Two Channel Switch is routed through the
Configuration Control Panel (#1505) of a multiprocessing S/360
Model 65 system, Remote Switch Attachment (#6148) is required. Also in a S/360 Model 67-2, Remote Switch Attachment
(#6148) is required ... see #6148 above.
'- to be reproduced without written permission....
:M231fl.~~
April7S
M2315/2316.
April 78
2315 DISK CARtRIDGE
2316 DISK PACK
Purpose: High-speed rem()v~ble disk'storage:'unit for a
an 1810 or 2310 Disk Storage, the drive in an 11-31
Processing Unit (Model 2, 3), or the standard single disk
drive or Second Single Disk Storage Drive (#6415) of
Processing Unit.
drive in
Central
storage
a 2044
Purpose: High-speed, removable, interchangeable disk storage
unit for the 2314 DASF, the 2319 Disk Storage, or the 5445 Disk
Storage Drive.
Not to be reproduced without written permi f
:'.,.;... .
.... . ''.
;;:;~, ,~~~~~=~.,.
-.
-
M2314/2318"
~.:'~::.== G~nerarSyste~s Division-Machines
--..
-~.-
..
.
2314 ,STORAGE CONTROL' . ,- .
.
.
Purpose: Control'unit for
B Series.
~,
2318 DISK STORAGE - Model A1
.
a 2314 DASF-ASeries or 2314 DASF-
Model A 1 Controls up to a maximum of eight active and one
spare disk storage modules (various combinations of 2312 Model A1s, 2313 Model A1s, 2318 Model A1s) in a 2314 DASF - A
Series
Model B1 Controls three, six or nine (eight active and one spare)
disk storage modules (one 2319 Model B1 and up to two 2319
Model B2s) in a 2314 DASF-B Series.
Highlights: See 2314 DASF-A Series or 2314 DASF-B Series.
Prerequisites: The 2314 Model A1 and 2314 Model B1 are
designed respectively for interconnected operation as part of a
2314 DASF-A Series or 2314 DASF-B Series. Customers who
wish to order a 2314 for stand-alone or individual use should
submit an RPQ to provide the necessary safety elements
(covers, cable connectors, etc.) to complete the unit for a nonstandard (i.e., not interconnected as part of a 2314 DASF-A or
2314 DASF-B Series) environment. In lieu of the RPQ, the customer may provide safety elements equivalent to the standard
2314 DASF configuration or that provided by the above RPQ. If
not provided, the unit will be offered on a purchase only basis.
Agreement for IBM to install and maintain the 2314 Model A1 or
B1 in any non-standard environment must be reviewed with CE
Management prior to making a commitment to the customer.
Bibliography: GA22-6822.
Metering: Assignable Unit (2844 metered by A 1)
Purpose: Disk storage unit composed of two disk storage modules for a 2314 DASF-A Series, or attachment to the 2319 Disk
Storage Model A1 / A2/ A3.
Highlights: See 2314 DASF - A Series.
Prerequisites: The 2318 Model A1 is designed for interconnected operation as part of a 2314 DASF-A Series or attachment to
the 2319 Disk Storage Model A 1I A21 A3. Customers who wish
to order a 2318 Model A 1 for stand-alone or individual use
should submit an RPQ to provide the necessary safety elements
(covers, cable connectors, etc.) to complete the unit for a nonstanda.rd (Le., not interconnected with a 2314 DASF-A Series or
2319) environment. In lieu of the RPQ, the customer may provide safety elements equivalent to the standard 2314/2318 or
2319/2318 configuration or that provided by the above RPQ. If
not provided, the unit will be offered on a purchase only basis.
Agreement for IBM to install and maintain the 2318 Model A1 in
any non-standard environment must be reviewed with
Management prior to making a commitment to the customer.
Bibliography: GA22-6822.
Specify
(1) Refer to the "Specify" section under the 2314 DASF-A Series for ordering instructions, codes, voltage, position designator, etc. required for this unit when part of a 2314 DASF-A
Series. Refer to the 2319 Disk Storage when this unit is to be
attached to the 2319. Refer to the 2319 Disk Storage when
this unit is to be attached to the 2319.
(2) 2316 Disk Packs are required and must be ordered separately
... see 2316.
Specify
(1) Refer to
DASF-B
for this
. DASF-B
April 78
the "Specify" section under DASF-A Series or 2314
Series for ordering instructions and codes required
unit when part of a 2314 DASF-A Series or 2314
Series.
(2) Non-Standard Environment: #9485 ... must be specified if
the 2314 is not to be installed as part of a 2314 DASF-A
Series or 2314 DASF-B Series. Also see "Prerequisites"
above.
Note: Refer to "Specify" under 2314 DASF-A Series or
2314 DASF-B Series for codes to indicate desired Voltage
(1) and Color (2) or (4).
(3) Non-Standard Environment: #9485 ... must be specified if
the 2318 is not to be installed as part of a 2314 DASF-A
Series or attached to a 2319 Disk Storage Model A 1/A2/ A3 .
Also see "Prerequisites" above.
Special Features
See "Special Features" under 2314 DASF - A Series. Those
features are available on this machine when it is ordered as a
part of a 2314 DASF - A Series ... they cannot be ordered when
this machine is ordered for separate use.
Special Features
See "Special Features" under 2314 DASF-A Series or 2314
DASF-B Series. Those features are available on this machine
when it is ordered as part of a 2314 DASF-A Series or 2314
DASF-B Series ... they cannot be ordered when this machine is
ordered for separate use.
Not to be reproduced without written permis,
~
J
,
---= ---=
=---= General Systems Division-Machines
-- ------. --""
-
"".
--""
2401 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
Purpose: Magnetic tape unit for a S/360 Model 20 (submodel
5) or an 1800 system.
Models: Operate at the following 8-bit bytes/second data rates:
Modell Model 2 Model 3 Model 4 -
30,000
60,000
90,000
60,000
at
at
at
at
800 bpi
800 bpi
800 bpi
1600 bpi
Model Changes: Mdl 2 can be field changed to Model 3 ...
Model 5 to Model 6 ... no other changes are possible.
System: S/360 Model 20 (submodel 5)--only models 1, 2 and
4 attached via Native Tape Attachment (#5301. or #5302) on the
2020.
1800 Only models 1,2 and 3 can be attached.
Highlights: Single tape unit which reads or writes the following
half-inch magnetic tapes: IBM Heavy Duty. IBM Dynexcel, IBM
Series 500. or competitive formulations which meet the specifications described in SRL GA32-0006. IBM Mylar* is suitable for
use at 200. 556 or 800 bpi, but it should not be used at 1600
bpi.
On models 1, 2 and 3, a 9-Track Read/Write Head (#9558) or a
7-Track Read/Write Head (#9557) may be specified. See
"Specify" below. On models 4. 5 and 6, use of Dual Density
800-1600 BPI (#3471) permits operation at 800 bpi density as
well as at 1600 bpi. See "Special Features" below.
Nine Track Operation In 9-track format, data is recorded parallel by bit, serial by byte, in 9 tracks across the width of the tape
... tape data format uses eight of the nine bits for data, the ninth
bit serving as a parity bit. The eight data bits can represent an
alphameric or special character. two digits, a signed digit, or
eight binary bits. For this operation on a Modell, 2 or 3. #9558
is required ... see "Specify" below.
Seven Track Operation On models 1. 2. 3 only ... tape is written in 7-track format compatible with tape written by
727/729/7330/7335/7701/7702/7765 tape units and by
2401/2415s (or 2402s), or 3420s equipped with 7-Track
Read/Write Heads. For this operation, #9557 is required. See
"Specify." Seven Track Compatibility (#7125, 7126, 7127) or
Seven and Nine Track (800 BPI NRZI) Compatibility (#7135,
7136) is also required on the 2803/2804 (or 2403/2404) tape
control unit, except on 2803/2804 Model 3s. See "Special
Features" under those units.
Checking Read-back-check-while-write on all models ... vertical
parity recording on models 4 and 6 ... vertical. longitudinal and
diagonal parity recording on models 1, 2. and 3.
Error Correction Automatic in-flight single track error correction is provided for 1600 bpi 9-track format ... automatic single
track error correction for 800 bpi 9-track format during the
reread of a record containing one or more errors confined to a
single track ... all other errors are detected and conventional
error recovery routines apply.
Read Backwards All tapes (9 or 7-track) written on a
2401/2402/2403/2404/2415/2420 (9-track 1600 BPI PE
only) /
3420
can
be
read
by
any
2401/2402/2403/2404/2415/2420 (9-track 1600 BPI PE
only)/3420 in a forward or backward direction ... Data Conver*"Mylar" is a trademark of E.!. Dupont de Nemours & Co., Inc.
"IBM Mylar" is a brand of magnetic tape which includes a Mylar
polyester substrate and which was previously marketed by IBM.
sion (#3228, 32:,l6) cannot be· used on the" tape control unit
when reading 7-track tape backwards", .. tapes' written by
727/729/7330/7335/7701 /7702/7765s 'ca~not be read backward.
Power Window On machines shipped after April 1, 1966, a
powered access window, raised or lowered under push-button
control" and always lowered upon completion of the programinitiated rewind unload command. is standard ... for units shipped prior to April 1, 1966. see Power Window (#5519) under
"Special Features."
Quick Release Latch Facilitates mounting and removal of tape
reels.
Characteristics
800 BPI
Model 1 Model 2 Model 3
Bytes/ second
Density (bytes/inch)
Tape Speed (inches/ second)
Nominal Interrecord Gap
NominallRG Time
(milliseconds)
Rewind Time. incldg reload
(minutes)
Rewind and Unload (minutes)
30,000
800
37.5
.6
60,000
800
75.0
.6
90,000
800
112.5
.6
16.0
8.0
5.3
3.0
2.2
1.4
1.5
1.0
1.1
1600 BPI
Model 4
Bytes/ second
Density (bytes/inch)
Tape Speed (inches/second)
Nominal Interrecord Gap (inches)
NominallRG Time (milliseconds)
Rewind Time, incldg reload
(minutes)
Rewind and Unload (minutes)
60,000
1,600
37.5
.6
16.0
3.0
2.2
Prerequisites: 2401 Models 1, 2, 3-an 1802 ProcessorController ... one Data Channei (standard or #3222) is required
on the 1802 for one or two 2401 Models 1. 2 or 3 (or one 2402
Modell. 2 or 3). See 1802.
Maximums
S/360 Any combination of 2401 Models 1, 2 and 4 which does
not exceed six tape drives can be attached to a Native Tape
Attachment (#5301. #5302) on a 2020 submodel 5.
1800 Two 2401s, Models 1, 2 and 3 in any combination, (or one
2402 Model 1, 2 or 3) can be attached to an 1802.
Bibliography: S/360, S/370-GA22-6822, 1800-GA26-5921.
Metering: I/O Unit (Online)
Specify
(1) Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire. 60 cycle): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V.
(2) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow. #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
(3) Read/Write Head: (For Model 1. 2 or 3 only (800 bpi NRZI))
#9557 for 7-track, or #9558 for 9-track.
Prerequisite: For #9557, Seven Track COMpatibility or Seven
and Nine track Compatibility feature on the tape control ... see
"Special Features" under 1802, (2403/2404), or 2803/2804.
Note: #9557 can be changed in the field to #9558, or vice
versa, at no charge to the rental customer. On purchasr
machines. the changes can be made on an RPQ basis
\to be reproduced without written permission.
SF _*~.~=:
=
...., --=---=
_._--- -'.-
". . . ",
M2401.2
~.
General SystelTf$ Division~Machines
April 78
-.~~.,-
when 'ordering specifY #9557 ,or #9558, machin~ type and
model .. '
'
(4) Tape Reels: If any color other than gray is desired, specify
#9051 for red, #9053 for blue, or #9054 for white.
(5) Use with Native Tape Attachment #5302 on a 2020 submodel 5: Mode Compatibility (#5121) is required on each 2401
Model 1, 2 or 3 ... see "Special Features" below.
Special Features
Dual Density 800 - 1600 BPI (113471): (2401 Model 4, 5, 6 only)
Permits these drives to operate at 800 bpi in addition to 1600
bpi.
Prerequisite: Nine Track (800 BPI NRZI) Compatibility (#5320,
5321) or Seven and Nine Track (800 BPI NRZI) Compatibility
(#7135, 7136) on the 2403 Model 4, 5 or 6 controlling the 2401.
Mode Compatibility (#5121): (2401 Model 1, 2, 3 only) Required to attach these units to Native Tape Attachment (#5302)
on a 2020 submodel 5.
Power Window (#5519): (For field installation on units shipped
before April 1, 1966) All units shipped after April 1, 1966 are
equipped with a power window as a standard feature. This
feature may be ordered for field installation on units installed
without the feature.
Specify
Serial number of 2401.
Simultaneous Read-while-Write (#7160): Limitation: When
equipped with this feature, 2401 s will not operate with the
Native Tape Attachment (#5301, 5302) on the S/360 Model 20.
Not to be reproduced without written perm'
11"
---= ---=
=---=- General Systems Division-Machines
-------.-.-
- --
.
2402 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
Specify
Note: These units have been withdrawn and new orders cannot
be accepted ... the special features listed below are available for
field installation.
Machine type and serial number.
Metering: 2402 I/O Unit (Online)
Seven Track Compatibility (#7125 - 7127): Required if any
2401 or 2402 Model 1, 2 or 3 attached to the 2403 or 2404 has
a 7-Track Read/Write Head (#9557). Permits such drives to
read or write in 7-track format compatible with tape generated
by727 /729/7330/7335/7701/7702/7765 tape units and other
2401/2402/2403/2404 or 2415 tape drives equipped with
7-Track Heads.
#7125 for 2403 Model 1, 2 or 3.
#7126 for 2404 Model 1, 2 or 3.
#7127 for 2403 Model 4, 5 or 6.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Nine Track (800 BPI NRZt)
Compatibility (#5320) or Seven and Nine Track (800 BPI NRZI)
Compatibility (#7135) on a 2403 Model 4, 5 or 6.
Limitations: In 1800 only a 2402 model 1, 2 or 3 can be used.
Specify
Highlights: See "Highlights" under 24D-1.
The number of tape drives associated with this feature that will
be equipped with 7-Track Read/Write Heads (#9557).
2402 two independently operating drives in a single unit.
Models Models of all units denote the tape data rate in 8-bit
bytes/ second ... 2404s were available only in models 1, 2 and 3.
Model 1 30,000 at 800 bpi
Model 2 60,000 at 800 bpi
Model 3 90,000 at 800 bpi
Model Changes: 2402 a model 2 can be field converted to a
model 3.
Prerequisites: See "Prerequisites" under 2401.
Maximums: See "'Maximums" under 2401.
Specify
(1) Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 cycle): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V.
(2) Read/Write Heads: (For Model 1s, 2s or 3s only (800 bpi
NRZI)) #9557 for 7-track, or #9558 for 9-track.
Prerequisite: For #9557, Seven Track Compatibility or Seven
and Nine Track Compatibility feature on the tape control ... see
"Special Features" below or under 1802.
Note: #9557 can be changed in the field to #9558, or vice
for the rental customer. On purchased maversa
chines, the changes can be made on an RPQ basis ... when
ordering specify #9557 or #9558, machine type and model.
(3) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
(4) Tape Reels: If any color other than gray is desired, specify
#9051 for red, #9053 for blue, or #9054 for white.
Special Features
Note: The following features are available for field installation.
Data Conversion (#3228, 3236): Program controlled feature for
processing data with maximum packing efficiency. On a write
operation, three 8-bit bytes are written as four 6-bit tape characters ... on a read operation, four 6-bit tape characters are converted to three 8-bit bytes. #3228--on 2403 ... #3236--0n
2404. Limitation: Cannot be used when reading 7-track tapes
backward. Prerequisite: Seven Track Compatibility (#7125,
7126, 7127) or Seven and Nine Track (800 BPI NRZI) Compatibility (#7135).
.
Seven and Nine Track (800 BPI NRZI) Compatibility (#7135):
(2403 Model 4, 5 or 6 only) Satisfies the requirements of both
the Seven Track Compatibility (#7127) and Nine Track (800 BPI
NRZt) Compatibility (#5320) features ... permits reading and
writing of both 7-track and 9-track 800 bpi NRZI tapes on suitably equipped tape drives attached to the 2403 Model 4, 5 or 6.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Nine Track (800 BPI NRZI)
Compatibility (#5320) or Seven Track Compatibility (#7127).
Specify
The number of tape drives associated with this feature that will
be equipped with 7-Track Read/Write Heads (#9557).
Prerequisites: 7-Track Read/Write Head(s) on 2401/2402
Models 1, 2 or 3 attached to this 2403 and / or Dual Density
(#3471,3472) on the 2403 or attached 2402(s).
Simultaneous Read-while-Write (#7161): (2402 Model 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6 only) Required on any 2402 attached to a two-channel,
simultaneous read-while-write tape control ... 2402 Models 1, 2
or 3 require this feature when attached to a 2404 Model 1, 2 or
3 or a 2804 Model 1 or 2 '" 2402 Models 4, 5 or 6 require it
when attached to a 2804 Model 2. Limitation: When equipped
with this feature, 2402s will not operate with a 2403 or 2803
control unit.
Sixteen Drive Addressing (#7185): (2403 Model 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
only) Required where the pool of drives attached through 2816
Switching Units exceeds eight ... permits the 2403 to address up
to sixteen tape drives ... see 2816.
Power Window (#5519): (Only for field installation on units
shipped prior to April 1, 1966 '" power window(s) are standard
on units shipped after that) If. ordered, two #5519s are required
for each 2402.
It.O
be reproduced without written permission.
M2415.1
April 78
2415·MAGNETIC TAPE UNITAN'O, CONTROL
Characteristics:
PurpoSJt:Magnetic tape unit and control for a S/360 Model 20
Models: Each model has one single-channel tape control and
muJtrple independently operating tape drives.
15,000 bytes/second
30,000 bytes/ second*
Model 1 - 2 drives
Model 2 - 4 drives - 800 bpi
Model 3 - 6 drives
Model 4 - 2 drives
Model 5 - 4 drives 1600 bpi
Model 6 - 6 drives
*When equipped with an appropriate compatibility feature,
drives on these models can operate at 15,000 bytes/second
(800 bpi) ... see "Special Features."
Model Changes: A model 1, 2 or 3 can be field converted to
another model within that group ... a model 4, 5 or 6 to another
model within that group .. , no other changes are possible. See
item (1) under "Specify."
Highlights: Tape drives read and write the following half-inch
magnetic tapes: IBM Heavy Duty, IBM Dynexcel, IBM Series
500, or competitive formulations which meet the specifications
described in SRL GA32-0006. IBM Mylar* is suitable for use at
200,556 or 800 bpi, but should not be used at 1600 bpi.
The standard drives read or write 9-track tapes. Special features
permit reading and writing of 7-track tapes .. , see "Special
Features."
Nine Track Operation In 9-track format, data is recorded parallel by bit, serial by byte, in 9 tracks across the width of the tape
.... tape data format uses 8 of the 9 bits for data, the 9th bit
serving as a parity bit. The 8 data bits can represent an alphameric or special character, two digits, a signed digit, or eight
binary bits.
Seven Track Operation Tape is written in 7-track format compatible
with
tape
written
by
727/729/7330/
7335/7701/7702/7765 tape units and by 2401/2415 (or
2402/2403/2404)
and
3420s equipped
with
7-Track
Read/Write Heads. For this operation, a compatibility feature
#7125, #7127 or #7135 is required ... see "Special Features."
Checking Read:-back-check-while-write on all drives ... vertical
parity recording on 1600 bpi drives ... vertical, longitudinal and
diagonal parity recording on 800 bpi drives.
Error Correction Automatic in-flight single track error correction is provided for 1600 bpi 9;"track format ... all other errors are
. detected and conventional error recovery routines apply. The
cyclic redundancy check character is recorded on 800 bpi 9track format to maintain 2400 series compatibility ... drives are
not capable of error correction during read operations ... all
errors are detected and conventional error recovery routines
apply.
Read Backward All tapes (9 or 7-track) written on a
2401/2402/2403/2404/2415/2420 (9-track 1600 BPI PE
only)/3420 can
be
read
by any 2401/2402/2403/
2404/2415/2420 (9-track 1600 BPI PE only)/3420 in a forward
or backward direction '" Data Conversion (#3228) cannot be
used when reading 7-track tape backwards ... tapes written by
727/729/7330/ 7335/7701 /7702/7765s cannot be read backwards.
Bytes/ second
Density (byteS/inch)
Tape Speed (inches/second)
Nominal Interrecord Gap (inches)
Nomina'i IRG Time (milliseconds)
Rewind Time. incldg reload. (minutes)
Rewind and Unload (minutes)
Model 4.5.6
15,000
800
18.75
.6
30,000/15,000
1600/800
18.75
.6
32.00
32.00
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
Prerequisites: For S/360 Model 2D-lnput/Output Channel
(#4658) on the 2020 Processing Unit ... see 2020.
Bibliography: S/360 ModeI2D-GA26-3565.
Metering: Assignable Unit
Specify
(1) All 2415 models are to be ordered as follows:
2415
Model
Specify
1
2
3
One 2415 Model 001
One 2415 Model 002 and one 2416 Model 001
One 2415 Model 003 and two 2416 Model 001 s
4
5
6
One 2415 Model 004
One 2415 Model 005 and one 2416 Model 004
One 2415 Model 006 and two 2416 Model 004s
Notes: The 2416 type number is to be specified at no charge
and is to be used only for internal IBM ordering and control
purposes. List each 2415 and 2416 separately with all its
associated features.
(2) Voltage
only-~
J,)
/3-phase, 4-wire, 60 cycle):
Ir 208V, or #9905 for 230V.
For
2415
(3) Read/Write Heads: A 9-track head is furnished as standard
for each of the two drives in each 2415 and 2416, unless
Seven Track Compatibility (#7125, 7127) or Seven and Nine
Track Compatibility (#7135) is ordered for the 2415 and
7-track Read/Write Heads are specified as indicated under
those features ... see "Special Features."
(4) Color: For 2415 and each 2416 listed in (1) above, specify
one of the following-#9041 for red, #9042 for yellow,
#9043 for blue, or #9045 for gray ... the same color must be
specified for all units comprising the 2415.
(5) Empty Tape Reels: If other than standard gray reels are
desired, for 2415 and each 2416 listed in (1) above, specify
two of the following in any combination-#9051 for red,
#9053 for blue, or #9054 for white.
(6) Isolation, Control Unit: May be required on units shipped
prior to December 29, 1967 ... see "Special Features."
(7) If the 2415 is to be used as an emulating unit in a S /360
Model 20 with 1401/1440 Compatibility (#3901), see #3901
under 2020.
Quick Release Latches: .Each drive has quick release latches to
facilitate mounting and removing of tape reels.
*"Mylar" is a trademark of E.I. Dupont de Nemours & Co., Inc.
"IBM Mylar" is a brand of magnetic tape which includes a Mylar
polyester substratej,~nd which was previously marketed by IBM.
-'f~
Model 1.2.3
•
l
Not to be reproduced without written permif
;r
---= -- General Systems Division-Machines
=---=
- ------_.-
- -=
.
. 9-track heads
. 7-track heads
Special Features
Data Conversion (#3228): Program-controlled feature for processing data with maximum packing efficiency. On a write operation, three 8-bit bytes are written as four 6-bit tape characters ...
on a read operation, four 6-bit tape characters are converted to
three 8-bit bytes. Limitation: Cannot be used when reading
7-track tapes backward. Note: Specify on 2415 only.
Prerequisite: Seven Track Compatibility (#7125 or 7127) or
Seven and Nine Track (800 BPI NRZI) Compatibility (#7135).
Isolation, Control Unit (#4701, 4703): (For field installation on
units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... standard on units
shipped after that) To turn power on or off on the 2415 without
generating spurious signals. Thus, a CPU program, if it can be
logically disconnected from the system before power is turned
off, can continue operating.
#4701-for a 2415 Model 1, 2 or 3 ... #4703-for a 2415 Model
4, 5 or 6. Note: Specify on 2415 only.
Nine Track (800 BPI NRZI) Compatibility (#5320): (Models 4,
5, 6 only) Required if any of the 2415 (or 2416) drives is to read
or write 800 bpi 9-track NRZI in addition to 1600 bpi.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Seven Track Compatibility
(#7127) or Seven and Nine Track (800 BPI NRZI) Compatibility
(#7135). Note: Specify on 2415 only.
Seven Track Compatibility (#7125,7127): Required if any of
the 2415 (or 2416) drives is to read or write 7-track tape. Note:
Each 2415 and 2416 has two drives. Permits them to read or
write tape in 7-track format compatible with tape generated by
727/729/7330/7335/7701/7702/7765 tape drives and by
2401/2402/2403/2404/2415/3420 tape drives with 7-track
Read/Write Heads. #7125-for Model 1, 2 or 3 ... #7127-for
Model 4, 5 or 6. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Nine Track
(800 BPI NRZI) Compatibility (#5320) or Seven and Nine Track
(800 BPI NRZI) Compatibility (#7135).
Specify
Depending on 2415 model, #7125 or #7127 for 2415 only ... do
not specify on 2416(sj since only the unit containing control
circuits is affected. Either or both drives in the 2415 and/or any
2416 may be equipped with a 7-track Read/Write Head ... from
the following table, order only for the specific position(s) on
each unit which is to read/write 7-track tape:
Type
Model
7-track Read/Write Heads
Left Drive (A) Right Drive (B)
2415
2415
2416
2415
2416
2416
1 or 4
2 or 5
1 or 4
3 or 6
1 or 4 (first)
1 or 4 (second)
#9680
9680
9682
9680
9682
9684
2415 Model 2
2416 Model 1
9680 (left drive)
9683 (right drive)
Standard on right drive
Standard on left drive
It is desired to switch 7- and 9-track heads on the 2415 and
also on the 2416.
On 2415-Remove 9680 and install 9681
On 2416-Remove 9683 and install 9682
Removal of 9680 and 9683 in effect causes these drive positions to revert to standard 9-track heads and installation of
9681 and 9682 changes these other positions to 7-track
heads. Parts (and instructions) supplied with the MES will.
enable all drives to function in the desired manner when
installed.
Seven and Nine Track (800 BPI NRZI) Compatibility (#7135):
(Models 4, 5, 6 only) Satisfies the requirements of both Nine
Track (800 BPI NRZI) Compatibility (#5320) and Seven Track
Compatibility (#7127). Permits reading and writing of both 7and 9-track 800 bpi NRZI tape. Limitation Cannot be installed
with #5320 or#7127. For purchased machines, RPQs are available to convert #5320 or #7127 to #7135.
Specify
#7135 for 2415 only ... do not specify on 2416(s) silice only the
unit containing control circuits is affected. Either or both drives
in the 2415 and/or any 2416 may be equipped with a 7-track
read/write head ... from the following table, order only for the
specific position(s) on each unit which is to read/write 7-track
tape:
Type
2415
2415
2416
2415
2416
2416
Model
4
5
4
6
4 (first)
4 (second)
7-track Read/Write Heads
Left Drive(A) Right Drive (B)
#9680
9680
9682
9680
9682
9684
#9681
9681
9683
~81
9683
9685
Note: For any drive where a 7-track head is not specified, a
9-track head will be furnished.
#9681
9681
9683
9681
9683
9685
Note: For any drive where a 7-track head is not specified, a
9-track head will be furnished.
Ito be reproduced without written permission.
_'''''I
_ .....r: =:=
--'~.,-----:--:~' ..
~:='
':"..
-
".z, ~.~:'r"\~,._,~' ~'-."
M2501.1'
•••
.,
•
April 78
General'SystemsDlvlslon--Machlnes
2501 iARDREAbER'
Purpose: Punch~d card input unit 'for .,~ S/360' Model 20
through 85a~d .195, a S/370 Model 115 thru 195, an 1130
Computing System, or a System/3 Model 15.
Mdl
Rated 80-col Card Speed For Use With
A1
A2
600/minute
1,000/minute
S/360 Model 20, 1130
submodel1, 2 or 3,
S/3 Model 15
Model Changes: Can be made only between Models A 1 and
A2.
Highlights: The system's processing unit performs all format
control and analysis. The unit provides high-speed, low-cost
card input. Cards are read serially by a light-sensing mechanism
which is checked for proper functioning in every card cycle. The
Extended BCD Interchange Code (256 codes) can be rea.d ...
invalid codes, off-punching and mispositioned cards are detected ... when used with an 1130, all codes are considered valid.
Binary Codes When attached to a 202.0 Processing Unit submodel 2, 5 or 6, or an 1130 Central Processing Unit, or a 5415
Processing Unit, a Model A 1 or A2 can read binary codes.
All models have a 1,200-card capacity hopper and a 1,300-card
capacity stacker.
Maximum: 1130--0ne 2501 Model A 1 or A2 can be attached
to any 1131 model except 1A" 1 B, 4A or 4B ... see 1130 in
"Systems" for allowable I/O unit configurations.
System/3 Model 15 One 2501 Model A 1 or A2 can be attached
... see System/3 Model 15 in "Systems" for allowable I/O unit
configurations.
S/360 Model 20 One 2501 Model A 1 or A2 can be attached ...
see S/360 Model 20 in "Systems" for allowable I/O unit configurations.
Prerequisites: 1130-a 2501 Attachment (#8042) on the 1131
... in addition, a 2501' Coupling (#3630) is required on the 2501.
See "SpeCial Features" below.
Note: A 2501 cannot be installed with an 1131 Model 1A or
1B ... in addition, the 1130 system must have 208V or 230V
power. See "Voltage" under "Specify" for the 1131.
System/3 Model 15 A 2501 Attachment (#8090) on the 5415 ...
2501 Coupling (#3630) on the 2501. In addition, a 5424 MFCU
or a 2560 MFCM or a 1442 Model 6 or 7 is required on the
System/3 Model 15, except when Channel Terminator Feature
#1601 is installed.
Note: When a 2501 is retained from a S/360 Model 20 to be
attached to a 5415 Processing Unit, new cables must be
ordered.
M-7, M-11, OM-2, CF-4 and CF-11. OM-3 may be used if
the score is on the column 1 end. Note: Upper left corner cut
required when the M-11 or CF-11 is used on column 1 end.)
All other scores may result in unsatisfactory performance.
Bibliography:
System / 360 Model 20,
System/3, GC20-8080.
GA26-3565;
1130,
GA26-5916;
Metering I/O Unit (Online)
Specify
(1) Voltage (must be consistent with system voltage): Model A1
or A2 (AC, 60 cycle, power provided by system)-with
S/360 Model 20 or S/3 Model 15, #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V; with 1130 #9902 for 208 V, or #9904 for
230 V .. , ModelB1 or B2 (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60
cycle)-#9902 for 208 V, or #9904 for 230 V.
(2) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
(3) Cable Adapter (Model A1 or A2 with S/360 Model 20 only):
#9099. Req'd on a 2501 being attached to an installed 2020
which has a serial no under 20,000. Plant installable only,
but can be removed in the field.
(4) Use with 1130 (Model A 1 or A2 only): A 2501 Coupling
(#3630) is req'd ... see "Special Features" below.
(5) Isolation, Control Unit (Model B1 or B2 only): May be required on units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... see
"Special Features" below.
(6) If the 2501 Model A 1 or A2 is to be used as an emulation
unit in a S/360 Model 20 with 1401/1440 CompatibiUty
(#3901), see #3901 under 2020.
Special Features
2501 Coupling (#3630). [Models A 1, A2 only] Required to
attach a 2501 to an 1130 system or a System/3 Model 15.
Prerequisites For 1130-2501 Attachment (#8042) on the
1131. Also requires a 208 V or 230 V power source ... see 1131.
For System/3 Model 15-2501 Attachment (#8090) on the
5415.
S/360 Model 20 A 2020 submodel 1, 2, 5 or 6 with a 2501
Attachment (#8090) ... if the installed 2020 has a serial no.
under 20000, a Cable Adapter (#9099) is required on the 2501'.
See "Specify" below.
Card Limitations: Generally, scored cards require careful handling and a favorable environment. Use of the following scores
has been approved:
Internal Scores (before separation) M-4, M-5, OM-2,
OM-3, S-1 and 10-3 (2" x 3-1/4" or 2-3/16" x 3-3/4" sizes
only). Note: When using OM-2 or OM-3, reading must be
terminated prior to the column that is scored.)
''\ External Scores (after separation) M-3, M-4, M-5, M-6,
Not to be reproduced without written permiss.'
------
=---=
-= -=- --.. -
General Systems Division-Machines
~---~-.-.
2502 CARD READER
Purpose: Punched card input for a 3770 Data Communication
System and S/7 (5024).
Model
Rated 80-column Card Speed
A1
A2
150/minute (not with S/7)
300/minute
Model Changes: Can be made in the field.
Highlights: On the 3774 or 3775, used for automatic entry' of
punched card data to the transmission line or to offline operation units. The 3774, or 3775 Communication Terminal performs
all format control and analysis.
I nter~hangeableFeed, 66/80 Column (#4651 h. Pe.rmits .re8ding of 66..; or, SO-column cards.'· Operator can· readily set up
machine to read 66-column cards and 'reconvert it to read 80column cards. Limitation: Cannot be installed with'lnterchangeable Feed, 51/80 Column (#4650); or Optical Mark Read (#5455)
on a 3782 Model 2 attached to a 3774 or 3775.
'
Optical Mark Read (#5450). For reading of up to 40 columns of
marked data. Either marked and/or punched hole data can be
read from the same card. Cards on which a mark was unacceptable are offset stacked and the reader continues operation when
in line mode.
Cards are read serially by a sensing mechanism which is
checked for proper functioning in every card cycle. EBCDIC (256
characters) or ASCII (128 characters) code can be read, depending upon the transmission code specified for the 3774 or 3775.
Invalid codes, off-punching, and mispositioned cards are
checked.
On the System/7 used for automatic entry of punched card data
to the system. The 5024 I/O Attachment Enclosure (Models 2
or 3) performs all format control and analysis.
Hopper capacity is 700 cards ... stacker capacity is 600 cards .
.Card Limitations: Generally, scored cards require careful handling and a favorable environment. Use of the following has
been approved:
External Scores: Column 1 End-M-3, M-4, M-5, M-6, M-7,
M-11, OM-2, OM-3,CF-4, and CF-11. Column 80
End-M-5, M-7, M-11, CF-4, and CF-11.
Internal Scores: M-4, M-5, S-1, 5-2,10-1,10-2 and 10-3.
All other scores may result in unsatisfactory performance.
C-4 corner cut cards cannot be used.
Prerequisite: For Model A1 3782/2502 Card Reader Attachment (#8149) on the 3774 or 3775 Communications Terminal
and a 3782 Card Attachment Unit Model 2.
For Model A2 3782/2502 Card Reader Attachment (#8149) on
the 3774 or 3775 Communications Terminal and a 3782 Card
Attachment Unit Model 2. 5024 Model 2 or 3 with System/7.
Specify
(1) Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 cycle): For use with 3774,
3775 or S/7-#9901 for 115 V AC. Must be consistent with
system voltage.
(2) Color: #9046 for white when used with a 3774, 3775 or S/7.
(3) Cabling: Fixed length cables are supplied as standard.
(4) Documentation: One must be specified
9103 for use with System / 7
Special Features: (not with System/7-5024)
Interchangeable Feed, 51/80 Column (#4650). Permits reading of 51- or 80-column cards. Operator can readily set up
machine to read 51-column cards and reconvert it to read 80column cards. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Interchangeable Feed, 66/80 Column (#4651).
be reproduced without written permission.
U
..-,J./$l~..
....
..:.
..,....
_. 1III!it,--1:' :. General Systems Division.:..-Machines
"~.J:
M2560.1
April 78
--':~.
2560 MULTI-FUNCTION CARD MACHINE
Purpose: A multi ..function card input/output unit for a S/360
Model 20 ora System/3 Model 15.
Model A 1:. For a 2020 submodel 1, 2, 5 or 6 or for native attachment to a 5415.
Model A2: For a 2020 submodel 3 or 4, or for a 5415.
Model Changes: Can be made in the field only from Model A2
to A 1 (without Card Print feature) ... this also requires conversion from 2020 submodel 3 or 4 to 2020 submodel 1 or 2 and
change of its 2560 Attachment from #81 to #8099, both of
which can be done in the field ... or replacement of a 2020 submodel 3 or 4 by a 2020 submodel 5 or 6 equipped with 2560
Attachment (#8099).
Highlights: Provides the combined functions of a card
reader / punch, collator, and, with Card Print (#1575-1577) on a
Model A 1, . card interpreter/document printer in one unit. Permits collating, gangpunching, reproducing, summary punching,
punching of calculated results, printing and classifying of cards
in a single pass of the cards. The Extended BCD Interchange
Code (256 codes) can be read and punched ... with a 2020
submodel 2, 4, 5 or 6 or a 2025, binary codes may also be read.
Input Section Separate primary and secondary card hoppers,
each with a 1.200 card capacity, feed cards independently in
separate paths through pre-read, read and pre-punch stations.
Rated serial reading is at 500 cards/minute from either hopper
with Model A1, or 310 cards/minute with Model A2. The common reading unit, a light sensing mechanism, is checked for
proper functioning on each read cycle. Invalid codes, offpunching and mispositioned cards are detected.
Output Section From the separate primary and secondary
pre-punch stations, cards merge into a common path past the
punch, pre-print and print stations, and on into anyone of the
radial stackers, each with a 1,300 card capacity. Mdl A 1 has five
stackers and Model A2 has four stackers. Blank or prepunched
cards can be punched.
Rated serial punching speeds
Model A1
Model A2
160 cols/ sec
120 cols / sec
For S/360 Model 20, submodel 3 or 4 the 2560 Model A2 requires a 2560 Model A2 Attachment (#8100) on the 2020.
For System/3 Mdl 15 the 2560 Model A 1 or A2 requires a 2560
Attachment (#8100) on the 5415. In addition, a 2560 Model A 1
requires a 2560 Mdl A 1 Attachment (#9801) on the 5415. If the
system includes a 5445 Disk Storage(s), 1442/2560 Compatibility (#9751) is required on each 5445 Model 1 or 3. A 5422 Disk
Enclosure with a minimum or one 5444 Model A2 is also required. Limitation: Cannot be attached with a 5424 MFCU or a
1442 Model 6 or 7. Note: When a 2560 is retained from a
S / 360 Model 20 to be attached to a 5415, new cables must be
ordered.
Card Limitations: Generally, scored cards require careful handling and a favorable environment. Use of the following scores
has been approved.
Internal Scores (before separation)-S-1, and for a maximum of five passes, M-4 ... M-5 may be used if the operator
limits the stackers to 1,000 cards and the number of passes
does not exceed five ... cards folded at the crease (card fold
crease S-2) must be properly flattened.
External Scores (after separation)-for reading, punching
and printing: On the column 1 end-M-7, M-11 and CF-11;
on the column 80 end-M-3, M-6*, M-7, OM-2* and CF-4*
(maximum of five passes for CF-4). For reading only: On the
column 80 end-M-4, M-5, M-11 and CF-11 .
*Punching not recommended if card has O.K. verify notch.
All other scores may result in unsatisfactory performance.
Bibliography: System/360 Model 20, GA26-3565; System/3,
GC20-8080.
Metering: I/O Unit (Online)
Some rated throughputs, in
cards/minute, are:
First 10 columns only
First 40 columns only
First 60 columns only
80 columns
2560 Model A 1 requires a 2560 Model A 1 Attachment (#8099)
on the 2020. If it is to be attached to an installed 2020 with
serial no. under 20000, a Cable Adapter (#9099) is required on
the 2560 ... see "Specify."
Specify
260
145
112
91
173
100
79
65
Actual speed depends upon the last column punched. Interspersed columns between fields to be punched are counted
at the rated serial punching speed.
Multi-function With the ability to move cards from either hopper under independent control to the punching station and with
complete stacker selection flexibility, the common card functions
of collating, reproducing, gangpunching, summary punching,
and selective stacking can be accomplished ... singly or in combination.
Limitation: When attached to the System/3 Model 15, only
Extended BCD Interchange Code can be read or punched.
Maximum; One 2560 can be attached to a S/360 Model 20, or
a S/3 Model,15. in "Systems" for allowable I/O unit configurations.
Prerequisites: For S/360 Model 20, submodel 1, 2, 5 or 6--the
(1) Voltage (AC, 60 cycle, power provided by system): #9903 for
208V, or #9905 for 230V ... must be consistent with system
voltage.
(2) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
(3) Cable Adapter (Model A 1 only): #9099. Required if the 2560
is to be attached to an installed 2020 which has a serial no.
under 20000 ... plant installation only, but can be removed in
the field.
(4) If the 2560 is to be used as an emulation unit in a S/360
Model 20 with 1401/1440 Compatibility (#3901), see #3901
under 2020.
Special Features
Card Print (#1575, 1576, 1577). Model A 1 only #1575 (plant
installation only) Each provides a print unit with two print heads
for printing two lines. Printing is on the face-down side of cards
passing through the print unit. Each head prints a maximum
horizontal line of 64 printing positions, spaced
10
characters/inch, extending approximately between card columns
Not to be reproduced without· written permi1"
--
----.--=
=
=---=
·General Systems Division-Machines
----_..
.
2 and 75. Printing can be operator-adjusted to any of the 25 line
positions from above the "12-punch" row to below the
"9-punch" row ... see "Limitation" below. Each head prints any
of the characters from the standard 63-character set printed by
a 2203 Printer. Rated speed is 140 print positions/second.
regardless of the number of heads per print position simultaneously activated ... interspersed blank print positions between
fields to be printed count at the 140 position, second rate. Actual speed depends upon the location of the last position. on any
line, printed on a card. #1575--for first two lines ... #1576-for
second two lines ... #1577-for third two lines. Limitation: In
punched fields, printing on any of the twelve even numbered
lines will probably result in parts of characters being lost because of printing on holes, and should normally be avoided ...
printing on line position 5 should be avoided because of possible
smearing. Prerequisites: Card Print Control (#1580) on the
2020 submodel 1, 2, 5 or 6 or 5415 ... #1576 requires #1575 ...
#1577 requires #1576.
.
~
reproduced without written permission.
M2S6"
Nov
78-
-- =1IIiII!,...-::-
M 2700.1
~~...;
~'---"-' ..
--~- General Systems Division-Machines
- - - ---------
Nov 78
-~-.-
In Chart 1, at the intersection of the 2740 mdl 2 row and
the 3705 column, the entry reads "ADG." This entry
points to Facility Charts A, 0 and G.
TERMINOLOGY
In these pages, the term "Data Terminal Equipment" and its a
abbreviation "DTE" will mean any business machine which has
a telecommunications capability, be it a terminal, a multiplexer
or a CPU with an integrated communications adapter.
Also, the term "Data Communications Equipment" and its
abbreviation "DCE" will mean any equipment whose function it
is to convert DTE signals into a form suitable for transmission
over a communication facility, and to convert-signals received
from a communication facility into a form suitable for transfer
to
a
DTE.
This
DCE
may
be
a
modem
(MOdulator/DEModulator), a telegraph line adapter or another
type of signal converter equipment.
Finally, the term "Automatic Calling Equipment" and its abbreviation "ACE" will mean that equipment which will accept dial
digits from the DTE and present them to the telephone central
office for the purpose of effecting a switched network connection.
Reference to these Charts show that, since feature codes
are entered for both the 2740 mdl 2 and the 3705, communication between them is possible over Facilities A4,
01, D1M, 02, D2M, G1 and G2.
-
Further, the A and G Facility Charts show, for both the
2740 mdl 2 and the 3705, the feature codes required on
each to allow this intercommunication.
Finally, reference should be made to the M 2740 and the
3705 pages to assure that any restrictions or prerequisites to the installation of the indicated features are satisfied.
MULTIPLE SUPPLIER SYSTEMS POLICY
These pages are organized into three intercommunication capability charts, which are:
Non-IBM modems are attached to IBM DTE's under the provisions of the IBM Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
Such attachments are delineated in the
"M" suffix facilities in these pages, and information on the
DCE's so attached is available. See "Reference Material"
following:
-
REFERENCE MATERIAL
ORGANIZATION
-
#1, IBM Start/Stop DTE Intercommunication Capability
Table
#2, IBM Synchronous DTE Intercommunication Capability
Table
#3, IBM Parallel Tone DTE Intercommunication Capability
Table
The HONE configurator, CFM2700, is available for information
on TP configurations and IBM and non-IBM DCEs.
and seven communication facility charts, which are:
-
-
#A, Common Carrier Private Line (non-switched) Telegraph
Channels
#C, Common Carrier Public Switched Networks
#0, Common Carrier Private Line (non-switched) Voice
Grade Channels
#E, Common Carrier Private Line (non-switched) Wideband
Channels
#G, Customer Owned and Maintained Limited Distance
Facilities
#H, Common Carrier Parallel Transmission Channels
#X, Common Carrier Private Line (non-switched) Digital
Data Communication Services
UTILIZATION
To utilize these pages:
First, refer to the appropriate intercommunication chart,
finding the desired DTEs, and determining if they are'
capable of intercommunication.
-
At the intersection of the row and column associated
with the desired DTEs, read the alphabetic designations
for the facilities over which they may communicate.
Refer to the charts for the facilities so designated to find
the particular facility and the required feature codes for
the DTEs which will allow their communication.
Refer to the individu'al "Machines"
pages
for the DTE's to determine prerequisites, restrictions,
etc.
'For example, assume that communication between a 2740 mdl
.2 and a 3705 is desired.
Since this would obviously be in Start/Stop mode, the first
reference would be to Chart 1.
Not to be
reproduc~c:j
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
The customer must be advised, in writing, that:
He is responsible for making arrangements for price
quotations, installation and cost (initial and recurring) of
the common carrier supplied facilities/ services.
He is responsible for all toll charges incurred in the installation and maintenance of the IBM equipment.
He must be prepared to relinquish the system for service
in those cases in which service aids or available error
message printouts do not permit localization of a malfunction to the communication facility or terminal location.
He is responsible for the DTE/DCE and DTE/ ACE interface compatibility when he, or the common carrier, provides the DCE or ACE,
Due to the nature of the teleprocessiog environment, it is possi;..
ble that the throughput anticipated on the specified network
configuration with recommended channel conditioning will not
be achieved. The probability of this is slight, though it is more
likely at the higher data signalling rates or when using an
acoustic coupler. Some actions that can be taken if antiCipated
throughput is not achieved are:
re-dialing the connection if operating on the Public Switched
Telephone Network
adjusting the block size, where possible, to optImIze
throughput based on the error characteristics of the communications facility being used
requesting the Common Carrier, if appropriate, to provide
alternate routing or facility improvements. This is normally
without written
~ep-
-----= - --==----=
-!)------
=
ljj:2700~
.-
General Systems Division-M~chines
Nov 78
-~-y-
MULTIPOINT OPERATION
provided. at extra cost. The Common Carrier's representative should be contacted for further details.
Duplex communication facilities are required for multipoint
systems in which it is desired that a continuous carrier be
maintained on the line from the control station, thereby eliminating the control station "Ready for Sending" delays.
However, it is possible that, at a particular location, only
lower speed operation will be possible.
In addition, the customer should be advised that his local IBM
representative is available to assist him in analyzing and planning for his responsibilities in installing or operating teleprocessing configura~ions.
The use of duplex facilities and the operation in the continuous
carrier mode is strongly recommended since control station
operation in a non-continuous carrier mode will subject the
system to inordinate delays, particularly in the polling and
addressing sequences.
'I
!
The
Marketing Representative must have the customer
obtain a firm installation date for the start of transmission
service prior to processing the OC card.
When using IBM Modems, IBM Integrated Modems or IBM
Line Adapters, it is recommended that the customer investigate
the economics of providing alternate voice grade service to
facilitate installation and maintenance.
CHART 1
Start/Stop Data Terminal Equipment Intercommunication Capability Chart
1051
1031A
1034
1051
1061
ACDG
2025
2701
2702
2703
3115
3125
DG
DG
DG
DG
D
D
D
D
D
ACDG
CDG
ACDG
DG
DG
1071
3704
3705
D
DG
DG
D
D
D
D
ACDG
ACD
ACD
ACDG
ACDG
DG
DG
D
D
DG
DG
DG
DG
DG
3135
CD
2740 mdl 1
CDG
CDG
CDG
CDG
CD
CD
CD
CDG
CDG
2740 mdl2
ADG
DG
ADG
ADG
AD
AD
D
ADG
ADG
2741
CDG
CDG
CDG
CDG
CD
CD
CD
CDG
CDG
2845
D
D
D
D
2848
D
D
D
D
5010
CDG
CD
CD
CD
CDG
CDG
5100
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
5110
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
C
C
C
A
A
CDG
CDG
CDG
CMCST
C
C
C
C
C
TTY (1)
A
A
A
A
A
TWX 33/35
C
C
C
C
C
TWX 37
C
C
C
'~reproduced
3792
without written permission.
4955
CD
CD
C
C
4953
~
SYNCHRONOUS DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT INTERCOMMUNICATION CAPABILITY CHART
M
I
I
~
0
~
1131
COX COX COX
~.
CD
~
~
COX
CD
....N'"
N
........
N
~
'"
M
COX COX
COX
I
~
'"
N
M
'" ....
M
M
COX
COX
... ..J
.... 0
~:;
N
M
~
to
....
~
....
N
to
M
~
'
...
g
(!)
'"~
~
~
~ ~
~
~
COX
COX
1826
COX COX COX
CD
COX
CD
COX COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
2020
COX COX coex
CD
coex CD
COX COX
coex
coe
COX
coex
CO ex
2025
CD
CD
CD
CD
2701
COX COX cO ex
CD
CO ex CD CD COX COX
2703
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD CD CD
CD CD CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
coex
coex COX OX OX
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
2772 -
COX COX COX
CD
COX
CD
COX COX
COX
COX
COX
2780
COX COX COX
CD
COX
CD
COX COX
COX
COX
COX
3115
COX COX COEX
CD
CO EX CD CD COX COX
COEX
COEX CD
3125
COX COX COEX
CD
coex CD CD COX COX
COEX
3135
COX COX COX
CD
2751
0
M
M
~
M
M
'"~'"
~
0
0
'"
0
'"
~
~
CD
CO ex
COX
COX COX COX
CD
0
CD
CD
CD
CD
COX
CD
CD
coex CO EX coex
CD
COX
CD
~
::l
COX
COX
I
(!)
COX
coex
'"
13
COX
0
N
~
~
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
coex coex coex
!
~
COX
CD
i
COX
CD
CD
COX
CD
CD
CD
COX
COX
COX
COX
COE,X -COEX COEX
CD
CD
CD
CD
,COX
,~
'l~
COX
..
'
coex;
CD
COEX
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX'
OX OX
COX OX
COEX
COEX
COX
COX COX COX
COEX COEX COEX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COEX coex COEX
c:;~~.
coex
COX OX OX
COX OX
COEX
COEX
COX
COX COX COX
COEX COEX COEX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
coex coex coex
co1:x
COX OX
COX
COX
COX
COX COX COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
OX
OX
CD CD COX COX
COX
COX
COX OX OX
OX
0
OX
OX
OX
3274
OX
OX
OX
OX
OX(4)
OX(4)
3275
COX
CD
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
OX
OX(4)
OX(4)
COX(4)
COX(4)
OX(4)
OX(4)
OX
M
N
0
COX
OX
... ...
M
COX OX
3271
3276'1-4
'"
OX
I
,
327611-14
0(4) OX(4)
3601
3604
0(4)
3614
OX(4) 0(4) OX(4)
COX
COX
OX
-
OX
---'-f--
COX
COX
COX
C-QX
OX
OX
OX
OX
OX
OX
OX
OX
COX
COX
COX
COX
OX
OX
OX
OX
I:'
,',
0(4) 014)
0
3651·50
OX(4)
OX(4)
CO(4)
CO(4)
C
C
0
3659
C
3669
0
3671
0
COX OX OX(4)
COX OX(4) OX(4) OX(4)'
OX(4) CO(4)
C
0
coex
COEX
COX
COX COX COX COX COEX coex
coex
COX
COX
CD
COX
COEX
coex
COX OX OX(4)
COX OX(4) OX(4) OX(4)
OX(4) CO(4)
C
,0
COEX
coex
COX
COX COX COX COX COEX COEX coex
COX
COX
CD
COX
CD
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
CD
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
CD
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX COX
COX
COX
COX
CD
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX COX COEX
CD
coex CD CD CD
3705
CQX COX coex
CD
coex
CD CD COX COX
3735
COX
3741
COX
3747
COX
COX
CD
CD
COX COX
3791
4953
f--~
4955
I---
5010
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COEX
-COX COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
CDEX
COEX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COEX CD
COEX
COEX COX
CDEX
CDEX
COX
COX
COX
CDX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
CDX
CDX
COX
COEX
COX
CDX
COX
COX
COX
COX
CD CD
COEX
COX
COX
COX
COX
-i---~~~~-~~-
COX
COX
COX
COX
CD
COX
COX
CD
COX
CD
CDX CDX
..
COX
COX
COX
COX
~¥-
~O!_ ~~ coex CO~~
COX
COX(6)
COX
CDX
COX
COX
COX CDX
COX
CDX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
CDX
COX
COX
COX
CDX
COX
COX
COX
(OX COX
CDX
COX
CDX
COX(6) CDX
COX
COX
COX
CDX
COX
COX
COX
CDX
COX
CDX
COX
CD
COX
COX
CDX
COX
CDX
COX
COX
COX
CDX
COX
CDX
COX
CDX
COX
_ CD
CDX
COX -, COX
CDX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
CDX
COX
COX
CDX
coex
COEX
CDX
CD
COX
COX
COX
COX
CDX
CDX
COX
COX
CDX
COEX COEX COEX
COEX
CDX OX
cDE'i<- f-coEX
COX
CD
CDX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COX
COEX COEX COEX
CDEX
COX
COX
coex
COX
COX
coex coex
COX
COX(6)
COX
I
OX
OX
----
+cDX
CD
COX
CD
COX CDX
CDX
CDX
,d
COX
CDEX
CD
coex
CD
CDX CDX
CDex
COEX COX D
J
COX
CDEX
CD
CDEX CD
COX CDX
CDEX
CDex COX C
OX
CDX
coex
CD
COEX CD
COX COX
CDex
COEX COX C
OX
COX DX
COEX
CD EX
COX
CD
CDX
CDX
CDX
COX
COX
COX
CDX
COX
CDEX
CD
coex
COX COX
CDEX
CDEX COX C
OX
COX OX
CDEX
COEX
COX
CD
CDX
CDX
COX
COX
COX
COX
CDX
---~,
COX
-+--t---
COX
CD
-_ -
COX
COX
I
COX
COX
coex
'COX
"
COX
COX
coex
COX
-CD
COX
COX
coex
COX
COX
coex
coex
\
COX
COEX
coex COEX coex
COX
COX(6)
I
coex COEX COEX
COX
coex
COX
>
COX
COX
COX
-~1-12
0
COX
coex
1 5110 -,5231-2
0
coex , coex
3704
3780
0
,
-
J
coex COEX
c'OEX
COEX
CDEX
---= -=---=General Systems Division-Machines
-- -----
=
- - - - -
-
yo
PARALLEL TONE DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT INTERCOMMUNICATION CAPABILITY CHART
024/026 1001
H
1092
1093
H
H
7770
7772
1001
H
H
H
1092
H
H
H
1093
H
H
H
7770
H
H
H
7772
H
H
H
Notes for CHARTS 1, 2 and 3
(1) The TTY terminals referred to are Telephone Company
83B2/83B3 or Western Union Plan 115A terminals.
(2) The 1131, 1826, 2715 mdl 2, 2772, 2780, 3271, 3275,
3735, 3780, System/3, System/32, System/34 and S/360
mdl 20 can be intermixed as tributary stations on a multipoint non-switched line. The control station must be one of
the following:
-
Nov 78
-
CHART 3
024/026
M 2700.3
a S/360 mdl 25 with an Integrated Communications
Adapter and the appropriate BSC features.
a S/370 mdl 115, 125 or 135 with an Integrated Communications Adapter and the appropriate BSC features.
a S/360 or S/370 with an attached, appropriately configured, 2701, 2703, 3704 or 3705 '" see M 2701, M
2703, M 3704 and M 3705 pages for the CPU models to
which these multiplexers may be attached.
The 1131, 2772, 2780, 3671 and S/360 model 20 can be
intermixed as tributary stations on .a multipoint nonswitched line when the control station is a S/360 mdl 50 (or
larger) or a S/370 mdl 145 (or larger) with an attached,
appropriately configured 2701, 2703, 3704 or 3705.
See SRL GA27-3004 for information on which BSC terminals may communicate with each other over point-to-point
non-switched lines.
See SRL's GC30-1005, GC30-2004 and GC30-5001 for the
limitations and restrictions on these types of operations.
(3)Appropriatelyconfigured 1131's, 1826's, 2701's, 2703's,
2715 mdl 2's, 2772's, 278"C)'s, 3704's, 3705's, 3735's,
3741's,
3747's,
3780'5,
System/3's,' System/32's,
System/34's, S/360 mdl 20's and 25's, and S/370 mdl
115's, 125's and 135's may communicate over the public
switched telephone network to the same BSC line appearance on a S/360 mdl 25 (except for the 3741'sand 3747's),
a S/370 md1115, 12501- 135 or a S/360 or S/370 with an
attached, appropriately configured, 2701, 2703, 3704 or
3705.
See SRL's GC30-1005, GC30-2004 and-GC30-5001 for the
limitations and restrictions on this type of operation.
(4) The 3271 models 11 and 12, 3274, 3275 models 11 and 12,
3276, 3.601, 3602, 3614, 3651 . model 50, 3767, 3771,
3773, 3774, 3775, 3776, 379'1 and System/32 may communicate over a non-switched voice grade line with a 3704
or 3705 using Synchronous Data Link Control. This communications uses the Synchronous Data Link Control, in which
the control station may be receiving from one tributary station while it is transmitting to a second tributary station. For
this mode of 9peration, a duplex communications facility
and a duplex line set at the 3704/3705 is required. Normal
half-duplex or duplex communications facilities is also supported.
(5) See the SCP Programming pages for information on which
intercommunication capability is supported by the
3704/3705 Emulation and Network Control Programs.
(6) The 5251 Model 12 will communicate over non-switched
and switched communication lines with a 5340 (System/34)
and a 5381 (System/38) via the SNA/SDLC protocol.
When a multipoint line is used, the 5340 provides the necessary control station support for the 5251 Model 12. Normal half-duplex operation on half-duplex or duplex communication facilities is supported under SDLC.
_-
-- ......
- - . .-.-.- - ------... -
-
M 2700.4
General Systems Division-M~chines
Nov 78
-~"",y-
CHART A
COMMON CARRIER NON-SWITCHED D. C. TELEGRAPH CHANNELS
FACILITIES A 1 -
Type 1002 Channel, Pt-to-Pt or Multipoint at 45. 5 bps (1)
IBM MACHINE TYPE
2025
2701
2702
2703
Telegraph Line Adapter 7411
9641
(2)
7860
7911
9680
7895
7911
4873
7876
7897
(3)
3115
3125
3704
3705
7881
9733
(2)
4721
9601
FACILITIES A2 -
Type 1002 Channel, Pt-to-Pt or Multipoint at 56.9 bps (1)
IBM MACHINE TYPE
2025
2701
2702
2703
Telegraph Line Adapter 7411
9645
(2)
7861
7911
9681
7895
7911
4874
7876
7897
(3)
3115
3125
3704
3705
7881
9734
(2)
4721
9602
FACILITIES A3-
Type 1002 Channel, Pt-to-Pt or Multipoint at 74.2 bps (1)
IBM MACHINE TYPE
2025
2701
2702
2703
Telegraph Line Adapter 7411
9649
(2)
7862
7911
9682
7895
7911
4875
7876
7897
(3)
3115
3125
3704
3705
7881
9735
12)
4721
9603
FACILITIES A4 -
Type 1005 Channel, Pt-to-Pt or Multipoint at 75 bps (1)
IBM MACHINE TYPE
1051
2025
2702
2703
Telegraph Line Adapter 7873
7411
9637
(2)
4615
9683
7895
4696
4876
7876
7897
(3)
2704
Mdl2
3115
3125
3704
3705
7807
7881
9736
(2)
4721
9604
Notes for CHART A
(11 Facilities Al, A2, A3 and A7 are Telephone Company supplied Type 1002 or Type 1005 Channels, Facilities A4, A5, A6 and A8 are Western Union supplied Type
1002 or Type 1005 Channels. The terminals on the A 1 through A6 Facilities are Telephone Company 8382 or 8383 or Western Union Plan 115A terminals.
(2) The 2025, 3115 and 3125 codes are for the attachment of the first communication line. See the M2025, M3115 and M3125 pages for additional line attachment
feature codes.
(3) The 2703 Line Set code (#7897) is for the attachment of up to eight communication lines. See the M2703 pages for additional line attachment feature codes. When
operating two 2703s in series on the same telegraph channel, RPO S30017 (no charge) must be installed on one 2703 and RPO S30018 (no charge) must be
installed on the other 2703. These RPOs are not required to operate two telegraph line appearances on the same 2703 in series on the same telegraph channel.
---- - General Systems Division-M~chines
-----
M 2700.5
: ::-:. =-=
Nov 78
-~-.-
CHARTC
PUBLIC SWITCHED NETWORKS (See Note 13)
FACILITY C1 -
Start-stop Operation @ 300 bps on the Public Switched Telephone Network
IBM MACHINE TYPE
3704
3705
1200 bps Integrated
Modem
4782
9612
7111'
or
7113
9540
5502
1200 bps Integrated
Modem with
Interrupt
4786
9612
7113
9540
5506
FACILITY C1 M -
Start-stop Operation @ 134.5 bps or 300 bps on the Public Switched Telephone Network via Standalone DCEs attached under the provisions of
the IBM Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
IBM MACHINE TYPE
1051
2025
2701
2702
2703
Interface to
Standalone DCE
(1)
9114
7401
9621
(2)
4640
9581
4615
9684
3233
4696
4878
3205
(3)
1300
1302
1290
Interface to
Standalone ACE
3767
2740
M1
2741
3255
9114
3255
9114
1340
(2)
(2)
3115
3125
3135
3704
3705
1231
9739
or
1241
9738
(2,
15)
4640
9625
9721
(2)
4711
or
4714
9606
or
9612
(15)
1291
(2)
1290
9777
(2)
4715
(5)
FACILITY C2-
Start-stop Operation @ 110 bps, 134.5 bps or 150 bps on the TWX Network
IBM MACHINE TYPE
1051
Interface to CPTTWX Service @ 110
bps (1, 6)
Interface to CFTWX Service @
134.5 bps (1, 6)
2025
2701
2702
2703
7401
9633
7885
7912
3233
7912
4877
3205
(3)
4640
9581
4615
9684
3233
4696
4878
3205
(3)
(2)
9114
7401
9621
(2)
2740
M1
3255
9114
2741
3255
9114
3115
3125
3135
1241
9737
(2)
4640
9785
(2)
1244
9738
(2)
3704
3705
3767
3792
7111
or
7113
9540
3719
(15)
3701
5010
CMCST
2165
(4)
4953
4955
1610
or
2092
5010
5100
5110
CMCST
2165
1525
1525
(4)
4711
or
4714
9605
4711
or
4714
9606
4711
or
4714
9611
Interface To CPTTWX Service @ 150
bps (1,6)
Interface to
Standalone ACE
on the CE-TWX or
CPT-TWX Services
1300
1302
1290
(2)
1340
1291
(3)
(2)
4715
(5)
FACILITY C3 -
Synchronous Operation @ 600 bps on the Public Switched Telephone Network
IBM MACHINE TYPE
3704
3705
3767
5320
5340
5381
9531
5502
5501
2500
5501
4703
(2)
5501
5502
5508
1200 bps Integrated
Modem
4782
9607
(9)
FACILITY C3M -
Synchronous Operation @ 600 bps on the Public Switched Telephone Network via Standalone DCEs attached under the provisions of the IBM
Multiple Supplier Systems Polic~
IBM MACHINE TYPE
3115
3125
3135
Interface to
Standalone DeE
(1)
7141
(2)
Interface to
Standalone ACE
(5)
1295 1290
(2)
'9777
(2)
4640
9601
9625
9649
(2)
3275
M1,2
3440
3704
3705
3767
4714
9607
(9)
4714
9607
or
9615
'(9)
3719
9531
9619
4715
4715
4953
4955
2074
or
2094
or
2090
5406
5408
5410
5412
5415
5320
5340
5381
3701
4703
2500
5501
4703
(2)
3701
2074
4703
9392
9483
9750
(2)
5760
1315
(2)
-- -- --_.- -
-,.------- --- General Systems Division-Machines
---
M 2700.6
Nov 78
y
FACILITY C4 -
Synchronous Operation @ 1200 bps on the Public Switched Telephone Network
3661
3704
3705
3735
5501
4782
(9)
4782
(9)
5501
5501
4791
4709
4791
3791
5010
5110
5231
M2
5251
2-12
5501
6301
(12)
5501
5501
5501
5502
4703
IBM MACHINE TYPE 2701
3275
M1.2
1200 bps Integrated
Modem
4782
4782
5500
or
5501
1200 bps Integrated
Modem with
ACO feature (7)
4782
4791
3774
IBM MACHINE TYPE 3775
1200 bps Integrated
Modem
5501
or
5502
3276
M1114
3741
3747
3115
3125
5502
9490
5320
5340
5381
5501
2500
5501
4703
(2)
5501
5502
5508
3787
5502
9532
3771
3773
(Contd
below)
5501
or
5502
5408
5410
5412
5415
4782
1200 bps Integrated
Modem with
ACO feature (7)
FACILITY C4M -
Synchronous Operation @ 1200 bps on the Public Switched Telephone Network via Standalone DCEs attached under the provisions of the IBM
Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
IBM MACHINE TYPE 1131
1826
2020
2025
2701
2703
Interface to
Standalone DCE
(1)
7551
7552
4703
7551
7541
(2)
7698
7692
(8)
7705
7710
(3)
1315
1300
(2)
1314
1340
(3)
7690
Interface to
Standalone ACE
, (5)
IBM MACHINE TYPE 3705
3735
Interface to
Standalone DCE
(1)
4714
9608
or
9615
(9)
7705
Interface to
Standalone ACE
4715
3741
3747
7705
9123
3767
3719
9532
9619
3771
3773
3774
3775
1482
3701
1482
3701
2715
M2
7705
2772
2780
3115
3125
3135
7705
9123
9402
7705
9110
9402
7141
(2)
7141
(2)
4640
9625
9649
(2)
1295
(2)
1295
(2)
1290
9777
(2)
3780
3791
7705
9123
9402
3701
6301
4953
4955
2074
or
2094
or
2090
5010
5110
4800
4703
2074
3701
3275
M1.2
3440
3278
M1114
3701
6301
9490
(Contd
below)
3861
3704
3701
4714
9608
(9)
4715
5406
5408
5410
5412
5415
5231
M2
5251
2-12
5320
5340
5381
4780
9483
9751
3701
4703
3701
4703
2500
3701
4703
(2)
3701
2074
4703
9392
9483
9751
(2)
5760
1315
(2)
(5)
FACILITY C5 -
Synchronous Operation @ 2400 bps on the Public Switched Telephone Network,
IBM MACHINE TYPE 1131
1826
2020
2025
2701
2703
2715
M2
2772
2780
3115
3125
3135
2400 bps Integrated
Modem
3276
M1114
3651
M50
3701
6302
9490
9822
(Contd
below)
3669
3704
(1l)
4761
or
4771
(9.
10)
Interface to IBM
3872 Modem
Interface to ACO
Feature (#1091)
on IBM 3872 (7)
7690
7551
2074
7551
(2)
7698
(8)
7710
(3)
1315
1300
(2)
1314
1340
(2)
(4)
9120
9402
9110 7151
9402(2)
7131
9758
or
7151
(2)
4640
9609
9625
9649
(2)
1295
(2)
1295
9777
1290
(2)
(2)
9120
4714
(9)
4715
-- ---=---=- General Systems Division-Machines.::
- -----..
M 2700.7
-= -
Nov 78
-~-
IBM MACHINE TYPE
3705
3735
2400 bps Integrated
Modem
4761
or
4707
(9,
10)
5610
4714
(4)
Interface to IBM
3872 Modem
3741
3747
3767
3771
3773
3774
3775
3776
3777
3780
5610
5610
3791
4953
4955
5010
5110
5231
M2
5251
2-12
5320
5340
5381
5610
2500
5610
3701
5406
5408
5410
5412
5415
(2)
9121
(9)
1660
9121
3718
9533
9619
1481
3701
1481
3701
9120
9402
3701
6302
(12)
2074
or
2094
or
2090
4800
2074
3701
3701
4780
9483
9753
2500
3701
(2)
5760
2074
9392
9483
9753
(2)
1315
Interface to ACO
Feature (# 1091 )
on IBM 3872 (7)..,
4715
FACILITY C5M -
Synchronous Operation @ 2000 or 2400 bps on the Public Switched Telephone Network via Standalone DCEs attached under the provisions of
the IBM Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
(2)
3701
IBM MACHINE TYPE
1131
1826
2020
2025
2701
2703
2715
M2
Interface to
Standalone DCE
7690
7551
2074
7551
7698
7710
(4)
(2)
(8)
(3)
1300
1314
2772
2780
3115
3125
3135
9120
9402
9110
9402
7151
7131
9758
or
7151
(2)
4640
9609
9625
9649
(2)
1290
9777
(2)
(1)
1315
Interface to
Standalone ACE
(2)
1340
1295
1295
(3)
(2)
(2)
3276
M11
-14
9821
or
9822
3701
6302
9490
(Contd
below)
3704
3705
3735
4714
(4)
(9)
4715
(2)
(5)
IBM MACHINE TYPE
3741
3747
3767
Interface to
Standalone DCE
9121
1660
9121
3718
9533
9619
(1)
3371
3773
3774
3775
3776
3777
3780
3791
1481
3701
1481
3701
9120
9402
3701
6302
(12)
4953
4955
2074
or
2094
or
2090
5010
5110
4800
2074
3701
5231
M2
5251
2-12
5320
5340
5381
4780
9483
9752
or
9753
3701
3701
2500
3701
3701
(2)
5406
5408
5410
5412
5415
2074
9392
9483
9753
(2)
Interface to
Standalone ACE
5760
1315
(2)
(5)
FACILITY C6 -
IBM MACHINE TYPE
Synchronous Operation @ 4800 bps on the Public Switched Telephone Network
1131
1826
2020
7690
7551
2074
2025
2701
2703
2715
M2
(4)
3115
3125
3135
3276
M11
14
4640
9609
9625
9649
3701
6302
9490
9823
3651
M50
3704
3705
3735
4714
(4)
3771
3773
3774
3775
1481
3701
1481
3701
4800 bps Integrated
Modem
Interface to IBM
3874 Modem
7551
7698
7710
(2)
(8)
(3)
(2)
7151
1300
1314
1340
1295
(3)
(2)
9126
(9)
(2)
Interface to ACO
Feature (#1091)
on IBM 3874
1315
(2)
4715
1290
9777
(2)
3776
IBM MACHINE TYPE
3777
4800 bps Integrated
Modem
5710
(14)
Interface to IBM
3874 Modem
1481
3701
Interface to ACO
Feature (#1091)
on IBM 3874
3780
9128
9402
4953
4955
2074
or
2094
or
2090
5010
5110
4800
2074
3701
5231
M2
5251
2-12
5320
5340
5381
4780
9483
9754
3701
3701
2500
3701
(2)
3701
5406
5408
5410
5412
5415
2074
9392
9483
9754
(2)
5760
1315
(2)
(Contd
below)
_--._,
--
----
= -- - --==--=
----',,----_
... -
FACILITY C6M -
M 2700.8
Nov 78
General Systems Divisjon~Machines
Synchronous Operation @ 4800 bps on the Public SWitched Telephone Network via Sti..ndalone DCEs attached under the provisions of·the IBM
Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
IBM MACHINE TYPE
1131
1826
2020
2025
2701
2703
Interface to
Standalone DCE
7690
7551
2074
7551
(2)
7698
(8)
7710
(3)
1315
1300
(2)
1314
1340
(3)
2715
M2
3115
3125
(4)
7151
(2)
4640
9609
9625
9649
(2)
1295
(2)
'!290
9777
(2)
(1)
Interface to
Standalone ACE
(5)
IBM MACHINE TYPE
Interface to
Standalone DCE
(1)
3776
3777
3780
1481
3701
9128
9402
4953
4955
2074
or
2094
or
2090
5010
5110
4800
2074
3701
5231
M2
4780
9483
9754
3135
3701
6302
9490
9823
3704
3705
4714
(9)
5251
5320
5340
5381
3701
2500
3701
(2)
3701
2074
9392
9483
9754
5760
1315
(2)
Synchronous Operation @ 50 Kbps on the Switched Wideband Service
IBM MACHINE TYPE
3704
3705
(4)
3774
3775
1481
3701
1481
3701
(Contd
below)
5406
5408
5410
5412
5415
3701
FACILITY C7 -
3735
3771
3773
4715
2·12
Interface to
Standalone ACE
(5)
Interface to
Standalone DCE
(1)
3276
M1114
4717
(9)
Notes for CHART C
(1)
Refer to the 'IBM Data Communications Handbook,
(2)
The 2025,3115,3125.3135.5340,5410,5412. and 5415 feature cpdes are for the attachment of the first communication line. See the M2025, M3115,
M3125, M3135, M5340, M5410, MS412, and MS415 pages for additional line attachment feature codes.
(3)
The 2703 Line Set feature codes are for attachment of up to eight start/stop or up to four synchronous communication lines. See the M2703 pages for
additional line attachment feature codes.
(4)
No special feature is required to attach this Data Terminal Equipment to this Facility.
(S)
"ACU." Automatic Calling Unit, refers to the standalone unit which accepts dial digits from the DTE and presents these digits to the telephone central office.
Refer to the IBM Data Communications Handbook
(6)
CE-TWX indicates all customer equipment, in which tht> IBM DTEs may communicate with each other over the TWX network. CPT·TWX indicates a customer
provided terminal, in which an IBM multiplexer or integrated communications adapter communicates with a Common Carrier provided TWX 33/35 or TWX 37
terminal over the TWX network. Only the 3704 and 370S will operate on this facility of 150 bps.
(7)
"ACO," Automatic Call Originate, refers to the featurd available on the IBM 3872 and 3874 Modems and oli'the IBM 1200 bps Integrated Modem and the IBM
2400 bps Integrated Modem which permits automatic (under program control) dialing of a remote terminal. When this feature is installed, a standalone ACU is
not required.
(8)
The 2701 feature codes are for the attachment of a single synchronous communication line. See the M2701 pages tor the description of the Dual Communication
Interface features, which outlines the conditions under which a second synchronous communication line may be attached.
(9)
When a 3704 or 3705 is equipped with the Remote Program loader feature (#6260J, it may serve as a "Remote," and communicate with a "Local" 3704 or
3705. The primary communication facility between the Remote and the Local must be a non-switched facility. A secondary (alternate path) may be employed,
and may be either non-switched or switched. Therefore, this type of communication over these facilities is allowed only as an alternate to the primary,
non-switched communication link.
(10)
Feature code #4761 on the 3704 and 3705 provides one IBM 2400 bps Integrated Modem for use on the switched telephone network. Feature code #4771 on
the 3704 and #4707 on the 3705 provides one IBM 2400 bps Integrated Modem for use on the switched telephone network and one Automatic Call Originate
feature for automatic dialing over the switched telephone network.
(11)
Operation on this Facility may also be at 2000 bps. See the IBM Data Communications Handbook
{12}
The IBM 2400 bps Integrated Modem is included as part of the basic 3669.
(13)
3791 switched network operation is supported at the host (3704/370S) by non-switched programming. Special procedures are required to establish and
disconnect the communication links. Refer to the VTAM operation instructions and the 3790 operation instructions for appropriate procedures.
(14)
Performance of Modems on Switched Networks: Satisfactory data transmission cannot be achieved with all Switched Network voice services, specifically with
those on which proper conditioning of the local loop is not available. For example, off premises PBX extensions, tandem tie line networks, foreign exchange lines,
WATs lines may present characteristics that are not suitable for satisfactory data transmission. It is recommended to carefully plan ahead with the common
carrier the installation of such communication systems.
--- --'....------
-- -
~--~-
M 2700.9
Nov 78
General Systems Division-Machines
-~-.-
CHART 0
COMMON CARRIER PRIVATE LINE NON-SWITCHED) SUB-VOICE OR VOICE GRADE CHANNELS
FACILITY 01 -
Point-to-point or Multipoint Start-stop Operation @ 134.5 bps or 300 bps on a Half-duplex Type 3002 (or equivalent) Channel
IBM MACHINE TYPE
1051
Shared Line Adptr
Ty 1A (half-duplex)
(1)
Shared Line Adptr
Ty 1 B (Duplex)
(1)
4691
thru
4694
Leased Line Adptr
TV 1A (Half-duplex)
1061
2740
2471
4641
thru
4644
4641
thru
4644
4641
thru
4644
4691
thru
4694
4691
thru
4694
4691
thru
4694
4639
4639
4639
3115
3125
4743
(2)
(1)
Leased Line Adptr
Ty 1 B (Duplex)
4647
4647
4647
4647
4743
(2)
(1)
4781
1231
9739
1200 bps Integrated
Modem
(@300bps) (1)
3704
3705
3792
5010
4742
9606
(18)
5400
9652
4751
4743
9606
(18)
5400
9651
4752
4781
9612
7111
or
7113
9540
5500
4785
9612
7113
9540
5505
(2)
1200 bps Integrated
Modem with
Interrupt (@300
bps) (1)
3767
5100
5110
1525
1525
FACILITY 01 M -
Point-to-point or Multipoint Start-stop Operation @ 134.5 bps or 300 bps via Standalone DCEs attached under the provisions of the IBM
Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
IBM MACHINE TYPE
1051
1061
Interface to Telephone 9120
Co. Type 1006
Sub-voice Grade
Service (3)
9120
Interface to Western
Union Type 106 Subvoice Grade Service
(3)
9116
9116
Interface to a
Standalone DCE
on a Voice Grade
Channel (3)
9115
or
9120
(4)
9115
or
9120
(4)
1071
3115
3125
3704
3705
4953
4955
5010
2701
2702
2703
2740
2741
7401
9621
(2)
4640
9581
4615
9684
3233
4696
4878
3205
(5)
9120
9120
(4)
1241
9738
(2)
4711
or
4714
9606
1610
or
2092
2165
9111
7401
9621
(2)
4640
9581
4615
9684
3223
4696
4878
3205
(5)
9116
9116
(4)
1241
9738
(2)
4711
or
4714
9606
1610
or
2092
2165
9110
7401
9621
(2)
4640
9581
4615
9684
3233
4696
4878
3205
(5)
9115
or
9120
(4)
9115
or
9120
(4)
1231
9739
or
1241
9738
(2,
26)
1610
or
2092
2165
3135
4640
9721
(2,
20)
4711
or
4714
9606
or
9612
26)
3767
3792
2025
7111
or
7113
9540
3719
(26)
3701
5100
5110
1525
1525
FACILITY 0 2 -
Point-to-point or Multipoint Start-stop or Synchronous Operation @ 600 bps on a Half-duplex or Duplex Type 3002 (or equivalent) Channel
IBM MACHINE TYPE
1031
1034
Leased Line Adptr
Ty 1 A, Start-stop
(Half-duplex) (1)
Leased Line Adptr
Ty 1 B, Start-stop
(Duplex) (1)
1200 bps Integrated
Modem,
Start-stop (1 )
4647
2740
M2
3115
3125
3704
3705
4639
4743
(2)
4742
9607
(18)
4751
4743
4743
9607
4752
4647
(2)
3767
5010'"
5381
(18)
4781
1231
9739
4781
9607
7112
9541
5500
4781
or
4784
9607
(10,
22)
9531
5500
(22)
(2)
1200 bps Integrated
Modem,
Synchronous (1)
5500
5508
bduced without
writt~n
permission.
----- ---- .........-----
----
M2700.10
Nov 78
General Systems Division-Machines
y
FACILITY D2M -
IBM MACHINE TYPE
Interface to
Standalone DCE
for Start-stop
Operation (3,8)
Point-to-point or Multipoint Start-stop or Synchronous Operation @ 600 bps via Standalone DCEs attached under the provisions of the IBM
Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
1031
1034
1071
2025
2701
2702
2703
2068
9110
9625
or
9629
7401
(2)
4640
9582
or
4648
4616
or
4615
9685
7387
3233
4696
or
4697
4879
3205
(5)
2740
M2
3115
3125
7106
9121
9739
or
9740
1231
(2)
3135
3704
3705
3767
4953
4955
4640
9601
9721
(2)
4711
or
4714
9607
4711
or
4714
9607
7112
9541
3719
1610
or
2092
4714
or
4718
9607
(10,
22)
4714
or
4718
9607
or
9615
(10,
22)
9531
3719
(22)
2074
or
2094
or
2090
I nterface to
Standalone DCE
for Synchronous
Operation (3)
FACILITY D3 -
IBM MACHINE TYPE
IBM MACHINE TYPE
2165
Point-to-point or Multipoint Start-stop or Synchronous Operation @ 1200 bps on a Half-duplex or Duplex Type 3002 (or equivalent) Channel
2701
1200 bps Integrated
Modem,
Start-stop (1)
1200 bps Integrated
Modem,
Synchronous (1 )
5010
3115
3125
3275
M1,2
3275
M11
12
4781
1231
9739
(2)
4781
3774
3775
4781
7141
(2)
3791
5500
7820
5010
3276
M1-4
3276
M1114
5500
9491
9651
or
9652
(16)
5500
9491
9651
or
9652
(16)
5500
7820
(22)
5110
3601
3614
1200 bps Integrated
Modem,
Start-stop (1)
5251
2-12
3604
3735
3741
3747
4781
9608
5500
or
8001
(22)
5231
M2
3603
3704
3705
5320
5500
4703
(15,
21)
5340
8001
(15)
4781
or
4784
9608
(10,
(22)
5381
5408
5410
5412
5415
5500
5508
4781
(2)
3767
3771
3773
(Contd
below)
7112
9542
5500
5500
5500
9532
5500
(22)
5500
(22)
2500
5500
4703
(2)
1200 bps Integrated
Modem,
Synchronous (1)
5500
(22)
FACILITY D3M-
Point-to-point or Multipoint Start-stop or Synchronous Operation @ l:?OO bps via Standalone DCEs attached under the provisions of the IBM
Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
IBM MACHINE TYPE
1131
5500
6301
(22)
1826
5500
2020
5500
2025
Interface to
Standalone DCE
for Start-stop
Operation (3)
Interface to
Standalone DCE
for Synchronous
Operation (3)
IBM MACHINE TYPE
2701
5500
2703
2715
M2
2772
2780
4646
(8)
7690
3275
M1.2
7551
7552
3275
M1',
12
Interface to
Standalone DCE
for Start-stop
Operation (2)
Interface to
Standalone DCE
for Synchronous
Operation (3)
5500
7820
7820
(22)
4703
7551
7541
(2)
3276
M1-4
3276
M11
-14
3701
6301
9491
(16)
3701
6301
9491
(16)
7698
7692
(7)
(7)
7705
7710
(5)
3601
3614
3704
3705
4711
or
4714
9608
(8)
4711
or
4714
9608
(8)
4714
or
4718
9608
(10,
16)
4714
or
4718
9608
or
9615
(10,
16)
3701
6301
(16)
7705
7705
9122
2845
2848
3115
3125
9012
(8)
1231
9739
(2)
4640
9753
(2,
8)
7141
(2)
4640
9649
(2)
3771
3773
3774
3775
1482
3701
(22)
1482
3701
(22)
7705
9110
(7)
3735
3741
3747
3767
3135
3271
M1,2
3271
M11
12
7820
7820
(22)
3780
3791
7705
9122
3701
6301
(22)
7112
9542
3719
7705
5010
7705
9122
9532
3719
(22)
Not to be reproduced without writte~'tr':a!
(Contd
below)
(Contd
below)
---- -==---=
General Systems Division-Machines
- --=_
- --.-
M 2700.11
-
4953
IBM MACHINE TYPE 4955
5010
5110
523'
M2
5251
2·12
5320
3701
4703
5340
5381
Nov 78
5406
5408
5410
5412
541S
2500
3701
4703
(2)
Interface to
Standalone DCE
for Start·stop
Operation (3)
1610
or
2092
Interface to
Standalone DCE
for Synchronous
Operation (3)
2074
or
2094
or
2090
FACILITY 03SB -
Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 1200 bps on a Type 3002 (or equivalent) Channel with Backup on the Public Switched
Telephone Network @ 1200 bps or 600 bps
4800
4703
2074
3701
4780
9571
9481
3701
1701
n03
'!2)
2074
4703
9751
(2.
19)
3276
M1'·
14
3276
M1·4
1200 bps Integrated
Modem (1)
5507
or
9651
or
9652
(16)
5507
or
9651
or
9652
(16)
FACILITY 04 -
Point-to-point or Multipoint Start-stop or Synchronous Operation @ 2400 bps on a Half-duplex or Duplex Type 3002 (or equivalent) Channel
IBM MACHINE TYPE
1131
IBM MACHINE TYPE
1826
5381
5508
2020
2025
2701
2703
2715
M2
2772
2780
2845
2848
3115
3125
3135
3271
M1.2
(Contd
below)
2400 bps Integrated
Modem.
Pt-to-pt (11)
2400 bps Integrated
Modem.
Multipt (11)
2400 bps Integrated
Modem.
Multipt (16)
Interface to IBM
3782 Modem for
Start-stop
Operation (9)
Interface to IBM
3872 Modem for
Synchronous
Operation (9)
4657
(8)
4640
9609
9753
(2.
8)
9013
(8)
7690
7551
2074
7551
(2)
7698
(7)
7710
(5)
M11
12
3274
1C
3275
M1.2
3276
M1·4
3276
M11
·14
3275
M11
12
3701
6302
9491
9822
(16)
3701
6302
9491
9822
(16)
(6)
9121
9402
3601
3614
3651
MSO
9110
(7)
7151
(2)
3659
3671
3704
3705
5600
5010
(29)
(28)
4751
or
4754
(10)
2400 bps Integrated
Modem.
Multipt (11)
4752
5010
(29)
2400 bps Integrated
Modem.
Multipt (16)
4755
Interface to IBM
3872 Modem for
start-stop
Operation (9)
4714
(8)
IBM MACHINE TYPE
2400 bps Integrated
Modem.
Pt-to-pt (11)
Interface to IBM
3872 Modem for
Synchronous
Operation (9)
3701
6302
9822
(16)
(11.
17)
(6.
(16)
3701
6302
(16)
9121
or
9122
or
6111
(22.
23)
9753
4714
or
4718
(10.
(22)
7131
9758
or
7151
(2)
4640
9609
9649
(2)
(6)
(Contd
below)
3735
5010
3741
3747
9121
1660
9121
---- ----- -- ------.- -- --
-- - -- -
M 2700.12
Nov 78
General Systems Divi$ion-Machines
y
3771
3773
3774
3775
3776
3777
5231
M2
5251
2·12
5320
5340
2400 bps Integrated
Modem.
Pt-to-Pt (11 )
5600
5600
(30)
5600
2500
5600
(2)
2400 bps Integrated
Modem.
Multipt (11)
5602
5602
(30)
5602
2500
5602
(2)
2400 bps Integrated
Modem.
Multipt (16)
5602
5602
2500
5602
(2)
3701
(16)
2500
3701
(2.
22)
IBM MACHINE TYPE
3767
3780
3791
5010
5110
5381
5406
5408
5410
5412
5415
Interface to IBM +t
3872 Modem for
Start-stop
Operation (9)
Point-to-point or Multipoint Start-stop or Synchronous Operation @ 2000 or 2400 bps via Standalone DCEs attached under the provisions of
the IBM Multiple Supplier Systems Policy
IBM MACHINE TYPE
1131
2020
2025
Interface to
Standalone DCE
for Start-stop
Operation (3)
Interface to
Standalone DCE
for Synchronous
Operation (3)
IBM MACHINE TYPE
IBM MACHINE TYPE
7690
3271
M11.
12
7551
3274
1C
2074
3275
M1.2
9891
or
9822
3701
6302
(16)
2703
2074
3701
2715
M2
4780
9753
9481
2772
2780
3774
3775
3776
3777
2845
2848
3115
3125
7698
(7)
7710
(5)
3276
M1-4
3276
M11
-14
3275
M11.
12
9891
or
9822
3701
6302
9491
(16)
9891
or
9822
3701
6302
9491
(16)
(6)
3601
3614
9120
or
9121
3671
9110
7151
(2)
(7)
3704
3705
7131
9758
or
7151
(2)
3791
3701
6302
(22)
9753
4714
or
4718
(10.
22)
5010
5110
9120
or
9121
3701
6302
(22)
2074
or
2094
or
2090
4800
2074
3701
(Contd
below)
(6)
3735
3741
3747
3767
5010
9120
or
9121
9120
or
9121
1660
9553
3718
(22)
1481
3701
(22)
5231
M2
5251
2-12
5320
5340
5381
4780
9752
or
9753
9481
3701
3701
2500
3701
(2.
22)
3701
5410
5412
5415
1610
or
2092
1481
3701
(22)
4640
9609
9649
(2)
3771
3773
5406
5408
3780
3271
M1.2
4714
(8)
(6.
16)
4953
4955
3135
4640
9609
9753
(2.
8)
9013
(8)
7551
(2)
(6)
(6.
16)
Interface to
Standalone DCE
for Start-stop
Operation (3)
Interface to
Standalone DCE
for Synchronous
Operation (3)
2701
4800
4657
(8)
Interface to
Standalone DCE
for Start-stop
Operation (3)
I nterface to
Standalone DCE
for Synchronous
Operation (3)
3701
6301
(22)
2074
9753
(2.
19)
FACILITY D4M -
1826
9121
9402
3701
9533
3718
(22)
1481
3701
(22)
1481
3701
(22)
3701
Interface to IBM
3872 Modem for
Synchronous
Operation (9)
9752
or
9753
2074
(2.
19)
(Contd
below)
--
--- -----.------- FACILITY 04SB -
IBM MACHINE TYPE
M 2700.13
Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 2400 bps on a Type 3002 (or equivalent) Channet with Backup @ 2400 bps or 1200 bps
on the Public Switched Telephone Network
2020
2.701
2703
2772
2780
3115
3125
3271
M1,2
3271
M",
12
IBM MACHINE TYPE
3274
1C
3275
M1,2
3275
M",
12
3701
6302
9822
(16)
2400 bps Integrated
Modem
Interface to IBM
3872 Modem (9,12)
Nov 78
General Systems Division-Machines
y
2074
7698
(7)
3651
M50
3704
3705
2400 bps Integrated
Modem
7710
(5)
3735
9121
9402
3771
3773
5600
or
5602
7951
(29)
7131
9758
or
7151
(2)
3780
5110
5600
1461
or
5602
1462
7951
5600
or
5602
7951
2074
3701
1461
or
1462
1481
3701
9125
9402
(6)
5251
2·12
(6)
(6)
22)
5320
5340
5600
or
5602
7951
or
7952
2074
2500
5600
or
5602
7951
or
7952
(2,
22)
3701
2500
3701
(2,
22)
5381
3701
6302
9491
9822
(16)
(6,
22)
5406
5408
5410
5412.
5415
FACILITY 05 -
Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 4800 bps on a Duplex Type 3002 with C1 Conditioning (or equivaient) Channel
1131
1826
2020
2025
2.701
2703
7690
7551
2074
7551
(2)
7698
(7)
7710
(5)
3701
2715
M2
2.772
3701
3701
6302
9491
9822
(16)
(Contd
below)
9121
or
9122
5010
1461
or
1462
1481
3701
3774
3775
3776
3777
7151
(2)
3276
M11
·14
Interface to IBM
3872 Modem (9,12)
IBM MACHINE TYPE
4714
9110
9402
(7)
3276
M1·4
2074
9753
(2)
3271
M1,2
2780
3115
3125
3135
9110
9208
7151
(2)
7131
9758
4640
9609
9649
(2)
7821
3774
3775
3776
3777
3271
M",
12
(Contd
below)
4800 bps Integrated
Modem (19)
Interface to IBM
3874 Modem (9)
(6)
9124
9402
(7)
or
7151
(2)
IBM MACHINE TYPE
4800 bps Integrated
Modem (19)
3274
1C
3275
M1'.
12.
3701
6302
9823
(16)
Interface to IBM
3874 Modem (9)
IBM MACHINE TYPE
3275
M1,2
7821
3276
M1·4
32.76
M11
-14
3701
6302
9491
9823
(16)
3701
6302
9491
9823
(16)
(6,
22)
3601
3614
5110
5231
M2
5251
2.-12
4800
2074
3701
4780
9754
3701
3671
3735
3771
3773
(Contd
belowl
3780
or
5702
9124
or
9125
5320
5340
5381
3701
(22)
2500
2701
(2,
22)
3701
9754
5406
5408
5410
5412.
5415
4800 bps Integrated
Modem (19)
Interface to IBM
3874 Modem (9)
3704
3705
5700
3701
6302
(22)
5010
3651
M50
(6.
22)
2074
9754
(2,
19)
4714
or
4718
(10,
22)
5010
1481
3701
(22)
1481
3701
(22)
1481
3701
(22)
9124
9402
----.
-
- -------~-.-~-
M 2700.14
Nov 78
General Systems Division-Machines
FACILITY D5M -
Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operations @ 4800 bps via Standalone OeEs attached under the provisions of the IBM Multipla
Supplier Systems Policy
IBM MACHINE TYPE
1131
1826
2020
Interface to
Standalone DeE
7690
7551
2074
2025
2791
2703
2715
M2
2772
2780
3115
3125
3135
7551
7698
(7)
7710
(6)
9124
9110
(5)
7151
(2)
7131
9758
4640
9609
:lr
9649
(2)
(2)
9208
(7)
(3)
7151
(21
IBM MACHINE TYPE
3274
1C
3275
M1.2
Interface to
Standalone DCE
3701
6302
7821
(3)
9823
(16)
3275
M11,
12
(6.
22)
3278
M1·4
3276
M11
-J4
3801
3814
3701
6302
3701
6302
3701
6302
9491
9823
9491
9823
(22)
3704
3871
3705
3735
9754
4714
or
4718
5010
3771
3773
1481
3701
(22)
3271
M1,2
7821
3271
M11,
12
(Contd
below)
(6.
22)
3774
3778
3778
3777
(Contd
below)
3780
4953
4955
6010
1481
9124
2074
4800
3701
or
2094
(22)
(10,
or
2090
22)
5406
5408
5410
IBM MACHINE TYPE
5110
5231
M2
5251
2-12
Interface to
Standalone DeE
2074
3701
4780
9754
3701
5320
5340
5381
3701
2500
2701
3701
(22)
(3)
FACILITY 05SB -
IBM MACHINE TYPE
(2,
22)
5412
5415
2074
9754
(2,
19)
Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 4800 bps on a Duplex Type 3002 with Cl Conditioning (or equivalent) Channel with
Backup @ 4800 bps or 2400 bps on the Public Switched Telephone Network
2020
2701
2703
2772
2780
3115
3125
2074
7698
(7)
7710
(5)
9129
9402
9110
9208
7151
(2)
7131
9758
or
7151
3271
M1.2
3271
M11.
12
7821
(6)
3274
1C
3275
M1.2
3275
M11.
12
3701
6302
9491
9823
(16)
7821
(6)
3276
M1-4
3278
M11
-14
4800 bps Integrated
Modem (26)
Interface to IBM
3874 Modem (9.12)
(7)
(2)
3701
6302
9491
9823
3701
6302
9823
5406
5408
5410
3651
IBM MACHINE TYPE
M50
3704
3705
3735
3771
3773
3774
3775
4800 bps Integrated
Modem (26)
3776
3777
3780
5110
5251
2-12
5320
5340
5381
5412
5415
9129
9402
2074
3701
3701
2500
3701
(2)
3701
2074
3701
5700
1461
or
5702
1462
7951
Interface to IBM
3874 Modem (9.12)
9124
or
9125
FACILITY 06 -
Point-to-point to Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 7200 bps on a Duplex Type 3002 with C2 Conditioning (or equivalent) Channel
IBM MACHINE TYPE
2020
2701
2772
3115
3125
3135
Interface to IBM
3875 Modem (9)
2074
(12)
7698
(7)
8040
9402
7151
(2)
7131
9759
or
7151
4640
9609
9649
4714
5010
1461
or
1462
1481
3701
1461
or
1462
1481
3701
1461
or
1462
1481
3701
3271
M1.2
3271
M".
12
7821
(6)
(2)
(2)
3274
1C
3275
M1.2
3275
M11.
12
3701
6302
9824
(16)
7821
(6)
9754
(2)
3276
M1-4
3276
M1114
3701
6302
9491
9824
(16)
3701
6302
9491
9824
(16)
5406
5408
5410
3704
IBM MACHINE TYPE 3705
3780
5010
5251
2-12
5320
Interface to IBM
3875 Modem (9)
9126
9402
4800
3701
3701
4714
or
4718
(10)
5340
5381
3701
3701
(2)
5412
5415
2074
9757
(2.
19)
Not to be reproduced without wnnen permission.
(Contd
below)
3671
9757
-----
=--==
-=-=- ------_
.. -
M 2700.15
Nov 78
General Systems Division-Machines.
-~-"-
FACILITY D6M -
Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 7200 bps vi~ Standalone Dr.Fs: attached under the provisions of the IBM Multiple
Supplier Systems Policy
IBM MACHINE TYPE
2020
2701
2772
3115
3125
3125
Interface to
Standalone DCE
(3)
2074
(12)
7698
(7)
8040
9402
7151
(2)
7131
9759
or
7151
(2)
4640
9609
9649
(2)
IBM MACHINE TYPE
3704
3705
3780
4953
4955
3271
M1'.
12
7821
(6)
5010
5251
2·12
5320
5340
5381
4800
3701
3701
3701
(2)
3701
3274
1C
3275
M1.2
3275
M".
12
3701
6302
9824
(16)
7821
(6)
3276
M1·4
3276
M1,·
14
3701
6302
9491
9824
(16)
3701
6302
9491
9824
(16)
(Contd
below)
3671
9757
5406
5408
5410
5412
5415
2074
9757
(2.
19)
Interface to
Standalone DCE
(3)
4714
or
4718
(10)
FACILITY D6SB-
Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 7200 bps on a Duplex Type 3002 with C2 Conditioning (or equivalent) Channel with
Backup @ 3600 bps on the Public Switched Telephone Network
9126
9402
2074
or
2094
or
2090
3271
M1.2
IBM MACHINE TYPE
2020
2701
2772
3115
3125
Interface to IBM
3875 Modem (9.12)
2074
(14)
7698
(7)
8040
9402
7151
(2)
7131
9759
or
7151
3271
M1.2
3271
M1'.
12
7821
(6)
(2)
IBM MACHINE TYPE
5010
5251
2·12
5320
5340
5381
Interface to IBM
33875 Modem (9.12)
4800
3701
3701
3701
(2)
3701
3276
M1·4
3275
M1.2
3275
M1'.
12
3276
M1,·
14
3701
6302
9491
9824
(16)
7821
(6)
3701
6302
9491
9824
(16)
3274
1C
3704
3705
3701
6302
9824
(16)
4714
(Contd
below)
3780
9127
9402
5406
5408
5410
5412
5415
2074
9757
(2,
19)
FACILITY D7M -
IBM MACHINE TYPE
Interface to
Standalone DCE
(3)
Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 9600 bps via Standalone DCEs attached under the provisions of the I BM Multiple
Supplier Systems Policy
3271
M11
12
(6.
22)
3274
1C
6302
or
6303
3701
9825
(16)
3275
M1'.
12
(6,
22)
3276
M1·4
3701
6302
6315
9491
9825
(16)
3276
M11
·14
3704
3705
5251
2·12
3701
6302
9491
9825
(16)
4714
or
4718
(10,
22)
3701
5340
5381
2500
3701
(22)
3701
Notes for CHART D
(1)
IBM Line Adapters and IBM Integrated Modems perform the modulation/demodulation function on a communication facility at speeds up to 2400 bps. When
they are used, standalone DCEs are not required. sRL GA24-3435 is your best source of information on the IBM Line Adapters and the IBM Integrated Modems.
(2)
The 2025, 3115, 3125, 3135, 5340, 5408, 5410, 5412. and 5415 feature codes are for the attachment of the first communication line. See 2025, 3115. 3125,
3135, 5340, 5408, 5410, 5412, and 5415 "Machine" pages for. additional line attachment (feature codes.
(3)
See the I BM Data Communications Handbook
(4)
When used on a Voice Grade Channel, F/C 9120 on the 1051. 1061 and 2740 will operate in a point-to-point mode only. The 2741 terminal will operate in a
point-to-point mode only on any facility.
(5)
The 2703 Line Set Feature codes (#3205. #7710) are for the attachment of up to eight start/ stop or up to four synchronous communication lines. See the
M2703 pages for additional line attachment feature codes.
(6)
No special features are required to attach this Data Terminal Equipment to this facility.
(7)
The listed feature codes are for the attachment of a single synchronous communication line. See the description of the "Dual Communications Interface" features
in the M2701, M2715 and M2780 pages for the conditions under which a second synchronous communication line may be attached.
(8)
IBM Type III Data Terminal Equipments require duplex communication facilities.
(9)
Refer to M3872. M3874 and M3875 pages for the DTE attachment codes required for each attaching machine.
(10)
3704/3705 "Remotes" may communicate with 3704/3705 "Locals" point-to-point only over these communication facilities as their primary communication
link. #4714 will support data-half-duplex over I alf-duplex or duplex facilities. #4718 will support data-full-duplex (i.e .• data transmission in both directions
simultaneously) over full duplex facilities only.
(11)
When standalone DCEs are used on the 05 Facility, the channel will normally require C1 conditioning.
(12)
The IBM 2400 bf)s Integrated Modem and the IBM 3659 Remote Communications Unit are line compatible and suiteble for communication with the IBM 3872
Modem properly equipped. #4751 or #5600 Integrated Modems require that the 3872 be equipped with #6101 or #6102. #4752 Integrated Modems require
PfC01"t6 'be reproduced without written permission.
---= ---- - - --
- -= :--.. -.:
-~-
M 2700.16
General Systems Division-Machin~s
Nov 78
...
that the 3872 be equipped with #5101 or #5102. #5602 Integrate,d Modems are compatible with the basic 3872 (control station). The 3659 requires that the
3872.be equipped with #6101 or #6102.
(13)
The 4800 bps Integrated Modem, Point-to-point (#5700), is line compatible and suitable for communication with an IBM 3874 Modem equipped with the
Point-to-point feature (#6101). The 4800 bps Integrated Modem, Multipoint (#5702), is line compatible and suitable for communication with an IBM 3874
Modem ",quipped with the Multipoint Control feature (#5100).
(15)
IBM STR Data Terminal Equipments will communicate in point-to-point mode only.
(16)
The 3271 Models 11 and 12,3274,3275 Models 11 and 12,3276,3601,3602,3614,3651 Model 50, 3767, 3771, 3773, 3774, 3775, 3776, 3777, 3791
and 5320 ~ill communicate with a 3704 or 3705 using Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC). In a multipoint network, SDLC allows the control station (The
3704/3705)
to
receive
from
one
tributary
station
(the
3271/3274/3275/3276/3601/3602/3614/3651/3767 /3771/3773/3774/
3775/3776/3777/3791/5320) while it is transmitting to another tributary station. Operation in this mode requires that the 3704/3705 be equipped with one
of the following:
#4784 for communication with a tributary station equipped with a 1200 bps Integrated Modem, or
#4755 for communication with a tributary station equipped with a 2400 bps Integrated Modem or attaching an IBM 3872 Modem, or
#4718 for communication via standalone DCEs.
Duplex communication facilities are required to support the above type operation. SDLC also supports the normal data-half-duplex mode of operation over
half-duplex or duplex communication facilities.
(17)
The IBM 4872 Modem is a purchase-only modem, available in three models, as follows: Model 1-for point-to-point communication with another model 1 ...
Model 2-for the multipoint control station for communication with model 3s at the tributaries ... Model 3 - for the multipoint tributary station for
communication with a model.2 at the control station. This modem requires C2 conditioning instead of C1 on 08 facility.
(19)
Only the System/3 and 8 (5408), model 10 (5410), model 12 (5412) or model 15 (5415) may be installed as the control station in a multipoint network.
(20)
The S/360 ~odel 20 (2020) does not support Intermediate Block Checking at speeds greater than 4800 bps.
(21)
The 3604 and 3614, when equipped with #8001, will communicate with a 3601 (similarly equipped) over a normal 3600 System "loop." When more than one
3604 or 3614 is on the loop, half-duplex, point-to-point, 2 wire terminated communication facilities are required from the 3601 to the first station on the loop,
between successive stations on the loop and from the last station on the loop back to the 360.1. When only one station is on the loop, a duplex point-to-point 4
wire terminated facility is required between it and the 360L
The 3601 and 3614, when equipped with #5500 will communicate with a 3704 or 3705 over non-switched voice grade lines either point-to-point or multipoint.
See Note (22) following.
(22)
3601,3614,3651 model 50, 5320, 5340, and 3791 communication with a 3704 or 3705 uses Synchronous Data Link Control, which allows the control station
(the 3704/3705) to receive from one tributary station (the 3601/3614/3651 model 50/3791/5320/5340) while it is transmitting to a second tributary
station. Operation in this mode requires that the 3704/3705 be equipped with either: #4784-for communication with a 3601/3614/3651 model 50/3791
with an IBM 1200 bps Integrated Modem, or ... #4755-for communication with a :l601 /3614/3651 model 50/3791/5320/5340 attaching an IBM 3872
Modem, or ... #4718 for communication via standalone modems.
['
Duplex communication facilities are required to support the above mode of operation. The Synchronous Data Link Control also supports the normal "data
half-duplex" mode of operation over half-duplex or duplex facilities.
(23)
The 3651 model 50 will communicate over this facility with a 3704 or 3705 at the host S/370, or with a 3659 at a remote store site. Communication with the
3704/3705 requires #9121 or #9122. Communication with a 3659 requires #6111. The 3659 at the remote store site includes an IBM 2400 bps Integrated
Modem as part of the basic unit.
(24)
Leased Line Adapters are available as features on the 3704 and 3705 as noted. However, additional Leased Line Adapters may be attached via the 2711 Line
Adapter Unit. The 3704 and 3705 feature code for each pair of lines so attached is either #4711 or #4714.
(25)
Performance of modems on Switched Networks: Satisfactory data transmission cannot be achieved with all Switched Network voice services, specifically those
on which proper conditioning of the local loop is not available. For example, off premises PBX extensions, tandem tie line networks, foreign exchange lines,
WATS lines may.present characteristics that are not. suitable for satisfactory data tranmission. It is recommended to carefully plan ahead with the common
carrier the installation of such communication systems.
(26)
The 3767 terminal will communicate over this Facility at 300 bps with a 3115, 3125, 3135, 3704 or 3705. Thespeed specifies for this operation are:
#9739
#9593
#9612
#9540
on
on
on
on
the
the
the
the
3115 and 3125
3135
3704 and 3705
3767.
(27)
The basic 3603 includes a 1200 bps Integrated Modem which is line compatible and suitable for communication with the 3601's 1200 bps Loop Integrated
Modem.
(28)
Features #4751 and #4754 on 3705 require an RPQ.
(29)
Features #5600 and #5602 on 3735 require an RPQ.
(30)
Features #5600 and #5602 on 3780 require an RPQ.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- - General Systems Division-Machines
=--==
- -- ----. ------
- -=
CHARTE
COMMON CARRIER TYPE 8800 WIDEBAND SERVICE
FACILITY E1 -
Point-to-point at 40.8 Kbps
IBM STR MACHINES 2701
Interface to
Standalone DCE (1)
7695
(2)
3115
3125
3704
3705
4953
4955
7121
4717
2075
2058
IBM SYNC MACHINES2020
2701
I nte rface to
Standalone DCE
2074
4500
7697
(2)
FACILITY E2 -
Point-to-point at 50 Kbps
(3)
5010
4805
5406
5408
5410
5412
5415
2074
9755
IBM STR MACHINES 2701
Interface to
Standalone DCE (1 )
7695
(2)
3115
3125
3704
3705
4953
4955
7121
4717
2075
2058
IBM SYNC MACHINES2020
2701
Interface to
Standalone DCE (1)
2074
4501
7697
(2)
FACILITY E3-
Point-to-point at 19.2 Kbps
(3)
3115
3125
3704
3705
4953
4955
7121
4717
2075
2058
IBM SYNC MACHINES2020
2701
Interface to
Standalone DCE (1 )
2074
4501
7697
(2)
FACILITY E4-
Point-to-point at 230.4 Kbps
(3)
5010
4805
5010
4805
5406
5408
5410
5412
5415
2074
9755
5408
5410
5412
5415
2074
9755
IBM SYNC MACHINES2701
Interface to
Standalone DCE (1)
7697
(2)
Notes for CHART E
(1) See the IBM Data Communications Handbook
(2) This feature code is for the attacnment of a single
communication line.
See the M2701 pages for the conditions under which a second line may be attached via the Dual Communications Interface Feature.
(3) A line attached to the ICA via this feature will have a 100 % load factor and must not be operated
simultaneously with any other line on the ICA.
'>
·-Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 2700.17
Nov 78
---- ---====
General Systems Division-Machines
---_.-=-- ----
M 2700.18
Nov 78
CHART X
COMMON CARRIER PRIVATE LINE (NON-SWITCHE.DI DIGITAL DATA COMMUNICATION SERVICES
FACILITY X1 -
Point to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 2400 bps
IBM MACHINE TYPE
3776
M3.4
3777
M3
3274
MIC
Interface to
AT&T
DataphoneDigital Service
(1)
5650
or
5651
9822
5650
or
5651
6302
9822
FACILITY X1 M -
Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 2400 bps via Standalo.ne DCEs attached under the provisions of the IBM Multiple
Supplier Systems Policy
IBM MACHINE TYPE
1131
1826
2020
2701
2772
2780
3115
312&
3135
Interface to
Standalone DCE
(1)
7690
7551
2074
7698
(2)
9121
9110
(2)
7151
(4)
7131
9758
or
7151
(4)
4640
9609
9649
(4)
3276
M1-4
3276
M1114
3701
6302
9491
9822
(5)
3701
6302
9491
9822
(5)
IBM MACHINE TYPE
Interface to
Standalone DeE
(1)
IBM MACHINE TYPE
5100
Interfaca to
Standalone DeE
(1)
2074
3701
3601
3614
3704
3705
3701
6302
(5)
4714
or
4718
(5,
6)
5231
M2
5251
2-12
4780
9753
9481
3701
or
5651
3735
3741
3747
3767
3771
3773
5010
9121
1660
9121
9533
3718
(5)
1481
3701
(5)
5320
5340
5381
3701
(5)
2500
3701
or
5650
or
5651
(5,
7)
5650
5651
3774
3775
3776
3777
1481
3701
(3.
5)
3274
1C
3275
M1.2
3701
6302
9822
(5)
(3)
3275
M11.
12
(Contd
below)
(3.
5)
(Contd
below)
3780
3791
9121
3701
6302
(5)
(5)
49&3
4955
2074
or
2094
or
2090
5010
4800
2074
9753
(4,
7)
Point to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operlltion @ 4800 bps
IBM MACHINE TYPE
3776
M3,4
3777
M3
Interface to
AT&T
Dataphone·
Digital Service
5650
or
5651
9823
(1)
(3)
3271
M11
12
5406
5408
5410
5412
5415
FACILITY X2 -
FACILITY X2M-
3271
M1.2
3274
MIC
5650
or
5651
6302
9823
Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 4800 bps via Standalone DeEs attached under the provisions of the IBM Multiple
Supplier Systems Policy
IBM MACHINE TYPE
1131
1826
2020
2701
2772
2780
3115
3125
3135
Interfa~e to
Standalone DCE
(1)
7690
7551
2074
7698
(2)
9124
9110
(2)
7151
(4)
7131
9758
or
7151
(4)
4640
9609
9649
(4)
3271
M1.2
7821
3271
M11,
12
(3.
5)
3274
1C
3275
M1.2
3701
6302
9823
(5)
7821
-Registered Trademark of AT&T
Not to be reproduced without written permission-: .,
3275
M1'.
12
(3,
5)
(Contd
below)
---_........--- Gener':ll Systems Division-Machines
--...
- -----_
M 2700.19
--
Nov 78
-~-.-
IBM MAC ... , ..,r: TYPE
Interface to
Standalone DCE
(1)
FACILITY X3M -
IBM MACHINE TYPE
Interface to
Standalone DCE
(1)
3276
M1·4
3276
M11·
14
3701
6302
9491
9823
(5)
3701
6302
9491
9823
(5)
3601
3614
3704
3705
.3701
6302
(5)
4714
or
4718
(5,
6)
3735
5010
3771
3773
3774
3775
3776
3777
1481
3701
(5)
1481
3701
(5)
3780
911.4
4953
4955
2074
or
2094
or
2090
5010
5110
5231
M2
5251
2·12
4800
2074
3701
4780
9754
3701
or
5651
5320
5340
5381
3701
(5)
2500
3701
or
5650
or
5651
(5,
7)
5650
5651
5406
5408
5410
5412
5415
2074
9754
(4.
7)
Point-to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 9600 bps via Standalone DCEs attached under the provisions of the I BM Multiple
Supplier Systems Policy
3274
1C
3276
M1·4
6302
or
6303
3701
9825
(5)
3701
6302
6315
9491
9825
(5)
3276
M11·
14
3704
3705
3701
6302
9491
9825
(5)
4714
or
4718
(5,
6)
3777
1481
3701
(5)
4953
4955
5251
2·12
2074
or
2094
or
2090
3701
or
5651
5340
5381
2500
3701
or
5650
or
5651
(5,
7)
5650
5651
FACILITY X3 -
Point to-point or Multipoint Synchronous Operation @ 9600 bps
IBM MACHINE TYPE
3776
M3.4
3777
M3
3274
MIC
5650
or
5651
6302
or
6303
9825
Interface to
AT&T
Dataphone·
Digital Service
(1)
5650
or
5651
9825
FACILITY X4M -
Point-to-point Synchronous Operation @ 56 Kbps via Standalone DCEs attached under the provisions of the I BM Multiple Supplier Systems
Policy
IBM MACHINE TYPE
3705
Interface to
Standalone DCE
4720
(6)
4953
4955
2074
2060
(1)
Notes for CHART X
(1) See the I BM Data Communications Handbook
(2) The listed feature codes are for the attachment of a single synchronous communications line. See the description of the Dual Communication Interface feature in the
M2701 and M2780 pages for the conditions under which a second synchronous communications line may be attached.
(3i No special feature is required to attach this DTE to this Facility.
(4) The 3115,3125 and 3135 feature codes listed are for the attachment of the first communications line. See the M3115, M3125 and M3135 pages for additional line
attachment feature codes.
(5) The 3271 Models 11 and 12, 3275 Models 11 and 12, 3601, 3602, 3614, 3767, 3791, and when not operating in BSC mode, the 3771, 3773, 3774, 3775, 3776,
3777 model 1, 5320 and 5340 will communicate with a 3704 or 3705 using Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC). In a multipoint network, SDLC allows the
control station (the 3704/3705) to receive from one tributary station (the 3271/3275/3601/3602/3614/3651/3767/ 3771/3773/3774/3775/3776/3777.
model 1/3791/5320/5340) while transmitting to a second tributary station. Operation in this mode requires duplex communications facilities and 3704/3705
equipped with feature code #4718. SDLC also supports the normal "data-half-duplex" mode of operation over half-duplex or duplex lines.
(6) 3704/3705 "Remotes" may communicate over this Facility with 3704/3705 "Locals" point-to-point only as their primary communications line. Feature code
#4714 will support data-half-duplex operation over half-duplex or duplex facilities, while feature code #4718 will support data-full-duplex (i.e., simultaneous data
transmission in both directions) over duplex facilities.
(7) The 5340, 5408, 5410, 5412, and 5415 feature codes are for the attachment of the first communications line. See M5340, M5408, M5410, M5412, and M5415
pages for additional line attachment feature codes.
(8) The 3777 model 2 operates in point-to-point mode only.
(9) Communication over this facility is between a 3276 operating as a multipoint or point-to-point tributary station and a 3791 (with #3211 and #3703) operating as a
multipoint control station.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- - . . -- General Systems Division-Machines
M 2700.20
- - - ---
Nov 78
-~-
-~-.,-
-~.-y-
CHARTG
COAM LIMITED DISTANCE
FACILITY G1 -
Half-duplex or Duplex, Point-to-point or Multipoint, up to 4.75 miles in length at 134.5 bps
IBM MACHINE ll'PE
2702
2703
2740
2741
3704
3705
Limited Distance Line
Adapter, Type 1A,
Half-duplex
4634
9684
4686
4878
4634
4634
(5)
4731
9606
Limited Distance Line
Adapter, Type 1 B,
Duplex
4635
9684
4687
4878
4635
4635
(5)
4732
9606
FACILITY G2-
Half-duplex, Point-to-point or Multipoint, up to 8 miles in length at 134.5 or 600 bps
IBM MACHINE TYPE
1031A
Limited Distance Line
Adapter, Type 2A
at 134.5 bps
Limited Distance Line
Adapter, Type 2A
at 600 bps
1051
1061
1071
2025
2701
2702
2703
2740
2741
4790
4790
4792
9112
(2)
4636
4612
9684
(3)
4688
4878
(1,
3)
4790
4790
(5)
4792
9112
(2)
4637
4613
9685
(3)
4688
4879
(1,
3)
4790
(6)
(4)
3704
3705
5010
4741
9606
(3)
4750
4741
9607
(3)
4750
Notes for CHART G
(1) The 2703 feature codes are for the attachment of up to eight communication lines. See the M2703 pages for additional line attachment feature codes.
(2) See the M2025 pages for information on the attachment of the 2025 to this Facility via the 2711 Line Adapter Unit.
(3) Type 2 Limited Distance Line Adapters are available as features on the 2702, 2703, 3704, and 3705. However, when the maximum number of line adapters is
reached on these machines, additional line adapters may be attached via the 2711 Line Adapter Unit. The 2702 feature code required for eac" line so attached is
#3233. The 2703 feature code required for each group of eight lines so attached is either #3205 or #3206. The 3704 and 3705 feature codes required for each pair
of lines so attached is either #4714 or $4711.
(4) The Limited Distance Line Adapter, Type 2B, is included as part of the basic 1031A. unless the IBM Line Adapter, #4647, is ordered.
(5) This Datil Terminal Equipment will operate on this Facility in point-to-point mode only.
(6) The entry applies to the 2740 model 2 only.
CHART H
PARALLEL TRANSMISSION
FACILITY H1 -
Parallel Transmission on Switched or Non-switched Voice Grade Lines. Point-to-point at 13 characters/second.
IBM MACHINE TYPE
024/026
Md15,6
Interface to
Standalone DCE
(1)
(2) or
4702
1221
1001
1092
1093
7770
7772
(2)
7795
(3)
9470
or
9471.
3239
(2)
9114
Notes for CHART H
(1) See the IBM Data Communications Handbook
(2) No special feature is required to attach this Data Terminal Equipment to this Facility.
(3) This feature is required to allow the 1092 to communicate with an 024.026,7770 or 7772 via a 1093 Programmed Keyboard. See the M1092 and M1093 pages
for details.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- -=--~
- - - ---
-=
M 2700.21
Nov 78
General Systems Division-Machines
the 2702 will allow only the Transmit Interrupt
feature of this unit to be recognized.
OPD COMMUNICATING MAG CARD "SELECTRIC"
TYPEWRITER
Via 2703
Purpose
A communicating version of the OPD Mag Card "Selectric" to
satisfy the need for incidental communications in the power
typing environment. May be used to communicate with another
like machine or as a terminal.
Highlights
The Mag Card "Selectric" uses a new I/O, a read/write unit
and a Mag Card console housing the electronics. The mag card
itself consists of 50 tracks of 100 characters each. The line
expansion feature permits recording of 30-35 characters beyond the normal writing line of 65-70 characters. All functional
controls and code keys for local and communications mode are
provided on the keyboard of the "Selectric" I/O. The communications controls include a "Start" key for initiating transmission to a like machine, "AtterUjon" key, a "CPU" key for initiating transmission to a computer, and a "Line Hold" key for
maintaining communication when not transmitting or receiving.
Includes character format checking, dual velocity printing, send
and receive indicator lights and a choice of a fabric or film
ribbon. Print quality is exactly equivalent to that of a Maq Card
"Selectric" Typewriter.
Magnetic cards prepared off-line on any Mag Card "Selectric"
may be transmitted at 135 baud. Sending and receiving may
also take place directly from the keyboard.
The Standard Communicating Mag Card "Selectric" Typewriter is functionally equivalent on line to a 2741 Communicating
Terminal equipped with the following features: Dial Up
(#3255), Switched Network Attachment (#9114). Receive
Interrupt (#4708), Typamatic Keys (#8341) and Transmit Interrupt (#7900).
Code and systems compatibility provide for transmission to or
from a suitably equipped S/360 model 22 through 85 and 195,
or a S/370 model 125 through 195. See "Prerequisites" below.
The 2703 requires either Start-Stop Base Type I
(#7505) or Type II (#7506). IBM Terminal Control
Base (#4619). IBM Terminal Control Type I
(#4696), Line Speed Option (#4878), and Data
Line Set (#3205). Note: Type I Terminal Interrupt
(#8200) will allow the Transmit and Receive Interrupt capability of this unit to be recognized. 2741
Break (#8055) will allow only the Transmit Interrupt feature of this unit to be recognized.
Customer Responsibilities
The customer must be advised that: (1) He is responsible for
making arrangements for price quotations, installation and cost
(initial and recurring) of common carrier communication
facilities/ services ... (2) Toll charges, if required for installation
and maintenance of the I BM equipment, are to be paid by the
customer .. , (3) The customer must be prepared to relinquish
the data processing system for service in those cases in which
servicing aids or available error message printouts do not permit localization of a malfunction of the communication facility
or terminal location.
Manuals: Communicating Mag Card Reference Manual, G5430608 ... Communicating Mag Card Users Guide, G543-0609 ...
Communicating Mag Card Program Supplement Sheets. G5430610.
Specify
(1) Voltage ... 115 V. 60 cycle. AC. 15 amps, 3-wire cord only.
(2) Typing Element ... available only in standard correspondence
"Selectric" code. One OPD "Selectric" 72 element in correspondence keyboard confirmation 101 is furnished with
the unit. See #9811 on page 23 in "Type Catalog." Additional elements may be ordered by specifying the appropriate OPD part number. Note: The byte structure of the
standard "Selectric" character set differs from that for
PTTC/BCD or PTTC/EBCD character sets.
Communication Facilities
characters/inch
(3) Character
Spacing ... 10
characters/inch may be specified.
The unit operates in half duplex data, full duplex control mode
over Common Carrier Public Switched Facilities (C1) at 134.5
bps.
(4) Line Feeding ... 6 lines/inch. unless otherwise specified. Pin
feed platens are available on an SER (RPQ) basis only.
or
12
Prerequisites
Communicate with a S/360 model 22 through 85 and 195. or a
S/370 model 125 through 195. The data processing system
requires a 2701 Data Adapter Unit or a 2702 or 2703 Tranmission Control.
VIA 2701
Via 2702
The 2701 requires an IBM Terminal Adapter Type
1 (#4640)
and Speed Selection (#9581).
Limitation: The Receive and Transmit Interrupt
features on this unit will not be recognized when
communication is via a 2701.
The 2702 requires IBM Terminal Control Base
(#9696), IBM Terminal Control-Type I (#4615),
Selective Speed (#9684), and Data Set Line Adapter (#3233). Note: Type I Terminal Interrupt
(#8200), when installed on the 2702. will allow the
Transmit and Receive Interrupt features of this
unit to be recognized. The 2741 Break (#8055) on
Operating Procedures
OPD will accept orders for delivery from the plant for the Communicating Mag Card "Selectric" Typewriter and the special
features below.
OPD will accept MESs to field convert a Mag Card "Selectric"
Typewriter a Communicating Mag Card "Selectric" Typewriter
and to add any of the special features berow in the field.
Special Features
ACOUSTICAL FILTER HOOD. (Plant or field installable) This
feature significantly red uces the amount of noise produced
when printing output.
PARAGRAPH INDENT. (Plant or field installable.) Designed
for a maximum level of efficiency when preparing and reviSing
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--=--==
- ------..
-- -'=-=
------
-
M 2700.22
Nov 78
General Systems Division-Machines
y
..
':
indented material in the local mode. This feature is inoperative
when receiving from a computer.
OPD MAG CARD TYPEWRITERS
AUTO TERMINAL 10. (Plant or field installable) The four
character identification sequence is permanently assigned by
IBM. The plant will assign a different combination of characters to each Mag Card "Selectric" Typewriter equipped with
this feature. The first character will specify terminal type and
the last three will be assigned to that unit. If field installation' of
a new number or change to an existing number is desired, an
M ES must be submitted
Description OPD product family of word processing typewriters (IBM Magnetic Card "Selectric" Typewriter, Mag Card
"Executive" Typewriter, IBM Communicating Mag Card
"Selectric" Typewriter, IBM Mag Card "AU Typewriter, and
IBM Mag Card II Typewriter, all produce magnetic card output
or printed reports originating on magnetic cards. The output of
these devices can provide input to the System/32 with SCP
feature #6002, provided the 5321 Mag Card Unit and MagCard Unit Attachment (#4900) are attached to the System/32.
COMMUNICATE MODE KEYLOCK. (Plant or field installable) The keylock which inhibits the communicate mode will be
furnished by IBM. Two keys will be furnished with each lock
and additional keys may be purchased.
Highlights The mag card typewriter family uses a "Selectric"
keyboard and printer to produce magnetic card output. The
mag card console is cable connected to the keyboard/ printer.
The magnetic card itself consists of 50 tracks of 100 + 2 - 0
characters each.
All functional controls and code keys are provided as on the
keyboard of the "Selectric" I/O.
Features
IBM Mag Card II Typewriter and IBM Mag Card/ A Typewriter.
IBM
Mag Card II
Typewriter
IBM
Mag Card/ A
Typewriter
Standard Features
Printer Acoustical Filter Hood
Alternate Sections of Memory
Dual Pitch Printer
End of Ribbon Shut Off
I nternal Scan
Production Tab
Selective Ribbon System
Input Automatic Centering
Automatic Decimal Tabulation
Automatic Error Correction
Automatic Line Length and Tab Grid
Automatic Word Underscore
Keyboa rd-Electronic
Memory Storage - 6,000 characters
Memory Storage - 8,000 characters
Pack Feed - 50 cards
Paragraph Indent (14 levels)
Single Card Feed Slot w / Stacker
Unattended Printing
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Optional Features
End of Paper Switch
I BM Correctable FIlm Ribbon
Limiting Device
Pin Feed Platens
Reverse Index
Roll Paper Holder
X
X
X
X
X
Mag Card "Executive"
Typewriter
Mag Card "Selectric"
Typewriter
Standard Features
Standard Features
Acoustical Filter Hood
Automatic Word
Acoustical Filter Hooel
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
X
X
X
X
-------------=
-"
=---=
- - - ---
M 2700.23
General Systems Division-Machines
Underscore
End of Ribbon Shut Off
Error Correction Backspace / Strikeover
Keyboard - Electronic
Memory Backspace
Paragraph Indent (7 levels)
Production Tab
Proportional Lettering
Removable Card Holder
Selective Ribbon System
Space Expand Button
Optional Features
Pin Feed Platens
Reverse Index
"
Error Correction Backspace / Strikeover
Keyboard - Electronic
Pitch - 10 or 12
Production Tab
Ribbon - Carbon or Fabric
Optional Fsatures
Communicating Feature
Automatic Terminal identification*
Communicate Mode Keylock*
Paragraph Indent-a no charge
option (7 levels)
Pin Feed Platens
Reverse Index
Roll Paper Holder
Selective Ribbon System
*Access-limiting features for Mag
Card "Selectric" Typewriter with
Communicating feature.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Nov 78
_._-=
-= - --==--=
-General Systems Division-Machines
- -- --......
-.-
M 2700.24
__
Nov 78
INCLUDED IN SHIPMENT
Two "Selectric" Typewriter Elements
One Mag Card "Executive" Typewriter
Element
One "Selectric" Typewriter Element
One I BM Correctable Film Ribbon
One IBM lift-off Tape
One Film/Cartridge Ribbon
One Film or Fabric Ribbon
One Magnetic Card
One Magnetic Card File Box
One Magnetic Card Folder
One Magnetic Card Project Box
One Magnetic Card Tray
Five Additional Removable Card Holders
IBM Mag
Card II
Typewriter
IBM Mag
CardIA
Typewriter
X
X
Mag Card
"Executive'
Typewriter
Mag Card
"Selectric"
Typewriter
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
At the time an order is entered, a minimum quantity of four boxes of cards, one box of folders, and ribbons should be ordered.
SPECIFICATIONS
Description
IBM Mag Card II
Typewriter**
IBM Mag CardIA
Typewriter**
Mag Card
"Executive"
Typewriter
Mag Card
"Selectric"
Typewriter
Cable Length
8.0'
8.0'
7.0'
7.0'
Color Console
Charcoal Black/
White
Pebble Gray /
Black
White/ Raven
Black
White/ Raven
Black
Printer
Charcoal Black/
Charcoal Gray
Pebble Gray/
Charcoal Gray
Raven Black/
White/Charcoal
Gray
Raven Black/
Accent Gray/
Charcoal Gray
12"
22-1/4"
12"
22-1/4"
10-3/8"
22-1/4"
10-3/8"
22-1/2"
19"
15-5/8"
19"
15-5/8"
20"
15-5/8"
20"
15-1/2"
26-1/2"
7-5/8"
26-1/2"
7-5/8"
32"
7-1/8"
32"
7-1/8"
641bs.
501bs.
651bs.
501bs.
781bs.
511bs.
751bs.
461bs.
27-1/4"
23-1/4"
46-1/2"
1601bs.
115V, 60 HZ-
27-1/4"
23-1/4"
46-1/2"
156.5Ibs.
115V, 60 HZ-
26-7/8"
22-3/4"
46-3/4"
1691bs.
115V, 60 HZ-
27-1/4"
23-1/4"
43-1/2"
1641bs.
115V.60 HZ
3 amps current
drain
3 amps current
drain
2 amps current
drain
2 amps current
drain
Dimensions and Weights
Net
Width
Console
Printer
Depth
Console
Printer
Height
Console
Printer
Weight
Console
Printer
Shipping
Length
Width
Height
Weight(Gross)
Voltage Requirements
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----- ----~--=
-- General Systems Division-Machines
---- - -..
-----
- -= _ -
Special Features
Reverse Index Selectiv'" Ribbon System
End of Paper Switch
I BM Correctable Film Rihbon Limiting Device
Paragraph Indent
Pin Feed Platens
Roll Paper Holder
Format Feature
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 2700.25
Nov 78
- .......
- -.-= --- =--==
General Systems Division-Machines
-.--.-
- - _._=
.
This page left blank intentionally
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 2700.26
Nov 78
-=- -=- -- ---=---=
------
M2711.1
April 78
General Systems Division-Machines
-
2711 LINE ADAPTER UNIT
Bibliography: GA22-6822.
Purpose: Unit for attachment to 2025 Processing Unit(s) equipped with an Integrated Communications Attachment, 3135
Processing Unit(s) equipped with an Integrated Communications
Adapter, and/or 2702/2703 Transmission Control(s), and/or
3704/3705 Communications Controller. It provides for the
addition of IBM Line Adapters for a 2025 or 3135 using an ICA
feature and attachment of additional IBM Line Adapters for
2702s/2703s/3704s/3705s. The IBM Line Adapters serve as
modems for use on appropriate communication facilities, permitting communication with similarly equipped IBM terminals.
Specify
Highlights: A modular unit ... provides for installation of up to
thirty-two IBM Line Adapters. See "Special Features" below.
These
adapters
are
for
use
by
the
attached
2702/2703/3704/3705(s). They provide for modulating and
demodulating signals over communication facilities in a manner
similar to common carrier data sets that would otherwise be
required for those functions. Thus, when I BM Line Adapters are
used, common carrier data sets are not required.
Three types of IBM Line Adapters can be installed to provide for:
limited distance (8 wire-miles) communication ... communication
over privately owned or leased common carrier facilities, and/or
'" the equivalent of up to four independent low speed channels
from a single voice grade channel (each low speed channel may
be operated point-to-point or multi-point).
The basic 2711 accommodates up to four IBM Line Adapters, in
any combination ... for more than four, Line Adapter Modules
(#4794) are required. Each #4794 permits attachment ot up to
four additional IBM Line Adapters, in any combination. A maximum of seven #4794s can be installed, for a total of thirty-two
IBM Line Adapters per 2711 ... see "Special Features" below.
Communication Facilities: The 2711, when equipped with
appropriate I BM Line Adapter(s). can attach to common carrier
leased private line telephone channels or privately owned communication facilities conforming to the specifications described
in SRL GA24-3435* under: Limited Distance Line Adapter, Type
2 ... Leased Line Adapter, or ... Shared Line Adapter.
Attachment to Communication Lines: Attachment to communication facilities conforming to the specifications above is via
the appropriate I BM Line Adapter(s) for the type(s) of communication service being used ... see "Special Features" below.
Customer Responsibilities: See M 2700 pages.
Prerequisites: Attachment to 2025 Attachment is made via the
Integrated Communications Attachment (#4580) on a per line
basis to EIA Start/Stop Data Adapters ... see 2025. Note: In a
S/360 Model 25, attachment can also be made via a 2702 or
2703 ... see below.
Attachment to 3135 Attachment is made via the Integrated
- Communications Adapter (#4640) on a per line basis, to a Terminal Adapter Type I Model I (#9721-9728) ... see 3135.
Limitation: Only IBM Line Adapter (#4647) is supported ... see
"Special Features." Note: In a S/370 Model 135, attachment
can also be made via a 2702 or 2703 ... see below.
Attachment to 2702 Attachment is made on a per line basis to
the Data Set Line Adapter (#3233) on the 2702 ... see 2702.
Attachment to 2703 Attachment is made on a per line basis for
up to eight lines to each Data Line Set (#3205) or Data Line Set
Expander (#3206) ... see 2703.
Attachment to 3704/3705 Attachment is made on a per line
basis to Line Set Type 1A or 10 (#4711 or #4714).
(1) Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 cycle): #9902 for 208V, or
#9904 for 230V.
(2) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
(3) Line Assignments: Must be specified on 2711 Line Assignment Form (120-1468).
Limitations: Up to thirty-two of the IBM Line Adapters below,
in any combination, can be installed ... operation with 1030,
1050 or 2741 (with Interrupt (#4708)) is limited to the 4-wire
versions of the leased line adapter (#4647) or shared line adapters (#4691, 4692, 4693 or 4694).
Special Features:
tlBM Line Adapter (#4790): A modem for 2-wire limited distance use (up to 8 wire-miles). Line turnaround time is approximately 12 ms ... see Limited Distance Line Adapter, Type 2 in
SRL GA24-3435***for specifications aftd restrictions. For operation with similarly equipped 1030/1050/1060/1070 systems
and 2740/2741 terminals at speeds up to 600 bps. Limitations:
See above. Prerequisite: An available position in the basic unit
or in a Line Adapter Module (#4794).
tlBM Line Adapter #4639 for 2-wire, #4647 for 4-wire). A
modem for leased common carrier or privately owned voice
grade facilities. Line turnaround time is approximately 200 ms
for #4639 and 20 ms for #4647, both plus line propagation time
'" see Leased Line Adapter in SRL GA24-3435* for,specifications and restrictions. For operation with similarly equipped
1030/1050/1060 systems and 2740/2741 terminals at speeds
up to 600 bps, as applicable. There is no limitation on the length
of the communication line that can be served, if it conforms to
the specifications in SRL GA24-3435*. Limitations: See above.
Prerequisite: An available position in the basic unit or in a Line
Adapter Module (#4794).
tlBM Line Adapter (#4641-4644 for 2-wire, #4691-4694 for
4-wire). A modem for shared use of a leased common carrier or
privately owned voice grade facility. Line turnaround time is
approximately 200 ms for #4641-4644 and 20 ms for #46914694, both plus line propagation time ... see Shared Line Adapter in SRL GA24.,.3435* for specifications and restrictions. For
operation with similarly equipped 1050/1060 systems and
2740/2741 terminals at speeds up to 134.5 bps. When used, a
single leased telephone line can provide up to four 134.5 bps
"subchannels" ... the equivalent of up to four low-speed lines
from a single voice grade channel. Each "subchannel" is obtained through use of one of the four shared line adapters. Thus,
to operate four "subchannels" on a single telephone channel,
four line adapters (#4641 through #4644) for a 2-wire channel.
or (#4691 through #4694) for a 4-wire channel are required.
Limitations: See above. Prerequisite: Each line adapter requires an available position in the basic unit or in a Line Adapter
Module (#4794).
Ordering: The terminal with which each "subchannel" on
the 2711 is to communicate must be equipped with the
same shared line adapter, i.e., the same feature #.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---.-- --=
=
~~
--= ,ii1= ':'
--
M2711.2
~
=
General Systems Division-Machines
Line adapters for use with each different leased telephone
channel must be ordered in sequence, as follows:
Forsubchannell
Forsubchannel2
Forsubchannel3
Forsubchannel4
2-wire
4-wire
#4641
4642**
4643**
4644**
#4691
4692**
4693**
4694**
**Subchannel lis prerequisite for installation of
higher numbered subchannels, unless Shared Line
Adapter 4/1 Terminator (#6350) is ordered.
Line Adapter Module #4794: For attachment of up to four
additional I BM Line Adapters ... any of those above, in any
combination. Maximum Seven.
~
Shared Line Adapter 4/1 Terminator (#6350): A pluggable
device for physically attaching up to four different 2-wire IBM
shared line adapters (#4641-4644) or up to four different 4-wire
IBM shared line adapters (#4691-4694) to a single 404B Telephone Co. line terminating jack ... see Shared Line Adapter
installatiofl practices in SRL GA24-3435*:
Prerequisite: The appropriate IBM Line Adapters (#4641-4644)
or (#4691-4694).
*SRL GA24-3435-2, or subsequent revisions.
tFor further information on IBM Line Adapters, see M 2700
pages.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
April78
------
= = =---=
-- -----.. -
M274D.1
General Systems Division-Machines
April 78
-~-
2740 COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
Purpose: A Selectric® typewriter· terminal (printer/keyboard) for
transmission of data or text to or from another terminal or data
p'rocessing system.
Model 1: Keyboard/ pripter terminal for transmission to or from
another 2740 Model 1, or to or from a 5/360 Model 22 thru 85,
195, or S/370 Model 115 thru 195 or a Series/1 Model 3 or 5 ...
see "Communication Facilities" and "Prerequisites" below. Also
attaches directly to a 2715 Transmission Control for keyboard
input or printed outpu~ ... see "Prerequisites" below.
Model 2: Buffered keyboard/printer terminal for transmission to
or from a S/360 Model 22 thru 85, 195, or S/370 Model 115
thru 195 ... see "Communication Facilities" and "Prerequisites"
below.
Model Changes: Cannot be made in the field.
Highlights: The unit's Selectric typewriter provides the optimum
in operator/machine relationship. Special features a·vailable
permit tailoring of terminals to the requirements of a specific
work station.
.
System control keys and indicator lights, located conveniently
alongside the keyboard, make it a compact console-like unit.
When not used for data transmission, the typewriter may be
used for office typing. (Note: There are basic design differences
in the 2740 which will result in different printing output than the
Selectric typewriter. Customers with applications requiring
critical printing must be directed to evaluate 2740 output capability in light of their own needs. Statements by IBM must not
be made equating 2740 output printing to the Selectric typewriter output.)
Model 1 Code and system capability permit transmission to or
from other 2740 Model 1s, or to or from a suitably equipped
S/360 or S/370 or Series/1 ... see System Application, under
"Specify" below.
Model 2 Code and system application permit transmission to or
from a suitably equipped S/360 or S/370. The basic unit has a
120-position magnetic core buffer. Data entered from the keyboard can be stored and visually verified before transmission to
the S/360 or S/370. Data from the S/360 or S/370 is received
directly by the' printer, except when the unit is equipped with
Buffer Receive (#1499) ... see "Special Features." This model
also includes the functions. provided by Station Control (#7479)
on the model 1 .
Communication Facilities: Either model operates in half duplex
mode over the following facilities at the speeds indicated. For
information concerning the facilities, see M 2700 pages.
Model 1: At 134.5 bps via facility C1, C2, 01, G1 or G2.
Model 2: At 75 bps via facility A4. At 134.5 bps via facility 01,
G1 or G2. At 600 bps via facility 02 or G2.
Note: For attachment to A4, the channels must be capable of
75 bps operation, use non-code sensitive regeperators and a
9-bit Character' code, and be terminated in a 62:5 ma neutral
DC loop of the terminal.
Also see Data Set Attachment under "Specify" for required
facility specification code. On appropriate lines, IBM Line Adapters may be used in lieu of data sets ... see "Special Features."
IBM Line Adapters and data sets cannot be mixed on the same
circuit.
Prerequisites: Attachment to a 2715 Transmission Control Unit
(Model 1 only)-requires a 2715 Model 2, or a 2715 Model 1
equipped with a Local 2740 Adapter (#4850) ... 2715 Attachment (#9715) is also required on the 2740 Model 1 itself. See
"Specify" below.
Communication with Another 2740 (Model 1 only)-system
Application (#9701) is required on each 2740 ... in addition, the
same Data Set Attachment is required on each 274'0. See
"Specify" below.
Communication with a S/360 Model 25-via the Integrated
Communications Attachment· (#4580) with appropriate features
on the 2025 ... see "Special Features" under 2025.
Note: Communication with a S/360 Model 25 may also
be via a 2701,2702 or 2703.
Communication with a S/370 Model 115, 1l5, 135-via the
Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640) on the 3115, 3125,
3135. Also a 2701, 2702, 2703, 3704 or 3705 can be used ...
see below.
Communication with a S/360 Model 22 thru 85, 195, or S/370
Model 115 thru 195-via a 2701 Data Adapter Unit, or
2702/2703 Transmission Control equipped with appropriate
features ... see 2701, 2702 or 2703,
Communication with a S/360 Model 30 thru 195 (except Model
44, 67 in TSS Mode, 85 or 91), or S/370 Model 115 thru
195-via a 3704/3705 Communications Controller. Note: See
the 3704 and 3705 Machines and Programming sales manual
pages for attachment capability and refer to Host System Programming pages for possible restrictions to any of the above
attachments.
.
Communications with a Series/1 Model 3 and 5 via Asynchronous Comm. Single Line Control (#1610), or Asynchronous
Comm. 8 Line Control (#2091) in conjunction with Asynchronous
Comm. 4 Line Adapter (#2092).
.
Customer Responsibilities: See M 2700 pages.
Bi~liography:GA24-3089.
Specify
(1) Voltage (AC,
1-phase, 3-wire, 60 cycle):
Locking
. plug-#9880 for 115 V, #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230
V. Non:-Iock plug-#9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, or
#9887 for 230 V. If a 2740 is to be installed on a raised floor,
specify Moisture Proof Plug -#9902 for 208V, or #9904 for·
230V.
(Note: Consideration of voltage must be made independently of
CPU voltage and ShOllld be specified only after checking availa- .
ble voltage at terminal location.)
(;2.) Printing Element:. One element is supplied ... see "Typ~
Catalog"~ page TC 21, etc. for available PTTC/BCD,
PTTC/EBCD and~tandard
Selectric elements available,
feature #s, and pnces. of additional elements. The element
specified determines the keyboard arrangement. (Note:. The
byte structure 'of the standard.
Selectric character set
differs fr~m that for PTTC/ BCD or PTTC/EBCD character
sets. The 2740 Model 1 or 2 is not Type I programming supported on S/360 with any standard
Selectric elements.
Standard
Seiectric elements are not available for the
2740 Model 2.)
(3) Character Spacing: #9104 for 10 characters/inch, or #9105
for 12 characters/inch. (Note: #91 05 is not recommended
unless a 12-pitch element ·is specified ~ .. intermixing of char-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----= -= -=--~ General Systems Division-Machines
---~---~.-.-
--
acter spacing on terminals in anyone system should be
avoided .. , character spacing cannot be changed in the field.)
(4) Une Feeding: #9435 for 6 lines/inch, or #9436 for 8
lines/inch. If a Pin Feed Platen is desired in lieu of the standard lriction feed platen, see "Special Features" below. #9435
or #9436 must be specified even though a Pin Feed Platen is
orderea.
(5) Data Set Attachment: Unless an IBM Line Adapter, Telegraph Une Attachment (#7807), or 2715 Attachment (#9715)
is specified, one of the following #s must be specified; depending upon the facility to be used.
#9114-(Model 1 only) for facility C1 or C2.
Prerequisite: Dial Up (#3255) ... see "Special Features."
#9115, #911'6 or #9120 for Facility 01 M.
See this Facility in the M27UO pages for applicability of
these codes.
#9121 for facility 02.
Prerequisite: Speed Base - 600 BPS (#7106) ... see "Special
Features."
See M 2700 pages, this section, for information on these
communication facilities.
(6) System Application (Model 1 only): #9700 for terminal-tomultiplexer system (except 2715), or #9701 for terminal-toterminal.
(7) 2715 Attachment (Model 1 only): #9715 ... required for
attachment to a 2715.
Prerequisite: Dial Up (#3255) and Print Element (#9592). Cable
for the 2740 must be ordered on the 2715 Cable Order Form.
Limitation: When attached to a 2715, Dial Up #3255) is the
only special feature that can be installed on the 2740.
Special Features: For Either Model
tlBM Line Adapter (#4634 for 2-wire, #4635 for 4-wire).
A modem for local use up to 4.75 wire-miles over facility G 1 .
See Umited Distance Line Adapter, Type I in SRL GA24-3435**
for specifications and restrictions. Note: Operation with a 2712
Remote Multiplexer requires #4635.
tlBM Line Adapter (#4639 for 2-wire, #4647 for 4-wire):
A modem for leased or privately owned voice grade use (facility
01 or 02). See Leased Une Adapter in SRL GA24-3435** for
specifications and restrictions. Limitation: For point-to-point
terminal-to-multiplexer operation, #4647 cannot be used on the
2740 Model 1 when the multiplexer is operated in continuous
carrier mode.
tlBM Line Adapter (#4641-4644 for 2-wire, #4691-4694 for
4-wire):
A modem for shared use of a Type 3002 Private Line Service* or
privately owned voice grade facility (facility 01). See Shared
Une Adapter in SRL GA24-3435** for specifications, use and
restrictions. When used, a single voice grade line can provide up
to four independent "subchannels" ... the equivalent of up to
four independent low-speed lines from a single voice grade line.
Each "subchannel" operates on a separate frequency and simultaneous data flow is possible on all four "subchannels," either
on a point-to-point or multipoint basis.
M274D.2
April 78
2-wire
#4641--forsubchanneI1
#4642--forsubchanneI2
#4643--forsubchanneI3
#4644-forsubchanneI4
4-wire
#4691 forsubchannel 1
#4692 for subchannel2
#4693forsubchannel3
#4694forsubch~nneI4
Maximum One per 2740.
Prerequisite: All units expected to communicate directly with
each other must be on the same "subchannel", i.e., must be
equipped with the same shared line adapter (same feature #) ...
it is recommended that if no more than two "subchannels" are
required on a line facility, that #4641 and #4642, or #4691 and
#4692, be used. Limitation: For point-to-point terminal-tomultiplexer operation, #4691 - #4694 cannot be used on the
2740 Model 1 when the multiplexer is operated in continuous
carrier mode.
tlBM Line Adapter (#4790): A modem for 2-wire limited distance use up to 8 wire-miles at speeds up to 600 bps over faoili.;.
ty G2. See Limited Distance Line Adapter, Type 2B, in SRL
GA24-3435** for specifications and restrictions.
Pin Feed Platen (#9509): (Purchase Only) For Plant
Installation--specify #9509 ... maximum one, in lieu of standard
friction feed platen. See "Pin Feed Platens" on M 10000 pages,
this section, for available options, Feature #s to be specified and
price.
limitation:
Cannot be used if Document Insertion (#3401 or 3402) is installed.
Record Checking (#6114): Provides a combination of character
(parity) checking and block (longitudinal redundancy) checking.
For Model 1 Only
Automatic EOB (#1313): Provides an automatic EOB (End of
Block) code following the carriage return code upon depression
of the carriage return key.
Prerequisite: Record Checking (#6114).
Dial Up (#3255). Required when a di~1 data set is used, i.e.,
when Data Set Attachment (#9114) is specified.
Limitation: Cannot be used with Station Control (#7479).
Station Control (#7479): Gives the terminal the ability to react to
a poll or address from a multiplexer. The polling scheme employs a "character + space" poll or address. The addressing
sequence is identified by the "start of address" (comma) character. Limitation: Cannot be used with Dial Up (#3255) or 2760
Attachment (#8301). (Note: The functions provid.ed by this
feature on a Model 1 are standard on the Model 2.)
Transmit Control (#8028): Gives the terminal the ability to
respond to a 2-character control code sequence from a multiplexer and to switch from a standby condition to a transmit
condition. Limitation: Cannot be used with a 2760 Attachment
(#8301). Prerequisite: Dial Up (#3255).
2760 Attachment (#8301): To attach a 2760 Optical Image
Unit. A PTTC/BCD or PTTC/EBCD Data 1 or Data 2 type font
printing element must be specified with this feature. See "Type
Catalog," page 23, for feature Is. Limitations: Can be field
installed only on units serial no. 15000 or above ... cannot be
installed with Station Control (#7479) or Transmit Control
(#8028). Prerequisite: Record Checking (#6114).
For Model 2 Only
Buffer Expansion (#1495, 1496): To increase capacity of the
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------= - -=--==
-- ---
- -=
M2740.3
~
April 78
General Systems Division-Machines
basic 120-position magnetic core buffer. #1495-for positions
121 to 248 '" #1496-for positions 249 to 440. Prerequisite:
#1496 requires #1495.
Buffer Receive (#1499): Permits data to enter the buffer from
the communication line in lieu of going directly to the printer.
Incoming data is stored until an EOT is received ... terminal then
automatically goes to a receive buffer print state and prints out
the contents of the buffer.
Document Insertion (#3401, 3402): (Plant installation only) For
insertion of single part ledger cards in front of the typewriter
platen without using the platen knobs. See SRL GA24-3403 for
details on portions of ledger cards which cannot be used for
printing. Manual positioning is required for each new print line.
Includes controls and lights necessary for a Split Friction Feed
Platen (#9600). Maximum: One, #3401 or #3402. Limitation:
Pin Feed Platen (#9509) cannot be used if this feature is installed.
#3401 Accepts a ledger card 6" wide (maximum), with minus
1/32" tolerance, and length of at least 5". With a 10-pitch
printing element, 25 characters may be printed before printing
on the ledger begins ... with a 12-pitch element, 30 characters.
The 26th character (10-pitch) and 31st (12-pitch) are not printable on the ledger card. The 27th (10-pitch) and 32nd (12-pitch)
will be the first printable character and the 85th (10-pitch) and
102nd (12-pitch) the last printable character on the ledger card.
#3402 Accepts a ledger card 7-3/8" wide (maximum), with
minus 1/32" tolerance, and length of at least 5". With a 10pitch printing element, 55 characters may be printed before
printing on the ledger begins ... with a 12-pitch element, 66
characters. The 56th character (1 O-pitch) and 67th (12-pitch)
are not printable on the ledger card. The 57th (1 O-pitch) and
68th (12-pitch) will be the first printable character and the 129th
(10-pitch) and 155th (12-pitch) the last printable character on
the ledger card.
Edit (#3600): Helps in error correction of keyboard-entered data.
Provides two additional keys, Line Return and Line Type, for
operator use in making corrections.
Header Control (#4510): Permits customer designation of the
first 28 positions of the buffer (in groups of 4 positions) for
repetitive header information. Under switch control, keyed data
may be entered into the header area and played back for verification. Header is transmitted each time the buffer is read out to
the line. The header size (4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24 or 28 positions) is
specified by customer at installation time.
Speed Base - 600 BPS (#7106): To transmit and receive data
over common carrier leased or privately owned facilities at 600
bps ... transmission character rate is 66.7 characters/second.
(Note: Buffer print will be at normal 14.8 cps rate.) Limitation:
Cannot be used when 2740 is connected to a 2712 Remote
Multiplexer. Prerequisite: Buffer Receive (#1499).
Split Friction Feed Platen (#9600): (Plant installation only) One
2-section platen with the split located to provide a 5-1/2" printing line on the left and a 7 1/2" printing line on the right can be
purchased in lieu of the standard friction feed platen ... with this
'platen and Document Insertion (#3401, 3402), two separate
forms, in addition to printing on a ledger card, can be inserted
and individually controlled. For purchase price, see "Split Friction Feed Platen" on M 10000 pages. Maximum: One.
t
For further information, see M 2700 pages, this section.
tTelegraph Line Attachment (#7807): For operation with 75
baud common carrier leased private line telegraph service, or
privately owned equivalent, only. With this feature, transmission
rate is 8.33 characters/second. (Note: If Buffer Receive·(#1499)
is also installed, buffer print will be at normal 14.8 cps rate.)
Limitation Cannot be used when 2740 is connected to a 2712
Remote Multiplexer.
t
For further information, see page M 2700
tion.
(1~,
etc, this sec-
Accessories
Roll Paper Hold~r (for 2740):: Provides for mounting of rolls of
paper or continuous forms. Includes a tear bar and forms guide.
If ordered on a Single Use-Charge basis prior to August 6, 1973,
may be retained by rental customers at any time in the future if
they so desire. Upon machine discontinuance, if a customer
does not desire to retain roll paper holder, it is to be returned
with the machine. If ordered on a purchase basis, the roll paper
holder remains the property of the customer and is to be removed when a rental machine is discontinued.
Pin Feed Platens (2704): For feeding of continuous forms that
have pre-punched feed holes. On anyone machine, one pin feed
platt:ln may be ordered for plant installation in lieu of the standard solid platen. The platen becomes the property of the customer and cannot be returned for credit.
One in lieu of std friction feed platen (max 1 per machine)
#9509
Pin Feed Platen (regular)
Specify
[1] #9509 '" [2] Line Spacing and Hole-to-hole Width: One feature number, depending upon forms width and line spacing,
from "Line Spacing" below. Prerequisite: On 2740 the appropriate Feature Number for line spacing on the basic machine
(#9435 for 6 lines/inch, or #9436 for 8 lines/inch) is required ...
see "Specify" under each unit in "Machines."
Line Spacing With #9509 one of the following Feature Numbers
must be specified in accordance w'ith line spacing and hole-tohole width of the forms to be used.
Over-all Forms
Width
Hole-to-Hole
Width
Writing
Line
Feature No. for Line Spacing
6 lines/inch
S lines/inch
5-3/4"
6-1/2"
S"
S-1/2"
9-1/2"
9-7/S"
10-3/S"
10-1/2"
10-5/S"
11-3/4"
12"
13"
13-5/S"
14-3/S"
5-1/4"
6"
7-1/2"
S"
9"
9-3/S"
9-7/S"
10"
10-1/S"
11-1/4"
11-1/2"
12-1/2"
13-1/S"
13-7/S"
4-5/S"
5-3/S"
6-7/S"
7-3/S"
S-3/S"
S-3/4"
9-1/4"
9-3/S"
9-1/2"
10-5/S"
10-7/S"
11-7/S"
12-1/2"
13-1/4"
9151
9152
9153
9154
9155
9156
9157
915S
9159
9160
9161
9167
9162
916S-
-No additional installation charges
Prerequisites: Document Insertion (#3401 or 3402) and Line
Feeding (#9435) (6 lines/inch).
* or equivalent
** SRL GA24-2435-2, or subsequent revisions.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
9272
9273
9274
9275
927S
9279
92S0
92S1
92S7
92S2
92SS-
--= ---- General SystemS'''Division-Machines
=---=
-----
- =-.
M2741.1
April 78
2741 COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
Specify
Purpose: A Selectric® typewriter terminal to satisfy special
system applications that require one-terminal-per-line operation.
(1) Voltagett (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 cycle):
Locking
plug-#9880 for 115V, #9884 for 208V, or #9886 for 230V.
Non-lock plug-#9881 for 115V, #9885 for 208V, or #9887
,for 230V. If a 2741 is to be installed on a raised floor, specify
Moisture Proof Plug-#9902 for 208V, or #9904 for 230V.
(Note: Consideration of voltage must be made independently
of CPU voltage and should be specified only after checking
available voltage at terminal location.)
Highlights:
Looks
like
and
includes
the
optimum
operator/machine relationship of the standard Selectric typewriter. The only terminal controls located in the keyboard area
are the "On'/Off" switch and "Attention" key. Mounted on a
stand similar to that of the 2740. The typewriter may be used
for office typing when not used for data transmission.
iii'
(Note: There are basic design differences in the 2741
which will result in different printing output than the Selectric typewriter. Customers with applicc;ltions requiring
critical printing must be directed to evaluate 2741 output
capability in light of their own needs. Statements by IBM
must not be made equating 2741 output printing to the
Selectric typewriter output.)
Code and systems compatibility provide for transmission to or
from a suitably equipped S/360 Model 22 thru 85, 195, or
S/370 Model 125 thru 195. The 2741 can attach to a 3790
system via a 3792 Auxiliary Control Unit. See "Prerequisites"
below.
Communication Facilities: The 2741 operates in half-duplex
mode over the following facilities. For information concerning
the facilities, see M 2700 pages.
At 134.5 bps via facility C1, C2, D1, G1, or G2.
Also see Data Set Attachment under "Specify" for required
facility specification code. On appropriate lines, IBM Line Adapters may be used in lieu of data sets ... see "Special FeattJres."
IBM Line Adapters and data sets cannot be mixed on the same
circuit.
Prerequisites
Communication with a 5/360 Model 25: Via the Integrated
Communications Attachment (#4580) with appropriate features
on the 2025. Communication with a S/360 Model 25 may also
be via a 2701, 2702 or 2703.
Communication with a 5/370 Model 115, 125, 135: Via the
Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640) on the 3115, 3125,
3135. Also a 2701, 2702, 2703, 3704 or 3705 can be used ...
see below.
Communication with a 5/360 Model 22 thru 85, 195, or
5/370 Model 115 thru 195 Via a 2701 Adapter Unit, or 2702 or
2703 Transmission Control equipped with appropriate features
... see 2701, 2702, 2703.
Communication with a 5/360 Model 30 thru 195 (except
Model 44, 67 in T55 Model, 85 or 91) or 5/370 Model 115
thru 195: Via a 3704 or 3705 Communications Controller. Note:
See the 3704 and 3705 Machines and Programming sales manual pages for attachment capability and refer to Host System
Programming pages for possible restrictions to any of the above
attachments.
Communication with a 3792 Auxiliary Control Unit: Via an
IBM Leased Line Adapter (#5400) or EIA Interface (#3701) on
the 3792.
Customer Responsibilities: See M 2700 pages, this section.
Bibliography: GA24-3089.
(2) Printing Element: One element is supplied ... see "Type
Catalog," page TC 21 etc. for available PTTC/BCD,
PTTC/EBCD and standard
Selectric elements available,
feature #s, and prices of additional elements. The element
specified determines the keyboard arrangement. (Note: The
byte structure of the standard
Selectric character set
differs from that for PTTC/BCD or PTTC/EBCD character
sets.)
(3) Character Spacing: #9104tt for 10 characters/inch, or #9105
for 12 characters/inch. (Note: #9105 is not recommended
unless a 12-pitch element is specified ... intermixing of character spacing on terminals in anyone system should be
avoided ... character spacing cannot be changed in the field.)
(4) Line Feeding: #9435tt for 6 lines/inch, or #9436 for 8
lines/inch. If a Pin Feed Platen is desired in lieu of the standard friction feed platen, see "Special Features" below. #9435
or #9436 must be specified even though a Pin Feed Platen is
ordered.
(5) Data Set Attachment:tt Unless an IBM Line Adapter is spec. ified, one of the following #s must be specified, depending
upon the facility to be used.
#9114 For facility C1 or C2.
Prerequisite: Dial Up (#3255) ... see "Special Features."
#9115, #9116 or #9120 For facility D1 M.
See the D1 M Facility in the M 2700 pages for the availabilhy of these codes.
See M 2700 pages, this section. for information on these
communication facilities.
Special Features:
ttDial Up (#3255): Required when a dial data set is used, i.e.,
when Data Set Attachment (#9114) is specified.
Interrupt, Receive (#4708), Transmit (#7900): Either can be
used with any of the communication facilities listed above.
Receive Interrupt' (#4708) Used to interrupt transmission
from the processor at the operator's convenience.
Transmit Interrupt (#7900) Allows the processor to interrupt transmission from the 2741. Limitation: Cannot be
used when 12741 is connected to a 2701, or to a S/360 Model 25 via the Integrated Communications Attachment
(#4580). Prerequisites: For #4708, either 2741 Break
(#8055) or Type I Terminal Interrupt (#8200) on a 2702 or
2703 or a S/370 Model 125 Integrated Communications
Adapter (#4640) or a S/370 Model 135 Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640) with Write Interrupt (#9745-9752) .. ,
For #7900, Type I Terminal Interrupt (#8200) on a 2702 or
2703 or a S/370 Model 125 Integrated Communications
Adapter (#4640) or a S/370 Model 135 Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640) with Read Interrupt (#9737-9744) .. ,
if an IBM Line Adapter is used, it must be a 4-wire version.
tlBM Line Adapter (#4634 for 2-wire, #4635 for 4-wire):
A modem for local use up to 4.75 wire-miles over facility G1.
See Limited Distance Line Adapter, Type 1 in SRL GA24-3435**
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- --
_
-....
--- -- .-.-~-
M2741.2
----~
--~.-
April 78
General Systems Division-Machines
-~-.-
for specifications and restrictions. Note: Operation with a 2712
Remote Multiplexer requires #4635.
holder remains the property of the customer and is to be removed when a rental machine is discontinued.
tlBM Line Adaptertt (#4639 for 2-wire, #4647 for 4-wire):
Pin Feed Platens (2741): For feeding of continuous forms that
have prepunched feed holes. On anyone machine, one pin feed
platen may be ordered for plant installation in lieu of the standard solid platen. The platen becomes the property of· the customer and cannot be returned for credit.
A modem for leased or privately owned voice grade use (facility
D1). See Leased Line Adapter in SRL GA24-3435** for specifications and restrictions.
tlBM Line Adapter (#4641-4644 for 2-wire, #4691-4694 for
4-wire):
A modem for shared use of a Type 3002 Private Line Seryice* or
privately owned voice grade facility (facility D1). See Shared
Line Adapter in SRL GA24-3435** for specifications, use and
restrictions. When used, a single voice grade line can provide up
to four independent "subchannels" ... the equivalent of up to
four independent low-speed lines from a single voice grade line.
Each "subchannel" operates on a separate frequency and simultaneous data flow is possible on all four "subchannels."
2-wire
#4641 forsubchannel 1
#4642 for subchannel2
#4643forsubchannel3
#4644forsubchannel4
4-wire
#4691 forsubchannel 1
#4692 for subchannel2
#4693 for subchannel3
#4694forsubchannel4
Maximum: One per 2741. Prerequisite: The multiplexer with
which the 2741 is to communicate must be equipped with the
same "subchannel," i.e., the same feature # ... it is recommended that if no more than two "subchannels" are required on a line
facility, that #4641 and #4642, or #4691 and #4692, be used.
tlBM Line Adapter (#4790): A modem for 2-wire limited distance use up to 8 wire-miles over facility G2 See Limited Distance Line Adapter, Type 2 in SRL A24-3435** for specifications
and restrictions.
One in lieu of std friction feed platen (max 1 perplachine)
Pin Feed Platen (regular) .............................................. #9509
Specify
(1) #9509 ... (2) Line Spacing and Hole-to-hole Width: One
feature number, depending upon forms width and line spacing,
from ·"Line Spacing" below. Prerequisite: On 2741 the appropriate Feature Number for line spacing on the basic machine
(#9435 for 6 lines/inch, or #9436 for 8 lines/inch) is required ...
see "Specify" under each unit in "Machines."
Line Spacing With #9509 or #9510, one of the following Feature
Numbers must be specified in accordance with line spacing and
hole-to-hole width of the forms to be used.
Over-all Forms
Width
5-3/4"
6-1/2"
8"
8-1/2"
9-1/2"
9-7/8"
10-3/8"
10-1/2"
10-5/8"
11-3/4"
12"
13"
13-5/8"
14-3/8"
Hole-to-Hole
Width
5-1/4"
6"
7-1/2"
8"
9"
9-3/8"
9-7/8"
10"
10-1/8"
11-1/4"
11-1/2"
12-1/2"
13-1/8"
13-7/8"
ttPin Feed Platen (#9509): (Purchase Only) For Plant
Installation-specify #9509 ... maximum one, in lieu of standard
friction feed platen. See "Pin Feed Platens" on M 10000 pages,
this section, for available options, feature #s to be specified and
prices.
Print Inhibit (#5501): Allows the processing unit to inhibit the
2741 from printing transmitted or received data.
ttTypamatic Keys (#8341): Allows repeat action when key level
is depressed to a lower level ... operations included are
Hyphen/Underscorer, Space and Backspace.
or equivalent
*
SRL GA24-3435-2, or subsequent revisions.
**
t
For further information, see M 2700 pages, this section
tt Only these specify codes and special features are supported
by the 3790 system.
Accessories
Roll Paper Holder (for 2741): Provides for mounting of rolls of
paper or continuous forms. Includes a tear bar and forms guide.
If ordered on a Single Use-Charge basis prior to August 6, 1973,
may be retained by rental customers at any time in the future if
they so desire. Upon machine discontinuance, if a customer
does not desire to retain roll paper holder, it is to be returned
with the machine. If ordered on a purchase basis, the roll paper
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
Writing
Line
4-5/8"
5-3/8"
6-7/8"
7-3/8"
8-3/8"
8-3/4"
8-1/4"
9-3/8"
9-1/2"
10-5/8"
10-7/8"
11-7/8"
12-1/2"
13-1/4"
Feature No. for
6 lines/inch
9151
9152
9153
9154
9155
9156
9157
9158
9159
9160
9161
9167
9162
9168
Line Spacing
8 lines/ inch
9272
9273
9274
9275
9278
9279
9280
9281
9287
9282
9288
---= -- General Systems Division-Machines
=---=
- -- _.-------
-=
2791 AREA STATION
Purpose: An input/output station and local device data controller for a 2790 Data Communication System.
Model 1 For card, identification badge, and 12-key manual entry
... available adapters provide for attachment of up to three 1035
Badge Readers, up to thirty-two 2795/2796/2797 Data Entry
Units with "a 2715, System/7, or 1800 System, up to twelve
2798 Guidance Display Units (2715 and System/7 only), a 1053
Printer Model 1, and an OEM digital device. See "Special
Features" and "2791/2793 Limitations" under 2793.
Model 2 For card, identification badge, and 12-key manual entry
only.
Model Changes: Model 2 can be changed in the field to Model
1, but not vice versa.
Prerequisite: The 2790 system controller can be a 2715 Transmission Control Unit or a properly equipped or System/7 1800
System.
With 2715 See 2715 for details.
With System/7. See 2790 Control (#8195) under 5012 or 5013.
Highlights: A solid-state, industrially packaged un~t. It features
data entry via prepunched cards, identification badges, and
12-key manual entry ... display of manually entered data for verification before transmission ... step-by-step display of operator
instructions ... display of data in response to an inquiry .,. timeof-day display ... designed for attachment to a unique transmission line capable of handling large volumes of short messages
from many stations.
Card Reader: Standard or Port-A-Punch ® prepunched 80column cards can be individually inserted and removed manually. An upper left corner cut, C1, is required. M3, M4 and M5
scores can be used. Numbers, letters and certain special character card codes are read ... see SRl GA27-3015. Blank card columns are not recognized and are automatically skipped.
Badge Reader: Reads identification badges (22-column card
size) prepunched in IBM code with a maximum of ten digits. The
badges, which are punched on a 13 Badge Punch, are individually inserted and removed manually. Badges with or without a
pocket clip can be used. They can be purchased from vendors or
produced by commercially available equipment. See SRl GA219028 for badge specification.
Note: A badge gauge is shipped at no charge with each badge
punch ... see 13 Badge Punch.
Manual Entry: Ten numeric keys and two special keys provide
for entry of variable numeric source data. As each key is depressed, the number or special character is displayed to the
operator for verification. Up to six positions are displayed for
anyone data field. After verification, an enter key is depressed
to transmit the data to the system controller. The number of
fields that may be entered is specified by the system controller
program.
Digital Display: When not being used for display of manual
entry, the time-of-day is displayed. Digital display may also be
used for display of six digits of data in response to an inquiry.
Operator Guidance: Step-by-step instructions are provided to
the operator for each transaction. The thirty-one guidance indicators are designed to permit the user's own terminology. The
indicators are activated under program control of the system
controller.
Transaction Selection: Nine transaction keys and one release
M2791.1
April 78
key are provided. The transactions may be expanded by subsequent card, badge or manual entry to provide a greater number
of transactions.
Monitor Key: Used where a supervisor's approval is required
before a record can be transmitted. One key is supplied .
Indicators: Advise the operator that: (1) The station is online
and ready for use ... (2) The station is in process of transmitting
a record ... (3) The record is not valid and the "Repeat Clear"
button should be depressed .. , (4) A card is in the card reader.
Control Keys: The "Enter" key is used to transmit the manually
keyed data ... the "Clear" key is used to reset the station to
normal ready status ... the "Next Guidance" key is used to
advance the operator guidance when required for unusual transactions.
Attachment Features: On the Model 1, available features
permit attachment of up to three 1035 Badge Readers, one 1053
Printer Model 1, up to thirty-two 2795/2796/2797 Data Entry
Units (any combination), or up to twelve 2798 Guidance Display
Units and up to eight 2795/2796/2797s (2715 and System/7
only), and one OEM digital device such as a scale, meter or
counter. See "Special Features" below.
Customer Responsibilities: See 2790 in "Systems."
Environment: See 2790 in "Systems."
Limitations: See "2791/2793 Limitations" following 2793.
Bibliography: GA24-3089.
Specify:
(1)Voltage (115V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 cycle): #9880 for
locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
(2) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
(3) Cable to Junction Box: #9030, if required. If initial machine
order includes #3330, 7990, 8030 or 8295, or any combination of these features, #9030 must be specified. Any subsequent MES to add any of these features must also specify
#9030. Note: Do not specify #9030 on mechanical replace
orders; see Physical Planning Manual GA27-3017 for requirement.
Note: If #9030 is specified, provide complete person's name
and address for shipment.. .cables will be shipped automatically, approximately 30 days prior to scheduled delivery.)
(4) For initial 2791 machine order having Extended Distance
Repeater, Receive or Send (#3874, 3875) specify #9547 and
#9548 ... also specify #9548 (oscillator) for each 2791 ordered for the 2790 system.
(5) If a 2792 Remote Communications Controller is used in the
2790 System, specify #9790 for each 2791 Model 1 or 2
attached to the 2792 Model 2 on the second "loop."
Special Features:
Digital Device Read-in (#3330): [Model 1 only] For attachment
of an OEM digital device such as a scale, meter or counter via a
customer-supplied junction box and cable ... reads up to ten
decimal digits. Electrical resistance of OEM device and cable is
limited to 10 ohms ... OEM device must comply with the 2791
interface ... see "Specify" (3) above. Maximum: One.
External Alarm Contacts (#3690): (Model 1 only) Provides a
pair of dry contacts which can be momentarily (35 milliseconds
nominal) closed to allow operation of a customer's attached
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- --=-_-.--=---=
- - ....
-----
M2791.2
General Systems Division-Machines
external alarm device (bell, whistle, light, etc.). Momentary
closure of the contacts is activated by receipt of an EBCDIC
"Bell" character. The contacts are capable of switching 115 V
AC or DC at not more than 0.5 amperes. Maximum: One. Note:
Includes a 4-foot 2-wire cable for attachment of a customerprovided alarm or junct:on box. Limitation: Not available when
System/7 is the system controller. Prerequisite: 1053 Attachment (#8050) on the 2791 and Expanded Capability (#3801) on
the 2715 controller.
Extended Distance Repeater, Receive (#3874): Provides for
operation with another 2791 or 2793 Area Station or 2715
Transmission Control Unit equipped with Extended Distance
Repeater, Send (#3875) located up to 6,000 wire-feet away. See
Physical Planning Manual GA27-3017 for cable specifications.
Maximum: One. Limitations: See Limitations for Extended
Distance Repeater, Send (#3875) below. Field installable on
units shipped prior to October 2, 1971 which also include B/M
#5992893 and all units shipped after October 1, 1971. B/ M
#5992893 is plant installable only ... when #3874 is added anywhere in the 2790 system,
#9548 (oscillator change)
must be ordered for each 2791 or 2793 ordered for the system.
Prerequisites: Extended Distance Repeater, Send (#3875) on
the "up-line" 2791, 2793, or 2715.
April 78
length is 1,000 feet. Maximum: One.
1053 Attachment (#8050): [Model 1 only] For attachment of
one 1053 Printer Model 1 ... maximum 1053 cable length is 8
feet. Maximum: One. Limitation: Print checking is not performed on the 1053 when attached to 2791.
2795/2796/2797 Attachment, Basic (#8295): [Model 1 only]
For attachment of up to eight 2795/2796/2797 Data Entry Units
(any combination) ... see Specify (2) above. Maximum: One.
2795/2796/2797 Attachment, Additional (#8296): (Model 1
only) Each provides for attachment of up to 8 additional
2795/2796/2797 Data Entry Units (any combination) ... see
Specify (2) above. Maximum: Three. Limitations: See
2791/2793 Limitations on 2793 machine page. Prerequisite:
2795/2796/2797 Attachment, Basic (#8295).
Extended Distance Repeater, Send (#3875): Provides for
operation with another 2791 or 2793 Area Station or 2715
Transmission Control Unit equipped with Extended Distance
Repeater, Receive (#3874) located up to 6,000 wire-feet away.
See Physical Planning Manual GA27-3017 for cable specifications. Maximum: One. Limitations: (1) The use of two pairs of
Extended Distance Repeaters, Receive/Send (#3874, 3875) in
tandem is not recommended. If the Area Station having both
Receive and Send Repeater should fail, the entire segment
would be inactive. (2) When an 1800 System or System/7 is the
2790 System Controller, these repeaters cannot be used between the system controller and the first Area Station or between the last Area Station and the system controller. However,
they can be used between all other Area Stations attached to the
system within the maximum limit. (3) Maximum of eight pairs
per 2715, 1800/2790 Adapter (#7570) or System/7. (4) Maximum of two pairs of EDRs may be used on a secondary loop
attached to a 2792. Field installable on units shipped prior to
October 2, 1971, which also include B/M #5992893 and aU
units shipped after October 1, 1971. B/ M #5992893 is plant
installable only ... when #3875 is added anywhere in the 2790
system, an MES, #9548 (oscillator change) must be ordered for
each 2791 or 2793 ordered for the system. Prerequisites:
Extended Distance Repeater, Receive (#3874) on the
"down-line" 2791, 2793 or 2715.
2798 Attachment. Basic (#7990): [Model 1 only] For attachment of up to four 2798 Guidance Display Units. Maximum:
One. Limitations: See "2791/2793 Limitations" on 2793 machine page. Field installable on units shipped prior to October 2,
1971 which also include B/M #5992893 and all units shipped
after October 1, 1971. B/M #5992893 is plant installable only.
Prerequisites: Expanded Capability (#3801) on the 2715 ... see
Specify (3) above.
2798 Attachment. Additional (#7991): [Model 1 only] Each
provides for attachment of up to four 2798 Guidance Display
Units. Maximum: Two.
Limitations: See "2791/2793
Limitations" under 2793 machine page. Prerequisite: 2798
Attachment, Basic (#7990).
1035 Attachment (#8030): [Model 1 only] For attachment of up
to three 1035 Badge Readers via customer-supplied junction
boxes and cable ... see "Specify" (3) above. Maximum cable
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-- --------
-- -=- --=---=
M2792.1
April 78
General Systems Division-Machines
2792 REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER
Purpose: For the 2790 Data Communication System ... controls
exchange of data between the 2790 System Controller and
remote 2790 terminals via common carrier leased communication facilities.
Model 1 Attaches to the 2790 System Controller (via the
"loop"') and directly to the local termination of the
common carrier facilities.
Model 2 Attaches directly to the remote termination of the
common carrier facilities and up to fifteen 2791/2793
Area Stations (via a secondary "loop").
Both a Model 1 and Model 2, operating point-to-point with one
another on the common carrier facilities are required to attach
each group of up to fifteen Area Stations.
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Highlights: For 2790 Systems in which 2790 terminals are
inaccessible to the System Controller via in-house wiring, viz.,
across a thoroughfare, across the city," or in another city; the
2792s enable exchange of data via common carrier leased communication facilities.
Terminal Devices: Each pair of 2792s establishes a secondary
communications loop at the remote location to which can be
attached up to fifteen 2791/2793 Area Stations with their associated 2795/2796/2797 Data Entry Units, 2798 Guidance Display Units, Production Monitoring Pulse Count (#5550), and
other related features ... see 2715 "Maximum Configurations."
Communication Facilities: Between the 2792 Model 1 and
2792 Model 2, the communication facilities must be a leased
four-wire duplex channel, Type 32 with C1 conditioning (or
better) or privately owned equivalent. No data sets (modems)
are required.
If t~e communication facilities round-trip delay exceed 80 milliseconds, the 2792 cannot be used. If the communications route
between the 2792s, Model 1 and Model 2, approximates 1,000
miles or more, or if the communications facilities round-trip
delay is expected to approach 80 milliseconds, the customer
should be advised to consult the common carrier to determine
the expected communication facilities delay.
System/7 is the 2790 System controller, IBM service requires
the resident On-Line Diagnostics program ... see System/7
Programming.
Maximum Configuration: Each 2792 Model 1 is set in the field
to respond to its own address plus the address(es) of 1, 3, 7 or
15 of the Area Stations remotely attached or reserved for future
attachment. The maximum number of Area Stations that can be
locally attached to the 2790 System Controller is reduced by the
set number of addresses. The number of 2791/2792 Model
1/2793s is limited by the number of addresses available t.o the
system controller; i.e., maximum of 100 addresses per 2715.
See 2790 Configurator SRL GA27-3021. Maximum eight pairs
of 2792 Model 1s and 2s per 2715. Maximum of two pairs of
Extended Distance Repeater (EDR) features may be used on a
secondary "loop." When System/7 is the controller the maximum number of 2792 Model 1s is two per "loop" or four per
system.
Limitations:
(1) 2792 attached is not available when the System Controller is
an 1800 System.
(2) The system configuration and the delays encountered in the
common carrier facilities can affect the waiting time at the
remote 2790 terminals served by the 2792s. Graphs and
formulas to assist the user in determining throughput will
be found in SRL GA27-3015. Common carrier communication facilities round-trip delay cannot exceed 80 milliseconds.
Customer Responsibilities:
M2700 pages.
See 2790 in
"Systems" and
Bibliography: GA24-3089.
Specify
(1) Voltage (115V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 cycle): #9880 for
locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
The 2792 Model 1 attaches to the 2715 or System/7 via the
2-wire high speed communications line, in the "loop", similar to
the 2791/2793 Area Stations.
2791/2793 Area Stations attach to the 2792 Model 2 via a
2-wire customer-provided high-speed communication line.
Distances between Area Stations and the 2792 depend upon the
of the line used (e.g., up to 1,000 wire-feet for
#22 AWG). The Extended Distance Repeater features cannot be
installed on the 2792s. However, they can be installed in the
attached Area Stations. See Physical Planning Manual, GA27"3017.
characteristi~s
Prerequisites:
(1) A 2715 Transmission Control tJnit with Expanded Capability
(#3801) or a System/7 with a 2790 control (#8195 on 5012
or 5013) for the 2790 System Controller.
(2) Specify #9790 on each 2791 Area Station Model 1 or Model
2 on the secondary "loop." See "Specify" under 2791.
IBM
Service: To facilitate servicing of the 2790 terminals
on the secondary "loop" by the IBM
a minimum of one 1053
Printer is required proximate to each 2792 Model 2. When
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---..-
--- - -
--~~
- . . -~-
-'
-~-
M2793.1
General Systems Division-Machines
2793 AREA STATION
Purpose: A local device data controller for a 2790 Data Communication System.
Prerequisite: The 2790 system controller can be a 2715 Transmission Control Unit or a properly equipped 1800 Data Acquisition and Control System or a properly equipped System/7.
With 2715 See 2715 for details.
With 1800 See 1800/2790 Adapter (#7570) under 1826 for
details.
With System/7 For details see 2790 Control (#8195) unde(5012
in "Machines."
Highlights: A solid-state, industrially packaged unit. It controls
data transfer between locally attached I/O units and the system
controller. It is designed for attachment to a unique transmission
line capable of handling large volumes of short messages from
many stations.
The basic unit provides for attachment of up to eight
2795/2796/2797 Data Entry Units (any combination ... available
features provide for attachment of up to twenty-four additional
2795/2796/2797s, and a 1053 Printer Model 1, and up to sixteen 2798 Guidance Display Units (2715 and System/7 only).
See "Special Features" below.
Customer Responsibilities: See 2790 in "Systems."
Environment: See 2790 in "Systems."
Limitations: See "2791/2793 Limitations" below.
Bibliography: GA24-3089.
Specify
(1) Voltage (115V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 cycle): #9880 for
locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
(2) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
(3) Cable and Junction Box: #9030, if required. A 4 foot cable
and junction box from the 2793 for initial installation of
2795s/2796s/2797s or #7990, or #5550, and #5552 ... see
Physical Planning Manual GA27-3017 for requirement.
Note: If #9030 is specified, provide complete person's name
and address for shipment ... cables will be shipped automatically, approximately 30 days prior to scheduled delivery.)
(4) For initial 2793' machine order having 'Extended Distance
Repeater, Receive or Send (#3874, 3875), specify #9547 and
#9548; also specify #9548 (oscillator) for each 2793 ordered
for the 2790 system.
Special Features
External Alarm Contacts (#3690): Provides a pair of dry contacts which can be momentarily (35 milliseconds nominal)
closed to allow operation of a customer's attached external
alarm device (bell, whistle, light, etc.). Momentary closure of the
contacts is activated by receipt of an EBCDIC "Bell" character.
The contacts are capable of switching 115 V AC or DC at not
more than 0.5 amperes. Maximum: One. Note: Includes a
4-foot, 2-wire cable for attachment of a customer-provided
alarm or junction box. Limitation: External Alarm not available
when System/7 is the system controller. Prerequisites: 1053
Attachment (#8050) on the 2793 and Expanded Capability
(#3801) on the 2715 in the system.
Extended Distance Repeater, Receive (#3874): Provides for
April 78
operation with another 2793 or 2791 Area Station or 2715
Transmission Control Unit equipped with Extended Distance
Repeater, Send (#3875) located up to 6,000 wire-feet away. 'See
Physical Planning Manual, GA27-3017 for cable specifications.
Maximum: One. Limitations: See Limitations for Extended
Distance Repeater, Send (#3875) below. Field installable on
units shipped prior to October 2, 1971, which also include B/ M
#5992893 and all units shipped after October 1, 1971. The B/ M
is plant installable only ... when #3874 is added anywhere in the
2790 system, an MES, #9548 (oscillator change) must be ordered for each 2791 or 2793 ordered for the system.
Prerequisites: Extended Distance Repeater, Send (#3875) on
the "up-line" 2791, 2793 or 2715.
Extended Distance Repeater, Send (#3875): Provides for
operation with another 2793 or 2791 Area Station or 2715
Transmission Control Unit equipped with Extended Distance
Repeater, Receive (#3874) located up to 6,000 wire-feet away.
See Physical Planning Manual, GA27-3017 for cable specifications. Maximum: One. Limitations: (1) The use of two pairs of
EDRs, Receive or Send in tandem is not recommended. If the
Area Station having both features should fail. the entire segment
would be inactive. (2) When an 1800 System or System/7 is the
2790 System Controller, these repeaters cannot be used between the System Controller and the first Area Station or between the last Area Station and the System Controller. However, they can be used between all other Area Stations attached to
the system within the maximum limit. (3) Maximum of eight
pairs per 2715, 1800/2790 Adapter (#7570) or System/7. (4)
Maximum of two pairs of EDRs may be used on a secondary
loop attached to a 2792. Field installable on units shipped prior
to October 1, 1971, which also include B/M #5992893 and all
units shipped after October 1, 1971. B/ M #5992893 is plant
installable only ... when #3875 is added anywhere in the 2790
system, an MES, #9548 (oscillator change) must be ordered for
each 2791 or 2793 ordered for the system. Prerequisites:
Extended Distance Repeater, Receive (#3874) on the
"down-line" 2791, 2793 or 2715.
Pulse Counters, Basic (#5550): Provides necessary control
circuits, a CE diagnostic counter for servicing all counters on the
Area Station, and the first 7 pulse counters for customer attachment to his production pulsing points. Each counter may be
used as ACCUMULATOR or as a PRE-SET accumulator. Decimal counts to 29,999 may be handled at Area Station level
before requiring overflow service from the system controller.
Each counter has a unique address. Each counter has Overflow
Interrupt and Counter Advance Test indicators. Maximum:
One. Additional counters are provided via #5551 and #5552
below to a maximum of 63 counters per Area Station. Note: In
the event of a power failure, all pulse counters so affected will
reset to zero with a resultant loss of count. There are commercially available power backup systems via which customers can
elect to insure power continuity, if they so choose. Customers
should be advised of the exposure and assurance measures
available to meet it. Also see Visual Readout (#8710) below.
Specify
#9030 for shipment of a 4-foot cable and junction box for attachment of the counters. See "Specify (3)" above. Limitations:
Cannot be used if 2798 Attachment, Basic (#7990) is used.
Prerequisites: (1) Customer's production count pulsing contacts must meet the interface requirements for the pulse counter
sensing circuits. They are designed to operate with contacts
specified as follows: 16 milliseconds minimum closed time; 16
milliseconds open time (equivalent to approximately 30 pulses
per second); maximum contact bounce of 4 milliseconds on
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--
----=
=
~--:: General Systems Division-Machines
------_.Qpen or close; maximum contact resistance of 10 ohms. (2)
Wiring (single pair required) from the Area Station pulse counter
points to the customer's production pulse counting contacts
must be provided, installed and maintained by the customer.
The series wire resistance of the wire from the contact to the
Area Station must be less than 40 ohms. This requirement can
be met by several types of wiring with maximum distance shown
such as: Twisted Pair, AWG #22-1,000 feet ... AWG
#18-3,000 feet ... AWG #14-7,500 feet ... (3) Expanded
Capability (#3801) on the 2715.
Pulse Counters, Additional (#5551): Provides a group of 8
counters. See #5550 above for description of counter functions.
Maximum: 6 groups. Prerequisites: #5550 for the first three
additional groups (total 31 counters); #5552 for additional
groups 4, ~ and 6.
Pulse Counter Expansion (#5552): Provides a group of 8
counters (nos. 32 - 39) and their necessary circuits and controls.
See #5550 for description of counter functions. #5552 also
provides controls for adding #5551 groups 4, 5 and 6.
Maximum: One.
Specify
#9030 for shipment of a 4-foot cable for attachment of the
counters to a customer-supplied junction box. See "Specify" (3)
above. Prerequisites: #5550 and first three groups of #5551 .
2798 Attachment, Basic (#7990): For attachment of up to four
2798 Guidance Display Units. Maximum: One. Limitations:
See "2791/2793 Limitations" below. Cannot be used if Pulse
Counter (#5550) is used. Field installable on units shipped prior
to October 1, 1971, which also include B/M #5992893 and all
units shipped after October 1, 1971. B/ M #5992893 is' plant
installable only. Prerequisites: Expanded Capability (#3801) on
the 2715. See Specify (3) above.
2798 Attachment, Additional (#7991): Each provides for attachment of up to four 2798 Guidance Display Units. Maximum:
Three. Limitations: See "2791/2793 Limitations" below.
Prerequisite: 2798 Attachment, Basic (#7990).
1053 Attachment (#8050): For attachment of one 1053 Printer
Model 1 ... maximum 1053 cable length is 8 feet. Maximum:
One. Limitation: Print checking is not performed on the 1053
when attached to a 2793.
2795/2796/2797 Attachment, Additional (#8296): Each
provides for attachment of up to 8 additional 2795/2796/2797
Data Entry Units (any combination) ... cable provided by specify
#9030 accommodates #8296 also. Maximum: Three.
Visual Readout (#8710): Provides a backup means for manual
readout. (inside the Area Station cover via coded display lights)
of pulse counters if for some reason the Area Station is bypassed, or the system controller is unable to provide service.
This feature is dependent upon continuous power being supplied
to the counters. Should power be lost, the counters reset to
zero. See the "Note" under Pulse Counters, Basic (#5550)
above. Maximum: One.
2791/2793 Limitations
(1) When using a 2715 The maximum number of 2791/2793
Area Stations (any combination) is 100 ... the maximum
number of 2795/2796/2797 Data Entry Units (any combination) is 1,024 ... the maximum number of 2798 Guidance
Display Units is 256 ... the maximum number of Pulse Counters is 1,008.
M2793.2
April 78.
When using 2792 Remote Communications Controllers with
the 2715, the number of Area Stations that can be attached
is reduced. Each 2792 Model 1 is set in the field to respond
to its own address plus the address(es) of 1, 3, 7 or 15 of the
Area Stations remotely attached or reserved for future attachment. The maximum number of Area Stations that can be
locally attached to the 2715 is reduced by the set number of
addresses. The number of 2791s/2792 Model 1s/2793s is
limited by the number of addresses available to the 2715; i.e.,
maximum 100 addresses. Maximum, eight pairs of 2792
Model 1sand 2s per 2715. Maximum of two pairs of Extended Distance Repeater (EDR) features may be used on a secondary loop. See 2790 Configurator, SRL GA27-3021.
When using an 1800 System, on each of up to two
1800/2790 Adapters (#7570)-the maximum number of
2791/2793s combined is 100 ... the maximum number of
2795/2796/2797s combined is 1,024 ... the maximum number of Pulse Counters is 1,008 ... 2798 attachment is not
provided.
When using a System/7 The maximum number of
2791/2792 Model 1s/2793s combined is 64 ... the maximum
number of 2795/2796/2797s combined is 512 ... the maximum number of 2798 Guidance Display Units is 256 per
2790 control feature or 256 per System/7 ... External Alarm
is not provided.
(2) One 2791 Model 1 will accommodate: (a) Up to thirty-two
2795/2796/2797s (any combination), or (b) up to eight
2795/2796/2797s (any combination) and up to twelve
2798s.
In addition to the above combinations, up to three 1035s,
one 1053 Model 1, and one OEM digital device can be attached.
(3) One 2793 will accommodate: (a) Up to thirty-two
2795/2796/2797s (any combination) and up to sixteen
2798s, or (b) up to thirty-two 2795/2796/2797s (any combination) and up to 63 Pulse Counters.
In addition to the above combinations, one 1053 Model 1 can
be attached.
(4) The permissable distance between Area Stations or between
the Area Stations and the System Controller, depends upon
the transmission line characteristics. For example: Without
Extended Distance Repeater (#3874, 3875)' using #22 AWG
outside-type telephone cable, these units may be separated
up to 1,000 wire-feet apart ... using #19 AWG cable, separation may be up to 1,750 wire-feet. With Extended Distance
Repeaters available on the 2791, 2793 and 2715, units having may be separated up to 6,000 wire':'feet apart. For cable
specifications and other distances, see Physical Planning
Manual,GA27-3017. See "Limitations" under Extended
Distance Repeater, Send (#3875).
(5) Forms Feed Control (#4452) cannot be installed on a 1053-1
printer when attached to 2791/2793 area stations in a 2790
system, if required, this function is available
(6) Loop Delay System/7 2790 performance is affected by
delay on the local loop and must be considered when developing a configuration. Maximum loop configurations are
determined by a formula for "loop delay" that will assist you
in quickly determining the viability of the configuration you
are considering. The following calculation should be used for
each 5012/5013 module equipped with 2790 Control
(#8195). The resultant figure (total usec) must not exceed
316 usec per 5012/5013.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---= ==--=- General Systems Division-Machines
- ----------.. -
-=
Area Stations ......... 2791
2792 Model 1
2793
Total Area Stations
Extended Distance Repeater
Pairs (send/receive)
1000' increments of cable
x 17.6 usec = _ __
x 8.4 usec =
x 2.0 usec =
Total usec =
For further information on see IBM 2790 Physical Planning
Manual, GA27-3017.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M2793.3
April 78
-----
=
=---=
- -=- _------_
..'f_
_---
M2796.1
General Systems Division~Machines
2796 DATA ENTRY UNIT
Purpose: A data entry unit for a 2790 Data Communication
System.
Prerequisite: Ao2791 Area Station Model 1 or 2793 Area Station equipped with an appropriate attachment feature ... see
2791 or 2793.
Highlights: A compact, industrially packaged reporting unit for
use by one or two production workers at their work stations. It
features a unique reader that accepts either the end of a
punched card or an identification badge ... four 10-position code
selection dials .,. 4-position manual entry for quantitative data ...
a monitor key ... a telephone jack. It attaches to the 2791 Model
1, 2793 or 5013 via a twisted pair cable. Transmission speed is
40 cha racters / second.
Card-Badge Reader:Reads up to ten numeric digits from either
end of a punched card (columns 1-10, or 71-BO) or from an
identification badge. Data is read interchangeably, from a card
or a badge, into a give!) record. Cards and badges are inserted
manually. For badge specifications, see SRL GA21-902B.
Badges with attached pocket clips cannot be accommodated.
Code Selection:Four 10-position (0-9) rotary dials are used to
identify various codes such as production status, services required, labor codes or operation, during execution of a production order.
Manual Entry:A group of four rocker thumbwheel switches for
entry of quantitative data.
Monitor Key:A three-position, key-operated switch permits
supervisory control of specific transactions ... one key is supplied.
Telephone Jack:For supervisor's use in communicating by
voice with support groups ... requires a separate voice communication network ... will accommodate a sound powered telephone
handset.
Customer Responsibilities: The
Representative
must advise the customer that maintenance is provided as defined in "2795/2796/2797 Maintenance" following the 2797.
The customer is responsible for: the Agreement[1] Providing a
central maintenance facility ... 2 Installation and removal of the
unit from its operational location.
Limitations:
2797.
See
"2795/2796/2797
Limitations"
following
Environment: See 2790 in "Systems."
Maintenance: See "2795/2796/2797 Maintenance" following
2797.
Bibliography: GA30B9
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
April 78
------
M2797.1
-- -=- ---
~-~ General Systems Division-Machines
April 78
2797 DATA ENTRY UNIT
Specify
Purpose: A data entry unit for a 2790 Data Communication
System.
(1) Voltage (115V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 cycle): #9880 for
locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
Prerequisite: A 2791 Area Station Model 1 or 2793 Area Station equipped with an appropriate attachment feature ... see
2791 and 2793.
2795/2796/2797/2798 Limitations
Highlights: A compact, industrially packaged reporting unit for
use by production workers or other employees at their work
stations. It features a unique reader that accepts either the end
of a punched card or an identification badge ... two 10-position
code selection cI:als ... 10 keys for manual entry ... 6-position
visual display of manual entry data for verification before transmission ... a monitor key ... an "Enter" key to cause data transmission ... a telephone jack. It attaches to the 2791 Model 1,
2793 or 5013 via a twisted pair cable. Transmission speed is 40
characters/ second.
Card-Badge Reader: Reads up to 10 numeric digits from either
end of a punched card (columns 1-10, or 71-80) or from a
punched identification badge. Data is read interchangeably,
from a card or a badge, into a given record. Cards and badges
are inserted manually. For badge specifications, see SRL GA21.,.
9028. Badges with attached pocket clips cannot be accommodated.
Code Selection: Two 10-position (0-9) rotary dials are used to
input codes for things such as status, names or services required during execution of a production order.
Manual Entry: 10-key keyboard provides for entry of variable
numeric data. As each key is pressed, the number is displayed
to the operator for verification. Up to six positions are displayed
per data field.
Visual Display: A 6-position visual display in which digits shift
from right to left as keyed. Each PQsition can display any of ten
characters,O through 9 and blank.
(1) The 2795/2796/2797 Data Entry Units and 2798 Guidance
Display Units may be attached up to 1,000 wire-feet from the
2791 Model 1 or 2793 Area Station or the 5013 Digital
Input/Output Module. For cable specifications and other
distances, see Physical Planning Manual GA27-3017.
(2) See "2791/2793 Limitations" under 2793 or the 0 & PT for
RPG #008249 for maximum combinations of Data Entry
Units and other devices.
2795/2796/2797 Maintenance
Installation of 2795s, 2796s and 2797s in the immediate work
area precludes the acceptability of online repair due to loss of
the terminal's use and interruption of the worker's production.
Maintenance of the Data Entry units will be by hardware replacement as opposed to repair at the operational location. The
customer will determine the failing unput and deliver the unit to
the central maintenance facility located at his central site. At this
facility the customer engineer will repair and online test the Data
Entry Unit. Installation of the units at the operational location is
the customer's responsibility. To facilitate CE maintenance and
checkout, the customer must provide a dedicated line termination in the central maintenance facility. This line would be wired
to address CO of an Area Station. A printer (5028, 1053, 2741,
etc.) must be located in the proximity of the maintenance facility.
Although the Data Entry Units of anyone type are interchangeable, the customer may wish to replace the failing unit with a
spare for availability.
Monitor Key: A 3-position, key-operated switch permits supervisory control over the validity of specific records ... one key is
supplied.
Control Buttons: The "Enter" button activates an electric powered unit to transmit to the system controller data read by the
card-badge reader, codes selected by the rotary dials, data
keyed and visually displayed, and the monitor key digit ... the
Reset button is used to reset the visual display when an error is
seen during operator verification.
Telephone Jack: For supervisor's use in communicating by
voice with support groups ... requires a separate voice communication network ... will accommodate a sound powered telephone
handset.
Customer Responsibilities: The
Representative
must advise the customer that maintenance is provided as defined in "2795/2796/2797 Maintenance" following the 2797.
The customer is responsible for: [1] Providing a cental maintenance facility ... [2] Installation and removal of the unit from its
operational location.
Limitations: See "2795/2796/2797 Limitations" below.
Environment: See 2790 in "Systems."
Maintenance: See "2795/2796/2797 Maintenance" below.
Bibliography: GA24-3089.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
---= -....--::
- General Systems Division-Machines
= -~
----------- - . -
--
M2798.1
April 78
,
2798 GUIDANCE DISPLAY UNIT
Specify:
Purpose: For the 2790 Data Communication System-an alphameric keyboard, 16-position variable data display and 48
instruction operator guidance panel for interactive transaction
via a 2715 Transmission Control Unit with a S/360 or S/370
Data Base or with a System/7 as the 2730 System Controller.
(1) Voltage (115V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 cycles): #9880 for
locking plug or #9881 for non-lock plug.
Prerequisite: A 2791 Model 1 or 2793 Area Station equipped
with an appropriate attachment feature ... see 2791 or 2793.
Highlights: A small, desk/bench mounted, self-contained,
buffered, data entry and output unit for mUlti-step interactive
transactions via a 2715 Transmission Control Unit or with a
System/7 as the 2790 System Controller ... packaged for industrial environment ... featuring a typewriter style 56 character
alphameric keyboard ... 8 control keys ... a 16-position visual
display ... a unique 48 instruction operator guidance panel which
can be customized by the user to suit his specific applications ...
6 operational indicators ... a monitor key ... and an ON/OFF
switch. Each unit is attached to a 2791 Model 1 or 2793 Area
Station via a 4-wire user provided cable (up to 1,000 wire-feet).
Keyboard: The 56 data keys include the 26 alphabetic, 10 numeric, 4 printer functions represented by symbols for tab, new
line, line feed and space, 8 special characters and 8 functional
keys (assignable by the user) : .. the 8 control keys for functions
such as Enter, Clear, Cancel, Backspace, Transaction-Lock and
Unlock, Advance, and Display-Inhibit.
Display: For visual verification, prior to transmission, of any
16-character combination of the 56 characters entered from the
keyboard ... response data or messages ... guidance expansion
~essages ... time-of-day, when not used for· data, from the
System Controller.
Guidance Panel: Up to 16 customer defined instructions can be
actuated at a time on the guidance panel by the System Controller to direct the operator step-by-step through transactions or
for status information ... instructions are written on two removable overlays provided by the customer to suit his specific applications ... overlays are similiar to those used on the 2791 Area
Station ... three manual settings on each of two panels provide
for a total of 48 instructions or lines of information.
Operational Indicators: Advise the operator that: (1) the unit is
"online" and ready for use ... (2) a transaction is "in-process"
... (3) the record is not valid, the "Clear" button should be depressed and data re-entered ... (4) the "transaction-selection"
code must be entered ... (5) the "transaction-lock" mode is in
effect ... (6) the "first step" of a multi-step transaction should
be initiated.
Monitor Key: A 2-position common key operated switch permits supervisory control of specific transactions.
ON/OFF Switch: A power on-off switch.
Customer Responsibilities: See 2790 in "Systems."
Environment: See 2790 in "Systems."
Limitatic)ns:
(1) Using #22 AWG inside-type telephone cable, 2798s may be
attached up to 1,000 wire-feet from the 2791 Modell or 2793.
See Physical Planning Manual GA27-3017 for cable specifications and other distances ... (2) See "2791/2793 Limitations"
under 2793 for maximum combinations of 2798s and other
devices ... (3) 2798 attachment is not available when an 1800
System is the system controller.
Bibliography: GA24-3089.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--...--_
.....
-- -----=---=
--=------
M2841.1
~
April 78
General Systems Division-Machines
-~-.-
2841 STORAGE CONTROL
Data Rates:
Purpose: Control unit for 2302* Disk Storage Model 3s and 4s,
2303 Drum Storages, 2311 Disk Storage Drive Model 1s and
2321 Data Cell Drives.
2302 Data is transmitted to and from the 2841 in 8-bit bytes at a
rate of 156,000 bytes/second ... with packed decimal at a rate
of 312,000.digits/second.
S/360 Model 22,30 2302s, 2311s, 2321s.
2303 Data is transmitted to and from the 2841 in 8-bit bytes at a
rate of 303,800 bytes/second ... with packed decimal at a rate
of 607,600 digits/second.
S/360 Model 40, 50, 65, 67, 75 2302s, 2303s, 2311s, 2·321s.
S/360 Model 44 2311s only.
S/360 Model 85, 195, S/370 Model 135, 145, 155, 158, 165,
168,195,2303s,2311s,2321s.
1800 Data Acquisition and Control System-2311s only.
*
The 2302 Models 3 and 4 have been withdrawn from production and are no longer available.
Control Capabilities: The basic 2841 can control I,JP to eight
2311 Disk Storage Drives ... see Additional 2311 Attachment
(#9706) under "Specify" if more than four 2311 s are to attached. Special features are required to attach 2302s, 2303s and
2321s ... see "Special Features."
Each 2841 can control up to eight storage access mechanisms.
Units controlled by the 2841 are considered to have the following number of access mechanisms: 2302 Model 3-two; 2302
Model 4-four; 2303--one; 2311--one; 2321--one.
Except as shown under "Limitations" below, any combination of
these units can be attached if the total number of access mechanisms does not exceed eight ... see Additional Storage (#1024)
under "Special Features" for controlling up to four 2302 Model
4s with up to sixteen access mechanisms.
Limitations: A 2841 controls up to eight 2311 s. With appropriate attachment features it can control up to eight access mechanisms in the following combinations:
With no 2303 Any combination of 2302 Models 3 and 4, 2311s,
2321s.
With one 2303 Up to three 2311 s and any combination of 2302
Models 3 and 4, 2321 s.
With two 2303s No 2311s, any combination of 2302 Models 3
and 4,23215.
In no case can more than two 2303s or four 2302s be attached.
Highlights: The unit provides an advanced method of utilizing
disk, data cell and drum storage units. Self-formating tracks,
applicable to all units that attach to the 2841, provide for easy
handling of variable length identifiers and records. Variable
length record identifiers, up to 255 bytes in length, permit use of
data-oriented identifiers for retrieval of information that is organized in either a random or sequential manner.
Command Chaining-multiple records within a cylinder can be
read/written by a sequence of channel commands without
rotational delays between records.
New commands, together with command chaining, permit index
and directory searches without processor intervention. The
command structure is optimized to yield efficient random and
sequential processing with either randomly or sequentially organized data files. The ability to protect "logical" files is provided by the combination of commands in the 2841 and checks
within the control p·rograms servicing the file system. Cyclic
code checking is used to assure the integrity of stored data.
2311 Data is transmitted to and from the 2841 in 8-bit bytes at a
rate of 156,000 bytes/ second ... with packed decimal at a rate
of 312,000 digits/second.
2321 Data is transmitted to and from the 2841 in 8-bit bytes at a
rate of 55,000 bytes/second ... with packed decimal at a rate of
110,000 digits/second.
Prerequisite: A control unit position on a system channel:
S/360 Model 22, 30 Multiplexer channel (standard), Selector
Channels (special features, except on 2022 one selector channel
is standard) ... see 2022, 2030. [No 2303(s)]
S/360 Model 40 For 2303(s), Selector Channel No.1 or No.2
(special features), but not both. When 2303s and 2314s or
2844s are used in the same system, they must all be attached to
the same Selector Channel ... for all other units, multiplexer ..
channel (standard), Selector Channels (special features) ... see
2040.
S/360 Model 44 [for 2311s only] Special features on the 2044:
Multiplexer Channel, High Speed Multiplexer Channels, Addition~1 High Speed Multiplexer Subchannels ... see 2044.
S/360 Model 50 For 2303(s), Selector Channels (special features) ... for all other units, multiplexer channel (standard), Selector Channels (special features) ... see 2050.
S/360 Model 65, 67, 75 Selector channel of 2860, or Selector
Subchannels (special features) on 2870 ... see 2860,.or 2870.
Limitation: On Selector Subchannels, the 2841 can be used
only to attach up to eight 2321 s. Only one 2841 may be attached per Selector Subchannel and its attachment precludes the
attachment of any other control unit to that subchannel.
S/360 Model 85, 195, or S/370 Model 165, 168, 195 Selector
channel of 2860, Selector Subchannels (special features) on
2870, shared subchannel of a 2880 ... see 2860, 2870, 2880.
Limitation: On Selector Subchannels, the 2841 can be used
only to attach up to eight 2321 s. Only one 2841 may be attached per Selector Subchannel and its attachment precludes the
attachment of any other control unit to that subchannel.
S/370 Model 135 For all units, Selector Channels or Block Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see 3135.
S/370 Model 145 For 2303s, selector channels, for all other
units multiplexer channel (standard), selector channels ... see
3145.
S/370 Model 155, 158 Block multiplexer channel (first two are
standard) ... see 3155, 3158.
1800 [for 2311 s on·ly] Selector Channel (#7710) on an 1826
Model· 2 or 3 ... see 1826. #9160 is required on the 2841 ... see
"Specify."
Bibliography:
S/360
1800-GA26-5921.
Metering: Assignable Unit
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
and
S / 370-GA22~6822,
----~
- --- -
- =
==--=
---------------... --
M2841.2
General Systems Division-Machines
Specify
(1) Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 60 cycle): #9903 for 208 V, or #9905
for 230 V.
(2) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
(3) Additional 2311 Attachment: #9706. The basic 2841 is
equipped with connection facilities for up to four 2311s ... this
specification provides internal cables and connectors required when five or more 2311s are to be attached ... can be
field installed.
(4) Attachment of 2302s, 2303s, 2321 s: Appropriate attachment
features are required ... see "Special Features."
(5) Control Unit Isolation: Field installation may be required on
certain units ... see #4700 under "Special Features."
(6) For use with 1800 System #9160 ... can be field installed.
Special Feature:
Additional Storage: (#1024) For attachment of up to two 2302s
having up to eight access mechanisms .. , these are in addition to
the access mechanisms that can be controlled by the basic
2841. The total number of devices that can be controlled by a
2841 equipped with this feature is limited toa maximum of
sixteen access mechanisms, of which all in excess of eight must
be 2302 access mechanisms, or eight load units, as follows:
Load Units
(maximum, 8)
2302 Model 3
2302 Model 4
2303
2311
2321
85 or 195, or S/370 Model 145, 155, 165, 195] To attach up to
eight 2302 Model 3 and Model 4 access mechanisms.
Maximum: One. Note: For additional 2302s, see Additional
Storage (#1024) above.
2303 Attachment (#8077): Not with 1800 or S/360 Model 22,
30, 44 To attach up to two 2303s. Limitation: Attachment of
2303s limits the number of other storage units possible ... see
"Control Capabilities" above. Maximum: One.
2321 Attachment (#8079): [Not with 1800 or S/360 Model. 44]
To attach up to eight 2321s. Maximum: One.
Two Channel Switch (#8100): To attach the 2841 to a second
channel. Switching is under program control ... includes partitioning. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Additional Storage
(#1024).
Prerequisite: If the Two Channel Switch is routed through the
Configuration Control Panel (#1505) of a multiprocessing S/360
Model 65 system, Remote Switch Attachment (#6148) is required. #6148 is also required in a S/360 Model 67-2, or a
S/370 Model 158 MP or 168 MP. See above.
Access Mechanisms
(maximum, 16)
2
2
4
4
1
none
1
1
April 78
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Two Channel Switch
(#8100).
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: 2302 Attachment (#7950).
File Scan: (#4385) For performing a comparison on selected
bytes of file information ... not effective for 2303 Drum Storages.
Isolation, Control Unit: (#4700) [For field installation on all
units shipped prior to December 29, 1967, and reconditioned
units with serial no. 30099 or below shipped prior to March 4,
1968 .. , standard on all units shipped subsequently]. To turn
power on or off on the 2841 without generating spurious signals. Thus, a CPU program, if it can be logically disconnected
from the system before power is turned off, can continue operating.
Prerequisite: Since in all cases there are compatible EC level
requirements, the concurrence of the
Manager is
required for any order for this feature .
.Record Overflow (#6118): "For greater utilization of available
storage ... allows a record to overflow from one track to another.
Remote Switch Attachment (#6148): To attach the Two Channel Switelt is the customer's responsibility. If
the customer desires to have customer engineering replace or
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----==
=---= General Systems Division-System/3S
- ... - -------_.-
Belt Description
Specify Code
48 Character
60 Character S/38 Special**
64 Character EBCDIC
64 Character EBCDIC Optimized
64 Character ASCII
64 Character ASCII Optimized
64 Multinational
96 Character EBCDIC *
96 Character ASCII *
96 Multinational
188 Multinational
9520
9521
9522
9523
9524
9525
9564
9526
9528
9563
9562
*
Available only with .095".'character height (#9950).
** This specially designed belt will enable the user to print the
System/38 Control Language characters.
Character Set Height
Specify Code
.079 inches
.095 inches
9951
9950
Supplies: A black ribbon, part number 7819690, or equivalent, is required.
Prices: See Price List.
Terms and Conditions: The 3262 is offered for lease and
rental as Plan D under the Agreement for Lease or Rental of
IBM Machines and its Amendment for Plan D, and is offered
for purchase under the applicable IBM Purchase Agreement.
-
Additional Monthly Maintenance charge rate: $120.00
-
Initial Period of Maintenance: 3 months
Not to be reproduced wifhout written permission.
M3262.2
Nov 78
---.= -= - --=-----=
-
M3271.1
~
--.~
General Systems Division-Machines
3271 CONTROL UNIT
Purpose: Provides control and multiplexing capabilities for a
cluster of 3277 Display Stations, 3284, 3286, 3287 and 3288-2
Printers.
The 3271 communicates with:
•
System/3 Model 4 via the Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter
•
System/3 Modell 0 or 15 via the Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter or the Local Communications Adapter
•
System/3 Model 8 or 12 via the Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter or the Integrated Communications
Adapter
•
System/3 Model 150 via the Binary Synchronous Communications Controller (BSCC)
•
System/360 Model 25, 30, 40, 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode), 75,
85, 195 or System/370 Model 115 through 195 via a 2701
Data Adapter Unit, 2703 Transmission Control, or, except for
System/360 Models 25 or 85, a 3704 or 3705 Communications Controller on half-duplex communications facilities
using binary synchronous transmission.
Note: 3288 Model 2 attaches only to a 3271 Model 2.
Model 1: For attachment of 3277 Display Station Modell s (480
characters), 3284 Printer Modell s, 3286 Printer Modell s, and
3287 Printer Model 1sand 2s. The basic unit provides attachment of up to four devices at transmission speeds of 2000 to
2400 bps. Note: One 3277 Model 1 must be installed with the
basic 3271 ... the remaining three devices may be any combination of 3277 Model 1s, 3284 Model 1s, 3286 Model 1s, and
3287 Modell sand 2s.
Model 2: For attachment of 3277 Display Station Model 2s
(1,920 characters), 3277 Model 1s (480 characters), 3284 Printer
Model 1sand 2s, 3286 Printer Model 1sand 2s, 3287 Printer
Model 1sand 2s, and 3288 Model 2s. The basic unit provides
attachment of up to four devices at transmission speeds of 2000
to 2400 bps. Note: One 3277 Model 2 must be installed with the
basic 3271 ... the remaining three devices may be any combination of 3277 Model 1sand 2s, 3284 Model 1sand 2s, 3286
Modells and 2s, 3287 Modells and2s, and 3288 Model2s.
April 78
Communications Facilities: The 3271 operates in half-duplex
multipoint mode on half-duplex facilities at transmission speeds
of 1200, 2000 or 2400 bps on facilities via the 2701, 2703,
3704, 3705, #4640 on 3115, 3125, or 3135, or #2074 on
System/3 Model 4, or #2074/2084 on System/3 Model 10 or
15 or #4645/2074 of System/3 Model 8, using binary synchronous transmission. The 3271 operates in half-duplex multipoint
mode on duplex facilities at transmission speeds of 1200, 2000,
2400 or 4800 bps on facilities via the 2701, 2703, 3704, 3705,
#4640 on 3115,3125,3135, or #2074 on System/3 Model 4, or
#2074/2084 on System/3 Model 10, 12 or 15, or #2074 on
System/3 Model 8, or #2094 on System/3 Model 150, using
binary synchronous transmission. Half-duplex multipoint operation on duplex facilities at 7200 bps on facility 06 is also available on the 2701, 3704, 3705, or #4640 on 3115, 3125, 3135, or
#2074 on System/3 Model 4, or #2074/2084 on System/3
Model 10, 12 or 15 or #2074 on System / 3 Model 8, or #2094 on
System/3 Model 15D,using binary synchronous transmission.
See M2700 pages for facilities.
Modems: One I BM modem can be attached to any model of a
3271. Prerequisite: Transmission Speed (#7821) required for
speeds over 2400 bps.
Modem
Speed (bps)
3872 Modell
3874 Modell
3875 Model 1
2400
4800/2400
7200
Switched network backup operation is available on the 3872
Modell, 3874 and 3875. For communications capabilities,
product utilization and special features, see M 2700, 3872, 3874,
3875 pages.
Prerequisites: Transmission via common carrier facility to a
2701, 2703, 3704, 3705, Integrated Communications Adapter
(#4640) on 3115, 3125, 3135, ICA (#4645 and #6202) or BSCA
(#2074) on System/3 Model 8, ICA (#4645 and #6202) or BSCA
(#2074/#2084)
on
System/~
Model
12,
or
BSCA
(#2074/#2084) on System/3 Model 10 or 15, or #2094 on
System/3 Model 150 requires a modem except when communicating to a System/3 Model 8 with ICA (#4645 and #4801) or
EIA Local Attachment (#3601) or to a System/3 Model 12 with
ICA (#4645 and #4801), or EIA Local Attachment
(#3601/#3602) installed, or System/3 Model 10 or 15 with EIA
Local Attachment (#3601/#3602) or Local Communications
Adapter (#4765) installed, or System/3 Model 150 with EIA
Local (#3603/#3604) installed. See M2700 pages and M5408,
M5410, M5412 or M5415 pages.
Highlights: Up to thirty-two devices (3277s, 3284s, 3286s,
3287s and 3288 Model 2s) may be attached in increments of
four devices by adding up to seven Device Adapters (#3250) ...
see "Special Features."
One 3277 with keyboard must be installed on each 3271 on a
model for model basis as a diagnostic aid. That is, 3277 Modell
on 3271 Model 1, or 3277 Model 2 on 3271 Model 2.
Efficient telephone line utilization by means of Compacted Da.ta
(blank suppression and modified data transmission), program
tab, and character addressing.
System/3 Models 8 and 10 allow execution of online terminal
tests concurrent with a user's TP application program in the
same program level ina disk oriented system with at least 16K
bytes of main storage.
The 3271 may be multidropped on the same facility with other
BSC devices (System/3 Model 4, Model 6, Model 8, Model 10,
Model 12 or Model 15, System/360 Model 20, 1130, 1800,
2715, 2770, 2780, 3271, 3275 or 3780) as tributary stations on
a multipoint line with a System/360 Model 22-195 (except
Model 44) or System/370 Model 115-195 as a control station.
Communication with a System/370 Model 115, 125, 135 can be
made via the Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640) and
appropriate binary synchronous features on the 3115, 3125 or
3135 as well as via a 2701, 2703, 3704 or 3705.
System/3 Model 12 allows execution of online terminal tests
concurrent with a user's TP application program in the same
program level with at least 32K bytes of main storage.
System/3 Model 15 allows execution of online terminal tests
concurrent with a user's TP application program inilihe same
partition in a system with at least 48K bytes of main storage.
For these systems, diagnostic programs will be executed only
under control of the Diagnostic Control Monitor in a dedicated
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- - ----
..... --- .-
-=
= - ----=---=
--
M3271.2
General Systems Division-Machines
-~-.-
mode. i.e .• not concurrent with user program execution or residence.
Bibliography: See KWIK Index G320-1621 or specific system
bibliography.
iSpecify:
(1) Voltage (AC. 1-phase. 3-wire. 60 Cycle):
Locking
plug-#9880 for 115V. #9884 for 208V. or #9886 for 230V.
Non-lock plug-#9881 for 115V. #9885 for 208V. or #9887
for 230V.
(2) Cables: Cable to attach Data Set must be ordered. See 3270
Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA27-2787.
(3) System Attachment: For record purposes. identify the host
processor(s) by specifying the following
Host Processor
System/3
System/3
System/3
System/3
System/3
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
4
8
10
12
15
(4) Transmission Code: Specify one of the following: #9761-for
EBCDIC Transmission Code (available at time of manufacture
only) ... utilizes 8-bit EBCDIC code over the transmission
facilities used in conjunction with EBCDIC Character Set
(#9089) on the 3277. 3284. 3286. 3288-2. or EBCDIC Character Set (#9082) on the 3287. #9762-for ASCII Transmission Code (available at time of manufacture only) ... utilizes
8-bit ASCII code over the transmission facilities '" used in
conjunction with the ASCII Character Set (A) (#9091) or (B)
(#9092) on the 3277. 3284. 3286 or 3288-2. or the ASCII
Character Set (B) (#9084) on the 3287.
Model Changes: Field Installable
Special Features
Copy (#1550): Provides the ability to transfer the complete
contents of the storage buffer of one device into the storage
buffer of a second device ... either display or printer. These
devices must share a common control unit. Field Installation:
Yes.
Device Adapter (#3250): Each permits the addition of four
devices (3277s. 3284s. 3286s. 3287. and 3288-2s in any combination). Maximum: Seven ... for a maximum of 32 attached
devices. Field Installation: Yes.
Transmission Speed (#7820, 7821): #7820 For transmitting
over common carrier facilities at 1200 bps. #7821 For transmitting at fpeeds of 4800 or 7200 bps. Clocking provided by modem. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
April 78
-- -=
=--==
- - - --.--
-.-..-...
M3272.1
-~--
April 78
General Systems Division-Machines
-~-~-.3272 CONTROL UNIT (Local Attachment)
Purpose: Provides the controls and multiplexing capabilities for
a cluster of 3277 Display Stations, 3284, 3286, 3287 and 32882 Printers. The 3272 attaches to a System/360 Model 25, 30,
40, 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode), 75, 85, 195 or a System/370 Model
115 through 195 via a multiplexer, selector, or block multiplexer
channel.
Bibliography: GA22-6822
Specify:
Note: 3288 Model 2 attaches only to a 3272 Model 2.
Model 1: For attachment of 3277 Display Station Model 1s (480
characters), 3284 and 3286 Printer Model 1sand 3287 Printer
Model 1sand 2s. The basic unit provides for attachment of up
to four devices at a data transfer rate of up to 650,000
characters/second. Note: One 3277 Model 1 must be installed
with the basic 3272 ... the remaining three devices may be any
combination of 3277 Model 1sand 3284 and 3286 Model 1s
and 3287 Model 1s.
Model 2: For attachment of 3277 Display Station Model 2s
(1,920 characters), 3277 Model 1s (480 characters), 3284 and
3286 Printer Model 1sand 2s, 3287 Model 1sand 2s, and 3288
Printer Model2s. The basic unit provides for attachment of up
to four devices at a data transfer rate of up to 650,000
characters/ second. Note: One 3277 Model 2 must be installed
with the basic 3272 ... the remaining three devices may be any
combination of 3277 Model 1sand 2s, 3284 and 3286 Model 1s
and 2s, 3287 Model 1sand 2s, and 3288 Model 2s.
Highlights: Up to thirty-two devices (3277s, 3284s, 3286s,
3287s, 3288-2s) may be attached in increments of four devices
by adding up to seven Device Adapters (#3250) ... see "Special
Features."
Basic features include Compacted Data (blank suppression and
modified data transmission), program tab, and character addressing.
Prerequisites: One 3277 with keyboard must be installed on
each 3272 on a model for model basis, as a diagnostic aid. That
is, 3277 Model 1 on 3272 Model 1, or 3277 Model 2 on 3272
Model 2.
Each 3272 requires a control unit position on a system channel.
System/360 Model 25 Special feature on 2025; Multiplexer
Channel or Selector Channel ... see 2025.
System/360 Model 30, 40, 50: Multiplexer channel (standard),
or Selector Channel (special feature) ... see 2030, 2040, 2050.
System/360 Model 65, 67, 75: Selector channel of a 2860,
basic multiplexer channel of a 2870, Selector Subchannels
(special features) on 2870 ... see 2860, 2870.
System/360 Model 85, 195 or System/370 Model 165, 168,
195: Selector channel of a 2860, basic multiplexer channel of
2870, Selector Subchannels (special features) of 2870, block
multiplexer channel of 2880 ... ~ee 2860, 2870, 2880.
System/370 Model 115, 125: Multiplexer Channel (special
feature) ... see 3115, 3125.
System/370 Model 135, 145, 155, 158: Byte multiplexer channel, block multiplexer channel, selector channel ... see 3135,
3145,3155,3158.
(1) Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): Locking plug-#9884
for 208V, or #9886 for 230V. Non-lock plug-#9885 for
208V, or #9887 for 230V. Must be consistent with system
voltage.
(2) Cables: Cables to System/360 or System/370 must be
ordered. See 3270 Installation Manual-Physical Planning,
GA27-2787.
(3) System Attachment: For record purposes, identify the host
processor(s) by specifying the following
Host Processor
System/360
System/360
System/360
System/360
System/360
System/360
System/360
System/360
System/360
System/370
System/370
System/370
System/370
System/370
System/370
System/370
System/370
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
25
30
40
50
65
67
75
85
195
115
125
135
145
155
158
165
168
(4) Operator Console Use: [Mdl 2 only] For record purposes only
use. #9480-if one 3277 Model 2 is to be used as a system
operator console, or #9481-if no system operator console is
required for the 3272.
Model Changes: Field Installable.
Model Upgrade Purchase Price See price list
Special Features
Field Installation: Yes.
Device Adapter (#3250): Each permits the addition of four
devices (3277s, 3284s, 3286s, 3287s, 3288-25 in any combination).
Maximum: Seven ... for a maximum of 32 attached devices.
Field Installation: Yes.
Systems 360/370 availability will be restricted unless the using
system provides sufficient core to allow diagnostic programs
(OLTs) to be executed. For details associated with the required
additional core sizes, see the appropriate SRL (TCAM, BTAM
andVTAM).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----= -~--:: General Systems Division~Machines
- ---_.-----
M3274.1
-=
3274 CONTROL UNIT
Purpose: A fontrol unit which provides the capability of controlling up to a maximum cluster of thirty-two terminals consisting of display stations, serial matrix printers and/or line printers.
Two categories of terminal adapters are used in attaching the
desired display/printer terminals (see terminal attachment list
below).
The basic 3274 Control Unit allows attachment of up to eight
Category A terminals. The two types of terminal adapters can be
featured in various combinations to provide the maximum terminal configuration of 32 terminals (a maximum of 16 of the 32
terminals can be Category B units) and at least one 3278 Display
Station with keyboard is needed for diagnostic purposes.
The 3274 communicates in half duplex mode via half or full
duplex communications facilities at speeds up to 9600 bps.
ATTACHABLE TERMINALS
Category A
3278 Model
3287 Model
3289 Model
Terminals
2
1 & 2
1 & 2
Display Station
Printer
Line Printer
Category B
3277 Model
3284 Model
3286 Model
3287 Model
3288 Model
Terminals
1 & 2
1 & 2
1 & 2
1 & 2
2
Display Station
Printer
Printer
Printer
Line Printer
April 78
conclusion of these diagnostic tests the pre-configured control
code is loaded.
Communications: The 3274 Model 1CCommunications with a
System/3 over full or half duplex communications facilities as
follows:
System/3
System/3
System/3
System/3
System/3
System/3
Model 4 via BSCA
Model 8 via ICA or BSCA
Model 10 via BSCA
Model 12 via ICA or BSCA
MGdel15 via BSCA
Model 150 via BSCA or BSCC
Communications Facilities: The 3274 Model 1C operates in
half-duplex point-to-point or multipoint mode on half-duplex or
duplex facilities at transmission speeds of 2000, 2400, 4800,
7200 and 9600 bps on non-switched facilities 04, D4M, D4SB,
05, D5M, D5SB, 06, D6M, D6SB, D7M, X1 M, X2M and X3M.
See M2700 pages for facilities.
Modems: An external modem with its own clocking must be
attached to a 3274 Model 1C with the External Modem Interface
(#3701) and Communication Adapter (#6302). No external
modem is required when attached locally to System/3 through
BSCA/EIA Local, BSCC/EIA Local, LCA, or ICA, however
(#3701) and #6302) are required.
Model 1C. For Binary Synchronous communications in half
duplex mode over half duplex or duplex communications facilities with a suitably equipped System/3 Model 4, 8, 10, 12, and
15.
Highlights: The 3274 Control Unit is a new terminal control unit
which can handle up to thirty-two diplays, serial matrix printers
and/ or line printers. These terminals are grouped into two categories. The Category A terminals are a new display and printers
which were developed along with the 3274 controller, while the
Category B terminals were designed for attachment to the 3271
and 3272 Control Units. The 3274 Control Unit was designed to
attach the Category B terminals with certain limitations. A maximum of sixteen of the thirty-two attachable terminals can be
Category B terminals. Category A terminals can be driven up to
a maximum of 1500 meters (4920 feet) while Category B terminals can only be driven a maximum of 610 meters (2000 feet).
Both type terminals attach to their respective Terminal Adapter
by the same type coaxial cable and connectors which are used
between a 3271 or 3272 Control Unit and its display or printer
terminals. One Feature Diskette, two System Diskettes, and one
Language Diskette are shipped with each 3274.
As part of the installation procedure, a customized system diskette is generated. The generation process is accomplished by
the customer keying in system configuration parameters. A
unique configuration table is written on the system diskette
along with the necessary control code to accomplish the functions.F()r example, during subsequent control unit loading or
initialization of a Model 1C, BSC operation is determined by the
configuration recorded on the system diskette used.
The control unit is initialized with control code as a result of
Power On or by pressing the IML push button. The load occurs
from the integrated diskette which was previously oustomized to
the desired configuration. The process starts with the execution
of extended tests contained on the diskette. Upon successful
IBM Modems
Speed (bps)
3872 Model 1
3874 Model 1
3875 Model 1
2400/1200
4800/2400
7200/3600
Switched
network
backup
operation
with
Manual
Answer/Manual Call is available on the 3872 Model 1, 3874
Model 1, and 3875 Model 1. For communications capabilities,
product utilization and features, see M2700, M3872, M3874 and
M3875
Problem Determination Procedures: Significant function has
been designed into this unit to provide greater availability to the
customer. This has been done through the use of problem determination and recovery procedures that are easily understood and
used by the operator. See Customer Responsibility below.
CUSTOMER SETUP (CSU)
The 3274 Model 1C is designated as Customer Setup thereby
offering the customer early availability and terminal relocation
flexibility.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
The customer is
r~sponsible
for:
(1)
Adequate site, system, and other vendor preparation.
(2)
Receipt at the customer's receiving dock, unpacking, and
placement.
(3)
Physical Setup, connection of cables to TP Lines/modems
and IBM devices, incorporating protected customer access areas, switch settings, and check-out.
(4)
to make cable conContact IBM
nections of IBM CSU units to IBM non-CSU unit where
customer access areas are not provided.
(5)
Relocation of the 3274, if required, to allow IBM Service
access.
(6)
Notify IBM of intent to relocate and follow IBM instructions for relocation.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- - - .........
= ::-:
===
--~
(7)
(8)
M3274.2
General Systems Divisi9n-Machines
Connection of communication cable to the communication
facility.
Performing 3274 customization in accordance with IBM
supplied procedures.
a. For initial installation
b. When made necessary by changes in configuration
c. Updating Engineering Change level of the Control Unit
diskettes (at the customer's option)
(9)
(10)
Use and follow the problem determination procedures,
and fill out the trouble report prior to calling for IBM service.
Disconnecting, packing, and removal to the customer's
shipping dock at the time of discontinuance. Appropriate
instructions will be provided by IBM.
Prerequisites: (1) One 3278 Display Station with keyboard is
needed on each 3274 as a diagnostic aid. (2) External Modem
Interface (#3701) must be ordered along with Common Communications Adapter (#6302). Either an IBM or non IBM external
modem, with its own clocking, must be provided (except when
attached locally to System/3 through BSCA/EIA Local,.
BSCC/EIA Local, LCA or ICA).
Bibliography: See applicable KWIC Index listed below or specific system bibliography.
3274 Model 1C GC20-0001
Special Features
Terminal Adapter Type A1 through A3 (#6901, #6902, and
#6903). One each of these adapters can be installed. Each
adapter provides for the attachment of an additional eight Category A terminals. The base control unit, which provides for
attachment of eight Category A terminals, can be expanded with
these three terminal adapters to a maximum 'configuration of
thirty-two Category A terminals. These terminal adapters must
be installed in sequence, making it important to order the correct
adapter feature code(s).
Terminal Adapter Type A1 (Terminals 9-16)-#6901
Terminal Adapter Type A2 (Terminals 17-24)-#6902
Terminal Adapter Type A3 (Terminals 25-32)-#6903
Limitation: Terminal Adapter Type A3 (#6903) is mutually
exclusive with Terminal Adapter Types B3 (#7804 and B4
(#7805). Maximum: One of each type· terminal adapter.
Prerequisite: Terminal Adapter Type A 1 is a prerequisite to
installing A2 and A2 is a prerequisite to A3. Field Installation:
Yes.
Terminal Adapter Type B1 (#7802): Permits the attachment of
four Category B terminals and provides for the installation of
Terminal Adapters Type B2, B3, and B4 when additional Category B terminals are desired. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes. Corequisite: Extended Function Store--16K (#3622) and
Control Storage Expansion (#1801) must be installed.
Terminal Adapter Type B2 through B4 (#7803 through
#7805): Each of these terminal adapters permits the attachment
of four additional Category B terminals. A maximum of one each
of these terminal adapters can be installed for a combined total
of twelve additional or sixteen total Category B terminals attached to a control unit. These terminal adapters must be installed
in sequence, making it important to order the correct adapter
feature code(s).
Specify:
(1) Voltage (AC,' 1-phase, 3-wire, 60HZ); Locking Plug-#9890
for 120V, #9884 for 208V, #9894 for 240V. Non-Lock
Plug-#9881 for 120V, #9885 for 208V, #9885 for 240V.
(2) Power Cable Length: If standard 4.3 meter (14 feet) power
cable is not desired, specify #9511 for 1.8 meters (6 feet).
(3) Communications Cable: If the standard 6.1 meter (20 feet)
communication cable is not desired, specify one of the following: #9061 for 3.0 meter (10 feet), #9062 for 9.1 meters
(30 feet) or #9063 for 12.2 meters (40 feet).
(4) System attachment: For record purposes, identify the System
the 3274 attaches to or communicates with:
Processor
System/3
System/3
System/3
System/3
System/3
April 78
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
4
8
10
12
15
Customer Setup: Yes.
Model Changes: Not applicable
Terminal Adapter Type B2
(Terminals 5, 6, 7 & 8)-#7803
Terminal Adapter Type B3
(Terminals 9,10,11 & 12)-#7804
Terminal Adapter Type B4
(Terminals 13, 14, 15 & 16)-#7805
Limitation: Terminal Adapter Type B3 (#7804) and Terminal
Adapter Type B4 (#7805) are mutually exclusive with Terminal
Adapter Type A3 (#6903). Maximum: One of each type terminal adapter. Prerequisite: Terminal Adapter Type B1 (#7802)
must be installed before these adapters can be installed. Field
Installation: yes.
Note: Maximum number of terminals attached cannot exceed
32 .. Various combinations of Category A terminals and Category
B terminals are possible depending on adapters selected.
Extended Function Store 16K (#3622): Provides 16,384 bytes
of additional control storage.
Maximum:
One.
Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Control Storage Expansion
(#1801) must be installed with this EFS feature. Note: See
Special Feature, Terminal Adapter Type B1 (#7802) for requirements.
External Modem Interface (#3701): Provides the appropriate
cable and interface logic necessary to attach either an external
IBM or non-IBM modem with its own clocking. See Specify (3)
for cable length. Specify: (for record purposes only, no parts
required) #9821 for 2000 bps, #9822 for 2400 bps, #9823 for
4800 bps, #9824 for 7200 bps, #9825 for 9600 bps line speed.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Com-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-----~=
==--=
General Systems Division-Machines
- ------
- -=
--_.-
mon Communications Adapter (CCA)
ordered/installed with this feature.
(#6302)
must
be
Common Communications Adapter (#6302): Required for
attachment to communication lines at speeds up to 9600 bps
(BSC transmission control protocol) through either an IBM or a
non-IBM modem with its own clocking. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: External Modem Interface
(#3701) must be installed with this feature.
Control Storage Expansion (#1801): Provides the ability to
access storage addresses above the basic level. This feature is a
prerequisite to installing the Extended Function Store feature
Maximum:
One.
Field
Installation:
Yes.
(#3622).
Corequisite: Terminal Adapter Type B1 (#7802) must be installed.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M3274.3
April 78
--...----- -===
-= :-:
M3275.1
~
---
April 78
General Systems Division-Machines
-~-.-
3275 DISPLAY STATION
Purpose: A single remote cathode ray tube display station.
Provides controls and display of alphameric information from a
System/3 Model 4 via the Binary Synchronous Communications
Adapter, or from System / 3 Model 10 or 15 via the Binary
Synchronous Communications Adapter or the Local Communications Adapter or with System/3 Model 8 or Model 12 via the
ICA or BSCA, or with a System/3 Model 150 via the Binary
Synchronous Communications Controller (BSCC), or from a
System/360 Model 25, 30, 40, 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode), 75, 85,
195 or System/370 Model 115 through 195 via a 2701 Data
Adapter Unit, 2703 Transmission Control or, except for
System/360 Models 25 or 85, a 3704 or 3705 on half-duplex or
duplex communication facilities using binary synchronous transmission.
Model 2: Displays 1,920 characters ... 24 lines of 80 characters
each.
Highlights: Displays sixty-three 7 x 9 dot matrix characters ...
36 alphamerics, 27 special characters, including the space.
Features Data-Field Organization, which permits individual fields
of data on the screen to be program-defined with various attributes such as protected or unprotected, alphameric or numeric,
normal intensity, non-displayed, or brightened intensity, and
selector light-pen detection-allowed or disallowed.
Editing Features: Typamatic, cursor, tab, back-tab, protecteddata, insert and delete, and extended-erase (erase to end-offield, erase all keyboard input data, erase entire screen) are
standard features for displays equipped with a keyboard.
Input Flexibility: A choice of keyboards, a selector light-pen,
and a set of program function keys provide unmatched input
flexibility ... see "Special Features" below.
Security Enhancement Features: A special Non-displayed
Keying Mode (standard) provides for fields of data to be
program-defined so that they will accept data entered from the
keyboard without displaying the data on the screen. A Security
Keylock (optional) prevents modification of data on the display
unless the key is turned to the "On" pOSition. An Operator
Identification Card Reader (optional) is provided to enter system
user identification. This enhances the (programmed) control of
his access to data and audit of his actions. It may also be used
to enter any sequence of characters (pre-recorded on a card) for
other purposes such as transaction control, account control, and
billing.
Optional features allow the attachment of a 3284 Model 3 dedicated printer, EBCDIC or ASCII keyboard, selector light-pen,
audible alarm and other features ... see "Special Features"
below.
Communications: The 3275 may be multidropped on the same
facility with other BSC devices (System/3 Model 4, Model 6,
Model 8, Model 10, Model 12, or 15, System/360 Model 20,
1130, 1800, 2715, 2770, 2780, 3271, 3275 and 3780) as tributary stations on a multipoint line with a System/360 Model
25-195 (except Model 44)' or a System/370 Model 115-195 as
the control station.
Communications Facilities: The 3275 operates in half-duplex
multipoint mode on half-duplex facilities at transmission speeds
of 1200, 2000 or 2400 bps on facilities 03, 04 or Xl M via the
2701, 2703, 3704, 3705, #4640 on 3115, 3125, 3135, #2074 on
System/3 Model 4, #2074/2084 on System/3 Model 10 or 15
or #4645/2074 on System/3 Model 8 or #4645/2074/2084 on
System/3 Model 12 or #2094 on System/3 Model 150 using
binary synchronous transmission.
The 3275 operates in half-duplex multipoint mode on duplex
facilities at transmission speeds of 1200, 2000, 2400 or 4800
bps on facilities 03, 04, 05, Xl M or X2M via the 2701, 2703,
3704,3705, #4640 on 3115, 3125, 3135, #2074 on System/3
Model 4, #2074/2084 on System/3 Model 10, 12 or 15 or
#2074 on System/3 Model 8, using binary synchronous transmission. Half-duplex multipoint operation at a speed of 7200
bps is available on facility 09 via the 2701, 3704, 3705, #4640
on the 3115, 3125, 3135, #2074 on System/3 Model 4,
#2074/2084 on System/3 Model 10, 12, or 15 or #2074 on
System/3 Model 8, or #2094 on System/3 Model 150, using
binary synchronous transmission. The 3275 operates on
switched network facilities at a transmission speed of 600/1200
bps when equipped with feature #3440 Clsing binary synchronous transmission. See M 2700 pages for facilities.
Modems: One IBM modem may be attached to a 3275, any
model. Prerequisite: #7821 is required on the 3275 for speeds
over 2400 bps on leased lines.
Modem
Speed (bps)
3872 Modell
3874 Modell
3875 Modell
2400
4800
7200
Note: Switched network backup operation is available on the
3872 Modell, 3874 and 3875. For communication capabilities,
product utilization and special features, see M2700, M2701,
M3705, .M3872, M3874 and M3875 pages.
Prerequisites: Transmission via common carrier facility to a
2701, 2703, 3704, 3705, Integrated Communications Adapter
(#4640) on 3115, 3125 on 3135, ICA (#4645 and #6202) or
BSCA (#2074) on System/3 Model 8, ICA (#4645 and #6202) or
BSCA (#2074/#2084) on System/3 Model 12, 6r BSCA
(#2074/#2084) on System/3 Model 10 or 15, or #2094 on
System/3 Model 150. Requires a modem except when communicating to a System/3 Model 8 with ICA (#4645 and #4801) or
EIA Local Attachment (#3601/3602) installed or a System/3
Model 12 with ICA (#4645 and #4801) or EIA Local Attachment
(#3601/#3602) installed, or System/3 Model 10 or 15 with EIA
Local Attachment (#3601/#3602) or Local Communications
Adapter (#4765) installed, or System/3 Model 150 with EIA
Local (#3603/3604) installed. See M2700 pages and M5408 or
M5410 or M5412 or M5415 pages.
System/3 Model 4 allows execution of online terminal tests
concurrent with a user's TP application program.
System/3 Models 8 and 10 allow execution of online terminal
tests concurrent with a user's TP application program in the
same program level in a disk oriented system with at least 16K
bytes of main storage.
System/3 Model 12 allows execution of online terminal tests
concurrent with a user's TP application program in the same
program level with at least 32K bytes of main storage.
System/3 Model 15 allows execution of online terminal tests
concurrent with a user's TP application program in the same
partition in a system with at least 48K bytes of main storage.
For these systems, diagnostic programs will be executed only
under control of the Diagnostic Control Monitor in a dedicated
mode, i.e., not concurrent with user program execution or residence.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------ General Systems Division-Machines
==--=
- - - ---
-=
Bibliography: See KWIK Index G320-1621 or specific system
bibliography.
Specify:
M3275.2
April 78
Special Features
Audible Alarm (#1090): An alarm, sounded under program
control, to alert the operator to a special condition. This alarm,
during keyboard operation, is sounded when a character is
entered into the next to last position on the screen. Maximum:
One. Field Installable: Yes.
Dial (#3440): [Plant installation only] Provides the capability of
operating over the public switched telephone network at speeds
of 600/1200 bps.
(1) Voltage (115V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880 for locking
plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
(2) Cables: Cable to attach Data Set should be ordered. Refer to
3270 Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA27-2787.
(3) System Attachment: For record purposes identify the host
processor(s) by specifying the following
Processor
System/3
System/3
System/3
System/3
System/3
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
4
8
10
12
15
(4) Transmission Code: Specify one; #9761-for EBCDIC Transmission Code (available at time of manufacture only) .. , utilizes 8-bit EBCDIC code over the transmission facilities ...
used in conjunction with EBCDIC Character Set (#9089).
#9762-for ASCII Transmission Code (available at time of
manufacture only) .,. utilizes 8-bit ASCII code over the transmission facilities ... used in conjunction with ASCII Character
Set (A) (#9091) or (B) (#9092).
(5) Character Set: Specify one of the following;
#9089 For EBCDIC Character Set (available at time of manufacture only) .. , provides the 64 characters described on the
EBCDIC typewriter keyboard. Prerequisite: EBCDIC Transmission Code (#9761).
#9091 For ASCII Character Set (A) (available at time of manufacture only .,. provides the 64 ASCII characters but substitutes the Logical OR (/) and Logical NOT (..,) for the exclamation mark (!) and circumflex (A). Prerequisite: ASCII
Transmission Code (#9762).
#9092 For ASCII Character Set (B) (available at time of manufacture only) ... provides the standard 64 ASCII character
set. Prerequisite: ASCII Transmission Code (#9762).
Accessories: LOCKS AND KEYS: The 3275 with the Security
Keylock (#6340) special feature is shipped with two keys. Additional keys may be purchased only from IBM. (Vendor will supply_additional keys only .to .. original purchaser.)
Operator Identification Card Reader (#4600): Provides the
capability of reading a Mr size, 2-1/8" x 3-3/8" (credit card
size), plastic card with a magnetic stripe on the back. This card
can be encoded with up to 40 numeric characters, including
control characters.
The feature provides the ability to read an operator identification
card to allow identification of the display operator, thus enhancing system data security capability.
The card reader can read, under program control, the magnetically encoded information from the operator identification card
on the ABA standard magnetic striped credit card. This allows
the feature to be used in both banking anQ operator identification applications. The same card that is read on the 2730 can be
read by this feature.
For complete information on the availability of magnetically
striped and encoded identification and credit cards, see the IRD
Sales Manual. Maximum: One. Field Installable: Yes.
Prerequisite: Any Keyboard.
Keyboard (#4630 - 4636).
#4630 66 key EBCDIC Typewriter Keyboard, typewriter-like
layout, movable, with 45 alphameric keys and 21 control keys.
Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9089).
#4631 66 key EBCDIC Data Entry Keyboard, movable, with 3&alphameric keys and 30 control keys. Prerequisite: EBCDIC
Character Set (#9089).
#4632 78 key Operator Console Keyboard, operator-console
layout, movable, with 45 alphameric keys, 21 control keys, and
12 program function keys. Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set
(#9089).
#4633 78 EBCDIC Typewriter Keyboard, 66 key EBCDIC layout
with
12 additional program function keys, movable.
Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9089).
#4634 66 key ASCII Keyboard, ASCII typewriter layout, movable, with 45 alphameric keys and 21 control keys. Prerequisite:
ASCII Character Set (A) or (B) (#9091 or #9092).
#4635 78 key .ASCII Keyboard, 66 key ASCII typewriter layout,
with 12 additional function keys, movable. Prerequisite: ASCII
Character Set (A) or (B) (#9091 or #9092).
#4636 66 key EBCDIC Data Entry Keyboard, keypunch layout,
movable, with 36 alphameric keys and 30 control keys. This is
the recommended keyboard for data entry, including Video 370.
Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9089).
Maximum: One of the above. Field Installable: Yes.
Model Changes: Field Installable.
Keyboard Numeric Lock (#4690): Provides the ability to lock
the keyboard, if a non-numeric key [other than 0-9, minus (-L
period (.) or dup] is depressed in a predefined numeric-only field.
Maximum: One. Field Installable: Yes.
Line Adapter (#5500): Provides a modem capable of operating
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------
-= -=
M3275.3
- ------.,-
~--= General Systems Division-Machines
-~-.-
at a speed of 1200 bps on the leased telephone network, or at
speeds of 600/1200 bps on the switched telephone network via
a similiarly equipped System/3 CPU, 2701 or 3705. Field
Installable: Yes. Prerequisites: Dial (#3440) on the switched
network ... Transmission Speed (#7820) on the leased network.
Line Adapter with Auto Answer (#5501): Provides a modem
with automatic answering for use with the switched telephone
network at speeds of 600/1200 bps via a similiarly equipped
System/3 CPU, 2701 or 3705. Field Installable: Yes.
Prerequisite: Dial (#3440).
Printer Adapter (#5550): To attach a 3284 Printer Model 3.
Provides the controls to print out the contents of the 3275 buffer. Used with the basic 3275. Maximum: One. Field
Installable: Yes.
Security Keylock (#6340): A lock and key which prevents
modification and display of data on the display when in the
"off" position. Maximum: One. Field Installable: Yes.
Selector Light-Pen (#6350): A hand-held, pen-like device that
permits the operator to select fields of data from a display for
computer input. Maximum: One. Field Installable: Yes.
Transmission Speed (#7820, 7821): #7820-for transmitting
over common carrier facilities at 1200 bps. Clocking is provided
by the 3275. #7821-for transmitting at speeds of 4800 or 7200
bps. Clocking provided by modem. Maximum: One Field
Installable: Yes.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
April 78
-- - --....
--'- ---
M3276.1
-~-.~
April 78
General Systems Division-Machines
3276 CONTROL UNIT DISPLAY STATION
_ Purpose: An enhanced, cathode-ray tube (CR) display station
used for displaying alphameric data, and for entering data into,
and retrieving data from a System/3. The 3276 optionally provides control and mUltiplexing capabilities to support up to
seven 3278 Display Stations, 3287 Printers, or 3289 Line Printers, allowing a maximum cluster size of eight displays or printers
including the 3276's own display. A keyboard, or a selector
light-pen, permit an operator to display and manipulate data on
the screen in a flexible and efficient manner. The 3276 meets
both general and unique display requirements with its set of
basic anti optional features.
The 3276 communicates with System/3 in half duplex mode via
half or full duplex communications facilities at speeds up to
7200 bps.
Model 2. Displays up to 1920 characters ... 24 lines of 80 characters each. Can attach up to seven 3278 Model 2s 3287s (any
model), or 3289s (any model) in any combination.
Highlights: Displays each character within a 7 x 14 character
matrix. The basic 26 character upper case letters are presented
in a 7 x 9 matrix. There is a 94 character set; 632 alphanumeric
and 32 special character, not including the Space and Null characters. The display character set may be restricted to the upper
case characters by the monocase switch. Uses 3270 Field Formatting capability which permits individual fields of data on the
screen to be program defined with various attributes such as
protected/ unprotected, alphameric, normal/highlighted intensity, displayable/non-displayable, and selector light-pen detection
allowed/ disallowed.
The operator may initiate a local display-to-printer copy function
(i.e., without host intervention) from the keyboard of a 3276 or
3278 attached to a 3276. The printer designation is controlled
by a configuration default matrix which is fixed by the relative
port positions of displays and printers attached to the 3276.
Other printers may be accessed using the IDENT key.
Devices attached to the 3276 are assigned port positions 1
through 8. Displays are authorized to print only to printers which
are attached to higher numbered ports. If the IDENT key is not
used, a PRINT operation from a given display will cause printing
to take place at the first printer whose port position is higher
than the display. The operator may use the IDENT key to print
to any printer. (The host can perform copy in a manner compatible with existing 3271/3272 support.
Operator Factors: The 3276 has an anti-glare screen. Indicators are displayed on the bottom row of the screen, outside
the data display area, and provide useful operator factors.
Host display of data on the screen is accomplished without
refresh interrupt (i.e., no blinking). The keyboard which is
low in profile provides a palm rest area and has separators to
help prevent accidental striking of control keys. Tbe operator
may select one of several cursor modes.
Cluster Capability: Up to seven 3278s or 3287s or 3289s
may be attached. The basic 3276 provides a display and a
port for one device, a 3278, a 3287 or a 3289. Up to three
Device Adapters, each controlling up to two devices, can be
attached to the 3276. The 3276 allows the attachment of
seven additional displays and/or printers for a maximum
, cluster size of eight including its own display ... See "Special
Features" below.
Editing Functions: Cursor move, tab, home key, back tab,
insert, delete, extended erase (erase to end-of-field, erase all
keyboard input data, and erase entire screen) and cursor
select keys are all basic. All alphameric, special symbol, and
cursor move keys have typamatic capability. Double speed
cursor typamatic is attained with a simultaneous depressing
of the ALT key and a horizontal cursor positioning key.
Input Flexibility) A choice of keyboard or the Selector
light-Pen provide input flexibility ... See "Special
Features" below. Fields of data can be selected by positioning the cursor and pushing the cursor select key,
instead of using the S,elector light-Pen. Twelve Program
Function (PF) keys are basic with all typewriter keyboards.
Security Functions A special non-displayed input mode
provides for fields of data to be program-defined so that they
will accept data entered from the keyboard without displaying the data on the screen. A security Keylock (optional)
prevents modification or display of data in the display buffer
unless the key is turned to the "on" position. An optional
operator identification card reader can also be attached.
These capabilities allow customer-supplied security program
routines and procedures, to control access to data and audit
of actions. An Address Keylock (optional) controls access to
the address switches.
Communications: The 3276 Model 2 communicates with
System/3 over full or half duplex communications facilities as
follows:
System/3
System/3
System/3
System/3
System/3
System/3
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
4 via BSCA
8 via ICA or BSCA
10 via BSCA
12 via ICA or BSCA
15 via BSCA
15D via BSCA or BSCC
Communications Facilities: The 3276 operates in data halfduplex point-to-point or multipoint mode on half-duplex or
duplex facilities at transmission speeds of 1200, 2000, 2400
4800, and 7200 bps on non-switched facilities D3, D3M, D3SB,
D4, D4M, D4SB, D5, D5M, D5SB, D6, D6M, D6SB, X1 M, and
X2M.
Modems: A 1200 bps Integrated modem feature or an external
IBM modem may be attached to the 3276. External modems
require External Modem Interface (#3701).
Modem
Speed (bps)
3872 Model 1
3874 Model 1
3875 Model 1
2400/1200
4800/2400
7200/3600
No external modem is required when attached locally to
System/3 through BSCA/EIA Local, BSCC/EIA Local. LCA or
ICA; however,. External Modem Interface (#3701) is required.
Switched network backup operation, with Manual Call and
Manual or Auto Answer, is available on the 3872 Model 1, 3874
Model 1 and 3875 Model 1. For communications capabilities,
product utilization and special features, see M2700, M3872,
M3874, and M3875 pages.
Problem Determination Procedures
Significant function has been designed into this unit to provide
greater availability to the customer. This has been done through
the use of problem determination and recovery procedures that
are easily understood and used by the operator. The procedures
are provided by the Problem Determination Guide manual that
will be stored under the keyboard palm rest. See "Customer
Responsibility" below.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- -=
~--:: General Systems Division-Machines
- - ---
M3276.2
-
Customer Setup
The 3276 is designated as Customer Setup thereby offering the
customer early availability and terminal relocation flexibility.
Customer Responsibility
The customer is responsible for:
April 78
(4) System Attachment: For record purposes, identify the host
processor(s) by specifying the following
Processor
System/3
System/3
System/3
System/3
System/3
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
4
8
10
12
15
•
Adequate site, system and other vendor preparation.
•
Receipt at customer's receiving dock, unpacking and placement of 3276.
Special Features
•
Physical setup, connection of cables to TP lines/modems
and I BM devices incorporating protected customer access
areas, switch settings, and check out.
Address Keylock (#1009): Controls access to the unit address
switches which are located in the Operator Panel Drawer.
Maximum: One. Field Installation; Yes.
•
Notify IBM of intent to relocate and follow IBM instructions
for relocation.
•
Use and follow the problem determination procedures and fill
out trouble report prior to calling for IBM service.
•
Disconnecting, packing and removal to the customer's shipping dock at the time of discontinuance appropriate instructions will be provided by IBM.
Audible Alarm (#1090): An alarm, sounded under program
control. to alert the operator to a special condition. This alarm,
during keyboard operation, is also sounded when a character is
entered into the next-to-Iast position on the screen. The operator may adjust the volume of the tone. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Each 3276 requires a modem (except as indicated above under Modems): A keyboard must be installed on each
3276.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index, G320-1621 or specific system
bibliography.
Specify:
Terminal Adapters (#3255, #3256, #3257)
#3255 Terminal Adapter No. 1 enables attachm~nt of two devices (3278s, 3287s, and/or 3289s). Maximum: One.
#3256 Terminal Adapter No.2 enables attachment of two devices (3278s, 3287s, and/or 3289s). Prerequisite: Terminal
Adapter No.1 (#3255). Maximum: One.
#3257 Terminal Adapter No. 3 enables attachment of two devices (3278s, 3287s, and/or 3289s). Prerequisite: Terminal
Adapter No.2 (#3256). Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Note; The 3276 provides a display and
a port for one device, a 3278 a 3287, or a 3289. The 3276 with
the three Terminal Adapters (#3255, #3256, #3257) thus allows
a maximum cluster size of eight displays or printers.
Keyboard (one should be ordered for each 3276)
(1) Voltage (120V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire 60HZ): #9890 for locking
plugs, or #9891 for non-lock plug. If standard 2.8 meter (9
foot) power cable is not desired, specify: #9511 for 1.8 meter
(6 foot) cable, #9512 for 3.7 meter (12 foot) cable, or #9513
for 4.5 meter (15 foot) cable.
(2) Communication cable:
A 6.1 meter (20 foot) communication cable is provided as
standard for attachment to standalone modem, or the communication facility when integrated modem is used. If standard 6.1 meter communication cable is not desired, specify:
#9061 for 3.0 meter (10 foot) cable, #9062 for 9.1 meter (30
foot) cable or #9063 for 12.2 meter (40 foot) cable.
(3) Character Set: (Specify one)
#9082 For EBCDIC Character Set-used in conjunction with
75 Key Typewriter Keyboard (#4621) or Data Entry Keyboard
(#4622 or #4623) or 87-Key EBCDIC Typewriter Keyboard
(#4627).
#9084 For ASCII Character Set (B)-used in conjunction with
75-Key ASCII Typewriter Keyboard #4624 or 87-Key ASCII
Typewriter Keyboard (#4628).
#4621 75 Key Typewriter Keyboard, typewriter-like layout,
movable, with 49 data keys· and 26 control keys. Twelve program function keys are included in the top row of data keys
through use of an alternate shift key. Prerequisite: EBCDIC
Character Set (#9082).
#4622 75 Key Data Entry Keyboard movable, with 35 data keys,
10 program function keys and 30 control keys. Prerequisite:
EBCDIC Character Set (#9082).
#4623 75 Key Data Entry Keyboard, keypunch layout, movable,
with 35 data keys, 10 program function keys and 30 control
k~ys. This is the recommended keyboard for high volume data
entry. Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9082).
#4624 75 Key ASCII Typewriter Keyboard, ASCII typewriter
layout, movable, with 49 data keys and 26 control keys. Twelve
program function keys are included in the top row of the data
keys through use of an alternate shift key. Prerequisite: ASCII
Character Set (B) (#9084).
#4627 87 Key EBCDIC Typewriter Keyboard, typewriter-like
layout, movable, with 49 alphameric data keys, 26 control keys,
and 12 program function keys (24 total P.F. keys). Twelve of the
program function keys are included in the top row of data keys
through the use of an alternate shift key. Prerequisite: EBCDIC
Character Set (#9082).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-- -=
--- General Systems Division-Machines
= -=---=
--.. -
M3276.3
April 78
-~-.,-
-~-
#4628 87 Key ASCII Typewriter Keyboard, ASCII typewriter-like
layout, movable, with 49 alphameric data keys, 26 control keys,
and 12 program function keys (24 total P.F. keys). Twelve of the
program function keys are included in the top row of "data keys
and are available through the use of an alternate shift key.
Prerequisite: ASCII Character Set (B) (#9084).
....
Maximum: One of the above. Field Installation: Yes. The
keyboard is set up by the customer. Specify: If standard 91
centimeter (3 foot) keyboard cable is not desired, specify #9399
for 182 centimeter (6 foot) cable. Limitation: Keyboards used
on 3275 and 3277 machines a·re not interchangeable with keyboards used·bn 3276/3278 machines.
Communications Feature with Business Machine Clock
(16301): Required for attachment to communications facilities
through the 1200 bps Integrated Modem, or the External Modem Interface (#3701) at 1200 bps to any external modem that
does not provide its own clocking. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitations: Cannot be ordered with #6302.
Communications Feature without Business Machine Clock
(#6302): Required for attachment to communications facilities,
at speeds up to 7200 bps using BSC, through the External Modem Interface (#3701) to any external modem that provides its
own clocking. Specify: (for record purposes only, no parts
required) #9821 for 2000 bps, #9822 for 2400 bps, #9823 for
4800 bps, #9824 for 7200 bps. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be ordered with #6301.
Accessories: The following items are available on a purchase
only basis.
Magnetic Slot Reader (Part #4123500): A free standing Magnetic Slot Reader (MSR) that reads encoded information from a
magnetic stripe. It attaches by a 1.5 meter cable through the
Magnetic Reader Control (#4999). The MSR has 3 lights and a
buzzer which provide feedback to the user on the status of the
read data.
The MSR accpmmodates a wide range (height and length) of
magnetic striped plastic cards such as: ID badges, security
operator identification cards, etc. These cards can be encoded
with Numeric only up to 40 characters at 75 bits per inch, or up
to 65 characters at 127 bits per inch.
Note: Magnetic cards coded with the Alternate End of Message
character (hexidecimal "C") cannot be read by this reader.
Maximum: One. Limitation: Valid for numeric only data.
Prerequisite: Magnetic Reader Control (#4999).
Locks and Keys: The 3276 with the Security Keylock (#6340)
special feature is shipped with two keys. Additional keys may be
purchased only from IBM. (Vendor will supply additional keys
only
to
original
purchaser.)
External Modem Interface (#3701): Provides an EIA/CCIT
interface for attachment of an IBM or other external modem.
Specify: #9491 for operation on non-switched communication
facilities. Prerequisite: Communication Feature with or without
Business Machine Clock (#6301 or #6302). Maximum; One.
Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be ordered with
#5500.
1200 bps Integrated Modem, Non-switched (#5500): Provides an integrated modem at speeds of 1200/600 bps for
operation over non-switched communication facilities. No external modem is required. Specify: #9651 for use with 4-wire
facility or #9652 for use with 2-wire facility. Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: Communication Feature with Business Machine
Clock (#6301). Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be
ordered with #3701.
Keyboard Numeric Lock (#4690): Provides a Data Entry Keyboard (#4622 or #4623) with the ability to lock the keyboard, if a
non-numeric key [other than 0-9, minus (-). decimal sign, or
dup] is depressed in a pre-defined numeric-only field.
Prerequisite: Data Entry Keyboard (#4622 or #4623).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Security Keylock (#6340): A lock and key which prevents
modification or display of data in the display terminal when in
the "off" position. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Selector Light-Pen (#6350): A hand-held, pen-like device which
permits the operator to select fields of data from a display for
i~PtJt~tot.hehost system. The Selector Light-Pen, while not
being used, can be placed in a recess of the keyboard, which is
used for user's incidental items. Maximum: One. Field
. Ir~stallation: Yes.
Magnetic Reader Control (#4999): Provides the capability of
attaching a Magnetic Slot Reader. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---
------- -= - =----=.
M3277.1
-~---
-~-
General Systems Division-Machines
3277 DISPLAY STATION
Purpose: A high-performance cathode-ray tube used in clusters
with the 3271, 3272, or 3274 Control Unit or local Display Adapter (System/3 Model 8 or 12) or Display Adapter (System/3
Model 15), or as local work station or operator display on a
System/3 Model 4, for displaying alphameric data, and for
entering data into and retrieving data from a System/360.
System/370, System/3, or 3790 Communication System. Used
as the operator display console on System/3 Model 15. A keyboard or light-pen or both permit an operator to display and
manipulate data on the screen in a highly flexible and efficient
manner. With its comprehensive and powerful set of standard
and optional features, the 3277 meets both general-purpose and
unique display requirements.
Model 1: To display up to 480 characters ... 12 lines of 40
characters each. For use with the 3271 Model 1, or 2 ... 3272
Model 1 or 2 ... 3274 ... Local Display Adapter (#4702 on
System/3 Model 8 or 12) ... Display Adapter (#4601 on
System/3 Model 15) ... System/3 Model 4 as local work station
or operator display. For use with 3790, see below.
Model2:To display up to 1920 characters ... 24 lines of 80
characters each. For use with 3271 Model 2 ... 3272 Model 2 ...
3274 ... or Local Display Adapter (#4702 and #4705 on
System/3 Model 8 or 12) ... Display Adapter (#4601 on
System/3 Model 15) ... System/3 Model 4 as local work station
(#4705 on 5404). For use with System/3 see below.
Note: 3277 Model 1 and 2 displays may be intermixed on a 3271
Model 2, 3272 Model 2, or 3274. In this configuration, each
3277 Model 1 will display 480 characters supplied by the CPU to
the 1,920 character buffer in the 3271 or 3272 or 3274. 3277
Model 1sand 2s may not be intermixed on a 3271 Model 1,
3272 Model 1, or 3791.
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Highlights: Displays sixty-three 7 x 9 dot-matrix characters ...
36 alphamerics, 27 special characters, including the space.
Features Data-Field Organization which permits individual fields
of data on the screen to be program-defined with various attributes such as protected or unprotected, alphameric or numeric,
normal intensity, non-displayed, or brightened intensity, and
selector light-pen detection-allowed or disallowed.
Editing Features: Typamatic cursor, tab, back-tab, protecteddata, insert and delete, and extended-erase (erase to end-offield, erase all keyboard input data, erase entire screen) are
standard features for displays equipped with a keyboard.
Input Flexibility: A choice. of keyboards, a selector light-pen,
and a set of program function keys provide unmatched input
flexibility ... see "Special Features" below.
Output Flexibility: Information on the screen can be directed to
another display or hard copy device under program control.
Security Enhancement Features: A special Non-displayed
Keying Mode (standard) provides for fields of data to be
program-defined so that they will accept data entered from the
keyboard without displaying the data on the screen. A Security
Keylock (optional) prevents modification of data on the display
unless the key is turned to the "on" position. An Operator Identification Card Reader (optional) is provided to enter system user
identification. This enhances the (programmed) control of his
access to data and audit of his actions. It may also be used to
enter any sequence of characters (prerecorded on a card) for
other purposes such as transaction control, account control, and
billing.
April 78
For Operator Display on System/3 Model 4: A 3277 Model 1
(without keyboard) is required on the System/3 Model 4. It
functions as the operator display for the Communications Control Program (CCP). A 3271, 3272, or 3274 is not required. For
voltage, specify #9881. No cable order is required.
For Local Work Stations on System/3 Model 4: Up to five
3277s (Models 1 and 2 intermixed) can be directly attached to
the 5404 Processing Unit. A 3271 or 3272 or 3274 Control Unit
is not required. A cable is required. All 3277 "Special Features"
apply with the exception of ASCII keyboards and character sets.
$pecify #9089 for EBCDIC Character Set. See "Specify" below
for voltage and cable ordering information.
For the Local Display Adapter on System/3 Model 8 or
Model 12: Up to twelve 3277s (Models 1 and 2 intermixed) can
be directly attached to the Local Display Adapter (#4702) with
appropriate subfeatures on the 5408 or 5412. This maximum is
reduced by one for each 3284 (Model 1 or 2), 3286 (Model 1 or
2), 3287 (Model 1 or 2) or 3288 (Model 2) Printer that is attached. A 3271, 3272, or 3274 Control Unit is not required. A
cable is required. All 3277 "Special Features" apply with the
exception of ASCII keyboards and character sets. Specify #9089
for EBCDIC Character Set. See "Specify" below for voltage and
cable ordering information.
For Operator Console on System/3 Model 15: A 3277 Model
1 is required on the System/3 Model 15. It functions as an
operator console and must be equipped with 78 key Operator
Console Keyboard (#4632). No other special features are supported on the 3277. A 3271, 3272, or 3274 is not required when
the 3277 Model 1 is directly attached to a 5415. For voltage,
specify #9881. For character set, specify #9089. Specify #9590
for required CE servicing documentation. No cable order is
required.
For Display Adapter on System/3 Model 15: Up to thirty
3277s (Models 1 and 2 intermixed) can be directly attached to
the Display Adapter (#4601/#4602) on the 5415. This maximum
is reduced by one for each 3284 (Model 1 or 2), 3286 (Model 1
or 2), 3287 (Model 1 or 2), or 3288 (Model 2) Printer that is
attached. A 3271, 3272, or 3274 Control Unit is not required. A
cable is required. All 3277 "Special Features" apply with the
exception of ASCII keyboards and character sets. Specify #9089
for EBCDIC Character Set. See "Specify" below for voltage and
cable ordering information.
Maximum: Up to thirty-two 3277s can be attached to a 3271 or
3272. Up to sixteen 3277s can be attached to a 3274. The
maximum is reduced by one on a 3271 or a 3272 for each 32841, 2, or 3286 - 1, 2 or 3287, or 3288-2 Printer attached. The
maximum is reduced by one on a .3274 for each 3284 - 1, 2,
3286 -1, 2, 3287, or 3288-2 Printer attached through Terminal
Adapter 7802 through 7805. See 3271,3272 or 3274.
Prerequisites: For Model 1: A 3271 Model 1 or 2, 3272 Model
1 or 2, or 3274 with appropriate Device Adapters (#3250) ... see
3271,3272,or3274.
For Model 2: A 3271 Model 2 or 3272 Model 2 with appropriate
Device Adapters (#3250) ... see 3271, 3272, or 3274.
Bibliography: See KWIK Index G320-1621 or specific system
bibliography.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--= ----::--~ General Systems Division-Machines
- ------
M3277.2 .
- -=
April 78
-~-.-
Part #2621414
Part #1833106
Part #5252643
Part #1830818
Part #5252899
Specify:
Note 1:
(1) Voltage (115V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880 for locking
plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
(2) Cables: See Accessories for 3277 cable ordering instructions.
For cable specifications, see Installation Manual-Physical
Planning, GC22-7004 or 3270 Installation Manual-Physical
Planning, GA27-2787.
Note 2:
'Note 3:
Note 4:
(3) Character Set: Specify one of the following:
#9089 For EBCDIC Character Set (available at time of manu·facture only) ... provides the 64 characters described on the
EBCDIC typewriter keyboard. Prerequisite: If used with the
3271, EBCDIC Transmission Code (#9761) is a prerequisite
on the 3271.
#9091 For ASCII Character Set (A) (available at time of manufacture only) ... provides the 64 ASCII characters but substitutes the Logical OR ( I) and Logical NOT (..,) for the exclamation mark (!) and circumflex' (A). Prerequisite: If used
with the 3271, ASCII Transmission Code (#9762) is a prerequisite on the 3271.
#9092 For ASCII Character Set (B) (available at time of manufacture only) ... provides the standard 64 ASCII characters.
Prerequisite: If used with the 3271, ASCII Transmission
Code (#9762) is a prerequisite on the 3271.
(4) Console Use with System/3 Model 15 (Model 1 only). #9590
for System/3 Model 15 console use.
Accessories:
Locks and Keys: The 3277 with the Security Keylock (#6340)
special feature is shipped with two keys. Additional keys may be
purchased only from IBM. (Vendor will supply additional keys
only to original purchaser.)
Note 5:
Note 6:
Note 7:
Modification Kit (Note 3)
Station Protector Attachment Kit (Note 5)
Adapter (Note 7)
Station Protector Kit, Gas (Note 4)
Station Protector Element, Gas (Note 6)
Coax wire and one connector kit (includes 2 connectors 1836444) required for each indoor cable assembly.
Coax wire and one connector kit (includes 2 connectors '1836447) required for each outdoor assembly.
Customers replacing 2260 Display Stations may utilize
the existing installed cables by use of this modification
kit. One kit required for each cable.
Must be used with outdoor cable assembly when
installed above ground. One kit required for each cable
assembly.
Used to attach outdoor cable to station protector. One
kit required for each cable assembly.
Replacement station protector elements.
Used to join two 2577672 or two 1833108 cable assemblies together.
Special Features
Audible Alarm (#1090): An alarm, sounded under program
control, to alert the operator to a special condition. This alarm
during keyboard operation, is sounded when a character is
entered into the next to last position on the screen. Maximum:
One. Field Installable: Yes.
Operator Identification Card Reader (#4600): Provides the
capability of reading Mr Size 2-1/8" x 3-3/8" (credit card size).
plastic card with a magnetic stripe on the back. This card can be
encoded with up to 40 numeric characters, including control
characters.
The feature provides the ability to read an operator identification
card to allow identification of the display operator, thus enhancing system data security capability.
Prerequisite: Any Keyboard.
Keyboard (#4630-#4636).
3277 Key (#2577741)
Cables
Cables and/or associated parts to attach the subject machines
to the 3271/3272/3274 Control Units, the Local Display Adapter (#4702) on System/3 Model 8 and Model 12, or the Display
Adaptor (#4601) on System/3 Model 15 or directly to the
System/3 Model 4, may be purchased from IBM or from a
customer selected source. For the proper identification, installation, and application of the subject cables and parts, see 3270
• Installation lv1amJal-:-Physical Planning, GA27-2787 and
Coaxial Cable and Accessories Manual, GA27-2805. The cus. tomer is responsible for installation and maintenance of these
c~bles and their associated parts.
Assem. #2577672 Cable Assembly Indoor
Bulk #0323921 Coax Wire (Note 1)
Part #1836418 Connector Kit (Note 1)
Assem. #1833108 Cable Assembly Outdoor
Bulk #5252750 Coax Wire (Note 2)
Part #1886419 Connector Kit (Note 2)
#4630 66 key EBCDIC Typewriter Keyboard, typewriter-like
layout, movable, with 45 alphameric keys and 21 control keys.
Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9089).
#4631 66 key EBCDIC Data Entry Keyboard, movable, with 36
alphameric keys and 30 control keys. Prerequisite: EBCDIC
Character Set (#9089).
#4632 78 key Operator Console Keyboard, operator-console
layout, movable, with 45 alphameric keys, 21 control keys, and
12 program keys. Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9089) .
#4633 78 key EBCDIC Typewriter Keyboard, 66 key EBCDIC
typewriter layout with 12 additional program function keys,
movable. Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9089).
#4634 66 key ASCII Typewriter Keyboard, ASCII typewriter
layout, movable, with 45 alphameric keys and 21 control keys.
Prerequisite: ASCII Character Set (A) (#9091) or (B) (#9092).
#4635 78 key ASCII Typewriter Keyboard, 66 key ASCII typewriter layout with 12 additional function keys, movable.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- - --=--==
-----
-- =
M3277.3
-~-_~_'t'_
General Systems Division-Machines
Prerequisite: ASCII Character Set (A) (#9091 lor (B) (#9092).
#4636) 66 key EBCDIC Data Entry Keyboard, keypunch layout,
movable, with 36 alphameric keys and 30 control keys. This is
the recommended keyboard for Data Entry including Video 370.
Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9089).
Maximum: One of the above. Field Installable: Yes.
Keyboard Numeric Lock (#4690): Provides the ability to lock
the keyboard if a non-numeric key [other than 0-9, minus (-),
period (.), or dup] is depressed in a predefined numeric-only
field. Maximum: One. Field Installable: Yes.
Security Keylock (#6340): A lock and key which prevents
modification and display of data on the display when in the
"off" position. Maximum: One. Field Installable: Yes.
Selector Light-Pen (#6350): A hand-held, pen-like device that
permits the operator to select fields of data from a display for
computer input. Maximum: One. Field Installable: Yes.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
April 78
- ....
------ -......
.--.
- . . --- General Systems Division-Machines
- ---
-- -
~
M3278.1
April 78
3278 DISPLAY STATION
Customer Setup (CSU)
Purpose: An enhanced cathode-ray tube (CRT) display station
used in clusters with the 3274 Control Unit or the 3276 Control
Unit Display Station for displaying alphameric data, and for
entering data into and retrieving data from a System 3. A Keyboard, Selector Light-Pen or both permit an operator to display
and manipulate data on the screen in a flexible and efficient
manner. With its set of basic and optional features, the 3278
meets both general-purpose and uniq·ue display requirements.
The 3278 Model 2 is designated as Customer Setup. thereby
offering the customer early availability and terminal relocation
flexibility.
Model 2. For use with 3274 or 3276 to display up to 1920
characters ... 24 lines of 80 characters each.
Highlights: Displays each character within a 7 x 14 character
matrix. The basic 26 character upper case letters are presented
in a 7 x 9 matrix. There is a 94-character set; 26 upper case
alphabetic, 26 lower case alphabetic, 10 numeric, and 32 special
characters. A monocase switch is used for 3277 compatibility.
Uses 3270 field formatting which permits individual fields of
data on the screen to be program defined with various attributes
such as protected/unprotected, alphameric, normal/highlighted
intensity, displayable/ non:...displayable, and Selector Light-Pen
detection allowed/ disallowed.
Operator Factors: The 3278 has an anti-glare screen. Indicators are displayed on the bottom row of the screen, outside
the data display area, and provide useful operator ·factors.
Host display of data on the screen is accomplished without
refresh interrupt (i.e., no blinking). The keyboard which is
low in profile provides a palm rest area and has separators to
help prevent accidental striking of control keys. The operator
may select one of several cursor modes.
Editing Function: Cursor move, tab, home key, back tab,
insert, delete, extended erase (erase to end-of-field, erase all
keyboard input data, and erase entIre screen) and cursor
select keys are all basic for displays equipped with a keyboard. All alphameric, special symbol, and cursor move keys
have typamatic capability. Double speed cursor typamatic is
attained with a simultaneous depressing of the ALT key and
a horizontal cursor positioning key.
Input Flexibility: A choice of keyboards or the Selector
Light-Pen provide input flexibility ... See"Special Features"
below. Fields of data can be selected by positioning the
cursor and pushing the cursor select key, instead of using the
Selector Light-Pen. Twelve Program Function (PF) keys are
basic with all typewriter keyboards.
Security Functions A special non-displayed input mode
provides for fields of data to be program-defined so that
they will accept data entered from the keyboard without
displaying the data on the screen. A Security Keylock
(optional) prevents modification or display of data in the
display buffer unless the key is turned to the "on" position. An optional operator identification card reader can
also be attached. These capabilities allow customersupplied security program routines and procedures to
control access to data and audit of actions.
Customer Responsibility
The customer is responsible for:
•
Adequate site. system and other vendor preparation.
Receipt at customer's receiving dock. unpacking and placement of 3278.
•
Physical setup, connection of cables in protected customer
access areas, switch settings, and check out.
•
Contact Customer Engineering to make cable connections of
IBM CSU units to IBM non-CSU units where customer access areas are not provided.
•
Notify I BM of intent to relocate and follow I BM instructions
for relocation.
•
Use and follow the problem determination procedures and fill
out trouble report prior to calling for IBM service.
•
Disconnecting, packing and removal to the customer's shipping dock at the time of discontinuance appropriate instructions will be provided by IBM.
Prerequisites: Each 3278 requires a 3274 or 3276 with appropriate Terminal Adapters ... See 3274 or 3276
Bibliography: See KWIC Index, G320-1621 or specific system
bibliography.
Specify:
(1) Voltage (120V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire 60HZ): #9890 for locking
plugs, or #9891 for non-locking plug. If standard 2.8 meter
(9 foot) power cable is not desired, specify: #9511 for 1.8
meter (6 foot) cable, #9512 for 3.7 meter (12 foot) cable, or
#9513 for 4.5 meter (15 foot) cable.
(2) Cables: Cables and/or associated parts may be purchased
from IBM or from a customer selected source. For the proper
identification, installation, and application of the subject
cables and parts, see 3270 Installation Manual-Physical
Planning, GA27-2787 and Coaxial Cable and Accessories
Manual GA27-2805. The customer is responsible for installation and maintenance of these cables and their associated
parts.
Problem Determination Procedures
Significant function has been designed into this unit to provide
greater availability to the customer. This increased availability
has been achieved through the use of problem determination
and recovery procedures that are easily understood and used by
the operator. The procedures are provided by the Problem Determination Guide manual that will be stored under the keyboard
palm rest. See ':Customer Responsibility" below.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--: :..:- ==--=:
-..,-
-
-
Assm. #
Bulk#
Part #
Assm. #
Bulk #
Part #
Part #
Part #
2577672
0323921
1836418
1833108
5252750
1836419
2621414
1833106
Part #
Part #
Part #
5252643
1830818
5252899
Note 1:
Note 2:
Note 3:
Note 4:
Note 5:
Note 6:
Note 7:
M3278:2
General Systems Division-Machines
Cable Assembly Indoor
Coax Wire (Note 1)
Connector Kit (Note 1)
Cable Assembly Outdoor
Coax Wire (Note 2)
Connector Kit (Note 2)
Modification Kit (Note 3)
Station Protector Attachment
Kit (Note 5)
Adapter (Note 7)
Station Protector Kit, Gas (Note 4)
Station Protector Element, Gas
(Note 6)
Coax wire and one connector kit (includes 2 connectors part #1836444) required for each' indoor cable
assembly.
Coax wire and one connector kit (includes 2 connectors part #1836447) required for each outdoor cable
assembly.
Customers replacing 2260 Display Stations may utilize
the existing installed cables by use of this modification
kit. One kit required for each cable.
Must be used with outdoor cable assembly when
installed outdoors (either above or below grdund level.
One kit required for each cable assembly.
Used to attach outdoor cable to station protector. One
kit required for each cable assembly.
Replacement station protector elements.
Used to join two part #2577672 or two part #1833108
cable assemblies together.
(3) Character Set: (Specify one.)
#9082 for EBCDIC Character Set-used in conjunction with
75 Key Typewriter Keyboard (#4621) or Data Entry Keyboard
(#4622 or #4623) or 87 Key EBCDIC Typewriter Keyboard
(#4627).
#9084 for ASCII Character Set (B)-used in conjunction with
75 Key ASCII Typewriter Keyboard #4624 or 87 Key ASCII
Typewriter Keyboard (#4628).
(4) System attachment: For record purposes identify the 3274 or
3276 to which this 3278 will attach.
3274 Modell C Specify #9551
3276 Model 2 Specify #9552
Limitation: A 3278 must specify the same Character Set as
used on the 3274 or 3276 to which it is attached.
Prices: See Price List.
Special Features
Audible Alarm (#1090): An alarm, sounded under program
control. to alert the operator to a special condition. This alarm,
during keyboard operation, is also sounded when a character is
entered into the next-to-Iast position on the screen. The operator may adjust the volume of the. tone. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
Keyboard
#4621 75 Key Typewriter Keyboard, typewriter-like layout, movable, with 49 data keys and 26 control keys. Twelve program
function keys are included in the top row of data keys through
use of an alternate shift key, Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character
Set (#9082).
#4622 75 Key Data Entry Keyboard, movable, with 35 data keys,
10 program function keys and 30 control keys. Prerequisite:
April 78
EBCDIC Character Set (#9082).
#4623 75 Key Data Entry Keyboard, keypunch layout, movable,
with 35 data keys, 10 program function keys and 30 control
keys. This is the recommended keyboard for Data Entry.
Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9082).
#4624 75 Key ASCII Typewriter Keyboard, ASCII typewriter
layout, movable, with 49 data keys and 26 control keys. Twelve
program function keys are included in the top row of the data
keys through use of an alternate shift key. Prerequisite: ASCII
Character Set (B) (#9084).
#4627 87 Key EBCDIC Typewriter Keyboard, typewriter-like
layout, movable, with 49 alphameric data keys, 26 control keys,
and 12 program function keys (24 total P.F. keys). Twelve of the
program function keys are included in the top row of data keys
through the use of an alternate shift key. Prerequisite: EBCDIC
Character Set (#9082).
#4628 87 Key ACSII Typewriter Keyboard, ASCII typewriter-like
layout, movable, with 49 alphameric data keys, 26 control keys,
and 12 program function keys (24 total P.F. keys). Twelve of the
program function keys are included in the top row of data keys
and are available through the use of an alternate shift key.
Prerequisite: ASCII Character Set (B) (#9084).
Maximum: One of the above. Field Installation: Yes. The
keyboard is set up by the customer. Specify: If standard 91
centimeter (3 foot) keyboard cable is not desired, specify #9399
for 182 centimeter (6 foot) cable. Limitation: Keyboards used
on 3275 and 3277 machines are not interchangeable with keyboards used on 3276/3278 machines.
Keyboard Numeric Lock (#4690): Provides a Data Entry Keyboard (#4622 or #4623) with the ability to lock the keyboard, if a
non-numeric key [other than 0-9, minus (-L decimal sign, or
dup] is depressed in a pre-defined numeric-only field.
Prerequisite: Data Entry Keyboard (#4622 or #4623).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Security Keylock (#6340): A lock and key which prevents
modification or display of data in the display terminal when' in
the "off" position. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Selector Light-Pen (#6350): A hand-held, pen-like device which
permits the operator to select fields of data from a display for
input to the host system. The Selector Light-Pen, while not
being used, can be placed in a recess of the keyboard, which is
used for user's incidental items. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
Switch Control Unit (#1720): Permits switching operational
control of the display station between two different 3274 or
3276 control units. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Customer Setup: Yes.
Magnetic Reader Control (#4999): Provides the capability of
attaching a Magnetic Slo~ Reader. Maximum: One. Field
Ins1Jlllation: Yes.
Accessories: The. following items are available on a purchase
only basis. Order the part number indicated below at price listed
in the Machines Price List.
Magnetic Slot Reader (Part #4123500): A free standing Magnetic Slot Reader (MSR) that reads encoded information from:"a
magnetic stripe. It attaches by a 1.5 meter cable through the,
Magnetic Reader Control (#4999). The MSR has 3 lights and a
buzzer which provide feedback to the user on the status of the
read data.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----= -- General Systems Division-:-Machines
=---=
-----
- -=
-~-.-
The MSR accommodates a wide range (height and length) of
magnetic striped plastic cards such as: ID badges, security
operator identification cards, etc. These cards can be encoded
with Numeric only up to 40 characters at 75 bits per inch, or up
to 65 characters at 127 bits per inch.
Note: Magnetic cards coded with the Alternate End of Message
character (hexidecimal "C") cannot be read by this reader.
Maximum: One. Limitation: Valid for numeric only· data.
Prerequisite: Magnetic Reader Control (#4999).
Locks and Keys: The 3278 with the Security Keylock (#6340)
special feature is shipped with two keys. Additional keys may be
purchased only from IBM. (Vendor will supply additional keys
only
to
original
purchase.)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M3278.3
April 78
= ---
--=-...::
-- -----~-----.~
M3284.1
April 78
Gen"eral .systems Division-Machines
_~_'f'_
3284 PRINTER
Purpose: Provides hard copy output at a speed of 40 cps.
Model 1: Provides storage of 480 characters and attaches to:
3271 Modell or 2 ... 3272 Modell or 2 ... 3274 ... Local Display
Adapter (#4702 on System/3 Model 8 or 12) .,. Display Adapter
(#4601 on System/3 Model 15) ... 3284 Attachment (#7901 on
System/3 Model 15) ... System/3 Model 4 as local work station. For use with System/3, see below.
Model 2: Provides storage of 1,920 characters and attaches to:
either a 3271 Model 2, or a 3272 Model 2 ... 3274 ... Local Display
Adapter (#4702 and #4705 on System/3 Model 8 or 12) ...
Display Adapter (#4601 on System/3 Model 15) '" System/3
Model 4 as local work station (#4705 on 5404). For use with
System/3, see below.
Model 3: Attaches to and uses the storage buffer of a 3275
Display Station Modell, 2, or 3. Also attaches to and uses the
storage buffer of a 5275 Direct Numerical Control Station.
Highlights: Provides a hard copy output at a speed of 40 cps,
using the EBCDIC character set ... for ASCII character sets, see
"Specify" below. Model 1 and 2 may print from the CPU or the
contents of a 3277 Display Station or 3284 or 3286/3287 printer buffer via the 3271, 3272, or 3274 Control Unit. Model 3
prints the contents of the buffers of the 3275 Display Station or
the 5275 Direct Numerical Control Station.
The unit has a pin feed platen which permits the feeding of
marginally punched continuous forms paper. 120, 126 or 132
print positions may be specified '" see "Specify." Line spacing
is 6 lines/inch. Matrix characters are formed by 7 vertical wires
printing dots in up to 4 of 7 possible horizontal positions. Use of
the underscore in conjunction with another character will overprint the lowest dot in that character and is not recommended.
Refer to SRL GA24-3488 for forms design considerations and
limitations. Up to 6-part forms can be printed with a maximum
thickness of .018" (for optimum feeding and stacking, no more
than 3 parts are recommended). Forms lengths can be 3" to 14"
in increments of 1/6". Card stock continuous forms are not
recommended.
For Local Work Station on System/3 Model 4: 3284 Printers
(Models 1 and 2) may be intermixed with 3277 Display Stations
(Models 1 and 2) and 3286 Printers (Models 1 and 2) and 3287
Printers (Models 1 and 2) and 3288 Line Printers (Model 2) for a
maximum of 5 devices attaclled to the 5404. Specify #9089 for
EBCDIC Character Set. A 3271, 3272, or 3274 Control Unit is
not required. A cable order is required. See "Specify" below for
voltage and cable ordering information.
For Local Display Adapter on System/3 Model 8 or Model
12: 3284 Printers (Models 1 and 2) may be intermixed with 3277
Display Stations (Models 1 and 2) and 3286 Printers (Models 1
and 2) and 3287 Printers (Models 1 and 2) and 3288 Printers
(Model 2) for a maximum of twelve devices attached via the
Local Display Adapter (#4702) and its subfeatures on the 5408
or 5412. A 3271, 3272, or 3274 Control Unit is not required. A
cable is required. Specify #9089 for EBCDIC Character Set. Not
compatible with ACSII Character Sets. See "Specify" below for
voltage and cable ordering information.
For Console Use with System/3 Model 15: A 3284 Modell
is optional and is primarily used to provide console message
logging. For Voltage, specify #9881 ... For Character Set, specify #9089 ... For Pin Feed Platen, specify as shown below. No
cable order is required. Prerequisite: 3284 Attachment (#7901)
on the 5415.
For Display Adapter on System/3 Model 15: 3284 Printers
(Models 1 and 2) may be intermixed with 3277 Display Stations
(Models 1 and 2) and 3286 Printers (Models 1 and 2) and 3287
Printers (Models 1 and 2) and 3288 Printers (Model 2) for a
maximum of 30 devices attached via the Display Adapter
(#4601/#4602) on the 5415. A 3271, 3272, or 3274 Control
Unit is not required. A cable is required. Specify #9089 for
EBCDIC Character Set. Not compatible with ACSII Character
Set. See "Specify" below for voltage and cable ordering information.
Prerequisites:
Model 1: A 3271 Model 1 or 2, a 3272 Model 1 or 2, 3274, or
#7901 on a 5415.
Model 2: A 3271 Model 2, a 3272 Model 2, or 3274.
Model 3: A 3275 Model 1, 2 or 3 with Printer Adapter (#5550)
or a 5275 with Printer Adapter (#5555).
Supplies: A black ribbon, Part No. 1136970 or equivalent, is
required.
Bibliography:
3270-GA24-3089
System / 360/ 370-GA22-6822,
Specify:
(1) Voltage (115V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880 for locking
plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
(2) Pin Feed Platen: #9162 for 126 print positions (13-1 /8"
hole-to-hole), or #9167 for 120 print positions (12-1/2"
hole-to-hole), or #9168 for 132 print positions (13-7/8"
hole-to-hole). Note: Do not order #9167 or #9168 unless
paper is available in your area.
(3) Character Set: Specify one of the following:
#9089-for EBCDIC Character Set (available at time of manufacture only) ... provides the 64 ASCII characters described
on the EBCDIC typewriter keyboard. #9089 required if used
with the 3275 Model 3. Prerequisite: If used with the 3271,
EBCDIC Transmission Code (#9761) required on the 3271.
#9091-for ASCII Character Set (A) (available at time of
manufacture only) ... provides the 64 ASCII characters but
substitutes the Logical OR (I) and Logical NOT (...,) in place
of the exclamation mark(!) and circumflex (A). Prerequisite:
If used with the 3271, ASCII Transmission Code (#9762) is
required on the 3271.
#9092-for ASCII Character Set (B) (available at time of
manufacture only) ... provides the standard 64 ASCII characters. Prerequisite: If used with the 3271, ASCII Transmission Code (#9762) is required on the 3271.
(4) Cables: See Accessories for 3284-1, -2 cable ordering instructions. For cable specifications, see System/370 Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7004 or 3270 Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA27-2787.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- -....--- -==--=
---
-- -=- ----
M3284.2
General Systems Division....;.-Machines
Model Changes: Model changes between model 1 and model 2
are field installable. Model 3 is field installable on the 3275 or
5275 but is not interchangeable with a model 1 or model 2.
Accessories:
Forms Stand
Permits placement of continuous forms on the stand above floor
level and provides for forms stacking after printing. This accessory is a two shelf forms stand.
TYPE
FEATURE NO.
3284
4450
Cables
Cables and/ or associated parts to attach the subject machines
to the 3271/3272/3274 Control Units, the Local Display Adapter (#4702) on System/3 Model 8 and Model 12, or the Display
Adaptor (#4601) on System/3 Model 15 or directly to the
System/3 Model 4, may be purchased from IBM or from a
customer selected source. For the proper identification, installation, and application of the subject cables and parts, see 3270
Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA27-2787 and
Coaxial Cable and Accessories Manual, GA27-2805. The customer is responsible for installation and maintenance of these
cables and their associated parts.
Assem. #2577672 Cable Assembly Indoor
Bulk #0323921 Coax Wire (Note 1)
Part #1836418 Connector Kit (Note 1)
Assem. #1833108 Cable Assembly Outdoor
Bulk #5252750 Coax Wire (Note 2)
Part #1836419 Connector Kit (Note 2)
Part #2621414 Modification Kit (Note 3)
Part #1833106 Station Protector Attachment Kit (Note 5)
Part #5252643 Adapter (Note 7)
Part #1830818 Station Protector Kit, Gas (Note 4)
Part #5252899 Station Protector Element, Gas (Note 6)
Note 1:
Note 2:
Note 3:
Note 4:
Note 5:
Note 6:
Note 7:
Coax wire and one connector kit (includes 2 connectors 1836444) required for each indoor cable assembly.
Coax wire and one connector kit (includes 2 connectors 1836447) required for each outdoor assembly.
Customers replacing 2260 Display Stations may utilize
the existing installed cables by use of this modification
kit. One kit required for each cable.
Must be used with outdoor cable assembly when
installed above ground. One kit required for each cable
assembly.
Used to attach outdoor cable to station protector. One
kit required for each cable assembly.
Replacement station protector elements.
Used to join two 25776n()r two.1833108 cable assemblies together.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
April 78
--_..... --
=
=--==
- -=- -.-----_
..
M3286.1
General Systems Division-Machines
April 78
-~-.-
3286 PRINTER
Purpose: Provides hard copy output at a speed of 66 cps.
Model 1: Provides storage of 480 characters and attaches to:
3271 Model 1 or 2 ... 3272 Model 1 or 2 ... 3274 ... Local Display
Adaptor (#4702 on System/3 Model 8 or 12) ... Display Adapter
(#4601 on System/3 Model 15) ... System/3 Model 4 as local
work station. For use with System/3, see below.
Model 2: Provides storage of 1,920 characters and attaches to:
Either 3271 Model 2 or a 3272 Model 2 ... 3274 ... Local Display
Adapter (#4702 and #4705 on System/3 Model 8 or 12). .. Display Adapter (#4601 on System/3 Model 15) ... System/3 Model
4 as local work station (#4705 on 5404). For use with
System/3, see below.
Sets. See "Specify" below for voltage and cable ordering information.
Prerequisites:
Model 1: a 3271 Model 1 or 2 or a 3272 Model 1 or 2 or a
3274.
Model 2: a 3271 Model 2 or a 3272 Model 2 or a 3274.
Model 3: a 3735 Model 1 with #7880 installed.
Supplies: A black ribbon, Part No. 1136970 or equivalent, is
required.
Bibliography: System/360/370, GA22-6822, 3720, GA24-3089.
Specify:
Model 3. Attaches to and uses the storage buffer of a 3735
Programmable Buffered Terminal Model 1.
Highlights: Provides controls, storage and hard copy output at a
speed of 66 cps, using the EBCDIC character set '" for ASCII
character sets, see "Specify" below. The unit may print from a
CPU or the contents of a 3277 Display Station or a 3284, 3286,
or 3287 printer buffer via the 3271, 3272, or 3274 Control Unit.
When attached to a 3735, the 3286 Model 3 prints under 3735
Program Control.
The unit has a pin feed platen which permits the feeding of
marginally punched continuous forms paper. 120, 126 or 132
print positions may be specified ... see "Specify." Line spacing
is 6 lines/inch. Matrix characters are formed by 7 vertical wires
printing dots in up to 4 of 7 possible horizontal positions. Use of
the underscore in conjunction with another character will overprint the lowest dot in that character and is not recommended.
Refer to SRL GA24-3488 for forms design considerations and
limitations. Up to 6-part forms can be printed with a maximum
thickness of .018" (for optimum feeding and stacking, no more
than·3 parts are recommended). Forms lengths can be 3" to 14"
in increments of 1/6". Card stock continuous forms are not
recommended.
For Local Work Station on System/3 Model 4: 3286 Printers
(Models 1 and 2) may be intermixed with 3277 Display Stations
(Models 1 and 2) and 3284 Printers (Models 1 and 2) and 3287
Printers (Models 1 and 2) and 3288 Line Printers (Model 2) for a
maximum of 5 devices attached to the 5404. Specify #9089 for
EBCDIC Character Set. A 3271, 3272, or 3274 Control Unit is
not required. A cable order is required. See "Specify" below for
voltage and cable ordering information.
For Local Display Adapter on System/3 Model 8 or Model
12: 3286 Printers (Models 1 and 2) may be intermixed with 3277
Display Stations (Models 1 and 2) and 3284 Printers (Models 1
and 2) and 3287 Printers (Models 1 and 2) and 3288 Printers
(Model 2) for a maximum of twelve devices attached via the
Local Display Adapter (#4702) and its subfeatures on the 5408
or 5412. A 3271, 3272, or 3274 Control Unit is not required. A
cable is required. Specify #9089 for EBCDIC Character Set. Not
compatible with ASCII Character Sets. See "Specify" below for
voltage and cable ordering information.
(1) Voltage (115V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880 for locking
plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
(2) Pin Feed Platen: #9162 for 126 print positions (13-1/8"
hole-to-hole), or #9167 for 120 print positions (12-1/2"
hole-to-hole), or #9168 for 132 print positions (13-7/8"
hole-to-hole). Note: Do not order #9167 or #9168 unless
paper is available in your area.
(3) Character Set: Specify one of the following:
#9089 For EBCDIC Character Set ... provides the 64 characters described on the EBCDIC typewriter keyboard.
Prerequisites: If used with the 3271, EBCDIC Transmission
Code (#9761) is required on the 3271. If used with the 3735,
EBCDIC Transmission Code (#9761) is required on the 3735.
#9091 For ASCII Character Set (A) ... provides the 64 ASCII
characters but substitutes the Logical OR (I) and Logical
NOT (..,) in place of the exclamation mark (I) and circumflex
("). Prerequisites: If used with the 3271, ASCII Transmission Code (#9762) is required on the 3271.
#9092 For ASCII Character Set (B) ... provides the standard
64 ASCII characters. Prerequisiftts: If used with the 3271,
ASCII Transmission Code (#9762) is required on the 3271. If
used with the 3735, ASCII Transmission Code (#9762) is
required on the 3735.
(4) Cables: See Accessories for 3286 cable ordering instructions.
For cable specifications, see System/370 Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GC22-7004 or 3270 Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GA27-2787 ..
Model Changes: Model changes between model 1 and model 2
are field installable ... model 3 is not interchangeable with model
1 or model 2.
For Display Adapter on System/3 Model 15: 3286 Printers
(Models 1 and 2) may be intermixed with 3277 Display Stations
(Models 1 and 2) and 3284 Printers (Models 1 and 2) and 3287
Printer (Models 1 and 2) and 3288 Printers (Model 2) for a maximum of 30 devices attached via the Display Adapter
(#4601/#4602) on the 5415. A 3271, 3272, or 3274 Control
Unit is not required. A cable is required. Specify #9089 for
EBCDIC Character Set. Not compatible with ASCII Character
Not to be reproduced without written permisSion.
----- -=
--- - -=---=
-- - ---
M3286.~
General Systems Division.-.;;.Machines
Accessories:
Forms Stand
Permits placement of continuous forms on the stand above floor
level and provides for forms stacking after printing. This accessory is a two shelf forms stand.
TYPE
FEATURE NO.
3286
4450
Cables
Cables and/or associated parts to attach the subject machines
to the 3271/3272/3274 Control Units, the Local Display Adapter (#4702) on System/3 Model 8 and Model 12, or the Display
Adaptor (#4601) on System/3 Model 15 or directly to the
System/3 Model 4, may be purchased from IBM or from a
customer selected source. For the proper identification, installation, and application of the subject cables and parts, see 3270
Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA27-2787 and
Coaxial Cable and Accessories Manual, GA27-2805. The customer is responsible for installation and maintenance of these
cables and their associated parts.
Assem. #2577672 Cable Assembly Indoor
Bulk #0323921 Coax Wire (Note 1)
Part #1836418 Connector Kit (Note 1)
A~sem. #1833108 Cable Assembly Outdoor
Bulk #5252750 Coax Wire (Note 2)
Part #1836419 Connector Kit (Note 2)
Part #2621414 Modification Kit (Note 3)
Part #1833106 Station Protector Attachment Kit (Note 5)
Part #5252643 Adapter (Note 7)
Part #1830818 Station Protector Kit, Gas (Note 4)
Part #5252899 Station Protector Element, Gas (Note 6)
Note 1:
Note 2:
Note 3:
Note 4:
Note 5:
Note 6:
Note 7:
Coax wire and one connector kit (includes 2 connectors 1836444) required for each indoor cable assembly.
Coax wire and one connector kit (includes 2 connectors 1836447) required for each outdoor assembly.
Customers replacing 2260 Display Stations may utilize
the existing installed cables by use of this modification
kit. One kit required for each cable.
Must be used with outdoor cable assembly when
installed above ground. One kit required for each cable
assembly.
Used to attach outdoor cable to station protector. One
kit required for each cable assembly.
Replacement station protector elements.
Used to join two 2577672 or two 1833108 cable assemblies together.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
April' 78
't---.-.------ -=- --=--==
M3287.1
April 78
General Systems Division-Machines
.
3287 PRINTER
Customer Setup (CSU)
Purpose: Provides hard copy output. The 3287 Models 1 and 2
attach to a 3271 Control Unit Model 1 or 2, or a 3272 Control
Unit Model 1 or 2, or a 3274 Control Unit Model 1C, or a 3276
Control Unit Display Model 2, or a System/3 Models 4, 8, 12, or
15 or as an optional console printer on System/3 Model 15.
The 3287 Models 1 and 2 are designated as Customer Setup,
thereby offering the customer early availability and terminal
relocation flexibility.
Model 1: 80 cps maximum bi-directional printer.
Model 2: 120 cps maximum bi-directional printer.
Note: Actual printer throughout is dependent upon operational
and system characteristics. Factors such as controller configuration and line transmission speed, output format, and programming application processing must all be considered in determining actual throughput.
Model Changes: Field installable.
Highlights: The 3287 consists of control functions, printer and
indicator lights in one integrally designed desk-top unit. Special
Features are available which permit tailoring of the printer to the
user's requirements.
Where the 3287 replaces a 3284 or 3286 Printer the Variable
Width Forms Tractor (Special Feature) is used in lieu of the Pin
Feed Platen or Forms Tractor RPQ WD 4031. In addition, Friction Feed Paper Handling is available as a Specify Feature.
Control Functions: Provides the control for all online operations. This unit requires the 3271/3272 Attachment (#8330) for
receiving data from a 3271/3272 Control Unit, or a 3274 Control
Unit,(with Terminal Adapter B), or a System/3. The 3274/3276
Attachment (#8331) is used for receiving data from a 3274
Control Unit (with Terminal Adapter Type A), or a 3276 Control
Unit Display Station.
Printer: Maximum printer throughput is obtained with bidirectional serial matrix printing and indexing without unnecessary print head movement. The printer dot matrix is 4 of 7 wide
by 8 high giving high legibility with character spacing at 10 to
the inch. Line spacing is 6 and 8 lines to the inch. Up to 132
characters can be printed in a line. Up to 6 part forms (total
thickness-0.018" /0.457mm) may be used. For any mUlti-part
or pre-printed continuous forms the Variable Width Forms Tractor (#8700) is recommended. Five and six part continuous forms
should be tried on an individual basis for acceptable feeding,
registration, and print quality.
The Friction Feed Paper Handling (#9180) is recommended, for
use with non-preprinted single part roll or fan-fold paper, with a
minimum width of 8" /203mm, when the Variable Width Forms
Tractor (#8700) is not used. Maximum overall forms width is
14-7/8" /378mm; card stock forms are not recommended. (See
Form Design Printers Reference Guide, GA24-3488 for form
specifications and limitations.)
Audible Alarm, Mono-Dual case, Single/Double line spacing,
and Maximum Print Position are standard functions. Dual Case
is nbt supported for ASCIIB when using 3271/3272 Attachment
(8330) Mono/Dual switch is inoperative when the 3287 is copying from a display.
Problem Determination Procedures
Significant function has been designed into this unit to provide
greater availability to the customer. This has been done through
the use of problem determination and recovery routines and
procedures that can be understood and used by the operator.
See Customer Responsibilities below.
For additional information on CSU refer to the GI Section 2.
Customer Responsibilities
The customer is responsible for:
•
Adequate site, system and other vendor preparation.
•
Receipt at the customer's receiving dock, unpacking, and
placement of the 3287.
•
Physical setup, connection of cables, switch settings, and
checkout.
•
Contacting
to make cable connections
of IBM CSU units to IBM non-CSU units where customer
access areas are not provided.
•
Notifying IBM of intent to relocate and following IBM instructions for relocation.
•
Using and following the problem ,determination procedures
and fill out trouble report prior to calling for IBM service.
•
Disconnecting, packing and removal to the customer shipping dock at the time of discontinuance. Appropriate instructions will be provided by IBM. .
•
Providing a desk or table top to support the 3287.
Prerequisites:
Attachment
Feature
Device Adapter
Attachment on 3287
on Control Unit
3271/3272
FC#8330
3274
FC#83310r
FC#8330
FC#8331
3276
Available port or added
FC#3250
Type A or B Adapter
(See M3274 Sales Pages)
Available port or added
FC#3255, FC#3256,
FC#3257
For Direct Local Attachment to a System/3:
(via FC#8330 on the 3287 and available device interface on
System/3 CPU)
System/3 Model 4
System/3 Model 8
System/3 Model 12
System/3 Model 15
For console use with
System/3 Model 15
5404 Processing Unit
FC#4701 /4702 on
5408 Processing Unit
FC#4701 /4702 on
5412 Processing Unit
FC#4601 on 5415
Processing Unit
FC#8330 is required on 3287
FC#7901 is required on 5415
Bibliography: See KWIC Index GA20-1621 or specific system
bibliography.
Supplies: A black ribbon, IBM Part No. 1136653 or equivalent,
is required.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--....
--- -=
::..~ General Systems Division-Machines
- =-. - ---
M3287.2
.-.
-----~
...
Specify Features (For details see Specify Descriptions):
(4)
S/3
3271/72 3274 3276
DA/LDA
(Note 1)Console
Plugs
Locking Plug
#9890 X
Non-locking Plug #9891 X
X
X
X
X
X
XX
Power Cord
6 foot (1.8m)
9 foot (2.8m)
12 foot (3.7m)
15 foot (4.5m)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
XX
X
X
(3)
Cables
See Specify-Descriptions X
X
X
X
(4)
Character Set
EBCDIC
ASCII (B)
#9082 X
#9084 X
X
X
X
X
X
Variable Width Forms
Tractor-Covers #9850 X
X
X
X
(6)
Variable Width Forms
Tractor-Paper
Handling
#9185 X
X
X
X
(7)
Friction Feed Paper
Handling
#9180 X
X
X
X
Page Length Control
#9550 X
X
X
X
X Print Error
Indication
#9488 X
X
X
X
(10) Character Print Operation
480 Characters #9520 X
1920 Characters #9522 X
X
X
X
X
X
(11) Blower
X
X
X
(2)
(5)
(8)
(9)
Note 1:
#9511
Default
#9512
#9513
#9030 X
Character Set:
Specify one of the following:
3287 Attached to:
(1 )
April7.a
#9082 For EBCDIC Character Set.
#9084 For ASCII (B) Character Set. (Not for System/3
LDA/ DA or as console printer)
Note: The Character Set specified [EBCDIC or ASCII (9)]
must be the same as the transmission code/character set
used on the control unit to which it is attached.
(5)
if Variable Width Forms Tractors (#8700) is ordered.
(6)
(7)
Variable Width Forms Tractor- Paper Handling (#9185):
Specify if Variable Width Forms Tractor (#8700) is ordered and there is a requirement to handle forms with an
overall width from 3 to 8 inches (76.2 to 203.2mm).
Prerequisite: Variable Width Forms Tractor (#8000).
Friction Feed Paper Handling (#9180):
Must be ordered on all machines without the Variable
Width Forms Tractor Covers (#9850). A Customer using
the Variable Width Forms Tractors has the option of ordering Specify Feature #9180 at no additional charge once
per machine, for friction feeding of single part nonpreprinted continuous roll and fan fold paper with a minimum width of 8" /203mm. Included in Specify Feature
(#9180) is a paper tear bar for tearing continuous forms
approximately 2 1/2" /64mm from the last line printed.
Specify Feature #9180 is used interchangeably with the
Variable Width Forms Tractor and is attached and removed by the customer. This specific feature is designated as Customer Setup.
(8)
Page Length Control (#9550): Allows customer insertion
of Forms Feed (FF) Character (HEX OC) into the data
stream. Upon detection of the FF character, the printer
will skip to the first print line of the next form. The .forn{
length is entered into two decade switches on the 3287
by the operator and is variable from 00 to 99. (The programming implementation of this feature is the
customer's responsibility). Prerequisite: Variable Width
Forms Tractor (#8700).
(9)
X Print Error Indication (#9488): To indicate an error an X
is printed on the print line immediately below the last line
normally printed.
(10)
Character Print Operation:
For Terminal Adapter Type B on 3274, select from
specify, #9520 and #9522. For Terminal Adapter Type
A, #9520 is not required.
Specify
Variabl~ Width Forms Tractor-Covers (#9850): Specify
With 3271/3272 Attachment (#8330) specify one of the
following:
(1)
Plugs (Voltage 120V AC, 1-phase 3 wire 60 Hz): #9890
for locking plug, or #9891 for non-locking plug.
(2)
Power Cord:
If standard 9 foot (2.8m) Power Cord is not desired, specify: #9511 for 6 foot (1.8m) Power Cord, #9512 for 12
. foot (3.7m) Power Cord, or #9513 for 15 foot (4.5m) Power Cord.
(3)
Cables: See Accessories, Page M3287.3 for 3287 Models
See Installation
1 and 2 ordering instructions.
Manual-Physical Planning, GA27-2787, for cable details.
A sep.~rate cable order is not required when attaching to
Systerrl!3 Model 15 via FC#7901 on the 5415.
#9520 (480 character print operation) for use with a
3271 Control Unit Model 1, or a 3272 Control Unit
Model 1 or a 3274 Control Unit Model 1C (Adapter
Type B), or a System/3 Model 4, 8, 12 or 15. Note:
#9520 (480-character print operation can also be specified for use with a 3271 Control Unit Model 2, or a
3272 Control Unit Model 2. #9520 is required for console printer on System/3 Model 15.
#9522 (1,920 character print operation) for use with a
3271 Control Unit Model 2, a 3272 Control Unit Model
2, or a 3274 Control Unit Model 1C (Adapter Type B),
or a System/3 Model 4, 8, 12 or 15.
With 3274/3276 Attachment (#8331) specify the following:
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-
.....
-.=- =-=---=
General Systems Division-Machines
--...
-~-
.-
M3287.3
- -- - ---
#9522 (1920 character print operation) for use with a
3276 Control Unit Display Station Model 2, or a 3278
Display Station Model 2 attached to a 3274 Control
Unit (Adapter Type A).
(11)
(12)
Blower (#9030): Must be specified only for 3287 Model 1
to be used in an environment above 90°F (32.2°C) ambient temperature [specification limits up to 104°F
(40.5°C)]. Available at original manufacture only.
System Attachment: Identify the attaching Control Unit or
natively attached Host Processor by specifying the following
Control Unit/natively attached
Host Processor
3271
3272
3274 Model 1C
3276 Model 2
System/3 Model 4
System/3 Model 8
System/3 Model 12
System/3 Model 15
Special Features
Descriptions) :
(For
details
X
Accessories
Forms Stand Permits placement of continuous forms on the
stand above floor level and provides for stacking after printing.
This accessory is a two shelf forms stand.
Type
Cables:
Cables and/or associated parts may be purchased from IBM or
from a customer selected source. For the proper identification,
installation, and application of the subject cables and parts, see
3270 Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA27-2787 and
Coaxial Cable and Accessories Manual, GA27-2805. The customer is responsible for installation and maintenance of these
cables and their associated parts.
see
Special
X
X
X
X
X
#
2577672
0323921
1836418
1833108
5252750
1836419
2621414
1833106
Cable Assembly Indoor
Coax Wire (Note 1)
Connector Kit (Note 1)
Cable Assembly Outdoor
Coax Wire (Note 2)
Connector Kit (Note 2)
Modification Kit (Note 3)
Station Protector Attachment
Kit (Note 5)
Adapter (Note 7)
Station Protector Kit,
Gas (Note 4)
Station Protector Element,
Gas (Note 6)
XX
Assm.
Bulk#
Part #
Assm.
Bulk#
Part #
Part #
Part #
XX
Part #
Part #
5252643
1830818
Part #
5252899
Note 1:
Coax wire and one connector kit (includes 2 connectors part #1836444) required for each indoor cable
assembly.
Coax wire and one connector kit (includes 2 connectors part #1836447) required for each outdoor cable
assembly.
Customers replacing 2260 Display Stations may utilize
the existing installed cables by use of this modification
kit. One kit required for each cable.
Must be used with outdoor cable assembly when
installed outdoors (either above or below ground level.
One kit required for each cable assembly.
Used to attach outdoor cable to station protector. One
kit required for each cable assembly.
Replacement station protector elements.
Used to join two part #2577672 or two part #1833108
cable assemblies together.
Feature
S/3Syste
3271/72 3274 3276 DA/LDAC
X
and Variable Width Forms Tractor-Paper Handling (#9185)
where there is a requirement to handle forms with an overall
width from 3 to 8 inches (76.2 to 203.2 mm). maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Customer Setup: No.
3287
3287 Attached to:
3271/3272 Attach
#8330
3274/3276 Attach
#8331
Variable Width Forms
Tractor
#8700
April 78
Special Feature Descriptions:
3271/3272 Attachment (#8330): Provides one interface for
attachment of a 3287 Model 1 or 2 to a 3271 Control Unit Model
1 or 2, a 3272 Control Unit Model 1 or 2, or a 3274 Control Unit
Model 1C, or a System/3 Model 4, 8, 12 or 15. Provides the
buffer storage required for print operation. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Customer Setup: No. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with 3274/3276 Attachment (#8331).
Prerequisite: For 3270 System ... An available port or added
FC#3250 on a 3271 Model 1, 2, or 3272 Model 1, 2 ... See
M3271 or M3272. For 3274 Control Unit ... An available port
(Type B) or added Type B Adapter ... See M3274. For System!3
Model 4,8,12 or 15 ... See M5404, M5408, M5412, or M5415
... An available device interface on the System/3 CPU. For
console printer on System/3 Model 15, FC#7901 is required on
5415.
3274/3276 Attachment (#8331): Provides one interface for
attachment of a 3287 Model 1 or 2 to a 3274 Control Unit Model
1C or to a 3276 Control Unit Display Station Model 2. Provides
buffer storage required for print operation. Included in this
feature is Buffer Reprint support. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Customer Setup: No. Limitation: Cannot
be installed with 3271/3272 Attachment (#8330). Prerequisite:
An available port or added FC#3255, FC#3256, FC#3257 or a
3276, or an available port (Type A) or added Type A Adapter on
a 3274.
#
Note 2:
Note 3:
Note 4:
Note 5:
Note 6:
Note 7:
Variable Width Forms Tractor (#8700): A forms feeding device for continuous margin punched forms. Overall forms width
from 3 to 15 inches (76.2 to 381.0 mm) can be fed.
Prerequisites: Variable Width Forms Tractor-Covers (#9850)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---.-= ----.--==--=
----- --_.--- General Systems Division-Machines
~..
M3288.1
April 78
_Specify:
3288 LINE PRINTER (Model 2)
Purpose: Provides hard copy output at speeds up to 120 LPM."
Highlights: Provides hard copy output at a speed of up to 120
LPM using EBCDIC or ASCII 64 character sets ... see "Specify"
below. May print from the CPU or the contents of a 3277 Display Station. Attaches to: 3271 Model 2 or 3272 Model
2 ... 3274 ... Local Display Adapter (#4702 and #4705 on
System/3 Model 8 or 12)... Display Adapter (#4601 on
System/3 Model 15) ... System/3 Model 4 as local work station
(#4705 on 5404). For use with System/3, see below.
Prints 10 characters per inch, 132 characters or positions per
line at 6 lines per inch on continuous fan-fold paper. The paper
handling mechanism is adjustable to accept paper from widths
of 3.5" (8.9 cm) to 15.0" (38.10 cm). Paper up to 6 parts plus
carbon (maximum total thickness is .020" or .50 mm) can be
accommodated. Forms jam detection is provided. Use of card
stock forms is not recommended.
Notes: (1) The 3288 Line Printer is recommended for use in a
machine room environment due to its higher noise level while
printing ... (2) The 3288 is supported by programming as a 3286
Printer Model 2.
For Local Work Station on System/3 Model 4: 3288 Line
Printers (Model 2) may be intermixed with 3277 Display Stations
(Models 1 and 2) and 3284 Printers (Models 1 and 2) and 3286
Printers (Models 1 and 2) and 3287 Printers (Models 1 and 2) for
a maximum of 5 devices attached to the 5404. Specify #9089
for EBCDIC Character Set. A 3271, 3272, or 3274 Control Unit
is not required. A cable order is required. See "Specify" below
for voltage and cable ordering information.
For Local Display Adapter on System/3 ModelS or 12: 3288
Line Printers (model 2) may be intermixed with 3277 Display
Stations (Models 1 and 2), 3284 Printers (Models 1 and 2), 3286
Printers (Model 1 and 2) and 3287 Printers (Models 1 and 2), for
a maximum of twelve devices attached via the Local Display
Adapter (#4702) and its subfeatures on the 5408 and 5412. A
3271, 3272, or 3274 Control Unit is not required. A cable is
required. Specify #9089 for EBCDIC Character Set. See
"Specify" below for voltage and cable ordering information.
For Display Adapter on System/3 Model 15: The 3288 Printer
(Model 2) may be intermixed with 3277 Display Stations
(Models 1 and 2) and 3284 Printers (Models 1 and 2) and 3286
Printers (Models 1 and 2), or 3287 Printers (Models 1 and 2) for
a maximum of 30 devices attached via the Display Adapter
(#4601/#4602) on the 5415. A 3271, 3272, or 3274 Control
Unit is not required. A ,cable is required. Specify #9089 for
EBCDIC Character Set. Not compatible with ASCII Character
Sets. See "Specify" below for voltage and cable ordering information.
Prerequisite: A 3271 Control Unit Model 2, a 3272 or a 3274
Control Unit Model 2.
Supplies: A black ribbon, Part No. 1136634 or equivalent, is
required.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621 or specific system
bibliography.
(1) Voltage (11.5V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880 for locking
plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
(2) Character Set: Specify one of the following;
#9089 For EBCDIC Character Set (available at time of manufacture only) ... provides the 64 characters described on the
EBCDIC Typewriter Keyboard. Prerequisite: If used with the
3271 Model 2, EBCDIC Transmission Code (#9761) is required on the 3271 Model 2.
#9091 For ASCII Character Set (A) (available at time of manufacture only) ... provides the 64 ASCII characters but substitutes the Logical OR (I) and Logical NOT (...,) in place of the
exclamation mark (!) and circumflex (1\). Prerequisite: If
used with the 3271 Model 2, ASCII Transmission Code
(#9762) is required on the 3271 Model 2.
#9092 For ASCII Character Set (B) (available at time of manufacture only) ... provides the standard 64 ASCII characters.
Prerequisite: If used with the 3271 Model 2, ASCII Transmission Code (#9762) is required on the 3271 Model 2.
(3) X Print Error Indication: #9944 ... to indicate an error an X is
printed on the print line immediately below the last line normally printed.
(4) Vertical Forms Control: Specify #9850 ... allows customer
insertion of a Forms Feed Character (Hex DC) into his data
stream. Upon detection of the FF character, the printer will
skip to the first print line of the next form. The form length is
entered into two decade switches by the operator and is
variable from 00 to 99. (The implementation of this feature is
the customer's responsibility.)
(5) Cables: See 3288 cable ordering instructions. For cable
specifications see System/370 Installation Manual-Physical
Planning,
GC22-7004
or
System/370
Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GA27-2787.
Accessories:
Forms Stand
Permits placement of continuous forms on the stand above floor
level and provjdes for forms stacking after printing. This accessory is a two shelf forms stand.
TYPE
3288
Cables
Cables and/or associated parts to attach the subject machines
to the 3271/3272/3274 Control Units, the Local Display Adapter (#4702) on System/3 Model 8 and Model 12, or the Display
Adaptor (#4601) on System/3 Model 15 or directly to the
System/3 Model 4, may be purchased from IBM or from a
customer selected source. For the proper identification, installa-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-- --- -
M3288.2
===
-~--
= :-: 't'_ Gene,ral Systems Division-Machines
_____
-------
tion, and application of the subject cables and parts, see 3270
Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA27-2787 and
Coaxial Cable and Accessories Manual, GA27-2805. The customer is responsible for installation and maintenance of these
cables and their associated parts.
Assem. #2577672 Cable Assembly Indoor
Bulk #0323921 Coax Wire (Note 1)
Part #1836418 Connector Kit (Note 1)
Assem. #1833108 Cable Assembly Outdoor
Bulk #5252750 Coax Wire (Note 2)
Part #1836419 Connector Kit (Note 2)
Part #2621414 Modification Kit (Note 3)
Part #1833106 Station Protector Attachment Kit (Note 5)
Part #5252643 Adapter (Note 7)
Part #1830818 Station Protector Kit, Gas (Note 4)
Part°#5252899 Station Protector Element, Gas (Note 6)
Note 1:
Note 2:
Note 3:
Note 4:
Note 5:
Note 6:
Note 7:
Coax wire and one connector kit (includes 2 connectors 1836444) required for each indoor cable assembly.
Coax wire and one connector kit (includes 2 connectors 1836447) required for each outdoor assembly.
Customers replacing 2260 Display Stations may utilize
the existing installed cables by use of this modification
kit. One kit required for each cable.
Must be used with outdoor cable assembly when
installed above ground. One kit required for each cable
assembly.
Used to attach outdoor cable to station protector. One
kit required for each cable assembly.
Replacement station protector elements.
Used to join two 2577672 or two 1833108 cable assemblies together.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
April 78
---......
--=- ---=------=---=
-~-.
M3289.1
.-
---- - y-
April 78
General Systems Division-Machines
3289 LINE PRINTER MODELS 1 AND 2
•
Purpose: A line printer for attachment to a 3274 Control Unit or
a 3276 Control Unit Display Station.
Use and follow the problem determination procedures and fill
out trouble report prior to calling IBM for service.
•
Disconnecting, packing and removal to the customer's shipping dock at the time of discontinuance appropriate instruction will be provided by IBM.
Highlights: Line printing is from characters engraved on a
revolving metal belt. The 3289 models operate at the following
speeds:
Model 1
Model 2
Maximum Lines
Per Minute*
Character
Set
155
120
80
48
64
94
400
300
230
48
64
94
Supplies: Black ribbons, IBM Part No. 1136634 or equivalent
for Model 1 or I BM Part No. 1136670 or equivalent for Model 2
is required .
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621 or specific system
bibliography.
Specify:
*Actual printer throughput is dependent on operational and
system characteristics. Maximum print speed may be degraded
by such factors as commul]ication line speed, control unit load,
and application program.
Model Changes: Not field installable.
Included is one interchangeable print belt (48-, 64-, and 94character set)-see "Specify." A variable width forms tractor
for feeding of marginally punched continuous fQrms (one to six
parts) up to 15" overall width is provided. The following functions are basic: paper jam detection; front forms loading; vertical forms control; vertical/horizontal format control; end of
forms detection; single/double vertical spacing; 132 print positions; character spacing of 10 per inch"; line spacing of 6 or 8 lies
per inch; 4016 byte buffer; standard color accent panel will be
pebble gray; any other colors are via RPQ only.
Limitations: Refer to Form Design Printers Reference Guide,
GA24-3488 for forms design considerations. Printed output is
not supported for optical character reading.
Prerequisite: A 3274 Control Unit with appropriate adapter or a
3276 Control Unit Display Station.
Problem Determination Procedure
Significant function has been designed into this unit to provide
greater availability to the customer. This has been done through
the use of problem determination and recovery routines and
procedures that are easily understood and used by the operator.
See "Customer Responsibility:' below.
Customer Setup (CSU)
The 3289 Model 1 and 2 are designated as Customer Setup
thereby offering the customer early availability and terminal
relocation flexibility.
For additional information on CSU refer to the GI Section 2.
Customer Responsibilities
(2) Power Cord: If standard 9 foot (2.8m) Power Cord is not
desired, specify: #9511 for 6 foot (1.8m) Power Cord, #9512
for 12 foot (3.7m) Power Cord, or #9513 for 15 foot (4.6m)
Power Cord.
(3) Print Belt Character Set: Specify one. Available at time of
manufacture only. See Print Belt, additional, below:
#9490
#9491
#9492
#9493
#9494
#9495
48-Character
64-Character
94-Character
48-Character
64-Character
94-Character
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
EBCDIC
EBCDIC
EBCDIC
ASCII (B)
ASCII (B)
ASCII (B)
(Code must be the same as that specified for the control
unit.)
(4) Cabling: Customer is responsible for procurement, maintenance, and installation of coaxial signal cable. See below.
.See 3270 Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA27~
2787, for cable details.
(5) Print Error Indication: An error graphic X is printed online
immediately below the last print line for that data buffer
when the printer is used in 3270 data stream mode. Specify
9488.
(6) Character Print Operation: To specify the printer buffer size
when the priflter is used in 3270 data stream mode.
9522 (1920-character print) For use with a program which
assumes the buffer size is 1920 bytes.
(7) System Attachment: Identify the attaching control unit by
specifying the following
The following are customer responsibilities:
•
(1) Voltage (120 AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60Hz): #9890 for locking
plug or #9891 for non-locking plug.
Adequate site, system and other vendor preparation.
.~ . Receipt at the customer's receiving dock, unpacking, and
placement of the 3289.
•
Physical setup, connection of cables, switch settings, and
check out.
•
Notify IBM of intent to relocate and follow IBM instructions
for relocation.
Control Unit
3274-1C
3276-2
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- ....
---...---_
::
~
='::'=
M3289.2
General Systems Division-Machines
Special Feature
Audible Alarm (#1090): Sounds an alarm that alerts the operator of conditions that require manual intervention. The operator
can set loudness level and duration (short or continuous). Field
Installable: Yes. Customer Setup: No.
Accessories:
The following items are available on a purchase only basis. For
shipment with machine order part # the feature # is indicatea
below.
Print Belt, additional-Permits the customer to obtain more
than one character set print belt.
#5821
#5822
#5823
#5811
#5812
#5813
48-Character EBCDIC
64-Character EBCDIC
94-Character EBCDIC
48-Character ASCII (B)
64-Character ASCII (B)
94-Character ASCII (B)
Cables
Assm. #
Bulk#
Part #
Assm. #
Bulk#
Part #
Part #
Part #
2577672
0323921
1836418
1833108
5252750
1836419
2621414
1833106
Part #
Part #
5252643
1830818
Part #
5252899
Cable Assembly Indoor
Coax Wire (Note 1)
Connector Kit (Note 1)
Cable Assembly Outdoor
Coax Wire (Note 2)
Connector Kit (Note 2)
Modification Kit (Note 3)
Station Protector Attachment
Kit (Note 5)
Adapter (Note 7)
Station Protector Kit. Gas
(Note 4)
Station Protector Element, Gas
(Note 6)
Note 1:
Coax wire and one connector kit (includes 2 connectors part #5214874) required for each indoor cable
assembly.
(Note 7: Coax wire and one connector kit (includes 2 connec~
tors part #5252758) required for each outdoor cable
assembly.
Note 3: Customers replacing 2260 Display Stations may utilize
the existing installed cables by use of this modification
kit. One kit required for each cable.
Note 4: Must be used with outdoor cable assembly when
installed outdoors (either above or below ground level.
One kit is required for each cable assembly.
Note 5: Used to attach outdoor cable to station protector. One
kit required for each cable assembly.
Note 7: Used to joint two part #2577672 or two part #1833108
cable assemblies together.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
April 78
-- ------....- -=
=---=
General Systems Division-Machines
-- ---.. -
M3340.1
April 78
~-..
3340 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE FACILITY
3348 Cylinder Concepts
Purpose: Multiple capacity, high-speed, direct acce.ss storage
for attachment to a System/3 Model 12 or System/3 Model 15
with B, C, or D Model Processing Unit, System/7 with E Model
Processing Unit.
Model A2: Two disk storage drives and associated control for
attachment to a System/3 Model 15, with B, C, or D Model
Processing Unit via native attachment, or a System/7 equipped
with a 5988-T01, 3340 attachment module. It provides logic and
power for the attachment of up to three 3340 Model B units.
Model B1: Contains one disk storage drive.
Configurations:
System/7: Up to three can be attached to a 3340 Model A2 to
provide a 3, 4 or 5 drive configuration. Can be combined with
Models A2 and B2 for 5,6 or 7 drive configuration.
System/3 Model 15 with B, C, or 0 Model Processor: One
can be attached to a 3340 Model A2 to provide a 3 drive configuration.
Model B2: Contains two disk storage drives.
Configurations:
System/7: Up to three can be attached to a 3340 Model A2 for
a 4, 6, or 8 drive configuration. Can be combined with Models
A2 and B1 for a 5, 6 or 7 drive configuration.
Svstem/3 Model 15 with B, C, or 0 Model Processor: One
can be attached to a 3340 Model A2 to provide a 4 drive configuration.
Model C:. Contains two disk storage drives.
Prices: See Price List
Configuration:
System/3 Model 12--one can be attached directly to the 5412
to provide a two-drive configuration.
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Highlights: Each 3340 contains an air filtration system and the
load/unload mechanism for the 3348 Data Module. It features
low cost, muttiple capacity, fast access and high data rate ...
two drives (C2 only) attach to a System/3 Model 12 ... up to 4
drives attach to a System/3 Model 15 B, C, or D ... , up to 8
drives attach to a System /7 .
The 3340 introduces a new design in which a sealed cartridge
(3348 Data Module) contains the disks, access arms, read/write
heads and spindle. Multiple capacity options on each drive
become possible due to the modularity provided by this unique
design. In addition, the 3348 Model 70F contains fixed heads
which provide low cost, fixed head capability for the 3340 user.
The user may place selected components of IBM software as
well as his own programs in the fixed head area to increase
device performance. The 3348 Model 70F requires the Fixed
Head Feature (#4301) on the 3340. See "Special Features." The
3348 Model 70F is not available on the System/3 Model 12 or
Model 15.
Bytes per Track
Tracks per Cylinder
Cylinders per
Data Module
Bytes per Cylinder
Mdl35 on
System/7
(34.9MB)
Mdl70 or
70F on
System/7
(69.8MB)
Mdl70 on
System/3-l2
or15
(41.0MB)
8;368
12
8,368
12
12,288
20
348
100,416
696
100,416
210*
245,760
*Note: For the Model 12 or 15, these are "logical" cylinders
rather than physical cylinders. For capacities on the System/7
see System/7 under 3348.
Data Rate: 885,000 bytes per second. See GA09-1004 for Data
Rate on System /7.
Access Time: For the 3348 Model 35 and 70, the average seek
time is 25 ms with a minimum of 10 ms and a maximum of 50
ms. For the Model 70F, the average seek time is Oms for cylinders 1 through 5 while all other cylinders retain the above seek
timing. Rotation time is 20.2 ms and latency is 10.1 ms, the
same as for the 3348 Models 35 and 70.
Autoloading: Data Modules are automatically loaded after the
Data Module is placed in the drive, the drive cover is closed and
a switch is turned on. The Data Module is a sealed unit and
requires no cover removal. Start up time is less than 20 seconds.
Read Only: A switch is provided on every 3340 drive. This
switch is activated by inserting a latch in the Data Module.
When the latch is not inserted, the Data Module is protected
from being written upon or erased.
Data Modules: Each drive requires a Data Module to operate.
These must be ordered separately ... see 3348.
3348 Data Module Model 35 provides 34,944,768 bytes of main
data storage plus 9,830,400 bytes for program support on
System/3 Model 12 and Model 15.
3348 Data Module Model 70 provides 41,041,920 bytes of main
data storage plus 9,830,400 bytes for program support on
System/3 Model 12 and Model 15.
3348 Data Module Model 70F provides 69,889,536 bytes of
storage of which 502,080 are accessible by fixed heads.
Only the 3348 Data Module Model 70 is available on System/3
Model 12 and Model 15.
Either the Model 35 or the Model 70 may operate on any drive
and they are interchangeable between drives, including drives
with the Fixed head feature (#4301 or #4302) installed. The
Model 70F, however, requires the Fixed head feature (#4301 or
#4302) on the drive ..
Data written on a data module by System/3 cannot be retrieved
by System/370, and vice versa.
Prerequisites: A 3340 facility requires-a 3340 Model A2
(except System/3 Model 12, which supports only 3340 Model
C2) ... a System/3 Model 15 with a B, C, or D Model Processor,
System/7 with a 5998-T01 Module ... each 3340 drive requires
a 3348 Data Module.
Maximum:
System/3 Model 12-two 3340 drives (C2)
System/3 Model 15B, 15C, or l5D-four 3340 drives
System/7 Model E--eight 3340 drives
Bibliography: GA22-6822
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------='=
=---= General Systems Division-Machines
- - ---
-
---.~
Specify:
(1) Voltage (AC. 3-phase. 4-wire. 60 cycle): #9903 for 208V. or
#9905 for 230V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
(2) Color: #9041 for red. #9042 for yellow. #9043 for blue.
#9045 for gray. or #9046 for white.
(3) System Attachment: Specify #9589 for Attachment of Model
A2 to System/3 Model 15. Specify #9589 must also be used
for a Model B1 or B2 attached to the 3340 A2 to provide a 3
or 4 drive system.
Attachment
Specify #
System/3 Model 15
System/7 Model E
9589
9590
The following must be specified for a 3340 Model C2.
Attachment
Specify #
System/3 Model 12
#9600
(4) For conversion of a 5415A Model CPU to a 5415B. 5415C. or
5415D Model CPU. the MES must indicate deletion of Feature #9400. and if a second 5444 is installed. deletion of
#9401 or #9402.
tSpecial Features
Fixed Head Feature (#4301, 4302). #4301 For model A2 or B2
... #4302 For model B1. To operate the 3348 Model 70F on the
3340. The Fixed Head Feature is available on System/7. Attachment is via the 5998-T01 on the System/7. See appropriate
machines for additional requirements. Limitations: Not available on 3340s attached to -System/3 Model 12 or 15: Field
Installation: Yes.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M3340.2
April 78
-- ---
-- = 'f'_
_____
- - - ----_----
M3344.1
~-= General Systems Division-Machines
....
3344 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE
Purpose: Dual drive, large capacity, direct access storage for
attachment via a 3340 Model A2 to a System/3 Model 150.
Model B2: Two-drive disk storage unit which attaches to a 3340
Model A2. On System/3 Model 15D, one 3344 B2 can be attached to a 3340 A2 to make a four-drive system.
Highlights: The 3344 features a large capacity, fixed storage
medium. Each 3344 has two drives and requires eight logical
device addresses. On System/3 Model 150 each drive is approximately equivalent to four logical 3348 Model 70s--each
logical volume features a larger main data area, and a smaller
area reser:ed for simulation, than on a 3348 data module.
Cylinder concept-System/3 Model 150: Each drive has 828
logical cylinders with 20 tracks per cylinder. Maximum track
capacity is 12,288 bytes providing up to 245,760 bytes per
logical cylinder. Maximum drive capacity is 203,489,280 bytes.
Data Rate--885,000 bytes per second.
Access Time: Average seek time is 25 ms. with a minimum of 10
ms and a maximum of 50 ms. Rotation time is 20.2 ms and
latency is 10.1 ms.
Read Only: A two position switch is provided for each drive.
When the switch is in the "read only" position, the drive is
protected from being written upon or erased.
Data Recovery (Plant Only): Should data in the field prove
unrecoverable, data recovery assistance at the plant of manufacture will be provided.
Alternate Tracks: As used on System/3 Model 15D, there are
160 alternate tracks per drive (40 per logical volume). The 3344
will be shipped from the plant with not more than 5 flagged
tracks per drive. Therefore, a minimum of 155 alternate tracks
per drive are available for customer use.
Prerequisites: For use with System/3-15D, a 5415D with specify #9781 and #9784, and a 3340 Model A2, are required.
Data written by System/3 cannot be retrieved by System/370.
Data written by System/370 cannot be retrieved by System/3
using SCP support.
Limitations: Data written by System/3 cannot be retrieved by
System/370. Data written by System/370 cannot be retrieved
by System/3 using SCP support.
Prices: See Price List
Bibliography: System/3: GC20-8080
SPECIFY:
(1) Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208V, or
#9905 for 230V ... must be consistent with that of the unit to
which the 3344 is attached.
(2) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white .
. (3) System Attachment: Specify #9589
System/3 Model 15D.
for
attachment to
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
April 78
----= -...=
::- - - ----.:
M3348.1
General Systems Division-Machines
3348 DATA MODULE
Purpose: A new generation, removable and interchangeable
Data Module for the 3340 Disk Drive family.
April 78
Data Module is placed in drive, cover is closed and a switch is
turned on. Start-up time is less than 20 seconds.
Flag-Free:, Data Modules are shipped from the plant flag-free. If
within 90 days after receipt the customer is requried to assign an
alternate track (using DOS/VS System utilities), he may return
the Data Module to IBM and it will be repaired at no cost to the
customer.
Capacity Upgrade (Plant, Only): The model 35 may be capacity
upgraded to a model 70. Data Modules must be returned to the
plant of manufacture for the upgrade service. Downgrading is
not available. Recorded data will not be recoverable. Upgrade of
either the model 35 or 70 to the model 70F is available at time of
manufacture only.
..
Models: Three are available in two different capacities:
3348 Model 35
3348 Model 70
3348 Model 70F
34,944,768 bytes
69,889,536 bytes on System/370 and
41,041,920 bytes of main data storage
plus 9,830.400 bytes for program support on System/3 Model 12 and Mode115.
69,889,536 bytes of which 502,080
are accessible by fixed heads.
System/7 Capacities
Mode of Recording
Capacity by Model (MB
35
70
70F
5022 Emulation
Native Max Record Length
7,294 bytes
Native Optimum Record Length
4,100 bytes
29.4
58.9
58.9
30.4
60.9
60.9
34.2
68.4
68.4
Dimensions:
Model 35
Model 70
Model70F
Height
Width
Maximum Length
Shipping Weight (lbs)
8"
16"
18"
21
8"
16"
18"
23
8"
16"
18"
24
Covers are sealed at the plant and are unbreakable and nonflammable. A large handle is provided for ease of installation, removal and transportation. The Data Module has an aperture that is
opened (or closed) automatically by the drive during loading (or
unloading). The Data module is then connected to the drive for
power and communications.
A CE cylinder is assigned to facilitate maintenance of the 3340.
Data Recovery (Plant Only): Should data in the field, for any
reason, prove unrecoverable, a method for data recovery assistance at the plant of manufacture will be provided.
Initialization: The Data Module will be initialized at the plant.
Home addresses and record zero will be written for each track.
3348 Data Module Repair Service (Plant Only)
Replace one or more defective disks (including servo disk)
and/ or heads, clean and lubricate, and retest to new Data Module performance specifications:
System/3 Model 12 and Model 15 use only the 3348 Model 70.
Model 35
Model 70
Model 70F
Highlights
Repair Service
Data Module Concept: The 3348 Data Module utilizes a new
concept in removable direct access storage devices. The Data
Module, within a sealed cartridge, contains the disks, the spindle, the read/write heads and the access arms. The access arms
and heads are not part of the drive as in previous disk pack/ disk
drive interfaces. The sealed module design protects the disk
surfaces by reducing ,outside contamination. Multiple capacity
options on each drive become possible due to the modularity
provided by this unique design. In addition, the Model 70F
contains fixed heads which provide low cost, fixed head capability for the 3340 user. The user may place selected components
of IBM software as well as his own programs in the fixed head
area to increase device performance. The 3348 Model 70F
requires that the Fixed Head Feature (#4301) be installed on the
3340.
* Repair prices will be made available at time of first customer
shipment.
If in addition to normal repair service a new cover is required,
there will be an additional charge.
Removable: Can be installed and removed from the 3340 by the
operator.
Interchangeable: ~he Model 35 or the Model 70 may operate
on any drive and are interchangeable between drives, including
those with the Fixed Head Feature (#4301) installed. The Model
70F, however, requires that #4301 or #4302 be installed on the
drive. System/3, Model 12 and Model 15 use only the 3348
Model 70.
Auto-loading: Data Modules are automatically loaded after the
Not to be reproduced without written permissior
--= ----- General Systems Division-Machines
=--==
- - - ----------. --
1t13410-M3411.1
=
April 78
Model
3410 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
3411 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT AND CONTROL
Characteristics
Purpose: Magnetic tape units and controls for a System/3
Models 8/10/12/15 the 3410 Model 001 can be used with a
3881 Optical Mark Reader Model 002 or a 3886 Optical Character Reader Model 002.
Data Rate (kb/ sec)
at 1600 bpi (P.E.)
20
40
at 800 bpi (NRZI)
10
20
at 556 bpi
6.9
13.9
at 200 bpi
2.5
5.0
Recording Density (bpi) 1600/800/556/200-all models
Tape Speed (ips)
12.5
25
NominallBG (inch)
- 9 Track
.6
.6
- 7 Track
.75
.75
Nominal IBG Time (ms)
- 9 Track
48
24
- 7 Track
60
30
Nominal Read/Write
Access Time (ms)
15
12
Rewind Time Full Reel (min)
3
3
Models:
Data rates in 8-bit bytes per second (1600 bpi).
Model 001
Model 002
Model 003
3410
3411
20,000
40,000
80,000
20,000
40,000
80,000
Highlights:
The 3410 is a single tape unit controlled by a 3411. The 3411 is
a single channel control unit with one tape drive.
-
-
Efficient, compact space saving design.
Dual Density feature ... allows processing of data recorded at
1600 bpi PE or 800 bpi N RZI.
Seven Track feature ... tape written in seven track format
compatible with tapes written at 200, 556, 800 bpi by
729/7330/7335 and 2401/2402/2403/2404/2415/3420
tape drives equipped with 7 track read/write heads.
Radial attachment of tape units permits limited offline maintenance.
Simplified tape threading path.
Checking: During write operations, both parity and signal amplitude are checked. (When used with a 3881 Optical Mark
Reader, both are checked in 800 bpi NRZI ... signal amplitudes
only in 1600 bpi). During read operations, parity is checked.
Error Correction: In 1600 bpi PE recording format single track
error correction in flight takes place. For 9-track, 800 bpi NRZI,
track in error (T.I.E.) is provided. (Not applicable when used
with a 3881 Optical Mark Reader.)
Functions: The following table indicates feature numbers for
corresponding functions:
001
Model
002
Model
003
80
40
27.8
10.0
50
.6
.75
12
15
6
2
Maximums:
Interconnected 3410's and 3411's must be of the same model ...
models cannot be intermixed. The maximum number of tape
units (3410's) per 3411 are:
Model 001 Up to three 3410 Model 001's ... a total of 4 drives.
Model 002 Up to three 3410 Model 002's ... a total of 4 drives.
Model 003 Up to three 3410 Model 003's ... a total of 4 drives.
Limitation: A maximum of 4 tape drives (any model) can be
attached to a System/3 Model 8/10/12/15. A maximum of one
3410 Model 001 can be attached to the 3881 or 3886.
Prerequisites: Each 3411 requires the following:
For System/3 Model 10/15-a 3411 Magnetic Tape Attachment (#7951) on the 5410 or 541 5 and System / 3 Model
8/10/12/15 Attachment (#7003) on the 3411 ... see"Special
Features."
For System/3 Mdl 8-A 3411 Magnetic Tape Attachment
(#7960) on the 5408 and System / 3 Model 8/ 10/12/ 15 A ttachment (#7003) on the 3411 ... see"Special Features."
Subsystem Function Feature Control
Name
Unit
(includes tape unit
on 3411)
For System/3 Md112-a Basic Attachment Feature (#4701) and
a 3411 Magnetic Tape Attachment (#7960) on the 5412 and
System/3 Model 8/10/12/15 attachment (#7003) on the 3411
... see "Special Features."
1600 bpi
9-track only
#3211
Each 3410 requires an appropriate model of the 3411, except
when a 3410 Model 001 is attached to a 3881 or 3886.
3411
Single
Density
3410* Tape Unit
Standard
Magnetic Tape:
1600 bpi PE/800 bpi
Dual
NRZl9-track
Density '#9150
#3211 or #3221
1600 bpi PE/200-556800 bpi NRZI
Seven
7-track
Track
#3211 or #6550
#9160
* Tape units must all be the same model as 3411.
The following tapes and reels can be used: IBM Series 500, IBM
Heavy Duty, IBM Dynexcel, or competitive formulations which
meet the tape and reel criteria in Tape Specifications, GA320006.
Note: I BM tapes other than those above do not provide adequate reliability and should not be used.
Bibliography:
System /3-GC20-8080,
3881-GA21-9127.
Also IBM 3410/3411 Component Summary, GA32-0015.
Metering: 3410 (all Models)-I/O Unit (online) ... 3410 Model
001 when used with a 3881 Model 2-1/0 Unit (offline).
3411-Assignable Unit.
Model Changes: Field installable.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--w·o,',.
-----= -- - _.: .::'- .
M3410-M3411.2
.~ ,.~:'
--~
...
--- - y-
General Systems Division-Machines
April 78
.
003 to operate at 800 bpi as well as 1600 bpi. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with Single Density, Tape Unit (#3211) or
Seven Track, Tape Unit (#6550). Field Installation: Yes.
Prere.quisite: Dual Density, Control (#9150) on the 3411 ... see
"Specify," or Dual Density (#3550) on the 3881 Optical Mark
Reader, or Dual Density Tap'B Adapter (#6485) on the 3886
Optical Character Reader.
Specify:
(1) Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 cycle): #9902 for 208V, or
#9904 for 230V. If used with a 3881 Optical Mark Reader or
a 3886 Optical Character Reader, voltage must be consistent.
(2) Dual Density, Control (3411 only): #9150. Permits attachment of 3410's equipped with Dual Density, Tape Unit
(#3221) and installation of Dual Density, Tape Unit (#3221)
on the 3411 itself. 3410' s equipped with Single Density,
Tape Unit (#3211) can also be attached. Limitation: Cannot
be installed on same 3411 with' Seven Track, Control
(#9160). Field Installation: Yes.
(3) Seven Track, Control (3411) only): #9160. Permits attachment of 3410's equipped with Seven Track, Tape Unit
(#6550) and installation of Seven Track, Tape Unit (#6550)
on the 3411 itself. 3410's equipped with Single Density,
Tape Unit (#3211) can also be attached. #9160 includes the
translator function which, when used causes 8-bit bytes from
the I/O interface to be written on tape as 6-bit BCD characters and 6-bit characters read from tape to be translated into
their EBCDIC equivalents. The Data Conversion function,
also included, allows reading and writing of 8-bit bytes on
7-track tape by converting 4 tape characters to three storage
bytes and vice versa. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
Dual Density, Control (#9150). Field Installation: Yes.
Seven Track, Tape Unit (#6550): (3410, 3411-any model)
Permits the 3410 or the tape unit on the 3411 to operate at 200,
556 or 800 bpi NRZI in the seven track format compatible with
729 7330, 7335 and 2401, 2402, 2403, 2404, 2415, 3420 tape
units equipped with seven-track read/write heads. Tape units
with this feature will only read or write 7-track tape. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with Single Density, Tape Unit (#3211), or
Dual Density, Tape Unit (#3221). Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Seven Track, Control (#9160) on the 3411.
System/3 MdI8/10/12/15 Attachment (#7003): (3411 Model
001, 002, 003) To attach the 3411 with up, to three 3410's to a
System/3 Model 8, 10, 12 or 15. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with
System/360/370 Attachment
(#7360)
or
System/370 Model 115/125 Artachment (#7361). Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: 3411 Magnetic Tape Attachment (#7960) on the 5408 and 5412 or 3411 Magnetic Tape
Attachment (#7951) on the 5410 and 5415.
(4) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
(5) Tape Reels: If any color other than gray is desired, specify
#9051 for red. #9053 for blue, or #9054 for white.
(6) Density Formats: The 3410/3411 subsystem can operate in
three density formats ... 1600 bpi PE, single density ... or
1600/800 bpi, dual density ... or 200/556/800 bpi, seven
track. With the exception of single density, which is standard
on the control unit of the 3411, a feature number for the
format desired must be specified for each tape unit and the
control unit ... see"Special Features" for limitations. Dual
Density, Control (#9150) is required on the 3411 for Dual
Density, Tape Unit (#3221) on the 3411 and attached 3410's
... see specify (2) above. Seven Track, Control (#9160) is
required on the 3411 for Seven Track, Tape Unit (#6550) on
the 3411 and attached 3410's ... see specify (3) above.
(7) System Attachments: System/3 Model 8/10/12/15 Attachment (#7003) is required for attachment to a System/3 Model 8, 10, 12 or 15.
(8) Language Group: #2927 for English.
Special Features:
Single Density, Tape Unit (#3211): (3410, 3411-any Model)
Permits the 3410 or the tape unit on a 3411 to operate at 1600
bpi PE only. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Dual Density,
Tape Unit (#3221) or Seven Track, Tape Unit (#6550). Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: If installed on the 3886 Optical
Character Reader, Single Density Tape Adapter (#6490) on the
3886.
Dual Density, Tape Unit (#3221): (3410, 3411-any Model)
Permits the 3410 , or the tape unit on a 3411 Model 001, 002 or
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---= -=---=
- ... - ----
=
M3601.1
3601 FINANCE COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER
Purpose: A programmable controller for attachment of 3600
Finance Communication System Terminals to S/370 and S/3
Model 15 processors.
Attachment to S/370 is via a 3704/3705 Communications
Controller using SOLC transmission over various common carrier
or user-owned facilities.
Attachment to S/3 Model 15 is via Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC)- see 3601/3602 RPQ 8K0598 and 5415 RPQ
S40156.
Model 2A
A programmable controller with a diskette drive
which accommodates one-sided removable diskettes, a maximum of three loops, and a maximum
of 88K bytes of user programmable storage.
Remote terminal attachments* are available.
Model 2B
A programmable controller with a diskette drive
which accommodates one or two-sided removable
diskettes, a maximum of three loops, and a maximum of 88K bytes of user programmable storage.
Remote terminal attachments* are available.
Model 3A
A programmable controller with a diskette drive
which accommodates one-sided removable diskettes, diskette drive, a maximum of six loops and a
maximum of 88K bytes of user programmable storage.
Remote terminal attachments* are available.
Model 3B
April 78
.General Systems Division-Machines
A programmable controller with a diskette drive
which accommodates one or two-sided removable
diskettes, a maximum of six loops and a maximum
of 88K bytes of user programmable storage.
Remote terminal attachments* are available.
* Remote terminal attachments can be achieved on
the total number of loops indicated by one or a
combination of the following, as applicable.
Device or Feature
Device or
Feat. #
2A
2B
3601
3A
3B
1200 bps Loop
Integrated Modem
Term. Attach Unit
EIA Interface
#8001
3603-1
RPQ
3
2
3
2
5
6
5
Communications
(BSC)
5
6
5
see
Models 2A and 3A house a direct access diskette drive with a
one-sided removable diskette which provides permanent storage
for control and user programs, plus temporary and permanent
storage for user data (sequential logging, random retrieval of
data records, etc.).
Models 2B and 3B-houses a direct access diskette drive with a
two-sided removable diskette which provides permanent storage
for control and user programs, plus temporary and permanent
storage for user data (sequential logging, random retrieval of
data records, etc.).
All 3600 System terminals are attached by loops which operate
at speeds of 1200, 2400 or 4800 bps for locally attached terminals and at 1200 bps for remotely attached terminals. The base
unit provides one loop. Two additional loops are available on
models 2A and 2B while five additional loops are available on
models 3A and 3B. 1200 bps loops integrated modems are
available on models 3A and 3B only ... see "Special Features."
Note: Only one 4800 bps loop per 3601 may be specified for
System/3 Host attachment configurations.
Communication between the controller and the 3704/3705 may
be either through an integrated 1200 bps modem or through an
external modem with EIA Interface (#3701), or via the local
attachment feature of the 3704/3705. See "Modems" and
"Special Features" below. Each 3601 operates in half-duplex
mode. Duplex communication line operations are possible with
multiple 3601' s attached to the line ... one 3601 transmitting
while the other receives.
For attachment to S/3 Model 15 see 3601/3602 RPQ 8K0598
and 5415 RPQ S40156.
Can be programmed to operate independently when the CPU is
unavailable. Capable of controlling all terminal functions, executing arithmetic, and capturing data from the terminals for later
transmission to the CPU. A keylock is provided for the removable diskette. One key is provided.
Transmission: The 3601 operates over common carrierprovided or equivalent customer-owned communications facilities. For information concerning these facilities, see the M 2700
pages.
Highlights: Controls all the functions of 3600 Finance Communications System terminals. Controls data transmission between
those terminals and the central processing site. Four SOLC
Communications features are available one of which is required
for transmission to and from the Host. An SOLC Communications feature at speeds from 1200 bps to 4800 bps or an SOLC
Communications (model 1, 3A or 3B) feature at speeds from
1200 bps to 9600 bps can be selected. Besides Host link speed
differences the SOLC feature to 9600 bps allows a maximum
controller aggregate baud rate of 12,000· bps for the loops independent of the host link speed ... see "Communications Features."
For Binary Synchronous
8K0598.
programming depends upon the attached terminal configuration
and user environment ... see "Additional Storage Feature
(#1006)."
RPQ
Models 2A, 2B, 3A and 3B-contains approximately 24K bytes
of programmable storage. Four additional increments of 16K
bytes of programmable storage (for a total of 88K) are available.
The amount of programmable storage available for application
Modems: External modems operating at up to 4800 bps may be
attached when used with SOLC Feature #6301 or #6302.
Speeds up to 9600 bps may be achieved with SOLC Feature
#4501 or #4502.
Modem Speed (bps)
Facility
3872
3874
3875
Non-switched
Non-switched
Non-switched
Non-switched
Non-switched
*
*
2400
4800
7200
9600
9600
voice grade lines
voice grade lines
voice grade lines
voice grade lines
digital data svc.
* No I BM Modem available.
Prerequisite: Communications with a S/370 with virtual storage
capability via a 3704 or 3705 Communications Controller equipped with appropriate features.
Bibliography: GC20-0370 IBM 5/370 Bibliography and GC27-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--=---=
- ------
.- -=
M3601.2
----~
- - -
!,-
General Systems Division-Machines
April 78
-~-.-
0001 IBM 3600 Finance Communication System, System
Summary.
Specify:
(4) If ordering a 3614 with 1st position designator (see Host
Attachment Designation under "Specify~' for the 3614) to be
added to any existing 3601. an MES order transaction should
be used against the initial 3601 (specify code #9491 with
#9494) requesting to delete #9494 and add #9455 for the
. initial 3601.
Refer to 677-28 for further explanation of these specify
codes and their use when (1) ordering a loop-attached 3614
in a network where no 3614s are previously attached. and (2)
field installation of feature #9001 on a loop-attached system.
(1) Voltage (115V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz). #9880 for locking plug,
or #9881 for non-lock plug. Field Installation: Not recommended.
(2) Controller Designation: Media distribution of Controller Data.
Specify #9491 to identify the initial 3601 ordered for use with
a host system location, or specify #9492 to identify additionat
3601 s per host system.
Note:
customers using the 3600 program preparation
service may chose not to receive the controller data separately. In this case, #9492 should also be specified for the initial
3601.
If all installecf or on order 3614s for loop attachment to the
3601 are removed or cancelled, an
order transaction should be used against the initial 3601 (specify code
#9491 with #9495) to delete #9495 and add #9494.
Model Changes: Model 2A can be changed to Model 2B, 3A or
3B. Model 2B to Model 3B. Model 3A to Model 3B. Field
Installation: Yes ... Model 2A to 2B, 2A to 3B, or 3A to 3B requires replacement of the diskette storage device. Adequate
provision must be made for retaining data contained on the
diskette by having the user remove it prior to the start of any
conversion.
Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgment
letters for purchase
must state: "Installation of this model
change involves removal of parts which become the property of
IBM."
Special Features
If #9491 is specified for the 3601, specify: #9494 if there is
no 3614 with a first position designator attached to any 3601
on the same host system, or #9495 if there is a 3614 with a
first position designator and #9001 attached to any 3601 on
the same host system. See 3614 Host Attachment Designation under "Specify" for the 3614.
If #9491 is specified, select the specify number of the desired
media.
#9412
#9413
#9414
9/800 Magnetic Tape
9/1600 Magnetic Tape
9/6250 Magnetic Tape
If magnetic tape is not available on designated CPU, then
select one of the following media. [DOS/VS users only]
#9431
#9432
80-Column Cards
96-Column Cards
If card or tape inputs are not available at the host location,
contact your Industry Support Center for guidance.
When feature #9491 is specified, additional shipping information is required.
Supplement Spec
is to be entered exactly as
follows to indicate shipping address of the HOST SYSTEM
LOCATION.
Line 1 IBM PROGRAMMING SUPPORT REPRESENTATIVE
(PSR)
Line 2 C/O (Name of Customer)
Line 3 Street Address (or P.O. Box)
Line 4 City, State, Zip
This is the address to which controller data tapes will be
automatically shipped (1) after the first controller is ordered
and (2) whenever controller data is updated by an EC.
(3) Cables: See Accessories for ordering instructions. Also see
Installation Manual-Physical Planning,GA27-2766.
Additional Storage Feature (#1006). [Models 2A, 2B, 3A and
3B only] Provides an additional 16,384 bytes of control storage
for device arrangement or an additional 16,384 bytes of user
programmable storage. Specify: #9591 for Control Storage for
Device Attachment. Any combination of device types; 3603,
3604,3606,3608,3610,3611.3612,3614, and/or 3618 may
be attached. Some combinations of device types can be accommodated by the basic machine and some combinations will
require an optional 16,384 bytes of control storage provided by
the use of feature #1006. To determine if #1006 is required,
refer to the Device Attachment Table "C" below. Calculate the
sum of the attachment factors for the combination of devices or
function required. Add the attachment factor one time only for
each device type. If the attachment factor sum is 10 or less,
feature #1006 (Specify #9591) is not required. If the attachment
factor sum is greater than 10. feature #1006 (Specify #9591) is
required. An attachment factor greater than 22 is not allowed.
Device Attachment Table C
Device Type or Feature
Attachment
Factor
3603 or 3604
Mag. Strip Encoder-Reader (#4905/4906)
3606
3608
3610,3611 and/or 3612
0
0.7
3.0
5.8
2.6
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-- -----
-=
=---==
- - - _.------
M3601·3
General Systems Division-Machines
April 78
-~-
3614 [without controller data
encryption support]
3614 [with support for the Alternate
Encryption Technique (AET) only]
3614 [with support for the Data
Encryption Standard (DES) only]
3614 [with support for both DES and AET]
3618
SDLC to 9600 bps (#4501 or #4502)
Data Sequencing
Set Diskette
Storage Expansion
Instruction Enhancements
Priority Dispatching (LCHAP) only
Translate Instruction (LTRT) only
LCHAP and LTRT together
for operation at 1200 bps over non:"switched half-duplex or
duplex voice grade lines for communication to the CPU through
the 3704 or 3705 ... or to an appropriately featured S/3 Model 15
communication adapter- see 5415 RPQ S40156. Specify:
#9651 for 4-wire strapping, or #9652 for 2-wire strapping.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDlC
Communications Feature with Clocking (#4501 or #6301).
Limitation: Cannot be installed with EIA Interface (#3701).
1 .2
2.2
2.7
3.7
3.0
0.7
1.S
0.9
1.0
1.7
0.6
1.5
1.8
Communications Features: Each 3601 must b~ equipped with
one of the following SDLC features and either the EIA Interface
(#3701) or the 1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5500) for communication with the host processor.
Note: Any 3610, 3611 and 3612 combination constitutes one
device type. The Magnetic Stripe Reader (#4901 or #4902) need
not be considered in computing the attachment factor. If both a
3606 and 3608 are used, do not include the 3606 attachment
factor.
Note: A single 3614 may have either DES or AET, but not both.
Note:
A description of non-"Specify." non-"Feature,"
non-"Machine" Attachment Factor functions is given later in
this section.
Maximum: For #1006 with #9591
Installation: Yes.
specified-One.
Field
Specify: #9592 for User Programmable Storage. Additional
Storage Feature (#1006) provides additional 16,384 bytes of
user programmable storage. Maximum: For #1006 with #9592
specified and without #6501-Two. For #1006 with #9592
specified and with #6501-Four. Prerequisite: If more than
two Additional Storage Features (#1006 with specify #9592) are
ordered the Storage Expansion Feature (#6501) is required.
Field Installation: Yes.
EIA Interface (#3701): Provides the appropriate cables and
interface logic necessary to attach an external I BM modem for
communications to the System/3 or host processor through the
3704/3705 or for local attachment to the System/3 or
3704/3705 without requiring modems. Non-IBM modems may
be attached to subject to the multiple Suppliers System Policy.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC
CommL!nications Feature with Clocking (#6301 or #4501) or
SDLC Communications Feature without Clocking (#6302 or
#4502). Limitation: Cannot be installed with a 1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5500).
Loop Feature, Additional (#4735): Provides the ability to attach
additional 3600 Finance Communication System terminals.
Maximum: Two per models 2A and 2B. Five per models 3A
and 3B. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: For each loop
with any remotely attached terminals. 1200 bps Loop Integrated
Modem (#8001 or #8002) on a terminal or a 3603 is required.
Limitation: A maximum of two loops (including the provided
local loop) operating at~ 480() bps, per 3601 are aliowedVllhen
one of the SDLC communication features (#4501 or #4502) are
specified. Loop Integrated Modem (#8001) cannot be installed
on models 2A and 2B. Note: The sum of speeds of all loops in
bits per second (bps) plus the speed of the SOLC link (#6301 or
#6302) in bps cannot exceed 12,000 bps. When SDLC feature
(#4501 or #4502) is installed, the sum of all loops cannot exceed
12,000 bps (do not use the host link speed).
.
1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5500): An integrated modem
SOLC Communications Feature with Business Machines
Clocking (#4501): [Model 3A or 3B only] Required for attachment to communication lines through the 1200 bps Integrated
Modem (#5500) or any external modem which does not have
internal clocking. The SDLC link speed of this feature need not
be included when calculating the sum of loop speeds nqt to
exceed the controller aggregate baud rate of 12,000 bps.
'Maximum: One. Limitations: Cannot be installed with #6301,
6302 or 4502. Field Installation: Yes.
SOLC Communications Feature without Business Machine
Clocking (#4502): [Model 3A or 3B only] Required for attachment to communication lines through an external modem which
does not have internal clocking at speeds up to 9600 bps. The
SDLC link speed of this feature need not be included when
calculating the sum of the loop speeds not to exceed the controller aggregate baud rate of 12,000 bps. Maximum: One.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with #6301, 6302 or 4501.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: EIA Interface (#3701).
SOLC Communications Feature with Business Machine
Clocking (#6301): Required for attachment to communication
lines thrOl-!gh the 1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5500) or any
external modem which does not have internal clocking, or for
local attachment to the 3704/3705.
Maximum: One.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with #6302, 4501 or 4502.
Field Installation: Yes.
SOLC Communications Feature without Business Machine
Clocking (#6302): Required for attachment to communications
lines through an external modem which does have internal clocking at speeds up to 4800 bps. Maximum: One. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with #6301, 4501 or 4502. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: EIA Interface (#3701).
Storage Expansion Feature (#6501): [Models 2A, 2B, 3A and
3B only] Provides capability of expanding user programmable
storage beyond 56K bytes. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: This feature (#6501) is required when more
than two Additional Storage Features (#1006 with specify
#9592) are ordered.
1200 bps Loop Integrated Modem (#8001): [Model 3A or 3B
only] An integrated modem for transmission to remotely located
3600 Finance Communication System terminals. Operates at
1200 bps over non-switched normal quality voice grade lines.
Note: Several remote loop configuration variations can be realized; e.g., see the IBM 3600 FCS Configurator, GA27-2762. However, regardless of configuration, the interconnecting common
carrier facilities are always point-to-point circuits; either 2-wire
half-duplex or 4-wire duplex. The common carrier does not tariff
3600 "remote loops." The customer should be referred to the
configurator or information in the M 2700 pages for definition of
the tariffed elements of the remote loop. Maximum: One per
Additiona! Loop Feature (#4735). Field Installation: Yes.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
__
-=
-- --........
J._~
....
M3601.4
- - - ---------
~--= General Systems Division-Machines
April 78
-~-.-
Prerequisite: Additional Loop Feature (#4735). Each remote
location must have either a 3604 Keyboard Display Model 2, 3 or
4 equipped with a 1200 bps Loop Integrated Modem (#8001 or
#8002), a 3614 Consumer Transaction Facility with a 1200 bps
Loop Integrated Modem (#8001) or a 3603 as the first attached
remote unit in each physical (geographic) location.
Accessories: See accessories at the end of this Machine Type.
Attachment Factor Functions
Data Sequencing: Allows user applications to sequence, in
storage, a block of data items or to collate, in storage, data
items from two separate blocks into a third block, according to a
parameter list.
Set Diskette: Allows user applications to reset the temporary
files, to specify the type of start-up (i.e., warm or cold) to be
performed on the next load, and/or to initiate a load of the
controller.
Instruction Enhancements: Provides the user application with
the following new instructions:
Bit Manipulating-Test and Branch (LiFON, LlFOFF): provide
a test, set and branch function in a single instruction. This
reduces the 3600 AP processing and memory requirements
when processing single bits.
Logical Compare Data Immediate (CCDI) Compares immediate data to data in a specified field.
Move Data Immediate (MVDI) Moves immediate data to a
specified field.
Load Data Immediate (LDDI) Loads immediate data into
specified register.
SCALE formats an input string of characters into a conveniently processable numerical format. When used in processing monetary input, functions such as the removal of the
monetary symbol, commas, and periods from the input data
are automatically done. In the event that cents were not in
the input data, zero padding is optionally provided. SCALE
should significantly reduce the number of instructions required to process monetary input.
Segment Indexing (SETX, TESTX, SETXREG) Provides an
alternate method of referencing data within a segment: Only
fixed operands of 3600 instruction may be indexed. This
function can be used to reduce the number df SETFPL instructions executed by the AP, thereby enhancing performance and reducing AP size. This function also provides a
pseudo DSECT facility, thereby enabling an AP to more readily reference (1) variably displaced data within segments
and/ or (2) data beyond 4K bytes from the beginning of a
segment.
Branch on Index (BRANX) Provides an index increment,
compare and branch function in a single instruction. This
instruction is used to control the number of times a series of
AP instructions will be executed. Since the instruction algebraically increments a register, BRANX can be used in conjunction with the Segment Indexing facility to simplify the
processing of tables.
Execute (LEXEC) Provides a function similar to the ,S/370
EXECUTE instruction. The amount of data logically OR'ed
into the target instruction may be 2, 4, or 6 bytes.
Priority Dispatching Provides the ability to specify the order
in which 3601/3602 workstations are dispatched. This function consists of the LCHAP instruction which activates or
deactivates the dispatching priority specified in the table(s)
generated by the PRIDSP macro.
Translate The LTRT instruction processes an input data
stream against user specifiable translate table(s) to generate
a translated output data stream. The LTRTBEG, LTRTENT
and LTRTGEN instructions assist the user application programmer in specifying the translate table(s).
3600 ACCESSORIES
CABLES (3600)
Cables to attach 3600 units may be purchased from IBM or a customer-selected source ... see Physical Planning Manual GA27-2766 for
cable and connector specifications. The customer is responsible for installation and maintenance of these cables. Assembled cables
may be purchased from IBM at the prices shown below.
Item No.
Description
Maximum Length
ASSM 1563155
ASSM 1741656
Loop Cable Assembly
Cable Assy
(joining 2 telephone lines)
Cable Assy
(3603 to Loop Terminal Box)
Cable Assy (Loop Repeater
to Loop Terminal Box)
Cable Assy (DDA to 3603)
Cable Assy (3603 to Leased Lines)
Bulk Cable (2 Conducter)
Bulk Cable (4 Conducter)
Strain Relief
Connector Assembly (3603)
Male Plug
Female Plug
Mini-Ty (used with 1745363)
609.6m(2000')
ASSM 1745348
ASSM 1745372
ASSM 1745349
ASSM 1745350
BULK 5252769
BULK 5252913
PART 1561344
PART 1745363
PART 5252765
PART 5252766
PART 5420242
N/A
7.62m(25')
7.62m(25')
7.62m(25')
7.62m(25')
N/A
N/A
LOCKS AND KEYS
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----- -....-.. _
- ---- General Systems Division-Machines
--
~~--
M3601.5
April 78
3601: The 3601 is shipped with two keys. Additional keys may be purchased from IBM.
3610,3612: The 3610 mdl 2 and 3612 mdl 2 with the Journal Takeup with Locked Cover (#4651) special feature are shipped with two
keys. Additional keys may be purchased from IBM.
3610 mdl.4: The 3610 mdl 4 is shipped with two keys. Additional keys may be purchased from IBM.
FORMS STAND
Permits placement of continuous forms (out of carton) on stand above floor level and provides for stacking after printing. This
accessory is a two"shelf forms stand.
Permits feeding of continuous forms from the carton and provides for forms stacking after printing. This accessory is a one-shelf forms
stand.
For 3610, 3612, 3618 #4450
LOOP REPEATER (PIN 440002) (3600 System)
Plugs into the Loop cable and red rives all signals being transmitted in a 3600 Finance Communication System. Each Loop Repeater
contains Loop redriving capabilities which allow for the extension of the Loop cable length by 2000 feet. Loop Repeaters may be
employed on a Loop to extend its overall length to a maximum of 20,000 cable-feet. The unit can be physically mounted on a wall in an
out-of-the-way iocation.
Prerequisite: An operating 3600 System Local Loop or Remote Subloop.
Bibliography: GC22-0005
Customer Responsibilities: The customer may be advised that: (1) The customer is responsible for making certain that the use of the
equipment complies with all Federal, State, and Local Laws, Regulations, and Ordinances ... (2) The customer is responsible for price
quotations, installation and cost (initial and recurring) of common carrier equipment and service ... (3) The customer is responsible for
the set-up of the unit ... (4) The customer will determine the failing unit (see "Maintenance" below) ... (5) the customer is responsible
for aetermining the required number of spares.
Physical------Planning and Set-up: Physical planning and set-up is the responsibility of the customer. Attachment to the Loop cable is
provided by ordering External Signal Cable Assembly (IBM PIN 174372), or equivalent ... see IBM 3600 Finance Communication
System Installation Manual-Physical Planning GA27-2766.
Spares: The customer may wish to replace a failing unit with a spare and must be advised to purchase sufficient spare units for such
use. The number of spare units recommended is dependent upon the number of units the customer has installed, application
requirements, physical locations and layouts. However, the minimum number of spare units recommended is shown in the following
table:
Number of
Loop Repeaters
Installed
100
200
300
500
1000
1500
2000
Number of
Minimum NumberLoop Repeaters
Spares Recommendedlnstalled
2
2
3
4
6
9
10
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
Minimum Number
Spares Recommended
12
14
16
18
19
21
Warranty: Service is available at the designated
Center during the 90 day warranty period, which commences 30 days
following date of shipment from the plant of manufacture (Raleigh). It ~hall be the customer's responsibility to set up the equipment. It
shall be the customer's responsibility to determine the failing unit and remove it from the Loop, and if the unit is still under warranty, to
pack it in the designated shipping container and ship it prepaid to the designated
Center. IBM will return the serviced unit,
shipping charges prepaid. There is no regularly scheduled preventative maintenance recommended by IBM on these units.
Maintenance agreements are not available.
Machine Part No.
Loop Repeater
Loop Repeater
3601
3602
4400002
4400002
Miscellaneous
Accessories for 3600 System equipment may be purchased from IBM or a customer selected source.
Not to be reproduced without written permisSion.
--= ----=-~ General Systems Division-Machines
-------
- -=
-~-.-
Part Number Description
3603
111262
1176668
Fuse (.4 Slow Blow)
Fuse (1.5A Flow Blow)
3604 Keytop Labels
Mdls 1, 2, 3, 4
1561332
1562333
1561341
1561342
Blank Base for Customization
Clear Protective Overlay
Preprinted (Group 1)
Preprinted (Group 2)
3604 Overlays
Models 5, 6
4942506
4942515
4943749
White Background 45 Key
Blue Insert 15 Key
Clear Protective Cover 45 Key
3606/3608
1652103
1702817
1702847
1702848
1702849
1702904
Fuse Holder Assembly
Display Filter - Standard
Keyboard Overlay - Standard
Keyboard Overlay - Blank except for Numerics
Keyboard Overlay - Protective Cover
Display Filter - Blank Red
3603
1745353
5929886
Jumper Assembly (Signal Attenuation)
Wall Plate Assembly
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M3601.6
April 78
------ -=---=
- - General Systems Division-Machines
- - -----.. -
M3602.1
- -= _
3602 FINANCE COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER
Purpose: A programmable controller for attachment of 3600
Finance Communication System Terminals to S/370 and S/3
Model 15 processors.
Attachment to S/370 is via a 3704/3705 Communications
Controller using SDLC transmission over various common carrier
or user-owned facilities.
Attachment to S/3 Model 15 is via Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC)- see 3601/3602 RPQ 8K0598 and 5415 RPQ
S40156.
Model1A: A large-file programmable controller with a 5.2 meg
disk, a drive which accommodates one or twosided removable diskettes, 16K increments of storage, and a maximum loop capacity of eight of
which seven can be remote.
Model 1 B: A large-file programmable controller with a 9.3 meg
disk, a drive which accommodates one or twosided removable diskettes, 16K increments of storage, and a maximum loop capability of eight, of
which seven can be remote.
-Highlights: Controls all the functions of 3600 Finance Communication System terminals. Controls data transmission between
those terminals and the central processing site. Four SDLC
Communication features are available one of which is required
for transmission to the Host. An SDLC Communications feature
·at sp6eds from 1200 bps to 4800 bps or an SDLC Communications feature at speeds from 1200 bps to 9600 bps can be selected. Besides Host link speed differences the SDLC feature to
9600 bps allows a maximum controller aggregate baud rate of
12,000 bps for the loops independent of the Host link
speed ... see "Communications Features." For Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC) see RPQ 8K0598.
Contains approximately 24K bytes of programmable storage. Six
more increments of 16K bytes of programmable storage (for a
total of 120K) are available. The amount of programmable storage available for application programming depends upon the
attached terminal configuration and user environment ... see
Additional Storage Feature (#1006).
April 78
multiple 3601/36025 attached to the line ... one 3602 transmitting while the other receives.
For attachment to S/3 Model 15 see 3601/3602 RPQ 8K0598
and 5415 RPQ S40156.
Can be programmed to operate independently when the CPU is
unavailable. Capable of controlling all terminal functions, executing arithmetic, and capturing data from the terminals for later
transmission to the CPU.
Transmission: The 3602 operates over common carrierprovided or equivalent customer-owned communications facilities. For information concerning these facilities, see the M 27.00
pages.
Modems: E.xternal modems operating at up to 4800 bps may be
attached when used with SDLC Feature #6301 or #6302.
Speeds up to 9600 bps may be achieved with SDLC Feature
(#4501 or 4502).
Modem
3872
3874
3875
*
*
Speed (bps)
2400
4800
7200
9600
9600
Facility
Non-switched
Non-switched
Non-switched
Non-switched
Non-switched
voice
voice
voice
voice
voice
grade
grade
grade
grade
grade
lines
lines
lines
lines
lines
* No standard I BM Modem available.
Prerequisite: Communications with a S/370 with virtual storage
capability via a 3704 or 3705 Communications Controller equipped with appropriate features. For BSC communication with a
5/3 Model 15 ... see 3601/3602 RPQ 8K0598 and 5415· RPQ
540156.
Bibliography: GC20-0370 for S/370, and GC27-0001 for IBM
3600 Finance Communication System, System Summary.
Specify:
Houses a direct access diskette drive with two-sided removable
diskette which provides permanent storage for control and user
programs, plus temporary and permanent storage for user data
(sequential logging, random retrieval of data records, etc.).
Houses a disk storage device for storage of user data. This
storage device is not removable except by service personnel.
Includes a fixed head feature which will provide 8 additional
heads with access to disk data on 8 tracks ... see Additional Disk
Heads Feature (1010, 1011).
All 3600 System terminals are attached by loops which operate
at speeds of 1200, 2400 or 4800 bps for locally attached terminals and at 1200 bps for remotely attached terminals. The base
unit provides one loop. Seven additional loops are available.
Integrated modems are available on both models ... see "Special
Features." Note: Only one 4800 bps loop per 3602 may be
specified for System/3 Host attachment.
Communication between the controller and the 3704/3705 may
be either through an integrated 1200 bps modem through an
external modem with EIA Interface (#3701), or via the local
attachment feature of the 3704/3705. See "Modems" and
"Special Features" below. Each 3602 operates in half-duplex
mode. Duplex communication line operations are possible with
(1) Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): Locking Plug-#9880 for
115V, #9884 for 208V, #9886 for 230V. Non-lock
Plug-#9881 for 115V, #9885 for 208 V, #9887 for 230V.
Field Installation: Not recommended.
(2) Controller Designation: Media distribution of Controller Data,
Specify #9491 to identify the initial 3602 ordered for use with
a host system location, or specify #9492 to identify additional
3602s per host system.
If #9491 is specified for the 3602, specify: #9494 if there is
no 3614 with a first position designator attached to any 3602
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
-- -
--- General Systems Division-Machines
=
= - ---=--==
----
M3602.2
April 78
-~-.-
on the same host system, or #9495 if there is a 3614 with a
first position designator and #9001 attached to any 3602 on
the same host system. See 3614 Host Attachment Designation under "Specify" for the 3614.
Special Features
If #9491 is specified, select the specify number of the desired
media.
#9412
#9413
#9414
9/800 Magnetic Tape
9/1600 Magnetic Tape
9/6250 Magnetic Tape
If magnetic tape is not available on designated CPU, then
select one of the following media. [DOS/VS users only]
#9431
#9432
80-Column Cards
96-Column Cards
Additional Storage Feature (#1006): Provides an additional
16,384 bytes of control storage for device attachment or an
additional 16,384 bytes of programmable storage. Specify:
#9591 for Control Storage for Device Attachment. Any combination of device types; 3603, 3604, 3606, 3608, 3610, 3611,
3612, 3614 and/or 3618 may be attached. Some combinations
of device types can be accommodated by the basic machine and
some combinations will require an optional 16,384 bytes of
control storage provided by the use of feature #1006. To determine if #1006 is required, refer to the Device Attachment Table
below. Calculate the sum of the attachment factors for the
combination of devices or function required. Add the attachment factor one time only for each device type. If the attachment factor sum is 10 or less, feature #1006 (Specify #9591) is
not required. If the attachment factor sum is greater than 10,
feature #1006 (Specify #9591) is required. An attachmen1.1actor
greater than 22 is not allowed.
v
Device Attachment Table
Device Type or Feature
Refer to letter 677-28 for further information of these specify
codes and their use when (1) ordering a loop attached 3614 in a
network where no 3614's are previously attached, and (2) field
installation of feature #9001 on a loop attached 3614.
Model Changes: Model 1A can be changed to Model 1 B. This
upgrade requires replacement of the disk storage (not diskette)
device. Adequate provision must be made for retaining data
contained on disk storage and elimination of user proprietary
information. Limitation: Field installation of the additional disk
heads for Model 1 B (#1011) concurrently with a model change
from Model 1A to Model 1 B requires the submission of an RPQ.
Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgment
letters for purchase MESs must state: "Installation of this model
change involves removal of parts which become the property of
IBM."
3603 or 3604
Mag. Strip Encoder-Reader (#4905/4906)
3606
3608
3610,3611 and/or 3612
3614 [without controller data
support]
3614 [with support for the 3614 Alternate
Encryption Technique (AET) only]
3614 [with support for the Data
Encryption Standard (DES) only]
3614 [with support for both DES and AET]
3618
SDLC to 9600 bps
Disk File (5.2 or 9.3 meg)
Data Sequencing
Set Diskette
Storage Expansion
Instruction Enhancement Package
Priority Dispatching (LCHAP) only
Translate Instruction (LTRT) only
LCHAP and LTRT together
Attachment
Factor
0.0
0.7
3.0
5.8
2.6
1 .2
2.2
2.7
3.7
3.0
0.7
10.0
1.6
0.9
1.0
1.7
0.6
1.5
1 .8
Note: A single 3614 may have either DES or AET, but not both.
Note: Any 3610, 3611 and 3612 combination constitutes one
device type. The Magnetic Stripe Reader (#4901) need not be
considered in computing the attachment factor. If both a 3606
and 3608 are used, do not include the 3606 attachment factor.
Note:
A description of non-"Specify." non-"Feature,"
non-"Machine" Attachment Factor functions is given later in
this section.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- - ---
-- -=- =---=
-~-
M3602.3
General Systems Division-Machines
Maximum: For #1006 with #9591
Installation: Yes.
specified-One.
Field
Specify: #9592 for User Programmable Storage. Additional
Storage Feature (#1006) provides an additional 16,384 bytes of
user programmable storage. Maximum: For #1006 with #9592
speCified and without #6501-two. For #1006 with #9592
specified and with #6501-Six. Prerequisite: If more than two
Additional Storage Features (#1006 with specify #9592) are
ordered the Storage Expansion Feature (#6501) is required.
Field Installation: Yes.
Additional Disk Heads (#1010, 1011): [#1010 for Model
1A. .. #1 011 for Model 1 BJ Provides additional disk heads (8) for
the disk file as specified by model type selected. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Not recommended.
EIA Interface (#3701): Provides the appropriate cables and
interface logic necessary to attach an external I BM modem for
communications to the System/3 or host processor through the
3704/3705 or for local attachment to the System/3 or
3704/3705 without requiring modems. Non-IBM modems may
be attached subject to the Multiple Suppliers System Policy.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC
Communications Feature with Clocking (#6301 or #4501) or
SDLC Communications Feature without Clocking (#6302 or
#4502). Limitation: Cannot be installed with a 1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5500).
Loop .. Feature, Add'i (#4735): Provides the ability to attach
additrdnal 3600 Finance Communication System terminals.
Maximum: Seven. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: For
each loop with any remotely attached terminals, a 1200 bps
Loop Integrated Modem (#8001 or #8002) or a 3603 is required.
Limitation: Only one loop (including the provided local loop)
operating at 4800 bps, per 3602 is allowed unless SDLC Features (#4501 or #4502) are used.
Note: The sum of the speeds of all loops in bits per second (bps)
plus the speed of the SDLC link (#6301 or #6302) in bps cannot
exceed 12,000 bps. When SDLC Feature (#4501 or #4502) is
installed only the sum of the loops cannot exceed 12,000 bps.
1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5500): An integrated modem
for operation at 1200 bps over non-switched half-duplex or
duplex voice grade lines for communication to the CPU through
the 3704 or 3705 ... or to an appropriately featured 5/3 Model 15
communications adapter- see 5415 RPQ S40156. Maximum:
One. Field installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC Communications Feature with Clocking (#6301 or #4501). Limitation: Cannot be installed with EIA Interface (#3701).
Communications Features: Each 3602 must be equipped with
one of the following SOLe features and either the EIA Interface
(#3701) or the 1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5500) for communication with the host processor.
SDLC Communications Feature with Business Machine
Clocking (#4501): Required for attachment to communication
lines through the· 1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5500) or any
external modem which does riot have internal clocking. The
SDLC link speed of this feature need not be included when
calculating the sum of the loop speeds not to exceed the controller aggregate baud rate of 12,000 bps. Maximum: One.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with #6301, 6302 or 4502.
Field Installation: Yes.
SDLC Communications Feature without Business Machine
Clocking (#4502): Required for attachment to communication
April 78
lines through an external modem which does have internal clocking at speeds up to 9600 bps. The SDLC link speed of this
feature need not be included when calculating the sum of the
loop speeds not to exceed the controller aggr:egate baud rate of
12,000 bps. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with #6301, 6302 or 4501.
Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: EIA Interface (#370n
SDLC Communications Feature with Business Machine
Clocking (#6301): Required for attachment to communication
lines through the 1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5500) or any
external modem which does not have internal clocking, or for
local attachment to the 3704/3705.
Maximum: One.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with #6302, 4501 or 4502.
Field Installation: Yes.
SDLC Communications Feature without Business Machine
Clocking (#6302): Required for attachment to communication
lines through an external modem which does have internal clocking at speeds up to 4800 bps. Maximum: One. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with #6301, 4501 or 4502. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: EIA Interface (#3701).
Storage Expansion Feature (#6501): Provides capability of
expanding user programmable storage beyond 56K bytes.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. This feature (#6501)
is required when more than two additional Storage Features
(#1006 with specify #9592) are ordered.
1200 bps Loop Integrated Modem (#8001): An integrated
modem for transmission to remotely located 3600 Finance Communication System terminals. Operates at 1200 bps over nonswitched normal quality voice grade lines. Note: Several remote
loop configuration variations can be realized; e.g., see the IBM
3600 FCS Configura tor, GA27-2762. However, facilities are
always point-to-point circuits; either 2-wire half-duplex or 4-wire
duplex. The common carrier does not tariff 3600 "remote
loops." The customer should be referred to the configurator or
information in the M2700 pages for defiFlition of the tariffed
elements of the remote loop. Maximum: One per Additional
Loop Feature (#4735). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Additional Loop Feature (#4735). Each remote location must
have either a 3604 Keyboard Display Model 2, 3 or 4 equipped
with a 1200 bps Loop Integrated Modem (#8001 or #8002). a
3614 Consumer Transaction Facility with a 1200 bps Loop Integrated Modem (#8001). or a 3603 as the first attached remote
unit in each physical (geographic) location.
Accessories: See Accessories at end of Machine Type 3601.
Attachment Factor Functions
Data Sequencing: Allows user applications to sequence, in
storage, a block of data items or to collate, in storage, data
items from two separate blocks into a third block, according to a
lJarameter list.
Set Diskette: Allows user applications to reset the temporary
files, to specify the type of start-up (i.e., warm or cold) to be
performed on the next load, and/or to initiate a load of the
controller.
Instruction Enhancements: Provides the user application with
the following new instructions:
Bit Manipulating-Test and Branch (LiFON, LlFOFF): Provide
a test, set and branch function in a single instruction. This
reduces the 3600 AP processing and memory requirements
when processing single bits.
Logical Compare Data Immediate (CCDI): Compares immediate data to data in a specified field.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----...= - -- - General Systems Division-Machines
=---=
- - ---
-=
----~
-~-.-
Move Data Immediate (MVDI): Moves immediate data to a
specified field.
Load Data Immediate (LDDI): Loads immediate data into
specified register.
SCALE Formats an input string of characters into a conveniently processable numerical format. When used in processing monetary input, functions such as the removal of the
monetary symbol, commas, and periods from the input data
are automatically done. In the event that cents were not in
the input data, zero padding is optionally provided. SCALE
should significantly reduce the number of instructions required to process monetary input.
Segment Indexing (SETX, TESTX, SETXREG): Provides an
alternate method of referencing data within a segment. Only
fixed operands of 3600 instruction may be indexed. This
function can be used to reduce the number of SETFPL instructions executed by the AP, thereby enhancing performance and reducing AP size. This function also provides a
pseudo DSECT facility, thereby enabling an AP to more readily reference (1) variably displaced data within segments
and/or (2) data beyond 4K bytes from the beginning of a
segment.
Branch on Index (BRANX): Provides an index increment,
compare and branch function in a single instruction. This
instruction is used to control the number of times a series of
AP instructions will be executed. Since the instruction algebraically increments a register, BRANX can be used in conjunction with the Segment Indexing facility to simplify the
processing of tables.
Execute (LEXEC): Provides a function similar to the S/370
EXECUTE instruction. The amount of data logically OR'ed
into the target instruction may be 2, 4, or 6 bytes.
Priority Dispatching: Provides the ability to specify the order
in which 3601/3602 workstations are dispatched. This function consists of the LCHAP instruction which activates or
deactivates the dispatching priority specified in the table(s)
generated by the PRIDSP macro.
Translate: The LTRT instruction processes an input data
stream against user specifiable translate table(s) to generate
a translated output data stream. The LTRTBEG, LTRTENT
and LTRTGEN instructions assist the user application programmer in specifying the translate table(s).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M3602.4
April 78
-- --------= ~~
--=-----
M3603.1
April 78
General Systems Division-Machines
-~-.-
Terminal-Terminal Installation Guide GA27-2796, should be
3603 TERMINAL ATTACHMENT UNIT
Purpose: Attaches all 3600 System Controllers and terminals to
the comm~nication facilities. The 3603 enables remote subloop.
operation by connecting the controller loop feature to the communication facilities which connect to a remote 3603 with the
subloop ofterminals.
Model 1 Provides 1200 bps integrated circuitry for attachment to communication facilities and has
switched network backup capability for use if
the non-switched communication line fails.
Model 2 Provides an EIA RS2.32C interface to an external
asynchronous modem (1200,2400 bps).
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Highlights: Can be physically installed on a wall ... has self test
facilities to establish valid operation of the 3603 on a local loop
exclusive of the non-switched network.
PREREQUISITES:
The 3603 mdl 2 with Clocking (#6352) requires a synchronous
modem that accepts transmit signal element timing from the
3600 System equipment.
A 3601 or 3602 with an Additional Loop Feature (#4735) is
required for each remote loop that is attached with a 3603.
As an alternate to a 3603, a 1200 BPS Loop Integrated Modem
(#8001,) in the 3601 or 3602 may be used. (#8001) in the 3601
or 3602 may be used.
Note: The loop is unidirectional. Therefore, if there is only one
3603 attached, there must be a four-wire duplex communication
channel interconnecting the 3601/3602 and the 3603. If there is
more than one 3603 location attached to a single loop, there
must be a two-wire line linking all the 3603s in the loop, plus a
two-wire line from the 3601/3602 to the first 3603 and from the
last 3603 to the 3601/3602. The 3603 attaches to normal quality voice grade lines. When using a 3603 on a loop it is recommended that a 3603 be used at the 3601/3602 to maximize
backup capabilities.
Bibliography: IBM Financial Services Terminals: Complementing
the IBM 3600 Finance Communication System, GC27-0002.
Customer Responsibilities: The customer must be advised
that: [1] He is responsible to make certain that the use of the
equipment complies with all Federal, State, and Local Laws,
Regulations, and Ordinances ... [2] He is responsible for price
quotations, installation and cost (initial and recurring) of common carrier equipment and service ... [3] He is responsible for set
up of the unit ... [4] The customer will determine the failing unit
(see "Maintenance" below) ... [5] He is responsible to determine
required spares ... [6] Purchaser agrees that IBM is reliaved of
responsibility for all claims including, but not limited to, loss of
funds contained in, dispensed by or associated with the 3603.
The customer is also responsible for the provision of a telephone
local loop conditioned for data above 300 bps, and for a CDT
Data Access Arrangement in order to use the Switched Network
Backup Function. A cable is available from IBM for a fee, for the
DAA attachment. A similar cable is available, also for a fee, to
connect the 3603 to the non-switched line connector. Installation of the cable i.s also a customer responsibility.
The IBM 3600 Finance Communication System Installation
Manual-Physical Planning GA27-2766, and the IBM 3600
Finance
Communication
System
Financial
Services
ordered for each customer installation.
Spares: The customer may wish to replace a failing 3603 with a
spare and must be advised to purchase sufficient spare unit for
such use. The number: of spare units recommended is dependent upon the number of units the customer has installed, his
applications requirements, physical locations, and layouts. However, the minimum number of spare units recommended is
shown in the following table:
Number of 3603s installed
Minimum Number of
Spares Recommended
100
200
300
500
1000
1500
2000
'2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
Modell
23
34
46
68
1014
1419
1724
2028
2333
2738
3042
3347
3651
Model 2
Maintenance: Maintenance of the 3603 will normally be ata
designated IBM Repair Center. All maintenance, parts replacement, adjustments, and repair shall normally be performed at the
designated IBM Repair Center. It shall be the customer's responsibility to set up the equipment and to determine when
remedial maintenance is required. When remedial maintenance
is required, it shall be the customer's responsibility to determine
the failing unit, pack the unit in the designated shipping container and ship it prepaid to the designated IBM Repair Center. IBM
will pay the transportation charges for return of the repaired
unit. There is no regularly scheduled preventive maintenance
recommended by IBM on these units.
The repair service is available under an IBM Repair Center Maintenance Supplement to the IBM Maintenance Agreement or on a
time and material basis.
Customers with machines not under an IBM Maintenance
Agreement have the option to ship the machines to the designated IBM Repair Center for repair under the IBM Machine
Repair Authorization Form, G 120-2165, in which case repair will
be made (if the machine is repairable). Alternatively, upon request, IBM will provide, for a minimum charge, an estimate of
repair charges. This charge covers handling, inspection, cleaning, adjustments, testing, and estimating of repair charges.
IBM Repair Center Service: The 3603 is eligible for maintenance coverage immediately following expiration of the service
and parts warranty at the monthly charge shown under MMMC
in Price List.
If maintenance coverage is not contracted for immediately following expiration of any service and parts warranty and the
customer now wants maintenance coverage, he may ship the
machine(s) to the designated IBM Repair Center for an inspection.
If, ,on the basis of an inspection, the repair center concludes that
a machine is not repairable, no further work will be performed
and the machine will be returned to the customer without
charge.
NoUo be reproduced without written permission.
-----
-- -=- --=---=
-~-
..
-
M3603.2
General Systems Division-Machines
In all other cases, a minimum charge per machine to cover handling, inspection, cleaning, adjustments, and testing will be
applied. In addition, all parts needed will be billed at IBM's
prevailing parts prices and the additional time required for repairs will be billed at I BM's applicable service rates. The machine will then be eligible for maintenance coverage.
Central Facility Maintenance: I BM will accept requests for
special contracts for central facility maintenance (see General
Information; section 9). Under this offering, service will be
performed at a repair facility located on customer premises. The
customer will continue to be required to determine the failing
unit and to transport it to and from the facility.
SPECIAL FEATURES
CLOCKING (#6352). (Model 2 only) Provides Transmit Signal
Element Timing to synchronous modems (1200, 2400 bps).
Field Installation: Not recommended.
$PECIFY:
(1) Voltage (115 V AC,1-phase, 60 Hz): #9901.
(2) Cables: See Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA272766. Also see Accessories at the end of Machine Type
3601.
Accessories: See Accessories at the end of Machine Type
3601.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
April 78
-.--= ----=---=
-- General Systems Division-Machines
-------
-=
3604 KEYBOARD DISPLAY Model 1
Purpose: A combination keyboard and gas-panel terminal for
input and output in interactive banking applications.
The 3604 Model 1 displays 240 characters-six rows of 40
characters. May have numeric and function keys.
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Highlights: The 3604 displays up to 153 different characters
under programmed control of a 3601 or 3602 Finance Communication Controller.
Has a variety of keyboards to meet input requirements ... see
"Special Features."
Can be equipped to read a magnetic stripe on either a plastic
card or a passbook and/or encode a magnetic stripe on a passbook.
May be either locally or remotely attached to the 3601 or 3602.
Prerequisites:
(1) An available positi9[1 on a local or remote loop of a 3601 or
3602. If located remotely from the 3601 or 3602, the remote
location must have either a 3603 Terminal Attachment Unit, a
3614 Consumer Transaction Facility equipped with a Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) and an appropriate modem, or a
3604 Model 2, 3 or 4 equipped with a Line Feature Base
(#4751 or #4752) and appropriate modem. If both a 3614
and 3604 Model 2, 3 or 4 are installed in the same remote
location, it is recommended that the loop modem be located
with 3614 since the 3614 will often be operating when the
3604 Model 2, 3 or 4 is not.
(2) One keyboard type must be selected to complete the order... see "Keyboards" under "SpeCial Features."
Bibliography: GC20-0370.
Specify:
(1) Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9880 for locking plug,
or #9881 for non-lock plug. Field Installation: Not recommended.
M3604.1
April 78
Keyboards: All keyboards will have a combination of preengraved and non-engraved keytops. Each 3604 will be provided with 3 sets of self-adhesive keytop labels. One set will be
pre-printed with commonly-used function nomenclature and will
have a protective plastic coating applied. Also, set of blank
labels plus a set of clear plastic overlays for the blank labels will
be provided so that the user may create his own labels.
Each keyboard will have an engraVed numeric keyboard consisting of 15 keys arranged in three columns of five rows. The
bottom row of this section will be engraved as specified ... see
item [3] under "Specify." The next three rows will be engraved
with the digits 1 thru 9. The top row will contain three nonengraved function/transaction keys. All keyboards will also
contain at least one function/transaction keypad consisting on
non-engraved keys arranged in some number of columns which
are 5 keys high.
Numeric Keyboard (#4661): A three-column function/ transaction keypad to the right of an engraved numeric keypad. See
items [3] and [4] under "Specify." Maximum: One. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with Keyboard (#4663). Field Installation:
Not recommended.
Expanded Numeric Keyboard (#4663): Same as #4661 plus an
additional three-column function/transaction keypad to the left
of the engraved numeric keyboard. See items [3] and [4] under
"Specify." Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with Keyboard (#4661). Field Installation: Not recommended.
Magnetic Stripe Capability: The 3604 can be equipped with a
Magnetic Stripe Reader or a Magnetic Stripe Encoder/Reader
which mounts on top of the 3604. To use these features an
operator manually passes a magnetic striped plastic identification card or credit card (for reading), or a passbook with a magnetic stripe label attached (for reading or encoding), through .the
slot. The 3604 encoding is a unique format at 210 bits per inch.
Standard ABA encoding is at 75 bits per inch; therefore, credit
cards cannot be encoded to ABA specifications, and this must
be used as "read-only" documents. The 3604 is capable of
reading either the standard ABA format or the 3604 passbook
format.
(2) Cables: See Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA272766. Also see Accessories.
(3) Numeric Engraving: For bottom row of engraved numeric
keypad (from left to right)-#9481 for zero, double-zero,
triple-zero, #9482 for zero, double-zero, decimal point;. or
#9483 for zero, triple-zero, decimal point. See "Special Features." Field Installation: Not recommended.
(4) Function/Transaction
Key
Configuration:
For
the
Function/Transaction keyboard to the right of the engraved
numeric section-#9181 if all individual keys, or #9182 if 3
bottom keys in leftmost column are to be replaced by a single
raised "Motorbar" key. See "Special Features." Field
Installation: Not recommended.
Special Features
Magnetic Stripe Reader (#4901): Has read capability only.
Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Magnetic
Stripe Encoder Reader (#4905). Field Installation: Yes.
Magnetic Stripe Encoder-Reader (#4905): Has encode and
read capability. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Magnetic Stripe Reader (#4901). Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: Depending upon the configuration, the Additional Storage Feature (#1005 or #1006) may be required on the
3601 or 3602 ... see M3601 or M3602 pages.
Note: Effective July 1, 1977, orders for the 3604 Model 1 will be
accepted by I BM on a purchase only basis.
Accessories: See Accessories at the end of Machine Type
3601.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- -=--~ General Systems Division-Machines
- -----..
- -= -
M3604.2
April 78
-~-
3604 KEYBOARD DISPLAY Models 2. 3 and 4
Purpose: A combination k!3yboard and gas-panel display terminal, for input and output in interactive banking applications, with
a variety of screen sizes.
Model 2 Displays 240 characters-six rows of 40 characters.
May have alphanumeric, numeric and function keys.
May have an integrated modem.
Model 3 Displays 480 characters-12 rows of 40 characters.
May have numeric, alphanumeric and function keys.
May have an integrated modem.
Model 4 Displays 1024 characters-16 rows of 64 characters.
May have numeric, alphanumeric and function keys.
May have an integrated modem.
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Highlights: The 3604 displays up to 153 different characters
under programmed control of a 3601 or 3602 Finance Communication Controller.
Has a variety of keyboards to meet input requirements ... see
"Special Features."
Can be equipped to read a magnetic stripe on either a plastic
card or a passbook and/or encode a magnetic stripe on a passbook.
May be either locally or remotely attached to a 3601 or 3602.
Prerequisites:
(1) An available position on a local or remote loop of a 3601 or
3602. If located remotely form the 3601 or 3602, the remote
location must have either a 3603 Terminal Attachment Unit, a
3614 Consumer Transaction Facility equipped with a Terminal
Loop Feature (#7820) and an appropriate modem, or a 3604
Model 2, 3 or 4 equrpped with a Line Feature Base (#4751 or
#4752) and appropriate modem. If both a 3614 and a 3604
Model 2, 3 or 4 are installed in the same remote location, it is
recommended that the loop modem be located with the 3614
since the 3614 will often be operating when the 3604 Model 2, 3
or 4 is not.
(2) One keyboard type must be selected to complete the order... see "Keyboards" under "Special Features."
Bibliography: GC20-0370.
tures::. Field Installation: Not recommended.
Key
Configuration:
For
the
(4) Function/Transaction
Function/Transaction keyboard to the right of the engraved
numeric section-#9181 if all individual keys, or #9182 if 3
bottom keys in leftmost column are to be replaced by a single
raised "Motorbar" key. See "Special Features." Field
Installation: Not recommended. Note: Motorbar key is
available on Numeric' Keyboard (#4771), Expanded Numeric
Keyboard (#4773), or Expanded Alphanumeric Keyboard
(#4774). It is not available with Alphanumeric Keyboard
(#4772), therefore no Specify Feature if #4772 is selected.
tSpecial Features
Keyboards: All keyboards will have a combination of preengraved and non-engraved keytops. Each 3604 will be provided with 3 sets of self-adhesive keytop labels. One set will be
preprinted with commonly-used function nomenclature and will
have a protective plastic coating applied. Also, set a blank labels
will be provided so that the user may create his own labels.
Each keyboard will have an engraved nllijleric keypad consisting
of 15 keys arranged in three columns of"'five rows. The bottom
row of this section will be engraved as specified ... see item [3]
under "Specify." The next three rows will be engraved with the
digits 1 through 9. The top row will contain three non-engraved
function/transaction keys. All keyboards will also contain at
least one function/transaction keypad consisting on nonengraved keys arranged in some number of columns which are 5
keys high.
Numeric
Keyboard
(#4771):
A
three-column
function/transaction keypad to the right of an engraved numeric
keypad. See items [3] and [4] under "Specify." Maximum: One
on Model 2, 3 or 4. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Keyboard (#4772, 4773, 4774). Field Installation: Not recommended.
Alphanumeric Keyboard (#4772): An alphanumeric section
pre-engraved as a typewriter keyboard to the left on an engraved
numeric keyboard plus a one-column function/transaction keypad to the right of the engraved numeric Keypad. See item [3]
under "Specify." Maximum: One on Model 2, 3 or 4.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Keyboard (#4771, 4773,
3774). Field Installation: Not recommended.
Expanded Numeric Keyboard (#4773): Same as #4771 plus an
additional three-column function/transaction keypad to the left
of the engraved numeric keypad. See, items [3] and [4] under
"Specify." Maximum: One on Model 2, 3 or 4. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with Keyboard (#4771, 4772, 4774). Field
Installation: Not recommended.
Specify:
Expanded Alphanumeric Keyboard (#4774): Same as #4772
except that function/transaction keyboard is five columns wide.
See items [3] and [4] under "Specify." Maximum: One on Model 2, 3 or 4. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Keyboard
(#4771,4772, 4773). Field Installation: Not recommended.
(1) Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9880 for locking plug,
or #9881 for non-lock plug. Field Installation: Not recommended.
(2) Cables: See Instal/atjon Manual-Physical Planning, GA272766. Also see Accessories at the end of Machine Type
3601.
(3) Numeric Engraving: For bottom row of
keypad (from left to right)-#9481 for
triple-zero; #9482 for zero, double-zero,
#9483 for zero, triple-zero, decimal point.
engraved numeric
zero, double-zero,
decimal point; or
See "Special Fea-
Magnetic Stripe Capability: The 3604 can be equipped with a
Magnetic Stripe Reader or a Magnetic Stripe Encoder/Reader
which mounts on top of the 3604. To use these features, an
operator manually passes a magnetic striped plastic identification card or credit card (for reading), or a passbook with a magnetic stripe label attached (for reading or encoding), through a
slot. The 3604 encoding is a unique format at 210 bits per inch.
Standard ABA encoding us at 75 bits per inch; therefore, credit
cards cannot be encoded to ABA specifications, and thus must
be used as "read-only" documents. The 3604 is capable of
reading either the standard ABA format or the 3604 passb~
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----
-- -=- ---
.--
-
~~
M3604.3'
fi.\'
=--~ General Systems Division-Machines
format.
April 78
"3604 KEYBOARD DISPLAY-MODELS 5 and 6
Purpose: A combination keyboard and gas-panel display terminal for input and output in interactive 'banking applications.
Magnetic Stripe Reader (#4902): Has read capability only.
Maximum: One on Model 2, 3 or 4. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with Magnetic Stripe Encoder-Reader (#4906). Field
Installation: Yes.
Magnetic Stripe Encoder-Reader (#4906): Has encode and
read capability. Maximum: One on Model 2, 3 or 4. Limitation:
Cannot be installed vyith Magnetic Stripe Reader (#4902). Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Depending upon the configuration, the Additional Storage Feature (#1006) may be required on
the 3601, or 3602 ... see M3601 or M3602 pages.
Modems [Models 2, 3 and 4]: One modem is required at each
location which has 3600· Finance Communication System terminals remotely attached to the 3601 or 3602 Finance Communication Controller. The following features provide the required
capability in the 3604 Keyboard Display Model 2, 3 or 4.
Line Feature Base 11#4752): Required to operate the 1200 bps
LQop Integrated Modem (#8002) below. Maximum: One on
Model 2, 3 or 4. Limitation: Only with #8002. Field
Installation: Yes.
1200 bps Loop Integrated Modem (#8002): An integrated
modem for communications with a remotely located 3601 or
3602 Finance Communication Controller. Operates at 1200 bps
over unconditioned voice-grade lines. Maximum: One on Model
2, 3 or 4. Limitation: Not required if a 3614 at the same location has a 1200 bps integrated modem. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Line Feature Base (#4752) on the 3604, and a
1200 bps Loop Integrated Modem (#8001) on an Additional
Loop Feature (#4735) on the 3601 ... see 3601 or 3602 for further
details.
Accessories: See Accessories at the end of Machine Type
3601.
Model 5: Displays 120 characters-3 rows of 40 characters.
Included with the keyboard display is a 45-key keyboard, the keys of which may be designated by the
customer to represent any numeric, alphabetic, or special character, or to represent a preprogrammed function.
Model 6: Displays 240 characters-6 rows of 40 characters.
The same 45-key keyboard is available as described
above on the model 5.
Highlights: The 3604 Keyboard Display Model 5 displays characters using a 5 x 7 dot matrix. The 3604 Model 6 displays
characters using a 7 x 9 dot matrix.
A 45-key keyboard is standard. Can be equipped to read a
magnetic stripe on either a plastic card or a passbook. Can be
equipped with an audible alarm which is activated under program control. Dimensions are: 9.75 in. (247.67 mm) high x 18.0
in. (457.2) wide x 7.5 in. (190.5 mm) deep. May be either locally
or remotely (see Prerequisites) attached to the 3601 or 3602.
Keyboard: The 45-key keyboard contains 3 clusters of 15 keys.
The layout of each cluster is a matrix of 5 rows, with three kyes
in each row. The keyboard includes a blank overlay which may
be designated with any notation the customer desires. A second
overlay identifies the 10 numeric keys in a blue field, which may
be placed in any of the 3 15-key clusters the customer desires.
Covering these overlays is a clear plastic, protective overlay.
Additional overlays and clear protective overlays are also available. See Accessories at the end of Machine Type 3601.
Indicator Lights: Five indicator lights are provided, three of
which can be lighted under program control.
Prerequisites: An available position on a local or remote loop of
a 3601 or 3602. If located remotely from the 3601 or 3602, the
remote location must have either a 3603 Terminal Attachment
Unit, a 3614 Consumer Transaction Facility equipped with a
Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) and an appropriate modem, or a
3604 Model 2, 3 or 4 equipped with a Line Feature Base (#4751
or #4752) and appropriate modem. If both a 3614 and 3604
Model 2, 3 or 4 are installed in the same remote location, it is
recommended that the loop modem be located with the 3614
since the 3614 will often be operating when the 3604 mdls 2, 3
or 4 is not.
Bibliography: GC27-0370
Specify:
(1) Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 115 V, 60 Hz): #9880 for locking plug,
or #9881 for non-lock plug. Field Installation: Not recommended.
(2) Cables: See 3600 Installation Manual-Physical Planning,
GA27-2766. Also see Accessories at the end of Machine
T~3601.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
-= ---~--~ General Systems Division-Machines
- - - ---
=
-~-.-
Model Changes: Model 5 to Model 6-Not recommanded for
field installation. All other model changes-at time of manufacture only.
tSpecial Features
Audible Alarm (#1050): The 3604 Model 5 or 6 can be equipped with an audible alarm which can be enabled or disabled
under program control. The audible alarm can be programmed
to work with any of the programmable indicator lights.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Magnetic Stripe Capability: The 3604 Model 5 or 6 can be
equipped with a Magnetic Stripe Reader which is located in
front of "the display panel, to the left of the keyboard keys or
with a Magnetic Stripe Encoder-Reader attached by a 30 inch
cable. To use these features, an operator manually passes a
magnetic striped plastic identification card or credit card (for
reading), or a passbook with a magnetic stripe label attached
(for reading or encoding), through a slot. The 3604 encoding is
in a unique format at 210 bits per inch. Standard ABA encoding
is at 75 bits per inch.; therefore, credit cards cannot be encoded
to ABA specifications; and thus must be used as "read-only"
documents. The 3604 is capable of reading either the standard
ABA format or the 3604 passbook format.
Magnetic Stripe Encoder-Reader (#1501): Has encode and
read capability. Maximum: One on the Model 5 or 6.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Magentic Stripe Reader
(#4903). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Depending
upon the configuration, the Additional Storage Feature (#1006)
may be required on the 3601 or the 3602 ... see 3601 or 3602.
Magnetic Stripe Reader (#4903): Has read capability only.
Maximum: One on the Model 5 or 6. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with Magnetic Stripe EncoderReader (#1501). Field
Installation: Yes.
Accessories: See Accessories at the end of Machine Type
3601.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M3604.4
April 78
----- = ==--= General Systems. Division-Machines
----3606 FINANCIAL SERVICES TERMINAL
Purpose: A keyboard display termimll for use with the 3600
Finance Communication System in point of sale or other applications.
Modell : Attaches to the 3601 or 3602 Finance Communication
Controller local or remote loop. If located remotely
from the 3601 or 3602, the remote location must have
either a 3603 Terminal Attachment Unit, a 3614 Consumer Transaction Facility equipped with a Terminal
Loop Feature (#7820) and an appropriate modem, or a
3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4 equipped with a Line Feature Base
(#4751 or #4752) and appropriate modem.
Model 2: Attaches to the 3601 or 3602 Finance Communication
Controller remote loop.
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Highlights: Has 8 position numeric display, 9 message indicators, a numeric keyboard, 6 function keys and a magnetic stripe
reader capable of reading either standard ABA format (75 bpi) or
the 3604 passbook format (210 bpi).
Used an an interactive terminal in point of sale and other
applications (credit authorization, data capture, check verification, funds transfers).
PREREQU JSITES:
Modell: If located remotely from the 3601 or 3602, the remote
location must have either a 3603 Terminal Attachment Unit, a
3614 Consumer Facility equipped with a Terminal Loop Feature
(#7820) and an appropriate modem, or a 3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4
equipped with a Line Feature Base (#4751 or #4752) and appropriate modem. If both a 3614 and a 3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4 are
installed in the same remote location, it is recommended that the
loop modem be located with the 3614 since the 3614 will often
be operating when the 3604 mdl 2, 3 and 4 is not.
Model 2: Common carrier termination at location of installation.
Bibliography: IBM Financial Services Terminals. Complementing the IBM 3600 Finance Communication System, GC27-0002.
Customer Responsibilities: The customer must be advised
that: (1) He is responsible to make certain that the use of the
equipment complies with all Federal, State, and Local Laws,
Regulations, and Ordinances ... (2) He is responsible for price
quotations, installation and cost (initial and recurrent) of common carrier equipment and service ... (3) He is responsible for the
installation of the unit ... (4) The customer will determine the
failing unit (see "Maintenance" below) ... (!i) He is responsible to
determine required spares ... (6) Purchaser agrees that IBM is
relieved of responsibility for all claims including, but not limited
to, loss of funds contained in, dispensed by or associated with
the 3606.
Spares: The customer may wish to replace a failing 3606 with a
spare and must be advised to purchase sufficient spare units for
such use. The number of spare units recommended is dependent upon the number of units the customer has installed, his
application requirements, physical locations, and layouts. However, the minimum number of spare units recommended is
shown in the following table:
Number of 3606s Installed
100
200
300
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
M3606~1
April 78
Minimum Number of
Spares Recommended
Modell
Model 2
2
3
4
5
8
11
14
16
19
21
24
26
29
2
4
5
6
10
14
18
21
25
28
31
34
37
Maintenance: All maintenance of the 3606 parts replacement,
adjustments, and repair shall normally be performed at the
designated IBM Repair Center. It shall be the customer's responsibility to install the equipment and to determine when
remedial maintenance is required. When remedial maintenance
is required, it shall be the customer's responsibility to determine
the failing unit, pack the unit in the designated shipping container and ship it prepaid to the designated IBM Repair Center. IBM
will pay the transportation charges for return of the repaired
unit. There is no regularly scheduled preventive maintenance
recommended by IBM on these units.
The repair service is available under an IBM Repair Center Maintenance Supplement to the I BM Maintenance Agreement or on a
time and material basis.
Customers with machines not under an IBM Maintenance
Agreement have the option to ship the machines to the designated IBM Repair Center for repair under the IBM Machine
Repair Authorization Form, G 120-2165, in which case the repair
will be made (if the machine is repairable). Alternatively, upon
request, IBM will provide, for a minimum charge, an estimate of
repair charges. This charge covers handling, inspection, cleaning, adjustments, testing, and estimating of repair charges.
IBM Repair Center Services: The 3606 is eligible for maintenance coverage immediately following expiration of the service
and parts warranty at the monthly charge shown under MMMC
in the Price List.
If maintenance coverage is not contracted for immediately following expiration of any service and parts warranty and the
customer now wants maintenance coverage, he may ship the
machine(s) to the designated IBM Repair Center for an inspection.
If on the basis of an inspection, the repair center concludes that
a machine is not repairable, no further work will be performed
and the machine will be returned to the customer without
charge ..
In other cases, a minimum charge per machine to cover handling, inspection, cleaning, adjustments, and testing will be
applied. In addition, all parts needed will be billed at IBM's
prevailing parts prices and the additional time required for repairs will be billed at IBM'S applicable service rates. The machine will then be eligible for maintenance coverage.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---=---= General Systems Division-Machines
- -----..
- -=
-~-
-
Specify:
(1) Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9901.
(2) Cables: See Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA272766. Also see Accessories at the end of Machine Type
3601.
(3) Terminals are shipped with standard keyboard and indicator
light nomenclature. See Financial Services Terminals Complimenting Manual, GC27-0002. The customer may choose
the nomenclature to suit an application. Bank keyboard overlays and filters are available for a fee. See Accessories at the
end of Machine Type 3601.
(4) Keyboard Arrangement: Specify #9390 for a reverse or calculation formatted keyboard (top row-7, 8, 9; middle row--4,
5, 6; bottom row-1, 2, 3). Field Installation: Not recommended.
Accessories: See Accessories at the end of Machine Type
3601.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M3S0S.2
April 78
-- -
---= =-.----~~~ General Systems Division-Machines
-.. -
M3608.1
April 78
.
-~-
3608 PRINTING FINANCIAL SERVICES TERMINAL
Purpose: A keyboard display terminal, with printer, for use with
the 3600 Finance Communication System in p.oint of sale or
other appiications.
Model 1 : Attaches to the 3601 or 3'602 Finance Communication
Controller local or remote loop. If located remotely
from the 3601 or 3602, the remote location must have
either a 3603 Terminal Attachment Unit, a 3614 Consumer Transaction Facility equipped with a Terminal
Loop Feature (#7820) and an appropriate modem, or a
3604 model 2, 3 or 4 equipped with a Line Feature
Base (#4751 or #4752) and appropriate modem.
Model 2: Attaches to the 3601 or 3602 Finance Communication
Controller remote loop.
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Highlights:
Can print three lines of alphameric data on sales slips, charge
receipts, or other documents used in point of sale applications. Line positions must be specified ... see "Specify."
Has 45 character set. Optional 10 character numeric OCR 7B
font for uppermost print row is available as a special feature ... see "Special Features."
Document to be printed is inserted into the chute at the right
of the terminal, is fed past spring wheels, printed, and ejected .at the left side of the terminal.
Has 8 position numeric display, 9 message indicators, a
numeric keyboard, 6 function keys, and a magnetic stripe
reader, capable of reading either standard ABA format (75
bpi) or the 3604 passbook format (210 bpi).
Used as interactive terminal in point of sale applications (e.g.,
credit authorization, check verification, funds transfers).
Used as interactive terminal in point of sale applications (e.g.,
credit authorization, check verification, funds transfer(s».
Model 1-lf located remotely from the 3601 or 3602, the remote
location must have either a 3603 Terminal Attachment Unit, a
3614 Consumer Transaction Facility equipped with 2 Terminal
Loop Feature (#7820) and an appropriate modem, or a 3604
model 2, 3 or 4 equipped with a Line Feature Base (#4751 or
#4752) and appropriate modem. If both a 3614 and a 3604
model 2, 3 or 4 are installed in the same remote location, it is
recommended that the loop modem be located with the 3614
since the 3614 will often be operating when the 3604 model 2, 3
or 4 is not.
Model 2: Common carrier termination at location of installation.
Bibliography: IBM Financial Services Terminals: Complementing
the IBM 3600 Finance Communication System,
GC27-0002 .. .IBM Forms Design Reference Guide for Printers,
GA24-3488.
Customer Responsibilities: The customer must be advised
that: (1) He is responsible to make certain that the use of the
equipment complies with all Federal, State, and Local Laws,
Regulations, and Ordinances ... (2) He is responsible for price
quotations, installation and cost {initial and recurrent) of common carrier equipment and service ... (3) He is responsible for the
installation of the unit ... (4) The customer will determine the
failing unit (see "Maintenance" below) ... (5) He is responsible to
determine required spares ... (6) Purchaser agrees that IBM is
relieved of responsibility for all claims including, but not limited
to, loss of funds contained in, dispensed by or associated with
the 3608.
Spares: The customer may wish to replace a failing 3608 with a
spare and must be advised to purchase sufficient spare units for
such use. The number of spare units recommended is dependent upon the number of units the customer has installed, his
application requirements, physical locations, and layouts. However, the minimum number of spare units recommended is
shown in the following table:
Number of 3606s Installed
Minimum Number of
Spares Recommended
Model 2
Model 1
100
200
300
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
5
8
11
16
27
38
49
59
70
80
90
100
110
5
9
12
17
30
43
55
67
78
90
102
113
124
Maintenance: All maintenance of the 3608 parts replacement,
adjustments, and repair shall normally be performed at the
designated IBM Repair Center. It shall be the customer's responsibility to install the equipment and to determine when
remedial maintenance is required. When remedial maintenance
is required, it shall be the customer's responsibility to determine
the failing unit, pack the unit in the designated shipping container and ship it prepaid to the designated IBM Repair Center. IBM
will pay the transportation charges for return of the repaired
unit. There is no regularly scheduled preventive maintenance
recommended by IBM on these units.
The repair service is available under an IBM Repair Center Maintenance Supplement to the IBM Maintenance Agreement or on a
time and material basis.
Customers with machines not under an I BM Maintenance
Agreement have the option to ship the machines to the designated IBM Repair Center for repair under the IBM Machine
Repair Authorization Form, G 120-2165, in which case repair will
be made (if the machine is repairable). Alternatively, upon request, IBM will provide, for a minimum charge, an estimate of
repair charges. This charge covers handling, inspection, cleaning, adjustments, testing, and estimating of repair charges.
IBM Repair Center Services: The 3608 is eligible for maintenance coverage immediately following expiration of the service
and parts warranty at the monthly charge shown under MMMC
in "Price List."
If maintenance coverage is not contracted for immediately following expiration of any service and parts warranty and the
customer now wants maintenance coverage, he may ship the
machine(s) to the designated IBM Repair Center for an inspection.
If on the basis of an inspection, the repair center concludes that
a machine is not repairable, no further work will be performed
and the machine will be returned to the customer without
charge.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-----:::.--~ General Systems Division-Machines
-- ------
M3608.2
- -=
April 78
-~-.-
In all other cases, a minimum charge per machine to cover handling, inspection, cleaning, adjustments, and testing will be
applied. In addition, all parts needed will be billed at IBM's
prevailing parts prices and the additional time required for repairs will be bmed at IBM'S applicable service rates. The machine will then be eligible for maintenance coverage.
(5) Keyboard Arrangement: Specify #9390 for a reverse or calculation formatted keyboard (top row-7, 8, 9; middle row--4,
5, 6; bottom row- 1, 2, 3). Field Installation: Not recommended.
Line Position Chart
Line
Pos. Font
OCR OCR 7B
Forms Characteristics: Printing is possible on single part
forms of the following dimensions: From 2.75" (69.9 mr'n) up to
3.25" (82.6 mm) high by 5.8" (147.3 mm) to 8.5" (215.9 mm)
wide by .004" (0.10 mm) to .011" (0.28 mm) thick. In addition,
the following dimensions apply to mUlti-part charge forms:
3.25" (82.6 mm) high by 4.8" (121.9 mm) to 8.5" (215.9 mm)
wide by .001" (0.18 mm) to .017" (0.43 mm) thick. Refer to the
IBM Forms Design Reference Guide for Printers, GA24-3488 for
additional information. OCR 7B (not inked) printing is intended
for two (2) and three (3) part charge forms. Due to variations in
card, paper, and carbon stock, the customer should evaluate his
printed forms to determine if they meet his performance objectives.
Character Sets:
OCR is 0-9
10-pitch is 0-9, A-Z, and special characters number sign (#), at
sign (@), comma (,), minus (-), dollar ($), period (.), ampersand
(&), slash (I), and percent sign (%).
Specify:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
10-pitch
10-pitch
10-pitch
10-pitch
10-pitch
10-pitch
10-pitch
10-pitch
10-pitch
10-pitch
10-pitch
10-pitch
Nominal Center Line
Location, distance from
bottom edge of document
Note
3.031" (77.0 mm) (.219"
[5.56 mm] from top edge of
3.35" [85.1 mm] document)
Available as
Special Feat
(#5454) only
3.031"
2.831"
2.631"
2.431"
2.231"
2.031"
1.831"
1.631"
1.431"
1.231"
1.031"
0.831"
Not with #5
Not with #5
(77.0
(71.9
(66.8
(61.7
(56.7
(51.6
(46.5
(41.4
(36.3
(31.3
(26.2
(21.1
mm)
mm)
mm)
mm)
mm)
mm)
mm)
mm)
mm)
mm)
mm)
mm)
Only with #5
Only with #5
If a customer desires three print lines positioned in locations
other than the five feature combinations shown, an RPQ may be
submitted at order time. RPQs to change print line positions or
to add the OCR print feature will not be accepted after manufacture and shipment to the customer.
Special Features
,OCR 78 Font (#5454): The 10-character OCR 7B font can be
substituted for the standard font in the uppermost print row.
The 3 print line positions, when this feature is installed, are OCR,
3 and 5. The OCR 7B characters impact printed when #5454 is
used can be read on a 1287 Optical Character Reader equipped
with the OCR 7B special feature (#3945). Field Installation:
Available at time of manufacture only.
Accessories: See Accessories at the end of Machine Type
3601.
(1) Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9901.
(2) Cables: See Accessories at the end of Machine Type 3601 for
ordering
instructions.
Also
see
Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GA27-2766.
(3) Terminals are shipped with standard keyboard and indicator
light nomenclature. See Financial Services Terminals Complementing Manual, GC27-0002. The customer may choose
the nomenclature to suit an application. Bank keyboard overlays and filters are available for a fee. (See Accessories at the
end of Machine Type 3601.)
(4) Print Line Positions [at time of manufacture only]: The following are standard combinations ... see Line Position Chart.
#9540
#9541
#9542
#9543
#9544
for 1, 4,10
for 1, 5,10
for 1,3,6
for 1, 7, 10
for 4, 7, 10
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- ------,= ---...,.
-= --;;---=
----
-
M3610.1
General Systems Division-Machines
April 78
,
3610 DOCUMENT PRINTER-MODEL 3
Special Features
Purpl)s,: A printer for use with the 3600 Finance Communications System to provide a hard-copy output of banking transactions.
Model 3: Prints on a cut form and on continuous fanfold paper.
Model Ch,anges: Available at time of manufacture only.
Highlights: The 3610 printer provides for a hard-copy output on
a variety of .cut forms and paper stock to meet the customer's
printing requirement in banking aJJplications. When combined
with a 3604 Keyboard Display. the 3610 provides a bank teller
with a work station to use in performing bank transactions. The
3610 printer can also be used alone for administrative printing of
required reports. A document-handling device provides the
capability to print on cut forms. The forms can be those usu,ally
used for printing of one line or a number of lines. When a single
line document is used. a lever is provided to engage a document
stop which positions the center line of the printed line 13/16" ±
1/16" (20.6 ± 1.6 mm) from the bottom of the document. The
lever is disengaged when the teller wishes to insert the document further into the printer.
Printing occurs at 10
characters/inch and 5 or 6 lines/inch. At time of installation. the
CE will set line spacing at 5 LPI or 6 LPI as requested by the
customer. Speeds range from 15 cps to 30 cps ... see "Special
Features."
Model 3--contains a pin feed platen assembly which allows
printing to occur on continuous fanfold paper stock. A cut form
can be placed in front of the continuous form so that printing
can occur simultaneously on both documents with the appropriate carbon or impact paper.
Shared Terminal (#6350): Provides two push buttons each
labeled. START PRINT. These push buttons provide teller identification to the 3601 or 3602 Finance Communication Controller
when two tellers are sharing one printer. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
15 CPS with 64 Character Set (#6903: Provides a 64 character set consisting of 63 printable graphics and space (blank).
Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #6904.
Field Installation: Available at time of manufacture only.
Up to 30 CPS with 96 Character Set (#6904): Provides a 96
character set consisting of 95 printable graphics and space
(blank). Field Installation: Available at time of manufacture
only. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
#6903.
* Either #6903 or #6904 must be selected to complete the machine order.
Accessories: See Accessories at the end of Machine Type
3601.
Prerequisites:
(1) An available position on a local or remote loop of a 3601 or
3602. If located remotely from the '3601 or 3602. the remote
location must have either a 3603 Terminal Attachment Unit. a
3614 Consumer Transaction Facility equipped with a Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) and an appropriate modem. or a
3604 Model 2. 3 or 4 equipped, with a Line Feature Base
(#4751 or #4752) and appropriate modem. If both a 3614
and 3604 Model 2. 3 or 4 are installed in the same remote
location, it is recommended that the loop modem be located
with the 3614 since the 3614 will often be operating when
the 3604 Model 2. 3 or 4 is not.
(2) Selection of print speed ... see "Special Features."
(3) Depending upon the configuration, the Additional Storage
Feature (#1006) may be required on the 3601. or 3602 ... see
M 3601 or M 3602 pages.
Forms Specification: Refer to Form Design Reference Guide
for Printers, GA24-3488.
Bibliography: GC20-0370
Specify:
(1) Voltage (115- V AC, l-phase. 60 Hz): #9880 for locking plug.
or #9881 for non-lock plug. Field Installation: Not Recommended.
(2) Cables: See Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA272766. Also see Accessories at the end of Machine Type
3601.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- - =---=
--- -------.. -
-- =
M3610.2
---~-
_
General Systems Division~Machines
3610 DOCUMENT PRINTER-MODEL 4
Purpose: A printer for use with the 3600 Finance Communications System to provide a hard-copy output of banking transactions. The 3610 Model 4 prints on a cut form and on a journal
roll/ audit roll.
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Highlights: The 3610 Document Printer Model 4 provides a
hard-copy output on a variety of cut forms and paper stock to
meet the customer's printing requirements in banking applications. In addition, the 3610 Model 4 has the capability of printing single or multiple lines as well as being able to print on a one
or two part journal roll. When a single line document is used, a
lever is provided to engage a document stop which positions the
center of the printed line .812 ± .062 in. (20.625 ± 1.575 mm)
from the bottom of the document. A cut form can be positioned
in front of the journal roll so that printing can occur simultaneously on the cut form and journal roll, provided that appropriate
carbon or impact paper is used.
Printing occurs at 10 characters per inch, and 5 or 6 lines per
inch. At time of installation the customer engineer will set the
line spacing at 5 or 6 lines per inch as requested by the customer. The 3610 Model 4 prints at speeds up to 30 characters/sec.
Forms control capabilities include a right-hand forms-advance
knob, and a forms tear bar located, 2.625 ± .25 in. (66.675 ±
6.35 mm) above the print line. When one part of the journal
paper is attached to the take-up roll, the forms-advance knob
may be used to advance the paper. Otherwise, the paper must
be advanced manually.
April 78
Specify:
(1) Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9880 for locking plug,
or #9881 for non-lock plug. Field Installation: Not recommended
(2) Cables: See 3600 Installation Manual-Physical Planning,
GA27-2766. Also see Accessories at the end of Machine
Type 3601.
Special Features
Shared Terminal (#6350): Provides two push buttons for teller
identification to the 3601/3602 Finance Communication Controller when two tellers are sharing one. printer. Maximum: One.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with the Address Sharing RPQ
(MG 1586). Field Installation: Yes.
The size of the 3610 Model 4 is 10.5 in. (266.7 mm) high x 18.0
in. (457.2 mm) wide x 10.5 in. (266.7 mm) deep. When used
with the 3604 Keyboard Display Model 5 or 6 it provides a teller
with a work station which fits within a work area with dimensions 10.5 in. (266.7 mm) high x 18.0 in. (457.2 mm) wide x
18.0 in. (457.2 mm) deep.
Journal Take-up with Locked Cover: Provides a journal takeup roll for accumulating one part of a two-part journal after it is
printed. (The other part of the journal exits from the printer past
a tear bar.) A locked cover is also provided to prevent unauthorized access to the take-up roll. Two keys are provided for the
lock. When a Single-part journal is used, it should exit the printer
past the tear bar. The journal take-up roll can accommodate up
to a maximum of 50 feet (15.24 m) of paper.
48 Character Set: Provides a 48 character set consisting of 47
printable graphics and space (blank).
Prerequisites: (1) an available position on a local or remote
loop of a 3601 or 3602. If located remotely from the 3601 or
3602, the remote location must have either a 3603 Terminal
Attachment Unit, a 3614 Consumer Transaction Facility equipped with a Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) and an appropriate
modem, or a 3604 Model 2, 3 or 4 equipped with a Line Feature
Base (#4751 or #4752) and appropriate modem. If both a 3614
and a 3604 Model 2, 3 or 4 are installed in the same remote
location, it is recommended that the loop modem be located
with the 3614, since the 3614 will often be operating when the
3604 Model 2, 3 or 4 is not... (2) Depending upon the configuration, the Additional Storage Feature (#1006) may be required on
the 3601 /3602 ... see 3601/3602.
Bibliography: GC20-0370
Forms Specifications: Refer to Form Design Reference Guide
for Printers, GA24-:3488.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----- -=
~--= General Systems Division-Machines
-- ----------.. 3611 PASSBOOK PRINTER
M3611.1
April 78
Special Features
Purpose: A printer used in the 3600 Finance Communications
System to print on horizontal fold or vertical fold passbooks or
on single or multiple part cut forms.
Model 2: Prints on passbooks and cut forms.
Highlights: The 3611 printer provides the capability of printing
on a variety of passbooks and forms to meet customer's requirements in ba~king applications.
The 3611 is a physically compact unit with a flat top suited for
placement of a 3604 Keyboard display. When combined with a
3604, the 3611 provides a high function work station in a limited
amount of space.
Passbook specifications for both models are the same as for the
3612 passbook printers. Passbook and forms printing occurs at
12 characters/inch and may be at 5 or 6 lines/inch, with up to
an 8.3 inch (211 mm) print line of 100 characters.
Model 2-prints on a horizontal fold or vertical fold passbook.
Variable size, single or multipart documents can be printed in the
passbook chute. The size of document which can be accommodated is determined by the width of the passbook to which the
passbook chute is adjusted. The maximum document width is
equal to 1/2 the passbook width plus 4.35" (110 mm).
Prerequisites:
(1) An available position on a local or remote loop of a 3601 or
3602. If located remotely from the 3601 or 3602, the remote
location must have either a 3603 Terminal Attachment, a
3614 Consumer Transaction Facility equipped with a Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) and an appropriate modem, or a
3604 Model 2, 3 or 4 equipped with a line Feature Base
(#4751 or #4752) and appropriate modem. If both a 3614
and 3604 Model 2, 3 or 4 are installed in the same remote
location, it is recommended that the loop modem lje located
with the 3614 since the 3614 will often be operating when
the 3604 Model 2, 3 or 4 is not.
Shared Terminal (#6350): Provides two push buttons, labelled
START PRINT. These pushbuttons provide teller identification
to the 3601 or 3602 Finance Communication Controller when
two tellers are sharing one printer. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
*15 CPS with 64 Character Set (#6903): Provides a 64 character set consisting of 63 printable graphics and space (blank).
Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #6904.
Field Installation: Available at time of manufacture only.
*Up to 30 CPS with 96 Character Set (#6904): Provides a 96
character set consisting of 95 printable graphics and space
(blank). Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
#6903. Field Installation: Available at time of manufacture
only.
* Either #6903 or #6904 must be selected to complete the machine order.
Accessories: See Accessories at the end of Machine Type
3601.
(2) Selection of print speed ... see "Special Features."
(3) Depending upon the configuration, the Additional Storage
Feature (#1006) may be required on the 3601, or the
3602 ... see M 3601 or 3602 pages.
Forms Specifications: Refer to Form Design Reference Guide
for Printers, GA24-3488.
Bibliography: GC20-0370.
Specify
(1) Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9880 for locking plug,
or #9881 Jor non-lock plug. Field Installation: Not Recommended
(2) Cables: See Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA272766. Also see Accessories at the end of Machine Type
3601.
(3) Short Page Passbooks: #9650-provides a passbook stop
position for passbooks with short pages, cutouts, notches or
windows. Optional stop position required when the distance
between the edge of the short pages, cutouts, notches or
windows and the leading edge of the passbook cover is
between .360" (9.14" mm) and .657" (16.7 mm). Field
Installable: Not recommended.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- --
= -= =---=
- ---_.------
M3612.1
General Systems Division-Machines
April 78
3612 PASSBOOK AND DOCUMENT PRINTER
(2) Selection of print speed ... see "Special Features."
Purpose: A printer used in the 3600 Finance Communication
System to print on a variety of forms, documents, and passbooks.
(3) Depending upon the configuration, the Additional Storage
Feature (#1006) may be required on the 3601, or the
3602 ... see M 3601 or M 3602 pages.
Model 2: Prints on a horizontal-fold or vertical-fold passbook, on
a cut form, and on a journal/ audit roll.
Forms Specifications: Refer to Form Design Reference Guide
for Printers, GA24-3488.
Model 3: Prints on a horizontal-fold or vertical-fold passbook, on
a cut form, and on continuous fanfold paper.
Bibliography: GC20-9370.
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Highlights: The 3612 printer provides the capability of printing
on a variety of forms and passbooks to meet the customer's
requirements in banking applications. This printer, when combined with a 3604 Keyboard Display, provides a full-function
work station for handling the wide range of banking transactions
through the incorporation of two independent print mechanisms.
A document-handling device provides the capability to print on
cut forms. The forms can be those usually used for printing of
one line or a number of lines. When a single-line document is
used, a lever is provided to engage a document stop which
positions the center line of the printed line 13/16 ± 1/16 inch
(20.6 ± 1.6 mm) from the bottom of the document. The lever is
disengaged when the customer wishes to insert the document
further into the printer. Passbooks are inserted in the bottom
half of the printer while cut forms/ documents may be inserted in
the top half. With this facility, the printer is able to print on the
passbook and print on the cut forms. Forms printing occurs at
10 characters per inch and 5 or 6 lines per inch. A maximum of
80 characters may be printed across an 8 inch (200 mm) line.
The capability to print a single line on a document that is inserted in the cut form chute is provided. Passbook printing occurs
at 12 characters per inch and 5 or 6 lines per inch with up to an
8.3 inch (211 mm) print line of 100 characters. At time of instalEngineer will set line spacing to 5 LPI or
lation, the
6 LPI as requested by the customer. Note: Only one print element (either passbook or cut form) prints at a time. Both must
be selected with the same print speed.
Model 2: Prints on a passbook and has the capability of printing
on a one-part or two-part journal roll, which can be used to
maintain an audit trail of bank transactions. A cut form can be
pOSitioned in front of the journal so that printing can occur
simultaneously on the cut form and journal roll, provided that
appropriate carbon or impact paper is used.
Model 3: Prints on a passbook and contains a pin feed platen
assembly that allows printing to occur on continuous fanfold
paper stock. A cut form can be placed in front of the continuous
form so that printing can occur simultaneously on both documents with the appropriate carbon or impact paper. Note: Passbook unit (as opposed to forms printing unit) is 12 pitch with an
8.3 inch (211 mm) print line of 100 characters for all models.
Prerequisites:
(1) An available position on a local or remote loop of .a 3601 or
3602. If located remotely from the 3601 or 3602, the remote
location must have either a 3603 Terminal Attachment Unit, a
3614 Consumer Transaction Facility equipped with a Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) and an appropriate modem, or a
3604 Model 2, 3 or 4 equipped with a Line Feature Base
(#4751 or #4752) and appropriate modem. If both a 3614
and 3604 Model 2, 3 or 4 are installed in the same remote
location, it is recommended that the loop modem with the
3614 since the 3614 will often be operating when the 3604
Model 2, 3 or is not.
Specify
(1) Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9880 for locking plug,
or #9881 for non-lock plug. Field Installation: Not recommended
(2) Cables: See Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA272766. Also see Accessories at the end of Machine Type
3601.
(3) Short Page Passbooks: #9650 Provides a passbook stop
position for passbooks with short pages, cutouts, notches, or
windows. Optional stop position required when the distance
between the edge of short pages, etc., and the leading edge
of the passbook cover is between .360 inches (9.14 mm) and
.657 inches (16.7 mm). Field Installation: Not recommended
Special Features
Journal Takeup with Locked Cover (#4652): [Mdl 2 only]
Provides a paper roll on which one or -both parts of the printed
journal can be taken up after it has been printed. If two-part
journal paper is used, one part may be put on the takeup roll,
while the original can exit past a tear bar. A locked cover is also
provided over the takeup roll to prevent unauthorized access to
the journal roll. Two keys are provided. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
Shared Terminal (#6350): Provides two push buttons, labelled
start print. These pushbuttons provide teller identification to the
3601 or 3602 Finance Communication Controller when two
tellers are sharing one printer. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
·15 CPS with 64 Character Set (#6903): Provides a 64 character set consisting of 63 printable graphics and space (blank).
Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #6904.
Field Installation: Available at time of manufacture only.
·Up to 30 CPS with 96 Character Set (#6904): Provides a 96
character set consisting of 95 printable graphics and space
(blank). Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
#6903. Field Installation: Available at time of manufacture
only.
*
Either #6903 or #6904 must be selected to complete the machine order. The selected speed applies to both print units,
passbook and forms.
Accessories: See Accessories at the end of Machine
3601.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Typ~
---=-~--= General Systems Division-Machines
- _.--------
- -=
3614 CONSUMER TRANSACTION FACILITY
Purpose: An unattended self-service banking terminal that
issues variable amounts of money, accepts deposits, performs
other transactions, and attacl1es to a 3601 or 3602 Finance
Communication Controller or directly to a S/370 Processor via a
3704/3705 Communications Controller ... see 3704/3705.
Model 1:
Model 2:
Model 11:
Model 12:
Consumer Transaction Facility, Lobby. Designed
for use inside a building. Consists of the basic unit
with a protective covers, a protective front panel,
and a bezel around the front panel. The protective
cover contains provision for customer insertion of
two keylock cylinders.
Consumer Transactions Facility, Through the Wall.
Designed for use through the wall of a building.
Has a motorized protective door over the
keyboard/ guidance area for outdoor environmental
protection. Can be attached to a heavy duty enclosure, through-the-wall bezel, and mounted on a 4,"
7" or 10" high mounting stand. The heavy duty
enclosure contains a combination lock and provision for customer insertion of bank examiner's type
keylock for locking the combination dial.
Same as Model 1 with a capability of issuing two
denominations during one transaction. Can also be
loaded with a single denomination, doubling the bill
capacity currently available in the 3614 Model 1.
Same as Model 2 with a capability of issuing two
denominations during one transaction. Also can be
loaded with a single denomination, doubling the bill
capacity currently available in the 3614 Model 2.
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Highlights:
Issues Cash: Withdrawal transaction issues single (Model 1 or
2) or dual denominations (Model 11 or 12) up to a maximum of
20 bills from a single account. Withdrawal is from a choice of
four accounts.
Accepts Deposits: Deposit transaction and depository with
controlled access slot allows users to deposit to checking or
savings accounts.
Accepts Payments: Allows user to make various payments by
depositing cash or check: User may also deposit payment coupon and have financial institution deduct funds from hisaccount.
Cas!1 Check: A single transaction that allows cash to be issued
to user following deposit of a check drawn ~n another institution.
Additional Transactions: The 3614 provides a general purpose
special transaction, an account inquiry transaction, and a funds
transfer transaction.
Transaction Chaining: A series of mUltiple transactions can be
performed with a singl'e insertion of magnetic stripe card and
single keyed entry of personal identification number.
M3614.1
April 78
Keyboard/Guidance: Guidance display steps user through a
transaction. Customer can specify messages to be displayed.
Encrypt/Decrypt Feature: Encryption/decryption of sensitive
data during communication line transmission. Provision for one
of two encryption algorithms: the proposed U. S. Federal Information Processing Data Encryption Standard (DES) or the
original 3614 Alternate Encryption Technique (AET). See
"Specify".
Multi-Institution Usage: Provision to accept magnetic stripe
cards for 50 different card issuer identifiers with Data Encryption
Standard (DES) technique.
Off-Host Operation: Offline operation via a 3601 or 3602 controller possible.
Customizing Capability: Customer can customize terminal
operation (within limits) and change guidance messages.
Identification: The user is identified through the reading of his
ABA-standard magnetic stripe card. As a second check, the
user is verified by a comparison of a keyed personal identification number.
Installation: Can be installed for use inside the building or
through-the-wall for outside use.
Bill Issue: Issues bills directly. No packets or cartridges are
used.
Heavy Duty Enclosure: A strong steel protective enclosure to
protect bills ... available for purchase on Model 2 or 12.
Logo Panel: The 3614 logo panel is a purchase-only accessory.
It provides an area on the top half of the front of the 3614 for
personalization by the customer (silk screen, painting, etc.). An
area is provided for name, logo, and advertising purposes. A
logo panel is required with all models of the 3614. Lack of a
logo panel detracts from the appearance of the 3614.
Prerequisites:
(1) Each 3614 must have loop attachment to a 3601/3602, or
SDLC attachment to S/370 via a 3704/3705.
For Attachment to a 3601/3602 there must be an available
position on a local loop or remote loop of 3601/3602. The 3614
must have Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) ... if located remotely
from the 3601/3602 the remote location must have a 3614 with
Loop Integrated Modem (#8001), a 3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4 with Line
Feature Base (#4751 or 4752) and appropriate modem, or a
3603 Terminal Attachment Unit. If a 3603 is at the remote location, the 3614 does not require Loop Integrated Modem (#8001).
If both a 3614 and a 3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4 are installed in the same
remote location without a 3603, it is recommended that the loop
modem be located with the 3614 since the 3614 might often be
operating when the 3604 is not, e.g., weekends, holidays.
For Attachment to a S/370 with virtual storage capability via a
3704/3705 Communications Controller equipped with appropriate features, see 3704 and 3705. The 3614 must have SDLC
Communications Feature With Clocking (#6301) or SDLC Communications Feature Without Clocking (#6302).
Issues Statements: Can print and issue a statement or message to user.
(2) Depending upon the configuration, the Additional Storage
Feature #1006 may be required on the 3601, or the 3602 ...
see 3601 or 3602.
Journaling: Transaction documents can be printed and retained
in the 3614, as an aid in machine balancing.
(3) Logo Panel (#9401 or #9402) ... see "Specify." Purchase
Only.
3704/3705 Attachment: Can attach via communications link
directly to a 3704 or 3705 Communications Controller.
(4) The 3614 mdl 2 and 12 require Model 2/12 Accessory Group
#9571 ... see "Specify." Purchase Only.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-----
M3614.2
-- =--_.=---= General Systems Division-Machines
------
-
2nd Position Designator -- identifies additional 3614s of each
version ... controller-data media is not distributed to host system
location for 2nd position designated 3614s.
Bibliography: GC20-0370
Specify:
(1) Voltage, (AC, l-phase, 60 Hz): #9901 for 115V.
(2) Cables: See Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA272766. Also see Accessories at the end of Machine Type
3601.
(3) Currency Denomination: #9091 for $5, $10, $20.
(4) Keyboard: Specify one of the following. All are field installable.
Specify Number
April 78
From Account
To Account
Transaction Type
>-
Q)
~
The following matrix identifi~s individual Controller Data Versions and their corresponding 1st and 2nd position specify
codes. Limitations: Each 3614 must have either 1st or 2nd
position specified ... one 1st position must be specified for each
version ... only one 1st position may be specified for each version.
Specify either
1st or 2nd Pos
Code below:
1st
2nd Version
Host
Attachment:
Loop-3601/2
Direct-SDLC
Encryption
Technique
DES (#9001)
AET (#9002)
#9701#97023
#9703#97043
#9801#98025
#9803#98045
Loop
Direct
Loop
Direct
Alternate
Alternate
DES
DES
Q)
Ol
When 1st position (#9701, 9703, 9801 or 9803) is specified,
also specify one of the following to indicate magnetic tape density (media) used at the host system location:
C
>-
Q)
~
Q)
Ol
~
'"
U
.J::
-S
;:
C
:J
.J::
U
0
~
I/)
Qi
"'0
0
"'0
c
0
~
N
]
g
->I.
c c:
..c
0
~
~
~
u
I/)
Q)
Qi
~
"'0
(j)
~
~
(3)
#9351
9352
9353
9354
9355
9356
9357
9358
9359
9360
9361
9362
9363
9364
#9412
#9413
#9414
8
~
>-
0.
0
#9451
9452
9453
9454
9455
9456
9457
9458
9459
9460
9461
9462
9463
9464
g ~
~
ro
OJ
~
~
iii
0
0.
Q)
0
C
Q)
Ol
Q)
c
I/)
E
E
-E
c
0...
0...
U
~
U
'" U~
>-
Q)
.J::
U
Ol
~
(j)
(2) (2) (2) (2)
(1)
If magnetic tape in not used at the host system location, select
one of the following media: (DOS/VS users only) .
-6Q)
Qi
.c.
U
6
#9431
#9432
0
When #9701, 9703, 9801 or 9803 is specified, additional information is required.
80 column cards
90 column cards
(1)
(1 )
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
]
U
Q)
9-track 800 bpi
9-track 1600 bpi
9-track 6250 bpi
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0 0
0
0 0
0 0
0
0
0
0
0 0 0 0
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
(1)
(1)
'0
0
(1)
0 0
0
0
d
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Supplemental Spec
are to be entered exactly as
follows to indicate shipping address of host system location:
Line 1 IBM PROGRAMMING SUPPORT
REPRESENTATIVE (PSR)
Line 2 C/O (Name of Customer)
Line 3 Street Address (or P.O. Box)
Line 4 (etc.) City, State, Zip
(8) Specify one of the following:
(x) Does not have any transaction select or "from Account"
keys. Note 1: Two currency denominations must be specified.
(5) Logo Panel [Purchase Only]: See 3614 Accessories at the end
of 3614 Pages.
(6) Model 2/12 Accessory Group [Purchase Only]: #9571. See
Accessories at the end of 3614 pages. See 3614 Accessories
at the end of 3614 Pages.
0) 3614 Host Attachment Designation: 1st and 2nd position
designation is required to control distribution of 3614
controller-data media to host system location.
1st Position Designator -- identifies first 3614 of each different
Controller Data Version attached to a host system ... used to
limit distribution of controller-data media to one copy of each
version per host system location.
DES: #9001 -- provides the data encryption technique (DES)
proposed as a U.S. Federal Information Processing Data Processing Standard by the U.S. National Bureau of Standards. DES
facilitates. multi-institution usage by providing for personal identification number (PIN) validation based on individual user PIN
encryption keys for 50 different card issuer identifiers ... PI N
offset value may be recorded on magnetic stripe to be used to
validate PINs in 3614 which were not based originally on DES
technique ... accepts 4 to 16 digit fixed or variable length PINs ...
option to load PI N encryption keys via communication line from
host. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be specified if
#9002 is specified.
AET: #9002 -- provides the Alternate Encryption Technique
(AET) which is the original 3614 encryption techndique.
Limitation: May not be specified if #9001 is specified.
Prerequisite: DES and/or AET encryption capability required on
the 3601 or 3602 and in host system ... see 3601 and 3602 in
"Machines." DES and AET are used to determine 3614 Host 1st
and 2nd Position Host Attachment designation ... see item (7)
above.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----.--- = -~~ General Systems Division-Machines
- ------
-- -
'
M3614.3
April 78
.
-~-.-
Customer Responsibilities: Because the 3614 Model 2 and 12
is attached to a customer premise, installation of cables, mounting stand and enclosure and bezel are a customer responsibility.
The customer is also responsible for site preparation, such as
cutting a hole in the wall for mounting of the 3614 Model 2 or
12. Installation of cables and site preparation is also customer
responsibility for the 3614 Model 1 and 11. I BM is not responsible for any loss of money incurred through the use of the 3614.
Sub host operation under control of the 3601 or 3602 Finance
Communication Controller requires special customer systems
design and support. Maintenance of system integrity in the sub
host mode is a customer responsibility.
IBM is not responsible for intentional damage to the 3614 mdls
1, 2, 11 or 12. Repair of such damage is not covered under the
IBM Rental Agreement or Maintenance Contract. Repair of such
damage at cost of time and materials will be made to rental
machines and can be provided for purchased machines.
Customer Responsibilities-Currency Sorting:. The general
condition of used currency may vary. To achieve satisfactory
operatioR, the customer must ensure that only good quality
used currency is loaded into the 3614. Used or recirculated
currency must be inspected to remove excessively worn, damaged or torn notes. The 3614 Operator's Guide GA66-0001
contains procedures for preparation of new currencies and
inspection of used currencies for loading the 3614. For the 3614
Model 11 and 12 the customer must ensure that each hopper is
loaded.with the proper denomination currency.
Special Features
Depository (#3322): Provides a controlled access slot in the
front of the 3614 leading to an internal deposit receptacle for the
collection deposit documents. In addition to the controlled
access slot, the chute is designed to discourage tampering with
previously inserted deposits.
Field Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisite: One of the following keyboards-#9357, #9358:
#9360,#9457, #9458, or #9460.
EIA Interface (#3701): Provides an interface for external modems. limitation: Not available on Terminal Loop Feature
(#7820). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC Communication Feature.
EXPANDED FUNCTION FEATURE (#3895). Provides the
options of transaction chaining, journal printing, and cash check
transactions. field. Installation: Yes .,. any of the individual
functions may be field installed. Prerequisite: DES (specify
code #9001). Limitation: May not be ordered with specify code
#9002. Equivalent capability is available via RPQ MG3758 for
customers o~dering 3614s with specify code #9002. Specify:
Any combination of the following functions may be specified
with #3895. Specify at least one:
(1) Transaction Chaining (#9721) -- allows a series of multiple transactions with single insertion of magnetic stripe
card and single keyed entry of PIN.
(2) Journal Printing (#9722) -- print statement documents
and retain in 3614 ... can be used as an aid in machine
balancing and settlements.
Statement Printer (#7900).
Prerequisite: Transaction
(3) Cash Check (#9723) -- in single transaction, cash is
issued to user following deposit of check drawn on other
institution. Prerequisites: Depository (#3322) and one of
the following keyboards ... #9362, #9363, #9364, #9462,
#9463, or #9464.
IBM 1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5500): Provides an integrated 1200 bps modem for use with leased voice grade
line ... see M 2700 pages. This modem is for a point-to-point or
tributary SOLC station. Specify: #9651 for 4-wire strapping, or
#9652 for 2-wire strapping.
Field Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisite: SDLC Communication Feature with Clocking
(#6301).
SDLC Communications Feature with Clocking (#6301):
Provides communications capability to communicate with the
same S/370 models listed below for #6302. Required for attachment to communication lines through the IBM 1200 bps
Integrated Modem (#5500) or any external modem which does
not have internal clocking. limitations: Cannot be installed
with Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) or SDLC Communications
Feature without Clocking (#6302). Field Installation: Yes.
Transmission: This feature operates over common carrier provided or equivalent customer owned communication facilities.
For information concerning these facilities, see M 2700 pages.
SDLC Communications Feature without Clocking (#6302):
Provides communications capability to communicate with S/370
Processor except 3115 via a 3704/3705 ... see 3704, 3705. Required for attachment to communications lines through an external modem which dces have internal clocking. Limitations:
Cannot be installed with Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) or SOLC
Communications Feature with Clocking (#6301).
Field
Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisite:
EIA
interface(#3701).
Transmission: This feature operates over common carrier provided or equivalent customer owned facilities. For information
concerning these facilities, see M 2700 pages. Modems: External modems operating at up to 4800 bps may be attached .. ,IBM
3872 Modem ... IBM 3874 Modem.
TERMINAL LOOP FEATURE (#7820). Provides the capability
to attach either to a local or remote 3601/3602 Finance Communication Controller loop directly; or to a remote 3601/3602 loop
via a 3603 or 3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4. Prerequisites: (1) Available
positions on the loop ... (2) Depending on the configuration, the
Additional Storage Feature (#1005 or #1006) may be required on
the 3601/3602. See M3601 or M3602 pages .. , (3) Attachment
to remote 3601/3602 loop directly requires a 1200 BPS Loop
Integrated Modem (#8001). Specify: If loop attachment is
without Loop Integrated Modem (#8001), specify one of the
following loop speeds: (1) For local loop attachment to
3601/3602, specify local loop speed: #9062 for 1200 bps,
#9063 for 2400 bps, or #9064 for 4800 bps ... (a) For remote
loop attachment via a 3603 or 3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4, specify loop
speed; #9062 for 1200 bps. Limitations: (1) Cannot be ordered
with SDLC Communications with Clocking (#6301) or SDLC
Communications without Clocking (#3602) ... (2) Remote loop
speed is 1200 bps. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Transaction Statement Printer (#7900): Prints a statement
showing the record of the transaction and passes the printed
statement to the customer through the cash issue slot. Data is
printed on 96-column card stock (2-5/8" by 3-1/4"). A 57
character set is provided consisting of 56 printable graphics and
a space (blank). Four lines one character per line, are printed
simultaneously, for up to 34 characters per line ... a total of 136
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-=---= General Systems Division-Machines
-- =- - --_.
-
,
----.-~-~-.-
characters on each statement. The data to be printed is determined by the host application program and by the data stored in
the 3614. Printing is overlapped with the cash issue cycle and
the user deposit cycle. Prerequisites: If a statement is to be
issued for any transaction on a given keyboard, then the Transaction Statement is required. Card Limitations: The 96-column
card stock used in the transaction statement printer must not
have the optional 60 degree corner cuts.
1200 bps loop Integrated Modem (#8001): Provides an integrated 1200 bps modem for use over normal quality voice grade
lines. Limitation: If a 3604 Model 2, 3 or 4 and a 3614 are
located at the same remote loop location, it is recommended
that the loop modem be located on the 3614 because the 3614
will often be operating when the 3604 is not; e.g., weekends.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Terminal loop Feature
(#7820).
3614 ACCESSORIES
3614 lOGO PANEL #9401 or #9402
A purchase only accessory for either a 3614 mdl 1, 2, 11 or 12.
The personalization panel provides an area on the top half of the
front of the 3614 that can be personalized by the customer
(silk-screened, painted, etc.). The area is provided for customer
name and/ or advertising purposes.
Feature
logo Panel
If #9401 is specified, logo panel will be shipped with 3614
#9401
.
April 78
Note: These items are provided as accessories to the 3614 mdl 2
or 12 to facilitate installation of the 3614 mdl 2 or 12 throughthe-wall. Installation, checkout, and maintenance of these items
will not be provided by IBM. All responsibility and expenses
involved must be borne by the customer.
Warranty for 3614 Model 2/12 Accessory Group: For 90 days
commencing on the date of installation or 30 days after shipment, whichever comes first, these accessories are warranted
from defects in materials and workmanship. IBM's obligation is
limited to providing replacement parts on an exchange basis.
Delivery Instructions: Supplemental Specs for the Accessory
Group must be submitted at least 90 days prior to the 3614 DP
Friday schedule date. Due to installation requirements, the
Accessory Group will generally be shipped three weeks prior to
the 3614. Supplemental Specs (via Terminal Entry) are to be
entered exactly as follows to indicate shipping destination of
these items:
line 1 - c/o (Name of Customer)
line 2 - Customer Designated Delivery Point
(Note special considerations described below)
line 3 - Street Address
line 4 (etc.) - City, State, Zip
The "Heavy Duty Enclosure" included in this Accessory Group
is, in effect, a steel safe with dimensions of approximately 43" x
28" x 63" and weighing approximately 2800 pounds. It does not
have casters and will be transported on a skid. The item will be
shipped via common carrier to the delivery point designated by
the customer and will probably require special handling or rigging at destination. The customer should be advised that it is
suggested this item be delivered directly to a local drayman that
has the facilities to move an item of these dimensions and
weight. The customer should then make local provisions to have
the Accessory Group delivered for physical installation at the
selected site.
3614 MODEl2 ACCESSORY GROUP
(Purchase Only) The 3614 Model 2/12 Accessory Group consists of a heavy duty enclosure, a through the wall bezel and a
mounting stand.
Heavy Duty Enclosure: Provides a strong steel enclosure for
the through-the-wall configuration. This enclosure has a rear
access door with a resettable combination lock and a provision
for a keylock. The combination for the combination lock is set
by the customer. The customer must provide the actual keylock
and the key. limitation: For 3614 mdl 2 or 12 only.
Through the Wall Bezel: Provides a frame around the throughthe-wall portion of the 3614 mdl 2 or 12 and provides a casement for the hole in the wall.
Mounting Stand: Provides a support stand for the 3614 mdl 2
or 12 that comes in three different heights. Specify:
Height-#9572 for 4", #9573 for 7", or #9574 for 10".
Feature
3614 Model 2/12 Accessory Group
M3614.4
#9571
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- ---.-=- - General Systems Division-Machines
= - --==--=
--_
-.-
--
3618 ADMINISTRATIVE LINE PRINTER
Purpose: A medium-speed line printer for use in the 3600 Finance Communication System.
Highlights: Provides the capability to print on continuous fanfold paper up to 80 print positions on an 8 inch (200 mm) print
line. The unit has a pin feed mechanism. It accepts paper
widths of 3.5 inches (89 mm) to 9 inches (229 mm) pin hole
center to center. Paper up to 14.875 inches (378 mm) can be
handled with Expanded Print Line (#3860) ... see "Special Features." Paper up to six parts plus carbon [maximum total thickness is .02 inches (5 mm)] can be accommodated. A form jam
• detection capability is provided. Print speeds are dependent
upon the number of characters printed per line, loop speed, and
available slot position on the loop.
Character Set
Nominal Print Speed
48
64
96
1551pm
120lpm
80lpm
M3618.1
April 78
Dual Independent Form Feed (#3550): Provides two independently indexed pin feed mechanisms. Different sizes of
forms can be handled in each paper feed. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Not recommended.
Expanded Print Line (#3860): Expands the print line to 132
print positions on a .13.2 inch (33.5 cm) line. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Not recommended.
Prerequisites:
(1) An available position on a iocal or remote loop of a 3601 or
3602. If located remotely from the 3601 or 3602, the remote
location must have either a 3603 Terminal Attachment Unit, a
3614 Consumer Transaction Facility equipped with a Terminal Loop Feature (#7820} and an appropriate modem, or a
3604 Model 2, 3 or 4 equipped with a Line Feature Base
(#4751 or #4752) and appropriate modem. If both a 3614
and 3604 Model 2, 3 or 4 are installed in the same remote
location, it is recommended that the loop modem be located
with the 3614 since the 3614 will often be operating when
the 3604 Model 2, 3 or 4 is not.
(2) Depending upon the configuration, the Additional Storage
Feature (#1006) may be required on the 3601 or the
3602 ... see M 3601 or M 3602 pages.
Forms Specifications: Refer to Form Design Reference Guide
for Printers, GA24-3488.
Bibliography: GC20-0370
'Specify:
(1) Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9880 for locking plug,
or #9881 for non-lock plug. Field Installable: Not recommended
(2) Cables: See Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA272766. Also see Accessories at the end of Machine Type
3601.
(3) Character Set Size: #9071 for 48 characters, #9072 for 64, or
#9073 for 96. A space (blank) character is included in each
character set, resulting in 47, 63, or 95 printable graphics.
Accessories: See Accessories at the end of Machine Type
3601.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- =- --~--= General Systems Division-Machines
- ---
-
3624 CONSUMER TRANSACTION FACILITY
Purpose: An unattended self-service banking terminal that
issues variable amounts of money, accepts deposits, and performs other financial transactions ... other documents such as
traveler's checks may be dispensed if they complete a document
issue qualification test successfully ... attaches to a 3601 or
3602 Finance Communication Controller via loop, or to a virtual
storage S/370 Processor through a 3704 or 3705 Communications Controller.
Model 1 Lobby-Single Document Feed Mechanism. For use
inside a building in a secure attended location. The basic model
includes a single cartridge feed station, card reader, user guidance keyboard and display unit and is suitable for counter-top or
free-standing mounting ... includes covers and front trim paneling ... covers contain locking handle, with a standard key, and
provision for customer insertion of an additional keylock cylinder. A backlighted logo panel. required for installation of a lobby
model, is available as a purchase accessory. A pedestal is available as a purchase accessory to mount the basic lobby model. A
pedestal base is included as part of the depository special feature when the depository is added to the basic model.
Model 2 Through the Wall-Single Document Feed Mechanism.
For outdoor, vestibule, drive-up, and otherwise less secure,
unattended locations to provide availability on a 24-hour basis.
The basic model includes a single cartridge feed station, card
reader, user guidance keyboard and display unit. and has provision for mounting the currency dispensing and depository mechanisms inside a heavy-duty security enclosure. Covers are provided for the components not contained within the heavy-duty
enclosure. A heavy-duty enclosure, pedestal base for mounting
the enclosure, through-the-wal! bezel, front trim paneling, and
logo panel. for through-the-wall installation, are available as
purchase accessories.
Model 11 Same as the model 1, but with dual document feed
mechanism. Provides capability to issue the same or two different denominations in a single transaction; to load the same
denomination in both dispensers, effectively doubling the bill
capacity of a single denomination 3624 model 1; or to issue
currency and other documents as separate transactions (e.g.,
cash and traveler's checks).
Model 12 Same as the model 2, but with dual document feed
mechanism. Provides capability to issue the same or two different denominations in a single transaction; to load the same
denomination in both dispensers, effectively doubling the bill
capacity of a single denomination 3624 model 2; or to issue
currency and other documents as separate transactions (e.g.,
cash and traveler's checks).
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
M3624.1
April 78
accounts. Built-in depository envelope holder available as an
accessory on mdls 2 and 12. Envelope holder included with
depository on mdls 1 and 11.
Cash-Check: A single transaction that allows cash to be issued
to user, following deposit of a check.
Accepts Payments: Allows user to make various payments by
depositing cash or check or by having funds deducted from
user's account.
Depository Envelope Printer: A special feature which prints
unit and sequence number on envelope as it is deposited.
Additional Transactions: Provides account balance inquiry,
funds transfer transaction, and special transactions.
Keyboard/Guidance: Comprehensive set of function keys and
customized display messages step a user through a transaction
... keyboard and transaction functions can be modified through
programming. Option for either numeric or alphanumeric keypad.
Transaction Chaining: Allows user to perform a series of transactions with a single insertion of the magnetic stripe card.
Transaction Statements: Can print and issue individual statements or messages to user. Issues one statement per transaction in a series of chained transactions.
Journaling: Can print and retain documents within the 3624.
Backlighted Logo: Backlighted logo panel that can be customized, extending across full width of the front panel.
Host/Subhost Attachment: Attaches to the System/3 Model
15 host processor through a subhost 3601 /3602 via BSC.
Encrypt/Decrypt: Encryption of sensitive data for communication line transmission ... uses the U.S. Federal Information Processing Data Encryption Standard (DES) algorithm.
Multi-Institution Usage: Provision to accept magnetic stripe
cards of many different card issuers. Base capacity of issuer
identifier table within the 3624 can be expanded by table overflow request message to host or with Additional Storage Feature
(#1301) ... "Special Features."
Personal Identification: User account is identified through
reading magnetic stripe card. To validate the identity of the
person using the card, a personal identification number (PIN) is
used ... validation of PIN (up to 16 digits) may be performed in
the 3624 and/or host/subhost support system.
Installation Configurations: Can be installed inside a building,
for lobby use; or through-the-wall of a building, for walk-up or
drive-up use.
Highlights:
Multiple Languages: Capability to display different languages
based on identifier code recorded on magnetic stripe card.
Cartridge Loading: Currency cartridge provides for quick, easy
loading and convenient, tamper-resistent transportation of the
currency.
Third Track: A special feature provides reading and writing third
track data recorded on magnetic stripe card ... see "Special
Features."
Issues Cash: Issues one denomination (mdls 1 and 2), or two
denominations (mdls 11 and 12) up to a maximum of 20 bills
from a choice of accounts. Issues all bills at one time. in a single
stack ... no prepackaging or packets are used.
Additional Storage: Special feature(s) provide additional memory for expanding the number of custom messages and Financial
Institution Table entries ... see "Special Features."
Individual Document-Feed Control: Allows each cartridge
drive station on the dual-feed models 11 and 12 to be associated with a separate transaction select key (e.g., cash and
traveler's checks).
Accepts Deposits: Allows user to make a deposit to choice of
Modular Packaging: For model 2 or 12 through-the-wall installation, currency dispenser and depository mechanisms are contained in a heavy-duty enclosure independent of other functional
modules.
Compatability: 3614 family compatibility, designed to minimize
transition requirements.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- ----=- :::..-:
--------_.-
M3624.2
General Systems Division-Machines
Security: Models 2 and 12 installed with heavy-duty enclosure
and through-the-wall installation accessories meet security
requirements of UL291 and comply with the intent of U.S. Federal Regulation P for unattended automated paying and receiving
machines used when banking offices are closed.
Installation Units and Accessories: Heavy-duty enclosre,
through-the-wall bezel, optional pedestal base, front dress panel
and front trim border are required for installation of through-thewall models 2 and 12 ... these are available as purchase only
accessories, see" Accessories."
Walk-up Configuration: Recessed through-the-wall bezel,
designed to provide a shelf surface for the user, is recommended
for walk-up use.
Drive-up Configuration: Non-recessed through-the-wall bezel,
designed to position the user area nearer the outer wall surface,
is recommended for drive-up use.
A pedestal for mounting lobby models 1 and 11 is availble as an
optional purchase only accessory ... see "Accessories."
A logo panel and cartridges are required for installation of all
models and are available as purchase accessories ... see
"Accessories. "
Prerequisites
1) Each 3624 must be loop attached to a 3601/3602 for attachment to a System/3 Model 15.
For Loop Attachment to a 3601/3602: There must be an
available position on a local or remote loop of the 3601/3602.
The 3624 must have Terminal Loop Feature (#7820). If located
remotely from the 3601/3602, the 3624 can be attached to a
remote loop via any of the following: 1) Directly, using the 1200
BPS Loop Integrated Modem (#8001) ... 2) Via a subloop
through a 3603 Terminal Attachment Unit mdl 1 for 1200 bps or
a 3603 mdl 2 for 1200 or 2400 bps ... 3) Via subloop through a
3604 Keyboard Display mdl 2, 3 or 4 equipped with line Feature
Base (#4751 or #4752) and an appropriate modem ... 4) Via a
subloop through a 3614 equipped with Terminal Loop Feature
(#7820) and 1200 BPS Loop Integrated Modem (#8001) ... 5)
Via a subloop through another 3624 equipped with Terminal
Loop Feature (#7820) and 1200 BPS Loop Integrated Modem
(#8001). Note: The 3624 does not require #8001 if it is attached
to a remote loop via a subloop through a 3603, 3604, 3614,
3624, or if the 3624 is attached to a local loop. It is recommended that the 3624 not be attached through a 3604, as the 3624
might often be operating while the 3604 is not, e.g., weekends
and holidays.
For Direct Attachment to a Virtual Storage S/370
Processor: The S/370 requires a 3704/3705 Communications
Controller equipped with appropriate features to communicate
with the 3624 via SDLC ... see 3704 or 3705. The 3624 must
have an SDLC Communications Feature (#6301 or #6302).
2) Encryption modules BOKDES and BOKDPRS are required
with 360a Host Support Independent Release program ... see
Guide for Ordering Programs for feature numbers used to order
these modules on the 3600 Host Support IR. Source listings are
not orderable for, nor supplied with, these modules. Customers
should be informed of this fact before the 3624 is ordered.
3) .Depending upon the configuration, Additional Storage Feature
(#1005 or #1006) may be required on the 3601, or Additional
Storage Feature (#1006) may be required on the 3602 ... see
. 3601 or 3602.
4) For 3624 mdls 1 and 11: Pedestal, Lobby (#5510) is available
April 78
as an option for free-standing lobby configuration without a
depository feature ... see "Accessories." #5510 is purchase
only. Note: A pedestal is included with the Depository, Lobby
feature (#3233, #3234).
5) For 3624 mdls 2 and 12: The following units are required for
through-the-wall installation: (1) Heavy-duty Enclosure, Single
Function (#3901) or Dual Function (#3902). Note: Single function enclosure cannot be field modified to a dual function enclosure ... (2) Bezel, Through-the-Wall, Recessed or non-Recessed.
Recessed Bezel (#1490) is recommended for walk-Up configuration. Non-Recessed Bezel (#1491) is recommended for drive-up
configuration ... (3) Front Dress Panel (#3851) ... (4) Front Trim
Border, with Envelope Holder (#3961) or without Envelope Holder (#3962) ... (5) Pedestal for single function heavy duty enclosure (#4901) or dual function heavy duty enclosure (#4902) is
optional for mounting heavy duty enclosure at appropriate height
for walk-up or drive-up use. Storage Cabinet (#4903) is optional
when mounting dual function heavy-duty enclosure without
pedestal. Note: Storage cabinet is included with Pedestal
(#4901 or #4902). See "Accessories" for descriptions and
ordering information. These accessories are for pu~chase only.
6) Logo Panel: Required on all 3624 models. Shipment of the
logo pane! is determined by the following specify codes: (1)
#9401 if panel is to be shipped with the 3624. (2) #9402 if
panel(s) are to be shipped prior to the 3624. Note: Specify
feature #9402 can be used to order more than one panel if the
customer desires to have several panels delivered before the
3624 (e.g., for customization at one time). (3) #9403 if panel is
not to be ordered with the 3624 as it will either be ordered separately by part number
or ordered under specify
code #9402 on another 3624
see "Specify" and
"Accessories." Purchase only.
7) Currency Cartridge: For 3624 mdls 1 and 2: One is required.
For 3624 mdls 11 and 12: Two are required. Currency cartridges
are not included with the basic 3624 and must be ordered separately. Spare cartridges are recommended for convenience of
operation. A minimum of one spare cartridge for mdls 1 and 2
and two spare cartridges for mdls 11 and 12 must be made
available by the customer to the CE for normal 3624 maintenance ... see "Accessories." Purchase only. See "Customer
Responsibilities - 3624 Currency Cartridge" for installation and
maintenance requirements.
Customer Responsibilities
Installation Facilities: Because the 3624 mdl 2 or 12 attaches
to customer premises, installation of cables, pedestal, heavyduty enclosure, through-the-wall bezel, front dress panel, front
trim border, and logo panel are customer responsibilities. The
customer is also responsible for site preparation, such as cutting
a hole in the wall. For mdls 2 and 12, the customer is responsible for placement of the document feed and depository modules
into the heavy-duty enclosure and attachment of the I/O module
to the·· heavy-duty enclosure. Installation ·of cables and site
preparation are customer responsibilities also, for 3624 lobby
mdls 1 and 11.
Machine Maintenance: I BM will not provide warranty or maintenance service on a 3624 containing money. The customer will
be responsible for removing, controlling and reloading all money
in the 3624 so that IBM can fulfill its warranty and maintenance
obligations.
Keylocks: Covers included with lobby mdls 1 and 11 have a
locking handle, with a standard key, and provide for customer
insertion of an additional keylock cylinder. Covers included with
through-the-wall mdls 2 and 12 have a keylock cylinder, with a
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- -=
~-= General Systems Division-Machines
-- ---- ----_~_'t'_
standard key. Cabinet doors, included in all pedestals, have a
keylock cylinder with a standard key. Currency cartridges provide for customer insertion of a keylock. If the customer desires
to change the locks and/or keys included with those units or to
install additional keylock cylinders where provided for, he is
responsible for their procurement and installation.
Accessories Maintenance: The customer is responsible for
maintenance and parts procurement on all accessories. Repair
of the currency issue and depository slot protective environmental gates in the heavy-duty enclosure can be provided by IBM on
a time and material basis.
Currency Cartridge: The 3624 Currency Cartridge is a purchase
only accessory and is not included with the basic 3624. One
cartridge is necessary for mdls 1 and 2, and two for mdls 11 and
12 for installation checkout and operation of the 3624. Models 2
and 12 may also be operated with a single cartridge. Cartridges
are not maintained by IBM under the normal lease agreement or
MMMC for a purchased machine. The customer is responsible
for determining if the cartridge is the failing unit; for providing
cartridge for CE 3624 maintenance and testing (a minimum of
one spare cartridge for mdls 1 and 2 and two for mdls 11 and 12
must be made available by the customer
for normal
3624 maintenance); and for setting the keying system on the
cartridges and (:Irive stations so that there is the desired match
of currency denomination to drive station ... see "Customer
Responsibilities - 3624 Currency Cartridge" in Accessories for
installation and maintenance requirements.
Currency Sorting: To achieve satisfactory operation, the customer must ensure that only new currency and good-quality
used currency are used in the 3624. The general condition of
used currency may vary. Used currency must be inspected to
remove excessively worn, damaged, or torn bills. The IBM 3624
Operator's Guide, GA66-0006 and IBM 3624 Cartridge Owner's
Manual, GA66-0005, contain procedures for preparation of new
currency and inspection of used currency for operation in the
3624. For the 3624 mdls 11 and 12, the customer must ensure
that each feed mechanism is loaded with the proper denomination currency. The cartridges contain a keying mechanism which
can be set by the customer to ensure a match between specific
cartridges and cartridge drive stations.
Printer Ink Rolls: The customer is responsible for procurement
and replacement of ink rolls in transaction statement and depository printers.
Logo Lamp: The customer is responsible for procurement and
replacement of the lamp in the logo panel light assembly.
M3624.3
April 78
can be performed in conjunction with positive-file data bases.
The scope of security exposure expands with the degree of
offline implementation, for which the Third Track might be used.
The U.S. Federal Information Processing Data Encryption Standard (DES) algorithm is utilized to provide cryptographic security
in the 3624 and may be used in conjunction with the third track
application. IBM recommends that the customer consider using
DES for this purpose. An optional security feature of the proposed ANSI/ISO Third Track Data Content standard is a 'Crypto
Check Digits (CCD) fie1d in the card, that may be used to relate
the data elements of track 3 to the magnetic stripe. This does
not imply, however, that its use is not subject to fraud techniques. ANSI/ISO has not prescribed using the optional CCD field
or any specific CCD implementation technique. IBM recommends that the customer consider its value in his application,
weighing possible enhancements in security with economic and
performance implications for his system. I BM will continue to
pursue a course of action with customers and industry to maintain a high level of system security.
IBM reserves the right to modify the parameters of the track 3
function if the parameters of the final ANSI/ISO standard differ
from those now in the process of standardization. However, this
reservation of rights is not intended nor should it be construed
as a commitment by IBM to support parameters different from
those published by ISO/DIS 4909-June 1976."
Bibliography: IBM System/370 Bibliography, GC20-0370.
Specify
Voltage (120V, AC, l-phase, 60Hz): #9911 ... usable on 115V.
Cabling: Refer to Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA272766 and GA26-1658.
Keyboard Arrangement: #9301 for numeric-only keypad, or
#9302 for alphanumeric keypad ... alphanumeric arrangement is
the basic touch-pad telephone format with the Q and Z added
over the numeric "0."
Currency Cartridge: See Accessories for ordering instructions.
Currency Denomination: #9091 for 5, 10,20 dollar.
Keyboard: Specify one of the following for standard keyboard
... an RPQ should be submitted for any keyboard not shown
below. All are field installable. The Change key, available on
mdls 11 and 12, allows the user to request a change in the
denomination mix to be issued.
Damage: I BM is not responsible for intentional damage to the
3624 or any 3624 accessories. Repair of such damage is not
covered under the IBM Maintenance Contract, Lease Agreement
or under the Pilot Test Plan. Repair of such damage at cost of
time and materials will be provided for leased machines, Pilot
Test machines, and purchase machines.
System Integrity: Subhost operation, under control of the 3600
Finance Communication Controller, requires customer systems
design and support. Maintenance of system integrity in the
subhost is a customer responsibility.
IBM is not responsible for any loss of money to the financial
institution or its customers through the use of the 3624.
Third Track System Security Statement: Customers ordering
the Third Track feature (#7950) must be advised that:
"IBM believes that the system security is optimized in an online
environment, where PIN validation and transaction authorization
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----= -=
~-~ General Systems Division-Machines
-------...
_.-
--
From Account
To Account
Transaction Type
>
Q)
~
Q)
C)
>
Q),
Q)
C)
c:
(Q
.s::
U
0
~
II)
Qi
'0
0
::!:
«
#9351
9352
9353
9354
9355
9356
9357
9358
9359
9360
9361
9362
9363
9364
April 78
-
Specify Number
~
M3624.4
c:
(Q
.s::
1st Position Designator (#9491): Used in combination with
individual 3624 feature codes to determine which specific
controller-data set is to be distributed to t\le host-system location. Normally, one 3624 attached to a host-system processor is
specified #9491. However, more than one 3624 must be specified #9491 when there are both loop and direct attached configurations.
Specify #9491 for the following 3624s:
U
....
.s::
First 3624 loop attached (Feature #7820) via 3601/3602 to host
system processor .
...c:
~
::l
0
c>
0
N
.-
-........
II)
Q)
'0
0
::!:
#9451
9452
9453
9454
9455
9456
9457
9458
9459
9460
9461
9462
9463
9464
'0
Q)
II)
0
(j
iii
~
~
'0
...
.s::
~
Cii
Q)
(,,)
«
E
....e
... ... ... ...c:
.... ';;;
0
Q)
c:
w
c:
Q)
E
First 3624 direct attached (Feature #6301 or #6302) via SOLC
communications to a host-system processor.
(,,)
(,,)
Q)
,:,t.
~
.s::
U
c:
c:
(Q
(Q
a. iii j!:
(J)
III
0
(3)
(2) (2) (2) (2)
II)
'(j
Q)
a.
Q)
>
(Q
0-
E
>
(Q
0-
.s::
II)
(Q
U
'E
(Q
C)
~ ~
(Q
U
.s::
U(J)
(1)
(1 )
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
(1 )
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
... ...
=c
(1 )
0
U
~ .~
Q)
Q)
...
.s::
0
When 1st position (#9491) is specified, also specify one of the
following:
If magnetic tape is used at the host-system location:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
(1)
0
0
0
0
o
0
0
0
0
0 0
0 0
(1 )
2nd Position Designator (#9492): Used to identify additional
3624s attached to host-system ... controller-data set media are
not distributed to host-system location for any 2nd position
designated 3624s.
Notes:
(1) Key position does not appear on the keyboard panel; single
function is selected automatically.
(2) Prerequisite: Depository #3233, 3234, 3243 or 3244.
(3) Prerequisite: Depository #3233, 3234, 3243 or 3244 if any
special transactions are customized to require a deposit step.
Logo Panel Group: Specify one of the following: #9401 if logo
panel is to be shipped with 3624 ... #9402 if logo panel(s) is to
be shipped prior to the 3624 ... #9403 if logo panel is not to be
ordered with 3624 and will either be ordered separately by part
number
or has been ordered through #9402 on
another 3624. Note: More than one panel may be ordered on
specify code #9402 if customer desires to have several panels
delivered before the 3624 (e.g., for customization at one time).
Purchase only.
Controller-Data Designation: 1st and 2nd position designation
is required to control distribution and maintenance of controllerdata media necessary for 3624 load images. Specify #9491 or
#9492 as follows:
#94129-track, 800 bpi
#94139-track, 1600 bpi
#94149-track 6250 bpi
If magnetic tape is not used at the host-system location
(OOS/VS users only):
#943180 column cards
#943296 column cards
When 1st position (#9491) is specified, additional information is
required to determine the shipping address of the controller-data
media. Supplemental Specs are to be entered
exactly as
follows to indicate the shipping address of the host system
location.
Line
Line
Line
Line
1234-
I BM Programming Support
C/O (Name of Customer)
Street Address (or P.O. Box No.)
(etc.) - City, State, Zip
This is the address to which controller-data media will be automatically shipped after first 3624 is ordered.
Changes to 1st Position Designators for On-order and Installed 3624s: If a 1st position (#9491) 3624 is deferred, cancelled, or discontinued and 2nd position (#9492) 3624s have
been specified, then one 2nd position 3624 must be altered from
2nd to 1st position (from #9492 to #9491) to ensure continued
distribution of controller-data media to the host system location.
When altering a 3624 to 1st position, include all items as required to be specified when #9491 is specified (items specified
on previous 1st position 3624) ... if the host system location
changes the -input medium (e.g., from 1600 bpi to 6250 bpi
tape), the media specify code must be changed on the 3624 with
#9491 specified. In this case, the former media specify code
must be deleted and the new one added.
Special Features
Additional Storage Feature (#1301): Provides an additional
2,048 bytes of storage. The user can utilize this to increase the
number of custom messages, entries in Financial Institution
Table, and as might be necessary for RPQs. To determine the
number of additional storage features required, see IBM 3624
Programmer's Reference Manual and Component Description,
GC66-0009. Maximum: Two ... 4,096 bytes total. Field
Installation: Yes.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- ---.- ---.-- - .-. ------
-
M3624.5
General Systems Division-Machines
April 78
-~-.,
-~-.-
Depository, Lobby Without Depository Printer (#3233):
[Models 1 and 11 only] Provides envelope transport mechanism
leading from a controlled access slot to deposit receptacle inside
the 3624. The depository transport is designed to discourage
tampering with previously inserted deposits. Includes a pedestal
stand, with lockable rear access door and standard key, and a
built-in depository envelope holder. Deposit envelopes may vary
in size from 88.9mm x 152.4mm (3.5" x 6.0") to 114.3mm x
247.7mm (4.5" x 9.75") and shall be constructed of paper having basic weight of sub 20 through sub 28. Maximum thickness
of a deposit envelope and its contents is 12.7mm (0.5").
Limitation: Cannot be installed in Pedestal, Lobby (#5510) or
with Depository, Lobby with Depository Printer (#3234).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Depository Lobby With Depository Printer (#3234): [Models
1 and 11 only] Provides envelope transport mechanism leading
from a controlled access slot to deposit receptacle inside the
3624. The depository transport is designed to discourage tampering with previously inserted deposits. Includes a pedestal
stand, with lockable rear access door and standard key, and a
built-in depository envelope holder. Deposit envelopes may vary
in size from 88.9mm x 152.4mm (3.5" x 6.0") to 114.3mm x
247.7mm (4.5" x 9.75") and shall be constructed of paper having basic weight of sub 20 through sub 28. Maximum thickness
of a deposit envelope and its contents is 12.7mm (0.5"). Includes depository envelope printer that prints sequence number
on envelope as it passes through the depository throat. Six
numeric digits are printed horizontally at repeated intervals along
the envelope. Three digits are set by the customer engineer to
identify unit, and three digits are automatically sequenced when
envelope passes print station. The depository ink roll is IBM Part
No. 457149. It is the customer's responsibility to purchase and
replace the ink roll when required. Limitation: Cannot be installed in Pedestal, Lobby (#5510) or with Depository, Lobby
without Depository Printer (#3233). Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
Depository, Through-the-Wall Without Depository Printer
(#3243): [Models 2 and 12 only] Provides envelope transport
mechanism leading from a controlled access slot in the security
enclosure to deposit receptacle inside the 3624. In addition to
the controlled access slot in the security enclosure, the depository transport is designed to discourage tampering with previously
inserted deposits. Deposit envelopes may vary in size from
88.9mm x 152.4mm (3.5" x 6.0") to 114.3mm x 247.7mm (4.5"
x 9.75") and shall be constructed of paper having basic weight
of sub 20 to sub 28. Maximum thickness of a deposit envelope
and its contents is 12.7mm (0.5"). Prerequisite: Heavy-Duty
Enclosure, Dual Function (#3902) ... see "Accessories."
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Heavy-Duty Enclosure,
Single Function (#3901) or Depository, TTW with Depository
Printer (#3244). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Note:
Field installation requires that Heavy-Duty Enclosure, Dual Function (#3902) has been initially ordered.
Depository, Through-the-Wall With Depository Printer
(#3244): [Models 2 and 12 only] Provides envelope transport
mechanism leading from a controlled access slot in the security
enclosure to deposit receptacle inside the 3624. In addition to
the controlled access slot in the security enclosure, the depository transport is designed to discourage tampering with previously
inserted deposits. Deposit envelopes may vary in size from
88.9mm x 152.4mm (3.5" to 6.0") to 114.3mm x 247. 7mm (4.5"
x 9.75") and shall be constructed of paper having basic weight
of sub 20 to sub 28. Maximum thickness of a deposit envelope
and its contents is 12.7mm (0.5"). Includes depository envelope
printer that prints sequence number on envelope as it passes
through the depository throat. Six numeric digits are printed
horizontally at repeated intervals along the envelope. Three
digits are set by the customer engineer to identify unit, and three
digits are automatically sequenced when envelope passes the
print station. The depository ink roll is IBM Part No. 457149. It
is the customer's responsibility to purchase and replace the ink
roll when required. Prerequisite: Heavy-Duty Enclosure, Dual
Function (#3902) ... see "Accessories." Limitations: Cannot be
installed with Heavy-Duty Enclosure, Single Function (#3901) or
Depository, TTW Without Depository Printer (#3243).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Note: Field installation
requires that Heavy-Duty Enclosure, Dual Function (#3902) has
been initially ordered.
EIA Interface (#3701): Provides the appropriate cables and
interface logic necessary to attach an external modem for communications attachment to the 5/370 Processor via SDLC
through a 3704/3705 Communications Controller. Non-IBM
modems may be attached subject to the Multiple Suppliers
System Policy. Prerequisite: SDLC Communication Feature
(#6301 or #6302). Limitation: Cannot be installed with 1200
BPS Integrated Modem (#55000), or Terminal Loop Feature··
(#7820). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
IBM 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500): Provides an internal modem for communications attachment to the 5/370 processor via SDLC at 1200 bps over non-switched half-duplex or
duplex voice grade lines. Specify: #9651 for 4-wire strapping,
or #9652 for 2-wire strapping. Prerequisite: SDLC Communications Feature with Clocking (#6301). Limitation: Cannot be
installed with EIA Interface (#3701). SDLC Communications
Feature Without Clocking (#6302), Terminal Loop Feature
(#7820), or 1200 bps Loop Integrated Modem (#8001).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
SDLC Communications Feature W.ith Clocking (#6301):
Provides capability to attach to a host system via SDLC, e.g.,
5/370 through a 3704/3705. Required for attachment to communication facilities through the IBM 1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5500), or through the EIA Interface (#3701) to any 1200
bps external modem which does not have internal clocking.
Prerequisite: IBM 1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5500) if no
external modem, or EIA Interface (#3701) if external modem.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Terminal Loop Feature
(#7820), SDLC Communication Feature without Clocking
(#6302), or 1200 bps Loop Integrated Modem (#8001).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not recommended for field
installation if Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) is installed. SDLC
Communications Feature Without Clocking (#6302) can be
changed to #6301 in the field. Transmission: This feature operates over common carrier communication facilities. For information concerning these facilities, see M2700 pages.
SDLC Communications Feature Without Clocking (#6302):
Provides capability to attach to a host system via SDLC, e.g.,
5/370 through a 3704/3705. Required for attachment to communication facilities through the EIA Interface (#3701) to any
external modem which provides internal clocking speeds up to
4800 bps. Prerequisite: EIA Interface (#3701). Limitations:
Cannot be installed with Terminal Loop Feature (#7820), SDLC
Communications Feature With Clocking .<#6301), IBM 1200 bps
Integrated Modem (#5500), or 1200 bps Loop Integrated Modem (#8001). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not recommended for field installation if Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) is
installed. SDLC Communications Feature With Clocking (#6301)
can be changed in the field to #6302. Transmission: This feature operates over common carrier communication facilities. For
information concerning these facilities, see M2700 pages.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-- -- . ----- General Systems Division-l\fIachines
- - - ---
External Modems: I BM external modems that may be attached
are: (1) 3872 Modem at 2400 bps ... (2) 3874 Modem at 4800
bps.
Terminal Loop Feature (#7820): Provides capability to attach
to a 3601/3602 loop. Attachment to local loop is directly. Attachment to remote loop can be either directly or via remote subloop through a 3603, a 3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4, a 3614, or another
3624. Prerequisites: (1) Available position on the loop. (2)
Depending upon the configuration, the Additional Storage Feature (#1005 or #1006) may be required on the 3601/3602 .. , see
3601 or 3602. (3) Attachment to a 3601/3602 local loop directly
does not require an additional feature. (4) Attachment to a
3601 /3602 remot~ loop directly requires 1200 bps Loop Integrated Modem (#8001). (5) Attachment to a 3601/3602 remote
loop via remote subloop requires one of the following: 3603
Terminal Attachment Unit mdl 1 or 2 for 1200 bps or mdl 2 for
2400 bps ... 3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4 with Line Feature Base (#4751 or
#4752) and appropriate modem ... 3614 with Terminal Loop
Feature (#7820) and 1200 bps Loop Integrated Modem (#8001)
... or another 3624 with Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) and
'200 bps Loop Integrated Modem (#8001).
Specify
1) For attachment to a 3601/3602 local loop specify one of the
following loop speeds: #9062 for 1200 bps, #9063 for 2400 bps,
or #9064 for 4800 bps.
2) For attachment to 3601/3602 remote loop via subloop
through a 3603 mdl 1 or 2 at 1200 bps, #9062.
3) For attachment to 3601/3602 remote loop via subloop
through 3603 mdl 2 at 2400 bps, #9063.
4) For attachment to 3601/3602 remote loop via subloop
through 3604, 3614 or another 3624, #9062 for 1200 bps.
Limitations: (1) Cannot be installed with SDLC Communications
Feature (#6301 or #6302), EIA Interface (#3701), or IBM 1200
bps Integrated Modem (#5500). (2) Remote loop speed is 1200
bps maximum when attached directly or via subloop through
3603 mdl 1 or 2, 3604, 3614, or another 3624 ... is 2400 bps
maximum via subloop through 3603 mdl 2. (3) Loop Integrated
Modem (#8001) is not required .if the 3624 is attached 'to a local
loop, or via subloop to remote loop through 3603, 3604, 3614 or
another 3624. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not recom-
M3624.6
April 78
mended for field installation if SDLC Communications Feature
(#6,301 or #6302) is installed.
Third Track (#7950): Provides for reading data on track two
and/or both reading and writing data on track three of magnetic
stripe card. Presently conforms to ISO/3554/ AD1 Third Track
Standard, and proposed Data Content Standard ISO/DIS 4909.
Can read tracks two and three independently or in conjunction
with each other. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not recommended.
Transaction Statement Printer (#8201): Prints document
showing record of transaction and issues to user through the
transaction statement slot. Prints documents for audit use that
can be retained in a journal stacker in the 3624. Print feed hopper has a capacity of 2,000 documents. Journal stacker has a
capacity of 400 documents. Data is printed on 96-column card
stock 66.7mm x 82.6mm (2-5/8" x 3-1/4") in size. Provides a
57 character set consisting of 56 printable graphics and space
(blank). Four lines can be printed with up to 34 characters per
line ... maximum of 136 characters on each document. The data
to be printed is determined by the host application program.
Printing is overlapped with currency issue and user deposit
cycles. Card Limitations: The 96-column card stock used in the
statement printer must not have corner cuts.
1200 BPS Loop Integrated Modem (#8001): An internal modem for attachment to a 3601/3602 remote loop. Operates at
1200 bps over non-switched unconditioned voice-grade lines.
Prerequisite: Terminal Loop Feature (#7820). Limitation: Not
required if 3624 is attached to a 3601/3602 remote loop
through a 3603, 3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4, 3614, or another 3624 ... or
if attached to a 3601/3602 local loop. If there are both a 3604
and a 3624 located at the same remote loop location that does
not have a 3603 or 3614, it is recommended that the loop modem (#8001) be located on the 3624. because the 3624 might
often be operating while the 3604 is not, e.g., weekends.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
3624 Accessories
3624 MODELS 2 and 12 ... INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
(Purchase only) Provides heavy-duty steel enclosure, through-the-wall bezel. front trim border. front dress panel, and pedestal base for
installation of mdls 2 and 12 in configurations suitable for walk-up or drive-up use.
A heavy-duty enclosure is required. Two heavy-duty enclosures are available. A single function enclosure houses the currency
dispensing mechanism on mdls 2 and 12 that do not have a depository. A dual function enclosure houses both the currency dispensing
and the depository mechanisms on mdls 2 and 12 that have a depository. The dual function enclosure can also be used to house the
currency dispensing mechanism only. on mdls 2 and 12 that do not have a depository. Both enclosures have a single rear access door
that includes a combination lock and provides for a dial lock. The combination of the combination lock is set by the customer. The dial
lock must be procured by the customer. A second combination lock is available as an optional feature. Both enclosures have a
penetration-detection alarm grid across the inside of the front face. Construction of the heavy-duty enclosures meets requirements of
UL291 and complies with the intent of U. S. Federal Regulation P for unattended paying and receiving machines.
Pedestal bases are available in a number of sizes to mount the enclosure at a height most suitable for walk-up or drive-up use. The
recommended nominal mounting heights are 1321 mm (52 inches) from keyboard centerline to walkway for walk-up use and 1067 mm
(42 inches) from keyboard centerline to driveway for drive-up use. The difference in elevation between walkway or driveway and the
mounting surface should be considered in selecting the pedestal height ... refer to Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA27-2766
and GA26-1658. A lockable storage (!abinet with standard key is included in the pedestal base. A lockable storage cabinet only is also
available that can be used with the dual function heavy-duty enclosure to mount the enclosure directly to a floor surface where a
pedestal is not required.
A through-the-wall bezel, front trim border that fits around the bezel, and front dress panel that fits within the bezel are required. Two
through-the-wall bezels are available--one with a recessed bezel-providing a convenient shelf surface for user and recommended for a
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
I'll
-- -- - -----------_.
----- ---.~
~---
-..
M3624.7
General Systems Division-Mac~,i~es
Apri178
walk-up installation, and another with a non-recessed bezel positioning the user guidance area near the outside wall surface for more
convenient use by a vehicle occupant and recommended for a drive-up installation. Two front trim borders are availabl~ne with an
envelope holder for depository transactions, and another without an envelope holder.
Warranty: These accessories are warranted free from defects in materials and workmanship for 90 days, commencing either on the
date of installation or 30 days after shipment, whichever occurs first. IBM's obligation is limited to providing replacement parts on an
exchange basis during the warranty period.
Delivery Instructions: Supplemental Specs for installation accessory items must be submitted at least 90 days prior to the 3624
Friday schedule date. Due to installation requirements, the heavy-duty enclosure and pedestal items will generally be shipped three
weeks prior to the 3624. Other accessories will be shipped with the 3624. Supplemental Specs (via terminal entry) are to be entered
exactly as follows to indicate destination of these items:
Line 1 - c/o (Name of Customer)
Line 2 - Customer Designated Delivery Point
(Note special considerations described below)
Line 3 - Street Address
Line 4 (etc.) - City, State, Postal Zone
The "Heavy-Duty Enclosure" included in this group of accessories is a steel enclosure with dimensions of approximately 432 mm x 914
mm x 1575 mm (17" x 36" x 62") and weight of approximately 950 kg (2100 pounds) for the dual function unit, and dimensions of
approximately 432 mm x 914 mm x 991 mm (17" x 36" x 39") and weight of approximately 680 kg (1500 pounds) for the single
function unit. The enclosure does not have casters and will be transported on a skid.
•
The item will be shipped via common carrier to the delivery point designated by the customer and may require special handling or
rigging at destination. The customer should be advised that it is suggested this item be delivered directly to a local drayman that has
facilities to move an item of these dimensions and weight. The customer then should make local provisions to have the enclosure
delivered for physical installation at the selected site.
Heavy-Duty Enclosure, Single Function (#3901): Used to enclose currency dispensing mechanism on 3624 mdls 2 or 12 that do not
have a depository. Prerequisite: Bezel, Through-the-Wall (#1490 or 1491), Front Dress Panel (#3951), and Front Trim Border Without
Envelope Holder (#3962). Note: Pedestal (#4901), that includes a lockable storage cabinet, is available in several heights to mount the
single function enclosure. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Depository, Through-the-Wall (#3243 or 3244)' Pedestal for Dual
Function Heavy-Duty Enclosure (#4902), Storage Cabinet for Dual-Function Heavy-Duty Enclosure (#4903), or Front Trim Border with
Envelope Holder (#3961). Single Function Heavy-Duty Enclosure (#3901) cannot be field upgraded to a Dual Function Heavy-Duty
Enclosure (#3902).
Heavy-Duty Enclosure, Dual Function (#3902): Used to enclose the currency dispensing and the depository mechanisms on 3624
mdls 2 or 12 that have a depository. May also be used to enclose the currency dispensing mechanism only and provide spare lockable
storage space on 3624 mdls 2 or 12 that do not have a depository. Prerequisites: Bezel, Through-the-Wall (#1490 or 1491); Front
Dress Panel (#3951), and Front Trim Border, With or Without Envelope Holder (#3961 or 3962). Note: Pedestal (#4902), that includes a
lockable storage cabinet, is available in several heights to mount the dual function enclosure ... a lockable storage cabinet only (#4903)
is also available to mount dual function enclosure directly to a floor surface where a pedestal is required. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with Pedestal for Single Function Heavy-Duty Enclosure (#4901). Single F.unction Heavy-Duty Enclosure (#3901) cannot be
field upgraded to a Dual Function Heavy-Duty Enclosure (#3902).
Heavy-Duty Enclosure, Dual Function (#3902): Used to enclose the currency dispensing and the depository mechanisms on 3624
mdls 2 or 12 that have a depository. May also be used to enclose the currency dispensing mechanism only and provide spare lockable
storage space on 3624 mdls 2 or 12 that do not have a depository. Prerequisites: Bezel, Through-the-Wall (#1490 or 1491), Front
Dress Panel (#3951), and Front Trim Border, With or Without Envelope Holder (#3961 or 3962). Note: Pedestal (#4902), that includes a
lockable storage cabinet, is available in several heights to mount the dual function enclosure ... a lockable storage cabinet only (#4903)
is also available to mount dual function enclosure directly to a floor surface where a pedestal is not required. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with Pedestal for Single Function Heavy-Duty Enclosure (#4901). Single Function Heavy-Duty Enclosure (#3901) cannot be
field upgraded to a Dual Function Heavy-Duty Enclosure (#3902).
Dual Lock (#3375): (Optional) Provides second combination-lock on rear access door. Field Installation: No.
Bezel, Through-the-Wall, Recessed (#1490), Non-Recessed (#1491): Bezel for through-the-wall installation of 3624. #1490 is
recessed, providing a shelf surface, and is recommended for walk-up installation. #1491 is non-recessed, placing the user guidance
area nearer the outside wall surface for convenience of a vehicle. occupant, and is recommended for drive-up installation. Prerequisites:
Heavy-Duty Enclosure, Single or Dual Function (#3901 or 3902). Front Dress Panel (#3951 and Front Trim Border With· or Without
Envelope Holder (#3961 or 3962).
i.
Pedestal for Single Function Heavy-Duty Enclosure (#4901): For mounting 3624 mdls 2 or 12 that use the single function enclosure.
Consists of a base stand and a lockable storage cabinet. A standard key is provided. Available in heights to position the keyboard
centerline 1067, 1194, or 1321 mm (42, 47, or 52 inches) from mounting surface. Note: If single function enclosure is installed without
a pedestal, the keyboard centerline is 368 mm (14.5 inches) from mounting surface. Prerequisite: Heavy-Duty Enclosure, Single
Function (#3901). Limitation: Cannot be installed with Heavy-Duty Enclosure, Dual Function (#3902). Specify: Height of keyboard
centerline from mounting surface:
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------
--:::..-:
-=
=
- -------.--.----.,.-
,M3624.8
General Systems Division-Machines
April 78
"
~-
#97011067 mm (42 inches)
-1197021194 mm (47 inches)
#97031321 mm (52 inches)
Pedestal for Dual Function Heavy-Duty Enclosure (#4902): For mounting 3624 mdls 2 or 12 that use the dual function enclosure.
Consists of base stand and a lockable cabinet. A standard key is provided. Available in sizes to position the keyboard centerline 1067,
1194, or 1321 mm (42, 47, or 52 inches) from mounting surface. Note: See Storage Cabinet for Dual Function Heavy-Duty Enclosure
(#4903) for installing with keyboard centerline height lower than 1067 mm (42 inches) from mounting surface. Limitation: Heavy-Duty
Enclosure, Dual Function (#3902). Limitation: Cannot be installed with Heavy-Duty Enclosure, Single Function (#3901). Specify:
Height of keyboard centerline from mounting surface:
#97011067 mm (42 inches)
#97021194 mm (47 inches)
#97031321 mm (52 inches)
Storage Cabinet for Dual Function Heavy-Duty Enclosure (#4903): Lockable storage cabinet only, for 3624 mdls 2 or 12 dual
function enclosure mounted directly to floor surface without pedestal. The keyboard centerline height is 965 mm (38 inches) from
mounting surface. A standard key is provided. Prerequisite: Heavy-Duty Enclosure, Dual Function (#3902). Limitation: Cannot be
installed with Heavy-Duty Enclosure, Single Function (#3901). Note: Storage cabinet is included with the Pedestal for Dual Function
Heavy-Duty Enclosure (#4902).
Front Dress Panel (#3951): Provides panel to cover face of heavy-duty enclosure and I/O moduJe. Prerequisites: Bezel, Through-theWall, Recessed or Non-Recessed (#1490 or 1491), and Heavy-Duty Enclosure, Single or Dual Function (#3901 or 3902).
Front Trim Border, With Envelope Holder (#3961). Without Envelope Holder (#3962): Provides trim paneling around the bezel to
seal through-the-wall installation. #3961 includes build-in depository envelope holder and is available only when the depository fature is
installed. #3962 does not include a depository envelope holder. Prerequisites: (1) Bezel, Through-the-Wall, Recessed or Non-recessed
(#1490 or 1491) ... (2) Front Trim Border, With Envelope Holder (#3961) requires Depository, Through-the-Wall (#3243 or 3244).
Feature
(one req'd)
Heavy-Duty Enclosure,
Single Function
Dual Function
Dual Lock
(optional)
(one req'd)
Bezel, Through-the-Wall,
Recessed
Non-Recessed
(Drive-up use)
Pedestal, (includes storage
cabinet)
(optional)
for Single Function
Heavy-Duty Enclosure
(see "Specify"
above for mounting height)
for Dual Function
Heavy-Duty Enclosure
(see "Specify"
above for mounting height)
Storage Cabinet for Dual Function
(optional)
Heavy-Duty Enclosure
(Keyboard height =
965 mm (38 inches)
Front Dress Panel
(one req'd)
(one req'd)
Front Trim Border,
With Envelope Holder
Without Envelope Holder
#3901
#3902
#3375
#1490
#1491
#4901
#4902
#4903
#3951
#3961
#3962
3624 MODELS 1 and 11 .,. PEDESTAL. LOBBY (#5510):
(Purchase only) Provides optional mounting stand for 3624 mdls 1 or 11 that do not have depository feature. Note: A pedestal base
with casters is included with the lobby model depository special feature. Limitation: #5510 cannot be installed with Depository, Lobby
(#3233 or 3234).
ACCESSORY PRICES:
Feature
Pedestal, Lobby
#5510
3264 LOGO PANEL (#9401.9402 or 9403):
(Purchase only) Backlighted Logo' Panel, suitable for customization by silkscreening or other acceptable process.
ACCESSORY PRICES:
Feature
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-_ - a .-__
----=
=
-- --=--~
----
_~_'t'_
M3624.9
April 78
General Systems Division-Machines
#9401
If #9401 is specified, logo panel will be shipped with 3624
If #9402 is specified, logo panel will be shipped approximately three weeks prior to 3624. Note: More than one panel may be ordered
when #9402 is specified (e.g., customer may desire to order spares or to arrange to have several panels delivered for customization at
one time). When more than one panel is ordered using #9402, then #9403 should be specified on the other 3624s to avoid duplicating
orders for logo panels.
#9402
Logo Panel
Logo Panel
Machine
Part No.
3624 mdl 1 or 11
3624 mdl2 or 12
945618
945617
3624 CURRENCY CARTRIDGE:
(Purchase only) Portable currency container, interchangeable between 3624s. Cartridge case is made of a high-impact resistant, fire
retardant material. Removable access cover and built-in carrying handle, for ease of loading and transportation. Locking mechanism
provides for customer installation of keylock and affixing security seals to help prevent unauthorized access to contents during storage
or transport of the cartridge. The cartridge is connected to a cartridge drive station in the 3624 for power and communication of
cash-low and cash-out currency levels. A keying system is provided so that a match between the cartridge and the cartridge drive
station must be satisfied before the cartridge can be properly loaded in the drive station. The maximum new bill capacity is 2300 bills.
The used bill capacity is approximately 1700.
Customer Responsibilities - 3624 Currency Cartridge: The customer must be advised that: (1) The customer is responsible for
determining if the cartridge is the failing unit ... (2) The customer should schedule the frequency of cleaning and belt replacement
procedure for optimum cartridge performance according to the usage, to maintain maximum machine availability .,. (3) The customer
may repair cartridge or send back to Repair Center (see "Maintenance" below) ... (4) The customer is responsible for determining
required spares (see "Spares" below) '" (5) The customer is responsible for providing cartridge for CE 6324 maintenance and testing; a
minimum of one spare cartridge for mdls 1 and 2 and two spare cartridges for mdls 11 and 12 must be made available by customer
for normal 3624 maintenance ... (6) The customer is responsible for setting the keying system on the cartridges and drive
stations so that there is the desired match of currency denomination to drive station ... (7) Purchaser agrees that I BM is relieved of
responsibility for all claims, including, but not limited to, loss of currency or documents contained in, dispensed by, or associated with
the cartridge ..
Spares: The customer may wish to replace (1) an empty or partially loaded cartridge with a fully loaded cartridge, (2) a failing cartridge
with a spare for problem determination or while malfunctioning cartridge is being repaired, (3) a cartridge to enable
IBM
to
perform 3624 maintenance and testing. The customer should be advised to purchase sufficient cartridges to cover the above uses. The
number of cartridges recommended is dependent upon the total number of cartridge drive stations the customer has installed,
application requirements, physical location of 3624s, and location where cartridges are temporarily stored and loaded. The customer
must be advised that it is recommended that spare cartridges should remain in use and not be stored for extended periods. A
recommended quantity of spare cartridges and spare replacement belts per cartridge drive station is shown below. It assumes for every
loaded cartridge installed in a cartridge drive station, another cartridge is available for currency replenishment. In addition, approximately one spare is available for every three cartridge drive stations. This should provide sufficient quantity of spares for customer
3624 testing and for temporary replacement of cartridges in repair. These quantities should be adjusted to the customer's particular
application requirements once the physical environment and usage affect on the cartridge and belt wear is understood. The customer
can replace separator and restraint belts in conjunction with performing the recommended operator cleaning and belt replacement
procedure.
Cartridge Drive
Stations (*)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Recommended Minimum Quantity Spare
Recommended Quantity of Cartridges Replacement Belts
(including spares)
Separator Belt PIN
945307
Restraint Belt PIN 945242
3
5
7
10
12
14
17
19
21
23
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---::- :..:,?-.:::
- --_.--- General Systems Division-Machines
---
M3624.10
April 78
24 mdls 1 and 2 have one cartridge drive station and mdls 11 and 12 have two cartridge drive stations, Cartridges and belts required for
more than ten drive stations can be extrapolated from the above table by taking a multiple of these numbers. Additional quantities over
the recommended minimum quantity of spare replacement belts should be ordered as required, as part of the customer periodic belt
inspection and replacement schedule for cartridges (in conjunction with IBM's general recommendation).
Maintenance: Cartridges are not maintained by IBM under the normal lease agreement or MMMC for purchased machine. A
recommended operator cleaning and belt replacement procedure is provided in the IBM 3624 Cartridge Owner's Manual GA66-0005;
under adverse operator conditions, it is the customer's responsibility to modify the procedure to meet his own particular requirements,
The customer can replace separator and restraint belts in conjunction with performing the recommended procedure. If the cartridge is in
need of repair, he can send it to a designated IBM Repair Center. It is the customer's responsibility to package the unit in the
designated shipping container and ship it prepaid to the designated I BM Repair Center.
IBM Repair Center Service: For cartridge repair, the customer will fill out an IBM Repair Authorization Form GX27-2981, pack it and
the defective cartridge in the designated shipping container, and ship it prepaid to the designated IBM Repair Center, where repair will
be made if the cartridge is repairable, The charge for the repair of the cartridge at IBM Repair Center will cover handling, inspection,
cleaning, repair, adjustment, testing, and return shipping, Billing will be at IBM's applicable hourly rates. In addition, all parts needed
will be billed at IBM's prevailing parts prices. Alternately, upon request, the IBM Repair Center will provide, for a minimum charge, an
estimate of repair charges.
If on the basis of an inspection, the repair center concludes that a cartridge is not repairable, no further wor,k will be performed and the
cartridge will be returned to the customer with a minimum charge to cover handling; inspection, testing, and return shipping charges.
Warranty: The cartridge is warranted to be free from defects in workmanship and material for a period of 90 days, commencing either
on the date of installation or 30 days after shipment, whichever occurs first. Warranty service for the cartridge will be performed at the
IBM Repair Center. If warranty service is performed at an IBM Repair Center, the customer will fill out an IBM Repair Authorization
Form, GX27-2981, pack it and the defective cartridge in the designated shipping container, and ship it prepaid to the designated IBM
Repair Center.
Ordering: Order by feature number below and specify quantity.
Feature
3624 Currency Cartridge
#9110
** Time and Material at IBM Repair Center only.
Note: For cartridge parts, refer to the IBM 3624 Cartridge Owner's Manual, GA66-0005.
Dual Lock (#3375) is available as an option, providing a second
combination lock on the rear access door. Penetration-detection
grid is provided across the inside front face of enclosure.
Dual Lock (#3375): An optional second combination-lock for
the rear access door of a Heavy-Duty Enclosure (#3901 or
#3902). Field Installation: Available at time of manufacture
only.
Bezel. Through-the-Wall (#1490 or #1491): [Mdls 2 and 12
only] Required for installation of mdls 2 and 12. Provides bezel
to interface outside wall surface with 3624 enclosure throughthe-wall of building or other structure. #1490: A recessed bezel
that provides a shelf surface. Recommended for walk-up use.
#1491: A non-recessed bezel which positions the user guidance
nearer outside wall surface. Recommended for drive-up use.
Pedestal. for Heavy-Duty Enclosures (#4901 or #4902): [Mdls
2 and 12 only] Available for installation of mdls 2 and 12. A
mounting stand to locate the 3624 at a height most convenient
for user operation .,. includes a lockable storage cabinet '"
available for single and dual heavy-duty enclosures in heights
appropriate for walk-up or drive-up use. Recommended nomin'al
keyboard heights are 52" for walk-up, 42" for drive-up. #4901:
for 3624s that use the single function enclosure (#3901). #4902:
for 36245 that use the dual function enclosure (#3902). Specify:
For keyboard centerline height from mounting surface '" #9701:
for 1067mm (42") ... #9702 for 1194mm (47") .,. #9703: for
1321mm (52").
Pedestal, Lobby (#5510): [Mdls 1 and 11 only] A mounting
stand for free-standing configuration of lobby model without the
depository feature. Note: #5510 is not required if customer
intends to install a 3624 mdl 1 or 11, without the depository
feature, on an alternative mounting surface or stand. #5510 is
not required if a 3624 mdl 1 or 11 is installed with a depository
feature (#3233 or #3234) since a pedestal base is included in
#3233 or #3234.
Front Dress Panel (#3951): [Mdls 2 and 12 only] Required for
installation of mdls 2 and 12. Provides user guidance area panel
covers and logo lamp assembly.
Front Trim Border (#3961 or #3962): [Mdls 2 and 12 only]
Required for installation of mdls 2 and 12. Provides trim border
panel around the bezel on the outside .of building for outer seal
of through-the-wall installation. 3961: includes a built-in depository envelope holder. #3962: has no envelope holder.
Logo Panel (#9401. #9402. #9403): [All Models] Required for
installation on all models of the 3624. Provides a panel that can
be personalized by the customer (silk-screened, painted, etc.).
Can be shipped with the 3624 or prior to the 3624. See "Specify
Section" above for specification of appropriate specify code.
Currency Cartridge (#9110): Required for installation of any
3624. Portable container for loading, storing, transporting. and
issuing currency or other approved documents .. , interchangeable between 3624s. See customer responsibilities for recommended number of spare cartridges, and maintenance.
Storage Cabinet. For Dual Function Heavy-Duty Enclosure
(#4903): [Mdls 2 and 12 only) Available for installation of mdls 2
and 12. A lockable storage cabinet for installation of the dual
function heavy-duty enclosure (#3902) directly to a mounting
surface where a pedestal is not required.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
-
--=
=
~--= General Systems Division-Machines
---------- ...
Th is page left blank intentionally.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M3624.11
April 78
----- - -- - General Systel1ls Division-Machines
=---=
- ------
-- -=
M3707.1
April 78
-~-.,-
3707 REMOTE
STATION
DATA
ACQUISITION
AND
CONTROL
Purpose: To provide a remote teleprocessing station with digital
input/ output and analog input capability.
Models
I/O Feature Capacity
A7
A15
A23
A31
7
Analog Input Multiplexer Model 1: Provides a solid state
multiplexing switch to connect one of 16 analog input points to
the analog to digital converter. One of two gain ranges can be
optioned where the full scale range for all 16 points is +5.12
volts or +51.2 millivolts.
Analog Input Multiplexer Model 2: Identical to Analog Input
Multiplexer Model 1 except that high voltage transient protection
is provided.
15
23
31
Highlights: Provides control, addressing and checking logic to
receive and transmit digital input/output and analog input data.
The model A7 and A 15 enclosure is a one bay 19" relay rack.
The model A23 and A31 enclosure is a two bay 19" relay rack.
Customer access is provided at the rear of the enclosure by
panels with screw down type barrier strips provided with each
I/O feature requiring customer connection. Cooling for all models is by natural convection. Refer to the I/O Feature Configurator, located at the end of this section, for allowable feature
intermix. The following I/O features can be addressed.
Digital Input Model 1: Provides 16 digital input points where
each point is a TTL compatible, 2 terminal circuit. This feature
can be optioned to operate in register mode, where it can be
read as either latching and/or unlatching inputs, or as eight
buffered 15 bit pulse counters.
Digital Input Model 2: Identical to Digital Input Model 1 except
that each point is an isolated, voltage sense (48V or 129V). 2
terminal circuit and is protected against high voltage transients.
Digital Output Model 1: Provides 16 TTL compatible digital
output points. One of two operating modes can be selected.
Either all points are controlled as a 16 position register where
each point can be set or reset, or one of the 16 points can be
selected and commanded to operate for a programmable time
duration from 100 milliseconds to 25.5 seconds in 100 millisecond increments. Read before execute capability is provided on
a selectable basis.
Digital Output Model 2: Identical to Digital Output Model 1
except that each point is a form A mercury wetted relay contact
rated at 500 Vdc maximum and 1A dc maximum; the product of
peak voltage and peak current not to exceed 100 VA and is
protected against high voltage transients.
This feature requires that either +48Vdc or + 129 Vdc be provided to power the relay coil driver circuits. This' power must be
wired by the customer to the customer termination panel provided by this feature. Refer to Installation Manual-Physical
Planning, GA34-0009 for recommended wiring practices.
Digital Output Model 3: Identical to Digital Output Model 1
except that each point is a medium power, solid state, optically
isolated digital output which operates at up to 129 Vdc at 250
MA dc and is protected against high voltage transients.
Analog Input Multiplexer Model 3: Identical to Analog Input
Multiplexer Model 2 except that it also has the capability for
simultaneously storing, sequentially converting and then buffering all 16 inputs on command. Note: One Digital Output Model
2 feature per 3707 is required to control one or more of these
features.
To support and enhance the I/O features, the following special
features are also available. These features do not preempt an
I/O feature address position.
Analog Voltage Reference: Provides two stable and precise
voltage levels for use as reference inputs to the Analog Input
Multiplexer features. Output levels are 4.5 V and 45mv. Each
level can drive up to four analog inputs.
Analog Power Supply: Provides +24 Vdc to the Analog Input
features.
Digital I/O Power Supply: Provides a +48V, 6A dc power
supply for use with the Digital Input/Output features. For example, this supply can be used by the customer to power and drive
circuits associated with the Digital Output Model 2 and 3 and
Digital Input Model 2 features if customer power is not available
for this purpose.
Customer Responsibilities: See System 370 in "Systems."
System 3707 Summary: See IBM 3707 Remote Data Acquisition and Control Station Introduction and Configura tor, GA340014.
Specify
1. Voltage: #9901 for 115V, AC, 1-Phase, 60 cycle; #9902 for
208 V, AC, 1-Phase, 60 cycle; #9904 for 230V, AC, 1-Phase,
60 cycle; or #9906 for 48VDC; #9907 for 129VDC.
2. Communications: A communications interface is required,
see "Special Features."
Model Changes: Field installable. Changes from AC to DC
power and vice versa, (See "Specify" (1) ... above), are not field
installable.
This feature requires that either +48 Vdc or + 129 Vdc be provided to power the base drive circuit for the output drivers. This
power must be wired by the customer to the customer termination panel provided with this feature. Refer to the Installation
Manual-Physical Planning for recommended wiring practices.
Analog Input Control: Provides an analog to digital converter
and the address controls for up to seven analog input multiplexers. Multiplexer types can be intermixed. The converter output
is a binary value of 11 bits plus sign. The maximum conversion
rate is 2.5 milliseconds per point.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
III
---.- - ----- - - _.---~
-~-
M3707.2
General Systems Division-Machines
For connection to the communications line, one of the following
features must be selected.
Communications Adapter (#1510): A communications adapter
with speeds of 134.5, 600 or 1200 bps in the asynchronous
mode and up to 4800 bps in the synchronous mode (when the
attached modem provides its own clocking). The modem interface adheres to the EIA RS232-C specification.
Because of the unique line discipline employed by the 3707,
communication may only be with a System/7 with either a
TPMF (RPQ 008010) or a TPMM
-
the public switched telephone network at speeds of 134.5,
600 or 1200 bps (asynchronous) or up to 4800 bps
(synchronous). or
-
a Type 3002 non-switched voice grade channel at speeds of
134.5, 600 or 1200 bps (asynchronous ) or up to 4800 bps
(synchronous) .
Limitation: Mutually exclusive with #1520. Maximum: One per
3707. Field Installation: Yes. Modem: IBM 3872 at 2400 bps
on the public switched telephone network or on a Type 3002
(with C1 Conditioning) non-switched voice grade channel.
Communications Line Interface (#1520): Provides a communications adapter and an asynchronous modem at speeds of
134.5, 600 or 1200 bps. This modem is compatible with the
IBM 1200 bps Integrated Modem.
Because of the unique line discipline employed by the 3707,
communication may only be with a System/7 with either a
TPMF (RPQ 008010) or a TPMM (RPQ 008011) and an IBM
1200 bps Integrated Modem over a Type 3002 non-switched
voice grade channel. Limitation: Mutually exclusive with
#1510. Maximum: One per 3707. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Type 3002 Channel.
Note: The communications between the 3707 and a Host
System/7 utilizes a unique line discipline incorporating the following characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Data Checking
Bit-Significant Data
Multi-byte data frames
Single-frame or multi-frame data transmission
Compatible with asynchronous or synchronous modems
Point-to-point or multipoint capability.
The address location of certain features must be specified. The
"I/O Feature Configurator" located at the end of this section is
used for this purpose. For each feature ordered that requires
this specification, indicate the feature number plus a location
specify code based on the feature type. Note: Specifications
stated are a generalized description of the system features.
Detail specifications must be quoted or proposed from the latest
revision of the IBM 3707 Remote Data Acquisition and Control
Station Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA34-0009.
Analog Input Control (#1010): Provides control and analog-todigital conversion for up to 7 analog input multiplexer features.
Converter output is -11 bits plus sign. The maximum conversion
rate is 2.5 ms per point. An address location must be specified
per the _"I/O Feature Configurator" for each #1010 ordered.
Limitation: Address locations available for #1010 are fixed.
Maximum: 1 for model A7, 2 for model A15, 3 for model A23,
4 for model .6.31. Field installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Analog
Power Supply (#5503).
Analog Input Multiplexer Model 1 (#1015): Provides 16 solid
state multiplexer points for analog input signals. All signals may
either be in the range of +5.12 volts or in the range of +51.2
April 78
millivolts. Limitation: Address locations available for #1015 are
fixed depending on the address location of the Analog Input
Control (#1010) to which they are interfacing. Maximum: Six
for model A7, 13 for model A15, 20 for model A23, and 27 for
model A31. Field installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Analog Input
Control (#1010).
Analog Input Multiplexer Model 2 (#1020): Provides 16 solid
state multiplexer points, each with high voltage transient protection, **for analog input signals. All signals may either be in the
range of +5.12 volts or in the range of +51.2 millivolts.
Limitation: Address locations for #1020 are fixed depending on
the address location of the Analog Input Control -(#1010) to
which they are interfacing. Maximum: Six for model A7, 13 for
model A15, 20 for model A23, and 7 for model A31. Field
installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Analog Input Control (#1010).
Analog Input Multiplexer Model 3 (#1025): Provides 16 solid
state multiplexer points, each with high voltage transient
protection** for analog input signals. With this model the input
signals can be read sequentially after first executing a lock-up
command which simultaneously stores all of the input signals, or
can be read sequentially without the use of the lock-up command. All signals must be either in the range of +5.12 volts or
in the range of +51.2 millivolts. Limitation: Address locations
available for #1025 are fixed depending on the address location
of the Analog Input Control (#1010) to which they are interfacing. Maximum: Five for model A7, 12 for model A15, 19 for
model A23, and 26 fot model A31. Field installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Analog Input Control (#1010) and Oig,ital Output
Model 2 (#3345).
Analog Voltage Reference (#1280): Provides one low level and
one high level voltage source for use as reference inputs to the
analog input multiplexer features. Each level can drive up to four
analog inputs. Maximum: One per Analog Input Control
(#1010). Field installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Analog Input
Control (#1010).
Digital Input Model 1 (#3230): Provides 16 latching and/or
unlatching TTL compatible digital input points. These points can
be optioned for register in or pulse counter in operation. An
address location must be specified per the "I/O Feature
Configurator" located at the end Of this section. Maximum: 7,
15,23, or 31 per 3707 dependent on the model ordered.
Limitation: When installed with other I/O features, the maximum applies to the total number of address locations available.
Each addressable feature ordered reduces the maximum by one.
Field Installation: Yes.
Digital Input Model 2 (#3235): Provides 16 latching and/or
unlatching, isolated, digital input voltage or contact points, each
with high voltage transient protection**. These points can be
optioned for register in or pulse counter in operation. An address location must· be specified per the "I/O Feature
Configurator", located at the end of this section, for each #3235
ordered. Maximum: 7, 15, 23, or 31 per 3707 dependent on the
model ordered. Limitation: When installed with other I/O
features, the maximum applies to the total number of address
locations available. Each addressable feature ordered reduces
the maximum by one. Field Installation: Yes.
Digital Output Model 1 (#3340): Provides 16 low power (TTL
compatible) digital outputs. An address location must be specified per the "I/O Feature Configurator" for each #3340 ordered.
Maximum: 7, 15,_ 23, or 31 per 3707 dependent on the model
ordered. Limitation: When installed with other I/O features,
the maximum applies to the total number of address locations
available. Each addressable feature ordered reduces the maximum by one. Field In~on: Yes.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----= = -::--.---. -: Gen"eral Systems Division-Machines
- - - -----_
... -
M3707.3
April 78
-~-.-
Digital Output Model 2 (#3345): Provides 16 isolated Form A
mercury wetted relay contacts with high voltage transient
protection** and rated at 500 Vdc maximum and 1 A dc maximum; the product of peak voltage and peak current not to exceed 100 VA. An address location must be specified per "I/O
Feature Configurator" for each #3345 ordered. Maximum: 7,
15, 23, or 31 per 3707 dependent on the model ordered.
Limitation: When installed with other I/O features, the maximum applies to the total number of address locations available.
Each addressable feature ordered reduces the maximum by one.
Field installation: Yes. Prerequisite: +48 V (#5502) required if
output bias power is not provided by the customer. Refer to
Installation Manual-Physical Planning for details.
Duration = 120 transients per second for 10 seconds.
Digital Output Model 3 (#3350): Provides 16 isolated medium
power solid state digital outputs each with high voltage transient
protection**. Each output operates at up to 129 V at 250 MA.
An address location must be specified per the "I/O Feature
Configurator" for each #3350 ordered. Maximum: 7, 15, 23, or
31 per 3707 dependent on the model ordered. Limitation:
When installed with other I/O features, the maximum applies to
the total number of address locations available. Each addressable feature ordered reduces the maximum by one. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: +48 V (#5502) required if
output bias power is not provided by the customer. Refer to
Installation Manual-Physical Planning for details.
Digital I/O Power Supply (#5502): Provides a 48 V, 6A dc
power supply for use with the digital input/output features. For
recommended wiring and to insure that enough current is availaQle for any given customer configuration, refer to the Installation
Manual-Physical Planning. Maximum: One per model A7 or
A 15, and two per model A23 or A31. Limitation: Customer
must provide any wiring from this supply to digital input/output
circuits. Field Installation: Yes.
Analog Power Supply (#5503): Provides ±24 Vdc power to the
analog input features. Maximum: One per 3707. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: AC Power, #9901, #9902 or
#9904.
test tool (P/N 5891393)-a
One of the required tools is
portable Test Box specifically designed for the 3707 and an
integral part of the maintenance philosophy of this system.
Although one is not required for each 3707 ordered, it is recommended that a sufficient quantity be obtained by the customer
so that he can satisfactorily service his system.
**High voltage transient protection provides each point with the
following surge withstand capability: (no physical damage will
be done)
Frequency
Peak Voltage
1 .0 to 1.5 M HZ
2.5 to 3.0 KV
Pattern = An envelope which decays to approximately 50%
of crest value, but not less than 1.25 KV, within 6 microseconds of initial peak voltage.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-- - --
-- -=- --=--==----
M3707.4
-~-.-
April 78
General Systems Division-Machines
-~-.-
I/O Feature Placement Chart
The table below is a physical planning chart to be used in configuring System 3707.
For each of the listed feature types ordered a unique address
location must be specified. Include this specify code with each
feature ordered.
A total of 31 feature positions are available in the largest model.
A31. and the table may be used to configure this. or any smaller
model. Model numbers and their capacities are indicated in the
table columns labeled "Model" and "Feature Position." You
must confine your choices of feature locations to that section of
the table which pertains to the model you have chosen.
Two rules concerning the placement of Analog Input Control and
Analog Input Multiplexer features must be observed:
2. Analog Input Multiplexer features associated with each Analog Input Control must be located in positions adjacent to the
Analog Input Control feature in contiguous descending position numbers. Example: An Analog Input Control feature is
specified for position 23. The associated Analog Input Mutliplexers must be located in positions 22. 21, 20. etc .• in that
order. without skipping any position numbers. through position 16. Positions 22 through 16 may contain.up to 7 Analog
Input Multiplexers. which is the maximum number that may
be associated with an Analog Input Control feature in position 23.
Each code identifies a position. Only one specify code in each
row may be chosen.
To assist you. a Recommended Procedure may be found following the table.
1. Analog Input Control feature placement is limited to positions
7.15.23 and 31.
I/O FEATURE CONFIGURATOR
3707
Model
Analog
Input
Feature Control
Position #1010
1
2
3
A7
--------::------.--
=::::::::::
-.:.......:
--~- ~
6
Analog
Voltage AI
Reference Modell
",1280
#1015
__________
------
------
119101
9102
9103
TI
I
AI
AI
01
Model 2 Model3 Modell
",1020
d025 , #3230
I
Row
01
Totals
Model 2
1
2
3 should
#3235
#3340 i #3345 ,#3350
be 0 or 1
'>9201
9202
9203
119501
9502
9503
-==== -~TI~ ~
119301 119401
9302
9402
_ 99330034'- -~9440034
________
9106
9206
9305
9306
~~del
~~del
#9601 1119701
9602
9702
9603
9703
~~el
il9801
9802
~li~_
r;~r -r~~f r;g~- .~~~
9405
9406
9506
9606
9706
9806
-----==-
---
A15
A23
A31
\\\
25
---_
____
9125
9225
9325
9425
9525
9625
9725
9825:
26
----:......
----
9126
9226
9326
9426:
9526
9626:
9726
9826
932_9_~-.242~_
9330 i 9430
9431
9529
9530
9531
~~
29
30
31
-==== ~__ :g~
~
---9131
-===-
~.
9231
:~~~
9129
9229
9130
9230
____________
Column Totals Equal Number
of Features Ordered
:~~~
I
-----=::::'
11
i
::~~ +~fr+ ~~1~
I
. --
:H~ :~~~l--
t
I
9629 I 9729
9829 f----9630 -l_rmation to be
specified.
The 2741 Transmit and Receive Interrupt function on the 3767
with #7113 (2741 line Control) is supported via the following:
1200 bps Intg'd Modem
Sw'd
Non-Switched
2-wire 2-wire 4-wire
#1231
#4781
#1231
#4781
#3115
leA
#3125
leA
#3135
leA
#3704
#4786
#4785
#4781
#3705
#4786
#4785
#4781
#3767
#5506
#5505
#5500
External Modem
Switched
Non-Switched
2-wire (1)
2-wire (1)
4-wire
#1231
#1231
#1231
#1231
#1231 or
#1232
9593-9600
9721-9728
9737-9744
9745-9752
#1231 or
#1232
9593-9600
9721-9728
9737-9744
9745-9752
#4711 or
#4714
#4711 or
#4714
#3719
#4711 or
#4714
#4711 or
#4714
9593-9600
9721-9728
9737-9744
9745-9752
9625-9632
#4711 or
#4714
#4711 or
#4714
3719 #3719
1. Modem must be full duplex.
Terminal and Group Addresses: Terminal and group addresses must be selected when one of the following Start/Stop Features is ordered:
#7111 for 2740 model 1 line Control with Station Control
(#9560) specified.
#7112 for 2740 model 2 Line Control.
For Terminal Address and Group Address, a two-character code
must be selected as described below. The first character must
be the Terminal Address, and the second character must be the
Group Address. (The same character may be ordered for both
addresses.) However, the terminal will be wired at the factory as
a Group Responding #9197 terminal.
With EBCDIC Keyboard Arrangement (#9391). select characters
from:
A thru Z, 0 thru 9, and special characters @ (at sign) ... $ (dollar
sign) ... & (ampersand) ... - (hyphen) .... (period).
*With Correspondence Keyboard Arrangement (#3981), select
characters from:
A thru Z (except B and X). 0 thru 8, and special characters =
(equal) ... / (slash) ... ; (semi-colon) ... , (comma) .... (period) ...
(apostrophe) ... - (hyphen).
*Not available with #7112.
If Alternate Character Set (#1291) is installed on the terminal,
the Terminal and Group Address line code bit configuration
remains the same for either switch setting.
Specify: #9644 (Terminal and Group Addresses) and enter the
two-character code as Supplemental Specs
Terminal Identification: If Terminal Identification is used in the
customers application (provided by RPQ E 46148 Auto Address
Answer-back on the 2741), a four-character Terminal Identification must be selected when Start/Stop Feature--2741 Line
Control (#7113) and one of the following are ordered: #5502,
#5506, or #3719 with #9619 (switched line operation) specified.
Depending on the Keyboard Arrangement specified on the base
machine, the following characters may be selected for the Terminal Identification code.
With EBCDIC Keyboard Arrangement (#9391). select characters
from:
A thru Z, 0 thru·g, and special characters # (number sign) ... /
(slash) ... $ (dollar sign) ... & (ampersand) ... @ (at sign) ... ,
(comma) .... (period) ... - (hyphen) ... C/R (carriage return) .. .
space.
With Correspondence Keyboard Arrangement (#3981). select
characters from:
A thru Z, 0 thru 9, and special characters = (equal) ... / (slash)
... ' (apostrophe) ... - (hyphen) ... ; (semi-colon) .... (period) ... ,
(comma) ... C/R (carriage return) ... space.
The same character may be selected for all four positions except
C/ R may only be used in the fourth position.
If Alternate Character Set (#1291) is installed on the terminal.
the Terminal 10 line code bit configuration remains the same for
either switch setting.
Specify: #9645 (Terminal Identification) and enter the fourcharacter code as Supplemental Specs
Vertical Forms Control (#8731): Allows vertical forms skipping
to a pre-set page header location or a pre-set vertical tab position. Page size, header location and vertical tab stops are entered from the keyboard or received from the host under SOLC
line control. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Variable Width Forms Tractor Covers (#9850)
and Variable Width Forms Tractor (#8700). Limitation: This
feature (#8731) is non-functional in Start/Stop (#7111, #7112,
#7113) mode.
Depending on the K¢yboard Arrangement specified for the base
machine, the following characters may be selected for Terminal
and Group Addresses:
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----=
=---=
-- ------ General Systems Division-Machines
-
'- =
-~-.-
Variable Width Forms Tractor (#8700): A forms feeding device for continuous edge-punched forms. Overall forms width
from 3 to 15' inches can be fed. Specify code #9850 (Variable
Width Forms Tractor Covers) is required'.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M3767.5
April 78
---.- ----- =- - ---
M3780.1
~
=--~ General Systems Division-Machines
3780 DATA COMMUNICATIONS TERMINAL
Purpose: A data transmission terminal using the BSC technique. It can communicate over appropriate communications
facilities to another 3780, a System/3S0 model 20, a
System/3S0 model 25, a System/3S0 model 22-195 or
System/370 model 115-195, a 2770 Data Communication
System, or a 2780 Data Transmission Terminal. May be locally
attached to a 3704/3705 Communications Controller.. For requirements, see "Prerequisites."
Highlights: Provides medium speed, batch-oriented, buffered
card reading and printing via approriate communications facilities ... see "Communications Facilities." Punched card output
provided via attachment of a 3781 Card Punch ... see 3781.
Card Reader: Reads at a rated speed of SOO cards/ minute.
Provides hopper capacity of 1200 cards and stacker capacity of
1300 cards. Only 80 column cards can be read.
Printing: Prints at a rated speed of 350 lines/minute utilizing the
basic 52-character set. Interchangeable type bars of 39 and S3
character sets are available with rated speeds of 425 Ipm and
300 Ipm respectively. Only the 63 character set may be employed when using ASCII transmission code. The printer provides 120 print positions standard with feature expansion to 144
positions ... see "Special Features." Horizontal and Vertical
Format control are provided as standard functions of the printer.
Buffers: Provides two 512-character buffers which service the
transmission line and the I/O units alternately to provide overlap
operation for efficiency.
Buffer Checking: All characters are checked on the data path
when sent to or received from the buffer.
Variable Record Length: End-to-end characters are used to
define the end of a record, allowing for complete variable length.
Full buffer blocks with variable length records can be transmitted or received. On card transmission, blank positions are removed from the end of the card record to increase the transmission efficiency.
Space Compression/Expansion: Operable under switch control. this capability provides for the removal of consecutive
spaces in transmitted data and their re-insertion in received
data. A two character sequence is substituted for from two to
sixty-three consecutive spaces. If more than sixty-three consecutive spaces are to be transmitted, a second two character
sequence will be substituted for the number of consecutive
spaces greater than sixty-three. If only one space is to be transmitted, it will be transmitted as a normal space. This feature is
inoperable when transmitting in transparency or operating in
home mode.
Home Mode: Provides card reader to buffer to printer operation
in off-line non-communications mode.
, April 78
ties, see M2700 pages. The alphameric facility designations
above correspond to those shown on the charts on those pages.
Binary Synchronous Transmission: Allows for transmission
rates of 1200, 2000, 2400, 4800, 7200/3S00 bps ... see
'·Modems" below and Data Set Attachment under "Specify."
Communications can be with another 3780, 2780 modell, 2 or
4, a System/3S0 model 20 thru 195 (except model 44 or model
67 in TSS mode), or a System/370 model 115 thru 195 ... for
requirements, see "Prerequisites."
In addition, the 3780 may be multi-dropped on the same line
facility with other BSC devices (System/360 model 20,
System/3, 1131, 1826, 2715, 2780, 3271, 3272, 3735) as tributary stations on a multi-point line with a System/360 model
22-195 (except model 44 or model 67 in TSS mode), or
System/370 model 115-195 as the control station. In a
switched control network, it may use the same termination
(phone number) at the computer that is used for the other BSC
devices.
Transmission Code: One of two codes can be selected ... see
"Specify." For printable graphics, see "Type Catalog."
EBCDIC Code: 256 character set which is the basic code of
System/3S0 and System/370.
ASCII Code: Industry standard code with a 128 character set.
Transmission Checking: A redundancy check is performed on
all data. EBCDIC uses a 16-bit cyclic check transmitted as two
8-bit bytes ... ASCII uses an odd-parity VRC on each character,
including the LRC character and an LRC check transmitted as a
single 8-bit odd parity byte. Format check plus an odd/even
block check is provided on both code sets.
Modems: One Integrated 2400/1200 bps Modem feature, IBM
3872 Modem (2400/1200 bps), IBM 3875 Modem (7200/3S00
bps), or IBM 4872 Modem (4800 bps) can be attached to the
3780. For communications capabilities, product utilization, and
special features, see M2700 pages, 3872, 3874, 3875, 4872 and
Integrated Modem under "Special Features" below.
Card Limitations: Generally, scored ca'rds require careful handling and a favorable environment. Use of the following scores
has been approved.
Internal Scores: (before separation)-M-4, M-5, OM-2, OM-3,
S-1 and I D-3 (2" x 3-1/4" or 2-3/1S" x 3-3/4" sizes only).
Note: When using OM-2 or OM-3, reading must be terminated
prior to the scored column.
External Scores: (after separation)-M-3, M-4, M-5, M-S,
M:-7, M-11, OM-2, CF-4 and CF-11. OM-3 may be used if the
score is on the column 1 end. Note: Upper left corner cut required when the M-l1 or CF-11 is used on the column 1 end.
All other scores may result in unsatisfactory performance.
Integrated 2400/1200 BPS Modem: Provides 2400 bps transmission with half speed backup on leased and switched facilities
... compatible with IBM 3872 Modem.
Conversation Mode: Allows a CPU to turn the communications
line around after receiving text and return text without additional
selection.
Audible Alarm: Alerts the operator when manual intervention is
required in line mode ... unattended operation is not provided.
Customer Responsibilities: See M2700 pages. In addition, the
customer must be advised that when non-IBM data sets or
privately owned communications facilities are used, he is responsible for insuring that signal levels and impedances are
compatible with the IBM communications interface.
Communications Facilities: The 3780 operates in half duplex
mode over facility C4, C5, CS, D3, D4, D4SB, D5, D5SB, DS,
DSSB, Xl M or X2M ... for information concerning these facili-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- -= - --=---= General Systems Division-Machines
---
--
M3780.2
April 78
Prerequisites
System/360 model 20 (submodel 2. 4. 5. or 6): Communica~
tion is via a 2020 equipped with a Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (#2074).
System/360 model 25: Communications can be via the Integrated Communications Attachment (#4580) with appropriate
binary synchronous features on the 2025, or via a 2701 Data
Adapter Unit or 2703 Transmission Control ... see below.
System/360 model 22-195 (except model 44 or 67 in TSS
mode). or System/370 model 115-195: Communications can
be via a 2701 Data Adapter Unit or 2703 Transmission Control
equipped with approriate binary synchronous features ... see
2701, 2703. Notes: (1) To utilize OLT support, the host processor requires a minimum of 32K bytes of storage ... (2) The
3780 communicates only in EBCDIC or ASCII codes ... (3) Only
EBCDIC Transparency (#3601) is available on the 3780. Therefore, a 2701 or 2703 must be configured with 3780 restrictions
and limitations for compatibility ... (4) All 3780s on a mUlti-point
line must have the same code, EBCDIC or ASCII.
System/360 (except models 22, 25. 44. 67 in TSS mode or
85). or System/370 model 115-195: Communications can be
via a 3704/3705 Communications Controller ... see 3704, 3705.
System/370 model 115. 125. 135: Communications can be via
the Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640) and appropriate binary synchronous features on the 3115, 3125, 3135 as well
as via a 2701, 2703 or 3704/3705.
3704/3705 Medium Speed Local Attachment: Attachment
without modem at speeds up to 2400 bps via IBM-provided
cables. Requires Synchronous Clock ... see "Specify."
2770 Data Communication System: Communication requires
Terminal Use (#9711) and the same Transmission Code (#9761
or #9762) on both units. The 2772 must have Buffer Expansion,
Add'i (#1491), or both the 3780 and the 2772 must have
EBCDIC Transparency.
Another 3780: Communication requires Terminal Use (#9711)
and the same Transmission Code (#9761 or #9762) on both
units ... see "Specify."
2780 Data Transmission Terminal (models 1. 2. 4 only):
Communication requires that both terminals have EBCDIC Code
(#9761 on 3780, #9762 on 2780) and EBCDIC Transparency
(#3601 on 3780, #8030 on 2780). Comm!Jnications can be in
EBCDIC Transparency mode only. The 3780 may not have multiple records in Transparent mode.
Bibliography: See KWIK Index, G320-1621 or specific system
bibliography.
Specify
1. Voltage (AC,
1-phase, 3-wire,
60 cycle): Locking
plug-#9884 for 208 V or #9886 for 230 V. Non-lock
plug-#9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, or #9887 for 230
V.
2. Transmission Code: #9761 for EBCDIC or #9762 for ASCII ...
can be field installed.
3. Character Set: One of the available character sets and the
type size must be specified at no charge on the initial order .. ,
see "Type Catalog" for specified characters in each set and
price for additional sets.
4. Printer Tape Punch: Order under Part No. 120910
5. Identification: #9350 ... provides an identification function by
which a CPU under stored program control and operating on
a switched public network, can identify a legitimate 3780.
Prerequisite: Switched Network Control (#7651).
6. Terminal Use (point-to-point): #9711 ... for communications
with another 3780 or 2780. Provides "Bell" key and light
indicator to signal remote terminal that voice mode is desired.
Receipt of "Bell" code sounds alarm. Can be installed in the
field. When communications is alternately with a CPU and
another 3780 or 2780, via switched network, specify #9711.
7. 3704/3705 Medium Speed Local Attachment: Specify Modem or Data Set Attachment .. , see item (8) below. #9121
(2400 bps) or #9122 (1200 bps). Also Communications Facilities ... see item (9) below. #9402 for half-duplex.
8. Modem or Data Set Attachment: One of the following, depending upon facility to be used must be specified: #9120 for
C5 (2000 or 2400 bps) or D4M (2000 bps), #9121 for 04
(2400 bps), #9122 for 03 (1200 bps), #9123 for C4 (1200
bps), #9124 for 05 (4800 bps), #9125 for D4SB (2400/1200
bps), #9126 for 06 (7200 bps), #9127 for D6SB
(7200/3600), #9121 for X1 M (2400 bps), #9124 for X2M
(4800 bps), 9128 for C6 (4800/2400 bps), or #9129 for
D5SB (4800/2400 bps). Can be installed in the field. Note:
#9120 required with #5610, #9121 with #5600/5602 without
#7951, #9125 with #5600/5602 with #7951 .. , if Public
Switched Network Facility is used at data rate above 2400
bps, specify #9128 in lieu of #9120. Prerequisite: #9122 or
#9123 may require Synchronous Clock (#7705) ... see
"Special Features."
9. Communication Facilities: #9402 for half-duplex, or #9404 for
duplex. Can be changed in the field. Note: Features specify
3780 control of the data set and do not necessarily correspond to the communication facility. Specify as indicated
below:
Switched Network Operation-#9402. Leased Private Line
(or equivalent privately owned). Multipoint-#9402 (halfduplex), although the communication facility may be 2-wire
or 4-wire.
Point-to-point-#9402 for 2-wire (half-duplex) communications facilities ... #9404 for 4-wire (full duplex) facilities.
Note: If 3780 Integrated Modem, IBM 3872, 3874 or 3875
Modem is used, specify #9402.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----= -- General Systems Division-Machines
= -=---=
--
- -------
M3780.3
April 78
-~-.-
10.Extended Retry Transmission: #915O--extends the maximum
retry count from three (12 seconds) to a maximum of fifteen
(48 seconds) in an effort to recognize a valid response to the
last block of data transmitted, prior to sending an EDT code
and timing out with an error condition. Can be changed in
the field.
11. Data Set Cable: A 20' data set cable is provided as standard.
If a longer cable is required, specify #9021, indicating length
as a quantity of 25, 30, 35 or 40.
12.WACK Response (Wait before transmit-positive acknowledge): #9936 a ... if initial WACK is to be transmitted immediately. All subsequent WACK responses are transmitted
after a 2-second delay. Can be changed in the field.
13.Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
Accessories
Locks And Keys: The 3780 with Keylock (#4560) special feature is shipped with two keys.
SIl8ciai Features
Communications Special Features: Use of the following
special
features
depends
upon
the
communications
application(s) for which the specific 3780 is to be used.
Component Selection (#1601): Provides the capability of
specific 3780 I/O device selection. In addition to component
selection, it provides priority output selection and multi-point
Data link Control Component Selection capability. It is a prerequisite for attachment of a 3781 Card Punch. Field Installation:
Yes.
EBCDIC Transparency (#3601): Allows the 3780 to receive
and transmit all 256 EBCDIC bit combinations as data characters. Variable length records cannot be transmitted if card I/O
or printer is selected. Either normal or transparent text can be
received without the "Transparency" switch being in the transparency position. The switch must be ON for transmitting in
transparency. If a terminal on a multi-point line requires this
feature, all terminals on that line must also have this feature.
Field Installation:Yes. Prerequisite: EBCDIC Transmission
Code (#9761).
Keylock (#4650): A key-operated Power-On switch for the
3780. The key must be inserted and turned to the "On" position
before the control unit Power-On switch is operative. When the
key is turned off, power is removed from the control unit. For
additional or replacement keys, see Accessories. Field
Installation: Yes.
Multi-Point Data Link Control (#5010): Allows multiple 3780s
to be used on the same communication line with a CPU. Terminal can be polled or selected when operating as a tributary
station on a multi-point system. All 3780s installed on the same
line facility require this feature and must use the same transmission code and data set attachment. Other BSC devices (2780,
1130, System/360, System/370 System/3, System/360 model
20) as tributary stations, can be on a mUlti-point line with a
processor control station. Limitation: If Terminal Use (#9711)
is installed, it must be removed prior to installation of this fea-
ture. Field Installation: Yes.
Integrated 2400/1200 BPS Modem (#5600~ 5602, 5610):
Provides an integrated 2400 bps modem with half speed backup
capability. Equivalent to and compatible with similiarly featured
IBM 3872 Modems. Three versions cover different communication requirements, as described below. Operator controls are
integrated with the 3780 operator panel. Built-in diagnostic
functions are provided for local and remote testing. See M2700,
M3782 and "Prerequisites" above for additional information on
allowable machine/system combinations and required features.
Maximum: One #5600, #5602, or #5610.
Leased Line Point-to-Point Modem (#5600): Operates over
04 or. (with Switched Network Backup, #7951) 04SB facilities
with a similiarly equipped 3780 or a 2780, 3780, System/360 or
System/370 equipped with appropriate features and an equivalent featured IBM 3872 Modem. Includes manual equalization
control. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Modem or
Data Set Attachment #9121 (#9125 with Switched Network
Backup, #7951>. Half Duplex (#9402) Communication Facilities
Control. Terminal Use (#9711) may be required, depending upon
application. *
Leased Line Multipoint Tributary Modem (#5602): Operates
on a multipoint network with a controlling CPU. Other 3780s on
the same line facility must have either this feature or an IBM
3872 Modem with Multipoint Tributary (#5101 or #5102); other
BSC tributary devices on the same line facility must have an IBM
3872 Modem with #5101 or #5102. Utilizes 04 or (with
Switched Network Backup, #7951) 04SB facilities. rncludes
Field
Installation:
Yes.
manual equalization
control.
Limitation: Terminal Use (#9711) cannot be installed.
Prerequisites: Submit an RPO for operation on a basic 3002
channel. Modem or Data Set Attachment #9121 (#9125 with
Switched Network Backup, #7951). Half Duplex (#9402) Communication Facilities Control, Multipoint Data Link Control
(#5010).*
Switched Network Modem (#5610): Operates over the
Switched Network facility C5 with a similiarly equipped 3780 or
a 2780, 3780, System/360 or System/370 equipped with appropriate features and an equivalent featured IBM 3872 Modem
with Switched Network (#7941 or #7942). Provides automatic
line equalization. Provides automatic answering/disconnect
capability when used in conjunction with Switched Network
Control (#7651). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Half
Duplex operation (#9402). Modem Attachment (#9120)*.
Print Positions, Additional (#5701): Provides an additional 24
print positions for the 3780 printer. Field Installation: Yes.
Switched Network Control (#7651): To attach to a switched
network, provides automatic answering of incoming calls initiated by another terminal or central computer over common carrier
switched (dial-up) facilities. The line must be equipped with an
appropriate data set with auto answer capability and the terminal must be in a "ready" status. Provides automatic disconnect
when disconnect sequence is received or when no data is
transmitted/received for 20 seconds. Disconnect causes audible
alarm to sound. Specify: #9850 for use with the IBM 3874
Modem. Field Installation: Yes.
Synchronous Clock (#7705): A synchronous clock for use with
modems which do not have an internal clock, or for use with
3704/3705 Medium Speed Local Attachment Line Set, Type 1 F.
Will operate at 1200 bps or 2400 bps. The device with which
the 3780 will communicate must also have an internal clock
operating at the same bps rate. Specify: #9702 for 1200 bps, or
1#9704 for 2400 bps. Field Installation: Yes.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----- - --- -
M3780.4
-. -=-=
= .: - :.
..:.
=--~ General Systems Division-Machines
-~-.-
Switched Network Backup (#7951): Provides alternate operation on facility D4SB for Leased Line Point-to-Point (#5600) or
Multipoint Tributary (#5602) feature. Auto answer is not provided. Half duplex mode of modem operation is forced when this
feature is selected by the operator panel "Mode" switch; a
"Talk/Data" switch is provided. This feature can be used with
OS/DOS BTAM in certain configurations. Additional use program routines will be required to fully utilize the capabilities of
this feature. For additional information see IBM Modem Marketing Guide. Field Installation: Yes.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
April 78
--------- . . ---- General Systems Division-Machines
- - ---. -
-
-~-
-
3781 CARD PUNCH
Purpose: Punched card output unit for a 3780 Data Communications Terminal.
Highlights: Provides 80 column card output at a rated speedof
160 columns per second. Punches serially with actual throughput dependent upon number of columns punched, communication facility, and 3780 features employed. Refer to the 3780
Component Information Manual for throughput calculations.
A free standing unit, cable attached within seventeen feet of the
supportin9 3780. It has a 1200-card capacity hopper and a
1300-card capacity prime stacker. Echo pulse check of punched
data is provided by the 3781 in addition to conventional transmission checking provided by the 3780. Error cards are laced in
card column 82 and stacked in secondary stacker.
The unit may be used in home mode in conjunction with the
3780 card reader to create punched card output media.
Only one 3781 can be attached to a 3780 Data Communications
Terminal.
Prerequisites: A 3780 equipped with Component Selection
(#1601) ... see 3780.
Card Limitations: Heavy duty cards, aqua cards, and C-4 corner cut cards cannot be used. Scored cards require careful
handling and a favorable environment. Recommended use of
scored cards is limited to the following:
Internal Scores Before separation: S-1, 10-1, 10-2, and for a
maximum of three passes, M-4 and M-5.
External Scores After separation: M-7, M-11 (with round
corners), CF-11 (with round corners) on either end of the card,
and M-3 on column 80 end only.
Bibliography: GA24-3089
Specify
1. Voltage (AC,
1-phase, 3-wire, 60 cycle):
Locking
plug-#9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V. Non-lock
plug-#9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, or #9887 for 230
V. Must be consistent with that specified for the 3780.
2. Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
3. Transmission Code: #9761 for EBCDIC, or #9762 for ASCII.
Specify the same as that for the 3780. Can be field i'1stalled.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M3781.1
April 78
----- =---
M3845.1
-~---
- - - ---
=--~ General Systems Division-Machines
3845 DATA ENCRYPTION DEVICE
Purpose: A table top or shelf mounted encryption/decryption
device for data transmitted over a communication line. The 3845
is positioned between a data terminal equipment (OTE) and a
data communications equipment (OCE), one at each end of a
half duplex or duplex communication line. The 3845 will operate
with Start-Stop, Bisynchronous, or Synchronous Oata Link
Control (SOLC) protocol at speeds ranging from 110 bps to
19,200 bps. See "Limitations" under "Communications."
Attachable devices: The 3845 is transparent to the OCE and
the OTE. Control signals by the 3845 are red riven iri compliance
with the EIA-CCITT specification. All other signals are cable fed
through the 3845. The 3845 will attach wherever EIA-RS232C/CCITT-V.24 interface requirements are met.
Models 1-3-for use with Start-Stop or SOLC line protocol (S/S
or SOLC).
Model 1 A single half duplex unit operating on a 2- or 4-wire
half duplex communication line.
Model 2 A dual half duplex unit, with each half duplex device
completely independent of the other, operating over 2or 4-wirehalf duplex communication lines.
Model 3 A full duplex unit operating over a full duplex communication line.
Models 11-13 for use with Bisynchronous, Bisynchronous with
Business Machine Clocking (BMC)' or Synchronous Data Link
Control (BSC/SOLC or BSC with BMC/SOLC).
Model 11 A single half duplex unit, operating on a 2- or 4-wire
half duplex communication line in BSC/SOLC or BSC
with BMC/SOLC ... see "Specify Features."
Model 12A dual half duplex unit, with each half duplex device
completely independent of the other, operating over 2or 4-wire half duplex lines in BSC/SOLC or BSC with
BMC/SOLC ... see "Specify Features." Limitation: A
Model 12 must have both outputs either BSC/SOLC or
both BSC with BMC/SOLC.
Model13A full duplex unit operating over a full duplex communication line in SSC/SOLC or BSC with BMC/SOLC ...
see "Specify Features."
Highlights: A communication security device that provides
encryption/ decryption of digital data transmitted over a communication line.
Two or more data encryption devices (3845 or 3846) are needed,
one at each termination of a communication line (point-to-point
or multi-point). Limitation: A 3845 or 3846 is required at each
node in order to have message header information in the clear
through that node.
The 3845 is cabled to the OTE via the cable that is provided by
the OTE manufacturer for attachment to the OCE. Attachment
from the 3845 to the OCE is by a cable provided with the 3845.
One cable is provided per line function, Limitation: The cable
provided with the 3845 is 1.5 metres long (5 ft.). This adds load
capacitance to the OTE/OCE.
April 78
a 56-bit plus pari~code, entered by the customer at a frequency
consistent with his security requirements. The customer defines
his own keys, selects them in a random manner, and enters
them manually. The seed is 1 to 16 hexadecimal random characters used to initiate the synchronization message. The personalization consists of 4 hexadecimal characters of information that
personalizes the 3845 to the communication facilities, such as
line discipline, line speed, method of clocking, and synchronization message length.
The 3845 has a bypass switch that allows messages to be sent
in the clear and is also used by the customer in fault isolation. A
battery is provided that maintains power to the storage registers
containing the key variable, seed, and personalization data when
the 3845 AC power is removed.
Security is provided by use of interlocks that remove power,
including battery power, from the storage registers whenever the
service cover is removed. The seed, key variable and personalization must be re-entered when all (battery and AC) power is
removed.
Communications:
The 3845
Models
1, 2, and 3
encrypt/decrypt data if (a) the OTE/OCE conforms to interface
EIA-RS-232C or CCITT-V.24, (b) uses SIS or SOLC protocol, (c)
operates on a half duplex or duplex facility, (d) is within the
speed of 110-9600 bps for asynchronous operation or the speed
of up to 19,200 bps for sychronous operation, and (e) uses a 7
or 8 bit code (exclusive of the required start and stop bits) for
asynchronous operation or uses an 8 bit SOLC flag for SOLC
operation.
The 3845 Models 11, 12, and 13 encrypt/ decrypt data if (a) the
OTE/OCE conforms to interface EIA-RS-232C or CCITT-V.24,
(b) uses BSC or SOLC protocol, (c) operates on a half duplex or
duplex facility, (d) is within the speed of up to 19,200 bps, and
(e) uses an EBCDIC or ASCII code for BSC or uses an 8 bit
SOLC flag for SOLC operation.
Limitations: (1) SOLC will not operate with Non-Return to Zero
Inverted (NRZI) transmission mode. NRZI describes the way
information bits are presented at the EIA interface. NRZI is
required in some SOLC networks when using IBM 3872 modems
to ensure modem synchronization. (2) Operation at 19,200 bps
may require the user to optimize cable length and quality.
Data Communications Equipment: Data Communications
Equipment operating in non-N RZI is needed with the 3845 when
operating in SOLC protocol. I BM external modems may be
attached to the 3845, i.e.:
Modem
Speed (bps)
3872
3874
3875
1200/2400 (BSC only)
4800
7200
Problem Determination Procedures: A bypass switch is
provided that allows transmission in the clear to permit determining whether a problem exists in the 3845 or in other equipment. See "Customer Responsibility" below.
Problem determination is a customer responsibility that does not
involve the customer engineer. Customer education in problem
determination is a marketing responsibility.
An accessory, the Personalization/Key Entry Unit (P/KEU), must
be available at each site location having a 3845. This accessory
is used to enter the key variable, the seed, and to personalize the
3845 to the customer's communication line. The key variable is
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- ~~ General Systems Division-Machines'
- ------.... --
-- -=
M3845.2
April 78
-~-
Customer Set-Up (CSU): The 3845 is de4fgnated as a customer set-up device thereby offering the customer relocation flexibility. CSU is a customer responsibility that does not involve the
customer engineer. Customer education in CSU is a marketing
responsibility .
Customer
Respo~sibility:
The customer is responsible to:
•
Provide an adequate site and other preparation.
•
Receipt at the customer's receiving dock, unpacking and set
up of the 3845.
•
Connect cables to the DTE and DCE.
•
Personalize to the communication facility.
•
Enter the seed.
•
Enter the key' variable.
•
Use and fqllow the problem determination procedures and to
follow instructions for service of the 3845.
charge to cover handling, inspection, testing, and a return shipping charge.
In all other cases, the I BM Repair Center will charge a minimum
fee per machine to cover handling, inspection, adjustments,
testing, and return shipping. In addition, all parts needed will be
billed at IBM's prevailing parts prices and the additional time
required for repairs will be billed at IBM's applicable service
rates, if so authorized by the customer. The machine will then be
eligible for maintenance agreement service.
Prerequisites: (1) A SIS, BSC, or SOlC communication line .. ,
(2) Compliance with EIA-RS-232C or CCITT-V.24 ... (3) External
modems, IBM or non-IBM ... (4) Accessory Personalization/Key
Entry Unit available at site location.
Note: Appropriate procedures are provided by IBM for personalization and entering the seed and key variable.
Maintenance
Spares: The customer may wish to replace a failing 3845 with a
spare and must be advised to purchase spares for such use. The
number of spare devices recommended is dependent upon the
number of devices the customer has installed, his application
requirements, physical locations, and layouts.
IBM Repair Center Service: Maintenance of the 3845 will
normally be at a designated IBM Repair Center. All maintenance, parts replacement, adjustments, and repair shall normally
be performed at the designated IBM Repair Center. It shall be
the customer's responsibility to set up the equipment and to
determine when remedial maintenance is required. When remedial maintenance is required, it shall be the customer's responsibility to determine the failing device, pack the device in the
designated shipping container and ship it prepaid to the designated IBM Repair Center.
I BM will pre-pay the transportation charges for return of the
repaired device. There is no regularly scheduled preventive
maintenance recommended by I BM on these devices.
Customers with machines not under an IBM Maintenance
Agreement have the option to ship the machines to the designated IBM Repair Center for repair under the IBM Repair Center
Machine Repair Authorization Form, GX27-2981, in which case
repair will be made (if the machine is repairable). Alternately,
upon request, the I BM Repair Center will provide, for a minimum
charge, an estimate of repair charges. This charge covers handling, inspection, adjustments, testing, return shipping charges
and estimating of repair charges.
The 3845 is eligible for maintenance agreement service immediately following expiration of the service and parts warranty at
the monthly charge shown under MMMC in "Prices" below.
If agreement service is not contracted for immediately following
expiration of the service and parts warranty and the customer
wants agreement service, the customer may ship the machine(s)
to the designated IBM Repair Center for an inspection. If, on the
basis of an inspection, the repair center concludes that a machine is not repairable, no further work will be performed and
the machine will be returned to the customer with a minimum
Specify
1. line Voltage Plug (115/120 V Power and line Cord, 1-Phase,
60 Hz): #9890 for locking plug ... #9891 for non-lock plug.
2. line Cord length: If the standard 2.8 m (9 ft.) power cable is
not desired, specify: #9511 for 1.8 m (6 ft.) line cord, #9512
for 3.7 m (12 ft.) line cord, #9513 for 4.5 m (15 ft.) line cord.
3. For 3845 Models 11, 12, and 13: Specify one ... installation
available at time of manufacture only.
#9110--BSC/SOLC,or
#9115-BSC with BMC/SOLC
Model Changes: At time of manufacture only.
Personalization/Key Entry Unit (Part No. 4407908) to enter key
.variable, seed, and personalization data. One must be available
at each site.
A battery, part no. 1743456, is needed to replace the installed
battery. The replacement schedule is defined in the Principles of
Operation Manual. Discharged batteries should be returned to
IBM.
Purchase
Personalization/Key Entry Unit,
Part No. 4407908
Battery
Part No. 1743456
MMMC
$265
17
··Warranty Services are available at the designated IBM. Repair
Center during the 90 day warranty period, which commences. 30
days following date of shipment from the Plant of Manufacture
It shall be the customer's responsibility to determine
the failing unit and, if the unit is still under warranty, to pack it in
the designated shipping container and ship it prepaid to the
designated IBM Repair Center.
IBM Maintenance Agreements are not available.
Engineering on-site service will not be provided.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
Customer
----= -=
=-...-~ General Systems Division-Machines
- ------
M3846.1
--
April 78
-.~-.-
3846 DATA ENCRYPTION DEVICE
Purpose: A rack mounted encryption/ decryption device for data
transmitted over a communication line. The 3846 is positioned
between a data communications equipment (DCE) and a data
terminal equipment (OTE). one at each end of a half duplex or
duplex communication line. The 3846 will operate with a
Start/Stop, Bisynchronous, or Synchronous Data Link Control
(SOLC) protocol at speeds from 110 bps to 19,200 bps. See
"Limitations" under "Communications."
Attachable Devices: The 3846 is transparent to the DCE and
DTE. Control signals used by the 3846 are redriven in compliance with the EIA-RS-232C/CCITT-V.24 specification. All other
signals are cable fed through the 3846. The 3846 will attach
wherever EIA-RS-232C/CCITT-V2.4 interface requirements are
met.
Model 1 A power unit capable of providing power to 1 to 4 line
function units.
Models 2 and 3 for use with Start-Stop or Synchronous Data
Link Control (SDLC) line protocol meeting EIA-RS-232C or
CCITT-V.24 interface. Requires a 3846 Model 1 for power.
Model 2 A dual half duplex line function unit, with half duplex
device completely independent of the other, operating
over 2 or 4 wire half duplex communication lines.
Model 3 A full duplex line function unit operating over a full
duplex communication line.
Models 12 and 13 for use with Bisynchronous, Bisynchronous
with Business Machine Clocking (BSC, BSC with BMC), or SOLC
with EIA-RS-232C or CCITT-V.24. Requires a 3846 Model 1 for
power.
Model 12A dual half duplex line function unit with each half
duplex device completely independent of the other,
operating over 2 or 4 wire half duplex communication
lines in BSC, BMC SOLC line protocol ... see "Specify
Features." Limitation: A Model 12 must have both
outputs either BSC/SOLC or both BSC with
BMC/SDLC.
Model13A full duplex line function unit operating over a full
duplex facility in BSC, BMC, SOLC line protocol ... see
"Specify Features."
Highlights: A communication security device that provides
encryption/decryption of digital data, transmitted over a communication line.
Two or more data encryption devices (3845 or 3846) are needed,
one at each termination of a communication line (point-to-point
or multipoint). Limitation: A 3845 or 3846 is required at each
node in order to have message header information in the clear
through that node.
The 3846 is cabled to the DTE via the cable that is provided by
the DTE manufacturer for attachment to the DCE. Attachment
from the 3846 to the DCE is by a cable provided with the 3846.
One cable is provided per line function. Limitation: The cable
provided with the 3846 is 1.5 metres (5 ft.) long. This adds load
capacitance to the OTE/DCE.
An accessory, the Personalization/Key Entry Unit (P/KEU), must
be available at each site location having a 3846. This accessory
is used to enter the key variable, the seed, and to personalize the
3846 to the cust~mer's communication line. The key variable is
a 56 bit plus parity code, entered by the customer at a frequency
consistent with their security requirements. The customer defines the keys, selects them in a random manner, and enters
them manually. The seed is 1 to 16 hexadecimal random characters, used to initiate the synchronization message. The personalization consists of 4 hexadecimal characters of information that
personalizes the 3846 to the specific communication line characteristics such as line discipline, line speed, method of clocking,
and synchronization message length.
The 3846 depends on the customer providing a method of
switching to enable the user to send messages in the clear and
for fault isolation. A battery is provided that maintains power to
the storage registers containing the key variable, seed, and
personalization data when the 3846 AC power is turned off.
Security is provided by the use of interlocks that remove power,
including battery power, from the storage registers whenever a
line function unit is removed from the rack. The seed, key variable and personalization must be re-entered when all power
(battery and AC) is removed.
Communications: The 3846 Models 2 and 3 encrypt/decrypt
data if (a) the OTE/OCE conforms to interface EIA-RS-232C or
CCITT-V.24, (b) uses an SIS or SOLC protocol ... (c) operates
on a half duplex or duplex facility, (d) is within the speed of
110-19,200 bps and (e) uses 7 or 8 bit transmission code exclusive of the required start and stop bits for asynchronous operation or uses an 8 bitSDLC flag for SDLC operation.
The 3846 Models 12 and 13 encrypt/decrypt data if (a) the
OTE/DCE conforms to interface EIA-RS-232C or CCIIT-V.24,
(b) uses a BSC or SOLC protocol, (c) operates on a half duplex
or duplex facility, (d) is within the speed of up to 19,200 bps,
and (e) uses an EBCDIC or ASCII code for BSC or uses an 8 bit
SDLC flag for SDLC operation.
Limitations: (1) SDLC will not operate with Non-Return to Zero
Inverted (NRZI) transmission mode. NRZI describes the way
information bits are presented at EIA interface. NRZI is required
in some SbLC networks when using IBM 3872 modems to
ensure modem synchronization. (2) Operation at 19,200 bps
may require the user to optimize cable length and quality.
Data Communications Equipment: Data Communications
Equipment operating in non-N RZI is needed with the 3846 when
operating in SOLC protocol. IBM external modems may be
attached to the 3846.
Modem
Speed (bps)
3872
3874
3875
1200/2400 (BSC only)
4800
7200
Problem Determination Procedures: A customer installed
switch panel must be used to permit determining whether a
problem exists in the· 3846 or in the other equipment. See
"Customer Responsibility" below.
Problem determination is a customer responsibility that does not
involve the customer engineer. Customer education in problem
determination is a marketing responsibility.
Customer Set-Up (CSU): The 3846 is designated as a customer set-up device, thereby offering the customer relocation flexibility.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----= -.....--::
- General Systems Division.-Machines
=
~
-- ----.-
M3846.2
April 78
'
-~-.-
CSU is a customer responsibility that does not involve the customer engineer. Customer" education in CSU is a marketing
responsibility .
Customer Responsibility: The customer is responsible to:
•
Provide an adequate site and other preparation.
•
Receipt at the customer's receiving dock, unpacking, and set
up of 3846.
•
Provide a method of switching to enable the user to send
messages in the clear and to assist in fault isolation.
•
Make the interconnection between the 3846 Model 1 and the
3846 line function devices.
•
Personalize to the communication facility.
•
Enter the seed.
•
Enter the key variable.
• "Use and follow the problem determination procedures and to
follow instructions for service of the 3846.
Note: Appropriate procedures are provided by IBM for personalization and entering the seed and key variable.
Center for an inspection. If on the basis of an inspection, the
repair center concludes that. a machine in not repairable, no
further work will,be performed and the machine will be returned
to the customer with a minimum charge to cover handling, inspection, testing, and return shipping charges.
In all other cases, the IBM Repair Center will charge a minimum
fee per machine to cover handling, inspection, adjustments,
testing and return shipping charge. In addition,' all parts needed
will be billed at IBM's prevailing parts prices and the additional
time required for repairs will be billed at IBM's applicable service
rates if so authorized by the customer. The machine will then be
eligible for maintenance coverage.
Prerequisites: (1) An SIS, BSC, or SDLC communication line ...
(2) Compliance with EIA-RS-232C or CCITT-V.24 ... (3) External
modems, IBM or non-IBM ... (4) Accessory Pe'rsonalization/Key
Entry Unit available at site location ... (5) Accessory mounting
panel ... (6) Accessory blank panel may be ordered if desired.
Maintenance
Spares: The customer may wish to replace a failing 3846 with a
spare and must be advised to purchase sufficient spare devices
for such use. The number of spare devices recommended is
dependent upon the number of devices the customer has installed, his application requirements, physical locations, and
layouts.
IBM Repair Center Service: Maintenance of the 3846 will
normally be at a designated IBM Repair Center. All maintenance, parts replacement, adjustments, and repair shall normally
be performed at the designated I BM Repair Center. It shall be
the customer's responsibility to set up the equipment and to
determine when remedial maintenance is required. When remedial maintenance is required, it shall be the customer's responsibility to determine the failing device, pack the device in the
designated shipping container and ship it prepaid to the designated IBM Repair Center. IBM will pre-pay the transporation
charges for return of the repaired device. There is no regularly
scheduled preventative maintenance recommended by IBM for
these units.
Customers with machines not under an IBM Repair Center Maintenance Supplement to the IBM Maintenance Agreement, have
the option to ship the machines to the designated I BM Repair
Center for repair under the IBM Repair Authorization Form,
GX27-2981, in which case repair will be made (if the machine is
repairable). Alternatively, upon request, the IBM Repair Center
will provide, for a minimum charge, an estimate of repair
charges. This charge covers handling, inspection, adjustment,
testing, estimating of repair charges, and return shipping
charges.
The 3846 is eligible for maintenance agreement service immediately following expiration of the service and parts warranty at
the monthly charge under MMMC in "Prices" below.
Specify
1. Line Voltage Plug (115/120 V Power and Line Cord, 1-phase,
60 Ha): #9890 for locking plug, #9891 for non-lock plug.
2. Line Cord Length-if the standard 2.8M (9 ft.) power cable is
not desired, specify: #9511 for 1.8M (6 ft.) line cord, #9512
for 3.7M (12 ft.) line cord, #9513 for 4.5M (15 ft.) line cord.
3. For Models 12 and 13: Specify one ... installation available at
time of manufacture only.
#9110-BSC/SDLC or
#9115-BSC with BMC/SDLC
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Accessories
•
Personalization/ Key Entry Unit, Part No. 4407908, to enter
key variable, seed, and personalization data. One must be
available at each site.
•
Mounting plate, Part No. 6813128, to attach 4 type 3846
units to a rack. One required for each 4 units.
•
Blank panel, Part No. 4409058, to close any unused opening
in a mounting panel. One may be ordered for each unused
opening.
•
A battery, Part No. 1743456, is needed to replace the installed battery. The replacement schedule is defined in the
Principle of Operation Manual. Discharges batteries should
be returned to IBM.
If maintenance agreement service is not contracted for immediately following expiration of service and parts warranty and the
customer now wants maintenance agreement service, the customer may ship the machine(s) to the designated I BM Repair
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
------
:: :-:. ===
M3846.3
General Systems Division-Machin.es
Purchase
Personalization/Key Entry Unit,
Part No. 4407908
Mounting Plate,
Part No. 6813128
Blank Panel,
Part No. 4409058
Battery,
Part No. 1743456
$265
MMMC
..
30
5
17
··Warranty Services are available at the designated IBM Repair
Center during the 90 day warranty period, which commences 30
days following date of shipment form the Plant of Manufacture
It shall be the customer's responsibility to determine
the failing unit and, if the unit is still under warranty, to pack it in
the designated shipping container and ship it prepaid to the
designated IBM Repair Center.
IBM Maintenance Agreements are not available.
Engineering on-site service will not be provided.
Customer
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
April 78
- -----= -=
~----=
-------
-
M3872.1
General Systems Division~Machines
3872 MODEM
Purpose: A 2400 bps modem, with half;-speed capability, used
to provide communications products with the means for transmitting data over common carrier provided voiceband private
line (non-switched) channels, equivalent privately owned channels or switched telecommunication networks.
Highlights: Modem operation is possible in half-duplex mode
over 2- or 4-wire half-duplex facilities, half-duplex or duplex
mode over duplex facilities or half-duplex mode over switched
telecommunication networks.
Data Rates: 2400 bps with back-up half-speed.
Equalization: Manually adjustable by operator on private line
(non-switched) channels and automatic on switched networks.
Operation: Switched network or multipoint control, multipoint
tributary, point-to-point on a private line (non-switched) channel.
See "Special Features."
.o(f
Built-in Diagnostics: Included in each modem are the following
diagnostic features accessible to the operator: (1) The modem
may be wrap tested independently of the using machine and
telecommunication channel ... (2) It may be line tested with a
remote modem and telecommunication channel, independently
of the attached business machine. The test may be one way or
remotely wrapped to the local modem.
Communications Facilities: Communication Common Carrier
provided voiceband private line (non-switched) channel, type
3002, (or equivalent) as described in the Bell System Technical
Reference PU B 41004, dated October, 1973. Note: Machines
with a serial number prior to 13100 and a suffix prior to HZ with
Multipoint Tributary (#5101, 5102) or Point-to-point (#6101,
6102) feature require the installation of an RPQ to operate on a
basic (not conditioned) 3002 channel.
Privately Owned Communication Facilities: Equivalent to
above.
Public Switched Networks The customer must be advised that
satisfactory data transmission depends upon the characteristics
of the particular switched network connection being used. Refer
to M2700 pages for further details.
International Facilities: Transmission of data between the
United States and Canada on non-switched or switched facilities
is supported. (For non-switched operation, the channel in Canada must be a schedule 4, type 4.)
Attachment to Facilities: Attachment to a private line (nonswitched) channel is by a cable, supplied with the 3872, which is
terminated with a four prong plug (WE 283B or equivalent). The
plug mates with a receptacle (WE 404B or 549A surface mount
or 493A flush mount, or equivalent) which is connected to the
channel. (The receptacle is a conventional item of communication equipment and is, upon customer request, ordinarily furnished by the telecommunication service supplier.)
April 78
lugs for connection to the Data Coupler CBS (WE 1001 A, series
5 or later, or WE 1001 F, or equivalent).
Related Equipment: The 3872 operates with IBM communications products capable of 2400 bps operation ... see "Related
Equipment" under "Specify." Modem clocking must be used.
The IBM 3872 Modem must communicate with another appropriately equipped 3872, or with an appropriately equipped IBM
2400 bps Integrated Modem. The interconnecting cable between the business machine and the modem must be supplied
by the business machine. If the 3872 is equipped with the Automatic Call Originate (#1091) feature, the interconnecting AutoCall cable between the business machine and the modem must
be supplied by the business machine.
Customer Responsibilities: The customer must be informed of
his responsibilities as detailed in the M2700 pages and in the
Installation Planning section of the 3872 User's Guide, GA273058. The customer is responsible for:
1. Private line (non-switched) channel-arranging for the telecommunication service supplier to provide a type 3002 voice
grade data channel (or equivalent) as described under
"Communications Channel Specifications" in the 3872 User's
Guide. Also arranging for the installation of the appropriate
receptacle described in "Attachment to Facilities."
2. Switched Telecommunication Network-arranging for the
telecommunication service supplier to install the appropriate
communication service equipped with the required connecting device as described in "Attachment to Facilities" and for
attaching the IBM provided cable to the connecting device.
Also inform the telecommunication service supplier that the
speed of data transmission will be 2400 bps and that appropriate conditioning of the local loop .is required. The customer must be made aware that the use of local loops not properly conditioned for the speed of data transmission or the use
of special switched facilities may result in unsatisfactory data
transmission.
3. Providing voice communications between modems to coordinate tests or re-equalization. The voice facility can be provided by the 3872 Alternate Voice feature. Information concerning the handset for the Alternate Voice feature is described in
the 3872 Modem User's Guide. The voice facility must be
located such that ·an operator can use it while operating the
controls on the front of the modem.
4. If the 3872 is to be attached to a non-I BM product, the interconnecting cable between the business machine and the
modem must be supplied by the business machine.
5. If the 3872 is equipped with the Automatic Call Originate
feature (#1091), the interconnecting Auto-Call cable between
the business machine and the modem must be supplied by
the business machine.
Bibliography: See GA24-3089
If the 3872 is equipped with Switched Band Network Back-up
(#7951), another cable is supplied with the feature. This cable is
also terminated with a four prong plug and requires the aforementioned type of receptacle which is connected to the Data
Access Arrangement COT (WE 1000A or equivalent).
If the 3872 is equipped with Switched Network (#7941, #7942)
or Switched Network Back-up with Automatic Answer (#7952) a
cable is supplied with the feature which is terminated with spade
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-- ---._ :-:. ='='=
- - - .. -
M3872.2
General Systems Division-Machines
April 78
-~-
Publication: IBM 3872 User's Guide, GA27-3058
Specify
1. Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz):
Locking Plug
Non-Locking Plug
115V
#9880
#9881
208V
#9884
#9885
230V
#9886
#9887
2. Telecommunication Cord (modem to telecommunication
facility): Specify one of the following for each telecommunication channel or network connection;
#9750 Telecommunication cord to connect a basic (control
station) 3872 modem, or one equipped with Multipoint Tributary (#5101), or Point-to-Point (#6101) feature, to a private
line (non-switched) channel.
#9751 Telecommunication cord to connect a basic (control
station) 3872 Second r,,1odem (#6302) or second modem
equipped with Multipoint Tributary (#5102), or Point-to-Point
(#6102) feature, to a private line (non-switched) channel.
#9752 Telecommunication cord to connect a 3872 modem
equipped with Switched Network (#7941) to a switched
telecommunication network.
#9753 Telecommunication cord to connect a 3872 Second
Modem (#6302) equipped with Switched Network (#7942) to
a switched telecommunication network.
#9754 Telecommunication cord to connect a 3872 modem
equipped with Switched Network Back-up (#7951) or
Switched Network Back-up with Automatic Answer (#7952)
to a switched telecommunication network.
A 10-foot cable will be supplied. If a longer cable is required,
indicate 15, 20 or 25 feet as the quantity of the feature # specified. Note:
orders to add the Switched Network Backup
feature(s) (#7951 or #7952), to convert a private line (nonswitched) channel modem to Switched Network, or to convert a
Switched Network modem to private line (non-switched) channel must include the telecommunication cord specify number(s)
compatible with the resultant modem configuration.
3. Related Equipment: For record purposes, one 3872 Attachment Feature Code from the table below must be specified
for each 3872, depending upon the unit to which it is attached.
Machine
1131
1826
2020
2780
2848
3271
3274
3275
3276
3707
3735
3741-2/4
3747
3872
3872
Attachment # Machine
9501
3767
9502
3780
9503
5010
9509
5110
9511
5231
9513
5251-2/12
9558
5320
9514
5340
9557
5404
9548
5406
9517
5408
9526
5410
9526
5412
5415
Non-IBM
PRQ Machine
Attachment #
9537
9521
9531
9564
9547
9565
9545
9559
9549
9518
9538
9519
9546
9533
9520
9524
Special Features
The basic 3872 Modem with no additional feature required is
used at the control station in a centralized multipoint network.
Additional capabilities/configurations are provided by the following features.
Alternate Voice (#1051, 1052): Provides signalling capability
and a socket on the operator panel into which a customer provided handset may be plugged permitting voice communication
with the distant 3872 Modem(s). Data cannot be simultaneously
transmitted with voice. A handset is not provided. See 3872
User's Guide for description of handset. #1051-for basic
modem ... #1052-for Second Modem (#6302). Maximum:
One of each. Limitations: a #1051 cannot be installed with
Switched Network (#7941) ... #1052 cannot be installed with
Switched
Network (#7942).
Field
Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisites: #1052 requires Second Modem (#6302).
Automatic Call Originate (#1091): Permits automatic origination of a call by the using machine equipped with an IBM autocall feature. Provides control to the common carrier Data Coupler Type CBS (or equivalent) to dial telephone numbers and to
provide on-hook/ off-hook control. Note: Can only be used with
Rotary Dial. System. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with Second Modem (#6302) or Switched Network
Back-up (#7951, 7952). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Switched Network (#7941) on 3872 and an IBM Auto Call feature on the using machine.
Fan-Out (#3901): This feature allows attachment, to the '3872,
of up to three IBM Teleprocessing Machines at one location ...
see Specify (3) for applicable machines. Only one of the attached machines may transmit at a time.
This feature may be used at a tributary station in a centralized
multipoint network. In this configuration, multipoint programming discipline will provide the selection/control of the specified
IBM terminals without any additional user involvement.
This feature may also be used to allow up to three of the specified IBM Multiplexers, Communication Controllers, or Integrated
Communications Adapters, at a central site to share the same
3872 Modem for back-up purposes. In this case, although all of
the machines attached to the 3872 will receive the incoming
data simultaneously, the user switchover procedure must insure
that only one machine is sending.
Maximum: One.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with Second Modem (#6302)
or Switched Network (#7941). Field Installation: Yes.
Multipoint Tributary (#5101, 5102): Used on each modem
attached to tributary stations in a centralized multipoint network
to compensate for line distortion between the control and tributary station. Operator adjustment on front panel. #5101-for
basic modem ... #5102-for Second Modem (#6302).
Maximum: One of each. Limitation: #5101 cannot be installed
with Point-to-Point (#6101) or Switched Network (#7941) ...
#5102 cannot be installed with Point-to-Point (#6102) or
Switched
Network
(#7942).
Field
installation:
Yes.
Prerequisite: #5102 requires Second Modem (#6302). Specify:·
Telecommunication cord #9750 for feature #5101 ... Telecom-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------=
~--= General Systems Division-Machines
----- --_.--.•.
munication cord #9751 for feature #5102. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: #5102 requires Second Modem (#6302).
Point-to-Point (#6101~6102): Used on modems at each end of
a point-to-point private line (non-switched) channel to compensate for line distortion. #6101-for basic modem ... #6102-for
Second Modem (#6302). Maximum: One of each. Limitation:
#6101 cannot be installed with Multipoint Tributary (#5101) or
Switched Network (#7941) ... #6102 cannot be installed with
Multipoint Tributary (#5102) or Switched Network (#7942).
Specify: Telecommunication cord #9750 for feature #6101 .. ,
Telecommunication cord #9751 for feature #6102. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: #6102 requires Second Mo-:
dem (#6302).
Second Modem (#6302): Permits two modems, each to operate on a separate line, to be housed in the same stand-alone
cabinet. The two modems share the same power supply.
Maximum: One. Limitations: Only the following features are
allowed on either or both modems-Alternate Voice (#1051,
1052). Point-to-Point (#6101, 6102), Multipoint Tributary
(#5101, 5102). or Switched Network (#7941, 7942). Field
Installation: No. Plant only.
Switched Network (#7iJ41, 7942): Used for operation over
public switched network via the common carrier Data Coupler
type CBS (or equivalent). Automatic answering of incoming calls
will be performed by the modem. Automatic equalization is
effected at the beginning of each call. #7941- for basic modem
... #7942-for Second Modem (#6302). Conditioning of the
telecommunication service local loop for transmission of data
faster than 300 bps is required. It can communicate with another 3872 equipped with Switched Network (#7941 or #7942),
with Switched Network Back-up (#7951) or with Switched
Network Back-up with Automatic Answer (#7952). Maximum:
One of each. Limitations: #7941 cannot be installed with Alternate Voice (#1051), Fan-Out (#3901). Multipoint Tributary
(#5101). or Point-to-Point (#6101) ... #7942 cannot be installed
with Alternate Voice (#1052). Multipoint Tributary (#5102), or
Point-to-Point (#6102). Specify: Telecommunication cord
#9752 for feature #7941 ... Telecommunication cord #9753 for
feature #7942. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: #7942
requires Second Modem (#6302).
M3872.3
April 78
loop for transmission of data faster than 300 bps is required.
For additional information, see the 3872 User's Guide.
Maximum: One. Limitations: Cannot be installed with Second
Modem (#6302). or Switched Network features (#7941, 7942 or
7952).
Specify: Telecommunication cord #9754.
Field
Installation: Yes.
Switched Network Back-up with Automatic Answer
(#7952): Same as Switched Network Back-up (#7951) plus the
added capability of automatically answering incoming calls when
attached to a common carrier Data Coupler type CBS (or equivalent). Note: To use this feature, operator intervention at the
modem is required. Operator intervention,program modification, or both may be required on the using system/terminal.
This feature can be used with BTAM programs for DOS,
DOS/VS, OS, OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 in certain configurations.
Programming support for the 2020, 5231, 5320, 5340, 5404,
5406, 5~08, 5410, 5412, and 5415 is still applicable when these
devices are used as remote terminals. Additional customer
routines will be required, in existing BTAM programming, to fully
utilize the capabilities of the Switched Network Back-up feature.
Conditioning of the telecommunication service local loop for the
transmission of data faster than 300 bps is required. For additional information, see the 3872 User's Guide. Maximum: One.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with Second Modem (#6302).
or Switched Network features (#7941, 7942 or 7951). Specify:
Telecommunication cord #9754. Field Installation: Yes.
Switched Network Back-up (#7951): Provides the capability
of attaching the 3872 to the public switched network as a backup to the private line (non-switched) channel. It can communicate with another 3872 equipped with Switched Network (#7941
or #7942), with Switched Network Back-up (#7951), or with
Switched Network Back-up with Automatic Answer (#7952). A
fixed compromise equalizer is provided for the back-up operation. A front panel switch permits operator selection of either
the prime or the back-up facility. Both facilities cannot be used
simultaneously.
Attachment to the switched network is made via the common
carrier Data Access Arrangement type COT (or equivalent). Calls
must be established and answered manually. Note: To use this
feature, operator intervention at the modem is required. Operator intervention, program modification, or both may be required
on the using system/terminal.
This feature can be used with BTAM programs for DOS,
DOS/VS, OS, OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 in certain configurations.
Programming support for 2020, 5231, 5320, 5340, 5404, 5406,
5408, 5410, 5412, and 5415 is still applicable when these devices are used as remote terminals. Additional customer program routines will be required, in existing BTAM programming,
to fully utilize the capabilities of the Switched Network Back-up
feature. Conditioning of the telecommunication service local
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
..........
----= -=.
=---=
-----------...
M3872.4
.....,,;
April 78
General Systems Division-Machines
.
~~-.-
CONFIGURATOR
3872
Modem
Second
Modem
*
#6302
*
Switched
Network
Switched
Network
#7941t
#7942tt
Alternate
Voice
Multipoint
Tributary
#1051t
#5102tt
Multipoint
Tributary
Point-toPoint
#5101 t
#6102tt
Point-toPoint
Alternate
Voice
#6101 t
#1052
tt
Autocall
#1091t
Fan-Out
#3901 t
Switched
Network
Back-up
#79.51
t
* Multipoint Control Modem.
t
For Basic Modem.
tt For Second Modem.
Switched
Network
Back-up with
Auto-Answer
#7952 t
Specify:
1. Power Cord
2. Telecommunication Cord
3. Related Equipment
Not to be reproduc.ed without written permission.
-- - ---
M3874:. 1
=
- =- -'---
=--~ General Systems Division-Machines
-~-
..
April 78
-
3874 MODEMS
Purpose: A 4800 bps modem, with half-speed capability, used
to provide communications products with the means for transmitting data over common carrier provided voiceband private
line (non-switched) channels, equivalent privately owned channels or switched telecommunication networks.
Highlights: Modem operation is possible in half-duplex or
duplex mode over 4-wire duplex facilities or half-duplex over
2-wire switched telecommunication networks,
Data Rates: 4800 bps with back-up half speed.
Equalization: Automatic.
Operation: Switched network or multipoint control, multipoint
tributary, point-to-point on a private line (non-switched) channel.
See "Special Features."
Built-in Diagnostics: Included in each modem are the following
diagnostiC features accessible to the operator: (1) The modem
may be wrap tested independently of the using machine and
telecommunication channel ... (2) It may be line tested with a
remote modem and telecommunication channel. independently
of the attached business machine. The test may be one way or
remotely wrapped to the local modem ... (3) Facility is provided
to allow the attached machine to initiate a local wrap test independently from the telecommunication channel via an interface
lead.
Communications Facilities: Communications common carrier
provided voiceband private line (non-switched) channel, type
3002, with C1 conditioning (or equivalent) as described in the
Bell System Technical Reference PUB 41004 dated October,
1973.
Privately Owned Communications Facilities: Equivalent to
above.
Public Switched Telecommunication Networks: The custom,er must be advised that satisfactory data transmission depends
on the characteristics of the switched network connection being
used ... see M2700 pages for further details.
International Facilities: Transmission of data between the
United States and Canada on non-switched or switched facilities
is supported. (For non-switched operation, the channel in Canada must be a schedule 4, type 4, with 4A conditioning.)
Attachment to Facilities: Attachment to a private line (non-.
switched) channel is by a cable, supplied with the 3874, which is
terminated with a four prong plug (WE 283B or equivalent). The
plug mates with a receptacle (WE 404B or 549A surface mount
or 439A flush mount, or equivalent) which is connected to the
channel. (The receptacle is a conventional item of communication equipment and is, upon customer request. ordinarily furnished by the telecommunication service supplier.)
If the 3874 is equipped with Switched Network Back-up (#7951)
another cable is supplied with the feature. This cable is also
terminated with a four prong plug and requires the aforementioned type of receptacle which is connected to the Data Access
Arrangement COT (WE 1000A or equivalent).
If the 3874 is equipped with Switched Network (#7941) or
Switched Network Back-up" with Automatic Answer (#7952) a
cable is supplied with th'e feature which is terminated with spade
lugs for connection to the Data Coupler CBS (WE 1001 A series
5 or later or WE 1001 F or equivalent).
Related Equipment: The 3874 operates with IBM communications products capable of 4800 bps operation ... see "Related
Equipment" under "Specify." Modem clocking must be used.
The 3874 modem must communicate with another appropriately
configured 3874 or IBM 4800 bps Integrated Modem. The
interconnecting cable between the busines~ machine and the
modem must be supplied by the business machine. If the 3874
is equipped with the Automatic Call Originate feature (#1091),
the interconnecting Auto Call cable between the attached machine and the modem must be supplied by the attached machine.
'
Customer Responsibilities: The customer must be informed of
his responsibilities as detailed in the M2700 pages and in the
Installation Planning Section of the 3874 User's Guide, GA330002. The customer is responsible for:
1. Private line (non-switched) channel-arranging for the telecommunication service supplier to provide a type 3002 voice
grade data channel with C1 conditioning (or equivalent) as
described under "Communication Channel Specifications" in
the 3874 User's Guide. Also arranging for the installation of
the appropriate receptacle described in "Attachment to Facilities."
2. Switched Telecommunication Network-arranging for the
telecommunication service supplier to install the appropriate
communication service equipped with the required connecting device as described in "Attachment to Facilities,"
Also inform the telecommunication service supplier that the
speed of data transmission will be 4800 bps and that appropriate conditioning on the local loop is required. The customer must be made aware that the use of local loops not properly conditioned for the speed of data transmission or the use
'of special switched facilities may result in unsatisfactory data
transmission.
3. For attaching the IBM provided line cable to the common
carrier provided Data Access Arrangements.
4. Providing voice communications between modems attach~d
to non-switched lines to coordinate tests. This voice facility
can be provided by 3874 Alternate Voice feature. Information
concerning the handset for the Alternate Voice feature is
described in the 3874 Modem User's Guide. The voice facility
must be located such that an operator can use it while operating the controls on the front of the modem.
5. If the 3874 is to be attached to a non-IBM product, the interconnecting cable between the business machine and the
modem must be supplied by the business machine.
6. If the 3874 is equipped with the Automatic Call Originate
feature (#1091), the interconnecting Auto-Call cable between
the business machine and the modem must be supplied by
the business machine.
See M2700 pages for additional customer responsibilities.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index, G320-1621 or specific system
bibliography.
Publication: IBM 3874 Modem User's Guide, GA33-0002.
Specify
1. Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz):
Locking Plug
Non-Locking Plug
115V
#9880
#9881
208V
#9884
#9885
230V
#9886
#9887
2. Telecommunication Cord (modem to telecommunication
facility): Specify one of the following for each connecti()n to a
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
--- =- --- General Systems Division-Machines
=---=
- - -------.-
-
M3874.2
April 78
-~-.-
private line (non-switched) channel and for each connection
to a switched telecommunication network
see
"Attachment to Facilities."
#9750 Telecommunication cord to connect a 3874 modem
provided with Point-to-Point (#6101). Multipoint Control
(#5100). or Multipoint Tributary (#5101) features to a private
line. (non-switched) channel.
#9754 Telecommunication cord to connect a 3874 modem
provided with Switched Network (#7941) or Switched Network Backup with Automatic Answer (#7952) features to a
switched telecommunication network terminated by a Data
Coupler type CBS.
#9752 Telecommunication cord to connect a 3874 modem
provided with Switched Network Backup (#7951) to a
switched telecommunication network terminated by a Data
Access Arrangement type CDT.
A 10-foot cable will be provided as standard. If a longer
cable is required, indicate 15, 20 or 25 feet as the quantity of
the feature # specified. Note: MES orders to add the
Switched Network Backup feature (#7951 or #7952) or to
convert a non-switched modem to switched network or to
convert a switched network to non-switched channel must
include the telecommunication cord specify number(s) compatible with the resultant modem configuration.
3. Related Equipment: For record purposes, one 3874 Attachment Feature # from the table below must be specified for
each 3874, depending upon the unit to which it is to be attached.
3874
Machine Attachment # Machine
1131
1826
2020
2780
3271
3274
3275
3276
3735
3780
9501
9502
9503
9509
9513
9558
9514
9557
9517
9521
5010
5110
5231
5251-2/12
5320
5340
5404
5406
5408
5410
5412
5415
Non-IBM
RPQ Machine
3874
Attachment #
9531
9564
9552
9565
9545
9559
9549
9518
9538
9519
9546
9533
9520
9524
Prerequisite: One of the following special features must be
installed: Multipoint Control (#5100), Multipoint Tributary
(#5101). Point-to-Point (#6101) or Switched Network (#7941).
Multipoint Control (#5100.): Used on each modem attached to
a control station in a centralized multipoint network. Provides
for automatic equalization of the private line (non-switched)
channel from up to six tributary stations. Operator controls on
front panel. Maximum: One. Limitations: Cannot be installed
with Point-to-Point (#6101), Multipoint Tributary (#5101), or
Switched Network (#7941). Specify: Telecommunication cord
#9750. Field Installation: Yes.
Multipoint Tributary (#5101): Used on each modem attached
to tributary stations in a centralized multipoint network. Provides
for automatic equalization of the private line (non-switched)
channel from the control station. Operator controls on front
panel. Maximum: One. Limitations: Cannot be installed with
Multipoint Control (#5100), Point-to-Point (#6101), or Switched
Network (#7941). Specify: Telecommunication Cord #9750.
Field Installation: Yes.
Point-to-Point (#6101): Used on modems at each end of a
point-to-point private line (non-switched) channel. Provides
automatic equalization of the channel. Operator controls on
front panel. Maximum: One. Limitations: Cannot be installed
with Multipoint Control (#5100), Multipoint Tributary (#5101), or
Switched Network (#7941). Specify: Telecommunication cord
#9750. Field Installation: Yes.
Switched Network (#7941): Used for operation over public
switched network via the common carrier Data Coupler type
CBS (or equivalent). Automatic answering of incoming calls will
be performed by the modem. Automatic equalization is effected
at the beginning of each call. It can communicate with another
3874 equipped with Switched Network (#7941), with Switched
Network Backup (#7951), or with Switched Network Backup
with Automatic Answer (#7952). Conditioning of the telecommunication service local loop for the transmission of data faster
than 300 bps is required ... see "Customer Responsibilities."
Maximum: One. Limitations: Cannot be installed with Alternate Voice (#1051), Multipoint Control (#5100). Multipoint Tributary (#5101), or Point-to-Point (#6101). See "Programming"
section of Sales Manual for restricted configurations. Specify:
Telecommunication cord #9754. Field Installation: Yes.
The following features are optional to enhance the modem function.
Alternate Voice (#1051): Provides signalling capability and a
socket on the operator panel into which a customer provided
handset may be plugged, permitting voice communications with
the distant 3874 modem(s). Data cannot be simultaneously
transmitted with voice. A handset is not provided. See 3874
User's Guide for description of handset. Maximum: One.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with Switched Network
(#7941) ... c.annot be used when a non-switched line 3874 modem is in Switched Network Back-up operation. Field
Installation: Yes.
Automatic Call Originate (#1091): Permits automatic origination of a call by the using machine equipped with an IBM Auto
Call feature. Provides control to the common Carrier Data Coupler, Type CBS (or equivalent) to dial telephone numbers and to
provide on hook/off hook control. Note: Can only be used with
Rotary Dial System. Maximum: One. Limitations: Cannot be
installed with Switched Network Back-up (#7951). Switched
Network Back-up with Automatic Answer (#7952), or Fan-out
(#3901). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Switched
Network (#7941) and an IBM Auto Call feature on the using
machine.
Fan-Out (#3901): This feature allows attachment to the 3874 of
up to three IBM teleprocessing machines at one location. See
"Specify" for applicable machines. Only one of the attached
machines may transmit at a time. The feature may be used at a
tributary station in a centralized multipoint network. In this
configuration, multipoint programming discipline will provide the
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----= -.....=
~
~ General Systems Division-Machines,
-- -----
M3874;,3
April78
-~-.-
selection/ control of the specified I BM terminals without any
additional user involvement.
CONFIGURATION
Switched Network Back-up (#7951): Provides the capability
of attaching the 3874 modem to a public switched network as a
back-up to the prime leased facility. It can communicate at
4800/2400 bps with another 3874 equipped with Switched
Network (#7941), Switched Network Back-up (#7951), or
Switched Network Back-up with Auto Answer (#7952). Attachment to the switched network is made via the common carrier
Data Access Arrangement type COT (or equivalent). Calls must
be established and answered manually. Note: To use this feature, operator intervention at the modem is required. Operator
intervention, program modification, or both may be required on
the using system/terminal.
This feature can be used with BTAM programs for DOS,
DOS/VS, OS, OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 in certain configurations.
Programming support for 2020, 5320, 5340, 5404, 5406, 5408,
5410, 5412 and 5415 is still applicable when these devices are
used as remote terminals. Additional customer program routines
will be required in existing BT AM programming to fully utilize the
capabilities of feature #7951. Conditioning of the telecommunication service local loop for the transmission of data faster than
300 bps is required ... see "Customer Responsibilities."
Maximum: One. Limitations: Cannot be installed with
Switched Network (#7941), Switched Network Back-up with
Automatic Answer (#7952), or Automatic Call Originate (#1091).
*
Switched Network Prime Operation
"Switched Network Back-up
Specify:
1. Power Cord
2. Telecommunication Cord
3. Related Equipment
Switched Network Back-up with Automatic Answer
(#7952): Same as Switched Network Back-up (#7951) plus the
added capability of automatically answering incoming calls.
Requires attachment to a Common Carrier Data Coupler Type
CBS (or equivalent). Conditioning of the telecommunication
service local loop for the transmission of data faster than 300
bps is required ... see "Customer Responsibilities." Note: To
use this feature, operator intervention at the modem is required.
Operator intervention, program modification, or both may be
required on the using system/terminal. Maximum: One.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with Switched Network
(#7941), Switched Network Back-up (#7951), or Automatic Call
Originate (#1091).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
END
-- - --=---=
- .....
- ----
M3875.1
,~--...'-.
- -=
General Systems Division-Machines
April 78
. . ,.
3875 MODEM
Purpose: Provides communication terminals with the means of
transmitting data at 7200 bps, with half-speed capability, over
common carrier provided voiceband private line (non-switched)
channels, equivalent privately owned channels, or, at 3600 bps,
with half-speed capability, over switched telecommunication
networks as a back-up to the private line (non-switched) channel.
Highlights: Modem operation is possible in half-duplex or
duplex mode over 4-wire duplex facilities or half-duplex mode
with the Switched Network Back-up feature over switched
telecommunication networks.
Data Rates: 7200 bps with back-up half-speed on private line
(non-switched) channels ... 3600 bps with back-up half-speed
on switched telecommunication networks.
Equalization: Manually adjustable by an operator on private line
(non-switched) channels. Fixed compromise on back-up
switched telecommunication networks.
Operation: Multipoint control, multipoint tributary, point-topoint on private line (non-switched) channel. Switched telecommunication network as a back-up to the private line (nonswitched) channel. See "Special Features."
Built-in Diagnostics-included in each modem are the following diagnostic features accessible to the operator:
The modem may be wrap tested independently of the using
machine and telecommunication channel.
The modem may be line tested with a remote end modem
and telecommunication channel independently of the attached business machines. The test may be one way or remotely wrapped back to the local modem.
Communications Facilities: Communications Common Carrier
provided voiceband private line (non-switched) channel, type
3002, with C2 conditioning (or equivalent) as described in the
Bell System Technical Reference PUB 41004, dated October,
1973.
Normally the telecommunication service defined in the preceding
statement provides for satisfactory operation of the 3875. However, there may be unusual circumstances where the channel
characteristics exceed the tolerance level of the 3875. Where
these characteristics cause an unacceptable error rate, the customer may request the telecommunication service supplier to
provide D1 conditioning in addition to the C2 conditioning. D1
conditioning may not be available in some locations. For this
situation the customer may request the telecommunication
service supplier to provide alternate routing or special engineering effort.
D1 conditioning is not available under existing tariffs for multipoint networks. If an unacceptable error rate is encountered, the
alternatives available to the customer are to request the telecommunication service supplier to provide re-routing or special
engineering effort.
The telecommunication service supplier may not always be able
to supply alternate routing or special engineering effort.
The operation of a multipoint network is more critical of line
characteristics due to the cumulative effect of all the segments
in the network. Actual performance cannot be accurately predicted but can only be established after the installation of the
equipment.
The customer must be made aware of these exposures and the
available alternatives prior to ordering the equipment. See
M2700 pages-"Customer Responsibilities."
Privately Owned Communications Facilities: Equivalent to
above.
Public Switched Network The customer must be advised that
satisfactory data transmission depends on the characteristics of
the switched telecommunication network connection being used
... see M2700 pages for further details.
International Facilities: Transmission 'of data between United
States and Canada is supported. (In Canada a Schedule 4, Type
4, channel with 4B conditioning is required. The equivalent of
D1 conditioning is not available in Canada.)
Attachment to Facilities: Attachment to a private line (nonswitched) channel is by a cable, supplied with the 3875, which is
terminated with a four prong plug (WE 283B or equivalent). The
plug mates with a receptacle (WE 404B or 549A surface mount
or 493A flush mount, or equivalent) which is connected to the
channel. (The receptacle is a conventional item of communication equipment and is, upon customer request, ordinarily furnished by the telecommunication service supplier.)
If the 3875 is equipped with Switched Network Back-up (#7951)
another cable is supplied with the feature. This cable is also
terminated with a four prong plug and requires the aforementioned type of receptacle which is connected to the Data Access
Arrangement type COT (WE 1000A or equivalent).
If the 3875 is equipped with Switched Network Back-up with
Automatic Answer (#7952) a cable is supplied with the feature
which is terminated with spade lugs for connection to the Data
Coupler type CBS (WE 1001 A series 5 or later or WE 1001 F or
equivalent).
Related Equipment: The 3875 Modem operates with the binary
synchronous control adapters of the IBM machines listed in the
table under "Specify." Modem clocking must be used. See
M2700 pages for facilities description.
Customer Responsibilities: The customer must be informed of
his responsibilities as detailed in the M2700 pages and in the
Installation Planning section of the 3875 User's Guide, GA330001. The customer is responsible for:
1. Private line (non-switched) channel-arranging for the communication common carrier to provide a voiceband private
line (non-switched) channel, type 3002, with C2 conditioning
as defined in the Bell System Technical Reference PUB
41004. "Data Communications Using Voiceband Private Line
Channels" (October, 1973). Arrange for the installation of
the appropriate receptacle described in "Attachment to Facilities."
2. Public switched telecommunication network-arranging for
the telecommunication service supplier to install the appropriate communication service equipped with the required
connecting device as described in "Attachment to Facilities"
and for attaching the IBM provided cable to the connecting
device.
Also. inform the telecommunication service supplier that the
speed of data transmission will be 3600 bps and that appropriate conditioning of the local loop is required. The customer must be made aware that the use of local loops not appropriately conditioned for the speed of data transmission or the
use of special switched facilities may result in unsatisfactory
data transmission.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----=--==
-=
- ------
-
, *'.
M387q,.2
----~
General Systems Division-Machines
April 78
",
-~-.-
3. Providing voice communications between control and tributary stations to coordinate test or re-equalize. This voice
facility can be provided by the Alternate Voice feature. Information concerning the handset for the Alternate Voice
feature is described in the 3875 Modem User's Guide.
Special Features
The basic 3875 Modem (#9101) is used as the control station in
a centralized multipoint network. Specify: #9101 and telecommunication line cord #9750.
4. When the 3875 is to be attached to other than an IBM machine, that business machine must provide the interconnecting cable between the connector or digital equipment and the
modem.
Bibliography: GA24-3089
Publication: IBM 3875 User's Guide, GA33-0001.
Additional capabilities/configurations are provided by the following features.
Alternate Voice (#1051): Provides signalling capability, and a
jack on the operator panel into which the customer provided
handset may be plugged, permitting voice communication with
the other end. Data cannot be simultaneously transmitted with
voice. A handset is not provided. See 3875 User's Guide for
description of handset. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes.
Specify
1. Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz):
Locking Plug
Non-Locking Plug
115V
208V
230V
#9980
#9881
#9884
#9885
#9886
#9887
2. Telecommunication Cord (modem to telecommunication
facility): Specify one of the following for each connection to
private line (non-switched) channel or to a switched telecommunication network.
#9750 Telecommunication cord to connect a 3875 modem to
a private line (non-switched) channel.
#9031 Telecommunication cord to connect a 3875 modem
equipped with Switched Network Back-up (#7951) to a
switched telecommunication network.
#9032 Telecommunication cord to connect a 3875 modem
equipped with Switched Network Back-up with Automatic
Answer (#7952) to a switched telecommunication network.
A 10 foot cable will be supplied as standard. If a longer cable
is required, indicate 15, 20 or 25 feet as a quantity of the
feature number specified. Note:
orders to add
Switched Network Back-up (features #7951, #7952) must
include the telecommunication cord specify number for the
appropriate cord.
3. Related Equipment Attachment: For record purposes, one
3875 attachment feature must be specified with each 3875
order.
3875
Machine Attachment # Machine
3875
Attachment #
2020
3271
3274
3275
3276
5010
5320
5340
9549
9518
9538
9519
9546
9533
9520
9524
9503
9513
9558
9514
9557
9531
9545
9559
5404
5406
5408
5410
5412
5415
RPQ Machine
Non-IBM
Control Station Equalizer (#1601): Provides the capability for
a multipoint control station to operate with the Switched Network Back-up (#7951, 7952) features. Maximum: One.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Multipoint Tributary
(#5101) or Point-to-Point (#6101). Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Control Station Specify #9101.
Fan Out (#3901): Permits attachment, to one 3875, of up to
three business machines at one location. Only one of the machines may transmit at a time. The feature may be used at a
tributary station or on a multipoint configuration, in which case
the BSC multipoint line control procedure will handle the
selection/operation without any additional user involvement.
The feature may also be used to share the modem between two
or three multiplexers at a central site for back-up purposes. In
this case, though both multiplexers may receive the incoming
data, the user switchover procedures must ensure that both
multiplexers are not transmitting simultaneously. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes.
Multipoint Tributary (#5101): Used on each modem at tributary stations in a centralized multipoint network to compensate
for channel distortion between the control modem and tributary
modem. Not required on the modem at the control station.
Equalizer adjustments are on the operator panel. Maximum:
One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Point-to-Point
(#6101) or Control Station Specify #9101 or Control Station
Equalizer (#1601). Field Installation: Yes. Specify: Telecommunication cord #9750.
Point-to-Point (#6101): Used on modems at each end of a
point-to-point private line (non-switched) channel to compensate for the channel distortion. Equalizer adjustments are on the
operator panel. Maximum: One. Limitations: Cannot be installed with Multipoint Tributary (#5101) or Control Station
Specify #9101 or Control Station Equalizer (#1601). Field
Installation: Yes. Specify: Telecommunication cord #9750.
Switched Network Back-up (#7951, 7952): Provides the
capability of attaching the 3875 to a switched telecommunication network as a back-up to the private line (non-switched)
channel. Operation is at 3600 bps with half-speed capability. A
fixed compromise equalizer is provided for the back-up opera-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------=- --'.---=------
M3875.3
=--~ General Systems Division-Machines
-~-
_ April78
..
tion. A front panel switch permits operator selection of either
facility or speed. Both facilities cannot be used simultaneously.
#7951 for attachment to the common carrier Data Access
Arrangement type COT. Calls must be established and answered manually.
CONFIGURATOR
3875
Modem
#7952 for attachment to common carrier Data Coupler type
CBS. Calls must be established manually and may be answered either manually or automatically.
Point·to
Point
4/:6101
Note: To use this feature, operator intervention at the modem is
required. Operator intervention, program modification, or both
may be required on the using system/terminal.
This feature can be used with BT AM programs for DOS,
DOS/VS, OS, OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 in certain configurations.
Programming support for the 2020, 5320, 5340, 5404, 5406,
5408, 5410, 5412 and 5415 is still applicable when these devices are used as remote terminals. Additional customer program routines will be required, in existing BTAM programming,
to fully utilize the capabilities of the Switched Network Back-up
feature. Conditioning of the telecommunication local loop for
transmission of data faster than 300 bps is required. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Specify: Telecommunication cord
#9031 for FC #7951 ... Telecommunication cord #9032 for FC
#7952. Prerequisite: Point-to-Point (#6101), Multipoint Tributary (#5101), or Control Station Equalizer (#1601).
Multipoint
Tributary
4/:5101
Control
Station
4/:9101
Control
Station
Equalizer
4/:1601
N
4/:7952
N
#7951
Fan Out
4/:3901
Alternate
Voice
4/:1051
1. Power Cord
2. Telecommunication Cord
3. Related Equipment
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----= -- General Systems Division-Machines
= -=--==
--
- ------
_~_'t'_
3881 OPTICAL MARK READER
Purpose: Reads machine printed and/ or handmarked data
on..:Jine into System/370 models 115, 125, 135, 145, 155 II and
158, or System/3 model 8, 10, 12 or 15, or off-line to either of
two magnetic media: diskette or compatible 9-track magnetic
tape via a 3410 Magnetic Tape Unit model 1.
Modell For use with a System/370 model 115, 125, 135, 145,
155 II or 158, or System/3 model 8, 10, 12 or 15.
Field Installation: Yes.
Model2 Magnetic tape output via a 3410 Magnetic Tape Unit
model 001.
Model 3 Output data written on IBM Diskette.
Mo~el
!VI3881.1
April 78
written as one record on tape. An optional feature, Dual Density, permits output at either 1600 bpi PE or 800 bpi N RZI.
Diskette: Documents are read under control of the 3881 at
speeds varying up to 5,700 documents/hour (3" x 3")-and
3,800 pages/hour (8-1/2" x 11").
The diskette drive and its control function are installed within the
3881 model 3. Each magnetic diskette has a storage capacity of
up to 1,898 data records (128 characters each) with as many as
19 data sets per diskette. The contents of each document read
by the 3881 is written within one data record (a maximum of up
to 128 characters). The diskette media written by the 3881 is
compatible with such devices as the 3741, 3742, 3747 and
3540.
Prerequisites
Changes: Field installable.
Highlights: The 3881 is a high speed optical mark reader. Data
sheets are fed from a hopper with a 600-sheet capacity, through
the reading area and directed to one of two output stackers. The
main stacker has a capacity of 600 sheets. Sheets with detected
errors are directed to a separate stacker with a 1OO-sheet capacity. Documents are stacked in the same sequence as they were
entered in the hopper.
Data to be read can be placed on data sheets with ordinary #2
pencils, or by a 3203, a 1403 Printer, a 1443 Printer model 1 or 2
with a 52 or 63 character type bar with arrangement A, H or K, a
1443 Printer model N 1 or 2203 Printer model AOl with a 52 or
63 character type bar, a 3211 Printer, or a 5203 Printer. The
1403/5203 print chains or trains, the 1443/2203 type bar, or
the 3216 Interchangeable Train Cartridge must be equipped with
an enlarged dash which replaces the standard dash ... see "Type
Catalog."
Data Sheets: 3" x 3" to 9" x 12" ... up to 2,480 mark positions
printed on a side. Preprinted mark positions are printed in rows
of 40 positions on .2" centres for printer compatibility. Vertical
spacing is up to 6 to the inch for printer compatibility. Rows and
columns can be grouped into various combinations to form
fields for the recording of source data.
Format Control Sheet: Used to load format control information
into the 3881. Format control will define:
The area of the input data sheet which is to be read.
The marks allowed or discrimination required within each
area.
The sequence of the marking positions which make up the
marking matrices.
The output desired (numeric, alpha, alphameric or multiple
mark format).
The timing mark count which is expected on the sheets to be
processed.
BCD Read (optional feature) requirements.
From one to six formats, each consisting of one or more Format
Control Sheets, are read by the 3881 at the beginning of a job.
After reading the last Format Control Sheet, the data sheets of
the job to be processed are loaded in the 3881 .
System/3 and System/370: Documents are read under computer program control with speeds varying up to 6,000
documents/hour and 4,000-8-1/2" x 11" pages/hour. Data is
transferred to the System/370 CPU one page at a time on a fully
buffered interrupt basis.
3410 Magnetic Tape Unit: Documents are read under control
of the 3881 at speeds varying up to 5,400 documents/hour and
3,700-8-1/2" x 11" pages/hour. The 3881 reads and fully
buffers a document after which the data from the document is
Model 1 For System/370 models 115 and 125, an available
control unit position on the Multiplexer Channel (#5248) ... see
3115 and 3125. For System/370 models 135, 145, 155 II or
158, an available control unit position on a byte multiplexer
channel ... see 3135,3145,3155,3158. For System/3 model 8,
10, 12 or 15, a Serial I/O Channel (#7081) on the 5408, 5410,
5412 or 5415. One 3881 can be attached. Limitation:
System/3 model 10 programming support for the 3881 requires
a model 10 Disk System with 12,288 bytes of storage or a minimum model 8; System/3 model 12 programming support requires a minimum model 12 system; System/3 model 15 programming support requires a minimum model 15 system.
Model 2 A 3410 Magnetic Tape Unit model 001 equipped with
either Single Density (#3211) or Dual Density (#3221) ... see
3410.
Model 3 None.
Supplies: For printing marks, use IBM ribbon 1136940 or
1136430 on the 1403 (all models) and 1136430 on the 3203;
422536 on the 1443/2203; 1136964 on the 3211; 1136990 on
the 5203, or equivalent ribbons capable of producing acceptable
marks. For non-readable background printing, use ribbon
419101, or equivalent.
Format Control Sheets: 100 are provided with each 3881 .
Manuals: 3881 Reference Manual, GA21-9143 ... 3881 Systems
Design Guide, GC20-1751.
Bibliography: GA22-6822
Specify
1. Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208V, or
#9904 for 230V ... must be consistent with system or 3410
voltage. Field Installation: Yes.
2. Invalid Marking Condition Code: #9301 for Hex 3F
(unprintable), or #9302 for Hex 7C (printable). Field
Installation: Yes.
3. Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white. Field Installation: Yes.
4. System/370 Adapter: #9551. Required when a 3881 model 1
is to be attached to System/370. Field Installation: Yes.
5. System/3 Adapter: #9552. Required when a 3881 model 1 is
to be attached to a System/3 model 8, 10, 12 or 15. Field
Installation: Yes.
6. Machine Nomenclature: #2927 for English (UK).
7. Kickstrips: #9431 ... if desired.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
"\T
M3881.2
=~ ::;sn.~?
-
-'-·~-, .. :--
=- -
-....... .General Systems Division-Machines
- -----IIIII!!.
...- P
April 78
-~-.-
Metering:
Modell I/O Unit (On-line)
Model 2 Meter on 3410
Model 3 Meter on 3881
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Model Changes: Field Installation: Yes.
Serial Numbering (#6451): A device for printing consecutive
serial numbers on the form being processed. Will print a 7-digit
number (2-digit batch and 5-digit serial number) which can be
manually set to zero or any desired setting. A reading of the
counter may be obtained and entered into the 3881 logic via a
marked Serial Number Card. Various options exist for the printing of the number. A control switch provides either selective
serial numbering based on stacker selection, or a 7-digit batch
number without unit advancing. Concurrent with printing, the
number will be transmitted to the CPU or the output magnetic
tape unit or the diskette. Supplies: Ribbon-use IBM purple
ribbon 1136944, or equivalent.
Field Installation: Yes.
BCD Read (#1471): Provides, in addition to the basic read
head, a second 12-position read head which allows the reading
of high density, preprinted binary coding. These heads will read
as marks, digit "ones," the character "I" or a vertical bar
(special character). Each BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) character
read will be translated into its equivalent numeric EBCDIC code
and transmitted to the CPU or magnetic tape unit, or diskette
one byte per character. Five of the twelve positions may contain
BCD information which is weighted 1-2-4-8- parity from the
reference (aligned) edge. The first row of BCD data following
the start BCD Field Mark must indicate which 5 of the 12 positions will contain BCD data for that field. If an invalid BCD
character is read or an even parity error is detected, an invalid
marking condition code is sent to the CPU, diskette, or magnetic
tape unit. Field Installation: Yes.
Document Inspection Gauge--one is furnished with each 3881
as a Customer Engineering tool. Used for checking printing and
alignment on data sheets.
Document Counters (#3450): Provides two 5-position counters to be incremented by one for documents processed by the
3881. Counters can be manually reset to zero. Counter 1 increments by 1 for each accepted document ... Counter 2 increments
by 1 for each selected document. Field Installation: Yes.
Dual Density (#3550): (Model 002 only) Permits on the 3881 to
write on the 3410 Magnetic Tape Unit in either 800 bpi NRZI or
1600 bpi Phase Encoded modes. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Dual Density (#3221) on the 3410 Magnetic Tape
Unit model 001.
Expanded Storage (#3801): Provides for an additional 512
bytes of memory which may be required in those situations
where the number of formats, fields and characters processed
exceed the maximum number of positions available within the
basic data store. The formula for the determination of this condition is as follows:
5 (F + n)
Bytes
+ BCD Bytes + Normal
+S+ I $ E
E = 435 for 3881 models 1 and 2;
or 307 for 3881 model 3.
Where:
F = Number of instruction fields
used on all Format Control
Sheets loaded
n = Number of different formats
used with the alternate format
capability (from 1 to 6)
S = 7 if Serial Numbering (#6451)
is installed and is being
used--otherwise S = 0
= Total number of bytes required
to store image format data.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- .....
---- - -==--=
- - General Systems Division-Machines
--------- - . - _.-
-- =
3886 OPTICAL CHARACTER READER
Purpose: Optically reads OCR-A font and OCR-B font machine
printed numeric digits, alphabetic characters, and handprinted
numeric digits from a wide variety of forms. Attaches on-line to
System/370 models 115, 125, 135, 145, 155 11,158,165 II or
168, or off-line to the 3410 Magnetic Tape Unit model 1 which
provides compatible 9-track magnetic tape.
Modell
For use with a System/370 model 115, 125, 135,
145,15511,158,16511 or 168.
Model 2
For use off-line with a 3410 Magnetic Tape Unit
model 1.
Moc:iel Changes: Field Installable.
Highlights: The 3886 is a general purpose optical character
recognition reader designed to meet a broad range of data entry
requirements. It will read multiple lines of print from forms
ranging in size from 3 to 9 inches wide (direction of printing) and
from 3 to 12 inches long. Allowable weights range from 16# to
card stock ... see "Documents and Printing."
Forms enter the 3886 from the input hopper which has a capacity of one inch of forms. The forms are advanced line by line
(maximum 3 lines per inch) past a read station which incorporates a total solid state scanning system to collect character
images. These images are analyzed by recognition programs
within the 3886 recognition and control processor. After a complete line has been recognized, certain user specified editing and
output formatting functions take place. The line output is then
transmitted to the System/370 or to a 3410 Magnetic tape Unit
model 1.
After the complete form has been read it is directed to one of
two output stackers, each having a capacity of one inch of
forms.
The recognition, machine control, and CE diagnostic microprograms for the 3886 are supplied on an internal direct access
storage device. The use of these programs singly or in combination is dependent on the configuration of the 3886 .,. see
"Config urator."
Input from several different sources can be read on the 3886.
The "Table of Acceptable Characters and Printing Devices"
below shows the characters which are acceptable from typewriters, high speed printers, lithograph, or, in the case of Numeric
Handprinting, a pencil.
Model 1 The on-line 3886 model 1 provides buffered timeindependent attachment to System/370 model 115 and 125 via
an optional multiplexer channel, or to System/370 model 135,
145, 155 II, 158, 165 II and 168 via byte multiplexer, block
multiplexer or selector channels. Forms are read and other 3886
functions are performed under System/370 program control.
The basic 3886 model 1 contains 24K bytes of Instruction Storage for machine control and recognition microprogram storage.
Model 2 The off-line 3886 model 2 operates independently of
any CPU. It produces compatible 9-track magnetic tape output
via the attachment of a 3410 Magnetic Tape Unit model 1. The
user indicates form characteristics and processing requirements
with Line/Field and Job Specification Sheets. These are translated on a special 3886 run into the necessary Format Control
information, and then stored on the internal DASD for subsequent use.
M38SS.1
April 78
cross-foot total verification, and field to field comparison. The
results of. these functions can be specified to control stacker
selection, and Serial Numbering and Line Marking features if
they are installed ... see "Special Features." The basic 3886
model 2 contains 32K bytes of Instruction Storage for machine
control
and
recognition
microprogram
storage.
Speed-document throughput depends upon 3886 model,
document length, number and type of characters read, the
amount of output editing and formatting specified, and the user
System/370 program (Modell).
On the model 1 speeds range from approximately 5,800 threeinch long single line 8 character machine printed turnaround
documents per hour, to approximately 330 typewritten 8-1/2" x
11" pages with 2,262 characters (29 lines of 78 characters).
On the model 2, speeds for the same forms range from approximately 5,200 documents to approximately 300 pages per hour.
SRL GA21-9148 contains formulas which should be used to
determine throughput for specific forms.
Documents and Printing-the input forms and printing to be
read by the 3886 must conform to the established specifications
described in SRL GA21-9148. Only those ribbons (see
"Supplies") and background inks specifically meeting the outlined spectral criteria will give satisfactory performance. Certain
restrictions apply to document sizes, weights, and combinations
thereof. These are discussed in SRL GA21-9148.
Supplies: providing maximum flexibility in background ink
colors and intensities requires that ribbons used for printing
3886 input are carefully selected. The following, or their equivalents, should be used: For Film Ribbon Selectric 1136310 or
1136391 ... for Fabric Ribbon Selectric 1136138 ... for 1403 (all
models) 1136430 ... for 3211 ribbon 1136627 for 20 to 24 lb.
bond and 1136626 for all heavier papers. Ribbons not having
similar characteristics may result in reduced recognition performance and/or reduced ribbon life.
Prerequisites
Model 1 An available control unit position on the Multiplexer
Channel (#5248) of a System/370 model 115 or 125, or a byte
multiplexer, block multiplexer or selector channel of a
System/370 model 135, 145, 155 II, 158, 165 II or 168.
Model 2 A 3410 Magnetic Tape Unit model 1 ... if Single Density
(#3211) is on the 3410, a Single Density Tape Adapter (#6490)
is required on the 3886 ... if Dual Density (#3221) is on the
3410, a Dual Density Tape Adapter (#6485) is required on the
3886. See "Special Features."
Bibliography: GA22-6822
Specify
1. Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 cycle): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system or 3410
voltage. Field Installation: Yes.
2. Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white. Field Installation: Yes.
3. Up-Ending Kit: #9840, if required ... loan basis on initial
machine order only, remains property of IBM. Dimensions
will be 29-1/2" wide, 60" long and 76" high.
4. 3211 B-Font Compatibility #9XXX, if required ... only if predominately reading 3211 OCR-B generated documents.
Up to eight different form layouts (all one size) can be intermixed
within a batch (run). Certain editing and validation functions
normally performed by the host CPU are also provided. These
include self-check digit (Modulus 10) calculation, column or
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- . . - --~--
--
--_
.....
=
=---==
..
-----~
-~-
M3886.2
General Systems Division-Machines
April 78
-~-.-
with stacker selection. Ribbons: Serial Numbering may be done
with a purple ribbon (1136844) or equivalent if numbered documents are to be re-processed through the 3886. Otherwise a
black ribbon (1136843) or equivalent may be used.
Tape Adapter, Dual Density (#6485): (Model 2 only) Provides
the appropriate adapter, within the 3886, to attach a 3410 Magnetic Tape Unit model 1 for writing at 1600 bpi PE or 800 bpi
NRZI (Feature #3221 on the 3410). Field Installation: Yes.
Data Storage, Additional (#3210):
Handprinting recognition require this
complex character shapes which
Maximum: One. Field Installation:
OCR B-Font and Numeric
feature to handle the more
appear in these fonts.
Yes.
Tape Adapter, Single Density (#6490): (Model 2 only) Provides the appropriate adapter, within the 3886, to attach a 3410
Magnetic Tape Unit model 1 for writing at 1600 bpi PE (Feature
#3211 on the 3410). Field Installation: Yes.
Hopper and Stacker Capacity, Additional (#4520): The
standard hopper and two stackers on the 3886 each have a
capacity of one inch of forms. This feature adds the motors,
sensors, etc. to increase that capacity to approximately 4 inches
in each. Field Installation: Yes.
Video Collect Features (#8701, 8702, 8703): Prerequisites:
Each of the following Video Collect Features requires Additional
Data Storage (#3210) plus two increments of Additional Instruction Storage (#4610), in addition to the increments required to
hold the font recognition programs as described in Figure 10 of
the 3886 SRL's (GA21-9147 and GA21-9154) and the Configurator below. Limitations: The required 3277 model 1 or 2 (as
described below) cannot be equipped with any of the following:
Operator Identification Card Reader (#4600), Selector Light Pen
(#6350), ASCII Character Set (#9091 or 9092), or ASCII Keyboard (#4634 or 4635). For #8703, if a 3277 model 1, with the
RPQ listed below, is to be attached to the required 3272 Control
Unit model 2, at least one 3277 model 2 (with or without the
RPQ) must also be attached to the same 3272 Control Unit for
diagnostic purposes.
Instruction Storage, Additional (#4610): The recognition
microprograms for alphameric machine printed fonts and Numeric Handprinting require storage capacity greater than the
basic models of the 3886, as do combinations of fonts. This
feature provides the necessary additional storage increments of
8K bytes. Up to 'nine of these features may be added .. , see
"Configurator." Field Installation: Yes.
Line Marking (#4720): Provides a four-position fixed slug
printer (1, 2, 4 and 8) which prints 15 different codes to be used
as an aid to error correction procedures. It is used to indicate
field location or error type information in the margin of lines
requiring corrective action. It will also provide page marking
capability to indicate user controlled post-processing document
handling information. Line Marking is under program control on
the model 1 and is controlled by coding on the specification
she~ts on model 2. Ribbons: Line Marking may be done with a
purple ribbon (414499) or equivalent if marked documents are to
be re-processed through the 3886. Otherwise a black ribbon
(414491) or equivalent may be used.
Numbering/Marking Adapter (#5340): Provides a group of
common parts necessary for the installation of Serial Numbering
(#6450) and/or Line Marking (#4720). Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
Numeric Handprinting (#5360): Provides the additional machine circuits to read the handprinted numbers 0-9 and the letter
X. For optimum operation, character shapes and spacing should
conform to the basic rules of handprinting as outlined in SRL
G21-9148. Handprinting should be performed with ordinary #2
pencils or grade H B fine line lead for mechanical pencils. The
NHP feature includes the ability to read forms supplier preprinted Gothic 3/16" font numbers 0-9. The feature provides two
modes of operation, normal and verify. The appropriate mode
can be selected on a field-by-field basis depending on the critical
nature of the data, the circumstances of form preparation, and
Field
the level of other available control techniques.
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Data Storage, Additional
(#3210) and sufficient Instruction Storage, Additional (#4610) ...
see "Configurator."
Serial Numbering (#6450): Permits the sequential numbering
of forms as they are processed. A ten-position numbering head
is provided, of which five are unit advanced and five are stationary. Selection of documents to be printed works in conjunction
Video Collect (#8701): (Model 2 Only) Provides for direct
attachment of a 3277 Display Station model 1 with RPQ 8K0438
to a 3886 model 2. (No 3272 Control Unit is required). Entries
on Line and Field Specification sheets allow the 3886 to collect
video image data of reject characters in specified fields and/or
the collection of the video image of an entire field at either
0.006" or 0.012" resolution. Video image data will be displayed
on the cable attached 3277 (with RPQ 8K0438) for visual recognition. The display operator will key enter the correct data. The
data record will be updated with the keyed information before
being written to tape. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites
and Limitations: See above.
Video Collect (#8702): (Model 2 Only) Entries on Line and Field
Specification sheets cause collection of video image data of
reject characters in specified fields and/or the collection of the
video image of an entire field at either 0.006" or 0.012" resolution. Video image data is written to tape in record lengths that
match the user selected data record length. The tape can be
processed on a system and have the video image data displayed
on a 3277 Display Station model 1 or 2 equipped with RPQ
8K0438 and attached to the CPU via a 3272 Control Unit model
2. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites and Limitations: See
above.
Video Collect (#8703): (Model 1 Only) Provides the ability to
collect video image data of reject characters in specified fields
and/ or the collection of the video image of an entire field at
either 00.006" or 0.012" resolution. The video image data can
be transferred from the 3886 to the CPU by user written routines
coded with present 3886 Type I programming support. The
display of video image data will require a 3277 Display Station
model 1 or 2 equipped with RPQ 8K0438 and attached to the
CPU via a 3272 Control Unit model 2. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites and Limitations: See above.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- -- General Systems Division-Machines
=--==
-------
M3886.a
-- -=
April 78
-~-.-
Configurator
Tables of Acceptable Characters and Printing Devices
All 3886 Optical Character Readers will be shipped containing an
internal DASD. That device will contain all of the recognition
microprograms for OCR-A font, OCR-B font and NHP. (See
"Tables of Acceptable Characters.") This configurator shows
which features are necessary in order to utilize all valid combinations of those recognition programs.
OCR-A Font, Size 1 (1)
IBM 1403 mdls 2, 3, 7 N1 (or equivalent) and
IBM Selectric@Typewriter (or equivalent). Numeric
Set only from IBM 3211 (see Note 6)
Numeric
0
1
From the following table, find the combination of fonts which
will appear within anyone batch (run) of input forms. The features shown on that line are required. If any other batch (run)
will contain another font, a greater quantity of #4610 may be
required to cover maximum combination of fonts for all batches
to be run in various applications.
2
3
4
5
b
Data
Storege,
Add'i
(#3210)
{
&
•*
+
/
E R
%
F S
?
blank
7
8
'l
Y
;
G T
J
K
L
M
I
}
all
H U [PIUS
Characters
I
Quantity of Features Which
Must be Ordered
Numeric
Handprinting
(#5360)
Alphameric
A N
B 0
C P
D Q
ri
Instruction
Alpha Alpha Numeric Storage.
Num
Num
Meric Meric HandAdd'l*
OCR-A OCR-8 OCR-A OCR-8 printing (#4610)
Additional Characters from IBM
SelectriC ~ Ty)Jewriter (or
equivalent) Only
V
W
X
y
Z
to left
except y
:
(3)
=
"
"**
• :c
I
(2)
(6i
]
(Group Erase)
(Character Erase)
(4)
(5)
1. The division of characters into sets above refers to 3886
recognition capability. The appropriate type catalog arrangements should be referenced for high speed printer output
character sets.
Single Machine Font Configurations
2. These characters are recognized in mode 1 alphameric set. **
x
x
3. All these characters are recognized only on mode 2 alpham-
X
X
X
3
X
4
4
4
X
X
X
X
X
51
8
eric set except Group Erase, - and I which are recognized in
the numeric character also.
1·
Combination OCR-A and OCR-B Configurations
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5. The timing mark dash (-) can be substituted for a non OCRA font graphic (#) for the purpose of printing timing marks.
See "Type Catalog" for details.
2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5
5
6
6
9
*Equal or smaller size combinations of fonts will operate on
machines with the required features (#5360 and #3210).
Example: User batch to be processed will contain Alphameric
OCR-A font and Numeric Handprinting. This requires the following features: Quantity of 5 of #4610 plus 1 of #5360 and 1 of
#3210.
Other batches this user will be able to run can include the following fonts or combinations of fonts:
Numeric-A
Numeric-B
Numeric-A and NHP
Numeric-B and NHP
Alphameric-B
4. The LVM (long vertical mark) is recognized in all OCR-A
character sets. The LVL (preprinted long vertical line) is also
recognized. **
Numeric-A and Numeric-B
Numeric-B and Alphameric-A
Numeric-A and Numeric-B and NHP
Numeric-A and Alphameric-B
6. The OCR Print Package (#5450), on the 3211 is a prerequisite
for OCR applications. Use of reread on reject capability and
20-24 lb. bond is recommended for optimum performance.
When other papers are used, customer testing should be
performed to assure adequate reading performance.
OCR-B Font, Size 1 (1) (4)
IBM 1403 mdls 2, 3, 7, N1 (or equivalent) and
IBM Selectric" Typewriter (or equivalent>.
Alphameric
Numeric
1 $
A N
B
2
3
o
0
I
5,
4
6
7
8
9
<
> (3)
+
Additional Characters from IBM
Selectric" Typewriter (or equivalent> only. These can be recognized in a II OC R-6 Font
Character Sets.
I
a
~
C P
Q
E R
F
G
H
I
J
K
i'I
S
T
U
r
J
•
(LVM) (2)
(Group Erase)
(Character Erase)
Plus all
characters.
to left
V
W
X
y
Z
1. The division of characters into sets above refers to 3886
recognition capability. The appropriate type catalog arrangements should be referenced for high speed printer output
character sets.
2. The LVM (long vertical mark) is recognized in both numeric
and alphameric OCR-B but can only be preprinted or typed.
The LVL (long vertical line), a special case of the LVM, can
also be recognized. **
3. The timing mark dash (-) can be substituted for the greater
than (» for the purpose of printing timing marks. See "Type
Catalog" for details.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- ------=
- -=- ---
M3886.4
~
~--= General Systems Division-Machines
-~-~-~-~-
4. This is compatible with the European Computer Manufacturers Associated revised OCR-B Font published in the Standard
ECMA-11 for Alphameric Character Set OCR-B for Optical
Recognition, 2nd Edition, dated October, 1971.
5. The OCR Print Package (#5450) on the 3211 is a prerequisite
for OCR applications. Use of reread or reject capability and
20-24 lb. bond is recommended for optimum performance.
When other papers are used, customer testing should be
performed to assure adequate reading performance.
Numeric Handprinting: Recognizes the following: 1 234567
8 9 0 X. Preprinted Gothic 3/16" font digits 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
can also be read. Blanks are not recognized in NHP. European
Numeric Handprinting (ENHP) can be selected by proper codes
in the Format Control Record (see SRL GA21-9146).** This
provides recognition of the (one) and (seven) commonly used in
several European countries in place of the NHP 1 and 7.
Document Inspection Gauge PIN 2448299: One is furnished
with each 3886 as a customer engineering tool. It is used for
checking printing alignment on data sheets.
**See IBM OCR Model 1 Component Reference Manual, GA219147, IBM 3886 Model 2 Component Reference Manual, GA219154.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
April 78
----=
=
~-~ General Systems Division-Machines
- -------..~-
M5010.1
-
April 78
5010 PROCESSOR MODULE
Purpose: Provides the arithmetic. logic and control functions for
System/7.
Models: Storage Stand-Alone
(words) Models
2.048
4.096
6.144
8.192
10.240
12.288
14.336
16.384
16.384
20,480
24.576
28.672
32.768
36.864
40.960
45.056
49.152
53.248
57.344
61.440
65.536
A2
A4
A6
A8
*Al0
*A12
*A14
*A16
E16
E20
E24
E28
E32
E36
E40
E44
E48
E52
E56
E60
E64
1130 Attach
Models
B2
B4
B6
B8
*Bl0
*B12
*B14
*B16
1) For the location of the Modules in the system. specify one of
the following:
#9141 location of all I/O Modules to be determined at the plant.
(Specify Code #9143 if I/O Modules cannot be used.)
#9142 location of all I/O Modules are specified by the customer.
Specify Code #9143 must be used in each I/O Module order.
#9144 for shipment without mounting in an enclosure.
2) For identification of major application. specify #9XXX on all
models. See Special Features for identifier code. No charge
feature.
3) System Control Programs must be ordered prior to Order
Confirmation (OC) Time.
4) Cables: Use cable order
* Requires #7401 in 5026.
Highlights: Uses binary arithmetic. fixed word length of 16 data
bits plus 2 parity bits. Storage cycle time is 400 nanoseconds.
Instructions are one or two words in length with full storage
addressing.
Standard features include 64 priority interrupts. including 4
interrupt levels with 16 sublevels. 7 index registers. one accumulator. and one instruction address register per interrupt level. two
interval timers. and an interface for the 5028 Operator Station.
The 5010 Processor Module includes a Read Only Tape Cassette Recorder attachment and associated connection cable
(P/N 2703633). The attachment provides the capability to IPL
and program load either FE Diagnostic Programs or the Disk
Support System (DSS/7) (5707-SC2) from a tape cassette
recorder (Norelco Model 1420 or equivalent). See Customer
Responsibilities for System/7 in the "Systems" section.
The A and E models have an Aysnchronous or Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter as an optional feature. This
circuitry provides the capability for initial program load of the
System/7 from a remote system with no resident program in the
System/7. The B models have an interface for connection to an
1130 System as a standard feature.
Prerequisites: The first module location in the 5026 Enclosure
mdl A2. C3 or C6. A and B models with more than 8K of storage
require Storage Power Addition (#7401) in the 5026 Enclosure ...
see 5026. #7401 is not required for ~ models. For E models
replacing installed A or B models. or vice versa.
or RPQ (purchase) must be ordered for the proper 5026 Power
Specify Code ... see 5026. The B models require a Storage
Access Channel (#7490) on the 1131 or a Storage Access Channel II (#7492) on an 1133. Limitation: Program preparation on
configurations with 2K storage are not supported by IBM supplied programming.
Customer Responsibilities: See System/7 in "Systems."
System/7 Summary: GA34-0002
Model Changes: Changes within A mdls. B mdls or E mdls are
field installable. Replacement of A or B mdls with E mdls requires a 5026
to remove code #7401 or #9490 on both and
add code #9491 (see 5026). Change from A or B mdl to E mdl
(and vice versa) within a 5010 cannot be field installed. Changes
from A mdl to B mdl (and vice versa) are not recommended for
field installation.
STORAGE UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES: Upgrade price
equals the difference in purchase price between the two models.
There are no additonal installation charges.
Special Features
CYCLE STEAL BASIC (#2662): Provides a path between 5010
main storage for the 5022 Disk Storage Module. equipped with
companion cycle steal attachment. Disk Cycle Steal (#2664).
Maximum: One per 5010.
Field
Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Model A4 or larger. Model B4 or larger. or Model
E16 or larger. Required for 5998-T01. 3340 Attachment.
5024 ATTACHMENT FEATURE" (#4115): [Model E only] Provides a path between 5010E main storage for the 5024 I/O
Attachment to Enclosure. Maximum: One per 5010E. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be installed with IBM
1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5500 or #5501) or with System
360/370 Channel Attach (RPQ 008112). Other 5010E RPQs
must be submitted for review.
ASYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL (#1610):
[Models A and E only] Provides control circuits for one asynchronous communications line adapter. #1610 is used for communications with S/360 and S/370. See DP Sales Manual. Data
transmission is serial by bit using start/ stop method of character and bit synchronization. The IBM PTTC/EBCD code is used.
Point-to-point or multidrop transmission at speeds of 134.5 or
600 bps (14.8 or 66.7 characters per second) are available.
Speed changes can be made in the field. Line control characters
are identical to 2740 mdl 1. Line control characters are used in a
manner similiar to 2740 mdl 1. with error checking. See IBM
System/7 Functional Characteristics. GA34-0003. for exact
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------
- -=- --=
=---=
--~--
------ -
.
M5010.2
April 78
General Systems Division-Machines
-
description of use. Communication Control provides the capability to load a program from the communication network into
System/7 with no resident program in System/7 (remote IPL).
For information on communications facilities, see M 2700 pages.
Maximum: One #1610 per system. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter
(#2074). Field Installation: Yes.
COMMON CARRIER ADAPTER (#2165): [Mdls A and E only]
Provides interface to an external modem meeting EIA standard
RS-232-C. The interface lines provided are Transmitted Data,
Received Data, Request to Send, Clear to Send, Data Set Ready,
Data Terminal Ready, Signal Ground and Protective Ground.
Limitation: Cannot be used with Line Adapter (#4750, 4751 or
4752). Maximum: One per #1610. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Asynchronous Communications Control (#1610).
LINE ADAPTER. LEASED LINE TYPE 1A (#4751): [Models A
and E only] A leased line type 1A modem for 2-wire unlimited
distance use at speeds of 134.5 or 600 bps. Only point-to-point
communications facilities can be used. See Line Adapter Leased
Line Type 1A in SRL GA24-3435 for specifications and requirements. Limitation: Cannot be used with Line Adapters (#4750
or #4752) or Common Carrier Adapter (#2165). Maximum: One
per #1610. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Asynchronous
Communications Control (#1610).
.
LINE ADAPTER. LEASED LINE TYPE 1B (#4752): [Models A
and E only] A leased line type 1 B modem for 4-wire unlimited
distance use at speeds of 134.5 or 600 bps. Point-to-point or
multipoint communications facilities can be used. See Line
Adapter Leased Line Type 1 B in SRL GA24-3435 for specifications and requirements. Limitation: Cannot be used with Line
Adapters (#4750 or #4751) or Common Carrier Adapter (#2165).
Maximum: One per #1610. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Asynchronous Communications Control (#1610).
LINE ADAPTER. LIMITED DISTANCE TYPE 2B (#4750):
[Models A and E only] A limited distance type 2B modem for
2-wire use up to 8.25 wire-miles at speeds of 134.5 or 600 bps.
Point-to-point or multipoint communication facilities can be
used. See Line Adapter Limited Distance Type 2B in SRL GA243435 for specifications and requirements. Limitation: Cannot
be used with Line Adapters (#4751 or #4752) or Common Carrier Adapter (#2165). Maximum: One per #1610. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Asynchronous Communications
Control (#1610).
BINARY SYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL
(BSCA) (#2074): [Models A and E only] Provides circuitry for
one binary synchronous communications adapter. This feature
is used for communications with S/370, another System/7 with
BSCA (#2074), or a System/3 mdl 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 or 15 with
BSCA, or a System/32 with BSCA (#2074) (switched or nonswitched point-to-point only), a System/34 with its Communications Adapter (switched or non-switched point-to-point only), a
System/3 mdl 8,10,12 or 15 with BSCA and EIA Local Attachment (FC #3601, 3602), or a System/3 mdl 6, 10 or 15 with
Local Communications Adapter (LCA) (FC #4765), or a
System/3 mdl 8 or mdl 12 with Integrated Communications
Adapter (lCA) (FC #4645) or ICA-Local Interface, or a System/3
mdl 8 with ICA or BSCA. Data transmission is half duplex over
2- or 4-wire circuits using binary synchronous line control. Data
transfer on point-to-point (switched or non-switched) and multipoint configurations is supported. In multipoint configurations,
System/7 operates as a tributary station. On point-to-point
networks System/7 functions as a processor terminal. Transmission codes supported are EBCDIC and ASCII, software controlled. Transparent mode is standard in the BSCA, but allowed
only in EBCDIC. Control circuitry provides the capability for IPL
of the System/7 from a remote system with no resident program
in the System/7. Control of the IPL sequence is by the remote
system. IPL can be accomplished on point-to-point switched
and multipoint configurations and requires the use of transparent EBCDIC transmission code.
Local Attachment to System/3: Point-to-point Non-Switched
Communication is also provided with the System/3 BSCA-EIALOCAL, LCA, or ICA-LOCAL.
SYSTEM/3
Model
BSCA-EIA-LOCAL
LCA(#4785)
Speed (bps)
(#3801, 3602)
Speed (bps)
ICA (#4645)
Speed (bps)
6
8
10
12
15
2400
N/A
2400
N/A
2400
N/A
2400,4800,8000
2400,4800.8000
2400,4800,8000
2400,4800,8000
N/A
2400,8000
N/A
2400,8000
N/A
For local attachment to a System/3 BSCA-EIA-LOCAL, ICALOCAL, or LCA, an appropriate cable order is required.
Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA34-0004, includes
cable description and ordering information. (Availability of cable
is 08/01/75.)
Limitations: Cannot be installed with Asynchronous Communications Control (#1610); support as a multipoint central system
is not provided. Maximum: One #2074 per system. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: 5010 mdl A6 or larger or mdl
E16 or larger.
INTERNAL CLOCK (#4703): [Models A and E only] Provides
BSCA clocking when modems do not provide clock pulses.
Speed options are 1200, 2000 and 2400 bps which are hardware
selectable. Maximum: One per #2074. Limitation: Not available
with Line Interface Type 1G (#4805). Do not use if System/7 is
to interface to a System/3 mdl 8, 10, 12 or 15 BSCA-EIA-Local
Attachment (#3601,3602) or a System/3 mdl6, 10 or 15 Local
Communications Adapter (LCA) (#4765), or a System/3 mdl 8 or
i'Tld112 Integrated Communications Adapter (lCA) (#4645). Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: BSCA (#2074).
LINE INTERFACE TYPE 1 D (#4800): [Models A and E only]
Provides a low and medium speed interface to permit operation
with external modems that comply with the EIA RS-232-C
standard and with System/3 mdl 8, 10, 12, 15 with BSCA and
EIA Local Attachment (#3601, 3602)' or a System/3 mdl 6, 10
or 15 with Local Communications Adapter (LCA) (#4765), or
System/3 mdl 8 or mdl 12 with Integrated Communications
Adapter (lCA) (#4645). Modems of this type operate on
switched or non-switched facilities up to 2400 bps and over
non-switched facilities at up to 7200 bps. Autoanswer capability
is supported. Maximum: One per #2074. Limitations: Cannot
be installed with Line Interface Type 1G (#4805) or IBM 1200
BPS Integrated Modem (#5500, 5501). Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: BSCA (#2074).
LINE INTERFACE TYPE 1G (#4805): [Models A and E operating up to 50.0K bps max.] Provides a high speed interface for
stand-alone modems operating on a wide band interface. Modems of this type operate at speeds of 10,000 bps and higher
only on non-switched lines. Maximum: One per #2074.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with #4800, #5500, #5501;
Internal Clock (#4703) is not available with this feature; Will not
interface to S/370 mdl 135, Integrated Communications Adapter
(#4640). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: BSCA (#2074).
IBM 1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, LEASED (#5500):
[Models A and E only] Provides one IBM 1200 bps Integrated
Modem which is suitable for communication over facility 05
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----= -==-~ General Systems Division-Machines
- - ---
-=
with another IBM 1200 bps Integrated Modem. Maximum: One
per #2074. Limitations: Cannot be installed with #4115, #4800,
#4805 or #5501; Will not interface to S/370 mdl 135 Integrated
Communications Adapter (#4640). Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: BSCA (#2074); Internal Clock (#4703).
IBM 1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED (#5501):
[Models A and E only] Provides one IBM 1200 bps Integrated
Modem which is suitable for communication over faciilty C4 with
another IBM 1200 bps Integrated Modem. This adapter includes
the automatic answer capability. Maximum: One per #2074.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with #4115, #4800, #4805 or
#5500; Will not interface to S/370 mdl 135 Integrated Communications
Adapter
(#4640).
Field
Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisites: BSCA (#2074); Internal Clock (#4703).
BSCA COMMUNICATIONS FACILITIES
Speed (bps)
BSCA Features
1200
2000
2400
4800
7200
19.2K
40.8K
50.0K
4800,5500,5501,4703
4800,4703
4800,4703
4800
4800
4805
4805
4805
SYSTEM/7 APPLICATION IDENTIFIER CODES
Specify Feature Codes have been added to the 5010 Processor
Unit. These are no-charge features which identify the major
application on the system. This data will be retrievable by marketing requirements and planning areas, and used as additionai
input to marketing analysis and planning. This data will also
provide ready references to the field for specific applications.
Special Features
Processing Unit-major applications on order in the account.
Identifier (9XXX) (All Models).
Code Feature (Application) Code#
Feature (Application)
Data Collection
Telephone Data Entry
Power Management
Message Switching
Other TP Applications
CAS
Testing/ Monitoring
Process Control
Lab. Applications
Stand-alone Scientific
Maritime
TTS/TR
CAMA
ACLR
ACDMS
9001
9002
9003
9004
9005
9006
9007
9008
9009
9010
9011
9012
9013
9014
9015
Limitations: Only one feature code per 5010 can be specified.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
M5010.3
April 78
- .....
---.---_
-- -=- --=--==
M5012.1
General Systems Division-Machines
5012 MULTIFUNCTION MODULE
Purpose: To provide digital input/output, analog input/output,
and 2790 control on System/7.
Highlights: Provides capability for:
- Attachment of a 2790 Control.
- Up to 128 digital input points.
- Up to 32 isolated process interrupt points.
- Up to 64 digital output points.
- Up to 32 differential analog input points.
- Up to 2 isolated analog output points.
2790 Control: Provides the required logical interface for attachment of 2790 Data Communication devices to System/7. This
allows System/7 to act as the "system controller" for
2791/2793 Area Stations or 2792 Remote Communication
Controller. The 2790 Control allows transmission of data between System/7 and the 2791/2793 Area Stations (and
2795/2796/2797 Data Entry Units, and 2798 Guidance Display
Units). Transmission rate is approximately 500,000 bits per
second (900 characters per second). See 2790 in "Systems".
The combined number of 2791 /2793s and 2792 mdl 1s on each
5012 or 5013 may not exceed 16. Maximum: Four 2790 Controls per system, one per 5012 Multifunction Module.
Digital Input: Provides up to 8 groups of 16 digital input points.
Either isolated or non-isolated Digital Input groups are available.
Each digital input point is a voltage or contact sense, 2-terminal
circuit. Each group can be program controlled for latching or
non-latching operation. Anyone of the eight groups may be
read under direct program control. The first two groups of digital inputs may be converted to process interrupt points through
the addition of the Process Interrupt feature.
Process Interrupt: An "interrupt on change" feature is offered
on the first two groups of digital inputs. This feature provides
the capability to compare the input of 16 bit groups against a
program loadable 16 bit register and initiate an interrupt on
either an equal or unequal comparison.
Digital Output: Provides up to four groups of 16 digital output
points. Each digital output point may be set or reset under
program control. Each Digital Output group may be one of the
following circuit types: Low Power, Medium Power, Medium
Power Non-Isolated, or Contact Output. Low Power output
provides switching with a maximum rating of 6 volts at 4 milliamps. Medium Power and Medium Power Non-Isolated operate up to 48 volts at 450 milliamps. Contact Output provides a
Form A mercury wetted relay contact rated at 125 V dc max or
88 V ac RMS max, 2A ac RMS max; the product of peak voltage
and peak current must not exceed 100 (100 VA max). Digital
outputs operate under direct program control. Medium Power
and Contact Output points are isolated and may be directly
connected to the standard Digjtal Input points. This provides the
capability for wrap-around testing and multiplexing of digital and
analog inputs with digital output points.
Analog Input: Provides up to eight groups of 8 differential
analog input points. A multiplexer connects each point to an
analog-to-digital converter which is capable of converting voltage signals, in the range of ± 10 millivolts to ± 5.12 volts full
scale, into binary values of 14 bits plus sign. Either an amplifier
with a unit gain or an automatic multi range amplifier must be
selected. The unity gain or high level amplifier provides a full
scale range of ± 5.12 volts. The multirange amplifier provides
full scale ranges of ±10 mv, ±20 mv, ±40 mv, ±80 mv, ±160
April 78
mv, ±640 mv, and ±5.12 volts. Analog input is under direct
program control. Immediate and External Synchronization operations are both available. Two analog scan rates are provided;
#5246 uses a mercury wetted relay multiplexer operating at a
scanning rate of up· to 200 points per second. #5248 uses a
solid state multiplexer operating at scanning rates up to 20K
points per second, depending on the level of the input signal and
mode of operation. For thermocouple operations, resistance
bulb thermometer (RBT) termination cards are available to be
used for measurement of the reference junc~ion temperature.
Limitations: All of the 32 analog input points must use the
same type of multiplexer in each Multifunction Module. The RBT
capability is available only on the multirange amplifier.
Analog Ouput: Provides one or two isolated analog output
voltages. The output signal has a polarized full scale range from
o to 10.24 volts, with a resolution of 10 bits and an accuracy of
±0.15% of full scale. Polarity of the output signal depends on
which ~tde of the isolated output is grounded. Analog Output
operates under direct program control at a rate of 25KC
(including amplifier settling time).
Attachment Accessories: A customer access area is provided
in the back of every I/O Module. Termination cards and connectors can be installed in this area to provide for connecting customer signals to the System/7 I/O interface. For detailed information, see "Attachment Accessories for System/7" under
5029.
Maximum: The total number of Input/Output Modules (5012,
5013, 5014 ~nd 5022 in any combination) per system cannot
exceed 11.
Prerequisite: One module location in a 5026 Enclosure mdl A2,
C3, C6, D3 or D6.
System/7 Summary: GA34-0002
Specify:
1) For location of the 5012 I/O Module, specify:
(If feature #9141 was specified on the 5010, do not use the
following specify features.)
#9143 also enter the desired module location number, as
shown in the. chart on the 5026 page, in the quantity column
of the order form. Specify #9142 in 5010 Processor Module.
#9144 for shipment without mounting in ,an enclosure
(spare).
2) Customer's signal wires enter through the rear side panels of
the module. Three types of side panels are available: Type 1
provides a slot for cables ... Type 2 has individual holes for each
pair of wires ... Type 3 is a blank panel that can be customized
by the customer. Separate side panels are used for digital and
analog input Signal wires. For details, refer to System /7 Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA34-0004.
For Digital Input/Output specify one:
#9501 Side Panel Digital Type 1
#9502 Side Panel Digital Type 2
#9503 Side Panel Digital Type 3
For Analog Input specify one:
#9511 Side Panel Analog Type 1
#9512 Side Panel Analog Type 2
#9513 Side Panel Analog Type 3
3) When 2790 Control (#8195) is ordered on 5012 specify:
(Multiloop Device) for each new 5012 in a multipoint
system. Note: When upgrading from a single loop system,
#9444 must be ordered
for the installed 5012 which
#9444
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- General Systems Division-Machines
- -=---=
-- - ---
---
--
-=
---.~
contains #8195. (It must also be ordered
which has #8195.)
for any 5013
M5012.2
April 78
can either be preset under program control or automatically
selected during the conversion process. With preset gains, a
resolution of 14 bits plus sign is obtained. With auto ranging, a
resolution of 12 bits plus sign and 3 bits for gain in-dication is
obtained. Limitation: Cannot be ordered with Amplifier High
Level B (#1210). Maximum: One per #1232. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: Analog Input Control Mod B (#1232).
MULTIPLEXER/MR4 (#5246): Provides a group of 4 mercury
wetted relay multiplexer points for analog input signals. Multiplexing is at a maximum rate of 200 points per second. Signals
may be in the range of 0 to ±5.12 volts. Maximum: 8 per
#1210 or #1215. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Amplifier High Level B (#1215) ... customer signal connection required, see 5029. -
2790 CONTROL (#8195): Interface for 2790 Data Communication devices. For 2790 devices supported by programming, see
MSP/7 in "Programming". Limitation: Online diagnostics are
available for maintenace of the 2790 - System/7 and must be
implemented on all systems which include a 2792 or have more
than sixteen area stations ... see page P7.3, System/7 Macro
Library / Relocatable. All 5012 and 5013 modules with 2790
Control (#8195) must reside within the same 5026 Enclosure.
See 2791/2793 Limitations, Loop Delay (2793 "Machines"
page) for special configuring considerations. Maximum: One
per 5012, four per System/7. MSP/7 provides support for a
maximum of four 2792 mdl 1s (up to two per 2790 Control) or a
maximum of sixty-four 2791/2792 mdl 1/2793s (16 per 2790
Control). Prerequisite: Customer signal connection required
see 5029. Field Installation: Yes.
• ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT
ANALOG BASIC (#1221): Provides the basic analog capability
within the 5012. Maximum: One per 5012. Field Installation:
Yes.
ANALOG OUTPUT CONTROL (#1245): Provides control for
one or two Analog Output Points (#1246). Maximum: One per
#1221. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Analog Basic
(#1221).
ANALOG OUTPUT POINT (#1246): Provides a 0 to 10.24 volts
isolated output signal. Polarity of the signal depends on the side
of the signal that is grounded. Maximum: Two per #1245.
Prerequisites: Analog Output Control (#1245) and its prerequisite ... customer signal connection required, see 5029. Field
Installation: yes.
ANALOG INPUT CONTROL MODEL B (#1232): Provides
control and analog-to-digital conversion for an amplifier and 8
groups of mercury-wetted relay multiplexers. Multiplexing is at a
maximum scanning rate of 200 points per second. Limitation:
Cannot be ordered with Analog Input Control Mod C (#1213).
Maximum: One per #1221.
Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Analog Basic (#1221).
AMPLIFIER HIGH LEVEL B (#1210): Provides a unity gain
amplifier for high level analog input with a full scale range of
±5.12 volts. Limitation: Cannot be ordered with Amplifier
Multirange B (#1215). Maximum: One per #1232. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Analog Input Control Mod B
(#1232).
AMPLIFIER MULTIRANGE B (#1215): Provides a multirange
amplifier for analog input signals. Full scale ranges of ± 10 mv.
±20 mv, ±40 mv, ±80 mv, ±160 mv, ±640 mv, and ±5.12 volts
ANALOG INPUT CONTROL MOD C (#1213): Provides control
and analog-to-digital conversion for an amplifier and 8 groups of
solid state multiplexers. Multiplexer scanning rate is up to 14K
points per second for low level signals, and up to 20K points per
second for high level inputs. For auto ranging mode, maximum
scanning rate is 7K points per second. Limitatio'n: Cannot be
ordered with Analog Input Control Mod B (#1232). Maximum:
One per #1221. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Analog
Basic (#1221).
AMPLIFIER HIGH LEVEL C (#1211): Provides a unity gain
amplifier for high level analog input with a full scale range of
±5.12 volts. Limitation: Cannot be ordered with Amplifier
Multirange C (#1216). Maximum: One per #1213. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Analog Input Control Mod C
(#1213).
AMPLIFIER MULTIRANGE C (#1216): Provides a multirange
amplifier for analog input signals. Full scale ranges of ± 10 mv,
±20 mv, ±40 mv, ±80 mv, ±160 mv, ±640 mv, and ±5.12 volts
can either be preset under program control or automatically
selected during the conversion process. With preset gains, a
resolution of 14 bits plus sign is obtained, while auto ranging
provides a resolution of 12 bits plus sign and 3 bits gain indication. Limitation: Cannot be ordered with Amplifier High Level C
(#1211). Maximum: One per #1213. Field. Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Analog I nput Control Mod C (#1213).
MULTIPLEXER/MS4 (#5248): Provides a group of 4 solid state
multiplexer points for analog input signals. Multiplexing is at a
maximum scanning rate of 20,000 points per second. Signals
may be in the range of 0 to ± 5.12 volts. Maximum: 8 per
#1211 or #1216. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: One
Amplifier High Level C (#1211). or Amplifier Multirange C
(#1216) ... customer signal connection required, see 5029.
TEMPERATURE REFERENCE ATTACH (#7830): Provides the
capability to attach Termination Cards containing resistance I?ulb
thermometers for determining the reference junction temperatures in thermocouple applications. See 5029. Maximum: one
per #1221. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Amplifier
Multirange B (#1215). or Amplifier Multirange C (#1216) ...
customer signal connection required, see 5029.
• DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT
DIGITAL INPUT CONTROL (#3284): Provides control for up to
4 Digital Input (#3289 or #3292). Maximum: Two per 5012.
Field Installation: Yes.
DIGITAL INPUT GROUP (#3289): Provides 16 latching on
non-latching digital input voltage or contact points. The voltage
or contact and the isolation capability of each point is determined by the Termination Card used. Maximum: Four #3289 or
#3292 in any combination per #3284. Field Installation: Yes.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- -----.. -
--- General Systems Division-Machines
- -=
= -~--=
--...
-~-
~
M5012.3
April 78
-~-
Prerequisites: Digital Input Control (#3284) ... customer signal
connection required, see 5029.
PROCESS INTERRUPT (#5710): Converts a Digital Input
Group (#3289) to a process interrupt group. Limitation: #5710
cannot be installed on Digital Input Non-Isolated (#3292).
Maximum: Two per 5012 ... can only be used with the first two
groups of Digital Input Group (#3289) in a 5012. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Digital Input Group (#3289).
DIGITAL INPUl NON-ISOLATED (#3292): Provides 16 latching or non-latching points of contact sense capabiltity. Input
signals are referenced to frame ground. Limitation: Cannot be
modified by Process Interrupt (#5710). Maximum: Four #3289
or #3292 in any combination per #3284. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Digital Input Control (#3284) ... customer signal
connection required, see 5029.
FUNCTION
max., one
per group
1st Digital Input Control (3284)
1st Group
2nd Group
DIGITAL
INPUT
ISOLATED
3289
PROCESS
INTERRUPT
ISOLATED
3289
plus
5710
DIGITAL
INPUT
NON-ISOLATED
PROCESS
INTERRUPT
NON-ISOLATED
3rd Group
4th Group
3289
3289
3289
3289
plus
5710
Not
Available
Not
Available
3292
3292
3292
9292
Not
Available
Not
Available
Not
Available
Not
Available
FUNCTION
max., one
per group
5th Group
6th Group
7th Group
8th Group
DIGITAL
INPUT
ISOLATED
3289
3289
3289
3289
Not
Available
Not
Available
Not
Available
Not
Available
DIGITAL
INPUT
NON-ISOLATED
3292
3292
3292
3292
PROCESS
INTERRUPT
NON-ISOLATED
Not
Available
Not
Available
Not
Available
Not
Available
PROCESS
INTERRUPT
ISOLATED
medium power solid state digital output switches. Power, up to
48 V dc, and 450 ma, must be provided by the user. Maximum:
Four #3420, 3421, 3422, 3424 i~ any combination per #3296.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Digital Input Control
(#3296) ... customer signal connection required, see 5029.
DO MEDIUM POWER NON-ISOLATED (#3424): Provides 16
non-isolated medium power (0 ma at 5.5 V to 12 ma at 2.4 V
supplied by IBM) solid. state digital output switches. Output
signals are referenced to frame ground. Customer powered
loads up to 450 ma at 52.8 V dc can be switched. Maximum:
Four #3420, 3421, 3422, 3424 in any combination per #3296.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Digital Output Control
(#3296) ... customer signal connection required, see 5029.
ATTACHMENT ACCESSORIES: Termination Cords and connectors for customer signal wires are provided as accessories in
the 5029. For details, see 5029.
2nd Digital Input Control (3284)
DIGITAL OUTPUT CONTROL (#3296): Provides control for up
to four groups of Digital Outputs (#3420, 3421, 3422, 3424) in
any combination. Maximum: One per 5012. Field Installation:
Yes.
DO CONTACT GROUP (#3420): Provides 16 isolated single
pole Form A mercury wetted relay contacts rated at 125 V dc
max or 88 V ac RMS max, 2A ac RMS max; the product of peak
voltage and peak current must not exceed 100 (100 VA max.).
Maximum: Four #3420, 3421, 3422, 3424 in any combination
per #3296. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Digital Output Control (#3296) ... customer signal connection required, see
5029.
DO LOW POWER GROUP (#3421): Provides 16 low power (4
ma, 6 V) digital output points. No user power supply is required.
Maximum: Four #3420, 3421, 3422, 3424 in any combination
per #3296. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Digital Output Control (#3296) ... customer signal connection required, see
5029.
DO MEDIUM POWER GROUP (#3422): Provides 16 isolated
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-----_ -- General Systems Division-Machines
::-:.=;=
M5013.1
April 78
-~----~-.5013 DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE
Purpose: To provide digital inp~t/ output, expansion capability
for custom products, and 2790 control on a System/7.
Prerequisite: One module location in a 5026 Enclosure mdl A2,
C3, C6, D3 or D6.
Svstem/7 Summary: GA34-0002
Highlights: Designed specifically to provide expansion capability for applications that require custom products along with
digital input/ output and 2790 control.
Provides capability for:
" Expansion for Custom Products
- Attachment of a 2790 Control
- Up to 128 digital input points
- Up to 32 isolated process interrupt points
- Up to 64 digital output points
Expansion Capability: Provides the space, power, and logical
interface to attach various Custom Products to the System/7.
2790 Control: Provides the required logical interface for attachment of 2790 Data Communication devices to System/7. This
allows System/7 to act as the "System Contro"er" for
2791/2793 Area Stations or 2792 Remote Communication
Controller. The 2790 Control allows transmission of data between System/7 and the 2791/2793 Area Stations (and
2795/2796/2797 Data Entry Units, and 2798 G(Jidance Display
Units). Transmission rate is approximately 500,000 bits per
second (900 characters per second). See 2790 in "Systems".
The combined number of 2791 /2793s and 2792 mdl 1s on each
5012 or 5013 may not exceed 16. Maximum: Four 2790 Controls per system, one per 5013 Digital Input/Output Module.
Digital Input: Provides up to 8 groups of 16 digital input points.
Either isolated or non-isolated Digital Input groups are available.
Each digital input point is a voltage or contact sense, 2-terminal
circuit. Each group can be program controlled for latching or
non-latching operation. Anyone of the 8 groups may be read
under direct program control. The first two groups of digital
inputs may be converted to process interrupt points through tha
addition of the Process Interrupt feature.
.
Process Interrupt: An "interrupt on change" feature is offered
on the first two groups of digital inputs. This feature provides
the capability to compare the input of the 16-bit groups against
a program loadable 16-bit register and initiate an interrupt on
either an equal or unequal comparison.
Digital Output: Provides up to 4 groups of 16 digital output
points. Each digital output point may be set or reset under
program control. Each Digital Output group may be one of the
following circuit types: Low Power, Medium Power, Medium
Power Non-Isolated, or Contact output. Low Power output
provides switching with a maximum rating of 6 volts at 4 milliamps. Medium Power and Medium Power Non-Isolated operate up to 48 volts at 450 milliamps. Contact Output provides a
Form A mercury wetted relay contact rated at 125 V dc max or
88 V ac RMS max, 2 A ac RMS max; the product of peak voltage and peak current must not e)(ceed 100 (100 VA max). Digital
outputs operate under direct program control. Medium Power
and Contact Output points are isolated and may be directly
connected to the standard Digital Input points. This provides the
capability for wrap-around testing and multiplexing of digital and
analog inputs with digital output points.
1) For location of the 5013 I/O Module, specify: (If feature
#9141 was specified on the 5010, do not use the following
specify features.)
#9143: Also enter the desired module location number, as
shown in the chart on page M 5026, in the quantity column of
the order form. Specify #9142 in the 5010 Processor Module.
#9144: For shipment without mounting in an enclosure (spare).
2) Customer's signal wires enter through the rear side panels of
the module. Three types of side panels are available: Type 1
provides a slot for cables; Type 2 has individual holes for each
pair of wires; Type 3 is a blank panel that can be customized by
the customer. Separate side panels eire used for digital and
analog input signals. For details, ref,er to IBM System/7 Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA34-0004.
For Digitallnput!Output specify one:
#9501: Side Panel Digital Type 1
#9502: Side Panel Digital Type 2
#9503: Side Panel Digital Type 3
3) When 2790 Control (#8195) is ordered on 5013 specify:
#9444 (Multiloop Device) for each new 5013 in a multiloop
system. Note: When upgrading from a single loop system,
#9444 must be ordered
for the installed 5013 which
contains #8195.
Special Features
2790 CONTROL (#8195): Interface for 2790 Data Communication devices. For 2790 devices supported by programming, see
MSP/7 in "Programming". Limitation: Online diagnostics are
available for maintenance of the 2790 - System/7 and must be
implemented on a" systems which include a 2792 or have more
than 16 area stations ... see page P7.3 System/7 Macro
Library / Relocatable. A" 5012 and 5013 modules with 2790
Control (#8195) must reside within the same 5026 Enclosure.
See 2791/2793 Limitations, Loop Delay (2793 "Machines"
page) for special configuring considerations. Maximum: One
per 5013, four per System/7. MSP/7 provides support for a
maximum of four 2792 mdl 1s (up to two per 2790 control) or a
maximum of sixty-four 2791/2792 mdl 1/2793s (16 per 2790
control). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Customer signal
connection required, see 5029.
Maximum: The !otal number of Input/Output Modules (5012,
5013, 5014 and 5022 'in any combination) per system may not
exceed 11.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---
--=
:-:.-===
M5013.2
-~--
-
General Systems Division-Machines
April 78
-~-~-.-
• DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT FEATURES
DIGITAL INPUT CONTROL (#3284): Provides control of up to
4 Digital Input (#3289 or #3292) groups. Maximum: Two per
5013. Field Installation: Yes.
DIGITAL INPUT GROUP (#3289): Provides 16 latching or
non-latching digital input voltage or contact points. The voltage
or contact and the isolation capability of each point is determined by the Termination Card used. Maximum: Four #3289 or
#3292 in any combination per #3284. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Digital Input Control (#3284) ... customer signal
connection required, see 5029.
PROCESS INTERRUPT (#5710): Converts a Digital Input
Group (#3289) to a process interrupt group. Limitation: #5710
cannot be installed on Digital Input Non-Isolated (#3292).
Maximum: Two per 5013 ... can only be used with the first two
groups of Digital Input Group (#3289) in a 5013. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Digital Input Group (#3289) and
its prerequisite.
DIGITAL INPUT NON-ISOLATED (#3292): Provides 16 latching or non-latching points of contact sense capability. Input
signals are referenced to frame ground. Limitation: Cannot be
modified by Process Interrupt (#5710). Maximum: Four #3289
or #3292 in any combination per #3284. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Digital Input Control (#3284) ... customer signal
connection required, see 5029.
FUNCTION
max., one
per group
1st Digital Input Control (3284)
1st Group
2nd Group
3rd Group
4th Group
DIGITAL
INPUT
ISOLATED
3289
3289
3289
3289
PROCESS
INTERRUPT
ISOLATED
3289
plus
5710
3289
plus
5710
Not
Available
Not
Available
DIGITAL
INPUT
NON-ISOLATED
3292
3292
3292
9292
PROCESS
INTERRUPT
NON-ISOLATED
Not
Available
Not
Available
Not
Available
Not
Available
FUNCTION
max., one
per group
DIGITAL
INPUT
ISOLATED
DO LOW POWER GROUP (#3421): Provides 16 low power (4
ma, 6 V) digital output points. No user power supply is required.
Maxim.um: Four #3420, 3421, 3422, 3424 in any combination
per #3296. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Digital Output Control (#3296) ... customer signal connection required, see
5029.
DO MEDIUM POWER GROUP (#3422): Provides 16 isolated
medium power solid state digital output switches. Power, up to
48 V dc, and 450 ma, must be provided by the user. Maximum:
Four #3420, 3421, 3422, 3424 in any combination per #3296.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Digital Output Control
(#3296) ... customer signal connection required, see 5029.
DO MEDIUM POWER NON-ISOLATED (#3424): Provides 16
non-isolated medium power (0 ma at 5.5 V to 12 ma at 2.4 V
supplied by IBM) solid state digital output switches. Output
signals are referenced to frame ground. Customer powered
loads up to 450 ma at 52.8 V dc can be switched. Maximum:
Four #3420, 3421, 3422, 3424 in any combination per #2396.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Digital Output Control
(#3296) ... customer signal connection required, see 5029.
ATTACHMENT ACCESSORIES: Termination Cards and connectors for customer signal wires are provided as accessories in
the 5029 mdl1. For details, see M 5029.
2nd Digital Input Control (3284)
5th Group
6th Group
7th Group
8th Group
3289
3289
3289
3289
Not
Available
Not
Available
Not
Available
Not
Available
DIGITAL
INPUT
NON-ISOLATED
3292
3292
3292
3292
PROCESS
INTERRUPT
NON-ISOLATED
Not
Available
Not
Available
Not
Available
Not
Available
PROCESS
INTERRUPT
ISOLATED
Maximum: Four #3420, 3421, 3422, 3424 in any combination
per #3296. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Digital Output Control (#3296) ... customer signal connection required, see
5029.
DIGITAL OUTPUT CONTROL (#3296): Provides control for up
to four groups of Digital Outputs (#3420, 3421, 3422, 3424) in
any combination. Maximum: One per 5013. Field Installation:
Yes.
DO CONTACT GROUP (#3420): Provides 16 isolated single
pole Form A mercury wetted relay contacts rated at 125 V dc
max or 88 V ac RMS max, 2A ac RMS max; the product of peak
voltage and peak current must not exceed 100 (100 VA max).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
"------- --=
=
- - -" -------.-
M5014.1
==-~ General Systems Division-Machines
April 78
-~---
5014 ANALOG INPUT MODULE
Purpose: To provide Systerp/7 with the capability to use voltage signals as input data. The 5014 Analog Input Module provides capability for up to 128 analog input points.
Model B1: Scanning rate up to 200 points per second.
Model C1: Scanning rate up to 20,000 points per second.
Model 01: Scanning rate up to 100 points per second.
Model E1: Expander for 5014 model 01.
Model E2: Expander for 5014 model 81.
Model Changes: Changes between model E1 and model E2 are
field installable. Model changes from 8 to C to 0 and vice versa
are not recommended for field installation.
Highlights: Provides analog input capability including mUltiplexing, amplification, and analog-to-digital conversion. Five models
are available: Model 81 uses mercury wetted relay multiplexers
with a maximum scanning rate of 200 points per second; Model
C1 uses a solid state multiplexer with a maximum scanning rate
of 7,000 to 20,000 points per second; Model 01, with a maximum scanning rate of 100 points per second, uses either mercury wetted or dry contact relay multiplexers; Model E1 is an expander module connected to model 01 sharing the amplifier and
analog-to-digital converter of the model 01 and using either type
of multiplexer; Model E2 is an expander module connected to
model 81 sharing the amplifier and analog-to-digital converter of
the model 81 and using mercury wetted relay multiplexers. Input
signals may range from 0 to ±5.12 volts full scale with mercury
wetted relay multiplexers and solid state multiplexers. Input
signals may range from -640 mv to +5.12 volts full scale with
dry contact relay multiplexers.
The analog-to-digital converter has a resolution of 14 bits plus
sign. Analog conversion and point addressing of the multiplexers are under program control. Immediate and External synchronization operations are both available. A special feature
provides for attachment of resistance bulb thermometer (R8T)
termination cards for determining the reference junction temperature in thermocouple applications. Connection of customer
signals and signal conditioning is achieved by terminatio"n cards
in the customer access area at the back of the Analog Input
Module. Limitations: The first model E1 must be located directly under its associated model 01. The second model E1 must be
located directly under the first model E1. The first model E2
must be located directly under its associated model 81. The
second model E2 must be located directly under the first model
E2. Maximum: Total number of Input/Output Modules (5012,
5013, 5014, 5022, and Customer Product Modules in any combination) per system cannot exceed 11. Prerequisite: One
module location in 5026 Enclosure mdls A2, C3, C6, 03 or 06.
System/7 Summary: GA34-0002
1) For location of the 5014 I/O Module, specify: (If feature
#9141 was specified on the 5010, do not use the following
specify features.)
#9143: also enter the desired module location number, as shown
in the chart on page M 5026, in the quantity column of the order
form. Specify #9142 in the 5010 Processor Module.
#9144: for shipment without mounting in an enclosure (spare).
2) Customer's signal wires enter through the rear side panels of
the module. Three types of panels are available; Type 1 provides
a slot for cables; Type 2 has individual holes for each pair of
wires; Type 3 is a blank panel that can be customized by the
customer. For details refer to IBM System/7 Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GA34-0004 Specify One;
#9511: Side Panel Analog Type 1
#9512: Side Panel Analog Type 2
#9513: Side'Panel Analog Type 3
3) On each 5014 mdl E specify one of the following:
#9185: For expansion from 128 to 256 points. (First 5014 mdl E
is connected to a single 5014 mdl 8 or D).
#9186: For expansion from 256 to 384 points. (Second 5014 mdl
E is connected to a single 5014 mdl 8 or D.)
MODEL DESCRIPTIONS
Model B1: provides amplification, analog-to-digital conversion,
and addressing of 128 analog input points at a scanning rate up
to 200 points per second using mercury wetted relay multiplexers. A special feature provides addressing for an additional 256
points in two attached model E2s (total 384 points).
Model C1: provides amplification, analog-to-digital conversion,
and addressing of 128 analog input points at a scanning rate up
to 20,000 points per second using solid state multiplexers. The
maximum scanning rate is dependent upon the input signal level
and mode of operation. Low level signals may be scanned at a
maximum rate of 14,000 points per second. High level signals
may be scanned at a maximum rate of 20,000 points per second.
Maximum scanning rate with auto ranging is 7,000 points per
second.
Model 01: provides amplification, analog-to-digital conversion,
and addressing of 384 analog input points at a scanning rate up
to 100 points per second using mercury wetted relay or dry
contact relay multiplexers. The first 128 points of relay multiplexers are installed in the model 01. The second 128 points of
relay multiplexers are installed in a model E1 attached to the
model 01. The third 128 points of relay multiplexers are installed in a model E1 attached to the first model E1.
Model E1: expansion model for model 01. Provides for 128
analog input points selected by mercury wetted relay or dry
contact relay multiplexers. It is connected to and uses the amplification, analog.:.to-digital conversion, and addressing circuits of
a model 01. The maximum scanning speed is the same as the
model 01 (100 points per second). Limitation: The first model
E1 must be located directly under the model 01 to which it is
attached. The second model E1 must be located directly under
the first model E1. Maximum Two per 5014 mdl 01.
Prerequisite: 5014 mdl 01.
Model E2: expansion module for model 81. Provides for 128
analog input points selected by mercury wetted relay mUltiplexers. It is connected to and uses the amplification, analog-todigital conversion, and addressing circuits of a model 81. The
ma~imum scanning speed is the same as the model 81 (200
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---= -=--~ General Systems Division-Machines
-- -----
=
M5014.2
April 78
-~-.
points per second). Limitation: The first model E2 must be
located directly under the model B1 to which it is attached. The
second model E2 must be located directly under the first model
E2. Maximum: Two per 5014 mdl B1. Prerequisite: Analog
Input Expander (#1250) on the 5014 mdl B1.
is modified to the range of -640mv to +5.12 volts. 14 bits of
data plus sign are generated. Limitation: Cannot be ordered
with Amplifier High Level 0 (#1212). Maximum: One per 5014
mdl 01. Field Installation: Yes.
ANALOG INPUT ADAPTER B (#1230): [Model B1 only] Provides capability for two Multiplexer/MR16 (#5247) groups.
Maximum: Four per 5014 mdl B1. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Amplifier High Level B (#1210) or Amplifier Multirange B (#1215).
ANALOG INPUT ADAPTER C (#1231): [Model C1 only] Provides capability for two Multiplexer/MS16 (#5249) groups.
Maximum: Four per 5014 mdl C1. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Amplifier High Level C (#1211) or Amplifier Multirange C (#1216).
AMPLIFIER HIGH LEVEL B (#1210): [Model B1 only] Provides
a un'ity gain amplifier for high level analog input signals with a
full scale range of ± 5.12 volts. Limitation: Cannot be ordered
with Amplifier Multirange B (#1215). Maximum: One per 5014
mdl B1. Field Installation: Yes.
AMPLIFIER HIGH LEVEL C (#1211): [Model C1 only] Provides
a unity gain amplifier for high level analog input signals with a
full scale range of ±5.12 volts. Limitation: Cannot be ordered
with Amplifier Multirange C (#1216). Maximum: One per 5014
mdl C1. Field Installation: Yes.
AMPLIFIER HIGH LEVEL 0 (#1212): [Model 01 only] Provides
a unity gain amplifier for high level analog input signals with a
full scale range of ±5.12 volts with Multiplexer/MR16 (#5247)
or -640 mv to +5.12 volts with Multiplexer/M016 (#5245).
Limitation: Cannot be ordered with Amplifier Multirange D
(#1217). Maximum: One per 5014 mdl 01. Field Installation:
Yes.
AMPLIFIER MULTIRANGE B (#1215): [Model B1 only] Provides a multirange amplifier for analog input signals. The amplifier gains can be set by the program or determined automatically
by the amplifier. Amplifier ranges are ±10mv, ±20mv, ±40mv,
±80mv, ± 160mv, ±640mv, and ±5.12 volts full scale. In program selected gain mode of operation, 14 bits of data plus sign
are generated. In auto ranging mode of operation, 12 bits of
data plus sign are generated. The remaining 3 bits are used to
indicate the range. Limitation: Cannot be ordered with Amplifier High Level B (#1210). Maximum: One per 5014 mdl B1.
Field Installation: Yes.
AMPLIFIER MULTIRANGE C (#1216): [Model C1 only] Provides a multi range amplifier for analog input signals. The amplifier gains can be set by the program or determined automatically
by the amplifier. Amplifier ranges are ±10mv, ±20mv, ±40mv,
±80mv, ±160mv, ±640mv, and ±5.12 volts full scale. In program selected gain mode of operation, 14 bits of data plus sign
are generated. In auto ranging mode of operation, 12 bits of
data plus sign are generated. The remaining 3 bits are used to
indicate the range. Limitation: Cannot be ordered with Amplifier
High Level C (#1211). Maximum: One per 5014 mdl C1 Field
Installation: Yes.
AMPLIFIER MULTIRANGE 0 (#1217): [Model 01 only] Provides a multirange amplifier for analog input signals. The amplifier gain is set by the program.
When used with
Multiplexer/MR16 (#5247), the full scale ranges are ±10mv,
±20mv, ±40mv, ±80mv, ±160mv, ±640mv, and ±5.12 volts.
When used with Multiplexer/M016 (#5245), all of the above
ranges are available with the exception that the ± 5.12 volt range
ANALOG INPUT ADAPTER D/E (#1233): [Model 01, E1 and
E2 only] Provides capability for two Multiplexer/MR16 (#5247)
groups on mdls 01, E1, E2, or two Multiplexer/M016 (#5245)
groups on mdls 01, E1. Maximum: Four per 5014 mdls 01, E1
or E2. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Amplifier High
Level 0 (#1212) or Amplifier Multirange 0 (#1217) on 5014 mdl
01.
ANALOG INPUT EXPAND,ER B (#1250): [Model B1 only]
Provides the capability to attach one or two 5014 mdl E2s to.a
5014 mdl B1. This provides up to 384 analog input point addresses on a 5014 mdl B1. Maximum: One per 5014 mdl B1.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Amplifier High Level B
(#1210) or Amplifier Multirange B (#1215).
MULTI?LEXER/MD16 (#5245): [Model 01 and. E1 only] Provides a group of 16 analog input points. Input points are multiplexed by.dry contact relays. Input signals can be in the range of
-640mv to +5.12 volts. Limitation: The combined quantity of
Multiplexer/M016 (#5245) and Multiplexer/MR16 (#5247) must
not exceed two per Analog Input Adapter O/E (#1233). Common mode voltage must not exceed 100 volts and the average
sampling rate per point must not exceed 20 samples pe....-minute
when averaged over at least 24 hours. This means that a single
input point must not be addressed more than 28,800 times in 24
hours. Maximum: Two per Analog Input Adapter O/E (#1233).
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Analog Input Adapter
O/E (#1233). Customer signal connection required, see M5029.
MULTIPLEXER/MR16 (#5247): [Model B1, 01, E1 or E2 only]
Provides a group of 16 analog input points. Input points are
multiplexed by mercury wetted relays. Input signals can be in the
range of ±5.12 volts. Limitation: The combined quantity of
Multiplexer/MR16 (#5247) and Multiplexer/M016 (#5245) must
not exceed two per Analog Input Adapter B (#1230) or Analog
Input Adapter O/E (#1233). Common mode voltage must not
exceed 250 volts and the average sampling rate is not limited.
Maximum: Two per Analog Input Adapter B (#1230) or Analog
Input Adapter O/E (#1233). Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Analog Input Adapter B (#1230) on 5014 mdl B1
or Analog Input Adapter O/E (#1233) on mdls 01, E1 or E2.
Customer signal connection required, see M5029.
MULTIPLEXER/MS16 (#5249): [Model C1 only] Provides a
group of 16 analog input points. Input points are multiplexed by
solid state switches. Input signals can be in the range of ± 5.12
volts. Limitation: Common mode voltage must not exceed 10
volts and the average sampling rate is not limited. Maximum:
Two per Analog Input Adapter C (#1231). Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisites: Analog Input Adapter C (#1231). Customer
signal connection required, see M5029.
TEMPERATURE REFERENCE ATTACH (#7830): [Model B1,
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- - General Systems Division-Machines
-..
- ---.... -
--
-~-
-~"--"
C1, or 01 only] Provides the capability to attach termination
cards containing resistance bulb thermometers (RBT) ... see M
5029. When this feature is installed in a 5014 mdl B1 or 01 the
capability is extended to 5014 mdl E1 or E2 associated with it.
Limitation: A maximum. of 32 RBT termination cards can be
attached to one Temperature Reference Attach (#7830).
Maximum: One per 5014 mdls B1, C1 and 01. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Amplifier Multirange B (#1215),
Amplifier Multirange C (#1216) or Amplifier Multirange 0
(#1217).
MAXIMUM FEATURE QUANTITY PER MODEL
Feature
Amplifier High Level 8 (1210)
Amplifier High Level C (1211)
Amplifier High Level 0 (1212)
Amplifier Multirange 8 (1215)
Amplifier Multirange C (1216)
Amplifier Multirange 0 (1217)
Analog Input Adapter B (1230)
Analog Input Adapter C (1231 )
Analog Input Adapter O/E (1233)
Analog Input Expander 8 (1250)
Multiplexer/MO 16 (5245)
Multiplexer/MR 16 (5247)
Multiplexer/MS 16 (5249)
Temperature Reference Attach
(7830)
Mdl81
200 pt
per sec
Mdl Cl
20K pt
per sec
Mdl01
100 pt
per sec
Mdl E1
100 pt
per sec
Mdl E2
200 pt
per sec
1
0
0
1
0
0
4
0
0
1
0
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
0
8
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
8
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
8
0
0
1
0
0
-4
0
8
8
0
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M5014.3
April 78
_......... -
--=
. -.~-== General Systems Division-Machines
MS022.1
-
- -- ----. -----
April 78
5022 DISK STORAGE MODULE
Purpose: Disk Storage Unit for System/7.
Model 1 Single Drive: 2.457 million 16-bit words ... access 200
cylinders on removable cartridge and 200 cylinders on its nonremovable disk ... 269 millisecond average access time.
Model 2 Single Drive: Same as Model 1 except 126 millisecond
average access time.
Model 3 Single Drive: 1.228 million 16-bit words ... access 200
cylinders on one non-removable disk ... average access time 269
milliseconds.
Model 4 Single Drive: Same as Model 3 except 126 millisecond
average access time.
Model Changes: Field Installable.
Highlights: Removable Disk Cartridges-each 5022 mdl 1 or
2 uses a removable 5440 Disk Cartridge that provides virtually
unlimited offline disk storage. 5440s must be ordered separately.
Cylinder Concept: The access mechanism with four vertically
aligned heads gives access to the top and bottom tracks of both
the removable 5440 and the 5022's non-removable disk for
model 1 or model 2. With one positioning of the access mechanism, 12,288 sixteen-bit words are available.
The access mechanism on model 3 or model 4 with two vertical
aligned heads gives access to the top and bottom tracks of the
non-removable disk, providing 6,144 sixteen-bit words with one
positioning of the access mechanism.
Formats: Each of the 200 customer usable cylinders, three
alternate cylinders and one CE cylinder on each disk is composed of two tracks of 24 sectors each. Each sector provides a
fixed length 128 word data field.
Housing: The 5022 can reside in an I/O module location in any
of the 5026 enclosures. However, it is recommended that it be
installed in the bottom module location for user accessability ...
·see "Specify" [1] below.
Access Times: Minimum access time is 39 milliseconds, average is 269 milliseconds and maximum is 750 milliseconds for
model lor model 3.
Minimum access time is 28 milliseconds, average is 126 milliseconds and maximum is 255 milliseconds for model 2 or model 4.
Data Transfer Rate: The disk rotates at 1500 rpm, yielding a
data rate of 99,500 words per second and a rotational period of
40 milliseconds.
Prerequisites:
(1) An available I/O module location in the 5026 Enclosure.
(2) Each 5022 mdl 1 or 2 requires a 5440 Disk Cartridge.
(3) Integral Power Supply (#4650) is required for:
a) Each additional 5022 after the first 5022 within a single 5026
Enclosure.
b) A 5022 installed in a 5026 mdl A2.
Configuration: Multiple 5022s may be installed on a single
System/7. IBM supplied programming support for the Disk
Cycle Steal (#2664) feature is mutually exclusive with Direct
Program Control Disk support. Drives of both types are not
supported on the same system. Multiple drives of either type are
supported.
System/7 Summary: GA34-0002
1) For location of the 5022 Disk Storage Module, specify:
#9143: - also enter the desired module location number, as
shown under the 5026, in the quantity column of the order form.
#9144 - for shipment without mounting in an enclosure (spare).
Limitations: the following limitations apply to the location
where a 5022 module can be installed in a 5026 Enclosure.
(a) A 5022 cannot be located in a top position of a 5026 (module
locations 0, 3, 6 or 9).
(b) It is recommended that 5022s be located in the bottom position of a 5026 enclosure (module locations 2, 5, 8 or 11). Only
when absolutely necessary should a 5022 be located in the
middle position of a 5026 enclosure (module locations 1, 4, 7 or
10).
.
(c) Locating a 5022 mdl 3 or 4 in the bottom position of a 5026
enclosure in systems without Internal Air Isolation (#4621 or
#4622) will increase its maximum allowable operating temperature from 90°F to 105°F.
(d) Housing a 5022 in a 5026 mdl D3 or D6 is not recommended
due to the increased processor loading during data transfer.
2) Each 5022 mdl 1 or mdl 2 requires a 5440 Disk Cartridge
which must be ordered separately .
3) Integral Power Supply (#4650) is required for: (1) instaMation
of each additional 5022 after the first 5022 within a single 5026
Enclosure, or (2) a 5022 installed in a 5026 mdl A2 ... see
"Special Features" below.
4) Power: Must be consistent with that of the 5026 Enclosure ...
see voltage feature #s under "Specify" for the 5026.
Special Features
DISK CYCLE STEAL (#2664): Provides data transfers between
the 5022 and main storage of a 5010 equipped with companion
Cycle Steal Basic (#2662) feature. Limitation: One per 5022.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Cycle Steal Basic (#2662)
on the 5010.
INTEGRAL POWER SUPPLY (#4650): Provides 24 volts power
supply which is required for: (1) Installation of each additional
5022 after the first 5022 within a single 5026 Enclosure. and (2)
Installation of 5022 on a 5026 Enclosure mdl A2. Field
Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
Feature MAC Purchase MMMC
Disk Cycle Steal
Integral Power Supply
#2664
#4650
$16
$39
$521
$1,210
$1.00
$1.00
Environment: The 5022 operates within the following temperature and humidity range.
60-90°F
Temperature *
Relative Humidity
8-95%
Max. Wet Bulb Temperature 85°F
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----= -- General Systems Division-Machines
=---=
- ------
- -=
M5022.2
April 78
-~-.-
Non-operating Temperature
Non-operating Humidity
*In systems without Air Isolation (#4621 or #4622 on 5026), the
maximum operating temperature for a 5022 mdl 3 or 4 (fixed
pack) is 105°F if the disk is located in the bottom position of a
5026 Enclosure (module locations 2, 5, 8 or 11).
5998-T01 3340 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE FACILITY ATTACHMENT
Purpose: Provides a module with the basic control logic for
attaching and controlling the 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility
to the System/7.
5998-T01 ·to be installed in Position 2 of 5026. Specify #9590
(System/7 Model E) on 3340 Model A02.
Power for 3340 must be consistent with that of 5026 Enclosure.
Highlights: The 3340 used with the System/7 may consist of
up to 8 drives. The prerequisite 3340-A02 contains two drives
and a control unit. Up to three additional 3340 Model B units
may be attached giving maximum configuration of 8 drives.
Allows the 3348 Data Module to be formatted to System/370
OS/VS and DOS/VS Standards. It also allows the S/7 programmer to access the 3348 Data Module as multiple 5022s
and/or with a new direct access method.
Application programs using MSP /7 symbolic file support access
methods can be converted by changing parameters in specification macros such as #DIT, #DISK, #CONF, etc., and recompiling
using programming supplied with the hardware (PSH).
The 3340 is an initial program load device. The 3340 can be
used as an auto restart device in conjunction with power fail
detect., 5026 FC#5731.
Maximum: One 5998-T01 per System/7.
Prerequisite: 5010-E28 with Cycle Steal Basic FC#2662. If
ordered for C03 Enclosure RPO 008332 is required. 5028 required for each system.
Limitations: limited to 5026 Model C03 equipped wi.th 60 HZ
high power RPO 008332 or a 5026-C06. The 5998-T01 must be
mounted in position 2 of the 5026. Power Loading characteristics influence the maximum configuration.
May not be installed in environments where airborne contaminants exist. Installation of the internal air isolation feature,
FC#4621 is not permitted.
This RPO restricts the S/7 to Class B environment:
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Non-Operating Temp
Maximum Wet Bulb
15.6 C to 32.2 C or 60 F to 90 F
8 to 80%
10 C to 43.3 Cor 50 F to 110 F
22.8 C or 73.0 F
The'following 3340 Features are not supported by this RPO:
Remote Switch Attachment (#6148)
Rotational Position Sensing (#6201, 6202)
String Switch (#8150)
A 5022 module cannot be mounted in Position 1 of a 5026
Enclosure when a 5998-T01 is mounted in Position 2.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
111
- -
-----= --~------.
~~~ General Systems Division-Machines
----- - . -
MS024.1
~
April 78
5024 I/O ATTACHMENT ENCLOSURE
MACHINE TYPE
BELT DESCRIPTION
FEATURE N
Purpose: To provide line printing and/or card reading capability
for System /7;
5024
5024
5024
48 Character
64 Character
96 Character
5552
5551
5550
Model 1 : Basic Enclosure with Line Printer.
Model 2: Basic Enclosure with 2502 Attachment.
Model Changes: Changes from Model 1 or 2 to Model 3 are
field installable. No other model changes can be made.
Model 3: Expanded Enclosure with Line Printer and 2502 Attachment.
Highlights:
Enclosure: The 5024 I/O Attachment Enclosure is a data processing oriented addition to the System/7. The enclosure provides basic space, power and logic to attach a printer, a card
reader, or both. If both a printer and a card reader are utilized,
an enclosure expansion is provided. The 5024 attaches to any
5010 Processor Module Model E equipped with 5024 Attachment Feature (#4115). A fixed length cable is supplied with th!3
5024 (see Physical Planning Manual for further details).
5024 Attachment Feature (#4115) on 5010: Provides the
interface between the 5010 model E and the 5024 and handles
data transfers between 5010 model E storage and the 5024 on a
cycle steal basis. Cycle Steal Basic (#2662) is required on the
5010 model E. If both a card reader and a printer are attached,
operations may be interleaved but not overlapped. In the inter-:
leave mode of operation, performance of the devices will be less
than the individual unit's rated speed of 300 cpm reading and
155 Ipm printing. For more details see GA34-0002. Only one
5024 may be attached per 5010 model E. The 5024 attachment
is mutually exclusive with IBM 1200 bps Integrated Modems
(#5500, 5501) and S/360 and S/370 Channel Attachment (RPQ
008112). All systems planning to use any 5010 RPQ (except
008119, Sensor Based Control Adapter) together with Feature
Code #4115 must resubmit the RPO for evaluation before it is
proposed to the customer.
PREREQUISITES: Cycle Steal Basic (#2662) and 5024 Attachment Feature (#4115) on a 5010 model E Processor. For 5024
model 2 or 3, a 2502 model A2 with specify features #9901 for
115 V AC, and #9046 for white color.
System/7 Summary: GA34-0002
[1] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[2] Print Belt: Specify-#9490 for 96-character belt, #9491 for
64-character belt, or #9492 for 48-character belt. (48-character
belt uses a character set with =, ( and) rather than¢, %, and,
respectively. )
[3] FC9901 for 115V AC, 1-Phase, 60 cycle.
ACCESSORIES:
FORMS STANDS: Permits feed continuous forms from the
carton and provides for forms stacking after printing. This accessory is a one-shelf forms stand.
TYPE FEATURE NO.
5024 4450
ADDITIONAL PRINT BELTS (5024): Permits the customer to
print more than one character set for various applications. Can
be interchangeably used with the belt provided with the machine.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-_
.... ---.- ---- -= _
=--=
--------.. -
M5026.1
April 78
General Systems Division-Machines
5026 ENCLOSURE
5026 - Module Location Chart
Purpose: To provide housing and power for System/7 Processor and Input/Output Modules.
C3
C6
0
1
2
0
1
2
Model A2: 2 Position ... for a Processor Module and one I/O
Module.
Model C3: 3 Position ... for a Processor Module and two I/O
Modules.
3
4
5
03
06
6
7
8
6
7
8
9
10
11
Front view
System/7 Summary: GA34-0002
Model CI: 6 Position ... for a Processor Module and five I/O
Modules.
Model 03: 3 .Position Extension ... 3 additional I/O Module
locations with C3 or C6.
Model 06: 6 Position Extension ... 6 additional I/O Module
locations with C3 or C6.
Model D3 or D6 is cable attached to model C3 or C6 and may be
located up to 200 feet from the model C3 or C6.
Highlights: Provides housing for the Processor Module and all
Input/Output Modules. Also included are the necessary power
supplies (see RPQ D08331 for power restrictions on 3340 Attachment) and interface connections for all modules. The Processor Module must be located in the first module location of A2,
C3 or C6 models. I/O Modules may be housed in any of the
remaining module locations, except Module 5998-TO 1 must be
located in module position 2 and if it is installed, a 5022 module
may not be located in module position 1. The D3 or D6 model
may be located up to 200 feet from the C3 or C6 model. An
Internal Air Isolation feature (not available on model A2) seals
the enclosure and prevents the outside air from entering into the
enclosure. Internal air is filtered through an activated carbon
filtration system. Heat within the enclosure is dissipated through
an air-to-air heat exchanger. This feature allows the System/7 to
be used in environments where airborne elements might harm
the electronic circuitry. Since this feature is not available on
model A2 enclosures, in environments where there is a possibility of existence of contaminants, a C3 or C6 model must be used.
An "Early Warning" corrosion detector card is installed as a
standard item in every System/7 enclosure. This card is specifically designed to be sensitive to airborne contaminants. Inspection of this card gives an early warning so that appropriate action for protection of the system may be taken.
1) Voltage (AC, 60 cycle):
#9902 for 208 V, l-phase (mdls A2, C3, D3 only),
#9903 for 208 V, 3-phase (mdls C3, C6, D3, D6 only),
#9904 for 230 V, l-phase (mdls A2, C3, D3 only),
#9905 for 230 V, 3-phase (mdls C3, C6, D3, D6 only).
Note: When options are available, use ·of 3-phase power is recommended. This would eliminate the need for rewiring for
system expansion to models C6 or D6.
2) Power: Specify one--#9490 for 5010 A and B models ...
#9491 for 5010 E models.
3) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, #9045
for gray, or #9046 for white.
4) Storage Power Addition (#7401) required for systems with
more than 8K of storage (5010 A and B models only) ... see
"Special Features."
5) Proposal of all 5026 Enclosures must be in accordance with
procedures outlined at the end of this section.
A Power Failure Detect feature (#5731) provides an early indication of imminent power failure so that the program can bring the
system to an orderly halt. When power is restored, the auto
restart function of the system can provide automatic program
load from either the Operator Station or host teleprocessing link.
The processor console switch must be appropriately set.
6) Kickstrips: #9431, if needed. When kickstrips are installed,
the open area underneath the machine is enclosed. This may be
inconvenient for the operator or for signal wiring. Use of kickstrips is recommended only when the physical appearance of the
system is of prime importance.
A thermal detector in the enclosure generates a warning interrupt if the internal temperature of the enclosure rises above a
specified operating level. The thermal detector causes a power
shutdown after the warning signal is generated. The time between the thermal interrupt and the power shutdown could be
used by the program to cause an orderly halt of the operation.
Model Changes: Changes from C3 to C6 and from D3 to D6 are
field installable. No other model changes can be made.
Prerequisite: Models D3 and D6 require a Dx Enclosure Attachment (#3715) feature in models C3 and C6 enclosures.
Module Locations:
Special Features
Ox ENCLOSURE ATTACHMENT (#3715): [Mdls C3 and C6
only] This feature provides for the connection of the Enclosure
models D3 or D6 to Enclosure models C3 or C6. Maximum: One
#3715 per system. Field Installation: Yes.
INTERNAL AIR ISOLATION 3 (#4621): (not with 5998-TO 1)
[Mdls C3 and D3 only] This feature seals the model C3 or D3
enclosures and provides an air-to-air heat exchanger for dissipation of the internal heat. An activated carbon filtration system
filters the internal air. The feature isolates the inside air from the
outside and is used in severe industrial environments where
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-----_.----=
=
=---=
- ... ----..,---
M5026.2
-~-~
General Systems Division-Machines
gaseous contaminants harmful to electronic circuitry exist.
Limitations: Proposals are not to recommend the tAl feature
unless the FE Installation Planni'ng' Representative has determined that the feature, is required, or the internal system detector indicates measures are necessary to protect an installed
system. Maximum: One per C3 or 03 enclosure. Field
Installation: Yes.
INTERNAL AIR ISOLATION 6 (1#4622): (not with 5998-TO 1)
[Mdls C6 and 06 only] This feature is identical to #4621 and is
provided for model C6 or 06 enclosures. Maximum: One per
C6 or 06 enclosure. Field Installation: Yes.
POWER FAILURE DETECT (115731): Provides a signal to the
system when the input AC voltage falls below a safe level. This
signal is used by the program to bring the system to an orderly
halt. This feature also provides auto restart which can automatically restart system power when input AC power is restored.
Maximum: One per enclosure. Field Installation: Yes.
STORAGE POWER ,ADDITION (111401): [Mdls A2, C3 and C6
only] Provides a power supply for the 5010 Processor Module
models A and B only, with storage in excess of 8K words.
Maximum: One per system. Field Installation: Yes.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
April 78,
---.- -= -
------ General Systems Division-Machines
= -=-----=
----- ---.5028 OPERATOR STATION
Purpose: To provide an operator and computer input/output
device for Systeni/7.
HighliJlhts: The 5~8 Operator Sta~ion provides a keyboard,
printer, paper tape punch, and paper tape reader. It is attached
via a multi-wire cable to a System/7 Processor Module. The
printer, paper tape reader, and paper tape punch operate at a
speed of 10 characters per second. Transmission code is 7 level
ASCII, with the 8th level for "even parity." The paper tape reader and punch can also read and punch 8-bit binary code without
parity. The recording tape is one inch wide and may be paper
(Part No.s 304469 or 426362), or lubricated, non-metallic plastic. A printing line is 72 characters with 6 lines per inch. Only
single part paper may be used for printing.
LOCAL REMOTE: Switches provide for offline and online operations. The 5028 is used for program loading, data
input/output, and paper tape preparation.
The 5028 Operator Station must be available for system maintenance in ali configurations. An Operator Station may be shared
among several System/7s, except those with 5998-TO 1. The
customer must attach the Operator Station to the system requiring maintenance prior to the arrival of a customer engineer.
Delays due to the relocation of an Operator Station from one
system to another may result in extended down time. Before
ordering a system without an Operator Station, the customer
must realize the above condition as well as the procedure for
diconnecting an Operator Station which requires these steps:
stop system; power off Operator Station; disconnect Operator
Station; start system.
Prerequisite: 5010 Processor Module.
System/7 Summary: GA34-0002
Input Power: 115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 cycle.
Supplies: A black ribbon, I BM Part No. 1136260 or equivalent,
is required.
Specify:
(1) Voltage: (AC 60Hz) #9901 115V, 1-phase.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M5028.1
April 78
--......
-= -=---=
-- -- -
= _----
M5029;1
General Systems Division-Machines
April 78
-~-.-
5029 MODEL 1 ATTACHMENT ACCESSORIES (Purchase
Only) FOR SYSTEM/7
Purpose: 5029 mdl 1 is an accessory control number used for
ordering components and Termination Cards for connection of
customer signal wires to the System/7 interface. 5029 is not a
it is entered in the machine field.
machine in itself;
Specify 5029 in -the machine field only once per system for all
Termination Cards and components. Features on 5029 cannot
be ordered
Accessories in the 5029 are for purchase
only and no maintenance service is available. Normal parts
warranty of 3 months applies to the accessories.
Highlights: 5029 Attachment Accessories provide a number of
cards and components used for connection of customer signals
to System/7 as well as conditioning and filtering of the signals.
Standard circuits are offered for each type of sensor I/O point.
Special circuits can be constructed by the customer on .the
Custom Cards. Termination Cards provide a screw-down terminal for connection of customer wires. This feature offers several
advantages, such as (a) the customer can wire his signals to the
cards prior to system arrival at the site, thereby reducing the
installation time; (b) when a system is upgraded, rewiring is
merely a matter of unplugging the cards from the old module
and plugging them into the new module; (c) sensor-based points
may be quickly disconnected for trouble shooting.
System/7 Summary: GA34-0002.
Accessories:
Table 1, below, shows a summary of the requirements for the
Attachment Accessories.
AI Custom (#1110): This card contains screw terminals for
customer - connection of four analog input signals to
Multiplexer/MR16 (#5247 in 5014), Multiplexer/MD16 (#5245
in 5014), Multiplexer/MR4 (#5246 in 5012)' Multiplexer/MS16
(#5249 in 5014), or Multiplexer/MS4 (#5248 in 5012). Solder
terminals are provided for the customer addition of networks to
each point to complete the connection. This card should be
used where the customer desires to construct analog input
networks of his own design. Limitation: Use of this card can
affect accuracy and repeatability of the analog to digital conversion of analog signals connected to it.
AI/MR Filter (#1113): This card contains filter circuits and
screw terminals for customer connection of four analog input
to
Multiplexer/MR16
(#5247
in
5014),
signals
Multiplexer/MD16 (#5245 in 5014), or Multiplexer/MR4 (#5246
in 5012). Current resistors can be added to the terminals. No
provision is made to add other components.
AI/MR RBT/Filter (#1114): This card contains one resistance
bulb thermometer circuit plus three filter circuits for customer
connection of three analog input signals to Multiplexer/MRl6
(#5247 in 5014), Multiplexer/MD16 (#5245 in 5014), or
Multiplexer/MR4 (#5246 in 5012). The resistenace bulb thermometer circuit output can be used to calculate a reference
junction temperature. Current resistors cannot be added to the
terminals. No provision is made to add components.
Maximum:
32
per
Temperature
Reference
Attach.
Prerequisite: Temperature Reference Attach (#7830 in 5012 or
5014).
AI/MS Connector (#1122): This card contains circuits and
screw terminals for customer connection of four analog input
signals
to
Multiplexer/MS16
(#5249
in
5014)
or
Multiplexer/IV!S4 (#5248 in 5012). No filter circuits are provid-
ed. Current resistors can be added to the terminals. No provision is made to add other components. Limitation: Use of this
card can affect accuracy and repeatability of the analog to digital
conversion of analog signals connected to it.
AI/MS Non-Polarized Filter (#1121): This card contains filter
circuits and screw terminals for customer connection of four
analog input signals to Multiplexer/MSl6 (#5249 in 5014) or
Multiplexer/MS4 (#5248 in 5012). The filter circuit is a nonpolarized network; can accept both positive and negative signals. Current resistors can be added to the terminals. No provision is made to add other components.
AI/MS Polarized Filter (#1124): This card is identical to the
AI/MS Non-Polarized Filter (#1121), except the filter circuit is
polarized; accepts only a single polarity signal.
AI/MS RBT/Non-Polarized Filter (#1123): This card contains
one resistance bulb thermometer circuit plus three filter circuits
for customer connection of three analog input signals to
Multiplexer/MS16 (#5249 in 5014) or Multiplexer/MS4 (#5248 .
in 5012). The resistance. bulb thermometer circuit output can be
used to calculate a reference junction temperature. The filter
circuit is a non-polarized network; can accept both positive and
negative signals. Current resistors cannot be added to the terminals. No provision is made to add other components.
Maximum:
32
per
Temperature
Reference
Attach.
Prerequisite: Temperature Reference Attach (#7830 in 5012 or
5014).
Capacitor Non-Polarized 10UF (#1570): A special capacitor
used to construct the network on the AI/MS Non-Polarized
Filter (#1121) termination card. This 10 microfarad, 5 volt, nonpolarized capacitor has very low dielectric absorption, low leakage, and small physical size.
Connector, 3-Pin (#1240): This cable plug is used to connect
the customer analog output signal wires to the analog output
points on the 5012. One is required for each Analog Output
Point (#1246 in 5012). Installation of wires on the connector iSr-a
customer responsibility.
Connector, 4-Pin (#8185): This plug is used to connect the
2790 loop transmission lines to the 2790 Control (#8195) in the
5012. One is required for the 2790 Control (#8195 in 5012).
This plug is also used to connect to the external synchronization
control on the 5012 and 5014. One is required for each 5014
and one for each 5012 with Analog Input Control MOD B
(#1232) or Analog Input Control MOD C (#1213). Installation of
wires on the connector is a customer responsibility.
Current Resistor 4-20 MA (#1670): This precision resistor can
be connected across analog input terminals to act as a current
shunt. It converts 4 to 20 milliamperes to 128 to 640 millivolts.
Limitation: Cannot be used on analog input termination cards
AI/MR RBT /Filter (#1114) or AI/MS RBT /Non-Polarized Filter
(#1123).
Current Resistor 10-50 MA (#1671): This precision resistor can
be connected across analog input terminals to act as a current
shunt. It converts 10 to 50 milliamperes to 128 to 640 millivolts.
Limitation: Cannot be used on analog input termination cards
AI/MR RBT /Filter (#1-114) or AI/MS RBT /Non-Polarized Filter
(#1123).
01 Contact Sense (#3281): This card contains contact sensing
circuits and screw terminals for customer connection of eight
digital input signals to Digital Input Group (#3289 in 5012 or
5013) or Process Interrupt (#5710 in 5012 or 5013). One side of
each contact sense point is connected to a common 48 volts DC
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---,--,---
----_.=
=
- -- - "=--==
----
M5029.2
April 78
General ,Systems Division-Machines
Voltage Check Card (,1184): This card provides seven voltage
outputs of either polarity suitable for use as an analog input
checking source. The card can be plugged into a specific socket
and wired to one analog input point at a time to be used, as a
program addressable voltage check source. The following voltages are provided: 4 volts, 512 millivolts; 128 millivolts, 64 millivolts, 32 millivolts, 15 millivol., and 5 millivolts.
to provide contact sensing capability. No provision is made to
add components.
DI Contact Sense Non-Isolated UI3280): This card contains
contact sensing circuits and screw terminals for customer connection of eight digital input signals to Digital Input NonIsolated (#3292) in the 5012 or 5013. One side of each contact
sense point is connected to a common 48 volt DC to provide
contact sensing capability. No provision is made to add components.
Accessories
Feature
01 Custom (13282): This card contains screw terminals for
customer connection of eight digital input signals to Digital Input
Group (13289 in 5012 or 5013), Digital Input Non-Insolated
(13292 in 5012 or 5013), or Process Interrupt (15710 in 5012 or
5013). Solder terminals are provided for th~ customer addition
of networks to each point to complete the connection. This card
should be used where the customer desires to use digital input
networkS of his own design.
AI Custom
AI/MR Filter
AI/MR RBT/Filter
AI/MS Connector
AI/MS Non-Polarized Filter
AI/MS Polarized Filter
AI/MS RBT/Non-Polarized Filter
Capacitor Non-Polarized 10 UF
Connector, 3-Pin
Connector, 4-Pin
,Current Resistor 4-20 MA
Current Resistor 10-50 MA
01 Contact Sense
01 Contact Sense Non-Isolated
01 Custom
01 Voltage Sense
DO Connector
DO Custom
Voltage Check Card
DI Voltage Sense (13283): This card contains circuits and
screw terminals for customer connection of eight digital input
signals to Digital Input Group (#3289 in 5012 or 5013) or Process Interrupt (#5710 in 5012 or 5013). No provision is made to
add components on this card.
DO Connector (113410): This card contains screw terminals for
direct customer connection of eight digital output signals to DO
low Power Group (#3421 in 5012 or 5013)' DO Medium Power
Group (#3422 in 5012 or 5013), DO Medium Power NonIsolated (#3424 in 5012 or 5013), or DO Contact Group (13420
in 5012 or 5013). No provision is made to add components.
#1110
1113
1114
1122
1121
1124
1123
1570
1240
8185
1670
1671
3281
3280
3282
3283
3410
3430
1184
DO Custom (#3430): This card contains screw terminals for
customer connection of eight digital output signals to DO low
Power Group (#3421 in 5012 or 5013) or DO Medium Power
Group (#3422 in 5012 or 5013), DO Medium Power NonIsolated (13424 in 5012 or 5013), or DO Contact Group (13420
in 5012 or 5013). Solder terminals are provided for the customer
'
addition of networks to each point.
Sensor Input/Output Features
External 14>
Current' R.sistor 4- 20 MA ('II 1670)
Current Resistor 10-50 MA (#1671)
Total Maximum Resistors per AI Group
01 Contact Sense (i/ 328))
"
(Used with Temperature Reference Attachment)
4
4
I
I
I
I
L
I
I
1
I
I
J
I
(Used with Temperature Reference Attachment)
4
16
16
16
4
16
16
1(;
4
16
16
16
01 Contact Sense Non·lsolated ('*3280)
01 Voltage Sense (#3283)
01 Custom HIi3282)
Totll Maximum Card. oer 01 GrouD
DO Connector 1~3410)
oOCustom ('*3430)
Total Maximum Card. per DO Group
Connector. 3 Pin
('II 1240)
I Connector. 4 Pin
(#811i5)
loer
~int
~:~:~O
AI Voltage Check Card (If' 1184) is available to check AI - maximum,one pe,5012 with t12'~ or'*1232; four per 5014.
Capacitor Non·Polarized 10 UF (#1570) ia ..ailable to construct custom networks.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
1 per
LOOD
------ -----=---=
M5100.1
.-
- -. - ---
Nov 78
General Systems Division-Machines
IBM 5100 PORTABLE COMPUTER
Purpose: The IBM 5100 Portable Computer is a desk top,
interactive computer designed primarily for the professional
problem solver.
Model
Language
Main Storage (Bytes)
A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
B3
B4
C1
C2
C3
C4
APL
APL
APL
APL
BASIC
BASIC
BASIC
BASIC
APL and
APL and
APL and
APL and
16,384
32,768
49,152
65,536
16,384
32,768
49,152
65,536
16,384
32,768
49,152
65,536
BASIC
BASIC
BASIC
BASIC
Tape Cartridge: Is a removable media for data and program
storage. Provides up to 204K bytes on 300 feet of 1/4" tape.
Tape speed is 40 inches/second yielding read rate of 2,850
bytes/ second and write/ check rate of 950 bytes/ second.
Interactive Languages: Are implemented in three options
within Read-Only Storage (ROS): APL, BASIC and a combined
APL/BASIC. With a combination machine the language is
selectable with a switch and a combined APL/BASIC keyboard
is provided.
Accessories
Tape Cartridges: Tape cartridges for the IBM 5100 or 5106
are available in packages of five from the IBM IRD Branch
Office.
Carrying Case: Soft, leather-like case provides environmental
protection plus hand and should straps to facilitate carrying.
Order Feature Number 1501 on AAS.
Specify
Model Upgrades: Field Insta"able.
There are no specify requirements. The machine comes with a
6 foot power cable. Voltage is 115V, AC, 1 Phase, 60 Hz,
non-lock plug. Color is pebble gray. The modem cable for the
communications feature and cables for the Serial I/O Interface
feature are 6 feet.
Highlights:
User-oriented, problem solving tool
Built-in interactive langudge-APL or BASIC or both
Easy-to-use keyboard for programs and data
CRT display screen
Tape cartridge for data and program storage
Communications
capability-2741
compatability
start/ stop mode
Serial I/O Adapter-EIA Standard RS-232-C Interface
in
Features
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor (MOSFET)
main storage ... 530 nanosecond main storage cycle time ...
main storage available in 16, 32, 48 or 64K bytes (see nate
below) ... internal parity che~king ... an adapter for black and
white TV monitors ... portable ... threaded inserts on the bottom so that it can be secured to a table or desk ... a" features
and model upgrades are field installable. Note: The language
interpreters utilize part of main storage which is not available to
the user. With BASIC this amounts to 4,400 bytes and with
APL 6,700 bytes.
Keyboard: Has familiar alphameric layout plus a numeric pad.
Four arithmetic operator keys located to right of numeric pad
provide a calculator function. Key tops indicate special characters for APL and/or BASIC, depending on model. The top row
of typewriter keys provide 14 machine commands, when depressed with the COMMAND key. With a BASIC machine, the
10-key pad keys can be programmed by the user to perform
special functions. These are activated by the COMMAND key.
Also on a BASIC machine, frequently used BASIC statement
keywords are printed on the front of the keys. The user may
then enter a statement keyword, such as GOTO or PRINT, by
pressing the COMMAND key with the appropriate word key.
The primary purpose of the use of the COMMAND key in the
above is to make it easier and faster to use the 5100.
Display Screen: Is used to display keyed input, provide user
guidance and display output. Up to 1,024 characters can be
displayed ... 16 lines of 64 characters each. qata is written at
the bottom ·of the screen only, then scrolled up. User may
select black characters on white background, or vice versa. Via
switch, user may separate and display either left or right 32
positions of line, 'or all 64.
Special Features
Expansion Feature (#1524): A prerequisite for attachment of
the Communications Adapter (#1525) or the Serial I/O Adapter
feature (#6301). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Communications Adapter (#1525): Provides the IBM 5100
with the capability to appear as an IBM 2741 (using EBCD or
correspondence notation) to a rerTlote system. The customer
may select either 134.5 bps or 300 bps start/ stop transmission
speeds, depending upon remote system. Operation wi" be over
appropriate B1, B2, C1, C2 and D1 facilities. Line connection is
through a customer-supplied modem.
The IBM 5100 is supported in stop/start mode connected to a
System/370 via an Integrated Communications Adapter or a
3704/3705 Communications Controller with the Emulation
Program (EP /VS) or the Network Control Program (NCP /VS).
See M2700 pages for details concerning the facilities and
prerequisites on these units.
When in communications mode the 5100 is supported as a
2741 by the following:
SCP
OS/VS1
OS/VS2
DOS/VS
VM/370
Options
TP Access Methods
TSO
BTAM, TCAM or VTAM
BTAM, TCAM or VTAM
BTAM or VTAM
In the communications mode, the IBM 5100 keyboard will be
used in the same way as a 2741 keyboard. Output will be
displayed on the CRT and may be printed on the optional printer. The user may also transmit data stored on the tape cartridge to the remote computer, and receive data from the remote system on the cartridge.
While in. the communications mode the IBM 5100 is a dedicated terminal device. Therefore, interaction with the APL or
BASIC interpreters takes place only after the session is completed.
Maximum:
One.
Field
Installation:
Yes.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- -----.-=- -=---==
- - General Systems Division-Machines
- -----_
..
- -=
_--...
_
M5100.2
Nov 78
t'
Prerequisites: A customer-supplied modem meeting EIA
RS-232C specifications and Expansion Feature (#1524).
3. For supporting his I/O device with APL or BASIC programs.
Additional Communications Information
4. For determining program storage
I.
References
1. See M2700 pages for additional information concerning communication facilities, machine attachment
requirements, operating capabilities and customer
responsibilities.
2. Refer to the
Handbook
IBM
U.S.
Data
Communications
3. Refer to IBM 5100 Preinstallation Planning Guide,
GA21-9219, for physical installation requirements.
II.
Notes
1. For questions regarding emulation of 2741 features
and/ or RPQs, contact your regional GSC. The functions df Receive Interrupt and Transmit Interrupt features on the 2741 are standard with the 5100 Communications Adapter, but require full-duplex modems.
2. A 6-foot modem cable is automatically provided with
this feature.
III.
Customer Responsibilities
1. The customer must be advised, in writing, of certain
responsibilities related to the installation and maintenance of common carrier facilities/ services as well as
the IBM equipment. For further information see
M2700 pages
External I/O Adapter (#3601): A prerequisite for attachment
of either the 5103 Printer or 5106 Auxiliary Tape Unit. A single
I/O port is available; when both devices are attached, the
Printer is attached to the Auxiliary Tape Unit which is then
attached to the IBM 5100. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
Serial I/O Adapter (#6301): Provides the IBM 5100 with the
capability to attach anyone of a variety of peripherals which
satisfy EIA Standard RS-232-C specifications. The customer
may select 5, 6, 7 or 8 bit code and data rates from 20 to 9600
bps (2400 maximum for 5 bit). Interaction with an attached
device is through the APL or BASIC languages. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Expansion
Feature (#1524).
Additional Serial I/O Adapter Information
I. References
Refer to the IBM 5100 Serial I/O Adapter Face
Sheet-GA21-9241 for information concerning attachment
requirements for the 5100 Serial I/O Adapter.
II. Customer Responsibilities
The customer must be advised, in writing, that he is responsible:
1. To attach a device which meets the defined EIA Standard RS-232-C specifications, interface type D.
2. To assure with the device manufacturer that time between data transfers is sufficient for his application.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
requirement~ ..
---=-- General Systems Division-Machines
=---=
-------
M5103.1
- -=
Nov 78
5103 PRINTER
Specify
Purpose: Provides hard-copy output for the IBM 5100 and the
IBM 5110 C9mputer System.
There are no specify features for the 5103 Printer. Power is
supplied by a 6-foot cable. Voltage is 115V, AC, 1-Phase, 60
Hz, non-lock plug. Attachment to the Computer, Auxiliary Tape
Unit, or 5114 Diskette Unit is via a 4-foot cable. The color is
pebble gray for Models 1 and 2, and pearl white for Models 11
and 12.
Model 1
80 CPS Maximum Bidirectional Printer 5100 Portable ComfJuter
Model 2
120 CPS Maximum Bidirectional Printer 5100
Portable Computer
Model 11
80 CPS Maximum Bidirectional Printer for use
with the IBM b "110 Computer System
Model 12
120 CPS Maximum Bidirectional Printer for use
with the IBM 5110 Computer System
Accessories
Forms Stand: Permits feed of continuous forms from the
carton and provides for forms stacking after printing. This
accessory is a one shelf forms stand.
Type
Feature
5103
4450
Model Change Considerations: The upgrade purchase price
for model changes may be greater than the purchase price
differentials. The customer should carefully evaluate his future
requirements prior to purchasing a system.
Highlights: Prints serially in both left-to-right and right-to-Ieft
directions. The maximum print line is 132 print positions at 10
characters/inch. Line spacing is at six lines/inch. All APL and
BASIC special characters can be printed.
The 5103 Models 11 and 12 allow the IBM 5110 System to
overlap printing with processing functions. The Models 11 and
12 also support both upper and lower case character printing.
The 5103 is packaged in its own table-top covers, measuring
24" x 141/2" x 12" It weighs 55 pounds. The standard forms
tractor allows multi-part, fan-folded paper. Overall forms
width ranges from 3 1/2" to 15". Continuous forms fold-tofold length may vary from 3" to 14". Up to six-part forms can
be printed with a maximum thickness of .018". Five and sixpart forms should be tried for satisfactory feeding, registration
and print quality. Forms that exceed .018" thickness can create printer feeding registration and print quality problems. Card
stock continuous forms are not recommended. Matrix characters are formed by 8 vertical wires printing dots in up to 4 of 7
possible horizontal positions. Refer to SRL GA24-3488 for
forms design considerations ond limitations.
Prerequisites: 5103 Models 1 and 2 only: External I/O
ter (#3601) on IBM 5100.
Adap~
5103 Model 2 only. EC 829572 on IBM 5100. IBM 5100's
shipped after November 12, 1976 will incorporate EC 829572
while those shipped prior to the date must be field upgraded.
Supplies:
A
black
ribbon,
IBM
part
number
1136653
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------= -------= ==--=9_
___
------
M5106.1
General Systems Division-Machines
5106 AUXILIARY TAPE UNIT
Purpose: Provides a second tape cartridge I/O unit for the
IBM 5100 Portable Computer and the IBM 5110 Computer.
Model 1
Attaches to IBM 5100 Portable Computer
Model 11
Attaches to IBM 5110 Computer, Model1s
Model Upgrades: Field Instal/able
Highlights: Attractive for the user with extensive tape data
storage requirements.
Housed in its own covers, the 5106 measures 12 1/4" x 10" x
7 1 /4" and weighs 20 pounds. It's characteristics are the
same as those of the inboard unit provided with the IBM 5100
and the IBM 5110. It is cable-connected to both the IBM 5100
and the IBM 5110.
Prerequisites: IBM 5100 requires External I/O Adapter
(#3601). None for attachment to the IBM 5110.
Accessories
Tape Cartridges: A tape cartridge is required and is available
in packages
Specify
There are no specify features for the 5106 Auxiliary Tape Unit.
Power is supplied by a 6-foot cable. Voltage is 115V, AC,
1-Phase, 60 Hz, non-lock plug. Attachment to the Portable
Computer is via a 2-foot cable. The color is pebble gray for
Model 1 and pearl white for Model 11.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Nov 78
---::-- -=-=?.....-:: General Systems Division-Machines,
- ---
-
M5110.1
Nov 78
-~-.-
IBM 5110 ,cOMPUTER
CRT display screen
Purpose: Designed to address a wide variety of commercial
and problem solving applications in both the small and large
business.
Optional communications adapters with Asynchronous or
Binary Synchronous
The IBM 5110 is offered in two Model Groups. Models A11
through C14 include a standard inboard tape cartridge unit and
can also attach a 5106 Auxiliary Tape Cartridge Unit and the
5111:- Diskette Unit. These are called the Model 1s. Models
A21 through C24 do not inClude the inboard or auxiliary tape
cartridge unit and are designed to attach the 5114 Diskette
Unit as the storage media. lnese are called the Model 2s. All
other IBM 5110 features pertain to all models within configuration constraints.
Models A21 through C24 can be field upgraded to Model 1s to
provide for the inboard tape cartridge unit and the attachment
of 5106 Auxiliary Tape Cartridge Unit.
Configuration Planning Guidelines
•
•
•
Tape Media only System-Use IBM 5110 Model 1
Diskette Media only System-Use IBM 5110 Model 2
Tape and Diskette Media System-Use IBM 5110 Model 1
Model
Language
Main Storage
(Bytes)
Inboard
Tape
A11
A12
A13
A14
B11
B12
B13
B14
C11
C12
C13
C14
A21
A22
A23
A24
B21
B22
823
B24
C21
C22
C23
C24
APL
APL
APL
APL
BASIC
BASIC
BASIC
BASIC
APL and
APL and
APL and
APL and
APL
APL
APL
APL
BASIC
BASIC
BASIC
BASIC
APL and
APL and
APL and
APL and
16,384
32,768
49,152
65,536
16,384
32,768
49,152
65,536
16,384
32,768
49,152
65,536
16.384
32.768
49,152
65,536
16,384
32,768
49,152
65,536
16,384
32,768
49,152
65,536
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
...:~
BASIC
BASIC
BASIC
BASIC
BASIC
BASIC
BASIC
BASIC
Model Upgrades: Field Installable
Model Change Considerations
1. The upgrade purchase price for model changes may be
greater than the purcnase price differentials. The customer
should carefully evaluate his future requirements prior to
purchasing a system.
2. Replacea parts from any model change become the property
of IBM.
Highlights
User-oriented data processing
Built-in high level interactive languages-APL or BASIC or
both
Optional I/O adapters: either Serial via EIA standard RS232-C, or Parallel Based on IEEE-488-1975
Optional Diskette Sort Feature
Optional Audible Alarm
Features
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor (MOSFET)
main storage ... 530 nanosecond main storage cycle time ...
main storage available in 16K 32K, 48K or 64K bytes (see note
below) ... internal parity checking ... an adapter for black and
white TV monitors '" portable ... threaded inserts on the botton
so that it can be secured to a table or desk ... all features and
model upgrades are field installable.
Note: The language interpreters utilize part of main storage
which is not available to the user. With BA.SIC this amounts to
4,624 bytes and 6,915 bytes with APL.
Keyboard: has familiar typewriter layout plus a numeric pad.
Four arithmetic operator keys located to right of numeric pad
provide a calculator function. Key tops indicate special characters for APL and/or BASIC, depending on model. The top row
of typewriter keys ,provides 14 machine commands. when
depressed with the COMMAND key. With a BASIC machine.
the keys on the 10-key pad can be programmed by the user to
perform special functions. These are activated by the COMMAND key. Frequently used APL and/or BASIC statements
are printed on the front of the keys. The user may then enter a
statement keyword, such as GOTO or PRI NT. by pressing the
COM MAN D key and the appropriate word key, The primary
purpose of the use of the COMMAND key is to make it easier
and faster to use the IBM 5110.
Display Screen: is used to display keyed input, provid~ user
guidance and display output. Up to 1,024 characters can be
displayed ... 16 lines of 64-characters each. Under program
control the user is permitted full screen management and display of upper/lower case characters. The user may select
black characters on white background, or vice versa.
Tape Cartridge: is a removable media for data and program
storage on the IBM 5110 Model1s. Provides up to 204K bytes
on 300 feet of 1/4 inch tape. Tape speed is 40 inches/ second
yielding read rate of 2,850 bytes/ second and write/ check rate
of 950 bytes/ second.
Interactive Languages: are implemented in three options
within Read Only Storage (ROS): APL, BASIC and a combined
APL/BASIC. With a combination machine the language is
selectable with a switch and a combined APL/BASIC keyboard
is provided.
Input/Output Operations: provide for update in place and
Record I/O with tape and diskette.
Customer Support Functions: are distributed with the IBM
5110 on diskette or tape cartridge as appropriatu, The functions provided include a relocatable loader, diskette initialize.
diskette compress, tape-to-tape copy, tape-to-diskette copy,
tape header recovery, tape data recovery, diskette-to-tape
copy, diskette-to-diskette copy, diskette recovery, and label
display.
Easy-to-use, keyboard for programs and data
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
_._= :..:
---?-== General Systems Division-Machines
- - ------
-
_______
l'
M5110.2
Nov?8
_
Specify
Accessories
The IBM 5110 comes with a 6 foot power cable. Voltage is
115V, AC, 1 Phase, 60 Hz, non-lock plug. Color is pearl white
with raven black highlights. The modem cable for the Asynchronous Communications Feature and cables for the Serial I/O
Feature are 6 feet.
Tape Cartridges: Tape Cartridges for the IBM 5110 or 5106
are available in packages
IBM 5110 ConfigUration Considerations
Model 1
Most configurations of I/O and optional features are possible,
but due to power and packaging considerations, some configurations are not available.
With the IBM 5110 Model 1s, only the following storage media
configurations are possible:
Carrying Case: Soft, leather-like case provides environmental
protection plus hand and shoulder straps to facilitate carrying.
Parallel I/O Cables: Cables to attach peripheral devices to
the IBM 5110 computer via the Parallel I/O Adapter may be
purchased from IBM or from a customer selected source ...
**See IBM 5110 General Information and Physical Planning
Manual, GA21-9300 for cable and connector specifications.
(Note: Maximum interconnecting device cabling as specified in
IEEE 488-1975 standard is 20 meters.)
1. One 5106 Auxiliary Tape Unit or
2. One 5105 Auxiliary Tape Unit and one 5114 Diskette Unit or
3. One or two 5114 Diskette Units
The IBM 5110 Model 2s can attach one or two 5114 Diskette
Units as storage media and cannot attach the 5106 Auxiliary
Tape Unit.
A maximum of two special features from the following list may
be installed on any model of the IBM 5110:
•
•
•
•
1525 Asynchronous Communications Adapter
5825 Parallel I/O Adapter
6301 Serial I/O Adapter
BSCA Modem attachment options-one of the following:
3701 EIA/CCITT Interface
5650 or 5651 DDS Adapter
5500 or 5501 1200 BPS Integrated Modems
*5508 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (SNBU/ AA)
*Note: If #5508 (SNBU/ AA) is selected as the BSCA modem none of the other special features \#1525, #5825, or
#6301) may be selected.
Special Features
Expansion Features (#1524): A prerequisite for attachment
of the Asynchronous Communications (#1525) or the Serial
I/O Feature (#6301). Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes.
Binary Synchronous Communications (#2074): In conjunction with APL or BASIC program control, this feature permits
the IBM 5110 to function on a switched, leased or private
communications ~ine as a processor terminal emulating 3741
line protocol with:
A System/3 equipped with BSCA (#2074 or #2084) or
BSCC (#2094)
A System/32 equipped with BSCA (#2074)
A System/34 equipped with Communications Adapter
(#2500 or #3500)
An IBM 5110 equipped with BSCA (#2074)
A 3741 Model 2 or 4
Or emulating 2770 line protocol with:
If BSCA (#2074) is used in conjunction with APL, a 32K minimum IBM 5110 is required.
In addition to the above considerations, when planning an IBM
5110 configuration for a Model 1 with BSCA (#2074) and
without a 5114, the following chart must be used. Valid configurations are those with options that do not exceed the
maximum value of 18 for Model 1s, with BSCA (#2074) and
without a 5114.
Memory
Options
Value
48K
64K
4
8
I/O Devices
5103 Printer
5106 Auxiliary Tape Unit
7
4
Features
#1524 Expansion Feature
#5825 Parallel I/O Adapter Feature
#5650, 5651 Data-Phone* Digital Data
Service Adapter
#3200 Diskette Sort/ Feature
3
2
A System/370 (which is supported by OS/VS-1 or OS/VS2 BTAM or TCAM; DOS/VS BTAM via an Integrated Communications Adapter, or a 3704/3705 Communications
Controller with NCP or EP, any of which are equipped with
a binary synchronous adapter and appropriate sub features).
This feature will operate with any of the above systems capable
of communicating at the following nominal transmission rates
on a point-to-point (non-switched) data link: 1200/600, 2000,
2400, 4800 BPS. See M2700 pages for information on communications facilities. The IBM 5110 may also operate as a
tributary station residing on a multipoint (leased or private)
communications line as a compatible member of the I BM family
of BSC terminals in conjunction with a System/370 Models
115 through 195 control station at transmission rates of 1200
to 4800 BPS.
This feature will operate in half-duplex mode over dial
(switched network) facilities, and in half-duplex mode over
leased (or equivalent private) communications lines which may
be half or full duplex facilities.
Operation of this feature on the IBM 5110 will be overlapped
with printer operation at all rates including 4800 BPS.
*.Registered Trademark of the American Telephone & Telegraph Co.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---=--==
General Systems Division-Machines
-- --- -- ----II--
-=
M5110.3
Nov 78
'
~
,BSC units at each termination of a data link to which the IBM
5110 is attached must be set to operate at the same transmission rate and to use the sam~ transmission code.
This feature supports, as a basic capability, the transmission
and reception of blocked records. Switched network versions
include the support of Manual Dial and Manual or Auto Answer
(where the attached modem supports this capability). The
feature may be configured to operate with the EBCDIC transmission code or EBCDIC transparency code.
The Internal Clock will generate synchronizing and timing signalsfor BSCA operation when they are not provided by the
attached modem. The decision to use, or not use, the internal
clock is made at Configuration time. When the internal clock is
used, all other terminals attached to the same data link must
also be equipped with similar internal clocking' capability.
Transmission rates of 600 or 1200 BPS are selectable at co-'
nfiguration time and initialization time.
One of the IBM modems, 3872 Model l' (2400 BPS) or 3874
Model 1 (4800 BPS), may be attached to the BSCA (#2074) of
the IBM 5110. For more information on the capabilities of
these modems refer to M3872 and M3874 of the sales pages.
Additional Information
Communications facilities attachments for the IBM 5110 BSCA
are designed to operate on transmission facilities such as:
1. Common Carrier leased telephone line services (voice
grade).
a. AT & T or Western Union Class 3002 (to 600 BPS)
b. AT & T or Western Unron Class 3002 with C1 conditioning (to 4800 BPS)
2. Private (customer owned) communications facilities equivalent to the above common carrier facilities.
3. Voice Grade (common carrier or private) lines supporting a
4800 BPS transmission rate. Channel requirements may
vary according to the type of data set selected. The data set
manufacturer should be consulted by the customer for this
information.
4. Common carrier switched network telephone (Voice Grade)
service at 600, 1200, 2400, or 4800 BPS.
Reference-See M2700 pages for additional information concerning modems, communications facilities, machine attachment requirements, terminal intermix, operating capabilities and
customer responsibilities.
For speed selection when using the Data-Phone* Digital Service Adapter with BSCA, specify:
DDSA (#5650,5651) transmission speed
#9822 for 2400 BPS
*Registered Trademark of the American Telephone & Telegraph Co.
,Customer Responsibilities The customer must be advised that:
1. He is responsible for making arrangements for installation,
pricing, charges if the data communication facility and attachment of selected data sets.
2. Toll charges, ·if required for installation and/ or maintenance
of BSCA. are to be paid by the customer.
3. The IBM marketing representatives musthave the customer
obtain a firm installation. date for transmission, services
(including modems) before the order, BSCA (#2074), can be
confirmed. For further information refer to "Teleprocessing
Systems" in the General Information section and M2700
pages.
Configuration options are as follows:
Leased point-to-point, Switched point-to-point, multipoint
Internal clock, modem clock
Integrated Modem, Data-Phone* Digital Service Adapter, EIA
(Electronic Industries Assn) RS-232'-C, and CCITT, V.24 and
V.28 interface
Full speed, half speed line rate
Full-duplex, Half-duplex
Use Switched Network Backup (SNBU). no SNBU
Use 202 mode-Yes/No
Use Auto Answer-Yes/No
Transparent Mode-Yes/No
Error Threshold (1 :8, 1 :4, 1 :2, 1 :1,2:1,4:1, 8:1)
Transmit/ Receive
Protocol Emulation 2770/3741
Blank Truncation-Yes/ No
ENQ maximum count
NAK maximum count
IBM 5110 Inactive timer
Line Hold Timer (default 20 seconds)
Record Length
Poll ID
Select ID
LocallD
Remote ID
Space Compression Expansion-Yes! No
Punch Device Number (DC1 / DC2/ DC3)
Read/Write with Hold-Yes/ No
Connect dataset to line-Yes/ No
Send answer tone-Yes/ No
Online Test-Yes/ No
Calling Station-Yes/ No
Write Unblocked-Yes/ No
Modem and Data Set interfaces to the BSCA (#2074) feature
are:
Facility
Speed
Type of Service Type of Modem
C4
C4M
C5
C5M
C6
C6M
D3
D3M
D4
D4M
D4SB
D5
D5M
D5SB
X1M
X2M
1200/600
1200/600
2400
2000/2400
4800
4800
1200/600 '
1200/600
2400
2000/2400
2400/1200
4800
4800
4800/2400
2400
4800
Switched
Switched
Switched
Switched
Switched
Switched
Non-switched
Non-switched
Non-switched
Non-switched
Non-switched
Non-switched
Non-switched
Non-switched
Private
Private
Integrated
Stand Alone
IBM 3872
Stand Alone
IBM 3874
Stand Alone
Integrated
Stand Alone
IBM 3872
Stand Alone
IBM 3872
IBM 3874
Stand Alone
IBM 3874
Stand Alone
Stand Alone
In addition to the basic funtions of Binary Synchronous Communications, one of the following special features must be
added: Integrated Modem (1200/600 BPS)' EIA/CCITT Interfaces or Data-Phone* Digital Service Adapter (DDSA).
.
*Registered Trademark of the American Telephone & Telegraph Co.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- - . . . . -- ......
----- General Systems Division-Machines
=---=
- - - --..
M5110.4
-=
Nov 78
-~-
-~-.-
A modem for BSC data transmission at 1200 or 600 BPS over
non-switched or switched network facilities is available as
follows:
•
IBM 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500): A modem for
BSC data transmission at 1200 BPS over non-switched facilities. Half-speed operation at 600 BPS is possible by a systems
configuration parameter and can be initiated by the initialization
command of the APL or BASIC language program.
Attachment to the non-switched (2- or 4-wire) Facility D3 is via
an IBM provided cable directly to the line. Specify: #9402 for
2-wire, #9404 for 4-wire. Prerequisite. BSCA (#2074).
Limitation: Cannot be installed with EIA/CCITT Interface
(#3701) Data-Phone* Digital Service Adapter (DDSA) (#5650,
5651) or Integrated Modem (#5501, 5508). Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
*Registered Trademark of the American Telephone & Telegraph Co.
1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5501): A modem for BSC
data transmission at 1200 BPS over switched facilities. Halfspeed operation at 600 BPS is possible by a systems configuration parameter and can be initiated by the initialization Gommand of the APL or BASIC language program.
Attachment to the switched C4 facility is via an I BM
cable directly to the line. Prerequisite: BSCA
Limitation: Cannot be installed with EIA/CCITT
(#3701) or Data-Phone* Digital Service Adapter
(#5650, 5651) or Integrated Modem (#5500,
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
provided
(#2074).
Interface
(DDSA)
5508).
*Registered Trademark of the American Telephone & Telegraph Co.
1200 BPS Integrated Modem, Switched Network Backup
with Auto Answer (SNBU/AA) (#5508): Provides for backup
attachment of the IBM 5110 to the switched network when the
primary facility is non-switched.
Communication can be with another IBM 1200 BPS Integrated
Modem when it is equipped with the switched network capability. Selection of the primary or backup facility is via the systems configuration parameters and can be changed by the
initialization command of the APL or BASIC language program.
The capability exists to automatically answer incoming calls
when attached to a common carrier arrangement type CBS or
equivalent. Operator intervention, program modification or
both may be required on the using system/terminal.
This feature can be used with BTAM programs for DOS/VS,
OS/VS-1 and OS/VS-2. In certain configurations it can be
used with TCAM under OS/VS-1 and OS/VS-2.
Additional customer program routines will be required in existing BTAM programming to fully utilize the capabilities of the
Switched Network Backup feature.
Attachment to the switched network is via an IBM provided
cable to a common carrier arrangement type CBS or equivalent.
The device communicating with the IBM 5110 must also be
equipped with an integrated modem capable of operating at the
same speed as this modem.
Attachment to the non-switched (2- or 4-wire) facilities is via
an IBM provided cable directly to the line, Type 3002. Specify:
#9402 for 2-wire, #9404 for 4-wire. Prerequisite: BSCA
(#2074). Limitations: Cannot be installed with EIA/CCITT
Interface Feature (#3701), Data-Phone* Digital Service Adap-
ter (DDSA) feature (#5650, 5651) or Integrated Modem
(#5500, 5501}. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
*Registered Trademark of the American Telephone & Telegraph Co.
EIA/CCITT Interface (#3701): Provides a cable and interface
for the attachment of an IBM or non-IBM modem meeting
RS-232-C characteristics. Non-IBM modems may be attached
subject to the multiple suppliers system policy. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500,
5501, 5508) or DDSA (#5650, 5651). Field Installation: Yes.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: BSCA (#2074).
Data-Phone* Digital Services Adapter-DDSA (#5650.
5651): An integrated adapter for data transmission at speeds
of 2400 or 4800 BPS over the AT & T non-switched DataPhone* Digital Service network. The DDSA interfaces to a
DDS channel service unit, the customer site termination of the
DDS network.
Attachment to the above service is via an IBM provided cable.
Specify: #5650 for point-to-point, #5651 for multipoint tributary. Prerequisite: BSCA (#2074). Limitations: Cannot be
installed with EIA/ CCITT Interface (#3701) or 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500, 5501, 5508). Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
*Registered Trademark of the American Teler5hone & Telegraph Co.
Asynchronous Communications (#1525): Provides the IBM
5110 with the capability to appear as an IBM 2741 (using
EBCD or Correspondence notation) to a remote system. The
customer may select 134.5 bps or 300 bps start/stop transmission speeds, depending upon remote system. Operation will
be over appropriate B1, B2, C1, C2 and D1 facilities. Line
connection is through a customer supplied modem.
The IBM 5110 is supported in stop/ start mode connected to a
System/370 via an Integrated Communications Adapter or a
3704/3705 Communications Controller with the Emulation
Program (EP/VS) or the Network Control Program (NCP/VS).
See M2700 pages for details concerning the facilities and
prerequisites on these units.
When in asynchronous communications mode the IBM 5110 is
supported as a 2741 by the following:
SCP
OS/VS1
OS/VS2
DOS/VS
VM/370
Options
TP Access Methods
TSO (via TCAM)
BTAM, TCAM or VTAM
BTAM, TCAM or VTAM
VTAM
In the asynchronous communications mode, the IBM 5110
keyboard will be used in the same way as a 2741 keyboard.
Output will be displayed on the CRT and may be printed on the
optional printer. The lIser may also use the tape cartridge or
diskette to transmit and receive data from the remote system.
While in the asynchronous communications mode the
5110 is a dedicated terminal device. Therefore, interaction
the APL or BASIC interpreters takes place only after the
sion is completed. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Prerequisite: A customer supplied modem meeting EIA
232-C specifications and Expansion Feature (#1524).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
IBM
with
sesYes.
RS-
---= -- General Systems Division-Machines
=---=
- - --.. -
-=
-~-~-
Nov 78
.
Additional Communications Information
and Serial I/O Adapters.
II. Customer Responsibilities
References
I.
M5110.5
1. See M2700 pages for additional information concerning communication facilities, machine attachment
requirements, operating capabilities and customer
responsibilities.
2. Refer to the IBM Data Communications Handbook
The customer must be advised, in writing, that he is responsible:
1. For attaching a device which meets the defined EIA
Standard RS-232-C specifications (interface type D) for
Serial I/O, or IEEE Standard 488-1975 for Parallel I/O.
2. For assuring with the device manufacturer that time
between data transfers is sufficient for his application.
3. For supporting his I/O device with APL or BASIC programs.
3. Refer to IBM 5110 General Information and Physical
Planning Manual, GA21-9300, for physical installation
requirements.
II.
Notes
1. For questions regarding emulation of 2741 features
and / or RPQs, contact your regional GSC. The functions of Receive Interrupt and Transmit Interrupt features on the 27 011 1 are standard with the IBM 5110
Communications Feature, but require full-duplex modems. (OS/VS BTAM does not support the transmit
interrupt feature
2. A 6··foot modem cable is automatically provided with
this feature.
/
III.
Customer Responsibilities
4. For determining program storage requirements.
Diskette Sort Feature (tI3200): Provides the IBM 5110 user
with the ability to sort diskette data files. Both full record sorts
and address out (ADDROUT) sorts are possible. The sort
resides in ROS can be initiated through the system language or
the keyboard.
Audible Alarm (#1250): The audible alarm is provided to
signal system attention required and, under program control,
operator messages like "end of job."
Channel Terminator (#1600): Required when an IBM 5110
Model 1 or 2 is used with either or both the Auxiliary tape
(#5106) or the diskette unit (#5114) and a printer (#5103) is
not attached. It logically and physically provides the load terminator to the channel.
1. The customer must be advised, in writing, of certain
responsibilities related to the installation and maintenance of common carrier facilities/ services as well as
the IBM equipment. For further information see
M2700 pages and "Teleprocessing Systems" in the
General Information section
Parallel I/O Adapter (#5825): Based on IEEE Standard 4881975 (Dated April 4, 1975), [he IBM Parallel I/O Adapter
provides the capability to attach up to 14 IEEE 488-1975 compatible devices (such as laboratory instruments, plotters, and
printers) to the IBM 5110, with the 5110 acting as the sole
controller in the network. The Parallel I/O Adapter is operated
directly from the APL or BASIC languages with device dependent message exchange in either 8-bit binary or 7-bit ASCII
code. All interface messages are encoded according to the
IEEE 488-1975 specificatIon. Interface address assignment
and management is the responsibility of the user. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes.
Serial I/O Feature (#6301): Provides the IBM 5110 with the
capability to attach anyone of a variety of peripherals which
satisfy EIA Standard RS-232-C specifications. The customer
may select 5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-bit code and data rates from 20 to
9600 bps (2400 maximum for 5-bitL Interaction with an attached device is through the APL or BASIC languages.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Expansion Feature (#1524).
Additional Information for Serial I/O and Parallel I/O
Features
I.
References
Refer to the IBM 5110 General Information Manual and
Physical Planning Manual, GA21-9300 for information concerning attachment requirements for the 5110 Parallel I/O
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-~--=- -=---=
- - Gen.ral Systems Division-Machines
- -=- ------_
.... --~-
5114 DISKETTE UNIT
Purpose: Provides diskette attachment to the IBM 5110 computer.
Highlights
-
1.2 to 2.4 Megabyte Storage Capacity
-
Direct Access capability
-
Multiple Open files (maximum of 10)
-
Media exchange capability with other diskette devices that
conform to basic interchange conventions
-
Self-contained floor standing unit
-
Average access .243 seconds (25 tracks, including latency,
excluding head load)
Housed in its own covers, the 5114 measures 17 3/4" x 22
1/4" x 29" and weighs from 120 to 136 pounds. Diskette
types 1, 2 and 2D can be intialized and used to READ/WRITE
data and to LOAD/SAVE programs and data. Rotational speed
is 360 RPM yielding: (in 1,000 Bytes/Second).
Diskette
Type
Maximum Data
Capacity
Transfer
1
2
2D
303
606
1,212
31.3
31.3
62.5
Read
Write &
Verify
24
24
48
9.5
9.5
18.9
One diskette drive is standard. A second drive is optional. A
maximum of two 5114s is possible on the IBM 5110 Computer.
Features
Second diskette drive (#3240) provides for up to twice the
capacity in single 5114 Diskette Unit. The second drive can be
used for increased capacity and backup requirements.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M5114.1
Nov 78
-_--.
.....
:- :..:
==--=:
- - ------_
... -
M5203.1
~
General Systems'Division-Machines
Nov 78
-~-.-
5203 PRINTER
Purpose: Printed output for a System!3 Model 8, 10 or 12 or
System/370 Model 115.
Models: Model 1 and 2 for use with System/3 Model 8, 10 or
12 only. Model 3 for use with System/3 Model 8,10 or 12 or
System/370, Model 115.
Model 1
100 Ipm rated speed with a 48 character set.
Model 2
200 Ipm rated speed with a 48 character set
Model 3
300 Ipm rated speed with a 48 character set
Model Changes: Can be made in the field.
Highlights: The standard unit has 96 print positions ... can be
expanded to 120 or 132 positions. See "Special Features."
Vertical spacing is 6 or 8 lines/inch, under operator control.
Horizontal spacing is 10 characters to the inch.
One interchangeable chain cartridge is supplied with the 5203
Models 1 and 2 ... see "Specify." One interchangeable chain
cartridge is supplied with the 5203 Model 3 ... see "Specify."
When Universal Character Set Control (#9848) is installed on
the Processing Unit (#8642 on 5408 or 5410 or 5412 ... #9848
on 3115), and the 5203 is equipped with Universal Character
Set Attachment (#8639), interchangeable chain cartridges
containing character sets with from 49 to 120 characters can
be used. Use of such character sets may result in reduced
throughput, depending upon the character set being used and
the text being printed. See 5203 Printer in "Type Catalog" for
details.
Vertical forms control (spacing and shipping) is provided by the
5408 or 5410 or 5412 and the stored program. Printed format
is controlled by the stored program. Continuous marginally
punched forms are fed by a forms tractor. Maximum forms
dimensions are 16-3/4" wide and 14" long (edge-to-edge).
Minimum forms dimensions are 3-7/8" wide and 3" long
(edge-to-edge). Paper eject speed is 16.67"/ second at 6
lines/inch ... 12" /second at 8 lines/inch. A Dual Feed Carriage
is available '" see "Special Features."
Limitations
1. Only marginally punched, pin fed, continuous forms can be
used on the 5203. No staples are permitted in the print
chain area.
2. No representations or commitments as to readability of
5203 printing by optical character recognition equipment
shall be made.
3. Print quality and forms feeding varies with paper specifications, ribbon and number of copies. Multiple copy forms of
more than four parts and forms with a first part heavier than
13-pounds should be tested under operating conditions to
determine that results are satisfactory for the user's application.
4. Forms sets which gave satisfactory results on 5203 Models
1 and 2 may show a decrease in print quality when used on
a 5203 Model 3.
Maximum: Only one 5203 can be attached to a System/3
Model 8, 10 or 12 or System/370 Model 115.
For a System/3 Model 8 The 5203 Printer Base Attachment
(#3960) with the appropriate 5203 Printer Speed Attachment
on the 5408 Processing Unit ... #3970 for a 5203 Model 1 or
Model 2 ... #3972 for a 5203 Model 3.
For a System/3 Model 10 An appropriate 5203 Printer Attachment on the 5410 Processing Unit ... #3970 for a 5203 Model 1
'" #3971 for a 5203 Model 2 '" #3972 for a 5203 Model 3.
For a System/3 Model 12 The 5203 Printer Base Attachment
(#3960) with the appropriate 5203 Printer Speed Attachment
on the 5412 Processing Unit ... #3970 for a 5203 Model 1 or
Model 2 ... #3972 for a 5203 Model 3.
Bibliography: System/3 Model 8, 10, or 12-GC20-8080.
Metering: I/O Unit (Online).
Specify
1. Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 60Hz): #9903 for 208 V or #9905 for
230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
2. Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white ... must be consistent
with 5408 or 5410 color.
3. Print Chain or Twin Arrangement: See 5203 Printer in
"Type Catalog" for arrangements and required feature #s.
4. System Attachment Adapter: (Model 1, 2, 3) #9221 for
attachment to System/3 Model 8, #9222 for attachment to
System/3 model 10, #9224 for attachment to System/3
model 12, or (Model 3 only).
Special Features
Dual Feed Carriage (#3475): In addition to standard carriage. Allows two sets of forms,. non-overlapped, to be printed
simultaneously, each independently controlled. The number of
horizontal printing positions is reduced by 17. Both forms
tractors are independently controlled by the stored program.
Limitation: Not available on the System/370 model 115.
Prerequisite: Dual Feed Carriage Control (#3480) on the
5408, 5410 or 5412.
Interchangeable Chain Cartridge, Additional (#4730):
(Models 1 and 2 only) An additional operator changeable chain
cartridge containing from 48 to 120 different characters. See
"Type Catalog" for feature numbers of available arrangements.
Prerequisites: If any character set containing more than 48
different characters is to be used, Universal Character Set
Attachment (#8639) is required on the 5203 and Universal
Character Set Control (#8642) is required on the 5408, 5410 or
5412.
Interchangeable Chain Cartridge, Additional (#4740):
(5203 model 3 only) An additional operator changeable chain
cartridge containing from 48 to 120 different characters. See
"Type Catalog" for feature numbers of available arrangements.
PrerequiSites: If any character set containing more than 48
different characters is to be used, Universal Character Set
Attachment (#8639) is required on the 5203. In addition, Universal Character Set Control (#8642) is required on the 5408,
5410, or 5412 ... #9848 is required on 3115.
Print Positions, 24 Additional (#5558): Increases the number of print positions from 96 to 120. Prerequisite: 120 Print
Position Attachment (#9495) on the 5408, 5410 or 5412 ... see
"Specify" under 5408, 5410, or 5412.
Print Positions, 12 Additional (#5559): [For field installation
only.. for plant installation of 132 print positions, order #5560
below.] Increases the number of print positions from 120 to
132. Prerequisites: Print Positions, 24 Add'i (#5558) on the
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---= -==--=
-- - ----- General Systems Division-Machines
=
-~-y-
5203 ... 132 Print Position Attachment (#9496) on the 5410 ...
see "Specify" under 5408, 5410 or 5412.
Print Positions, 36 Additional (#5560): Increases the number of print positions from 96 to 132. Prerequisite: 132 Print
Position Attachment (#9496) on the 5408, 5410 or 5412 ... see
"Specify" under 5408, 5410 or 5412.
Universal Character Set Attachment (#8639): Required if
any Interchangeable Chain Cartridge or Interchangeable Train
Cartridge with more than 48 different characters is to be used.
See 5203 Printer in "Type Catalog" for details. Prerequisite:
Universal Character Set Control (#8642) on the 5408, 5410 or
5412.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M5203.2
Nov 78
----- -- General Systems Division-Machines
=
:-,..:::
-------
M5211.1
--
5211 PRINTER
Purpose: Printed output unit for System/34 and System/38.
Model
Description
Speed (LPM)
1 Stand-alone
2 Stand-alone
(S/34 only)
(S/34 and S/38)
160
300
Nominal rated speeds are based on 48-character set. Specialized accessory belts allowing increased speeds are available.
See Highlights below:
Model Changes: Field Installable.
Nov 78
Prerequisites: A 5211 Attachment (#5810) on the 5340 System Unit. Specify #9301 or #9302 on 5340. See 5340
"Specify." OCR pr~nt available only with 5211-2 machines with
serial numbers above 51200. A 5211 Attachment feature on
the 5381 System Unit (#1100 for the first 5211 Attachment;
#1110 for the second 5211 Attachment). See 5381 special
features.
Specify
1. Voltage (AC, 1-Phase, 3-Wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208V, or
#9904 for 230V.
2. Color: One color accent panel must be specified. #9060 for
Highlights: A universal character set buffer of 192 positions.
The 5211 Attachment allows the use of graphic sets of up to
192 characters. Print speeds vary depending on character set
size and frequency of character repetition on the belt. General
purpose belts of 48, 64, alld 96 characters are available with
the following rated speeds:
48 character set
64 charactet set
96 character ~et
Model 1
160lpm
1231pm
841pm
Model 2
300lpm
2351pm
1641pm
Specialized print belts which can provide greater speeds up to
225 Ipm for Model 1 and up to 395 Ipm for Model 2, for numeric printing, are available as accessories. (See 5211 in Type
Catalog Section). 132 print positions are standard. Horizontal
spacing is 1O-character per Inch. Vertical spacing is 6 or 8 lines
per inch under operator control (S/34) and CL control (S/38).
Continuous marginally punched forms from 89mm (3 1/2") to
387mm (15 1/4") in overall width are fed by an automatic
carriage. Forms skipping and spacing are program controlled.
The carriage is a single speed unit allowing skipping up to 20
inches per second. Continuous forms are fed by a forms tractor. See Forms Design Reference Guide for Printers, for forms
design considerations.
OCR capability is provided for the Model 2 only. 48-character
print belts containing numeric A or B-font (13 characters) are
available as accessories. The Model 2 can prepare OCR documents on 20 to 24 lb. (75-90 gram/m2) OCR bond single-part
paper, using an OCR ribbon, that can be read by the IBM 3886
Optical Character Reader wIth feature code 9701 compatibility
requiring one rescan. No representation or commitment as to
readability of 5211 Model 2 printing by Optical Character Recognition equipment other than IBM 3886 Reader with feature
code 9701 shall be made.
The translation capability within the 5211 Attachment Feature
(#5810) on the 5340 provides for character substitution when
using a print belt which does not contain all the characters in
the printer data stream.
Limitations: (1) Only pin fed, continuous forms can be used.
(2) Both edges of the forms must be fastened in the forms
tractors. (3) No staples are permitted in the areas exposed to
the interchangeable print belt. (4) Printer operation and print
quality vary with paper and number of copies. Form sets of
more than four parts should be tested in operating conditions
to verify that results are satisfactory. (5) Due to the complexity
of certain characters on the 188-character Multinational print
belt, all multiple part forms should be tested in operating conditions to ensure results are satisfactory.
Maximum: Only one 5211 Printer Model 1 or 2 may be attached to a System/34. Two 5211-2 printers may be attached to
System/38.
Willow Green, #9061 for Garnet Rose, #9062 for Sunrise
Yellow, #9063 for Classic Blue, #9064 for Charcoal Brown,
#9605 for Pebble Gray (System/38 only), RPQ #GK1755
for Pearl White. Printer background color is Pearl White.
3. Interchangeable Print Belt: (Available at time of manufacture only). See "Type Catalog" for print belt arrays. When
orde~ing, indicate one specify code for character set and
one specify code for character height. When printing 8 Ipi,
.079" character height is recommended.
4. System Attachment: For System/38 Attachment #9010
(Model 2 only).
Specify Code
Models
1,2
48 Character EBCDIC
48 Character FORTRAN **
60 Character S/ 38 Special
64 Character EBCDIC
64 Character ASCII
64 Multinational*
96 Character EBCDIC*
96 Character ASCII*
96 Multinational*
188 Multinational*
9497
9492
9509
9498
9496
9505
9501
9502
9504
9503
The 60 character System/38 special belt is a specially designed belt which will enable the user to print the System/38
Control Language characters.
*Available only with .095" character height. (#9950)
**System/34 only
Character Set Height
.079 inches
.095 inches
Specify Code
#9951
#9950
If Spanish N pnntlng capability is desired on the rtrint belt
provided with the 5211, order Specify Code #2961 plus two
additional Specify Codes selected from the following offerings
of character set size and height:
Character Set Size
Character Set Height
48
64
96*
.095" #9950
079" #9951
#2767
#2768
#2770
*Available only with .095" character set height.
Only one "Specify" print belt may be ordered with each 5211.
Supplies: (1) A black ribbon, part number 1299115, or equivalent, is required. For OCR applications, an OCR ribbon, part
number 1299243, or equivalent, is required.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----= -- General Systems Division-Machines
=-_-=
- -- -----_.-
-=
Accessories: Additional print belts permit the customer to
print more than one character set for various applications. Can
be interchangeably used with the belt provided with the machine. See "Type Catalog" for print belt arrays.
Feature Number
Model
1,2
38 Character
42 Character Numeric
48 Character
48 Character FORTRAN**
48 Character OCR A
48 Character OCR B
60 Character S/38 Special
64 Character EBCDIC
64 Character ASCII
64 Multinational*
96 Character EBCDIC*
96 Character ASCIl*
96 Multinational*
188 Multinational*
5915
5916
5911
5552
5919
5920
5956
5910
5912
5925
5917
5918
5924
5923
(Md12
only)
The 60 character System/38 special belt is a specially designed belt which will enable the user to print the System/38
Control Language characters.
* Available only with .095" character height (#5950).
** System/34 only
Note: Accessory feature numbers 5910, 5911, and 5912 are
the same as System/32 accessory belts 5910, 5911, and 5912.
res pectively.
Character Set Height
.079 inches
.095 inches
Feature Number
5951
5950
For Spanish N printing capability on an additional 5211 print
belt. order FC #2761 plus two additional feature codes selected from the following offerings of character set size and height:
Character Set Size
Character Set Height
48
64
96*
.095" #5950
.079" #5951
#2867
#2868
#2870
*Available only with .095" character set height.
Prices: See Price List.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
MS211.2
Nov 78
--= ----- General Systems Division-Machines
=---=
------
M5213.1
-=
5213 PRINTER
Purpose: Printer for System/3 model 4 (5213 model 3 only),
or System/3 model 6, or optional console printer for
System/370 model 115 or 125 (5213 model 1 only).
Model 1 Has a pin feed platen.
Model 2 Has vertical forms control.
Model 3 Has vertical forms control and bi-directional print.
Model Changes: Model 1 to model 2 or 3: Requires a capacity replacement of machine. Model 2 to model 3: Field
installable: Yes.
Highlights: Prints serially at a rate of 85 cps, 115 cps nominal
when controlled by 5213 model 3 Enhanced Print Rate Attachment (#3960). The maximum print line is 132 positions at 10
characters/inch spacing. Line spaCing is 6 lines/inch. Electronic tab is provided under program control. EBCDIC coded matrix
characters are formed by 7 vertical wires, each printing a dot in
up to 4 of 7 possible horizontal positions. The 26 letters and 10
digits can be printed; the following special characters can also
be printed:
& @#?¢$%.,;:'(}_+-*/ t
Nov 78
Performance Considerations: An analysis of each document
type to be printed is necessary to find actual throughput of a
serial printer. When used for dedicated printing jobs, throughput depends upon the ratio (R) of lines printed per page to the
maximum number of lines available pei page and upon the
number of character positions (C) in the printed line. Lines
printed per minute (LPM) can be approximated using formulas:
For Model 1
LPM = 2700 R
RC + 5
For Model 2
LPM = 2700 R
RC + 1
For Model 3
LPM = 4500 R
RC + 5
6500 R
LPM =
RC
+
10
=::/=<> I . .
Use of the underscore in conjunction with another character
will overprint the lowest ml'ltrix dot forming that character and
is not recommended. Refer to SRL GA24-3488 for form design
considerations and limitations.
Example:
where C is average number
of character positions
where C is average number
of character positions
where C is maximum number
of character positions when
program prints alternate
line in opposite directions
where 5213 Model 3 Enhanced Print
Rate Attachment (#3960) is used and
where C is maximum number of
character positions when program
prints alternate lines in opposite
directions
For Model 3. If 22 of 66 lines on a page are
printed, R = 1/3. Assume a maximum line
length of 75 character positions
Three models of the 5213 are available:
Model 1: Has a pin feed platen, which feeds marginallypunched continuous forms 13-7/8" wide (hole-to-hole), provides single space forms indexing under program control, and
has high speed tab left. Up to 6-part forms can be printed, with
a maximum thickness of .018" (for optimum feeding and stacking, no more than 3 parts are recommended). Forms length can
be 3" to 14·' in increments of 1/6". Card stock continuous
forms are not recommended. An optional forms stand stacker
is available ... see "Special Features."
Model 2: Has a tapeless, vertical forms control tractor. Space
suppress, single, double, or triple space, and skip are controlled by the program and attachment. High speed tab left is
provided. The maximum overall form width is 14-7/8", minimum is 3". Forms length can be 3" to 14". Up to 6-part
forms, with maximum thickness of .025" can be accommodated. A forms rack that provides for continuous forms stacking
after printing is standard.
Model 3: Has the same characteristics as Model 2, with the
addition of bi-directional print and high speed tab left and right.
Bi-directional print increases throughput by eliminating the
carrier return. It allows printing with the print element moving
either left-to-right or right-to-Ieft.
LPM = 4500 (1/3) = 50 (approximate
1/3 (75) + 5
throughput)
Then:
For System/3-4: 5213 Model 3 Enhanced Print Rate Attachment (#3960) on the 5404 Processing Unit.
For System/3-6: An appropriate 5213 Printer Attachment
(#3901, 3902, 3903) or 5213 Model 3 Enhanced Print Rate
Attachment (#3960) on the 5406 Processing Unit.
Limitations: Only one printer can be attached to a 5404,
5406, 3115, or 3215 Processing Unit.
Supplies: Serial #12000 and below (model 1 }-#21 000 and
below (model 2). and #31000 and below tmodel 31. a black
ribbon, IBM Part No. 1136906 or equivalent, is recommended.
Serial #12001 and above (model 1)-#21001 and above (model
2), and #31001 and above (model 3). a black ribbon, Part No.
1136970 or equivalent, is recommended
Bibliography: GC20-8080. Metering: Base Unit (meter on
5404, 5406, 3115, or 3125.)
Specify
Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 cycle): #9902 for 208 V, or
#9904 for 230 V .. , must be consistent with system voltage.
Special Features
Forms Stand: Permits placement of continuous forms on the
stand above floor level and provides for stacking after printing.
This acce!':sory is a two _~helf forms stand.
Type
Feature No.
5213
4450
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---=-- General Systems Division-Machines
=
=--==
-_
- ---.-
-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M5213.2
Nov 78
-------=---=
--------.. -
-_ -= _
M5231.1
General Systems Division-Machines
5231 CONTROLLER
System Features
Purpose: Control Unit for the 5230 Data Collection System for
central collection of data from 5234 Time Entry Stations and
5235 and 5236 Data Entry Stations. Data is collected at the
controller on either card or diskette media for subsequent
transfer and processing on a data processing system. All controller models can be ordered with loop connection features
which allow attachment of up to 15 entry stations in any combination. All models provide operator guidance to the user to
assist him in responding to cOllditions requiring operator attention; e.g., output media full and almost full or a loop error. See
the 5231 Data Collection Console Guide for details.
A non-programmable device utilizing Read Only Storage (ROS)
for operational control with Ra'ndom Access Memory (RAM)
for definitions uniquely specifying output record format and
input requirements from Entry"'Stations. Definitions are personalized for customer application through up to six simple question and answer forms;~key entered into appropriate media for
input into controller at system startup.
Host Support For IBM System/32,
System/3: See 5230 "Systems."
System/34,
and
•
Two Wire Loop Attachment.·· Controls two wire loop for
attachment of Time Entry Stations and Data Entry Stations
to controller.
•
Unattended Operation. Once loaded with definition records
the system will operate in an unattended mode (assuming
no power or system failures) collecting data from entry
devices. Status codes will be displayed and the internal
alarm will sound whenever operator attention is required. In
addition, the external alarm contacts will activate any external alarm provided by the customer. The alarm will also be
activated when the output storage device is "almost" filled
to capacity.
Controller Models
Model 1: Punches and interprets 96-column card output records from data entered through the Time Entry and Data Entry
Stations ... punches and prints at 20 cards per minute ... Also
provides read capability for loading system definition records
for system startup. Characters punched and interpreted are the
standard 64 character set corresponding to the 96-column card
code. All other EBCDIC characters will be accepted by the
system and converted to blanks. Card hopper and stacker
capacity is 350 cards.
Model 2: Stores output records entered through the Time
Entry and Data Entry Stations on diskette in 128 character
records. An additional feature provides binary synchronous
communication of data directly to a data processing system
(unidirectional transmission only) over switched or nonswitched point-to-point or multipoint (non-switched) telephone
lines. The 5231 Controller can be used as a remote data collection device at 1200, 2000, 2400, 4800 bps over appropriate
communication facilities. Data can be batch transmitted or
each transaction transmitted as received by the controller
depending on the capability of the receiving system. The 52312 communicates as a 3741-2 or 4 to a System/3, System/32
(point-to-point only), System/34 (Point to Point only),
System/7 3741-2, 4 (point-to-point only), 5110 (point-to-point
only), or a System/370 115,125,135,138,145,148,155 II,
158, 165 II, 168, 3031, 3032, 3033. See "communications"
for special attachment instructions to System/370 and 3741.
The Model 2 also provides read capability for loading system
definition records for system start up.
Model 3: Punches and interprets 80-column card output records from data entered through Time Entry and Data Entry
Stations. The Model 3 punches and prints at 21 cards per
minute. Printed characters will be represented by the 64 character set EL. All other EBCDIC characters will be accepted by
the system and converted to blanks. Card hopper and stacker
capacity is 400 cards. The Model 3 also provides read capability for loading system definition records for system start up.
Model Changes: Controller models not recommended for
field conversion. All features are field installable.
Highlights:
-
Nov 78
Input Media Validation. A check character can be defined
for each card or badge entered at the entry stations. If the
character does not match, the error will be indicated at the
entry station and wait for the correctly coded badge or card
to be entered into the station. It is recommended that the
check character capability be used for card input to ensure
proper orientation of the card when it is inserted into the
Data Entry Station.
•
Self Diagnosis. Whenever there is idle time, the system will
continue self diagnosis and display a status message if any
problem is found. Alarm contacts will be activated and the
internal alarm will sound if operator attention is required.
•
Controller Console. The Console provides user communication with the controller to perform such functions as
start/ stop controller, set time of day, start/stop individual
loops, respond to status messages, etc.
•
Console Lock. A keylock is provided to enable entry of data
through the console. The key is removable in the "locked"
or "disabled" position so no entry of data can be made via
the console.
•
Alarm Contacts. Provides the capability for the customer to
add an external alarm to indicate a system status message
has been displayed at the controller console requiring operator attention. Alarm contacts work in conjunction with the
standard alarm. A customer may require both alarms, the
standard audible alarm for the immediate vicinity and his
own external (audible or visual) alarm for a remote location.
CE Diagnostic Port. The first loop can be used to attach up
to three entry stations to the controller. The three remaining
loops can support up to four entry stations each. The first
loop is limited to three in order to accommodate a CE Po-rt in
the controller to be used only by the CE (or other maintenance personnel for purchased systems) for entry station
diagnosis, checkout, and repair of failing units.
Non-programmable
Personalized through easy to use fill in the blanks forms
Application independent
Performs self diagnosis during "idle" time
Choice of output media available
Operator guidance at entry stations
Optional communication capability via BSCA
Audible alarm sounds when operator attention is required
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------ -=--==
- - General Systems Division-Machines
- ------
-=
- - - -
-
M5231.2
Nov 78
y
Communications
The 5231-2 with the optional BSCA feature can communicate
with appropriately configured System/3, System/34 Point-toPoint only), System/7, 3741-2, 4 (point-to-point only), 5110
(point-to-point only) or System/370-115, 125, 135, 138, 145,
148, 15511, 158, 16511, 168, 3031, 30~2, 3033. Communications with System/370 is via ICA (Where applicable), 2701,
2703, 3704 and 3705 operating under DOS/VS BTAM,
OS/VSl BTAM, or OS/VS2 BTAM. BSCA attachment is
supported by CICS/VS (operating under DOS/VS, OS/VS).
Transmission to a 3741 is via single diskette transfer only. (On
switched lines the telecommunications link must be reestablished for subsequent diskette transmission.) Data Communications on the Model 2 controller is supported as a 3741-2 or 4.
Transmission of data is one way only, from the 5231-2 to a
host. Communications is over multipoint (non-switched) or
point-to-point leased or switched facilities.
Specify
1. Voltage: (AC, 1 Phase, 60Hz 3 wire, 115V, Locking Plug)
#9880.
2. Color:
#9060
#9061
#9062
#9063
#9064
Willow Green
Garnet Rose
Sunrise Yellow
Classic Blue
Charcoal Brown
3. Processing system for the data collected by the 5231:
#9270
#9271
#9272
#9273
#9274
#9275
#9276
#9277
#9278
#9279
#9294
#9280
#9281
System /3-1 5
System/3-AII Others
System/32
System/7
System/360
Other IBM Equipment
Non-IBM Equipment
System/370, below 145
System/370,145-168
System/34, Processing System
System/34, Planned Device Attachment
5110
System/370 3031,3032,3033
Prerequisite: 5230 Data Collection System Accessory Package.
PIN 2461786 Loop Connector: One required for each 5231
controller (one also required for each additional loop, FC 4700,
4701,4702).
P / N 2461785 External Alarm Connector: (optional) if selected,
one is needed per 5231 Controller.
P / N 2461780 Station Connector: one required for each 5234,
5235 and 5236 entry station plus one spare.
See Accessory Package paragraphs in this section for details
and ordering instructions. The ship date required for these
prerequisites must be at least seven weeks prior to the ship
date specified for the 5231 Controller. This is to allow the
customer time to fulfill his preinstallation responsibilities prior
to the delivery of the controller. See 5230 Data Collection
System User Guide for schedule details.
Cables: No special orders required for 5230 Data Collection
System. Cables are shipped automatically with the type model
and the associated features except for loop cables.
For All Models
Loop 2 Attachment (#4700): Provides capability to attach
four additional Data Entry or Time Entry Stations to the 5231
Controller. This expands total system capability to seven entry
stations.
Maximum:
One.
Field
Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisite: 5230 Data Collection System Accessory Package B/M 2461786.
Loop 3 Attachment (#4701): Provides capability to attach
four additional Data Entry or Time Entry Stations to the 5231
controller. This expands the total system caRability to eleven
Entry Stations. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Loop 2 Attachment (#4700) ... 5230 Data Collection System Accessory Package B / M 2461786.
Loop 4 Attachment (#4702): Provides capability to attach
four additional Data Entry or Time Entry Stations to the 5231
controller. This expands the total system capability to its full
capacity of fifteen entry stations. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Loop 3 Attachment {#4701}
... 5230 Data Collection System Accessory Package B/ M
2461786.
For Models 1 and 3 Only
Secondary Output Punch Attachment (#3210): When
ordered with the 5231 Model 1 provides attachment of a 5496
Data Recorder equipped with System/3 Model 6/5230 Attachment (#7501). When ordered with Modei 3 provides attachment of a 129 Card Data Recorder equipped with Card
Input/ Output Attachment (#7503). The attachment allows the
5496 Data Recorder or the 129 Card Data Recorder to be
connected as a backup card punch/print for the 5231 Primary
Punch. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
For Model 2 Only
Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (BSCA)
(#2074): This feature permits the 5231 Controller to function
on a switched or non-switched point--to-point line 01' multipoint non-switched line as a terminal communicating in binary
synchronous mode. The transmission is unidirectional tram the
5231-2 to the host system. The 5231-2 \:Viii transmit to:
P / N . 2461781 Station Connector Mounting Bracket: one required for each 5234 and 5235 Entry Station (for rigid mounting and easy unit replacement) unless suitable alternative
mounting is provided.
-
A System/32 with #2074 ([,)oint-to-point only)
P / N 2461783 152m (500 feet) spool for loop cable OR
-
A System/34 with communications adapter (#2074) (Pointto-Point only)
-
A System/3 equipped with BSCA (#2074, #2084), LeA
(#4765) or ICA (#4645 and #4802)
PIN 2461784 304m (1000 feet) of loop cable
P / N 4413082 Contacts Closure Accessory: One required for
each 5234, 5235 and 5236 Entry Station for Feature 1480.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-- -
--- - ---.- -=
=----= General Systems Division-Machines
-----.,.-
M5231.3
-~-.-
-
-
A 3741 Data Station Model 2 or 3741 Programmable Work
Station Model 4. Transmission to the 3741 is restricted to
single diskette transfer only (point-to-point only).
Additional Information-Communications
I.
A 5110 with BSCA (#2074). Transmission to the 5110 is
restricted to Single Diskette Transfer (Point-to-Point only).
A System!7 with TPMM (RPQ 008011) or TPMF (RPQ
008010)
Note: For data communications program support on the receiving host, the 5231-2 is supported as a 3741-2 or 4.
See M2700 pages for information on communications facilities.
This feature will operate in half duplex mode over non-switched
communications lines which may be duplex or half duplex
facilities.
1. Transfer Rate
1200 BPS
2000 BPS
2400 BPS
4800 BPS
#9751
#9752
#9753
#9754
2. Network Attachment
Point-to-Point (Non-Switched)
Multipoint Tributary
Point-to-Point (Switched)
#9481
#9482
#9483
~l.
Switched Network versions include as a basic capability support of manual dial and manual or auto answer operations.
(Assumes the attached modems will support this mode of
operation.) Transmission code is EBCDIC. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Note: If ordering BSCA (#2074),
either one of the integrated modems (#5500, #5501) or the EIA
Interface (#4780) must also be ordered.
EIA Interface (#4780): Provides a cable and interface which
meets RS-232C characteristics for attachment of an I BM modem or Non-IBM data set. Non-IBM modems may be attached
subject to Multiple Suppliers System Policy. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes
Prerequisite: BSCA (#2074).
Limitation: Cannot be installed with IBM 1200 BPS Integrated
Modem (#5500, #5501). Specify: #9483 for attachment to
switched lines. Note: This feature may also require internal
clock specify code (#9334) if the external modem does not
provide its own clocking. Internal clock is available at 1200 bps
only. If the internal clock is desired with the EIA interface,
specify #9334.
IBM 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500. #5501): A modem for BSe data transmission at 1200 bps over non-switched
facilities or switched facilities. Available in two versions:
#5500-non-switched ... #5501-switched with auto answer.
Attachment to the non-switched facilities is via an IBM provided cable directly to the telepnone line. Attachment to the
switched network is via an IBM provided cable to a common
carrier arrangement type CBS or equivalent. The device communicating with the 5231 Controller must also be equipped
with an IBM 1200 bps Integrated Modem/Line Adapter.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with EIA Interface (#4780).
The #5500 and #5501 cannot be installed together.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: '(es. Prerequisite:
BSCA (#2074). Specify: Internal Clock (#9334). (#9483) if
#5501 was selected.
Optional Specifications
When ordering FC #2074 (Model 2), one selection must
be specified from each of the first three categories. Selection from category (4) must be made based on the
notes below:
- A System/370-115, 125,'135, 138, 145, 148, 155 11,158,
165 II, 168, 3031, 3032, 3033 operating under DOS/VS
BTAM, OS/VS1 BTAM, or OS/VS2 BTAM. BSCA attachment is sUDDorted by CICS/VS (operating under DOS/VS,
OS/VS).
-
Nov 78
Planned Device Attachment
System/370
3741 Model 2, Model 4
System/3
System!7
System/32
System/34
5110 (Point-To-Point only)
System/370 3031, 3032, 3033
Other-IBM Equipment
Non-IBM Equipment
4. Line Facility Attachment
Duplex (4 wire only)
Half duplex (2 wire)
#9570
#9579
#9580
#9590
#9591
#9594
#9595
#9596
#9592
#9593
#9391
#9392
Notes:
Only specify 9391 or 9392 as follows:
(a) If multipoint (tributary) #9482 is ordered, specify
#9391.
(b) If 1200 bps integrated modem-non-switched #5500 is
ordered, specify #9391 or #9392 based on 4 wire or 2
wire telephone line attachment.
(c) If EIA interface #4780 is ordered, specify #9391 if
external modem attachment is to a 4 wire telephone
line.
(d) If EIA interface #4780 with a 2 wire telephone connection or a 1200 bps integrated modem switched is
ordered, no specify code is required.
II.
IBM Modems
The following IBM modem can be attached to a 5231-2
Controller:
Modem
Speed (bps)
3872 Model 1 2400/1200
3874 Model 1 4800/2400
Note: The 5231 Controller does not support Auto Call
Originate (#1091) on the 3872 or the 3874.
III.
Cables
A 9.1 m (30 feet) modem cable will be furnished with the
Control Unit. No cable order is required for 5231-2.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- --
-=-=
=---=
-------_.IV.
M5231.4
BSCA Feature Confi.guration
When the BSCA feature is ordered. either the Integrated
Modem or External Modem Interface must be selected.
Select either Item 1 or 2 and the required or optional
special features.
Modem
Interface
Internal Clock
(#9334)
1. EIA Interface (#4780)
Optional
2. 1200 bps Integrated Modem:
V.
VI.
Nov 78
General Systems Division-Machines
a) Non-switched (#5500)
b) Switched with Auto
Required
Answer (#5501)
Required
Conlmunication Facility Attachments
Cards Four cards commonly used in manufacturing related data
collection applications can be ordered as standard supplies.
Each type of card may be individually ordered.
Type Card
80 Column
96 Column
Order I Material Receipt
Material Issue
Move
Operation
W41071
W41072
W41073
W41074
W41067
W41068
W41069
W41070
For format of these cards see the Data Collection Application
Workbook, GH30-0203.
Customer Responsibilities: For specific customer responsibilities see "Systems" 5230.
For detailed preinstallation responsibilities. see the 5230 Data
Guide~ GA34-0040.
The BSCA feature is designed to operate at speeds
between 1200 and 4800 bps over common carrier
switched or non-switched facilities or equivalent privately owned communication facilities.
Collection System User
References
5230 Data Collection System User Guide, GA34-0040 ... 5230
Data Collection System Console Guide, Model 1 GX34-0041 ...
5230 Data Collection System Console Guide, Model 2 GX340042 ... 5230 Data Collection System Console Guide, Model 3
GX34-0043 ... 5230 Data Collection System Data Communications Guide, GC34-0044 ... 5230 Data Collection System Badge
Specifications, GA21-9259
1. See M2700 pages for additional information concerning modems. communication facilities. machine attachment requirements. operating capabilities. and
customer responsibilities.
2. Refer to the U.S. Data Communications Handbook
Environment: See "Systems" 5230.
Publications
Test Allowance: No pre- or post-test allowance available for
the 5230 Data Collection System. See General Information
"Test Facility Operations."
5230 Data Collection System Accessory Package
For Model 1 Ribbon (*) PIN 1136849 and 96-column cards.
PIN 3700.
For Model 2 IBM 128 byte diskettes. PIN 2305830.
For Model 3 Ink Roll Assembly (*) P/ N 432695 and 80 column
cards. PIN 5081.
(*) One supplied with the controller.
Purpose: Contains the parts necessary for th~ customer to
complete his preinstallation responsibilities. All items in the
Accessory Package are prerequisites (except the Alarm Connector B/M 2461785) to some machines of the 5230 System.
The Contacts Closure Accessory is a prerequisite only for feature code #1480. The accessory items are ordered via the MES
Order Guide, Z120-2665 through AAS. Normal schedule ship
date for the accessory package items or customer supplied
equivalents should be scheduled to preceed the 5230 system
by seven weeks. Items ordered are purchase only and no maintenance is available. Normal parts warranty of 3 months is
applicable.
Highlights: The Accessory Package provides the capability for
the customer to order and install those physical installation
accessories not readily available from the customer's normal
supplier. The ship date for these accessory items must be a
minimum of seven weeks prior to the other 5230 machines.
This is to allow the customer time to complete his preinstallation responsibilities prior to receiving the 5230 system. See the
5230 Data Collection System User Guide, GA34-0040 chapter
titled "Installation-Schedule of Events."
Publications
See IBM 5230 Data Collection System User Guide, GA34-0040
for schedule and preinstallation instructions.
Customer responsibilities: See "Systems" 5230.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---.
----- -=-=---=
-----------,,-~-
M5231.5
Nov 78
General Systems Division-Machines
Ordering Instructions
Features
Station Connector B/M 2461780: Provides the interface
between each Entry Station (5234, 5235 and 5236) and the
loop cable. Addressing switches for entry station identification
and a bypass relay are included as part of the connector. One
station connector is required f<;>r each 5234, 5235 and 5236. It
is recommended that at ieast one spa re station connector
should be ordered per 5230 system. The customer is responsible for supplying the receptacle housing for the station connector. {Refer to GA34-0040 for details}.
Mounting Bracket B/M 2461781: Provides a metal bracket
for either wall, pedestal or table mounting of a 5235 or a 5234.
One mounting bracket is a prerequisite for each 5235 and
5234.
Loop Cable B/M 2461783 and B/M 2461784: Cable available from I BM to meet the loop requirements. Available in either
152m (500 ft.) spools B/M 2461783 or 304m (1000 ft.) spools
B/M 2461784.
All accessories must be ordered against the 5231 Controller
only
On the MES physically enter the chargeable accessories
before entering the non-chargeable items
Accessories
Bill of
Material
Station Connector
Mounting Bracket
Loop Cable 152m (500')
Loop Cable 304m (1000')
Alarm Connector
Loop Connector
Contacts Closure Accessory
2461780
2461781
2461783
2461784
2461785
2461786
4413082
Loop cable B/M 2461783 or B/M 2461784 or equivalent must
be used for system preinstallation. Specifications of this cable
must be met if other cable is used.
Alarm Connector B/M 2461785: Provides a three pin connector to attach an external alarm to the 5231 Controller. The
customer provides the external alarm and the wiring to the
alarm connector B/M 2461785. The customer provided wire
must be stranded 20 AWG. Voltage and current on the wire
must not exceed 48V and 1.5 Amps respectively. The connector is plugged into the 5231 Controller at installation time. The
customer supplied alarm is used, if desired, to provide an audible or visual signal to the customer when the 5231 Controller
requires operator attention. This no charge feature may be
desirable even though the 5231 has an internal audible alarm as
a standard feature.
Loop Connectors B/M 2461786: Provides the connection
between the 5231 Controller and the loop cable. One loop
connector is a prerequisite for each 5231 Controller, and one
for each additional loop (4700, 4701, 4702) attached to the
controller.
Contacts Closure Accessory B/M 4413082: is prerequisite
for installing the Contacts Closure Feature (#1480) on the 5234
or 5.235/5236. Accessory contains associated connectors,
printed circuit card, and relay. It is recommended that at least
one spare be ordered per 5230 System. More may be required
if several features are installed per system. Customer must
provide the external devices with required power and, if necessary, any circuitry to activate external devices that may require
a longer time than the contact closure time of 0.5 seconds
minimum. Contact maximum ratings are 28 VAC/vDC at 1.5
amperes. The I BM supplied crimp on terminals for connecting
external device are designed for 18 to 22 AWG wire. Two sets
of contacts are provided that can be used in a normally open or
normally closed mode. The customer is responsible for supplying the receptacle housing for the Contact Closure Accessory.
(Refer to GA34-0040 for details.)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-.---=
-= - -- - General Systems Division-Machines
====
-------_.5234 TIME ENTRY STATION
Supplies: See 5231 "Machines."
Purpose: An input device for the 5230 Data Collection System.
Publication
Prerequisites;
M5234.1
Nov 78
IBM 5230 Data Collection System User Guide, GA34-0040.
Specify
1. An available position on a loop multiplexer on the 5231
Controller.
2. The following. items from the 5230 Data Collection System
Accessory Package. See 5231 Machines for details.
B/M 2461780 Station Connector (One)
B/M 2461781 Mounting Bracket (One)
B/ M 4413082 Contact Closure Accessory (one) required
for feature #1480.
Note: The 5230 Data Collection Accessory Package items
must have a scheduled ship date at least seven weeks prior
to the ship date of the 5234 Time Entry Station. See the
"5230 Data collection System User Guide" for the preinstallation schedule.
Cables: No cable order required.
Highlights: The 5234 is Industrially packaged and attaches to
the 5231 Controller via a twisted pair, shielded loop. Both
models provide a four-position continental time of day display.
Additionally. a key operated, three position mode switch
(supervisor. test. and normal mode) is provided. Two keys
operate the mode switch. one for supervisor mode and a separate key for test mode.
Model 1 With Hole Badge Reader: Reads identification
badges (22-column card sized) prepunched in I BM code with a
maximum of 10 numeric digits. Badges with or without a pocket clip may be used.
(1) Voltage (115VAC. 1-phase. 3 wire. 60 cycle. locking plug)
#9880.
Special Features
Audible Indicator (#1470): Provides an audible indication to
the operator at the successful completion of a badge operation.
Field Installation: Yes.
Contacts Closure (#1480): Provides the capability for the
activation of customer provided external devices. These devices, for example. may be audible alarms. visual indicators. or
devices that provide limited access to restricted areas. Activa:tion of the external contracts will occur on 5234 Entry Station
successful badge read. This feature. which is in addition to the
normal visual indicators, can be ordered instead of or in addition to the audible indicator feature (Feature Code #1470). A
set of DPDT contacts is available. (Two sets of contacts that
can be used in either a normally open or normally closed
mode). Prerequisite: Contacts Closure Accessory (B/M
4413082). Limitations: Customer must provide power supply
for driving external devices. Contact maximum rating is 28
VAC/VDC at 1.5 amperes. Contact activation time is 0.5 seconds minimum. Field Installation: Yes. Installation: Refer to
User's Guide, GA34-0040. Installation of Contacts Closure
Accessory is similar to installation of Station Connector Assembly.
Model 2 With a Magnetic Stripe Badge Reader: Reads
identification badges (22-column card sized) magnetically
encoded with a ma"imum of 17 numeric digits. Size compatible
badges used with other IBM products are accepted by the
5234. Badges with or without a pocket clip may be used. __ _
Model Changes: Field installation. Yes.
Customer Responsibilities: Maintenance of the 5234 will
take place at the 5231 Controller location. The dedicated main--tenance port (first entry station position on the standard loop
multiplexer) will be used for maintenance only.
Limitations: Loop operations will not continue properly in the
event of a 5234. 5235 and 5236 Entry Station power off situation if the total resultant distance between operating units
(5231 /5234/5235/5236) exceeds 690m (2000 feet).
Environment: See "5230. Systems."
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
II~
----- -- General Systems Division-Machines
=
=---=
- - - ----.--
M5235.1
Nov 78
-~-,,-
5235 DATA ENTRY STATION MODEL 1
Purpose: An input device for the 5230 Data Collection System.
Environment: See 5230 "Systems."
Prerequisites:
Supplies: See M5231 "Machines."
1. An available position on a loop multiplexer on the 5231
Publication
Controller.
units
resultant
distance
between
operating
(5231 /5234/5235/5236) exceeds 609m (2000 feet).
,
IBM 5230 Data Collection System User Guide, GA34-0040.
2. The following items from the 5230 Data Collection System
Accessory Package. See 5231 in Machines for details.
BIM 24617S0 Station Connector (One)
BIM 24617S1 Mounting Bracket (One)
B/M 44130S2 Contact Closure Accessory (one) required for
feature #14S0
Note: The 5230 Data Collection System Accessory Package
items must have a scheduled ship date at least seven weeks
prior to the ship date of the 5235 Data Entry Station. See
the "5230 Data Collection System User Guide" for the
preinstallation schedule.
Specify
Voltage (115V AC, (1) 1-phase, 3 wire, 60 cycle, locking plug)
#9SS0.
Special Features
Badge Reader-Punched Hole (#1401): Provides the ability
to read identification badges (22-column card sized) prepunched in I BM code with a maximum of 10 numeric digits.
Badges with or without a pocket clip may be used. Size compatible hole badges used with other IBM products are accepted
specifications for the 5235.
by the 5235 if they meet other
Cables: No cable order required.
Highlights: The 5235 is industrially packaged and attaches to
the 5231 Controller via a twisted pair, shielded loop.
The basic unit provides variable numeric data entry capability
... customer defined action keys ... numeric display ability '"
continental time of day display ... mode switch (key operated)
... control keys ... status indicators.
Action Keys Eight customer defined keys used for individual
action definitions.
Badge Reader-Magnetic Stripe (#1402): Provides the
ability to read identification badges (22-column card sized)
magnetically encoded with a maximum of 17 numeric characters. Badges with or without a pocket clip may be used. Sizes
compatible magnetic badges used with other I BM products arp.
accepted by the 5235.
Numeric Keyboard Ten numeric keys arranged in a pattern
similar to a telephone keypad.
Display An eight-position d~splay used for continental time of
day, operator guidance, and display of key entered data. Data
entered through the Value Read Attachment (#3400) is also
displayed.
Mode Switch Key Operated-A three-position keylock
(Supervisor, test, and normal mode). One key is supplied for
supervisor use and a second different key for test mode use.
Control Keys The "ENTER" (E) key is used to indicate completion of a field of keyed data ... the "CLEAR" (C) is used to
delete a field of keyed data.
Status Indicators Advise the operator that the station is ready,
in process, or error.
Optional Features: Either an SO- or 96-column card reader
may be attached as a feature. Either a punched hole or magnetic stripe badge reader may be attached as a feature. See
"Special Features."
Customer Responsibilities: Maintenance of the 5235 will
take place at the 5231 Controller location. The dedicated maintenance port (first entry station position on the standard loop
multiplexer) will be used for maintenance only.
Limitations: Loop operations will not continue properly in the
event of a 5234, 5235 or 5236 power off situation if the total
Audible Indicator (#1470): Provides an audible indication to
the operator at the successful completion of a badge read
operation or upon completion of a transaction when the Transaction Indicator RPQ (D07009) is installed on the associated
5231. Either Badge Reader or RPQ (007009) is required for
this feature. Field Installation: Yes.
Card Reader-96 Col (#1510): Provides a single card reader
capable of reading columns 1-32 of a 96-column card (1 st tier)
at a rated speed of 30 columns/second. A 64 character set
including blanks is recognized. All other EBCDIC characters
will be accepted by the entry station and converted to blanks.
Cards are inserted face up column one edge first. Upper left
and upper right corner cuts are permitted. External scores
System/3-1 (bottom edge) and System/3-3 (column 32 edge)
are permitted as well as left and right edge continuous forms
scores. Standard DP-7 Point, Heavy Duty card stock, DP-9
Point, Super Stock, and Merchandise Tags with or without
upper right score or hole may be used. Limitation: This feature is mutually exclusive on the same data entry station with
CARD READER-SO COL (#1520). Field Installation: Yes.
Card Reader-80 Col (#1520): Provides a single card reader
capable of reading columns 1-64 of an SO-column card at a
rated speed of 30 columns/ second. A 64 character set including blanks is recognized. All other EBCDIC characters will be
accepted by the entry station and converted to blanks. Upper
left and upper right corner cuts (C1, C2, C3) are permitted.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---.-- --=---=
General Systems Division-Machines
-=-=- ------.
- - - -
--
y
Cards are inserted face up 80"':column edge first. External
sCores (column 1 end only) M-3, M-4, M-5, M-6, M-7, OM-2,
CF-4 and CF-11 are permitted. Internal scores may be M-3,
M-4, inverse M-5. Standard DP-itPoint. Heavy Duty card
stock, DP-9 Point, Super Stock, and Port-A-Punch cards may
be used. Limitation: This feature is mutually exclusive on the
same data entry station with Card Reader-96 Col (#1510).
Field Installation: Yes.
Contacts Closure (#1480.): Provides the capability for the
activation of customer provided external devices. These devices, for example, may be audible alarms. visual indicators, or
devices that provide limited access to restricted areas. Activation of the external contacts will occur on 5235 Entry Station
successful badge read or upon completion of a transaction
when the Transaction Indicator RPQ (D07009) is installed on
the associated 5231. Either Badge Reader or RPQ (D07009) is
required for this feature. This feature, which is in addition to
the normal visual indicators, can be ordered instead of or in
addition to the audible indicator feature (Feature Code #1470).
Customer may order spare Contact Closure Accessory (B/ M
4413082). A set of DPDT contacts is available. (Two sets of
contacts that can be used in either a normally open or normally
closed mocte). Prerequisite: Contact Closure Accessory (B/M
4413082). Limitations: Customer must provide power supply
for driving external devices. Contact maximum rating is
28VAC/VDC at 1.5 amperes. Contact activation time is 0.5
seconds minimum. Field Installation: Yes. Installation:
Refer to User's Guide GA34-0040 TNL available prior to first
customer ship. Installation of Contact Closure Accessory is
similar to installation of Station Connector Assembly.
Value Read Attachment Feature (#3400). Provides the capability to enter values from scales, counters, keyboards, switches
and other similar devices directly into the 5235 or 5236 data
entry station. Connection of the device to the Value Read
Attachment is accomplished through the 5239 Value Read
Module. The Value Read Attachment is mutually exclusive with
the badge or card reader in the 5235 or 5236 Data Entry Station. Field Installation: Yes.
Note: The user is responsible for setting up the 5239 and performing all connections to the Value Input Device.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M5235.2
Nov 78
----- - =---=
-- - ---
-- =
M5236.1
.-
Nov 78
General Systems Division-Machines
5236 DATA ENTRY STATION MODEL 1
resultant
distance
between
operating
(5231 /5234/5235/5236) e~ceeds 699m (2000 feet).
Purpose: An input device for the 5230 Data Collection System.
Environment: See 5230 "Systems."
Prerequisites:
Supplies: See M5231 "Machines."
1. An available position on a loop multiplexer on the 5231
Controller.
Publication
units
..>t
2. The following items from the 5230 Data Collection System
Accessory Package. See 5231 in Machines for details.
IBM 5230 Data Collection System User Guide, GA34-0040.
Specify
B/M 24617BO Station Connector (One)
Voltage (115V AC, (1) 1-phase, 3 wfre, 60 cycle, locking plug}
#9BBO.
B/ M 44130B2 Contact Closure Accessory (one) required for
feature #14BO
Special Features
Note: The 5230 Data Collection System Accessory Package
items must have a scheduled ship date at least seven weeks
prior to the ship date of the 5236 Data Entry Station. See
the "5230 Data Collection System User Guide" for the
preinstallation schedule.
Badge Reader-Punched Hole (#1401): Provides the ability
to read identification badges {22-column card sized} prepunched in IBM code with a maximum of 10 numeric digits.
Badges with or without a pocket clip may be used. Size compatible hole badges used with other I BM products are accepted
by the 5236 if they meet other
specifications for the 5236.
Cables: No cable order required.
Highlights: The 5236 is packaged in attractive desktop configuration and attaches to the 5231 Controller via a twisted
pair, shielded loop.
The basic unit provides variable numeric data entry capability
... customer defined action keys ... numeric display ability ...
continental time of day display ... mode switch (key operated)
... control keys ... status indicators.
Action Keys Eight customer defined keys used for individual
action definitions.
Numeric Keyboard Ten numeric keys arranged in a pattern
similar to a telephone keypad.
Badge Reader-Magnetic Stripe (#1402): Provides the
ability to read identification badges (22-column card sized)
magnetically encoded with a maximum of 17 numeric characters. Badges with or without a pocket clip may be used. Sizes
compatible magnetic badges used with other IBM products are
accepted by the 5236.
Display An eight-position display used for continental time of
day, operator guidance, and display of key entered data. Data
entered through the Value Read Attachment (#3400) is also
displayed.
Mode Switch Key Operated-A three-position keylock
(Supervisor, test, and normal mode). One key is supplied for
supervisor use and a secona different key for test mode use.
Control Keys The "ENTER" (E) key is used to indicate completion of a field of keyed data ... the "CLEAR" (C) is used to
delete a field of keyed data.
Status Indicators Advise the operator that the station is ready,
in process, or error.
Optional Features: Either an BO- or 96-column card reader
may be attached as a feature. Either a punched hole or magnetic stripe badge reader may be attached as a feature. See
"Special Features."
Customer Responsibilities: Maintenance of the 5236 will
take place at the 5231 Controller location. The dedicated maintenance port (first entry station position on the standard loop
multiplexer) will be used for maintenance only.
Limitations: Loop operations will not continue properly in the
event of a 5234, 5235 or 5236 power off situation if the total
Audible Indicator (#1470): Provides an audible indication to
the operator at the successful completion of a badge read
operation or upon completion of a transaction when the Transaction Indicator RPO (D07009) is installed on the associated
5231. Either Badge Reader or RPQ (D07009) is required for
this feature. Field Insta"ation: Yes.
Card Reader-96 Col (#1510): Provides a single card reader
capable of reading columns 1-32 of a 96-column card (1 st tier)
at a rated speed of 30 columns/ second. A 64 character set
including blanks is recognized. All other EBCDIC characters
will be accepted by the entry station and converted to blanks.
Cards are inserted face up column one edge first. Upper left
and upper right corner cuts are permitted. External scores
System/3-1 (bottom edge) and System/3-3 (column 32 edge)
are permitted as well as left and right edge continuous forms
scores. Standard DP-7 Point, Heavy Duty card stock, DP-9
Point, Super Stock, and Merchandise Tags with or without
upper right score or hole may be used. Limitation: This feature is mutually exclusive on the same data entry station with
CARD READER-80 COL (#1520). Field Insta"ation: Yes.
Card Reader-SO Col (#1520): Provides a single card reader
capable of reading columns 1-64 of an BO-column card at a
rated speed of 30 columns/ second. A 64 character set including blanks is recognized. All other EBCDIC characters will be
accepted by the entry station and converted to blanks. Upper
left and upper right corner cuts (C1, C2, C3) are permitted.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--...---.--- -------=
=--==
- - - ----
_
M5236.2
General Systems Division-Machines
...
Cards are inserted face up 80-column edge first. External
scores (column 1 end only) M-3, M-4, M-5, M-6,M-7, OM-2,
CF-4 and CF-11 are permitted. Internal scores may be M-3,
M-4, inverse M-5. Standard DP~ 7 Point, Heavy Duty card
stock, DP-9 Point, Super Stock, and Port-A-Punch cards may
be used. Limitation: This feature is mutqally exclusive on the
same data entry station with Card Reader-96 Col (#1510).
Field Installation: Yes.
Contacts Closure (#1480): Provides the capability for the
activation of customer provided external devices. These devices, for example, may be audible alarms, visual indicators, or
devices that provide limited access to restricted areas. Activation of the external contacts will occur on 5236 Entry Station
successful badge read or upon completion of a transaction
when the Transaction Indicator RPQ (007009) is installed on
the associated 5231. Either Badge Reader or RPQ (007009) is
required for this feature. This feature, which is in addition to
the normal visual indicators, can be ordered instead of or in
addition to the audible indicator feature (Feature Code #1470).
Customer may order spare Contact Closure Accessory (B/M
4413082). A set of DPDT contacts is available. (Two sets of
contacts that can be used in either a normally open or normally
closed mode). Prerequisite: Contact Closure Accessory (B/M
4413082). Limitations: Customer must provide power supply
for driving external devices. Contact maximum rating is 28
VACIVDC at 1.5 amperes. Contact activation time is 0.5 seconds minimum. Field Installation: Yes. Installation: Refer to
User's Guide, GA34-0040 TNL available prior to first customer
ship. Installation of Contact Closure Accessory is similar to
installation of Station Connector Assembly.
Value Read Attachment Feature (#3400): Provides the
capability to enter values from scales, counters, keyboards,
switches and other similar devices directly Into the 5235 or
5236 data entry station. Connection of the device to the Value
Read Attachment is accomplished through the 5239 Value
Read Module. The Value Read Attachment is mutually exclusive with the badge or card reader in the 5235 or 5236 Data
Entry Station. Field Installation: Yes.
Note: The user is responsible for setting the 5239 and performing all connections to the Value Input Device.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Nov 78
--------=--==
_____
1IW_ General Systems Division-Machines
------- - ---" -
-=
5239 VALUE READ MODULE MODEL 1
Purpose: An input device for the 5230 Data Collection System
that provides an interface between external devices (such as
scales, counters, keyboards and switches) and the Value Read
Attachment of the 5235 and 5236 Data Entry Stations.
1. Value Read Attachment Feature (#3400) on a 5235 or 5236
Data Entry Station.
Highlights: The 5239 provides 4 selectable modes of operation from manual to automatic:
Operator controlled reading and entry.
Keyboard or device input available.
- Protected:
Keyboard locked during data reading. Operator
controlled reading and entry from device.
- Semi-Automatic: Automatic reading with operator entry.
- Automatic:
Nov 78
#9066: Pearl White if used with the 5236 Data Entry Station.
Prerequisites:
. ,. Manual:
M5239.1
Reading and entry controlled from external
device.
Permits unattended data collection of externally
provided data.
Customer selection of reading mode for each
terminals.
Up to eight numeric digits can be entered from
one or more devices.
Operates with either BCD/TTL parallel or, ~ "f 10 dry contact
external devices.
Cables: No cable order required.
Customer Responsibilities: Maintenance of the 5239 will
take place at the 5231 Controller location.
For specific customer responsibilities, see "Systems" 5230.
Environment: See 5230 "Systems".
Publication: IBM 5230 Data Collection System User Guide
(GA34-0040).
Specify:
1. Value Read BCD (#9950). Electronic Device Input provides
for connection of BCD/TTL parallel external devices to the
Value Read Attachment. Provides manual and automatic
selectable modes of operation. The Value Read Atachment
#3400 for the 5235 and 5236 Data Entry Stations is a prerequisite
or
Value Read 1 of 10 (9951). Electromechanical Device Input
provides for connection of 1 of 10 or BCD dry contact external devices to the Value Read Attachment. Provides manual
and automatic selectable modes of operation. The Value
Read Attachment #3400 for the 5235 and 5236 Data Entry
Stations is a prerequisite.
2. Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase. 3 wire, 60 cycle, locking plug)
#9880.
3. Color #9065: Pebble Gray if used with the 5235 Data Entry
Station.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
-==--=
--=
=
-- --------.-
M5251.1
Nov 78
General Systems Division-Machines
-~-y-
5251 DISPLAY STATION
Purpose: The 5251 is an advanced function display station for
System/34 and System/38 for entering, editing and displaying
alphanumeric data. A movable keyboard permits the operator
to display, enter and manipulate data on the screen in a high~y
flexible and efficient manner. Available in four models:
Model 1 Displays up to 960 characters with 12 lines of 80
characters each. Attaches to the 5251 Models 2 or 12, 5340,
or 5381. Used as the system console with System/34.
Model 2 Displays up to 960 characters with 12 lines of 80
characters each. Provides communication capability with
System/34 and System/38 in SNA/SDLC mode. Optional
features allow up to eight additional work stations to be attached.
Model 11 Displays up to 1920 characters with 24 lines of 80
characters each. Attaches to the 5251 Moaels 2 or 12, 5340,
or 5381. Used as the system console with System/34.
Model 12 Displays up to 1920 characters with 24 lines of 80
characters each. Provides communication capability with
System/34 and System/38 in SNA/SDLC mode. Optional
features allow up to eight work stations to be attached.
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Highlights: The standard character set includes ninety-six 8 x
16 dot matrix characters-52 upper/lowercase alphabetic, 10
numeric, 34 special characters in addition to "space." A 188character Multinational Character Set (see Special Features
below) is available, providing 112 alphabetic, 10 numeric, and
66 special displayable characters in addition to "space." See
Type Catalog for character set and keyboard layout. Display
functions in addition to normal intensity are high intensity,
nondisplay, blinking, underscore, column separator, and reverse image (dark characters on a light background) on a field
basis. The operator can reverse the image of the entire screen.
An audible alarm, under program control, is provided to alert
the operator to special conditions. The keyboard with 24 application assigned command functions provides input and control
flexibility. See "Special Features" below.
Security Enhancements: Data fields may be defined so
entered data is accepted without being displayed on the
screen. A Keylock (special feature) prevents operator usage of
the display and keyboard when the key is in the locked position. The display is blanked and keyboard data entry is inhibited when the Keylock is locked. A Magnetic Stripe Reader
(Feature #4910) is available for entering user identification.
Field Editing: Individual data input fields may be edited as
Alphanumeric, Alpha Only, Signed Numeric, Field Exit Required, Right Adjust, Mandatory Entry, Mandatory Fill, Bypass,
Auto Enter, Dup Enable, Monocase and Self-Check Modulus
10 and 11 (Self-Check is optional on the 5251 Models 2 and
12).
For Direct Attachment to System/34: One 5251 Model 1 or
11 Display Station or 5252 Dual Display Station is required on
System / 34 for use as a system console. The console is attached to one of four twinax cable connectors on the 5340 via a
6 m (20 ft) cable provided with the 5340. For maintenance
reasons, only one of the above machine types (5251 or 5252)
should be attached to this cable. Three additional twinax cable
connectors on the 5340 are provided for attachment of additional work stations (5251 Models 1 or 11 or 5252 or 5256). A
maximum of eight work stations, including the system console,
may be attached to the 5340. A 5252 represents two work
stations. The maximum length of anyone twinax cable is 1525
m (5000 ft). Up to three such cables may be attached to the
5340. Multiple work stations (up to seven) may be attached to
one cable via a Cable Thru feature with each work station. See
IBM
5250
Information
Display
System
Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GA21-9277 for cabling information.
For Direct Attachment to System/3S: The 5381 System
Unit provides 8 cable connectors for attachment of the 5251
Model 1 and 11 Display Stations, 5252 Dual Display Stations
and 5256 Printers and supports up to 12 of these work stations. Optional features on the 5381 allow up to 40 work stations to be attached. The 5252 represents 2 work stations.
The cable attachment may be made with either Twinax or Coax
cable. Twinax cable connection: Maximum length of anyone
Twinax cable is 1525 m (5000 ft.). Up to 7 work stations may
be attached to a Twinax cable via a Cable Thru feature (#2680)
on each work station. Coax cable connection: Maximum length
of anyone Coax ca ble is 610 m (2000 ft.) between the system
attachment and the work station. (Twinax/ Coax Ada pter Kit is
required. Refer to Accessories.) A second work station may be
attached via the Cable Thru feature (#2680). Twinax cable
must be used between the first and second work station and
the maximum allowable distance between these two work
stations is 30 m (100 ft.) See IBM 5250 Information Display
System Installation Manual Physical Planning (GA21-9277) for
cabling information.
Clustering: The 5251 Models 1 and 11 may be attached to
the 5251 Model 2 or 12 with the Cluster (#2550) or the Dual
Cluster (#2551) feature. The Cluster feature allows attachment
of up to four work stations (5251 Models 1 or 11 or 5252 or
5256) and the Dual Cluster feature allows attachment of up to
eight work stations. A 5252 represents two work stations. See
IBM
5250
Information
Display
System
Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GA21-9277 for cabling information.
Communications: The 5251 Models 2 and 12 communicate
with a System/34 or a System/38 equipped with Communications Adapters operating in SDLC mode only. See 5340 and
5381 for Communication Adapters. The Models 2 and 12
communicate in half duplex mode on non-switched (leased)
point-to-point and multipoint communication lines which may
be duplex or half-duplex facilities at speeds up to 9600 bps,
and on switched (dial) point-to-point communication lines at
speeds up to 4800 bps. See M2700 pages for information on
communications facilities.
A 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500 or 5502), or EIA Interface (#3701), or DDS Adapter (#5650 or #5651) is required.
See "Special Features" and "Specify" for the required communication cable.
I BM Modems: One I BM modem may be attached to a 5251
Model 2 or 12. Prerequisite: EIA Interface (#3701).
Modem
Speed (bps)
3872 Model 1 2400/1200
3874 Model 1 4800/2400
3875 Model 1 7200/3600
Note: 5251 Models 2 and 12 £lo not support Auto Call Originate (#1091) on the 3872 or 3874 and Fan-Out (#3901) on the
3872, 3874 or 3875. For communications capabilities, product
utilization and special features, see M2700. M3872. M3874
and M3875.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--...
.---= = =--== General SyStems Division-Machines
~
- - -----
M5251.2
Nov 78
-~-.-
IBM Data Encryption Devices: An IBM 3845 or IBM 3846
Data Encryption Device may be attached between the 52512/12 and the external modem. Prerequisite: EIA Interface
(#3701 ).
Note: Refer to M2700, 3845\ and 3846 pages for information
on 3845 or 3846 configuration and communications capability.
3845 or 3846 devices operating with SDLC protocol will not
operate with N RZI transmission mode.
Problem Determination Procedures: Significant function
has been designed into this unit to provide greater availability
to the customer through the use of problem determination and
recovery procedures that are easily understood and used by the
operator. The procedures are provided in the IBM 5251
Operator's Guide. Also, see "Customer Responsibility" below.
Customer Setup (CSU): The 5251 is designated as a customer setup device thereby offering the customer early availability and relocation flexibility. For additional information on
CS U, refer to the G I Section 2. The Marketing Representative
must advise the customer of his responsibilities before receipt
of the machine.
Customer Responsibility: The customer is responsible for:
Receipt, unpacking and placement of the 5251.
•
Physical setup, connection of cables to TP lines/modems
and I BM devices incorporating protected access areas,
switch setting and checkout in accordance with instructions
supplied by IBM. Under certain conditions, when using
integrated modems, an IBM CE may be required. Details of
these conditions will be described in the Customer Setup
instructions.
Notifying IBM of intent to relocate and following IBM instructions for relocation 01' the 5251 .
Disconnecting, packing and removal to the customer's
shipping dock at the time of discontinuance. Removal instructions and packaging materials (if required) will be ordered by the Branch Office.
Relocation of the 5251, if required, to allow I BM service
access.
Using and following the problem determination procedures
for the 5251 prior to calling for IBM service.
•
Providing a desk or tabletop to support the 5251.
Installation and maintenance of signal cables and associated parts for attaching the 5251 Model 1 or 11 to the 5251
Model 2 or 12, 5340 or the 5381 .
The installation and maintenance of commpn carrier
facilities/ services. For further information, see M2700
. pages and "Teleprocessing Systems" in the General Information section of the Sales Manual.
•
•
Obtaining a firm installation date for the start of transmission services (including any required modems). The IBM
Marketing Representative must assure that a firm installation date is established pnor to processing the Order Confirmation card.
When adding additional direct or remote display stations to
System/34 or System/38, the customer may have to modify the system configuration specifications. See IBM
System/34 Program Product Installation and Modification
Reference Manual (SC21-7689) or IBM Sysrem/38 Program
Product Installation Guide (availability to be announced in a
future PRL).
Prerequisites
For Models 1 and 11: A 5251 Model 2 or 12 with Cluster
(#2550) feature or Dual Cluster (#2551) feature or a 5340 or a
5381.
For Models 2 and 12: Transmission via common carrier facility,
to a 5340 or 5381 with a Communications Adapter, requires a
modem or a DDS Adapter. See 5340 and 5381 for Communications Adapters.
Manuals: IBM 5250 Information Display System Introduction
Manual, GA21-9246 and IBM 5250 Information Display System
Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA21-9277.
Specify
1. Voltage (115V AC, 1-Phase, 60 Hz): #9881 for a standard
non-locking plug (uses customer standard type receptacle)
or #9880 for a locking plug (requires customer locking type
receptacle) .
2. A keyboard must be selected (see Special Features).
3. Color: Pearl white only (no specify required).
4. Cables: See Accessories for 5251 Models 1 and 11 cable
ordering instructions. For cable specifications, see the 5250
Information Display System Installation Manual-Physical
Planning, GA21-9277. Specify: #9050 if cable is ordered
from IBM, #9055 if cable is ordered from another source,
#9060 if 5251 is used with System/34 as the system console (no cable order required), #9065 if existing cable will be
used (no cable order required).
5. Communication Cable (Models 2 and 12 only): A 6 m (20 ft)
communication cable is provided as standard for attachment to an external modem or (0 a communication facility
when an integrated modem is used. If a 12 m (40 ft) cable
is desired, specify #9461.
6. DDSA (#5650 or #5651) Transmission Speed: #9822 for
2400 bps, #9823 for 4800 bps or #9825 for 9600 bps.
7. System Attachment: Specify the unit that the 5251 Model 1
or 11 is attached to: #9559 for 5251 Model 2, #9560 for
5251 Model 12 or #9561 for 5340, or #9562 for 5381.
Prices: See price list.
Special Features
All Models
Keyboard (#4600, #4601, #4602): One of the following must
be selected:
(#4600)-83-key keyboard with the EBCDIC character set,
typewriter-like layout, movable, with 49 alphanumeric keys, 24
control keys and 10-key numeric pad .
(#4601 )-66-key data entry style keyboard, movable, with 36
alphanumeric keys, 23 control keys, and 7 blank keys.
(#4602)-66-key data entry style keyboard with proof arrangement, movable, with 36 alphanumeric keys, 23 control keys
and 7 blank keys. The numeric keys are arranged similar to
those of an adding machine. Limitations: #4601 and #4602
are not supported when 5251 is directly or remotely attached
to the 5340. Maximum: One of the above. Field Installable:
Yes.
Keylock (#4655): Provides a lock and two keys which prevents operator entry and display of data when in a locked
position. Maximum: One. Field Installable: Yes.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----= -==--:
General Systems Division-Machines
-- -----
-=
M5251.3
Nov 78
-~-.,-
Multinational Character Set (#4905): Provides the capability
of displaying the 188 character Multinational Character Set to
facilitate the interchange of information between systems with
different language groups. Limitations: The keyboards do not
include the additional characters of the Multinational Character
Set. All characters may be entered via a single or multiple key
sequence. Prerequisites: Multinational Control (#4905) on
5340. All work stations attached to the System/34 and 5251
Model 2 or 12, must have the same character set. Maximum:
One. Field Installable: Not recommended for field installation.
Magnetic Stripe Reader (#4910): Provides the capability of
reading numeric encoded information from a magnetic stripe on
a wide range of credit cards, identification cards, and documents. The magnetic stripe may be encoded with up to 128
ABA numeric characters, including control characters. This
feature enhances system data security by providing the ability
to read an operator identification card without being displayed.
Expanded Function (#3600): Provides the following:
Copy provides for the direct transfer and printing of a screen
image from the 5251 Model 2 or 12 or an attached 5251
Model 1 or 11 or 5252 to a printer attached to the 5251
Model 2 or 12. The selection and allocation of the printer is
controlled by the system program.
Magnetic Stripe Reader Control provides control for Magnetic
Stripe Readers (#4910) feature on the 5251 Models 2 or 12
and on attached 5251 Models 1 and 11 and 5252s.
Selector Light Pen Control provides control for Selector Light
Pen (#6300) features on the 5251 Model 2 or 12 and on
attached 5251 Models 1 and 11.
Self Check Number provides Modulus 10 and 11 checking to
assure that all digits of a number have been correctly keyed
from the 5251 Model 2 or 12 keyboard or the attached 5251
Model 1 or 11 or 5252 keyboards.
Maximum: One. Field Installable: Yes.
limitations: Valid for numeric-only data
and single data fields. Not supported when 5251 is directly
attached to the 5381. Prerequisite: Expanded Function
(#3600) on 5251 Models 2 and 12 or Work Station Control
Expansion A (#4900) on 5340 when 5251 Models 1 or 11 are
directly attached. Maximum: One. Field Installable: Yes.
Selector Light Pen (#6300): A hand-held, pen-like device that
permits the operator to select fields of data from the display
screen for system input. Limitations: Not supported when
5251 is directly or remotely attached to the 5340 or directly
attached to the 5381. Prerequisite: Expanded Function
(#3600) on 5251 Models 2 or 12. Maximum: One. Field
Installable: Not recommended for field installation.
Models 1 and 11 Only
Cable Thru (#2680): Provides the capability of connecting
multiple 5251 Models 1 and 11, 5252s and 5256s to a single
twinax cable. Each unit on the cable, except the last, requires
this feature. (Note: For relocation flexibility, the customer
should consider including #2680 on all work stations).
Maximum: One. Field Installable: Yes.
Models 2 and 12 Only
Cluster (#2550): Allows attachment of up to four work stations (5251 Models 1 or 11, or 5252 or 5256). Provides four
cable connections. The maximum allowable length of each
twinax cable is 1525 m (5000 ft) and the maximum allowable
length of each coax cable is 610 m (2000 ft.). To attach multiple work stations (up to four) to one twinax cable, see Cable
Thru (#2680) feature for the 5251 Models 1 and 11, 5252 and
5256. limitation: Cannot be installed with Dual Cluster
(#2551) feature. A 5252 represents two work stations.
Maximum: One. Field Insta"able: Ves.
Dual Cluster (#2551): Allows attachment of up to eight work
stations (5251 Models 1 or 11, 5252s and 5256s). Two sets of
four cable connectors are provided and up to four work stations may be attached to each set. The maximum allowable
length of each twinax cable is 1525 m (5000 ft) and the maximum allowable length of each coax cable is 610 m (2000 ft.).
To attach mUltiple work stations (up to four) to one twinax
cable, see Cable Thru (#2680) feature for the 5251 Models 1
and 11, 5252s and 5256s. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
Cluster (#2550) feature. A 5252 represents two work stations.
Maximum: One. Field Installable: Yes.
EIA Interface (#3701): Provides an interface for attachment
of an IBM Modem or non-IBM Modem meeting RS-232-C
characteristics. Non-I BM Modems may be attached subject to
the Multiple Suppliers System Policy. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with DDS Adapter (#5650 or #5651) or 1200 bps
Integrated Modem (#5500, 5502). Prerequisite: Specify
#9492 when external modem has SNBU capability.
Note: I nternal Clock (#4703) is also required when the external
modem does not provide its own clocking. Maximum: One.
Field Installable: Yes.
Internal Clock (#4703): Generates synchronizing and timing
signals at 1200 bps when they are not provided by the modem.
See IBM Data Coml]Junications Handbook
...
MaxImum: une. t-lelCl Installable: Yes. Prerequisite:
EIA Interface (#3701) or 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500,
5502).
1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500, 5502): A modem for
operating at 1200 bps over a nons witched or switched network. Available in two versions: #5500-Non-switched and
#5502-Switched with Manual Answer. Attachment to the
non-switched (four-wire) facilities is via an IBM provided cable
directly to the line, Type 3002. Attachment to the switched
network is via an IBM provided cable to a data access arrangement type COT or FCC certified equivalent. The system communicating with the 5251 must also be equipped with an IBM
1200 BPS Integrated Modem.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with EIA Interface (#3701) or
DDS Adapter (#5650 or #5651). #5500 and 5502 cannot be
installed together. Prerequisite: Internal Clock (#4703).
Maximum: One. Field Installable: Yes.
Digital Data Service Adapter (#5650, 5651): An integrated
adapter for data transmission at speeds of 2400, 4800, or 9600
bps over the AT & T nonswitched Data-Phone* Digital Service
network. The DDSA interfaces to a DDS channel service unit,
the customer site termination of the 0 DS network. For pointto-point (#5650), for multipoint tributary (#5651), see
"Specify" for speed selection.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with EIA Interface (#3701) or
1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500, 5502). Maximum: One.
Field Installable: Yes.
*Registered Trademark of AT & T.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-=
=
- ---._._--
--
=--==
- ---- . -. -,. -
M5251.4
General Systems Division-Machines
Special Features and Accessory Prices: See Price List.
Accessories
Keylock. Keys: The 5251 with Keylock #4655 is shipped with
2 keys. Additional keys may be purchased from IBM. (Vendor
will supply additional kevs to origin..aLJLu.rchaser)
Display Screen Filter (#3225/3226): #3225 for Models 11
and 12, #3226 for Models 1 and 2. A specially designed filter
which attaches to the display screen reducing reflected glare in
those installations with adverse lighting conditions. Character
contrast may also be enhanced. The filter is a CSU accessory.
Cables: 5251 Models 1 and 11 Display Station cables and/or
associated parts to attach the 5251 Model 1 or 11 to the 5251
Model 2 or 12, the 5340, or the 5381 may be purchased from
IBM or from a customer selected source. For the description of
these cables and parts, see the IBM 5250 Information Display
System Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA21-9277.
The customer is responsible for the installation and maintenance of these cables and their associated parts. When cabling
is orqered from IBM, specify a shipping date at least 4 weeks
in advance of receiving the 5251 Model 1 or 11.
Part #7362267 Twinax Cable Assembly; includes a Connector
Kit (2 connectors) attached to bulk wire. The required
length of wire must be specified on the order. The cost of
the wire must be added to the fixed assembly price to obtain the total price of the cable assembly.
Part #7362230 Twinax Adapter; permits two Twinax Cable
Assemblies to be joined together.
Coax Station Protector Kit (#7855). A kIt provides two protectors. One is required at each end of each Coax Cable Assembly installed outdoors (either above or below ground
level). Individual Coax Station Protectors, Part No.
7362427, are available for replacement purposes.
rwinax Station Protector Kit (#7850). A kit includes two protectors. One is required at each end of each Twinax Attachment Cable installed outdoors (either above or below ground
level). Individual Twinax Station Protectors, PN 7362426,
are available for replacement purposes.
Coax Cabling (for attachment to the 5251 Models 2 and 12 and
the 5381). See Note 4.
Assm No
Bulk No
Part No
Assm No
Bulk No
Part No
Part No
Part No
2577672
0323921
1836418
1833108
5252750
1836419
5252643
7361118
Coax Cable Assembly Indoor
Coax Wire Indoor'
Coax Connector Kit Indoor'
Coax Cable Assembly Outdoor
Coax Wire Outdoor2
Coax Connector Kit Outdoor2
Coax Adapter 3
Twinax/ Coax Adapter Kit 4
Note 1: Coax wire and 1 connector kit (includes 2 connectors
No. 1836444) required for each indoor cable assembly.
Note 2:
Coax wire and 1 connector kit (includes 2 connectors
No. 1836447) required for each outdoor cable assembly.
Note 3:
Used to join 2 No. 2577672 or 2 No. 1833108 Coax
Cable Assemblies together.
Note 4:
Required to connect Coax Cable Assembly to the
connectors on the 5251 and 5381 Individual adapters, Part No. 7363102, are available for replacement
purposes.
Nov 78
Twinax Cabling (for attachment to the 5251 Model 2 and 12,
5340 and 5381):
Part #7362268 Twinax Connector kit; includes two connectors.
Twinax Wire and one Twinax Connector Kit are required for
each attachment cable.
(Individual connectors part
#7362229 are available for replacement.)
Part #7362211 Twinax Wire; order must specify the desired
length. Twinax Wire and one Twinax Connector Kit are
{This is an
required for each anachment cable.
indoor / outdoor cable.}
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-- -----
=---=-= =- - ----
M5252.1
General Systems-Division-Machines
Nov 78
-~-
-~-.-
5252 DUAL DISPLAY STATION. MODEL 1
Purpose: The 5252 is an advanced function dual display'
station which attaches to the 5251 Models 2 and 12 or 5340
System Unit or 5381 System Unit for entering, editing and
displaying alphanumeric data. It may be used as the system
console with System/34. The 5252 displays up to 960 characters on each display with 12 lines of 80 characters each. Two
movable keyboards permit both operators to display, enter and
manipulate data in a highly flexible and efficient manner.
Highlights: The 5252 functions as two independent display
stations. The standard character set includes ninety-six 8 x 16
dot matrix characters-52 upper/lower case alphabetic, 10
numeric, 34 special characters in addition to "space." A 188character Multinational Character Set (see Special Features
below) is available, providing 112 alphabetic, 10 numeric, and
66 special displayable characters;n addition to "space." See
"Type Catalog" for character set and keyboard layouts. Each
display provides functional characteristics which permit normal
intensity, high intensity, non-display, blinking, underscore,
column separator, and reverse image (dark characters on a
light background) on a field basis. The image of each display
can be reversed independently. Audible alarms, under program
control, are provided to -alert each operator to special conditions. The keyboards with 24 application assigned command
functions provide input and control flexibility. See "Special
Features" below.
Security Enhancements: Data fields may be defined so
entered data is accepted without being displayed on the
scre~n. A Keylock (special feature) prevents operator usage of
both displays and both keyboards when the key is in the locked
position. The displays are blanked and keyboard data entry is
inhibited when the keylock is locked. Two Magnetic Stripe
Readers (Feature #4910) are available for entering user identification.
Field Editing: Individual data input fields may be edited as
Alphanumeric, Alpha Only, Signed Numeric, Field Exit Required, Right Adjust. Mandatory Entry, Mandatory Fill, Bypass,
Auto Enter, Dup Enable, Monocase and Self Check Modulus 10
and 11.
For Direct Attachment to System/34: One 5252 Dual Display Station or 5251 Model 1 or 11 Display Station is required
on System/34 for use as a system console. When the 5252 is
used as the system console, one keyboard/ display functions as
the system console and the other keyboard/display functions
as a System/34 work station. The console is attached to one
of four Twinax cable connectors on the 5340 via a 6 m (20 ft.)
cable provided with the 5340. For maintenance reasons, only
one of the above machine types (5251 or 5252) should be
attached to this cable. The three additional Twinax cable connectors on the 5340 are provided for attachment of additional
work stations (5252 or 5251 Model 1 or 11 or 5256 Printer). A
maximum of eight work stations, including the system console,
may be attached to the 5340. The 5252 represents two work
stations. The maximum length of anyone Twinax cable is 1525
m (5000 ft.). Up to three such cables may be attached to the
5340. Multiple work stations (up to seven) may be attached to
one cable via Cable Thru feature with each work station. See
and 5256 Printers and supports up to 12 of these work stations. Optional features on the 5381 allow up to 40 work stations to be direct attached. The -5252 represents 2 work stations.
The cable attachment may be made with either Twinax or Coax
cable. Twinax Cable Connection: Maximum length of anyone
Twinax cable is 1525 m (5000 ft.). Up to 7 work stations may
be attached to a Twinax cable via a Cable Thru feature (#2680)
on each work station. Coax Cable Connection: Maximum
length of anyone Coax cable is 610 m (2000 ft.) between the
system attachment and the work station. (Twinax/Coax Adapter Kit is required. Refer to Accessories.) A second work station may be attached via the Cable Thru feature (2680). Twinax
cable must be used between the first and second work station
and the maximum allowable distance between these two work
stations is 30 m (100 ft.). See IBM 5250 Information Display
System Installation Manual Physical Planning (GA21-9277) for
cabling information.
Clustering: The 5252 may be attached to the 5251 Model 2
or 12 with the use Cluster (#2550) or the Dual Cluster (#2551 )
feature. The Cluster feature allows attachment of up to four
work stations (5252 or 5251 Model 1 or 11 or 5256) and the
Dual Cluster feature allows attachment of up to eight work
stations. The 5252 represents two work stations. See IBM
5252
Information
Display
System
Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GA21-9277 for cabling inforrnation.
Problem Determination Procedures: Significant function
has been designed into this unit to provide greater availability
to the customer through the use of problem determination and
recovery procedures that are easily understood and used by the
operators. The procedures are provided in the IBM 5252
Operator's Guide. Also, see "Customer Responsibility."
Customer Setup (CSU): The 5252 is designated as a customer setup device thereby offering the customer early availability and relocation flexibility. The Marketing Representative
must advise the customer of his responsibilities before receipt
of the machine.
Customer Responsibility: The customer is responsible for:
Receipt, unpacking and placement of the 5252
Physical setup, connection of cables to I BM devices incorporating protected access areas, switch setting, and checkout in accordance with instructions supplied by IBM.
Notifying I BM of intent to relocate and following I BM instructions for relocation of the 5252.
Disconnecting, packing, and removal to the customer's
shipping dock at the time of discontinuance. Removal instructions and packaging materials (if required) will be ordered by the branch office.
Relocation of the 5252, if required, to allow I BM service
access.
Using and following the problem determination procedures
for the 5252 prior to calling for IBM service_
IBM 5252 Information
Display System installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GA21-9277 for additional cabling
Providing a desk or tabletop to support the 5252.
Installation and maintenance of signal cables and associated parts for attaching the 5252 to the 5251 Model 2 or 12,
the 5340 or the 5381.
information.
For Direct Attachment to System/38: The 5381 System
Unit provides 8 cable connectors for attachment of the 5251
Model 1 and 11 Display Stations, 5252 Dual Display Stations
•
When adding additional display stations to System/34 or
System/38, the customer may have to modify the system
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- - . . -- .---.- - ---
M5252.2
.-
-- =
=--==
- ------
Nov 78
General Systems Division-Machines
configuration specifications. See IBM System/34 Program
Proauct Installation and Modification Reference Manual,
SC21-7689 or IBM System/38 Program Product Installation
Guide (availability to be announced in a future PRL).
when 5252 is directly attached. to the 5381. Prerequisite:
Expanded Function (#3600) on 5251 Models 2 or 12 or Work
Station Control Expansion A (#4900) on 5340 when 5252 is
directly attached; Maximum: Two. Field InstaUable: Yes.
Manuals: IBM 5250 Information Display System Introduction,
GA21-9246 and IBM 5250 Information Display System Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA21-9277.
Multinational Character Set (#4905): Provides the capability
of displaying the 188 character Multinational Character Set to
facilitate the interchange of information between systems with
different language groups. Limitations: The keyboards do not
inClude the additional characters of the Multinational Character
Set. All characters may be entered via a single or multiple key
sequence. Prerequisites: Multinational Control (#4905) on
5340. All work stations attached to the System/34 and 5251
Model 2 or 12, must have the same character set. Maximum:
One. Field Installable: Not recommended for field installation.
Specify
1. Voltage (115V, AC, 1-Phase, 60 Hz): #9881 for a standard
non-locking plug (uses customer standard type receptacle)
or #9880 for locking plug (requires customer locking type
receptacle).
2. Two keyboards must be selected (see Special Features).
3. Color: Pearl white only (no specify required).
4. Cables: See Accessories for 5252 cable ordering instructions. For cable specifications, see the 5250 Information
Display System Installation Manual-Physical Planning,
GA21-9277. Specify: #9050 if cable is ordered from IBM.
#9055 if cable is ordered from other source, #9060 if 5252
is used with System/34 as the system console (no cable
order required), #9065 if existing cable will be used (no
cable order required).
5. System Attachment: Specify the unit that the 5252 is attached to:
#9559
#9560
#9561
#9562
for
for
for
for
5251 Model 2
5251 Model 12
5340
5381
Cable Thru (#2680): Provides the capability of connecting
multiple 5252s, 5251 Models 1 and 11, and 5256s to a single
twinax cable. Each unit on the cable, except the last, requires
this feature. (Note: For relocation flexibility, the customer
should consider including #2680 on all work stations.)
Maximum: One. Field Installable: Yes.
Special Features and Accessory Prices
See price list.
Accessories
Keylock and Keys: The 5252 with Keylock #4655 is shipped
with 2 keys. Additional keys may be purchased from IBM.
Prices: See price list.
Special Features
Keyboard (#4600, 4601, 4602): Two of the following must be
selected:
(#4600)-83-key keyboard with the EBCDIC character set,
typewriter-like layout, movable, with 49 alphanumeric keys, 24
control Keys and 10-key numeric pad.
(#4601 )-66-key data entry style keyboard, movable, with 36
alphanumeric keys, 23 control keys and 7 blank keys.
(#4602)-66-key data entry style keyboard with proof arrangement, movable, with 36 alphanumeric keys, 23 control keys
and 7 blank keys. The numeric keys are arranged similar to
those of an adding machine.
Limitations: #4601 and #4602 are not supported when 5252
is directly attached to the 5340. Maximum: Two of the above.
Field Installable: Yes.
Keylock (#4655): Provides a lock and two keys which prevents operator entry and display of data on either work station
when in a locked position. Maximum: One. Field Installable:
Yes.
Magnetic Stripe Reader (#4910): Provides the capability of
reading numerically encoded information from a magn~tic
stripe on a wide range of credit cards, identification cards, and
documents. The magnetic stripe may be encoded with up to
128 ABA numeric characters, including control characters.
This feature may be used to enhance system data security by
providing the ability to read an operator identification card
without being displayed.
Limitations: Valid
for numeric-only data and single data field. Not supported
Cables: 5252 Dual Display Station cables and/or associated
parts to attach the 5252 to the 5251 Model 2 or 12, the 5340
or the 5381 may be purchased from IBM or from a customer
selected source. For the description of these cables and parts,
see the IBM 5250 Information Display System Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GA21-9277. The customer is
responsible for the installation and maintenance of these cables
and their associated parts. When cabling is ordered from 18M,
slJecify a shipping date at least 4 weeks in advance of receiving
the 5252.
Coax Cabling (for attachment to the 5251 Models 2 and 12 and
the 5381). See Note 4.
Assm No
Bulk No
Part No
Assm No
Bulk No
Part No
Part No
Part No
2577672
0323921
1836418
1833108
5252750
1836419
5252643
7361118
Coax
Coax
Coax
Coax
Cable Assembly Indoor
Wire Indoor'
Connector Kit Indoor'
Cable Assembly Outdoor
C~ax Wire Outdoor 2
Coax Connector Kit Outdoor 2
Coax Adapter 3
Twinax/ Coax Adapter Kit 4
Note 1:
Coax wire and one connector kit (includes 2 connectors No. 1836444) required for each indoor cable
assembly.
Note 2.'
Coax wire and one connector kit (includes 2 connectors No. 1836447) required for each outdoor cable
assembly.
Note 3.'
Used to join two No. 2577672 or two No. 1833108
Coax Cable Assemblies together.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- .....
------= - -=---=
- - General Systems Division-Machines
- -=- ---
.
Note 4: Required to connect Coax Cable ,6,ssembly to the
connectors on the 5252, 5251 Models 2 and 12 and
5381 Individual adapters, Part No. 7363102, are
available for replacement purposes.
Twinax cabling (for attacnment to the 5251 Models 2 and 12,
5340 and 5381):
Part #7362268 Twinax Connector Kit; includes two connectors. Twinax Wire and one Twinax Connector Kit are required for each attachment cable. (Individual connectors
Part #7362229 are available for replacements.)
Part #7362211 Twinax Wire; order must specify the desired
length. Twinax Wire and one Twinax Connector Kit are
required for each attachment cable.
This is an
indoor / outdoor cable.
Part #7362267 Twinax Cable Assembly; includes a Connector
Kit (2 connectors) attached to bulk wire. The required
length of wire must be specified on the order. The price of
the Twinax Wire (Part #7362211) must be added to the
purchase price of the Cable Assembly to obtain the total
price of the Cable Assembly.
Part #7362230 Twinax Adapter; permits two Twinax Cable
Assemblies to be joined together.
Coax Station Protector Kit (#7855): A kit provides two protectors. One is required at each end of each Coax Cable Assembly
installed outdoors (either above or below ground level). Individual Coax Station Protectors, PN 7362427. are available for
replacement ouroo!';p.~
Twinax Station Protector Kit (#7850): A kit includes two protectors. One is required at each end of each Twinax attachment cable installed outdoors (either above or below ground
level). Individual Twinax Station Protectors, PN 7362426,
are available for replacement purposes.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M5252.3
Nov 78
---==---= General Systems Division-Machines
-----
-=
5256 PRINTER
Purpose: Printed output for System/34 and System/38
A bi-directional printer with dual 256 byte buffers and full
buffer formatting capabilities.
Model 1
Model 2
Model 3
M5256.1
Nov 78
When adding additional Printers to System/34 or
System/38, the customer may have to modify the system
configuration specifications. See IBM System/34 Program
Product Installation and Modification Reference Manual or
IBM System/38 Program Product Installation Guide.
Supplies: A black ribbon, IBM P/ N 1136653, or equivalent, is
required.
40 cps Maximum
80 cps Maximum
120 cps Maximum
Model Changes: Field Installable
Highlights
Maximum printer throughput is obtained with bi-directional
serial matrix printing and indexing without unnecessary print
head movement. Matrix characters are formed by 8 vertical
wire printing dots in up to 4 of 7 possible horizontal positions,
giving high legibility with character spacing at 10 characters to
the inch for the standard upper/lower case 96-character set. A
188 character Multinational Character Set is available (see
Specify below).
The operator can select six or eight lines per inch (lpi) vertical
spacing. (Overlapped printing may result when printing at 8
Ipi). A variable width forms tractor provides for feeding continuous forms. Single cut forms may be processed in typewriter
fashion. For optimum handling of continuous forms, the special
feature Forms Stand (#4450) is recommended. See Accessories. Refer to Form Design Reference Guide for Printers,
GA24-3488 for forms design considerations and limitations.
See the "Type Catalog" for character set arrays.
For Direct Attachment to System/34: The 5340 System
Unit provides four twinax cable connectors for attachment of
5251 Model 1 and 11 Display Stations, 5252 Dual Display
Stations, and 5256 Printers. One cable connector is dedicated
to the exclusive attachment of a display station utilized as the
system console. No other devices may be attached to this
cable. The three additional twinax cable connectors on the
5340 are provided for attachment of additional work stations
(5251 Model 1 or 11, or 5252 or 5256). A maximum of eight
work stations, including the system console, may be attached
to to the 5340. The 5252 represents two work stations. The
maximum length of anyone twinax cable is 1525 m (5000 ft).
Up to three such cables may be attached to the 5340. Multiple
work stations (up to seven) may be attached to one cable via a
Cable Thru Feature with each work station. If a 5256 Printer is
designated as the system printer (in lieu of a 5211), a 6 m (20
ft) cable is provided with the 5340. See IBM 5250 Information
Display System Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA219277 for additional cabling information.
If the 5256 is the system printer, specify #9306 on the 5340.
See 5340 "Specify."
Problem Determination Procedures: Significant function
has been designed into this unit to provide greater availability
to the customer through the use of problem determination and
recovery procedures that are easily understood and used by the
operator. The procedures are provided in the IBM 5256
Operator's Guide. Also, see "Customer Responsibility" below.
For Direct Attachment to System/3S: The 5381 System
Unit provides 8 cable connectors for attachment of the 5'251
Model 1 and 11 Display Stations, 5252 Dual Display Stations
and 5256 Printers and supports up to 12 of these work stations. Optional features on the 5381 allow up to 4.0 work stations to be attached. The 5252 represents 2 work stations.
Customer Setup (CSU): The 5256 is designated as customer
setup, thereby offering the customer early availability and
relocation flexibility. The Marketing Representative must advise the customer of his responsibilities before teceipt of the
machine.
The cable attachment may be made with either Twinax or Coax
cable. Twinax Cable Connection: Maximum length of anyone
Twinax cable is 1525 m (5000 ft.). Up to 7 work stations may
be attached to a Twinax cable via a Cable Thru feature (#2680)
on each work station. Coax Cable Connection: Maximum
length of anyone Coax cable is 610 m (2000 ft.) between the
system attachment and the work station. (Twinax/Coax Adapter Kit is required. Refer to Accessories.) A second work station may be attached via the Cable Thru feature (#2680). Twinax cable must be used between the first and second work
station and the maximum allowable distance between these
two work stations is 30 m (100 ft.). See IBM 5250 Information
Display System Installation Manual Physical Planning (GA219277) for cabling information.
Customer Responsibilities: The customer is responsible for:
•
Receipt, unpacking and placement of the 5256.
•
Physical setup, connection of cables to IBM devices incorporating protected access areas, switch setting and checkout in accordance with instructions supplied by IBM.
•
Notifying IBM of intent to relocate and following IBM instructions for relocation of the 5256.
•
Disconnecting, packing and removal to the customer's
shipping dock at the time of discontinuance. Removal instructions and packaging materials (if required) will be ordered by the Branch Office.
•
Relocation of the 5256, if required, to allow IBM service
access.
•
Using and following the problem determination procedures
for the 5256 prior to calling for I BM service.
•
Providing a desk or tabletop to support the 5256.
•
Installation and maintenance of signal cables and associated parts for attaching the 5256 to the 5251 Model 2 or 12,
the 5340 or the 5381 .
Clustering: The 5256 mdY be attache'd to the 5251 Model 2 or
12 with the Cluster (#2550) or the Dual Cluster (#2551) feature. The Cluster feature allows attachment of up to four work
stations (5251 Model 1 or 11 or 5252 or 5256) and the Dual
Cluster feature allows attachment of up to eight work stations.
The 5252 represents two work stations. See IBM 5250 Information Display System Installation Manual-Physical Planning,
GA21-9277 for cabling information.
Manuals: IBM 5250 Information Display System Introduction,
GA21-9246 and IBM 5250 Information Display System Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA21-9277,
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---= -- General Systems Division-Machines
=---=
-- --------
M5256.2
=
Nov 78
-~-.-
Note 1: Coax wire and one connector kit (includes 2 connec-
Specify
1. Voltage (115V AC, 1-Phase, 60 Hz): #9881 for standard
non-locking plug, (uses customer standard type receptacle)
or #9880 for a locking plug (requires customer locking type
receptacle).
tors No. 1836444) required for each indoor cable
assembly.
Note 2:
Coax wire and one connector kit (jn~ludes 2 connectors No. 1836447) required for each outdoor cable
assembly.
Note 3:
Used to join two No. 2577672 or two No. 1833108
Coax Cable Assemblies together.
Note 4:
Required to connect Coax Cable Assembly to the
connectors on the 5256, 5251 Models 2 and 12 and
5381 Individual adapters, Part No. 7363102, are
available for replacement purposes.
2. Color: Pearl white only (no specify required).
3. Cables: See Accessories for cable orderinq instructions. For
cable specifications, see the IBM 5250 Information Display
System Manual-Physical Planning, GA21-9277. Specify:
#9050 if cable is ordered from IBM, #9055 if cable is ordered from another supplier, #9060 if 5256 is used with
System/34 as system printer (no cable order required),
#9065 if existing cable will be used (no cable order required).
4. System Attachment: Specify the unit to which the 5256 is
attached: #9559 for 5251 Model 2, 1/9500 for 5251 Model
12, #9561 for 5340 or #9562 for 5381.
5. Print Spanish N: #9570. Provides the following character
substitutions: prints~~L L an~'n placeof#,:,!, ¢ and~
6. Character Set: The 96-character EBCDIC character set is
provided as standard. If the 188-character Multinational
Character Set is desired, specify #9470. All work stations
and printers attached to a System/34 and a 5251 Model 2
or 12, must have the same character set.
Prices: See Price List.
Special Features
Audible Alarm (#1470): Provides an audible indication to the
operator when manual intervention is required. Maximum:
One. Field Installable: Yes.
Cable Thru (#2680): Provides the capability of connecting
multiple 5256s, 5251 Models 1 or 11 and 5252s to a single
twinax cable. Each unit on the cable, except the last, requires
this feature. (Note: For relocation flexibility, the customer
should consider including #2680 on all work stations).
Maximum: One. Field Installable: Yes.
Twinax Cabling {for attachment to the 5251 Models 2 and 12,
5340 and 5381 :
Part # 7362268 Twinax Connector Kit; includes two connectors. Twinax Wire and one Twinax Connector Kit are required for each attachment cable. (Individual connectors
part #7362229 are available for replacements.)
Part #7362211 Twinax Wire; order must specify the desired
length. Twinax Wire and one Twinax Connector Kit are
required for each attachment cable.
This is an
indoor / outdoor cable.
Part #7362267 Twinax Cable Assembly; includes a Connector
Kit (2 connectors) attached to bulk wire. The required
length of wire must be specified on the order. The cost of
the wire must be added to the fixed assembly price to obtain the total price of the cable assembly.
Part #7362230 Twinax Adapter; permits two Twinax Cable
Assemblies to be joined together.
Coax Station Protector Kit {#7855}: A kit provides two protectors. One is required at each end of each Coax Cable Assembly installed outdoors (either above or below ground
level). Individual Coax Station Protectors, PN 7362427, are
available for replacement purposes.
Special Feature ;;tnd Accessory Prices: See Price List.
Accessories
Cables: 5256 Printer cables and/or associated parts to attach
the Printers to the 5251 Model 2 or 12, the 5340, or the 5381
may be purchased from I BM or from a customer selected
source. For the description of these cables and parts, see the
IBM 5250 Information Display System Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GA21-9277. The customer is
responsible for the installation and maintenance of these cables
and their associated parts. When cabling is ordered from IBM,
specify a shipping date at least 4 weeks in advance of receiving
the 5256.
Twinax Station Protector Kit (#7850): A kit includes two protectors. One is required at each end of each Twinax Attachment Cable installed outdoors (either above or below ground
level). Individual Twinax Station Protectors, PN 7362426,
are available for replacement purposes. The Station Protector is a CSU accessory.
Forms Stand (114450): Permits feeding continuous forms from
a carton and provides for forms stacking on a single shelf after
printing.
Co.ax Cabling (for attachment to the 5251 Models 2 and 12 and
the 5381. See Note 4.
Assm No
Bulk No
Part No
Assm No
Bulk No
Part No
Part No
Part No
2577672
0323921
1836418
1833108
5252750
1836419
5252643
7361118
Coax Cable Assembly Indoor
Coax Wire Indoor'
Coax Connector Kit Indoor'
Coax Cable Assembly Outdoor
Coax Wire Outdoor 2
Coax Connector Kit Outdoor2
Coax Adapter 3
Twinax/ Coax Adapter Kit 4
Not to be reproduced without written permisSion.
--.......
--.=---=
-=--=-------
M5320.1
'
-~-.
Nov 78
General Systems Division-Machines
-~-.-
5320 SYSTEM UNIT
System Features
Purpose: The System/32 is a compact commercial data processing system designed primarily for small businesses.
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor (MOSFET)
main storage ... 600 nanosecond main storage cycle time ...
main storage available in 16K, 24K or 32K bytes with 2K bytes
reserved for SCP functions ... internal structure is EBCDIC
eight-bit byte ... all model changes and features are field installable.
Model
A01
A02
A03
A04
A11
A12
A13
A14
A21
A22
A23
A24
A31
A32
A33
A34
B11
B12
B13
B14
B21
B22
B23
B24
B31
B32
B33
B34
C41
C42
C43
C44
Printing Speed
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
80
80
80
80
120
120
120
120
50
50
50
50
100
100
100
100
155
155
155
155
285
285
285
285
CPS Unidirectional
CPS Unidirectional
CPS Unidirectional
CPS Unidirectional
CPS Bidirectional
CPS Bidirectional
CPS Bidirectional
CPS Bidirectional
CPS Bidirectional
CPS Bidirectional
CPS Bidirectional
CPS Bidirectional
CPS Bidirectional
CPS Bidirectional
CPS Bidirectional
CPS Bidirectional
LPM
LPM
LPM
LPM
LPM
LPM
LPM
LPM
LPM
LPM
LPM
LPM
LPM
LPM
LPM
LPM
Disk Storage Capacity
3,210,240 bytes
5,053,440 bytes
9,169,920 bytes
13,777,920 bytes
3,210,240 bytes
5,053,440 bytes
9,169,920 bytes
13,777,920 bytes
3,210,240 bytes
5,053,440 bytes
9,169,920 bytes
13,777,920 bytes
3,210,240 bytes
5,053,440 bytes
9,169,920 bytes
13,777,920 bytes
3,210,240 bytes
5,053,440 bytes
9,169,920 bytes
13,777,920 bytes
3,210,240 bytes
5,053,440 bytes
9,169,920 bytes
13,777,920 bytes
3,210,240 bytes
5,053,440 bytl?!s
9,169,920 bytes
13,777,920 bytes
3,210,240 bytes
5,053,440 bytes
9,169,920 bytes
13,777,920 bytes
Note: All models have 16,384 bytes of main storage standard.
Model Changes: Field Installable.
Model Change Considerations:
1. Any model change that involves a disk storage capacity may
require replacement of the disk storage mechanism. Adequate provision must be made for retaining the data contained on the replaced disk mechanism and elimination of
user proprietary information.
2. Model changes between "A," "B" and "C" Models require
replacement of the print mechanism and may require replacement of the power supply. AOX, A 1 X or A2X Models,
when changed to A31 , A32, A33 or A34 Models must be at
E.C. level 828749 or the print mechanism must be replaced.
Highlights
Operator oriented data processing.
Direct keyboard data entry.
Display screen.
Batch processing with stored job stream procedures.
RPG II programming support.
Communications capability via SDLC or BSC.
Word processing functions
Keyboard is used for data entry and operator/system communication. It features a familiar typewriter layout plus a
10-key proof keyboard and function keys. The top row of
typewriter keys are dual-defined, providing 24 command
keys. In addition to the standard alphanumeric keys, the
keyboard has record / field / cha racter advance / backspace
keys, repeat keys, and printer control keys.
A Dual Case Keyboard and Display feature provides
upper/lower and special character/graphic support and a
special key used by application programs to simulate the
OPD Mag Card ("Selectric," II, A, and "Executive") Typewriter code key.
Display Screen provides operator guidance and prompting
and auxiliary output under program control. Up to 240
characters can be displayed ... 6 rows of 40 characters
each. All data entered through the keyboard is displayed on
the screen by the progamming system.
Disk Storage capacity of 3.2, 5.0, 9.1 or 13.7 million bytes
of non-removable high speed direct access storage. The
disk rotates at 2964 RPM, yielding a data rate of up to
889,000 bytes per second ... permitting efficient sequential
and random access processing. The following table' provides corresponding capacity data and access times. For
more specific access times, refer to timing charts. Average
latency is 10.1 ms.
3.2 MB
Bytes / Sector
256
Sectors/Track
60
Tracks/ Cylinder
2
Bytes/ Cylinder 30,720
Cylinders
104.5
Access Time (ms)
Minimum
13.0
Average
50.4
Maximum
121.0
5.0 MB 9.1 MB
13.7 MB
256
60
2
30,720
1.64.5
256
60
2
30,720
298.5
256
60
3
46,080
299.0
13.0
70.0
180.0
14.2
72.5
166.9
14.2
72.5
166.9
Line Printing "B" and "C" Models with a 48 character print
belt provide printed output at nominal rated speeds of 50,
100, 155 or 285 lines per minute depending upon model.
Included as standard is one engraved font print belt selected from 48 or 64 character EBCDIC, 64 character ASCII or
96 character dual case modified Courier or Artisan. Nominal
printing speeds are as follows:
Character Set Size
48
Model
64
96
B1x
50lpm
50lpm
50lpm
B2x
100lpm
100lpm
80lpm
B3x
1551pm
120lpm
80lpm
C4x
2851pm
2251pm
1601pm*
*80 LPM when used with Word Processor/32 (5725-XX1)
PPA.
Horizontal spacing is 10 characters to the inch with a 132
position print line. Vertical spacing is 6 lines to the inch. For
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- .---=---= :::..-: General Systems Division-Machines
M5320.2
---
Nov 78
.,.
---~--_.--
Model 1 and 750 documents per minute for the Models 2
and 3. Six stackers are provided on the Models 1 and 2,
and twelve stackers on the Model 3. Operation of the 1255
within the same program as the diskette drive, BSCA, or
SDLC is not supported.
8 lines to the inch vertical spacing· and programming support, see RPQ 540127. A variable width forms tractor provides for feeding continuous forms. Refer to SRL, GA243488, Form Design Reference Guide for Printers, for forms
design considerations and limitations. Forms jam detection
is standard. See "Type Catalog" section for character set
arrays and styles.
Serial Printing "A" Models print at a maximum rate or 40
characters per second in a unidirectional mode or 40, 80 or
120 characters per second in a bidirectional mode depending on model. Matrix characters are formed by eight vertical
wires. Horizontal spacing is 10 characters to the inch with a
132 position print line. Vertical spacing is 6 lines to the inch.
A variable width forms tractor provides for feeding continuous forms. Refer to SRL, GA24-3488, Form Design Reference Guide for Printers, for forms design considerations
and limitations. See the "Type Catalog" for character set
array.
Notes:
(1) Differences between line and serial printing are transparent
to RPG II object code for continuous forms and recompilation
is not required when changing printer models ... (2) System/32
printed output is not recommended for optical character reading ... (3) A forms stand, providing for the feeding and stacking
of continuous forms, is provided with the system ... (4) Printed
output utilizing Artisan or Modified Courier print belts should
not be expected to compare in quality to the "Selectric" typewriter.
Diskette Drive provides the capability of entering data recorded off-line and also is a load/ dump back-up facility via
the IBM Diskette 1. The diskette also provides compatible
media for interchange with other systems utilizing IBM
Diskette 1 ... (up to 242,944 byte capacity). For System/32
use, Diskette 1... capacity is 246,272 bytes in basic data
exchange format and 303,104 bytes in 512 byte Extended
Format. 128 byte records are processed at rates up to 3400
per minute reading and up to 1800 per minute writing.
"Read" and "Write" are not overlapped with processing or
other devices, however, "one track forward seek" is overlapped.
Card I/O utilizing the 129 Card Data Recorder (80 column)
provides reading up to 50 cards per minute and punching or
punching and printing from 12 to 50 cards per minute. In
punch mode, throughput may vary. When two or more
adjacent columns are blank, the equivalent of read speed is
achieved until a non-blank column is encountered. Utilizing
the 5496 Data Recorder (96 column) provides reading,
punching and printing speeds of up to 21 cards per minute.
Cannot be installed with Mag Card Unit (Attachment #4900)
and Half Line Space Printing (#4530). Card I/O operation
within the same program as the diskette drive, BSCA or
SDLC is not supported.
Mag Card I/O utilizing the 5321 Mag Card Unit provides
reading and recording of information up to 102 char /track
and 50 tracks/card ... Reading is at the rate of 230
millisecond / track; recording is at the rate of 450
millisecond/track. The 5321 Mag Card Unit uses the same
Mag Card prodcard and recording discipline as the
ucts. Operation of the Mag Card Unit within the same program as the diskette drive, BSCA or SDLC is not supported.
Magnetic Character Reading utilizing the 1255 Magnetic
Character Reader provides reading and sorting of MICR
inscribed documents at 500 documents per minute for the
Supplies: (1) A black ribbon, part number 1136653, or equivalent, is required for the A models ... (2) A black ribbon, part
number 1136634, or equivalent, is required for the B models ...
(3) A black ribbon, part number 1136670, or equivalent, is
required for "C" Models .
Bibliography: GC20-0032
1. Voltage (AC, 1 Phase, 60 Hz): #9884 for 208V, or #9886 for
230V.
2.
Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue or
#9045 for light gray.
3. Print Belt (B and C Models only).: Available at time of manufacture only except when upgrading an installed "A" Model.
Specify one of the following:
Belt Description
64
48
64
96
96
48
Char
Char
Char
Char
Char
Char
Specify No.
.079 inches
EBCDIC
#9490*
EBCDIC
9491*
ASCII
9493*
modified Courier
N/A
Artisan
N/A
FORTRAN
N/A
Specify No.
.095 inches
#9496
°9497
9498
9499
9487
9492
*Recommended for use with 6 or 8 Ipi RPQ (540127).
4. ASCII key tops and Display Screen graphiCS: Specify
#9370.
Note: Includes ASCII graphics on serial printing (A models).
5. Modem Cable (SDLC or BSCA only): Required for attaching
System/32 to the communications facility regardless of
whether an IBM integrated modem or an external modem is
used. #9460 for a 20-foot cable ... #9461 for a 40-foot
cable.
Note: Up ending, if required, may be accomplished by following
the instructions shipped with the system.
Purchase Considerations
1. Any model upgrade that involves a disk storage capacity
change may require replacement of the disk storage mechanism. Adequate provision must be made for retaining the
data contained on the replaced disk mechanism and elimination of user proprietary information.
2. Model changes between "A," "B" and "C" Models require
replacement of the print mechanism and may require replacement of the power supply. AOX, A 1X or A2X Models
when changed to A31, A32, A33 or A34 Models must be at
E.C. level 828749 or the complete print mechanism must be
replaced.
3. The upgrade purchase prices for model changes may be
greater than the purchase price differentials. The customer
should carefully evaluate his future requirements when
purchasing a system.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----- -=--==
- - General Systems Division-Machines
____
't'_
- - ----
- -=
M5320.3
.-
4. Replaced parts from any model change become the property
of IBM.
Nov 78
chased from IBM. (Vendor will supply additional keys to original purctlaser).
Special Feature
Additional Storage (#1005); Provides an additional 8,192
bytes of main storage. Maximum: Two. Field Installation:
Ves.
1255 Attachment (#1100): To dttach a 1255 Magnetic Character Reader Model 1, 2 or 3, equipped with a
System/3/32/34 Adapter (#6303). See GA21-9177, IBM
System/32 Installation Manual-Physical Planning, for cabling
information. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Ves.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Data Recorder Attachment (#3200) or 5321 Mag Card Unit Attachment (#4900).
Control Storage Increment (#1500): Provides additional
control storage and access to a Scientific Instruction Set, a
group of additional instructions which perform functions commonly required in scientific programs. Required for execution
of FORTRAN IV (5725-F01) generated object programs.
#1500 is not required for compiling programs. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Ves.
Keylock (#4655): Replaces on / off power switch to protect
against unauthorized use. See Locks and Keys for additional
information. Field Installation: Ves.
Data Recorder Attachment (#3200): TG attach either a 129
Card Data Recorder Model 2 equipped with a 3741 /5320
Attachment (#8201) or a 5496 Data Recorder Model 1 equipped with a 2772/3741/5320 Attachment (#7850). A ten foot
cable and connector required to attach a 129 or 5496 to the
5320 is included. Maximum: "One. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with 5321 Mag Card Unit
AttacRment (#.4900) or 1255 Attachment (#1100).
5321 Mag Card Unit Attachment (#4900) (B and C Models
only): To attach a 5321 Mag Card Unit Model 1 to a
System/32. A 15 foot cablp. and connector required to attach
the 5321 is included. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Data Recorder Attachment (#3200) or 1255 Attachment (#1100).
Dual Case Keyboard Display (#3400) {B and C Models
only}: Provides upper and lowercase characters and new
graphics as well as redefines the character/graphic arrangement of the System/32 keyboard and display. (See "Type
Catalog" for character/graphic arrangements supported.) One
set of prompt templates (10 keyboard arrangements) are supplied with #3400. Field Installation: Yes. See Dual Case
Keyboard Print Templates tor additional sets. Limitations: Not
compatible with #9370 ASCII Key tops and Graphics; not
compatible
with
RPG
GG0339-(additional
Print
Belt-96-character); not compatible with RPQ S40127-(6 or
8 lines per inch spacing).
Half Line Space Printing (#4530) (B ana C Models only):
Provides half line vertical spacing for printing. This feature
supports superscript and subscript requirements normally
associated with the character sets provided by Artisan and
modified Courier print belts.
Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: Application programs using half line spacing must
include repositioning to the next full vertical space where full
space alignment is required. Cannot be installed with RPQ
S40127 (8 lines/in spacing) or Data Recorder Attachment
(#3200).
Locks and Keys: The 5320 with Keylock (#4655) special
feature is shipped with 2 keys. Additional keys may be pur-
Additional Print Belts (Bond C Models only): Permits the
customer to print more than one character set for various applications. Can be interchangeably used with the belt provided
with the machine.
Belt Description
64
48
64
96
96
48
Feature No.
.079 inches
Char EBCDIC
#5905*
Char EBCDIC
5906*
Char ASCII
5907*
Char modified Courier
N/A
Char Artisan
N/A
Char FORTRAN
N/A
Feature No.
.095 inches
#5910
5911
5912
5913
5914
5552
*Recommended for use with 6 or 8 Ipi RPQ (S40127).
Dual Case Keyboard Prompt Templates: (P/N 2773082) A
set of ten keyboard redefine prompt templates support the OP
keyboard options as identified in the GSD Type Catalog. One
set is provided with Dual Case Keyboard and Display (#3400).
Communications Features
Synchronous Data Link Control Communications (SDLC)
(#6301): In conjunction with stored program control, this feature provides communications capability with System/370
Mpdels 115,125,135,145,15511,158, 158MP, 16511, 168 and
168MP via a 3704 or 3705 Communications Controller equipped with appropriate features ... see 3704, 3705
The System/370 must be operating under control of DOS/VS, OS/VS1 or OS/VS2 VTAM and the
3704/3705 under control of the Network Control Program/VS"'
(NCP/VS). See the System/32 programming pages for a
description of the program support provided on System/32 for
this feature.
The SDLC feature (#6301) will allow System/32 to communicate on a non-switched point-to-point or multipoint line at
speeds up to 7200 bps and on a switched point-to-point line at
speeds up to 4800 bps. See M2700 pages for information on
communication facilities.
This SDLC feature will operate in half-duplex mode over dial
(switched network) facilities, and in half-duplex mode over
non-switched (or equivalent private) communication lines
which may be duplex or half-duplex facilities. Operation of this
feature on System/32 will be overlapped at all transmission
rates with processing and / or I/O device operations including
fixed disk. SDLC units at each termination or drop point of a
data line to which the System/32 is attached must use the
same clocking source (modem or business machine), the same
transmission encoding option (N RZ or N RZI) and must be
operating at the same transmission rate.
Switched network versions include as a basic capability support of Manual Dial and Manual or Auto Answer (where the
attached modem supports this capability) operations.
The System/32 operates as an SDLC secondary station and
can operate on a communication line with other IBM SDLC
terminals.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--__
-=
--.-J_
- General Systems Division-Machines
__=--==
--- -
M5320.4
=
Nov 78
'
-~-,,-
limitation: Cannot be, installed with BSCA (#2074). Card I/O,
the 5321 Mag Card Unit, the 1255 Magnetic Character Reader
or the diskette drive cannot be operated within the same program as SDLC. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite:One of the Integrated Modems (#5500, 5501,
5600, 5602 or 5610) or EIA Interface (#3701). Nate: See
"Specify" for requirea moaem cable. SDLC supported by SCP
(5723-SC1) requires 24K bytes of main storage.
.
Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (BSCA)
(#2074): In conjunction with stored program control, this feature permits System/32 to function on a switched, nonswitched,
or
private
communications
line
as
a
processor / terminal communicating in binary synchronous
mode with:
Another System/32 equipped with #2074.
A System/34 equipped with a Communication Adapter.
A 6640 Document Printer* equipped with BSC/EBCDIC
feature
IBM Office. System* 6/430, 6/440, and 6/450 equipped
with BSC/EBCDIC feature
An IBM Mag Card (( typewriter-Communicating
A System/3 equipped with #2074 or #20B4.
A System/360 Model 20 equipped with #2074.
A System/360 or System/370 (which is supported by OS
or DOS BTAM; as TCAM; OS/VS1 or OS/VS2 BTAM,
TCAM or VTAM; DOS/VS BTAM or VTAM) via an Integrated Communications Adapter, a 2701 Data Adapter Unit,
or a 3704/3705 Communications Controller with the Net':'
work Control Program (NCP) or the Partitioned Emulation
Program (PEP), any of which are equipped with a binary
synchronous adapter and appropriate sub-features.
A 3741 Data Station Model 2 or 3741 Programmable Work
Station Model 4.
A 3747 Data Converter equipped with Communications
Adapter (#166Q).
A 5110 Computer System equipped with BSCA #2074 (as a
3741 Model 2 or 4).
A 5231 Model 2 equipped with BSCA (#2074) (Point-topoint unidirectional transmission only)
A System/7 equipped with BSCA (#2074).
*Requires communicating features 3700 and 3701 or 5501 or
550B, or 5510 (The system/32 requires SCP feature 6002 with
WPCU)
See the System/32 programming pages for a description of the
program support provided on System/32 for this feature.
The BSCA feature (#2074) will allow System/32 to communicate on a non-switched point-to-point or mutlipoint line at
speeds up to 7200 bps and on a switched POlOt-to-point line at
speeds up to 4BOO bps. See M 2700 pages for information on
communication facilities.
On a multipoint line System/32 operates as a tributary station.
No support is provided for System/32 to operate as a control
station on a multipoint line; therefore, communication with
other devices which do not provide control station capability
must be done on a point-to-point line only.
This feature, Binary Synchronous CommUnications Adapter,
will operate in half-duplex mode over dIal (switched network)
facilities, and in half-duplex mode over non-switched (or equivalent private) communication lines which may be duplex or
half-duplex facilities. Operation of this feature on System/32
will be overlapped at all transmission rates with processing
and / or I/O device operations including disk.
units at each
termination or drop point of a data link to which the System/32
is attached must use the same clocking gowca (modem or
business machine) and must be set to operate at the same
transmission rate and to use the same transmission code.
esc
Switched network versions include as a basic capability support of Manual Dial and Manual or Auto Answer (where the
attached modem supports this capability) operations.
ASCII, EBCDIC, or EBCDIC Text Transparency are standard.
One of the above transmission codes is selected at program
compilation time.
limitation: Cannot be installed with SDLC (#6301). Card I/O,
the 5321 Mag Card Unit, the 1255 Magnetic Character Reader
or the diskette drive cannot be operated within the same program as the BSCA. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: One of the Integrated Modems (#5500, 5501,
5600, 5602 or 5610) or EIA Interface (#3701). Nate: See
"Specify" for required modem cable.
EIA Interface (#3701): Provides a cable and interface for the
attachment of an IBM Modem or non-IBM data set meeting
RS-232-C characteristics. Non-I BM modems may be attached
subject to the Multiple Suppliers System Policy. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Cannot be installed with 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500, 5501) or
2400 BPS Integrated Modem (#5600, 5602, 5610). Nate: This
feature may also require Internal Clock (#4703) if the external
modem does not provide its own clocking.
Internal Clock (#4703): Generates synchronizing and timing
signals for SDLC or BSC operation when they are not provided
by the modem. Clocking speeds available with this feature are
600 bps and 1200 bps. Selection of speed is indicated via a
system utility program (SCP). When this feature is installed on
System/32, all other SDLC or BSC stations attached to the
same data link must also be equipped with a similar IBM Internal Clock feature.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: SDLC (#6301) or BSCA (#2074); EIA Interface
(#3701) or 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#f)50Q, 5PD1).
limitation: Cannot be installed with 2400 BPS Integrated
Modem (#5600, 5602, 5610).
1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500, 5501): A modem for
SDLC or BSC data transmission at 1200 bps over nonswitched facilities or switched network. Available in two different versions: #5500--Non-Switched ... #5501-Switche9 with
Auto Answer. Attachment to the non-switched (2 or 4~wire)
facilities is via an IBM provided cable directly to the line, Type
3002 Attachment to the switched network is via an I BM provided cable to a common carrier arrangement type CBS or
equivalent. The device communicating with System/32 m~st
also be equipped with 1200 BPS Integrated Modem/ Line
Adapter. limitation: Cannot be installed with EIA Interface
(#3701) or 2400 BPS Integrated Modem (#5600, 5602, 5610).
#5500 and 5501 cannot be installed together. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SOLe (#6301) or BSCA
(#2074); and Internal Clock (#4703).
2400 BPS Integrated Modem (#5600, 5602. 5610): A modem for SDLC or BSC data transmission at 2400 bps over
non-switched facilities or switched network, equivalent to and
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- _-.
---.--- ......
----- General Systems .Division-Machines
- - - --compatible with similarly featured IBM 3872 modems. Available in three different versions: #5600-Non-Switched Point-toPoint ... #5602-Non-Switched Multipoint Tributary
#561Q-Switched Network with Auto Answer.
Attachment to Non-Switched (2 or 4-wire) facilities is via an
IBM provided cable directly to the line, Type 3002. Attachment
to the switched network is via an IBM provided cable to a
common carrier arrangement type CBS or equivalent. The
device communicating with System/32 must also be equipped
with 2400 BPS Integrated Modem/Line Adapter or IBM 3872
Modem. Limitation: Cannot be installed with EIA Interface
(#3701) or 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500, 5501).
#5600,5602, or 5610 cannot be installed together. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: SOLC (#6301) or
BSCA (#2074); Processing Unit Expansion (#5733).
Processing Unit Expansion (#5733): Provides for mounting
of one IBM 2400 BPS Integrated Modem (#5600, 5602, 5610).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
SOLC (#6301) or BSCA (#2074); IBM 2400 BPS Integrated
Modem (#5600, 5602, 5610). Limitation: Cannot be installed
with EIA Interface (#3701) or IBM 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500, 5501).
Switched Network Backup (SNBU) (#7951): Provided for
back-up attachment of System/32 to the public switched
network when the 2400 BPS Integrated Modem (#5600, 5602)
is used on a non-switched line as the prime facility. It can
communicate with another 2400 BPS Integrated Modem or an
IBM 3872 Modem when either is equipped with switched
network capability. Selection of the primary or back-up facility
is via an operator invoked system utility program (SCP).
Attachment to the switched network is made via a common
carrier arrangement type COT or equivalent, Calls must be
established and answered manually. Operator intervention,
program modification, or both may be required on the using
systemlterminal. This feature can be used with BT AM programs for ~OS, DOS/VS, OS, OS/VS1, and OS/VS2 in certainconfigurations or with TCAM/VTAM under OS/VS1 or
OS/VS2. Additional customer program routines will be required, in existing BT AM programming, to fully utilize the capabilities of the Switched Network Back-Up feature. For additional information see the 3872 User's Guide. Maximum: One.
limitations: Cannot be installed with SOLC (#6301) or
Switched Network Back-Up with Auto Answer (#7952). Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: BSCA (#2074); 2400 BPS
Integrated Modem {#5600 or 5602}; Processing Unit Expansion
(#5733).
Switched
Network
Back-up
with
Auto
Answer
(SNBU/AA) (#7952): Same as Switched Network Back-Up
(#7951) plus the added capability of automatically answering
incoming calls when attached to a common carrier arrangement
type CBS or equivalent. Selection of the prime or back-up
facility is via an operator invoked system utility program (SCP).
Operator intervention, program modification, or both may be
required on the using system/ terminal. This feature can be
used with BTAM program for DOS, OOS/VS, OS, OS/VS1 or
OS/VS2 in certain configurations or with TCAM/VTAM under
OS/VS1 or OS/VS2. Additional customer program routines
will be required, in existing BTAM programming, to fully utilize
the capabilities of the Switched Network Back-Up feature. For
additional information see the 3872 User's Guide. Maximum:
One. Limitations: Cannot be installed with SOLC (#6301) or
Switched Network Back-Up (#7951). Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: BSCA (#2074); 2400 BPS Integrated Modem
(#5600 or 5602); Processing Unit Expansion (#5733).
M5320.5
Nov 78
IBM Modems One IBM modem can be attached to a
System/32. Prerequisite: SOLC (#6301) or BSCA (#2074);
EIA Interface (#3701).
Speed (bps)
Modem
2400/1200
4800/2400
7200/3600
3872 Model 1
3874 Model 1
3875 Model 1
Note: System/32 does not support Auto Call Originate (#1091)
on the 3872 or 3874. For communications capabilities, product
utilization, and special features, see M2700, 3872, 3874, 3875
pages.
To verify the proper integrated modem or external modem
interface configuration, refer to the following chart. Select one
of the categories numbered from 1 to 3 and follow across for
t'~1e required and optional special features.
Modem/Interface Feature Configurator
Modem/Interface
Internal
Clock
(#4703)
1.EIA Interface (#3701)
Optional
2.1200 BPS Integrated
Modem:
A. Non-Switched
(#5500)
B. Switched with Auto
Answer (#5501)
Processing
Unit Expansion
(#5733)
SNBU or SNBU/AA
(#7951 )(#7952)
Required
Optional
Required
Optional
Required
Required
3.2400 BPS Integrated
Modem:
A_ Non-Switched
Point-to-Point
(#5600)
B. Non-Switched
Multipoint Tributary (#5602)
C. Switched Network
Auto Answer (#5610)-
Required
Additional Information
I.
Communication Facility Attachments
The SOLC and BSCA features are designed to operate at
speeds between 600 and 7200 bps over common carrier
switched or non-switched facilities or equivalent privately owned communication facilities.
II.
References
1. See the Host System Programming pages
2. See M2700 pages for additional information concerning modems, communications facilities, machine attachment requirements, terminal intermix, operating
capabilities, and customer responsibilities.
3. Refer to the Data Communications Handbook
4. Refer to Installation Manual-Physical Planning,
GA21-9177, for physical installation requirements.
5. Refer to SCP feature (6002) for Word Processing
Commynications Utility Support to 6640 Oocument
Printer, IBM Office Systems 6/430, 6/440, 6/450 a
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---= - -:::...-=
-- -------
-=
M5320.6
----~
General·Systems Division-Machines
..
-~-,,-
second Word Processing System/32, and the IBM
Mag Card II Typewriter-Communicating.
III.
Customer Responsibilites
1. The customer must be advised, in writing, of certain
responsibilities related to the installation and maintenance of common carrier facilities/ services as well as
the IBM equipment.
2. The IBM Marketing Representative must have the
customer obtain a firm installation date for the start
of transmission services (including any required modems) prior to processing the Order Confirmation
card.
IV.
Cables
A Modem Cable is required. See "Specify." No other
Cable Order is required for the System/32.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Nov 78
---- -- General Systems Division-Machines
=--==
______
'f'_
- - ---
-- =
~---,...
5321 MAG CARD UNIT
Purpose: To provide magnetic card input and output for
System/32.
Highlights: Reads and records information using OPD 50
track magnetic cards. Reading is at the maximum rate of 20
seconds/card (102 char/track). Recording is at the maximum
rate of 30 seconds/card (102 char/track). OPD Mag Card
products may be used to prepare the cards to be read by the
5321. Playback of the cards recorded by the 5321 can be on
Mag Card "Selectric," Mag Card II, IBM 6640 Document
Printer and Mag Card/A. Character sets and command codes
are supported by application programming. The input hopper
holds a maximum of fifty cards and the output stacker a maximum of sixty cards. The unit is cable connected to the
System/32 with Mag Card Unit Attachment (#4900) installed.
Prerequisite: 5321 Mag Card Unit Attachment (#4900) on
System/32 and System Control Program SCP 5725-SC1 with
feature #6002.
Limitations: Cannot be installed on 5320 "A" Models. Cannot
be installed on 5320 "B" or "C" Models with 1255 Attachment
(#1100) or Data Recorder Attachment (#3200) installed. Can
be located a maximum of 15 feet from the System/32.
Physical Characteristics: The 5321 requires 115V, AC, 1phase, 60 Hz power and is provided in cloud white color.
Maximum: Only one 5321 may be attached to System/32.
Supplies: Only diagnostic magnetic cards are shipped with the
5321. Magnetic cards for customer applications must be separately ordered.
-Bibliography: GC20-0032
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M5321.1
Nov 78
--...
---......
--=-_-=
-=
=
- - - ---.
M5340.1
~
Nov 78
General Systems Division-Machines
-~---~-.-
5340 SYSTEM UNIT
Purpose: Contains main storage, disk storage, diskette drive,
facilities for addressing main storage, and logical processing
circuits and control for I/O units on System/34.
Model
Main Storage Diskette
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A31
A32
A33
A34
A35
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B31
B32
B33
B34
B35
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
C21
C22
C23
C24
C25
C31
C32
C33
C34
C35
011
012
013
014
015
021
022
023
024
025
031
032
033
034
32K
32K
32K
32K
32K
32K
32K
32K
32K
32K
32K
32K
32K
32K
32K
48K
48K
48K
48K
48K
48K
48K
48K
48K
48K
48K
48K
48K
48K
48K
64K
64K
64K
64K
64K
64K
64K
64K
64K
64K
64K
64K
64K
64K
64K
96K
96K
96K
96K
96K
96K
96K
96K
96K
96K
96K
96K
96K
96K
Diskette 1
Diskette 1
Diskette 1
Diskette 1
Diskette 1
Diskette 20
Diskette 2D
Diskette 20
Diskette 2D
Diskette 20
Magazine
Magazine
Magazine
Magazine
Magazine
Diskette 1
Diskette 1
Diskette 1
Diskette 1
Diskette 1
Diskette 20
Diskette 2D
Diskette 20
Diskette 20
Diskette 20
Magazine
Magazine
Magazine
Magazine
Magazine
Diskette 1
Diskette 1
Diskette 1
Diskette 1
Diskette 1
Diskette 2D
Diskette 20
Diskette 20
Diskette 20
Diskette 20
Magazine
Magazine
Magazine
Magazine
Magazine
Diskette 1
Diskette 1
Diskette 1
Diskette 1
Diskette 1
Diskette 20
Diskette 20
Diskette 20
Diskette 20
Diskette 20
Magazine
Magazine
Magazine
Magazine
Disk Storage
Capacity
8.6 MB
13.2 MB
27.1 MB
63.9 MB
128.4 MB
8.6 MB
13.2 MB
27.1 MB
63.9 MB
128.4 MB
8.6 MB
13.2MB
27.1 MB
63.9 MB
128.4 MB
8.6 MB
13.2 MB
27.1 MB
63.9 MB
128.4 MB
8.6 MB
13.2 MB
27.1 MB
63.9 MB
128.4 MB
8.6 MB
13.2 MB
27.1 MB
63.9 MB
128.4 MB
8.6 MB
13.2 MB
27.1 MB
63.9 MB
128.4 MB
8.6 MB
13.2 MB
27.1 MB
63.9 MB
128.4 MB
8.6 MB
13.2 MB
27.1 MB
63.9 MB
128.4 MB
8.6 MB
13.2 MB
27.1 MB
63.9 MB
128.4 MB
8.6 MB
13.2 MB
27.1 MB
63.9 MB
128.4 MB
8.6 MB
13.2 MB
27.1 MB
63.9 MB
035
E11
E12
E13
E14
E15
E21
E22
E23
E24
E25
E31
E32
E33
E34
E35
96K
128K
12.8K
128K
128K
128K
128K
128K
128K
128K
128K
128K
128K
128K
128K
128K
. Magazine
Diskette 1
Diskette 1
Diskette 1
Diskette 1
Diskette 1
Diskette 20
Diskette 20
Diskette 20
Diskette 20
Diskette 20
Magazine
Magazine
Magazine
Magazine
Magazine
128.4 MB
8.6MB
13.2 MB
27.1 MB
63.9 MB
128.4 MB
8.6 MB
13.2 MB
27.1 MB
63.9 MB
128.4 MB
8.6 MB
13.2 MB
27.1 MB
63.9 MB
128.4 MB
Model Changes: Field Installable
Highlights
Multiple work station system cap~bility
Multiprogramming and printer spooling provided Vltith System Program Product (5726-SS1)
Extension of System/32 capabilities
Direct and remote work station attachment flexibility
5251 Display Station
5252 Dual Display Station
5256 Printer
I/O unit attachment features
1255 Magnetic Character Reader
5211 Printer
Diskette Magazine Drive
Communications capability via BSC or SDLC through one or
two common adapters
Easy-to-use work station utility programming support available
Facilities to provide high-level of system availability
Main Storage Failure Recovery
Scientific Instruction Set
Fixed interval timer
Address Translation Registers
Storage protection
MICR document processing capability
5211 translation tables for character substitution.
5340 System Unit Components
Processor Unit: The main storage processor represents a
hardwired System/3 language processor with 32K, 48K, 64K,
96K, or 128K bytes of main storage. A microprocessor, with
16K words of control storage, operates in parallel with the
main storage processor, and supports a microcoded control
function and each of the I/O devices. The processor unit uses
a combination of LSI/MSI-Iarge and medium scale integration for the logic circuitry. Memory technology is Metal Oxide
Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor (MOSFET). Data and
instructions are stored as EBCDIC characters ... each EBCDiC
character is stored in an 8-bit byte ... a ninth bit is added for
parity checking. Main storage internal cycle time is 600 nanoseconds.
Work Station Controller: The 5250 Information Display
System devices (5251 Models 1 and 11 Display Stations, the
5252 Dual Display Station and the 5256 Printer). used as directly attached System/34 work stations, attach to a controller
in the 5340 System Unit via four twinax cable connectors on
the 5340. One cable connector must be dedicated to attachment of a 5251 Model 1 or 11 or 5252 to be used as the sys-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-----
= = =--==
_ _
__
....
_
M5340.2
General Systems Division-Machines
f
tem console. For maintenance reasons. only one of the above
machine types (5251 or 5252) should be attached to this cable.
A 6 m (20 ft) cable is provided with the 5340 for attachment of
the system console. Up to three additional twinax cables may
be connected to the 5340 for attachment of additional work
station devices. A maximum of eight display stations and
printers (the 5252 counts as two display stations). including
the console. may be attached. The maximum length of anyone
twinax cable attached to the 5340 cable connector is 1525 m
(5000 ft). Multiple work stations may be attached to one cable
via the Cable Through feature on the 5251 Models 1 and 11 or
5252
or
5256.
See
IBM System/34 Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GA21-9242.
Diskette: Included in the Models x1 x of the System Unit is the
diskette 1 drive. Models x2x incorporate the IBM Diskette 2D
drive. and the Models x3x use the Diskette Magazine drive.
The Diskette 1 drive is capable of reading and writing the IBM
Diskette 1 in Basic format or Extended format. The Diskette 2D
drive can read and write either the I BM Diskette 1 (Basic or
Extended format) or the two-sided double density I BM Diskette
2 D (Basic or Extended format).
The Diskette Magazine drive can process individual diskettes or
magazines. The magazine holds up to ten operator accessible
diskettes. The magazine drive can accommodate two magazines and three individual diskettes. The selecting of diskettes
within a magazine. and proceeding from the first magazine to
the second. is automatic (under program control). The magazines will typically be used for Savel Restore functions. The
three individual slots may be used for smaller jobs. Selectior. of
up to three individual diskettes is automatic (under program
control). Both IBM Diskette 1 (Basic or Extended format) or
the two-sided double density IBM Diskette 2D (Basic or Extended format) can be used in the Diskette Magazine. The
select cycle time (eject diskette. move to next diskette. load
diskette) is approximately 3 sec.
The compatible media for data exchange with other devices
such as 3740 is the IBM Diskette 1 in Basic format. The formats for diskettes are:
Diskette 1
Data Tracks/ Diskette
Capacity
Basic format
Bytes/ Sector
Sectors/Track
Tracks/ Cylinder
Data Bytes/ Diskette
Extended Format
Bytes / Sector
Sectors/Track
Tracks/ Cylinder
Data Bytes/ Diskette
74
128
26
246,272
512
8
303,104
Nov 78
cally non-removable. high speed. direct access media. and the
primary processing file in the system. Programs and data are
stored on the disk for processing. Data can be stored offline
for security or backup purposes by first copying the data from
disk storage to either of the two diskette media. The
System/34 with the Diskette 1 drive. the Diskette 20 drive. or
the Diskette Magazine drive. plus a multiprogramming capability provide flexible combinations to optimize diskette functions
with system disk storage. See M5340.8 for disk storage specifications:
System Console: A system console is not a component of the
5340 System Unit. The system console may be either a 5251
Model 1 or 11 Display Station or a 5252 Dual Display Station
which is physically attached to the System Unit similar to other
directly attached work station devices. For system operation
and service reasons. the console is required to be located within 6 m (20 ft) of the System Unit. Its primary use is to facilitate
operator control of the system via operator commands and to
allow the operator to respond to system messages presented
on t/le display. It may also be used as a data entry/inquiry
work station. interacting with a user application. The mode of
operation is easily switched from work station mode to console
mode for servicing system requests.
Minimum System Configuration: 5340 System Unit, 5256
Printer (serial) or 5211 Printer (line). and 5251 Model 1 or 11
Display Station or 5252 Dual Display Station. A system printer
must be provided to satisfy IBM maintenance requirements
when using IBM System Support Program Product (5726SS1).
Purchase Considerations
1. Any model upgrade that involves a disk storage capacity
change may require replacement of the disk storage mechanism. Adequate provision must be made for retaining the
data contained on the replaced disk mechanism and elimination of user proprietary information.
Diskette 20
2. The upgrade purchase prices for model changes may be
greater than the purchase price differentials. The customer
should carefully evaluate his future requirements when
purchasing a system.
148(74
Cylinders}
3. Replaced parts from any model change that includes disk
storage capacity change becomes the property of IBM.
256
26
2
985,088
1,024
8
2
1,212,416
The data transfer rate for the Diskette 1 drive is 31.2KB/sec;
for Diskette 2D drive it is 62.5KB/ sec (using Diskette 2D); and
for the Diskette Magazine drive it is 125.0KB/ sec (using Diskette 2D).
4. Replaced parts from any model change which changes the
diskette remain the property of the customer.
5. Replaced parts from any Special Feature installation or
removal remain the property of the customer.
Accessories
Keylock Keys: The 5340 with Keylock #4655 special feature
is shipped with two keys. Additional keys may be purchased
from IBM. (Vendor will supply additional keys only to the
original purchaser).
"Read or Write" of diskettes is overlapped with processing
and other device functions except disk storage data transfer.
All diskette seek operations are overlapped with processing
and I/O devices.
Disk Storage: Each model of the 5340 System Unit contains
one of five disk storage capacities. The disk storage is physi-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- -- General Systems Division-Machines
--- - -.. --_
-
-=-= ---
1. Voltage (AC, 1 Phase, 60 Hz): 9902 for 208V, or 9904 for
230V.
2. Color: Pearl white only (no specify code required).
3. Modem Cable (with #2600, #3600): Required for attaching
System/34 to the communications facility regardless of
whether an I BM integrated modem, an external modem or
DDSA is used. #9460 for a 6 m (20 ft) cable: #9461 for a
12 m (40 ft) cable. Specify this cable only once per system.
If two Communications Adapters are installed, the cable
length will be the same on both.
4. A 6 m (20 ft) twinax cable is included with the system unit
for 6261 Model 1 or 11 Display Station or 6262 Dual Display Station (system console). A 6 m (20 ft) cable is also
included if a 6266 Printer is used as the system printer. See
M6261, M6262, and M6266 pages for additional work
station twinax cable order information.
6. System Printer: #9301 jf 6211 Model 1 is attached; #9302 if
6211 Model 2 is attached; or #9306 if 6266 is the system
printer (no 6211).
6. Mandatory Specify Codes for Communications: One or
more selections per adapter must be specified from the
following list indicating prime usage of the first and / or
second Communications Adapter.
System/360
System/370 Model 138 and below
System/370 Model 146 and up
System/3
System/32
System/34
3740
5230
5260
Other IBM
Non-IBM
1st
Adapter
#2500
9670
9277
9278
9680
9691
9593
9579
9592
9595
9275
9276
2nd
Adapter
#3500
9670
9477
9478
9680
9691
9693
9679
9692
9695
9475
9476
7. Magnetic Stripe Control: Prerequisite #4900 if Magnetic
Stripe Reader (#4910) is installed on any 5251 or 5'-52.
8. Multinational Control: Prerequisite #4905 if Multinational
Character Set (#4905) is installed on any 5251, 5252, or
6256.
Note:
1. I/O Unit Attachments: Appropriate special features are
required to attach some I/O units ... see "Special Features."
2. System Support Program Product: 6726-SS1 should be
ordered at equipment order entry time ... see "System Support Program Product," 5726-SS1 for additional information.
3. Refer to IBM System/34 Installation Manual-Physical
Planning, GA21-9242 for physical installation requirements.
Prices: See Price List
Nov 78
Special Features
Specify
Prime Communications with:
M5340.3
1255 Attachment (#1100): Required to attach IBM 1255
Magnetic Character Reader ModelS 1, 2 or 3. Maximum: One.
Field Installable: Yes. Prerequisites: Processor Unit Expansion A and/or E may be required on certain models. See Processor Unit Expansion Feature Configurator. Limitation: Cannot
operate concurrently with 2nd Communications Adapter
(#3500). See IBM System/34 Installation Manual-Physical
Planning, GA21-9242 for cabling information.
Keylock (#4655): Replaces on/off power switch to protect
against unauthorized use. See Accessories above for information concerning additional keys. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
Internal Clock (#4703): Generates synchronizing and timing
signals for BSC or SOLC operation when they are not provided
by the modem on either Communications Adapter (#2500 or
#3500). Clocking speeds available with this feature are 600
bps and 1200 bps. Selection of full or half speed is indicated
via a system utility program. When this feature is installed on
System/34, all other BSC or SOLC stations attached to the
same data link must also be equipped with a similar IBM Internal Clock feature. See IBM Data Communications Handbook
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Communications Adapter .<#2500 or #3500),
EIA Interface (#3701 or #3702) or 1200 BPS Integrated Modem i#5500, 5501, 6500 or 6501).
Work Station Control Expansion A (#4900): Required if
Magnetic Stripe Reader (#4910) is installed on any 5251 or
5252 that is directly attached to the 5340. Maximum: One.
Field Installable: Yes.
Multinational Control (#4905): Required if Multinational
Character Set (#4905) is installed on any 5251, 5252, or 5256
attached to the 5340. Maximum: One. Field Installable: Not
recommended for field installation.
Processor Unit Expansion A (#5732: This is a feature I/O
board required for 1255 Attachment (#11 00). Not required on
xx3 (27.1 MB) models. Maximum: One. Field Installable:
Yes. See Processor Unit Expansion Feature Configurator.
Processor Unit Expansion B (#5733: Additional power for
communications. Required for 2400 BPS Integrated Modem
(#5600, #6600, #5601, #6601, #5602, #6602, #5610,.#6610).
Not required on xx4 and xx5 models. Maximum: One. Field
Installable: Yes. See Processor Unit Expansion Feature Configurator.
Processor Unit Expansion C (#5734): I/O modem regulator
required for EIA Interface (#3701 or #3702). or 1200 BPS
Integrated Modem, (#5500, #5501, #6500, #6501). Not required on xx4 and xx5 models. Not required if Processor Unit
Expansion B (#5733) is already installed. Maximum: One.
Field Installable: Yes. See Processor Unit Expansion Feature
Configurator.
Processor Unit Expansion D (#5735): Gate Assembly required for 2400 BPS Integrated Modem (#5600, #6600, #5601,
#6601, #5602, #6602, #56tO, #6610). Maximum: One. Field
Installable: Yes. See Processor Unit Expansion Feature Configurator.
Processor Unit Expansion E (#5736): Additional power
required for 1255 Attachment (#1100) on certain models.
Maximum: One. Field Installable: Yes. See Processor Expansion Feature Configurator.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- -- General Systems Division-Machines
= -=---=
- - - --_-.-....... -
M5340.4 '
Nov 78
-~-.-
5211 Printer Attachment <#5810): Required to attach a 5211
Printer Model 1 or 2. A translation capabilitY provides for use
of translation tables for substituting characters when the characters to be printed are not contained on the print belt.
Maximum: One. Field Installable: Yes. Prerequisite: See
"Specify" No.5 above.
5211 Translation Feature: Provides the capability in the 5211
Printer Attachment for use of translation tables for substituting
characters when the characters to be printed are not contained
on the print belt. Maximum: One Field Installable: Yes
Prerequisite: 5211 Printer Attachment (#5810)
Special Feature Prices: See Price List.
Processor Unit Expansion Feature Configurator
Attachments
1255
EIA/1200 BPS
2400 BPS
5340
Models
x11
x12
x21
x13
x22 x23
x14
x15
x24
x25
x34
x35
A
C*
C*
B, D B, D
A, E
D
x31
x32
x33
A, E
C*
B,D
E
C*
B,D
*"C" is not required if "B" is installed.
Note: Processor Unit Expansion Features required for communications features (EIA Interface or Integrated Modems) are
required only once per system regardless of whether one or
two Communications Adapters are installed. If 2400 BPS
Integrated Modem is installed on either Communication Adapter (#2500, #3500)' order Processor Unit Expansion Feature B
and D. If 2400 BPS Integrated Modem is not installed on either
Communications Adapter, order Processor Unit Expansion C
for EIA or 1200 BPS Integrated Modem. No I;'rocessor Unit
Expansion Feature is required if DDSA is installed on both
Communications Adapters.
Communications Adapter-BSC/SOLC <#2500, #3500):
Two Communications Adapters can be attached to System/34.
One communications line is connected (via appropriate interface or modem) to each adapter. In conjunction with stored
program control, this feature permits System/34 to function on
a switched, non-switched public or private communications
line. Each adapter provides both BSC or SDLC. The proper line
protocol is loaded into the control processor at program execution time.
Two Communications Adapters are available: #2500 is the first
Communications Adapter. #3500 is the second Communications Adapter. #2500 is a prerequisite for #3500. Maximum:
One #2500 and one #3500. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: For #2500-0ne of the Integrated Modems
(#5500, 5501, 5600, 5601, 5602 or 5610) or EIA Interface
(#3701) or DDSA (#5650 or #5651); For #3500-the first
Communications Adapter (#2500l, one of the Integrated Modems (#6500,6501,6600,6601,6602,6610) or EIA Interface
(#3702) or DDSA (#5652 or 5653). Note: See "Specify" for
required modem cable. SDLC supported by SSP (5726-SS1)
requires 48K bytes of main storage (5340 Model B or larger).
Below is a discussion of the communications hardware support: (1) common to both BSC and SDLC, (2) specific to BSC
support, (3) specific to SDLC support.
1. Support Common to Both BSC and SDLC
Each Communications Adapter (#2500 or #3500) will allow
System/34 to communicate on a non-switched point-topoint or multipoint line at speeds up to 9600 bps and on a
switched point-to-point line at speeds up to 4800 bps. Each
adapter operates independently under program control;
however, the maximum aggregate bit rate for both adapters
operating concurrently is 9,600 bps. See M2700 pages for
information on communication facilities.
On a multipoint line, System/34 operates as a tributary
station. No support is provided for System/34 to operate
as a control station on a multipoint line. except for the 5251
Model 2 or 12 under SDLC; therefore, communication with
other devices which do not provide control station capability
must be done on a point-to-point line only.
Each Communications Adapter will operate in half-duplex
mode over dial (switched network) facilities, and half-duplex
mode over non-switched (or equivalent private) communication lines which may be duplex or half-duplex facilities.
Operation of each feature will be overlapped at all transmission rates with processing and / or I/O device operations
(see Additional Information). Units at each termination, or
drop point, of a communication line to which the System/34
is attached must use the same clocking source (modem or
business machine) and must be set to operate at the same
transmission rate and to use the same transmission code.
Compatible modems must be used at all terminations on a
network.
Switched network versions include as a basic capability
support of Manual Dial and Manual or Auto Answer (where
the attached modem supports this capability) operations.
2. Support Specific to BSC Operations
The Communication Adapter allows operation in BSC mode
as requested by the executing program.
In conjunction with stored program control, this feature
permits System/34 to function on a switched or nonswitched communications line as a processor/terminal
communicating in binary synchronous mode with:
Another System/34 equipped with #2500 or #3500
A System/32 equipped with #2074
A System/3 equipped with #2074 or #2084
A System/360 Model 20 equipped with #2074
A System/360 or System/370 (which is supported by
OS or DOS BTAM; OS TCAM; OS/VS1 or OS/VS2
BTAM, TCAM or VTAM; DOS/VS BTAM or VTAM) via
an Integrated Communications Adapter, a 2701 Data
Adapter Unit, a 2703 Transmission Control Unit, a
3704/3705 Communications Controller with the Network
Control Program (NCP) or the Partitioned Emulation
Program (PEP), any of which are equipped with a binary
synchronous adapter and appropriate sub-features
A 3741 Data Station Model 2 or 3741 Programmable
Work Station Model 4
A 3747 Data Converter equipped with Communications
Adapter (#1660)
A 5110 Computer System equipped with BSCA #2074
(as a 3741 Model 2 or 4)
A 5231 Model 2 equipped with BSCA (#2074) (Point-toPoint unidirectional transmission only)
A System!7 equipped with BSCA (#2074)
See the System/34 programming pages for a description of
the program support provided for this feature.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---.- - -------~
-.
- -=- --==--=
----------_
- .... -
M5340.5
.-
General Systems Division-Machines
Nov 78
.
.,.
ASCII, EBCDIC, or EBCDIC Text Transparency are standard
ASCII or EBCDIC transmission codes are selected at program compilation time.
3. Support Specific to SDLC Operations
The Communications Adapter allows operation in SDLC
mode as requested by the executing program.
The System/34 SSP provides SDLC communications support for multipoint line control when the 5251 Model 2 or 12
Display Stations are attached to that Communications
Adapter.
In conjunction with stored program control, this feature
provides communications capability with System/370 Models 115 to 168 via a 3704 or 3705 Communications Controller equipped with appropriate features ... see 3704, 3705.
The System/370 must be operating under control of
DOS/VS, OS/VS1 or OS/VS2 VTAM and the 3704/3705
under control of the Network Control Program/VS
(NCP /VS). See the System/34 programming pages for a
description of the program support provided on System/34
for this feature. ASCII support for 5251 Model 2 or 12 is by
RPQ only.
Communications Features: For the first Communications
Adapter (#2500).
EIA Interface (#3701): Provides a cable and interface for
attachment of an IBM Modem or non-IBM Modem meeting
RS-232-C characteristics. Non-IBM Modems may be attached
subject to the Multiple Suppliers System Policy. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: Cannot be installed
with 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500, 5501), or 2400 BPS
Integrated Modem (#5600, 5601, 5602, 5610), or DDSA
(#5650, 5651). Prerequisites: Communications Adapter
(#2500), and Processor Unit Expansion C (#5734). Note: This
feature may also require Internal Clock (#4703) if the external
modem
does
not
provide
its own
clocking.
See
Modem/ Interface Feature Configurator.
1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500, 5501): A modem for
SDLC or BSC data transmission at 1200 bps over nonswitched facilities or switched network. Half speed operation
at 600 bps is indicated via a system utility program. Available
in
two
different
versions:
#5500-Non-switched ... #5501-Switched with Auto Answer.
Attachment to the non-switched (2 or 4-wire) facilities is via an
IBM provided cable directly to the line, Type 3002. Attachment
to the switched network is via an I BM provided cjble to a
common carrier arrangement type CBS or equivalent. The
device communicating with System/34 must also be equipped
with a 1200 BPS Integrated Modem. limitations: Cannot be
installed with EIA Interface (#3701) or 2400 BPS Integrated
Modem (#5600, 5601, 5602, 5610)' or DDSA (#5650, 5651).
#5500 and 5501 cannot be installed together. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Communications
Adapter (#2500), Processor Unit Expansion C (#5734) and
Internal Clock (#4703). See Modem/Interface Feature Configurator.
2400 BPS Integrated Modem (#5600, 5601, 5602, 5610): A
modem for BSC or SDLC data transmission at 2400 bps over
non-switched facilities or switched network, equivalent to and
compatible with similarly featured IBM 3872 modems. Available in four different versions: #5600-Non-switched Point-toPoint,
#5601-Non-switched
Multipoint
Control,
#5602-Non-switched Multipoint Tributary, #5610-Switched
Network with Auto Answer.
Attachment to non-switched (2 or 4-wire) facilities is via IBM
provided cable directly to the line, Type 3002, Attachment to
the switched network is via an IBM provided cable to a common carrier arrangement type CBS or equivalent. The device
communicating with System/34 must also be equipped with a
2400 BPS Integrated Modem or IBM 3872 Modem.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with EIA Interface (#3701) or
1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500, 5501), or DDSA (#5650,
5651). #5600, 5601, 5602, or 5610 cannot be installed together. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Communications Adapter (#2500), Processor Unit Expansion B
(#5733) and Processor Unit Expansion D (#5735). See
Modem/ Interface Feature Configurator.
Switched Network Backup (SNUB) (#7951): Provided for
backup attachment of System/34 to the public switched network when the 2400 BPS Integrated Modem (#5600, 5601,
5602) is used on a non-switched line as the prime facility. It
can communicate with another 2400 BPS Integrated Modem or
an IBM 3872 Modem when either is equipped with switched
network capability. Selection of the primary or backup facility
is via an operator invoked system utility program.
Attachment to the switched network is made via a common
carrier arrangement type CDT or equivalent. Calls must be
established and answered manually. Operator intervention,
program modification, or both may be required on the using
system/terminal. This feature can be used with BTAM programs for DOS, DOS/VS, OS, OS/VS1, OS/VS2 in certain
configurations or with TCAM/VTAM under OS/VS1 or
OS/VS2. Additional customer program routines will be required, in existing BT AM programming, to fully utilize the capabilities of the Switched Network Backup feature. For additional
information, see the IBM 3872 Modem User's Guide, GA213058. Limitations: Cannot be installed with Switched Network
Backup with Auto Answer (#7952). Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Communications Adapter
(#2500) and 2400 BPS Integrated Modem (#5600, 5601,
5602).
Switched Network Backup with Auto Answer (SNBU/AA)
(#7952): Same as Switched Network Backup (#7951) plus the
added capability of automatically answering incoming calls
when attached to a common carrier arrangement type CBS or
equivalent. Selection of the prime or backup facility is via an
operator invoked system utility program. Operation intervention, program modification, or both may be required on the
using systemlterminal. This feature can be used with BT AM
programs for DOS, DOS/VS, OS, OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 in
certain configurations or with TCAM/VTAM under OS/VS1 or
OS/VS2.
Additional customer program routines will be required, in eXIsting BT AM programming, to fully utilize the capabilities of the
Switched Network Backup feature. For additional information
see the IBM 3872 Modem User's Guide, GA21-3058.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with Switched Network Backup (#7951). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Communications Adapter (#2500) and 2400
BPS Integrated Modem (#5600, 5601, or 5602).
DDS Adapter-(DDSA) (#5650, 5651): An integrated adapter for BSC or SDLC data transmission at speeds of 2400,
4800 or 9600 bps over the AT & T non-switched Data-Phone*
Digital Service I"'etwork. The DDSA interfaces to a DDS channel service unit, the customer site termination of the DDS
network. Available at three speeds: 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps.
For point-to-point or multipoint control (#5650), for multipoint
tributary (#5651). Limitations: Cannot be installed with EIA
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--..=
=--==General Systems Division-Machines
------- - .
-
interface (#3701) or 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500,
5501) or 2400 BPS Integrated Modem (#5600, 5601, 5602,
5610).
Maximum:
One.
Field
Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisite: Communications Adapter (#2500).
*Registered Trademark of AT & T.
Communications
Adapter (#3500)
Features:
For
second
Communications
EIA Interface (#3702): Provides a cable and interface for
attachment of an IBM Modem or non-IBM Modem meeting
RS-232-C characteristics. Non-I BM Modems may be attached
subject to the Multiple Suppliers System Policy. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: Cannot be installed
with 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#6500, 6501) or 2400 BPS
Integrated Modem (#6600, 6601, 6602, 6610) or DDSA
(#5652, 5653). Prerequisites: Communications Adapter
(#3500) and Processor Unit Expansion C (#5734). Note: This
feature may also require Internal Clock (#4703) if the external
modem
does
not
provide
its
own
clocking.
See
Modem/ Interface Feature Configurator.
1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#6500, 6501): A modem for
SDLC or BSC data transmission at 1200 bps over nonswitched facilities or switched network. Half speed operation
at 600 bps is indicated via a system utility program. Available
in
two
different
versions:
#6500-Non-switched,
#6501-Switched with Auto Answer. Attachment to the nonswitched (2 or 4-wire) facilities via an I BM provided cable
directly to the line, Type 3002. Attachment to the switched
network is via an IBM provided cable to a common carrier
arrangement type CBS or equivalent. The device communicating with System/34 must also be equipped with a 1200 BPS
Integrated Modem. Limitations: Cannot be installed with EIA
Interface (#3702) or 2400 BPS Integrated Modem (#6600,
6601, 6602, 6610) or DDSA (#5652, 5653). #6500 and #6501
cannot be installed together.
Maximum: One.
Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Communications Adapter
(#3500), Processor Unit Expansion C (#5734) and Internal
Clock (#4703). See MOdem/Interface Feature Configurator.
2400 BPS Integrated Modem (#6600, 6601, 6602, 6610): A
modem for BSC or SDLC data transmission at 2400 bps over
non-switched facilities or switched network, equivalent to and
compatible with similarly featured IBM 3872 modems. Available in four different versions: #6600-Non-switched Point-toPoint,
#6601-Non-switched
Multipoint
Control,
#6602-Non-switched Multipoint Tributary, #6610-Switched
Network with Auto Answer.
Attachment to non-switched (2 or 4-wire) facilities is via IBM
provided cable directly to the line, Type 3002. Attachment to
the switched network is via an IBM provided cable to a common carrier arrangement type CBS or equivalent. The device
communicating with System/34 must also be equipped with a
2400 BPS Integrated Modem or IBM 3872 Modem.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with E IA Interface (#3702) or
1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#6500, 6501), or DDSA (#5652,
5653). #6600, 6601, 6602 or 6610 cannot be installed together. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Communications Adapter (#3500), Processor Unit Expansion B
(#5733) and Processor Unit Expansion D (#5735). See
Modem/ Interface Feature Configurator.
Switched Network Backup (SNBU) (#7953): Provided for
backup attachment of System/34 to the public switched network when the 2400 BPS Integrated Modem (#6600, 6601,
6602) is used on a non-switched line as the, prime facility. It
can communicate with another 2400 BPS Integrated Modem or
M5340.6
Nov 78
an IBM 3872 Modem when either is equipped with switched
network capability. Selection of the primary or backup facility
is via an operator invoked system utility program.
Attachment to the switched network is made via common
carrier arrangement type CDT or equivalent. Calls must be
established and answered manually, Operator intervention,
program modification, or both may be required on the using
system !terminal. This feature can be used with BT AM programs for DOS, DOS/VS, OS, OS/VS1, OS/VS2, in certain
configurations or with TCAM/VTAM under OS/VS1 or
OS/VS2. Additional customer program routines will be required, in existing BTAM programming, to fully utilize the capabilities of the Switched Network Backup feature. For additional
information, see the IBM 3872 Modem User's Guide, GA213058. Limitations: Cannot be installed with Switched Network
Backup with Auto Answer (#7954). Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Communications Adapter
(#3500) and 2400 BPS Integrated Modem (#6600, 6601,
6602),
Switched Network Backup with Auto Answer (SNBU/AA)
(#7954): Same as Switched Network Backup (#7953) plus the
added capability of 'automatically answering incoming calls
when attached to a common carrier arrangement type CBS or
equivalent. Selection of the prime or backup facility is via an
operator invoked system utility program. Operation intervention, program modification, or both may be required on the
using system/terminal. This f~ature can be used with BTAM
programs for DOS, DOS/VS, OS, OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 in
certain configurations or with TCAM/VTAM under OS/VS1 or
OS/VS2.
Additional customer program routines will be required, in existing BT AM programming, to fully utilize the capabilities of the
Switched Network Backup feature. For additional information
see the IBM 3872 Modem User's Guide, GA21-3058,
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Switched Network Backup (#7953). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Communications Adapter (#3500) and 2400
BPS Integrated Modem (#6600, 6601, 6602).
DDS Adapter-(DDSA) (#5652, 5653): An integrated adapter
for BSC or SDLC data transmission at speeds of 2400, 4800 or
9600 bps over the AT & T non-switched Data-Phone* Digital
Service network, The DDSA interfaces to a DDS channel
service unit. the customer site termination of the DDS network.
Available at three speeds: 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps. For pointto-point or multipoint control (#5652), for multipoint tributary
(#5653). Limitations: Cannot be installed with EIA Interface
(#3702) or 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#6500, 6501) or 2400
BPS Integrated Modem (#6600,
6601,
6602,
6(10).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Communications Adapter (#3500).
*Registered Trademark of AT & T.
IBM Modems: One IBM Modem can be attached to each
Communications Adapter.
Prerequisite: Communications
Adapter (#2500, 3500); EIA Interface (#3701, 3702). Processor Unit Expansion (#5734)
Modem
3872 Model 1.
3874 Model 1
3875 Modell
Speed (bps)
2400/1200
4800/2400
7200/3600
Note: System/34 does not support Auto Call Originate (#1091)
on the 3872 or 3874, For communications capabilities, product
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- ....
-= --_
==--=
- -------.-
=
.-----
M5340.7
Nov 78
General Systems Division-Machines
utilization, and special features, see M2700, M3872, M3874,
M3875 pages.
To verify the proper integrated or external modem interface
configuration, refer to the chart below. Select one of the categories numbered from 1 to 3 and follow across for the required
and optional special features.
Modem/Interface Feature Configurator:
Modem/Interface
Internal
Clock
(#4703)
Optional
1. EIA Interface
(#3701, 3702)
2. 1200 BPS Integrated Modem:
A. Non-Switched
(#5500,6500)
Required
B. Switched W / Auto
Answer (#5501 ,
6501)
Required
3. 2400 BPS Integrated Modem:
A. Non-Switched Point-toPoint (#5600,
6600)
B. Non-Switched Multipoint
Tributary (#5602,
6602)
C. Switched N~twork with
Auto Answer (#5610,
6610)
D. Non-Switched Multipoint
Control (#5601,
6601 )
Processor
Unit Expansion
0(1)
(#5735)
SNBU or
SNBU/AA
(#7951, 7953)
(#7952, 7954)
Required(3)
Required
Optional
Required(3)
Required
Optional
Required(3)
Required
Required(3)
Required
Processor
Unit Expansion
B (1)
(#5733)
Processor
Unit Expansion
C (1)
(#5734)
Required (2)
Reqllired (2)
Required (2)
Optional
Note: 1. See Processor Unit Expansion Feature Configurator.
2. Not required if Processor Unit Expansion B
(#5733) is installed. Not required on xx4 and xx5 models.
3. Not required on xx4 and xx5 models.
Note: Refer to M2700. 3845. and 3846 pages for in-
Additional Information
I.
formation on 3845 or 3846 configuration and communication capability. The IBM 3845 or 3846 device operating with SDLC will not operate with NRZI transmission
mode.
Communication Facility Attachments
The Communications Adapter features operate at speeds
up to 9600 bps on a non-switched point-to-point or multipoint common carrier facility or equivalent privately
owned communication facility and up to 4800 bps on a
switched point-to-point facility. However, the aggregate
bit rate when both adapters are operating concurrently is
9,600 bps. The second Communications Adapter
(#3500) may be physically attached to System/34 which
also has the 1255 Attachment (#1100), but these two
attachments (#1100 and #3500) cannot operate concurrently.
II.
2. See M2700 pages for additional information concerning modems. communications facilities. machine attachment requirements. terminal intermix. operating
capabilities. and customer responsibilities.
3. Refer to the Data Communications Handbook
A system utility program is used for the selection of
certain data communications characteristics such as: full
speed or half speed, internal or external modem clocking.
line type. station address. etc. See the System / 34 System Support Reference Manual, SC21-5155 for a complete description of $SETCF utility.
IBM Data Encryption Devices-An IBM 3845 or IBM
3846 Data Encryption Device may be attached between
the System/34 communications adapter and the external
modem. Prerequisite: EIA Interface #3701 or #3702.
References
1. See the host system programming pages
This handbook also contains information related
to common carrier facilities and tariffs.
"I.
4. Refer to System/34 Installation Manual-Physical
Planning, GA21-9242 for physical installation requirements.
Customer Responsibilities
1. The customer must be advised. in writing. of certain
responsibilities related to the installation and mainte-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-----= - --=---=
- - -------"" " -
-=
M5340.8
Nov 78
General Systems Division-Machines
Communication Feature Prices: See Price List.
nance of common carrier facilities/ services as well as
the IBM eq uipment.
2. The r8M Marketing Representative must have the
customer obtain a firm installation date for the start
of transmission services {including any required modems} prior to processing the Order Confirmation
card.
IV.
Cables
A modem cable is required. See "Specify."
8.6 MB
Bytes/ Sector
Bytes/Cylinder
Disk Spindles
Cylinders
Capacity
Access Time (ms)
Cyl to Cyl
*Average
Maximum
13.2 MB
256
46,080
1
187.00
256
46,080
2
589.33
8,616,960
13,271,040
27,156,480
10
33
55
(201 cyl)
10
38
70
(302 cyl)
10
38
70
(302 cyl/
spindle)
2964
Rotational Speed (RPM) 2964
Data Transfer Rate
(MB/SEC)
.889
63.9 MB
27.1 MB
256
46,080
1
288.00
2964
.889
128.4 MB
256
180,224
1
354.50
63,905,792
128,425,984
9
9
27
46
(359 cyl/
spindle}
3125
27
46
(359 cyl)
3125
.889
256
180,224
2
712.50
1 .031
*Average of all possible disk accesses.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
1 .031
---...
-- =
---
~.
.- -====
-- - --- General Systems Division-Machines
-~-.
-~-,,-
This page left blank intentionally
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M5340.9
Nov 78
---- ------ =---=
- -=- ---
M5381 1.1
~
General Systems Division-System/3S
5381 SYSTEM UNIT
Model Changes: Field Installable
Purpose
Highlights
Contains main storage, control storage, work station controllers, communications controller (optional), disk storage, diskette magazine drive, system console keyboard/display,
operator / service panel, facilities for addressing main storage,
arithmetic and logical processing circuits and control functions
for I/O units on System/3B.
Model**
321
322
323*
324*
325*
326*
331
332
333*
334*
335*
336*
341
342
343*
344*
345*
346*
521
522
523*
524*
525*
526*
531
532
533*
534*
535*
536*
541
542
543*
544*
545*
546*
551
552
553*
554*
555*
556*
561
562
563*
564*
565*
566*
Main Storage
512K
512K
512K
512K
512K
512K
768K
768K
768K
768K
768K
768K
1024K
1024K
1024K
1024K
1024K
1024K
512K
512K
512K
512K
512K
512K
768K
768K
768K
768K
768K
768K
1024K
1024K
1024K
1024K
1024K
1024K
1280K
1280K
1280K
1280K
1280K
1280K
1536K
1536K
1536K
1536K
1536K
1536K
Disk Storage
64.5 MB
129.0 MB
193.5 MB
25B.0 MB
322.6 MB
387.1 MB
64.5 MB
129.0 MB
193.5 MB
258.0 MB
322.6 MB
387.1 MB
64.5 MB
129.0 MB
193.5 MB
258.0 MB
322.6 MB
387.1 MB
64.5 MB
129.0 MB
193.5 MB
258.0 MB·
322.6 MB
387.1 MB
64.5 MB
129.0 MB
193.5 MB
258.0 MB
322.6 MB
387.1 MB
64.5 MB
129.0 MB
193.5 MB
258.0 MB
322.6 MB
387.1 MB
64.5 MB
129.0 MB
193.5 MB
258.0 MB
322.6 MB
387.1 MB
64.5 MB
129.0 MB
193.5 MB
258.0 MB
322.6 MB
387.1 MB
* Includes expansion enclosure.
** Model 5xx has approximately two times the internal performance of the Model 3XX.
Note: Model 551 through 566 available 2/22/80.
Nov 78
Interactive work station system.
•
System architecture oriented to work station environment.
•
Virtual storage for efficient management of main storage.
System Architecture
A primary feature of System/38 is the 5381 unit advanced
instruction set which embodies many basic supervisory, resource and data base management functions. As an example
of the power, the instruction set includes data base operations
that retrieve, update, and logically order data records.
The 5381 has an object-oriented architecture fundamental to
its overall design. Objects are structures such as programs,
processes, and data base files, which are manipulated at a
logical level through the unit's instruction set. The 5381 manages storage on an object basis reducing user dependence on
main storage size, physical disk location, and internal implementation.
Access to objects is machine controlled providing a high level
of integrity, automatic serialization of concurrent operations on
an object. and effective authority enforcement.
Units of work are managed as independent processes (tasks)
which share the machine resources (processor, storage, devices). Interprocess communication is accomplished through
queues and event Signals. Objects can be locked to control and
serialize concurrent access to them by several processes.
All objects reside in virtual storage which is managed by the
5381 processing unit. Objects are allocated space on permanent disk storage and are brought into main storage (as needed) where they may be shared by all processes. Although
system performance may be affected by main storage size.
applications are not limited in the number or size of objects
used. This allows additional disk or main storage to be added
without a need to restructure applications.
Input/ output operations offer improved device independence
through the use of the 5381 device support (source/sink)
functions which manage the channel, communications, and
other asynchronous hardware operations.
This high level of function is standard on all System/38 models.
'
Microcode Main Storage Utilization
The System/38 accomplishes much of its advanced function
using main storage resident microcode. The amount of main
storage used depends on system size and configuration. and
the number of system functions active at any specific time,
Hardware Features***
•
Main Storage Capacity-512K bytes, 76BK bytes. 1024K
bytes. Model 5XX expandable to 1280K and 1536K bytes,
•
Single Level Storage Management (manages main storage
and disk storage as one logical storage resource which
contains all programs and data),
•
Two performance-level models (3XX and 5XX). Nominal
main storage internal cycle time per 4 byte access is 1100
nanoseconds for Model 3XX and 600 nanoseconds for
Model 5XX. Specific times may vary according to the instruction mix.
Not to be reproduced without written permissio,n.
----=
=---=
-----_- ...., -----
=
M5381 1.2·
General Systems Division-System/3S
From one to six spindles of disk storage (64.5-387.1 MB).
Direct attachment capability of 5250 work station devices
(40 maximum).
Up to two 650 LPM printers may be attached.
Diskette magazine drive-standard.
•
System console/keyboard display-standard.
Up to 4 SNA/SDLC communication lines.
Main storage Error Checking and Correction.
Instruction retry capability (except where "results" field is
also an operand field).
I/O controller retry
Reliability, Availability, and Serviceability (RAS) features are
implemented throughout the system and are all supported
by new and improved diagnostic aids.
Note:
In device operations, the nominal or rated throughputs represented in this publication may not be
achieved in an actual customer environment when
used with the customer's control program or application load.
System Unit Components
Processor Unit
Main storage on the Models 3XX and 5XX is available with
512K, 768K, and 1024K bytes. Model 5XX expandable to
1280K and 1536K bytes. 4K words (32-bit word) of control
storage is standard on the Model 3XX. The Model 5XX has 8K
words of control storage standard. The Model 5XX has an
internal performance of approximately 2 times the Model 3XX.
Average main storage internal cycle time per 4-byte access on
the Model 5XX is 600 nanoseconds and on the Model 3XX is
1100 nanoseconds. (Actual timings may vary depending on the
actual instruction mix.)
Virtual Address Translation (VAT) is a standard facility on
the 5381. Virtual Address Translation converts virtual addresses to real addresses.
Nov 78
The System Control Adapter (SCA) provides the capability to
initiate a power-on/off sequence and also, provides a central
serviceability point to all system units. The SCA provides a
dual interface between the Operator/Service panel and the
console to the system. At initial power-on or Initial Microprogram Load (IMPL) time, the SCA performs functional testing of
the processor and diagnostic check-out of main storage prior to
loading the control store with microcode. Execution of the
microcode initializes the system and control is then transferred
to the operator. The SCA is an integral part of the hardware
system.
The Operator/Service panel is located on the system where it
is easily accessible to the operator and service personnel. The
operator / service panel contains 24 indicators (LE Os), one
LOAD pushbutton switch, one Power-on pushbutton switch,
one display intensity switch, and two rotary switches. Three
optional features may be included on the panel: An audible
alarm and attention indicator; a power keylock switch, and an
automatic IMPL switch.
System Console/Keyboard Display
System console functions are invoked by the standard CRT
display and keyboard. They are physically integrated into the
right top section of the system. The console display uses a 12"
CRT, and contains 1024 character positions, 16 lines of 64
character positions each. The large characters improve readability for the operator. Upper/Lower case characters are
standard, as well as four display indicators (attention, input
inhibited, reset required, and upper shift).
Display attributes include protected fields, underscore, and
nondisplay. The keyboard has a typewriter-like layout with 24
Command Function keys and a HEX key. The multinational
character set provides the overstrike function. Overstrike is the
capability to create, process, and output National Usage Characters. In addition, the multinational character set provides the
capability for multicountry processing. See Type Catalog for
character sets and keyboard layout. A 5251/5252 can be
attached to serve as an alternate console should the user desire
the console in a different location or require a desk top sitting
position.
Diskette Magazine Drive
The VAT facilities include:
Primary Directory (PD}-indicates the virtual address and
status information of a page stored in a block of real storage
called a page frame.
Hash Table (HT}-a list of entries used to index the Primary
Directory.
Lookaside Buffer (LB}-is a high speed buffer storage
which contains certain information specified in the primary
directory. The translation process time is reduced if the
referenced virtual address is listed in the LB.
A diskette drive is standard on the System/38 and provides
three significant functions; save/restore, diskette I/O, and CE
servicing. The diskette drive is designed to accept two 10diskette magazines which can be used for save/restore and
other diskette I/O operations. Each magazine can contain up
to 12 megabytes of data (2D format). In addition to the two
magazines, the diskette drive contains 3 diskette slots which
can be used for loading one to three diskettes manually. Diskette types 1, 2, and 20 may be read or written.
Main Storage technology is dynamic Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor (MOSFET). The processor unit uses
LSI-Large Scale Integration for the logic circuitry.
The processor provides overlap operation of instruction fetch
and execution functions. The Time-:of-Day clock provides a
measure of time suitable for elapsed time measurements and
time-of-day indications.
The high-speed integrated channel has an instantaneous character transfer rate of up to 2.5 million bytes per second.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---= =
=---=
General Systems Division-System/3S
----_.
-
Disk Storage
Prices: See Price List.
The System Unit can contain from one to six spindles of integrated nonremovable disk storage. The following table provides capacity and access times.
Purchase Considerations
Bytes! Sector
Bytes! Cylinder
Capacity
Access Time (ms)
Minimum (Cyl to Cyl) seek
Maximum Average seek
Maximum seek
Latency (Average)
Rotational speed RPM
Data Transfer Rate ( MB!Sec)
(Nominal)
512
180,224
64,520,192
Bytes
9
27
46
9.6 ms
3,125
1.031
Data can be' stored offline for security or backup purposes by
copying the data to diskettes.
Work Station Controller
Direct local attachment of IBM 5250 Information Display System devices is provided by the Work Station Controller. One
Work Station Contr.oller is standard on all models of
System/38. It provides 8 ports for attaching up to 12 work
stations (Keyboard Displays and/or Printers) directly to the
system in any combination.
Bibliography: IBM System/38 Guide to Publications GC217726.
M5381 1.3,
Nov 78
•
The upgrade purchase prices for model changes may be
greater than purchase price differentials. The customer
should carefully evaluate his future requirements when
purchasing a system.
•
Replaced parts from any model upgrade become the property of IBM.
Notes:
1. Refer to IBM System/38 Installation Manual-Physical
Planning, GA21-9293 for physical installation requirements.
2. The Installation and Service Facility (ISF) is optionally available for installation of System/38s and to support diagnostics and analysis.
The Installation and Service Facility is provided on an "as
required" basis. ISF is available from Customer Engineering
as an Engineering Change (EC). To order, specify to Customer Engineering either the EC number or EC name.
For those customers who have the CPF Licensed Program,
the Concurrent Service Monitor provides support for installation, support of diagnostics, and analysis in the postinstallation period.
Special Features
Minimum Configuration: Any Model 3XX or 5XX.
First 5211/3262 Printer Attachment (#1100)
Although a customer may order a System/38 without a line
printer, he must be made aware that IBM's ability to diagnose
the system without an attached line printer may be impaired
and thus have an adverse effect on the system's availability.
To attach the first 5211/3262 printer, one of the following
feature codes must also be specified: 5211-2 (#1204). 3262A 1 (#1207). and 3262-B1 (#1208). Maximum: one. Field
Installation: yes.
Second 5211/3262 Printer Attachment (#1110)
Note: Diskettes and diskette magazines are not included with
the 5381 System Unit.
Specify
1. Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60Hz): #9903 for 208V, and
#9905 for 230V.
2. Accent Panel Color: One must be specified.
Willow Green
Garnet Rose
Sunrise Yellow
Classic Blue
Charcoal Brown
Pebble Grey
(#9060)
(#9061)
(#9062)
(#9063)
(#9064)
(#9065)
(Note: The color for the base enclos~re is Pearl White.)
3. Up-Ending Kit (#9845): This kit enables the 5381 to be
up-ended for installation and moving purposes at the customer location. This kit is furnished only as n~cessary and
remains the property of IBM.
4. Character Set: (#9540) provides the United States character set. See Type Catalog for details. (#9535) provides the
multinational character set. See Type Catalog for details.
Maximum: one. Field Installation: yes.
5. I/O Attachments: Appropriate special features are required to attach most I/O units. See special features.
Req uired to attach the second 5211 /3262 printer, one of the
following feature codes must also be specified: 5211-2 (#1232)
and 3262-B1 (#1234). Maximum: one. Field Installation:
yes. Prerequisite: Processor Unit Expansion 2 and 3 (#6301
and #6302) are required. See "Processor Unit Expansion Feature Configurator" to determine requirements. Limitation: The
3262-A 1 cannot be a second printer to another 3262-A 1. If the
first printer attached is a 5211-2 or 3262-B 1 and the user
requires a 3262-A 1 as a second printer, then an MES is needed
to move the first attached printer to the second attach position,
and install the 3262-A 1 to the first attachment position.
Multifunction Card Unit Attachment 250/60/60 CPM
(#1220)
To attach a 5424 MFCU Model A 1. Maximum: one 5424 per
system. Field Installation: yes. Prerequisite: Processor Unit
Expansion 2 and 3 (#6301 and #6302) are required. See
"Processor Unit Expansion Feature Configurator" to determine
requirements. Also, System/38 Attachment feature (#6500) is
required on the 5424.
M~ltifunction Card Unit Attachment 500/120/120 CPM
(#1221 )
To attach a 5424 MFCU Model A2. Maximum: one 5424 per
system. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Multifuncti?n
Card Unit Attachment - 250/60/60 (#1220). Also, Processor
Unit Expansion 2 and 3 (#6301 and #6302) are required. See
"Processor Unit Expansion Feature Configurator" to determine
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--~--==--=
- - General Systems Division-System/3S
=
- -----_
... -
--
M5381 1.5
Nov 78
-~-.-
Work Station Controller, Second (#5302). The maximum number of 5250 devices that can be attached to each appropriately
featured Work Station Controller is 20. (The 5252 Model 1 is
counted as two devices.)
WORK STATION CONTROLLER CONFIGURATOR
Work Station
Controller
(Standard)
~8 Cable Ports
f-12 Devices
I
I
I
OR
Device
Interfllce
Expansion
(#5321 )
Device Control
Expansion
(#5331)
-8 Add'i Cable Ports
-8 Add'i Devices
-8 Add'i Devices
-No Add'i Cable Ports
Work Station
8 Cable Ports
Controller
.- 12 Devices
Second
(#5302)
1 ______._.
I
Device Control
Expansion
(#5332)
-8 Add'i Devices
-No Add'i Cable Ports
OR
-
... ~
Device
I Interface
Expan'sion
(#5322)
-8 Add'i Cable Ports
-8 Add'i Devices
MAXIMUM OF 20 DEVICES PER CONTROLLER
MAXIMUM OF 40 DEVICES PER SYSTEM
UP TO 7 DEVICES MAY BE ATTACHED TO A SINGLE
CABLE PORT VIA TWINAX CABLING 5250 CABLETHROUGH FEATURE
UP TO 2 DEVICES MAY BE ATTACHED TO A SINGLE
CABLE PORT VIA COAX CABLING 5250 CABLETHROUGH FEATURE
Note: The 5252 Model 1 is counted as 2 devices.
Device Control Expansion (#5331), (#5332)
Permits Work Station Controllers to support up to eight additional 5250 devices (5251 Models 1 and 11, 5252 Model 1,
5256 Models 1, 2, and 3). This feature does not provide any
additional cable connectors but provides the necessary control
storage to support additional devices attached via the cable
connectors provided by Work Station Controllers.
(#5331) - for Basic Work Station Controller (Component of
Base System) '" (#5332) - for Work Station Controller, Second
(#5302). See 5250 sales pages (M5251, M5252, and M5256)
for selection of appropriate 5250 features which permit multidropping devices on twinax cable facilities. (Note: The 5252
represents 2 devices.) Maximum: one per Work Station Controller. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Device Interface
Expansion (#5321 L (#5322) on the same Work Station Controller. Prerequisite: Work Station Controller, Second (#5302)
for (#5332).
Device Interface Expansion (#5321), (#5322)
Provides the necessary control and eight twinax cable connectors for attachment of eight additional 5250 devices (5251
Models 1 and 11, 5252 Model 1, 5256 Models 1, 2, and 3) in
any combination. This feature is always installed in conjunction
with a Work Station Controller: (#5321) - for Basic Work
Station Controller (Component of Base System) ... (#5322) for Work Station Controller, Second (#5302). Refer to 5250
sales pages for information pertaining to device features, accessories, and cabling requirements. (Note: The 5252 represents 2 devices.) Maximum: one per Work Station Controller.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Device Control Expansion
(#5331), (#5332) on the same Work Station Controller.
Prerequisite: Work Station Controller, Second (#5302) for
(#5322).
COMMUNICATIONS-GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Communications capability is provided by a multiline facility
integrated in the 5381 System Unit. It is made up of several
features to allow flexibility to best satisfy v~rious communication application requirements. There are four basic building
blocks (features), each being one or more features which can
be selected to provide the function desired
Special Features
Work Station Controller, Second (#5302)
Provides direct local attachment of additional 5250 devices
(5251 Models 1 and 11, 5252 Model 1, 5256 Models 1, 2, and
3) in any combination. This feature (#5302) with expansion
features described below extends the system maximum of
locally attached 5250 devices to 40. This feature (#5302)
includes basic control and 8 cable interfaces for attaching
additional work stations. Up to 12 work stations can be attached using the Cable Thru features on the 5250 devices.
1. Communications Attachment (#1501)
2. Communications Control (#2000)
3. Line Base(s) (#3200)
4. Line Interfaces
Cabling provisions are the same as the basic Work Station
Controller described above. For further expansion of 5250
devices (maximum of 20 for this controller), see Device Interface Expansion (#5322), or Device Control Expansion (#5332).
Programming support for the attached devices is provided by
the Control Program Facility Licensed Program. (Note: The
5252 represents 2 devices.) Maximum: one. Limitation:
none. Prerequisite: Processor Unit Expansion 1 (#6300) and
Processor Unit Expansion 3 (#6302).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
:-- =-=
?-=:
- ------------
----.-
M5381 1.6
General Systems Division-System/3S
Nov 78
"
Position Code for installation (see Table A). Also specify appropriate Line Position Code if Internal Clocking (1200BPS) is
required.
Communications Configurator
Communications
Attachment
#1501
4 Lines
Maximum
LINE INTERFACES
Communications
Control
#2000
One of the following line interface features must be ordered
for each Line Base depending on the type of communication
facility and modem to be used.
Line 1
Line 2
I Line 3
Line 4
Line
Base
#3200
#9001
Line
Base
#3200
#9002
Line
Base
#3200
#9003
Line
Base
#3200
#9004
+
+
1
I
Line
Interface
(See
Table A)
Line
Interface
(See
Table A)
+
I
Line
Interface
(See
Table A)
+
I
Line
Interface
(See
Table A)
These features will allow System/38 to communicate on nonswitched point-to-point or multipoint lines at speeds from 600
to 9600 BPS and on switched point-to-point lines at speeds
from 600 to 4800 BPS. This communications controller operates in half-duplex mode over switched facilities. and in halfduplex mode over nonswitched communication lines which may
be full-duplex or half-duplex facilities.
Units at each termination or drop point of a data link to which
System/38 is attached must use the same clocking source
(modem or business machine) and must be set to operate at
the same transmission rate and to use the same transmission
code. Compatible modems must be used at all terminations on
a network.
Special Features
Communication Attachment (#1501 )
Provides the basic control and common circuits for direct attachment of up to four communication lines. This feature in
conjunction
with the
appropriate subfeatures
allows
System/38 to communicate on four lines concurrently. each
operating at data rates up to 9600 BPS. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Processor Unit Expansion (#6300) and Processor Unit Expansion (#6302).
Communication Control (#2000)
This feature is required with Communication Attachment (#1501) to provide the basic control storage and common
circuits for SDLC data link control. The Communication Control
feature in conjunction with Communication Attachment feature
(#1 ~01) provides control for multiplexing up to four line appearances.
Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: Supports SNA/SDLC only. Prerequisites: Communication Attachment (#1501).
Line Base (#3200)
This feature provides the interface and control between the
Line Interface features and the Communication Control
(#2000). This feature is required for each line appearance and
provides the necessary control required for each of the unique'
Line Interface types. Line Interfaces supported via this feature
are: EIA (#3701), DDSA (#5650. #5651), 1200 BPS Integrated
Modems (#5500, 5501, 5502. 5508), and Auto Call (#5760).
Maximum: One per line position or four for system with Communication
Attachment
(#1501).
Limitations:
None.
Prerequisites: Communication Control (#2000). Specify: Line
EIA Interface (#3701) Provides an interface for attachment of
an IBM Modem or nonlBM Modem meeting RS-232-C characteristics. Non-IBM Modems may be attached subject to the
Multiple Suppliers System Policy. Maximum: One per line
position. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: Cannot be
installed on same line position with any other line interface
type. Prerequisites: Line Base (#3200). Requires appropriate
cable order. See IBM System/38 Installation Manual-Physical
Planning, GA21-9293. Specify: Required that one code be
specified from each of the following tables: Line Position
Codes (Table A), Line Speed Codes (Table B), and Device
Attachment Codes (Table C).
Digital Data Service Adapter (DDSA) (#5650, 5651) An
integrated data link adapter for data transmission at speeds of
2400. 4800 or 9600 BPS over the AT & T nonswitched
Dataphone* Digital Service network. The DDSA interfaces to a
DDS channel service unit. the customer site termination of the
DDS network. For point-to-point and multipoint control
(#5650). for multipoint tributary (#5651). Available at three
speeds: 2400 BPS. 4800 BPS. or 9600 BPS. Maximum: One
per line position. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot
be installed on same line position with any other line interface
type. Prerequisites: Line Base (#3200). Requires appropriate
cable order. See IBM System/38 Installation Manual-Physical
Planning, GA21-9293. Specify: Required that one code be
specified from each of the following tables: Line Position
Codes (Table A), Line Speed Codes (Table B), and Device
Attachment Codes (Table C).
1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500, 5501. 5502, 5508) A
modem for data transmission at 1200 BPS over switched or
nonswitched facilities. Half speed operation at 600 BPS is
optional via a Control Program Facility parameter. Available in
4 different versions: (#5500) - Nonswitched. (#5501) Switched with Auto Answer, (#5502) - Switched with Manual
Answer, (#5508) - Nonswitched (primary mode) with Switched
Network Backup Auto Answer capability. The Nonswitched
version (#5500) provides for a cable attachment directly to a
nonswitched (2 or 4 wire) facility, Type 3002. The Switched
with Auto Answer versions, (#5501 and 5508) provides for a
cable attachment to a common carrier arrangement type CBS
or equivalent. The Switched Network Manual Answer version
(#5502) provides for a cable attachment to a common carrier
arrangement type CDT or equivalent. The devices communicating with System/38 must also be equipped with a 1200 BPS
Integrated Modem. Limitations: Cannot be installed with EIA
Interface (#3701) or DDSA (#5650, 5651). Maximum: One
per line position. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Line
Base (#3200). Internal Clocking must be specified on Line Base
(Table A). Requires appropriate cable order. See IBM
System/38 Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA219293. Specify: Required that one code be specified from each
of the following tables: Line Position Codes (Table A), Line
Speed Codes (Table B), and Device Attachment Codes (Table
C).
* Registered Trademark of AT & T.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---=-- General Systems Division-System/3S
=---=
---_
- ----,..-
M5381 1.7
- -=
Auto Call Adapter (#5760) Permits the System/38 when
attached to a switched network facility via an appropriate
'modem and Auto Call Unit, to initiate a data link connection to
a remote station. Provides automatic dialing under program
control. An Auto Call Adapter (#5760) must always be installed in conjunction with an EIA Interface (#3701) for each
line to automatically originate calls on switched network facilities. Each line featured with Auto Call Adapter (#5760) takes
two (2) line postions, therefore, reducing the maximum number
of lines which can be supported. Maximum: Two. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitations: Cannot be installed on same
line position with any other line interface type. Installable in
Line Position 2, 3, or 4 only. Prerequisites: Line Base
(#3200).
Requires appropriate cable order.
See IBM
System/38 Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA219293. Specify: Required that one code be specified from each
of the fonowing tables: Line Position Codes (Table A), Line
Speed Codes (Table B), and Device Attachment Codes (Table
C). The Line Position Code specified must be the next higher
order position relative to the modem it is associated with.
Table A
Line Bases &. Line Interface Codes
Line Position
2
Line Base (#3200)
#9001
I nternal Clocking
3
4
#9002 #9003 #9004
#9021 #9022 #9023 #9024
Line Interface Type:
EIA (#3701)
#9101
#9102 #9103 #9104
Nonswitched (#5500)
#9111
#9112 #9113 #9114
1200 BPS Int Modem:
Table C
Device Attachment Codes
Line Position
1
Switched-AA (#5501 )
#9121 #9122 #9123 #9124
#9131 #9132 #9133 #9134
SNBU-AA (#5508)
#9141
3
4
S/370
#9301 #9302 #9303 #9304
5250
#9381 #9382 #9383 #9384
Other Non-IBM
#9411 #9412 #9413 #9414
Customer Responsibilities
See M2700 pages for customer responsibilities regarding communications facilities and sevices.
Communications Facilities:
See M2700 pages for communications facility requirements for
these features.
IBM Modems: Each line position featured with EIA Interface
(#3701) requires an external modem which meets the requirements desired. IBM Modems which can be attached to
Sys 7m/38 via EIA Interface (#3701) are as follows:
Madam
Data Rate (BPS)
3872 Model 1
3874 Model 1
3875 Model 1
2400/1200
4800/2400
7200/3600
See M2700, 3872, 3874, 3875 pages for inform~tion on modem features, communication capabilities and product utilization.
ACCESSORIES
The 5381 with Power Keylock (#3210) is shipped with two
keys. Additional keys (PN 2546418) may be purchased from
IBM. (Vendor will supply additional keys only to the original
purchaser.)
#9142 #9143 #9144
#9151 #9152 #9153 #9154
DDS ADAPT-M/PT (#5651) #9161 #9162 #9163 #9164
AUTO CALL (#5760)
2
Keylock Keys
Switched-MA (#5502)
DDS Adapt-P/P & M/PC
(#5650)
Nov78
NA
#9172 #9173 #9174
Table B
Line Speed Codes
Line Position
2
3
4
Line Speed:
1200 BPS
#9201 #9202 #9203 #9204
2000 BPS
#9211
#9212 #9213 #9214
2400 BPS
#9221 #9222 #9223 #9224
4800 BPS
#9231 #9232 #9233 #9234
7200 BPS
#9241 #9242 #9243 #9244
9600 BPS
#9251 #9252 #9253 #9254
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----..-
--=---=
-=
=
- - - ---
M5381 1.8
General Systems Division-System/3S
This page left blank intentionally.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Nov 78
-- ----
-_ -=- =---=
----
-~-
·M5381 1.4
Nov 78
General Systems Division-System/3S
..
requirements. Also, System/38 Attachment faature (#6500) is
required on the 5424.
Processor Unit Expansion Feature Configurator
(Maximum Required-one each)
Automatic Initial Microprogramming Load (#1300)
PROCESSOR UNIT EXPANSION
REQUIRED
#1
#2
#3
#4
I/O Function Required
#6300 #6301 #6302 #6303
Auto - IMPL enables the system to automatically initiate a
power-on sequence following the restoration of commercial
(utility) AC power after a commercial power failure. The primary use is for unattended operations; therefore, manual intervention is not required. A manually controlled toggle switch located on the Operator/Service panel permits the user to enable or
disable the feature. Maximum: one. Field Installation: yes.
Audible Alarm And Attention Indicator (#2100)
Provides, in addition to the attention indicator on the display. a
backlighted indicator, an audible alarm, and a volume control to
alert the operator of an outstanding message requiring attention. Maximum: one. Field Installation: yes.
Power Keylock (#3210)
A key controlled switch, in series with the power-on pushbutton, will inhibit the power-on cycle if the keylock switch is
"Off." The keylock cannot power the system down. The key
lock is located on the Operator/Service panel. See Accessories
for key ordering information.
Maximum:
one Field
Installation: yes.
Processor Unit Expansion 1 (#6300)
This is a feature I/O board/power supply and is required for
any of the following I/O devices: (1) attaching Communications
Attachment (1-4) (#1501), (2) attaching Second Work Station
Controller (#5302). Maximum: one. Field Installation: yes.
Prerequisite: Processor Unit Expansion 3 (#6302).
Processor Unit Expansion 2 (#6301)
This is a feature I/O board/power supply and is required for
any of the following I/O devices: (1) attaching the 5424 M ultifunction Card Unit (#1220/1221), (2) attaching the 3411 Magnetic Tape Unit (#7960), (3) attaching the second 5211/3262
printer (#1110). Maximum: one. Field Installation: yes.
Prerequisite: See Processor Unit Expansion Feature Configurator.
Processor Unit Expansion 3 (#6302)
This is a feature air circulating/ cable assembly and is required
for any of the following I/O devices: (1) Communications
Attachment (1-4) (#1501), (2) attaching Work Station Controller #2 (#5302), (3) attaching the 5424 Multifunction Card Unit
(#1220/1221), (4) attaching the 3411 Magnetic Tape Unit
(#7960), (5) attaching the second 5211/3262 printer (#1110).
Maximum: one. Field Installation: yes. Prerequisite: See
Processor Unit Expansion Feature Configurator.
Processor Unit Expansion 4 (#6303)
This is a feature power expansion assembly required to attach
the 3411 Magnetic Tape Unit (#7960). Maximum: one. Field
Installation: yes. Prerequisite: Processor Unit Expansion 2
(#6301) and Processor Unit Expansion 3 (#6302).
X
X
Work Station Controller, Second X
(#5302)
X
Communications Attachment
{#1501 }
5424 MFCU
(#1220/ #1221)
X
X
3411 Magnetic Tape
(#7960)
X
X
Second 5211/3262
Printer Attachment
(#1110)
X
X
X
3411 Magnetic Tape Attachment (#7960 available
2/22/80)
To attach a 3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control. Maximum:
one. Field Installation: yes. Prerequisite: Processor Unit
Expansiun #6301, .1+6302, and .1+6303 are required. Feature # 7003
is required on the 3411. See "Processor Unit Expansion Feature
Configurator" to determine averall requirements.
Special Feature Prices: See Price List.
LOCAL WORK STATION CONTROLLER
Work Station Controller
Provides direct local attachment of IBM 5250 Information
Display System devices to System/38. One Work Station
Controller is standard on all models of System/38. It provides
8 ports for attaching work stations (Keyboa rd Displays and / or
Printers) directly to the system in any combination. These 8
ports permit attachment of up to 12 devices with twinax cabling using the Cable Thru feature on the 5250 devices. It is
also possible to use coax cabling (see below). Devices supported via the Work Station Controller are:
5251
5251
5252
5256
5256
5256
Model 1, Display Station (960 Character)
Model 11, Display Station (1920 Character)
Model 1, Dual Display Station
(960 Character per Display)
Model 1, Printer (40 CPS)
Model 2, Printer (80 CPS)
Model 3, Printer (120 CPS)
The Work Station Controller provides support for device attachment cabling via both 5250 twinax and 3270 compatible
coax. Twinax cable provides for multipoint cable connections
at distances up to 1525m (5000 feet). Up to seven devices may
be attached to a single port via twinax.
Devices can be attached via individual coax cable at distances
up to 61 Om (2000 feet) from the 5381. For attachment to coax
cable a special adapter is required and is available as a 5250
accessory. Refer to 5250 Information Display System Sales
Pages (M5251, M5252, or M5256) for selection of appropriate
features, accessories, and cables for attachment of 5250 devices.
For attachment of additional 5250 devices, see Device Interface Expansion (#5321), Device Control Expansion {#5331}, or
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- - - . - . .....
--- -- General Systems Division-Machines
=
=--=:
----_
- - --.... .. -
=
M5404.1
Nov 78
-~-
5404 PROCESSING UNIT
Purpose: Contains main storage, a keyboard console, and
maintenance console, and facilities for addressing main stor. age, arithmetic and logical processing of data, and controlling
I/O devices in a System/3 Model 4.
Model
Processor Storage (bytes)
A18
65,536
Highlights: The CPU uses highly integrated Monolithic Systems Technology (MST) for logical circuitry. Memory is Metal
Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor (MOSFET). Data
and instructions are stored as EBCDIC characters ... each
EBCDIC character is stored in an 8-bit byte ... a ninth bit is
added for parity checking. Main cycle time is 1.52 microseconds. I nstruction execution and I/O data handling utilizes the
"Cycle Steal" techniq ue, providing overlap of I/O and processing.
3270 Information Display System devices (3277's, 3284's,
3286's, 3287's and 3288's) used as local work stations are
attached directly to the processing unit. Attachment capability
for three 3270 Model 1 devices is standard. Attachment provisions for 3 additional 3270 devices and for 3270 model 2 devices (e.g. 3277 model 2) is available by special feature.
Communications with remotely located systems or terminals
may be performed through the use of the Binary Synchronous
Communications Adapter (BSCA) over data communications
transmission facilities.
The system console uses a message display unit for simplified
direct operator/system communication. The keyboard consists
of three groups of keys: eight command keys; alpha-numeric
and function keys; and 1O-key numeric keyboard.
Maximum: Only one 5464 can be attached to a System/3
Model 4.
Configuration: 5404 Processing Unit, 5213 Printer Model 3
(#3960 required), and 5447 Disk Storage and Control Model
A 1 or A2. For displaying CCP messages, a 3277 Display Station Model 1 is required. From one to five locally attached work
stations may be selected from this list: 3277 Display Station
Model 1 or 2, 3284 Printer Model 1 or 2, 3286 Printer Model 1
or 2, and 3288 Line Printer Model 2.
Bibliography: GC20-BOBO. Metering: Base Unit.
Specify
1. Voltage AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz-#9902 for 20BV, or #9904 for
230 V: AC, 3-phase, 60 Hz-#9903 for 208V, or #9905 for
230V.
2. Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
3. Disk configuration: #9120 if 5447-A2 is attached.
4. I/O Unit Attachments: Appropriate special features are
required to attach most I/O units ... see "Special Features."
5. For Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (#2074),
see "Specifications" under "Additional Information."
6. System Control Programming, 5703-SC1, and the Communications Control Program, 5703-SC1 Feature 6033, should
be ordered at equipment order entry time
See
Programs/ SCP section for additional information.
7. For information relative to Upending Kit, Feature #9840, see
Specify section of M5447 page.
Special Features
5213 Model 3 Enhanced Print Rate Attachment (#3960):
Required to attach a 5213 Printer Model 3. Drives the Printer
at a nominal rate of 115 characters per second. Maximum:
One.
Display Increment (#4704): Provides for attachment of three
additional 3270 devices in any combination to the processing
unit. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
3270 Model 2 Attachment (#4705): Provides for attachment
of 3270 Model 2 devices (i.e., 3277-2, 3284-2, 3286-2, or
3288-2) to the processing unit. This is required if any of the
locally attached devices is a Model 2 (1920 Character Buffer).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Serial I/O Channel (#7081): Provides a means of attaChing
special units that may be required by the customer.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Communication Features
Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (#2074):
This feature in conjunction with program control permits
System/3 Model 4 to communicate in binary synchronous
mode with other IBM systems aRd terminals. System/3 Model
4 can operate on a multipoint line as either a control station or
a tributary station, or on a point-to-point switched or leased
communications line. Transmission rates are available from
600 bps to 50,000 bps. Auto answer capability is standard (to
be effective, the modem must also have this capability) in
switched network version. Any version can be selected to
operate in EBCDIC or ASCII transmission code, but not both.
Also, see "Modems" at end of this section.
Specify: See "Additional
Intormatlon" at end or tnlS section for applicable specify
codes. Maximum: One per 5404. Field Installation: Yes.
In addition to the basic functions of #2074, the following special features may be added ... all of them can be field installed.
Auto Call (#1315): Permits the System/3 Model 4, when
attached to a switched network (#9483) via an appropriate
modem and Auto Call Unit, to initiate (dial) through stored
program control, a data link connection to a remote BSC station. limitation: Cannot be installed with Station Selection
(#7477). Maximum: One. Prerequisites: BSC Adapter
(#2074), Network Attachment (#94B3), and one voice grade
Transmission Rate from 600 to 4800 bps. Requires appropriate
cable order. See Installation Planning Manual, GA21-90B4.
Internal Clock (#4703): Generates synchronizing and timing
signals for BSCA operation when they are not provided by the
attached modem. When this feature is installed, all other terminals attached to the same data link must also be equipped with
a similar IBM Internal Clock. Will service one of the following
transmission rates: 600 bps, 1200 bps, 2000 bps or 2400 bps.
Maximum: One. Prerequisites: BSC Adapter (#2074) and
one of the voice ~rade Transmission Rates from 600 to 2400
bps.
Station Selection (#7477): Permits the System/3 Model 4 to
operate as a compatible member of the IBM family of BSC
terminals on a multipoint communications line as a tributary
station. limitation: Cannot be installed with Auto Call
(#1315). Maximum: One. Prerequisites: BSC Adapter
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---==---=
General Systems Division-Machines
------ -----. -
M 5404. 2
-=
E. One (or more if necessary) optional selection code
must be specified from the following list as determined by planned device attachments to BSCA.
(#2074), Network Attachment (#9482 or 9484), Line Facility
Attachment (#9392) and one of the voice grade Transmission
Rates from 1200 to 9600 bps.
S/360 (Model 22 and up) or S/370
S/360 Model 20
1130 System
2770 System
2780
3270 System
3735
3741 Model 2 or Model 4
System/3
System/7
System/32
5231 Model 2
System/34
Series/1
Text Transparency (#7850): Permits the System/3 Model 4
to transmit or receive "8-bit binary data" or EBCDIC coded
data. Limitation: Cannot be installed with ASCII Transmission
Code (#906 '1) ... limitations exist on the use of this facility for
the transmission of data and are referenced· in publications
GA27-3004. Maximum: One. Prerequisites: BSC Adapter
(#2074) and EBCDIC Transmission Code (#9060).
Note: Configuration requirements for IBM Programming Support must satisfy the minimum machine requirements stated in
the programming sections of the Sales Manual.
For information on optional selections, attachment to communications lines, customer responsibilities, etc., see "Additional
Information" below.
Speed(bps)
3872 Model 1
3874 Model 1
3875 Mod,el 1
2400
4800
7200
1. Refer to U.S. Data Communications Handbook
2. See publication GA27-3004 for potential proolem
areas and possible restrictions to application dat~
when using certain modems at this or higher speeds.
For communication capabilities, product utilization and special
features, see M2700, 3872, 3874 and 3875 pages.
3. If Multipoint Tributary Station use (with #7477) is to
be implemented alternately with Multipoint Control
Station use on the same adapter, specify code #9484
must be used.
Additional Information
I.
Specifications One selection must be specified from
each of the following five categories:
A. Transmission Code
EBCDIC
ASCII
4. When BSCA is used as a Control Station adapter or
when attached to a point-to-point (non-switched)
data link, the facility may be duplex (4-wire only) or
half-duplex. Half-duplex facility must be specified for
Switched Network attachments and for adapters
implementing Multipoint Tributary Station only operation.
#9060
9061
B. Transmission Rate (1)
600 bps
1200 bps
2000 bps
2400 bps (2)
4800 bps
7200/3600 bps
9600 bps
High Speed (19,200 to 50,000 bps)
#9750
9751
9752
9753
9754
9757
9759
9755
II.
#9481
9482
9483
9484
D. Line Facility Attachment (4)
Full Duplex (4-wire only)
Half Duplex
#9391
9392
Special Features
A. Available with Voice Grade (600 to 9600 bps) and
High Speed (19,200 to 50,000 bps) Adapters.
Text Transparency
#7850
B. Available with Voice Grade Adapters only.
C. Network Attachment
Point-to-point (non-switched)
Multipoint (tributary)
Switched Network
Multipoint Control Station (3)
#9570
9571
9572
9573
9574
9577
9578
9579
9580
9590
9591
9592
9593
9594
Notes:
Modems One IBM modem can be attached to a 5404.
Prerequisite: BSC Adapter (#2074).
Modem
Nov 78
Internal Clock
Station Selection
Auto Call
III.
#4703
7477
1315
Communications Facility Attachments The System/3
Model 4 BSCA is designed to operate on transmission
facilities such as:
A. Common carrier leased telephone line services (Voice
Grade).
AT & T or Western Union Class 3002-600 bps.
AT & T or Western Union Class 3002 with C1
conditioning-to 4800 bps.
AT & T or Western Union Class 3002 with C2
conditioning-to 7200 bps.
B. Private (customer owned) communications facilities
equivalent to the above common carrier facilities.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- --
==--=
-=-=- ------_
.... --
M5404.3
General Systems Division-Machines
-~-
C. Voice Grade (common carrier or private) lines supporting a 9600 bps transmission rate. Channel requirements may vary according to the various types
of data sets selected. The data set manufacturer
should be consulted by the customer for this information.
D. Common carrier switched network telephone (Voice
Grade) service at 600 bps to 4800 bps.
E. Commo·l carrier Wideband Communications Services
at 19,200 bps, 40,800 bps, or 50,000 bps.
IV.
Reference See M2700 pages for additional information
concerning modems, communications facilities, machine
attachment requirements, terminal intermix, operating
capabilities, and customer responsibilities.
V.
Customer Responsibilities The customer must be
advised that: (1) he is responsible for making arrangements for installation, pricing, and charges of the data
communication facility and attachment of selected data
sets ... (2) Toll charges, if required for installation and/ or
maintenance of the BSCA, are to be paid by the customer ... (3) the IBM marketing representative must have the
customer obtain a firm installation date for transmission
services (including modems) before the order can be
for
further
information,
see
confirmed
"Teleprocessing Systems" in the "General Information"
section and reference (IV) above.
VI.
Cables BSCA (#2074) always requires an appropriate
Installation Manual-Physical
cable
order.
See
Planning, GA21-9084.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Nov 78
----= -- General Systems Division-Machines
==--=
- ------
M5406.1
-=
Nov 78
-~-.-
5406 P·ROCESSING UNIT
Purpose: Contains main
maintenance console, and
age, arithmetic and logical
I/O devices in a System/3
storage, a keyboard console and
facilities for addressing main storprocessing of data, and controlling
Model 6.
Models:
Model
Main Storage (bytes)
B2
B3
B4
8,192
12,288
16,384
6. System Control Programming, 5703-SC1, should be ordered
at equipment order entry time ... see "System Control
Programming" for System/3 model 6 in "Systems" for
additional information.
7. Upending Kit; #9840, for use with the 5406 I/O unit. UpEnded dimensions will be 29-1/2" wide, 42" long, 73"
high. This kit is furnished only as necessary and remains the
property of IBM.
Special Features
Model Changes: Field installable.
Highlights: The keyboard console provides all indications and
controls necessary for the operator. Field/operation and command key indicators inform the operator of status and progress
in a job. Control of the CPU and all I/O is from the console.
The keyboard has standard typewriter layout, a 10-key numeric
section, and eight command keys ... eight additional command
keys are available (see "Special Features"). Special characters
for interactive programs are conveniently located. TAB and
BACKSPACE keys have typamatic as standard.
Uses the new highly integrated Monolithic Systems Technology
(MST). Data and instructions are stored as EBCDIC characters. Each EBCDIC character is stored in an 8-bit byte (a ninth
bit is added for parity checking). Main cycle time is 1.52 microseconds. Instruction execution and I/O data handling utilize
the "Cycle Steal" technique, providing overlap of I/O and
processing. Main storage capacity changes and all I/O device
attachments are field installable.
Maximum: Only one 5406 can be attached to a System/3
Model 6.
Minimum Configuration: In addition to a 5406 model B2, the
system requires, for minimum configuration, a 5444 Disk Storage Drive and a 5213 or 2222 Printer. IBM program support of
a .2265 Display Station model 2 and/or 1255 Magnetic Character Reader requires a 5406 model B3 or B4.
Supplies: Blank System/3 Model 6 Keyboard Indicator Templates, GX 34-0004, can be marked by the operator to identify
the meanings of the field / operation and command key indicators according to individual application requirements.
Bibliography: GC20-8080. Metering: Base Unit.
Specify
1. Voltage [AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208V, or #9904 for
230V. [AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208V, or
#9905 for 230V.
2. Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
3. I/O U nit Attachments: Appropriate special featu res are
required to attach most I/O units ... see "Special Features."
4. For Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (#2074),
see "Specifications" under "Additional Information."
5. All Systems: Specify one of the following-#9201 for 5444
model 1, #9202 for 5444 model 2, #9203 for 5444 model 2
and model 3, or #9204 for two 5444 model 2's. Field
Installation: Yes.
Command Keys (#1550): Provides eight command keys
(9-16) in addition to the eight which are standard. Note: #1550
is required when the 2265 model 2 is supported by System/3
BASIC (Program Product 5703-XM1). Field Installation: Yes.
Data Recorder Attachment (#3210): To attach either a 129
Card Data Recorder equipped with Card Input/Output Attachment (#7503) or a 5496 Data Recorder model 1 equipped with
a System/3 Model 6 Attachment (#7501). Specify: #9112 for
use with 5496, or #9113 for use with 129. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
5213 Printer Attachment (#3901, 3902, 3903): To attach a
521 3 Printer.
#3901
#3902
#3903
to attach a 5213 Printer model 1
to attach a 5213 Printer model 2
to attach a 521 3 Printer model 3
Limitation: Only one printer attachment feature can be installed on a system. Field Installation: Yes.
5213 Model 3 Enhanced Print Rate Attachment (#3960):
To attach a 5213 Printer model 3 and drive it at a nominal print
rate of 115 cps. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3901,
#3902 or #3903. Field Installation: Yes.
Local Communications Adapter (#4765): Permits local
attachment of one 3741 model 2 or 4, one 5231 model 2 equipped with BSCA (#2074) (Point-to-point unidirectional transmission only) or one System/7 equipped with a binary synchronous communications adapter (#2074) to a System/3 model 6.
The external modem cable of the device will attach directly to
the 5406 when this feature is installed. Data transfer rate is
2400 bps only. Operates in EBCDIC Code. Programming support is provided by the RPG " Telecommunications Feature.
The 5231 Model 2 is supported as a 3741 Model 2 or 4.
limitations: Cannot be installed with BSCA (#2074). Data
exchange with attached device is non-transparent only. For
data transparent operation contact GSD Special Product Marketing for RPQ detail and approval. Maximum: One per 5406.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Processing Unit Expansion (#5732).
Processing Unit Expansion (#5732): Provides additional
processing unit capacity for Serial I/O Channel (#7081) and / or
Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (#2074) and/or
Local Communications Adapter (#4765) and/or 3741 Attachment (#8220). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Second Disk Attachment (#6378): To attach a 5444 Disk
Storage Drive model 3 or a second 5444 model 2. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: A 5444 model 2.
Serial I/O Channel (#7081): To attach a 1255 Magnetic
Character Reader. Maximum: One. limitation: IBM Program
Support available only for 5406 models BO!3 and B04. Cannot
be installed with 3741 Attachment (#8220). Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: Processing Unit Expansion (#5732).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
I~
--... -- ------...-- -=- ---
M5406.2
---~
~--:: General Systems Division-Machines
Nov 78
---
-~-.,-
2222 Printer Attachment <#7951, 7952): To attach a 2222
Printer.
#7951
#7952
To attach a 2222 Printer model 1
To attach a 2222 Printer model 2
limitations: Cannot be installed with a 2265 Display Station
Model 2 Attachment (#7960) ... only one printer attachment
feature can be installed on a system. Field Installation: Yes.
2265 Display Station Model Attachment <#7960): To attach a 2265 Display Station model 2. Maximum: One.
limitations: I BM Program Support available only on 5406
model B3 or B4 ... cannot be installed with a 2222 Printer.
Note: See requirements for Command Keys (#1550). Field
Installation: Yes.
3741 Attachment <#8220): To directly attach a 3741 model 1,
2, 3 or 4. Maximum: One. limitations: Cannot be installed
with SIOC (#7081). IBM Programming Support available only
for 5406 models B3 and B4. For a 3741 model 3 or 4,
System/3 does not support the Application Control Language
(ACL). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Processing
Unit Expansion (#5732) on 5406 ... I/O Adapter (#3265/3266)
on 3741.
Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (#2074):
This feature in conjunction with program control permits
System/3 Model 6 to communicate in binary synchronous
mode with other IBM systems and terminals. System/3 Model
6 can operate on a multipoint line as a tributary station, or on a
point-to-point switched or leased communications line. Transmission rates are available from 600 bps to 50,000 bps. Auto
answer capability is standard (to be effective, the modem must
,also have this capability) in switched network version. Any
!version can be selected to operate in EBCDIC or ASCII transmission code, but not both. Also, see "Modems" at end of this
section.
Specify:
See "Additional Information" at ena OT lim; section tor applicable specify codes.
Maximum: One per 5406.
Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Processing Unit Expansion
(#5732).
In addition to the basic functions of #2074, the following special features may be added ... all of them can be field installed.
Auto Call (#1315): Permits the System/3 Model 6, when
attached to a switched network (#9483) via an appropriate
modem and Auto Call Unit to initiate (dial) through stored
program control, a data link connection to a remote BSC station. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Station Selection
(#7477). Maximum: One. Prerequisites: BSC Adapter
(#2074), Network Attachment (#9483) and one voice grade
Transmission Rate from 600 to 4800 bps. Requires appropriate
cable order. See Installation Planning Manual, GA21-9084.
Internal Clock (#4703): Generates synchronizing and timing
signals for BSCA operation when they are not provided by the
attached modem. When this feature is installed, all other terminals attached to the same data link must also be equipped with
a similar IBM Internal Clock. To determine if this feature is
required, see "Additional Information" below. It will service
one of the following transmission rates: 600 bps, 1200 bps,
2000 bps, or 2400 bps. Maximum: One. Prerequisites: BSC
Adapter (#2074) and one of the voice grade Transmission
Rates from 600 to 2400 bps.
terminals on a multi-point communications line as a tributary
station. limitation: Cannot be installed with Auto Call
(#1315). Maximum: One. Prerequisites: BSC Adapter
(#2074), Network Attachment (#9482), Line Facility Attachment (#9392) and one of the voice grade Transmission Rates
from 1200 to 9600 bps.
Text Transparency <#7850): Permits the System/3 Model 6
to transmit or receive "8-bit binary data" or EBCDIC coded
data. Limitation: Cannot be installed with ASCII Transmission
Code (#9061) ... limitations exist on the use of this facility for
the transmission of data and are referenced in SRL A27-3004.
Maximum: One. Prerequisites: BSC Adapter (#2074) and
EBCDIC Transmission code (#9060).
Note: Configuration requirements for IBM Programming Support must satisfy the minimum machine requirements stated in
the "Program Products" and "Systems" sections
For information on optional selections, attachment to communications lines, customer responsibilities, etc., see "Additional
Information" below.
Modems: One IBM modem can be attached to a 5406, any
model. Prerequisite: BSC Adapter (#2074).
Modem
Speed (bps)
3872 model 1
3874 model 1
3875 model 1
2400
4800
7200
Note: For communication capabilities, product utilization and
special features, see M2700, 3872, 3874, 3875, pages.
Additional Information
I.
Specifications: One selection must be specified from
each of the following five categories:
A. Transmission Code
EBCDIC
ASCII
#9060
9061
B. Transmission Rate
600 bps
1200 bps
2000 bps
2400 bps
4800 bps
7200/3600 bps
High Speed (19,200 to 50,000 bps)
9600 bps
9750
9751
9752
9753
9754
9757
9755
9759
C. Network Attachment
Point-to-point (non-switched)
Multi-point (tributary)
Switched Network
9481
9482
9483
D. Line Facility Attachment (1)
Full duplex (4-wire only)
Half duplex
I Station
Selection (#7477): Permits the System/3 Model 6 to
operate as a compatible member of the I BM family of BSC
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
9391
9392
----= =--==
General Systems Division-Machines
- ------
M5406.3
- -=
Nov 78
-~-.-
facilities, machine attachment requirements, terminal
intermix, operating capabilities, and customer responsi""
bilities.
E. Modem or Oata Set Interface-from the list below
specify the facility to which the BSCA will attach.
C4
03
04M
C5,04,04M,04SB
E2
E3
E1
C6, OS, or 05SB
06 or 06SB
(600 or 1200 bps)
(600 or 1200 bps)
(2000 bps)
(2400 bps) (2)
(50,000 bps)
(19,200 bps)
(40,800 bps) (2)
(4800 bps) (3)
(7200 or
3600 bps) (3)
#9101
9102
9103
9104
9105
9106
9107
9108
9109
V. Customer Responsibilities: The customer must be ad-"
vised that:
A. He is responsible for making arrangements for installation, pricing, and charges of the data communications facility and attachment of selected data sets.
B. Toll charges, if required for installation and/or maintenance of the BSCA, are to be paid by the customer.
C. The IBM Marketing Representative must have the
customer obtain a firm installation date for transmission services (including modems) before the order can
be confirmed
for further information. see
"Teleprocessing
Systems"
in
the
"General
Information" section and reference (IV) above.
Notes:
1. Where modem is u~ed on a point-to-point (nonswitched) type data link, the facility must be Full duplex (4-wire only) or Half duplex. Multi-point tributary or Switched Network attachments must specify
Half-duplex.
2. See SRL GA27-3004 for problem areas and possible
restrictions to application data.
VI.
Cables: BSCA (#2074) always requires an appropriate
See
Installation Manual-Physical
cable
order.
Planning, GA21-9084.
3. For information on above communication facilities,
see M2700 pages.
II.
Special Features
A. Available with Voice Grade (600 to 9600 bps) and
High Speed (19,200 to 50,000 bps) Adapters.
Text Transparency (#7850)
B. Available with Voice Grade Adapters only.
Internal Clock (#4703)
Station Selection (#7477)
Auto Call (#1315)
III.
Communications
Facility
Attachments:
The
System/3 Model 6 BSCA is designed to operate on
transmission facilities such as:
A. Common carrier leased telephone line services (Voice
Grade).
AT & T or Western Union Class 3002-to 600 bps.
AT & T or Western Union
conditioning-to 4800 bps.
Class 3002
with
C1
AT & T or Western Union Class 3002
conditioning-to 7200 bps.
with
C2
B. Private (customer owned) communications facilities
equivalent to the above common carrier facilities.
C. Voice Grade (common carrier or private) lines supporting a 9600 bps transmission rate. (Channel requirements may vary according to the various types
of data sets selected. The data set manufacturer
should be consulted by the customer for this information.)
D. Common carrier switched network telephone (Voice
Grade) service at 600 bps to 4800 bps.
E. Common carrier Wideband Communications Services
at 19,200 bps, 40,800 bps, or 50,000 bps.
IV.
Reference: See pages M2700, this section, for additional information concerning modems. communications
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----= =--==
General Systems Division-Machines
------ - ------_
.. --
=
M5408.1
Nov 78
.,
5408 PROCESSING UNIT
Purpose: Contains main storage and facilities for addressing
main storage, arithmetic and logical processing of data. and
controlling I/O units for System/3 Model 8. Also includes a
housing for one or two 5444 Disk Storage Drives.
Model
Processor Storage (bytes)
A14
A16
A17
A18
16,384
32,768
49.152
65.536
6. System Control Programming, 5702-SC1. should be ordered
at equipment order entry time ... see "System Control
Programming" section for additional information.
7. Printer Attachments: Specify #9180 for 5203 Model 1 ...
#9181 for 5203 Model 2.
8. Upending Kit: #9840. This kit is furnished only as necessary and remains the property of IBM.
Special Features
Model Changes: Field Installable.
Highlights: The CPU uses highly integrated Monolithic Systems Technology (MST) for logical circuitry. Memory is Metal
Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor (MOSFET). Data
and instructions are stored as EBCDIC characters ... each
EBCDIC character is stored in an 8-bit byte .. , a ninth bit is
added for parity checking. Main cycle time is 1.52 microseconds. Instruction execution and I/O data handling utilizes the
':Cycle Steal" technique. providing overlap of I/O and processing.
The direct attachment of the 3741 Data Station or Programmable Work Station provides high speed input and output via
magnetic media.
The 5448 Disk Storage Drive can be added to the system to
provide an additional 9.8 million bytes of disk storage.
The system console uses an alphameric halt indicator for simplified direct operator / system communication.
The Local Display Adapter provides local attac'hment of any
mix of up to twelve 3277 Model 1 or 2 Display Stations and/ or
3284/86/87/88 Printers.
Communication with remotely located systems or terminals
may be performed through the use of the Integrated Communications Adapter or the Binary Synchronous Communications
Adapter over Data Communications Transmission facilities.
Maximum: .Only one 5408 can be attached to a System/3
ModeI8.·
Minimum Configuration: In addition to the 5408. a
System/3 Model 8 requires a 5203 Printer. 5444 Disk Storage
Drive and either ... (a) a 5471 Printer-Keyboard. or. (b) a 3741
Data Station directly attached to the system.
Bibliography: GC20-8080. Metering: Base Unit.
Dual Feed Carriage Control (#3480): Required for Dual Feed
Carriage (#3475) on a 5203 Printer. Prerequisite: 5203 Printer Base Attachment (#3960) and appropriate 5203 Printer
Speed Attachment (#3970 or #3972). Field Installation: Yes.
Dual Program (#3500): Provides the capability to independently load and process two programs simultaneously. Independent operator control of each program is provided so that
either program may be initiated. restarted after a program halt.
run to completion. or terminated without regard to the other
program other than availability of memory and I/O units. Field
Installation: Yes.
5203 Printer Base Attachment (#3960): Required to attach
a 5203 Model 1. 2 or 3. Prerequisite: #9221 on the 5203.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Note: A Model 8
displacing an installed Model 10 must submit an MES requesting Specify Feature #9221 on the 5203 Printer to receive a new
printer cable.
5203 Printer Speed Attachment-100 Ipm/200 Ipm
(#3970): To attach a 5203 Printer Model 1 or Model~n2.
Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3972.
Prerequisite: #3960 on the 5408. Field Installation: Yes.
5203 Printer Speed Attachment-300 Ipm (#3972): To
attach a 5203 Printer Model 3. Maximum: One. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with #3970. Prerequisite: #9221 on the
5203. Field Installation: Yes.
Note: A Model 8 displacing an Installed Model 10 must submit
an MES requesting Specify Feature #9221 on the 52.03 printer
to receive a new printer ca ble.
5448 File Attachment (#4040): To attach a 5448 Disk Storage Drive Model A 1. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
SIOC (#7081). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Processing Unit Expansion A (Feature #5732) on
the 5408. 5444 Disk Storage Drive Model A2 and Specify
#9056 on the 5448 Disk Storage Drive.
5471 Printer-Keyboard Attachment (#4110): To attach a
5471 Printer-Keyboard. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes.
Specify
1. Voltage (AC. 3-phase. 4-wire. 60 Hz): #9903 for 208V. or
#9905 for 230 V.
2. Color: #9041 for red. #9042 for yellow. #9043 for blue.
#9045 for gray. or #9046 for white.
3. Print Position Attachment: #9495 for 5203 with 120 print
positions. or #9496 for 5203 with 132 print positions.
4. I/O Attachments: Appropriate special features are required
to attach most I/O units ... see "Special Features."
5. Disk Storage: Specify one of the following-#9205 for
5444 model A 1 .. , #9206 for' one 5444 model A2 '" #9207
for model A2 and model A3 ... #9208 for two 5444 model
A2s.
Basic Attachment Feature (#4701): To attach either the
Local Display Adapter (#4702) or the 3411 Magnetic Tape
Attachment (#7960) or both (#4702 and #7960 must be specified). Maximum: One. Limitations: Cannot be installed with
the Integrated Communications Adapter (#4645). Field
Installable: Yes.
Local Display Adapter (#4702): Permits direct local attachment (up to 2000 feet) of up to three 3277-1 Display Stations.
3284-1 Printers. 3286-1 Printers or 3287 Printers in any combination. The 3271 Control Unit i:-.. not required. The 3270
device cables will be attached directly to the Local Display
Adapter (#4702). For attachment of additional 3270 devices
(maximum of 12) see Display Increment (#4704). For attachment of the 3270 Model 2 devices (1920 Character Buffer) see
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------
= ==---=
-,-----..-..
- y-
M5408.2
General Systems Division-Machines
Nov 78
-~-.,-
Model 2 Attachment (#4705). Maximum: One. Field
Installable: Yes. Prerequisite: Basic Attachment Feature
(#4701) and a minimum of 32K bytes of storage (Model A16)
on the 5408. Specify EBCDIC Character Set (#9089) on attached 3270 devices.
Cartridge with more than 48 different characters is to be used
on the 5203 Printer. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Universal Character Set Attachment (#8639) on the 5203 Printer.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Universal Character Set Attachment (#8639) on the 5203. Field Installation: Yes.
Display Increment (#4704): Provides for attachment of three
additional 3270 devipes in any combination to the Local Display
Adapter (#4702). Maximum: Three. Field Installable: Yes.
Prerequisite: Local Display Adapter (#4702).
Communication Features
Model 2 Attachment (#4705): Required if any 3277 Model 2
Display Stations and/or 3284/86/88 Model 2 Printers and/or
3287 Printers (with 1920 Character Buffer) are to be attached
to the Local Display Adapter (#4702). Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Local Display Adapter
(#4702).
Processing Unit Expansion (#5732): Provides additional
connectors and mounting space for the 5448 File Attachment
(#40401. Serial I/O Channel (#7081) or BSCA {#2074}.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Processing Unit Expansion B (#5733): Provides additional
power for attaching both BSCA (#2074) and SIOC (#7081) or
both the 5448 File Attachment (#4040) and BSCA (#2074).
Prerequisite:
Processing
Unit Expansion A
(#5732).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Processing Unit Expansion Feature Configurator
Communications
I/O Unit
None
None
BSCA
#5732
sloe
#5732
#5733
5448
#5732
#5733
Note: #5732 is a prerequisite for #5733. If BSCA is attached
on a system with #4040, Processing Unit Expansion A (#5732)
and Processing Unit Expansion B (#5733) are both required.
Second Disk Attachment (#6378): To attach a 5444 Disk
Storage Drive model A3, or a second 5444 model A2.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: A first 5444 model A2. Field
Installation: Yes.
Serial I/O Channel (#7081): To attach a 1255 Magnetic
Character Reader or a 3881 Optical Mark Reader. Maximum:
One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with 5448 File Attachment (#4040). Prerequisite: Processing Unit Expansion A
(#5732); both processing Unit Expansion A (#5732) and B
(#5733) if attached with BSCA (#2074). Field Installation:
Yes.
3411 Magnetic Tape Attachment (#7960): To attach a 3411
Magnetic Tape Unit and Control. Maximum: One Field
Installab/e: Yes. Prerequisite: Basic Attachment Feature
(#4701 ).
3741 Attachment (#8220): To attach a 3741 Data Station
model 1 or 2 or 3741 Programmable Work Station model 3 or
4. Maximum: One. Limitation: For 3741 models 3 and 4,
System/3 does not support the Application Control Language
(ACL). Prerequisite: I/O Adapter (#3265) on the 3741 models 1 and 2, I/O Adapter (#3266) on the 3741 models 3 and 4.
Field Installation: Yes.
Universal Character Set Control (#8642): Required if any
Interchangeable Chain Cartridge or Interchangeable Train
Integrated Communications Adapter (#4645): This feature
in conjunction with its sub-features provides up to three (3)
communications interfaces, two (2) local, and one (1) remote.
When more than one interface is present, only one can be
active at a time as selected by the operator through a manual
switch control. See description of interface features (#4801,
4802 and 6202) below. Specify: #9070 for EBCDIC transmission code, or #9071 for ASCII. Maximum: One per 5408.
limitation: Cannot be installed with the Basic Attachment
Feature (#4701). Field Installation: Yes.
8000 BPS Local Interface (#4801): Permits local attachment
of one 3271 Control Unit model 1 or 2 or one 3275 Display
Station model 1 or 2 or one System17 equipped with a binary
synchronous communications adapter (#2074) to the 5408
without use of a communications line or modems. The external
modem cable of the attached Device connects directly to the
5408 when this feature is installed. The feature provides clocking for the 8000 bps data transfer rate. Limitation: Data
transfer rate is 8000 bps only.
Maximum:
One.
Prerequisites: Integrated Communications Adapter (#4645).
The attached 3271 or 3275 must have #7821 installed. Field
Installation: Yes.
2400 BPS Local Interface (#4802): Permits local attachment
of one binary synchronous IBM terminal, e.g., 3741 model 2 or
4, one 5231 model 2 (point-to-point unidirectional transmission
only). or one System/7 equipped with a binary synchronous
communications adapter (#2074) to the 5408 without the use
of a communications line or modems. The external modem
cable of the attached Device connects directly to the 5408
when the feature is installed. The feature provides clocking for
the 2400 bps data transfer rate. Limitations: Data transfer
rate is 2400 bps on Iv
Specify: See "Additional Information" at el1d of
this section for device attachment code. Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: Integrated Communications Adapter (#4645).
Field Installation: Yes.
Synchronous Line, Medium Speed (#6202): Provides one
medium speed BSC line interface to an external modem. The
communications network attachment may be point-to-point
(switched),
point-to-point (non-switched), or multipoint
(control station). Maximum transmission rate is 4800 bps for
switched operation and 9600 bps for non-switched operation.
The attached modem must provide the necessary data clocking. See "IBM Modem" in "Additional Information" at end of
this section. Devices attached to the Synchronous Line, Medium Speed, have the same requirements as when attached to
System/3 via BSCA (Feature #2074) with equivalent communications facilities and line speeds. (Note: For attached device
prerequisites see appropriate machines pages.) Limitations:
Cannot function as a multipoint tributary station. Modem
clocking only.
Specify: See "Additional Information" at end of this section
for applicable specify codes. Maximum: One. Prerequisites:
Integrated Communications Adapter (#4645) ... see appropri-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------
--- -=-=---=
- - - ------_
.... -
M5408.3
General Systems Division-Machines
Nov 78
-~-y-
Field
(#9391). For 8000 bps operation,. #7821 is required .on the
3271 or 3275. Field Installation: Yes.
Text. Transparency (#7851): Permits the ICA to transmit or
receive "8 bit binary data" and EBCDIC coded data.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with ASCII Transmission
Code (#9071). Limitations on the use of this facility are described in SRL GA27-3004. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
Integrated Communications Adapter (#4645) and Transmission
Code (#9070). Field Installation: Yes.
Internal Clock (#4703): Generates syncronizing and timing
signals for BSCA operation when they are not provided by the
attached modem. When this feature is installed on System/3,
all other BSC stations attached to the same data link must also
be equipped with a similar I BM Internal Clock feature. See IBM
ate "M~chines" pages
Installation: Yes.
for
device
prerequisites.
Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (#2074):
This feature in conjunction with program control permits
System/3 model 8 to communicate in binary synchronous
mode with other IBM systems and terminals. System/3 can
operate on a multipoint line as either a control station or a
tributary station, or on a point-to-point switched or leased
communication line. Transmission rates are available from 600
bps to 50,000 bps. Auto answer capability is standard (to be
e'f.fective, modem must also have this capability) in switched
network version. Any version can be selected to operate in
EBCDIC transmission code or ASCII code, but not both. A
1200 BPS Integrated Modem is available as a special feature.
Also see "IBM Modems" in "Additional Information" at end of
this section.
Specify: See "Additional Information" at end of this section
for applicable specify codes. Maximum: One per 5408.
Prerequisite: Processing Unit Expansion A (#5732); both
Processing Unit Expansion A (#5732) and B (#5733) if attached with the 5448 File Attachment (#4040) or SIOC (#7081).
Field Installation: Yes.
The following special features may be added to #2074.
Auto Call (#1315): Permits the System/3 whet'! attached to a
switched network (option #9483) via an appropriate modem
and Auto Call Unit to initiate (dial) through stored program
control, a data link connection to a remote BSC station.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Station Selection
(#7477), or 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#4781, 4782).
Maximum: One. Prerequisites: BSCA (#2074), one Voice
Grade Transmission Rate from 600 to 4800 bps, and Network
Attachment (#9483). Requires appropriate cable order. See
Installation Planning Manual, GA21-9084. Field Installation:
Yes.
EIA Local Attachment (#3601): Permits attachment of one
3271 Control Unit, one 3275 Display Station, one 3274-1 C
Control Unit, one 3276-2 Control Display Station, one
System/7 equipped with a binary synchronous communications adapter (#2074), 5231 model 2, or one 2972 GBTS Control Unit to System/3 without the use of a data communications line and modems at either device. This attachment may
be used where the device's control unit or System/7 is located
within a distance to the 5408 that is reached by the Device's
EIA attachment cable (i.e., the cable normally used to attach to
any external modem). This feature provides the clocking signals for the System/3 BSCA and for the attached control unit's
adapter; therefore, the System/3's Internal Clock (#4703)
cannot be installed on the same adapter with this feature .. Data
transfer rates of 2400, 4800 and 8000 bps are supported by
this feature and are specified by the Transfer Rates (#9753,
9754, 9758) respectively. Limitations: Cannot be installed
with Internal Clock (#4703), or Auto Call (#1315). Maximum:
One. Prerequisites: BSCA (#2074, Transfer Rate (#9753,
9754, 9758), Network Attachment (#9484) and Line Facility
Data Communications Handbook
Will service rates of 60rr bps, 1200 bps, 2000 bps or 2400 bps.
Maximum: One. Prerequisites: BSCA (#2074) and one of
the above serviced transmission rate options.
Field
Installation: Yes.
1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#4781, 4782): A modem for
BSC data transmission at 1200 bps over non-switched facilities
or switched network. Available in two different versions:
#4781-Non-switched ... #4782-Switched with Auto Answer. Attachment to non:"switched (2 or 4-wire) facilities is via
an I BM provided cable directly to the line, type 3002 facility.
Attachment to the switched network is via an I BM provided
cable to a common carrier arrangement type CBS·equivalent.
The device communicating with System/3 must also be equipped with an IBM 1200 bps integrated modem/line adapter.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with sub-features Auto Call
(#1315) or EIA Local Attachment (#3601). #4781 and #4782
cannot be installed together on the same BSCA. Maximum:
One. Prerequisite: BSCA (#2074), Modem Base (#5201),
Internal Clock (#4703), Transfer Rate (#9751).
Field
Installation: Yes.
Modem Base (#5201): Provides for mounting of one 1200
BPS Integrated Modem (#4781, 4782). Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: BSCA (#2074). Field Installation: Yes.
Station Selection (#7477): Permits the System/3 to operate
as a compatible member of the IBM family of BSC terminals on
a multipoint communications line as a tributary station.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Auto Call (#1315).
Maximum: One. Prerequisites: BSCA (#2074), Network
Attachment (#9482 or #9484), Line Facility Attachment
(#9392) and. one of the Voice Grade Transmission Rates
600-9600 bps. Note: Control station operation on a
System/3 BSCA with Station Selection installed is possible,
but such operation cannot be performed concurrently with
tributary station operation on that adapter. Additionally, a
change in modems or in modem operation may be required to
utilize the same adapter (at different periods of time) as a
tributary station and as a control station adapter. Also, the
network attachment option (#9484) must be specified when
control station operation is to be performed whether Station
Selection (#7477) is installed or not. Field Installation: Yes.
Text Transparency (#7850): Permits the System/3 to transmit or receive "8-bit binary data" and EBCDIC' coded data.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with ASCII Transmission
Code (#9061) ... limitations on the use of this facility exist and
Maximum:
One.
are described in SRL GS27-3004.
Prerequisites: BSCA (#2074) and EBCDIC Trandmission Code
(#9060). Field Installation: Yes.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---'--=
=
=---=
- - -',-------
M5408.4
Nov 78
General Systems Division-Machines
-~-.-
2. See SRL GA27-3004 for potential problem areas and
possible restrictions to application data when, using
certain modems at this or higher speeds.
Additional Information
I.
Optional Specifications: The following 5 categories of
specify codes apply to the ICA (#4645) and BSCA
(#2074).
3. If Multipoint Tributary Station use (with #7477) is to
be implemented alternately with Multipoint Control
Station use on the same adapter, specify code #9484
must be used.
For ICA (#4645):
Category A and E applies to all configurations.
Categories B thru D do not apply unless #6202 is installed.
4. Where BSCA is used as a Control Station adapter or
when attached to a pOint-to-point (non-switched)
data link, the facility may be duplex (4-wire only) or
half-duplex. Half-duplex facility must be specified for
Switched Network attachments and for adapters
implementing Multipoint Tributary Station only operation.
For BSCA (#2074) one selection must be specified from
each of the 5 categories.
#4645
#2074
#9070
9071
#9060
9061
600 bps
#9850
1200 bps
9851
2000 bps
9852
2400 bps (2)
9853
4800 bps
9854
7200/3600 bps
9857
8000 bps
N/ A
High Speed (19,200 to 50,000 bps) N/ A
9600 bps
9859
#9750
9751
9752
9753
9754
9757
9758
9755
9759
A. Transmission Code
EBCDIC
ASCII
II.
B. Transfer Rate (1)
Text Transparency (#7850)
B. Available with Medium Speed adapters only:
Internal Clock (#4703)
Station Selection (#7477)
Auto Call (#1315)
EIA Local Attachment (#3601)
1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#4781,4782).
C. Netwprk Attachment
Point-to-Point (non-switched)
Point-to-Point (switched)
Multipoint Tributary (3)
Multipoint Control Station
#9581
9583
N/A
9584
#9481
9483
9482
9484
#9381
9382
#9391
9392
III.
AT & T or Western Union Class 3002-600 bps (1200
bps with 1200 BPS Integrated Modem).
AT & T or Western Union Class 3002 with C1 conditioning to 2400 bps.
E. One (or more) selections must be specified from the
following list depending on planned device attachments:
S/360 (mdl 22 and up) or S/370 #9670
S/360 mdl 20
9671
1130 System
9672
2770 System
9673
2780
9674
2972/2980
9676
3270 System
9677
3735
9678
3741 mdl2 or 4
9679
5231 Mdl2
9692
System/3
9680
System/7
9690
System/32
9691
System/34
9693
Series/1
9694
Notes:
1. Refer to Data Communications Handbook
#9570
9571
9572
9573
9574
9576
9577
9578
9579
9592
9580
9590
9591
9593
9594
Communication Facility Attachments: The ICA and
BSCA are designed to operate on transmission facilities
such as:
A. Common carrier leased telephone services (voice
grade)
D. Line Facility Attachment (4)
Duplex (4-wire only)
Half-Duplex
Special Features (BSCA)
A. Available with Medium Speed (600-9600 bps) and
with Wideband attachments (19,000-50,000 bps):
AT & T or Western Union Class 3002 with C2 conditioning to 7200 bps.
B. Private (customer owned) communications facilities
equivalent to the above common carrier facilities.
C. Common carrier switched network telephone (voice
grade) service at 600 bps to 4800 bps.
D. Common carrier wideband communication services at
19,200 bps, 40,800 bps, or 50,000 bps (BSCA only).
E. Private carrier organizations providing equivalent to
above (1 through 4) data transmission services.
IV.
Reference: See M2700 pages for additional information
concerning modems, communications facilities, machine
attachment requirements, terminal intermix, operating
capabilities and customer responsibilities.
V.
Customer Responsibilities-the customer must be
advised that:
A. He is responsible for making arrangement for installation, pricing and charges of the data communications
facility and attachment of selected data sets
(modems).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- =
--.....
--:::.-'-== General Systems Division-Machines
- - -------. " ....
----~
'
B. Toll charges, if required for installation and/ or maintenance of the BSCA or ICA, are to be paid by the,
customer.
C. The IBM Marketing Representative must have from
the customer a firm installation date for transmission
services (including modems) before the order can be
for
further
information
see
confirmed
"Teleprocessing Systems" in "Genercrl Information"
and consult "Reference IV" above.
VI.
IBM Modems: One IBM modem can' be attached to the
ICA (with #6202 installed) and to the BSCA as follows:
Modem
Speed (bps)
3872 model 1
3874 modet 1
3875 model 1
2400/1200
4800/2400
7200/3600
See, M2700 pages, 3872, 3874, 3875 in "Machines" for
information on modem features, prices, communications
capabilities and product utilization.
VII.
Cables: BSCA (#2074) always requires an appropriate
cable order [unless EIA Local Attachment (#3601) is
ordered]. ICA (#4645) requires a cable order only when
#6202
is
also
ordered.
See
Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GA21-9084.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M5408.5
Nov 78
---General Systems Division---Machines
-=- ...=--==
----_
... -
M5410.1
-
Nov 78
-~-y-
Bibliography: GC20-8080. Metering: Base Unit.
5410 PROCESSING UNIT
Purpose: Contains core storage and facilities for addressing
main storage, arithmetic and logical processing of data, and
controlling I/O units for System/3 Model 10.
Model
*A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
**A7
***A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
*
Core Storage (bytes)
Card System
Disk System
8,192
12,288
16,384
24,576
32,768
49,152
Specify
1. Voltage [AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60Hz (cps)]: #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V.
2. Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
3. Print Position Attachment: #9495 for a 5203 with 120 print
positions, or #9496 for a 5203 with 132 print positions.
4. I/O Unit Attachments: Appropriate special features are
required to attach most I/O units ... see "Special Features."
8,192
12,288
16,384
24,576
32,768
49,152
5. Disk Systems (models A 12-A17 only): Appropriate codes
are required on the 5424 or 5422 ... see "Specify" under
5424,5422.
I BM Programming Systems for the 3410/3411 Magnetic
Tape Subsystem on System/3 model 10 requires a 5410
Processing Unit with a minimum of 12,288 bytes of core
storage. IBM's ability to service a disk oriented System/3
with 8,192 bytes of core storage will be impaired with an
effect on systems availability.
** I BM Programming Systems for card oriented systems will
not utilize core storage in excess of 32,768 bytes.
***IBM Programming Systems for a disk oriented System/3
model 10 require a minimum of 12,288 bytes of core storage. IBM's ability to service a disk oriented System/3 model 10 with 8,192 bytes of core storage may be impaired with
an effect on systems availability.
Model Changes: Field installable.
Highlights: Uses the highly integrated Monolithic Systems
Technelogy (MST). Data and instructions are stored as
EBCDIC characters ... each EBCDIC character is stored in an
8-bit byte ... a ninth bit is added for parity checking. Main
cycle time is 1.52 microseconds. I nstruction execution and I/O
data handling utilizes the "Cycle Steal" technique, providing
overlap of I/O processing.
The systems console uses an alphameric halt indicator for
simplified, direct operator / system communication.
Core storage capacity changes and most I / a unit attachments
are field installable.
Communication with remotely located systems or terminals
may be performed through the use of a Binary Synchronous
Communications Adapter over Data Communications Transmission facilities.
Maximum: Only one 5410 can be attached to a System / 3
model 10.
Minimum Configuration: In addition to a 5410, a System/3
model 10 requires a printer (5203 or 1403) and either-(a} a
5424 Multi-Function Card Unit, or (b) a 1442 model 6 or 7 Card
Punch and a 5422 Disk Enclosure with at least one 5444 Disk
Storage Drive.
The 5422 Disk Enclosure is "not recommended for field
installation" on System/3 model 10 unless the 5410 has a
printed circuit board rather than discrete wiring on the primary
power box sequence control relay panel.
6. Disk Systems (models A 12-A17 only): Specify one of the
following: #9201 for 5444 Model 1, #9202 for 5444 Model
2, #9203 for 5444 Model 2 and Model 3, or #9204 for two
5444 Model 2's, #9205 for 5444 Model A 1, #9206 for 5444
Model A2, #9207 for 5444 Model A2 and Model A3, or
#9208 for two 5444 Model A2's or #5300 for no 5444.
7. For Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (#2074)
see "Special Features."
8. System Control Programming, 5701-SC1, for card systems,
or 5702-SC1 for disk systems, should be ordered at equipment order entry time
see "System Control
Programming" section for additional information.
Note: For a 5410 to 5412 or 5415 Model B, C or D conversion
where installed 5424 is to be moved to the new system,
an MES must be submitted to remove the 5444(s} from
the 5424. This M ES must also delete #9400, and if a
second 5444 is installed, #9401 or #9402 (all from the
5424).
Special Features
Dual Feed Carriage Control (#3480): Required for Dual Feed
Carriage (#3475) on a 5203 Printer. Field Installable: Yes.
Prerequisite: 5203 Printer Attachment-100 Ipm (#3970),
-200 Ipm (#3971), or-300 Ipm (#3972).
Dual Program (#3500): Provides the capability to independently load and process two programs simultaneously. Independent operator control of each program is provided so that
either program may be initiated, restarted after a programmed
halt, run to completion, or terminated without regard to the
other program other than availability of core and I/O units.
Field Installable: Yes. Limitations: (1) IBM Programming
Systems for this feature require a disk oriented System/3
model 10 with a minimum of 12,288 bytes of core storage ...
(2) IBM's ability to service a card oriented System/3 model 10
equipped with this feature may be impaired with an effect on
systems availability.
First 5445 Disk Attachment (#3901): To attach a 5445 mode11, or with #3902 below. Maximum: One. Field Installable:
Yes. Limitations: Cannot be installed with the 5448 File Attachment
(#4040).
Prerequisites:
Processing
Unit
Expansion-A (#5732). Processing Unit Expansion-B, C and
D (#5733, 5734, 5735) may be required if certain features are
specified ... refer to "Processing U nit Expansion Featu res
Configurator" below to determine requirements.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- - . . -. .---~-== General Systems Division-Machines
- ------
-- -=
M5410.2
Nov 78
-~-.-
Second 5445 Disk Attachment (#3902): To attach a 5445
model 2 or model 3. Maximum: One. Field Installable: Yes.
Prerequisite: First 5445 Disk Attachment (#3901).
5203 Printer Attachment 100 Ipm (#3970): To attach a 5203
Printer model 1. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with #3971, #3972, #4140, or #4150. Field
Installable: Yes. Prerequisite: #9222 on the 5203.
5203 Printer Attachment 200 Ipm (#3971): To attach a 5203
Printer model 2. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with #3970, #3972, #4140, or #4150. Field
Installable: Yes. Prerequisite: #9222 on the 5203.
5203 Printer Attachment 300 Ipm (#3972): To attach a 5203
Printer model 3. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with #3970, #3971, #4140, or #4150. Field
Installable: Yes. Prerequisite: #9222 on the 5203.
5448 File Attachment (#4040): To attach a 5448 Disk Storage Drive Model A 1. Limitations: Cannot be installed with
First 5445 Disk Attachment (#3901). Maximum: One. Field
Installable: Yes. Prerequisite: 5444 Disk Storage Drive
Model 2 or A2, Processing Unit Expansion A (#5732) on the
5410 and Specify #9057 on the 5448 Disk Storage Drive.
Refer to the Processing Unit Expansion Features Configurator
to determine if other expansion features are required.
Multi-Function Card Unit Attachment-250/60/60 cpm
(#4100): To attach a 5424 Multi-Function Card Unit model A1.
Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #4101
or #4130. Field Installable: Yes.
Multi-Function Card Unit Attachment-500/120/120 cpm
(#4101): To attach a 5424 Multi-Function Card Unit model A2.
Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be instaUed with #4100
or #4130. Field Installable: Yes.
5471 Printer-Keyboard Attachment (#4110): To attach a
5471 Printer-Keyboard. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot
be installed with #4120. Field I nstallable: Yes.
1442 Model 6/7 Card Read Punch Attachment (#4130): To
attach a 1442 model 6 or 7. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with #4100 or #4101. Maximum: One. Field Installable:
Yes. Prerequisites: A 5422 Disk Enclosure and a minimum of
one 5444 ... 5410/5412/5415 Coupling (#3950) on the 1442.
1403 Model 2 Printer Attachment 600 Ipm (#4140): To
attach a 1403 Printer model 2. Maximum: One. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with #3480, #3970, #3971, #3972. #4150.
#8642. Field Installable: Yes.
1403 Model N1 Printer Attachment 1100 Ipm (#4150): To
attach a 1403 Printer model N1. Maximum: One. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with #3480. #3970. #3971. #3972. #4140.
#8642. Field Installable: Yes.
Higher Performance 1 st Disk Attachment (#4501):
(Models A 12 thru A 17 only) To attach a 5444 model A 1 or first
5444 model A2. Not required to attach a 5444 model 1 or first
5444 model 2. Maximum: One. Field Installable: Yes.
Prerequisites: If a MLTA RPQ is present on the 5410. the
Power Supply Expansion (#5501) is required. #9400 is also
required on the 5424 Multi-function Card Unit ... see "Specify"
under 5424.
Higher Performance 2nd Disk Attachment (#4502):
{Models A12 thru A17 only} To attach a 5444 model A3 or
second 5444 model A2. Maximum: One. Field Installable:
Yes. Prerequisite: Second Disk Attachment {#6378}.
Local Communications Adapter (#4765): (Models A 12 thru
A 17 only) Permits local attachment of one 3741 Data Station
model 2, 'or Programmable Work Station model 4, one 5231
model 2 equipped with BSCA {#2074} (Point-to-point unidirectional transmission only), one 3271 Control Unit, or one 3275
Display Station or one 3274-1 C Control Unit or one 3276-2
Control Unit Display Station or one System/7 equipped with a
binary synchronous communications adapter (#2074) to, a disk
oriented System/3 model 10. The external modem cable of the
device will attach directly to the 5410 when this feature is
installed. Data transfer rate is 2400 bps only. EBCDIC Transmission Code must be specified where applicable on the attached device. Programming support for the 3741 model 2 or 4
and 5231 model 2, is provided by the RPG \I Telecommunications Feature and the Communications Control Program feature
of Disk SCPo Programming support for the 3271, 3274, 3275,
and 3276 is provided by the Multiline/Multipoint and Communications Control Program features of the Disk SCPo Programming support for the System/7 is provided by the RPG \I Telecommunications feature or by the Multiline/ Multipoint or the
Communications Control Program features of the disk SCPo
(Host programs must be point-to-point mode and a CCP program must use data mode only.) Limitations: Cannot be installed with BSCA-1 (#2074) ... Data exchange with attached
device is non-transparent only. For data transparent operation
contact GSD Special Product Marketing for RPQ detail and
approval. Specify: One of the following: #9577 for attachment of the 3270 devices ... #9597 for attachment of the 3741
model 2 or 4 ... #9592 for 5231 model 2 ... #9590 for attachment of the System/7. Maximum: One per 5410. Field
Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisites:
Processing
Unit
Expansion-A (#5732). Requires same Processing Unit Expansion features as BSCA-1. See Processing Unit Expansion
Configurator for possible requirements for additional expansion
features.
Power Supply Expansion (#5501): (Models A 12 thru A 17
only) Provides additional processing unit 6 volt power. Required when a MLTA RPQ and Higher Performance 1st Disk
Attachment (#4501) both are desired. Maximum: One. Field
Installable: Yes.
Processing Unit Expansion A (#5732): Provides additional
processing unit power supply, connectors, and mounting space
when required. Contact Special Product Marketing for details.
Maximum: One. Note: Refer to Processing Unit Expansion
Feature configurator below to determine requirements. Field
Installable: Yes.
Processing Unit Expansion B (#5733): Provides additional
processing unit power supply and connections. Refer to Processing Unit Expansion Feature configurator below to determine
requirements. May be required when certain RPQ's are ordered. Contact Special Product Marketing for details.
Maximum: One. Field Installable: Yes. Prerequisite: Processing Unit Expansion-A (#5732).
Processing Unit Expansion C (#5734): Provides additional
processing unit power supply and connections. Refer to Processing Unit Expansion Feature configurator below to determine
requirements. May be required when certain RPQ's are ordered. Contact Special Product Marketing for details.
Maximum: Oce. Field Installable: Yes. Prerequisites:
Processing Unit Expansion A (#5732) and Processing Unit
Expansion B (#5733).
Processing Unit Expansion D (#5735): Provides additional
processing unit power supply and connections. Refer to Proc-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-- ....
--_
=---=
- - -----.. -
-=_
M5410.3
General Systems Division-Machines
essing Unit Expansion Feature configurator below to determine
requirements.
Maximum: One. Field Installable: Yes. Prerequisites:
Processing Unit Expansion A (#5732), B (#5733), and C
(#5734).
PROCESSING UNIT EXPANSION FEATURES
CONFIGURATOR COMMUNICATIONS
I/O Unit
Attachments
None
None
1442*
#5732
5445/5448
#5732
3411
#5732
1442* &
5445/5448
#5732
1442* & 3411
#5732
5445/5448 &
3411
#5732
1142* g" 5445/
5448 & 3411
#5732
3741 (#8220)
#5732
3741 & 1442*
#5732
3741 &
5445/5448
#5732
3741 & 3411
#5732
3741 & 1442*
& 5445/5448
#5733
3741 & 1442*
& 3411
#5732
3741 & 5445/5448
& 3411
#5732
3741 & 1442* &
5445/5448 &
3411
#5733
BSCA-2
with
either
BSCA-1
or LCA
BSCA-2
& MLTA
with
either
BSCA-1
or LCA
BSCA-1
or
LCA
MLTA
RPQ
MLTA
RPQ
with
either
BSCA-1
or LCA
#5732
#5732
#5733
#5732
#5732
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5734
#5733
#5732
#5733
#5733
#5732
#5733
#5734
#5735
#5733
#5733
#5732
#5733
#5733
#5734
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5735
#5734
#5733
#5733
#5734
#5733
#5735
#5733
#5732
#5732
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5734
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5732
#5733
#5735
#5733
#5734
#5733
#5732
#5733
#5733
#5734
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5735
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5735
#5733
#5735
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5734
#5733
#5733
#5735
#5733
#5735
#5733
#5733
#5735
#5733
#5735
Notes:
1. #5732 is a prerequisite for #5733.
2. #5733 is a prerequisite for #5734.
3. #5734 is a prerequi~ite for#5735.
* RPO-1442 in addition to 5424.
Second Disk Attachment (#6378). (Models A 12 thru A 17
only) To attach a 5444 Disk Storage model 3 or model AJ, or a
second 5444 model 2 or model A2. Maximum: One. Field
Installable: Yes. Prerequisites: A 5444 model 2 or model A2
... #9401 or #9402 is also required on the 5422 Disk Enclosure
or 5424 Multi-function Card Unit. See "Specify" under 5422
or 5424.
Serial I/O Channel (#7081): To attach a 1255 Magnetic
Character Reader or a 3881 Optical Mark Reader. Maximum:
One. Field Installable: Yes.
3411 Magnetic Tape Attachment (#7951): To attach a 3411
Magnetic Tape Unit and Control. Maximum: One. Field
Installable:
Yes.
Prerequisites:
Processing
Unit
Expansion-A (#5732).
Processing Unit Expansion-B
(#5733) is required when the MLTA RPO is also installed on
system. Refer to "Processing Unit Expansion Features
Configurator" above to determine requirements. Note: IBM
Programming Systems for the 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape
Subsystem on System/3 model 10 requires a 5410 Processing
Unit with a minimum of 12,288 bytes of core storage. IBM's
ability to service a magnetic tape subsystem with 8,192 bytes
Nov 78
of core storage will be impaired with an effect on systems
availa bility.
3741 Attachment (#8220): To directly attach a 3741 model 1,
2, 3 or 4. Limitation: IBM Programming Support requires a
disk oriented 5410 with a minimum of 12,288 bytes of storage.
For 3741 models 3 and 4, System/3 does not support the
Application Control Language (ACL). Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Processing Unit Expansion
A (#5732). See Processing Unit Expansion Features Configurator for possible requirements for additional expansion features.
I/O Adapter (#3265/3266) on 3741.
Universal Character Set Control (#8642): Required if any
Interchangeable Chain Cartridge or Interchangeable Train
Cartridge with more than 48 different characters is to be used
on the 5203 Printer. Field Installable: Yes. Note: This feature
is not required if a 1403 model 2 or N 1 with UCS feature is
attached to the 5410 thru a 5421 Printer Control Unit.
Prerequisites: Universal Character Set Attachment (#8639)
on the 5203 Printer.
Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (#2074):
This feature in conjunction with program control permits
System/3 Model 10 to communicate in binary synchronous
mode with other IBM systems and terminals. System/3 Model
10 can operate on a multipoint line as either a control station or
a tributary station, or on a point-to-point switched or leased
communications line. Transmission rates are available from
600 bps to 50,000 bps. Auto answer capability is standard (to
be effe~tive, the modem must also have this capability) in
switched network version. Any version can be selected to
operate in EBCDIC or ASCII transmission code, but not both.
A 1200 BPS Integrated Modem is available as a special feature. Also, see "Modems" at the end of this section.
Specify: See
"Additional Information" at end of this section for applicable
specify codes. Maximum: One per 5410. Field I nstal/ation:
Yes. Limitations: Cannot be installed with Local Communications Adapter (#4765). Prerequisites: Installation of #2074
requires Processing Unit Expansion A (#5732). Refer to
"Processing Unit Expansion Features Configurator" for possible requirement for additional Processing Unit Expansion features, B, C, D.
Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter, Second
(#2084): Permits operation of two BSCA's simultaneously on
System/3 model 10 and / or in two different configurations
(speed, network attachments, line facility attachments, codes,
etc.). First BSCA (#2074) or LCA (#4765) is a prerequisite for
installation of this feature, Their prerequisite, Expansion Feature (#5732) serves also for #2084 and need not be ordered
twice.
See the "Processing Unit Expansion Features
Configurator" for possible requirements for additional Processing Unit Expansion Features, B, C, D. This second adapter
(#2084) is functionally identical to the first adapter (#2074), It
will support the same subfeatures, which require the same
prerequisites (except #5732) as the first BSCA. The same
options and limitations also apply to the second BSCA. with the
following exception: #2084 is provided only in the medium
speed version (600 to 7200 bps) and does not support attachment to a Wideband data link (feature #9755), Provision of a
second adapter does not limit in any way the options on the
first adapter, including #9755. Limitations: No wideband
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
-......
-- -_
.....
=---=
- = - ---
- --- ---.--..-
M541 0.4
Nov 78
General Systems Division-Machines
.,.
attachment capability. Maximum: One per System/3 model
10. Prerequisites: First BSCA (#2074) and its prerequisite
(#5732)or the Local Communications Adapter (#4765) and its
prerequisite {#5732}. See "Processing Unit Expansion
Configurator" for possible requirement of additional Processing
Unit Expansion Features. See the following section on
"Additional information" for optional selection codes and the
price list for subfeature code numbers applicable to the Second
BSCA (#2084). Field Installation: Yes.
tn addition to the basic functions of #2074 and #2084 described above, the following special features may be added:
Auto Call (#1315, 1325): Permits the System/3 when attached to a switched network (option #9483 or #9583) via an
appropriate modem and Auto Call Unit to initiate (dial) through
stored program control, a data link connection to a remote BSC
station. #1315 for #2074 ... #1325 for #2084. Limitations:
Cannot be installed with Station Selection (#7477 or 7487), or
1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#4781, 4782). Maximum: One
per BSCA. Prerequisites: As appropriate BSCA (#2074 or
2084), one Voice Grade Transmission Rate from 600 to 4800
bps, and Network Attachment (#9483, "9583). Requires appropriate cable order. See Installation Planning Manual, GA219'084. Field Installation: Yes.
EIA Local Attachment (#3601, 3602): Permits attachment of
one 3271 Control Unit, one 3274-1 C Control Unit, one 3275
Display Station, one 3276-2 Control Unit Display Station, one
5231 Model 2, or one 2972 GBTS Control Unit, or one
System/7 equipped with a binary syncronous communications
adapter (#2074) to System/3 without the use of a data communications line and modems at either device. This attachment
may be used where the device's control unit or System/7 IS
located within a distance to the 5410 that is re$iched by the
Device's EIA attachment cable (Le., the cable normally used to
attach to an external modem). This feature provides the clocking signals for the System/3 BSCA and for the attached control unit's adapter; therefore, the System/3's Internal Clock
(#4703 or 4723) cannot be installed on the same adapter with
this feature. Data transfer rates of 2400, 4800 and 8000 bps
are supported by this feature. #3601 for #2074 '" #3602 for
#2084. Limitations: Cannot be installed with Internal Clock
(#4703 or 4723), or Auto Call (#1315 or 1325). Maximum:
One per BSCA. Prerequisites: As approp r iate-#2074 or
2084, Transfer Rate (#9753, 9754, 9758 or #9853, 9854,
9858), Network Attachment (#9484 or#9584) and Line Facility
(#9391 or #9381). For 8000 bps operation, #7821 is required
on the 3271 or 3275. Field Installation: Yes.
Internal Clock (#4703, 4723): Generates synchronizing and
timing signals for BSCA operation when they are not provided
by the attached modem. When this feature is installed on
System/3, all other BSC stations attached to the same data
link must also be equipped with a similar IBM Internal Clock
feature. See IBM Data COfT}mUnlc8tions Handbook
#4703 for #2074 ... #4723 for #2084. Will service
rates 600 bps, 1200 bps, 2000 bps or 2400 bps. Maximum:
One per BSCA. Prerequisites: As appropriate BSCA (#2074
or 2084), and one of the above serviced transmission rate
options. Field Installation: Yes.
1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#4781, 4782): A modem for·
BSC data transmission at 1200 bps over non-switched facilities
or switched network. Available in two different versions:
#4781 Non-switched ... #4782 Switched with Auto Answer.
Attachment to non-switched (2 or 4-wire) facilities is via an
IBM provided cable directly to the line, type 3002 facility.
Attachment to the switched network is via an IBM provided
cable'to a common carrier arrangement type CBS or equivalent.
The device communicating with System/3 must also be equipped with an IBM 1200 bps integrated modem/line adapter.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with sub-features Auto Call
(#1315 or 1325) or EIA Local Attachment (#3601, 3602).
#4781 and 4782 cannot be installed together on the same
BSCA. Maximum: One per BSCA. Prerequisites: As appropriate BSCA (#2074 or 2084), Modem Base (#5201 or 5202),
Internal Clock (#4703 or 4723), Transfer Rate (#9751 or 9851).
Field Installation: Yes.
Modem Base (#5201, 5202): Provides for mounting of one
1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#4781, 4782). #5201 for #2074
#5202 for #2084.
Maximum:
One per BSCA.
Prerequisite: As appropriate-BSCA (#2074, or 2084). Field
Installation: Yes.
Station Selection (#7477, 7487): Permits the System/3 to
operate as a compatible member of the I BM family of BSC
terminals on a multipoint communications line as a tributary
station. #7477 for #2074 ... #7487 for #2084. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with Auto Call (#1315, 1325). Maximum:
One per BSCA. Prerequisites: As appropriate BSCA (#2074
or 2084), Line Facility Attachment (#9392 or 9382) and one of
the Voice Grade Transmission Rates 600 to 9600 bps. Note:
Control station operation on a Sys~em/3 BSCA with Station
Selection installed is possible, but such operation cannot be
performed concurrently with triJjutary station operation on that
adapter. Additionally, a change in modems or in modem operation may be required to utilize the same adapter (at different
periods of time) as a tributary station and as a control station
adapter. Also, the network attachment option (#9484 or.9584)
must be specified when control station operation is to be performed whether Station Selection (#7477 or 7487) is installed
or not. Field Installation: Yes.
Text Transparency (#7850, 7851): Permits the System /3 to
transmit or receive "8-bit binary data" and EBCDIC coded
data. Limitations: Cannot be installed with ASCII Transmission code (#9061 or 9071) ... limitations on the use of this
facility exist and are described in SRL GA27-3004. #7850 for
#2074 '" #7851 for #2084. Maximum: One per BSCA.
Prerequisite: As appropriate BSCA (#2074 or 2084) and
Transmission Code (#9060 or 9070). Field Installation: Yes.
IBM Modems: One IBM modem can be attached to the
BSCA (#2074) and/or one to the second BSCA (#2084) as
follows:
Modem
Nominal Speed (bps)
3872 model 1
3874 model 1
3875 model 1
2400
4800/2400
7200/3600
See M2700, 3872" 3874, 3875 pages for information on modem features, prices, communications capabilities and product
utilization.
Note: Configuration requirements for IBM Programming Support must satisfy the minimum machine requirements stated in
the "Program Products" and "Systems" sections
For information on optional selections, attachment to communications lines, customer responsibilities, etc., see "Additional
Information"
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---=---=
- - - --.. General Systems Division-Machines
_=
_______
-~-
't'
_
Nov 78
'
4. Where BSCA is used as a Control Station adapter or
when attached to a point-to-point {non-switched}
qata link, the facility may be duplex {4-wire only} or
half-duplex. Half-duplex facility must be specified for
Swtiched Network attachments and for adapters
implementing Multipoint Tributary Station only operation.
Additional Information
I.
M5410.5
Optional Specifications: One selection must be specified from each of the following five categories for each
adapter.
#2074
#2084
#9060
9061
#9070
9071
#9750
9751
9752
9753
9754
9757
9758
9755
9759
#9850
9851
9852
9853
9854
9857
9858
NA
9859
A. Transmission Code
EBCDIC
ASCII
II.
B. Transfer Rate {1}
600 bps
1200 bps
2000 bps
2400 bps {2}
4800 bps
7200/3600 bps
8000 bps
High Speed (19,200 to 50,000 bps)
9600 bps
Special Features
A. Available with Medium Speed (600-9600 bps) and
with Wideband attachments (19,200-50,OOO bps).
Text Transparency (#7850/7851).
B. Available with Medium Speed adapters only.
Internal Clock (#4703/4723)
Station Selection (#7477/7487)
Auto Call (#1315/ 1325)
EIA Local Attachment (#3601 /3602)
1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#4781/4782)
C. Network Attachment
Point-to-point (non-switched)
Point-to-point {switched}
Multi-point (Tributary)
Multi-point Control Station(3)
#9481
9483
9482
9484
#9581
9583
9582
9584
III.
A. Common carrier leased telephone line services (Voice
Grade).
AT & T or Western Union Class 3002-600 bps (1200
nps with 1200 BPS Integrated Modem)
D. Line Facility Attachment (4)
Duplex {4-wire only}
Half Duplex
#9391
9:{92
#9381
9382
AT & T or Western Union Class 3002 with C1 conditioning to 4800 bps.
E. One {or more if necessary} optional selection code
must be specified from the following list, contingent
upon planned device attachments:
S/360 {mdl 22 and up} or S/370
S/360 mdl 20
1130 System
2770 System
2780
2980
3270 System
3735
3741 mdl 2, 3741 mdl 4
5231 Mdl2
System/3
System/7
System/32
System/34
Series/1
#9570
9571
9572
9573
9574
9576
9577
9578
9579
9592
9580
9590
9591
9593
9594
#9670
9671
9672
9673
9674
9676
9677
9678
9679
9692
9680
9690
9691
9693
9694
Notes:
AT & T or Western Union Class 3002 with C2 conditioning to 7200 bps
B. Private (customer owned) communications facilities
equivalent to the above common carrier facilities.
C. Common carrier switched network telephone (Voice
Grade) service at 600 to 4800 bps.
D. Common carrier Wideband Communications Services
at 19,200 bps, 40,800 bps, or 50,000 bps.
E. Private carrier organizations providing equivalent to
above (A through D) data transmission services.
IV.
2. See SRL GA27-3004 for potential problem areas and
possible restrictions to application data when using
certain modems at this or higher speeds.
Multi-point
Tributary
Station
use
{with
3. If
#7477/7478} is to be implemented alternately with
Multi-'point Control Station use on the same adapter,
specify code #9484/9584 must be stated.
Reference
See M2700 pages for additional information concerning
modems, communications facilities, machine attachment
requirements, terminal intermix, operating capabilities,
and customer responsibilities.
V.
1. Refer to Data Communications Handbook
Communications Facility Attachments: The BSCA is
designed to operate on transmission facilities such as:
Customer Responsibilities
The customer must be advised that:
A. He is responsible for making arrangements for installation, pricing, and charges of the data communications facility and attachment of selected data sets
(modems).
B. Toll charges, if required for installation and/ or maintenance of the BSCA, are to be paid by the customer.
C. The IBM Marketing Representative must have from
the customer a firm installation date for transmission
services (including modems) before the order can be
confirmed
for
further
information,
see
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
----~-== General Systems Division-Machines
- - - -------.-
==
"Teleprocessing Systems" in "General Information"
VI.
Cables
BSCA (#2074/2084) always requires an appropriate
cable order (unless EIA Local Attachment #3601 /3602 is
ordered). See Installation Manual-Physical Planning,
GA21-9084.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M5410.6
Nov 78
---== - --=---=
General Systems Division-Machines
----
MS412.1
---_.-
Nov 78
5412 PROCESSING UNIT
Specify
Purpose: Contains main storage and facilities for addressing
main storage, arithmetic and logical processing of data, and
controlling I/O units for System/3 Model 12. Also includes the
attachment for 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility Mod~1 C2.
1.
Voltage: AC, 3-Phase, 4-Wire, 60Hz (CPS): #9903 for
208V,or#9905for230V.
2.
Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
3.
Print Position Attachment: #9495 for 5203 with 120
print positions, or #9496 for a 5203 with 132 print positions.
4.
I/O Unit Attachments: Appropriate special features are
required to attach most I/O units ... see "Special Features."
5.
System Control Programming: 5705-SC1 should be
ordered at equipment order entry time .. , see "System
Control Programming" section for additional information.
6.
System Attachment Adapter: #9180 for 5203 Model 1.
#9181 for 5203 Model 2.
7.
3741 Direct Attachment: #9500 if either a 5424 or a
1442 are present. #9501 if neither are present.
8.
Upending Kit: #9840. This kit is furnished only as necessary and remains the property of IBM.
9.
5412/5415 Frame Separation Kit: #9190
Model
B16
B17
B18
*C19
*C20
Processor Storage (Bytes)
32,768
49,152
65,536
81,920
98,304
Model Changes: Field installable.
. Purchase Considerations: Replaced parts from any model
upgrade becomes the property of IBM.
Highlights: CPU uses highly integrated Monolithic Systems
Technology (MST) for logical circuitry. Memory is Metal Oxide
Semi-conductor Field Effect Transistor (MOSFET). Data and
instructions are stored as EBCDIC characters ... each EBCDIC
character is stored in an eight bit byte. a ninth bit is added for
parity checking. Main cycle time is 1.52 microseconds. Instruction execution and I/O handling utilizes the "Cycle Steal"
technique. providing overlap of I/O and processing.
The direct attachment of the 3741 Data Station or 3741 Programmable Work Station provides input and output via magnetic media. This feature may reside with or without Card I/O.
Frame separation may be required at installation time at
those locations where building dimensions (doorways.
hallways. stairways, etc.) do not allow movement of the
Central Processor as one unit.
The Local Display Adapter provides local attachment of any
mix of up to twelve 3277 Model 1 or 2 Display Stations and
3284/3286 (Model 1 or 2) and 3288 (Model 2) Printers. The
3271 Control Unit is not required if the devices are attached via
the Local Display Adapter.
Communication with remotely located systems or terminals
may be performed through the use of the Integrated Communications Adapter (lCA) or the Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (BSCA) over data communications transmission
facilities.
The system console uses a message display unit for simplified
direct operator / system communication.
Maximum: Only one 5412 can be attached toa System/3
Model 12.
- Minimum Configuration: In addition to the 5412. a
System/3 Model 12 requires a 5203 or 1403 Printer. a 3340
Direct Access Storage Facility Model C2. two 3348 Model 70
Data Modules and one of '" (a) 5424 Multi-Function Card Unit.
(b) 1442 Ca~d Read Punch, or (c) 3741 Data Station directly
attached. Support for Models C19 and C20 additionally requires Dual Program Feature*.
Note: When the Model 12 SCP option of Print Spooling is
used. either Dual Program (No. 3500) or the 5471 PrinterKeyboard must be ordered.
* I BM Programming Systems support for the 5412 C19 and
5412 C20 requires· the Dual Program Feature (Feature
#3500). IBM's ability to service a 5412 C19 or 5412 C20
without the Dual Program Feature will be impaired with an
effect on systems availability.
Bibliography: GC20-8080.
The local Installation Planning Representative can determine if this kit is required.
The Frame Separation Kit is not to be ordered when the
Upending Kit (#9840) will suffice.
10.
For a 5410 to 5412 conversion where an installed 5424
is to be moved to the new system. an MES must be submitted to remove the 5444(s) from the 5424. This MES
must also delete #9400. and if a second 5444 is installed. #9401 or #9402. (all from the 5424).
Special Features
Dual Feed Carriage Control (#3480): Required for Dual Feed
Carriage (#3475) on a 5203 Printer. Field Installable: Yes.
Prerequisite: 5203 Printer Base Attachment (#3960), and
appropriate 5203 Printer Speed Attachment (#3970 or #3972).
Dual Program (#3500): Provides the capability to independently load and process two programs concurrently. Independent operator control of each program is provided so that either
program may be initiated. restarted after a program halt. run to
completion. or terminated without regard to the other program
other than availability of main storage and I/O units. Field
Installable: Yes.
5203 Printer Base Attachment (#3960): Required to attach
a 5203 Printer Model 1. 2 or 3. Maximum: One. Field
Installable: Yes. Prerequisite: #9224 on the 5203 Printer.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with #4160.
5203 Printer Attachment 100 Ipm/200 Ipm (#3970): To
attach a 5203 Printer Model 1 or Model 2. Maximum: One.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3972. Field Installable:
Yes. Prerequisite: #3960 on the 5412.
5203 Printer Attachment 300 Ipm (#3972): To attach a 5203
Printer Model 3. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--___
...........
=
::.--==
General Systems Division-Machines
- .-----9_
-
- -=
-~
installed with #3970. Field Installable: Yes. Prerequisite:
#3960 on the 5412.
Multi-Function Card Unit Attachment 250/60/60 CPM
(#4100): To attach a 5424 Multi-Function Card Unit Model A1.
Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #4130.
Field Installable: Yes.
Multi-Function Card Unit Attachment 500/120/120 CPM
(#4101): To attach a 5424 Multi-Function Card Unit Model A2.
Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #4130.
Field Installable: Yes. Prerequisite: Multi-Function Card
Unit Attachment-250/60/60 CPM (#4100).
5471 Printer-Keyboard Attachment (#4110): To attach a
5471 Printer-Keyboard. Maximum: One. Field Installable:
Yes.
1442 Model 6/7 Card Read Punch Attachment (#4130): To
attach a 1442 Model 6 or 7. Maximum: One. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with #4100. Field Installable: Yes.
Prerequisites: 5410/5412/5415 Coupling (#3950) on the
1442 and Power Supply Expansion II (#5502) on the 5412.
1403 Printer Base Attachment (#4160): To attach a 1403
Printer Model 5, 2, or N 1 (#4135, #4140 or #4150 must be
Maximum:
One.
Field Installable:
Yes.
specified).
Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3960. Prerequisite: A
5421 Printer Control Unit.
1403 Model 5 Printer Attachment 465 Ipm (#4135): To
attach a 1403 Printer Model 5. Maximum: One. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with #4140 or #4150. Field Installable:
Yes. Prerequisite: 1403 Printer Base Attachment (#4160)on
the 5412 and (#9185) on the 5421.
1403 Model 2 Printer Attachment 600 Ipm (#4140): To
attach a 1403 Printer Model 2. Maximum: One. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with #4135 or #4150. Field Installable:
Yes. Prerequisite: A 1403 Printer Base Attachment (#4160)
on the 5412.
1403 Model N1 Printer Attachment 1100 Ipm (#4150): To
attach a 1403 Printer Model N1. Maximum: One. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with #4135 or #4140. Field Installable:
Yes. Prerequisite: A 1403 Printer Base Attachment (#4160)
on the 5412.
Basic Attachment Feature (#4701): To attach either the
Local Display Adapter (#4702) or 3411 Magnetic Tape Attachment (#7960) or both (#4702 and #7960 must be specified).
Maximum: One. Field Installable: Yes. Prerequisite: Processing Unit Expansion A (#5732). See Processing Unit Expansion Configurator Tables for possible requirements for additional expansion Feature{s).
Local Display Adapter (#4702): Permits direct local attachment (up to 2000 feet) of up to three 3277-1 Display Stations,
3284-1 Printers, 3286-1 Printers, or 3287 Printers in any combination. A 3271 Control Unit is not required. The 3270 device
cables will be attached directly to the Local Display Adapter.
For attachment of additional 3270 devices (maximum of 12)
see Display Increment (#4704). For attachment of the 3270
Model 2 (1920 Character Buffer) devices see Model 2 attachment (#4705). Maximum: One. Field Installable: Yes.
Prerequisite:
Basic
Attachment
Feature
(#4701).
Limitations: Cannot be installed with the Integrated Communications Adapter (#4645) or with the second Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (#2084).
M5412.2
Nov:8
Model 2 Attachment (#4705): Required if any 3277 Model 2
Display Stations and/or any 3284/3286/3288 Model 2 Printers and/or 3287 Printers (with 1920 Character Buffer) are to
be attached to the Local Display Adapter. Maximum: One.
Field Installable: Yes. Prerequisite: Local Display Adapter
(#4702).
.
Display Increment (#4704): Permits attachment of up to
three more devices to the Local Display Adapter. Maximum:
Three. Field Installable: Yes. Prerequisite: Local Display
Adapter (#4702).
Power Supply Expansion I (#5501): Provides additional
processing unit 6 volt power. Required when an MLTA RPQ is
desired. Maximum: One. Field Installable: Yes.
Power Supply Expansion \I (#5502): Provides additional
processing unit 24 volt power. Required when 5424 is not
attached. Maximum: One. Field Installable: Yes.
Processing Unit Expansion A (#5732): Provides additional
processing unit power supply, connectors and mounting space
when required. Refer to Processing Unit Expansion Configurator Tables to determine requirements. May be required when
certain RPO's are ordered.
Maximum: One. Field Installable: Yes.
Processing Unit Expansion B (#5733): Provides additional
processing unit power supply and connections. Refer to Processing Unit Expansion Configurator Tables to determine requirements. May be required when certain RPO's are ordered.
Maximum:
One. Field Installable: Yes. Prerequisite: Processing Unit
Expansion A (#5732).
Processing Unit Expansion C (#5734): Provides additional
processing unit power supply and connections. Refer to Processing Unit Expansion Configurator Tables to determine requirements. May be required when certain RPO's are ordered.
Maximum:
One. Field Installable: Yes. Prerequisites: Processing Unit
Expansion A (#5732) and Processing Unit Expansion B
(#5733).
Processing Unit Expansion 0 (#5735): Provides additional
processing unit power supply and connections. Refer to Processing Unit Expansion Configurator Tables to determine requirements. May be required when certain RPO's are ordered.
Maximum:
One. Field Installable: Yes. Prerequisites: Processing Unit
Expansion A (#5732). B (#5733). and C (#5734).
3411 Magnetic Tape Attachment (#7960): To attach a 3411
Tape Unit and Control. Maximum: One. Field Installable:
Yes. Prerequisite: Basic Attachment Feature (#4701). See
Processing Unit Expansion Configurator Tables for possible
requirement for additional Expansion Fe.atures.
Serial I/O Channel (#7081): To attach a 1255 Magnetic
Character Reader or a 3881 Optical Mark Reader. Maximum:
One. Field Installable: Yes. Prerequisite: Processing Unit
Expansion A (#5732). See Processing Unit Expansion Configurator Tables for possible requirement for additional Expansion
Fe8tures.
3741 Attachment (#8220): To attach a 3741 Model 1, 2, 3 or
4. Limitation: For 3741 Model 3 or 4, System/3 does not
support the Application Control Language (ACL). Maximum:
One. Field Installable: Yes. Prerequisite: Power Supply
Expansion II (#5502) on the 5412 is required if the 5424 is not
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----= -- General Systems Division-Machines
=---=
- -' "------ - -.. -
=
M5412.3
Nov 78
.
installed on the system. If attached with the 5424 MultiFunction Card Unit or the 1442 Card Read Punch, Processing
Unit Expansion A (#5732) is required. See Processing Unit
Expansion Configurator Tables for possible requirements for
additional Expansion Features.
Universal Character Set Control (#8642): Required if any
Interchangeable Train Cartridge with more than 48 different
characters is to be used on the 5203 Printer. Field Installable:
Yes. Note: This feature is not required if a 1403 Model 2, 5 or
N 1 with UCS feature is attached to the 5412 through a 5421
Control Unit. Prerequisite: Universal Character Set Attachment (#8639) on the 5203 Printer.
Communication Features
Integrated Communications Adapter (#4645): This feature,
in conjunction with its sub-features, provides up to three (3)
communications interfaces: two (2) local and one (1) remote.
When more than one interface is present, only one can be
active at a time as selected by the operator through a manual
switch control. See description of interface features (#4801,
4802 and 6202) below: At least one must be specified.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Local Display Adapter
(#4702) or BSCA 2 (#2084). Specify: #9070 for EBCDIC
transmission code, or #9071 for ASCII. Maximum: One per
5412. Prerequisite: Processing Unit Expansion A (#5732).
See Processing Unit Expansion Configurator Tables for possible requirement for additional Expansion Feature(s). Field
Installable: Yes.
8000 BPS Local Interface (#4801): Permits local attachment
of one 3271 Control Unit Model 1 or 2, or .one 3275 Display
Station Model 1 or 2 to the 5412 without use of a communications line or modems. The external modem cable of the attached terminal connects directly to the 5412 when this feature is
installed. The feature provides clocking for the 8000 bps data
transfer rate. Limitation: Data transfer rate is 8000 bps only.
Specify: See "Additional Information" at end of this section
for device attachment code. Maximum: One. Prerequisites:
Integrated Communications Adapter (#4645). The attached
3271 or 3275 must have #7821 installed. Field Installable:
Yes.
2400 BPS Local Interface (#4802): Permits local attachment
of one binary synchronous IBM terminal; e.g., 3741 Model 2 or
4, or 5231 Model 2, to the 5412 without the use of a communications line or modems. The external modem cable of the
attached terminal connects directly to the 5412 when this
feature is installed. The feature provides clocking for the 2400
bps data transfer rate. Limitations: Data transfer rate is 2400
bps only.
Specify: See "Additional Information" at end of this section
for device attachment code. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
Integrated
Communications
Adapter
(#4645).
Field
Installable: Yes.
Synchronous Line, Medium Speed (#6202): Provides one
medium speed BSC line interface to an external modem. The
communications network attachment may be point-to-point
(switched), point-to-point (non-switched), or multipoint
(control station). Maximum transmission rate is 4800 bps for
switched operation, and 7200 bps for non-switched operation.
The attached modem must provide the necessary data clocking. See "IBM Modem" in "Additional Information" at end of
this section. Devices attached to the Synchronous Line, Medium Speed, have the same requirements as when attached to
System/3 via BSCA (Feature #2.074) with equivalent communications facilities and line speeds. (Note: For attached device
prerequisites,
see
appropriate
"Machines"
pages.)
Limitations: Cannot function as a multipoint tributary station.
Modem clocking only.
Specify: See "Additional Information"'- at end
of this section for applicable specify codes. Maximum: One.
Prerequisites: Integrated Communications Adapter (#4645) ...
see appropriate "Machines" pages for device prerequisites.
Field Installable: Yes.
Text Transparency (#7851): Permits the ICA to transmit or
receive "8 bit binary data" and EBCDIC coded data.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with ASCII Transmission
Code (#9071). Limitations on the use of this facility are described in SRL GA27-3004. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
Integrated
Communications
Adapter
(#4645).
Field
Installable: Yes.
Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (#2074):
This feature in conjunction with program control permits
System/3 Model 12 to communicate in binary synchronous
mode with other IBM systems and terminals. System/3 Model
12 can operate on a multipoint line as either a control station or
a tributary station, or on a point-to-point switched or leased
communications line. Transmission rates are available from
600 bps to 50,000 bps. Auto answer capability is standard (to
be effective, the modem must also have this capability) in
switched network version. Any version can be selected to
operate in EBCDIC or ASCII transmission code, but not both.
A 1200 BPS Integrated Modem is available as a special feature. Also, see "Modems" at end of this section.
Specify: See "Additional
Information" at end of this section for applicable specify
codes. Maximum: One per 5412. Prerequisites: Processing
Unit Expansion A (#5732). See Processing Unit Expansion
Configurator Tables for possible requirement for additional
Expansion Feature(s). Field Installation: Yes.
Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter, Second
(#2084): Permits operation of two BSCA's simultaneously on
System/3 Model 12 and/or in two different configurations
(speed, network attachments. line facility attachments, codes.
etc). First BSCA (#2074) is a prerequisite for installation of
#2084. See Processing Unit Expansion Configurator Table for
possible requirements for additional Expansion Feature(s). This
second adapter (#2084) is functionally identical to the first
adapter (#2074). It will support the same sub-features. which
require the same prerequisites as the first BSCA. The same
options and limitations also apply to the second BSCA. with the
following exception: #2084 is provided only in the medium
speed version (600 to 7200 bps) and does not support attachment to a Wideband data link (option #9755). Provision of a
second adapter does not limit in any way the options on the
first adapter. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Local Display Adapter (#4702) or ICA (#4645), no Wideband attachment capability. Maximum: One. Prerequisites: First BSCA
(#2074). See Processing Unit Expansion Configurator Tables
for possible requirement of additional Expansion Feature{s).
See the following section on "Additional Information" for
optional selection codes and the price list for subfeature code
numbers applicable to the Second BSCA (#2084). Field
Installable: Yes.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------
=--==
-= -=- -------_
... -
M5412.4
Nov 78
General Systems Division-Machines
-~-,,-
In addition to the basic functions of #2074 and #2084 described above, the following special features may be added.
Auto Call (#1315, 1325): Permits the System/3 Model 12,
when attached to a switched network (option #9483 or #9583).
via an appropriate modem and Auto Call Unit to initiate (Dial)
through stored program control, a data link connection to a
remote BSC station. #1315 for #2074 ... #1325 for #2084.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with Station Selection (#7477
or #7487). or 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#4781, 4782).
Maximum: One per BSCA. Prerequisites: As appropriate
BSCA (#2074 or #2084). one Voice Grade Transmission Rate
from 600 to 4800 bps, and Network Attachment (#9483,
9583). Requires appropriate cable order. See Installation
Planning Manual, GA21-9084. Field Installable: Yes.
EIA Local Attachment (#3601, 3602): Permits attachment of
one 3271 Control Unit (Model 1 or 2). one 3275 Display Station
(Model 1 or 2). one 3274 Model 1C Control Unit, one 3276
Model 2 Control Unit Display Station, one 5231 Model 2, or
one 2972 GBTS Control Unit to System/3 Model 12 without
tbe use of a data communications line and modems at either
device. This attachment may be used where the device's control unit or System/7 is located within a distance to the 5412
that is reached by the device's EIA attachment cable (i.e., the
cable normally used to attach to an external modem). This
feature provides the clocking signals for the System/3 Model
12's BSCA and for the attached control unit's adapter; therefore, the System/3's Internal Clock (#4703 or #4723) cannot
be installed on the same adapter with this feature. Data transfer rates of 2400, 4800, and 8000 bps are supported by this
feature. #3601 for #2074, and #3602 for #2084. Limitations:
Cannot be installed with Internal Clock (#4703 ·or #4723), or
Auto Call (#1315 or #1325). Maximum: One per BSCA.
Prerequisites: As appropriate #2074 or #2084, Transfer Rate
(#9753, 9754, 9758 or #9853, 9854, 9858), Network Attachment (#9484 or #9584) and Line Facility (#9391 or #9381). For
8000 bps operation, #7821 is required on the 3271 or 3275.
Field Installable: Yes.
Internal Clock (#4703, 4723): Generates synchronizing and
timing signals for BSCA operation when they are not provided
by the attached modem. When this feature is installed on
System/3 Model 12, all other BSC stations attached to the
same data link must also be equipped with a similar IBM Internal Clock feature. Se~ IBM Data Communications Handbook
#4703 for #2074, #4723 for #2084. Will
service rates 600 bps, 1200 bps, 2000 bps or 2400 bps.
Maximum: One per BSCA. Prerequisites: As appropriate
#2074 or #2084, and one of the above serviced transmission
rate options. Field Installable: Yes.
1200 bps Integrated Modem (#4781, 4782): A modem for
BSC data transmission at 1200 bps .Jver non-switched facilities
or switched network. Available in two different versions:
#4781 non-switched and #4782 switched with Auto Answer.
Attachment to non-switched (2- or 4-wire) facilities is via an
IBM provided cable directly to the line, type 3002 facility.
Attachment to the switched network is via an IBM provided
cable to a common carrier arrangement type CBS or equivalent.
The device communicating with System/3 Model 12 must also
be equipped with an IBM 1200 bps integrated modem/line
adapter. Limitations: Cannot be installed with sub-features
Auto Call (#1315 or 1325) or EIA Local Attachment (#3601,
#3602). #4781 and 4782 cannot be installed together on the
same BSCA. Maximum: One per BSCA. Prerequisites: As
appropriate #2074 or #2084, Modem Base (#5201 or 5202),
Internal Clock (#4703 or 4723) Transfer Rate (#9751 or 9851).
Field Installable: Yes.
Modem Base (#5201, 5202): Provides for mounting of one
1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#4781, 4782). #5201 for #2074
and #5202 for #2084.
Maximum: One per BSCA.
Prerequisite: As appropriate #2074 or #2084.
Field
Installable: Yes.
Station Selection (#7477, 7487): Permits the System/3
Model 12 to operate as a compatible member of the IBM family
of BSC terminals on a multipoint communications line as a
tributary station. #7477 for #2074 ... #7487 for #2084.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Auto Call (#1315, 1325).
Maximum: One per BSCA. Prerequisites: As appropriate
#2074 or #2084, Line Facility Attachment (#9392 or 9382) and
one of the Voice Grade Transmission Rates 600-9600 bps.
Note: Control station operation on a System/3 Model 12 BSCA
with Station Selection installed is possible, but such operation
cannot be performed concurrently with tributary station operation on that adapter. Additionally, a change in modems or in
modem operation may be required to utilize the same adapter
(at different periods of time) as a tributary station and as a
control station adapter. Also, the network attachment option
(#9484 or 9584) must be specified when control station operation is to be performed whether Station Selection (#7477 or
7487) is installed or not. Field Installable: Yes.
Text Transparency (#7850, 7851): Permits the System/3
Model 12 to transmit or receive "8-bit binary data" and
EBCDIC coded data. Limitations: Cannot be installed with
ASCII Transmission Code (#9061 or 9071) '" limitations on the
use of this facility exist and are described in SRL GA27-3004.
#7850 for #2074 and #7851 for #2084: Maximum: One per
BSCA. Prerequisite: As appropriate #2074 or #2084 and
Transmission Code (#9060 or 9070). Field Installable: Yes.
IBM Modems: One IBM modem can be attached to the First
BSCA (#2074) and/ or one to the Second BSCA (#2084) or ICA
(#4645) with Synchronous Line, Medium Speed (#6202) as
follows:
Modem
Nominal Speed (bps)
3872 Model 1
3874 Model 1
3875 Model 1
2400/1200
4800/2400
7200/3600
See M2700, 3872, 3874 and 3875 pages for information on
modem features, communications capabilities and product
utilization.
Note: Configuration requirements for I BM programming support must satisfy the minimum machine requirements stated in
the "Program Products" and "Systems" sections
For information on optional selections, attachment to communications lines, customer responsibilities, etc., see "Additional
Information" .
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- - ------= - -=---=
- - General Systems Division-Machines
- - - ---
M5412.5
=
2. See SRL GA27-3004 for potential problem areas and
possible restrictions to application data when using
certain modems at this or higher speeds.
Additional Information
I.
Optional Specifications--one selection must be specified for each of the following five categories for either
BSCA 1 (#2074) or BSCA 2 (#2084). For ICA (#4645),
categories A and E apply to a/l configurations, categories
B through 0 do not apply unless #6202 is installed.
3. If Multipoint Tributary Station use (with #7477/7487)
is to be implemented alternately with Multipoint Control Station use on the same adapter, specify code
#9484/9584 must be used.
#2074 #2084 #4645
4. Where BSCA is used as a Control Station adapter, or
when attached to a point-to-point (non-switched)
data link, the facility may be duplex (4-wire only) or
half-duplex. Half-duplex facility must be specified for
Switched Network attachments and for adapters
implementing Multipoint Tributary Station only operation.
A. Transmission Code
EBCDIC
ASCII
#9060 #9070 #9070
9071
9071
9061
B. Transfer Rate (1)
600 bps
1200 bps
2000 bps
2400 bps (2)
4800 bps
7200/3600 bps
8000 bps
High speed (19,200 to
50,000 bps)
9600 bps
#9750 #9850 #9850
9851
9751
9851
9752 9852 9852
9753 9853 9853
9754 9854 9854
9757
9857 9857
9758 9858
N/A
5. Cables BSCA (#2074/2084) always requires an appropriate cable order [unless EIA Local Attachment
(#3601/3602) is ordered]. ICA (#4645) requires a
cable order only when #6202 is also ordered. See
Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA21-9084.
II.
9755
9759
N/A
9859
N/A
9859
Text Transparency (#7850/7851)
Point-to-point (non-switched)
Point-to-point (switched)
Multipoint Tributary
Multipoint Control Station (3)
#9481 #9581 #9581
9483 9583 9583
9482 9582
N/A
\9484 9584 9584
B. Available with Medium Speed adapters only:
Internal Clock (#4703/4723)
Station Selection (#7477/7487)
D. Line Facility Attachment (4)
Auto Call (#1315/ 1325)
#9391 #9381 #9381
9392 9382 9382
E. One (or more if necessary) optional selection code
must be specified from the following list, contingent
upon planned device attachments:
EIA Local Attachment (#3601 /3602)
1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#4781/4782)
III.
#2074 #2084 #4645
S/360 or S/370(Mdl 22
and up)
S/360 Mdl20
11 30 System*
2770 System
2780
2980
3270 System
3735
3741 Mdl 2, Mdl 4
5231 Mdl2
System/3
System/7
System/32
System/34
Series/1
Special Features
A. Available with Medium Speed (600-9600 bps) and
with Wideband attachments (19,200-50,000 bps);
C. Network Attachment
Duplex (4-wire only)
Half-Duplex
Nov 78
Communication
Facility
Attachments:
The
BSCA/ ICA is designed to operate on transmission facilities such as:
A. Common carrier leased telephone services (voice
grade)
#9570 #9670 #9670
9571
9671
9671
9572 9672 9672
9573 9673 9673
9574 9674 9674
9576 9676 9676
9577
9677 9677
9578 9678 9678
9579 9679 9679
9592 9692 9692
9580
9680 9680
9590 9690 9690
9591
9691
9691
9593 9693 9693
9594 9694 9694
AT & T or Western Union Class 3002-600 bps.
(1200 bps with 1200 BPS Integrated Modem)
AT & T or Western Union Class 3002 with C1 conditioning to 4800 bps.
AT & T or Western Union Class 3002 with C2 conditioning to 7200 bps.
B. Private (customer owned) communications facilities
equivalent to the above common carrier facilities.
C. Common carrier switched network telephone (voice
grade) service at 600 to 4800 bps.
D. Common carrier wideband communications services
at 19,200 bps, 40,800 bps, or 50,000 bps.
* Requires a no-charge RPQ.
E. Private carrier organizations providing equivalent to
above (A through D) data transmission services.
Notes:
1. Refer to Data Communications Handbook
IV.
Reference: See M2700 pages for additional information
concerning modems, communications facilities, machine
attachment requirements, terminal intermix, operating
capabilities, and customer responsibilities.
Not to be reproduced without written Dermission.
1"11
----=--==
General Systems Division-Machines
-----------
- -= _
...
V.
Customer Responsibilities: The customer must be
advised that:
A. He is responsible for making arrangements for installation. pricing. and charges of the data communications facility and attachment of selected data sets
(modems).
B. Toll charges. if required for installation and/or maintenance of the BSCA or ICA. are to be paid by the
customer.
C. The I BM Marketing Representative must have from
the customer a firm installation date for transmission
services (including modems) before the order can be
confirmed
for
further
information.
see
"Teleprocessing" in "General Information" and consult "Reference IV" above.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M5412.6
Nov 78
--=-= --_-
---....... - General Systems Division-Machines
=---==
- --- -.....
;..
--_
M5412.7
Nov 78
,
PROCESSING UNIT EXPANSION CONFIGURATOR
TABLE A:
To be used when either the 5424 MFCU or 1442 is attached.
COMMUNICATIONS
MLTA& MLTA& MLTA& BSCA 1 &
#4702*
ICA
BSCA 1 #4702*
BSCA 1 &
BSCA2
OR ICA
MLTA&
BSCA 1 &
#4702*
MLTA&
BSCA 1 &
BSCA2
ORICA
I/O UNIT
ATTACHMENTS
NONE
MLTA
BSCA 1
#4702*
ICA
No additional
above base
------
#5732
#5732
#5732
#5732
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5732
#5732
#5733
#5733
3741
#5732
#5733
#5732
#5732
#5732
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733
3411
#5732
#5733
#5732
#5732
#5732
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5732
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5735
#5733
**
3741 & 3411
#5732
#5733
#5732
#5732
#5732
#5733
#5733
SIOC
#5732
#5733
#5732
#5732
#5732
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733
;;5733
#5733
#5733
3741 & SIOC
#5732
#5733
#5732
#5732
#5732
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5735
#5734
3411 & SIOC
#5732
#5733
#5732
#5732
#5732
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5734
#5733
3741 , 3411 & S I OC
#5732
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733
=1'5735
#5734
#5733
#5733
* Local Display Adapter
Base system includes CPU, printer, disk file and a card reader (5424 or 1442).
CHART A
TABLE B:
To be used with cardless system (3741 directly attached and no card I/O)
I/O UNIT
COMMUNICATIONS
ATTACHMENTS
NONE
MLTA
BSCA 1
4702*
ICA
MLTA&
BSCA 1
MLTA&
4702*
MLTA&
ICA
BSCA 1 &
4702*
BSCA 1 &
BSCA 2
OR ICA
MLTA&
BSCA 1
4702*
MLTA&
BSCA 1
BSCA 2
OR ICA
No Additional
above base * * *
---
5732
5732
5732
5732
5733
5733
5733
5732
5732
5733
5733
3411
5732
5733
5732
5732
5732
5733
5733
5733
5733
5732
5733
5733
SIOC
5732
5733
5732
5732
5732
5733
5733
5733
5733
5733
5733
5733
3411 & SIOC
5732
5733
5732
5732
5732
5733
5733
5733
5733,
5733
5734
5733
• Local Display Adapter
*** Base system includes the CPU, printer, disk file and the 3741 directly attached (no card 1/0).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- -- General Systems Division-Machines
=---=
- ------
-=
M5416.1
Nov 78
-~-.-
5415 PROCESSING UNIT
Purpose: Contains main storage and facilities for addressing
main storage, arithmetical and logical processing of data, and
controlling I/O units for System/3 Model 15.
Model
A17 or 817
A18 or 818
A 19 or B19 or 019
A20 or B20 or 020
C21 or 021
C22 or 022
C23 or 023
C24 or 024
025
026
Communications with remotely located systems or terminals
may be performed through the use of binary synchronous
communications. See BSCA (#2074/2084)and BSCC (#2094)
features.
On the 5415A, B, C, two lines maximum
On the 54150, four lines maximum.
Processor Storage (bytes)
49,152
65,536
98,304
131,072
163,840
196,608
229,376
262,144
393,216
524,288
Model Changes: Field Installable.
Purchase Considerations: Replaced parts from any model
upgrade become the property of IBM.
Highlights: CPU uses Monolithic Systems Technology (MST)
for logical circuitry. Memory is Metal Oxide Semiconductor
Field Effect Transistor (MOSFET) with error correction and
checking. Data and instructions are stored as EBCDIC characters. Each EBCDIC character is stored in an 8-bit byte. Main
cycle time is 1.52 microseconds (on model 150, instruction
cycle time for certain. non-I/O instructions is faster). Ir.struction execution and I/O data handling uses the "Cycle Steal"
technique. 5415 A Model Processors support attachment of
5444 and 5445 Disk Storage Drives. 5415B or C Model Processors support attachment of the 3340 Direct Access Storage
Facility. 54150 Model Processors support attachment of the
3340 Direct Access Storage Facility and the 3344 Direct Access Storage.
Additional standard features supporting a multiprogramming
environment include:
Three additional instructions.
512K memory addressing using Address Translation Table
(ATT).
Write/Fetch CPU storage protection in 2K byte segments.
Program Check Interrupt.
Interval Timer
Eight levels of Interrupt.
Mask interrupt capability.
Privileged Mode Operation.
Memory Error Correction
Corrects single bit errors.
Detects double bit errors.
Dual byte data channel for disks.
Operation end interrupt for all I/O.
Complete overlap of I/O operation.
Additional Customer Engineer controls.
The Local Communications Adapter provides direct local attachment of the 3741 Data Station model 2 or 3741 Programmable Work Station model 4, or 3271 Control Unit, or 3275 Display Station, or System/7.
Maximum: Only one 5415 can be attached to a System/3
Model 15.
Minimum Configuration: In addition to a 5415 Processing
Unit Model A 17 through A20, a System/3 Model 15 requires a
3277 Display Station model 1 with 78 key Operator Console
Keyboa rd (#4632), a printer (1403 model 5, 2 or N 1), a 5421
Printer Control Unit, a minimum of one 5444 Disk Storage
Drive model A2, and either-(a) a 5424 Multi-Function Card
Unit, or (b) a 1442 Card Read Punch model 6 or 7, or (c) a
2560 Multi-Function Card Machine together with necessary
prerequisites. System/3 Model 15s with 5415 Processing
Units B17 through 820 or C21 through C24 or 019 through
026 require the same devices with exception of the 5444 Disk
Storage Drive, which is not available on 8, C or 0 Model,Processors. Model 15's with 8, C or 0 Model Processors require a
3340 Direct Access Storage Facility.
Cardless System/3 Model 15's require the same devices as
shown above for the appropriate CPU models with the exception of the 5424 or 2560 or 1442. Additionally, all Cardless
Systems require channel Terminator Feature #1601. A cardless
Model 15A requires a 5422 Disk Enclosure and Maintenance
Support Package #9440. A cardless Model 156 or 15C requires a 3741 Model 1, 2, 3 or 4 with Feature #3265 or #3266,
3741 Attachment Feature #8220. Power Supply Expansion 8
Feature #5502, and Maintenance Support Package #9441. A
cardless Model 150 has the same requirements asa cardless
15C, except the Maintenance Support Package #9445 is required instead of #9441.
Bibliography: GC20-8080.
Specify
1.
Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz (cps): #990;3 for
208V, or #9905 for 230V.
2.
Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
3.
Disk Configuration: Specify one of the followinij if a
second 5444 is ordered-#9207 for 5444 Model A3, or
The required 3277 Display Station with 78 key Operator Console Keyboard (#4632) provides enhanced operator-machine
communications. An optional console printer (3284 or 3287) is
also available via 3284 attachment (#7901).
The Display Adapter feature (#4601) provides direct local
attachment of up to thirty 3270 devices (CRT's and printers).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- -:::..~ General Systems Division-Machines
-. .-- r--_--_
.. _
-
= -=
M5415.2
Nov 78
#9208 for 5444 Model A2.
4.
5445 Attachment/Specify Configurator.
Attachment/Specify Configurator
5445 Mdls
attached
Total
Drives
1
1+2
3
3+1
1+2+1
1+2+1+2
1+2+3
3+3
2
2
3
3
4
4
4
Total
Capacity
million
bytes
CPU
Attachment
Features
CPU
Specify
Features
20.48
40.96
40.96
61.44
61.44
81.92
81.92
81.92
#3901
#3901
#3901
#3901+3903
#3901+3903
#3901+3903
#3901+3903
#3901+3903
#9182
#9182
#9182
#9182
#9182+9184
#9182+9184
#9182+9184
5.
3340/3344 Specify Configurator.
5415
Mdls Attached
3340
3344
Total Storage Capacities (MB)
Simulation
Drives Main Data
Area
Area
A2
A2 + B1 .......
A2 + B1A2&B2 A2 & B2 B2
A2
2
3
3
None
Specify Configurator
B,C,O
B,C
0
B,C
0
0
4
4
4
81.59
122.39
122.39
162.18
162.18
447.23
19.66
29.49
24.58
39.32
29.49
58.98
Specify
Features
#9781
#9781
#9781
#9781
#9781
#9781
& #9782
& #9782
& #9783
& #9783
& #9784
6.
I/O Attachments: Appropriate special features are required to a~tach most I/O units .. , see "Special Features."
7.
Appropriate codes are required on the 5424 or 5422
dependent upon the 5444 configuration .. , see "Specify"
under 5424 or 5422.
8.
System Control Programming, 5704-SC1 or 5704-SC2,
sll.ould be ordered at equipment order entry time ... see
"System Control Programming" section for additional
information.
9.
For a 5410 or 5415A to 54158, 5415C, or 5415D conversion where an installed 5424 is to be moved to the
new system, an MES must be submitted to remove the
5444(s) from the 5424. This M ES must also delete
#9400, and if a second 5444 is installed, #9401 or #9402
(all from the 5424).
10.
Upending Kit: #9840. This kit is furnished only as necessary and remains the property of 18M.
11.
5412/5415 Frame Separation Kit: #9190-Frame separation may be required at installation time at those locations where building dimensions (doorways, hallways,
stairways, etc.) do not allow movement of the Central
Processor as one unit.
The local installation Planning Representative can determine if this kit is required. The Frame Separation Kit is
not to be ordered when the Upending Kit (#9840) will
suffice.
Card Print Control (#1580): Controls necessary for an attached 2560 Multi-Function Card Machine model A 1 equipped
with Card Print (#1575, 1576, 1577). Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: 2560 Attachment (#8100)
on the 5415, plus Card Print (#1575) on the 2560.
Channel Terminator (#1601): Terminates Channel 8ank No.
1 which eliminates the requirement for a 1442, 2560 or 5424.
Provides cardless capability for Model 15. Prerequisites: On
5415A Models ... 5422 Disk Enclosure and Maintenance Support Package for Cardless Model 15A (Specify #9440). On
54158 or C Models ... 3741 Attachment Feature #8220. Power
Supply Expansion 8 Feature #5502, and Maintenance Support
Package for Cardless Model 158 and Cardless Model 15C
(Specify Feature #9441). On 5415D Models ... 3741 Attachment Feature #8220. Power Supply Expansion 8 Feature
#5502, and Maintenance Support Package for Cardless Model
15D (Specify #9445). Limitations: Cannot be installed with
#4100, #4101, #4130, or #8100. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
First 5445 Attachment (#3901): To attach the first and second 5445 drive(s) .,. see (4) under "Specify." Maximum: One.
Limitation: Not available on 817 through 820 or C21 through
C24 or D19 through D26 Processor Models.
Field
Installation: Yes.
Second 5445 Attachment (#3903): To attach the third and
fourth 5445 drive(s) ... see (4) under "Specify." Maximum:
One. Limitation: Not available on 817 through 820 or C19
through C24 or D19 through D26 Processor Models. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: First 5445 Attachment
(#3901 ).
Multi-Function Card Unit Attachment 250/60/60 CPM
(#4100): To attach a 5424 Multi-Function Card Unit model A 1.
Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #1601,
#4130 or #8100. Field Installation: Yes.
Multi-Function Card Unit Attachment 500/120/120 CPM
(#4101): To attach a 5424 Multi-Function Card Unit model A2.
Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #1601,
#4130 or #8100. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Multi-Function Card Unit Attachment 250/60/60 (#4100).
1442 Model 6/7 Card Read Punch Attachment (#4130): To
attach a 1442 model 6 or 7. Maximum: One. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with #1601, #4100, #4101 or #8100. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: A 5422 Disk Enclosure with
5415 Processing U nits A 17 through A20 ... 5410/5412/541 5
Coupling (#3950) on the 1442. Power Supply Expansion 8
(#5502) must be ordered with 8, C, or D Model Processors.
1403 Model 5 Printer Attachment 465 LPM (#4135): To
attach a 1403 Printer model 5. Maximum: One. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with #4140 or #4150. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: A #4160 8asic Attachment Control and a
5421 Printer Control Unit with #9185.
.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--.- General Systems Division-Machines
---=-=
==--=
- -----. -----
MS415.3
--
Nov 78
1403 Model 2 Printer Attachment 600 LPM (114140): To
attach a 1403 Printer model 2. Maximum: One. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with #4135 or #4150. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: A #4160 Basic Attachment Control and a
5421 Printer Control Unit.
1403 Model N1 Printer Attachment 1100 LPM (#4150): To
attach a 1403 Printer model N1. Maximum: One. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with #4135 or #4140. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: A #4160 Basic Attachment Control and a
5421 Printer Control Unit.
1403 Basic Attachment Control (#4160): To attach all models of a 1403 printer. Maximum: One.
Display Adapter (#4601): For direct local attachment of 3270
devices (3277 models 1 and 2, 3284 Models 1 and 2, 3286
Models 1 and 2, 3287 Models 1 and 2, 3288 Model 2) in any
combination. Includes the basic control and interface for three
devices. The 3270 device cables (maximum length 2000 ft.)
plug directly into the 5415 when this feature is installed. For
attachment of additional 3270 devices (maximum of 30) see
Device Interface (#4602). Programming support for the attached devices is provided by the Multiline/Multipoint interface
and the Communication Control Program feature of the SCPo
Maximum: One. Limitations: Cannot be installed with
BSCA-2 (#2084). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Processing Unit Expansion 1 (#5733). See Processing Unit
Expansion Features Configurator for possible requirements for
additional expansion features. EBCDIC Character Set (#9089)
required on attached 3270 devices. See applicable machines
pages for 3270 device ordering details.
Device Interface (#4602): Provides for attachment of three
additional 3270 devices (3277 Models 1 and 2, 3284 Models 1
and 2, 3286 Models 1 and 2, 3288 Model 2) in any combination to the Display Adapter (#4601). Maximum: Nine ... for a
maximum of 30 attached devices. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Display Adapter (#4601).
Local Communications Adapter (#4765): Permits local
attachment of one 3741 Data Station model 2, one 3741 Programmable Work Station model 4, one 5231 model 2 equipped
with BSCA (#2074), one 3271 Control Unit, or one 3275 Display Station or one 3274-1 C Control Unit, or one 3276-2 Control Unit Display Station, or one System/7 equipped with a
binary synchronous communications adapter (#2074) to a
System/3 model 15. The external modem cable of the device
will attach directly to the 5415 when this feature is installed.
Data transfer rate is 2400 bps only. EBCDIC transmission code
must be specified when applicable on the attached device.
Programming support for the 3741 model 2 or 4 and the 5231
model 2, is provided by the RPG II Telecommunications Feature
and the Communications Control Program feature of Disk SCPo
Program support for the 3271, 3274, 3275, and 3276 is provided by the Multiline/Multipoint and Communications Control
Program features of the Disk SCP Programming support for the
System/7 is provided by the RPG II Telecommunications feature or by the Multiline/ Multipoint or the Communications
Control Program features of the disk SCPo (Host programs
must be point-to-point mode and a CCP program must use
data mode only.) Specify: One of the following-#9577 for
attachment of 3270 devices, or #9579 for attachment of the
3741 model 2 or 4 ... #9592 for attachment of the 5231 model
2 ... #9590 for attachment of the System/7. Maximum: One
per 5415. Limitations: Cannot be installed with BSCA-1
(#2074). Data exchange with attached device is nontransparent only. For data transparent operation contact GSD
Power Supply Expansion B (#5502): Provides additional
processing unit 24V power. Required on B, C, and D models
when 5424 is not attached, or if Channel Terminator Feature
#1601 is installed. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Processing Unit Expansion 1 (#5733): Provides additional
processing unit power supply and connections. Refer to the
"Processing Unit Expansion Features Configurator" below to
determine requirements. May be required when certain RPQs
are ordered.
Processing Unit Expansion 2 (#5734): Provides additional
processing unit power supply and connections. May be required when certian RPQs are ordered. i
Processing Unit Expansion 3 (#5735): Provides additional
processing unit power supply and connections. May be required when certian RPQs are ordered.
Processing Unit Expansion Features ConfiguratQr (All
Models except D with BSCC
Communications
I/O Unit
Attachment
None
BSCA·'
(#2074)
or LCA
(#4765)
Neither
2501 (#8090) nor
3411 (#7951) nor 3741 (#8220)
BSCA·2
(#2084)
with
either
BSCA·'
or LCA
SIOC
(#7081)
with
either
BSCA·1
or LCA
BSCA·2
plus
SIOC
with
either
BSCA·'
or LCA SIOC
DA(4601)
plus
SIOC
with
either
BSCA·'
or LCA
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733
2501 (#8090)
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733
2501 & 3411
(#8090 & #7951) -
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733 #5733 #5733
2501 & 3411
& 3741 (#8090
#5733 #5733
& #7951 & #8220)
#5733
#5733
#5733 #5733 #5734
3411 (#7951)
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733
3411 &3741
(#7951 & #8220) -
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733 #5733 #5733
3741 (#8220)
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733
3741 & 2501
(#8220 & #8090) -
#5733
#5733
#5733
#5733 #5733 #5733
#5733
Model D Configurator: See page M5415.8 (If BSCC (#2094) in
on System).
Second 5444 Attachment (#6378): To attach a 5444 Disk
Storage model A3 or a second 5444 model A2. Maximum:
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----= -- General Systems Division-Machines
=---=
- ------
- -=
M5415.4
Nov 78
.
-~-.-
One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: A 5444 model
A2. Limitation: Not available on B17 through B20 or C21
through C24 or 021 through 026 Processor Models.
Serial I/O Channel (#7081): To attach a 1255 Magnetic
Character Reader or a 3881 Optical Mark Reader. Maximum:
One. Field· Installation: Yes.
3284 Attachment (#7901): To attach a 3284 Printer model 1
or a 3284 Printer Model 1 or Model 2. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
3411 Magnetic Tape Attachment (#7951): To attach a 3411
Magnetic' Tape Unit and Control. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Processing Unit Expansion
1 (#5733), 2 (#5734) or 3 (#5735) may be required dependent
upon other features. Refer to "Processing Unit Expansion
Features Configurator" to determine requirements.
2501 Attachment (#8090): To attach a 2501 Card Reader
model A1 or A2. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Processing Unit Expansion 1 (#5733), 2
(#5734) or 3 (#5735) may be required dependent upon other
features. Refer to "Processing Unit Expansion Features
Configurator". to determine requirements ... 2501 Coupling
(#3630) on the 2501. limitation: 2501 must be in addition to
a 5424, a 2560 or a 1442, or Channel Terminator Feature
#16<11.
2560 Multi-Function Card Machine Attachment (#8100):
To attach a 2560 Multi-Function Card Machine. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. limitations: Cannot be installed with #1601, #4100, #4101 or #4130. Specify: #9801 if
a 2560 model A 1 is to be attached. Prerequisite: A 5422 Disk
Enclosure with 5415 Processing Units A 17 through A20. Power Supply Expansion B (#5502) must be ordered with B, C or 0
Model Prooessors.
3741 Attachment (#8220): To directly attach a 3741 model 1,
2, 3 or 4. Limitation: For 3741 models 3 and 4, System/3
does not support the Application Control Language (ACL).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: See
Processing Unit Expansion Configurator for possible requirements for additional expansion features.
I/O Adapter
(#3265/3266) on 3741. Channel Terminator Feature #1601
required on 5415 B, C or 0 Model Cardless Systems.
Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (#2074):
This feature in conjunction with program control permits
System/3 Model 15 to communicate in binary synchronous
mode with other IBM systems and terminals. System/3 Model
15 can operate on a multipoint line as either a control station or
a tributary station, or on a point-to-point switched or leased
communications line. Transmission rates are available from
600 bps to 50,000 bps. Auto answer capability is switched
network version. Any version can be selected to operate in
EBCDIC or ASCII transmission code, but not both. A 1200
BPS Integrated Modem is available as a special feature. Also,
see "Modems" at end of this section.
Specify: See "Additional Information"at
end of this section for applicable specify codes. Maximum:
One per 5415. Field Installation: Yes. limitation: Cannot be
installed with Local Communications Adapter (#4765).
Prerequisites: Refer to "Processing Unit Expansion Features
Configurator" above for possible requirement for additional
Processing Unit Expansion features, 1, 2, 3.
Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter. Second
(#2084): Permits operation of two BSCA's simultaneously on
System/3 model 15 and/or in two different configurations
(speed network attachments, line facility attachments, codes,
etc.). 1st BSCA (#2074) or LCA (#4765 is a prerequisite for
installation of #2084. See the "Processing Unit Expansion
Features Configurator" for possible requirements for additional
Processing Unit Expansion Features, 1, 2, 3. This second
adapter (#2084) is functionally identical to the first adapter
(#2074). It will support the same sub-features which require
the same prerequisites as the first BSCA. The same options
and limitations also apply to the second BSCA, with the following exception: #2084 is provided only in the medium speed
version (600 to 7200 bps) and does not support attachment to
a Wideband data link (option #9755). Provision of a second
adapter does not limit in any way the options on the first adapter. Limitation: No Wideband attachment capability. Cannot
be installed with Display Adapter (#4601). Maximum: One
per System/3 mdl 15. Prerequisites: First BSCA (#2074) or
LCA (#4765). See "Processing Unit Expansion Features
Configurator" for possible requirement of additional Processing
Unit Expansion features. See the following section on
"Additional Information" for optional selection codes for subfeature code numbers applicable to the Second BSCA (#2084).
In addition to the basic functions of #2074 and #2084 described above, the following special features may be added.
Auto Call (#1315. 1325): Permits the System/3 model 15
when attached to a switched network (optiofl #9483 or #9583)
via an appropriate modem and Auto Call Unit to initate (dial)
through stored program control, a data link connection to a
remote BSC station. #1315 for #2074 and #1325 for #2084.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with Station Selection (#7477
or #7487), or 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#4781, 4782).
Maximum: One per BSCA. Prerequisites: As appropriate
BSCA (#2074 or 2084), one Voice Grade Transmission Rate
from 600 to 4800 bps, and Network Attachment (#9483,
9583). Requires appropriate cable order. See Installation
Planning Manual (GC21-9084). Field Installation: Yes.
EIA Local Attachment (#3601, 3602): Permits attachment of
one 3271 Control Unit, one 5231 Model 2 (pt-to-pt unidirectional transmission only), one 3274-1 C Control Unit, one 3275
Display Station, one 3276-2 Control Unit Display Station. one
2972 GBTS Control Unit or one System/7 equipped with a
binary synchronous communications adapter {#2074} to
System/3 model 15 without the use of a data communications
line and modems at either device. This attachment may be
used where the device's control unit or System/7 is located
within a dista nce reached by the device's E IA attachment ca ble
(j.e., the cable normally used to attach to an external modem).
This feature provides the clocking signals for the System/3
model 15' s BSCA and for the attached control unit's adapter;
therefore, the System/3's Internal Clock {#4703 or #4723}
cannot be installed on the same adapter with this feature. Data
transfer rates of 2400 4800 and 8000 bps are supported by
this feature. #3601 for #2074 and #3602 for #2084.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with Internal Clock (#4703 or
#4723), or Auto Call (#1315 or #1325). Maximum: One per
BSCA. Prerequisites: As appropriate #2074 or #2084, Transfer Rate (#9753, 9754, 9758 or #9853, 9854, 9858), Network
Attachment (#9484 or #95134), and Line Facility (#9391 or
#9381). For 8000 bps operation, #7821 is required on the 3271
or 3275. Field Installation: Yes.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
----=-=- =--~ General Systems Division-Machines
--- - .. ----
M5415.5
-- _
Internal Clock (#4703, 4723): Generates synchronizing and
timing signals for BSCA operation when they are not provided
by the attached modem. When this feature is installed on
System/3 model 15, all other BSC stations attached to the
same data link must also be equipped with a similar IBM Internal Clock feature. See IBM Data Communications Handbook
#4703 for #2074 and #4723 for #2084. Will
service rates 600 bps, 1200 bps, 2000 bps or 2400 bps.
Maximum:
On~
per
BSCA.
Prerequisites:
As
appropriate--#2074 or #2084, and one of the above serviced
transmission rate options. Field Installation: Yes.
1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#4781, 4782): A modem for
BSC data transmission at 1200 bps over non-switched facilities
or switched network. Available in two different versions:
#4781 Non-switched and #4782 Switched with Auto Answer.
Attachment to non-switched (2 or 4-wire) facilities is via an
IBM provided cable directly to the line, type 3002 facility.
Attachment to the switched network is via an IBM provided
cable to a common carrier arrangement type CBS or equivalent.
The device communicating with System/3 model 15 must also
be equipped with an IBM 1200 bps integrated modem/line
adapter. Limitations: Cannot be installed with sub-features
Auto Call (#1315 or 1325) or EIA Local Attachment (#3601,
3602). #4781 and 4782 cannot be installed together on the
same BSCA. Maximum: One per BSCA. Prerequisites: As
appropriate--#2074 or #2084, Modem Base (#5201 or 5202),
Internal Clock (#4703 or 4723)' Transfer Rate (#9751 or
#9851). Field Installation: Yes.
Modem Base (#5201, 5202). Provides for mounting of one
1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#4781, 4782). #5201 for #2074
and #5202 for #2084.
Maximum: One per BSCA.
Prerequisite: As appropriate #2074 or #2084. Field
Installation: Yes.
Station Selection (#7477, 7487): Permits the System/3
model 15 to operate as a compatible member of the I BM family
of BSC terminals on a multipoint communications line as a
tributary station. #7477 for #2074 and #7487 for #2084.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Auto Call (#1315, 1325).
Maximum: One per BSCA. Prerequisites: As appropriate
#2074 or #2084, Line Facility Attachment (#9392 or #9382)
and one of the Voice Grade Transmission Rates 600-9600
bps. Note: Control station operation on a System/3 model 15
BSCA with Station Selection installed is possible, but such
operation cannot be performed concurrently with tributary
station operation on that adapter. Additionally, a change in
modems or in modem operation may be required to utilize the
same adapter (at different periods of time) as a tributary station and as a control station adapter. Also, the network attachment option (#9484 or #9584) must be specified when control
station operation is to be performed whether Station Selection
(#7477 or 7487) is installed or not. Field Installation: Yes.
Nov 78
IBM Modems: One IBM modem can be attached to the First
BSCA (#2074) and/or one to the .Second BSCA (#2084) as
follows:
Modem
Nominal Speed (bps)
3872 model 1
3874 model 1
3875 model 1
2400/1200
4800/2400
7200/3600
See M2700, 3872, 3874, 3875 pages for information on Modem features, communications capabilities, and product utilization.
Note: Configuration requirements for IBM programming support must satisfy the minimum machine requirements stated in
the "Program Products" and "Systems" sections
For information on optional selections, attachment to communications lines, customer responsibilities, etc., see "Additional
Information" below.
Additional Information (BSCA-1 and BSCA-2)
I.
Optional Specifications: One selection must be specified from each of the following five categories for each
adapter.
#2074
A. Transmission Code
EBCDIC
ASCII
#9060
9061
#9070
9071
600 bps
#9750
1200 bps
9751
2000 bps
9752
2400 bps (2)
9753
4800 bps
9754
7200/3600 bps
9757
9758
8000 bps
High Speed (19,200 to 50,000 bps) 9755
9600 bps
9759
#9850
9851
9852
9853
9854
9857
9858
N/A
9859
B. Transfer Rate (1)
C. Network Attachment
Point-to-point (non-switched)
Point-to-point (switched)
Multipoint Tributary
Multipoint Control Station (3)
#9481
9483
9482
9484
#9581
9583
9582
9584
#9391
9392
#9381
9382
D. Line Facility Attachment (4)
Duplex (4-wire only)
Half-Duplex
Text Transparency (#7850, 7851): Permits the System/3
model 15 to transmit or receive "8-bit binary data" and
EBCDIC coded data. Limitations: Cannot be installed with
ASCII Transmission Code (#9061 or 9071) ... limitations on the
use of this facility exist and are described in SRL GA27-3004.
#7850 for #2074 and #7851 for #2084. Maximum: One per
BSCA. Prerequisite: As appropriate #2074 or #2084 and
Transmission Code (#9060 or 9070). Field Installation: Yes.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
....
-.---_ =--==
- --=-----
M5415.6
--..-.
Nov 78
General Systems Division-Machines
-~-.-
E. One (or more if necessary) optional selection code
must be specified from the following list, contingent
upon planned device attachments:
S/360 or S/370 (md122 and up)
S/360 mdl20
11 30 System
2770 System
2780
2980
3270 System
3735
3741 mdl 2, mdl 4
5231 mdl2
System/3
System/7
System/32
System/34
Series/1
3600*
#9570
9571
9572
9573
9574
9576
9577
9578
9579
9592
9580
9590
9591
9593
9594
9595
III.
A. Common Carrier leased telephone services (voice
grade)
#9670
9671
9672
9673
9674
9676
9677
9678
9679
9692
9680
9690
9691
9693
9694
9695
AT & T or Western Union Class 3002-600 bps (1200
bps with 1200 BPS Integrated Modem)
AT & T or Western Union Class 3002 with C1 conditioning to 4800 bps.
AT & T or Western Union Class 3002 with C2 conditioning to 7200 bps.
B. Private (customer owned) communications facilities
equivalent to the above common carrier facilities.
C. Common carrier switched network telephone (voice
grade) service at 600 to 4800 bps.
D. Common carrier wideband communications services
at 19,200 bps, 40,800 bps, or 50,000 bps.
E. Private carrier organizations providing equivalent to
above (A through D) data transmission services.
* Requires a no-charge RPQ.
Notes:
1. Refer to Data Communications Handbook
2. See SRL GA27-3004 for potential problem areas and
possible restrictions to applicatio'n data when using
certain modems at this or higher speeds.
IV.
Reference: See M2700 pages for additional information
concerning modems, communications facilities, machine
attachment requirements, terminal intermix, operating
capabilities and customer responsibilities.
V.
Customer Responsibilities: The customer must be
advised that:
A. He is responsible for making arrangements for installation, pricing and charges of the data communications facility and attachment of selected data sets
(modems).
3. If Multipoint Tributary Station use (with #7477/7487)
is to be implemented alternately with Multipoint Control Station use on the same adapter, specify code
#9484/9584 must be used.
B. Toll charges, if required for installation and/or maintenance of the BSCA, are to be paid by the customer.
4. Where BSCA is used as a Control Station adapter or
when attached to a point-to-point (non-switched)
data link, the facility may be duplex (4-wire only) or
half-duplex. Half-duplex facility must be specified for
Switched Network attachments and for adapters
implementing Multipoint Tributary Station only operation.
II.
Communication Facility Attachments: The BSCA is
designed to operate on transmission facilities such as:
Special Features
C. The IBM Marketing Representative must have from
the customer a firm installation date for transmission
services (including modems) before the order can be
confirmed
for
further
information
see
"Teleprocessing" in "General Information" and consult "Reference IV" above.
VI.
A. Available with Medium Speed (600 to 9600 bps) and
with Wideband attachments (19,200-50,000 bps):
Text Transparency (#7850/7851)
B. Available with Medium Speed adapters only:
Internal Clock (#4703/4723)
Station Selection (#7477/7487)
Auto Call (#1315/1325)
EIA Local Attachment (#3601/3602)
1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#4781/4782)
Cables: BSCA (#2074/2084) always requires an appropriate cable order (unless EIA Local Attachment
#3601/3602
is
ordered).
See
Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GA21-9084.
Binary
Synchronous
Communications
Controller
(#2094)(System/3 Model 150 Only): Provides the controller
base for attachment of two additional binary synchronous
communications lines. One or two additional lines are ordered
as separate features (see #4891 and 4892 below). This feature
(BSCC) can also provide the terminal polling function
(depending on the terminal type attache'd) for the 1 or 2 lines
thereby reducing CPU loading. The BSCC can handle polling
functions outboard of the Model 150 CPU. Both lines operate
in multipoint control station mode over non-switched communication facilities at speeds up to 9600 bps, Text transparency is
standard but applicable to EBCDIC coded data only.
Maximum: One per 54150. Limitations: Cannot be installed
with the MLTA RPQ (S40028). Operation on non-switched
facilities only. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: See
Processing Unit Expansion Configurator for possible expansion
feature requirements.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
---=---=
General Systems Division-Machines
- --=_
- --.-
M5415.7
-
Line Base. 1st (#4891): For attachment of the first communications line to the BSCC ($2094) through one of the line interface features (#3703, #5803, #5813, or #3603) described
below. Specify: See "Additional Information" below for selectiQn of transmission codes, line speeds, etc. Maximum:
One. Field I"nstallation: Yes. Prerequisites: BSCC (#2094).
Line Base. 2nd (#4892): For attachment of the second communications line to the BSCC (#2094) through one of the line
interface features (#3704, #5804, #5814, or #3604) described
below. Specify: See "Additional Information" below for selection of transmission codes, line speeds, etc. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: BSCC (#2094)
and Line Base, 1st (#4891).
Internal Clock (#4733. 4734): Provides business machine
clocking at 1200 bps for the external or integrated modem
operating at that line speed. This feature is alwasy required for
the 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5803 or 5804). Maximum:
One per Line Base. Limitations: 1200 bps only. For use only
when modem does not provide clocking. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisites: As appropriate-#4891 for #4733, #4892
for #4734.
Line Interfaces: One of the following line interface features
must be ordered for each Line Base depending on the type of
communication facility and modem to be used.
EIA Interface (113703. 3704): Provides an interface for attachment of an external modem meeting EIA RS 232C characteristics. Non-IBM modems may be attached subject to the Multiple Supplier System Policy. Maximum: One per Line Base.
Limitations: Cannot be installed on the same Line Base with
the 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5803 or 5804) or DDSA
(#5813 or 5814) or EIA Local (#3603 or 3604). Field
Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisites:
Line
Base,
as
appropriate-#4891 for #3703, #4892· for #3704. See
"Cables" under "Additional Information."
1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5803. 5804): A modem for
data transmission at 1200 bps over non-switched (2 or 4 wire)
facilities. Attachment to the communication facility is via an
IBM provided cable directly to the common carrier type 3002
channel or equivalent. All devices communicating with
System/3 must be equipped with a compatible IBM 1200 bps
integrated modem/line adapter. Maximum: One per Line
Base. Limitations: Cannot be installed on the same Line Base
with the EIA Interface (#3703 or 3704) or DDSA (#5813 or
5814) or EIA Local (#3603 or 3604). Non switched facilities
only. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Internal Clock,
as appropriate-#4733 for #5803, #4734 for #5804. Line
Base, as appropriate-4891 for #5803, #4892 for #5804. See
"Cables" under "Additional Information."
DDS Adapter (#5813. 5814): An integrated adapter for attachment to the AT & T nonswitched Data-Phone* Digital Service network. The DDSA interfaces to a DDS channel service
unit at the customer site termination of the DDS network. Line
speeds of 2400 bps, 4800 bps, and 9600 bps are available.
Maximum: One per Line Base. Limitations: Cannot be installed on the same Line Base withEIA Interface (#3703 or
3704) or 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5803 or 5804) or EIA
Local
(#3603
or
3604).
Field
Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisites: Line Base as appropriate #4891 for #5813,
#4892 for #5814. One of the three line speeds: 2400 bps,
4800 bps, or 9600 bps, must be specified on the applicable
Line Base. Line Facility" Attachment-4 wire. (#9311 or
#9411). See "Cables" under "Additional Information."
Nov 78
* Registered Trademark of AT & T.
EIA Local (113603. 3604): Permits local attachment of one
IBM binary synchronous device eq, 3271, to the 5415 without
the use of communications line or modem. The external modem
cable of the attached device connects directly to the 5415
when this feature is installed. Data clocking for transfer rates
of 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 7200 bps, and 9600 bps is provided by
this feature for both the 5415 and the attached device. The
device must be capable of functioning as a multipoint tributary
station at the transfer rate provided by this feature.
Maximum: One per Line Base. Limitations: Cannot be installed on the same Line Base with EIA Interface (#3703 or
3704) or 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5803 or 5804) or DDS
Adapter (#5813 or 5814).
Field Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisites: Line Base, as appropriate #4891 for #3603,
#4892 for #3604. One of four transfer rates: 2400 bps, 4800
bps, 7200 bps, or 9600 bps must be specified on the applicable
Line Base.
Additional Information (BSCC).
Optional Specifications: One selection must be specified for
each of the following four categories for each Line Base:
#4891
#4892
EBCDIC
ASCII
#9080
9081
#9090
9091
2. Line Speed
600 bps
1200 bps
2000 bps
2400 bps
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
#9300
9301
9302
9303
9304
9305
9306
#9400
9401
9402
9403
9404
9405
9406
#9310
9311
#9410
9411
#9320
9321
9322
9323
9324
9325
9326
9327
9330
9331
9328
9329
#9420
9421
9422
9423
9424
9425
9426
9427
9430
9431
9428
9429
1. Transmission Code
3. Line Facility Attachment
2 Wire
4 Wire
4. Device Attachment (1 or more)
3270
3600**
3735
3740
5230
S/3
S/7
S/32
S/34
Series/1
Other IBM
Other Non-18M
IBM Modems: One IBM modem can be attached to each Line
Base (#3703/3704 required):
Modem
Data Rate
3872 Model 1
3874 Model 1
3875 Model 1
2400 bps
4800 bps
7200 bps
See M2700, M3872, M3874, and M3875 pages for information on modem features, communications capabilities and
product utilization.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---=--== General Systems Division-Machines
-------- - " -
-- -=
Communication Facility Attachments: The BSCC is designed to operate on communication facilities such as:
1. Common carrier leased telephone services (voice grade)
Class 3002 (600 bps)
1200 bps with Integrated Modem (#5803/5804)
2400 bps with IBM 3872
Class 3002 with C1 conditioning (4800 bps)
Class 3002 with C2 conditioning (7200 bps)
2. Private or private carrier facilities equivalent to the above.
3. AT & Ts Private Line Dataphone* Digital Service
(#5813/5814) to 9600 bps.
Reference: See M2700 pages and Data Communications
Handbook
Customer Responsibilities: The customer must be advised of
certain responsibilities related to the installation and maintenance of common carrier facilities/services as well as the IBM
equipment.
Cables: Each line of the BSCC requires an appropriate cable
order unless EIA Local (#3603/3604) is ordered. See
Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA21-9084.
* Registered Trademark of AT & T
** Requires no-charge RPQ.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
~
M5415.8
Nov 78
----- General Systems Division-Machines
=--==
- - --.... -
=-=
M5421-5422.1
Nov 78
-~-~-
5421 PRINTER CONTROL UNIT
5422 DISK ENCLOSURE
Purpose: Control unit for a 1403 Printer model 2 or N 1 in a
System/3 model 10 and fora 1403 Printer model 5,2 or N1 in
a System/3 model 12 or 15.
Purpose: Unit for enclosure of one or two 5444 Disk Storage
Drives on System/3 model 10 or model 15 when a 5424 MFCU
is not attached.
Highlights: The 5421 provides the necessary controls for
attaching a 1403 Printer model 2 or N 1 to the appropriate 1403
Printer Attachment (#4140 or #4150) on the 5410 Processing
Unit. It also provides the necessary controls for attaching a
1403 Printer model 5, 2 or N 1 to the appropriate 1403 Printer
Attachment (#4135, 4140 or 4150) on the 5412 or 5415 Processing Unit.
Highlights: The 5422 provides for the attachment of one or
two 5444's. It replaces the 5424 in the basic System/3 model
10 or model 15 configuration and makes available a convenient
work table area. Limitations: Cannot be installed on a system
equipped with a 5424 MFCU ... The 5422 Disk Enclosure is
"not recommended for field installation" on System/3 model
10 unless the 5410 has a printed circuit board rather than
discrete wiring on the primary power box sequence control
relay panel. The 5422 cannot be installed with 5415 B or C
Model Processors. Maximum: One 5422 can be attached to a
system.
The control unit replaces the 5203 Printer in the basic
System/3 model 10 or 12 configuration. It may be field installed to replace the 5203 Printer in the SystE;}m / 3 model 10 or
12 system. Limitation: The 5421 cannot be installed with a
5203 Printer in the same System/3 model 10 or 12.
Maximum: Only one 5421 can be attached to a system.
Prerequisite: A 1403 Printer Attachment (#4140 or #4150) on
the 5410 Processing Unit or (#4135, 4140 or 4150) on the
5412 or 5415 Processing Unit.
Note: A 5421 is required in a System/3 model 12 or 15.
Bibliography:
GC20-S0S0.
(Online ... meter on 1403).
Metering:
I/O
Unit
Prerequisites: For System/3 model 10-a 1442 Model 6/7
Card Read Punch Attachment (#4130) is required on the 5410
Processing Unit ... a minimum of one 5444 is required.
For System/3 model 15: A 1442 model 6/7 Card Read
Punch Attachment (#4130), or a 2560 MFCM Attachment
(#S100) is required on the 5415 Processing Unit ... a'minimum
of one 5444 model A2 is required.
Bibliography: GC20-8080.
Specify
Specify
1. Voltage (AC, 3,..phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 20SV, or
#9905 for 230V.
1. Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208V, or
#9905 for 230V '" must be consistent with system voltage.
2. Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
2. Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
3. 1403 model 5 Compatibility: #9185 ... required when a
1403 model 5 is attached to a System / 3 model 12 or 15.
3. Front Covers: #9400 if one 5444 is to be installed ... #9401
if two 5444's are to be installed ... #9402 if a second 5444
is to be added to an installed system. Note: #9400 or
#9401 can be plant installed.,. #9402 is for field installation
only. When ordering MESs, also specify color of installed
5422 ... see (2) above. MES orders for #9400, #9401 or
#9402 on a System/3 model 10 require the serial no. of
5410 Processing Unit. Removal: If two 5444s are installed
and one is to be removed from the system, the MES must
indicate deletion of #9401 or #9402 and installation of
#9400 (one disk drive only).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------------=
=
==--=
- - -----_.-
M5424.1
General Systems Division-Machines
Nov 78
Limitations:
5424 MULTI-FUNCTION CARD UNIT
Purpose: A multi-function card input/output unit for
System/3 model 10, 12, 15, or System/3S ... uses the 96column card.
Model
Speed (Read/Punch/Print)
A1
A2
250/60/60* cpm
500/120/120* cpm
*Print Speed: Is at the maximum rate of 60 or 120 cards per
minute when printing on any or all of the first three lines. Printing on the fourth (lower) line will cause reduction in throughput
rogardJess of whether or not printing occurs on any or all of the
first three lines. Resultant throughput is 48 cpm for a model A 1
and 96 cpm for a model A2. Uses a cassette ribbon replaceable by the customer.
Model Changes: Field installable.
HighlightS: Provides the combined functions of a card reader,
punch, collator and interpreter in one unit. Permits collating,
gangpunching, reproducing, summary punching, punching of
calculated results, printing, and classifying of cards in a single
pass of the cards. Card sorting is also possible using a multiple
pass method under program control. In a disk oriented
System/3 model 10 or a model "15A, the 5444 Disk Storage
Drives are housed in drawers beneath the front of the 5424 .,.
see "Specify."
Input Section: Separate primary and secondary card hoppers,
each with a 2000-card capacity, feed cards independently to a
common read station and on into separate wait stations. Depending upon the model, rated serial reading is at 250 or 500
cards/minute from either hopper. The common reading unit is
checked for proper functioning on each read cycle. The card
code read is 6 rows consisting of B, A, 8, 4, 2, 1 punches
representing a 64-character set.
Output Section: From separate wait stations, cards are fed to
a common punch station, through the punch and cornering
stations, to the print station, where up to 4 lines with up to 32
characters per line can be printed on the card. Line designation
is determined by the stored program. Characters represented
are the standard 64-character set corresponding to the 96column card code. Printing is by engraved type wheel. Cards
are then selected into anyone of the 4 stackers, each with a
600-card capacity. Depending upon the model, rated serial
punching is at 60 or 120 cards/ minute.
Multi-Function: With the ability to move cards from either
hopper under independent control to the punching station and
with complete stacker selection flexibility, the common card
functions of collating, reproducing, gang punching, summary
punching, and selective stacking can be accomplished.
OCR type font for use with current line IBM Optical Character Reading equipment is not available.
Cannot be attached to a System/3 model 10 or model 12
when a 1442 Card Read Punch is attached.
Cannot be converted to a System/3 model 15 when a 1442
Card Read Punch or a 2560 MFCM is attached on the
System/3 model 15.
Bibliography: GC20-8080. Metering: I/O Unit (Online).
Specify
1. Voltage [AC, 3-phase, 60Hz]: #9903 for 20SV, or #9905 for
230V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
2. Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white ... must be consistent
with 5410, 5412 or ,5415 color. For 5424 ordered with
System/38, #9066 (Pearl White) must be ordered.
3. Lower Covers (System/3 model 10 or a System/3 model 15
only if a 5444 is to be installed): #9400 if one 5444 is to be
installed ... #9401 if two 5444's are to be installed ... #9402
if a second 5444 is to be added to an installed system.
Note: #9400 or #9401 can be plant or field installed ...
#9402 is for field installation only. MES orders for #9400,
#9401 or #9402 on a System/3 model 10 require the serial
no. of the 5410 Processing Unit.
Removal: If two 5444s are installed and one is to be removed from the system, the MES must indicate deletion of
#9401 or #9402 and installation of #9400 (one disk drive
only). For conversion of a 5415A Model CPU to a 5415B,
5415C or 54150 model, or for conversion from a 5410 CPU,
to a 5412 or 5415 the MES must indicate deletion of #9400,
and if a second 5444 is installed, #9401 or #9402,"
Special Features
System/38 Attachment (#6500): To attach a 5424 to
System/38 (Feature #6500 is not recommended for field installation.) Prerequisite: MFCU Attachment (#1220/#1221) is
required on System/3S.
Maximum: One 5424 can be attached to a System/3 Model
10, Model 12, Model 15, or System/38.
Prerequisite: A Multi-Function Card Unit Attachment (#4100
or 4101) on the 5410, 5412 or 5415 Processing Unit On
System/38, an MFCU Attachment (#1220 or #1221) is required.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--"
.....- ----- =---=
- -=- ---
M5440.1
.-
General Systems Division-Machines
-~---~-y-
5440 DISK CARTRIDGE
Purpose: Interchangeable disk cartridge for all models of the
5444 Disk Storage Drive, the 5447 Disk Storage and Control,
and for 5022 Disk Storage Module models 001 and 002.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Nov 78
------= - -==--= General Systems Division-Machines
- ---
-=
MS444.1
Nov 78
-----~-~-,,-
5444 DISK STORAGE DRIVE
Purpose: Disk storage drive units for a System/3 model 6, 8,
10 or 15 with 5415 Processing Units A 17 through A20.
Models: The A Series model drives (available on System/3
model 10 or 15 only) provide the system with faster disk access
time ... see "Access Times" below.
Model
For Use With
Model
For Use With
1
2
3
S/3 mdl 6 or 10
S/3mdI60r.10
S/3mdl 6 or 10
A1
A2
A3
S/3 mdl 8 or 10
S/3 mdl8, 10 or 15
S/3 mdl8, 10 or 15
Model
or A1: single drive ... 2.45 million bytes or 4.90
million packed decimal digits ... accesses 100 cylinders on
removable cartridge and 100 cylinders on its fixed nonremovable disk.
Model 2 or A2: single drive ... 4.90 million bytes or 9.80 million
packed decimal digits ... accesses 200 cylinders on removable
cartridge and 200 cylinders on its fixed non-removable disk.
Model 3 or A3: single drive ." 2.45 million bytes or 4.90
million packed decimal digits ... accesses 200 cylinders on
removable cartridge only.
Model Changes: can be made in the field. Limitations: (1)
Models 1, 2 and 3 can be changed to "A" series (A 1, A2, A3)
and vice versa only if the 5444 serial no. is 30101 or above '"
(2) 5444 models 1, 2 or 3 cannot be intermixed with models
A 1, A2 or A3 in the same system.
Highlights: Removable Disk Cartridges-each 5444 uses a
removable 5440 Disk Cartridge that provides virtually unlimiteq
off-line disk storage. 5440's must be ordered separately ... see
5440. Limitations: The 5440 Disk Cartridge is interchangeable
between all 5444 models. However, data recorded on the
. second 100 cylinders of a 5440 by a 5444 model 2, model A2,
model 3 or A3 is not available for reading by a 5444 model 1 or
~~ ·model A 1. A 5440 initialized on a 5444 model 1 or model A 1
will not be initialized on the second 100 cylinders.
Cylinder Concept: On 5444 models 1, A 1, 2 or A2, the access mechanism, with four vertically aligned heads, gives access to the top and bottom tracks of both the removable 5440
and the 5444's fixed, non-removable disk. However, due to
different functional uses, a cylinder is considered as the two
opposite tracks on either the removable cartridge or the fixed
disk. On either disk, 12,288 bytes or 24,576 packed decimal
digits are available at one setting of the mechanism.
Formats: On either disk or cartridge, a cylinder is two tracks
... one on each disk surface. Each track consists of 24 sectors,
each with a 3-byte identifying field and a fixed length 256-byte
data field. The disk drive configurations possible on a
System/3 yield the following capacities:
Bytes (in
Millions)
Disk Storage Drive
Combinations
Available On
2.45
4.90
7.35
9.80
5444 mdl1
5444 mdl2
5444 mdl 2 and 3
Two 5444 mdl 2s
S/3
S/3
S/3
S/3
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
2.45
4.90
7.35
9.80
5444 mdl A1
5444 mdl A2
5444 mdl A2 and A3
Two 5444 mdl A2s
S/3
S/3
S/3
S/3
mdl 8 or 10
mdl8, 10 or 15
mdl8, 10 or 15
mdl8, 10 or 15
6
6
6
6
and
and
and
and
mdl 10
mdl1 0
mdl1 0
mdl1 0
Functional Capabilities: A system with only one 5444 is
viable because of the unique arrangement of two disks, one
permanent and one removable, within a single housing.
On a 5410 or 5415: On a single drive system, the 5444 is
located in a drawer beneath the 5424 Multi-function Card
Unit or in the 5422 Disk Enclosure ... on a two disk drive
system, the disk drives are located in two drawers beneath
the 5424 or in the 5422. When ordering a 5444(s), see
"Specify" under 5424 or 5422 for appropriate drawer arrangement.
On a 5406: The 5444's are located in the left pedestal of
the operator console and need not be specified.
On a 5408: The 5444s are located to the right side of the
system in a housing similar to the 5422 Disk Enclosure.
Access Times: On the 5444 model 1, minimum access time is
39 milliseconds, average is 153 milliseconds, and maximum is
395 milliseconds ... on the 5444 model 2 or 3, minimum access
time is 39 milliseconds, average is 269 milliseconds, and maximum is 750 milliseconds ... on the 5444 model A 1, minimum
access time is 28 milliseconds, average is 86 milliseconds, and
maximum is 165 milliseconds ... on the 5444 model A2 or A3,
minimum access time is 28 milliseconds, normal average access time is 126 milliseconds, and maximum is 255 milliseconds. For specific average access length times, refer to timing
charts. Times vary depending on area of tbe file over which
access taKes place and direction of access.
Data Transfer Rate: The disks rotate at 1500 rpm, yielding a
data rate of up to 199,000 bytes or 398,000 packed decimal
digits per second ... permits efficient sequential and random
access processing.
Configurations: A disk oriented System/3 can have the following disk drive configurations:
One Disk Drive System One 5444 model 1 or one model 2
(on a System/3 model 6 or 10); or (on model 8 or 10) one
5444 model A 1; or (on model 8, 10 or 15) one 5444 model
A2.
Two Disk Drive System One 5444 model 2 and one model 3
or two 5444 model 2s (on a System /3 model 6 or 10); or
(on model 8, 10 or 15) one 5444 model A2 and one model
A3, or two 5444 model A2s.
Prerequisites: For System/3 model 6 or model 10 any disk
oriented system requires a 5410 Processing Unit model A 12*,
A 13, A 14, A 15, A 16, or A 17 or a 5406 Processing Unit model
82, 83 or 84 ... a second drive (5444 model 3 or 5444 model 2)
requires a Second Disk Attachment (#6378) on the 5410 or
5406 ... a 5444 model 3 or second 5444 model 2 requires the
presence of the first 5444 model 2. Any disk oriented system
with 5444 models A 1, A2 or A3 attached requires a 5410
Processing Unit model A12*, A13, A14, A15, A16 or A17. A
first disk drive (5444 model A 1 or A2) requires a Higher Performance 1st Disk Attachment (#4501); a second disk drive
(5444 model A2 or A3) requires a Second Disk Attachment
(#6378), the Higher Performance 2nd Disk Attachment
(#4502), and the presence of a 5444 model A2 as the first
drive.
For System/3 model 8: The 5444 "A" series (models A 1, A2
or A3) can be attached to any 5408 Processing Unit. There are
no prerequisites to attach the first disk drive (5444 model A 1 or
A2) to the 5408. A second disk drive (5444 model A2 or A3)
requires a Second Disk Attachment (#6378).
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
---- =---=
General Systems Division-Machines
- -=- ---•...-
-
-~-
Note: All System/3 model 15 systems with 5415 Processing
Units A 17 through A20 require the first disk drive (5444 model
A2).
All 5444 models use 5440 Disk Cartridges, which are not included with the 5444, but must be ordered separately ... see
5~-40.
When 5444' s are ordered for a 5410 or 5415 Processing Unit,
an appropriate location code is required on the 5424 MultiFunction Card Unit or on the 5422 Disk Enclosure ... see
"Specify" under 5424 or 5422.
* I BM Programming Systems for a disk oriented System/3
Model 10 require a minimum of 12,288 bytes of core storage. IBM's ability to service a disk oriented System/3 Model 10 with 8,192 bytes of core storage may be impaired with
an effect on systems availability.
Bibliography: GC20-8080. Metering: Assignable Unit.
Specify
1. Voltage [AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz]: #9902 for 208V, or #9904 for
230V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
2. 5440 Disk Cartridges: Must be ordered separately ... see
5440.
3. Covers: If the 5444 is to be attached to a 5410 or 5415, the
appropriate location codes for 5444's must be specified on
the 5424 Multi-function Card Unit or on the 5422 ... see
"Specify" under 5424 Dr 5422. For conversion of a 5415A
Model CPU to a 5415B, 5415C or 54150 model or for conversion from a 5410 CPU to a 5412 CPU, see Specify under
5424 for deletion of the appropriate 5444 location codes for
lower covers.
4. 5406, 5408, 5410, or 5415: The appropriate file capacity
code must be specified on the Processing Unit ... see
"Specify" under 5406, 5408, 5410 or 5415.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M5444.2
Nov 78
---..--- -.--=
=-__-= General Systems Division--Machines
-----'-----"" .-
=
M5445.1
Nov 78
.
5445,DI~K STORAGE
For System/3 model 15:
Purposer Large capacity, high speed direct access storage for
a System/3 'model 10 or model 15A.
1. The appropriate attachment feature{s) and specify
feature(s) on the 5415 (not B, C or D model processors) ...
.
see the configurator below.
Model 1
20.48 million bytes, one drive ... contains a power
supply for a model 1 and a model 2.
Model 2
20.48 million bytes, one drive ... attaches to a
model 1
Model 3
40.96 million bytes, two drives ... equivalent to a
model 1 and a model 2.
Model Changes: Not recommended for field installation.
Highiights: The 5445 attaches to a System/3 model 10 or 15
via at!8chment features on the 5410 or 5415 to provide additiona(~apacity general purpose direct access storage.
Capacity: System/3 model 10 and 15-20.48 million bytes
with a model 1; 40.96 million bytes with a model 3 or with a
model 1 and a model 2.
"System/3 model 15 61.44 million bytes with a model 1 and a
model. 3 or two model 1s and a model 2 ;81 .92 million bytes
with two model 3s, or two model 1s and two model 2s, or one
model 1 and one model 2 and one model 3.
The stated capacity assumes a 0 key, 256 byte data physical
record format. Key length plus pl1ysical data length may never
exceed 256 bytes. However, with System/3 programming
support, the logical record size can be larger than 256 bytes.
Access Time (m~lIiseconds): Average, 60 ... minimum, 25 ...
maximum, 130.
Data Rate: 312,000 bytes/second, or 624,000 packed deci":
mal digits/ secon<;l.
Disk Pack: removable and interchangeable 2316 Disk Pack.
By following System/'3 programming conventions on
System/360/370, data on a 2316 may be accessed by a
Sy~tem(3 model 10 or model 15 or a System/360/370.
2. At least one 5444 model A2 must be attached to the 5415
(not on B, C or D model processors) when IBM System/3
Disk System Management Programs are being used.
3. A 5445 model 1 is a prerequisite for a 5445 model 2.
4. Each 5445 must have a 2316 Disk Pack, which must be
ordered separately .
5. The 5445 model 2 is attached to the 5445 model 1. If a
model 2 is ordered for other than attachment to a model 1,
an RPQ must be submitted.
Limitations:
1. A maximum of two 5445 drives may be attached to a 5410.
2. A maximum of four 5445 drives may be attached to a
5415A.
3. If a disk oriented System/3 model 10 has a 5445 attached
and is not using IBM Programming Systems, certain system
configurations could result in I/O channel overruns. Refer
to the System Components Reference Manual for detailed
information.
ATTACHMENT/SPECIFY CONFIGURATOR
System/3 Model 10
Total
5445 Mdls Total Capacity CPU
attached
Drives million
Attachment
bytes
Features
1+2
3
1
2
2
1+2
3
3+1
1+2+1
1+2+1+2
1+2+3
3+3
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
4
20.48
40.96
40.96
CPU
Specify
Features.
None
#3901
#3901 + 3902 None
#3901 + 3902 None
System/3 Model 15
Prerequisites.:
For System/3 model 10:
1. The appropriate attachment feature{s) ... see configurator
below.
2. At least one 5444 Disk Storage Drive must be attached to
the 5410'when IBM System/3 Disk System Management
Programs are being used.
3. Processing Unit Expansion-A (#5732) is required on the
5410 for #3901.
4. Processing Unit Expansion-B (#5733) and/or Processing
Unit Expansion-C (#5734) and/or Processing Unit
Expansion-D (#5735) may be required on the 5410, depending upon which special features are specified on the
5410 ... see "Processing Unit Expansion Features
Configurator" under 5410 to determine requirements.
20.48
40.96
40.96
61.44
61.44
81.92
81.92
81.92
#3901
#3901
#3901
#3901
#3901
#3901
#3901
#3901
+
+
+
+
+
3903
3903
3903
3903
3903
None
#9182
#9182
#9182
#9182
#9182+9184
#9182+9164
#9182+9184
Specify
1. Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz); #9902 for 208V, or #9904 for
230V.
2. 1442/2560 Compatibility: #9751. Required when either
2560 MFCM or 1442 Card Read Punch and a 5445 Model 1
or 3 are in a System/3 Model 15 configuration ... order for
each 5445 Model 1 or 3. Can be field installed.
5. A 5445 model 1 is a prerequisite for a 5445 model 2.
6. Each 5445 must have a 2316 Disk Pack which must be
ordered separately.
7. The 5445 model 2 is attached to the 5445 model 1. If a
model 2 is ordered for other than attachment to a model 1,
an RPQ must be submitted.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---=-- General Systems Division-Machines
=---=
-_
- ---.-
-
5447 DISK STORAGE AND CONTROL
Purpose: Disk storage drive units and control for a System/3
Model 4.
Model A1: Single drive ... 4.90 million bytes or 9.80 million
packed decimal digits ... accesses 200 cylinders on one removable cartridge and 200 cylinders on one fixed non-removable
disk. (one access mechanism)
ModelA2: Dual drive ... 9.80 million bytes or 19.60 million
packed decimal digits ... accesses 200 cylinders on one removable cartridge and 600 cylinders on three fixed non-removable
disks. (two access mechanisms)
Model Changes: Can be made in the field.
Highlights: Removable Disk Cartridges-Each 5447 uses
removable 5440 disk cartridges, providing virtually unlimited
offline disk storage. 5440's must be ordered separately ... see
5440.
The 5447 unit includes the disk storage facility (including enclosure) and it$ control. It also includes table top space for the
5213 Printer, the oper~tor keyboard console, and a 3277 Display Station.
Cylinder Concept: The access mechanism, with four vertically
aligned heads, gives access to the top and bottom tracks of
both disks on a disk drive. However, due to different functional
uses, a cylinder is considered as the two opposite tracks on
either disk of a disk drive. On any disk, 12,288 bytes or 24,576
packed decimal digits are available at one setting of the mechanism.
Formats: On either disk or cartridge, a cylinder is two tracks
... one on each disk surface. Each track consists of 24 sectors,
each with a 3-byte identifying field and a fixed length 256-byte
data field.
Access Times-On the 5447 Model A1 or A2, minimum
access time is 28 milliseconds, average access time is 126
milliseconds, and maximum is 255 milliseconds. For specific
average access length times, refer to timing charts. Times vary
depending on area of the file over which access takes place
and direction of access.
Data Transfer Rate: The disks rotate at 1500 RPM, yielding a
data rate of up to 199,000 bytes or 398,000 packed decimal
digits per second '" permits efficient sequential and random
access processing.
Prerequisite: A 5404 Model A 18 Processing Unit.
Bibliography: GC20-8080.
Specify
1. Voltage (AC, 1-Phase, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208V, or #9904
for 230V ... must be consistent with system Voltage.
2. Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9046 for gray, or #9046 for white.
3. 3277 Console Display #9760 if 3277 Console Display Station located on 6447 table top (3277-1 required on table top
for CCP message display). #9761 if no 3277 Display Station
located on table top.
4. 6440 Disk Cartridges: Must be ordered separately ... see
5440.
6. Up-Ending Kit: #9840. This kit is furnished only as necessary and remains the property of IBM.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M5447.1
Nov 78
-- =_._-
- ..;.
- --==--=
General Systems Division-Machines
- -- ----
-
-~-.-
5448 DISK STORAGE DRIVE
Purpose: Disk Storage Drive Unit for a System/3 Model 8 or
Model 10.
Models: The 5448 Disk Storage Drive is available in one
model, the A 1, which provides 9.8 million bytes or 19.6 million
packed decimal digits. The 5448 Model A 1 accesses the data
on two modules, each with 200 cylinders of nonremovable disk.
, Highlights: The 5448 can be added to existing System/3
Model 8 systems to effectively double the maximum disk storage available. The 5448 can be added to existing System/3
Model 10 systems to provide an intermediate growth step.
Formats: The 5448 consists of four fixed disks, with eight
recording surfaces. The drive is divided into two modules, 01
and 02, each having 200 cylinders and four vertically aligned
heads. The 5448, when combined with the 5444 Disk Storage
Drive, yields the following capacities on the System/3 Model 8
or Model 10:
Bytes (in millions)
Disk Storage Drive Combinations
14.70
5444 Model 2 or A2, plus 5448 Model
A1
5444 Model 2 and 3, or A2 and A3, plus
5448 Model A 1
Two 5444 Model 2 or A2 plus 5448
Model A1
17.15
19.60
Location: The 5448 Disk Storage DriVE; is housed in a separate unit cabled to the 5408 or 5410 Processing Unit.
Access Times: On the 5448 Model A 1, minimum access time
is 28 milliseconds, average is 126 milliseconds, and maximum
is 255 milliseconds.
Data Transfer Rate: The disk rotates at 1500 RPM, yielding a
data rate of 199,000 bytes or 398,000 packed decimal digits
per second.
Cables: Power and Signal Cables are included with the 5448
Disk Storage Drive. See "Specify" for proper cable group.
Prerequisites: For System/3 Model 8-5444 Disk Storage
Drive Model .2, 5448 File Attachment (Feature #4040) and
Processing Unit Expansion A (Feature #5732) on the 5408
CPU. Mutually exclusive with the Serial Input/Output Channel
(SIOC) (#7081). For System/3 Model 10-5444 Disk Storage
Drive Model 2 or A2, 5448 File Attachment (Feature #4040)
and Processing Expansion A (Feature #5732) on the 5410 CPU.
Mutually exclusive with the 5445 Disk Attachment (#3901) on
the 5410.
Note: The attachment of certain other I/O devices may require
Unit Expansion
Features.
See
additional
Processing
"Processing Unit Expansion Features Configurator" to determine possible additional features.
Bibliography: GC20-8080. Metering: None.
Specify
1. Voltage (AC, 1 phase, 60Hz): #9902 for 208V, or #9904 for
- 230V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
2. Cable Group: #9056 for attachment to System/3 Model 8,
#9057 for attachment to System/3 Model 10.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M5448.1
Nov 78
- ------= =
=---=
- - -------.-
-
-~-
-
M5471.1
General Systems Division-Machines
5471 PRINTER-KEYBOARD
Purpose: A Selectric type printer-keyboard unit for attachment to System/3 Model 8, 10 or '12.
Highlights: Mounted on the console work table with a forms
stand located on the floor behind it. Allows either independent
or combined keyboard (input) ~nd/ or printer {output} functions. Serves primarily as an inquiry device and secondary
printer.
The keyboard and printer operate independently under program
control. Functions supported are inquiry, key entry of data,
operator/system communication and use as a secondary printer.
The keyboard will accept data whenever the "Proceed" light is
on, operating on an interrupt basis. It is typewriter style with
44 character keys, shift, space and carrier return. The top row
of keys are used for numerics and special characters. Functional keys (Cancel, Request, End) and indicator lights {Request
Pending, Proceed} are located to the right of the keyboard for
easy operator use.
The printer operates at a rated speed of 15.5 characters per
second. A 15-inch carriage provides a 12-1/2" writing line at
10 characters per inch. A 6 lines/inch pin feed platen {13-1/8"
pin-to-pin} is standard. A maximum of an original and five
carbon copies can be prepared, depending upon paper, carbon
quality and thickness. A Data 1 Font, Mono Case printing
element provides the 64 character set standard on System/3
(except for). See Feature #9592 on page TC 22 in "Type
Catalog" for character layout and purchase price for additional
elements.
Only those device functions which are useful and necessary in
a systems environment are furnished. Functions such as tab,
backspace, ribbon shift, end of line bell, tab set and clear, etc.
are removed for reduced maintenance, increased accessibility
and improved performance.
Maximum: Only one 5471 can be attached to a System/3
model 8, 10 or 12. Prerequisite: A 5471 Printer-Keyboard
Attachment (#4110) on the 5408, 5410 or 5412 Processing
Unit.
Limitations:
1. IBM Programming Systems require a disk oriented Model
10 with 12,288 bytes of main storage, or a minimum Model
8 or Model 12.
2. IBM's ability to service a card oriented System/3 equipped
with a 5471 may be impaired with an effect on systems
availa bility.
3. A 5471 cannot be attached with a 5475 Data Entry Keyboard.
Bibliography: GC20-8080.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Nov 78
_-.. ........
----.
=---= General Systems Division-Machines
---------.-
----.
--
5486 CARD SORTER
Purpose: To arrange 96-column punched cards in numeric or
alphabetic sequence.
Model 1
1,000 cards/ minute
Model 2
1,5QO cards/ minute
Model Changes: Can be made in the field.
Highlights: Has six stackers, each with a capacity of approximately 600 cards and an automatic stop. Hopper holds 2,000
cards. Six intermediate storage racks are attached with 1,500card capacity in each stacker. Compactness affords choice of
operator attendance in either a seated or standing position.
Numeric sorting requires a second pass for approximately
one-half of the cards for each numeric column sorted. Alphabetic sorting requires one additional pass per column. An edit
s,witch provides for separation of cards containing zone
punches or special characters during a numeric sort.
Specify
1. Voltage [115V AC. 1-phase. 60Hz (cps). non-lock plug]:
#9881.
Special Features
Alphabetic Sorting (#1225): Reduces the number of card
passes for alphabetic sorting to two full passes per card column.
Auxiliary Card Counter (#2370): A 6-position unit counter.
Switch controlled ... manually reset.
Sort Suppress/Digit Select (#7245): Sort Suppress-allows
separation of unpunched cards into the "Reject" pocket without distrubing the sequence of the remaining cards. Digit
Select-allows cards punched with selected digits to be sorted
into the appropriate pockets without disurbing the sequence of
the balance of the file.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M5486.~
Nov 78
------.
.....
-= =
=--==
-. ----.,.--- --
M5496.1
"~
Nov 78
General Systems Division-Machines
5496 DATA RECORDE·R
Purpose: An operator oriented key entry unit used to create
the 96-column card, as well as to verify data which has been
previously recorded.
Model 1
Rated card read speed 20 columns per second.
Model 2
Rated card read . speed 60 columns per second.
Minus right adjust standard.
When equipped with a 2772/3741/5320 Attachment (#7850).
the model 1 can be attached to a 2770 Data Communication
System for transmission and punching of 96-column card data
or can be attached to a 3741 Data Station/ Programmable
Work Station as an auxiliary card reader or punch or to any
model 5320 as an on-line card I/O device.
When equipped with a 3735 Attachment (#7801). the model 1
can be attached to a 3735 Programmable Buffered Terminal for
transmissions, reading, and punching of 96-column card data.
When equipped with System/3 Model 6 Attachment (#7501).
the model 1 can be attached to a System/3 Model 6 as an
auxiliary card reader or punch.
Highlights: Buffered, key entry, punch and print areas ...
64-character keyboard ... auto skipping ... automatic duplicating at electronic speeds ... four program levels ... right adjust,
size of field can be 96 columns ... field erase '" word erase .. .
record erase ... upper, lower and numeric shift control .. .
punches and prints at 20 columns per tier per second, equivalent to 60 characters per secend '" engraved printing ... reading via photosensors ... backlighted, easy-to-read column
indicator '" hopper and stacker capacity is 350 cards ... 410
square inch reading board work area ... rotational keyboard
mobility ... auxiliary duplication is a standard operation ... feed
check light indicates card misfeed or card jam '" stacker-full
light.
Alphabetic, numeric and special character recording in cards
can be key verified on the same machine.
Notches verified correct cards on trailing edge of card ... manually skipped columns verified as blanks ... programmed or
manually keyed auto verified fields will be verified ... programmed skipped fields will not be verified for content ... right adjust fields are programmable for testing proper number of
blanks inserted '" when an error is detected, keyboard locks
and error light is lit ... depressing error reset unlocks keyboard
... after third tryon column in error, memory is changed to
reflect corrected data ... at end of corrected field, control reverts
to first manual column of corrected field for reverification ...
completion of proper verify routine allows blank cards to be
manually inserted in hopper and repunch operation provides a
corrected card with verify notch. Incorrect card will be stacked
without notching. Proper card formatting will enhance throughput when verifying ... see Operator's Guide for details.
Specify
1. Voltage [115V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz {cps}, non-lock plug]:
#9881.
2. When ordered as a component of a 2770 System,
2772/3741/5320 Attachment (#7850) is required ... see
"Special Features."
3. When ordered as a component of a System/3 Model 6
System, System/3 Model 6 Attachment (#7501) is required
... see "Special Features."
4. When ordered for attachment to a 3735 Programmable
Buffered Terminal, 3735 Attachment (#7801) is required ...
see "Special Features."
5. When ordered for attachment to a 3741 Data Station or
Programmable Work Station, 2772/3741 Attachment
(#7850) is required ... see "Special Features."
6. Print Wheel Arrangement: Slash zero (0) is the standard
numeric character. If a non-slash zero (0) is desired, specify
#9490. See Type Catalog TC 1 for field installation charge.
Model Changes: Model 1, with serial number 51221
above, can be field upgraded to Model 2.
or
Special Features
8-Bit Read/Punch (#3666) (Model 1 only): Provides off-line
capability to punch special 8-bit coded characters in 96-column
cards. Dependent on C/ D-Bit switch setting, 5496 operates in
either conventional System/3 6-bit mode or Special 8-bit
mode. C/ D-Bit switch ON permits 96-column cards pu~ched
with 256-character set to be read into storage for subsequent
punchout (duplication) or manual keyboard entry of combined
bit structures to generate special 8-bit coded characters. Keyboard generated characters utilize the mUlti-punch key method.
8-bit characters are not printable regardless of print switch
setting. In verify, the 8-bit mode of operation is inhibited regardless of the C/ D-Bit switch setting, thereby preventing the
verification of 8-bit coded characters. Limitation: Cannot be
installed on machines equipped with System/3 Model 6 Attachment
(#7501).
3735
Attachment
(#7801).
or
2772/3741/5320 Attachment (#7850). Field installation:
Not recommended.
a
Self-Checking Number (#7061, 7062): Provides
means of
verifying precoded alphameric information at the same time it is
punched. Use of the feature requires that a check digit be
added to the basic code number to produce a self-check number. The check digit is always placed in the units position of a
self-checking number. More than one self-checking field can
be checked per card. Correctly keyed cards are identified by
"S" bit punch in the space adjacent to column 32 of tier 1
Self-check fields bypassed via skip key depression will not
carry the "S" bit punch in the specified location. One of two
versions of the feature can be installed: #7061-Modulus 10 ...
factors (X2, X1 applied to alternate positions) are the arithmetic weighing factors used to arrive at the Modulus 10 check
digit.
#7062-Modulus 11 '" factors (X7, X6, X5, X4, X3, X2 applied
in that order) are the arithmetic weighing factors used to arrive
at the Modulus 11 check digit. Limitations: Neither version
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
....
_
.....
--';.-'-=-.-.
.... - -.--==--=
-
- - ----..... ---.....-.-. ......
M5496.2
Nov 78
General Systems Division-Machines
will operate on a left-based number ... Self-check numbers of
Modulus 10 are not compatible with those of Modulus 11.
System/3 Model 6/5230 Attachment (#7501) (Model 1
only): (Available at time of manufacture only) To attach the
5496 to System/3 model 6 ~s an auxiliary card reader or punch
or 5231 Model 1 as an auxiliary punch unit. With the "Data
Recorder" switch on the console in the on-line position, the
5496 reads, punches, or prints and punches the cards under
system control. Rated speed for reading/punching-printing is
22 cpm. With the "Data Recorder" switch in the off-line position the 5496 operates as a conventional data recorder.
Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with 8-Bit
Read / punch (#3666). Prerequisites: Data Recorder Attachment (#3210 on the 5406 or Secondary Punch Attachment
(#3210) on the 5231 control unit. Connecting cable is required.
Special Feature Combinations: Maximum combinations,
indicated by "X" are shown in vertical columns.
Model
2
8-Bit Read Punch
Self Check N umber Modulus
10 or 11
System/3 Model 6 Attachment
3735 Attachment
2772/3741/5320 Attachment
Secondary Punch Attachment
(#3210) on the 5231 ... a 25 foot Connecting cable will be
supplied with the 5231 as part of the feature. No cable order is
required.
3735 Attachment (#7801) (Model 1 only): To attach the
5496 to the 3735 Programmable Buffered Terminal. Operation
is under switch control on the 5496. When in "Terminal"
position, the 5496 may be used as either a card reader or a
card punch for punching of 96-column card data at 20 columns
per tier per second, equivalent to 60 characters per second .,.
when in manual position, the 5496 operates as 'a standard
machine. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with 8-Bit Read/Punch (#3666). Specify: If desired, #9674
for ASCII print wheel and key tops ... otherwise standard print
wheel and key tops will be supplied. (Available at time of manu-.
facture only.) Prerequisite: 5496 Attachment (#3950) on the
3735. Note: Signal cable and connector required to attach a
5496 to a 3735 are included with #3950 on the 3735.
2772/3741/5320 Attachment (#7850) (Model 1 only): Provides the ability to attach the 5496 Data Recorder model 1 to
the 2772 Multi-Purpose Control Unit or the 3741 Data
Station/ Programmable Work Station or to any model 5320.
Operation is under switch control on the 5496. When in manual position, the 5496 operates as a standard machine. When in
"Terminal" position, the 5496 may be used either as a card
reader or as a card punch for punching of 96-column card
data. Attached on-line to the 2772, the 5496 reads, punches,
or punch/ prints card data at 20 columns per tier per second,
equivalent to 60 characters per second. Attached on-line to the
3741, the 5496 reads, punches or punch/ prints cards under
control ,of the 3741 at the following rated speeds: card
reading)i"21 cards per minute ... punch/ print-17 cards per
minute. Attached on-line to any model 5320, the 5496 reads,
punches or punch/ prints cards under control of the 5320 at the
rated speed of 21 cards per minute. Maximum: One.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with 8-Bit Read/Punch
(#3666). (Available at time of manufacture only.) Specify:
When ordered as a component of a 2770 system, if desired,
specify" #9674 for ASCII print wheel and key tops ... otherwise
standard print wheel and key tops will be supplied.
Prerequisites: 5496 Attachment (#3970) on the 2772 or Data
Recorder Attachment (#3200) on the 3741 or 5320. Note: A
signal cable and connector required to attac'h a 5496 to a 2772
is included in #3970 on the 2772. A 25 foot cable and connector required to attach a 5496 to a 3741 is included in #3200 on
the 3741. A 10 foot cable and connector required to attach a
5496 to a 5320 is included in #3200 on the 5320.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
#3666 x
#7061/
#7062 x
#7501
#7801
#7850
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
--
---==----=--=General Systems Division-Machines
- - ----
M10000.1
.
Nov78
-~-.-
Order Entry-General
1. Items identified by a Feature Code:
For shipment with a machine, specify the feature code at
the time of machine order entry via
transaction
OCORDER or after order.entry and prior to shipment via
OCALTER.
2-wire
Operation
Selector
Part
#
Frequency #
21
22
23
24
2. Items Not Identified by a Feature Code:
-
Non-cable parts and bills-of-materials.
For both on-order and installed machines, order via
MSORDER
using
order
category
transaction
accessories/ supplies under the appropriate group code
specified by the individual ordering instructions.
If a part or bill number is not shown, enter part number
= 0 and provide a complete description (Note: Price
must be manually entered also).
-
Cable hardware (parts), assemblies and bulk wire.
For both on-order and installed machines, order via
transaction MSORDER using order category Bulk Cable.
Connectors, etc., shou!d be ordered as cable hardware,
assembled cable as cable assemblies and bulk wire as
bulk cable. Ensure that the machine type specified in
these pages is used when entering the order.
information
on
endorser
plates
for
For
802/803/1201/1203/1260, see Endorser Plate Specification
Sheet, 120-1348. For 1210/1219/1241/1412/1419/1421,
see Endorser Plate Specification Sheet, 120-0563. For Plant
Installation on 803, 1201, 1203, 1219, 1241, 1260, 1412, or
1419, specify #3792 (or #3793 for Blank Endorser Plate where
applicable) at prices listed below. A completed Endorser Plate
Specification Sheet for each #3792 must be attached to the
DPOWor lAC.
Specify
An Individual completed Endorser Plate Specification Sheet
(102-1348 or 120-0563) '" see above. including machine and
serial number, must accompany each order for an endorser
plate. On mechanical and capacity replacement orders, also
attach a sample endorsement.
800 cps
1300 cps
1800 cps
2300 cps
338288
338289
338290
339291
4-wire
Operation
Selector
#
Frequency
41
42
43
44
800 cps
1300 cps
1800 cps
2300 cps
Part
#
338293
338294
338295
338296
Pin Feed Platens (7900)
For feeding of continuous forms that have pre-punched feed
holes. On anyone machine, one pin feed platen may be ordered
for plant installation in 1ieu of the standard solid platen. The
platen becomes the property of the customer and cannot be
returned for credit.
Pin Feed Platen Assembly (including one platen cylinder).
(Plant Installation in lieu of standard solid platen)
Feature
#
For 12" Carriage
For 16" Carriage
Purchase
#9506
#9507
Specify
1. One Feature #9506 or #9507 depending on carriage length
desired ...
2. Line 'Spacing and Hole-to-hole Width: One feature # based
on carriage length (see "Line Spacing" below) ...
3. Platen Cylinder Hardness: One of the following-#9523 for
hard, #9524 for medium, or #9525 for soft. Limitation:
The hard cylinder (#9523) is undercut 1/32" and should be
specified when form is to be 5 or more parts ... it should
never be used with fewer than 5 copies.
An RPQ is required for any of the following: (a) Change in line
spacing on an installed machine ... (b) Change from pin feed to
solid platen on an installed machine '" (c) Cutting down a
platen cylinder (to other than standard length) ... (d) To install a
solid platen with Automatic Carriage (#1721, 1722).
Transceiver Selectors (67/68): One Telegraph Speed Selector is furnished with the 67 Telegraph Signal Unit. Additional
selectors can be purchased.
Additiona! Telegraph Speed Selector, each
Part No. 33839860 words/minute
Part No. 338299 75 words/ minute
Part No. 338300 100 words/ minute
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
_- ..........=.
- ..... _---.--..,. -.- --:>
,.'::---=
-----
...
M10000~2
General Systems Division-Machines
-~-y-
:tine Spacing: Depending upon carriage length, one of the
following Feature '#s must be selected in accordance with line
spacing and hole-to-hole width of forms which will be used,
However, irnhis case, there is no limitation regarding hole-tohole width.
Feature
# for Line Spacing
4 lines/inch
spacing
Over-all HoleForms . to-hole
Width
Width·
5-3/4" '::;;·5-1/4"
6-1/2"
6"
8"
7-1/2"
8-1/2"
8"
9-7/8"
9-3/8"
6 lines/inch
spacing
Writing
Line
12"
12"
Carriage-7900 Carriage-7900
4-3/4"
5-1/2"
#9381
#9382
#9383
#9384
#9386
#9151
#9152
#9153
#9154
#9156
16"
16"
7"
7-1/2"
8-7/8"
Carriage-7900 Carriage-7900
9-7/8"
10-3/8"
10-5/8"
11-3/4"
13-5/8"
.9-3l8"
9-7/8"
10-1/8"
11-1/4"
13-1/8"
8-7/8"
9-3/8"
9-5/8"
10-3/4"
12-5/8"
#9386
#9387
#9389
#9390
#9392
#9156
#9157
#9159
#9160
#9162
If shipped prior to June 1, 1963 on a Singte-Use Charge Basis,
maybe retained by rental customers at any time in the future if
they so desire. Where shipped on and after June 1, 1963, the
items are to be removed when rental machines are discontinued.
Not to be reproduced withoot written permission.
Nov 78
--.------ =--.-- ....-=
M10000.3
..
=---::\.General Systems Division~Machines
--_.,
---- ---. -
. Nov 78
.
I nformation Records
80 Column Punched Cards-Standard Specifications
The punching arrangement is:
Dimensions: Width of all cards to be 3.250" with a tolerance
of plus 0.007" or minus 0.003". The length of all cards to be
as indicated below with a tolerance of plus or minus 0.005".
(These dimensions apply to cards conditioned at 50% relative
humidity and 73 degrees Fahrenheit.)
Dimensions
80 column card
66 column card
60 column card
51 column card
1 / 3 size card
22 column stub card
7.375"
6.157"
5.635"
4.852"
2.458"
2.329"
Corners may be square or round. Round corners have a 1/4"
radius. All angles formed by adjacent sides or, in the case of
round cornered cards, by extensions of the adjacent sides, are
at right angles. All angles are to be free from creases. A corner
may also be cut at 60 degrees angle, 1/4" along the top and
approximately 3/8" along the side. Cards, when cut, are to
have the grain of the paper running with the length of the card.
Paper Specifications: Coniferous chemical pulp or other pulp
which produces paper of like characteristics; paper is to contain not more than 2 % ash. Paper to is be free from defects
due to residual chemicals, slime, carbon or other electrically
conducting spots which would cause incorrect operation; and
to be manufactured in a manner that will not necessitate increased servicing of the machines through the accumulation of
deleterious matter from cards, will not cause incorrect operation of machines through improper electrical contacts or otherwise, nor interfere with the usual life of the cards. Paper or
cards are to be tested electrically for conductive spots, and
defective cards eliminated. Paper, when cut into cards, is to be
free of curl or wrinkles that will interfere with feeding of cards
in data processing machines. Paper stock is to be uniform in
thickness, viz, .0070" with a tolerance of plus or minus .0004".
Printing: Impression is to be legible without excess ink, but in
no circumstances to indent the card sufficiently to push any
part of the surface on either side of the card out of its plane.
Printed matter is to be accurately placed so that the columnar
figures will appear properly when tested through appropriate
gauges.
Special Purpose Cards: Many card scores have machine
processing limitations. Usually, those limitations simply restrict
machine J)rocessing to either before or after separation, and
some apply only to corner cuts on a specific corner of the card.
A few require engineering changes to the machine or prohibit
use of the score on that machine. The use of aperture cards
may also present limitations or require an engineering change
to the machine.
32 columns in three horizontal tiers
18 rows vertically divided into 3 tiers of 6 rows (bits) each
64 character set
6-bit card code is utilized (B, A, 8,4,2, 1).
The printing arrangement is:
Four (4) printing lines are provided for at the top of the card
Each line may be printed with up to 32 characters for a total
of 128 characters per card
Dimensions: Length of cards must be 3.250" with a tolerance
of plus 0.007" or minus 0.003" and width must be 2.6,3.0" with
a tolerance of plus 0.006" or minus 0.004". (These dimensions
apply to cards conditioned at 50% relative humidity.and 73
degrees Fahrenheit).
All corners are recommended to be leveled at 45 degree angle,
0.06" along the top and side with a tolerance of plus or minus
0.01". All angles formed by extensions of the adjacent sides
must be right angles. Either an upper left or upper right corner
may also be cut at a 60 degree angle. 0.200" along the top
with a tolerance of plus or minus 0.015" and 0.346" along the
side with a tolerance of plus or minus 0.015". Cards, when
cut, should have the grain of th3 paper running with the 2.63"
dimension of the card.
Paper Specifications: Paper should be composed of coniferous chemical wood pulp, or of other pulp which. produces
paper of like characteristics, and should contain not more than
2 % ash. Paper must be free from holes, loose dust, abrasive
materials, residual chemicals, static charges or translucent
spots that may cause incorrect operation or necessitate increased servicing of the machines. Paper or cards should be
tested optically and defective cards eliminated. Cards must be
free of curl or wrinkles that will interfere with feeding of cards
in data processing machines. Paper stock must be uniform in
thickness viz, .0070" with a tolerance of plus or minus .0004".
The opacity of tl:le paper must be no less than that of current
natural tabulating card stock.
Printing: Impression should be legible without excess ink, but
in no circumstances should indent the card so as to push any
part of the surface on either side of the card out of its plane.
Printed matter must be accurately placed so that the columnar
figures will appear properly when tested through appropriate
gauges.
Badge Specifications
96 Column Punched Cards Standard Specifications
The 96 column card is approximately one-third the size of the
standard 80 column card. It accommodates 96 columns of
punching into 3 horizontal tiers of 32 columns each.
Magnetic badges and punched hole badges used with th~"5~':30
System must meet IBM 5230 Data Collection System Badge
Specifications (GA21-9259). This document is available
through the I BM publication distribution centers. Badges
which do not conform to these specifications may result in
unsatisfactory machine performance on the. 5230 Data Collection System.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M10000.4
Nov 78
;"Controlled A~:c.'$S Cards
Signature panel
Controlled 'A~cess Cards are used in support of the System/7
Controlled'f::~p$;~§S System. TheiSM Magnetic Stripe Card
Reader (HP'C!l\.d~· the System/7 reads and transmits the data
encoded 0f!lh~ :magnetic stripe of the card.
'
l'
,~f. ~.'
The per~Qn',:~esiring entrance to a controlled area inserts the
. card oi'l)tq ,~~.~d,~!. When the card reaches a positive stop,
readingl;i~~~mp!ete and the person withdraws the card. Within
a certai~{¥~,;~:-~pan, determined by the customer's program,
system 1~1.f:;:~~~di~ the .S y stem/7 allows access, the door
controillfitle,ehamsm IS activated and unlocks the door. It remainsr~.~s~d for the period of time determined by the program.",;;.;,
In
'.;!':K'
additJ~~:·tffiri'ts
primary functions, as a means of gaining
entranO'e,. the' controlled access card may be used for additional
applicati~ry~.,
Size
"'H~,:~~hi'
Description
"~~'~~fi2;SI ~ (badge size)
4"~"'~;~:2S" (badge size)
3-1 / 4
3-1 /
J
Plastic
Clip with strap (requires clip hole)
Customer Supplied Plastics
I BM prefers to supply all plastics used for controlled access
c.ards and data collection badges.
**Printing is limited to text or line printing ans is not adaptable
to customer logos. Black and blue provide the best print quality. Green and red are also available. A 1 /S" color separation is
required. A 3/4" clear is required across the top of the card.
The top is defined as the edge closest to and parallel to the
magnetic stripe. A 1/4" clear area is also required along the
bottom edge. If 2 magnetic stripes are specified, a 3/4" clear
area is required along both the bottom and top edges. This
clear area requirement applies to both sides of the card.
Polaroid Dual Bond Seal*
3-3/S" x'2-1/S" (Mr. size)
Plastic
3-3/S~' x 2,~1 /S" (Mr. size)
Polaroid Dual Bond Seal*
*Registered trademark of the Polaroid Corporation.
Magneti~})tripe
Environment
Effectiv~fm"l'(~diately an improvement is being incorporated in
the magne,tic stripe of all Controlled Access plastic cards and
badge~whibh reduces the incidence of degaussing or magnetic
erasures~;":W.hen highlighting this improvement to customers or
prospects, ,. it must be communicated that the possibility of
degaussing still exists when plastic cards come in contact with
magnetic Nelds, 'and that the implementation of proper care and
handling procedures is still the most effective means to prevent
degaussing problems.
The Polaro,d Dual Bond Seal Card must be used in conjunction
with the Polaroid I D-2 or 10-3 Land Identification System. The
fOllowing'"n~brmation should be included in any proposal or
price qUotc;li~~nfegarding these cards:
T~e qua.9~,,\@.t,the
seal of the Polaroid photo I D card is
the us~ of the proper Polaroid or suitable s~~sti(ut~'i~:~ealing equipment. (Our e~perience has been
thati~,:~b.~t~lution in the sealing process or in the recommende~.;~q:":'ipmert',may affect the ~ntegrity of the seal.)
hlghlyq~eff;;:h~l'lt on
It is suggested that these cards be used in applications
where p,eriodic reissue is anticipated. Customers should
• also be advised that exposure to heat or humid conditions
may affect the sealed badge. Under these conditions, the
. plasticf~c;lP may become separated from the photo insert.
To protect tbe cards from climate conditions, it is suggested
'o.:at theYbe;"pl~ced in badge holders wherever possible.
Fe~lilt.~~.
.
.
~p!al:tibnal':striPe;(i~cludes encoding of second stripe)
Hot stamp printing**
One additi0~alhpt. stClmp' printing
rf ,:t~i~. f~'~o. '¥-·'.I
.
.
Hot Stam~', '~~~ering:.(consecutive and horizontal only)
and! or cliph61e
'.
,~~~~,
Punched cardl>Cl~ge (includes up to 10 positions)
~
?'
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37 Create Date : 2013:10:31 14:59:27-08:00 Modify Date : 2013:10:31 19:09:44-07:00 Metadata Date : 2013:10:31 19:09:44-07:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.55 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:c70004e2-38bc-a54d-ada1-4c665fcab587 Instance ID : uuid:263f2b58-b4f0-1f4b-bb84-c0145ff45cc4 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 703EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools